KR20250137182A - Head-mountable display - Google Patents

Abstract

A head-mountable display device includes a housing defining a front opening and a rear opening, a display screen disposed within the front opening, a display assembly disposed within the rear opening, a first fixation strap coupled to the housing and including a first electronic component, a second fixation strap coupled to the housing and including a second electronic component, and a fixation band extending between and coupled to the first fixation strap and the second fixation strap.

Description

Head-mountable display

Cross-reference to related applications

The present invention is a continuation-in-part of U.S. Non-Provisional Patent Application No. 18/663,007, filed May 13, 2024, entitled “HEAD MOUNTABLE DISPLAY,” U.S. Non-Provisional Patent Application No. 18/662,994, filed May 13, 2024, entitled “HEAD MOUNTABLE DISPLAY,” U.S. Non-Provisional Patent Application No. 18/662,980, filed May 13, 2024, entitled “HEAD MOUNTABLE DISPLAY,” U.S. Non-Provisional Patent Application No. 18/662,964, filed May 13, 2024, entitled “HEAD MOUNTABLE DISPLAY,” U.S. Non-Provisional Patent Application No. 18/662,954, filed May 13, 2024, entitled “HEAD MOUNTABLE DISPLAY,” and U.S. Non-Provisional Patent Application No. 18/662,980, filed May 13, 2024, entitled “HEAD MOUNTABLE DISPLAY,” and U.S. Non-Provisional Patent Application No. 18/662,964, filed May 13, 2024, entitled “HEAD MOUNTABLE DISPLAY,” and U.S. Non-Provisional Patent Application No. 18/662,954, filed May 13, 2024, entitled “HEAD MOUNTABLE DISPLAY.” U.S. Non-Provisional Patent Application No. 18/662,921, filed May 13, 2024, entitled “HEAD MOUNTABLE DISPLAY,” U.S. Non-Provisional Patent Application No. 18/662,906, filed May 13, 2024, entitled “HEAD MOUNTABLE DISPLAY,” U.S. Non-Provisional Patent Application No. 18/662,883, filed May 13, 2024, entitled “HEAD MOUNTABLE DISPLAY,” U.S. Non-Provisional Patent Application No. 18/662,857, filed May 13, 2024, entitled “HEAD MOUNTABLE DISPLAY,” U.S. Non-Provisional Patent Application No. 18/662,826, filed May 13, 2024, entitled “HEAD MOUNTABLE DISPLAY,” U.S. Non-Provisional Patent Application No. 18/662,781, entitled “HEAD MOUNTABLE DISPLAY,” U.S. Non-Provisional Patent Application No. 18/662,739, filed May 13, 2024, entitled “HEAD MOUNTABLE DISPLAY,” U.S. Non-Provisional Patent Application No. 18/662,641, filed May 13, 2024, entitled “HEAD MOUNTABLE DISPLAY,” U.S. Non-Provisional Patent Application No. 18/662,562, filed May 13, 2024, entitled “HEAD MOUNTABLE DISPLAY,” U.S. Non-Provisional Patent Application No. 18/662,488, filed May 13, 2024, entitled “HEAD MOUNTABLE U.S. Non-Provisional Patent Application No. 18/662,410, filed Sep. 29, 2023, entitled “HEAD MOUNTABLE DISPLAY,” U.S. Non-Provisional Patent Application No. 18/478,851, filed Sep. 29, 2023, entitled “HEAD MOUNTABLE DISPLAY,” U.S. Non-Provisional Patent Application No. 18/478,796, filed Sep. 29, 2023, entitled “HEAD MOUNTABLE DISPLAY,” U.S. Non-Provisional Patent Application No. 18/478,780, filed Sep. 29, 2023, entitled “HEAD MOUNTABLE DISPLAY,” U.S. Non-Provisional Patent Application No. 18/478,713, filed Sep. 29, 2023, entitled “HEAD MOUNTABLE DISPLAY,” U.S. Non-Provisional Patent Application No. 18/478,713, filed Sep. 29, 2023, entitled “HEAD MOUNTABLE DISPLAY,” No. 18/478,696, filed September 29, 2023, entitled “HEAD MOUNTABLE DISPLAY,” U.S. Non-Provisional Patent Application No. 18/478,618, filed September 29, 2023, entitled “HEAD MOUNTABLE DISPLAY,” U.S. Non-Provisional Patent Application No. 18/478,596, filed September 29, 2023, entitled “HEAD MOUNTABLE DISPLAY,” U.S. Non-Provisional Patent Application No. 18/478,506, filed September 29, 2023, entitled “HEAD MOUNTABLE DISPLAY,” U.S. Non-Provisional Patent Application No. 18/478,463, filed September 29, 2023, entitled “HEAD MOUNTABLE DISPLAY,” U.S. Non-Provisional Patent Application No. 18/478,463, filed September 29, 2023, entitled “HEAD MOUNTABLE DISPLAY,” No. 18/478,364, U.S. Non-Provisional Patent Application No. 18/478,305, filed September 29, 2023, entitled “HEAD MOUNTABLE DISPLAY,” U.S. Non-Provisional Patent Application No. 18/478,123, filed September 29, 2023, entitled “HEAD MOUNTABLE DISPLAY,” U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 63/586,403, filed September 28, 2023, entitled “HEAD MOUNTABLE DISPLAY,” U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 63/506,020, filed June 2, 2023, entitled “HEAD MOUNTABLE DISPLAY,” and U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 63/506,020, filed June 2, 2023, entitled “HEAD MOUNTABLE DISPLAY,” and U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 63/506,020, filed May 15, 2023, entitled “HEAD MOUNTABLE DISPLAY.” Claims the benefit of priority to U.S. Pat. No. 63/502,408, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

Technology field

The present disclosure generally relates to head-mounted computer systems that provide computer-generated experiences, including but not limited to electronic devices that provide virtual reality and mixed reality experiences through a display.

The development of computer systems for augmented reality, including head-mounted computer systems, has increased significantly in recent years. Exemplary augmented reality environments include at least some virtual elements that replace or augment the physical world. Input devices for computer systems and other electronic computing devices, such as cameras, controllers, joysticks, touch-sensitive surfaces, and touch-screen displays, are used to interact with virtual/augmented reality environments. Exemplary virtual elements include virtual objects such as digital images, videos, text, icons, and control elements such as buttons and other graphics.

In at least one example of the present disclosure, a head-mountable display device includes a housing defining a front opening and a rear opening, a display screen disposed within the front opening, a display assembly disposed within the rear opening, a first fixation strap coupled to the housing and including a first electronic component, a second fixation strap coupled to the housing and including a second electronic component, and a fixation band extending between and coupled to the first fixation strap and the second fixation strap.

In one example of the present disclosure, the display assembly is a first display assembly;

The head-mountable display device further includes a second display assembly disposed within the rear opening and including a second display screen and a third display screen. In one example of the present disclosure, the first display screen is oriented to project light in a first direction, and the second display screen and the third display screen are oriented to direct light in a second direction opposite the first direction.

In one example of the present disclosure, the first electronic component includes a speaker.

In one example of the present disclosure, the second electronic component includes a computing component.

In one example of the present disclosure, the display screen has a curvature.

In one example of the present disclosure, the curvature follows the contours of the user's face.

In one example of the present disclosure, the fixed band comprises a flexible textile material.

In at least one example of the present disclosure, the display device includes a housing defining a first opening, a second opening opposite the first opening, an interior volume, a first opening between the first opening and the second opening, and a second opening between the first opening and the second opening.

The display device includes a front-facing cover assembly disposed within a first opening, a rear-facing display assembly disposed within an interior volume, an elastic curtain covering a second opening between the housing and the rear-facing display assembly, a dial disposed within the first opening, and a button disposed within the second opening.

In one example of the present disclosure, the rear-facing display assembly includes a display screen, and the display device further includes an adjustment mechanism configured to adjust a position of the display screen.

In one example of the present disclosure, the dial is electrically coupled to the adjustment mechanism, and operation of the dial causes the adjustment mechanism to adjust the position of the display screen.

In one example of the present disclosure, the front-facing cover assembly includes a first display screen configured to project light in a first direction, and the rear-facing display assembly includes a second display screen configured to project light in a second direction different from the first direction.

In one example of the present disclosure, the first display screen is curved. In one example of the present disclosure, the second direction is opposite to the first direction.

In one example of the present disclosure, the display device further includes an optical seal coupled to the housing around the second opening.

The optical seal is configured to press against the user's face around the user's eyes to block light outside the device, including light from the first display screen, from reaching the user's eyes.

In at least one example of the present disclosure, a head-mountable electronic device includes a housing defining an interior volume and a front opening, a display assembly disposed within the interior volume, a curved front cover assembly disposed within the front opening, and a fixation mechanism extending rearward from the housing.

The securing mechanism comprises a first electronic strap having a first proximal end coupled to the housing and a first distal end opposite the first proximal end, a second electronic strap having a second proximal end coupled to the housing and a second distal end opposite the second proximal end, a first band, and a second band.

The first band includes a first end coupled to the first distal end and a second end coupled to the second distal end.

The second band extends between the first electron strap and the second electron strap.

In one example of the present disclosure, the second band includes a first end coupled to a first electronic strap between the first proximal end and the first distal end, and a second end coupled to a second electronic strap between the second proximal end and the second distal end.

In one example of the present disclosure, the first electronic strap and the second electronic strap comprise a plastic material and the first band and the second band comprise a flexible material.

In one example of the present disclosure, the flexible material comprises a woven fabric material.

In one example of the present disclosure, the first electronic strap defines an internal strap volume and includes electronic components disposed within the internal strap volume.

The present disclosure will be readily understood by the following detailed description taken in conjunction with the accompanying drawings, in which like reference numerals represent like structural elements, and in which:
I: Entire system
FIG. 1A illustrates a front perspective view of an example of a head-mountable device (HMD).
Figure 1b illustrates a rear perspective view of an example HMD.
Figure 2 illustrates an example of an HMD.
Figure 3 illustrates a display module of an HMD.
Figure 4 illustrates a display module of an HMD.
II: Cover glass
Figure 5 illustrates an example drawing of an HMD.
2.1: Systems with transparent layers
FIG. 6 is a perspective view of an exemplary system having a transparent layer, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional side view of an exemplary transparent layer overlapping optical components operating through the transparent layer.
FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional side view of an exemplary transparent layer according to one embodiment.
2.2: Systems with displays and sensors
FIG. 9 is a side view of an exemplary electronic device, such as a head-mounted device, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of an exemplary system having an electronic device, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 11 is a front view of an exemplary head-mounted device according to one embodiment.
FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view of an exemplary head-mounted device according to one embodiment.
FIG. 13A is a cross-sectional side view of an exemplary head-mounted device according to one embodiment.
FIG. 13B is a cross-sectional side view of another exemplary head-mounted device, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 14 is a front view of the upper left portion of an exemplary head-mounted device having a publicly viewable display, according to one embodiment.
FIGS. 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, and 20 are front views of portions of exemplary head-mounted devices according to embodiments.
FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view of a portion of an exemplary head-mounted device, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional side view of a portion of an exemplary head-mounted device having a display, according to one embodiment.
FIGS. 23, 24, and 25 are cross-sectional side views of exemplary display cover layers overlapping exemplary optical components, according to embodiments.
2.3: Systems with auxiliary lighting
FIG. 26 is a cross-sectional side view of a portion of an exemplary electronic device having an environmental lighting system, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 27 is a plan view of an exemplary electronic device having an environmental lighting system, according to one embodiment.
FIGS. 28, 29, 30, and 31 are cross-sectional side views of exemplary light sources for an auxiliary lighting system, according to one embodiment.
FIGS. 32, 33, and 34 are graphs illustrating exemplary lighting patterns that may be generated by an auxiliary lighting system, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 35 is a flowchart of exemplary operations involved in using an electronic device, such as a head-mounted device having an auxiliary lighting system, according to one embodiment.
2.4: Systems with Displays and Sensor Hiding Structures
FIG. 36 is a front view of an exemplary head-mounted device according to one embodiment.
2.5: Systems having cover layer sealing structures
FIG. 37 is a side view of an exemplary electronic device, such as a head-mounted device, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 38 is a schematic diagram of an exemplary system having an electronic device, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 39 is a front view of an exemplary head-mounted device according to one embodiment.
FIG. 40 is a front view of an exemplary shroud according to one embodiment.
FIG. 41 is a plan view of a portion of an exemplary head-mounted device having a display, a cover layer, and a shroud, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 42 is a side view of an exemplary cover layer having an encapsulating material that seals an edge surface of the cover layer and overlaps a laminate on the cover layer, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 43 is a side view of an exemplary cover layer having an encapsulating material sealing an edge surface of the cover layer, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 44 is a side view of an exemplary cover layer having an edge surface spaced from a head-mounted device housing, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 45 is a side view of an exemplary cover layer having a bumper ring or overmold structure sealing an edge surface of the cover layer, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 46 is a side view of an exemplary cover layer having an upper laminate wrapping an edge surface of the cover layer, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 47 is a side view of an exemplary cover layer having a lower laminate wrapping an edge surface of the cover layer, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 48 is a side view of an exemplary cover layer and glue filling a gap between an edge surface of the cover layer and a housing structure, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 49 is a side view of an exemplary cover layer having an upper laminate extending from the cover layer to the housing structure to separate the edge surface of the cover layer from the exterior of the device, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 50 is a side view of an exemplary cover layer and a lip formed from a shroud or housing member overlapping an edge portion of the cover layer, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 51 is a side view of an exemplary cover layer, and a lip formed from a shroud or housing member overlapping the edge portion, with an upper laminate wrapping around the edge portion of the cover layer, according to one embodiment.
2.6: Electronic devices having antennas and optical components
Figure 52 is a plan view of a head-mounted device.
Figure 53 is a rear view of the head-mounted device.
Figure 54 is a schematic diagram of a head-mounted device.
FIG. 55 is a drawing of a portion of a head-mounted device having a head-mounted housing frame and a camera support member.
FIG. 56 is a front view of a portion of a head-mounted device having a camera support structure.
FIG. 57 is a cross-sectional side view of a portion of a head-mounted device having a camera support structure.
Figure 58 is a schematic diagram of a wireless communication circuit.
Fig. 59 is a drawing of an antenna.
FIGS. 60, 61, 62, and 63 are cross-sectional side views of portions of a support structure, such as a camera support structure having antennas.
Figure 64 is a plan view of the camera support structure.
Figure 65 is a cross-sectional side view of the camera support structure.
FIG. 66 is a cross-sectional side view of a portion of a camera support structure having a bending sensor for detecting camera misalignment.
FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional side view of a portion of a camera support structure having an adjustable orientation camera.
III: Display Integration Assembly
Figure 68 is a drawing of the display and front cover assembly of the HMD.
FIG. 69 is a cross-sectional view of a portion of a display assembly of an exemplary HMD.
Figure 70 is a side view of an example of a display assembly of an HMD.
FIG. 71 is a cross-sectional side view of a portion of a display assembly of an exemplary HMD.
FIG. 71A is a cross-sectional side view of a portion of a display assembly of an exemplary HMD.
FIG. 71b is a cross-sectional perspective view of a portion of a display assembly of an exemplary HMD.
FIG. 71c is a cross-sectional perspective view of a portion of a display assembly of an exemplary HMD.
Figure 72 is a cross-sectional perspective view of a portion of a display assembly of an exemplary HMD.
Figure 73 is a cross-sectional perspective view of a portion of a display assembly of an exemplary HMD.
IV: Shroud
4.0: Systems with Displays and Sensor Hiding Structures
FIG. 74 is a front view of an exemplary shroud, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 75 is a front view of a portion of an exemplary shroud having a curved periphery, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 76 is a front view of a portion of an exemplary forward-facing display, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 77 is a cross-sectional view of a portion of an exemplary display, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 78 is a cross-sectional plan view of a portion of an exemplary head-mounted device having a display and a shroud, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 79 is a cross-sectional side view of a portion of an exemplary shroud having a through hole opening for accommodating an optical component, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 80 is a side cross-sectional view of a portion of an exemplary shroud with a window member within a through hole opening, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 81 is a cross-sectional side view of a portion of a head-mounted device having a shroud covering a display, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 82 is a cross-sectional side view of an exemplary head-mounted device optical component mounting arrangement having an optical component window coating, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 83 is a cross-sectional side view of an exemplary head-mounted device optical component mounting arrangement using shroud through-hole openings, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 84 is a cross-sectional side view of an exemplary head-mounted device optical component mounting arrangement having a window formed from a transparent window member, such as a layer of glass or transparent polymer having a coating, according to one embodiment.
4.1: Systems having cover layer sealing structures
FIG. 85 is a side view of an exemplary electronic device, such as a head-mounted device, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 86 is a schematic diagram of an exemplary system having an electronic device, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 87 is a front view of an exemplary head-mounted device according to one embodiment.
FIG. 88 is a front view of an exemplary shroud, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 89 is a plan view of a portion of an exemplary head-mounted device having a display, a cover layer, and a shroud, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 90 is a side view of an exemplary cover layer having an encapsulating material that seals an edge surface of the cover layer and overlaps a laminate on the cover layer, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 91 is a side view of an exemplary cover layer having an encapsulating material sealing an edge surface of the cover layer, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 92 is a side view of an exemplary cover layer having an edge surface spaced from a head-mounted device housing, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 93 is a side view of an exemplary cover layer having a bumper ring or overmold structure sealing an edge surface of the cover layer, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 94 is a side view of an exemplary cover layer having an upper laminate wrapping an edge surface of the cover layer, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 95 is a side view of an exemplary cover layer having a lower laminate wrapping an edge surface of the cover layer, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 96 is a side view of an exemplary cover layer and glue filling a gap between an edge surface of the cover layer and a housing structure, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 97 is a side view of an exemplary cover layer having an upper laminate extending from the cover layer to the housing structure to separate the edge surface of the cover layer from the exterior of the device, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 98 is a side view of an exemplary cover layer, and a lip formed from a shroud or housing member overlapping an edge portion of the cover layer, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 99 is a side view of an exemplary cover layer, and a lip formed from a shroud or housing member overlapping the edge portion, with an upper laminate wrapping around the edge portion of the cover layer, according to one embodiment.
FIGS. 100 and 101 are side views of exemplary cover layers having upper and lower laminates, according to some embodiments.
FIG. 102 is a side view of an exemplary cover layer having a laminate and a seal covering an edge of the laminate, according to some embodiments.
V: Dust seal
5.1: Seals for electronic devices
FIG. 103 illustrates a cross-sectional view of a portion of an electronic device, according to an example.
Fig. 104 shows a cross-sectional view of a seal according to an example.
FIG. 105 illustrates a cross-sectional view of an electronic device according to an example.
FIG. 106a illustrates a top perspective view of an electronic component and a seal, according to an example.
FIG. 106b illustrates a cross-sectional view of a portion of an electronic device, according to an example.
FIG. 106c illustrates a cross-sectional view of a portion of an electronic device, according to an example.
VI: Sensor System
Figure 107 illustrates an example drawing of an HMD.
FIG. 108 illustrates a front perspective view of an example sensor system for an HMD.
FIG. 109 illustrates a bottom perspective view of an example sensor system for an HMD.
FIG. 110 illustrates a bottom perspective view of an example sensor system for an HMD without a front cover assembly.
Figure 111 illustrates a bottom perspective view of an example of a sensor system of an HMD.
VII: Antennas
Figure 112 illustrates an example drawing of a display unit of an HMD.
7.1: Electronic devices having antenna-mounting structures
FIG. 113 is a plan view of an exemplary electronic device, such as a head-mounted device, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 114 is a drawing of an exemplary antenna for an electronic device, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 115 is a perspective view of an exemplary antenna on an exemplary unidirectional structured foam antenna bias structure, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 116 is a plan view of an exemplary structured foam member according to one embodiment.
FIG. 117 is a drawing illustrating how a structured foam member can exhibit preferential unidirectional compression and expansion properties, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 118 is a cross-sectional view of a right edge portion of an exemplary head-mounted device in which a unidirectional structured foam antenna bias member (antenna bias structure) is used to mount an antenna to a surface of an overlapping layer, such as a display cover layer, according to one embodiment.
7.2: Electronic devices with millimeter-wave antennas
FIG. 119 is a plan view of an exemplary electronic device having an antenna, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 120 is a front view of an exemplary antenna for an electronic device, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 121 is a side view of an exemplary millimeter wave antenna having an array of patch antenna elements, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 122 is a cross-sectional side view of a corner portion of an exemplary head-mounted device having an antenna, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 123 is a cross-sectional view of a front portion of an exemplary head-mounted device having an antenna, according to one embodiment.
7.3: Electronic devices having antennas with complex curvatures
FIG. 124 is a plan view of an exemplary electronic device having an antenna, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 125 is a drawing of an exemplary antenna for an electronic device, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 126 is a perspective view of an exemplary flexible printed circuit antenna having a compound curvature, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 127 is a side view of an exemplary apparatus for laminating a flexible printed circuit antenna to a dielectric member, such as a polymer layer, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 128 is a side view of an exemplary printed circuit antenna having a compound curvature attached to a compound curvature surface of a dielectric member having a compound curvature, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 129 is a perspective view of an exemplary printed circuit antenna having a compound curvature, laminated to an inner surface of a dielectric member having a compound curvature, according to one embodiment.
VIII: The Bent MLB
Figure 130 illustrates a drawing of an HMD including a logic board.
Figure 131 illustrates a plan view of an example of a logic board.
Figure 132 illustrates a plan view of an example of a logic board.
Figure 133 illustrates a close-up view of the logic board in Figure 132.
Figure 134 illustrates an example of a logic board.
Figure 135 illustrates a perspective view of the logic board combined with the fan assembly of the HMD.
IX: Thermals
Figure 136 illustrates a drawing of an HMD.
9.1: Air deflector for cooling system within head-mounted device
Figure 137 illustrates a schematic diagram of an example of a head-mounted device.
Figure 138 illustrates a front view of an example of a head-mounted device.
Figure 139 illustrates a side view of an example of a cooling system.
Figure 140 illustrates a side view of an example cooling system having an air deflector.
Figure 141 illustrates a side view of an example cooling system having an air deflector.
Figure 142 illustrates a side view of an example cooling system having an air deflector.
Figure 143 illustrates a side view of an example of air flow in a cooling system.
Figure 144 illustrates a side view of an example of air flow in a cooling system.
Figure 145 illustrates a block diagram of an example of a head-mounted device.
9.2: Fan with debris mitigation function
FIG. 146 illustrates a side view of a head-mountable device according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
FIG. 147 illustrates a perspective view of a fan for a head-mountable device according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
FIG. 148 illustrates a cross-sectional view of an assembly of the head-mountable device of FIG. 146 including the fan of FIG. 147 in operation to generate a flow, according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
FIG. 149 illustrates another cross-sectional view of the assembly of FIG. 148, with the fan of FIG. 147 in a stationary state and particles entering through an outlet, according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
FIG. 150 illustrates a cross-sectional perspective view of a fan having an annular ring for directing incoming particles, according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
FIG. 151 illustrates a cross-sectional view of a fan having an annular ring for directing incoming particles, according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
FIG. 152 illustrates a cross-sectional view of a fan having a base plate having variable thickness, according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
FIG. 153 illustrates a drawing of a fan having a base plate forming openings, according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
FIG. 154 illustrates a bottom view of a fan having a base plate and adhesive pads forming openings, according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
FIG. 155 illustrates a cross-sectional view of the fan of FIG. 154, according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
FIG. 156 illustrates a drawing of a fan having a base plate forming openings, according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
FIG. 157 illustrates a cross-sectional view of the fan of FIG. 156, according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
FIG. 158 illustrates a block diagram of a head-mountable device according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
9.3: Ventilation
Figure 159 illustrates an example drawing of an HMD.
Figure 160 illustrates an example rear perspective view of the ventilation assembly of an HMD.
Figure 161 illustrates an example cross-sectional view of a fan assembly of an HMD.
Figure 162 illustrates a cross-sectional view of an example of a fan assembly of an HMD.
Figure 163 illustrates a plan view of an example of a fan for an HMD.
Figure 164 illustrates a bottom view of an example of a fan for an HMD.
Figure 165 illustrates an exploded view of an example fan for an HMD.
FIG. 166 illustrates an example rear perspective view of the fan and circuit board assembly of the HMD.
Figure 167 illustrates an exemplary perspective view of the fan and circuit board assembly of the HMD.
FIG. 168 illustrates a close-up perspective view of an example of the fan and circuit board assembly of an HMD.
Figure 169 illustrates a cross-sectional side view of an example of a fan and circuit board assembly of an HMD.
X: Chassis
Figure 170 illustrates an example drawing of an HMD.
Figure 171 illustrates an example drawing of an HMD.
Figure 172 illustrates a rear perspective view of an example HMD.
Figure 173 illustrates an example front perspective view of a frame assembly of an HMD.
Figure 174 illustrates a front view of an example of a frame assembly of an HMD.
Figure 175 illustrates a front view of an example of a frame assembly of an HMD.
Figure 176 illustrates a close-up cross-section of a portion of an example HMD.
XI: Optical Module
Figure 177 illustrates an example drawing of an HMD.
11.1: IPD Adjustment
FIG. 178 illustrates a partial perspective view of an example of an HMD including an optical module adjustment system.
11.1.1: Crown
FIG. 179 illustrates a partial perspective view of an example HMD including an optical module adjustment system.
11.1.1.1: Adjustment Mechanism for Head-Mounted Displays
Fig. 180 is a plan view of a head-mounted display.
FIG. 181a is a detailed drawing of an actuator positioned within a head-mounted display similar to the head-mounted display of FIG. 180.
Figure 181b is a partially exploded cross-sectional view of the actuator of Figure 181a.
FIG. 182a is a detailed view of another actuator positioned within a head-mounted display similar to the head-mounted display of FIG. 180.
Figure 182b is a partially exploded cross-sectional view of the actuator of Figure 182a.
FIG. 183a is a detailed view of another actuator positioned within a head-mounted display similar to the head-mounted display of FIG. 180.
Figure 183b is a partially exploded cross-sectional view of the actuator of Figure 183a.
FIG. 184a is a detailed drawing of an electromagnetic damping mechanism for an actuator similar to the actuators of FIGS. 181a, 181b, 182a, 182b, 183a, and 183b.
Figure 184b is a detailed drawing of another electromagnetic damping mechanism for an actuator similar to the actuators of Figures 181a, 181b, 182a, 182b, 183a, and 183b.
FIG. 185a is a detailed drawing of a mechanical damping mechanism for an actuator similar to the actuators of FIGS. 181a, 181b, 182a, 182b, 183a, and 183b.
FIG. 185b is a detailed drawing of another mechanical damping mechanism for an actuator similar to the actuators of FIGS. 181a, 181b, 182a, 182b, 183a, and 183b.
FIG. 186 is a flowchart illustrating a process of operation for an actuator positioned within a head-mounted display similar to the head-mounted display of FIG. 180.
Figure 187 is a schematic hardware configuration for the controller within the head-mounted display of Figure 180.
11.1.1.2: Crown Input and Feedback for Head-Mountable Devices
FIG. 188 illustrates a plan view of a head-mountable device according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
FIG. 189 illustrates a planar exploded view of a head-mountable device according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
FIG. 190 illustrates a cross-sectional view of a crown module of the head-mountable device of FIG. 189, according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
FIG. 191 illustrates a partial cross-sectional view of a crown module of the head-mountable device of FIG. 189, according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
FIG. 192 illustrates a cross-sectional view of the crown module of FIG. 191 taken along line AA, according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
FIG. 193 illustrates a side view of the crown module of FIG. 191, according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
FIG. 194 illustrates a circuit diagram of a sensor of the crown module of FIG. 191, according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
FIG. 195 illustrates a block diagram of a head-mountable device according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
11.1.2: Wishbone and Mustache
FIG. 196 illustrates a front perspective view of the HMD with the front cover and display assembly omitted to show an example of the sensor system.
FIG. 197 illustrates a perspective view of a portion of a sensor system including sensors coupled to a bracket.
FIG. 198 illustrates a rear perspective view of a portion of an exemplary HMD including a display module bracket.
FIG. 199 illustrates a plan view of a portion of a display assembly of an exemplary HMD.
FIG. 200 illustrates a side cross-sectional view of an exemplary HMD.
11.1.3: Upper guide rod system
FIG. 201 illustrates a rear perspective view of an exemplary HMD including a display adjustment system.
Fig. 202 illustrates a close-up view of it with the display module omitted.
FIG. 203 illustrates a close-up view of the system illustrated in FIG. 201, with the display module omitted.
11.1.3.1: Motors
FIG. 204 illustrates a rear perspective view of an exemplary HMD including a display adjustment system.
FIG. 205 illustrates a perspective view of an example of a motor of a display adjustment system of an exemplary HMD.
FIG. 206 illustrates a cross-sectional view of an example of a motor of a display adjustment system of an exemplary HMD.
11.1.3.1.1: Electronic devices having optical module positioning systems
FIG. 207 is a plan view of an exemplary head-mounted device according to one embodiment.
FIG. 208 is a rear view of an exemplary head-mounted device according to one embodiment.
FIG. 209 is a schematic diagram of an exemplary head-mounted device according to one embodiment.
FIG. 210 is a rear view of an internal portion of an exemplary head-mounted device according to one embodiment.
FIG. 211 is a side view of an exemplary portion of an optical module configured to accommodate a guide rail and a screw actuator rod, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 212 is an exploded cross-sectional view of an exemplary guide rod and end cap according to one embodiment.
FIG. 213 is a side view of the exemplary guide rod of FIG. 212 after attachment of the end cap, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 214 is a cross-sectional view of the exemplary guide rod of FIGS. 212 and 213 showing how the guide rod may be mounted to a housing structure, such as a frame, in head-mounted support structures according to one embodiment.
FIGS. 215, 216, 217, and 218 are drawings of exemplary guide rods according to embodiments.
FIG. 219 is a side cross-sectional view of an exemplary guide rod tube partially filled with a core, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 220 is a plan view of a portion of an exemplary guide rod formed from a fiber composite material, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 221 is a cross-sectional end view of an exemplary portion of a guide rod formed from a fiber composite material, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 222 is a side cross-sectional view of an exemplary end portion of a guide rod, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 223 is a side cross-sectional view of an exemplary tapered end portion of a guide rod, according to one embodiment.
11.1.3.1.2: Electronic device having lens position detection capability
FIG. 224 is a schematic diagram of an exemplary electronic device, such as a head-mounted display device, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 225 is a plan view of an exemplary head-mounted device according to one embodiment.
FIG. 226 is a front view of an exemplary lens assembly having a force or position sensor, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 227a is a front view of an exemplary direct force sensor, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 227b is a plan view of an exemplary sensor woven into a fabric, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 227c is a cross-sectional side view of an exemplary nose flap having an air bladder sensor, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 228 is a front view of an exemplary lens assembly having a proximity sensor, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 229 is a front view of an exemplary lens assembly having movable components that block light-emitting components to indicate the position of the lens assembly, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 230 is a circuit diagram of an exemplary control circuit for controlling a positioner motor while monitoring feedback from the motor, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 231 is a flowchart of exemplary steps involved in operating a head-mounted device, according to one embodiment.
11.1.3.2: Sensors/Encoders
FIG. 232 illustrates a perspective view of an exemplary encoder for an HMD display adjustment system.
FIG. 233 illustrates a top perspective view of an exemplary display adjustment system for an HMD.
FIG. 234 illustrates a plan view of an exemplary encoder assembly for an HMD display adjustment system.
11.1.3.2.1: Sensor Assembly
FIG. 235 illustrates a side view of a head-mountable device according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
FIG. 236 illustrates an exploded perspective view of a sensor assembly of the head-mountable device of FIG. 235, according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
FIG. 237 illustrates a cross-sectional side view of a sensor assembly according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
FIG. 238 illustrates a cross-sectional side view of a sensor assembly according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
FIG. 239 illustrates a block diagram of a head-mountable device according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
11.1.3.2.2: Electronic devices having movable optical assemblies
FIG. 240 is a drawing of an exemplary head-mounted device according to one embodiment.
FIGS. 241 and 242 are rear views of portions of exemplary head-mounted devices according to embodiments.
FIG. 243 is a graph plotting exemplary optical assembly adjustment values as a function of measured pupillary distance (eye relief) for a number of different exemplary measured interpupillary distances, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 244 is a flowchart of exemplary operations involved in using a head-mounted device, according to one embodiment.
11.1.3.2.3: Electronic devices having movable optical assemblies
FIG. 245 is a drawing of an exemplary head-mounted device according to one embodiment.
FIGS. 246 and 247 are flowcharts of exemplary operations involved in using a head-mounted device having movable optical assemblies, according to embodiments.
FIG. 248 is a cross-sectional end view of an exemplary clutch based on a split nut that may be used to limit how much force is applied to an optical assembly, according to one embodiment.
FIGS. 249 and 250 are drawings illustrating how magnetic clutches can be used to limit forces applied to optical assemblies, according to embodiments.
FIGS. 251, 252, 253, and 254 are drawings of exemplary mechanical clutch mechanisms that may be used to move optical assemblies, according to embodiments.
FIG. 255 is a drawing illustrating how force sensitive switches may be used to couple a nut to an optical assembly, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 256 is a drawing illustrating how torque sensitive switches may be coupled between a rotary motor and a portion of a rotary shaft, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 257 is a circuit diagram illustrating how motor load can be electrically measured while moving optical assemblies, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 258 is a drawing of an exemplary motor having a rotary encoder, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 259 is a drawing of an exemplary motor, a movable optical assembly, and an associated linear magnetic encoder, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 260 is a graph illustrating how motor stalling can be detected while controlling a motor to move an optical assembly, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 261 is a flowchart of exemplary operations involved in using a head-mounted device having motors to move optical assemblies, according to one embodiment.
11.1.3.3: Hard stops
FIG. 262 illustrates a perspective view of a portion of an exemplary HMD including a hard stop.
FIG. 263 illustrates a perspective view of a portion of an exemplary HMD including a hard stop.
11.1.3.4: Upper bias members
FIG. 264 illustrates a perspective view of a portion of a display adjustment system of an exemplary HMD.
FIG. 265 illustrates a perspective view of a portion of a display adjustment system of an exemplary HMD.
11.1.4: Lower guide rod system
11.1.4.1: Electronic devices having biased guide rails
FIG. 266 is a plan view of an exemplary electronic device according to one embodiment.
FIG. 267 is a schematic diagram of an exemplary electronic device according to one embodiment.
FIG. 268 is a plan view of an exemplary electronic device having optical module guide rails, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 269 is a rear view of an exemplary electronic device having optical module guide rails, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 270 is a side view of an exemplary optical module having guide rails, according to one embodiment.
FIGS. 271a, 271b, and 272 are cross-sectional side views of exemplary guide rail bias mechanisms according to embodiments.
FIG. 273 is a side cross-sectional view of a portion of a kinematic guide rail mounting system, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 274 is a side view of a kinematic optical module guide rail mounting system according to one embodiment.
FIG. 275 is a perspective view of an exemplary guide rail sensor based on a strain gauge, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 276 is a cross-sectional side view of an exemplary optical module having a guide rail sensor, according to one embodiment.
11.1.4.2: Lower guide rods
FIG. 277 illustrates a plan view of a portion of an exemplary HMD including a guide system for an adjustable display.
11.1.4.2.1: Electrical contacts
Figure 278 illustrates a perspective view of a portion of an exemplary HMD.
11.1.4.2.2: Bias Absences
Figure 279 illustrates a perspective view of a portion of an exemplary HMD.
11.2: Barrels and Baskets
11.2.1: Lens Mounting Systems
FIG. 280 is a drawing of an exemplary head-mounted device according to one embodiment.
FIG. 281 is a front view of an exemplary lens according to one embodiment.
FIGS. 282 and 283 are cross-sectional side views of peripheral portions of exemplary lenses and associated mounting structures, according to embodiments.
FIGS. 284 and 285 are plan views of exemplary flexures for mounting a lens, according to embodiments.
FIGS. 286, 287, 288, and 289 are cross-sectional side views of additional exemplary flexure arrangements for mounting a lens, according to embodiments.
FIG. 290 is a drawing illustrating how an adhesive may be introduced into a gap between an exemplary flexure and a lens, according to one embodiment.
11.3: Rear-facing cameras
11.3.1: Optical Module for Head-Mounted Devices
Figure 291 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a hardware configuration for a head-mounted device.
FIG. 292 is a plan view example illustrating a head-mounted device, including a device housing and a support structure.
FIG. 293 is an example rear view taken along line AA of FIG. 292, showing the device housing.
Fig. 294 is an example perspective view showing an optical module of a head-mounted device.
FIG. 295 is an exploded side view illustrating components of an optical module, according to an example.
Fig. 296 is a front view showing a lens according to an example.
Fig. 297 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB of Fig. 296, illustrating a lens.
Fig. 298 is an example front view showing the housing body of the optical module housing assembly.
Fig. 299 is an example of a cross-sectional view taken along line CC of Fig. 298, showing a housing body.
FIG. 300 is a front view example showing a retainer of an optical module housing assembly.
FIG. 301 is an example of a cross-sectional view taken along line DD of FIG. 300, illustrating a retainer.
Fig. 302 is an example front view showing an infrared emitter.
FIG. 303 is an example cross-sectional view showing a portion of the main wall of the housing body and an infrared emitter.
Fig. 304 is an example cross-sectional view showing an optical module.
FIG. 305 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an optical module according to an alternative embodiment in which the optical axis of the eye camera is inclined toward the optical axis of the optical module.
FIG. 306 is an example cross-sectional view of an optical module according to an alternative embodiment in which the infrared emitter is positioned on the outside of the housing body of the optical module housing assembly.
FIG. 307 is a side view illustrating a display module according to an embodiment.
FIG. 308 is a plan view example showing the space adjustment mechanisms each supporting one of the optical modules.
FIG. 309 is a side view illustration of one of the space adjustment mechanisms.
FIG. 310 is a plan view cross-sectional example showing front facing cameras supported by each of the optical modules.
FIG. 311 is an example showing the connection of an eye camera and an infrared emitter to a computing device by means of an optical module jumper board.
11.3.2: Cameras and LEDs
Figure 312 illustrates a perspective view of a portion of an example optical module of an HMD.
Figure 313 illustrates a plan view of a portion of an example optical module of an HMD.
Figure 314 illustrates a perspective cutaway view of a portion of an example optical module of an HMD.
Figure 315 illustrates a plan view of a portion of an example optical module of an HMD.
Figure 316 illustrates a cutaway view of a portion of an example optical module of an HMD.
11.4: Display
11.4.1: Display system with interchangeable lenses
Figure 317 illustrates a drawing of an HMD.
Figure 318 is a side view of a display system with hidden components illustrated by dashed lines.
FIG. 319 is a cross-sectional view of the display system of FIG. 318 taken along line 2-2 of FIG. 318.
FIG. 320a is a cross-sectional view of the display unit and interchangeable lens assembly of the display system of FIG. 318, taken along line 3-3 of FIG. 319 and shown assembled.
FIG. 320b is a cross-sectional view of the display unit and interchangeable lens assembly of FIG. 320a, shown in an exploded state.
FIG. 321 is a rear view of the removable lens of the display system of FIG. 318, with the light emission, entrance, and exit points illustrated by dashed lines (i.e., chain lines).
Figure 322 is a rear view of another embodiment of a removable lens.
Figure 323 is a rear view of another embodiment of a removable lens.
Figure 324 is a cross-sectional view of another embodiment of a removable lens.
Figure 325 is a cross-sectional view of another embodiment of a removable lens.
Figure 326 is a cross-sectional view of another embodiment of a removable lens.
FIG. 327a is a cross-sectional view of another display unit and another interchangeable lens assembly for the display system of FIG. 318, shown in an exploded state.
FIG. 327b is a cross-sectional view of the display unit and interchangeable lens assembly of FIG. 327a, shown assembled.
FIG. 328a is a cross-sectional view of another display unit and another interchangeable lens assembly for the display system of FIG. 318, shown in an exploded state.
FIG. 328b is a cross-sectional view of the display unit and interchangeable lens assembly of FIG. 327a, shown in an assembled state.
FIG. 329a is a side view of a display module for use in a display system.
FIG. 329b is a front view of a display module for use in a display system.
FIG. 329c is a front view of a display module for use in a display system.
FIG. 329d is a front view of a display module for use in a display system.
FIG. 330a is a front view of a display module for use in a display system.
FIG. 330b is a front view of a removable lens assembly for use with the display module of FIG. 330a.
FIG. 330c is a cross-sectional view of the display module of FIG. 330a taken along line 11.4.1-13A-11.4.1-13A.
FIG. 330d is a cross-sectional view of the removable lens assembly of FIG. 330b taken along line 11.4.1-13B-11.4.1-13B.
FIG. 330e is a cross-sectional view of the display module of FIG. 330a and the removable lens assembly of FIG. 330b in a partially coupled state.
FIG. 330f is a cross-sectional view of the display module of FIG. 330a and the removable lens assembly of FIG. 330b in a combined state.
Figure 331a is a schematic diagram of a display system.
Figure 331b is a flowchart of a method for operating a display system.
Figure 332 is a flowchart of a process for determining compatibility between a removable lens and a user.
Figure 333 is a flowchart of a method for determining compatibility between a removable lens and a user.
Figure 334 is a schematic diagram of an exemplary hardware configuration of a controller of a display system.
11.4.2: Electronic device system with complementary lenses
FIG. 335 is a schematic diagram of an exemplary electronic device, such as a head-mounted display device, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 336 is a plan view of an exemplary head-mounted device according to one embodiment.
FIG. 337 is a drawing of an exemplary removable supplemental lens, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 338 is a flowchart of exemplary operations associated with using a head-mounted device, according to one embodiment.
11.4.3: Rx lenses
FIG. 339 illustrates a perspective view of a portion of the optical assembly of an exemplary HMD.
FIG. 340 illustrates a perspective view of a portion of the optical assembly of an exemplary HMD.
Figure 341 illustrates a perspective view of a portion of the optical assembly of an exemplary HMD.
Figure 342 illustrates a planar exploded view of a portion of the optical assembly of an exemplary HMD.
Figure 343 illustrates a magnet array for an exemplary display module of an HMD.
Figure 344 illustrates a perspective view of an exemplary lens of the HMD.
Figure 345 illustrates a side view of an exemplary lens of the HMD.
Figure 346 illustrates a side view of an exemplary lens of the HMD.
Figure 347 illustrates a side view of an exemplary lens of the HMD.
Figure 348 illustrates a side view of an exemplary lens of the HMD.
Figure 349 illustrates a side view of an exemplary lens of the HMD.
XII: Curtain
Fig. 350 illustrates a drawing of an HMD.
12.1: Electronic devices having flexible fabric covers
FIG. 351 is a plan view of an exemplary head-mounted device according to one embodiment.
FIG. 352 is a rear view of an exemplary head-mounted device according to one embodiment.
FIG. 353 is a schematic diagram of an exemplary head-mounted device, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 354 is a plan view of an exemplary head-mounted device in which the left and right eye optical modules are positioned close together to accommodate users with small pupillary distances, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 355 is a plan view of the exemplary head-mounted device of FIG. 354 with the optical modules moved further apart from each other to accommodate users with a large pupillary distance, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 356 is a front view of an exemplary cover layer in an unstretched state of the elastic fabric, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 357 is a front view of the exemplary cover layer of FIG. 356 in a stretched state of the elastic fabric, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 358 is a side view of an exemplary first strand that may be used in a cover layer of the type illustrated in FIGS. 356 and 357, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 359 is a side view of an exemplary second strand that may be used in a cover layer of the type illustrated in FIGS. 356 and 357, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 360 is a front view of an exemplary cover layer having regions with different extensibility and opacity levels, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 361 is a perspective view of an exemplary cover layer formed from a three-dimensional fabric, according to one embodiment.
12.2: Curtain Assembly
Figure 362 illustrates an example drawing of an HMD.
FIG. 363 illustrates a rear perspective view of an exemplary HMD including a curtain assembly.
FIG. 364 illustrates a rear view of an exemplary HMD including a curtain assembly.
FIG. 365 illustrates a side cross-sectional view of an exemplary HMD including a curtain assembly.
Figure 366 illustrates a perspective view of an example of a curtain assembly of an HMD.
Figure 367 illustrates an exploded view of an example of a curtain assembly of an HMD.
Figure 368 illustrates a rear view of an example of a curtain assembly of an HMD.
Figure 369 illustrates a partial view of an exemplary curtain assembly.
Figure 370 illustrates a partial view of an exemplary curtain assembly.
Figure 371 illustrates a partial view of an exemplary curtain assembly.
Figure 372 illustrates a partial view of an exemplary curtain assembly.
Figure 373 illustrates a partial view of an exemplary curtain assembly.
Figure 374 illustrates a partial view of an exemplary curtain assembly.
XIII: The Light Seal
Figure 375 illustrates a drawing of an HMD.
FIG. 376a illustrates a front perspective view of a device seal according to one embodiment.
Figure 376b illustrates a lower rear perspective view of the device seal of Figure 376a.
Figure 376c illustrates a rear view of the device seal of Figure 376a.
13.1: Electronic devices having covering structures
Fig. 377 is a plan view of a head-mounted device.
Fig. 378 is a rear view of the head-mounted device.
Figure 379 is a schematic diagram of a head-mounted device.
FIG. 380 is a plan view of a head-mounted device having left eye and right eye optical modules.
FIG. 381 is a plan view of the head-mounted device of FIG. 380 with the optical modules further spaced apart.
Figure 382 is a cross-sectional side view of a head-mounted device having a fan.
Figure 383 is an exploded perspective view of a curtain having a frame and a cover layer supported on the frame.
Fig. 384 is a plan view of the optical module and cover layer.
Fig. 385 is a drawing of a cover layer having a main elastic band.
FIG. 386 is a drawing of a cover layer having woven elastic strands forming a main elastic band.
Figure 387 is a drawing of a cover layer formed from an elongated material.
Fig. 388 is a drawing of a frame for a curtain.
Figure 389 is a cross-sectional side view of a cover layer having a main elastic band moving about a rigid frame.
FIG. 390 is a cross-sectional view of a head-mounted device having a floating curtain.
FIG. 391 is a rear view of the curtain having locations for attaching the curtain to the head-mounted device housing member.
FIG. 392 is a side cross-sectional view of a portion of a head-mounted device showing a curtain attached to a head-mounted device housing member.
Figure 393 is a plan view of a device having a movable member surrounded by a curtain.
13.2: Device having a removable cushion
FIG. 394 is a plan view of an electronic device such as a head-mounted device.
Fig. 395 is a plan view of an optical module for an electronic device.
FIG. 396a is a cross-sectional view of a head-mounted device without a removable cushion attached.
FIG. 396b is a cross-sectional view of a head-mounted device with a removable cushion attached.
Figure 397 is a perspective view of a head-mounted support structure.
FIG. 398a is a rear view of the flexible structure of the head-mounted support structure attached to the support posts.
FIG. 398b is a rear view of a removable cushion having high-rigidity portions configured to overlap support posts in a corresponding head-mounted support structure.
FIG. 399a is a rear view of a flexible structure having primary attachment structures and secondary attachment structures.
FIG. 399b is a rear view of a removable cushion having primary and secondary attachment structures.
FIG. 400 is a cross-sectional view of a head-mounted device having a removable cushion with magnets and recesses.
FIG. 401 is a rear view of a removable cushion having hinge structures.
FIG. 402 is a schematic diagram of a system including a head-mounted support structure and a plurality of removable cushions.
13.3: Electronic devices having light-blocking fabrics
Fig. 403 is a plan view of a head-mounted device.
Figure 404 is a rear view of the head-mounted device.
Figure 405 is a schematic diagram of a head-mounted device.
FIG. 406 is a perspective view of a head-mounted device having a fabric-covered facial frame.
Figure 407a is a schematic diagram of a knitting system.
Figure 407b is a schematic diagram of a knitting system.
Fig. 408 is a drawing of a portion of a weft knit fabric layer.
Fig. 409 is a cross-sectional view of a light seal.
Figure 410 is a perspective view of the inner fabric layer for the optical seal.
Fig. 411 is a cross-sectional view of a light seal.
13.4: Electronic devices having flexible fabrics
FIG. 412 is a drawing of a portion of a fabric layer having knit stitches.
FIG. 413 is a drawing of a portion of a fabric layer having knit stitches and miss stitches.
FIG. 414 is a drawing of a portion of a fabric layer having knit stitches and tuck stitches.
FIG. 415 is a knitting chart of a fabric layer that may have a four-row repeat pattern with knit stitches and tuck stitches.
13.5: Non-contact sensors for head-mounted devices
FIG. 416 illustrates a plan view profile of a head-mounted device including a facial interface.
FIG. 417a illustrates a side view of a head-mountable device including a facial interface.
FIG. 417b illustrates a front view of a head-mountable device including a facial interface.
FIG. 418 illustrates a plan view of a facial interface having a sensor.
FIG. 419 illustrates a plan view of a facial interface with multiple sensors located at various locations.
FIG. 420 illustrates another plan view of a facial interface with multiple sensors located at various locations.
FIG. 421a illustrates a plan view of a facial interface having various components including sensors.
FIG. 421b illustrates a plan view of a facial interface having various components including sensors.
Figures 422a and 422b illustrate non-disassembled and exploded perspective views of a facial interface having sensors.
13.6: Integrated Health Sensors
Figure 423 illustrates a block diagram of a head-mountable device.
Figure 424 illustrates a plan view of an exemplary head-mountable device.
FIG. 425 illustrates a rear perspective view of an exemplary head-mountable device including a facial interface integrated with sensors.
FIG. 426 illustrates a cross-sectional view of a facial interface with sensors positioned at various locations.
FIG. 427 illustrates a perspective view of a head-mountable device including sensors.
FIG. 428 illustrates a perspective view of a head-mountable device including a facial interface, a frame, and a plurality of electronic components.
13.7: Health Detection Maintenance Band
Figure 429 illustrates a schematic block diagram of a head-mountable device.
Fig. 430 illustrates a plan view of a head-mountable device.
Figure 431 illustrates a cross-sectional side view of a head-mountable device.
Figure 432a illustrates a rear perspective view of the maintenance band.
Figure 432b illustrates a side view of the retaining band of Figure 432a in an articulated position.
Figure 432c illustrates a side view of the retaining band of Figure 432a in an articulated position.
Figure 433 illustrates an exploded perspective view of a head-mountable device.
Figure 434 shows a side view of a maintenance band having sensors.
13.8: Conductive Fabric Architecture
Figure 435a illustrates a schematic block diagram of a head-mountable device.
FIG. 435b illustrates a plan view of a head-mountable device.
Fig. 436 shows a bottom perspective view of the optical seal.
Figure 437 illustrates a plan view of a head-mountable device.
Figure 438a illustrates a conductive fabric in a neutral state.
Figure 438b illustrates the conductive fabric of Figure 438a in a compressed state.
Figure 438c illustrates the conductive fabric of Figure 438a in an extended state.
Figure 439a illustrates a conductive component on the exterior of the cover.
Figure 439b illustrates a conductive component woven into the cover.
Figure 439c illustrates a conductive component on the inside of the cover.
Figure 439d illustrates free-floating conductive components.
Fig. 440 shows a side perspective view of the optical seal.
Fig. 441 shows a bottom perspective view of the optical seal.
13.9: Facial interface with integrated health sensors
Figure 442 illustrates a block diagram of a head-mountable device.
Figure 443a illustrates a plan view of a head-mountable device.
FIG. 443b illustrates a rear view of a facial interface for a head-mounted device.
FIG. 444 illustrates a rear perspective view of a facial interface with sensors positioned near the nose area of a head-mounted device.
FIG. 445a illustrates an exploded perspective view of the pressure sensor assembly of a head-mountable device.
FIG. 445b illustrates an assembled perspective view of the pressure sensor assembly of a head-mountable device.
FIG. 446a illustrates sensors positioned on the forehead area of a facial interface of a head-mounted device.
FIG. 446b illustrates sensors positioned on the forehead area of the facial interface of a head-mounted device.
Figure 447 illustrates a cross-sectional view of a pressure sensor assembly of a head-mountable device.
13.10: Touch-sensitive input surfaces
Figure 448a illustrates a schematic block diagram of a head-mountable device.
FIG. 448b illustrates a plan view of a head-mountable device.
Fig. 449 shows a bottom perspective view of the optical seal.
FIG. 450A illustrates a plan view of a head-mountable device having a conductive fabric within an optical seal of the head-mountable device.
FIG. 450b illustrates a plan view of a head-mountable device in which a user engages a touch-sensitive surface of an optical seal of the head-mountable device.
FIG. 451 illustrates a touch-sensitive surface of an optical seal of a head-mountable device.
FIG. 452 illustrates a touch-sensitive surface of an optical seal of a head-mountable device.
FIG. 453 illustrates a touch-sensitive surface of an optical seal of a head-mountable device.
FIG. 454 illustrates a head-mountable device in which a sensor is integrated with the frame of the head-mountable device.
FIG. 455a illustrates a head-mountable device in which a sensor is integrated with the frame of the head-mountable device.
FIG. 455b illustrates the head-mountable device of FIG. 455a in which a user mechanically deflects the frame of the head-mountable device.
13.11: Facial interlocking structures
FIG. 456 illustrates a plan view of an exemplary head-mountable device.
FIG. 457a illustrates a side view of an exemplary head-mountable device.
FIG. 457b illustrates a front view of an exemplary head-mountable device.
FIG. 458a illustrates a perspective view of a head-mountable device including a connector positioned at the forehead location.
Figures 458b through 458e illustrate various connector types.
FIG. 459a illustrates a perspective view of a head-mountable device including a connector positioned at the zygomatic location.
Figures 459a through 459h illustrate various connector types.
FIG. 460a illustrates a perspective view of a head-mountable device including a facial interface.
Figures 460b through 460g illustrate various facial interfaces.
Figures 461a and 461b illustrate other variations of the facial interface.
FIG. 462a illustrates a perspective view of a display including a display frame.
FIG. 462b illustrates an exploded perspective view of a display including a display frame.
Figures 463a and 463b illustrate a display frame having a relief cutout.
FIG. 464a illustrates a head-mountable device without a relief cutout.
FIG. 464b illustrates a head-mountable device having a relief cutout.
Figures 465a and 465b illustrate a head-mountable device having relief cutouts at various locations.
Figures 466a through 466c illustrate a display frame having a relief cutout.
Fig. 467 illustrates a display frame having through holes.
Fig. 468 illustrates a display frame having stiffeners.
FIG. 469a is a plan view of a frame for a device seal including reinforcement members.
Figure 469b is a cross-sectional view of the frame of Figure 469a.
Figure 469c is a bottom view of the frame of Figure 469a.
Figure 469d is a plan view of the frame of Figure 469a.
Figure 469 illustrates a perspective view of an exemplary connector.
FIG. 470a illustrates a side view of an exemplary connector positioned between the display frame and the facial interface.
FIG. 470b illustrates an exemplary facial interface.
FIGS. 470c and 470d illustrate exemplary cross-sections of the facial interface illustrated in FIG. 470b.
Figure 471 illustrates a cross-sectional view of an exemplary connector having a connector frame and post.
Figure 472 illustrates a plan view of an exemplary connector.
FIG. 473 illustrates a side perspective view of the base of an exemplary connector attached to an exemplary display frame.
Figure 474 illustrates another cross-sectional view of an exemplary connector.
Figures 475 and 476 illustrate perspective and plan views, respectively, of exemplary adhesives in an exemplary head-mountable device.
13.12: Facial interlocking structures
FIG. 477 illustrates a plan view of a head-mountable device including a facial interface.
FIG. 478a illustrates a side view of a head-mounted device including a facial interface connected to a display.
FIG. 478b illustrates a plan view of a head-mounted device including a facial interface connected to a display.
FIG. 479 illustrates a perspective view of a head-mountable device including a facial interface and exemplary connectors.
FIG. 480a illustrates a perspective view of a head-mountable device with an exemplary connector between the display and the facial interface.
Figure 480b illustrates a front view of an exemplary connector.
FIG. 480c illustrates a side view of an exemplary connector portion.
Figures 481a and 481b illustrate drawings of connectors in exemplary positional states.
FIG. 482a illustrates a perspective view of a head-mountable device including a facial interface and other exemplary connectors.
Figure 482b illustrates a plan view of an exemplary connector.
Figures 483a and 483b illustrate side views of other connectors in exemplary position states.
Figures 484a and 484b illustrate schematic drawings of exemplary sliding connectors.
FIG. 485a illustrates a bottom view of another exemplary head-mountable device.
FIGS. 485b through 485f illustrate various locations of connectors of a head-mountable device.
Figure 486 illustrates a cut-out diagram of an exemplary connector.
Figure 487 illustrates a perspective view of another exemplary connector.
Figure 488 illustrates a side view of another exemplary connector.
13.13: Coordination Mechanism
FIG. 489 illustrates a plan view profile of a head-mounted device including a facial interface.
FIG. 490a illustrates a side view profile of a head-mountable device including a facial interface.
FIG. 490b illustrates a plan view profile of a head-mountable device including a facial interface.
Figures 491a through 491d illustrate exemplary positions of the adjustment mechanism of a head-mountable device.
Figures 492a through 492c illustrate exemplary translational positions of the adjustment mechanism.
Figures 493a through 493c illustrate exemplary rotatable positions of the adjustment mechanism of a head-mountable device.
Figures 494a and 494b illustrate exemplary adjustment mechanisms.
Figures 495a and 495b illustrate exemplary rotatable adjustment mechanisms.
Fig. 496 illustrates another exemplary adjustment mechanism.
FIGS. 497a through 512b each illustrate exemplary head-mountable devices having actuator control units.
FIGS. 513a through 513d illustrate exemplary head-mountable devices having exemplary connectors and corresponding actuator controls.
Figure 514 illustrates an exemplary connection of a head-mountable device.
FIG. 515 illustrates another exemplary connection of a head-mountable device.
FIGS. 516 through 518 illustrate plan, front, and side views, respectively, of other exemplary head-mountable devices.
FIGS. 519 to 521 illustrate a perspective view of a lock-slider engagement release of a portion of a linear adjustment connection, a front view of a lock-slider engagement release, and a front view of a lock-slider engagement, respectively.
FIG. 522 illustrates a perspective view of a portion of a head-mountable device having a plurality of linear adjustment connections, according to one exemplary embodiment.
13.14: Nosepiece
FIG. 523 is a drawing of an exemplary electronic device according to one embodiment.
FIG. 524 is a front view of an exemplary electronic device having a light shielding structure, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 525 is a drawing of an exemplary light shielding structure having a fabric cover, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 526 is a front view of an exemplary light shielding structure having a structural frame, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 527 is a side view of an exemplary light shielding structure having fabric and elastomeric layers, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 528 is a front view of an exemplary light shielding structure having an extension portion, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 529 is a side view of an exemplary optical shielding structure having a buried service loop, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 530 is a side view of an exemplary light shielding structure having an embedded deformable reinforcement, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 531A is a side view of an exemplary light shielding structure having a rolled edge, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 531b is a side view of an exemplary light shielding structure having embedded foam, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 531c is a plan view of an exemplary light shielding structure having a crumpled zone, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 531d is a side view of an exemplary light shielding structure having a hemmed edge, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 531e is a plan view of an exemplary light shielding structure having a form in corner regions, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 531f is a side view of an exemplary light shielding structure having segmented foam or elastomeric regions, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 531g is a side view of an exemplary light shielding structure having a stiffener and a foam layer, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 532 is a front view of an exemplary light shielding structure having a semi-rigid reinforcement, according to one embodiment.
13.15: Removable facial interface
Figure 533a is a schematic block diagram of an example of a head-mountable device.
FIG. 533b is a plan view of an example of a head-mountable device.
Figure 534a is a perspective view of an example of a device seal.
Figure 534b is a perspective view of an example of a facial interface frame.
FIG. 534c is a perspective view of an example of a facial interface frame and a removable facial interface.
FIG. 534d is a cross-sectional view of an example of a facial interface shim.
Figure 535a is a perspective view of an example of a device seal.
FIG. 535b is a plan view of an example of a removable facial interface.
Figure 536 is a cross-sectional view of an example of a magnetic attachment mechanism.
Figure 537a is a cross-sectional view of an example of an interlocking attachment mechanism.
Figure 537b is a cross-sectional view of an example of an interlocking attachment mechanism.
Figure 538 is a cross-sectional view of an example of a magnetic slide attachment mechanism.
Figure 539 is a cross-sectional view of an example of a hook-and-loop attachment mechanism.
Figure 540 is a cross-sectional view of an example of a magnetic attachment mechanism.
Figure 541 is a cross-sectional view of an example of a spring snap attachment mechanism.
Figure 542 is a cross-sectional view of an example of an interlocking attachment mechanism.
Figure 543 is a cross-sectional view of an example of a suction attachment mechanism.
Figure 544 is a cross-sectional view of an example of a dual stable attachment mechanism.
FIG. 545a is a plan view of an example of a removable facial interface.
FIG. 545b is a plan view of an example of a removable facial interface.
Figure 546 is a cross-sectional view of an exemplary facial interface.
Figure 547a is a cross-sectional view of the compressible portion.
Figure 547b is a cross-sectional view of the compressible portion.
Figure 547c is a cross-sectional view of the compressible portion.
13.16: Electronic devices having optical blocking structures
FIG. 548 is a drawing of an exemplary electronic device according to one embodiment.
FIG. 549 is a front view of an exemplary electronic device having a light shielding structure, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 550 is a drawing of an exemplary light shielding structure having a fabric cover, according to one embodiment.
FIGS. 551a and 551b are front views of exemplary elastomeric layers that may be used in a nosepiece, according to some embodiments.
FIG. 552 is a front view of an exemplary light shielding structure having a structural frame, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 553 is a side view of an exemplary light shielding structure having fabric and elastomeric layers, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 554 is a front view of an exemplary light shielding structure having an extension portion, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 555 is a side view of an exemplary optical shielding structure having a buried service loop, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 556 is a side view of an exemplary light shielding structure having an embedded deformable reinforcement, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 557a is a side view of an exemplary light shielding structure having a rolled edge, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 557b is a side view of an exemplary light shielding structure having embedded foam, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 557c is a plan view of an exemplary light shielding structure having a crumpled zone, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 557d is a side view of an exemplary light shielding structure having a hemmed edge, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 557e is a plan view of an exemplary light shielding structure having a form in corner regions, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 557f is a side view of an exemplary light shielding structure having segmented foam or elastomeric regions, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 557g is a side view of an exemplary light shielding structure having a stiffener and a foam layer, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 558 is a front view of an exemplary light shielding structure having a semi-rigid reinforcement, according to one embodiment.
FIG. 559 is a perspective view of an exemplary light shielding structure formed from multiple fabric layers, according to one embodiment.
XIV: Powerstraps and Retaining Bands
Fig. 560 illustrates a drawing of an HMD.
14.1: Electrical Connectors
Figure 561a illustrates a side perspective view of an electronic device.
FIG. 561b illustrates a side perspective view of the electronic device of FIG. 561a.
FIG. 562 illustrates a perspective view of the display, support, and plug connector.
Figure 563a illustrates a perspective view of a receptacle connector.
Figure 563b illustrates a perspective view of a plug connector.
Figure 564 shows an exploded view of the receptacle connector.
Figure 565a illustrates a front view of a receptacle connector.
Figure 565b illustrates a partially cutaway front view of the receptacle connector of Figure 565a.
Figure 566a illustrates a side cross-sectional view of a receptacle connector.
Figure 566b illustrates a side cross-sectional view of a receptacle connector.
Figure 567a illustrates a detailed perspective view of a receptacle connector.
Figure 567b shows a detailed perspective view of a plug connector.
Figure 568a illustrates a cross-sectional view of a plug connector inserted into a receptacle connector.
Figure 568b illustrates a detailed cross-sectional view of a plug connector inserted into the receptacle connector of Figure 568a.
Figure 569a illustrates a detailed cross-sectional view of a plug connector inserted into a receptacle connector.
Figure 569b illustrates a detailed cross-sectional view of a plug connector inserted into the receptacle connector of Figure 569a.
FIG. 569c illustrates a detailed cross-sectional view of a plug connector inserted into a receptacle connector.
Figure 569d illustrates a detailed cross-sectional view of a plug connector inserted into the receptacle connector of Figure 569c.
Figure 569e illustrates a detailed cross-sectional view of a plug connector inserted into a receptacle connector.
Figure 569f illustrates a detailed cross-sectional view of a plug connector inserted into the receptacle connector of Figure 569e.
Figure 570 illustrates a cross-sectional view of a tool for ejecting a plug connector from a receptacle connector.
Figures 571a through 571d illustrate perspective views of tools for ejecting plug connectors from receptacle connectors.
Figure 572a illustrates a front view of a receptacle connector.
Figure 572b illustrates a front view of a plug connector.
Figure 573a illustrates a cross-sectional view of a receptacle connector.
FIGS. 573b through 573d illustrate detailed cross-sectional views of the seals of the receptacle connector of FIG. 573a.
Figure 574a illustrates a perspective view of a receptacle connector.
Figure 574b illustrates a detailed cross-sectional view of the mating portion of the receptacle connector of Figure 574a.
Figure 575 illustrates a perspective view of a receptacle connector, a plug connector, and a housing.
Figure 576a illustrates a cross-sectional side view of a receptacle connector and a plug connector.
Figure 576b illustrates a side view of the plug connector of Figure 576a.
Figure 577a illustrates a side view of a plug connector.
Figure 577b illustrates a bottom view of the plug connector of Figure 577a.
Figure 578a illustrates a perspective view of a receptacle connector.
Figure 578b illustrates a plan view of the receptacle connector of Figure 578a.
Figure 578c illustrates a side cross-sectional view of the receptacle connector of Figure 578a.
Figure 578d illustrates a side cross-sectional view of the receptacle connector and plug connector of Figure 578a.
Figure 578e illustrates a cross-sectional side view of the receptacle connector of Figure 578a and the plug connector of Figure 578d.
Figure 579a illustrates a detailed plan view of a receptacle connector.
Figure 579b illustrates a perspective view of a detent of the receptacle connector of Figure 579a.
Figure 579c illustrates a cross-sectional view of the stopper and plug connector of Figure 579b.
Figure 579d illustrates a detailed plan view of the receptacle connector.
Figure 579e illustrates a perspective view of the stopper of the receptacle connector of Figure 579d.
Figure 579f illustrates a cross-sectional view of the stopper and plug connector of Figure 579e.
Figure 579g illustrates a detailed plan view of a receptacle connector.
FIG. 579h illustrates a perspective view of a stopper of the receptacle connector of FIG. 579g.
Figure 579i illustrates a detailed plan view of the receptacle connector.
FIG. 579j illustrates a perspective view of a stopper of the receptacle connector of FIG. 579i.
FIG. 579k illustrates a cross-sectional view of the stop and plug connector of FIG. 579j.
Figure 579l illustrates a detailed plan view of the receptacle connector.
FIG. 579m illustrates a perspective view of the stopper of the receptacle connector of FIG. 579l.
FIG. 580a illustrates a bottom view of a receptacle connector and a plug connector.
Figure 580b illustrates a bottom view of the receptacle connector and plug connector.
Figure 581a illustrates a bottom view of a receptacle connector and a plug connector.
Figure 581b illustrates a bottom view of the receptacle connector and plug connector.
FIGS. 582a through 582e illustrate cross-sectional side views of a receptacle connector, a plug connector, and seals between the receptacle connector and the plug connector.
FIGS. 583a through 583g illustrate cross-sectional side views of a receptacle connector, a plug connector, and seals between the receptacle connector and the plug connector.
Figures 584a and 584b illustrate exploded views of receptacle connectors.
Figures 585a and 585b illustrate exploded views of receptacle connectors.
Figure 586a illustrates a perspective view of an electronic device.
Figure 586b illustrates a perspective view of the electronic device and plug connector of Figure 586a.
FIG. 587a illustrates a perspective view of a plug connector inserted into an electronic device.
Figure 587b illustrates a partial exploded view of the plug connector, trim ring, and receptacle connector of Figure 587a.
Figure 588a illustrates a cross-sectional view of a plug connector inserted into a receptacle connector and trim ring.
Figure 588b shows a detailed cross-sectional view of the latch and plug connector of the trim ring of Figure 588a.
Figure 588c illustrates a cross-sectional view of a plug connector inserted into the receptacle connector and trim ring of Figure 588a.
Figure 588d illustrates a cross-sectional view of a plug connector inserted into the receptacle connector and trim ring of Figure 588a.
Figure 588e illustrates a cross-sectional view of a plug connector being unlatched from the receptacle connector and trim ring of Figure 588a.
Figure 588f illustrates a perspective view of the lever arm of the trim ring of Figure 588a.
Figure 589a illustrates a cross-sectional view of a plug connector within a receptacle connector and trim ring.
Figure 589b illustrates a cross-sectional view of a tool used to unlatch a plug connector from the receptacle connector and trim ring of Figure 589a.
Figure 589c illustrates a perspective view of the trim ring and plug connector of Figure 589a.
Figure 589d illustrates a cross-sectional view of the trim ring of Figure 589a.
Figure 589e illustrates a perspective view of the lever arm of the trim ring of Figure 589a.
Figure 590a illustrates a perspective view of a plug connector and trim ring.
Figure 590b illustrates a cross-sectional view of a plug connector inserted within the receptacle connector and trim ring of Figure 590a.
Figure 590c illustrates a cross-sectional view of a plug connector inserted into the receptacle connector and trim ring of Figure 590b.
Figure 591a illustrates a cross-sectional view of a plug connector inserted into a receptacle connector and trim ring.
Figure 591b illustrates a cross-sectional view of a plug connector being unlatched from the receptacle connector and trim ring of Figure 591a.
FIGS. 592a through 592c illustrate perspective views of a receptacle connector and trim ring assembled within a housing.
Figure 593a illustrates a plan view of a plug connector inserted into a receptacle connector and trim ring.
Figure 593b illustrates a detailed view of the plug connector and trim ring of Figure 593a before the trim ring is latched into the receptacle connector.
Figure 593c illustrates a plan view of the plug connector latched within the receptacle connector and trim ring of Figure 593a.
Figure 593d illustrates a detailed view of the plug connector and trim ring of Figure 593c with the plug connector latched within the trim ring.
Figure 593e illustrates a plan view of the plug connector being unlatched from the receptacle connector and trim ring of Figure 593a.
Figure 593f illustrates a detailed view of the plug connector and trim ring of Figure 593e with the plug connector unlatched from the trim ring.
Figures 594a and 594b illustrate perspective views of a plug connector inserted into a receptacle connector and a trim ring.
Figure 595a illustrates an exploded view of a receptacle connector.
Figure 595b illustrates a side cross-sectional view of the receptacle connector of Figure 595a.
Figures 596a and 596b illustrate translucency and solid views, respectively, of an electrical connector portion.
Figures 597 and 598 illustrate plan and bottom views, respectively, of the electrical connector portion.
Figure 599 illustrates exemplary method steps for manufacturing an electrical connector portion.
FIG. 600 illustrates exemplary method steps for providing an interface connector to an electrical connector portion.
Figures 601a and 601b illustrate side schematic views of assembling an interface connector to an electrical connector portion.
14.2: Modular Components for Wearable Electronic Devices
FIG. 602a illustrates a wearable electronic device worn by a user.
FIG. 602b illustrates a plan view of the wearable electronic device of FIG. 602a.
FIG. 602c illustrates an exploded view of the wearable electronic device of FIG. 602a.
FIG. 603a illustrates an exploded view of a wearable electronic device.
FIG. 603b illustrates a side view of a component of the wearable electronic device of FIG. 603a.
FIG. 603c illustrates a side view of a component of the wearable electronic device of FIG. 603a.
FIG. 603d illustrates a cross-sectional view of the component of FIG. 603c.
FIG. 604 illustrates a side view of a component of a wearable electronic device.
FIG. 605 illustrates a side view of a component of a wearable electronic device.
FIG. 606a illustrates a plan view of components of a wearable electronic device.
FIG. 606b illustrates a side view of the component of FIG. 606a.
Figure 606c illustrates a cross-sectional view of a component of Figure 606a.
FIG. 607a illustrates a plan view of components of a wearable electronic device.
Figure 607b illustrates a side view of the component of Figure 607a.
Figure 607c illustrates a cross-sectional view of the component of Figure 607a.
FIG. 608a illustrates a plan view of components of a wearable electronic device.
FIG. 608b illustrates a side view of the component of FIG. 608a.
FIG. 608c illustrates a cross-sectional view of a component of FIG. 608a.
FIG. 609a illustrates a plan view of components of a wearable electronic device.
Figure 609b illustrates a side view of the component of Figure 609a.
Figure 609c illustrates a cross-sectional view of a component of Figure 609a.
FIG. 610a illustrates a plan view of components of a wearable electronic device.
Figure 610b illustrates a side view of the component of Figure 610a.
Figure 610c illustrates a cross-sectional view of a component of Figure 610a.
FIG. 611a illustrates a plan view of components of a wearable electronic device.
Figure 611b illustrates a side view of the component of Figure 611a.
Figure 611c illustrates a cross-sectional view of the component of Figure 611a.
Figure 612 illustrates an exploded view of a wearable electronic device.
Figure 613 illustrates an exploded view of a wearable electronic device.
Figure 614 illustrates an exploded view of a wearable electronic device.
14.3: Modular Straps for Electronic Devices
FIG. 615 illustrates a plan view of an example of an electronic device worn by a user.
Figure 616 illustrates a perspective view of an example of an electronic device.
Figure 617 illustrates an exploded perspective view of an example of an electronic device.
FIG. 618 illustrates a side profile view of an exemplary removable strap of an HMD system.
Figure 619 illustrates a cross-sectional profile view of an exemplary electronics pod.
FIG. 620 illustrates a plan view of another example of an electronic device worn by a user.
Figures 621 and 622 illustrate exemplary cable management mechanisms of an exemplary HMD system.
14.4: Devices with detachable headbands
FIG. 623 is a side view of an electronic device having a detachable headband.
Fig. 624 is a drawing of a detachable headband.
FIG. 625 is a side cross-sectional view of a portion of a detachable headband.
Fig. 626 is a plan view of the spring.
FIG. 627 is a drawing of a detachable headband having a latch with a release tab.
FIG. 628 is a cross-sectional side view of a detachable headband having a release tab.
Figure 629 is a plan view of the magnet array.
FIGS. 630, 631, and 632 are drawings illustrating latch bias mechanisms.
Figure 633 is a cross-sectional side view of the latch bias mechanism.
FIGS. 634 and 635 are cross-sectional side views of detachable headbands.
FIG. 636 is a perspective view of a detachable headband having recesses.
Figure 637 is a plan view of the headband attachment post.
Figure 638 is a side cross-sectional view of the headband attachment post.
FIG. 639 is a side cross-sectional view of a headband attachment post having a recess and a corresponding detachable headband.
14.5: Cable tensioning system and dial
FIG. 640 is a side view of an example of a head-mountable display device having an adjustable headband.
FIG. 641 is a plan view of an example of an adjustable headband.
FIG. 642 is a perspective view of an example of a tensioning system for an adjustable headband.
FIG. 643 is a partially exploded view of an example tensioning system for an adjustable headband.
FIG. 644 is a partial cross-sectional view of an example of a tensioning system for an adjustable headband.
Figure 645 is a partially exploded view of an example of a dial cap for a tensioning system.
Figures 646a and 646b are partial cross-sectional views of an example of a disk type angle limiting system.
Figure 647 is a partial cross-sectional view of an example of a dial cap including a spring detent mechanism.
Figures 648a through 648c are perspective views of examples of angle limiting systems.
14.6: Two-part speaker system
Figure 649a illustrates a side view of an electronic device.
Figure 649b illustrates a perspective view of an electronic device.
Figure 649c illustrates a perspective view of an electronic device.
Figure 649d illustrates a perspective view of an electronic device.
Figure 650 illustrates a cross-sectional side view of a speaker assembly.
Figure 651a illustrates a perspective view of a speaker assembly.
Figure 651b illustrates a side cross-sectional view of a speaker assembly.
Figure 651c illustrates a cross-sectional perspective view of a speaker assembly.
Figure 651d illustrates a top perspective view of the speaker assembly.
FIG. 651e illustrates a bottom perspective view of the speaker assembly.
Figure 652 shows an exploded perspective view of a port barrier.
14.7: Bifurcated Bands
FIG. 653 is a side view of an exemplary electronic device, such as a head-mounted display device having an adjustable headband, according to some embodiments.
FIGS. 654A and 654B are side views of opposite sides of an exemplary headband, according to some embodiments.
FIG. 655 is an exemplary front view of an edge of a headband, according to some embodiments.
FIG. 656 is a side view of an exemplary headband having a seam that is not visible to the naked eye, according to some embodiments.
FIG. 657 is a side view of an exemplary headband having reinforcements on a surface of the headband, according to some embodiments.
FIGS. 658A through 658C are side views of exemplary reinforcements that may be incorporated onto a surface of a headband, according to some embodiments.
FIG. 659 is a side view of an exemplary headband having embedded reinforcements, according to some embodiments.
FIG. 660 is a perspective view of an exemplary reinforcement within a channel of a headband, according to some embodiments.
FIGS. 661A and 661B are side views of exemplary headbands having local stiffeners that change the curvature of the headband when under tension, according to some embodiments.
14.8: Over the head strap
FIG. 662 is a side view of an exemplary electronic device, such as a head-mounted display device having a detachable headband, according to some embodiments.
FIG. 663 is a perspective view of an exemplary headband having a post coupled to a post on a head-mounted structure, according to some embodiments.
FIG. 664 is a cross-sectional side view of an exemplary headband having a post coupled to a post on a head-mounted structure, according to some embodiments.
FIG. 665 is a cross-sectional side view of an exemplary detachable headband having a release tab, according to some embodiments.
FIG. 666 is a perspective view of an exemplary headband having magnets coupled to posts on a head-mounted structure, according to some embodiments.
FIG. 667 is a cross-sectional side view of an exemplary headband having a magnet coupled to a post on a head-mounted structure, according to some embodiments.
FIG. 668 is a cross-sectional side view of an exemplary headband having a protrusion and a magnet coupled to a post having a recess on a head-mounted structure, according to some embodiments.
FIG. 669 is a perspective view of an exemplary headband having portions that wrap around a head-mounted support structure for attachment to the support structure, according to some embodiments.
FIG. 670 is a perspective view of an exemplary headband attached to a head-mounted support structure having a lug and socket system, according to some embodiments.
FIG. 671 is a cross-sectional side view of two exemplary headbands attached to a head-mounted support structure having latches, according to some embodiments.
FIG. 672 is a cross-sectional side view of two exemplary headbands, one attached to a head-mounted support structure having a latch and one attached to a head-mounted support structure having a protrusion, according to some embodiments.
FIG. 673 is a drawing of an exemplary headband attached to a head-mounted support structure having a twist-to-lock system, according to some embodiments.
FIG. 674 is a perspective view of an exemplary headband having an opening for enclosing a post of a head-mounted support structure, according to some embodiments.
FIG. 675 is a cross-sectional side view of an exemplary headband having an opening for enclosing a post of a head-mounted support structure, according to some embodiments.
FIGS. 676a and 676b are perspective views of exemplary posts having extendable magnets, according to some embodiments.
FIG. 677 is a perspective view of an exemplary headband having an opening for receiving a magnet and coupling to a head-mounted support structure, according to some embodiments.
FIGS. 678A and 678B are cross-sectional side views of an exemplary headband engaging an extendable magnet of a post, according to some embodiments.
XV: User Interface
FIG. 679 illustrates an exemplary user interface displayed by the display module of the HMD.
FIG. 680a illustrates an exemplary user interface displayed by the display module of the HMD.
FIG. 680b illustrates an exemplary user interface displayed by the display module of the HMD.
FIG. 681a illustrates an example of a user interface of a display module of an electronic device.
FIG. 681b illustrates an example of a user interface of a display module of an electronic device.
FIG. 682a illustrates an example of users interacting with the user interfaces of two display modules of an electronic device.
FIG. 682b illustrates an example of users interacting with the user interfaces of two display modules of an electronic device.
FIG. 683a illustrates an exemplary user interface displayed by the display module of the HMD.
FIG. 683b illustrates an exemplary user interface displayed by the display module of the HMD.
FIG. 683c illustrates an exemplary user interface displayed by the display module of the HMD.
FIG. 684a illustrates an exemplary user interface displayed by the display module of the HMD.
FIG. 684b illustrates an exemplary user interface displayed by the display module of the HMD.

I: Entire system

FIG. 1A illustrates a front, top perspective view of an example head-mounted display (HMD) device (1-100) configured to be worn by a user and to provide virtual and augmented/mixed reality (VR/AR) experiences. The HMD (1-100) may include a display unit (1-102) or assembly, an electronic strap assembly (1-104) connected to and extending from the display unit (1-102), and a band assembly (1-106) secured at opposite ends to the electronic strap assembly (1-104). The electronic strap assembly (1-104) and band (1-106) may be part of a retention assembly configured to wrap around a user's head to hold the display unit (1-102) against the user's face.

In at least one example, the band assembly (1-106) may include a first band (1-116) configured to wrap around the rear surface of the user's head, and a second band (1-117) configured to extend above the top of the user's head. The second strap may extend between the first electronic strap (1-105a) and the second electronic strap (1-105b) of the electronic strap assembly (1-104), as shown. The strap assembly (1-104) and the band assembly (1-106) may be part of a securing mechanism that extends rearward from the display unit (1-102) and is configured to hold the display unit (1-102) against the user's face.

In at least one example, the fastening mechanism comprises a first electronic strap (1-105a) having a first proximal end (1-134) coupled to a housing (1-150) of the display unit (1-102) and a first distal end (1-136) opposite the first proximal end (1-134). The fastening mechanism may also comprise a second electronic strap (1-105b) having a second proximal end (1-138) coupled to a housing (1-150) of the display unit (1-102) and a second distal end (1-140) opposite the second proximal end (1-138). The securing mechanism may also include a first band (1-116) having a first end (1-142) coupled to the first distal end (1-136) and a second end (1-144) coupled to the second distal end (1-140), and a second band (1-117) extending between the first electronic strap (1-105a) and the second electronic strap (1-105b). The straps (1-105a, 1-105b) and the band (1-116) may be coupled via connecting mechanisms or assemblies (1-114). In at least one example, the second band (1-117) includes a first end (1-146) coupled to a first electronic strap (1-105a) between a first proximal end (1-134) and a first distal end (1-136), and a second end (1-148) coupled to a second electronic strap (1-105b) between a second proximal end (1-138) and a second distal end (1-140).

In at least one example, the first and second electronic straps (1-105a, 1-105b) comprise plastic, metal, or other structural materials that form the shape of the substantially rigid straps (1-105a, 1-105b). In at least one example, the first and second bands (1-116, 1-117) are formed of elastic, flexible materials, including woven textiles, rubbers, and the like. The first and second bands (1-116, 1-117) may be flexible to conform to the shape of a user's head when wearing the HMD (1-100).

In at least one example, one or more of the first and second electronic straps (1-105a, 1-105b) may define internal strap volumes and may include one or more electronic components disposed within the internal strap volumes. In one example, as illustrated in FIG. 1A, the first electronic strap (1-105a) may include an electronic component (1-112). In one example, the electronic component (1-112) may include a speaker. In one example, the electronic component (1-112) may include a computing component, such as a processor.

In at least one example, the housing (1-150) defines a first, forward-facing opening (1-152). The forward-facing opening is labeled with dashed lines at 1-152 in FIG. 1A because the front display assembly (1-108) is positioned to obscure the first opening (1-152) when the HMD (1-100) is assembled. The housing (1-150) may also define a second, rear-facing opening (1-154). The housing (1-150) also defines an interior volume between the first opening (1-152) and the second opening (1-154). In at least one example, the HMD (1-100) includes a display assembly (1-108) that may include a front cover and a display screen (illustrated in other drawings) positioned within or across the front opening (1-152) to obscure the front opening (1-152). In at least one example, the display assembly (1-108) as well as the display screen of the display assembly (1-108) have a curvature configured to generally follow the curvature of the user's face. The display screen of the display assembly (1-108) may be curved as shown to complement the user's facial features and general curvature from one side of the face to the other side, e.g., from top to bottom and/or left to right as the display unit (1-102) is pressed.

In at least one example, the housing (1-150) may define a first opening (1-126) between the first opening (1-152) and the second opening (1-154), and a second opening (1-130) between the first opening (1-152) and the second opening (1-154). The HMD (1-100) may also include a first button (1-128) disposed within the first opening (1-126), and a second button (1-132) disposed within the second opening (1-130). The first and second buttons (1-128, 1-132) may be pressable through the respective openings (1-126, 1-132). In at least one example, the first button (1-126) and/or the second button (1-130) may be pressable buttons as well as twistable dials. In at least one example, the first button (1-126) is a pressable and twistable dial button, and the second button (1-132) is a pressable button.

Figure 1b illustrates a rear perspective view of the HMD (1-100). The HMD (1-100) may include an optical seal (1-110) extending rearward from the housing (1-150) of the display assembly (1-108) around the periphery of the housing (1-150), as shown. The optical seal (1-110) may be configured to extend from the housing (1-150) around the user's eyes and onto the user's face to block external light from being visible. In one example, the HMD (1-100) may include first and second display assemblies (1-120a, 1-120b) positioned at or within a rearward-facing second opening (1-154) defined by the housing (1-150) and/or positioned within an interior volume of the housing (1-150) and configured to project light through the second opening (1-154). In at least one example, each display assembly (1-120a, 1-120b) may include respective display screens (1-122a, 1-122b) configured to project light in a rearward direction toward the user's eyes through the second opening (1-154).

In at least one example, referring to both FIGS. 1A and 1B, the display assembly (1-108) may be a front-facing, forward-facing display assembly including a display screen configured to project light in a first, forward direction, and the rear-facing display screens (1-122a, 1-122b) may be configured to project light in a second, rearward direction opposite the first direction. As noted above, the light seal (1-110) may be configured to block light external to the HMD (1-100), including light projected by the forward-facing display screen of the display assembly (1-108) illustrated in the front perspective view of FIG. 1A, from reaching the user's eyes. In at least one example, the HMD (1-100) may also include a curtain (1-124) that obscures a second opening (1-154) between the housing (1-150) and the rear-facing display assemblies (1-120a, 1-120b). In at least one example, the curtain (1-124) may be resilient or at least partially resilient.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 1A and 1B ) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 2-4 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 2-4 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 1A and 1B .

FIG. 2 illustrates an exemplary drawing of an HMD (1-200) comprising its various parts or components separated according to the modularity and optional coupling of those components. For example, the HMD (1-200) may include a band (1-216) that may be optionally coupled to first and second electronic straps (1-205a, 1-205b). The first fixed strap (1-205a) may include a first electronic component (1-212a), and the second fixed strap (1-205b) may include a second electronic component (1-212b). In at least one example, the first and second straps (1-205a, 1-205b) may be removably coupled to the display unit (1-202).

Additionally, the HMD (1-200) may include an optical seal (1-210) configured to be removably coupled to the display unit (1-202). The HMD (1-200) may also include lenses (1-218) removably coupled to the display unit (1-202), for example, over first and second display assemblies including display screens. The lenses (1-218) may include custom prescription lenses configured for corrective vision. As noted, each of the components illustrated in the drawing of FIG. 2 and described above may be removably coupled, attached, reattached, and replaced to replace or update the components for different users. For example, bands such as band (1-216), optical seals such as optical seal (1-210), lenses such as lenses (1-218), and electronic straps such as straps (1-205a, 1-205b) can be interchanged by the user so that these components can be customized to fit and correspond to the individual user of the HMD (1-200).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIG. 2 ) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 1A , 1B , 3 , and 4 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 1A , 1B , 3 , and 4 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 2 .

FIG. 3 illustrates an exemplary drawing of a display unit (1-306) of an HMD. The display unit (1-306) may include a front display assembly (1-308), a frame/housing assembly (1-350), and a curtain assembly (1-324). The display unit (1-306) may also include a sensor assembly (1-356), a logic board assembly (1-358), and a cooling assembly (1-360) disposed between the frame assembly (1-350) and the front display assembly (1-308). In at least one example, the display unit (1-306) may also include a rear-facing display assembly (1-320) comprising first and second rear-facing display screens (1-322a, 1-322b) disposed between the frame (1-350) and the curtain assembly (1-324).

In at least one example, the display unit (1-306) may also include a motor assembly (1-362) configured as an adjustment mechanism for adjusting the positions of the display screens (1-322a, 1-322b) of the display assembly (1-320) relative to the frame (1-350). In at least one example, the display assembly (1-320) is mechanically coupled to the motor assembly (1-362) with at least one motor for each display screen (1-322a, 1-322b) such that the motors translate the display screens (1-322a, 1-322b) to match the interpupillary distance of the user's eyes.

In at least one example, the display unit (1-306) may include a dial or button (1-328) that is depressible relative to the frame (1-350) and accessible to the user from an outside of the frame (1-350). The button (1-328) may be electronically connected to the motor assembly (1-362) via a controller such that user manipulation of the button (1-328) causes the motors of the motor assembly (1-362) to adjust the positions of the display screens (1-322a, 1-322b).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIG. 3 ) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 1A-2 and FIG. 4 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 1A-2 and FIG. 4 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 3 .

FIG. 4 illustrates a drawing of another example of a display unit (1-406) of an HMD device similar to other HMD devices described herein. The display unit (1-406) may include a front display assembly (1-402), a sensor assembly (1-456), a logic board assembly (1-458), a cooling assembly (1-460), a frame assembly (1-450), a rear-facing display assembly (1-421), and a curtain assembly (1-424). The display unit (1-406) may also include a motor assembly (1-462) for adjusting the positions of first and second display subassemblies (1-420a, 1-420b) of the rear-facing display assembly (1-421), including first and second respective display screens for inter-spatial adjustments, as described above.

The various components, systems, and assemblies illustrated in the drawings of FIG. 4 are described in further detail herein with reference to FIGS. 1A-3 as well as subsequent drawings referenced in the present disclosure. The display unit (1-406) illustrated in FIG. 4 can be assembled and integrated with the fastening mechanisms illustrated in FIGS. 1A-3, including other components including electronic straps, bands, and optical seals, connecting assemblies, and the like.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIG. 4 ) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 1A-3 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 1A-3 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 4 .

II: Cover glass

FIG. 5 illustrates a drawing of an HMD (2.0-100) including a front cover and a display assembly (2.0-102), including one or more transparent layers, display integration assemblies, a shroud, and a dust seal. The transparent layers, display integration assemblies, shroud, and dust seal are described below in Sections II, III, IV, and V.

2.1: Systems with transparent layers

Transparent layers can be used to form windows in buildings, vehicles, and/or other systems. Transparent layers can also be used to form protective cover layers, such as cover layers for optical components.

Figure 6 is a cross-sectional side view of an exemplary system including a transparent layer. The system (2.1-10) of Figure 6 has a support, such as a support (2.1-12), on which one or more transparent layers, such as transparent layers (2.1-14), may be mounted. The system (2.1-10) may be a building (e.g., the support (2.1-12) may comprise building walls), a vehicle (e.g., the support (2.1-12) may be a vehicle body), an electronic device (e.g., the support (2.1-12) may be an electronic device housing, such as a head-mounted housing for a head-mounted device), and/or any other suitable system. In an arrangement where the system (2.1-10) is a building or a vehicle, the layer (2.1-14) may act as a window. In arrangements where the system (2.1-10) is an electronic device, the layer (2.1-14) may overlap and protect components within the device. For example, the layer (2.1-14) may serve as a protective cover layer overlapping optical components. In an exemplary configuration, the system (2.1-10) is a portable electronic device (e.g., a cellular phone, a head-mounted device, a tablet computer, a laptop computer, a wristwatch, etc.).

A transparent layer (2.1-14) and a support (2.1-12) can separate an inner region (2.1-16) of a system (2.1-10) from an outer region (2.1-18). System components can be mounted within the inner region (2.1-16). The layer (2.1-14) can have opposite inner and outer surfaces. The outer surface of the layer (2.1-14) can face the outer region (2.1-18), and the inner surface of the layer (2.1-14) can face the inner region (2.1-16). The surfaces of the layer (2.1-14) can include planar portions and/or curved portions. For example, the layer (2.1-14) can have a shape having a curved cross-sectional profile, such as shape (2.1-20). In the curved arrays of layers (2.1-14), the inner and outer surfaces can be parallel to each other (e.g., the thickness of the layers (2.1-14) can be constant throughout the layers (2.1-14). If desired, some or all of the surfaces of the layers (2.1-14) can have compound curvatures (surfaces that can be flattened only to a plane having distortion). Surface regions of compound curvature can be bent about both the X-axis and the Y-axis in FIG. 6.

Figure 7 illustrates how layers (2.1-14) may overlap with components within the inner region (2.1-16), such as exemplary components (2.1-20, 2.1-22). Components (2.1-20, 2.1-22) may include optical components that emit and/or detect light. As an example, component (2.1-22) may be a display that emits visible light that passes through layer (2.1-14). This allows a viewer within outer region (2.1-18) to view an image on the display through layer (2.1-14) (e.g., layer (2.1-14) may act as a display cover layer). Components such as component (2.1-20) may include, for example, visible and/or infrared cameras and/or other optical sensors that receive light through layer (2.1-14). By overlapping with components (2.1-20, 2.1-22) as illustrated in FIG. 7, layer (2.1-14) can serve as a protective cover layer for components (2.1-20, 2.1-22).

During events such as drop events where the system (2.1-10) suddenly contacts the ground or other rigid surface, the layer (2.1-14) may be subjected to undesirably high amounts of stress. To help improve durability, the layer (2.1-14) may be provided with one or more layers of a polymer. As an example, the polymer layer may be used to laminate together multiple layers of a transparent material, and/or the polymer layers may be formed on exposed inner and/or outer surfaces of the layer (2.1-14).

Figure 8 is a cross-sectional side view of a layer (2.1-14). As illustrated in Figure 8, the layer (2.1-14) may include multiple layers of transparent material, such as layers (2.1-40, 2.1-34, 2.1-32, 2.1-30). In an exemplary configuration, the layer (2.1-14) includes two layers of a rigid transparent material and one or more softer layers attached to the rigid layers. The softer layers may be, for example, polymer layers that help to improve durability.

In the example of FIG. 8, the layer (2.1-34) may be a rigid layer, such as a layer of glass (including glass ceramic) or sapphire or other crystalline material. Exemplary configurations in which the layer (2.1-34) is a layer of glass may sometimes be described herein as an example. The layer (2.1-34) may be formed from alumina silicate glass or other glass materials, and optionally may be chemically strengthened using an ion exchange chemical strengthening process that places the surfaces of the layer (2.1-34) in compression against the core of the layer (2.1-34). The layer (2.1-34) may have a thickness sufficient to provide some or all of its structural strength to the layer (2.1-14), and thus the layer (2.1-34) may sometimes be referred to as a structural layer, a structural transparent layer, or a structural glass layer. Layers (2.1-34) may have a thickness of, for example, 700 micrometers, at least 400 micrometers, at least 500 micrometers, at least 600 micrometers, less than 1200 micrometers, less than 1000 micrometers, less than 900 micrometers, less than 800 micrometers, 400 to 1200 micrometers, 400 to 1100 micrometers, 400 to 1000 micrometers, 400 to 800 micrometers, and/or other suitable thicknesses.

One or more polymer layers may be attached to the layer (2.1-34). In an exemplary configuration, the polymer layer (2.1-40) is attached to the inner surface (2.1-42) of the layer (2.1-34). The layer (2.1-40) may include a first layer, such as the layer (2.1-38), and a second layer, such as the layer (2.1-36). The layer (2.1-38) may be a polymer film (e.g., a film of polycarbonate, polyethylene terephthalate, or other polymer film) and may have a thickness of 50 micrometers, from 10 to 250 micrometers, from 25 to 100 micrometers, at least 20 micrometers, less than 200 micrometers, less than 150 micrometers, or any other suitable thickness. Layer (2.1-36) may be a polymer layer, such as a layer of a polymer adhesive (e.g., an epoxy, an acrylic adhesive, a curable liquid adhesive, a pressure-sensitive adhesive, and/or other adhesive) that attaches layer (2.1-38) to layer (2.1-34), and may have a thickness of 100 micrometers, 20 to 500 micrometers, at least 30 micrometers, less than 250 micrometers, less than 300 micrometers, or other suitable thickness.

If desired, an additional polymer layer, such as a polymer layer (2.1-32), may be attached to the upper surface outer surface (1.3-44) of the layer (2.1-34). The layer (2.1-32) may be formed from an elastomeric polymer or other soft polymer material. Examples of materials that may be used to form the polymer layer (2.1-32) include polyvinyl butyral and ethylene vinyl acetate. If desired, other polymers may be used to form the layer (2.1-32). The layer (2.1-32) may be the outermost layer of the material of the layer (2.1-14) (e.g., the outer surface of the layer (2.1-32) may be exposed to the region (2.1-18)), or the layer (2.1-32) may be covered with a harder outer layer.

As illustrated in FIG. 8, for example, a layer (2.1-32), which may sometimes be referred to as an elastomeric polymer layer or polymer interlayer, may be used to attach a thin rigid layer, such as an outer layer (2.1-30), to the layer (2.1-34). The thickness of the layer (2.1-32) may be 50 micrometers, 25 to 100 micrometers, at least 20 micrometers, at least 40 micrometers, at least 50 micrometers, less than 400 micrometers, 25 to 400 micrometers, less than 300 micrometers, less than 200 micrometers, 20 to 200 micrometers, 50 to 400 micrometers, or any other suitable thickness. The layer (2.1-30) may be formed from a crystalline material such as glass (including glass ceramics), sapphire, or a rigid polymer (e.g., a hardened acrylic). The thickness of layer (2.1-30) is preferably less than the thickness of layer (2.1-34) to help minimize the weight of layer (2.1-14).

In an exemplary arrangement, layer (2.1-30) is formed as a separate layer (e.g., a glass layer separate from layer (2.1-34)) that is attached to layer (2.1-34) by laminating layers (2.1-30, 2.1-34) together using polymer layer (2.1-32). The thickness of layer (2.1-30) in this type of arrangement can be at least 50 micrometers, at least 75 micrometers, at least 100 micrometers, less than 300 micrometers, less than 250 micrometers, less than 200 micrometers, less than 150 micrometers, less than 100 micrometers, from 50 to 200 micrometers, from 25 to 300 micrometers, from 50 to 150 micrometers, or any other suitable thickness (e.g., a thickness that provides sufficient hardness to resist scratches on the outermost surface of layer (2.1-14)). In addition to resisting scratches, including a hard outer layer, such as layer (2.1-30), in layer (2.1-14) can help enhance the strength of layer (2.1-14) and thereby allow the thickness of layer (34) to be reduced. To help match the curvature of layers (2.1-30, 2.1-34) in this type of arrangement, layers (2.1-30, 2.1-34) can be formed into desired shapes using molding operations (e.g., glass molding), machining and/or polishing operations, etching (wet and/or dry chemical etching), and/or other suitable shaping operations.

In some embodiments, the layer (2.1-30) may be deposited as a coating on the layer (2.1-32). As examples, deposition techniques such as physical vapor deposition and sol-gel deposition may be used to deposit an inorganic dielectric layer of a hard material (e.g., a glass coating formed of silicon nitride, silicon oxynitride, zirconia, alumina, and/or other hard dielectric coatings deposited by physical vapor deposition, or a glass coating formed of an inorganic dielectric based on silicon oxide deposited by sol-gel deposition techniques). The thickness of such a coating may be sufficient to allow the coating to enhance durability (e.g., to help prevent scratches in the layer (2.1-32). As examples, the layer (2.1-30) may have a thickness of at least 20 micrometers, at least 25 micrometers, at least 35 micrometers, and/or other suitable thickness. If desired, a liquid polymer (e.g., liquid acrylic) may be deposited and cured to form an acrylic-based hard coat (e.g., layer (2.1-30) may be a polymer hard coat that is harder than layer (2.1-32) and thus helps resist scratching).

2.2: Systems with displays and sensors

Figure 9 is a side view of an exemplary head-mounted electronic device. As shown in Figure 9, the head-mounted device (2.2-10) may include a head-mounted support structure (2.2-26). The support structure (2.2-26) may have walls or other structures that separate an interior region of the device (2.2-10), such as an interior region (2.2-42), from an exterior region surrounding the device (2.2-10), such as an exterior region (2.2-44). Electrical components (2.2-40) (e.g., integrated circuits, sensors, control circuitry, light-emitting diodes, lasers, and other light-emitting devices, other control circuits, and input/output devices, etc.) may be mounted on printed circuits and/or other structures within the device (2.2-10) (e.g., within the interior region (2.2-42)).

To present images to a user for observation from eye boxes, such as eye boxes (2.2-34), the device (2.2-10) may include rear-facing displays, such as displays (2.2-14R), and lenses, such as lenses (2.2-38). These components may be mounted on optical modules, such as optical modules (2.2-36) (e.g., lens barrels), to form respective left and right optical systems. For example, there may be a left rear display for presenting images to the user's left eye within the left eye box through the left lens, and a right rear display for presenting images to the user's right eye within the right eye box. When the structure (2.2-26) is placed against an outer surface of the user's face (facial surface (2.2-30)), the user's eyes are positioned within the eye boxes (34) on the rear surface (R) of the device (2.2-10).

The support structure (2.2-26) may include a main support structure, such as a main housing portion (2.2-26M) (sometimes referred to as the main portion). The main housing portion (2.2-26M) may extend from a front side (F) of the device (2.2-10) to an opposite rear side (R) of the device (2.2-10). On the rear side (R), the main housing portion (2.2-26M) may have cushioning structures to enhance the comfort of the user when the portion (2.2-26M) rests against the facial surface (2.2-30). If desired, the support structure (2.2-26) may include optional head straps, such as straps (2.2-26B), and/or other structures that enable the device (2.2-10) to be worn on the user's head.

The device (2.2-10) may have a publicly observable front-facing display, such as a display (2.2-14F) mounted on the front surface (F) of the main housing portion (2.2-26M). The display (2.2-14F) may be observable to the user when the user is not wearing the device (2.2-10) and/or observable by other persons in the vicinity of the device (2.2-10). The display (2.2-14F) may be visible on the front surface (F) of the device (2.2-10) to an external observer, such as an observer (2.2-50) observing the device (2.2-10) in a direction (2.2-52), as an example.

A schematic diagram of an exemplary system that may include a head-mounted device is illustrated in FIG. 10. As illustrated in FIG. 10, the system (2.2-8) may have one or more electronic devices (2.2-10). The devices (2.2-10) may include a head-mounted device (e.g., device (2.2-10) of FIG. 9), accessories such as controllers and headphones, computing equipment (e.g., a cellular telephone, tablet computer, laptop computer, desktop computer, and/or remote computing equipment that supplies content to the head-mounted device), and/or other devices in communication with one another.

Each electronic device (2.2-10) may have control circuitry (2.2-12). The control circuitry (2.2-12) may include storage and processing circuitry for controlling the operation of the device (2.2-10). The circuitry (2.2-12) may include storage, such as hard disk drive storage, non-volatile memory (e.g., electrically programmable read-only memory configured to form a solid-state drive), volatile memory (e.g., static or dynamic random access memory), etc. The processing circuitry within the control circuitry (2.2-12) may be based on one or more microprocessors, microcontrollers, digital signal processors, baseband processors, power management units, audio chips, graphics processing units, application specific integrated circuits, and other integrated circuits. Software code may be stored on storage of circuitry (2.2-12) and executed on processing circuitry of circuitry (2.2-12) to implement control operations for the device (2.2-10), such as data acquisition operations, operations involving coordination of components of the device (2.2-10) using control signals, etc. The control circuitry (2.2-12) may include wired and wireless communication circuitry. For example, the control circuitry (2.2-12) may include radio frequency transceiver circuitry, such as cellular telephone transceiver circuitry, wireless local area network transceiver circuitry (e.g., WiFi® circuitry), millimeter wave transceiver circuitry, and/or other wireless communication circuitry.

During operation, the communication circuitry of the devices within the system (2.2-8) (e.g., the communication circuitry of the control circuitry (2.2-12) of the device (2.2-10)) may be used to support communication between the electronic devices. For example, one electronic device may transmit video data, audio data, control signals, and/or other data to another electronic device within the system (2.2-8). The electronic devices within the system (2.2-8) may communicate via one or more communication networks (e.g., the Internet, a local area network, etc.) using wired and/or wireless communication circuitry. The communication circuitry may be used to allow data to be received by the device (2.2-10) from an external device (e.g., a portable device such as a tethered computer, a handheld device, or a laptop computer, an online computing device such as a remote server or other remote computing device, or other electronic device) and/or to provide data to the external device.

Each device (2.2-10) within the system (2.2-8) may include input/output devices (2.2-22). The input/output devices (2.2-22) may be used to allow a user to provide user input to the device (2.2-10). The input/output devices (2.2-22) may also be used to collect information about the environment in which the device (2.2-10) is operating. Output components within the devices (2.2-22) may allow the device (2.2-10) to provide output to the user and may be used to communicate with external electrical equipment.

As illustrated in FIG. 10, the input/output devices (2.2-22) may include one or more displays, such as displays (2.2-14). The devices (2.2-14) may include rear-facing displays, such as display (2.2-14R) of FIG. 9. The devices (2.2-10) may include, for example, left and right components, such as left and right scanning mirror display devices or other image projectors, liquid crystal-on-silicon display devices, digital mirror devices, or other reflective display devices, left and right display panels based on light-emitting diode pixel arrays (e.g., display devices based on pixel arrays formed of crystalline semiconductor light-emitting diode dies or organic light-emitting displays having polymer or semiconductor substrates), liquid crystal display panels, and/or other left and right display devices that provide images to left and right eye boxes for viewing by the user's left and right eyes, respectively. Display components such as these (e.g., organic light-emitting displays having a flexible polymer substrate, or displays based on pixel arrays formed of crystalline semiconductor light-emitting diode dies on a flexible substrate) can also be used to form forward-facing displays (sometimes referred to as front-facing displays, front displays, or publicly viewable displays) for devices (2.2-10), such as the forward-facing display (2.2-14F) of FIG. 9.

During operation, the displays (2.2-14) (e.g., displays (2.2-14R and/or 2.2-14F)) may be used to display visual content (e.g., still images and/or moving images, including photographs and pass-through video from camera sensors, text, graphics, movies, games, and/or other visual content) for a user of the device (2.2-10). The content presented on the displays (2.2-14) may include, for example, virtual objects and other content provided to the displays (2.2-14) by the control circuitry (2.2-12). This virtual content may sometimes be referred to as computer-generated content. The computer-generated content may be displayed in the absence of real-world content or may be combined with real-world content. In some configurations, the real-world image may be captured by a camera (e.g., a forward-facing camera, sometimes referred to as a forward-facing camera), and computer-generated content may be electronically overlaid on portions of the real-world image (e.g., when the device (2.2-10) is a pair of virtual reality goggles).

The input/output circuitry (2.2-22) may include sensors (2.2-16). Sensors (2.2-16) include, for example, 3D sensors (e.g., structured light sensors that emit beams of light and use 2D digital image sensors to collect image data for 3D images from dots or other light spots created when a target is illuminated by the beams of light, binocular 3D image sensors that collect 3D images using two or more cameras in a binocular imaging array, 3D LIDAR (light detection and ranging) sensors, sometimes referred to as time-of-flight cameras or 3D time-of-flight cameras, 3D radio frequency sensors, or other sensors that collect 3D image data), cameras (e.g., 2D infrared and/or visible digital image sensors), gaze tracking sensors (e.g., an gaze tracking system based on an image sensor, and, if desired, a light source that emits one or more beams of light that are then tracked using the image sensor after being reflected from the user's eyes), touch sensors, capacitive Sensors such as proximity sensors, light-based (optical) proximity sensors, other proximity sensors, force sensors (e.g., strain gauges, capacitive force sensors, resistive force sensors, etc.), contact sensors based on switches, gas sensors, pressure sensors, moisture sensors, magnetic sensors, audio sensors (microphones), ambient light sensors, flicker sensors that collect temporal information about ambient lighting conditions, such as the presence of time-varying ambient light intensity associated with artificial lighting, microphones for collecting voice commands and other audio input, sensors configured to collect information about motion, position, and/or orientation (e.g., accelerometers, gyroscopes, compasses, and/or inertial measurement units including all or one or a subset of two of these sensors), and/or other sensors.

User input and other information may be collected using sensors and other input devices within the input/output devices (2.2-22). If desired, the input/output devices (2.2-22) may include other devices (2.2-24), such as haptic output devices (e.g., vibration components), light-emitting diodes, lasers and other light sources (e.g., light-emitting devices that emit light to illuminate the environment surrounding the device (2.2-10) when ambient light levels are low), speakers such as ear speakers for generating audio output, circuits for receiving wireless power, circuits for wirelessly transmitting power to other devices, batteries and other energy storage devices (e.g., capacitors), joysticks, buttons and/or other components.

As described in connection with FIG. 9, the electronic device (2.2-10) may have head-mounted support structures, such as a head-mounted support structure (2.2-26) (e.g., a head-mounted housing structure, e.g., housing walls, straps, etc.). The head-mounted support structure may be configured to be worn on a user's head (e.g., against the user's face covering the user's eyes) during operation of the device (2.2-10) and may support displays (2.2-14), sensors (2.2-16), other components (2.2-24), other input/output devices (2.2-22), and control circuitry (2.2-12) (see, e.g., components (2.2-40) and optical module (2.2-36) of FIG. 9).

FIG. 11 is a front view of an exemplary configuration of a device (2.2-10) having a publicly observable display, such as a forward-facing display (2.2-14F). As illustrated in FIG. 11, the support structure (2.2-26M) of the device (2.2-10) may have right and left portions, such as portions (2.2-26R, 2.2-26L), joined by an interposed nose bridge portion, such as portion (2.2-26NB). The portion (2.2-26NB) may have a curved outer surface, such as a nose bridge surface (2.2-90), configured to receive and rest upon a user's nose to assist in supporting the main housing portion (2.2-26M) on the user's head.

The display (2.2-14F) may have an active area, such as an active area (AA) configured to display images, and an inactive area (IA) that does not display images. The outline of the active area (AA) may be rectangular, rectangular with rounded corners, may have teardrop-shaped portions on the left and right sides of the device (2.2-10), may have a shape with straight edges, a shape with curved edges, a shape with a peripheral edge having both straight and curved portions, and/or other suitable outlines. As illustrated in FIG. 11, the active area (AA) may have a curved recessed portion in the nose bridge portion (2.2-26NB) of the main housing portion (2.2-26). The presence of the nose-shaped recess in the active area (AA) may help fit the active area (AA) within the available space of the housing portion (2.2-26M) without unduly restricting the size of the active area (AA).

The active area (AA) includes an array of pixels. The pixels may be, for example, light-emitting diode pixels formed of thin-film organic light-emitting diodes or crystalline semiconductor light-emitting diode dies (sometimes referred to as micro light-emitting diodes) on a flexible display panel substrate. If desired, configurations in which the display (2.2-14F) uses other display technologies may also be used. Exemplary arrangements in which the display (2.2-14) is formed of a light-emitting diode display, such as an organic light-emitting diode display formed on a flexible substrate (e.g., a substrate formed of a bendable layer of polyimide or a sheet of other flexible polymer), may sometimes be described herein by way of example. The pixels of the active area (AA) may be formed on a display device, such as the display panel (2.2-14P) of FIG. 11 (e.g., a flexible organic light-emitting diode display panel). In some configurations, the outline of the panel (2.2-14P) may have a peripheral edge that includes straight segments or a combination of straight and curved segments. Configurations in which the overall outline of the panel (2.2-14P) features a curved main edge may also be used.

The display (2.2-14F) may have an inactive area, such as an inactive area (IA), that has no pixels and does not display images. The inactive area (IA) may form an inactive border area that extends along one or more portions of the peripheral edge of the active area (AA). In the exemplary configuration of FIG. 11, the inactive area (IA) has a ring shape that surrounds the active area (AA). In this type of arrangement, the width of the inactive area (IA) may be relatively constant, and the inner and outer edges of the area (IA) may be characterized by straight and/or curved segments or may be curved along their entire length. For example, the outer edge of the area (IA) (e.g., the peripheral edge of the display (2.2-14F)) may have a curved outline that extends parallel to the curved edge of the active area (AA).

In some configurations, the device (2.2-10) can operate in conjunction with other devices within the system (2.2-8), such as wireless controllers and other accessories. These accessories may have magnetic sensors that detect the direction and strength of magnetic fields. The device (2.2-10) may have one or more electromagnets configured to emit a magnetic field. The magnetic field may be measured by wireless accessories near the device (2.2-10), such that the accessories can determine their orientation and location relative to the device (2.2-10). This allows the accessories to wirelessly provide real-time information about their current location, orientation, and movement to the device (2.2-10), allowing the accessories to act as wireless controllers. The accessories may include wearable devices, devices with handles, and other input devices.

In an exemplary configuration, the device (2.2-10) may have a coil, such as an exemplary coil (2.2-54), extending around a periphery of the display (2.2-14F) (e.g., beneath an inactive area (IA) or other portion of the display (2.2-14F). The coil (2.2-54) may have any suitable number of turns (e.g., 1 to 10, at least 2, at least 5, at least 10, 10 to 50, less than 100, less than 25, less than 6, etc.). These turns may be formed of metal traces on a substrate and/or may be formed of wires and/or may be formed of other conductive lines. During operation, the control circuitry (2.2-12) may supply an alternating current (AC) drive signal to the coil (2.2-54). The drive signal can have a frequency of (for example) at least 1 kHz, at least 10 kHz, at least 100 kHz, at least 1 MHz, less than 10 MHz, less than 3 MHz, less than 300 kHz, or less than 30 kHz. As AC current flows through the coil (2.2-54), a corresponding magnetic field is generated in the vicinity of the device (2.2-10). Electronic devices, such as wireless controllers having magnetic sensors in the vicinity of the device (2.2-10), can use the magnetic field as a reference to determine their orientation, position, and/or movement while the wireless controllers are moved relative to the device (2.2-10) to provide input to the device (2.2-10).

As an example, consider a handheld wireless controller used to control the operation of a device (2.2-10). During operation, the device (2.2-10) emits a magnetic field using a coil (2.2-54). As the handheld wireless controller is moved, magnetic sensors in the controller can monitor the position of the controller and its movement relative to the device (2.2-10) by monitoring the strength, orientation, and changes in the strength and/or orientation of the magnetic field emitted by the coil (2.2-54) as the controller is moved through the air by the user. The electronic device can then wirelessly transmit information about the position and orientation of the controller to the device (2.2-10). In this manner, the handheld controller, wearable controller, or other external accessory can be manipulated by the user to provide air gestures, pointing inputs, steering inputs, and/or other user inputs to the device (2.2-10).

The device (2.2-10) may have components such as optical components (e.g., optical sensors among the sensors (2.2-16) of FIG. 10). These components may be mounted at any suitable location on the head-mounted support structure (2.2-26) (e.g., head strap (2.2-26B), main housing portion (2.2-26M), etc.). The optical components and other components may be oriented rearward (e.g., when mounted on a rear surface of the device (2.2-10), laterally (e.g., to the left or right), downwardly or upwardly, toward the front of the device (2.2-10) (e.g., when mounted on a front surface of the device (2.2-10)), mounted to point in any combination of these directions (e.g., forwardly, rightwardly, and downwardly), and/or mounted in other suitable orientations. In an exemplary configuration, at least some of the components of the device (2.2-10) are mounted so as to face outwardly (and optionally to the sides and/or up and down). For example, forward-facing cameras for pass-through video may be mounted on the front left and right sides of the device (2.2-10) in a configuration such that their fields of view somewhat overlap along the horizontal dimension while the cameras capture wide-angle images of the environment in front of the device (2.2-10). The captured images may, if desired, include portions of the user's surroundings below, above, and to the sides of the area directly in front of the device (2.2-10).

To help conceal components, such as optical components, from observation from outside the device (2.2-10), it may be desirable to cover some or all of the components with a decorative covering structure. The covering structures may include transparent portions (e.g., optical component windows) characterized by sufficient optical transparency to allow the overlaid optical components to operate satisfactorily. For example, an ambient light sensor may be covered with a layer that appears opaque to an outside observer to help conceal the ambient light sensor from observation, but allows sufficient ambient light to pass through to the ambient light sensor to allow the ambient light sensor to make satisfactory ambient light measurements. As another example, an optical component that emits infrared light may be overlaid with a visible-opaque material that is transparent to infrared light.

In an exemplary configuration, optical components for the device (2.2-10) may be mounted in the inactive area (IA) of FIG. 11, and decorative covering structures may be formed in a ring shape overlapping the optical components in the inactive area (IA). The decorative covering structures may be formed of structures including ink, polymer structures, metals, other materials, and/or combinations of these materials. In an exemplary configuration, the decorative covering structure may be formed as a ring-shaped member having a footprint that matches the footprint of the inactive area (IA). For example, if the active area (AA) has left and right portions having teardrop shapes, the ring-shaped member may have curved edges that follow the curved periphery of the teardrop-shaped portions of the active area (AA). The ring-shaped member may be formed of one or more polymer structures (e.g., the ring-shaped member may be formed of a polymer ring). Because the ring-shaped member may help conceal the overlapping components from observation, the ring-shaped member may sometimes be referred to as a shroud or ring-shaped shroud member. The appearance of the shroud or other decorative covering structures may be characterized by a neutral color (e.g., white, black, or gray) or a non-neutral color (e.g., blue, red, green, gold, rose gold, etc.).

The display (2.2-14F) may, if desired, have a protective display cover layer. The cover layer may overlap the active area (AA) and the inactive area (IA) (e.g., the entire front surface of the device (2.2-10) when viewed from the direction (2.2-52) of FIG. 9 may be covered by the cover layer). The cover layer, which may sometimes be referred to as a housing wall or a transparent housing wall, may have a rectangular outline, an outline with teardrop sections, an elliptical outline, or other shapes with curved and/or straight edges.

The cover layer may be formed of a transparent material such as glass, a polymer, a transparent crystalline material such as sapphire, a transparent ceramic, another transparent material, and/or combinations of these materials. As an example, a protective display cover layer for a display (2.2-14F) may be formed of safety glass (e.g., laminated glass including a transparent glass layer having a laminated polymer film). Optional coating layers may be applied to the surfaces of the display cover layer. If desired, the display cover layer may be chemically strengthened (e.g., using an ion exchange process to create an outer layer of material under compressive stress that resists scratching). In some configurations, the display cover layer may be formed of a stack of two or more layers of material (e.g., first and second structural glass layers, a rigid polymer layer bonded to a glass layer or another rigid polymer layer, etc.) to enhance the performance of the cover layer.

In the active area (AA), the display cover layer may overlap the pixels of the display panel (2.2-14P). The display cover layer within the active area (2.2-AA) is preferably transparent to allow viewing of images presented on the display panel (14P). In the inactive area (IA), the display cover layer may overlap a ring-shaped shroud or other decorative covering structure. The shroud and/or other covering structures (e.g., opaque ink coatings on the inner surface of the display cover layer and/or structures) may be sufficiently opaque to help conceal some or all of the optical components within the inactive area (IA) from viewing. Windows may be provided in the shroud or other decorative covering structures to help ensure that the optical components overlapped by these structures operate satisfactorily. The windows may be formed by apertures, may be formed by areas of the shroud or other decorative covering structures that are locally thinned to enhance light transmittance, may be formed by window members having desired light transmittance characteristics inserted into matching openings within the shroud, and/or may be formed by other shroud window structures.

In the example of FIG. 11, the device (2.2-10) includes optical components such as (by way of example) optical components (2.2-60, 2.2-62, 2.2-64, 2.2-66, 2.2-68, 2.2-70, 2.2-72, 2.2-74, 2.2-76, 2.2-78, 2.2-80). Each of these optical components (e.g., optical sensors selected from among the sensors (2.2-16) of FIG. 10, light-emitting devices, etc.) can be configured to detect light and, if desired, emit light (e.g., ultraviolet light, visible light, and/or infrared light).

In an exemplary configuration, the optical component (2.2-60) may sense ambient light (e.g., ambient visible light). In particular, the optical component (2.2-60) may have a photodetector that senses variations in ambient light intensity as a function of time. As an example, if a user is working in an environment with an artificial light source, the light source may emit light at a frequency associated with its source of wall power (e.g., 60 Hz AC mains power). The photodetector of the component (2.2-60) may sense that the artificial light from the artificial light source is characterized by 60 Hz variations in intensity. The control circuitry (2.2-12) may use this information to adjust a clock or other timing signal associated with the operation of the image sensors within the device (2.2-10) to help avoid unwanted interference between the light source frequency and other frequencies associated with the frame rate or image capture operations. The control circuitry (2.2-12) may also use measurements from the component (2.2-60) to help identify the presence of artificial light and the type of artificial light present. In this manner, the control circuitry (2.2-12) may detect the presence of lights, such as fluorescent lights or other lights, with known non-ideal color characteristics, and may make color cast adjustments (e.g., white point adjustments) for color-sensitive components, such as cameras and displays. Because the optical component (2.2-60) may measure variations in light intensity, the component (2.2-60) may sometimes be referred to as a flicker sensor or an ambient light frequency sensor.

The optical component (2.2-62) may be an ambient light sensor. The ambient light sensor may include one or more photodetectors. In a single photodetector configuration, the ambient light sensor may be a monochrome sensor that measures ambient light intensity. In a multi-photodetector configuration, each photodetector may be overlapped by an optical filter that passes through different wavelength bands (e.g., different visible and/or infrared passbands). The optical filter passbands may overlap at their edges. This allows the component (2.2-62) to act as a color ambient light sensor that measures both ambient light intensity and ambient light color (e.g., by measuring color coordinates for the ambient light). During operation of the device (2.2-10), the control circuitry (2.2-12) may take action based on the measured ambient light intensity and color. For example, the white point of the display or image sensor may be adjusted, or other display or image sensor color adjustments may be made based on measured ambient light color. The brightness of the display may be adjusted based on light intensity. For example, the brightness of the display (2.2-14F) may be increased in bright ambient lighting conditions to improve the visibility of images on the display, and the brightness of the display (2.2-14F) may be decreased in dim lighting conditions to save power. Image sensor operations and/or light source operations may also be adjusted based on ambient light readings.

The optical components within the active area (IA) may also include components that follow aspects of the device (2.2-10), such as components (2.2-80, 2.2-64). The optical components (2.2-80, 2.2-64) may be pose tracking cameras used to help monitor the orientation and movement of the device (2.2-10). The components (2.2-80, 2.2-64) may be line-of-sight optical cameras (and/or cameras sensitive to visible and infrared wavelengths) and, together with an inertial measurement unit, may form a visual inertial odometry (VIO) system.

The optical components (2.2-78, 2.2-66) may be line-of-sight optical cameras that capture real-time images of the environment surrounding the device (2.2-10). These cameras, which may sometimes be referred to as scene cameras or pass-through video cameras, may capture video that is displayed in real-time on displays (2.2-14R) for viewing by the user when the user's eyes are positioned within the eye boxes (2.2-34) at the rear of the device (2.2-10). By displaying pass-through images (pass-through video) to the user in this manner, the user may be provided with real-time information about the user's surroundings. If desired, virtual content (e.g., computer-generated images) may be overlaid on portions of the pass-through video. The device (2.2-10) may also operate in a non-pass-through video mode where components (2.2-78, 2.2-66) are turned off and the user is presented with only movie content, game content, and/or other virtual content that does not include real-time real-world images.

The input/output devices (2.2-22) of the device (2.2-10) can collect user input that is used to control the operation of the device (2.2-10). As an example, a microphone within the device (2.2-10) can collect voice commands. Buttons, touch sensors, force sensors, and other input devices can collect user input from the user's fingers or other external objects that come into contact with the device (2.2-10). In some configurations, it may be desirable to monitor the user's hand gestures or the motions of other user body parts. This allows the user's hand positions or other body part positions to be replicated in a game or other virtual environment, and allows the user's hand motions to act as hand gestures (air gestures) that control the operation of the device (2.2-10). User input, such as hand gesture input, may be captured using cameras operating in visible and infrared wavelengths, such as tracking cameras (e.g., optical components (2.2-76, 2.2-68)). Such tracking cameras may also track fiducials and other recognizable features on controllers and other external accessories (additional devices (2.2-10) of the system (2.2-8)) during use of such controllers in controlling the operation of the device (2.2-10). If desired, the tracking cameras may assist in determining the position and orientation of a handheld or wearable controller that senses its position and direction by measuring a magnetic field generated by a coil (2.2-54). Thus, the use of tracking cameras may assist in tracking hand motions and controller motions used to move pointers and other virtual objects displayed for the user, or may otherwise assist in controlling the operation of the device (2.2-10).

The tracking cameras can operate satisfactorily in the presence of sufficient ambient light (e.g., bright line-of-sight ambient lighting conditions). In dim environments, supplemental illumination may be provided by supplemental infrared light sources, such as optical components (2.2-82, 2.2-84). The infrared light sources may each include one or more light-emitting devices (e.g., light-emitting diodes or lasers) and may each be configured to provide fixed and/or steerable beams of infrared light that serve as supplemental illumination for the tracking cameras. If desired, the infrared light sources may be turned off in bright ambient lighting conditions (e.g., using the ambient light sensing capabilities of the optical component (2.2-62)) and turned on in response to detection of dim ambient lighting.

The 3D sensors within the device (2.2-10) may be used to perform biometric identification operations (e.g., facial identification for authentication), to determine 3D shapes of objects within the user's environment (e.g., to map the user's environment so that a matching virtual environment can be generated for the user), and/or to otherwise collect 3D content during operation of the device (2.2-10). As an example, the optical components (2.2-74, 2.2-70) may be 3D structured optical image sensors. Each 3D structured optical image sensor may have one or more light sources that provide structured light (e.g., a dot projector that projects an array of infrared dots onto the environment, a structured light source that generates a grid of lines, or another structured optical component that emits structured light). Each of the three-dimensional structured light image sensors may also include a flood illuminator (e.g., a light-emitting diode or laser that emits a broad beam of infrared light). Using flood illumination and structured light illumination, the optical components (2.2-74, 2.2-70) may capture facial images, images of objects within an environment surrounding the device (2.2-10), and the like.

The optical component (2.2-72) may be an infrared 3D time-of-flight camera that uses time-of-flight measurements of the emitted light to collect 3D images of objects within an environment surrounding the device (2.2-10). The component (2.2-72) may have a longer range and a narrower field of view than the 3D structured light cameras of the optical components (2.2-74, 2.2-70). The operating range of the component (2.2-72) may be (for example) 30 cm to 7 m, 60 cm to 6 m, 70 cm to 5 m, or another suitable operating range.

FIG. 12 is a plan view of a device (2.2-10) in an exemplary arrangement, wherein the display (2.2-14F) and the main housing portion (2.2-26M) are configured to curve relative to a curved surface of a user's face (curved face surface (2.2-30)). In particular, a rear surface (2.2-96) of the housing portion (2.2-26M) on the rear face (R) of the device (2.2-10) may have a curved shape that bends about an axis (2.2-98) (e.g., an axis parallel to the vertical Z-axis in the example of FIG. 12). By seamlessly wrapping the housing portion (2.2-26M) around the curved surface of a user's head, comfort when wearing the device (2.2-10) may be improved.

As illustrated in FIG. 12, the display (2.2-14F) and other structures on the front of the device (2.2-10) may have a protective cover layer (e.g., the front portion of the housing portion (2.2-26M), sometimes referred to as a front housing wall, a transparent dielectric housing wall, or a dielectric housing member), such as a display cover layer (2.2-92). In some embodiments, the display cover layer (2.2-92) may include regions that feature curved surfaces that can be flattened to a plane without distortion (sometimes referred to as deployable surfaces or curved surfaces without compound curvature). The display cover layer (2.2-92) may also include regions that feature compound curvature (e.g., surfaces that can be flattened to a plane only with distortion, sometimes referred to as non-deployable surfaces).

In the active area (AA) of the display (2.2-14F), the cover layer (2.2-92) overlaps the array of pixels (P) within the display panel (2.2-14P). In the inactive area (IA), the cover layer (2.2-92) does not overlap any pixels, but may overlap optical components, such as those illustrated in FIG. 11. To help reduce the size and weight of the device (2.2-10), the display (2.2-14F) may have a curved shape that wraps around the front of the user's head parallel to the facial surface (2.2-30) and parallel to the curved rear surface (2.2-96) of the housing portion (2.2-26M). For example, the display panel (2.2-14P) can have a flexible substrate that allows the panel (2.2-14P) to bend about a bend axis (2.2-94) (e.g., a bend axis parallel to the Z-axis in the example of FIG. 12). In the active area (AA) of the display (2.2-14F), the display cover layer (2.2-92) can have an inner surface having a curved cross-sectional profile that conforms to the bent display panel (2.2-14P) and a corresponding curved outer surface. In the inactive area (IA), the display cover layer (2.2-92) can also be curved (e.g., with a steeper bend radius and more curvature than in the active area (AA). If desired, a polymer layer (sometimes referred to as a shroud canopy or polymer member) can be interposed between the display cover layer (2.2-92) and the display panel (2.2-14P). The polymer layer may be separated from the pixels of the panel (2.2-14P) by an air gap (for example) and from the inner surface of the display cover layer (2.2-92) by the air gap.

FIG. 13A is a cross-sectional side view of the display (2.2-14F) as viewed in the X-direction. As shown in FIG. 13A, the cross-sectional profile (in planes parallel to the YZ plane) of the display panel (2.2-14P) may, in an exemplary configuration, be straight rather than curved. This may help prevent wrinkling or other distortion of the flexible substrate material of the display panel (2.2-14P) as the display panel (2.2-14P) bends about the bend axis (2.2-94) to wrap around the curved surface of a user's face. The display panel (2.2-14P) may, in this embodiment, have a deployable surface (e.g., a surface having a curved cross-sectional profile but without any compound curvature). The panel (2.2-14P) of FIG. 13A may be attached (e.g., using an adhesive) to the inner surface of the layer (2.2-92). In this scenario, the inner surface of the layer (2.2-92) may be a deployable surface that aligns with the outward-facing deployable surface of the panel (2.2-14P). The corresponding outer surface of the layer (2.2-92) within the active area (AA) may be a deployable surface or a surface of compound curvature. In the inactive area (IA), the layer (2.2-92) may have inner and/or outer surfaces of compound curvature and/or the inner and/or outer surfaces may be deployable surfaces. If desired, the entire outer surface of the layer (2.2-92) can have a compound curvature (both in the active area (AA) and in the inactive area (IA), the inner surface of the layer (2.2-92) in the active area (AA) can be a deployable surface to which the panel (2.2-14P) is adhesively laminated, and the inner surface of the layer (2.2-92) in the inactive area (IA) can have a compound curvature and/or can be a deployable surface.

Another exemplary configuration for the display (2.2-14F) is illustrated in FIG. 13B. As shown in the cross-sectional side view of FIG. 13B, the display cover layer (2.2-92) may, if desired, have a cross-sectional profile that is curved across the entire layer (2.2-92). In this type of arrangement, the surface of the inactive area (IA) of the display cover layer (2.2-92) may have a compound curvature, and the active area (AA) of the display cover layer (2.2-92) may have a compound curvature (e.g., the layer (2.2-92) may not have an area having a deployable surface). A polymer layer, such as a polymer layer (2.2-130), which may sometimes be referred to as a shroud or shroud canopy, may be interposed between the inner surface of the display cover layer (2.2-92) and the opposite outer surface of the display panel (2.2-14P). An outer surface of the display panel (2.2-14P) may be a deployable surface (e.g., the display panel (2.2-14P) may be bendable about an axis (2.2-94). In the active area (AA) where the polymer layer (2.2-130) overlaps pixels of the panel (2.2-14P), the polymer layer (2.2-130) may also be bendable about the axis (2.2-94) (e.g., the inner and outer surfaces of the polymer layer (2.2-130) in the active area (AA) may be deployable surfaces). In the inactive area (IA), the inner and outer surfaces of the polymer layer (2.2-130) may have complex curvatures. Air gaps may separate the panel (2.2-14P) from the inner surface of the layer (2.2-130) and may separate the outer surface of the layer (2.2-130) from the inner surface of the layer (2.2-92).

If desired, other arrangements for the layer (2.2-130) may be used. For example, the side of the layer (2.2-130) facing the display panel (2.2-14P) may have a deployable surface in the active area (AA), while the side of the layer (2.2-130) facing the layer (2.2-92) may have a compound curvature in the active area (AA) (e.g., the layer (2.2-130) may have a non-uniform thickness). The layer (2.2-92) may also have different configurations. For example, the outer surface of the layer (2.2-92) may have a compound curvature, while the inner surface of the layer (2.2-92) in the active area (AA) and/or area (IA) may be a deployable surface. Other arrangements in which the layer (2.2-92) and/or the layer (2.2-130) have variable thicknesses may also be used. In the inactive area (IA), a plurality of polymer structures may be joined. For example, in the area (IA), a ring-shaped polymer member, sometimes referred to as a shroud trim, may be joined to the layer (2.2-130), which may form a shroud canopy member extending over the entire front face of the device (2.2-10). The shroud trim and the shroud canopy, if desired, may sometimes be individually or collectively referred to as forming a shroud, shroud member(s), etc. Tinting (e.g., a dye, pigment, and/or other colorant) may be included in the layer (2.2-130). For example, the layer (2.2-130) may be tinted to exhibit a visible light transmittance of 30 to 80%, which may help to obscure internal structures within the device (2.2-10), such as the display panel (2.2-14P), from view when not in use.

FIG. 14 is a front view of a portion of a display (2.2-14F) and a display cover layer (2.2-92). The inner and outer surfaces of the display cover layer (2.2-92) that directly overlap the active area (AA) and the display panel (2.2-14P) may be deployable surfaces and/or may include regions of compound curvature. In an exemplary configuration, the inner surface of the cover layer (2.2-92) within the region (AA) may be bendable about the bending axis (2.2-94) without exhibiting curvature about any axis orthogonal to the axis (2.2-94), as described with respect to FIGS. 4 and 5A. The outer surface of the layer (2.2-92) within the region (AA) may be a deployable surface or a surface of compound curvature. The use of a deployable surface on the inward-facing side of the display cover layer (2.2-92) (and, if desired, the use of a deployable surface on the inward-facing side of the optional layer (2.2-130) of FIG. 13b) can help ensure that the display panel (2.2-14P) does not become wrinkled or otherwise damaged during bending of the panel (2.2-14P) to form a curved display shape that conforms to the shape of a user's head.

The display panel (2.2-14P) may have an outward-facing surface that is a deployable surface in the active area (AA). This display panel surface may be adhered to a corresponding inner deployable surface of the layer (2.2-130) or a corresponding inner deployable surface of the layer (2.2-92), or may be spaced apart from the inner surfaces of the layer (2.2-130) and/or the layer (2.2-92) by (for example) an air gap.

Some or all of the inner and outer surfaces of the display cover layer (2.2-92) within the inactive area (IA) may, if desired, feature a compound curvature. This allows a smooth transition of the periphery of the display (2.2-14F) away from the active area, and provides an attractive appearance and a compact shape for the device (2.2-10). The compound curvature of the display cover layer (2.2-92) within the inactive area (IA) may also enable the placement of optical components in desired orientations beneath the inactive area (IA). If desired, all areas of the layer (2.2-92) may have a compound curvature (e.g., the inner and outer surfaces of the layer (2.2-92) may have a compound curvature in both area (IA) and area (AA).

In the exemplary configuration of FIG. 14, where the display cover layer (2.2-92) has a curved peripheral edge and the inward-facing and outward-facing surfaces of the display cover layer (2.2-92) have a compound curvature in the inactive area (IA), cross-sectional profiles of the display cover layer (2.2-92) taken along each of the exemplary lines (2.2-100) of FIG. 14 are curved (e.g., in the example of FIG. 14, the inactive area of the entire peripheral ring shape of the display (2.2-14F) is covered by a portion of the display cover layer (2.2-92) having inner and outer surfaces of compound curvature). This type of shape for the display cover layer (2.2-92) can be manufactured by glass forming, polymer molding, machining, and/or other display cover layer manufacturing techniques. Other arrangements may also be used (e.g., configurations in which the display cover layer (2.2-92) has at least some deployable surfaces (inner and/or outer surfaces) in the inactive area (IA). The arrangement of FIG. 14 is exemplary.

Figures 15, 16, and 17 are front views of exemplary upper left portions of a display cover layer (2.2-92). The device (2.2-10) may have symmetrical right cover layer portions. The example of Figure 15 shows how the peripheral edges of the display cover layer (2.2-92) may have straight edges (e.g., a generally rectangular shape with straight edges) and rounded corners. In the example of Figure 16, the display cover layer (2.2-92) has teardrop shapes on its upper left and right sides. Figure 17 shows how the upper corners of the display cover layer (2.2-92) may have sweeping curves (e.g., to help soften the visual appearance of the device (2.2-10) when viewed from the front).

FIGS. 10, 11, and 12 are front views of exemplary lower left portions of a display cover layer (2.2-92). As illustrated in FIG. 18, the lower half of the cover layer (2.2-92) may feature a rectangular shape with rounded corners. The cover layer (2.2-92) of FIG. 18 may have an upper portion having a shape of the type illustrated in FIG. 15 (for example). In the nose bridge portion of the device (2.2-10), the cover layer (2.2-92) may have a recessed, curved nose bridge edge shape (see, e.g., curved edge surface (2.2-90)). In the exemplary arrangement of FIG. 19, the display cover layer (2.2-92) has lower left and right sides having teardrop shapes (e.g., shapes that may be used with a display cover layer having upper left and right teardrop shapes of the type illustrated in FIG. 16). Figure 20 shows how the lower portion of the display cover layer (2.2-92) can have a more gently curved outline.

In general, the upper and lower portions of the cover layer (2.2-92) may have any suitable contours when viewed from the front of the device (2.2-10). The shape used for the cover layer (2.2-92) may be determined by factors such as aesthetics, size, ability to facilitate suitable placement of optical components within the inactive area (IA), ability to provide desired active area coverage (overlap across the active area (AA), etc. Any of the exemplary shapes for the upper portion of the device (2.2-10) illustrated in FIGS. 7, 8, and/or 9 may be used in combination with any of the exemplary shapes for the lower portion of the device (2.2-10) illustrated in FIGS. 10, 11, and 12. The overall shape of the cover layer (2.2-92) may be symmetrical about the nose bridge (e.g., the left and right halves of the layer (2.2-92) may exhibit mirror symmetry). The shapes of FIGS. 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, and 12 are exemplary. Other shapes may be used if desired.

FIG. 21 is an exploded cross-sectional view of a portion of a device (2.2-10) showing how the display cover layer (2.2-92) may have a portion that overlaps the display panel (2.2-14P) and a portion that overlaps a decorative covering structure such as a shroud (2.2-130) (e.g., a ring-shaped shroud portion sometimes referred to as a shroud trim or shroud trim member that may be optionally attached to a shroud canopy covering the display (2.2-14F) such as an optional polymer layer (2.2-130) in the area (IA). Decorative covering structures within the inactive area (IA) may be formed from opaque masking layers (e.g., black ink layers) and/or other coatings on the inner surface of the display cover layer (2.2-92) and/or on the shroud, or may be formed from separate structures formed from metal, polymer, glass or other materials, and/or other structures that may help conceal the overlapping components (2.2-104). The components (2.2-104) may include the sensors (16) and other input/output devices (2.2-22) of FIG. 10. For example, components (2.2-104) may be optical components such as components (2.2-60, 2.2-62, 2.2-64, 2.2-84, 2.2-66, 2.2-68, 2.2-70, 2.2-72, 2.2-74, 2.2-76, 2.2-78, 2.2-82, 2.2-80) of FIG. 11. In the inactive area (IA), the cover layer (2.2-92) may have curved inner and outer surfaces (e.g., surfaces having a compound curvature). The shroud (2.2-102) (and, if desired, the layer (2.2-130) within the area (IA)) may optionally have corresponding inner and outer surfaces (e.g., surfaces having a compound curvature). Components (2.2-104) can operate through optical component windows within the shroud (2.2-102) (and optionally within layer (2.2-130) within area (IA)) and corresponding areas within layer (2.2-92). These windows may be formed by recesses and/or through hole openings within the shroud (2.2-102) (and optionally the layer (2.2-130)) and/or the layer (2.2-92), by window members installed within the openings within the shroud (2.2-102) (and optionally the layer (2.2-130)) and/or the layer (2.2-92), by portions of the shroud (2.2-102) (and optionally portions of the layer (2.2-130)) and/or the layer (2.2-92) that exhibit sufficient optical transparency for satisfactory operation of the overlapping components, and/or by other structures within the shroud (2.2-102) (and optionally the layer (2.2-130)) and/or the window (2.2-92).

If desired, the components (2.2-104) may include components such as cameras (e.g., line-of-sight and/or infrared image sensors, time-of-flight sensors, structured light 3D sensors, etc.) that are sensitive to optical distortion imposed by the curved shapes of the curved inner and/or outer surfaces of the cover layer (2.2-92). For example, the camera or other optical component (104) may operate through a portion of the cover layer (2.2-92) within an inactive area (IA) that features an outer surface having a compound curvature and an inner surface having a compound curvature or a deployable inner surface. In this type of situation, the control circuitry of the device (2.2-10) may be configured to digitally compensate for optical distortion introduced when light (e.g., real-world image light) passes through the layer (2.2-92) to the camera or other optical sensor. For example, the amount of image distortion (e.g., stretching, shifting, keystoning, barrel distortion, pincushion distortion, and/or other optical distortion) imposed by layer (2.2-92) can be measured and characterized for each optical component operating through layer (2.2-92) (e.g., through a portion of layer (2.2-92) within an inactive area (IA) having inner and/or outer surfaces of compound curvature). During operation of device (2.2-10), image data captured by the camera and/or other sensor data collected by optical components overlaid by layer (2.2-92) can be compensated for accordingly (e.g., an equal and opposite amount of digital image warping can be applied to the captured image data to remove the known distortion effect of layer (2.2-92)). In this manner, high quality (undistorted) images and/or other sensor data can be collected by cameras and/or other optical components operating through the curved portions of the layer (2.2-92). This allows the layer (2.2-92) to be provided with an attractive shape (e.g., a shape having one or more surfaces characterized by compound curvatures).

When assembled within the device (2.2-10), the display cover layer (2.2-92) and shroud (2.2-102) (and optionally layer (2.2-130)) may be mounted to an exposed edge portion of a polymeric housing structure, a metal housing wall, or other housing structure within the main housing portion (2.2-26M). For example, the main housing portion (2.2-26M) may have a polymeric sidewall member that extends around a perimeter of the display cover layer (2.2-92) and supports the perimeter edge of the display cover layer (2.2-92). The shroud (2.2-102) may have a ring shape that extends along the edge of the display cover layer (2.2-92) in the inactive area (IA). In an exemplary configuration, the adhesive is used to attach the display cover layer (2.2-92) to the shroud (2.2-102) (and/or layer (2.2-130)), and the adhesive is used to attach the shroud (2.2-102) (and/or layer (2.2-130)) to the exposed front edge of the sidewall within the main housing portion (2.2-26M). The components (2.2-104) may be attached to the shroud (2.2-102) (and/or layer (2.2-130)) and/or supported on internal housing structures (e.g., brackets, frame members, etc.) in alignment with the optical windows within the shroud (2.2-102) (and/or layer (2.2-130)) and corresponding portions of the layer (2.2-92).

FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional side view of a portion of a display (2.2-14F). In the example of FIG. 22, the display panel (2.2-14P) is a three-dimensional display panel having an array of pixels (P) superimposed by lenticular lenses (2.2-106) (e.g., the display panel (2.2-14P) is an autostereoscopic display that produces autostereoscopic three-dimensional images for viewers such as viewer (2.2-50) of FIG. 9). For example, the lenses (2.2-106) may be formed of elongated semi-cylindrical lens elements along the rows of pixels (e.g., lens elements extending parallel to the Z dimension in the example of FIG. 22). If desired, the lenses (2.2-106) may be omitted (e.g., the display panel (2.2-14P) may have an array of pixels (P) that are not overlapped by the lenses (2.2-106) to form a two-dimensional display).

An air gap, such as a gap (2.2-114), may separate the display panel (2.2-14P) of the display (2.2-14F) from the display cover layer (2.2-92). An optional layer (2.2-130) may be formed within the gap (2.2-114) of FIG. 22 such that the layer (2.2-130) has an outer surface separated from the layer (2.2-92) by a first air gap and an opposite inner surface separated from the lenses (2.2-106) and the pixels (P) of the display panel (2.2-14P) by a second air gap. In arrangements where lenses (2.2-106) are present, the air gap (2.2-114) (and thus the absence of direct contact between the inner surface of the layer (2.2-130) and the lenses (2.2-106)) may enable the lenses (2.2-106) to operate satisfactorily. The display cover layer (2.2-92) and the optional layer (2.2-130) may be formed from a transparent material, such as glass, a polymer, a transparent ceramic, a crystalline material such as sapphire, one or more sublayers of these materials, and/or other materials laminated together (e.g., using an adhesive, etc.). Configurations in which the layer (2.2-92) is a glass layer and the layer (2.2-130) is a polymer layer may sometimes be described herein as an example.

Coatings may be provided on one or more of the layers within the display cover layer (2.2-92). As illustrated in the exemplary configuration of FIG. 22, the display cover layer (2.2-92) may include, for example, a layer (2.2-108) formed from a layer, such as one or more sublayers (e.g., layer(s) of glass and/or polymer), a polymer layer that helps provide a safety glass function to the layer (2.2-92) (e.g., see the exemplary polymer film (112) attached to the inner surface of the glass layer (2.2-108) to form a layer of laminated glass), and a coating (2.2-110) on the front (outward-facing) surface of the layer (2.2-92) (e.g., the outer surface of the glass layer (2.2-108)). The coating (2.2-110) may be an antireflective coating formed from, for example, one or more inorganic dielectric layers and/or other layers having thicknesses and refractive index values selected to minimize visible light reflection from the outermost surface of the layer (2.2-92) and to help maintain a desired appearance (e.g., a neutral tint) of the layer (2.2-92). If desired, the display panel (2.2-14P) may be a touch-sensitive display (e.g., a display overlaid by or incorporating capacitive touch sensor circuitry). In configurations where the display (2.2-14F) is touch-sensitive, the outermost surface of the layer (2.2-92) may be coated with an oleophobic coating layer (e.g., a fluoropolymer layer).

To help strengthen layer (2.2-92), layer (2.2-108) may be formed of chemically strengthened glass (e.g., a glass layer that has been treated in an ion-exchange bath to place the outer surfaces of the glass layer under compression against the interior of the glass layer). This may help layer (2.2-108) resist scratches and cracks. Layer (2.2-108) may be formed as a single glass layer, a single polymer layer, a stack of two laminated glass layers (e.g., first and second glass layers laminated together with a polymer layer), a stack of two polymer layers, three or more polymer and/or glass layers, etc. If desired, layer (2.2-108) may be formed from a hybrid stack of layers comprising one or more glass layers adhered to one or more polymer layers. As an example, layer (2.2-92) may include a rigid structural polymer layer covered with a thin glass layer (e.g., a glass layer adhered to the structural polymer layer using heat and/or pressure, or a glass layer adhered to the structural polymer layer using a polymer adhesive layer). The thin glass layer in this type of arrangement may help protect the structural polymer layer from scratches.

One or more of the structures within the layer (2.2-92) (e.g., the coating (2.2-110), the layer(s) forming the layer (2.2-108), the layer (2.2-112), the optional layer (2.2-130), etc.) may be provided with a dye, pigment or other colorant that produces a desired neutral hue (e.g., gray or black) or non-neutral hue (e.g., red), if desired. Thin metal coatings, polarizers, and/or other structures may also be incorporated into the layer (2.2-92) to provide desired optical properties to the layer (2.2-92) and/or to help provide a desired external appearance to the layer (2.2-92).

If desired, portions of the layer (2.2-92) overlapping the optical components (2.2-104) and/or other portions of the layer (2.2-92) may be provided with a coating to help prevent scratches that could adversely affect the optical quality of the components (2.2-104). For example, as illustrated in FIG. 23, the display cover layer (2.2-92) may have a transparent layer (e.g., one or more layers of a polymer, glass, and/or other transparent layers, such as layer (2.2-108) of FIG. 22), such as the transparent layer (2.2-116). The transparent layer (2.2-116) may be covered with one or more coating layers, such as the coating layer (2.2-118). The layer (2.2-118) may be a thin film layer formed of an inorganic material (e.g., an oxide, a nitride, a diamond-like carbon, etc.) that helps resist scratches. This type of approach may be used, for example, to ensure that the portion of the display cover layer (2.2-92) that overlaps the optical component (2.2-104) does not become clouded from scratches when the layer (2.2-116) is formed of a material such as a polymer that may be susceptible to scratching when exposed to excessive friction from sharp external objects. The layer (2.2-118) may sometimes be referred to as a hard coat and may have a higher hardness (e.g., a higher Mohs hardness) than the layer (2.2-116). The layer (2.2-118) may be a thin film coating having a thickness of less than 3 micrometers, less than 2 micrometers, less than 1 micrometer, less than 0.5 micrometers, or any other suitable thickness.

Another way to help prevent unwanted scratches on the surface of the display cover layer (2.2-92) where the display cover layer (2.2-92) overlaps the optical components (2.2-104) is illustrated in the cross-sectional side view of the display cover layer (2.2-92) of FIG. 24. As this example demonstrates, the outer surface of the display cover layer (2.2-92) may be provided with a recess, such as a recess (2.2-120), (e.g., a shallow circular depression or a recess having a rectangular shape or other footprint). This positions the recessed display cover layer surface (2.2-124) of the recess (2.2-120) below the peripheral outer surfaces (2.2-122) of the layer (2.2-92). When the device (2.2-10) is placed on a tabletop or other surface, the non-recessed portion (outer surface (122)) of the surface of the layer (2.2-92) will contact the tabletop surface, thereby helping to prevent the tabletop surface from contacting the recessed portion (surface (2.2-124)) of the surface of the layer (2.2-92). As a result, the recessed surface (2.2-124) overlapping the component (104) will remain scratch-free. Accordingly, even when the layer (2.2-92) is exposed to excessive wear, haze will generally not occur in the area of the layer (2.2-92) overlapping the component (104).

The layer (2.2-92) may be formed of materials having optical properties compatible with the overlapping optical components (2.2-104). For example, if the optical component overlaid by a portion of the layer (2.2-92) in the inactive region (IA) is configured to operate in the visible and infrared wavelengths, that portion of the layer (2.2-92) may be provided with sufficient visible and infrared transparency to enable the overlaid component to operate satisfactorily in the visible and infrared wavelengths. In arrangements where the bulk material of the layer (2.2-92) does not have the desired optical properties for the optical component, an optical component window member (e.g., a disk of window material, such as an infrared-transparent disk, and, if desired, a visible-transparent glass or other inserted window member) may be mounted within an opening in the layer (2.2-92) overlapping the optical component.

As an example, consider an arrangement in which layer (2.2-92) is transparent to visible light but has low transmittance at infrared wavelengths. The optical components in this type of arrangement can operate at infrared wavelengths. To ensure that the optical components can transmit and/or receive infrared light through layer (2.2-92), layer (2.2-92) may be provided with a through-hole opening and an infrared-transparent optical component window member, such as an infrared-transparent disc. The infrared-transparent window member may be formed of a material different from the material forming layer (2.2-92) and may be mounted within the through-hole opening in layer (2.2-92). This type of arrangement is illustrated in the cross-sectional side view of FIG. 25, in which display cover layer (2.2-92) is provided with an optical component window member (2.2-92W) within the through-hole opening in layer (2.2-92). The display cover layer (2.2-92W) may be a glass optical component window member that is transparent to infrared light (and optionally transparent to visible light), while the peripheral portions of the layer (2.2-92) may be formed of a different material (e.g., a polymer, a different glass material, etc.). By providing an infrared-transparent window in the layer (2.2-92), the infrared optical component (e.g., optical component (2.2-102) of FIG. 25) may transmit and/or receive infrared light through the display cover layer (2.2-92) (e.g., through a window within the display cover layer) even when the layer (2.2-92) is formed of materials that are not infrared-transparent. This approach may be used to provide an optical component having any suitable optical properties (e.g., a desired amount of opacity, light transmittance, reflectivity, absorption and/or haze level, desired polarization properties, etc.) that are different from those of the remainder of the layer (2.2-92).

2.3: Systems with auxiliary lighting

FIG. 26 is a cross-sectional side view of an exemplary configuration of a head-mounted device, wherein the device includes an illumination system for providing environmental illumination. The head-mounted device (2.3-10) of FIG. 26 may have optical sensors. These sensors may include cameras. The cameras of the device (2.3-10) may have lenses and image sensors configured to capture images in ultraviolet light wavelengths, visible light wavelengths, and/or infrared wavelengths.

Some cameras (e.g., cameras of the type that may sometimes be referred to as scene cameras) may be used to capture images (e.g., real-time pass-through video) of the user's environment that are displayed in real time on the displays (2.3-14). Cameras within the device (2.3-10) may also be used to track the positions and movements of external objects. For example, tracking cameras may track the user's hand (e.g., see hand (2.3-30H)) or the user's torso or other body part (e.g., see user body part (2.3-30B)). For example, hand gesture input may be used to control the operation of the device (2.3-10). Body part monitoring may be used to enable the user's body motions to be replicated by content displayed in the virtual environment. If desired, the cameras may also be used to track the position of external accessories (e.g., the position and movement of controllers moved by the user to the control device (2.3-10)). In some scenarios, visual inertial odometry (VIO) systems or other systems that determine the position, motion, and/or orientation of the device (2.3-10) relative to the environment surrounding the device (2.3-10) may be formed by combining data from one or more cameras within the device (2.3-10) with additional sensor data (e.g., data from an inertial measurement unit). The cameras may perform dedicated functions (e.g., tracking, visual inertial odometry functions, scene capture, ranging, facial recognition, and 3D image capture for environment mapping), or two or more of these operations may be performed by shared cameras.

It may be desirable to enable a user of the device (2.3-10) to operate the device (2.3-10) in low-light conditions. For example, the user may be viewing content on displays (14) while in a dark room or inside a dark vehicle. To ensure that camera tracking functions, such as hand tracking, body tracking, accessory tracking, and optionally other camera-based functions (e.g., visual inertial odometry, etc.), can be performed satisfactorily, the device (2.3-10) may provide supplemental illumination. The supplemental illumination may be provided by light sources that generate supplemental ultraviolet light, supplemental visible light, and/or supplemental infrared light to augment any available ambient light. In an exemplary configuration, the supplemental illumination is provided at infrared wavelengths, since this light is detectable by tracking cameras or other cameras with infrared sensing capabilities and is invisible to the human eye. Because the auxiliary infrared illumination is invisible, people near the user of the device (2.3-10) (e.g., people in the same room or vehicle as the user) will not be disturbed by the presence of the auxiliary illumination.

Any suitable light sources may be used to form the auxiliary illumination system (e.g., light emitting diodes, lasers, etc.) for the device (2.3-10). In an exemplary configuration, these light emitting devices are laser diodes or light emitting diodes that emit infrared light at a wavelength of 940 nm or at another infrared wavelength (e.g., one or more wavelengths such as 740 to 1500 nm, at least 800 nm, 940 nm, at least 900 nm, 800 to 1200 nm, 900 to 1000 nm, 750 to 1100 nm, 800 to 1100 nm, less than 1500 nm, etc.). There may be N cameras and M auxiliary light sources that utilize the auxiliary illumination of the device (2.3-10). The values of N and M can be from 1 to 10, at least 2, at least 3, at least 4, at least 6, at least 8, from 2 to 10, from 4 to 6, from 2 to 4, less than 10, less than 5, less than 4 or other suitable values. The value of N can be greater than the value of M, the value of N can be equal to the value of M, or the value of N can be less than the value of M. As an example, there may be four cameras using supplemental infrared illumination and there may be two light sources emitting supplemental illumination.

Cameras using supplemental infrared illumination can be configured to be sensitive to wavelengths illuminated by the supplemental illumination system (e.g., infrared light wavelengths associated with the M supplemental light sources). The cameras can also be sensitive to visible light wavelengths, such that when sufficient visible ambient light illumination is present, the cameras can operate without any supplemental illumination. To help avoid infrared interference during normal ambient lighting conditions, the supplemental illumination system can be configured to emit light in a narrow infrared band (e.g., 940 nm), for example, and the cameras can be provided with filters that pass visible light while blocking all infrared light except light in the narrow infrared band. In another exemplary configuration, the cameras are sensitive across the visible spectrum (e.g., 380 to 740 nm) and the infrared spectrum (e.g., 740 to 1000 nm, or another suitable broader infrared wavelength band in which the infrared supplemental illumination is generated). If desired, switchable filters can be used to block infrared light from the cameras when the auxiliary infrared illumination is not in use and to pass infrared light when the auxiliary infrared illumination is in use.

As illustrated in FIG. 26, the right side of the device (2.3-10) may include a first camera, such as camera (2.3-50), facing in a direction such as direction (2.3-54) (e.g., in the -Z direction and slightly in the +Y direction), and a second camera (sometimes referred to as a forward-facing camera), such as camera (2.3-52), facing in a forward direction such as direction (2.3-56) (e.g., in the +Y direction and slightly in the -Z direction). The left side of the device (2.3-10) may have a corresponding pair of cameras oriented in the same manner. The fields of view of the cameras on the left and right sides may be configured to overlap in front of the device (2.3-10), such that there are no gaps in coverage in front of the user. If desired, the cameras (2.3-50, 2.3-52) may be replaced with a single camera (e.g., a camera at the location of camera (2.3-52), a camera at the location of camera (2.3-50), or another suitable forward-facing and/or downward-facing camera that captures images while looking outward from a location on the front face (F) of the device (2.3-10). For example, there may be a single tracking camera (e.g., camera (2.3-52)) on the right side of the device (2.3-10) and a corresponding single tracking camera on the left side of the device (2.3-10).

Regardless of the number of tracking cameras provided on each side of the device (2.3-10), there may be a right infrared light source, such as a light source (2.3-58), that provides supplemental illumination (infrared light) in the direction (2.3-60) to illuminate objects such as a hand (2.3-30H), a body (2.3-30B) and other external objects to the tracking camera(s) on the right side of the device (2.3-10), and there may be a corresponding left infrared light source that provides supplemental infrared light to the tracking camera(s) on the left side of the device (2.3-10). The use of a single supplemental infrared light source on each side of the device (2.3-10) to provide supplemental illumination to the tracking camera(s) on that side of the device (2.3-10) may help conserve space within the tight limits of the housing (2.3-26).

The auxiliary lighting system of the device (2.3-10) can provide infrared illumination in an area (range of angles) greater than the area (range of angles) covered by the tracking camera(s) of the device (2.3-10) which is equal to or smaller than the area covered by the camera(s).

As an example, consider the coverage of the auxiliary lighting system of the device (2.3-10) of FIG. 26 within the YZ plane. As shown in the side view of FIG. 26, the downward-facing camera (2.3-50) may feature a field of view (A1) in the YZ plane, and the forward-facing camera (2.3-52) may feature a field of view (A3) in the YZ plane. These fields of view may be overlapped to provide continuous tracking coverage in the YZ plane. If desired, the same amount of coverage in the YZ plane, or another suitable amount of coverage, may be provided using a single tracking camera. The example of FIG. 26 is illustrative.

The supplemental illumination from the light source (2.3-58) may be characterized by an illumination angle (A2) in the YZ plane. The value of A2 may be greater than, equal to, or less than the combined field of view of the cameras (2.3-50, 2.3-52), or may be greater than, equal to, or less than the field of view of a single tracking camera used in place of the cameras (2.3-50, 2.3-52). In an exemplary configuration, A2 is less than the combined field of view of the tracking camera(s) and is directed outward in a forward and downward direction in front of the device (2.3-10) (where hand and body tracking is most likely to occur). The use of a somewhat reduced illumination area for the supplemental illumination system (e.g., a smaller illumination area than the area covered by the tracking camera system) may help save power when operating in dark operating environments for extended periods of time while preserving the ability to track objects in all areas except the main areas.

FIG. 27 is a plan view of a device (2.3-10) illustrating how the device (2.3-10) may include cameras on both the left and right sides of the support structure (2.3-26). The center of the housing portion (2.3-26M) may include a nose bridge portion (2.3-26NB). The nose bridge portion (2.3-26NM) may have a lower edge having a curved shape configured to rest on a user's nose while the device (2.3-10) is worn on the user's face. The nose bridge portion (2.3-26NB) may couple the right housing portion (2.3-26R) to the left housing portion (2.3-26L). The optical components (2.3-62) may include side-facing visible-light cameras, forward-facing visible-light cameras, a time-of-flight camera (e.g., a time-of-flight sensor in the forward-facing nose bridge portion (2.3-26NM)), three-dimensional structured light cameras (e.g., left and right structured light cameras adjacent to the nose bridge portion (2.3-26NB)), a flicker sensor for detecting ambient light fluctuations (e.g., 60 Hz fluctuations associated with indoor artificial lighting), an ambient light sensor, etc.

The right camera (2.3-52) may be supported in the right housing portion (2.3-26R), and the corresponding left camera (2.3-52') may be supported in the left housing portion (2.3-26L). Similarly, an optional additional right camera, such as the camera (2.3-50) of FIG. 26, may be supported in the right housing portion (2.3-26R), and a corresponding optional additional left camera may be supported in the left housing portion (2.3-26L). In this type of configuration, auxiliary illumination for a single right tracking camera or a pair of right tracking cameras may be provided by a right auxiliary light source (2.3-58), and auxiliary illumination for the left camera(s) may be provided by a left auxiliary light source (2.3-58').

During the auxiliary lighting operations, the light sources (2.3-58, 2.3-58') generate auxiliary lighting in the directions (2.3-60, 2.3-60'), respectively. As described with respect to the relative coverage areas of the cameras and light sources in FIG. 26, the illumination coverage area of the auxiliary lighting system need not exactly match the coverage area of the cameras. For example, the tracking cameras on each side of the device (2.3-10) may feature a larger field of view in the XY plane than the coverage angle of the associated light source. Arrangements may also be used in which the illumination from the auxiliary light sources on each side of the device (2.3-10) is provided over a range of angles equal to the field of view of the cameras, or over a range of angles wider than the field of view of the cameras.

The auxiliary lighting can be provided globally over a relatively large, fixed area, or the desired area can be covered by activating or moving a narrower illumination beam toward or across the desired area. If desired, a dynamic lighting system with steerable or addressable beams of auxiliary lighting can steer or activate the illumination beam to follow the user's hand or other objects of interest. In this way, power is not unnecessarily consumed in areas of illumination that do not contain the objects to be tracked.

Figures 30 and 31 are side views of exemplary fixed area auxiliary illumination light sources. The exemplary light source (2.3-58) of Figure 28 has a semiconductor light emitting device (2.3-70). The device (2.3-70) may be a solid-state light emitting device, such as a light emitting diode, a superluminous light emitting diode, a resonant cavity light emitting diode, an edge-emitting light emitting diode, or a vertical-cavity surface-emitting diode, or may be a diode-pumped laser, such as a diode-pumped fiber laser or other diode-pumped laser. As illustrated in Figure 28, the device (2.3-70) may be mounted (e.g., using solder) on an optional interposer (2.3-72). The interposer (2.3-72) may be mounted to a package substrate (2.3-74) (e.g., a printed circuit). During operation, the device (2.3-70) can emit infrared light that is diffused across a desired illumination area by one or more optical structures overlapping the device (2.3-70). In the example of FIG. 28, these optical structures include optional secondary optical structures such as an optional overmolded polymer lens (3.3-76) and a peanut lens (3.3-78). Additionally, it is possible to form curved reflective optical structures on the interposer (2.3-76) or the substrate (2.3-74) to enhance side and/or backlight re-collection. The optical structures overlapping the device (2.3-70) can be used to shape the light intensity to create a desired far-field intensity distribution that differs from the natural light source intensity distribution (e.g., a light emitting diode having a Lambertian intensity distribution). If desired, safety enhancement structures such as resistive safety traces or capacitive traces may be embedded in or overlapped with the optical system, or the photodetector may be used to form a closed loop with safety interlocks on the light source drivers (e.g., in connection with the types of module architectures illustrated in connection with FIGS. 30-33).

In the exemplary configuration of FIG. 29, a light emitting device (2.3-70) (e.g., a laser) is mounted beneath a light diffusing structure, such as a beam shaping layer (2.3-82). The layer (2.3-82) may be supported by a light source package (2.3-80). The device (2.3-70) may be mounted as a package (2.3-80) on an optional interposer (2.3-72) on a printed circuit or other substrate. During operation, the device (2.3-70) of FIG. 29 may emit infrared light in an upward direction that is laterally diffused by the beam shaping layer (2.3-82) to cover a desired illumination area (e.g., +/- 60° or other suitable range of angles).

In general, any suitable optical components that act as light diffusing structures may be superimposed with the devices (2.3-70) of FIGS. 30 and 31. These optical components may include optical components such as refractive beam shaping optical components, diffractive optics, diffusing optics, optical nanostructures (e.g., thin two-dimensional metamaterial layers such as patterned structures of transparent dielectrics having subwavelength dimensions that form metasurfaces configured to diffuse the emitted beam), curved reflectors, etc. Multiple devices (2.3-70) may be mounted in a common package and/or multiple packaged devices (2.3-70) may be mounted on a printed circuit adjacent to each other when forming a light source (2.3-58). The use of a single light emitting device (2.3-70) when forming a light source (58) in the examples of FIGS. 30 and 31 is exemplary.

Figures 32 and 33 are side views of exemplary dynamic pattern illuminators that may be used in an illumination system for device (2.3-10). Using the types of light sources illustrated in Figures 32 and 33, control circuitry (2.3-12) can selectively activate or steer an emitted beam of infrared light, thereby providing targeted auxiliary illumination to one or more objects of interest.

In the example of FIG. 30, the light source (2.3-58) has an array of light emitting devices (2.3-70). The devices (2.3-70) may include a plurality of semiconductor dies mounted on a substrate, such as a printed circuit board (2.3-84) within a package (2.3-86), or may include a plurality of individually addressable emitters, or may include a plurality of individually addressable segments of emitters mounted on a substrate, such as silicon, ceramic, a printed circuit board (2.3-84), or other substrate within the package (2.3-86). A zoned beam shaper layer or other optical component, such as layer (2.3-88), may overlap the devices (2.3-70). The layer (2.3-88) may have a plurality of zones, each having a respective beam steering and beam shaping optical structure. Such structures may be refractive structures, diffractive structures, nanostructures, etc. Structures on both surfaces of a layer (2.3-88) and/or multiple layers of the layer (2.3-88) having vertically aligned or misaligned zones may be utilized. Each zone may be used to steer and shape a beam of light emitted from a respective light-emitting device in a different respective direction. For example, a first zone may direct a beam of light emitted vertically from a first device (2.3-70) to the left, while a second zone may direct a beam of light emitted vertically from a second device (2.3-70) to the right. By overlapping an array of individually controlled devices (70) with a corresponding array of individualized beam steering structures, each device (2.3-70) may be configured to emit a beam of light in a different respective direction (e.g., see exemplary beams (2.3-90)), thereby providing the light source (2.3-58) of FIG. 30 with the ability to emit a steered beam of light. The emission area of each beam can overlap adjacent beams to avoid potential gaps in coverage. The beams (2.3-90) can all be emitted simultaneously, or one or more selected beams (2.3-90) can be emitted at a time. If desired, the beams (2.3-90) can be emitted sequentially (e.g., to scan the emitted beam from the light source (58) across the region of interest).

Another exemplary light source that may be used to form a dynamic pattern illuminator for the auxiliary illumination system of the device (2.3-10) is illustrated in FIG. 31. The light source (2.3-58) of FIG. 31 may have one or more light-emitting devices, such as a device (2.3-70) that emits one or more beams of light, such as a light beam (2.3-92) (e.g., an infrared light beam). The device (2.3-70) may be mounted on a printed circuit or other substrate (2.3-94) in a package (2.3-96). The electrically controlled beam steerer (2.3-98) may have one or more beam steerers, such as a steerable microelectromechanical system mirror (2.3-100) or other electrically adjustable beam steering element(s) controlled by control signals from the control circuitry (2.3-12). When it is desirable to emit light in a first direction, the mirror (2.3-100) can be arranged in a first orientation to reflect the beam (2.3-92) to produce a first emitted beam (2.3-102). When it is desirable to emit light in a second direction, the mirror (2.3-100) can be arranged in a second orientation different from the first orientation, thereby reflecting the beam (2.3-92) to produce a second emitted beam (2.3-104). The mirror (2.3-100) can be arranged in any suitable number of different orientations (e.g., at least 2, at least 10, at least 25, at least 100, less than 5000, less than 1000, less than 500, or any other suitable number). The mirror (2.3-100) may be rotatable about a single axis (to change the angle of the emitted light beams along a single dimension) or may be rotatable about two axes (e.g., to change the angle of the emitted light beams randomly in two dimensions). If desired, beam shaping optics (e.g., beam collimating lenses, etc.) may be incorporated into the beam steerer (2.3-98) to help ensure that the steered beam has a desired intensity profile.

If desired, a hybrid illuminator architecture may be utilized, such that multiple channels of a device (2.3-70) or multiple devices (2.3-70) as described with respect to FIG. 30 may be selectively activated to provide one or more additional dimensions of dynamic illumination to a beam steering optical system, such as the mirror (2.3-100) of FIG. 31.

Light sources emitting static broad beams (e.g., see exemplary light sources (2.3-58) of FIGS. 30 and 31) may be configured to emit light beams of any suitable shape to help provide supplemental illumination for the tracking cameras of the device (2.3-10). FIG. 32 is a graph illustrating how a light source (2.3-58) may be configured to emit a circular field of regards (FoG), such as a circular beam (2.3-110) (e.g., a beam of infrared light having a full width half maximum (FWHM) intensity characterized by an angular spread of +/- 60 ^o or other suitable coverage area), or a rectangular beam FoG, such as a rectangular beam (2.3-112) having a similar angular spread vertically and a smaller angular spread horizontally. Two rectangular beams, such as beam (2.3-112), can be generated side by side to provide sufficient horizontal illumination coverage for both the left and right cameras of the device (2.3-10) (for example).

In most common use cases, the goal of an illumination system is to provide a uniform signal-to-noise ratio for the illuminated scene captured by one or more cameras. Within a desired FWHM 2-D FoG, a uniform far-field intensity at each instantaneous FoG (iFoG) can be achieved to provide uniform illumination and operating range for the cameras. However, there are cases where non-uniform far-field intensity distributions may be desirable. For example, when the target of illumination is flat or when camera vignetting is significant, a symmetrical "bat-wing" intensity distribution may be used to compensate for the relative intensity reduction of the camera image sensor. Additional examples include asymmetric intensity distributions for cameras aligned non-coaxially with respect to the illumination system, targets such as hands with asymmetric onset/dwell across the FoGs, multiple illuminators with overlapping FoGs, multiple non-coaxial cameras, irregular occlusions in certain FoG regions, etc.

The graphs of FIGS. 35 and 2.3-11 illustrate exemplary beam outputs (angular beam distributions) associated with a dynamically adjustable lighting system. In the example of FIG. 33, a light source, such as the light source (58) of FIG. 30 or the light source (58) of FIG. 31, is configured to produce a beam having an elongated rectangular shape (e.g., a rectangle having a horizontal spread greater than its vertical spread). Using beam steering, the light source (2.3-58) can emit this elongated rectangular beam at one or more vertical positions, such as the exemplary position (2.3-114) of FIG. 33. In an arrangement of the type illustrated in FIG. 30, each light emitting device (2.3-70) can produce a different respective elongated rectangular beam, each associated with a different vertical position at the output of the light source (2.3-58). One or more of these beams can be emitted simultaneously by turning on one or more respective light emitting devices (2.3-70). In an arrangement of the type illustrated in FIG. 31, the light emitting devices (2.3-70) can generate a beam, such as the beam (2.3-92) of FIG. 31, that is steered to a desired location (e.g., the exemplary location (2.3-114) of FIG. 33) and/or other locations by the beam steerer (2.3-98) to provide desired coverage for the light source (2.3-58).

In the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 33, light is output over a vertical angular range that is greater than the horizontal range. Additional horizontal coverage can be provided using an additional light source (e.g., a light source on the opposite side of the device (2.3-10)). In this manner, a desired angular output range (e.g., +/- 60° in both horizontal and vertical dimensions or another suitable angular output range) can be covered.

In the exemplary configuration of FIG. 34, the light source (2.3-58) (e.g., a dynamically configured light source such as light source (58) of FIG. 30 or FIG. 31) is configured to supply a relatively small circular or square output beam that can be steered in both horizontal and vertical dimensions to produce the desired overall amount of coverage.

In both such light sources having static and steerable beams and those having dynamically patterned output, the beam power can be controlled in a binary (on/off) or analog manner (e.g., by adjusting the output power continuously or in a stepwise manner between two or more different power levels). As illustrated in FIG. 34, for example, no light may be output in certain portions of the coverage area, such as areas (2.3-116) (e.g., the beam power may be zero for these areas), full power light may be output in areas such as areas (2.3-118) (e.g., the beam power may be maximized for these areas), and intermediate power levels may be used to supply output light to other areas, such as areas (2.3-120) immediately adjacent to areas (2.3-118).

Arrangements in which full power light is output from only a subset of the overall coverage area for a light source (58) can help the device (2.3-10) use power efficiently. For example, as illustrated in the drawing of FIG. 34, there may be one or more external objects of interest, such as objects (2.3-122), within the coverage area of a given light source. The device (2.3-10) may, for example, track a user's hands or other external objects. When such objects are relatively small compared to the overall field of view of the cameras within the device (2.3-10), power can be conserved by limiting the output of the auxiliary lighting to only those areas that overlap with the tracked external objects (or at least limiting the output of the full power auxiliary lighting).

In the example of FIG. 34, objects (2.3-122) (e.g., the user's hands or other body parts or other objects in the user's environment) are actively tracked by the device (2.3-10). Consequently, the auxiliary illumination system of the device (2.3-10) is used to provide full power illumination to areas (2.3-118) that overlap with the objects (2.3-122). Elsewhere in the coverage area of the light-emitting device (58), the beam power is reduced (e.g., see mid-power areas (2.3-120)) or completely blocked (e.g., see unilluminated areas (2.3-116)). This type of approach can be used for scanned beam arrays (e.g., using a scanning mirror device or other beam steerer as described with respect to FIG. 31) or for using light sources having addressable arrays of devices (70), each of which can provide output in different directions (e.g., light source (58) of FIG. 30).

In areas such as areas (2.3-116) of Fig. 34, no auxiliary lighting is present, and thus items in these areas will not receive auxiliary lighting. Nevertheless, once objects such as objects (2.3-122) are being tracked, the device (2.3-10) can monitor the position and direction of movement of the objects (2.3-122) in real time. This allows the device (2.3-10) to provide full power auxiliary lighting to areas overlapping the objects (2.3-122) and medium power (or, if desired, full power) auxiliary lighting to portions of the output area of the light source (58) immediately adjacent to the objects (2.3-122) (e.g., areas where the objects (2.3-122) are likely to move and/or are predicted to occupy in the near future based on tracked movements). If the locations of the objects (2.3-122) move into one of such adjacent areas, the device (2.3-10) may increase the auxiliary illumination for such areas to full power and update the beam powers so that the adjacent areas again have medium power level coverage.

Although the multi-power level beam scheme of FIG. 34 has been described in connection with two-dimensional scanning light beams from light sources (2.3-58) of FIGS. 7 and 8, such adjustable power output schemes may also be used with light sources (2.3-58) that provide one-dimensional adjustable directional light sources (e.g., light sources that generate slices of auxiliary illumination of the type illustrated in FIG. 33) and/or with fixed area light sources. For example, in a fixed area light source scheme, a right light source (58) of the type illustrated in FIG. 28 or FIG. 29 may be used to provide auxiliary lighting for tracked objects (2.3-122) in front of the right camera(s) of the device (2.3-10), while a left light source (58) of the type illustrated in FIG. 28 or FIG. 29 may be used to provide auxiliary lighting for tracked objects (2.3-122) in front of the left camera(s) of the device (2.3-10). The device (2.3-10) may activate either or both of the right light source or the left light source depending on the current and expected positions of the objects (2.3-122).

Another way to help use power efficiently for the auxiliary lighting system involves generating auxiliary lighting using the light sources (2.3-58) only when the cameras to which the auxiliary lighting is provided would benefit from the auxiliary lighting. For example, in bright lighting conditions, the ambient visible light may provide sufficient illumination, so the auxiliary infrared light beams may be turned off (or at least reduced to a lower level than would otherwise be used) to help conserve power. Activation of the auxiliary lighting may occur when dim ambient lighting conditions are detected, or when other suitable conditions are detected to trigger the generation of the auxiliary lighting.

Figure 35 is a flowchart of exemplary operations involved in the use of an electronic device (2.3-10). During the operations of block (2.3-150), the device (2.3-10) may be used to provide content to a user, such as visual content, audio content, and other output. The device (2.3-10) may, for example, be worn on the user's head while images are presented for viewing. The operations of block (2.3-150) may be performed while the device (2.3-10) is in a normal operating environment with satisfactory visible ambient light levels.

Visual content may be presented to the user on displays (2.3-14). This visual content may include camera images (e.g., pass-through video) from cameras within the device (2.3-10) and/or other content. In some scenarios, computer-generated content (sometimes referred to as virtual content) may be overlaid on real-world content from the cameras of the device (2.3-10). In this type of mixed reality environment, camera data may be used to help track the positions of the user's hands and other real-world objects, thereby helping to register the overlay of virtual content on the real-world images. For example, by tracking the position of the user's hand, a computer-generated image of a glove may be accurately overlaid on the real-world image of the user's hand. By tracking the position of a table surface, a computer-generated image may be positioned on the table surface. The camera data may be used to track the motion of the user's hands, fingers, and/or other body parts in real time. In this way, hand gestures, finger gestures and/or other body part motions (sometimes referred to as air gestures) that act as user input can be used to control the operation of the device (2.3-10) (e.g., in a mixed reality or fully virtual environment).

The device (2.3-10) may have any suitable number of cameras, including 3D cameras (e.g., structured light cameras, time-of-flight cameras, etc.), cameras for capturing real-world visible light images (e.g., for video pass-through), and/or cameras for performing tracking operations, acting as parts of virtual inertial odometry systems, and/or otherwise supporting operation of the device (2.3-10). The cameras of the device (2.3-10) may be oriented forward, downward, sideways, upward, backward, and/or in multiple directions. Some cameras may operate only in visible wavelengths. Other cameras may operate in visible and infrared wavelengths.

As described with respect to FIGS. 3 and 4, the device (2.3-10) may have, for example, one or more tracking cameras on each side of the device (2.3-10). These cameras may be sensitive to visible and infrared wavelengths and may be used for tracking operations (e.g., hand and body tracking, air gesture input tracking, accessory tracking) and optionally, additional functions such as imaging structures in the user's environment for a visual inertial odometry system. The tracking cameras may be sensitive to visible and infrared wavelengths, such as wavelengths of 400 to 1000 nm, 400 to 740 nm, and 940 nm, or other suitable visible and infrared wavelengths. The infrared sensitivity of the tracking cameras preferably matches the wavelength or wavelengths emitted by the light sources (2.3-58) of the auxiliary illumination system, such that these cameras can operate when most or all of the available illumination is provided by the light sources (2.3-58) rather than ambient light sources.

If desired, the auxiliary lighting may be provided continuously. Arrangements in which power is conserved by at least occasionally powering down the auxiliary lighting system are described herein as examples. In configurations for a device (2.3-10) in which the auxiliary lighting is turned on and off, the device (2.3-10) may monitor, during the operations of block (2.3-150), for the occurrence of conditions indicating that the auxiliary lighting should be switched on for satisfactory operation of the cameras (e.g., tracking cameras). These monitoring activities may occur while the cameras (e.g., tracking cameras) of the device (2.3-10) are operating normally in the absence of auxiliary lighting from the auxiliary lighting system.

Any suitable trigger criteria may be used to determine when to activate the auxiliary illumination system by turning on the light sources (2.3-58). For example, the device (2.3-10) may include an ambient light sensor. The ambient light sensor may measure the amount of visible ambient light present in the environment surrounding the device (2.3-10). A threshold or other criteria may be applied to the ambient light readings from the ambient light sensor. In response to a determination that the ambient light levels are below a predetermined ambient light threshold or are otherwise too dim for satisfactory operation of the tracking cameras, the control circuitry (12) may turn on the light sources (2.3-58) to provide auxiliary illumination (e.g., infrared light).

Other exemplary criteria that may be used to determine when to activate auxiliary lighting involve evaluating image processing algorithm quality metrics. During the operations of block (2.3-150), captured images may be processed by one or more image processing algorithms. These algorithms may include, for example, a hand tracking algorithm. The hand tracking algorithm may generate a quality factor or other metric indicating the hand tracking algorithm's ability to satisfactorily track the user's hands. In response to detecting that the tracking algorithm quality metric is below a desired threshold, the control circuitry (12) may turn on the light sources (2.3-58) to provide auxiliary lighting to the cameras.

If desired, the tracking cameras or other image sensor hardware may provide information indicating that performance is being adversely affected by low ambient light levels. For example, frames of image data may be evaluated to determine whether the light levels are low. The output of the tracking camera hardware of the device (2.3-10) may also indicate whether the signal-to-noise levels are satisfactory. If the tracking cameras are producing only dark and/or noisy image data, the control circuitry (12) may determine that the light sources (2.3-58) should be turned on.

In some arrangements, the device (2.3-10) may be configured to determine the user's position relative to walls and other obstacles within the user's environment. For example, the device (2.3-10) may include a map of known wall locations (e.g., a map obtained from an external source or a map based on previous map-building operations performed by the device (2.3-10) while the user wears the device (2.3-10) while walking throughout a building or other environment). Satellite navigation system circuitry (e.g., global positioning system circuitry) may use satellite signals to determine the location of the device (2.3-10) (e.g., the location of the device (2.3-10) relative to building walls and other obstacles). Based on the user's known location and movements and using information about the locations of known obstacles such as walls, the device (2.3-10) may be able to predict when the user is likely to approach a wall or other obstacle. Sensors (16) within the device (2.3-10), such as proximity sensors, time-of-flight sensors, radar, LIDAR, etc., may also be used to monitor the user's movements relative to walls and other obstacles. By using some or all of this information in combination with additional information about the operating environment for the device (2.3-10) (e.g., ambient light readings indicating that the ambient light is dim), the device (2.3-10) may determine when the light sources (2.3-58) should be turned on to provide supplemental illumination to help ensure that the tracking cameras of the device (2.3-10) operate satisfactorily. This may help ensure that the cameras of the device (2.3-10) can track the locations of obstacles in the user's environment using the infrared illumination of the light sources (2.3-58). By accurately tracking the locations of obstacles, warnings about the presence of these obstacles or obstacles can be displayed on displays (2.3-14) to help the user avoid unwanted collisions with obstacles.

If desired, multiple electronic devices (2.3-10) within the system (2.3-8) can monitor for conditions indicating the need for supplemental lighting. For example, multiple users may be wearing head-mounted devices, and one device may detect low levels of ambient lighting before the others. In this type of system, any of the devices that detect low levels of ambient lighting can signal other devices in the system to request that supplemental lighting be provided. In response, one or more of the other devices can provide supplemental lighting to assist the cameras of the requesting device in collecting images. Thus, the supplemental lighting systems of different devices can assist each other by contributing to a shared supplemental lighting. This could enable a wall-powered device to assist in providing supplemental lighting to a battery-powered device, or (for example) an electronic device closer to a tracked object could provide supplemental lighting to that object more efficiently than an electronic device further away from the tracked object.

As long as conditions for triggering auxiliary lighting are not detected, the device (2.3-10) (e.g., control circuitry (12)) may continue to monitor for conditions that satisfy auxiliary lighting trigger criteria during the operations of block (2.3-150) (e.g., dim ambient lighting, reduced tracking camera image processing quality, reduced camera hardware performance, criteria based on obstacle proximity, requests from other devices, etc.).

If the trigger criteria are met, processing may proceed to block (2.3-152). During the operations of block (2.3-152), the control circuitry (2.3-14) may provide auxiliary illumination to the cameras using an auxiliary illumination system (e.g., infrared light emitted by light sources (2.3-58) that illuminate external objects within the field of view of the tracking cameras). When providing the auxiliary illumination, the power of the infrared light emitted by each light source (2.3-58) and/or the direction of the light beam(s) emitted by each light source (2.3-58) may be adjusted. For example, some devices (2.3-70) may be turned on while other devices (2.3-70) remain off, and the emitted beams of light may be directed to areas containing tracked objects (e.g., known locations of the user's hands or other external objects of interest being tracked by the tracking cameras) and/or adjacent areas, and the emitted power levels may be adjusted in a stepwise or continuous manner (e.g., to provide sufficient auxiliary illumination to ensure satisfactory tracking camera operation without providing excessive illumination).

Light sources, such as light sources (2.3-58) of FIGS. 30 and 31, configured to provide illumination over a fixed area may be turned on to ensure that objects within such fixed areas are illuminated. Light sources that emit steerable beams, such as light sources (2.3-58) of FIGS. 30 and 33, may be used to emit supplemental illumination over a relatively wide area (e.g., by scanning the beam over a wide area or by using multiple smaller beams simultaneously to illuminate different individual portions of a wider area), or may be used to emit supplemental illumination at specific locations, such as the location(s) containing the user's hands or other objects being tracked.

Auxiliary illumination may be provided for cameras that track user body parts, cameras that track the positions of accessories, cameras that capture pass-through video, cameras forming part of a visual inertial odometry system, and/or other optical components that collect light from objects in the vicinity of the device (2.3-10). If desired, the light sources (2.3-58) may be configured to emit structured light (e.g., lines, dots, features distributed in pseudorandom patterns, etc.). Structured light may be used, for example, in scenarios where tracking cameras collect three-dimensional images.

During the operations of block (2.3-152), the device (2.3-10) may monitor for conditions indicating that supplemental lighting is no longer required. The control circuitry (2.3-12) may, for example, monitor to determine whether the supplemental lighting trigger conditions cease to be met. As long as dim ambient lighting conditions or other conditions that indicate that supplemental lighting should be provided continue to exist, the device (2.3-10) may continue to use the light sources (2.3-58) to provide supplemental lighting. When the dim lighting conditions cease or it is determined that other conditions requiring supplemental lighting no longer exist, the device (2.3-10) may turn off the supplemental lighting system. In particular, the control circuitry (2.3-12) may turn off the light sources (2.3-58) during the operations of block (156). Next, as indicated by line (2.3-152), the actions can return to block (2.3-150).

2.4: Systems with Displays and Sensor Hiding Structures

FIG. 36 is a front view of an exemplary configuration of a device (2.4-10) having a publicly observable display, such as a forward-facing display (2.4-14F). As illustrated in FIG. 36, the support structure (2.4-16M) of the device (2.4-10) may have right and left portions, such as portions (2.4-16R, 2.4-16L), joined by an interposed nose bridge portion, such as portion (2.4-16NB). The portion (2.4-16NB) may have a curved outer surface, such as a nose bridge surface (2.4-90), configured to receive and rest upon a user's nose to assist in supporting the main housing portion (2.4-16M) on the user's head.

The display (2.4-14F) may have an active area, such as an active area (AA) configured to display images, and an inactive area (IA) that does not display images. The outline of the active area (AA) may be rectangular, rectangular with rounded corners, may have teardrop-shaped portions on the left and right sides of the device (2.4-10), may have a shape with straight edges, a shape with curved edges, a shape with a peripheral edge having both straight and curved portions, and/or other suitable outlines. As illustrated in FIG. 36, the active area (AA) may have a curved recessed portion in the nose bridge portion (2.4-16NB) of the main housing portion (2.4-16). The presence of the nose-shaped recess in the active area (AA) may help fit the active area (AA) within the available space of the housing portion (2.4-16M) without unduly restricting the size of the active area (AA).

The active area (AA) includes an array of pixels. The pixels may be, for example, light-emitting diode pixels formed of thin-film organic light-emitting diodes or crystalline semiconductor light-emitting diode dies (sometimes referred to as micro light-emitting diodes) on a flexible display panel substrate. If desired, configurations in which the display (2.4-14F) uses other display technologies may also be used. Exemplary arrangements in which the display (14) is formed of a light-emitting diode display, such as an organic light-emitting diode display formed on a flexible substrate (e.g., a substrate formed of a bendable layer of polyimide or a sheet of other flexible polymer), may sometimes be described herein as examples. The pixels of the active area (AA) may be formed on a display device, such as the display panel (2.4-14P) of FIG. 36 (e.g., a flexible organic light-emitting diode display panel). In some configurations, the outline of the active area (AA) (and, optionally, panel (2.4-14P)) may have a peripheral edge comprising straight segments or a combination of straight and curved segments. Configurations in which the entire outline of the active area (AA) (and, optionally, panel (2.4-14P)) is characterized by a curved peripheral edge may also be used.

The display (2.4-14F) may have an inactive area, such as an inactive area (IA), that has no pixels and does not display images. The inactive area (IA) may form an inactive border area that extends along one or more portions of the peripheral edge of the active area (AA). In the exemplary configuration of FIG. 36, the inactive area (IA) has a ring shape that surrounds the active area (AA) and forms the inactive border. In this type of arrangement, the width of the inactive area (IA) may be relatively constant, and the inner and outer edges of the area (IA) may be characterized by straight and/or curved segments or may be curved along their entire length. For example, the outer edge of the area (IA) (e.g., the peripheral edge of the display (2.4-14F)) may have a curved outline that extends parallel to the curved edge of the active area (AA).

In some configurations, the device (2.4-10) can operate in conjunction with other devices within the system (2.4-8), such as wireless controllers and other accessories. These accessories may have magnetic sensors that detect the direction and strength of magnetic fields. The device (2.4-10) may have one or more electromagnets configured to emit a magnetic field. The magnetic field can be measured by wireless accessories near the device (2.4-10), such that the accessories can determine their orientation and location relative to the device (2.4-10). This allows the accessories to wirelessly provide real-time information about their current location, orientation, and movement to the device (2.4-10), allowing the accessories to act as wireless controllers. The accessories may include wearable devices, devices with handles, and other input devices.

In an exemplary configuration, the device (2.4-10) may have a coil, such as an exemplary coil (2.4-54), extending around a periphery of the display (2.4-14F) (e.g., beneath an inactive area (IA) or other portion of the display (2.4-14F). The coil (2.4-54) may have any suitable number of turns (e.g., 1 to 10, at least 2, at least 5, at least 10, 10 to 50, less than 100, less than 25, less than 6, etc.). These turns may be formed of metal traces on a substrate and/or may be formed of wires and/or may be formed of other conductive lines. During operation, the control circuitry (2.4-12) may supply an alternating current (AC) drive signal to the coil (2.4-54). The drive signal can have a frequency of (for example) at least 1 kHz, at least 10 kHz, at least 100 kHz, at least 1 MHz, less than 10 MHz, less than 3 MHz, less than 300 kHz, or less than 30 kHz. As AC current flows through the coil (2.4-54), a corresponding magnetic field is generated in the vicinity of the device (2.4-10). Electronic devices, such as wireless controllers having magnetic sensors in the vicinity of the device (2.4-10), can use the magnetic field as a reference to determine their orientation, position, and/or movement while the wireless controllers are moved relative to the device (2.4-10) to provide input to the device (2.4-10).

As an example, consider a handheld wireless controller used to control the operation of a device (2.4-10). During operation, the device (2.4-10) emits a magnetic field using a coil (2.4-54). As the handheld wireless controller is moved, magnetic sensors in the controller can monitor the position of the controller and its movement relative to the device (2.4-10) by monitoring the strength, orientation, and changes in the strength and/or orientation of the magnetic field emitted by the coil (2.4-54) as the controller is moved through the air by the user. The electronic device can then wirelessly transmit information about the position and orientation of the controller to the device (2.4-10). In this manner, the handheld controller, wearable controller, or other external accessory can be manipulated by the user to provide air gestures, pointing inputs, steering inputs, and/or other user inputs to the device (2.4-10).

The device (2.4-10) may have components such as optical components (e.g., optical sensors among the sensors (2.4-16) of FIG. 36). These components may be mounted at any suitable location on the head-mounted support structure (2.4-16) (e.g., head strap (2.4-16B), main housing portion (2.4-16M), etc.). The optical components and other components may be oriented rearward (e.g., when mounted on a rear surface of the device (2.4-10), laterally (e.g., to the left or right), downwardly or upwardly, toward the front of the device (2.4-10) (e.g., when mounted on a front surface of the device (2.4-10), mounted to point in any combination of these directions (e.g., forwardly, rightward, and downwardly), and/or mounted in other suitable orientations. In an exemplary configuration, at least some of the components of the device (2.4-10) are mounted so as to face outwardly (and optionally to the sides and/or up and down). For example, forward-facing cameras for pass-through video may be mounted on the front left and right sides of the device (2.4-10) in a configuration such that their fields of view somewhat overlap along the horizontal dimension while the cameras capture wide-angle images of the environment in front of the device (2.4-10). The captured images may, if desired, include portions of the user's surroundings below, above, and to the sides of the area directly in front of the device (2.4-10).

To help conceal components, such as optical components, from observation from outside the device (2.4-10), it may be desirable to cover some or all of the components with a decorative covering structure. The covering structures may include transparent portions (e.g., optical component windows) characterized by sufficient optical transparency to allow the overlaid optical components to operate satisfactorily. For example, an ambient light sensor may be covered with a layer that appears opaque to an external observer to help conceal the ambient light sensor from observation, but allows sufficient ambient light to pass through to the ambient light sensor to allow the ambient light sensor to make satisfactory ambient light measurements. As another example, an optical component that emits infrared light may be overlaid with a visible-opaque material that is transparent to infrared light.

In an exemplary configuration, optical components for the device (2.4-10) may be mounted in the inactive area (IA) of FIG. 36, and decorative covering structures may be formed in a ring shape overlapping the optical components in the inactive area (IA). The decorative covering structures may be formed of structures including ink, polymer structures, metal, glass, other materials, and/or combinations of these materials. In an exemplary configuration, the decorative covering structure may be formed as a ring-shaped member having a footprint that matches the footprint of the inactive area (IA). For example, if the active area (AA) has left and right portions having teardrop shapes, the ring-shaped member may have curved edges that follow the curved periphery of the teardrop-shaped portions of the active area (AA). The ring-shaped member may be formed of one or more polymer structures (e.g., the ring-shaped member may be formed of a polymer ring). Because the ring-shaped member may help conceal the overlapping components from observation, the ring-shaped member may sometimes be referred to as a shroud or ring-shaped shroud member. The appearance of the shroud or other decorative covering structures may be characterized by a neutral color (e.g., white, black, or gray) or a non-neutral color (e.g., blue, red, green, gold, rose gold, etc.).

The display (2.4-14F) may, if desired, have a protective display cover layer. The cover layer may overlap the active area (AA) and the inactive area (IA) (e.g., the entire front surface of the device (2.4-10) when viewed from the direction (2.4-52) of FIG. 36 may be covered by the cover layer). The cover layer, which may sometimes be referred to as a housing wall or a transparent housing wall, may have a rectangular outline, an outline with teardrop sections, an elliptical outline, or other shapes with curved and/or straight edges.

The cover layer may be formed of a transparent material such as glass, a polymer, a transparent crystalline material such as sapphire, a transparent ceramic, another transparent material, and/or combinations of these materials. As an example, a protective display cover layer for a display (2.4-14F) may be formed of safety glass (e.g., laminated glass including a transparent glass layer having a laminated polymer film). Optional coating layers may be applied to the surfaces of the display cover layer. If desired, the display cover layer may be chemically strengthened (e.g., using an ion exchange process to create an outer layer of material under compressive stress that resists scratching). In some configurations, the display cover layer may be formed of a stack of two or more layers of material (e.g., first and second structural glass layers, a rigid polymer layer bonded to a glass layer or another rigid polymer layer, etc.) to enhance the performance of the cover layer.

In the active area (AA), the display cover layer may overlap the pixels of the display panel (2.4-14P). The display cover layer within the active area (2.4-AA) is preferably transparent to allow viewing of images presented on the display panel (14P). In the inactive area (IA), the display cover layer may overlap a ring-shaped shroud or other decorative covering structure. The shroud and/or other covering structures (e.g., opaque ink coatings on the inner surface of the display cover layer and/or structures) may be sufficiently opaque to help conceal some or all of the optical components within the inactive area (IA) from viewing. Windows may be provided in the shroud or other decorative covering structures to help ensure that the optical components overlapped by these structures operate satisfactorily. The windows may be formed by apertures, may be formed by areas of the shroud or other decorative covering structures that are locally thinned to enhance light transmittance, may be formed by window members having desired light transmittance characteristics inserted into matching openings within the shroud, and/or may be formed by other shroud window structures.

In the example of FIG. 36, the device (2.4-10) includes optical components such as (as examples) optical components (2.4-60, 2.4-62, 2.4-64, 2.4-66, 2.4-68, 2.4-70, 2.4-72, 2.4-74, 2.4-76, 2.4-78, 2.4-80). Each of these optical components (e.g., optical sensors selected from among the sensors (2.4-16) of FIG. 36, light-emitting devices, etc.) can be configured to detect light and, if desired, emit light (e.g., ultraviolet light, visible light, and/or infrared light).

In an exemplary configuration, the optical component (2.4-60) may sense ambient light (e.g., ambient visible light). In particular, the optical component (2.4-60) may have a photodetector that senses variations in ambient light intensity as a function of time. As an example, if a user is working in an environment with an artificial light source, the light source may emit light at a frequency associated with its source of wall power (e.g., 60 Hz AC mains power). The photodetector of the component (2.4-60) may detect that the artificial light from the artificial light source is characterized by 60 Hz variations in intensity. The control circuitry (2.4-12) may use this information to adjust a clock or other timing signal associated with the operation of the image sensors within the device (2.4-10) to help avoid unwanted interference between the light source frequency and other frequencies associated with the frame rate or image capture operations. The control circuitry (2.4-12) may also use measurements from the component (2.4-60) to help identify the presence of artificial light and the type of artificial light present. In this manner, the control circuitry (2.4-12) may detect the presence of lights, such as fluorescent lights or other lights, with known non-ideal color characteristics, and may make color cast adjustments (e.g., white point adjustments) for color-sensitive components, such as cameras and displays. Because the optical component (2.4-60) may measure variations in light intensity, the component (2.4-60) may sometimes be referred to as a flicker sensor or an ambient light frequency sensor.

The optical component (2.4-62) may be an ambient light sensor. The ambient light sensor may include one or more photodetectors. In a single photodetector configuration, the ambient light sensor may be a monochrome sensor that measures ambient light intensity. In a multi-photodetector configuration, each photodetector may be overlapped by an optical filter that passes through different wavelength bands (e.g., different visible and/or infrared passbands). The optical filter passbands may overlap at their edges. This allows the component (2.4-62) to act as a color ambient light sensor that measures both ambient light intensity and ambient light color (e.g., by measuring color coordinates for the ambient light). During operation of the device (2.4-10), the control circuitry (2.4-12) may take action based on the measured ambient light intensity and color. For example, the white point of a display or image sensor may be adjusted, or other display or image sensor color adjustments may be made based on measured ambient light color. The brightness of the display may be adjusted based on light intensity. For example, the brightness of the display (2.4-14F) may be increased in bright ambient lighting conditions to improve the visibility of images on the display, and the brightness of the display (2.4-14F) may be decreased in dim lighting conditions to save power. Image sensor operations and/or light source operations may also be adjusted based on ambient light readings.

The optical components within the active area (IA) may also include components that follow aspects of the device (2.4-10), such as components (2.4-80, 2.4-64). The optical components (2.4-80, 2.4-64) may be pose tracking cameras used to help monitor the orientation and movement of the device (2.4-10). The components (2.4-80, 2.4-64) may be line-of-sight optical cameras (and/or cameras sensitive to visible and infrared wavelengths) and, together with an inertial measurement unit, may form a visual inertial ranging (VIO) system.

The optical components (2.4-78, 2.4-66) may be line-of-sight optical cameras that capture real-time images of the environment surrounding the device (2.4-10). These cameras, which may sometimes be referred to as scene cameras or pass-through video cameras, may capture video that is displayed in real-time on displays (2.4-14R) for viewing by the user when the user's eyes are positioned within the eye boxes (2.4-24) at the rear of the device (2.4-10). By displaying pass-through images (pass-through video) to the user in this manner, the user may be provided with real-time information about the user's surroundings. If desired, virtual content (e.g., computer-generated images) may be overlaid on portions of the pass-through video. The device (2.4-10) may also operate in a non-pass-through video mode where components (2.4-78, 2.4-66) are turned off and only movie content, game content, and/or other virtual content that does not include real-time real-world images are provided to the user.

The input/output devices (2.4-12) of the device (2.4-10) can collect user input that is used to control the operation of the device (2.4-10). As an example, a microphone within the device (2.4-10) can collect voice commands. Buttons, touch sensors, force sensors, and other input devices can collect user input from the user's fingers or other external objects that come into contact with the device (2.4-10). In some configurations, it may be desirable to monitor the user's hand gestures or the motions of other user body parts. This allows the user's hand positions or other body part positions to be replicated in a game or other virtual environment, and allows the user's hand motions to act as hand gestures (air gestures) that control the operation of the device (2.4-10). User input, such as hand gesture input, may be captured using cameras operating in visible and infrared wavelengths, such as tracking cameras (e.g., optical components (2.4-76, 2.4-68)). Such tracking cameras may also track fiducials and other recognizable features on controllers and other external accessories (additional devices (2.4-10) of the system (2.4-8)) during use of such controllers in controlling the operation of the device (2.4-10). If desired, the tracking cameras may assist in determining the position and orientation of a handheld or wearable controller that senses its position and direction by measuring a magnetic field generated by a coil (2.4-54). Thus, the use of tracking cameras may assist in tracking hand motions and controller motions used to move pointers and other virtual objects displayed for the user, or may otherwise assist in controlling the operation of the device (2.4-10).

The tracking cameras can operate satisfactorily in the presence of sufficient ambient light (e.g., bright line-of-sight ambient lighting conditions). In dim environments, supplemental illumination may be provided by supplemental infrared light sources, such as optical components (2.4-82, 2.4-84). The infrared light sources may each include one or more light-emitting devices (e.g., light-emitting diodes or lasers) and may each be configured to provide fixed and/or steerable beams of infrared light that serve as supplemental illumination for the tracking cameras. If desired, the infrared light sources may be turned off in bright ambient lighting conditions (e.g., using the ambient light sensing capabilities of the optical component (2.4-62)) and turned on in response to detection of dim ambient lighting.

The 3D sensors within the device (2.4-10) may be used to perform biometric identification operations (e.g., facial identification for authentication), determine 3D shapes of objects within the user's environment (e.g., to map the user's environment so that a matching virtual environment can be generated for the user), and/or otherwise collect 3D content during operation of the device (2.4-10). As an example, the optical components (2.4-74, 2.4-70) may be 3D structured optical image sensors. Each 3D structured optical image sensor may have one or more light sources that provide structured light (e.g., a dot projector that projects an array of infrared dots onto the environment, a structured light source that generates a grid of lines, or other structured light component that emits structured light). Each of the 3D structured light image sensors may also include a flood illuminator (e.g., a light emitting diode or laser that emits a broad beam of infrared light). Using flood illumination and structured light illumination, the optical components (2.4-74, 2.4-70) may capture facial images, images of objects within an environment surrounding the device (2.4-10), and the like.

The optical component (2.4-72) may be an infrared 3D time-of-flight camera that uses time-of-flight measurements of the emitted light to collect 3D images of objects within an environment surrounding the device (2.4-10). The component (2.4-72) may have a longer range and a narrower field of view than the 3D structured light cameras of the optical components (2.4-74, 2.4-70). The operating range of the component (2.4-72) may be (for example) 30 cm to 7 m, 60 cm to 6 m, 70 cm to 5 m, or another suitable operating range.

2.5: Systems having cover layer sealing structures

A head-mounted device may include a head-mounted support structure that allows the device to be worn on a user's head. The head-mounted device may have displays supported by the head-mounted support structure for presenting visual content to the user. The displays may include rear displays that present images to eye boxes located at the rear of the head-mounted support structure. The displays may also include forward-facing displays. The forward-facing displays may be mounted at the front of the head-mounted support structure and may be viewed by the user when the head-mounted device is not worn on the user's head. The forward-facing displays, which may sometimes be referred to as publicly observable displays, may also be observable by others in the vicinity of the head-mounted device.

Optical components, such as image sensors and other optical sensors, may be provided in a head-mounted device. In an exemplary configuration, the optical components are mounted beneath peripheral portions of a display cover layer that protects a forward-facing display. The display cover layer, or other layers within the head-mounted device, may be formed from materials that are susceptible to fracture, such as glass. Because the head-mounted device is positioned near the user's eyes during operation, it may be desirable to reduce the likelihood of these layers shattering into the user's eyes. Accordingly, laminates, such as plastic laminates, may be formed on the top and bottom surfaces of the cover layer. To protect the edges of the cover layer, an encapsulating material may be bonded to the edge surfaces, or the head-mounted device housing structures may be modified to reduce the likelihood of glass from the cover layer escaping the device.

Figure 37 is a side view of an exemplary head-mounted electronic device. As shown in Figure 37, the head-mounted device (2.5-10) may include a head-mounted support structure (2.5-26). The support structure (2.5-26) may have walls or other structures that separate an interior region of the device (2.5-10), such as an interior region (2.5-42), from an exterior region surrounding the device (2.5-10), such as an exterior region (2.5-44). Electrical components (2.5-40) (e.g., integrated circuits, sensors, control circuitry, light-emitting diodes, lasers, and other light-emitting devices, other control circuits, and input/output devices, etc.) may be mounted on printed circuits and/or other structures within the device (2.5-10) (e.g., within the interior region (2.5-42)).

To present images to a user for viewing from eye boxes, such as eye boxes (2.5-34), the device (2.5-10) may include rear displays, such as displays (2.5-14R), which may have associated lenses for focusing the images for viewing from the eye boxes. These components may be mounted within optical modules (e.g., lens barrels) to form respective left and right optical systems. For example, there may be a left rear display for presenting images to the user's left eye within the left eye box through the left lens, and a right rear display for presenting images to the user's right eye within the right eye box. When the structure (2.5-26) is placed against an outer surface of the user's face, the user's eyes are positioned within the eye boxes (2.5-34) on the rear surface (R) of the device (2.5-10).

The support structure (2.5-26) may include a main support structure (sometimes referred to as a main portion or housing). The main housing support structure may extend from a front side (F) of the device (2.5-10) to an opposite rear side (R) of the device (2.5-10). On the rear side (R), the support structure (2.5-26) may have cushioning structures to enhance the comfort of the user as the support structure (2.5-26) rests against the user's face. If desired, the support structure (2.5-26) may include optional head straps and/or other structures that enable the device (2.5-10) to be worn on the user's head.

The device (2.5-10) may have a publicly observable front display, such as a display (2.5-14F) mounted on the front face (F) of the support structure (2.5-26). The display (2.5-14F) may be observable to the user when the user is not wearing the device (2.5-10) and/or may be observable by other persons in the vicinity of the device (2.5-10). The display (2.5-14F) may, for example, be viewable from the front face (F) of the device (2.5-10) by an external observer observing the device (2.5-10) from the front face (F).

A schematic diagram of an exemplary system that may include a head-mounted device is illustrated in FIG. 38. As illustrated in FIG. 38, the system (2.5-8) may have one or more electronic devices (2.5-10). The devices (2.5-10) may include a head-mounted device (e.g., device (2.5-10) of FIG. 37), accessories such as controllers and headphones, computing equipment (e.g., a cellular telephone, tablet computer, laptop computer, desktop computer, and/or remote computing equipment that supplies content to the head-mounted device), and/or other devices in communication with one another.

Each electronic device (2.5-10) may have control circuitry (2.5-12). The control circuitry (2.5-12) may include storage and processing circuitry for controlling the operation of the device (2.5-10). The circuitry (2.5-12) may include storage, such as hard disk drive storage, non-volatile memory (e.g., electrically programmable read-only memory configured to form a solid-state drive), volatile memory (e.g., static or dynamic random access memory), etc. The processing circuitry within the control circuitry (2.5-12) may be based on one or more microprocessors, microcontrollers, digital signal processors, baseband processors, power management units, audio chips, graphics processing units, application specific integrated circuits, and other integrated circuits. Software code may be stored on storage of circuitry (2.5-12) and executed on processing circuitry of circuitry (2.5-12) to implement control operations for the device (2.5-10), such as data acquisition operations, operations involving coordination of components of the device (2.5-10) using control signals, etc. The control circuitry (2.5-12) may include wired and wireless communication circuitry. For example, the control circuitry (2.5-12) may include radio frequency transceiver circuitry, such as cellular telephone transceiver circuitry, wireless local area network transceiver circuitry (e.g., WiFi® circuitry), millimeter wave transceiver circuitry, and/or other wireless communication circuitry.

During operation, the communication circuitry of the devices within the system (2.5-8) (e.g., the communication circuitry of the control circuitry (2.5-12) of the device (2.5-10)) may be used to support communication between the electronic devices. For example, one electronic device may transmit video data, audio data, control signals, and/or other data to another electronic device within the system (2.5-8). The electronic devices within the system (2.5-8) may communicate via one or more communication networks (e.g., the Internet, a local area network, etc.) using wired and/or wireless communication circuitry. The communication circuitry may be used to allow data to be received by the device (2.5-10) from an external device (e.g., a portable device such as a tethered computer, a handheld device, or a laptop computer, an online computing device such as a remote server or other remote computing device, or other electronic device) and/or to provide data to the external device.

Each device (2.5-10) within the system (2.5-8) may include input/output devices (2.5-22). The input/output devices (2.5-22) may be used to allow a user to provide user input to the device (2.5-10). The input/output devices (2.5-22) may also be used to gather information about the environment in which the device (2.5-10) is operating. Output components within the devices (2.5-22) may allow the device (2.5-10) to provide output to the user and may be used to communicate with external electrical equipment.

As illustrated in FIG. 38, the input/output devices (2.5-22) may include one or more displays, such as displays (2.5-14). The devices (2.5-14) may include rear-facing displays, such as display (2.5-14R) of FIG. 37. The devices (2.5-10) may include, for example, left and right components, such as left and right scanning mirror display devices or other image projectors, silicon liquid crystal display devices, digital mirror devices, or other reflective display devices, left and right display panels based on light-emitting diode pixel arrays (e.g., thin film organic light-emitting displays having polymer or semiconductor substrates such as silicon substrates or display devices based on pixel arrays formed from crystalline semiconductor light-emitting diode dies), liquid crystal display panels, and/or other left and right display devices that provide images to left and right eye boxes for viewing with the user's left and right eyes, respectively. Display components such as these (e.g., thin film organic light emitting displays having a flexible polymer substrate, or displays based on pixel arrays formed of crystalline semiconductor light emitting diode dies on a flexible substrate) can also be used to form forward-facing displays (sometimes referred to as front-facing displays, front displays, or publicly viewable displays) for devices (2.5-10), such as the forward-facing display (2.5-14F) of FIG. 37.

During operation, the displays (2.5-14) (e.g., displays (2.5-14R and/or 2.5-14F)) may be used to display visual content (e.g., still images and/or moving images, including photographs and pass-through video from camera sensors, text, graphics, movies, games, and/or other visual content) for a user of the device (2.5-10). The content presented on the displays (2.5-14) may include, for example, virtual objects and other content provided to the displays (2.5-14) by the control circuitry (2.5-12). This virtual content may sometimes be referred to as computer-generated content. The computer-generated content may be displayed in the absence of real-world content or may be combined with real-world content. In some configurations, the real-world image may be captured by a camera (e.g., a forward-facing camera, sometimes referred to as a forward-facing camera), and computer-generated content may be electronically overlaid on portions of the real-world image (e.g., when the device (2.5-10) is a pair of virtual reality goggles).

The input/output circuitry (2.5-22) may include sensors (2.5-16). Sensors (2.5-16) include, for example, 3D sensors (e.g., structured light sensors that use 2D digital image sensors to emit beams of light and collect image data for 3D images from dots or other light spots generated when a target is illuminated by the beams of light, binocular 3D image sensors that collect 3D images using two or more cameras in a binocular imaging array, 3D LIDAR (Light Detection and Ranging) sensors, sometimes referred to as time-of-flight cameras or 3D time-of-flight cameras, 3D radio frequency sensors, or other sensors that collect 3D image data), cameras (e.g., 2D infrared and/or visible digital image sensors), gaze tracking sensors (e.g., an gaze tracking system based on an image sensor, and, if desired, a light source that emits one or more beams of light that are then tracked using the image sensor after being reflected from the user's eyes), touch sensors, capacitive proximity sensors, Sensors such as light-based (optical) proximity sensors, other proximity sensors, force sensors (e.g., strain gauges, capacitive force sensors, resistive force sensors, etc.), contact sensors based on switches, gas sensors, pressure sensors, moisture sensors, magnetic sensors, audio sensors (microphones), ambient light sensors, flicker sensors that collect temporal information about ambient lighting conditions, such as the presence of time-varying ambient light intensity associated with artificial lighting, microphones for collecting voice commands and other audio input, sensors configured to collect information about motion, position, and/or orientation (e.g., accelerometers, gyroscopes, compasses, and/or inertial measurement units including all or one or a subset of two of these sensors), and/or other sensors.

User input and other information may be collected using sensors and other input devices within the input/output devices (2.5-22). If desired, the input/output devices (2.5-22) may include other devices (2.5-24), such as haptic output devices (e.g., vibration components), light-emitting diodes, lasers and other light sources (e.g., light-emitting devices that emit light to illuminate the environment surrounding the device (2.5-10) when ambient light levels are low), speakers such as ear speakers for generating audio output, circuits for receiving wireless power, circuits for wirelessly transmitting power to other devices, batteries and other energy storage devices (e.g., capacitors), joysticks, buttons and/or other components.

As described in connection with FIG. 37, the electronic device (2.5-10) may have head-mounted support structures, such as a head-mounted support structure (2.5-26) (e.g., a head-mounted housing structure, e.g., housing walls, straps, etc.). The head-mounted support structure may be configured to be worn on a user's head (e.g., against the user's face covering the user's eyes) during operation of the device (2.5-10) and may support displays (2.5-14), sensors (2.5-16), other components (2.5-24), other input/output devices (2.5-22), and control circuitry (2.5-12) (e.g., components (2.5-40) and displays (2.5-14R, 2.5-14F) of FIG. 37, which may include associated optical modules).

FIG. 39 is a front view of an exemplary configuration of a device (2.5-10) having a publicly observable display, such as a forward-facing display (2.5-14F). As illustrated in FIG. 39, the support structure (2.5-26) of the device (2.5-10) may have right and left portions on either side of a nose bridge (2.5-90). The nose bridge (2.5-90) may be a curved outer surface configured to receive and rest upon a user's nose to assist in supporting the housing (2.5-26) on the user's head.

The display (2.5-14F) may have an active area, such as an active area (AA) configured to display images, and an inactive area (IA) that does not display images. The outline of the active area (AA) may be rectangular, rectangular with rounded corners, may have teardrop-shaped portions on the left and right sides of the device (2.5-10), may have a shape with straight edges, a shape with curved edges, a shape with a peripheral edge having both straight and curved portions, and/or other suitable outlines. As illustrated in FIG. 39, the active area (AA) may have a curved recessed portion in the nose bridge (2.5-90). The presence of the nose-shaped recess in the active area (AA) may help fit the active area (AA) within the available space of the housing (2.5-26) without unduly restricting the size of the active area (AA).

The active area (AA) includes an array of pixels. The pixels may be, for example, light-emitting diode pixels formed of thin-film organic light-emitting diodes or crystalline semiconductor light-emitting diode dies (sometimes referred to as micro light-emitting diodes) on a flexible display panel substrate. If desired, configurations in which the display (2.5-14F) uses other display technologies may also be used. Exemplary arrangements in which the display (2.5-14F) is formed of a light-emitting diode display, such as an organic light-emitting diode display formed on a flexible substrate (e.g., a substrate formed of a bendable layer of polyimide or a sheet of other flexible polymer), may sometimes be described herein by way of example. The pixels of the active area (AA) may be formed on a display device, such as a display panel (e.g., a flexible organic light-emitting diode display panel). In some configurations, the outline of the active area (AA) may have a peripheral edge that includes straight segments or a combination of straight and curved segments. Configurations in which the entire outline of the active area (AA) is characterized by curved peripheral edges may also be used.

The display (2.5-14F) may have an inactive area, such as an inactive area (IA), that has no pixels and does not display images. The inactive area (IA) may form an inactive border area that extends along one or more portions of the peripheral edge of the active area (AA). In the exemplary configuration of FIG. 39, the inactive area (IA) has a ring shape that surrounds the active area (AA) and forms the inactive border. In this type of arrangement, the width of the inactive area (IA) may be relatively constant, and the inner and outer edges of the area (IA) may be characterized by straight and/or curved segments or may be curved along their entire length. For example, the outer edge of the area (IA) (e.g., the peripheral edge of the display (2.5-14F)) may have a curved outline that extends parallel to the curved edge of the active area (AA).

In some configurations, the device (2.5-10) can operate in conjunction with other devices within the system (2.5-8), such as wireless controllers and other accessories. These accessories may have magnetic sensors that detect the direction and strength of magnetic fields. The device (2.5-10) may have one or more electromagnets configured to emit a magnetic field. The magnetic field can be measured by wireless accessories near the device (2.5-10), such that the accessories can determine their orientation and location relative to the device (2.5-10). This allows the accessories to wirelessly provide real-time information about their current location, orientation, and movement to the device (2.5-10), allowing the accessories to act as wireless controllers. The accessories may include wearable devices, devices with handles, and other input devices.

In an exemplary configuration, the device (2.5-10) may have a coil extending around the periphery of the display (2.5-14F) (e.g., below the inactive area (IA) along the periphery of the active area (AA). The coil may have any suitable number of turns (e.g., 1 to 10, at least 2, at least 5, at least 10, 10 to 50, less than 100, less than 25, less than 6, etc.). These turns may be formed of metal traces on a substrate, may be formed of wires, and/or may be formed of other conductive lines. During operation, the control circuitry (2.5-12) may supply an alternating current (AC) drive signal to the coil. The drive signal can have a frequency of (for example) at least 1 kHz, at least 10 kHz, at least 100 kHz, at least 1 MHz, less than 10 MHz, less than 3 MHz, less than 300 kHz, or less than 30 kHz. As AC current flows through the coil, a corresponding magnetic field is generated in the vicinity of the device (2.5-10). Electronic devices, such as wireless controllers having magnetic sensors in the vicinity of the device (2.5-10), can use the magnetic field as a reference to determine their orientation, position, and/or movement while the wireless controllers are moved relative to the device (2.5-10) to provide input to the device (2.5-10).

As an example, consider a handheld wireless controller used to control the operation of a device (2.5-10). During operation, the device (2.5-10) emits a magnetic field using a coil. As the handheld wireless controller is moved, magnetic sensors in the controller can monitor the position of the controller and the movement of the controller relative to the device (2.5-10) by monitoring the strength, orientation, and changes in the strength and/or orientation of the magnetic field emitted by the coil as the controller is moved through the air by the user. The electronic device can then wirelessly transmit information about the position and orientation of the controller to the device (2.5-10). In this manner, the handheld controller, wearable controller, or other external accessory can be manipulated by the user to provide air gestures, pointing inputs, steering inputs, and/or other user inputs to the device (2.5-10).

The device (2.5-10) may have components such as optical components (e.g., optical sensors among the sensors (2.5-16) of FIG. 38). These components may be mounted at any suitable location on the head-mounted support structure (2.5-26) (e.g., on the head strap, on the housing (2.5-26), etc.). The optical components and other components may be oriented rearward (e.g., when mounted on the rear surface of the device (2.5-10), laterally (e.g., to the left or right), downwardly or upwardly, toward the front of the device (2.5-10) (e.g., when mounted on the front surface of the device (2.5-10), mounted to point in any combination of these directions (e.g., forwardly, rightward, and downwardly), and/or mounted in other suitable orientations. In an exemplary configuration, at least some of the components of the device (2.5-10) are mounted so as to face outwardly (and optionally to the sides and/or up and down). For example, forward-facing cameras for pass-through video may be mounted on the front left and right sides of the device (2.5-10) in a configuration such that their fields of view somewhat overlap along the horizontal dimension while the cameras capture wide-angle images of the environment in front of the device (2.5-10). The captured images may, if desired, include portions of the user's surroundings below, above, and to the sides of the area directly in front of the device (2.5-10).

To help conceal components, such as optical components, from observation from outside the device (2.5-10), it may be desirable to cover some or all of the components with a decorative covering structure. The covering structures may include transparent portions (e.g., optical component windows) characterized by sufficient optical transparency to allow the overlaid optical components to operate satisfactorily. For example, an ambient light sensor may be covered with a layer that appears opaque to an outside observer to help conceal the ambient light sensor from observation, but allows sufficient ambient light to pass through to the ambient light sensor to allow the ambient light sensor to make satisfactory ambient light measurements. As another example, an optical component that emits infrared light may be overlaid with a visible-opaque material that is transparent to infrared light.

In an exemplary configuration, optical components for the device (2.5-10) may be mounted in the inactive area (IA) of FIG. 39, and decorative covering structures may be formed in a ring shape overlapping the optical components in the inactive area (IA). The decorative covering structures may be formed of structures including ink, polymer structures, metal, glass, other materials, and/or combinations of these materials. In an exemplary configuration, the decorative covering structure may be formed as a ring-shaped member having a footprint that matches the footprint of the inactive area (IA). For example, if the active area (AA) has left and right portions having teardrop shapes, the ring-shaped member may have curved edges that follow the curved periphery of the teardrop-shaped portions of the active area (AA). The ring-shaped member may be formed of one or more polymer structures (e.g., the ring-shaped member may be formed of a polymer ring). Because the ring-shaped member may help conceal the overlapping components from observation, the ring-shaped member may sometimes be referred to as a shroud or ring-shaped shroud member. The appearance of the shroud or other decorative covering structures may be characterized by a neutral color (e.g., white, black, or gray) or a non-neutral color (e.g., blue, red, green, gold, rose gold, etc.).

The display (2.5-14F) may, if desired, have a protective display cover layer. The cover layer may overlap the active area (AA) and the inactive area (IA) (e.g., the entire front surface of the device (2.5-10) as viewed from the front (F) of FIG. 37 may be covered by the cover layer). The cover layer, which may sometimes be referred to as a housing wall or transparent housing wall, may have a rectangular outline, an outline with teardrop sections, an elliptical outline, or other shapes with curved and/or straight edges.

The cover layer may be formed of a transparent material such as glass, a polymer, a transparent crystalline material such as sapphire, a transparent ceramic, another transparent material, and/or combinations of these materials. As an example, a protective display cover layer for a display (2.5-14F) may be formed of safety glass (e.g., laminated glass including a transparent glass layer having a laminated polymer film). Optional coating layers may be applied to the surfaces of the display cover layer. If desired, the display cover layer may be chemically strengthened (e.g., using an ion exchange process to create an outer layer of material under compressive stress that resists scratching). In some configurations, the display cover layer may be formed of a stack of two or more layers of material (e.g., first and second structural glass layers, a rigid polymer layer bonded to a glass layer or another rigid polymer layer, etc.) to enhance the performance of the cover layer.

In the active area (AA), the display cover layer may overlap the pixels of the display panel (2.5-14P). The display cover layer within the active area (2.5-AA) is preferably transparent to allow viewing of images presented on the display panel (14P). In the inactive area (IA), the display cover layer may overlap a ring-shaped shroud or other decorative covering structure. The shroud and/or other covering structures (e.g., opaque ink coatings on the inner surface of the display cover layer and/or structures) may be sufficiently opaque to help conceal some or all of the optical components within the inactive area (IA) from viewing. Windows may be provided in the shroud or other decorative covering structures to help ensure that the optical components overlapped by these structures operate satisfactorily. The windows may be formed by apertures, may be formed by areas of the shroud or other decorative covering structures that are locally thinned to enhance light transmittance, may be formed by window members having desired light transmittance characteristics inserted into matching openings within the shroud, and/or may be formed by other shroud window structures.

In the example of FIG. 39, the device (2.5-10) includes optical components such as (as examples) optical components (2.5-60, 2.5-62, 2.5-64, 2.5-66, 2.5-68, 2.5-70, 2.5-72, 2.5-74, 2.5-76, 2.5-78, 2.5-80). Each of these optical components (e.g., optical sensors selected from among the sensors (2.5-16) of FIG. 38, light-emitting devices, etc.) can be configured to detect light and, if desired, emit light (e.g., ultraviolet light, visible light, and/or infrared light).

In an exemplary configuration, the optical component (2.5-60) may sense ambient light (e.g., ambient visible light). In particular, the optical component (2.5-60) may have a photodetector that senses variations in ambient light intensity as a function of time. As an example, if a user is working in an environment with an artificial light source, the light source may emit light at a frequency associated with its source of wall power (e.g., 60 Hz AC mains power). The photodetector of the component (2.5-60) may detect that the artificial light from the artificial light source is characterized by 60 Hz variations in intensity. The control circuitry (2.5-12) may use this information to adjust a clock or other timing signal associated with the operation of the image sensors within the device (2.5-10) to help avoid unwanted interference between the light source frequency and other frequencies associated with the frame rate or image capture operations. The control circuitry (2.5-12) may also use measurements from the component (2.5-60) to help identify the presence of artificial light and the type of artificial light present. In this manner, the control circuitry (2.5-12) may detect the presence of lights, such as fluorescent lights or other lights, with known non-ideal color characteristics, and may make color cast adjustments (e.g., white point adjustments) for color-sensitive components, such as cameras and displays. Because the optical component (2.5-60) may measure variations in light intensity, the component (2.5-60) may sometimes be referred to as a flicker sensor or an ambient light frequency sensor.

The optical component (2.5-62) may be an ambient light sensor. The ambient light sensor may include one or more photodetectors. In a single photodetector configuration, the ambient light sensor may be a monochrome sensor that measures ambient light intensity. In a multi-photodetector configuration, each photodetector may be overlapped by an optical filter that passes through different wavelength bands (e.g., different visible and/or infrared passbands). The optical filter passbands may overlap at their edges. This allows the component (2.5-62) to act as a color ambient light sensor that measures both ambient light intensity and ambient light color (e.g., by measuring color coordinates for the ambient light). During operation of the device (2.5-10), the control circuitry (2.5-12) may take action based on the measured ambient light intensity and color. For example, the white point of the display or image sensor may be adjusted, or other display or image sensor color adjustments may be made based on measured ambient light color. The brightness of the display may be adjusted based on light intensity. For example, the brightness of the display (2.5-14F) may be increased in bright ambient lighting conditions to improve the visibility of images on the display, and the brightness of the display (2.5-14F) may be decreased in dim lighting conditions to save power. Image sensor operations and/or light source operations may also be adjusted based on ambient light readings.

The optical components within the active area (IA) may also include components that follow aspects of the device (2.5-10), such as components (2.5-80, 2.5-64). The optical components (2.5-80, 2.5-64) may be pose tracking cameras used to help monitor the orientation and movement of the device (2.5-10). The components (2.5-80, 2.5-64) may be line-of-sight optical cameras (and/or cameras sensitive to visible and infrared wavelengths) and, together with an inertial measurement unit, may form a visual inertial ranging (VIO) system.

The optical components (2.5-78, 2.5-66) may be line-of-sight optical cameras that capture real-time images of the environment surrounding the device (2.5-10). These cameras, which may sometimes be referred to as scene cameras or pass-through video cameras, may capture video that is displayed in real-time on displays (2.5-14R) for viewing by the user when the user's eyes are positioned within the eye boxes (2.5-34) at the rear of the device (2.5-10). By displaying pass-through images (pass-through video) to the user in this manner, the user may be provided with real-time information about the user's surroundings. If desired, virtual content (e.g., computer-generated images) may be overlaid on a portion of the pass-through video. The device (2.5-10) may also operate in a non-pass-through video mode where components (2.5-78, 2.5-66) are turned off and only movie content, game content, and/or other virtual content that does not include real-time real-world images are provided to the user.

The input/output devices (2.5-22) of the device (2.5-10) can collect user input that is used to control the operation of the device (2.5-10). For example, a microphone within the device (2.5-10) can collect voice commands. Buttons, touch sensors, force sensors, and other input devices can collect user input from the user's fingers or other external objects that come into contact with the device (2.5-10). In some configurations, it may be desirable to monitor the user's hand gestures or the motions of other user body parts. This allows the user's hand positions or other body part positions to be replicated in a game or other virtual environment, and allows the user's hand motions to act as hand gestures (air gestures) that control the operation of the device (2.5-10). User input, such as hand gesture input, may be captured using cameras operating in visible and infrared wavelengths, such as tracking cameras (e.g., optical components (2.5-76, 2.5-68)). Such tracking cameras may also track fiducials and other recognizable features on controllers and other external accessories (additional devices (2.5-10) of the system (2.5-8)) during use of such controllers in controlling the operation of the device (2.5-10). If desired, the tracking cameras may assist in determining the position and orientation of a handheld or wearable controller that senses its position and direction by measuring a magnetic field generated by a coil (2.5-54). Thus, the use of tracking cameras may assist in tracking hand motions and controller motions used to move pointers and other virtual objects displayed for the user, or may otherwise assist in controlling the operation of the device (2.5-10).

The tracking cameras can operate satisfactorily in the presence of sufficient ambient light (e.g., bright line-of-sight ambient lighting conditions). In dim environments, supplemental illumination may be provided by supplemental infrared light sources, such as optical components (2.5-82, 2.5-84). The infrared light sources may each include one or more light-emitting devices (e.g., light-emitting diodes or lasers) and may each be configured to provide fixed and/or steerable beams of infrared light that serve as supplemental illumination for the tracking cameras. If desired, the infrared light sources may be turned off in bright ambient lighting conditions (e.g., using the ambient light sensing capabilities of the optical components (2.5-62)) and turned on in response to detection of dim ambient lighting.

The 3D sensors within the device (2.5-10) may be used to perform biometric identification operations (e.g., facial identification for authentication), determine 3D shapes of objects within the user's environment (e.g., to map the user's environment so that a matching virtual environment can be generated for the user), and/or otherwise collect 3D content during operation of the device (2.5-10). As an example, the optical components (2.5-74, 2.5-70) may be 3D structured optical image sensors. Each 3D structured optical image sensor may have one or more light sources that provide structured light (e.g., a dot projector that projects an array of infrared dots onto the environment, a structured light source that generates a grid of lines, or other structured light component that emits structured light). Each of the 3D structured light image sensors may also include a flood illuminator (e.g., a light emitting diode or laser that emits a broad beam of infrared light). Using flood illumination and structured light illumination, the optical components (2.5-74, 2.5-70) may capture facial images, images of objects within an environment surrounding the device (2.5-10), and the like.

The optical component (2.5-72) may be an infrared 3D time-of-flight camera that uses time-of-flight measurements of the emitted light to collect 3D images of objects within an environment surrounding the device (2.5-10). The component (2.5-72) may have a longer range and a narrower field of view than the 3D structured light cameras of the optical components (2.5-74, 2.5-70). The operating range of the component (2.5-72) may be (for example) 30 cm to 7 m, 60 cm to 6 m, 70 cm to 5 m, or another suitable operating range.

FIG. 40 is a front view of an exemplary ring-shaped decorative covering structure for a device (2.5-10). The exemplary ring-shaped shroud (2.5-100) of FIG. 40 may be mounted beneath an inner surface of a display cover layer for a display (2.5-14F) within an inactive area (IA). This may help conceal optical components and other internal portions of the device (2.5-10) from observation from outside the device (2.5-10). The shroud (2.5-100) may be formed of one or more unbroken ring-shaped members and/or may be formed of multiple shroud segments attached using adhesives, fasteners, or other attachment structures. If desired, the shroud (2.5-100) may be formed of multiple members, which are sandwiched together along some or all of their lengths. In an exemplary configuration that may sometimes be described herein as an example, the shroud (2.5-100) may be formed of an inner piece (e.g., a complete or partial inner ring), which may sometimes be referred to as an inner shroud member, shroud trim, or shroud trim member, and may be formed of an outer piece or pieces (e.g., one or more strips of material or covering members, a complete ring, one or more partial rings, etc.), which may sometimes be referred to as a shroud cover, canopy, or shroud canopy.

As illustrated in FIG. 40, the shroud (2.5-100) can have optical component windows for accommodating components (2.5-60, 2.5-62, 2.5-64, 2.5-84, 2.5-66, 2.5-68, 2.5-70, 2.5-72, 2.5-74, 2.5-76, 2.5-78, 2.5-82, 2.5-80). The optical component windows can be formed by through-hole openings within the shroud (2.5-100), by recesses or other partial openings that do not pass completely through the shroud (2.5-100), by inserted optical window members within the shroud through-hole openings, and/or by other shroud optical component window structures. The display (2.5-14F) may have a display cover layer formed of a bulk material having corresponding optical component windows (e.g., through-hole openings, recessed regions, inserted window elements within the through-hole openings, etc.) and/or having desired optical properties (e.g., a display cover layer formed of one or more layers of a material such as glass and/or a polymer that is sufficiently transparent in the operating wavelength range of the overlapping optical component to allow the optical component to operate satisfactorily through the cover layer without forming openings or other window structures in the cover layer).

The shroud (2.5-100) may have any suitable shape. For example, the outline of the shroud (2.5-100) may be rectangular with rounded corners as illustrated in FIG. 40, and/or may have teardrop shapes on the left and right sides of the device (2.5-10), may have an oval outline, and/or may have other outlines with curved and/or straight edge segments. For example, the inner and outer edges of the shroud (2.5-100) may be curved (e.g., to follow a teardrop shape). The shaft (2.5-100) may, if desired, have a curved peripheral edge along most or all of its length.

The width of the shroud (2.5-100) may be constant along its length, or the shroud (2.5-100) may have portions that are wider than other portions. The thickness of the shroud (2.5-100) (e.g., the dimension of the shroud (2.5-100) into the page in the orientation of FIG. 40) may be less than the width of the shroud (2.5-100) (the lateral dimension of the shroud (2.5-100) into the page in the orientation of FIG. 40) or the thickness of the shroud may be equal to or greater than the width of the shroud. The shroud may have a two-dimensional shape (e.g., the shroud (2.5-100) may have a planar shape), or it may have a three-dimensional shape (e.g., a shape having a curved cross-sectional profile and/or a shape characterized by inner and/or outer surfaces of compound curvature). In an exemplary configuration, most or all of the inner and outer surfaces of the shroud have a compound curvature surface.

The optical components below the inactive area (IA) may include components that operate in concert with each other on the left and right sides of the device (2.5-10). For example, the scene cameras, tracking cameras, and/or structured light cameras within the device (2.5-10) may be formed in pairs, each including a left camera and a corresponding right camera. The left scene camera and the right scene camera may operate together to capture overlapping images that provide the device (2.5-10) with a wide field of view for collecting pass-through video, for example. The left and right tracking cameras may operate together to track the user's hands or other external objects. The left and right structured light cameras or other 3D cameras may be used together to capture 3D images of the user's environment. To improve the performance of the left and right optical components in these types of paired component arrangements, it may be desirable to maintain precise alignment between the left and right optical components. To help maintain the left and right optical components aligned with each other on the respective left and right sides of the device (2.5-10), the device (2.5-10) may be provided with one or more housing structures that help support the optical components. An exemplary example of a device (2.5-10) having housing structures that support the optical components and a cover layer that overlaps the optical components is illustrated in FIG. 41.

As illustrated in FIG. 41, the shroud (2.5-100) and display cover layer (2.5-92) can be attached to the housing (2.5-26) using adhesives, screws and other fasteners, press-fit connections, and/or other attachment mechanisms. An exemplary configuration is illustrated in FIG. 41 in which the shroud (2.5-100) and cover layer (2.5-92) are attached to the forward-facing edge of the housing wall within the main housing portion of the structure (2.5-26) using adhesives. In the example of FIG. 41, the shroud (2.5-100) has an inner shroud member, such as a shroud trim (2.5-100A), and a corresponding outer shroud member, such as a shroud canopy (2.5-100B). The shroud trim (2.5-100A) and shroud canopy (2.5-100B) may be formed of metal, polymer, ceramic, glass, other materials, and/or combinations of these materials. In an illustrative example, the shroud trim (2.5-100A) is formed of a black polymer or other dark material, and the shroud canopy (2.5-100B) is formed of a transparent polymer. The outer surface of the shroud canopy (2.5-100B) may be smooth to provide the shroud (2.5-100) with a decoratively attractive appearance.

A layer of pressure-sensitive adhesive may be used to attach the canopy (2.5-100B) to the trim (2.5-100A), or the canopy (2.5-100B) may be formed integrally with the trim (2.5-100A). The adhesive may also be used to attach the cover layer (2.5-92) and the shroud (2.5-100) to the housing portion (2.5-26). As illustrated in FIG. 41, a first adhesive, such as adhesive (2.5-122), may be used to attach the display cover layer (2.5-92) to the shroud (2.5-100) (e.g., to a ledge within the shroud trim (2.5-100A). A second adhesive, such as adhesive (2.5-124), may then be used to attach the shroud (2.5-100) (e.g., shroud trim (2.5-100A)) to an adjacent lip of the wall within the housing (2.5-26).

In some configurations, the adhesives (2.5-122, 2.5-124) may be formed of the same type of material. In an exemplary configuration, the adhesives (2.5-122, 2.5-124) are different. The housing portion (2.5-26) may have a wall having a lip shape that creates a shear force on the adhesive (2.5-124) as the display (2.5-14F) is attached to the housing (2.5-26) by pressing the display (2.5-14F) against the housing (2.5-26). In this type of scenario, it may be desirable to form the adhesive (2.5-124) with an adhesive that can satisfactorily bond in the presence of shear forces, such as a molten hot melt adhesive (thermoplastic adhesive) or other liquid adhesive, rather than a pressure-sensitive adhesive. The adhesive (2.5-124) may, if desired, be exposed to a curing agent (UV light, moisture, etc.) before the display (2.5-14F) is assembled into the housing (2.5-26).

It may be desirable to repair the device (2.5-10). For example, if the user exposes the display (2.5-14F) to excessive force during a drop event, it may be desirable to replace the display (2.5-14F) with a new display. This can be accomplished by heating the adhesive (2.5-124) to loosen the adhesive bond formed by the adhesive (2.5-124). To prevent the display cover layer (2.5-92) from separating from the shroud (2.5-100) while the adhesive (2.5-124) is thermally softened, the adhesive (2.5-122) may be provided with a higher softening point than the adhesive (2.5-124) (e.g., the adhesive (2.5-122) may be a two-part hot melt glue having a higher melting point than the adhesive (2.5-124).

Optical components overlapped by the display cover layer (2.5-92) and the shroud (2.5-100) within the inactive area (IA) can transmit and/or receive light through the shroud (2.5-100) and the display cover layer (2.5-92). The layer (2.5-92) can be formed of a single layer of glass, laminated glass, or other transparent material that allows light for each overlapped optical component (2.5-104) to pass through the layer (2.5-92). If desired, a partial recess or through-hole opening can be formed in a portion of the layer (2.5-92). An optional optical component window member can then be inserted into the layer (2.5-92) (e.g., a window overlapping the component (2.5-104)). For example, layer (2.5-92) may be formed of one or more layers of glass and/or polymer and characterized by a first level of optical transmittance at the operating wavelength(s) for component (2.5-104). The window member of layer (2.5-92) may be formed of polymer, glass, and/or other materials characterized by a second level of optical transmittance at the operating wavelength(s) that is greater than the first level of optical transmittance. In other exemplary arrangements, the window member is not embedded within layer (2.5-92) (e.g., where layer (2.5-92) alone is sufficiently transparent to transmit light for component (2.5-104).

The shroud (2.5-100) may be provided with an optical component window that overlaps the optical component to assist in accommodating the overlapping optical component (2.5-104). The component (2.5-104) may be operable at ultraviolet light wavelengths, visible light wavelengths, and/or infrared light wavelengths. To accommodate the component (2.5-104), the shroud trim (2.5-100A) is provided with a through-hole opening, while the shroud canopy (2.5-100B) does not have openings that overlap the component (2.5-104). This effectively forms a window recess within the shroud (2.5-100) in alignment with the components (2.5-104). The trim (2.5-100A) may be formed of a black polymer or other light absorbing material, and thus the formation of the opening (2.5-120) within the trim (2.5-100A) may help ensure that sufficient light passes through to allow the component (104) to operate satisfactorily. The portion of the canopy (2.5-100B) that overlaps the component (2.5-104) may be transparent (e.g., a transparent polymer). Alternatively, the canopy (2.5-100B) may be formed of a light absorbing material, and a portion of the canopy (2.5-100B) that overlaps the component (2.5-104) may be removed.

To help conceal the component (2.5-104) from view, the interior surface of the shroud canopy (2.5-100B) may be covered with one or more coatings, which may be used to provide an area overlapping the component (2.5-104) with optical properties and a desired external appearance that ensure satisfactory operation of the component (2.5-104). The coatings may include a thin film interference filter formed of a stack of thin film dielectric layers of alternating refractive index values (having refractive indices and thicknesses selected to produce a desired transmission spectrum and a desired reflection spectrum for the filter), and/or may include a layer of ink (e.g., a polymer layer including a dye, pigment, and/or other colorant), and/or may include any other suitable coating having desired optical properties.

As an example, consider a scenario where the component (2.5-104) transmits and/or receives infrared light. In this type of arrangement, the canopy (2.5-100B) may be coated with a coating that is opaque at visible wavelengths and transparent at infrared wavelengths. This helps to conceal the component (2.5-104) from observation from outside the device (2.5-10) while allowing infrared light associated with the operation of the component (2.5-104) to pass through the shroud (2.5-100) and the layer (2.5-92).

As another example, consider a scenario where component (2.5-104) is an ambient light sensor. In this configuration, the canopy (2.5-100B) may be coated with a coating exhibiting a visible light transmittance of (for example) 1 to 8%. This allows sufficient ambient visible light to reach the ambient light sensor to enable the ambient light sensor to read ambient light. At the same time, the transmittance of the coating may be sufficiently low to reduce the visibility of component (2.5-104) from outside the device (2.5-10).

As these examples demonstrate, areas of the display (2.5-14F) that overlap optical components, such as component (2.5-104) of FIG. 41, may be provided with optical component window structures within the layer (2.5-92) and/or shroud (2.5-100) that help accommodate the optical components.

As described with respect to FIGS. 39 and 40, multiple optical components, such as components (2.5-104), may be within the inactive area (IA). Each optical component may potentially have a different type of optical component window structure within the shroud (2.5-100) and/or layer (2.5-92) to accommodate that component. For example, some regions of the shroud (2.5-100) may have openings for accommodating the components, and/or other regions of the shroud (2.5-100) may have inserted optical window elements, and/or other regions of the shroud (2.5-100) may have partial shroud openings (e.g., recesses without through holes), such as the openings of FIG. 44 (which may optionally be coated to modify the optical properties of the shroud (2.5-100).

Because the cover layer (2.5-92) is in close proximity to the user's eyes, it may be desirable to reduce the possibility of the cover layer material (e.g., glass) shattering and causing injury to the user's eyes. An exemplary example of a cover layer (2.5-92) having encapsulation to reduce the possibility of such an event is illustrated in FIG. 42.

As illustrated in FIG. 42, a cover layer (2.5-92) may be bonded to a shroud (2.5-100). The cover layer (2.5-92) may include a glass layer (2.5-126), a front laminate (2.5-128), and a rear laminate (2.5-130). The front laminate (2.5-128) and the rear laminate (2.5-128) may be, for example, plastic layers laminated to the cover layer (2.5-92), plastic layers adhesively attached to the cover layer (2.5-92), or other shatter-resistant material attached to the front and rear surfaces of the glass layer (2.5-126). Although not illustrated in FIG. 42, multiple layers, such as anti-reflective coatings, anti-smudge coatings, acrylic layers, or other desired layers, may be included as part of the cover layer (2.5-92).

Although the front laminate (2.5-128) and the rear laminate (2.5-130) may reduce the likelihood of the glass layer (2.5-126) fragmenting toward the front or rear of the device (2.5-10), the edge surface of the glass layer (2.5-126) may still be exposed. In the event of a fragmentation event, such as when the device (2.5-10) is dropped, the glass layer (2.5-126) may fragment and glass may escape the device (2.5-10) from the edge surface of the glass layer (2.5-126). To mitigate this risk, an encapsulating material (2.5-132) may be attached to the edge surface of the glass layer (2.5-126). The encapsulating material (2.5-132) may be an epoxy material, such as a flexible epoxy, which seals the edge surface of the glass layer (2.5-126) and prevents the glass layer (2.5-126) from breaking at the edge surface. Alternatively, acrylates, polyvinyl butyral (PVB), polyurethanes, or moisture-curing materials may be used for the encapsulating material (2.5-132). Alternatively, the encapsulating material (2.5-132) may be formed of a material that adheres to the glass layer (2.5-126) while preventing the glass layer (2.5-126) from breaking.

The encapsulating material (2.5-132) can substantially fill the opening between the edge surface of the glass layer (2.5-126) and the shroud (2.5-100). For example, the encapsulating material (2.5-132) can extend approximately 150 micrometers from the edge surface. However, in general, any amount of the encapsulating material (2.5-132) can be applied to the edge surface.

As illustrated in FIG. 42, the encapsulating material (2.5-132) can cover the edge surface and also cover the edge portion of the laminate (2.5-128). However, this is merely exemplary. If desired, the encapsulating material (2.5-132) can cover the edge surface of the glass layer (2.5-126) without covering the edge portion of the laminate (2.5-128). For example, as illustrated in FIG. 43, the encapsulating material can cover only the edge surface of the glass layer (2.5-126). In the example of FIG. 7, the laminate (2.5-128) can extend over the encapsulating material (2.5-132). However, this is merely exemplary. If desired, the laminate (2.5-128) can be flush with the edge surface of the glass layer (2.5-126).

In some embodiments, it may be determined that the risk of fracture of the edge surface of the glass layer (2.5-126) can be mitigated by modifying the position of the glass layer (2.5-126) relative to the shroud (2.5-100) (or the support structure (2.5-126)). For example, as illustrated in the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 44, the edge surface of the glass layer (2.5-126) can be left unencapsulated, but the size of the opening (2.5-134) between the edge surface and the shroud (2.5-100) can be adjusted to reduce the risk of glass escaping through the opening (2.5-134) in the event of a fracture event. For example, if the glass layer (2.5-126) is close enough to the shroud (2.5-100) (e.g., if the opening (2.5-134) is small enough), glass from the layer (2.5-126) may not escape through the opening (2.5-134) if the layer (2.5-126) is fractured.

Instead of or in addition to adding material to the edge surface of layer (2.5-126), it may be desirable to add material to the gap between layer (2.5-126) and the shroud/support structure. An illustrative example of adding material to this gap is illustrated in FIG. 45.

As illustrated in FIG. 45, material (2.5-136) may be included between the edge surface of the glass layer (2.5-126) and the shroud (2.5-100). The material (2.5-136) may be, for example, a bumper ring. The bumper ring may be formed of an elastomeric material, a rigid plastic, or other material that helps protect the edge surface of the layer (2.5-126).

As an alternative to the material (2.5-136) being a bumper ring between the layer (2.5-126) and the shroud (2.5-100), the material (2.5-136) may be an overmolded structure over the layer (2.5-126), over the shroud (2.5-100), or over the chassis coupled to the support structure (26). Alternatively, the overmolded structure may help fill the gap between the layer (2.5-126) and the support structure, shroud, and/or chassis and prevent the edge surface of the layer (2.5-126) from fracturing out of the device (2.5-10).

Although not shown in FIG. 45, if desired, a portion of the material (2.5-136) may extend below the layer (2.5-126). In particular, a portion of the material (2.5-136) may be present between the lower surface of the layer (2.5-126) and the shroud (2.5-100).

Instead of or in addition to adding material between the layer (2.5-126) and the shroud (2.5-100), the upper laminate (2.5-128) and/or the lower laminate (2.5-130) may wrap around the edge surface of the layer (2.5-126). Illustrative examples of laminates wrapping the edge surface are illustrated in FIGS. 46 and 47.

As illustrated in FIG. 46, the upper laminate (2.5-128) can wrap around the edge surface of the layer (2.5-126). In particular, the upper laminate (2.5-128) can have a portion (2.5-128A) extending around and covering the edge surface of the layer (2.5-126). The layer (2.5-126) can have a rounded edge surface to allow the upper laminate (2.5-128) to wrap around the edge surface and sufficiently adhere to the surface, as illustrated in FIG. 46. By forming the layer (2.5-126) with a rounded edge, the curvature of the laminate (2.5-128) around the edge can be reduced, thereby reducing the stress on the laminate (2.5-128). However, the layer (2.5-126) may have a planar edge surface, or, if desired, a surface having any other desired profile around which the upper laminate (2.5-128) wraps. By wrapping the upper laminate around the edge surface of the layer (2.5-126), the glass can be prevented from breaking beyond the edge surface.

As illustrated in FIG. 47, the lower laminate (2.5-130) can wrap around the edge surface of the layer (2.5-126). In particular, the lower laminate can have a portion (2.5-130A) that extends around and covers the edge surface of the layer (2.5-126). The layer (2.5-126) can have a rounded edge surface to allow the lower laminate (2.5-130) to wrap around and sufficiently adhere to the edge surface, can have a flat edge surface, or can have a surface having any other desired profile that the lower laminate (2.5-130) wraps around. By wrapping the lower laminate (2.5-130) around the edge surface of the layer (2.5-126), glass can be prevented from breaking beyond the edge surface.

In the example of FIG. 47, the lower laminate portion (2.5-130A) completely wraps around the edge surface of the layer (2.5-126) and partially overlaps the upper laminate (2.5-128). This arrangement can ensure that glass cannot escape if the layer (2.5-126) is fractured. However, this arrangement is merely exemplary. If desired, the lower laminate portion (2.5-130A) can wrap only around the edge surface of the layer (2.5-126) without overlapping or extending above the upper laminate (2.5-128).

Another example of a material that can be used to prevent the layer (2.5-126) from being shattered and glass from escaping through the edge surface is illustrated in FIG. 48. In the example of FIG. 48, glue (or other similar material) (2.5-138) can be used to completely fill the gap between the layer (2.5-126) and the shroud (2.5-100). For example, after the cover layer (2.5-92) is assembled to the head-mounted device, the adhesive can be inserted into the gap. The glue (2.5-138) can help prevent glass from escaping through the edge surface of the layer (2.5-126) if the layer (2.5-126) is shattered.

Rather than wrapping the upper or lower laminate around the edge surface of the layer (2.5-126), the upper laminate (2.5-128) can extend into the shroud (2.5-100) to cover the gap between the edge surface and the shroud (2.5-100). For example, as illustrated in FIG. 49, the upper laminate (2.5-128) can have a portion (2.5-128B) that extends into the shroud (2.5-100) (or another portion of the support structure (2.5-26) or the device (2.5-10)). By covering the gap between the edge surface of the layer (2.5-126) and the shroud (2.5-100), glass can be prevented from escaping the device (2.5-10) during a fracture event.

Instead of or in addition to adding material or extending the laminates to prevent the glass from shattering outside the device (2.5-10), the chassis attached to the shroud (2.5-100) or the support structure (2.5-26) can be modified to reduce the risk of shattering the layer (2.5-126). Illustrative examples of modifying these components to reduce the risk of shattering the layer (2.5-126) are illustrated in FIGS. 50 and 51.

As illustrated in FIG. 50, the structure (2.5-140) may have a lip covering the gap between the layer (2.5-126) and the shroud (2.5-100)/support structure (2.5-126). The structure (2.5-140) may be formed from a portion of the shroud (2.5-100) or from a portion of the support structure (2.5-126) (e.g., a chassis of the support structure (2.5-126)). The lip of the structure (2.5-140) may help prevent glass that would otherwise fracture from the layer (2.5-126) and escape the device (2.5-10) from escaping the device (2.5-10), thereby protecting users of the device (2.5-10).

If desired, the lip of the structure (2.5-140) may be combined with an extension of the laminate around the edge surface of the layer (2.5-126). For example, as illustrated in FIG. 51, the upper laminate (2.5-128A) may wrap around the edge surface of the layer (2.5-126) to prevent glass from escaping through the edge surface, and the lip of the structure (2.5-140) may provide additional protection in case some glass does pass through the laminate.

Although the cover layer (2.5-92) is described as being coupled to the shroud (2.5-100), this is merely exemplary. In some embodiments, the cover layer (2.5-92) may be directly coupled to the support structure (2.5-26). In other embodiments, the device (2.5-10) may include a chassis (e.g., a chassis that supports various components of the device (2.5-10)) attached to the support structure (2.5-26), and the cover layer (2.5-92) may be coupled to this chassis.

Furthermore, although the cover layer (2.5-92) is described as comprising a glass layer capable of being shattered, this material is merely exemplary. The layer (2.5-126) may be formed from ceramic, sapphire, or any other desired material.

2.6: Electronic devices having antennas and optical components

An electronic device, such as a head-mounted device, may have a front surface facing away from the user's head and a rear surface facing toward the user's head. Optical modules may be used to provide images to the user's eyes. The positions of the optical modules may be adjusted to accommodate different user interpupillary distances. The head-mounted device may have actuators and optical module guide structures that allow the positions of the optical modules to be adjusted.

A head-mounted device may have wireless communication circuitry for communicating with an external device, such as a computer, a cellular phone, or other computing device. This allows the external device to provide content to the head-mounted device for viewing on the head-mounted device and/or allows the head-mounted device to otherwise interact with a remote device. The wireless communication circuitry may include multiple antennas.

A head-mounted device may have one or more cameras. For example, forward-facing cameras may allow the head-mounted device to monitor its movement relative to the environment surrounding the head-mounted device (e.g., the cameras may be used as part of a visual odometry system or a visual inertial odometry system). The forward-facing cameras may also be used to capture images of the environment displayed to the user of the head-mounted device. If desired, images from multiple forward-facing cameras may be merged with each other, and/or forward-facing camera content may be merged with computer-generated content for the user.

A plan view of an exemplary head-mounted device is illustrated in FIG. 52. As illustrated in FIG. 52, head-mounted devices, such as electronic devices (2.6-10), may have head-mounted support structures, such as a housing (2.6-12). The housing (2.6-12) may include a portion (e.g., a head-mounted support structure (2.6-12T)) that allows the device (2.6-10) to be worn on a user's head. The support structures (2.6-12T) may be formed of fabric, polymers, metals, and/or other materials. The support structures (2.6-12T) may form straps or other head-mounted support structures that assist in supporting the device (2.6-10) on the user's head. The main support structure of the housing (2.6-12) (e.g., a head-mounted housing such as the main housing portion (2.6-12M)) may support electronic components such as a display (2.6-14).

The main housing portion (2.6-12M) may include housing structures formed from metal, polymer, glass, ceramic, and/or other materials. For example, the housing portion (2.6-12M) may have housing walls on the front side (F) formed from a rigid polymer or other rigid support structure, and adjacent housing walls on the top, bottom, left, and right sides, which rigid walls may optionally be covered with electrical components, fabric, leather, or other flexible materials. The housing portion (2.6-12M) may also have internal support structures, such as a frame, and/or structures that perform multiple functions, such as airflow control, while providing structural support. The walls of the housing portion (2.6-12M) may enclose internal components (2.6-38) of the internal region (2.6-34) of the device (2.6-10) and may separate the internal region (2.6-34) from an environment (external region (2.6-36)) surrounding the device (2.6-10). The internal components (2.6-38) may include integrated circuits, actuators, batteries, sensors, and/or other circuits and structures for the device (2.6-10). The housing (2.6-12) may be configured to be worn on a user's head and may form eyeglasses, a hat, a helmet, goggles, and/or other head-mounted devices. A configuration in which the housing (2.6-12) forms goggles may sometimes be described herein as an example.

A front side (F) of the housing (2.6-12) may face outward from the user's head and face. An opposite rear side (R) of the housing (2.6-12) may face the user. A portion of the housing (2.6-12) on the rear side (R) (e.g., a portion of the main housing (2.6-12M)) may form a cover, such as a cover (2.6-12C) (sometimes referred to as a curtain). The presence of the cover (2.6-12C) on the rear side (R) may help conceal the internal housing structure, internal components (2.6-38), and other structures of the internal region (2.6-34) from the user's view.

The device (2.6-10) can have one or more cameras, such as cameras (2.6-46). For example, the device (2.6-10) can have K cameras, where the value of K is at least 1, at least 2, at least 4, at least 6, at least 8, at least 10, at least 12, less than 20, less than 14, less than 12, less than 10, from 4 to 10, or other suitable value. The camera (2.6-46) can be sensitive to infrared wavelengths (e.g., the camera (2.6-46) can be an infrared camera), sensitive to visible wavelengths (e.g., the camera (2.6-46) can be a visible camera), and/or the camera (2.6-46) can be sensitive to other wavelengths. If desired, the camera (2.6-46) can be sensitive to both visible wavelengths and infrared wavelengths.

Cameras (2.6-46) mounted on the front face (F) and facing outward (toward the front of the device (2.6-10) and away from the user) may sometimes be referred to herein as forward-facing cameras or forward-facing cameras. Forward-facing cameras (e.g., cameras (2.6-46) of FIG. 52) may include a first set of two or more forward-facing cameras on the left side of the front face (F) of the device (2.6-10) and/or may include a second set of two or more forward-facing cameras on the right side of the front face (F) of the device (2.6-10). The cameras (2.6-46) may also be provided elsewhere within the housing portion (2.6-12M). The cameras (2.6-46) may, if desired, include cameras oriented at a slight angle relative to the -Z axis of FIG. 52. For example, some of the cameras (2.6-46) may be oriented directly forward, while others (2.6-46) along the left and right edges of the front face (F) may be tilted slightly to the left and right of the -Z axis to capture left and right edge images, respectively. The cameras (2.6-46) may capture visual odometry information, image information that is processed to locate objects in the user's field of view (e.g., so that virtual content can be properly registered with respect to real objects), image content that is displayed in real time to the user of the device (2.6-10), and/or other suitable image data.

The device (2.6-10) may have left and right optical modules (2.6-40). The optical modules (2.6-40) support electrical and optical components, such as light emitting components and lenses, and may thus sometimes be referred to as optical assemblies, optical systems, optical component support structures, lens and display support structures, electrical component support structures, or housing structures. Each optical module may include a support structure, such as a respective display (2.6-14), a lens (2.6-30), and a support structure (2.6-32). The support structure (2.6-32), which may sometimes be referred to as a lens support structure, an optical component support structure, an optical module support structure, an optical module portion, or a lens barrel, may include hollow cylindrical structures having open ends or other support structures that accommodate the display (2.6-14) and the lens (2.6-30). The support structures (2.6-32) may include, for example, a left lens barrel supporting a left display (2.6-14) and a left lens (2.6-30), and a right lens barrel supporting a right display (2.6-14) and a right lens (2.6-30).

The displays (2.6-14) may include arrays of pixels or other display devices for generating images. The displays (2.6-14) may include, for example, organic light emitting diode pixels formed on substrates having thin film circuitry and/or formed on semiconductor substrates, pixels formed from crystalline semiconductor dies, liquid crystal display pixels, scanning display devices, and/or other display devices for generating images.

The lenses (2.6-30) may include one or more lens elements for providing image light from the displays (2.6-14) to the respective eye boxes (2.6-13). The lenses may be implemented using refractive glass lens elements, mirror lens structures (catadioptric lenses), Fresnel lenses, holographic lenses, and/or other lens systems.

When the user's eyes are positioned on the eye boxes (2.6-13), the displays (display panels) (2.6-14) work together to form a display for the device (2.6-10) (e.g., images provided by each of the left and right optical modules (2.6-40) can be viewed by the user's eyes at the eye boxes (2.6-13) so that a stereo image can be generated for the user). While the user views the display, the left image from the left optical module is fused with the right image from the right optical module.

It may be desirable to monitor the user's eyes while the user's eyes are in the eye box (2.6-13). For example, it may be desirable to capture an image of the user's iris (or other part of the user's eye) using a camera for user authentication. It may also be desirable to monitor the user's gaze direction. Gaze tracking information may be used in the form of user input and/or may be used to determine whether image content resolution within the image needs to be locally enhanced in a foveated imaging system. To enable the device (2.6-10) to capture satisfactory eye images while the user's eyes are in the eye box (2.6-13), each optical module (2.6-40) may be provided with a camera, such as a camera (2.6-42), and one or more light sources, such as a light-emitting diode (2.6-44) or other light-emitting device, such as a laser, lamp, or the like. The camera (2.6-42) and the light-emitting diode (2.6-44) may operate at any suitable wavelength (visible, infrared, and/or ultraviolet). For example, the diode (2.6-44) may emit infrared light that is invisible (or nearly invisible) to the user. This allows the eye monitoring operation to be performed continuously without interfering with the user's ability to view the image on the display (2.6-14).

Not all users have the same interpupillary distance (IPD). To provide the device (2.6-10) with the ability to adjust the interpupillary spacing between the modules (2.6-40) along the lateral dimension (X) and thereby the IPD between the eye boxes (2.6-13) to accommodate different user interpupillary distances, the device (2.6-10) may be provided with optical module positioning systems within the housing (2.6-12). The positioning systems may have guide members and actuators (2.6-43) used to position the optical modules (2.6-40) relative to one another.

The actuators (2.6-43) may be manually controlled and/or may be computer-controlled actuators (e.g., computer-controlled motors) to move the support structures (lens barrels) (2.6-32) relative to each other. Information about the positions of the user's eyes may be collected, for example, using cameras (2.6-42). The positions of the eye boxes (2.6-13) may then be adjusted accordingly.

As shown in the back view of the device (2.6-10) of FIG. 53, the cover (2.6-12C) may cover the rear surface (R) while leaving the lenses (2.6-30) of the optical modules (2.6-40) uncovered (e.g., the cover (2.6-12C) may have openings that align with and accommodate the modules (2.6-40). As the modules (2.6-40) move relative to one another along the dimension (X) to accommodate different pupillary distances for different users, the modules (2.6-40) move relative to fixed housing structures, such as the walls of the main portion (2.6-12M), and relative to one another.

A schematic diagram of an exemplary electronic device, such as a head-mounted device or other wearable device, is illustrated in FIG. 54. The device (2.6-10) of FIG. 54 may operate as a standalone device and/or the resources of the device (2.6-10) may be used to communicate with external electronic equipment. For example, communication circuitry in the device (2.6-10) may be used to transmit user input information, sensor information, and/or other information (e.g., wirelessly or via a wired connection) to external electronic devices. Each of these external devices may include components of the type illustrated by the device (2.6-10) of FIG. 54.

As illustrated in FIG. 54, a head-mounted device, such as device (2.6-10), may include control circuitry (2.6-20). The control circuitry (2.6-20) may include storage and processing circuitry to support the operation of the device (2.6-10). The storage and processing circuitry may include storage, such as non-volatile memory (e.g., flash memory or other electrically programmable read-only memory configured to form a solid-state drive), volatile memory (e.g., static or dynamic random access memory), etc. Processing circuitry within the control circuitry (2.6-20) may be used to collect input from sensors and other input devices, and may be used to control output devices. The processing circuitry may be based on one or more microprocessors, microcontrollers, digital signal processors, baseband processors, and other wireless communication circuits, power management units, audio chips, application-specific integrated circuits, etc. During operation, the control circuitry (2.6-20) may use display(s) (2.6-14) and other output devices to provide visual and other outputs to the user.

To support communication between the device (2.6-10) and external equipment, the control circuitry (2.6-20) may communicate using communication circuitry (2.6-22). The circuitry (2.6-22) may include an antenna, radio frequency transceiver circuitry, other wireless communication circuitry, and/or wired communication circuitry. The circuitry (2.6-22), which may sometimes be referred to as control circuitry and/or control and communication circuitry, may support bidirectional wireless communication between the device (2.6-10) and external equipment (e.g., a companion device, such as a computer, a cellular telephone, or other electronic device, an accessory, such as a pointing device, a computer stylus, or other input device, a speaker, or other output devices, etc.) over a wireless link. For example, the circuitry (2.6-22) may include radio frequency transceiver circuitry, such as wireless local area network transceiver circuitry configured to support communication over a wireless local area network link, near field communication transceiver circuitry configured to support communication over a near field communication link, cellular telephone transceiver circuitry configured to support communication over a cellular telephone link, or transceiver circuitry configured to support communication over any other suitable wired or wireless communication link. The wireless communication may be supported, for example, via a Bluetooth® link, a WiFi® link, a wireless link operating at a frequency between 10 GHz and 400 GHz, a 60 GHz link or other millimeter wave link, a cellular telephone link, or other wireless communication link. If desired, the device (2.6-10) may include power circuitry for transmitting and/or receiving wired and/or wireless power and may include a battery or other energy storage device. For example, the device (2.6-10) may include a coil and a rectifier for receiving wireless power provided to the circuit portion of the device (2.6-10).

The device (2.6-10) may include an input/output device, such as the device (2.6-24). The input/output device (2.6-24) may be used to collect user input, collect information about the user's surroundings, and/or provide output to the user. The device (2.6-24) may include one or more displays, such as the display(s) (2.6-14). The display(s) (2.6-14) may include one or more display devices, such as an organic light emitting diode display panel (a panel having organic light emitting diode pixels formed on a polymer substrate or silicon substrate including pixel control circuitry), a liquid crystal display panel, a microelectromechanical system display (e.g., a two-dimensional mirror array or scanning mirror display device), a display panel having an array of pixels formed of crystalline semiconductor light emitting diode dies (sometimes referred to as microLEDs), and/or other display devices.

The sensors (2.6-16) of the input/output devices (2.6-24) may include force sensors (e.g., strain gauges, capacitive force sensors, resistive sensors, etc.), audio sensors such as microphones, touch and/or proximity sensors, capacitive sensors such as touch sensors forming buttons, trackpads, or other input devices, and other sensors. If desired, the sensors (2.6-16) may be optical sensors, e.g., optical sensors that emit and detect light, ultrasonic sensors, optical touch sensors, optical proximity sensors and/or other touch sensors and/or proximity sensors, monochrome and color ambient light sensors, image sensors (e.g., cameras), fingerprint sensors, iris scanning sensors, retina scanning sensors and other biometric sensors, temperature sensors, sensors that measure three-dimensional non-contact gestures ("air gestures"), pressure sensors, sensors for detecting position, orientation and/or motion (e.g., accelerometers, magnetic sensors such as compass sensors, gyroscopes and/or inertial measurement units comprising any or all of these sensors), health sensors such as blood oxygen sensors, heart rate sensors, blood flow sensors and/or other health sensors, radio frequency sensors, three-dimensional camera systems, depth sensors (e.g., structured light sensors and/or depth sensors based on stereo imaging devices that capture three-dimensional images) and/or optical sensors, e.g., self-mixing sensors that collect time-of-flight measurements, and It may include a LIDAR sensor (e.g., a time-of-flight camera), a humidity sensor, a moisture sensor, an eye tracking sensor, an electromyography sensor for detecting muscle activation, a face sensor, and/or other sensors. In some arrangements, the device (2.6-10) may use the sensors (2.6-16) and/or other input/output devices to collect user input. For example, a button may be used to collect button press input, a touch sensor overlay display may be used to collect user touch screen input, a touchpad may be used to collect touch input, a microphone may be used to collect audio input (e.g., voice commands), and an accelerometer may be used to monitor when a finger touches an input surface and thus may be used to collect finger press input.

If desired, the electronic device (2.6-10) may include additional components (see, e.g., other devices (2.6-18) of the input/output device (2.6-24)). Additional components may include a haptic output device, an actuator for moving the movable housing structure, an audio output device, e.g., a speaker, a light emitting diode for status indication, a light source, e.g., a light emitting diode for illuminating a portion of the housing and/or display structure, other light output devices, and/or other circuitry for collecting input and/or providing output. The device (2.6-10) may also include a battery or other energy storage device, a connector port for supporting wired communication with auxiliary equipment and for receiving wired power, and other circuitry.

The housing (2.6-12) may include support structures for the optical modules (2.6-40) and other components of the device (2.6-10). In an exemplary configuration, the housing (2.6-12) may include a head-mounted support structure, such as the frame (2.6-12I) of FIG. 55. The frame (2.6-12I) may have support structures that run vertically (e.g., a frame portion (2.6-12I-M) in the middle of the device (2.6-10) that aligns with the user's nose bridge), and support structures that run horizontally across a top edge of the housing (2.6-12), along a bottom edge of the housing (2.6-12), and along left and right edges of the housing (2.6-12) (e.g., see the peripheral edge portion (2.6-12I-E)). This forms left and right openings within the frame (2.6-12I) that accommodate left and right optical modules (2.6-40), respectively. Alternatively, one or more support members may be present within the device housing (2.6-12) to assist in creating the housing portion (2.6-12M) and to support components within the housing portion (2.6-12M). The frame (2.6-12I) of FIG. 55 is exemplary.

As illustrated in FIG. 55, one or more component support structures, such as a camera support structure (2.6-50), may be coupled to the frame (2.6-12I) (e.g., left and right camera support structures (2.6-50) may be attached to respective left and right peripheral edges, such as edge portions (2.6-12I-E), of the frame (2.6-12I). Support structures for the device (2.6-10), such as the frame (2.6-12I) and the camera support structure (2.6-50), may be formed from polymers, glasses, ceramics, metals, carbon fiber composites or other fiber composites, other materials, and/or combinations of these materials (e.g., sheets of a rigid polymer or other material, and/or other structural members).

There may be multiple component support structures coupled to the frame (2.6-12I). For example, there may be a right camera support structure (2.6-50) coupled to the right side of the frame (2.6-12I) and a left camera support structure (2.6-50) coupled to the left side of the frame (2.6-12I). A single side of the frame (2.6-12I) and the corresponding camera support structure (2.6-50) is illustrated in the example of FIG. 55.

The camera support structure (2.6-50) may be joined to the frame (2.6-12I) using adhesives, welds, screws or other fasteners, mating interlocking structures (e.g., recesses and protrusions for forming a snap fit), press-fit connections, and/or other joining arrangements. In the example of FIG. 55, the fasteners (2.6-56) (e.g., threaded fasteners such as screws) pass through through-hole openings (2.6-54) of the camera support structure (2.6-50) and are received within corresponding openings (2.6-52) of the frame (2.6-12I). The openings (2.6-52) may be threaded openings or may be non-threaded through hole openings in configurations where threaded nuts (as examples) corresponding to the fasteners (2.6-56) are supplied.

The camera support structure (2.6-50) may be configured to accommodate cameras (2.6-46) (e.g., the structure may have recesses, openings, and/or other structures configured to accommodate front-facing cameras). As an example, the camera support structures (2.6-50) may have at least two openings (2.6-58) (e.g., through-hole openings), each of which is configured to accommodate an associated camera. Each camera (2.6-46), which may sometimes be referred to as a camera module, may have a camera module housing and may have a lens and an image sensor coupled to the camera module housing. The cameras (2.6-46) may be sensitive to any suitable wavelengths of light (e.g., infrared, visible, both infrared and visible, and/or other wavelengths) and/or may be stereoscopic (3D) cameras or 2D cameras and/or may be time-of-flight cameras and/or may be structured light 3D cameras and/or may be cameras that collect information for use in positioning virtual objects in a scene including real-world and virtual content and/or may be cameras used as part of a visual odometry system and/or may be other imaging systems. If desired, other optical components may be mounted on the camera mounting structure (2.6-50). For example, ambient light sensors, proximity sensors, and/or other components that emit and/or detect light may be mounted on the structure (2.6-50). Configurations in which two or more cameras (2.6-46) are attached to each camera mounting structure (2.6-50) may sometimes be described as examples herein.

When the cameras (2.6-46) are accommodated within the respective apertures (2.6-58) of the rigid single camera support structure (2.6-50) and/or are otherwise mounted to the camera support structure (2.6-50), the relative positions of these cameras are fixed. This ensures that the direction in which each camera is pointing (e.g., the orientation of the camera's field of view) is fixed with respect to the others, thereby helping to avoid misalignment problems arising from changing camera orientations during use of the device (2.6-10). By attaching the camera support structure (2.6-50) to the frame (2.6-12I), the rigidity and strength of the frame (2.6-12I) can be improved. This helps ensure that the housing portion (2.6-12M) is robust and can maintain the sensitive components, such as the optical modules (2.6-40), aligned with each other in the event that the device (2.6-10) experiences an unwanted drop event.

The camera support structure (2.6-50) may be formed from a layer of polymer or other material with optional ribs and/or other features to help reinforce the structure (2.6-50) without adding excessive weight. To help maintain the rigidity and strength of the camera support structure (2.6-50), the support structure (2.6-50) may partially or completely lack large notches along the periphery of the structure (2.6-50). This may help ensure that there are no portions of the structure (2.6-50) that have locally narrowed widths along the length of the structure (2.6-50) that could reduce the rigidity of the structure (2.6-50). The width of the support structure may be relatively large near the middle of the structure (2.6-50). For example, the support structure (2.6-50) may have a maximum width across its shorter lateral dimension of at least 2 mm, at least 4 mm, at least 8 mm, at least 16 mm, at least 32 mm, less than 40 mm, less than 25 mm, less than 18 mm, less than 15 mm, less than 10 mm, less than 7 mm, or another suitable value. The longitudinal dimension (length) of the support structure (2.6-50) may be at least 2 cm, at least 4 cm, at least 8 cm, at least 16 cm, less than 20 cm, less than 14 cm, less than 10 cm, less than 6 cm, less than 4 cm, or another suitable value. The minimum thickness of the support (2.6-50) may be at least 0.3 mm, at least 0.6 mm, at least 1.2 mm, at least 2.4 mm, less than 5 mm, less than 2.5 mm, less than 1.3 mm, less than 0.8 mm, less than 0.5 mm, or any other suitable value.

In addition to supporting the cameras (2.6-54) and/or other optical components, the camera support structure (2.6-50) may serve as a support for wireless communication components, such as antennas (2.6-60). In the example of FIG. 55, the camera support structure (2.6-50) serves as a support member for a pair of antennas (2.6-60). Alternatively, the camera support structure (2.6-50) may support at least one antenna, at least two antennas, at least three antennas, less than ten antennas, two to five antennas, or any other suitable number of antennas. The antennas (2.6-60) may be formed using any suitable antenna types. For example, the antennas (2.6-60) may include antennas having resonant elements formed from loop antenna structures, patch antenna structures, inverted-F antenna structures, slot antenna structures, planar inverted-F antenna structures, monopoles, dipoles, helical antenna structures, Yagi (Yagi-Uda) antenna structures, hybrids of these designs, and the like. If desired, one or more of the antennas (2.6-60) may be cavity-backed antennas. Different types of antennas may be used for different bands and combinations of bands. For example, one type of antenna may be used to form a local wireless link antenna, and another type of antenna may be used to form a remote wireless link antenna. Dedicated antennas may be used to receive satellite navigation system signals, or, if desired, the antennas (2.6-60) may be configured to receive both satellite navigation system signals and signals for other communication bands (e.g., wireless local area network signals and/or cellular telephone signals). The antennas (2.6-60) may be formed from metal members, patterned thin film metal layers, and/or other conductive structures.

The front side of the device (2.6-10) may be covered by an inactive housing wall (e.g., a polymer layer). In the example of FIG. 56, the front side (F) of the device (2.6-10) is covered by a display (2.6-14F) (e.g., an organic light-emitting diode display, a microLED display, an electrophoretic display, a liquid crystal display, etc.). The pixels of the display (2.6-14F) may be covered by an outer protective display cover layer (e.g., a layer of glass, a layer of transparent polymer, etc.).

Optical windows, such as camera windows (2.6-62), may be provided within the display cover layer. The camera windows (2.6-62) may be formed from portions of the display cover layer or from transparent window structures mounted within openings in the display cover layer. Each optical window may overlap a corresponding optical component and may allow light from the component to escape through the optical window and/or may allow ambient light from the environment to pass through the optical component. The camera windows (2.6-62) (e.g., camera windows within the display cover layer for the display (2.6-14F) and/or optical windows formed within other portions of the housing (2.6-12)) may have optical properties that allow the associated optical component to operate satisfactorily. As an example, consider a camera window (2.6-62) that overlaps one of the forward-facing cameras (2.6-46). As illustrated in FIG. 56, a camera support structure (2.6-50) may be mounted inside the device (2.6-10) such that the camera (2.6-46) is aligned with the camera window (2.6-62) and the antenna (2.6-60) is overlapped by a display cover layer for the display (2.6-14F). Each camera window (2.6-62) may have a level of visible light and/or infrared light transparency sufficient to allow a forward-facing camera (2.6-46) overlapped by that window to capture images of real-world objects in the user's environment and/or to collect other image data. The transmittance of the camera window (2.6-62) may be, for example, at least 50%, at least 90%, at least 95%, or other suitable value (at visible and/or infrared wavelengths). Non-camera components (e.g., ambient light sensors, optical proximity sensors, etc.) may have optical windows with different transmittance values.

FIG. 57 is a cross-sectional view of a portion of a device (2.6-10) in an exemplary configuration in which a display (2.6-14F) is formed on a front surface (F) of the device (2.6-10). As illustrated in FIG. 57, the display (2.6-14F) includes a pixel array (2.6-14M) (e.g., a display layer, e.g., an organic light-emitting diode display layer, an array of crystalline light-emitting diodes, an electrophoretic display layer, a liquid crystal display layer, etc.). A display cover layer (CG) of the display (2.6-14F) can cover and protect the pixel array (2.6-14M). During operation, the display (2.6-14F) can present images to the user (whether the device (2.6-10) is or is not being worn on the user's head). If desired, the display (2.6-14F) may have touchscreen functionality, allowing the user to provide touch input on the front face (F) of the device (2.6-10).

The camera (2.6-46) may be positioned at the edge of the display (2.6-14F) (e.g., outside the active area of the display) and/or the camera (2.6-46) may operate through an aperture within the pixel array (2.6-14M) and/or the camera (2.6-46) may detect light passing through gaps within opaque structures of the pixel array (2.6-14M). In the exemplary configuration of FIG. 57, the camera (2.6-46) is positioned within an inactive display border region devoid of pixels. As illustrated in FIG. 57, the camera window (2.6-62) may be formed from an aperture within an opaque masking layer (2.6-64) that allows light to pass through the display cover layer (CG). The opaque masking layer (2.6-64) may be, for example, a layer of black ink formed on the inner surface of the display cover layer (CG).

The camera (2.6-46) can be mounted to the opening in the camera support structure (2.6-50) using fasteners (2.6-66) (e.g., adhesive fasteners, welds, etc.), using screws or other fasteners such as exemplary fasteners (2.6-68), or using other attachment mechanisms (press-fit joints, mating interlocking structures, etc.). Next, the camera support structure (2.6-50) is attached to the camera support structure (2.6-50) by heat stakes (e.g., heat staked protrusions extending from the camera support structure (2.6-50) into mating openings in the frame (2.6-12I) and/or heat staked protrusions extending from the frame (2.6-12I) into openings), adhesives, welds (e.g., laser welds joining a metal camera support structure to a metal frame, laser welds joining a polymer camera support structure to a polymer frame, and/or other welds), press-fit connections, mating interlocking structures (e.g., snaps), or other attachment structures (2.6-70) and/or screws or other fasteners (2.6-56) (e.g., screws received within threaded openings in the camera support structure (2.6-50) and/or the frame (2.6-12I), inserts It can be attached to the frame (2.6-12I) by screws accommodated in nuts, etc.

As illustrated in FIG. 57, the antenna (2.6-60) may be formed from conductive antenna structures (e.g., metal traces, stamped metal foil, etc.) supported by the camera support structure (2.6-50). During operation, the antenna (2.6-60) may transmit and/or receive wireless signals passing through the display cover layer (CG) and other portions of the housing (2.6-12M).

A schematic diagram of an exemplary antenna (antenna (2.6-60)) coupled to an exemplary radio frequency transceiver circuitry (2.6-90) is illustrated in FIG. 58. The communication circuitry (2.6-22) of FIG. 3 may include the transceiver circuitry (2.6-90) (FIG. 58) and/or other radio circuitry formed from one or more integrated circuits, power amplifier circuitry, low-noise input amplifiers, passive radio frequency (RF) components, one or more antennas (2.6-60), transmission lines, and other circuitry for processing RF radio signals.

The radio frequency transceiver circuitry (2.6-90) of FIG. 58 can utilize the antenna (2.6-60) to process various radio frequency communication bands. For example, the circuitry (2.6-90) can include a wireless local area network transceiver circuitry (e.g., the circuitry (2.6-90) can process 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz bands for WiFi® (IEEE 802.11) communications) and can process the 2.4 GHz Bluetooth® communications band. If desired, the circuitry (2.6-90) may utilize cellular telephone transceiver circuitry or other circuitry for processing cellular telephone radio communications and/or other radio communications in frequency ranges such as 700 to 2700 MHz, 3.4 to 3.6 GHz, 450 MHz to 6 GHz, 24 to 53 GHz, 5 to 8 GHz, 60 to 90 GHz, and/or other communication bands. The circuitry (2.6-90) may process voice data and non-voice data.

The transceiver circuitry (2.6-90) may include satellite navigation system circuitry, such as GPS receiver circuitry for receiving Global Positioning System (GPS) signals at 1575 MHz or for processing other satellite positioning data (e.g., GLONASS signals at 1609 MHz). Satellite navigation system signals are received from a constellation of satellites orbiting the Earth.

In satellite navigation system links, cellular telephone links, and other long-range links, wireless signals are typically used to transmit data over thousands of feet or miles. In Wi-Fi® and Bluetooth® links at 2.4 and 5 GHz, and other short-range wireless links, wireless signals are typically used to transmit data over tens or hundreds of feet. If desired, the device (2.6-10) may include millimeter wave wireless transceiver circuitry. To improve signal reception for millimeter wave communications, phased antenna arrays and beam steering techniques (e.g., methods in which the antenna signal phase and/or amplitude for each antenna in the array is adjusted to perform beam steering) may be used. Antenna diversity schemes may also be used to ensure that antennas that are blocked or otherwise degraded due to the operating environment of the device (2.6-10) can be switched out of use and higher performance antennas can be used in their place. Circuitry (2.6-90) may, if desired, include circuitry for other short-range and long-range wireless links. For example, circuitry (2.6-90) may include circuitry for receiving television and radio signals, paging system transceivers, near-field communication (NFC) circuitry, etc. If desired, circuitry (2.6-90) and/or other wireless circuitry may utilize antennas, such as antenna (2.6-60), for radio frequency sensing (e.g., to determine orientation and/or distance between the device (2.6-10) and other wireless equipment, to form radar-based sensors, etc.).

As illustrated in FIG. 58, a radio frequency transceiver circuit (2.6-90) may be coupled to an antenna feed (2.6-102) of an antenna (2.6-60) using a transmission line (2.6-92). The antenna feed (2.6-102) may include a positive antenna feed terminal, such as a positive antenna feed terminal (2.6-98), and may have a ground antenna feed terminal, such as a ground antenna feed terminal (2.6-100). The transmission line (2.6-92) may be formed from metal traces or other conductive structures on a printed circuit and may have a positive transmission line signal path, such as a path (2.6-94) coupled to terminal (2.6-98), and a ground transmission line signal path, such as a path (2.6-96) coupled to terminal (2.6-100). Transmission line paths, such as path (2.6-92), may be used to route antenna signals within the device (2.6-10). For example, the transmission line paths may be used to couple antenna structures, such as one or more antennas in an array of antennas, to the transceiver circuitry (2.6-90). The transmission lines within the device (2.6-10) may include coaxial cable paths, microstrip transmission lines, stripline transmission lines, edge-coupled microstrip transmission lines, edge-coupled stripline transmission lines, transmission lines formed from combinations of these types of transmission lines, etc. Filter circuitry, switching circuitry, impedance matching circuitry, and other circuitry may be interposed within the transmission line (2.6-92), and/or circuits such as these may be integrated within the antenna (2.6-60) (e.g., to support antenna tuning, to support operation in desired frequency bands, etc.).

The device (2.6-10) may include multiple antennas (2.6-60). The antennas may be used together, or one of the antennas may be switched into use while the other antenna(s) is(are) switched into use. If desired, the control circuitry (2.6-20) may be used to select the optimal antenna for use in real time in the device (2.6-10) and/or to select optimal settings for the tunable radio circuitry associated with one or more of the antennas (2.6-60). The antenna adjustments may be made to tune the antennas to perform within desired frequency ranges, to perform beam steering with a phased antenna array, and to otherwise optimize antenna performance. Sensors may be integrated into the antennas (2.6-60) to collect sensor data in real time that is used to adjust the antennas (2.6-60).

FIG. 59 is a diagram of an exemplary antenna that may be used in the device (2.6-10). In the example of FIG. 59, the antenna (2.6-60) is an inverted-F antenna. As illustrated in FIG. 59, the antenna (2.6-60) may include an antenna resonating element, such as an antenna resonating element (2.6-110), and an antenna ground, such as an antenna ground (2.6-112). The antenna resonating element (2.6-110) may have one or more branches, such as an antenna resonating element arm (2.6-116) and an optional antenna resonating element arm (2.6-116'). A return path (2.6-118) (sometimes referred to as a short path) may be coupled between the resonating element arm (2.6-116) and the ground (2.6-112). The antenna feed (2.6-102) may include a positive antenna feed terminal (2.6-98) and a ground antenna feed terminal (2.6-100) and may be coupled between an element (2.6-110) (e.g., arm (2.6-116)) and ground (2.6-112) in parallel with a return path (2.6-118). One or more optional components (tunable circuits, such as switches, tunable capacitors, tunable inductors, etc.) may be coupled between the antenna ground (2.6-112) and the resonant element arm (2.6-116) and may be adjusted to tune the antenna (2.6-60). The configuration of FIG. 59, where no tunable components are coupled between the arm (2.6-116) and ground (2.6-112), is merely exemplary.

The antenna resonant element arm (2.6-116) may be isolated from ground (2.6-112) by a dielectric aperture (2.6-122). If desired, the aperture (2.6-122) may form a slot antenna element that contributes to the antenna response of the antenna (2.6-60). In the example of FIG. 59, the antenna (2.6-40) is an inverted F-type antenna that does not include a slot antenna element.

Optional parasitic antenna elements, such as the optional parasitic element (2.6-124), may be included in the antenna (2.6-60) to adjust the frequency response of the antenna (2.6-60).

Antennas such as the antenna (2.6-60) of FIG. 59 (e.g., inverted-F antennas, slot antennas, hybrid inverted-F slot antennas, etc.) and/or other types of antennas (2.6-60) (e.g., patch antennas, loop antennas, etc.) may be used to support any suitable operations involving transmission and/or reception of wireless signals.

The antennas (e.g., antenna resonating elements, parasitic elements, antenna ground structures, feed structures, and/or other structures for each antenna (2.6-60)) may be formed from conductive structures such as metal members (e.g. , metal structures formed from radio, machined metal parts, stamped sheet metal, etc.), metal traces (e.g., patterned metal deposited by physical vapor deposition or laser-assisted deposition techniques), other conductive materials (e.g., carbon nanowires, etc.), and/or other conductive antenna structures. These conductive structures may be supported by substrates such as rigid and/or flexible printed circuit boards, polymeric housing structures (e.g., portions of the camera support structure (2.6-50)), dielectric members formed from glass, ceramic, and/or other dielectrics, and/or other antenna support structures.

FIGS. 60, 61, 62, and 63 are cross-sectional side views of exemplary conductive antenna structures (2.6-126) for use in forming antennas (2.6-60).

In the exemplary configuration of FIG. 60, laser direct structuring (LDS) techniques are used to form antenna structures (2.6-126). A laser beam (2.6-128) is used to selectively illuminate a region (2.6-130) on the surface of a dielectric antenna support structure, such as structure (2.6-50). The structure (2.6-50) in the example of FIG. 60 may be formed from a polymer having an additive to help render the structure (2.6-50) sensitive to laser light exposure. After laser light exposure using the beam (2.6-128), electroplating operations are used to selectively deposit conductive structures (2.6-126) on the area (2.6-130) without depositing conductive structures elsewhere on the exposed surface of the structure (2.6-50), thereby forming structures (2.6-126) having a desired antenna shape (e.g., to form antenna resonant elements, parasitic elements, grounds, and/or other patterned antenna structures, as illustrated in FIG. 59).

In the example of FIG. 61, the conductive antenna structures (2.6-126) are metal traces deposited on a printed circuit (2.6-132). These metal traces may be deposited by physical vapor deposition and patterned using photolithography and/or may be formed using other deposition and patterning techniques. The metal traces (2.6-134) of the printed circuit (2.6-132) may assist in transmitting radio frequency signals to and/or from the antenna structures (2.6-126). An adhesive (2.6-136) may be used to attach the printed circuit (2.6-132) to the surface of the support structure (2.6-50).

If desired, the conductive antenna structures (2.6-126) may be formed from metal structures embedded within the support structure (2.6-50). For example, the metal antenna structures (e.g., wires, metal foils, structural metal members, sheet metal parts, and/or other conductive antenna structures forming the antenna structures (2.6-126)) may be embedded within the polymer forming the support structure (2.6-50), as illustrated in FIG. 62 (e.g., one or more shots of the polymer for the support structure (2.6-50) may be molded over the conductive antenna structures (2.6-126).

In the illustrative example of FIG. 63, a printed circuit (2.6-132) has metal traces forming conductive antenna structures (2.6-126) and metal traces (2.6-134) forming signal paths such as transmission lines. As shown in FIG. 63, the printed circuit (2.6-132) may be embedded within a support structure (2.6-50) (e.g., a polymer forming the support structure (2.6-50) may be molded over the printed circuit (2.6-132).

The arrays of FIGS. 60, 61, 62, and/or 63 and/or other arrays can be used to form antennas (2.6-60) on a camera support structure (2.6-50), while the camera support structure (2.6-50) simultaneously serves as a support and alignment member for the cameras (2.6-46).

FIG. 64 is a plan view of an exemplary camera support structure formed using multiple shots of a polymer. One shot of the polymer forms a portion (2.6-50-1) of the camera support structure (2.6-50), and another shot of the polymer forms a portion (2.6-50-2) of the camera support structure (2.6-50). The portion (2.6-50-1) may, for example, include fibers or other filler embedded within the shot of the polymer-formed portion (2.6-50-1), or the portion (2.6-50-1) may have an embedded fiber composite member (e.g., a rod, strip, or other elongated member of carbon fiber material or a reinforcing member formed from another reinforcing member). This may help to locally reinforce and stiffen the portion (2.6-50-1) (e.g., to improve the rigidity of the portion (2.6-50-1) compared to the portion (2.6-50-2). As illustrated in FIG. 64, a reinforcing member (2.6-50M) may extend between the apertures (2.6-58) (and thus the cameras (2.6-46)) to prevent bending of the intervening portion of the structure (2.6-50) (e.g., to prevent bending of the structure (2.6-50) out of the X-Y plane of FIG. 64) and thereby prevent undesirable bending-induced camera misalignment. The portion (2.6-50-1) may, if desired, be free of conductive material, such as conductive carbon fibers (e.g., to reduce the presence of conductive material that may interfere with the operation of the overlapping antennas).

FIG. 65 is a side cross-sectional view of a camera support structure (2.6-50) taken along line (2.6-140) of FIG. 64 and viewed in the direction (2.6-142) of FIG. 64. As illustrated in FIG. 65, the camera support structure (2.6-50) may include an embedded reinforcing structure, such as a fiber composite reinforcing member (2.6-50M), for example, an elongated strip-shaped carbon fiber reinforcing member. The member (2.6-50M) may be embedded within a portion (2.6-50-2). The portions (2.6-50-1, 2.6-50-2) may be formed from first and second shots of a molded polymer material, or may be formed using other techniques.

It may be desirable to detect misalignment of the cameras (2.6-46) due to deformation of the camera support structure (2.6-50). As shown in the cross-sectional side view of the structure (2.6-50) in FIG. 66, a bending sensor, such as sensor (2.6-16B), may be mounted on the camera support structure (2.6-50) between the cameras (2.6-46). The sensor (2.6-16B) may be a strain gauge or other sensor configured to detect bending of the structure (2.6-50) (e.g., bending about a bending axis (2.6-150)). The flexible printed circuit (2.6-152) may have signal lines that transmit bending measurements to the control circuitry (2.6-20) ( FIG. 3 ). In response to measuring the bending in the structure (2.6-50), the control circuitry (2.6-20) may take corrective action to compensate for any expected misalignment between the cameras (2.6-46). For example, if the cameras (2.6-46) are detected to be misaligned by 1° from the data collected by the sensor (2.6-16B), the control circuitry (2.6-20) may digitally compensate for the measured misalignment (e.g., by shifting and/or warping the camera image data collected by the cameras (2.6-46) to ensure that the images from the cameras (2.6-46) can be stitched together as desired or otherwise used as desired to operate the device (2.6-10).

If desired, the device (2.6-10) may have one or more camera positioning devices, such as the actuator (2.6-160) of FIG. 67. The actuator (2.6-160) may change the angular orientation of the camera (2.6-46) relative to the structure (2.6-50). In response to detecting, using the sensor (2.6-16B), that the structure (2.6-50) has been bent by 2° about the axis (150) of FIG. 66, for example, the control circuitry (2.6-20) may instruct the actuator (2.6-160) to move the camera (2.6-46) to compensate. For example, the cameras (2.6-46) can be tilted in the opposite direction by a compensation amount (e.g., -2o), thereby ensuring that the cameras (2.6-46) remain aligned even when the structure (2.6-50) undergoes deformation during operation of the device (2.6-10).

The use of strain gauges to detect bending is exemplary. Any suitable sensor (2.6-16) may be used to detect camera misalignment due to deformation of the support structure (2.6-50). The effects of camera misalignment may be compensated for by physically steering optical components, such as the cameras (2.6-46), by processing image data from the cameras (2.6-46) (e.g., image warping, etc.), and/or by otherwise compensating for the detected misalignment (as described in connection with FIG. 67). The examples of FIGS. 64, 65, 66, and 67 are exemplary.

III: Display Integration Assembly

FIG. 68 illustrates a perspective view of a front cover assembly (3-100) of an HMD device described herein, for example, the front cover assembly (3-1) of the HMD (3-100) illustrated in FIG. 68 or any other HMD device illustrated and described herein. The front cover assembly (3-100) illustrated in FIG. 1 may include a transparent or translucent cover (3-102), a shroud (3-104) (or “canopy”), adhesive layers (3-106), a display assembly (3-108) including a lenticular lens panel or array (3-110), and structural trim (3-112). The adhesive layer (3-106) may secure the shroud (3-104) and/or the transparent cover (3-102) to the display assembly (3-108) and/or the trim (3-112). The trim (3-112) can secure various components of the front cover assembly (3-100) to the frame or chassis of the HMD device.

In at least one example, as illustrated in FIG. 68, the display assembly (3-108) including the transparent cover (3-102), the shroud (3-104), and the lenticular lens array (3-110) can be curved to accommodate the curvature of a user's face. The transparent cover (3-102) and the shroud (3-104) can be curved two-dimensionally or three-dimensionally, for example, can be curved vertically in the Z direction into and out of the Z-X plane and horizontally in the X direction into and out of the Z-X plane. In at least one example, the display assembly (3-108) can include a display panel having pixels configured to project light through the shroud (3-104) and the transparent cover (3-102), as well as the lenticular lens array (3-110). The display assembly (3-108) can be curved in at least one direction, for example, a horizontal direction, to accommodate the curvature of the user's face from one side (e.g., the left side) to the other side (e.g., the right side). In at least one example, each layer or component of the display assembly (3-108), which may include a lenticular lens array (3-110) and a display layer, as illustrated and described in further detail in subsequent drawings, can be curved similarly or concentrically in the horizontal direction to accommodate the curvature of the user's face.

In at least one example, the shroud (3-104) may include a transparent or translucent material through which the display assembly (3-108) projects light. In one example, the shroud (3-104) may include one or more opaque portions, such as opaque ink-printed portions or other opaque film portions on a rear surface of the shroud (3-104). The rear surface may be the surface of the shroud (3-104) that faces the user's eyes when the HMD device is worn. In at least one example, the opaque portions may be on a front surface of the shroud (3-104) that is opposite the rear surface. In at least one example, the opaque portion or portions of the shroud (3-104) may include peripheral portions that visually conceal any components around the outer periphery of the display screen of the display assembly (3-108). In this manner, the opaque portions of the shroud conceal any other components of the HMD device, including electronic components, structural components, etc., that would otherwise be visible through the transparent or translucent cover (3-102) and/or shroud (3-104).

In at least one example, the shroud (3-104) may define one or more transparent openings (3-120) through which the sensors may transmit and receive signals. In one example, the portions (3-120) are openings through which the sensors may extend or transmit and receive signals. In one example, the portions (3-120) are transparent portions, or portions that are more transparent than the surrounding translucent or opaque portions of the shroud, through which the sensors may transmit and receive signals through the shroud and through the transparent cover (3-102). In one example, the sensors may include cameras, IR sensors, LUX sensors, or any other visual or non-visual environmental sensors of the HMD device.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIG. 68) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 69-73 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 69-73 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 68.

FIG. 69 illustrates a partial cross-sectional view of an example front cover assembly (3-200), including a display assembly (3-208) coupled to a shroud (3-204) via a display bracket (3-214). The shroud (3-204) may be coupled to a shroud bracket (3-216), which may couple the front cover assembly (3-200) to one or more structural frame members (3-218) of the HMD device. The display bracket (3-214) may extend behind the display assembly (3-208) and secure the display assembly (3-208) adjacent the shroud (3-204) such that pixels of a display screen of the display assembly (3-208) may project light outwardly through the shroud (3-204).

In at least one example, the display assembly (3-208) is curved in one direction, e.g., horizontally, but not vertically, e.g., up and down, in the orientation illustrated in FIG. 69. In such an example, the shroud (3-204) may be curved in both the vertical and horizontal directions, as illustrated in FIG. 1 and described above.

Figure 70 illustrates a side view of another front cover assembly (3-300) similar to the front cover assembly (3-200) illustrated in Figure 69. In Figure 70, the front cover assembly (3-300) is shown without an outer transparent cover, but includes a shroud (3-304) defining mechanical or visual openings (3-320) through which sensors can transmit and receive signals, as well as a display assembly (3-308) secured to the rear or rear surface of the shroud (3-304).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 69 and 70 ) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 68 and 71 through 73 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 68 and 71 through 73 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 69 and 70 .

FIG. 71 illustrates a partial cross-sectional view of an example of a front cover assembly (3-400) including an outer transparent or translucent cover (3-402), a shroud (3-404), a blinker film (3-422) secured to the rear/back surface of the shroud (3-404), a display assembly (3-408) including a lenticular lens array (3-410), a display bracket (3-414) securing the display assembly to the shroud (3-404) such that an air gap (3-424) is defined between the lenticular lens array (3-410) and the blinker film (3-422), and a graphite layer (3-426) disposed on the rear/back surface of the display bracket (3-414). The air gap (3-424) can define an open space or volume between the lenticular lens array (3-410) and the blinker film (3-422) to prevent other components from being positioned within the gap (3-424) between the lenticular lens array (3-410) and the blinker film (3-422). In at least one example, the blinker film (3-422) can be configured to conceal the display from view when the display of the display assembly (3-408) is not turned on or projecting light and/or when someone views the front display assembly from certain predetermined angles (e.g., wide angles instead of narrower, more "straight-ahead" viewing angles in front of the display (3-408). In at least one example, the lenticular lens array (3-410) may be used to create a three-dimensional effect for people viewing the outward-facing display (3-408) through the cover (3-402) and shroud (3-404) without wearing the HMD. The gap (3-424) may be present to allow light transmitted through the cover (3-402), shroud (3-404), and blinker film (3-422) to properly pass through the lenses of the lenticular lens array (3-410) to create the desired three-dimensional effect.

In at least one example, the blinker film (3-422) may be adhered to the shroud (3-404) via an optically clear adhesive (3-423) as illustrated in FIG. 71A. In one example, the lenticular lens array (3-410) may be adhered to the display assembly (3-408) via an optically clear adhesive (3-411) as illustrated in FIG. 71A. In at least one example, the blinker film (3-422) may diffuse and darken light, including specular highlights from the lenticular lens array (3-410), passing from the display assembly (3-408). In at least one example, diffusing particles may be formed within the optically clear adhesive layer (3-423), which may be referred to as a haze film (3-432), between the blinker film (3-422) and the shroud (3-404). In at least one example, the diffusing particles may be formed within the blinker film (3-422) itself. In at least one example, the diffusing particles may be formed within the shroud (3-404). In at least one example, the diffusing particles may comprise titanium dioxide. In at least one example, the display assembly (3-408) may comprise an LCD and/or OLED display layer rather than a lenticular lens array (3-410), for example, having a flat display assembly (as opposed to the curved display assembly (3-408) shown) to provide 3-D visual effects. The front cover assembly of the HMD may also include a dust seal (3-409) disposed between the shroud (3-404) and other components of the assembly, including the lenticular lens array (3-422) and/or the display assembly (3-408), to prevent dust and other particles/contaminants from entering the air gap (3-424) between the lenticular lens array (3-410) and the blinker film (3-422).

In at least one example, the graphite layer (3-426) can be one of a plurality of graphite layers, for example, two layers, three layers, four layers, or more than four layers. The graphite layers (3-426) can be configured to spread heat from the display assembly (3-408) coupled to the display bracket (3-414). In at least one example, the display bracket (3-414) is a metallic material that acts as a heat sink to dissipate heat from the display assembly (3-408). In one example, the display bracket (3-414) includes a thermally conductive material. In one example, the display bracket (3-414) includes magnesium.

In at least one example, the cover (3-402) includes a transparent core material (3-427). In one example, the core material (3-427) may include polycarbonate. In one example, the core material includes glass or other ceramic materials. In at least one example, optically clear adhesive (OCA) layers (3-428a, 3-428b) may be disposed on opposite sides of the core material (3-427), respectively. In at least one example, first and second protective coating layers/films (3-430a, 3-430b) may be disposed on opposite sides of the core material (3-427), respectively, with the OCA layers (3-428a, 3-428b) being disposed between the respective protective coating films (3-430a, 3-430b) and the core material (3-427l). In at least one example, an additional hard coat layer and/or an additional anti-reflective coating, which may be part of the hard coat layer, may be disposed over the first polycarbonate film (3-430a) to define an outer surface of the transparent cover (3-402).

In at least one example, the cover assembly (3-400) may include a haze film (3-432) disposed on the rear/back surface of the shroud (3-404). In one example, an optical bonding material, such as an optically clear bonding material, may be disposed between the blinker film (3-422) and the shroud (3-404). In one example, the bonding material may form or include the haze film (3-432) from particles within the bonding material. In at least one example, the front cover assembly (3-400) may also include a bracket (3-434) disposed outside the periphery of the display assembly (3-408) relative to the rear/back surface of the shroud (3-404). The display bracket (3-414) may be mounted to the shroud (3-404) via the bracket (3-434), as illustrated in FIG. In at least one example, one or more opaque painted portions (3-436) may be applied or formed on the rear/back surface of the shroud (3-404), for example, between the bracket (3-434) and the shroud (3-404), to visually conceal the bracket (3-434) from being seen from the outside or front of the front cover assembly (3-400). The shroud may also include an opaque portion or portions disposed generally around an outer perimeter area of the shroud to conceal components behind the perimeter portion, such as cameras, sensors, brackets, circuitry, frame and structural components of the HMD. The opaque portions may be applied to the shroud (3-404).

In at least one example, the bracket (3-434) may be referred to as a shroud canopy. The shroud (3-404) may include a layer of ink, paint, film, or other opaque layer (3-435) disposed between the bracket (3-434) and the shroud (3-404) to visually conceal any glue or other connecting mechanisms that secure the bracket (3-434) to the shroud (3-404) from someone looking through the front of the device. The bracket (3-434) may also be opaque and provide a visual barrier to components behind/within the HMD device. A film or paint layer (3-435) may be disposed on the shroud (3-404) around a peripheral edge or edge area surrounding the display assembly (3-408) or around a more opaque area of the shroud (3-404) through which the display assembly (3-408) is configured to project light.

FIG. 71B illustrates an exploded view of a front cover assembly (3-400) of an HMD device, including a transparent cover (3-402), a shroud (3-404), and a frame (3-448) to which the cover glass (3-402) and shroud (3-404) can be secured. The shroud (3-404) may include or define an opening (3-440) through which one or more cameras or other sensors of the HMD can transmit and receive signals. The shroud (3-404) may also include an optically opaque, infrared-transparent window (3-438) through which an infrared sensor and/or emitter can transmit and receive infrared light. The shroud (3-404) may also include another window or opening (3-442) through which other sensors of the HMD can transmit and receive signals.

In at least one example, the cover (3-402) may include a rear-painted opaque trim layer (3-444) disposed on the rear surface of the cover (3-402) between the cover (3-402) and the shroud (3-404). The trim layer (3-444) may include opaque inks, paints, films, or other opaque layers to reduce stray signals, e.g., optical signals, from various emitters of the HMD from undesirably bouncing between the cover (3-402) and the shroud (3-404), thereby reducing crosstalk between the sensors and the emitters. The trim layer (3-444) may also include a sensor peripheral trim portion (3-402) on the rear surface of the cover (3-402) to limit direct stray light around the sensor disposed behind the window (3-438). The trim portion (3-402) may include layers and materials that are the same or different from those of the trim layer (3-444), but may be aligned with the window (3-438) and thus positioned directly around the periphery of an emitter or sensor of the HMD that transmits and/or receives signals through the window (3-438) to prevent stray signals, including stray signals, from crosstalking with other emitters/sensors. In this manner, stray crosstalk between the cover (3-402) and the shroud (3-404) may be reduced.

FIG. 71C illustrates another exploded perspective view of a front cover assembly (3-400) including a shroud (3-404), a cover (3-402), a trim layer (3-444), a trim portion (3-446) defining a sensor window (3-445), windows (3-440), and a sensor/emitter window (3-438). In at least one example, the assembly (3-400) may also include an optical seal (3-450) disposed around the window (3-438) on the front face of the shroud (3-404) between the shroud (3-404) and the cover (3-402). The optical seal (3-450) may be a physical barrier extending between the shroud (3-404) and the cover (3-402), for example in physical contact with both the shroud (3-404) and the cover (3-402), and extending around the window (3-438), such that optical or other signals transmitted by the emitter or received by a sensor of the HMD through the window (3-438) are directed through the window (3-445) of the cover (3-402) to reduce stray signals and crosstalk. The seal (3-450) may be aligned with a trim portion (3-446) of the cover (3-402).

In at least one example, the shroud (3-404) and cover (3-402) may include radio frequency transparent materials, and the HMD may include antennas and emitters configured to pass radio frequency signals through the shroud (3-404) and cover (3-402).

In at least one example, the shroud (3-404) may include notches or cutouts recessed into or positioned on a rear surface of the shroud (3-404) to accommodate one or more antennas. The cutouts may be shaped and positioned to accommodate placement of the antennas adjacent to or relative to the shroud to allow for a greater distance between the antennas and one or more ground planes for the antennas. The increased resonant distance of the antennas provided by the shroud cutouts may improve the performance of the antennas. In one example, an increase of about 0.8 mm in the distance between an antenna positioned within a cutout and a ground plane may improve antenna performance by about 3 dB.

In at least one example, the rear surface of the shroud (3-404) (e.g., the face of the shroud (3-404) facing inward toward the interior volume of the HMD device) may include posts, brackets, or other fiducial features for aligning the cameras within the HMD device when assembled.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 71-71c) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 68-70 and FIGS. 72 and 73 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 68-70 and FIGS. 72 and 73 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 71-71c.

FIG. 72 illustrates another cutaway view of an example front cover display (3-500) without a shroud or outer transparent cover. In the illustrated example of FIG. 72, the assembly (3-500) includes a blinker film (3-522) separated from a lenticular lens array (3-510) by a gap (3-524), wherein the lenticular lens array (3-510) is part of or disposed on/with respect to the display assembly (3-508). FIG. 72 also illustrates a display bracket (3-514) that couples the display assembly (3-508) to the bracket (3-534). FIG. 72 illustrates the curvature of the display assembly (3-508) including the lenticular lens (3-510) and the curvature of the blinker film (3-522).

FIG. 73 illustrates a close-up view of a lenticular lens array (3-610) similar to the array (3-510) illustrated in FIG. 72, with individual lens or array portions (3-611) depicted. In at least one example, as noted above in other examples and as illustrated in FIG. 73, the angles of the array portions (3-611) may vary across the horizontal width or length of the lenticular lens array (3-610), since the display screen (3-609) of the display assembly (3-608) as well as the lens array (3-610) may be curved. The variation in the angles of the array portions (3-611) may prevent them from blocking light from the display screen as it is curved from the perspective of someone outside and in front of the front cover assembly (3-600) onto which light from the display screen (3-609) is projected. In one example, the display screen (3-609) may include a panel of pixels. In one example, the display screen (3-609) includes an OLED panel.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 72 and 73) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 68-71 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 68-71 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 72 and 73.

IV: Shroud

4.0: Systems with Displays and Sensor Hiding Structures

FIG. 74 is a front view of an exemplary ring-shaped decorative covering structure for a device (4-10). The exemplary ring-shaped shroud (4-100) of FIG. 74 may be mounted beneath an inner surface of a display cover layer for a display (4-14F) within an inactive area (IA). This may help conceal optical components and other internal portions of the device (4-10) from view from outside the device (4-10). The shroud (4-100) may be formed from one or more unbroken ring-shaped members and/or may be formed from multiple shroud segments attached using adhesives, fasteners, or other attachment structures. If desired, the shroud (4-100) may be formed from multiple members that are sandwiched together along some or all of their lengths. In an exemplary configuration that may sometimes be described herein as an example, the shroud (4-100) may be formed of an inner piece (e.g., a complete or partial inner ring), which may sometimes be referred to as an inner shroud member, shroud trim, or shroud trim member, and may be formed of an outer piece or pieces (e.g., one or more strips of material or covering members, a complete ring, one or more partial rings, etc.), which may sometimes be referred to as a shroud cover, canopy, or shroud canopy.

As illustrated in FIG. 74, the shroud (4-100) may have optical component windows for accommodating components (4-60, 4-62, 4-64, 4-84, 4-66, 4-68, 4-70, 4-72, 4-74, 4-76, 4-78, 4-82, 4-80). The optical component windows may be formed by through-hole openings within the shroud (4-100), by recesses or other partial openings that do not extend completely through the shroud (4-100), by inserted optical window members within the shroud through-hole openings, and/or by other shroud optical component window structures. The display (4-14F) may have a display cover layer formed of a bulk material having corresponding optical component windows (e.g., through-hole openings, recessed regions, inserted window elements within the through-hole openings, etc.) and/or having desired optical properties (e.g., a display cover layer formed of one or more layers of a material such as glass and/or a polymer that is sufficiently transparent over the operating wavelength range of the overlapping optical component to allow the optical component to operate satisfactorily through the cover layer without forming openings or other window structures in the cover layer).

The shroud (4-100) may have any suitable shape. For example, the outline of the shroud (4-100) may be rectangular with rounded corners as illustrated in FIG. 74, may have teardrop shapes on the left and right sides of the device (4-10), may have an oval outline, and/or may have other outlines with curved and/or straight edge segments. FIG. 75 is a front view of a portion of the shroud (4-100) showing how the inner and outer edges of the shroud (4-100) may be curved (e.g., to follow a teardrop shape). The shaft (4-100) may, if desired, have a curved peripheral edge along most or all of its length.

The width of the shroud (4-100) may be constant along its length, or the shroud (4-100) may have portions that are wider than other portions. The thickness of the shroud (4-100) (e.g., the dimension of the shroud (4-100) into the page in the orientation of FIG. 74) may be less than the width of the shroud (4-100) (the lateral dimension of the shroud (4-100) into the page in the orientation of FIG. 74) or the thickness of the shroud may be equal to or greater than the width of the shroud. The shroud may have a two-dimensional shape (e.g., the shroud (4-100) may have a planar shape lying in the XZ plane in the example of FIG. 74) or may have a three-dimensional shape (e.g., a shape having a curved cross-sectional profile and/or a shape characterized by inner and/or outer surfaces of compound curvature). In an exemplary configuration, most or all of the inner and outer surfaces of the shroud have a compound curvature surface.

The optical components below the inactive area (IA) may include components that operate in concert with each other on the left and right sides of the device (4-10). For example, the scene cameras, tracking cameras, and/or structured light cameras within the device (4-10) may be formed in pairs, each including a left camera and a corresponding right camera. The left scene camera and the right scene camera may operate together to capture overlapping images that provide the device (4-10) with a wide field of view for collecting pass-through video, for example. The left and right tracking cameras may operate together to track the user's hands or other external objects. The left and right structured light cameras or other 3D cameras may be used together to capture 3D images of the user's environment. To improve the performance of the left and right optical components in these types of paired component arrangements, it may be desirable to maintain precise alignment between the left and right optical components. To help maintain the left and right optical components aligned with each other on the respective left and right sides of the device (4-10), the device (4-10) may be provided with one or more housing structures that help support the optical components.

As illustrated in FIG. 76, for example, the device (4-10) may be provided with internal support structures, such as brackets (4-102), that help support optical components (4-104) on the left and right sides of the device (4-10). The components (4-104) may be, for example, optical components of the type illustrated below the inactive area (IA) of FIG. 74. The bracket (4-102) may be formed of a rigid metal and/or other rigid materials (e.g., a rigid polymer, a carbon fiber composite material, or other fiber composite material). A nose bridge recess within the bracket (4-102) (e.g., within a portion of the bracket (4-102) near the nose bridge portion (4-16NB)) may help the bracket (4-102) conform to the shape of the user's face. The bracket (4-102) may have an elongated strip shape that extends along a portion of the length of the inactive area (IA) (e.g., on the lower edge of the device (4-10)).

The bracket (4-102) may be attached to the device (4-10) by an attachment structure (e.g., adhesive, fasteners, press-fit joints, and/or other attachment mechanism) that allows the bracket (4-102) to float relative to the remainder of the housing portion (4-16M) during a drop event. The ability of the bracket (4-102) to shift its position somewhat relative to other housing structures without significantly distorting the shape of the bracket (4-102) and the rigidity of the bracket (4-102) may help maintain alignment of components on the left and right sides of the device (4-10) with one another during periods of excessive stress, such as when the device (4-10) experiences high stresses during an unexpected drop event.

In the example of FIG. 76, the bracket (4-102) is mounted below the inactive area (IA) and has a nose bridge recess having a curved edge configured to accommodate the user's nose when the device (4-10) is worn on the user's head. The bracket (4-102) may have other shapes, if desired. The components (4-104) may be attached to the respective left and right sides of the bracket (4-102) and/or other support structures (e.g., the shroud (4-100)) within the device (4-10) using adhesives, fasteners, press-fit connections, and/or other attachment structures.

Figure 77 is a cross-sectional view of a portion of the device (4-10). As shown in Figure 77, the shroud (4-100) may overlap one or more optical components (4-104) in the non-active area (IA). The non-active area (IA) may form a ring-shaped boundary surrounding the active area (AA). The display (4-14F) may have a display cover layer, such as a display cover layer (4-92). The layer (4-92) may be formed of glass, a polymer, a ceramic, a crystalline material such as sapphire, other materials, and/or combinations of such materials. The layer (4-92) may comprise a single layer of material or multiple stacked layers of material. In the active area (AA), pixels (P) within the display panel (4-14P) display images viewable through the display cover layer (92). The shroud (4-100) may be absent in the active area (AA) (e.g., the shroud may have a ring shape surrounding an opening above the panel (4-14P) as illustrated in FIG. 77), or the shroud (4-100) may optionally have a portion (sometimes referred to as a canopy or shroud structure) that overlaps the display panel (4-14P). The canopy may be fully or partially transparent. In the inactive area (IA), the shroud (4-100) overlaps the components (4-104). Components (4-104) may be optical components that emit and/or detect light that passes through transparent portions of the layer (4-92) and the shroud (4-100) and/or through optical component windows formed by recesses, through-hole openings, window members, and/or other window structures within the layer (92) and the shroud (4-100).

The display cover layer (4-92) may include planar surfaces and/or curved surfaces. In an exemplary configuration, most or all of the inner and outer surfaces of the display cover layer (4-92) have a curvature.

The curved surfaces of the display cover layer (4-92) may include curved surfaces that can be flattened to a plane without distortion (sometimes referred to as developable surfaces without compound curvature or curved surfaces). Such surfaces may, for example, overlap the active area (AA). The curved surfaces of the display cover layer (4-92) may also include curved surfaces characterized by compound curvature (e.g., surfaces that can only be flattened to a plane with distortion, sometimes referred to as non-developable surfaces). Some or all portions of the inner and outer surfaces of the display cover layer (4-92) within the non-active area (IA) may, for example, be characterized by compound curvature. This allows the periphery of the display (4-14F) to transition smoothly away from the active area, and provides an attractive appearance and a compact shape for the device (4-10). The compound curvature of the display cover layer (4-92) within the inactive area (IA) may also enable placement of optical components in desired orientations beneath the inactive area (IA). The inner and outer surfaces of the display cover layer (4-92) within the active area (AA) may have compound curvatures, may be deployable surfaces, or may include both deployable surface areas and compound curvature areas.

Image data and other data collected by the optical components may be digitally warped to compensate for optical distortion associated with the display cover layer (4-92). To help minimize optical distortion, one or more of the optical components may optionally be oriented parallel to, or close to, a surface normal of a portion of the display cover layer surface that overlaps the optical component.

As an example, consider the optical components (4-104) of FIG. 77. As illustrated in FIG. 77, some optical components, such as the exemplary optical component (4-104B) operating in direction (4-112), may be forward-facing at portions of the display cover layer (4-92) where the surface normal of the layer (4-92) is oriented parallel to or nearly parallel to the Y-axis (e.g., direction (4-112) may be parallel or nearly parallel to the Y-axis of FIG. 77). Other optical components, such as the exemplary optical component (4-104A) operating in direction (4-110), may be inclined away from the forward direction by a non-zero angle (e.g., at least 10 ^° , at least 20 ^° , less than 90 ^° , less than 50 ^° , or another suitable positive angle). The direction (4-110) can be parallel or nearly parallel to the surface normal of the overlapping surface of the display cover layer (92) (e.g., inclined within 30 ^° , within 20 ^° , within 10 ^° , or other suitable amount), and can lie within the XY plane of FIG. 77 or inclined from the XY plane (e.g., by orienting the component (4-104A) such that the direction (4-110) is inclined upward in the +Z direction or downward in the -Z direction in addition to being inclined away from the +Y direction as shown in FIG. 77).

In this type of arrangement, the display cover layer (4-92) may have a compound curvature in the inactive area (IA), and the shroud (4-100) may have a shape having a cross-sectional profile that mirrors that of the display cover layer (92) in the inactive area (IA) (e.g., the outer and/or inner surfaces of the shroud (4-100) within the inactive area (IA) may be compound curvature surfaces). When components, such as components (4-104A, 4-104B), are mounted to the shroud (4-100) and/or otherwise supported by support structures of the device (4-10) and act through the shroud (4-100) and the display cover layer (4-92), the curved shape of the display cover layer (4-92) and the shroud (4-100) can help orient these components in desired orientations (e.g., forwardly with respect to components, such as component (4-104B), or angled away from the forward direction with respect to components, such as component (4-104A)).

As an example, optical components mounted on the left and right sides of the nose bridge portion (4-16NB) may be oriented slightly to the left and slightly to the right, respectively, of the +Y forward direction (e.g., to ensure an appropriate field of view for a pair of cameras). As another example, the curved shape of the display cover layer (4-92) and shroud (4-100) along the lower edge of the device (4-10) may cause components of these portions to be oriented slightly downward from the XY plane, which may help orient cameras, such as tracking cameras, toward the user's hands.

The display panel (4-14P) may be a flexible display, such as a flexible organic light emitting diode display having a flexible substrate or a light emitting diode display formed of crystalline semiconductor light emitting diode dies mounted on a flexible substrate. This allows the pixels of the panel (4-14P) forming the active area (AA) and the display panel (4-14P) to bend about a bending axis that runs parallel to the vertical axis (Z), thereby helping to wrap the display (4-14F) and the housing portion (4-16M) around the curved surface of the user's face. If desired, the display panel (4-14P) may be a lenticular display configured to display three-dimensional images (e.g., an autostereoscopic display having a series of parallel lenticular lenses, each overlapping a group of multiple rows of pixels).

The outer and inner surfaces of the display cover layer (4-92) may have the same shape (e.g., they may be parallel to each other), or the outer and inner surfaces may have different shapes. In arrays where the display panel (4-14P) of the display (4-14F) is flexible, it may be desirable to configure the inner surface of the display cover layer (4-92) within the active area (AA) to exhibit a curved surface shape that matches the curved outward-facing surface of the display panel (4-14P) (e.g., the inner and, if desired, outer surfaces of the display cover layer (4-92) within the active area (AA) may be deployable surfaces without compound curvature to match the deployable outward-facing surface of the display panel (4-14P).

The shroud (4-100) and display cover layer (4-92) can be attached to the main housing portion (4-16M) using adhesives, screws and other fasteners, press-fit joints, and/or other attachment mechanisms. Exemplary configurations in which the shroud (4-100) and cover layer (4-92) are attached to the forward-facing edge of the housing wall within the main housing portion (4-16M) using adhesives are illustrated in FIGS. 77-79. In the example of FIG. 78, the shroud (4-100) has an inner shroud member, such as a shroud trim (4-100A), and a corresponding outer shroud member, such as a shroud canopy (4-100B). The shroud trim (4-100A) and shroud canopy (4-100B) can be formed of metals, polymers, ceramics, glass, other materials, and/or combinations of these materials. In an illustrative example, the shroud trim (4-100A) is formed of a black polymer or other dark material, and the shroud canopy (4-100B) is formed of a transparent polymer. The outer surface of the shroud canopy (4-100B) may be smooth to provide the shroud (4-100) with a decoratively attractive appearance.

A layer of pressure-sensitive adhesive (e.g., see adhesive (114)) may be used to attach the canopy (4-100B) to the trim (4-100A). The adhesive may also be used to attach the cover layer (92) and the shroud (4-100) to the housing portion (4-16M). As illustrated in FIG. 78, a first adhesive, such as adhesive (4-122), may be used to attach the display cover layer (92) to the shroud (4-100) (e.g., to a ledge within the shroud trim (4-100A). A second adhesive, such as adhesive (4-124), may then be used to attach the shroud (4-100) (e.g., the shroud trim (4-100A)) to an adjacent lip of a wall within the main housing portion (4-16M).

In some configurations, the adhesives (4-122, 4-124) may be formed of the same type of material. In an exemplary configuration, the adhesives (4-122, 4-124) are different. The housing portion (4-16M) may have a wall having a lip shape that creates a shear force on the adhesive (4-124) as the display (4-14F) is attached to the housing portion (4-16M) by pressing the display (4-14F) against the housing portion (4-16M) in the -Y direction. In this type of scenario, it may be desirable to form the adhesive (4-124) with an adhesive that can satisfactorily bond in the presence of shear forces, such as a molten hot melt adhesive (thermoplastic adhesive) or other liquid adhesive, rather than a pressure sensitive adhesive. The adhesive (4-124) may, if desired, be exposed to a curing agent (UV light, moisture, etc.) before the display (4-14F) is assembled into the housing (4-16M).

It may be desirable to repair the device (4-10). For example, if the user exposes the display (4-14F) to excessive force during a drop event, it may be desirable to replace the display (4-14F) with a new display. This can be accomplished by heating the adhesive (4-124) to loosen the adhesive bond formed by the adhesive (4-124). To prevent the display cover layer (4-92) from separating from the shroud (4-100) while the adhesive (4-124) is being thermally softened, the adhesive (4-122) may be provided with a higher softening point than the adhesive (4-124) (e.g., the adhesive (4-122) may be a two-part hot melt adhesive having a higher melting point than the adhesive (4-124).

Optical components overlapped by the display cover layer (4-92) and shroud (4-100) within the inactive area (IA) can transmit and/or receive light through the shroud (4-100) and the display cover layer (4-92). The layer (4-92) can be formed of laminated glass or other transparent material that allows light for each overlapped optical component (4-104) to pass through the layer (4-92). If desired, a partial recess or through-hole opening can be formed in a portion of the layer (4-92). An optional optical component window member (4-116) can then be inserted within the layer (4-92) (e.g., within the window area (4-118)). As an example, the layer (4-92) may be formed of one or more layers of glass and/or polymer and characterized by a first level of optical transmittance at the operating wavelength(s) for the component (4-104), while the window member (4-116) may be formed of polymers, glasses, and/or other materials characterized by a second level of optical transmittance at the operating wavelength(s) that is greater than the first level of optical transmittance. In other exemplary arrangements, the window member is not embedded within the layer (4-92) (e.g., the optional window member (4-116) of FIG. 78 may be omitted when the layer (4-92) alone is sufficiently transparent to transmit light to the component (4-104)).

The shroud (4-100) may be provided with an optical component window within the region (4-118) to accommodate a nested optical component (4-104). The component (4-104) may be operable at ultraviolet light wavelengths, visible light wavelengths, and/or infrared light wavelengths. In the example of FIG. 78, the shroud trim (4-100A) is provided with a through-hole opening, such as the opening (120), to accommodate the component (4-104), whereas the shroud canopy (4-100B) does not have an opening within the region (4-118). This effectively forms a window recess within the shroud (4-100) in alignment with the components (4-104). The trim (4-100A) may be formed of a black polymer or other light absorbing material, such that the formation of the opening (120) within the trim (4-100A) can help ensure that sufficient light passes through the region (4-118) to allow the component (4-104) to operate satisfactorily. The portion of the canopy (4-100B) that overlaps the opening (4-120) may be transparent (e.g., a transparent polymer).

To help conceal the component (4-104) from observation, the interior surface of the shroud canopy (4-100B) of FIG. 78 is covered with a coating (4-126). The coating (4-126) may be used to provide the region (4-118) with desired appearance and optical properties that ensure that the component (104) can operate satisfactorily. The coating (4-126) may be a thin film interference filter formed of a stack of thin film dielectric layers of alternating refractive index values (having refractive indices and thicknesses selected to produce a desired transmission spectrum and a desired reflection spectrum for the filter), and/or may be a layer of ink (e.g., a polymer layer including a dye, pigment, and/or other colorant), and/or may be any other suitable coating having desired optical properties.

As an example, consider a scenario where component (4-104) transmits and/or receives infrared light. In this type of arrangement, the coating (4-126) may be opaque at visible wavelengths and transparent at infrared wavelengths. This helps conceal component (4-104) from observation from outside of the device (4-10) while allowing infrared light associated with the operation of component (4-104) to pass through shroud (4-100) and layer (4-92).

As another example, consider a scenario where component (4-104) is an ambient light sensor. In such a configuration, coating (4-126) may exhibit a visible light transmittance of (for example) 1 to 8%. This allows sufficient ambient visible light to reach the ambient light sensor to enable the ambient light sensor to read ambient light. At the same time, the transmittance of coating (4-126) may be sufficiently low that coating (4-126) helps reduce the visibility of component (4-104) from the outside of device (4-10).

As these examples demonstrate, areas of the display (4-14F) that overlap with optical components, such as component (4-104) of FIG. 78, may be provided with optical component window structures within the layer (4-92) and/or shroud (4-100) that assist in accommodating the optical components.

If desired, the shroud (4-100) may be provided with a through-hole opening to accommodate a nested optical component. As illustrated in FIG. 79, for example, the shroud (4-100) may include one or more sub-layers (e.g., trim, canopy, and/or other layers). The through-hole opening (4-130) may pass from an inner surface of the shroud (4-100) to an outer surface of the shroud (4-100). The opening (4-130) may be aligned with the optical component (104). The component (104) may be mounted behind the opening (4-130) and/or may be partially or fully accommodated within the opening (4-130) as illustrated in FIG. 79. This allows light to be emitted and/or received by the component (104) without being blocked by the shroud (4-100).

In the exemplary configuration of FIG. 80, the shroud (4-100) also includes one or more sublayers (e.g., trim, canopy, and/or other layers). As illustrated in FIG. 80, a through hole opening may be formed in the shroud (4-100) in alignment with the optical component (104) and filled with an optical component window member (4-132) (e.g., a glass or polymer member, or a window structure formed from other materials and/or combinations of these materials). The optical component window member (4-132) has optical properties (e.g., optical transmittance, reflectivity, absorptivity, haze, etc.) that allow the component (4-104) to satisfactorily transmit and/or receive light through the region (4-118). As an example, the member (4-130) may be formed of a glass that is transparent to infrared light and opaque or transparent to visible light.

As described with respect to FIGS. 75 and 76, a plurality of optical components, such as component (4-104), may be within the inactive area (IA). Each optical component may potentially have a different type of optical component window structure within the shroud (4-100) and/or layer (4-92) to accommodate that component. For example, some areas of the shroud (4-100) may have openings for receiving components as described with respect to FIG. 79, and/or other areas of the shroud (4-100) may have inserted optical window elements such as the element (4-132) of FIG. 80, and/or other areas of the shroud (4-100) may have partial shroud openings (e.g., non-through hole recesses) such as the opening (4-120) of FIG. 78 (which may optionally be covered with a layer such as a coating (4-126) to modify the optical properties of the shroud (4-100).

FIG. 81 is a cross-sectional side view of a portion of a head-mounted device having a fully or partially transparent shroud covering a front face of the device. As illustrated in FIG. 81, the head-mounted device (4-10) may include a display panel (4-14P) for a forward-facing display (4-14). The panel (4-14P) may be a lenticular display (e.g., an autostereoscopic display having lenticular lenses (4-14P') configured to display three-dimensional images for a user).

In the arrangement of FIG. 81, the display cover layer (92) has inner and outer surfaces having compound curvatures within the inactive area (IA) (e.g., a ring-shaped area extending along the perimeter of the layer (4-92)). The inner and outer surfaces of the display cover layer (4-92) within the active area (AA) may also have compound curvatures, or one or both of these surfaces may be deployable surfaces. In the example of FIG. 81, the inner and outer surfaces of the layer (4-92) have compound curvatures in both the inactive area (IA) and the active area (AA) (e.g., these surfaces may not have any deployable surfaces), which may help provide an attractive appearance to the device (4-10).

The shroud of the device (4-10) of FIG. 81 includes a shroud trim (4-100A) and a shroud canopy (4-100B). The trim (4-100A) may have a ring shape and may extend around the periphery of the display (14). The canopy (4-100B), which may be formed of a material such as a polymer, may have an outline that is identical or nearly identical to the outline of the display cover layer (4-92) and may cover substantially the entire front surface of the device (4-10). With this type of arrangement, the shroud canopy (4-100B) overlaps the entire display panel (4-14P). The polymer comprising the canopy (4-100B) may have a bulk tint (e.g., a colorant such as a dye and/or pigment that provides the canopy (4-100B) with desired light transmittance characteristics). For example, the canopy (4-100B) may be tinted such that the canopy (4-100B) exhibits a visible light transmittance of from 30 to 80%, at least 20%, at least 40%, less than 95%, less than 90%, less than 85%, less than 75%, from 4 to 60%, or any other suitable amount. By configuring the canopy (10B) to exhibit a partial light transmittance (e.g., from 30 to 80% or any other suitable value), the canopy (4-100B) may help visually conceal internal components of the display (4-14P), such as the lenses (4-14P') and other structures, from observation (e.g., when the display (4-14P) is not in use).

The interior surface of the canopy (4-100B) may also be provided with an optical layer, such as an optical film (4-146). The layer (4-146) may have a texture and/or light scattering particles that create a haze. The haze may help conceal the structure of the display panel (4-14P) from observation from outside the device (4-10). The layer (4-146) may also have microlouvers or other features that help suppress off-axis light transmittance (e.g., the layer (4-146) may have privacy structures that reduce light transmittance for rays that are not parallel to the Y-axis). Because the layer (4-146) may include haze and/or privacy structures, the layer (4-146) may sometimes be referred to as a privacy layer, a haze layer, and/or a privacy and haze layer.

In an exemplary configuration, the layer (4-146) may have a flexible substrate layer covered with a haze coating. The haze coating may be a pad-printed polymer coating including embedded light-scattering particles (e.g., inorganic light-scattering particles such as titanium oxide particles). The flexible substrate layer may be a privacy film, such as a microlouver film or other privacy layer, that prevents off-axis (away from the Y-axis) viewing of the display panel (4-14P).

Haze for the layer (4-146) may be provided using any suitable haze structures (e.g., a coating of a haze polymer having a thickness of 3 to 10 micrometers on a flexible privacy film or other substrate, sometimes referred to as a haze coating, a laminated haze film, or other layer exhibiting 3% to 40% haze or other suitable value). Haze may be provided by embedded light-scattering particles and/or surface textures (e.g., textures within the layer (4-146) or optionally textures on the surface of the canopy (4-100B). The haze provided by the haze coating and/or other haze structures of the layer (4-146) is preferably provided sufficiently close to the display (4-14P) that the resolution of the display (4-14P) is not significantly affected. At the same time, the presence of haze (e.g., a haze coating of layer (4-146)) may help conceal lenses and other structures within layer (4-14P) from observation when not in use.

The device (4-10) may have an air gap between the display panel (4-14P) and the canopy (4-100B) (e.g., an air gap such as air gap (4-144) may exist between an inwardly facing surface of the canopy (4-100B) and any coatings and/or films, such as a haze layer (4-146) on that surface of the canopy (4-100B), and the opposite upper surface of the display panel (4-14P) (and the lenses (4-14P') and pixels on the panel (4-14P). The presence of the air gap (4-144) may help ensure that the lenses (4-14P') operate satisfactorily. The bracket (4-156) may help support the display panel (4-14P).

To help conceal internal components from observation, an opaque masking layer, such as layer (BM-1), may be formed on the inner surface of the display cover layer (4-92) within the passive area (IA). Adhesive (4-122) may attach layer (4-92) to the edge of the canopy (4-100B). Additional opaque masking material (e.g., see canopy opaque masking layer (BM-2)) may be formed on the inner surface of the canopy (4-100B) within the passive area (IA). Adhesive (4-114) may be used to attach the shroud trim (4-100A) to the shroud canopy (4-100B). Adhesive (4-124) may be used to attach the shroud trim (4-100A) to the housing portion (4-16M). Adhesive (14-60) may be used to attach the bracket (4-156) (which is adhesively attached to the rear of the panel (4-14P)) to the canopy (4-100B).

In the example of FIG. 81, the outer surface (4-148) and the inner surface (4-150) of the display cover layer (4-92) have compound curvatures in the inactive area (IA) and in the active area (AA). The outer surface (4-152) and the opposite inner surface (4-54) of the shroud canopy (4-100B) may have a harmonic compound curvature in the inactive area (IA). In the active area (AA), the outer surface (4-152) and the inner surface (4-154) of the shroud canopy (4-100B) may be deployable surfaces (e.g., surfaces without compound curvature that exhibit a curved cross-sectional profile bent about a single bending axis, such as axis (4-142). Axis (4-142) is an axis running parallel to the Z-axis in the present example. The display panel (4-14P) may exhibit the same amount of bending about the axis (4-142) and may also be characterized by a deployable surface (e.g., an array of pixels on an outer surface of the panel (4-14P) may have a deployable surface).

The amount of bending of the canopy (4-100B) and the corresponding amount of bending of the display panel (4-14P) about the axis (4-142) can be selected to help the device (4-10) conform to the curved shape of the user's face.

In the exemplary configuration of FIG. 81, the canopy (4-100B) does not have any regions of compound curvature overlapping the display panel (4-14P). Rather, the portion of the canopy (4-100B) that overlaps the panel (4-14P) has inner and outer deployable surfaces. If desired, one or both of the surfaces (4-152, 4-154) may have compound curvatures. For example, the outer surface (4-152) may have compound curvatures and may be configured to establish a uniform thickness for the air gap (4-140) beneath part or all of the inner surface (4-150) of the layer (4-92). In the example of FIG. 82, there is an air gap (4-140) of uneven thickness between the layer (92) and the canopy (4-100B).

The bracket (4-156) may be formed of a metal sheet or other support structure and may be characterized by inner and outer surfaces that are deployable surfaces (e.g., surfaces that are bent about the axis (4-142) and do not include areas of compound curvature). By avoiding compound curvature in the structures that support and directly overlap the display panel (4-14P), the display panel (4-14P) may be formed of a bent flexible substrate, such as a polyimide substrate, that is bent about the axis (4-142) without the risk of creating wrinkles or other artifacts of the type that would be introduced if the panel (4-14P) had areas of compound curvature.

The shroud and other structures of the device (4-10) of FIG. 81 (e.g., opaque masking layer coatings such as layers (BM-1, BM-2), which may be black ink layers, for example) may be configured to form optical windows for the optical components (4-104).

FIG. 82 illustrates how an opaque masking layer (BM-2) on a canopy (4-100B) may have a window opening filled with a coating layer, such as a coating (4-170). An optical component (4-104) (e.g., a flicker sensor, an ambient light sensor, and/or other photodetector) may be aligned with the window opening. A transparent canopy portion may overlap this window opening, or the canopy opening may overlap this window opening. The layer (BM-2) may be opaque, which helps prevent internal components within the device (4-10) from being observed from outside the device (4-10). The presence of the opening in the layer (BM-2) allows the optical component (4-104) to operate satisfactorily (e.g., in receiving and measuring ambient light). The coating (4-170) may be configured to enable the component (104) to operate while helping to visually conceal the component (4-104). As an example, the coating (4-170) may be formed of a layer of ink having a visible light transmittance of from 2 to 25%, at least 1%, at least 2%, at least 4%, less than 80%, less than 30%, or other suitable amount, while the layer (BM-2) may have a visible light transmittance of (as an example) less than 2%, less than 1%, or less than 0.5%.

FIG. 83 is a cross-sectional side view of another exemplary head-mounted device optical component mounting arrangement. The arrangement of FIG. 83 utilizes shroud through-hole openings in trim (4-100A) and canopy (4-100B). These through-hole openings align with openings in the display opaque masking layer (BM-1) (and optionally with corresponding openings in the canopy opaque masking layer (BM-2). An optional coating layer, such as layer (4-164), may cover the optical windows formed by these openings. Layer (4-164) and other openings of FIG. 84 may align with optical component (4-104), which may be mounted behind the shroud and/or may have portions protruding into the through-hole openings of the shroud. In a first exemplary configuration, component (4-104) of FIG. 83 is an infrared illuminator (e.g., an infrared light-emitting diode). In this type of arrangement, the coating layer (4-164) may be formed of a layer of ink, a thin film interference filter, or other filter layer that blocks visible light and is transparent to infrared light (e.g., a visible-light-blocking-and-infrared-light-transmitting filter layer). In a second exemplary configuration, the component (4-104) of FIG. 83 is a camera (e.g., a visible pass-through camera, an infrared camera, and/or other camera that operates at visible and/or infrared wavelengths). In this arrangement, the coating (4-164) may be omitted (to allow visible and/or infrared light to pass), may be configured to form an anti-reflective coating, and/or may otherwise be configured to operate in conjunction with the camera.

FIG. 84 is a cross-sectional side view of an exemplary head-mounted device optical component mounting arrangement having optical component windows formed of transparent window members. Transparent window members (4-166) (e.g., a layer of glass or polymer) may be mounted in through-hole openings in trim (4-100A) and canopy (4-100B) and aligned with openings in an opaque masking layer (BM-1) on optical components (4-104) and layer (4-92) (and, if desired, aligned with openings in an opaque masking layer (BM-2) on canopy (4-100B). A filter coating (4-168) may be provided on window members (4-166). In an exemplary configuration, component (4-104) of FIG. 84 is a three-dimensional camera, such as a time-of-flight camera or a structured light camera, and may operate in infrared wavelengths. The filter (4-168) within this type of array may be transparent to infrared light, transparent to visible light, or opaque to visible light (e.g., the filter (4-168) may be an infrared-light-transparent-and-visible-light-blocking filter). The filter coating (4-168) may be formed of ink, a thin film interference filter, or other filter structures.

The presence of a window member (4-166) that can be configured to exhibit a relatively small amount of optical distortion can help improve the optical performance of the component (4-104). If desired, optical component compatible surface areas for the optical component window for the component (4-104) can be formed directly on the canopy (4-100B) (e.g., so that the canopy (4-100B) can overlap the component (4-104) without forming a through-hole opening within the canopy (4-100B).

4.1: Systems having cover layer sealing structures

A head-mounted device may include a head-mounted support structure that allows the device to be worn on a user's head. The head-mounted device may have displays supported by the head-mounted support structure for presenting visual content to the user. The displays may include rear displays that present images to eye boxes located at the rear of the head-mounted support structure. The displays may also include forward-facing displays. The forward-facing displays may be mounted at the front of the head-mounted support structure and may be viewed by the user when the head-mounted device is not worn on the user's head. The forward-facing displays, which may sometimes be referred to as publicly observable displays, may also be observable by others in the vicinity of the head-mounted device.

Optical components, such as image sensors and other optical sensors, may be provided in a head-mounted device. In an exemplary configuration, the optical components are mounted beneath peripheral portions of a display cover layer that protects a forward-facing display. The display cover layer, or other layers within the head-mounted device, may be formed of materials such as glass, and laminates, such as plastic laminates, may be formed on top and bottom surfaces of the cover layer. To protect the edges of the cover layer, an encapsulating material may be bonded to the edge surfaces, or the head-mounted device housing structures may be modified.

Figure 85 is a side view of an exemplary head-mounted electronic device. As shown in Figure 85, the head-mounted device (4.1-10) may include a head-mounted support structure (4.1-26). The support structure (4.1-26) may have walls or other structures that separate an interior region of the device (4.1-10), such as an interior region (4.1-42), from an exterior region surrounding the device (4.1-10), such as an exterior region (4.1-44). Electrical components (4.1-40) (e.g., integrated circuits, sensors, control circuitry, light-emitting diodes, lasers, and other light-emitting devices, other control circuits, and input/output devices, etc.) may be mounted on printed circuits and/or other structures within the device (4.1-10) (e.g., within the interior region (4.1-42)).

To present images to a user for viewing from eye boxes, such as eye boxes (4.1-34), the device (4.1-10) may include rear displays, such as displays (4.1-14R), which may have associated lenses for focusing the images for viewing from the eye boxes. These components may be mounted within optical modules (e.g., lens barrels) to form respective left and right optical systems. For example, there may be a left rear display for presenting images to the user's left eye within the left eye box through the left lens, and a right rear display for presenting images to the user's right eye within the right eye box. When the structure (4.1-26) is placed against an outer surface of the user's face, the user's eyes are positioned within the eye boxes (4.1-34) on the rear surface (R) of the device (4.1-10).

The support structure (4.1-26) may include a main support structure (sometimes referred to as a main portion or housing). The main housing support structure may extend from a front side (F) of the device (4.1-10) to an opposite rear side (R) of the device (4.1-10). On the rear side (R), the support structure (4.1-26) may have cushioning structures to enhance the comfort of the user as the support structure (4.1-26) rests against the user's face. If desired, the support structure (4.1-26) may include optional head straps and/or other structures that enable the device (4.1-10) to be worn on the user's head.

The device (4.1-10) may have a publicly observable front display, such as a display (4.1-14F) mounted on the front face (F) of the support structure (4.1-26). The display (4.1-14F) may be observable to the user when the user is not wearing the device (4.1-10) and/or may be observable by other persons in the vicinity of the device (4.1-10). The display (4.1-14F) may, for example, be viewable from the front face (F) of the device (4.1-10) by an external observer observing the device (4.1-10) from the front face (F).

A schematic diagram of an exemplary system that may include a head-mounted device is illustrated in FIG. 86. As illustrated in FIG. 86, the system (4.1-8) may have one or more electronic devices (4.1-10). The devices (4.1-10) may include a head-mounted device (e.g., device (4.1-10) of FIG. 85), accessories such as controllers and headphones, computing equipment (e.g., a cellular telephone, tablet computer, laptop computer, desktop computer, and/or remote computing equipment that supplies content to the head-mounted device), and/or other devices in communication with one another.

Each electronic device (4.1-10) may have control circuitry (4.1-12). The control circuitry (4.1-12) may include storage and processing circuitry for controlling the operation of the device (4.1-10). The circuitry (4.1-12) may include storage, such as hard disk drive storage, non-volatile memory (e.g., electrically programmable read-only memory configured to form a solid-state drive), volatile memory (e.g., static or dynamic random access memory), etc. The processing circuitry within the control circuitry (4.1-12) may be based on one or more microprocessors, microcontrollers, digital signal processors, baseband processors, power management units, audio chips, graphics processing units, application specific integrated circuits, and other integrated circuits. Software code may be stored on storage of circuitry (4.1-12) and executed on processing circuitry of circuitry (4.1-12) to implement control operations for the device (4.1-10), such as data acquisition operations, operations involving coordination of components of the device (4.1-10) using control signals, etc. The control circuitry (4.1-12) may include wired and wireless communication circuitry. For example, the control circuitry (4.1-12) may include radio frequency transceiver circuitry, such as cellular telephone transceiver circuitry, wireless local area network transceiver circuitry (e.g., WiFi® circuitry), millimeter wave transceiver circuitry, and/or other wireless communication circuitry.

During operation, the communication circuitry of the devices within the system (4.1-8) (e.g., the communication circuitry of the control circuitry (4.1-12) of the device (4.1-10)) may be used to support communication between the electronic devices. For example, one electronic device may transmit video data, audio data, control signals, and/or other data to another electronic device within the system (4.1-8). The electronic devices within the system (4.1-8) may communicate via one or more communication networks (e.g., the Internet, a local area network, etc.) using wired and/or wireless communication circuitry. The communication circuitry may be used to allow data to be received by the device (4.1-10) from an external device (e.g., a portable device such as a tethered computer, a handheld device, or a laptop computer, an online computing device such as a remote server or other remote computing device, or other electronic device) and/or to provide data to the external device.

Each device (4.1-10) within the system (4.1-8) may include input/output devices (4.1-22). The input/output devices (4.1-22) may be used to allow a user to provide user input to the device (4.1-10). The input/output devices (4.1-22) may also be used to collect information about the environment in which the device (4.1-10) is operating. Output components within the devices (4.1-22) may allow the device (4.1-10) to provide output to the user and may be used to communicate with external electrical equipment.

As illustrated in FIG. 86, the input/output devices (4.1-22) may include one or more displays, such as displays (4.1-14). The devices (4.1-14) may include rear-facing displays, such as display (4.1-14R) of FIG. 85. The devices (4.1-10) may include, for example, left and right components, such as left and right scanning mirror display devices or other image projectors, silicon liquid crystal display devices, digital mirror devices, or other reflective display devices, left and right display panels based on light-emitting diode pixel arrays (e.g., thin film organic light-emitting displays having polymer or semiconductor substrates such as silicon substrates or display devices based on pixel arrays formed from crystalline semiconductor light-emitting diode dies), liquid crystal display panels, and/or other left and right display devices that provide images to left and right eye boxes for viewing with the user's left and right eyes, respectively. Display components such as these (e.g., thin film organic light emitting displays having a flexible polymer substrate or displays based on pixel arrays formed of crystalline semiconductor light emitting diode dies on a flexible substrate) can also be used to form forward-facing displays (sometimes referred to as front displays, front-facing displays, or publicly viewable displays) for devices (4.1-10), such as the forward-facing display (4.1-14F) of FIG. 85.

During operation, the displays (4.1-14) (e.g., displays (4.1-14R and/or 4.1-14F)) may be used to display visual content (e.g., still images and/or moving images, including photographs and pass-through video from camera sensors, text, graphics, movies, games, and/or other visual content) for a user of the device (4.1-10). The content presented on the displays (4.1-14) may include, for example, virtual objects and other content provided to the displays (4.1-14) by the control circuitry (4.1-12). This virtual content may sometimes be referred to as computer-generated content. The computer-generated content may be displayed in the absence of real-world content or may be combined with real-world content. In some configurations, the real-world image may be captured by a camera (e.g., a forward-facing camera, sometimes referred to as a forward-facing camera), and computer-generated content may be electronically overlaid on portions of the real-world image (e.g., when the device (4.1-10) is a pair of virtual reality goggles).

The input/output circuitry (4.1-22) may include sensors (4.1-16). Sensors (4.1-16) include, for example, 3D sensors (e.g., structured light sensors that emit beams of light and use 2D digital image sensors to collect image data for 3D images from dots or other light spots generated when a target is illuminated by the beams of light, binocular 3D image sensors that collect 3D images using two or more cameras in a binocular imaging array, 3D LIDAR (Light Detection and Ranging) sensors, sometimes referred to as time-of-flight cameras or 3D time-of-flight cameras, 3D radio frequency sensors, or other sensors that collect 3D image data), cameras (e.g., 2D infrared and/or line-of-sight digital image sensors), gaze tracking sensors (e.g., an gaze tracking system based on an image sensor, and, if desired, a light source that emits one or more beams of light that are then tracked using the image sensor after being reflected from the user's eyes), touch sensors, capacitive proximity sensors, Sensors such as light-based (optical) proximity sensors, other proximity sensors, force sensors (e.g., strain gauges, capacitive force sensors, resistive force sensors, etc.), contact sensors based on switches, gas sensors, pressure sensors, moisture sensors, magnetic sensors, audio sensors (microphones), ambient light sensors, flicker sensors that collect temporal information about ambient lighting conditions, such as the presence of time-varying ambient light intensity associated with artificial lighting, microphones for collecting voice commands and other audio input, sensors configured to collect information about motion, position, and/or orientation (e.g., accelerometers, gyroscopes, compasses, and/or inertial measurement units including all or one or a subset of two of these sensors), and/or other sensors.

User input and other information may be collected using sensors and other input devices within the input/output devices (4.1-22). If desired, the input/output devices (4.1-22) may include other devices (4.1-24), such as haptic output devices (e.g., vibration components), light-emitting diodes, lasers and other light sources (e.g., light-emitting devices that emit light to illuminate the environment surrounding the device (4.1-10) when ambient light levels are low), speakers such as ear speakers for generating audio output, circuits for receiving wireless power, circuits for wirelessly transmitting power to other devices, batteries and other energy storage devices (e.g., capacitors), joysticks, buttons and/or other components.

As described in connection with FIG. 85, the electronic device (4.1-10) may have head-mounted support structures, such as a head-mounted support structure (4.1-26) (e.g., a head-mounted housing structure, e.g., housing walls, straps, etc.). The head-mounted support structure may be configured to be worn on a user's head (e.g., against the user's face covering the user's eyes) during operation of the device (4.1-10) and may support displays (4.1-14), sensors (4.1-16), other components (4.1-24), other input/output devices (4.1-22), and control circuitry (4.1-12) (see, e.g., components (4.1-40) and displays (4.1-14R, 4.1-14F) of FIG. 85, which may include associated optical modules).

FIG. 87 is a front view of an exemplary configuration of a device (4.1-10) having a publicly observable display, such as a forward-facing display (4.1-14F). As illustrated in FIG. 87, the support structure (4.1-26) of the device (4.1-10) may have right and left portions on either side of a nose bridge (4.1-90). The nose bridge (4.1-90) may be a curved outer surface configured to receive and rest upon a user's nose to assist in supporting the housing (4.1-26) on the user's head.

The display (4.1-14F) may have an active area, such as an active area (AA) configured to display images, and an inactive area (IA) that does not display images. The outline of the active area (AA) may be rectangular, rectangular with rounded corners, may have teardrop-shaped portions on the left and right sides of the device (4.1-10), may have a shape with straight edges, a shape with curved edges, a shape with a peripheral edge having both straight and curved portions, and/or other suitable outlines. As illustrated in FIG. 87, the active area (AA) may have a curved recessed portion in the nose bridge (4.1-90). The presence of a nose-shaped recess in the active area (AA) may help fit the active area (AA) within the available space of the housing (4.1-26) without unduly restricting the size of the active area (AA).

The active area (AA) includes an array of pixels. The pixels may be, for example, light-emitting diode pixels formed of thin-film organic light-emitting diodes or crystalline semiconductor light-emitting diode dies (sometimes referred to as micro light-emitting diodes) on a flexible display panel substrate. If desired, configurations in which the display (4.1-14F) uses other display technologies may also be used. Exemplary arrangements in which the display (4.1-14) is formed of a light-emitting diode display, such as an organic light-emitting diode display formed on a flexible substrate (e.g., a substrate formed of a bendable layer of polyimide or a sheet of other flexible polymer), may sometimes be described herein by way of example. The pixels of the active area (AA) may be formed on a display device, such as a display panel (e.g., a flexible organic light-emitting diode display panel). In some configurations, the outline of the active area (AA) may have a peripheral edge that includes straight segments or a combination of straight and curved segments. Configurations in which the entire outline of the active area (AA) is characterized by curved peripheral edges may also be used.

The display (4.1-14F) may have an inactive area, such as an inactive area (IA), that has no pixels and does not display images. The inactive area (IA) may form an inactive border area that extends along one or more portions of the peripheral edge of the active area (AA). In the exemplary configuration of FIG. 87, the inactive area (IA) has a ring shape that surrounds the active area (AA) and forms the inactive border. In this type of arrangement, the width of the inactive area (IA) may be relatively constant, and the inner and outer edges of the area (IA) may be characterized by straight and/or curved segments or may be curved along their entire length. For example, the outer edge of the area (IA) (e.g., the peripheral edge of the display (4.1-14F)) may have a curved outline that extends parallel to the curved edge of the active area (AA).

In some configurations, the device (4.1-10) can operate in conjunction with other devices within the system (4.1-8), such as wireless controllers and other accessories. These accessories may have magnetic sensors that detect the direction and strength of magnetic fields. The device (4.1-10) may have one or more electromagnets configured to emit a magnetic field. The magnetic field can be measured by wireless accessories near the device (4.1-10), such that the accessories can determine their orientation and location relative to the device (4.1-10). This allows the accessories to wirelessly provide real-time information about their current location, orientation, and movement to the device (4.1-10), allowing the accessories to act as wireless controllers. The accessories may include wearable devices, devices with handles, and other input devices.

In an exemplary configuration, the device (4.1-10) may have a coil extending around the periphery of the display (4.1-14F) (e.g., below the inactive area (IA) along the periphery of the active area (AA). The coil may have any suitable number of turns (e.g., 1 to 10, at least 2, at least 5, at least 10, 10 to 50, less than 100, less than 25, less than 6, etc.). These turns may be formed of metal traces on a substrate and/or may be formed of wires and/or may be formed of other conductive lines. During operation, the control circuitry (4.1-12) may supply an alternating current (AC) drive signal to the coil. The drive signal can have a frequency of (for example) at least 1 kHz, at least 10 kHz, at least 100 kHz, at least 1 MHz, less than 10 MHz, less than 3 MHz, less than 300 kHz, or less than 30 kHz. As AC current flows through the coil, a corresponding magnetic field is generated in the vicinity of the device (4.1-10). Electronic devices, such as wireless controllers having magnetic sensors in the vicinity of the device (4.1-10), can use the magnetic field as a reference to determine their orientation, position, and/or movement while the wireless controllers are moved relative to the device (4.1-10) to provide input to the device (4.1-10).

As an example, consider a handheld wireless controller used to control the operation of a device (4.1-10). During operation, the device (4.1-10) emits a magnetic field using a coil. As the handheld wireless controller is moved, magnetic sensors in the controller can monitor the position of the controller and the movement of the controller relative to the device (4.1-10) by monitoring the strength, orientation, and changes in the strength and/or orientation of the magnetic field emitted by the coil as the controller is moved through the air by the user. The electronic device can then wirelessly transmit information about the position and orientation of the controller to the device (4.1-10). In this manner, the handheld controller, wearable controller, or other external accessory can be manipulated by the user to provide air gestures, pointing inputs, steering inputs, and/or other user inputs to the device (4.1-10).

The device (4.1-10) may have components such as optical components (e.g., optical sensors among the sensors (4.1-16) of FIG. 86). These components may be mounted at any suitable location on the head-mounted support structure (4.1-26) (e.g., on the head strap, on the housing (4.1-26), etc.). The optical components and other components may be rearwardly facing (e.g., when mounted on the back of the device (4.1-10)), laterally facing (e.g., to the left or right), downwardly or upwardly facing, forwardly facing the device (4.1-10) (e.g., when mounted on the front face of the device (4.1-10)), mounted to point in any combination of these directions (e.g., forwardly, rightwardly, and downwardly facing), and/or mounted in other suitable orientations. In an exemplary configuration, at least some of the components of the device (4.1-10) are mounted so as to face outwardly (and optionally to the sides and/or up and down). For example, forward-facing cameras for pass-through video may be mounted on the front left and right sides of the device (4.1-10) in a configuration such that their fields of view somewhat overlap along the horizontal dimension while the cameras capture wide-angle images of the environment in front of the device (4.1-10). The captured images may, if desired, include portions of the user's surroundings below, above, and to the sides of the area directly in front of the device (4.1-10).

To help conceal components, such as optical components, from observation from outside the device (4.1-10), it may be desirable to cover some or all of the components with a decorative covering structure. The covering structures may include transparent portions (e.g., optical component windows) characterized by sufficient optical transparency to allow the overlaid optical components to operate satisfactorily. For example, an ambient light sensor may be covered with a layer that appears opaque to an external observer to help conceal the ambient light sensor from observation, but allows sufficient ambient light to pass through to the ambient light sensor to allow the ambient light sensor to make satisfactory ambient light measurements. As another example, an optical component that emits infrared light may be overlaid with a visible-opaque material that is transparent to infrared light.

In an exemplary configuration, optical components for the device (4.1-10) may be mounted in the inactive area (IA) of FIG. 87, and decorative covering structures may be formed in a ring shape overlapping the optical components in the inactive area (IA). The decorative covering structures may be formed of structures including ink, polymer structures, metal, glass, other materials, and/or combinations of these materials. In an exemplary configuration, the decorative covering structure may be formed as a ring-shaped member having a footprint that matches the footprint of the inactive area (IA). For example, if the active area (AA) has left and right portions having teardrop shapes, the ring-shaped member may have curved edges that follow the curved periphery of the teardrop-shaped portions of the active area (AA). The ring-shaped member may be formed of one or more polymer structures (e.g., the ring-shaped member may be formed of a polymer ring). Because the ring-shaped member may help conceal the overlapping components from observation, the ring-shaped member may sometimes be referred to as a shroud or ring-shaped shroud member. The appearance of the shroud or other decorative covering structures may be characterized by a neutral color (e.g., white, black, or gray) or a non-neutral color (e.g., blue, red, green, gold, rose gold, etc.).

The display (4.1-14F) may, if desired, have a protective display cover layer. The cover layer may overlap the active area (AA) and the inactive area (IA) (e.g., the entire front surface of the device (4.1-10) as viewed from the front (F) of FIG. 85 may be covered by the cover layer). The cover layer, which may sometimes be referred to as a housing wall or transparent housing wall, may have a rectangular outline, an outline with teardrop sections, an elliptical outline, or other shapes with curved and/or straight edges.

The cover layer may be formed of a transparent material such as glass, a polymer, a transparent crystalline material such as sapphire, a transparent ceramic, another transparent material, and/or combinations of these materials. As an example, a protective display cover layer for a display (4.1-14F) may be formed of safety glass (e.g., laminated glass including a transparent glass layer having a laminated polymer film). Optional coating layers may be applied to the surfaces of the display cover layer. If desired, the display cover layer may be chemically strengthened (e.g., using an ion exchange process to create an outer layer of material under compressive stress that resists scratching). In some configurations, the display cover layer may be formed of a stack of two or more layers of material (e.g., first and second structural glass layers, a rigid polymer layer bonded to a glass layer or another rigid polymer layer, etc.) to enhance the performance of the cover layer.

In the active area (AA), the display cover layer may overlap pixels of the display panel (4.1-14P). The display cover layer within the active area (4.1-AA) is preferably transparent to allow viewing of images presented on the display panel (14P). In the inactive area (IA), the display cover layer may overlap a ring-shaped shroud or other decorative covering structure. The shroud and/or other covering structures (e.g., opaque ink coatings on the inner surface of the display cover layer and/or structures) may be sufficiently opaque to help conceal some or all of the optical components within the inactive area (IA) from viewing. Windows may be provided in the shroud or other decorative covering structures to help ensure that the optical components overlapped by these structures operate satisfactorily. The windows may be formed by apertures, may be formed by areas of the shroud or other decorative covering structures that are locally thinned to enhance light transmittance, may be formed by window members having desired light transmittance characteristics inserted into matching openings within the shroud, and/or may be formed by other shroud window structures.

In the example of FIG. 87, the device (4.1-10) includes optical components such as (as examples) optical components (4.1-60, 4.1-62, 4.1-64, 4.1-66, 4.1-68, 4.1-70, 4.1-72, 4.1-74, 4.1-76, 4.1-78, 4.1-80). Each of these optical components (e.g., optical sensors selected from among the sensors (4.1-16) of FIG. 86, light-emitting devices, etc.) can be configured to detect light and, if desired, emit light (e.g., ultraviolet light, visible light, and/or infrared light).

In an exemplary configuration, the optical component (4.1-60) may sense ambient light (e.g., ambient visible light). In particular, the optical component (4.1-60) may have a photodetector that senses variations in ambient light intensity as a function of time. As an example, if a user is working in an environment with an artificial light source, the light source may emit light at a frequency associated with its source of wall power (e.g., 60 Hz AC mains power). The photodetector of the component (4.1-60) may detect that the artificial light from the artificial light source is characterized by 60 Hz variations in intensity. The control circuitry (4.1-12) may use this information to adjust a clock or other timing signal associated with the operation of the image sensors within the device (4.1-10) to help avoid unwanted interference between the light source frequency and other frequencies associated with the frame rate or image capture operations. The control circuitry (4.1-12) may also use measurements from the component (4.1-60) to help identify the presence of artificial light and the type of artificial light present. In this manner, the control circuitry (4.1-12) may detect the presence of lights, such as fluorescent lights or other lights, with known non-ideal color characteristics, and may make color cast adjustments (e.g., white point adjustments) for color-sensitive components, such as cameras and displays. Because the optical component (4.1-60) may measure variations in light intensity, the component (4.1-60) may sometimes be referred to as a flicker sensor or an ambient light frequency sensor.

The optical component (4.1-62) may be an ambient light sensor. The ambient light sensor may include one or more photodetectors. In a single photodetector configuration, the ambient light sensor may be a monochrome sensor that measures ambient light intensity. In a multi-photodetector configuration, each photodetector may be overlapped by an optical filter that passes a different wavelength band (e.g., a different visible and/or infrared passband). The optical filter passbands may overlap at their edges. This allows the component (4.1-62) to act as a color ambient light sensor that measures both ambient light intensity and ambient light color (e.g., by measuring color coordinates for the ambient light). During operation of the device (4.1-10), the control circuitry (4.1-12) may take action based on the measured ambient light intensity and color. For example, the white point of a display or image sensor may be adjusted, or other display or image sensor color adjustments may be made based on the measured ambient light color. The brightness of the display can be adjusted based on light intensity. For example, the brightness of the display (4.1-14F) can be increased in bright ambient lighting conditions to improve the visibility of images on the display, and the brightness of the display (4.1-14F) can be decreased in dim lighting conditions to save power. The image sensor operations and/or the light source operations can also be adjusted based on ambient light readings.

The optical components within the active area (IA) may also include components that follow aspects of the device (4.1-10), such as components (4.1-80, 4.1-64). The optical components (4.1-80, 4.1-64) may be pose tracking cameras used to help monitor the orientation and movement of the device (4.1-10). The components (4.1-80, 4.1-64) may be line-of-sight optical cameras (and/or cameras sensitive to visible and infrared wavelengths) and, together with an inertial measurement unit, may form a visual inertial ranging (VIO) system.

The optical components (4.1-78, 4.1-66) may be line-of-sight optical cameras that capture real-time images of the environment surrounding the device (4.1-10). These cameras, which may sometimes be referred to as scene cameras or pass-through video cameras, may capture video that is displayed in real-time on displays (4.1-14R) for viewing by the user when the user's eyes are positioned within the eye boxes (4.1-34) at the rear of the device (4.1-10). By displaying pass-through images (pass-through video) to the user in this manner, the user may be provided with real-time information about the user's surroundings. If desired, virtual content (e.g., computer-generated images) may be overlaid on portions of the pass-through video. The device (4.1-10) may also operate in a non-pass-through video mode where components (4.1-78, 4.1-66) are turned off and the user is presented with only movie content, game content, and/or other virtual content that does not include real-time real-world images.

The input/output devices (4.1-22) of the device (4.1-10) can collect user input that is used to control the operation of the device (4.1-10). As an example, a microphone within the device (4.1-10) can collect voice commands. Buttons, touch sensors, force sensors, and other input devices can collect user input from the user's fingers or other external objects that come into contact with the device (4.1-10). In some configurations, it may be desirable to monitor the user's hand gestures or the motions of other user body parts. This allows the user's hand positions or other body part positions to be replicated in a game or other virtual environment, and allows the user's hand motions to act as hand gestures (air gestures) that control the operation of the device (4.1-10). User input, such as hand gesture input, may be captured using cameras operating in visible and infrared wavelengths, such as tracking cameras (e.g., optical components (4.1-76, 4.1-68)). Such tracking cameras may also track fiducials and other recognizable features on controllers and other external accessories (additional devices (4.1-10) of the system (4.1-8)) during use of such controllers in controlling the operation of the device (4.1-10). If desired, the tracking cameras may assist in determining the position and orientation of a handheld or wearable controller that senses its position and direction by measuring a magnetic field generated by a coil (4.1-54). Thus, the use of tracking cameras may assist in tracking hand motions and controller motions used to move pointers and other virtual objects displayed for the user, or may otherwise assist in controlling the operation of the device (4.1-10).

The tracking cameras can operate satisfactorily in the presence of sufficient ambient light (e.g., bright line-of-sight ambient lighting conditions). In dim environments, supplemental illumination may be provided by supplemental infrared light sources, such as optical components (4.1-82, 4.1-84). The infrared light sources may each include one or more light-emitting devices (e.g., light-emitting diodes or lasers) and may each be configured to provide fixed and/or steerable beams of infrared light that serve as supplemental illumination for the tracking cameras. If desired, the infrared light sources may be turned off in bright ambient lighting conditions (e.g., using the ambient light sensing capabilities of the optical components (4.1-62)) and turned on in response to detection of dim ambient lighting.

The 3D sensors within the device (4.1-10) may be used to perform biometric identification operations (e.g., facial identification for authentication), to determine 3D shapes of objects within the user's environment (e.g., to map the user's environment so that a matching virtual environment can be generated for the user), and/or to otherwise collect 3D content during operation of the device (4.1-10). As an example, the optical components (4.1-74, 4.1-70) may be 3D structured optical image sensors. Each 3D structured optical image sensor may have one or more light sources that provide structured light (e.g., a dot projector that projects an array of infrared dots onto the environment, a structured light source that generates a grid of lines, or other structured light component that emits structured light). Each of the 3D structured light image sensors may also include a flood illuminator (e.g., a light emitting diode or laser that emits a broad beam of infrared light). Using flood illumination and structured light illumination, the optical components (4.1-74, 4.1-70) may capture facial images, images of objects within an environment surrounding the device (4.1-10), and the like.

The optical component (4.1-72) may be an infrared 3D time-of-flight camera that uses time-of-flight measurements of the emitted light to collect 3D images of objects within an environment surrounding the device (4.1-10). The component (4.1-72) may have a longer range and a narrower field of view than the 3D structured light cameras of the optical components (4.1-74, 4.1-70). The operating range of the component (4.1-72) may be (for example) 30 cm to 7 m, 60 cm to 6 m, 70 cm to 5 m, or another suitable operating range.

FIG. 88 is a front view of an exemplary ring-shaped decorative covering structure for a device (4.1-10). The exemplary ring-shaped shroud (4.1-100) of FIG. 88 may be mounted beneath an inner surface of a display cover layer for a display (4.1-14F) within an inactive area (IA). This may help conceal optical components and other internal portions of the device (4.1-10) from observation from outside the device (4.1-10). The shroud (4.1-100) may be formed of one or more unbroken ring-shaped members and/or may be formed of multiple shroud segments attached using adhesives, fasteners, or other attachment structures. If desired, the shroud (4.1-100) may be formed of multiple members, which are sandwiched together along some or all of their lengths. In an exemplary configuration that may sometimes be described herein as an example, the shroud (4.1-100) may be formed of an inner piece (e.g., a complete or partial inner ring), which may sometimes be referred to as an inner shroud member, shroud trim, or shroud trim member, and may be formed of an outer piece or pieces (e.g., one or more strips of material or covering members, a complete ring, one or more partial rings, etc.), which may sometimes be referred to as a shroud cover, canopy, or shroud canopy.

As illustrated in FIG. 88, the shroud (4.1-100) may have optical component windows for accommodating components (4.1-60, 4.1-62, 4.1-64, 4.1-84, 4.1-66, 4.1-68, 4.1-70, 4.1-72, 4.1-74, 4.1-76, 4.1-78, 4.1-82, 4.1-80). The optical component windows may be formed by through-hole openings within the shroud (4.1-100), by recesses or other partial openings that do not extend completely through the shroud (4.1-100), by inserted optical window members within the shroud through-hole openings, and/or by other shroud optical component window structures. The display (4.1-14F) may have a display cover layer formed of a bulk material having corresponding optical component windows (e.g., through-hole openings, recessed regions, inserted window elements within the through-hole openings, etc.) and/or having desired optical properties (e.g., a display cover layer formed of one or more layers of a material such as glass and/or a polymer that is sufficiently transparent in the operating wavelength range of the overlapping optical component to allow the optical component to operate satisfactorily through the cover layer without forming openings or other window structures in the cover layer).

The shroud (4.1-100) may have any suitable shape. For example, the outline of the shroud (4.1-100) may be rectangular with rounded corners as illustrated in FIG. 88, and/or may have teardrop shapes on the left and right sides of the device (4.1-10), may have an oval outline, and/or may have other outlines with curved and/or straight edge segments. For example, the inner and outer edges of the shroud (4.1-100) may be curved (e.g., to follow a teardrop shape). The shaft (4.1-100) may, if desired, have a curved peripheral edge along most or all of its length.

The width of the shroud (4.1-100) may be constant along its length, or the shroud (4.1-100) may have portions that are wider than other portions. The thickness of the shroud (4.1-100) (e.g., the dimension of the shroud (4.1-100) into the page in the orientation of FIG. 88) may be less than the width of the shroud (4.1-100) (the lateral dimension of the shroud (4.1-100) into the page in the orientation of FIG. 88) or the thickness of the shroud may be equal to or greater than the width of the shroud. The shroud may have a two-dimensional shape (e.g., the shroud (4.1-100) may have a planar shape) or a three-dimensional shape (e.g., a shape characterized by a curved cross-sectional profile and/or inner and/or outer surfaces of compound curvature). In an exemplary configuration, most or all of the inner and outer surfaces of the shroud have a compound curvature surface.

The optical components below the inactive area (IA) may include components on the left and right sides of the device (4.1-10) that operate cooperatively with each other. For example, the scene cameras, tracking cameras, and/or structured light cameras of the device (4.1-10) may be formed in pairs, each including a left camera and a corresponding right camera. The left scene camera and the right scene camera may operate together to capture overlapping images that provide the device (4.1-10) with a wide field of view for collecting pass-through video, for example. The left and right tracking cameras may operate together to track the user's hands or other external objects. The left and right structured light cameras or other 3D cameras may be used together to capture 3D images of the user's environment. To improve the performance of the left and right optical components in these types of paired component arrangements, it may be desirable to maintain precise alignment between the left and right optical components. To help maintain the left and right optical components aligned with each other on the respective left and right sides of the device (4.1-10), the device (4.1-10) may be provided with one or more housing structures that help support the optical components. An exemplary example of a device (4.1-10) having housing structures that support the optical components and a cover layer that overlaps the optical components is illustrated in FIG. 89.

As illustrated in FIG. 89, the shroud (4.1-100) and display cover layer (4.1-92) may be attached to the housing (4.1-26) using adhesives, screws and other fasteners, press-fit joints, and/or other attachment mechanisms. An exemplary configuration is illustrated in FIG. 89 in which the shroud (4.1-100) and cover layer (4.1-92) are attached to the forward-facing edge of the housing wall within the main housing portion of the structure (4.1-26) using adhesives. In the example of FIG. 89, the shroud (4.1-100) has an inner shroud member, such as a shroud trim (4.1-100A), and a corresponding outer shroud member, such as a shroud canopy (4.1-100B). The shroud trim (4.1-100A) and shroud canopy (4.1-100B) may be formed of metal, polymer, ceramic, glass, other materials, and/or combinations of these materials. In an illustrative example, the shroud trim (4.1-100A) is formed of a black polymer or other dark material, and the shroud canopy (4.1-100B) is formed of a transparent polymer. The outer surface of the shroud canopy (4.1-100B) may be smooth to provide the shroud (4.1-100) with a decoratively attractive appearance.

A layer of pressure-sensitive adhesive may be used to attach the canopy (4.1-100B) to the trim (4.1-100A), or the canopy (4.1-100B) may be formed integrally with the trim (4.1-100A). The adhesive may also be used to attach the cover layer (4.1-92) and the shroud (4.1-100) to the housing portion (4.1-26). As illustrated in FIG. 89, a first adhesive, such as adhesive (4.1-122), may be used to attach the display cover layer (4.1-92) to the shroud (4.1-100) (e.g., to a ledge within the shroud trim (4.1-100A). A second adhesive, such as adhesive (4.1-124), may then be used to attach the shroud (4.1-100) (e.g., shroud trim (4.1-100A)) to an adjacent lip of the wall within the housing (4.1-26).

In some configurations, the adhesives (4.1-122, 4.1-124) may be formed of the same type of material. In an exemplary configuration, the adhesives (4.1-122, 4.1-124) are different. The housing portion (4.1-26) may have a wall having a lip shape that creates a shear force on the adhesive (4.1-124) as the display (4.1-14F) is attached to the housing (4.1-26) by pressing the display (4.1-14F) against the housing (4.1-26). In this type of scenario, it may be desirable to form the adhesive (4.1-124) with an adhesive that can satisfactorily bond in the presence of shear forces, such as a molten hot melt adhesive (thermoplastic adhesive) or other liquid adhesive, rather than a pressure-sensitive adhesive. The adhesive (4.1-124) may, if desired, be exposed to a curing agent (UV light, moisture, etc.) before the display (4.1-14F) is assembled into the housing (4.1-26).

If desired, the adhesive (4.1-124) may be heated to loosen the adhesive bond formed by the adhesive (4.1-124). To prevent the display cover layer (4.1-92) from separating from the shroud (4.1-100) while the adhesive (4.1-124) is being softened by heat, the adhesive (4.1-122) may be provided with a higher softening point than the adhesive (4.1-124) (e.g., the adhesive (4.1-122) may be a two-part hot melt glue having a higher melting point than the adhesive (4.1-124).

Optical components overlapped by the display cover layer (4.1-92) and the shroud (4.1-100) within the inactive area (IA) can transmit and/or receive light through the shroud (4.1-100) and the display cover layer (4.1-92). The layer (4.1-92) can be formed of a single layer of glass, laminated glass, or other transparent material that allows light for each overlapped optical component (4.1-104) to pass through the layer (4.1-92). If desired, a partial recess or through-hole opening can be formed in a portion of the layer (4.1-92). An optional optical component window member can then be inserted into the layer (4.1-92) (e.g., a window overlapping the component (4.1-104)). For example, the layer (4.1-92) may be formed of one or more layers of glass and/or polymer and characterized by a first level of optical transmittance at the operating wavelength(s) for the component (4.1-104). The window member of the layer (4.1-92) may be formed of polymers, glasses, and/or other materials characterized by a second level of optical transmittance at the operating wavelength(s) that is greater than the first level of optical transmittance. In other exemplary arrangements, the window member is not embedded within the layer (4.1-92) (e.g., where the layer (4.1-92) alone is sufficiently transparent to transmit light for the component (4.1-104).

The shroud (4.1-100) may be provided with an optical component window that overlaps the optical component to assist in accommodating the overlapping optical component (4.1-104). The component (4.1-104) may be operable at ultraviolet light wavelengths, visible light wavelengths, and/or infrared light wavelengths. To accommodate the component (4.1-104), the shroud trim (4.1-100A) is provided with a through-hole opening, while the shroud canopy (4.1-100B) does not have openings that overlap the component (4.1-104). This effectively forms a window recess within the shroud (4.1-100) in alignment with the components (4.1-104). The trim (4.1-100A) may be formed of a black polymer or other light absorbing material, and thus the formation of the opening (4.1-120) within the trim (4.1-100A) may help ensure that sufficient light passes through to allow the component (4.1-104) to operate satisfactorily. The portion of the canopy (4.1-100B) that overlaps the component (4.1-104) may be transparent (e.g., a transparent polymer). Alternatively, the canopy (4.1-100B) may be formed of a light absorbing material, and a portion of the canopy (4.1-100B) that overlaps the component (4.1-104) may be removed.

To help conceal the component (4.1-104) from view, the interior surface of the shroud canopy (4.1-100B) may be covered with one or more coatings, which may be used to provide an area overlapping the component (4.1-104) with optical properties and a desired external appearance that ensure satisfactory operation of the component (4.1-104). The coatings may include a thin film interference filter formed of a stack of thin film dielectric layers of alternating refractive index values (having refractive indices and thicknesses selected to produce a desired transmission spectrum and a desired reflection spectrum for the filter), and/or may include a layer of ink (e.g., a polymer layer including a dye, pigment, and/or other colorant), and/or may include any other suitable coating having desired optical properties.

As an example, consider a scenario where the component (4.1-104) transmits and/or receives infrared light. In this type of arrangement, the canopy (4.1-100B) may be coated with a coating that is opaque at visible wavelengths and transparent at infrared wavelengths. This helps to conceal the component (4.1-104) from observation from outside the device (4.1-10) while allowing infrared light associated with the operation of the component (4.1-104) to pass through the shroud (4.1-100) and the layer (4.1-92).

As another example, consider a scenario where component (4.1-104) is an ambient light sensor. In this configuration, the canopy (4.1-100B) may be coated with a coating exhibiting a visible light transmittance of (for example) 1 to 8%. This allows sufficient ambient visible light to reach the ambient light sensor to enable the ambient light sensor to read ambient light. At the same time, the transmittance of the coating may be sufficiently low to reduce the visibility of component (4.1-104) from outside the device (4.1-10).

As these examples demonstrate, areas of the display (4.1-14F) that overlap optical components, such as component (4.1-104) of FIG. 89, may be provided with optical component window structures within the layer (4.1-92) and/or shroud (4.1-100) that help accommodate the optical components.

As described with respect to FIGS. 87 and 88, multiple optical components, such as components (4.1-104), may be within the inactive area (IA). Each optical component may potentially have a different type of optical component window structure within the shroud (4.1-100) and/or layer (4.1-92) to accommodate that component. For example, some regions of the shroud (4.1-100) may have openings for accommodating the components, and/or other regions of the shroud (4.1-100) may have inserted optical window elements, and/or other regions of the shroud (4.1-100) may have partial shroud openings (e.g., recesses without through holes), such as the openings of FIG. 92 (which may optionally be coated to modify the optical properties of the shroud (4.1-100).

In some embodiments, it may be desirable to provide an encapsulating material over the cover layer (4.1-92). An exemplary example of an encapsulated cover layer (4.1-92) is illustrated in FIG. 90.

As illustrated in FIG. 90, a cover layer (4.1-92) may be bonded to the shroud (4.1-100). The cover layer (4.1-92) may include a glass layer (4.1-126), a front laminate (4.1-128), and a rear laminate (4.1-130). The front laminate (4.1-128) and the rear laminate (4.1-128) may be, for example, plastic layers laminated to the cover layer (4.1-92), plastic layers adhesively attached to the cover layer (4.1-92), or other protective materials attached to the front and rear surfaces of the glass layer (4.1-126). Although not illustrated in FIG. 90, multiple layers, such as anti-reflective coatings, anti-smudge coatings, acrylic layers, or other desired layers, may be included as part of the cover layer (4.1-92).

Although the front laminate (4.1-128) and the rear laminate (4.1-130) may protect the front and rear sides of the glass layer (4.1-126), the edge surface of the glass layer (4.1-126) may still be exposed. To further protect the edge surface of the glass layer (4.1-126), an encapsulating material (4.1-132) may be attached to the edge surface of the glass layer (4.1-126). The encapsulating material (4.1-132) may be an epoxy material, such as a flexible epoxy, which seals the edge surface of the glass layer (4.1-126) and protects the glass layer (4.1-126) at the edge surface. Alternatively, acrylate, polyvinyl butyral (PVB), polyurethane, or moisture curable materials may be used for the encapsulating material (4.1-132).

In some embodiments, the encapsulating material (4.1-132) may be an epoxy that adheres to the glass layer (4.1-126) without a primer (e.g., the encapsulating material (4.1-132) may be an adhesive without a primer). Furthermore, the encapsulating material (4.1-132) may have a suitable ductility that allows it to elongate without breaking, such as a Young's modulus of less than 3 GPa, less than 4 GPa, less than 2.5 GPa, or other suitable modulus. Additionally, the encapsulating material (4.1-132) may have chemical resistance to chemicals and resistance to degradation due to exposure to sunlight. Furthermore, it may be desirable for the encapsulating material (4.1-132) to match the appearance of the shroud. For example, the encapsulating material (4.1-132) may have a black appearance, a white appearance, a gray appearance, a shiny appearance, and/or a matte appearance. In general, the encapsulating material (4.1-132) can be formed of a material that adheres to the glass layer (4.1-126) while protecting the edge surface of the glass layer (4.1-126).

The encapsulating material (4.1-132) can substantially fill the opening between the edge surface of the glass layer (4.1-126) and the shroud (4.1-100). For example, the encapsulating material (4.1-132) can extend approximately 150 micrometers from the edge surface. However, in general, any amount of the encapsulating material (4.1-132) can be applied to the edge surface.

As illustrated in FIG. 90, the encapsulating material (4.1-132) may cover the edge surface and may also cover the edge portion of the laminate (4.1-128). However, this is merely exemplary. If desired, the encapsulating material (4.1-132) may cover the edge surface of the glass layer (4.1-126) without covering the edge portion of the laminate (4.1-128). For example, as illustrated in FIG. 91, the encapsulating material may only cover the edge surface of the glass layer (4.1-126). In the example of FIG. 91, the laminate (4.1-128) may extend over the encapsulating material (4.1-132). However, this is merely exemplary. If desired, the laminate (4.1-128) may be flush with the edge surface of the glass layer (4.1-126).

In some embodiments, it may be determined that the glass layer (4.1-126) can be protected by modifying the position of the glass layer (4.1-126) relative to the shroud (4.1-100) (or the support structure (4.1-126)). For example, as illustrated in the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 92, the edge surface of the glass layer (4.1-126) may be left unencapsulated, but the size of the opening (4.1-134) between the edge surface and the shroud (4.1-100) may be adjusted. By increasing or decreasing the size of the opening (4.1-134), the glass layer (4.1-126) can be protected.

Instead of or in addition to adding material to the edge surface of layer (4.1-126), it may be desirable to add material to the gap between layer (4.1-126) and the shroud/support structure. An illustrative example of adding material to this gap is illustrated in FIG. 93.

As illustrated in FIG. 93, material (4.1-136) may be included between the edge surface of the glass layer (4.1-126) and the shroud (4.1-100). The material (4.1-136) may be, for example, a bumper ring. The bumper ring may be formed of an elastomeric material, a rigid plastic, or other material that helps protect the edge surface of the layer (4.1-126).

As an alternative to the material (4.1-136) being a bumper ring between the layer (4.1-126) and the shroud (4.1-100), the material (4.1-136) may be an overmolded structure over the layer (4.1-126), over the shroud (4.1-100), or over the chassis joined to the support structure (4.1-26). Generally, the overmolded structure may help fill the gap between the layer (4.1-126) and the support structure, shroud, and/or chassis and protect the edge surface of the layer (4.1-126).

Although not illustrated in FIG. 93, if desired, a portion of the material (4.1-136) may extend below the layer (4.1-126). In particular, a portion of the material (4.1-136) may be present between the lower surface of the layer (4.1-126) and the shroud (4.1-100).

Instead of or in addition to adding material between the layer (4.1-126) and the shroud (4.1-100), the upper laminate (4.1-128) and/or the lower laminate (4.1-130) may wrap around the edge surface of the layer (4.1-126). Illustrative examples of laminates wrapping the edge surface are illustrated in FIGS. 94 and 95.

As illustrated in FIG. 94, the upper laminate (4.1-128) can wrap around the edge surface of the layer (4.1-126). In particular, the upper laminate (4.1-128) can have a portion (4.1-128A) extending around and covering the edge surface of the layer (4.1-126). The layer (4.1-126) can have a rounded edge surface to allow the upper laminate (4.1-128) to wrap around the edge surface and sufficiently adhere to the surface, as illustrated in FIG. 94. By forming the layer (4.1-126) with a rounded edge, the curvature of the laminate (4.1-128) around the edge can be reduced, thereby reducing the stress on the laminate (4.1-128). However, the layer (4.1-126) may have a planar edge surface, or, if desired, a surface having any other desired profile around which the upper laminate (4.1-128) wraps. By wrapping the upper laminate around the edge surface of the layer (4.1-126), the edge surface may be protected.

As illustrated in FIG. 95, the lower laminate (4.1-130) can wrap around the edge surface of the layer (4.1-126). In particular, the lower laminate can have a portion (4.1-130A) that extends around and covers the edge surface of the layer (4.1-126). The layer (4.1-126) can have a rounded edge surface to allow the lower laminate (4.1-130) to wrap around and sufficiently adhere to the edge surface, can have a planar edge surface, or can have a surface having any other desired profile that the lower laminate (4.1-130) wraps around. By wrapping the lower laminate (4.1-130) around the edge surface of the layer (4.1-126), the edge surface can be protected.

In the example of FIG. 95, the lower laminate portion (4.1-130A) completely wraps around the edge surface of the layer (4.1-126) and partially overlaps the upper laminate (4.1-128). However, this arrangement is merely exemplary. If desired, the lower laminate portion (4.1-130A) may wrap only around the edge surface of the layer (4.1-126) without overlapping or extending above the upper laminate (4.1-128).

Another example of a material that may be used to protect the layer (4.1-126) is illustrated in FIG. 96. In the example of FIG. 96, glue (or other similar material) (4.1-138) may be used to completely fill the gap between the layer (4.1-126) and the shroud (4.1-100). For example, after the cover layer (4.1-92) is assembled to the head-mounted device, the adhesive may be inserted into the gap. The glue (4.1-138) may help protect the edge surface of the layer (4.1-126).

Rather than wrapping the upper or lower laminate around the edge surface of the layer (4.1-126), the upper laminate (4.1-128) can extend into the shroud (4.1-100) to cover the gap between the edge surface and the shroud (4.1-100). For example, as illustrated in FIG. 97, the upper laminate (4.1-128) can have a portion (4.1-128B) that extends into the shroud (4.1-100) (or another portion of the support structure (4.1-26) or the device (4.1-10)). By covering the gap between the edge surface of the layer (4.1-126) and the shroud (4.1-100), the edge surface can be protected.

Instead of or in addition to adding material or extending the laminates to protect the edge surface of the layer (4.1-126), the chassis attached to the shroud (4.1-100) or support structure (4.1-26) may be modified to protect the edge surface. Illustrative examples of modifying these components to protect the layer (4.1-126) are illustrated in FIGS. 98 and 99.

As illustrated in FIG. 98, the structure (4.1-140) may have a lip covering the gap between the layer (4.1-126) and the shroud (4.1-100)/support structure (4.1-26). The structure (4.1-140) may be formed from a portion of the shroud (4.1-100) or from a portion of the support structure (4.1-26) (e.g., the chassis of the support structure (4.1-26)). The lip of the structure (4.1-140) may help protect the edge surface of the layer (4.1-126).

If desired, the lip of the structure (4.1-140) may be combined with an extension of the laminate around the edge surface of the layer (4.1-126). For example, as illustrated in FIG. 99, the upper laminate (4.1-128A) may wrap around the edge surface of the layer (4.1-126) to protect the edge surface, and the lip of the structure (4.1-140) may provide additional protection.

Although the cover layer (4.1-92) is described as being coupled to the shroud (4.1-100), this is merely exemplary. In some embodiments, the cover layer (4.1-92) may be directly coupled to the support structure (4.1-26). In other embodiments, the device (4.1-10) may include a chassis (e.g., a chassis that supports various components of the device (4.1-10)) attached to the support structure (4.1-26), and the cover layer (4.1-92) may be coupled to this chassis.

Furthermore, although the cover layer (4.1-92) is described as comprising a glass layer, this material is merely exemplary. The layer (4.1-126) may be formed from ceramic, sapphire, or any other desired material.

In general, the laminates (4.1-128, 4.1-130) can protect the layer (4.1-126). An exemplary stackup of a cover layer (4.1-92) including detailed laminates (4.1-128, 4.1-130) is illustrated in FIG. 100.

As illustrated in FIG. 100, the cover layer (4.1-92) may include a layer (4.1-126), which may be glass, sapphire, or other material, and laminates (4.1-128, 4.1-130). Although the laminates (4.1-128, 4.1-130) are illustrated planarly in FIG. 100 for illustrative purposes, if desired, the laminates (4.1-128) may be convex laminates and the laminates (4.1-130) may be concave laminates (as illustrated in FIGS. 90-99).

The laminate (4.1-128) can include a polymer layer (4.1-134) bonded to the layer (4.1-126) using an adhesive (4.1-132). The polymer layer (4.1-134) can be a polycarbonate (PC) layer, a polymethyl methacrylate (PMMA) layer, or another suitable polymer layer. The adhesive (4.1-132) can be a pressure sensitive adhesive (PSA), an optically clear adhesive (OCA), or another suitable adhesive. In some exemplary embodiments, the adhesive (4.1-132) can be a UV curable OCA. The adhesive (4.1-132) can have a thickness of at least 100 micrometers, at least 200 micrometers, 150 to 250 micrometers, or another suitable thickness.

The hard coat (4.1-136) can be formed on the polymer layer (4.1-134). The hard coat (4.1-136) can be an acrylic layer, a thin glass layer, a sapphire layer, or other materials. In some embodiments, when the polymer layer (4.1-134) is a PMMA layer, the hard coat (4.1-136) can be a polycarbonate layer or a mixture of polycarbonate and acrylic materials. For example, the hard coat (4.1-136) can be formed as an ultraviolet curable film. The hard coat (4.1-136) can be at least 2 micrometers thick, 3 micrometers thick, 3 to 5 micrometers thick, or another suitable thickness.

Coating layers (4.1-138) may be formed on the hard coat (4.1-136). The coating layers (4.1-138) may include, for example, an anti-reflective coating (e.g., a layer that matches the refractive index of the glass (4.1-126) to the air outside the glass (4.1-126)) and an anti-smudge coating (e.g., a fluoropolymer or other oleophobic material).

By including the adhesive (4.1-132) between the glass (4.1-126) and the polymer layer (4.1-134), the polymer (4.1-134) and the glass (4.1-126) can be debonded. Consequently, less stress can be applied from the polymer (4.1-134) to the glass (4.1-126). To further reduce the amount of stress, a UV-curable OCA can be used, as such an OCA can soften upon application. However, this is merely exemplary. Any suitable adhesive can be used to debond the polymer (4.1-134) from the glass (4.1-126) and reduce the stress applied to the glass (4.1-126).

In some exemplary embodiments, the polymer layer (4.1-134) may be formed of PMMA that can match the optical properties of the glass (4.1-126), particularly when the cover layer (4.1-92) is curved. However, any suitable material may be used to form the polymer layer (4.1-134) and to match the appearance of the polymer layer (4.1-134) to that of the glass (4.1-126).

Although the hard coat (4.1-136) is described as being overlaid by the coating layers (4.1-138), this is merely exemplary. In some embodiments, the hard coat (4.1-136) may be formed as the outermost layer of the cover layer (4.1-92). For example, as illustrated in FIG. 101, the hard coat (4.1-136) may be formed as the outermost layer.

If desired, the hard coat (4.1-136) may include anti-stain properties. For example, the hard coat (4.1-136) may have a fluoropolymer or other hydrophobic material incorporated into the hard coat material. Additionally, if an anti-reflective coating is desired, the anti-reflective coating (4.1-137) may be formed directly on the glass (4.1-126) as the bottom layer of the laminate (4.1-128).

Returning to FIG. 100, the laminate (4.1-130) may include an adhesive (4.1-140) that bonds the polymer (4.1-142) to the glass (4.1-126). The adhesive (4.1-140) and the polymer (4.1-142) may correspond to the adhesive (4.1-132) and the polymer layer (4.1-132). For example, the adhesive (4.1-140) may be PSA or OCA (e.g., UV-curable OCA), and the polymer layer (4.1-132) may be polycarbonate or PMMA. The polymer layer (4.1-142) may be acrylic, sapphire, glass, a UV-curable material, or another suitable material.

An anti-reflective coating (4.1-146) may be formed on the polymer layer (4.1-142). Although not shown, a UV stabilizer material, such as alumina, may be formed between the polymer layer (4.1-142) and the anti-reflective coating (4.1-146). The UV stabilizer material may have a thickness of at least 10 nm, at least 20 nm, or another suitable thickness, and may stabilize the surrounding layers when the adhesives (4.1-140, 4.1-132) and/or the polymer layers (4.1-134, 4.1-142) are cured.

The laminate (4.1-130) may also include ink (4.1-148). The ink (4.1-148) may be formed over an optical component of the head-mounted device, such as one of the components (4.1-60, 4.1-62, 4.1-64, 4.1-66, 4.1-68, 4.1-70, 4.1-72, 4.1-74, 4.1-76, 4.1-78, 4.1-80) of FIG. 87. In an exemplary embodiment, the ink (4.1-148) may overlap a flood illuminator, and the ink (4.1-148) may be an infrared-transparent-visible-blocking ink, such as an ink having a visible light transmittance of 10% or less. However, this is merely exemplary. In general, the ink (4.1-148) can overlap with any component within the head-mounted device and have a corresponding transmittance spectrum.

Although FIGS. 100 and 101 illustrate a laminate (4.1-130) without a hard coat layer, this is merely exemplary. If desired, the laminate (4.1-130) may have a hard coat layer, such as a hard coat layer (4.1-136), within the laminate (4.1-130) or as the outermost layer of the laminate (4.1-130).

Edge seals, such as those of FIGS. 90-93, can protect one or more layers of the laminate (4.1-128) and/or the laminate (4.1-130). An exemplary example of a seal overlapping the edges of layers within the laminate (4.1-128) is illustrated in FIG. 102.

As illustrated in FIG. 102, the seal (4.1-150) can overlap the edges of the laminate (4.1-128). In particular, the seal (4.1-150) can overlap and bond to the PMMA layer, the polycarbonate layer, and/or the hard coat layer of the laminate (4.1-128). In some embodiments, the seal (4.1-150) can form chemical bonds with the upper surface of the laminate (4.1-128). Additionally, in the illustrative example of FIG. 102, the seal (4.1-150) can extend to the glass layer (4.1-126). The seal (4.1-150) can be formed of polyurethane, epoxy, acrylate, PVB, or other suitable material to protect the edges of the laminate (4.1-128).

The foregoing is merely exemplary, and various modifications may be made to the described embodiments. The above-described embodiments may be implemented individually or in any combination.

V: Dust seal

5.1: Seals for electronic devices

The electronic devices described in the present disclosure include components and arrangements configured to protect LEDs, antennas, sensors, and/or other components that communicate with the external environment mentioned above from light and debris that could otherwise be harmful or negatively affect the components. More specifically, the present disclosure describes seals and electronic components that ensure that the internal components can function sufficiently without risk of damage to the internal components and, if necessary, without interference from the environment external to the electronic device. Such interference may include light, debris, or moisture. Such internal components may include, but are not limited to, cameras, LEDs, ambient light sensors, flicker sensors, and other sensors. These and other internal components may be disposed adjacent to or aligned beneath one or more openings/ports of the electronic device, with a seal disposed between the opening/vent and the internal electronic component. In this manner, the seals described herein may act as a barrier between an internal component and the external environment or between an internal component and other internal components while also enabling proper functioning of the internal component.

In a specific example, an electronic device includes a housing defining an interior volume, and an opening defined by the housing. An electronic component may be disposed within the interior volume, and a seal may be disposed between the opening and the electronic component, wherein the seal is configured to protect the electronic component within the housing.

In a specific example, the electronic component may include a light-emitting component coupled to a base support. The electronic device may include other electronic components that are photosensitive. A seal may be positioned and configured between the light-emitting component and the photosensitive component to prevent and/or minimize optical interference.

The seals described herein block light having wavelengths within the visible range as well as light having wavelengths extending into the ultraviolet and infrared ranges. The seals also inhibit dust and/or debris from traversing into the housing of the electronic device from openings and/or any vents located on the housing. The seals described herein are also compressible to aid in assembly of the electronic device. Furthermore, the seals and assemblies described herein are durable and resistant to damage. The seals may be die cut, and the components of the electronic device may be manufactured from materials intended to minimize the weight of the components and/or the electronic device.

For example, the seals described herein may include open or closed cell foam. The seals may be interlocked with a bracket or base support of an electronic device in an interference fit. In some examples, the seals may include a seal configured to surround a light-emitting component. Because the light-emitting component is mounted to an end of the base support in some examples, the seals may be die cut to have a precise interference fit with the base support to isolate the light-emitting component from other electronic components disposed within the electronic device and to facilitate top-down assembly orientation.

Figure 103 illustrates a cross-section of an electronic device (5-100). The electronic device may include any of the electronic devices described above. The electronic device may include a housing (5-105). The housing may include a first wall (5-110). In some examples, the first wall (5-110) may include an exterior wall of the electronic device (5-100) or may include a wall separating chambers or compartments within the electronic device (5-100). The housing (5-105) may include a base support (5-115) coupled to the first wall (5-110). The base support (5-115) may include a base bracket or support piece for the electronic device (5-100) and/or electronic components disposed within the housing (5-105). In some examples, the base support (5-115) may comprise one or more rigid metallic materials, including steel, stainless steel, magnesium, and/or titanium. In some examples, the base support (5-115) may comprise plastic and/or plastic components to reduce the weight of the electronic device (5-100). The base support (5-115) may be cylindrical or may comprise a cubic shape and may be hollow to reduce the weight of a solid material or the electronic device (5-100). The base support (5-115) may comprise a first surface (5-120) that is joined to the first wall (5-110) by an adhesive or any non-limiting fastening method and/or device. An electronic component may be joined to a second surface (5-125) of the base support (5-115). A second surface (5-125) of the base support (5-115) may be configured opposite the first surface (5-120). The electronic component may include a light-emitting component (5-130) (e.g., a light-emitting diode or LED).

The electronic device (5-100) may further include a second wall (5-135) disposed above the base support (5-115). The first wall (5-110) and the second wall (5-135) may form an enclosure (5-140) within the housing (5-105), and the base support (5-115) may be disposed within the enclosure (5-140). In some examples, an electronic component (5-145) may also be disposed within the enclosure (5-140). The electronic component (5-145), in some examples, may include a photosensitive component that is subject to optical interference from the light-emitting component (5-130). The electronic component (5-145) may be mounted to the second base support or may be directly coupled to the first wall (5-110) and/or the second wall (5-135).

The electronic device (5-100) may further include a seal (5-150) surrounding the light-emitting component (5-130). The seal (5-150) may be disposed between the base support (5-115) and the second wall (5-135). In some examples, the seal (5-150) separates the electronic component (5-145) from the light-emitting component (5-130). The seal (5-150) may be configured to block light having wavelengths between about 10-8 m and about 10-3 m. In other words, the seal (5-150) may block light in the visible, ultraviolet, and infrared regions. The seal (5-150) may also inhibit dust and/or debris from traversing between the base support (5-115) and the second wall (5-135). In some examples, the seal (5-150) surrounds the light-emitting component (5-130) on all sides. As such, the seal (5-150) engages the base support (5-115) around the periphery of the upper portion of the base support (5-115) or around a second surface (5-125) of the base support (5-115). In some examples, the second surface (5-125) comprises the same surface on which the light-emitting component (5-130) is disposed.

In some examples, the base support (5-115) defines a ledge (5-155). The seal (5-150) may surround an upper portion of the base support (5-115) and contact or engage an upper surface of the ledge (5-155). In this way, the seal (5-150) and the base support (5-115) may be engaged by a press fit. For example, the radial seal (5-150) may be positioned between the base support (5-115) and the second wall (5-135) by a press fit or friction fit. The seal (5-150) and the base support (5-115) may be held together by friction after the housing (5-105) and other components are assembled. For example, the seal (5-150) may be compressed between the second wall (5-135) and the second surface (5-125) or ledge (5-155) of the base support (5-115) to isolate or seal the light emitting component (5-130) from the electronic component (5-145). In some examples, the seal (5-150) may isolate and/or seal the enclosure (5-140) from an area or environment outside the housing (5-105) or outside the electronic device (5-100).

In some examples, the seal (5-150) may be die cut. The seal (5-150) may be cut to a precise shape by a metal "die" during production. Because of the precise shape (e.g., radial) and dimensions of the seal (5-150) to properly seal against light, dust, and other debris, and to properly fit with the second wall (5-135) and the base support (5-115), including the ledge (5-155) defined thereby, the die cutting process can provide the precise shape and characteristics of the seal (5-150) for proper assembly of the electronic device (5-100).

In some examples, the seal (5-150) may comprise a silicone material. The silicone seal (5-150) can be manufactured inexpensively and, when properly shaped, can provide the required compressibility and interference fit to the base support (5-115). In some examples, the silicone seal (5-150) may comprise a foaming agent and/or may be dyed to block light from passing from the external environment and/or the light-emitting component (5-130) to the electronic component (5-145) within the enclosure (5-140). The seal (5-150) may comprise portions formed of different materials. In some examples, the seal (5-150) may comprise a plastic core (5-160). A plastic shim (5-160) may be included as a component of the seal (5-150) to reduce the weight of the seal (5-150), and thus, the weight of the electronic device (5-100). In some examples, the plastic shim (5-160) may contact the base support (5-115). In some examples, the plastic shim (5-160) may contact the upper portion of the ledge (5-155) and/or the base support (5-115). The plastic shim (5-160) may also be impermeable or resistant to light, dust, and/or debris. The seal may additionally include a foam material (5-165) bonded to the plastic shim (5-160).

Referring now to FIG. 104, a cross-section of the seal (5-150) illustrated in FIG. 103 is illustrated. In some examples, a plastic shim (5-160) may be bonded to a foam material (5-165) with a pressure-sensitive adhesive (5-170), or any suitable adhesive. The plastic shim (5-160) may form a precision seal with the base support (5-115) and may be less expensive to manufacture than a seal comprising only silicone and/or foam material. The foam material (5-165) may be compressed between the plastic shim (5-160) and the second wall (5-135), as illustrated in FIG. 103. The plastic shim (5-160) may include a bottom surface (5-162) that is bonded to the base support (5-115). The plastic core (5-160) may be bonded to the base support (5-115) with a pressure-sensitive adhesive (5-170). The top surface of the plastic core (5-160) may also include a pressure-sensitive adhesive (5-170) for bonding the plastic core (5-160) to a foam material (5-165). In some examples, the foam material (5-165) may include a compressible open- or closed-cell foam to suppress light, dust, and/or debris.

FIG. 105 illustrates an electronic device (5-200) having a housing (5-205) and electronic components therein. The electronic device (5-200) may include a head-mountable device (e.g., device (30)). In some examples, the electronic device (5-200) may include a first enclosure (5-210) having a light-emitting component (5-222) disposed therein. The first enclosure may be at least partially defined by the housing (5-205), an inner wall (5-255), and an outer wall (5-240) defining an outer surface (5-242). The housing (5-205) may include a first wall (5-215). In some examples, the first wall (5-215) may include an outer wall of the electronic device (5-200) or may include a wall separating chambers or compartments within the electronic device (5-200). The housing (5-205) may include a base support (5-220) coupled to a first wall (5-215). The base support (5-220) may include a first surface (5-225) coupled to the first wall (5-215) by an adhesive or any non-limiting fastening method and/or device. An electronic component may be coupled to a second surface (5-230) of the base support (5-220). The second surface (5-230) of the base support (5-220) may be opposite the first surface (5-225). The light-emitting component (5-222) may include a light-emitting diode (LED).

The housing (5-205) may further include a second enclosure (5-230). The second enclosure (5-230) may include at least one photosensitive component (5-235) disposed therein. The second enclosure (5-230) may be bounded by the housing (5-205) including various inner and outer walls. In some examples, the photosensitive component (5-235) may include a photosensitive device. In some examples, the photosensitive component (5-235) may include at least one of a camera, an ambient light sensor, or a flicker sensor. In some examples, the second enclosure (5-230) may include an outer surface (5-240) of the housing (5-205). In other words, one of the walls of the second enclosure (5-230) includes an outer surface (5-240) of the housing (5-205).

In some examples, the housing (5-205) may further define a third enclosure (5-245). A base support (5-220) may be disposed within the third enclosure (5-245). In some examples, the base support (5-220) may comprise a metal or plastic material. In some examples, the third enclosure (5-245) may comprise an interior surface (5-250) of the housing (5-205). In other words, one of the walls of the third enclosure (5-245) comprises an interior surface (5-250) of the housing (5-205). In some examples, the housing (5-205) of the electronic device (5-200) comprises an interior wall (5-255) that separates at least a portion of the second enclosure (5-230) and the third enclosure (5-245). In some examples, a seal (5-260) is included. The seal (5-260) may be coupled to an upper portion or a second surface (5-230) of the base support (5-220). The seal (5-260) may separate the first enclosure (5-210), the second enclosure (5-230), and the third enclosure (5-245). In other words, the seal (5-260) comprises at least a portion of a wall or divider that separates the first enclosure (5-210), the second enclosure (5-230), and the third enclosure (5-245) from each other. In some examples, the seal (5-260) is opaque to dust, debris, and/or light. The seal may extend from the second surface (5-230) of the base support (5-220) past the inner wall (5-255) and may be press-fitted into the outer surface (5-240) of the housing (5-205). In such a configuration as illustrated in FIG. 6, the seal (5-260) functions to protect the photosensitive component (5-235) from the light-emitting component (5-222) and to protect both the photosensitive component (5-235) and the light-emitting component (5-222) from debris and/or dust (5-265) present outside the housing (5-205) or within the third enclosure (5-245).

In some examples, dust (5-265) may enter the third enclosure (5-245) through the air vent (5-270) or other opening. The seal (5-260) prevents or substantially prevents dust (5-265) or other debris, such as but not limited to water, dirt, and smoke, from passing into the first enclosure (5-210) or the second enclosure (5-230), which may contain sensitive electronic components. The air vent (5-270) may be included on the electronic device (5-200) for temperature control and/or heat dissipation. In some examples, the air vent (5-270) may be included for the comfort and/or safety of a user of the electronic device (5-200). In one example, the air vent (5-270) may include a perforated material to cover the air vent (5-270) or other openings within the electronic device. The size, location, and number of perforations extending through such material may vary from example to example. Such perforations may include machined, laser-cut, or otherwise manufactured openings defined by and extending through the material. Such openings may be sized and arranged to prevent particles of a predetermined size from the external environment from passing through the air vent (5-270). Such openings may also be sized and include other types of filters to prevent moisture or other harmful debris from passing through the air vent (5-270).

In some examples, the seal (5-260) may be cut and/or shaped to seal around the inner wall (5-255) and between the second surface (5-230) of the base support (5-220) and the outer surface (5-240) of the housing (5-205). The seal (5-260) may comprise a compressible foam and may be compressed by a force fit or press fit between the outer surface (5-240) of the housing (5-205) and the upper portion or second surface (5-230) of the base support (5-220). The seal (5-260) may comprise an open-cell polyurethane foam, which is lighter and more compressible than closed-cell foam. In other examples, the seal (5-260) may comprise a silicone material. The seal (5-260) may comprise reticulated polyurethane, PVC/nitrile, ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM) rubber, or other suitable materials. Materials that can be used to produce the closed-cell foam for the seal (5-260) can vary widely, from ethylene-vinyl acetate (EVA), polyethylene, polystyrene, rubber, to polypropylene, etc. The closed-cell foam may contain entrapped gas bubbles that form during the foam's expansion and curing process. The entrapped gas is very effective in increasing the foam's insulating capacity, so the bubbles are permanently locked in place. The resulting foam is strong and typically has a higher density than open-cell foam, which allows the gas bubbles to remain locked in place. The foam's properties allow it to be vapor-retardant and resistant to liquid water. In some examples, the materials for the seals may be open-celled, but may include sufficiently tortuous pathways to limit or eliminate the passage of contaminants between the enclosures.

In some examples, the upper portion of the base support (5-220) may include a ledge (e.g., ledge (5-155) illustrated in FIG. 103). A seal (5-260) may surround the upper portion of the base support (5-220) and contact the ledge. In some examples, the seal (5-260) may further include a plastic shim (e.g., plastic shim (5-160)) that contacts the ledge. The seal (5-260) may be tightly fitted to the base support (5-220). A tight fit may function to seal enclosures within the housing as well as control and/or hold electronic components in place, which may improve the design of the electronic device (5-200), minimize noise and/or vibrations, and reduce manufacturing costs.

Figures 106a through 106c illustrate an electronic device (5-300). Figure 106a depicts a top perspective view of an electronic component (5-305) within the electronic device (5-300) and a dust seal (5-310) surrounding the electronic component (5-305), according to an example. In some examples, the dust seal (5-310) may be coupled to a base support (5-315). The dust seal (5-310) may be coupled to the base support (5-315) via a press fit. In some examples, the dust seal (5-310) may be bonded to the base support (5-315) with an adhesive (e.g., a pressure-sensitive adhesive (5-170) illustrated in Figure 104). In some examples, the electronic component (5-305) may include a light-emitting component (e.g., light-emitting component (5-222) illustrated in FIG. 105). The electronic device (5-300) may further include a flexible printed circuit board or flexible printed circuit (flex PCB) (5-320). At least a portion of the flex PCB (5-320) may be disposed between the dust seal (5-310) and the base support (5-315). In some examples, the flex PCB may include an array of printed circuit portions and/or components utilizing flexible materials having a flexible overlay. The flexible printed circuit board may include a metal layer, typically copper, of traces bonded to a dielectric layer. The metal layer may vary in thickness from very thin (<.0001") to very thick (>.010"), and the dielectric thickness may also vary. A flex PCB may be incorporated into an electronic device (5-300) to reduce assembly steps and improve reliability. The flex PCB may be used as a connector, a power supply, and also as complete circuits assembled with components such as the electronic component (5-305). An advantage of incorporating a flex PCB (5-320) into the electronic device (5-300) is that it allows the electronic component (5-305) to be connected to other components and/or a power source (not shown), and the flex PCB (5-320) to be positioned between a dust seal (5-310) and a base support (5-315). In some examples, the dust seal (5-310) maintains the flex PCB adjacent to the base support (5-315).

Figure 106b illustrates a cross-sectional view of a portion of an electronic device (5-300). A flex PCB (5-320) may be coupled to an electronic component (5-305). In some examples, the electronic component (5-305) may include a light-emitting device mounted to a base support (5-315). In some examples, the light-emitting device may be coupled to a top surface (5-325) of the flex PCB (5-320), and a bottom surface (5-330) of the flex PCB (5-320) may be coupled to the base support (5-315). A dust seal (5-310) may surround the light-emitting device. In some examples, the dust seal (5-310) is opaque or resistant to light, dust, and/or debris. Figure 106b illustrates a base support (5-315) having a ledge (5-335). The dust seal (5-310) may extend from an upper portion of the base support (5-315) adjacent to the base support (5-315) and past the dust seal (5-310). In some examples, the ledge (5-335) may include a cut-out portion. The cut-out portion may have a width of the flex PCB to minimize folding of the PCB and maintain the flex PCB (5-320) adjacent to the base support (5-315). Referring to FIG. 106c, the flex PCB (5-320) may additionally include an adhesive (5-340) on a bottom surface (5-330) to maintain the flex PCB (5-320) adjacent to the base support (5-315). FIG. 7c illustrates components of a dust seal, each configured to retain a flex PCB (5-320) and/or prevent dust and/or debris from entering the electronic device.

In some examples, the dust seal (5-310) may act as a radial seal to apply a radial force (5-345) to the flex PCB (5-320) to maintain the flex PCB (5-320) adjacent to the base support (5-315). In other words, the dust seal (5-310) prevents ingress by applying a compressive vertical force that prevents the flex PCB (5-320) from peeling off the base support (5-315) and assists the adhesive (5-340) in flex management. The dust seal (5-310) may also act as a compression seal to apply a compressive force (5-350) to compress the dust seal (5-310) between the housing wall (5-355) and the base support (5-315). As such, the dust seal (5-310) may comprise a compressible foam. A dust seal (5-310) may be coupled to a base support (5-315) and may be force-fitted to the base support and the housing wall (5-355). As described in other examples above, the housing wall (5-355) of the electronic device (5-300) may include vents (5-360) and/or other openings. FIG. 7C illustrates a dust ingress path (5-365) that the dust seal (5-310) is configured to prevent. Because the dust seal (5-310) comprises a compressible foam and is engaged within the compression seal and the radial seal, the dust ingress path (5-365) is closed, and the dust seal (5-310) is impermeable to dust and/or debris. In some examples, the dust seal (5-310) is also impermeable to light.

In some examples, the components described above for electronic device examples (e.g., electronic devices (5-100, 5-200, and/or 5-300)) may assist in the assembly of an electronic device housing (e.g., housing (5-305)). The assembly process may, in some examples, require the use of a minimal amount of metallic material for the base support (5-315) to maximize the available distance available between components. The assembly methods may also require that the ledge (5-335) be minimized so that the base support (5-315) does not interfere with the inclusion/installation of other electronic components (e.g., electronic component (5-145)) during assembly. In other words, due to the materials used in the base support (5-315) and/or the shape of the base support (5-315), the base support (5-315) may be installed first, then other electronic components (e.g., electronic components (5-145)) may be installed after the base support (5-315), then the dust seal (5-310) may be placed on or around the base support, and finally a housing wall (e.g., housing wall (5-355)) may be installed to compress the dust seal (5-310) into a force fit between the housing wall (5-355) and the base support (5-315). In other words, the exemplary sealing systems and methods facilitate top or front assembly of the device while ensuring a secure light and/or dust seal between the sections.

VI: Sensor System

FIG. 107 illustrates an exemplary drawing of an HMD device (6-100). The HMD device (6-100) may include a sensor array or system (6-102) including one or more sensors, cameras, projectors, etc. mounted on one or more components of the HMD (6-100). In at least one example, the sensor system (6-102) may include a bracket (1-338) to which one or more sensors of the sensor system (6-102) may be affixed/secured.

FIG. 108 illustrates a portion of an HMD device (6-100) including a front transparent cover (6-104) and a sensor system (6-102). The sensor system (6-102) may include a number of different sensors, emitters, and receivers, including cameras, IR sensors, projectors, etc. The transparent cover (6-104) is illustrated in front of the sensor system (6-102) to illustrate the relative positions of the various sensors and emitters, as well as the orientation of each sensor/emitter of the system (6-102). As used herein, the terms "sideways," "lateral," "horizontal," and other similar terms refer to orientations or directions as indicated by the X-axis illustrated in FIG. 109. The terms "vertical," "up," "down," and similar refer to orientations or directions as indicated by the Z-axis illustrated in FIG. 109. The terms "forward", "backward", "front", "rear", and similar terms refer to orientations or directions as indicated by the Y-axis illustrated in FIG. 109.

In at least one example, a transparent cover (6-104) may define a front, outer surface of the HMD device (6-100), and a sensor system (6-102), including its various sensors and components, may be positioned behind the cover (6-104) in the Y-axis/direction. The cover (6-104) may be transparent or translucent to allow light, both light detected by the sensor system (6-102) and light emitted thereby, to pass through the cover (6-104).

As mentioned elsewhere herein, the HMD device (6-100) may include one or more controllers, including processors, for electrically coupling the various sensors and emitters of the sensor system (6-102) with other electronic devices, such as one or more motherboards, processing units, and display screens. Additionally, as illustrated in more detail below with reference to other drawings, the various sensors, emitters, and other components of the sensor system (6-102) may be coupled to various structural frame members, brackets, and the like of the HMD device (6-100) not shown in FIG. 108. FIG. 108 depicts components of the sensor system (6-102) electrically detached and decoupled from other components for clarity of illustration.

In at least one example, the device may include one or more controllers having processors configured to execute instructions stored on memory components electrically coupled to the processors. The instructions may include or cause the processor to execute one or more algorithms for self-correcting the angles and positions of the various cameras described herein over time with use as the initial positions, angles, or orientations of the cameras become bumped or deformed due to unintended dropping events or other events.

In at least one example, the sensor system (6-102) may include one or more scene cameras (6-106). The system (6-102) may include two scene cameras (6-102) positioned on either side of the nose bridge or arch of the HMD device (6-100) such that each of the two cameras (6-106) is positioned generally corresponding to the user's left and right eyes behind the cover (6-103). In at least one example, the scene cameras (6-106) are oriented generally forward in the Y direction to capture images of the area in front of the user during use of the HMD (6-100). In at least one example, the scene cameras are color cameras and provide images and content for MR video pass-through to display screens facing the user's eyes when using the HMD device (6-100). The scene cameras (6-106) may also be used for environment and object reconstruction.

In at least one example, the HMD (6-100) may include a controller electrically coupled to various sensors and displays of the HMD (6-100). In one example, the controller is configured to cause mixed reality video passthrough from the first and second scene cameras (6-106), respectively, to the rear-facing displays, including one or more images captured by the first and second scene cameras (6-106).

In at least one example, the sensor system (6-102) may include a first depth sensor (6-108) that is generally forward-facing in the Y direction. In at least one example, the first depth sensor (6-108) may be used for environment and object reconstruction as well as user hand and body tracking. In at least one example, the sensor system (6-102) may include a second depth sensor (6-110) that is centrally positioned along the width of the HMD device (6-100) (i.e., along the X axis). For example, the second depth sensor (6-110) may be positioned over the central nose bridge or receiving features on the user's nose when wearing the HMD (6-100). In at least one example, the second depth sensor (6-110) may be used for environment and object reconstruction as well as hand and body tracking. In at least one example, the second depth sensor may include a LIDAR sensor.

In at least one example, the sensor system (6-102) may include a generally forward-facing depth projector (6-112) to project electromagnetic waves, for example, in the form of a predetermined pattern of light spots, into the field of view of the user and/or scene cameras (6-106) or beyond the field of view of the user and/or scene cameras (6-106). In at least one example, the depth projector may project electromagnetic waves of light in the form of a point pattern that will reflect off objects and back into the depth sensors mentioned above, including the depth sensors (6-108, 6-110). In at least one example, the depth projector (6-112) may be used for hand and body tracking as well as for environment and object reconstruction.

In at least one example, the sensor system (6-102) may include downward-facing cameras (6-114) having a field of view generally downward relative to the HMD device (6-100) in the Z-axis. In at least one example, the downward-facing cameras (6-114) may be positioned on the left and right sides of the HMD device (6-100), as illustrated, and may be used for hand and body tracking, headset tracking, and facial avatar detection and generation for displaying a user avatar on the forward-facing display screen of the HMD device (6-100) as described elsewhere herein. The downward-facing cameras (6-114) may be used to capture facial expressions and movements of the user's face below the HMD device (6-100), including, for example, the cheeks, mouth, and chin.

In at least one example, the sensor system (6-102) may include jaw cameras (6-116). In at least one example, the jaw cameras (6-116) may be positioned on the left and right sides of the HMD device (6-100), as illustrated, and may be used for hand and body tracking, headset tracking, and facial avatar detection and generation for displaying a user avatar on the forward-facing display screen of the HMD device (6-100) as described elsewhere herein. The jaw cameras (6-116) may be used to capture facial expressions and movements of the user's face beneath the HMD device (6-100), including the user's chin, cheeks, mouth, and chin, for example, for hand and body tracking, headset tracking, and facial avatars.

In at least one example, the sensor system (6-102) may include side cameras (6-118). The side cameras (6-118) may be oriented to capture left and right side views in the X-axis or direction relative to the HMD device (6-100). In at least one example, the side cameras (6-118) may be used for hand and body tracking, headset tracking, and facial avatar detection and regeneration.

In at least one example, the sensor system (6-102) may include a plurality of eye-tracking and gaze-tracking sensors for determining the identity, state, and gaze direction of the user's eyes during and/or prior to use. In at least one example, the eye/gaze-tracking sensors may include nose-eye cameras (6-120) positioned on either side of and adjacent to the user's nose when the HMD device (6-100) is worn. The eye/gaze sensors may also include bottom-eye cameras (6-122) positioned below each of the user's eyes to capture images of the eyes for facial avatar detection and creation, gaze tracking, and iris identification functions.

In at least one example, the sensor system (6-102) may include infrared illuminators (6-124) pointing outward from the HMD device (6-100) to illuminate the external environment and any objects therein with IR light for IR detection using one or more IR sensors of the sensor system (6-102). In at least one example, the sensor system (6-102) may include a flicker sensor (6-126) and an ambient light sensor (6-128). In at least one example, the flicker sensor (6-126) may detect overhead light refresh rates to avoid display flicker. In one example, the infrared illuminators (6-124) may include light emitting diodes and may be used in low-light environments, particularly to illuminate a user's hands and other objects in low light for detection by the infrared sensors of the sensor system (6-102).

In at least one example, a plurality of sensors, including scene cameras (6-106), downward facing cameras (6-114), jaw cameras (6-116), side facing cameras (6-118), a depth projector (6-112), and depth sensors (6-108, 6-110), may be used in combination with an electrically coupled controller to combine depth data with camera data for size determination and hand tracking for better hand tracking and object recognition and tracking capabilities of the HMD device (6-100). In at least one example, the downward facing cameras (6-114), jaw cameras (6-116), and side facing cameras (6-118) described above and illustrated in FIG. 108 may be wide-angle cameras capable of operating in the visible and infrared spectrums. In at least one example, these cameras (6-114, 6-116, 6-118) may operate only in black and white light detection to simplify image processing and obtain sensitivity.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIG. 108) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 109-111 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 109-111 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 108.

FIG. 109 illustrates a bottom perspective view of an example of an HMD (6-200) including a cover or shroud (6-204) secured to a frame (6-230). In at least one example, the sensors (6-203) of the sensor system (6-202) may be positioned around the periphery of the HMD (6-200) such that the sensors (6-203) are positioned outwardly around the periphery of the display area or zone (6-232) so as not to obstruct the view of the displayed light. In at least one example, the sensors may be positioned behind the shroud (6-204) and aligned with transparent portions of the shroud that allow the sensors and projectors to pass light forward and backward through the shroud (6-204). In at least one example, opaque ink or other opaque materials or films/layers may be disposed on the shroud (6-204) around the display area (6-232) to conceal components of the HMD (6-200) outside the display area (6-232) other than the transparent portions defined by the opaque portions through which the sensors and projectors transmit and receive optical and electromagnetic signals during operation. In at least one example, the shroud (6-204) allows light to pass through from the display (e.g., from within the display area (6-232)), but does not allow light to pass radially outward from the display area around the periphery of the display and shroud (6-204).

In some examples, the shroud (6-204) includes a transparent portion (6-205) and an opaque portion (6-207), as described above and elsewhere herein. In at least one example, the opaque portion (6-207) of the shroud (6-204) may define one or more transparent areas (6-209) through which sensors (6-203) of the sensor system (6-202) can transmit and receive signals. In the illustrated example, the sensors (6-203) of the sensor system (6-202) that transmit and receive signals through the shroud (6-204), or more specifically through the transparent areas (6-209) of (or defined by) the opaque portion (6-207) of the shroud (6-204), may include sensors identical or similar to those illustrated in the example of FIG. 108, for example, depth sensors (6-108, 6-110), a depth projector (6-112), first and second scene cameras (6-106), first and second downward facing cameras (6-114), first and second side facing cameras (6-118), and first and second infrared illuminators (6-124). These sensors are also illustrated in the examples of FIGS. 110 and 111. Other sensors, sensor types, number of sensors, and their relative positions may be included in one or more other examples of HMDs.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIG. 109) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 108, 110, and 111 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 108, 110, and 111 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 109.

FIG. 110 illustrates a front view of a portion of an example HMD device (6-300) including a display (6-334), brackets (6-336, 6-338), and a frame or housing (6-330). The example depicted in FIG. 110 does not include a front cover or shroud to illustrate the brackets (6-336, 6-338). For example, the shroud (6-204) depicted in FIG. 109 includes an opaque portion (6-207) that visually covers/blocks the view of anything outside (e.g., outside the radial/peripheral portion) of the display/display area (6-334), including the sensors (6-303) and the bracket (6-338).

In at least one example, the various sensors of the sensor system (6-302) are coupled to brackets (6-336, 6-338). In at least one example, the scene cameras (6-306) have tight tolerances in their angles relative to one another. For example, the tolerance in the mounting angles between two scene cameras (6-306) may be less than 0.5 degrees, for example less than 0.3 degrees. To achieve and maintain such tight tolerances, in one example, the scene cameras (6-306) may be mounted to the brackets (6-338) rather than the shroud. The bracket may include cantilevered arms that may be mounted such that the scene cameras (6-306) and other sensors of the sensor system (6-302) remain positioned and oriented unchanged in the event of a user dropping event that results in any deformation of the other bracket (6-226), the housing (6-330), and/or the shroud.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIG. 110) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 108, 109, and 111 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 108, 109, and 111 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 110.

FIG. 111 illustrates a bottom view of an example HMD (6-400) including a front display/cover assembly (6-404) and a sensor system (6-402). The sensor system (6-402) may be similar to other sensor systems described above and elsewhere herein, including with reference to FIGS. 108-110 . In at least one example, the eye cameras (6-416) may be facing downward to capture images of the user's lower facial features. In one example, the eye cameras (6-416) may be directly coupled to a frame or housing (6-430) or one or more internal brackets directly coupled to the frame or housing (6-430) illustrated. The frame or housing (6-430) may include one or more openings/openings (6-415) through which the eye cameras (6-416) may transmit and receive signals.

In at least one example, an outward-facing sensor assembly configured to capture images from an external environment in front of a head-mounted device may include a first scene camera (6-106) facing in a first direction, a second scene camera (6-106) facing in a second direction, and an inward-facing sensor assembly configured to capture images of a user when the head-mounted device (6-100) is worn by the user. The inward-facing sensor assembly may include various rearward-facing eye-tracking cameras (6-120, 6-122). In at least one example, the device (6-100) may include a controller electrically coupled to the outward-facing sensor assembly and the inward-facing sensor assembly. The controller may be configured to cause a rearward-facing display to project first images captured by the outward-facing sensor assembly and to cause a forward-facing display to project second images captured by the various eye-tracking cameras (6-120, 6-122).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIG. 111 ) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 108 through 110 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 108 through 110 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 111 .

VII: Antennas

FIG. 112 illustrates an exemplary drawing of an HMD display unit (100) including an antenna assembly (7.0-102). Section VII of the present application describes antennas and various components, assemblies, and systems associated with the antenna system (7.0-102) of the HMD display unit (100).

7.1: Electronic devices having antenna-mounting structures

Electronic devices may be provided with component mounting structures. The electronic devices may include portable electronic devices, wearable devices, desktop devices, embedded systems, and other electronic equipment. Exemplary configurations in which the electronic devices include a head-mounted device having a component mounting system may sometimes be described herein as examples.

Component mounting systems may be used to assist in mounting electrical components within a device. As an example, a bias member (sometimes referred to as a bias structure) may be used to assist in mounting an antenna within a housing of the device. Additional structures, such as a bias member, an antenna, and an antenna support member (sometimes referred to as an antenna support structure or antenna support), may form an antenna assembly that assists in mounting the antenna within the device at a location where the antenna signals are not blocked by conductive housing structures. If desired, the bias members may be used to mount components other than antennas within the device. The use of bias members to assist in mounting antennas within head-mounted devices is exemplary.

The bias member for the antenna assembly may be formed from a material such as a structural foam or other compressible material that exhibits unidirectional compression and expansion characteristics. For this type of arrangement, the foam preferentially compresses and expands along a particular direction, and exhibits little or no expansion and compression along orthogonal directions. The direction of preferential compression and expansion, which may sometimes be referred to as a preferential compression direction, a unidirectional compression direction, a preferential compression/expansion axis, an axis of preferential compression, etc., need not be parallel to the surface normals of the bias member. For example, the bias member may be formed from a layer of foam having first and second surfaces that are opposite in shape and characterized by surface normals, and the direction of preferential compression may be oriented at a non-zero angle with respect to the surface normals (e.g., at least 10 ^° , at least 20 ^° , less than 80 ^° , less than 70 ^° , or another suitable angle).

FIG. 113 is a plan view of an exemplary electronic device that may include a component bias member. In the example of FIG. 113, the device (7.1-10) is a head-mounted device. As shown in FIG. 113, the head-mounted device (7.1-10) may include a housing (7.1-12). The housing (7.1-12) is configured to be worn on a user's head and may sometimes be referred to as a head-mounted housing or a head-mounted support structure. The housing (7.1-12) may have a nose bridge portion, such as curved head-shaped surfaces, a portion (NB) configured to rest on the user's nose when the device (7.1-10) is on the user's head, and/or may have a headband, such as a strap (7.1-12T) for supporting the device (7.1-10) on the user's head, and/or may have other features that allow the device (7.1-10) to be worn by the user. The housing (7.1-12) may have walls or other structures that separate an interior region of the device (7.1-10), such as the interior region (7.1-42), from an exterior region surrounding the device (7.1-10), such as the exterior region (7.1-44). As an example, the housing (7.1-12) may include a transparent layer that forms a housing wall on the front (F) of the device (7.1-10), such as a display cover layer (7.1-12CG). The display cover layer (7.1-12CG) may overlap a forward-facing display, such as a display (7.1-20) (e.g., a pixel array based on organic light-emitting diodes or other display panel). Electrical components (7.1-36) (e.g., integrated circuits, sensors, control circuitry, light emitting diodes, lasers, and other light emitting devices, other control circuits, and input/output devices, etc.) may be mounted on printed circuits and/or other structures within the device (7.1-10) (e.g., within the interior region (7.1-42)).

To present images to a user for viewing from eye boxes, such as eye boxes (7.1-34), the device (7.1-10) may include rear-facing displays within the optical modules (7.1-16). For example, there may be a left rear-facing display within the left optical module (7.1-16) for presenting images from the left eye box (7.1-34) to the user's left eye through the left lens, and a right rear-facing display within the right optical module (7.1-16) for presenting images from the right eye box (7.1-34) to the user's right eye through the right lens.

When the inward-facing surface (7.1-18) of the housing (7.1-12) is positioned against the outer surface of the user's face, the user's eyes are positioned within the eye boxes (7.1-34) at the rear (R) of the device (7.1-10). On the rear (R), the housing (7.1-12) may have cushion structures (sometimes referred to as optical seal structures) to enhance the user's comfort as the surface (7.1-18) is positioned against the user's face. The device (7.1-10) may have forward-facing components, such as forward-facing cameras and other sensors, on the front (F) facing outwardly away from the user. These components may generally be oriented in the +Y (forward) direction of FIG. 113.

During operation, the device (7.1-10) may receive image data (e.g., image data for video, still images, etc.) and present this information on displays of the optical modules (7.1-16). The device (7.1-10) may also receive other data, control commands, user input, etc. The device (7.1-10) may transmit data to accessories and other electronic equipment. For example, image data from a forward-facing camera may be provided to an associated device, audio output may be provided to a device having speakers, such as a headphone device, user input and sensor readings may be transmitted to remote equipment, and so on.

Such communications may be supported using wired and/or wireless communications. In an exemplary configuration, components (7.1-36) may include wireless communication circuitry to support wireless communications between the device (7.1-10) and remote wireless equipment (e.g., a cellular telephone, a wireless base station, a computer, headphones or other accessories, a remote control, peer devices, Internet servers, and/or other equipment). The wireless communications may be supported using one or more antennas operating at one or more wireless communication frequencies. In an exemplary configuration, the one or more antennas may be coupled to wireless transceiver circuitry. The wireless transceiver circuitry may include transmitter circuitry configured to transmit wireless communication signals using the antenna(s), and receiver circuitry configured to receive wireless communication signals using the antenna(s).

The wireless circuitry of the device (7.1-10) may be formed from one or more integrated circuits, power amplifier circuitry, low-noise input amplifiers, passive RF components, one or more antennas, transmission lines, and other circuitry for processing RF radio signals. The wireless circuitry may include radio frequency transceiver circuitry for handling various radio frequency communication bands. For example, the wireless circuitry of the device (7.1-10) may include wireless local area network (WLAN) and wireless personal area network (WPAN) transceiver circuitry. Such transceiver circuitry may handle the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz bands for WiFi® (IEEE 802.11) communications and other WLAN communications, and the 2.4 GHz Bluetooth® communications band or other WPAN bands, and may sometimes be referred to herein as WLAN/WPAN transceiver circuitry or local transceiver circuitry.

The wireless circuitry of the device (7.1-10) may utilize remote radio circuitry, such as cellular telephone transceiver circuitry, for handling wireless communications in frequency ranges (communication bands), such as cellular low band (LB) of 600 to 960 MHz, cellular low-mid band (LMB) of 1410 to 1510 MHz, cellular mid band (MB) of 1710 to 2170 MHz, cellular high band (HB) of 2300 to 2700 MHz, cellular ultra-high band (UHB) of 3300 to 5000 MHz, or other communication bands between 600 MHz and 5000 MHz. If desired, the cellular telephone transceiver circuitry may support 5G communications using the low band of 600 to 850 MHz, the mid band of 2.5 to 3.7 GHz, and the high band of 25 to 39 GHz. Wireless communications may also be provided using other frequency ranges (e.g., greater than 100 MHz, greater than 1 GHz, 1 to 30 GHz, 100 MHz to 300 GHz, 24 GHz, less than 300 GHz, less than 100 GHz, 10 to 300 GHz, or other mm-wave frequencies, and/or other suitable frequencies). The WLAN/WPAN transceiver circuitry and/or the cellular transceiver circuitry may handle voice data and non-voice data.

If desired, the antennas and other wireless circuitry of the device (7.1-10) may include satellite navigation system circuitry, such as GPS receiver circuitry for receiving global positioning system (GPS) signals at 1575 MHz or for processing other satellite positioning data (e.g., GLONASS signals at 1609 MHz). Satellite navigation system signals are received from satellites in a constellation orbiting the Earth. The wireless circuitry within the device (7.1-10) may, if desired, include circuitry for other short-range (local) and long-range (remote) wireless links. For example, the wireless circuitry within the device (7.1-10) may be provided to receive television and radio signals, paging signals, near field communication (NFC) signals at 13.56 MHz or other suitable NFC frequencies, ultra-wideband (UWB) signals (e.g., UWB signals between 6 and 8.5 GHz, UWB signals between 3.5 and 9 GHz, etc.). The wireless circuitry within the device (7.1-10) may also include antennas and transceivers for processing sensing applications (e.g., radar). If desired, the antennas may be provided in arrays that support beam steering (e.g., phased antenna arrays). These and other arrays may be used to support wireless communications, wireless sensing, wireless location services, wireless power, and other wireless operations.

The wireless circuitry of the device (7.1-10) may include antennas formed using any suitable antenna types. For example, the antennas of the device (7.1-10) may include antennas having resonant elements formed from slot antenna structures, loop antenna structures, patch antenna structures, stacked patch antenna structures, antenna structures having parasitic elements, inverted-F antenna structures, planar inverted-F antenna structures, helical antenna structures, monopole antennas, dipole antenna structures, Yagi (Yagi-Uda) antenna structures, surface-integrated waveguide structures, hybrids of these designs, and the like. If desired, one or more of the antennas may be cavity-backed antennas.

Different types of antennas may be used for different bands and combinations of bands. For example, one type of antenna may be used to form a local wireless link antenna, while another type of antenna may be used to form a remote wireless link antenna. If desired, space may be saved within the device (7.1-10) by using a single antenna to handle two or more different communication bands. For example, a single antenna within the device (7.1-10) may be used to handle communications in a WiFi® or Bluetooth® communication band while also handling communications in one or more cellular telephone frequencies. In some configurations, some cellular telephone communications (e.g., low-band and mid-band communications) may be handled using a first antenna (e.g., an inverted-F antenna), while other communications (e.g., high-band communications) may be handled using one or more phased antenna arrays (e.g., multiple linear patch antenna arrays, each mounted in a different orientation and each having a different field of view to achieve a desired amount of angular coverage).

To provide the antenna structures within the device (7.1-10) with the ability to cover different frequencies of interest, one or more of the antennas of the device (7.1-10) may be provided with circuitry, such as filter circuitry (e.g., one or more passive filters and/or one or more tunable filter circuits). Discrete components, such as capacitors, inductors, and resistors, may be integrated into the filter circuitry. Capacitive structures, inductive structures, and resistive structures may also be formed as patterned metal structures (e.g., as part of the antenna). If desired, the antenna(s) within the device (7.1-10) may be provided with adjustable circuitry, such as tunable components, for tuning the antenna across the communication (frequency) bands of interest. The tunable components may be part of a tunable filter or a tunable impedance matching network, may be part of an antenna resonant element, or may span a gap between an antenna resonant element and antenna ground.

Radio frequency transmission line paths may be used to convey antenna signals between radio frequency transceiver circuitry of the device (7.1-10) and antenna(s) of the device (7.1-10). These paths may include one or more radio frequency transmission lines (sometimes referred to herein simply as transmission lines). The radio frequency transmission line paths may each include a positive signal conductor and a ground signal conductor. The transmission lines within the device (7.1-10) may include coaxial cable transmission lines, stripline transmission lines, microstrip transmission lines, edge-coupled microstrip transmission lines, edge-coupled stripline transmission lines, transmission lines formed from waveguide structures (e.g., coplanar waveguides or grounded coplanar waveguides), and combinations of these types of transmission lines and/or other transmission line structures.

If desired, matching networks may be used to help match impedances in the radio circuitry of the device (7.1-10). The matching network may include components such as inductors, resistors, and capacitors that are configured to match the impedance of the antenna to the impedance of an associated radio frequency transmission line path used to couple the antenna to the transceiver. The matching network components may be provided as individual components (e.g., surface mount technology components), or may be formed from housing structures, printed circuit board structures, traces on plastic supports, etc. Components such as these may also be used to form antenna filter circuitry and may be tunable and/or fixed components.

Radio frequency transmission line paths may be coupled to antenna feed structures associated with antennas within the device (7.1-10). For example, an antenna within the device (7.1-10), such as an inverted-F antenna, a planar inverted-F antenna, a patch antenna, a loop antenna, or other antenna, may have an antenna feed having a positive antenna feed terminal and a ground antenna feed terminal. The positive antenna feed terminal may be coupled to an antenna resonant (radiating) element within the antenna. The ground antenna feed terminal may be coupled to an antenna ground within the antenna. The positive feed terminal may be coupled to a positive signal line within the transmission line, and the ground feed terminal may be coupled to a ground signal line within the transmission line.

If desired, other types of antenna feed arrangements may be utilized. For example, the antenna may be fed using multiple feeds, each coupled to a respective port of the transceiver via a corresponding transmission line. If desired, a given transmission line signal conductor may be coupled to multiple locations on the antenna, and/or switches may be interposed in the paths between the feed terminals of the transceiver and the antenna.

FIG. 114 is a diagram of exemplary wireless communication circuitry for a device (7.1-10). As depicted in FIG. 114, the wireless circuitry includes a radio frequency transceiver (7.1-60), which is coupled to an antenna (7.1-40) by a transmission line (7.1-62). The antenna (7.1-40) may have an antenna resonating element (7.1-52) and an antenna ground (7.1-50). The antenna resonating element (7.1-52) may be formed from any suitable antenna resonating element structures. In the example of FIG. 2, the antenna resonating element (7.1-52) is an inverted-F antenna resonating element having a resonating element arm (7.1-56) coupled to the ground (7.1-50) by a return path (7.1-54) and fed using an antenna feed (7.1-58). The feed (7.1-58) has positive and ground feed terminals that are coupled to the positive and ground signal lines within the transmission line (7.1-62), respectively. The conductive structures that make up the antenna (7.1-40) may be formed from thin film metal traces on printed circuits (e.g., rigid printed circuit boards formed from fiberglass-filled epoxy and other rigid printed circuit board substrate materials and/or flexible printed circuits formed from sheets of polyimide or other flexible polymer substrates), metal traces on molded polymer antenna substrates, metal traces on other dielectric substrates, metal foil, conductive structural members such as portions of a housing for the device (7.1-10) (e.g., a metal chassis and/or other inner and/or outer frame structures, metal housing walls, metal component support brackets, and/or other conductive housing structures), and/or other structures within the device (7.1-10) formed from metal and/or other conductive materials.

Antennas may be mounted within the device (7.1-10) using mounting brackets, biasing structures that press the antenna components against the housing structures, adhesives, screws and other fasteners, press-fit joints, solder, welds, conductive adhesives, and/or other conductive attachment mechanisms, and/or other mounting arrangements. Due to the assembly sequence of the device components (e.g., due to a desire to assemble some components, such as the display cover layer and/or other housing structures, after the rear of the housing (7.1-12) and other structures, such as the optical modules (7.1-16), have been assembled), it may be desirable to mount the antenna using a compressible structure, such as a layer of foam or other biasing member, that helps bias the antenna toward a known (reference) location within the device when the display cover layer or other housing structure is attached to the other device structures.

As an example, consider the exemplary antenna mounting structures of FIG. 115. As illustrated in FIG. 115, an antenna (7.1-40) may be formed from an antenna substrate (7.1-64) (e.g., a flexible printed circuit or other substrate that may be planar as illustrated in FIG. 115 or may have a curved, deployable surface and/or a surface of complex curvature). The antenna substrate (7.1-64) includes patterned metal traces (7.1-66) to form antenna resonating elements (7.1-52) and/or other antenna structures.

The antenna (7.1-40) may be mounted within (7.1-42) using an antenna support member, such as a support member (7.1-68) (sometimes referred to as a support structure or support). The support member (7.1-68) may be formed from a polymer, glass, ceramic, or other dielectric and/or other materials (e.g., metals, etc.) and/or combinations of these materials. A bias member (sometimes referred to as a bias structure), such as member (7.1-70), may be positioned between the antenna (7.1-40) and the support member (7.1-68). The member (7.1-70) may be formed from a compressible structure (e.g., one or more springs, foam layers, elastomeric polymer layers, and/or other structures that exhibit a restoring force when compressed). This allows the member (7.1-70) to provide a biasing force to help maintain the antenna (7.1-40) (e.g., the substrate (7.1-64)) against other portions of the device (7.1-10), such as the inner surface of the cover layer (7.1-12CG) and/or other housing structures. As an example, the member (7.1-68) may be mounted within the device (7.1-10) such that the antenna (7.1-40) faces outwardly toward the front (F) (e.g., in the +Y direction, away from the eye boxes (7.1-34)). After mounting the member (7.1-68) in this manner, one or more additional layers of material may be installed within the device (7.1-10) (e.g., by attaching such layer(s) to the housing sidewalls and/or other housing structures). The layers of material installed in this manner (which may sometimes be referred to as housing layers) may include decorative covering layers (e.g., a ring-shaped cover, sometimes referred to as a shroud or shroud trim, that extends around the perimeter of the display (7.1-20), a tinted polymer layer covering the display (7.1-20) on the front of the device (7.1-10) (sometimes referred to as a shroud canopy), a display cover layer (7.1-12CG), and/or other layer(s) of material. During installation of one or more of these housing layers (e.g., layer (7.1-12CG), shroud layer(s), etc.), a curved inner surface or other inner surface of the layer (7.1-12CG) and/or other housing layer(s) may contact the antenna (7.1-40) and may urge the antenna (7.1-40) toward the member (7.1-68). This compresses the bias member (7.1-70), which creates a restoring force (bias force) that helps to keep the antenna (7.1-40) in place relative to the inner surface of the layer (7.1-12CG) and/or other overlapping housing layers. In this way, the position of the antenna (7.1-40) relative to the layer (7.1-12CG) and/or other housing layers can be reliably established.

The substrate (7.1-64) may be formed from a layer having first and second opposing faces characterized by respective surface normals (e.g., reference surface normal ( n )). In configurations where the antenna (7.1-40) (e.g., substrate (7.1-64)) and the member (7.1-70) are compressed in a direction parallel to the surface normal ( n ) of the antenna (7.1-40) and the substrate (7.1-64), the member (7.1-70) will be compressed in the absence of shear forces (off-axis forces with respect to the surface normal ( n )). However, in some configurations, the inner surface of the layer (7.1-12CG) (or other structure on which the antenna (7.1-40) is disposed) may exert forces on the antenna ( ^7.1-40 ) and the member (7.1-70 ⁾ in a direction that is oriented at a non-zero angle with respect to the surface normal ( n ) (e.g., angle (A2) of FIG. 116, which may be 10 ^o to 80 o, 20 ^o to 70 o, etc.). For example, the inner surface of the layer (7.1-12CG) may be inclined with respect to the Y-axis. As a result, shear forces may be generated that result in uncertainty in the lateral placement (position along the X-axis) of the antenna (7.1-40) after the layer (7.1-12CG) and/or other overlapping housing layer(s) are assembled within the device (7.1-10).

To overcome undesirable lateral movement of the antenna (7.1-40) in response to installation of the layer (7.1-12CG) or other overlapping layer(s) and associated application of forces from the layer (7.1-12CG) or other overlapping layer(s) onto the antenna (7.1-40) and the member (7.1-70), the member (7.1-70) may be formed from a compressible structure that exhibits preferential compression along an axis (sometimes referred to as a compression axis, a unidirectional compression axis, an axis of compression, an axis of preferential compression, a preferential axis of compression, or a unidirectional axis of compression) that is not parallel to surface normals, such as a surface normal ( n ), associated with an inner surface of the display cover layer, surfaces of the antenna substrate, and adjacent surfaces of the member (7.1-70).

Use of a bias member having a preferred axis of compression that is not parallel to the surface normal ( n ) illustrated in FIG. 116. In the example of FIG. 116, the member (7.1-70) is formed from a polymer, such as a polymeric foam (e.g., an elastomeric open-cell and/or closed-cell foam). Fibers (7.1-72) (e.g., strands of polymer, glass, carbon, or other materials) are embedded within the member (7.1-70). Most or all of the fibers (7.1-72) extend parallel to the X-axis of FIG. 116, which is perpendicular to the Y-axis of FIG. 116, and/or the lengths of the fibers (7.1-72) that run parallel to the X-axis are longer than the lengths of the fibers (7.1-72) that run parallel to the Y-axis. The presence of the fibers (7.1-72) helps to preferentially reinforce and reduce the compressibility of the member (7.1-70) along the direction in which the fibers (7.1-72) are aligned. As a result, the foam material of the member (7.1-70) of FIG. 116 exhibits an increased resistance to compression along the X-axis (oriented at a non-zero angle (A1) with respect to the surface normal (n) in the example of FIG. 4) and a decreased (e.g., less) resistance to compression along the Y-axis (oriented at a non-zero angle (A2) with respect to the surface normal (n) in the example of FIG. 116). The Y-axis in this example serves as the preferred axis of compression for the member (7.1-70). Because the member (7.1-70) is compressed and elongated along the Y-axis but not significantly compressed or elongated along the X-axis orthogonal to the Y-axis, the member (7.1-70) may sometimes be referred to as a unidirectional structural foam antenna bias member (unidirectional structural foam antenna bias structure) or a unidirectional antenna bias member (unidirectional antenna bias structure).

FIG. 117 is a drawing illustrating the behavior of a member (7.1-70) of FIG. 116 when exposed to a force applied along the Y-axis (e.g., in a direction at a non-zero angle (A2) with respect to the surface normal (n)). Initially, the member (7.1-70) is uncompressed and has a thickness T. After compression, the member (7.1-70) has a reduced thickness TR. Due to the presence of fibers (7.1-72) (FIG. 116) and/or other structures that promote uniaxial expansion and contraction, when a force is applied to the surfaces of the member (7.1-70) along the Y-axis, the member (7.1-70) is compressed in the direction (7.1-74) along the Y-axis from its initial uncompressed state to a compressed state (see, e.g., compressed member shape (7.1-70') of FIG. 117). During these compression activities, the compression occurs along the Y-axis rather than the orthogonal X-axis. As a result, the opposing outward-facing and inward-facing surfaces of the member (7.1-70) do not shift laterally (e.g., there is no movement of these surfaces relative to each other along the X-axis). This helps ensure that the antenna (7.1-40) is mounted at a desired location within the device (7.1-10) and does not experience undesirable lateral movement during assembly.

FIG. 118 illustrates how the uniaxial compression properties of the member (7.1-70) can be used to help ensure satisfactory placement of the antenna (7.1-40) within the device (7.1-10). As illustrated in FIG. 118, a forward-facing display (7.1-20) can be mounted beneath the display cover layer (7.1-12CG) such that images on the display (7.1-20) can be viewed on the front (F) of the device (7.1-10). If desired, an air gap can separate the display (7.1-20) from the display cover layer (7.1-12CG). One or more additional structures (e.g., a shroud having a ring-shaped trim portion surrounding the pixels of the display (7.1-20) and a canopy portion covering the pixels of the display (7.1-20)) may optionally be positioned between the display cover layer (7.1-12CG) and the antenna (7.1-40), as illustrated by exemplary dielectric layer(s) (7.1-85). As an example, the device (7.1-10) may include an internal housing structure, such as a polymeric structure forming a shroud (e.g., layer (7.1-85) may be a polymeric shroud layer), which may be interposed between the layer (7.1-12CG) and the antenna (7.1-40). The shroud in this type of arrangement may have a ring shape extending around a periphery of the display (7.1-20) and/or may have portions overlapping the display (7.1-20). In general, the antenna (7.1-40) may be overlapped by any structure having a surface (e.g., an inner surface) on which the antenna (7.1-40) is mounted. The overlapping structure, which may be a housing structure (sometimes referred to as a housing structure or a housing layer), such as a display cover layer (7.1-12CG), a shroud trim member, a shroud canopy, or other polymeric layer, a dielectric housing wall, and/or any other dielectric member, may have an inward-facing surface on which the antenna (7.1-40) is mounted. In the exemplary configuration of FIG. 118, the housing layer overlapping the antenna (7.1-40) is the display cover layer (7.1-12CG) (or, in situations where an optional intervening layer (7.1-85) is present, the layer overlapping the antenna (7.1-40) is a polymeric layer between the layer (7.1-12CG) and the antenna (7.1-40). These are illustrative examples. Alternatively, any suitable polymer layer or other dielectric structure may overlap the antenna (7.1-40) and have a surface on which the antenna (7.1-40) may be mounted during assembly of the device (7.1-10).

In the exemplary configuration of FIG. 118, the antenna (7.1-40) is mounted within the device (7.1-10) in a peripheral (edge) region (7.1-80) below the layer (7.1-12CG) (on the right side of the device (7.1-10) in the example of FIG. 118). The layer (7.1-12CG) (and/or other housing structures overlapping the antenna (7.1-40)) may be planar or curved and may be tilted to the right sufficiently to create a region of surface (7.1-84) having a surface normal inclined with respect to the X and Y axes of FIG. 118 (e.g., see the surface normal ( n ) of the antenna (7.1-40) being parallel to the surface normal of the surface (7.1-84) in the region (7.1-80). Because the region (7.1-80) may have a cross-sectional profile that is inclined and curved away from the center portion of the layer (7.1-12CG) (or other overlapping dielectric layer), the region (7.1-80) may sometimes be referred to as forming a curved edge portion of the layer (7.1-12CG) or a curved edge portion of another overlapping housing layer.

The antenna (7.1-40) is attached (e.g., with an adhesive) to a bias member (7.1-70) (e.g., a layer of unidirectional structural foam of the type described in connection with FIGS. 116 and 117, configured to function as an antenna bias member). The member (7.1-70) has a first side facing the antenna (7.1-40) and an opposite second side facing the support member (7.1-68). The member (7.1-70) is attached (e.g., with an adhesive) to the support member (7.1-68). Next, the support member (7.1-68) is mounted to the housing (7.1-12) (e.g., a fastener (7.1-82) may be used to attach the member (7.1-68) to a portion (7.1-12P) of the housing (7.1-12) and/or other attachment mechanisms may be used to secure the member (7.1-68) to the housing (7.1-12) at the rear (R) and/or elsewhere within the device (7.1-10). When the device (7.1-10) is assembled, there is generally a slight compression of the member (7.1-70) (e.g., along the Y-axis), which creates an outward restoring force against the inner surface (7.1-84). Thus, the arrangement of FIG. 118 places the antenna (7.1-40) in a known spatial relationship with overlapping structures, such as the display cover layer (7.1-12CG), (e.g., in direct contact with the surface (7.1-84)), thereby eliminating uncertainty in the distance between the antenna (7.1-40) and the layer (7.1-12CG). This may help avoid the possibility of forming air gaps of variable size between the antenna (7.1-40) and the surface (7.1-84), which may have various effects on antenna performance. The layer (7.1-12CG) and/or other overlapping housing structures (e.g., a polymeric shroud layer or other polymeric layer) are preferably formed from a dielectric, such as glass or a polymer, such that radio frequency antenna signals for the antenna (7.1-40) may pass through a portion (7.1-80) of the layer (7.1-12CG) or other overlapping layer.

The antenna performance, which is affected by the distance between the structures of the antenna (7.1-40) and the device (7.1-10), and the reliability of the mounting arrangement illustrated in FIG. 118, can potentially be adversely affected by undesirable lateral movement of the antenna (7.1-40) relative to its nominal position below the portion (7.1-80). Such lateral movement is prevented by using a uniaxial form to form the member (7.1-70). During assembly of the device (7.1-10), the antenna (7.1-40), the member (7.1-70), and the member (7.1-68) are initially mounted in the housing (7.1-12). In this initial state, the front wall of the housing (7.1-12) (e.g., the cover layer (7.1-12CG) in the present example) may be absent. After the components (7.1-36) are installed within the housing (7.1-12), the cover layer (7.1-12CG) and/or other overlapping housing layer(s) can be moved in the -Y direction and mounted to the housing (7.1-12) (e.g., using an adhesive layer (7.1-86), using fasteners, and/or using other attachment structures). Since the surface normal ( n ) of the antenna (7.1-40) and the opposite surface normal of the surface (7.1-84) within the edge region (7.1-80) are at a non-zero angle with respect to the Y axis (e.g., see angle (A2) in FIG. 116), the movement of the layer (7.1-12CG) in the -Y direction generates a lateral force along the X axis on the antenna (7.1-40) and the member (7.1-70) that has the potential to compress the member (7.1-70) laterally. However, since the member (7.1-70) is formed from a unidirectional structural foam that is preferentially compressed along the Y-axis, such lateral movement (movement parallel to the X-axis) is prevented. Rather, as the layer (7.1-12CG) (or other overlapping dielectric housing structure) is mounted to the housing (7.1-12) and pressed inwardly onto the antenna (7.1-40), the member (7.1-70) is compressed only along the Y-axis. As a result, the antenna (7.1-40) moves slightly in the -Y direction when pressed by the surface (7.1-84), but does not shift its position with respect to the X-axis. This ensures that the antenna (7.1-40) is satisfactorily positioned within the device (7.1-10) with respect to the housing (7.1-12) (which may include metal structures such as, for example, a metal chassis forming part or all of the antenna ground (7.1-50) of FIG. 114). Therefore, satisfactory performance of the antenna (7.1-40) can be achieved.

Although sometimes described herein in the context of an antenna bias member within a head-mounted device, unidirectional structural foams or other compressible structures having a unidirectional axis of compression may be used in other contexts and/or devices. As examples, unidirectional structural foams may be used in devices (7.1-10) for sound management (e.g., to exhibit preferential sound channeling along a particular direction), for directional vibration absorption (perpendicular to the axis of the fibers (7.1-72)), and/or for exhibiting directional electrical conductivity (e.g., for sensing and signal routing applications), and/or in electronic devices that would otherwise benefit from increased control of antenna placement and/or increased control of placement of other device components.

7.2: Systems with transparent layers

Electronic devices may be provided with components such as antennas. Electronic devices may include portable electronic devices, wearable devices, desktop devices, embedded systems, and other electronic equipment. Exemplary configurations in which electronic devices include head-mounted devices may sometimes be described herein as examples.

Antennas within an electronic device may be configured to cover communication bands of interest (e.g., local area network bands, cellular phone bands, etc.). To handle some communications, such as 5G cellular communications, the antennas may include millimeter wave antennas (e.g., antennas operating at one or more frequencies between 20 GHz and 300 GHz, as an example). A millimeter wave antenna may utilize a phased antenna array architecture in which a plurality of antenna elements, such as patch antenna elements, are arranged in an array (e.g., a plurality of patches forming a row). During operation, the relative phases of each of the elements may be adjusted (e.g., such that the phased antenna array performs beam steering).

Electronic device housing structures and other portions of the electronic device may include regions that feature curved surfaces that can be flattened to a plane without distortion (sometimes referred to as deployable surfaces or curved surfaces without compound curvature). Electronic device housing structures and other portions of the electronic device may also include regions that feature compound curvature (sometimes referred to as non-deployable surfaces, surfaces that can be flattened to a plane only with distortion). Mounting millimeter wave antennas and/or other antennas within electronic devices having curved surfaces can be challenging because the presence of a curved surface adjacent to the antenna can result in different amounts of loading on different antenna elements within the antenna.

To help ensure satisfactory antenna operation when integrating a millimeter wave antenna into an electronic device having a curved structure, a dielectric member (sometimes referred to as a dielectric structure or dielectric layer) may be provided between the curved structure and the antenna. The dielectric member may have a planar surface facing the antenna. As an example, in a head-mounted device having a curved display cover layer, a polymer layer with the planar surface facing the antenna may be disposed between the antenna and the curved display cover layer. In this manner, the dielectric structure may help equalize the amount of loading experienced by each antenna element within the antenna. The dielectric structure may also assist in impedance matching.

FIG. 119 is a plan view of an exemplary electronic device having antennas, such as one or more millimeter wave antennas. In the example of FIG. 119, device (7.2-10) is a head-mounted device. Alternatively, device (7.2-10) may be any suitable electronic device.

As illustrated in FIG. 119, a head-mounted device (7.2-10) may include a housing (7.2-12). The housing (7.2-12) is configured to be worn on a user's head and may sometimes be referred to as a head-mounted housing or a head-mounted support structure. The housing (7.2-12) may have curved head-shaped surfaces, and may have a nose bridge portion, such as a portion (NB) configured to rest on the user's nose when the device (7.2-10) is on the user's head, a headband, such as a strap (7.2-12T), for supporting the device (7.2-10) on the user's head, and/or other features that allow the device (7.2-10) to be worn by the user.

The housing (7.2-12) may have walls or other structures that separate an interior region of the device (7.2-10), such as the interior region (7.2-42), from an exterior region surrounding the device (7.2-10), such as the exterior region (7.2-44). As an example, the housing (7.2-12) may include a transparent layer that forms a housing wall on the front (F) of the device (7.2-10), such as a display cover layer (7.2-12CG). The housing (7.2-12) may also include inner frame structures (e.g., a metal chassis), decorative covering members, polymer layers (e.g., fully or partially transparent polymer layers), housing walls formed from polymers and/or other materials, and/or other housing structures. In an exemplary configuration, the housing (7.2-12) includes a dielectric structure, such as a dielectric member (7.2-13), which is overlapped by a display cover layer (7.2-12CG). The dielectric member (7.2-13), which may sometimes be referred to as a polymer layer, a shroud, a dielectric layer, or a dielectric structure, may be formed from one or more individual dielectric structures (e.g., structures formed from polymers, glasses, ceramics, and/or other dielectrics). The member (7.2-13) may be formed in a ring shape that extends along a perimeter of the cover layer (7.2-12CG) (e.g., below a perimeter edge portion (E) of the cover layer (7.2-12CG)), or may overlap substantially all of the display cover layer (7.2-12CG), as illustrated in FIG. 119.

The display cover layer (7.2-12CG) and member (7.2-13) may overlap with a forward-facing display, such as a display (7.2-20) (e.g., a flexible display panel formed from a pixel array based on organic light-emitting diodes or other display panel). A portion of the member (7.2-13) that overlaps the display (7.2-20) may be formed from a completely transparent polymer or a partially transparent polymer that helps to conceal the display (7.2-20) from view. A portion of the member (7.2-13) within the edge portion (E) may be opaque or transparent. The display cover layer (7.2-12CG) may be formed from (for example) a transparent polymer or glass.

Portions of the display cover layer (7.2-12CG) and the member (7.2-13), such as edge portions of the display cover layer (7.2-12CG) and the member (7.2-13) surrounding the display (7.2-20), may have curved cross-sectional profiles. As an example, the edge portion (E) of the cover layer (7.2-12CG) and the edge portion underlying the member (7.2-13) may have one or more surfaces characterized by a compound curvature (e.g., non-deployable surfaces). Central portions of the display cover layer (7.2-12CG) and the member (7.2-13) that overlap pixels of the display (7.2-20) may have a compound curvature and/or may have developable surfaces. In an exemplary arrangement, the cover layer (7.2-12CG) has inner and outer surfaces having compound curvatures, the member (7.2-13) has an outer surface of compound curvature around the edges of the device (7.2-10) (e.g., a portion of the member (7.2-13) surrounding the display (7.2-20)) and has deployable inner and outer surfaces that overlap the display (7.2-20). In regions of compound curvature, at least some portions of the curved surface of the layer (7.2-12CG) and/or the member (7.2-13) may be characterized by a radius of curvature (R) of from 4 mm to 250 mm, from 8 mm to 200 mm, from 10 mm to 150 mm, from at least 5 mm, from at least 12 mm, from at least 16 mm, from at least 20 mm, from at least 30 mm, from less than 200 mm, from less than 100 mm, from less than 75 mm, from less than 55 mm, from less than 35 mm, and/or other suitable amounts of curvature. In such exemplary configurations, the display (7.2-20) may be a flexible display panel that bends into a curved shape (e.g., a curved shape that follows a curved face of a user) and features inner and outer deployable surfaces. A portion of the member (7.2-13) overlapping the display (7.2-20) may have corresponding inner and outer deployable surfaces. The innermost surface of the member (7.2-13) within the edge portion (E) may be planar to accommodate millimeter wave antennas. If desired, other arrangements for the shapes of the display cover layer (7.2-12CG) and the member (7.2-13) may be used in the device (7.2-10).

The device (7.2-10) may include millimeter wave antennas and other antennas. The millimeter wave antennas may use phased antenna arrays to implement beam steering. Each millimeter wave antenna may have an associated field of view. To help provide satisfactory antenna coverage for the device (7.2-10) at millimeter wave frequencies, it may be desirable to provide the device (7.2-10) with multiple millimeter wave antennas and to orient each of these antennas in different directions such that their respective angular coverages overlap.

As an example, consider an exemplary device (7.2-10) of FIG. 119 having three millimeter wave antennas, each oriented in a different direction. A first of the three antennas (millimeter wave antenna (7.2-40-1)) is positioned on the left side of the device (7.2-10) below the cover layer (7.2-12CG) and the edge portion (E) of the member (7.2-13). The antenna (7.2-40-1) is oriented in a direction (7.2-72) rotated counterclockwise by an angle (AX) about the Y-axis (wherein the Y-axis is oriented in a forward direction facing outward from the front of the device (7.2-10). Among the three antennas, the second antenna (millimeter wave antenna (7.2-40-2)) is positioned at the center of the device (7.2-10) and, in this exemplary example, points directly forward (along the Y axis, in the direction (7.2-74)). Among the three antennas, the third antenna (millimeter wave antenna (7.2-40-3)) is oriented in the direction (7.2-76) rotated clockwise by an angle (AX) about the Y axis. The directions (7.2-72, 7.2-74, 7.2-76) may each lie within the XY plane of FIG. 1, or may be inclined above or below the XY plane. For this type of arrangement, each antenna has a respective field of view (VA) (e.g., a value in the range of 15 ^o to 90 ^o , as an example). By overlapping the field of view coverage of each antenna (e.g., by pointing antenna (7.2-40-1) slightly left of center, antenna (7.2-40-2) directly forward, and antenna (7.2-40-3) slightly right of center), the device (7.2-10) can be provided with greater angular coverage at millimeter wave frequencies than if only one of these antennas were used.

During operation, the device (7.2-10) may receive image data (e.g., image data for video, still images, etc.) and present this information on displays of the optical modules (7.2-16). The device (7.2-10) may also receive other data, control commands, user input, etc. The device (7.2-10) may transmit data to accessories and other electronic equipment. For example, image data from a forward-facing camera may be provided to an associated device, audio output may be provided to a device having speakers, such as a headphone device, user input and sensor readings may be transmitted to remote equipment, and so on.

Such communications may be supported using wired and/or wireless communications. In an exemplary configuration, components (7.2-36) may include wireless communication circuitry to support wireless communications between the device (7.2-10) and remote wireless equipment (e.g., a cellular telephone, a wireless base station, a computer, headphones or other accessories, a remote control, peer devices, Internet servers, and/or other equipment). The wireless communications may be supported using one or more antennas (e.g., see antennas 7.2-40-1, 7.2-40-2, 7.2-40-3 of FIG. 119) operating at one or more wireless communication frequencies. In an exemplary configuration, one or more antennas may be coupled to wireless transceiver circuitry. The wireless transceiver circuitry may include transmitter circuitry configured to transmit wireless communication signals using the antenna(s), and receiver circuitry configured to receive wireless communication signals using the antenna(s).

The wireless circuitry of the device (7.2-10) may be formed from one or more integrated circuits, power amplifier circuitry, low-noise input amplifiers, passive RF components, one or more antennas, transmission lines, and other circuitry for processing RF wireless signals. The wireless circuitry may include radio frequency transceiver circuitry for handling various radio frequency communication bands. For example, the wireless circuitry of the device (7.2-10) may include wireless local area network (WLAN) and wireless personal area network (WPAN) transceiver circuitry. Such transceiver circuitry may handle the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz bands for WiFi® (IEEE 802.11) communications and other WLAN communications, and the 2.4 GHz Bluetooth® communications band or other WPAN bands, and may sometimes be referred to herein as WLAN/WPAN transceiver circuitry or local transceiver circuitry.

The wireless circuitry of the device (7.2-10) may utilize remote radio circuitry, such as cellular telephone transceiver circuitry, for handling wireless communications in frequency ranges (communication bands), such as cellular low band (LB) of 600 to 960 MHz, cellular low-mid band (LMB) of 1410 to 1510 MHz, cellular mid band (MB) of 1710 to 2170 MHz, cellular high band (HB) of 2300 to 2700 MHz, cellular ultra-high band (UHB) of 3300 to 5000 MHz, or other communication bands between 600 MHz and 5000 MHz. If desired, the cellular telephone transceiver circuitry may support 5G communications using the low band of 600 to 850 MHz, the mid band of 2.5 to 3.7 GHz, and the high band of 25 to 39 GHz. Wireless communications may also be provided using other frequency ranges (e.g., greater than 100 MHz, greater than 1 GHz, 1 to 30 GHz, 100 MHz to 300 GHz, 24 GHz, less than 300 GHz, less than 100 GHz, 10 to 300 GHz, or other millimeter wave frequencies, and/or other suitable frequencies). The WLAN/WPAN transceiver circuitry and/or the cellular transceiver circuitry may handle voice data and non-voice data.

If desired, the antennas and other wireless circuitry of the device (7.2-10) may include satellite navigation system circuitry, such as GPS receiver circuitry for receiving global positioning system (GPS) signals at 1575 MHz or for processing other satellite positioning data (e.g., GLONASS signals at 1609 MHz). Satellite navigation system signals are received from a constellation of satellites orbiting the Earth. The wireless circuitry within the device (7.2-10) may, if desired, include circuitry for other short-range (local) and long-range (remote) wireless links. For example, the wireless circuitry within the device (7.2-10) may be provided to receive television and radio signals, paging signals, near field communication (NFC) signals at 13.56 MHz or other suitable NFC frequencies, ultra-wideband (UWB) signals (e.g., UWB signals between 6 and 8.5 GHz, UWB signals between 3.5 and 9 GHz, etc.). The wireless circuitry within the device (7.2-10) may also include antennas and transceivers for processing sensing applications (e.g., radar). If desired, the antennas may be provided in arrays that support beam steering (e.g., phased antenna arrays). These and other arrays may be used to support wireless communications, wireless sensing, wireless location services, wireless power, and other wireless operations.

The wireless circuitry of the device (7.2-10) may include antennas formed using any suitable antenna types. For example, the antennas of the device (7.2-10) may include antennas having resonant elements formed from slot antenna structures, loop antenna structures, patch antenna structures, stacked patch antenna structures, antenna structures with parasitic elements, inverted-F antenna structures, planar inverted-F antenna structures, helical antenna structures, monopole antennas, dipole antenna structures, Yagi (Yagi-Uda) antenna structures, surface-integrated waveguide structures, hybrids of these designs, and the like. If desired, one or more of the antennas may be cavity-backed antennas.

It could be.

Different types of antennas may be used for different bands and combinations of bands. For example, one type of antenna may be used to form a local wireless link antenna, while another type of antenna may be used to form a remote wireless link antenna. If desired, space may be saved within the device (7.2-10) by using a single antenna to handle two or more different communication bands. For example, a single antenna within the device (7.2-10) may be used to handle communications in a WiFi® or Bluetooth® communication band while also handling communications in one or more cellular telephone frequencies. In some configurations, some cellular telephone communications (e.g., low-band and mid-band communications) may be handled using a first antenna (e.g., an inverted-F antenna), while other communications (e.g., high-band cellular communications) may be handled using one or more phased antenna arrays (e.g., multiple linear patch antenna arrays, each mounted in a different orientation and each having a different field of view to achieve a desired amount of angular coverage).

To provide the antenna structures within the device (7.2-10) with the ability to cover different frequencies of interest, one or more of the antennas of the device (7.2-10) may be provided with circuitry, such as filter circuitry (e.g., one or more passive filters and/or one or more tunable filter circuits). Discrete components, such as capacitors, inductors, and resistors, may be integrated into the filter circuitry. Capacitive structures, inductive structures, and resistive structures may also be formed as patterned metal structures (e.g., as part of the antenna). If desired, the antenna(s) within the device (7.2-10) may be provided with adjustable circuitry, such as tunable components, for tuning the antenna across the communication (frequency) bands of interest. The tunable components may be part of a tunable filter or a tunable impedance matching network, may be part of an antenna resonant element, or may span a gap between an antenna resonant element and antenna ground.

Radio frequency transmission line paths may be used to convey antenna signals between radio frequency transceiver circuitry of the device (7.2-10) and antenna(s) of the device (7.2-10). These paths may include one or more radio frequency transmission lines (sometimes referred to herein as transmission lines). The radio frequency transmission line paths may each include a positive signal conductor and a ground signal conductor. The transmission lines within the device (7.2-10) may include coaxial cable transmission lines, stripline transmission lines, microstrip transmission lines, edge-coupled microstrip transmission lines, edge-coupled stripline transmission lines, transmission lines formed from waveguide structures (e.g., coplanar waveguides or grounded coplanar waveguides), and combinations of these types of transmission lines and/or other transmission line structures.

If desired, matching networks may be used to assist in matching impedances in the radio circuitry of the device (7.2-10). The matching network may include components such as inductors, resistors, and capacitors that are configured to match the impedance of the antenna to the impedance of an associated radio frequency transmission line path used to couple the antenna to the transceiver. The matching network components may be provided as individual components (e.g., surface mount technology components), or may be formed from housing structures, printed circuit board structures, traces on plastic supports, etc. Components such as these may also be used to form antenna filter circuitry and may be tunable and/or fixed components.

Radio frequency transmission line paths may be coupled to antenna feed structures associated with antennas within the device (7.2-10). For example, an antenna within the device (7.2-10), such as an inverted-F antenna, a planar inverted-F antenna, a patch antenna, a loop antenna, or other antenna, may have an antenna feed having a positive antenna feed terminal and a ground antenna feed terminal. The positive antenna feed terminal may be coupled to an antenna resonant (radiating) element within the antenna. The ground antenna feed terminal may be coupled to an antenna ground within the antenna. The positive feed terminal may be coupled to a positive signal line within the transmission line, and the ground feed terminal may be coupled to a ground signal line within the transmission line.

If desired, other types of antenna feed arrangements may be utilized. For example, the antenna may be fed using multiple feeds, each coupled to a respective port of the transceiver via a corresponding transmission line. If desired, a given transmission line signal conductor may be coupled to multiple locations on the antenna, and/or switches may be interposed in the paths between the feed terminals of the transceiver and the antenna.

FIG. 120 is a front view of the device (7.2-10) illustrating exemplary locations for millimeter wave antennas (7.2-40-1, 7.2-40-2, 7.2-40-3). As shown in FIG. 120, the front-facing display (7.2-20) may be surrounded by peripheral edge portions (E) of a display cover layer (7.2-12CG) (which may be formed from dielectric materials such as glass and/or polymer) and a dielectric member (7.2-13), which dielectric structures may overlap the antennas (7.2-40-1, 7.2-40-2, 7.2-40-3). During operation, transmitted antenna signals from the millimeter wave antennas and received antenna signals for the millimeter wave antennas may pass through the display cover layer (7.2-12CG) and the member (7.2-13). To improve antenna efficiency, conductive structures, such as conductive pixel structures and other conductive structures associated with the display (7.2-20), may be present only at the center of the device (7.2-10) (e.g., the edge portions (E) may be free of any conductive display structures overlapping the millimeter wave antennas).

Figure 121 is a cross-sectional side view of an exemplary millimeter wave antenna. As illustrated in Figure 121, the wireless circuitry of the device (7.2-10) includes a radio frequency transceiver (7.2-60). The transceiver (7.2-60) can be coupled to an antenna (7.2-40) by a signal path (7.2-62) (e.g., one or more transmission lines). The configuration of the millimeter wave antenna (7.2-40) of Figure 121 can be used for antenna (7.2-40-1), antenna (7.2-40-2), or antenna (7.2-40-3). As illustrated in Figure 121, the millimeter wave antenna (7.2-40) can have multiple antenna elements (7.2-40E). The elements (7.2-40E) may be formed from millimeter wave antenna resonant elements, such as patch antenna elements (e.g., patch antennas formed from thin film metal structures). The patch antennas may be arranged in a linear array (e.g., a line) on an antenna substrate (7.2-40B) (e.g., a printed circuit board, a ceramic or glass layer, or other dielectric substrate). Grounding for the antenna (7.2-40) may be formed from a ground antenna trace within the substrate (7.2-40B) and/or other conductive structures within the device (7.2-10) (e.g., a metal chassis within the device (7.2-10), a heat sink within the device (7.2-10), a support bracket within the device (7.2-10), etc.). The antenna (7.2-40) (e.g., elements (7.2-40E) and substrate (7.2-40B)) may have a planar surface characterized by a surface normal (e.g., see surface normal (nb) of FIG. 121). During operation, control circuitry of the device (7.2-10) may perform beam steering operations by adjusting the relative phases of signals for each of its respective elements (7.2-40E). In this manner, the angle BA of the antenna beam direction (7.2-92) (e.g., the direction in which the antenna (7.2-40) nominally faces) with respect to the antenna surface normal (nb) may be adjusted (e.g., to ensure that antenna signals are transmitted and received along a direction that provides satisfactory antenna performance).

Antennas may be mounted within the device (7.2-10) using mounting brackets, using bias structures that press the antenna components against the housing structures, using adhesives, using screws and other fasteners, using press-fit connections, using solder, welds, conductive adhesives, and/or other conductive attachment mechanisms, using one or more frames, carriers, and/or other internal support structures, and/or other mounting arrangements.

To ensure uniform loading of each of the elements (7.2-40E), the antenna (7.2-40) may be mounted adjacent to a planar dielectric structure that is uniformly spaced from each of the elements (7.2-40E). In arrays such as those of FIGS. 119 and 120, where the edge portion (E) of the display cover layer (7.2-12CG) has an inner surface having a curved cross-sectional profile (e.g., an inwardly facing concave surface of compound curvature), a dielectric structure such as a dielectric member (7.2-13) positioned between the display cover layer (7.2-12CG) and the antenna (7.2-40) may be used to form the planar dielectric structure. (If desired, arrays in which the planar inner surface is formed directly on the inner face of the layer (7.2-12CG) and the member (7.2-13) is omitted may also be used.)

As an example, consider a cross-sectional view of the left front corner of the device (7.2-10) illustrated in FIG. 122. As illustrated in FIG. 122, the inner and outer surfaces of the display cover layer (7.2-12CG) (e.g., surfaces of the edge portion (E) of the layer (7.2-12CG)) may have curved cross-sectional profiles. These surfaces may have compound curvatures. For example, the inner surface (7.2-83) of the display cover layer (7.2-12CG) may be a concave surface of compound curvature. The antenna elements (7.2-40E) of the antenna (7.2-40) are supported on the planar outer surface (7.2-82) of the substrate (7.2-40B). To equalize the antenna loading for each of the elements (7.2-40E) within the antenna (7.2-40), and thereby facilitate beam forming by the antenna (7.2-40), the dielectric member (7.2-13) may be provided with a planar inner surface (7.2-70) parallel to the planar surface (7.2-82) (e.g., the surface normal (na) of the surface (7.2-70) may be parallel to the surface normal (nb) of the surface (7.2-82)). This ensures that each antenna element (7.2-40E) is separated from the surface (7.2-70) by an air gap of equal size, thereby ensuring equal loading on each element (7.2-40E).

The outer surface of the member (7.2-13) may be curved (e.g., the outer surface of the member (7.2-13) attached to or adjacent to the inner surface (7.2-83) of the layer (7.2-12CG) may have a convex shape, such as a convex shape having a compound curvature that matches the concave shape of the surface (7.2-83). The permittivity of the member (7.2-13), the thickness of the member (7.2-13), and the size of the air gap between the antenna (7.2-40) and the member (7.2-13) may be selected to help match the impedance of the antenna (7.2-40) to the impedance of the layer (7.2-12CG), thereby reducing antenna signal reflections. In an exemplary configuration, the permittivity of the layer (7.2-12CG) has a first permittivity value, the permittivity of air has a second permittivity value lower than the first permittivity value, and the permittivity of the polymer constituting the member (7.2-13) has a third permittivity value between the first and second values. This configuration can help match the impedance of the antenna (7.2-40) to the impedance of the layer (7.2-12CG). The presence of an air gap between the antenna (7.2-40) and the member (7.2-13) can help reduce surface waves and can facilitate assembly of the device (7.2-10) (e.g., by physically decoupled the antenna (7.2-40) from overlapping structures such as the member (7.2-13)).

The antenna (7.2-40) may be supported on internal housing structures and/or other support structures (e.g., see exemplary support structures (7.2-86) of FIG. 122). The support structures beneath the antenna (7.2-40) may include a metal plate and/or other heat sink structure (e.g., see heat sink (7.2-84)). In the exemplary configuration of FIG. 122, the antenna (7.2-40) is positioned on the left front corner of the device (7.2-10) (e.g., the antenna (7.2-40) of FIG. 122 may serve as the antenna (7.2-40-1) of FIG. 119). If desired, the approach of FIG. 122 may be used to form an antenna (7.2-40-3) on the right front corner of the device.

At the center of the device (7.2-10), the antenna (7.2-40-2) may be installed using an arrangement of the type illustrated in the plan view of FIG. 123. As illustrated in FIG. 123, the antenna (7.2-40) (e.g., the antenna (7.2-40-2) of FIG. 119) may be mounted on the heat sink (7.2-84) and the support structure (7.2-86) such that the planar outer surface of the antenna (7.2-40) faces the opposite inwardly facing planar surface of the member (7.2-13). Adjacent surfaces of the member (7.2-13) and the antenna (7.2-40) may be parallel to each other (e.g., the surface normal (na) may be parallel to the surface normal (nb)).

7.3: Systems with transparent layers

Electronic devices may be provided with components such as antennas. Electronic devices may include portable electronic devices, wearable devices, desktop devices, embedded systems, and other electronic equipment. Exemplary configurations in which electronic devices include head-mounted devices may sometimes be described herein as examples.

Antennas may be formed from thin flexible substrates, such as flexible printed circuits. A flexible printed circuit antenna may have metal traces patterned to form antenna resonating elements (sometimes referred to as antenna resonating structures or antenna resonators). The metal traces may be supported by a flexible printed circuit board layer. The flexible printed circuit board layer may be formed from one or more sheets of polyimide or layers of another polymer.

Electronic device housing structures and other portions of the electronic device may include regions that feature curved surfaces that can be flattened to a plane without distortion (sometimes referred to as developable surfaces or curved surfaces without compound curvature). Electronic device housing structures and other portions of the electronic device may also include regions that feature compound curvature (sometimes referred to as non-developable surfaces, surfaces that can be flattened to a plane only with distortion).

To provide the antenna with a shape that facilitates conforming the flexible printed circuit antenna to a surface of an electronic device housing structure or other dielectric member within the electronic device and/or that facilitates installation and use of the antenna within a device having potentially complex geometries, such as surfaces having compound curvatures, the flexible printed circuit antenna may be formed into a three-dimensional shape (e.g., a wrinkle-free shape featuring surfaces having compound curvatures). A flexible printed circuit antenna provided with compound curvature surfaces in this manner may then be attached to a supporting housing structure having compound curvatures. For example, a flexible printed circuit antenna having compound curvatures may be laminated to a dielectric member having a matching compound curvature using a layer of adhesive.

FIG. 124 is a plan view of an exemplary electronic device that may include a flexible printed circuit antenna having a complex curvature. In the example of FIG. 124, the device (7.3-10) is a head-mounted device. Alternatively, the device (7.3-10) may be any suitable electronic device.

As illustrated in FIG. 124, a head-mounted device (7.3-10) may include a housing (7.3-12). The housing (7.3-12) is configured to be worn on a user's head and may sometimes be referred to as a head-mounted housing or a head-mounted support structure. The housing (7.3-12) may have curved head-shaped surfaces, and may have a nose bridge portion, such as a portion (NB) configured to rest on the user's nose when the device (7.3-10) is on the user's head, a headband, such as a strap (7.3-12T), for supporting the device (7.3-10) on the user's head, and/or other features that allow the device (7.3-10) to be worn by the user.

The housing (7.3-12) may have walls or other structures that separate an interior region of the device (7.3-10), such as the interior region (7.3-42), from an exterior region surrounding the device (7.3-10), such as the exterior region (7.3-44). As an example, the housing (7.3-12) may include a transparent layer that forms a housing wall on the front (F) of the device (7.3-10), such as a display cover layer (7.3-12CG). The housing (7.3-12) may also include inner frame structures (e.g., a metal chassis), decorative covering members, polymer layers (e.g., fully or partially transparent polymer layers), housing walls formed from polymers and/or other materials, and/or other housing structures. In an exemplary configuration, the housing (7.3-12) includes a dielectric structure, such as a dielectric member (7.3-13), which is overlapped by a display cover layer (7.3-12CG). The dielectric member (7.3-13), which may sometimes be referred to as a polymer layer, shroud, dielectric layer, or dielectric structure, may be formed from one or more individual dielectric structures (e.g., structures formed from polymers, glasses, ceramics, and/or other dielectrics). In the example of FIG. 124, the dielectric member (7.3-13) includes a first dielectric layer, such as a polymer layer (7.3-13-1), which extends substantially all of the front (F) of the device (7.3-10) (e.g., layer (7.3-13-1) of FIG. 124 has a footprint similar to or identical to that of layer (7.3-12CG). For such an arrangement, the layer (7.3-13-1), which may sometimes be referred to as a shroud canopy or shroud, has a central portion that overlaps the display (7.3-20) and a peripheral portion (e.g., a portion below the edge portion (E) of the display cover layer (7.3-12CG)) that has a ring-shaped footprint that surrounds the display (7.3-20). The dielectric member (7.3-13) of FIG. 124 also has a second polymer layer, such as the layer (7.3-13-2). The layer (7.3-13-2), which may sometimes be referred to as a shroud trim or shroud, may have a ring-shaped footprint that surrounds the display (7.3-20). In the main portion of the member (7.3-13), the layers (7.3-13-1, 7.3-13-2) can be attached to each other using adhesives, press-fit joints, screws or other fasteners, and/or other attachment mechanisms.

The display cover layer (7.3-12CG) and member (7.3-13) (e.g., layer (7.3-13-1)) can overlap with a forward-facing display such as a display (7.3-20) (e.g., a flexible display panel formed from a pixel array based on organic light-emitting diodes or other display panel). The layer (7.3-13-1) can be formed from a completely transparent polymer or a partially transparent polymer that helps to conceal the display (7.3-20) from view. The display cover layer (7.3-12CG) can be formed from (as examples) a transparent polymer or glass.

Portions of the display cover layer (7.3-12CG) and the member (7.3-13), such as edge portions of the display cover layer (7.3-12CG) and the member (7.3-13) surrounding the display (7.3-20), may have curved cross-sectional profiles. As an example, the edge portion (E) of the cover layer (7.3-12CG) and the edge portion underlying the member (7.3-13) may have inner and/or outer surfaces (e.g., non-deployable surfaces) characterized by compound curvatures. Central portions of the display cover layer (7.3-12CG) and the member (7.3-13) may have compound curvatures and/or may have deployable surfaces. In an exemplary arrangement, the cover layer (7.3-12CG) has inner and outer surfaces having compound curvatures, and the member (7.3-13) has surfaces of compound curvature around the edges of the device (7.3-10) (e.g., a portion of the member (7.3-13) surrounding the display (7.3-20)) and has deployable surfaces overlapping the display (7.3-20). In this exemplary configuration, the display (7.3-20) may be a flexible display panel that bends into a curved shape (e.g., a curved shape that follows a curved face of a user) and features inner and outer deployable surfaces. The portion of the member (7.3-13) overlapping the display (7.3-20) may have corresponding inner and outer deployable surfaces. If desired, other arrangements for the shapes of the display cover layer (7.3-12CG) and member (7.3-13) can be used in the device (7.3-10).

The device (7.3-10) may have one or more antennas. As an example, the antenna (7.3-40) may be mounted within the device (7.3-10) along the edge of the display (7.3-20). As illustrated in FIG. 124, the antenna (7.3-40) may be mounted, for example, on the inner surface of the dielectric member (7.3-13) below the edge portion (E) of the display cover layer (7.3-12CG). During operation, antenna signals may pass through these overlapping dielectric structures.

The antenna (7.3-40) may be attached to a surface of the member (7.3-13) (e.g., an inner surface of the layer (7.3-13-2) in the example of FIG. 124) using an adhesive (7.3-15). In this manner, a portion of the inner surface of the member (7.3-13) on which the antenna (7.3-40) is mounted may have a compound curvature. The antenna (7.3-40) may be formed from a flexible printed circuit having a matching compound curvature.

The device (7.3-10) may include electrical components (7.3-36) (e.g., integrated circuits, sensors, control circuitry, light emitting diodes, lasers, and other light emitting devices, other control circuits, and input/output devices, etc.). The components (7.3-36) may be mounted on printed circuits and/or other structures within the device (7.3-10) (e.g., within the interior region (7.3-42)).

To present images to a user for viewing from eye boxes, such as eye boxes (7.3-34), the device (7.3-10) may include rear-facing displays within the optical modules (7.3-16). For example, there may be a left rear-facing display within the left optical module (7.3-16) for presenting images from the left eye box (7.3-34) to the user's left eye through the left lens, and a right rear-facing display within the right optical module (7.3-16) for presenting images from the right eye box (7.3-34) to the user's right eye through the right lens.

When the inward-facing surface (7.3-18) of the housing (7.3-12) is positioned against the outer surface of the user's face, the user's eyes are positioned within the eye boxes (7.3-34) at the rear (R) of the device (7.3-10). On the rear (R), the housing (7.3-12) may have cushion structures (sometimes referred to as optical seal structures) to enhance the user's comfort as the surface (7.3-18) is positioned against the user's face. The device (7.3-10) may have forward-facing components, such as forward-facing cameras and other sensors, on the front (F) facing outwardly away from the user. These components may generally be oriented in the +Y (forward) direction of FIG. 124.

During operation, the device (7.3-10) may receive image data (e.g., image data for video, still images, etc.) and present this information on displays of the optical modules (7.3-16). The device (7.3-10) may also receive other data, control commands, user input, etc. The device (7.3-10) may transmit data to accessories and other electronic equipment. For example, image data from a forward-facing camera may be provided to an associated device, audio output may be provided to a device having speakers, such as a headphone device, user input and sensor readings may be transmitted to remote equipment, and so on.

Such communications may be supported using wired and/or wireless communications. In an exemplary configuration, components (7.3-36) may include wireless communication circuitry to support wireless communications between the device (7.3-10) and remote wireless equipment (e.g., a cellular telephone, a wireless base station, a computer, headphones or other accessories, a remote control, peer devices, Internet servers, and/or other equipment). The wireless communications may be supported using one or more antennas (e.g., see antenna (7.3-40) of FIG. 124) operating at one or more wireless communication frequencies. In an exemplary configuration, the one or more antennas may be coupled to wireless transceiver circuitry. The wireless transceiver circuitry may include transmitter circuitry configured to transmit wireless communication signals using the antenna(s), and receiver circuitry configured to receive wireless communication signals using the antenna(s).

The wireless circuitry of the device (7.3-10) may be formed from one or more integrated circuits, power amplifier circuitry, low-noise input amplifiers, passive RF components, one or more antennas, transmission lines, and other circuitry for processing RF radio signals. The wireless circuitry may include radio frequency transceiver circuitry for handling various radio frequency communication bands. For example, the wireless circuitry of the device (7.3-10) may include wireless local area network (WLAN) and wireless personal area network (WPAN) transceiver circuitry. Such transceiver circuitry may handle the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz bands for WiFi® (IEEE 802.11) communications and other WLAN communications, and the 2.4 GHz Bluetooth® communications band or other WPAN bands, and may sometimes be referred to herein as WLAN/WPAN transceiver circuitry or local transceiver circuitry.

The wireless circuitry of the device (7.3-10) may utilize remote radio circuitry, such as cellular telephone transceiver circuitry, for handling wireless communications in frequency ranges (communication bands), such as cellular low band (LB) of 600 to 960 MHz, cellular low-mid band (LMB) of 1410 to 1510 MHz, cellular mid band (MB) of 1710 to 2170 MHz, cellular high band (HB) of 2300 to 2700 MHz, cellular ultra-high band (UHB) of 3300 to 5000 MHz, or other communication bands between 600 MHz and 5000 MHz. If desired, the cellular telephone transceiver circuitry may support 5G communications using the low band of 600 to 850 MHz, the mid band of 2.5 to 3.7 GHz, and the high band of 25 to 39 GHz. Wireless communications may also be provided using other frequency ranges (e.g., greater than 100 MHz, greater than 1 GHz, 1 to 30 GHz, 100 MHz to 300 GHz, 24 GHz, less than 300 GHz, less than 100 GHz, 10 to 300 GHz, or other mm-wave frequencies, and/or other suitable frequencies). The WLAN/WPAN transceiver circuitry and/or the cellular transceiver circuitry may handle voice data and non-voice data.

If desired, the antennas and other wireless circuitry of the device (7.3-10) may include satellite navigation system circuitry, such as GPS receiver circuitry for receiving global positioning system (GPS) signals at 1575 MHz or for processing other satellite positioning data (e.g., GLONASS signals at 1609 MHz). Satellite navigation system signals are received from satellites in a constellation orbiting the Earth. The wireless circuitry within the device (7.3-10) may, if desired, include circuitry for other short-range (local) and long-range (remote) wireless links. For example, the wireless circuitry within the device (7.3-10) may be provided to receive television and radio signals, paging signals, near field communication (NFC) signals at 13.56 MHz or other suitable NFC frequencies, ultra-wideband (UWB) signals (e.g., UWB signals between 6 and 8.5 GHz, UWB signals between 3.5 and 9 GHz, etc.). The wireless circuitry within the device (7.3-10) may also include antennas and transceivers for processing sensing applications (e.g., radar). If desired, the antennas may be provided in arrays that support beam steering (e.g., phased antenna arrays). These and other arrays may be used to support wireless communications, wireless sensing, wireless location services, wireless power, and other wireless operations.

The wireless circuitry of the device (7.3-10) may include antennas formed using any suitable antenna types. For example, the antennas of the device (7.3-10) may include antennas having resonant elements formed from slot antenna structures, loop antenna structures, patch antenna structures, stacked patch antenna structures, antenna structures having parasitic elements, inverted-F antenna structures, planar inverted-F antenna structures, helical antenna structures, monopole antennas, dipole antenna structures, Yagi (Yagi-Uda) antenna structures, surface-integrated waveguide structures, hybrids of these designs, and the like. If desired, one or more of the antennas may be cavity-backed antennas.

Different types of antennas may be used for different bands and combinations of bands. For example, one type of antenna may be used to form a local wireless link antenna, while another type of antenna may be used to form a remote wireless link antenna. If desired, space may be saved within the device (7.3-10) by using a single antenna to handle two or more different communication bands. For example, a single antenna within the device (7.3-10) may be used to handle communications in a WiFi® or Bluetooth® communication band while also handling communications in one or more cellular telephone frequencies. In some configurations, some cellular telephone communications (e.g., low-band and mid-band communications) may be handled using a first antenna (e.g., an inverted-F antenna), while other communications (e.g., high-band cellular communications) may be handled using one or more phased antenna arrays (e.g., multiple linear patch antenna arrays, each mounted in a different orientation and each having a different field of view to achieve a desired amount of angular coverage).

To provide the antenna structures within the device (7.3-10) with the ability to cover different frequencies of interest, one or more of the antennas of the device (7.3-10) may be provided with circuitry, such as filter circuitry (e.g., one or more passive filters and/or one or more tunable filter circuits). Discrete components, such as capacitors, inductors, and resistors, may be integrated into the filter circuitry. Capacitive structures, inductive structures, and resistive structures may also be formed as patterned metal structures (e.g., as part of the antenna). If desired, the antenna(s) within the device (7.3-10) may be provided with adjustable circuitry, such as tunable components, for tuning the antenna across the communication (frequency) bands of interest. The tunable components may be part of a tunable filter or a tunable impedance matching network, may be part of an antenna resonant element, or may span a gap between an antenna resonant element and antenna ground.

Radio frequency transmission line paths may be used to convey antenna signals between radio frequency transceiver circuitry of the device (7.3-10) and antenna(s) of the device (7.3-10). These paths may include one or more radio frequency transmission lines (sometimes referred to herein as transmission lines). The radio frequency transmission line paths may each include a positive signal conductor and a ground signal conductor. The transmission lines within the device (7.3-10) may include coaxial cable transmission lines, stripline transmission lines, microstrip transmission lines, edge-coupled microstrip transmission lines, edge-coupled stripline transmission lines, transmission lines formed from waveguide structures (e.g., coplanar waveguides or grounded coplanar waveguides), combinations of these types of transmission lines and/or other transmission line structures.

If desired, matching networks may be used to help match impedances in the radio circuitry of the device (7.3-10). The matching network may include components such as inductors, resistors, and capacitors that are configured to match the impedance of the antenna to the impedance of an associated radio frequency transmission line path used to couple the antenna to the transceiver. The matching network components may be provided as individual components (e.g., surface mount technology components), or may be formed from housing structures, printed circuit board structures, traces on plastic supports, etc. Components such as these may also be used to form antenna filter circuitry and may be tunable and/or fixed components.

Radio frequency transmission line paths may be coupled to antenna feed structures associated with antennas within the device (7.3-10). For example, an antenna within the device (7.3-10), such as an inverted-F antenna, a planar inverted-F antenna, a patch antenna, a loop antenna, or other antenna, may have an antenna feed having a positive antenna feed terminal and a ground antenna feed terminal. The positive antenna feed terminal may be coupled to an antenna resonant (radiating) element within the antenna. The ground antenna feed terminal may be coupled to an antenna ground within the antenna. The positive feed terminal may be coupled to a positive signal line within the transmission line, and the ground feed terminal may be coupled to a ground signal line within the transmission line.

If desired, other types of antenna feed arrangements may be utilized. For example, the antenna may be fed using multiple feeds, each coupled to a respective port of the transceiver via a corresponding transmission line. If desired, a given transmission line signal conductor may be coupled to multiple locations on the antenna, and/or switches may be interposed in the paths between the feed terminals of the transceiver and the antenna.

FIG. 125 is a diagram of exemplary wireless communication circuitry for a device (7.3-10). As shown in FIG. 125, the wireless circuitry includes a radio frequency transceiver (7.3-60) coupled to an antenna (7.3-40) by a transmission line (7.3-62). The antenna (7.3-40) may have an antenna resonating element (52) (sometimes referred to as an antenna resonating structure or antenna resonator) and an antenna ground (7.3-50). The antenna resonating element (52) may be formed from any suitable antenna resonating element structures. In the example of FIG. 125, the antenna resonating element (52) is an inverted-F antenna resonating element having a resonating element arm (7.3-56) coupled to the ground (7.3-50) by a return path (7.3-54) and fed using an antenna feed (7.3-58). The feed (7.3-58) has positive and ground feed terminals that are coupled to the positive and ground signal lines within the transmission line (7.3-62), respectively. The conductive structures that constitute the antenna (7.3-40) may be formed from thin film metal traces on printed circuits (e.g., flexible printed circuits formed from sheets of polyimide or other flexible polymer substrates). If desired, the conductive structures that constitute the antenna (7.3-40) (e.g., ground structures for the antenna (7.3-40)) may include conductive structural members, such as portions of a housing for the device (7.3-10) (e.g., a metal chassis and/or other inner and/or outer frame structures, metal housing walls, metal component support brackets, and/or other conductive housing structures), and/or other structures within the device (7.3-10) formed from metal and/or other conductive materials.

Antennas may be mounted within the device (7.3-10) using mounting brackets, using bias structures that press the antenna components against the housing structures, using adhesives, using screws and other fasteners, using press-fit connections, using solder, welds, conductive adhesives, and/or other conductive attachment mechanisms, using one or more frames, carriers, and/or other internal support structures, and/or other mounting arrangements. In an exemplary configuration, a flexible printed circuit antenna (7.3-40) has a compound curvature and is attached to an overlapping dielectric member, such as a member (7.3-13) and/or a display cover layer (7.3-12CG), having opposite surfaces of the matching compound curvature. By matching the complex curvature of the substrate of the antenna (7.3-40) to the complex curvature of the associated overlapping dielectric layer, the antenna (7.3-40) can be configured to fit within the potentially stringent limits of the device (7.3-10) without adversely affecting the shape and appearance of the device (7.3-10). As an example, by matching the complex curvature of the substrate of the antenna (7.3-40) to the complex curvature of an overlapping dielectric structure, such as the member (7.3-13), the antenna (7.3-40) can be adhesively attached to an inner or outer surface of the member (7.3-13). Subsequently, the display cover layer (7.3-12CG) can be mounted on the device (7.3-10) such that the edge portion (E) of the layer (7.3-12CG) overlaps the member (7.3-13) and the antenna (7.3-40).

As an example, consider the exemplary antenna structures of FIG. 126. As illustrated in FIG. 126, the antenna (7.3-40) may be formed from an antenna substrate (7.3-64). The substrate (7.3-64) may be formed from a flexible printed circuit having a surface of compound curvature (sometimes referred to as a non-developable surface). The antenna substrate (7.3-64) includes metal traces, such as metal traces (7.3-66) (e.g., a patterned thin film metal layer). In an exemplary configuration, the substrate (7.3-64) has an upper layer (e.g., an upper polyimide layer or other sheet of polymer) and a lower layer (e.g., a lower polyimide layer or other sheet of polymer), and the traces (7.3-66) are formed from a patterned thin film metal layer between the upper and lower layers. The traces (7.3-66) are patterned to form antenna resonating elements (52) (Fig. 125) and/or other antenna structures. The antenna (7.3-40) of Fig. 126 is formed from a planar sheet of printed circuit board material that has been contoured with a contouring tool to create a desired three-dimensional shape having a compound curvature. At least some portions of the curved surface of the substrate (7.3-64) may be characterized by a radius of curvature (R) of from 4 mm to 250 mm, from 8 mm to 200 mm, from 10 mm to 150 mm, at least 5 mm, at least 12 mm, at least 16 mm, at least 20 mm, at least 30 mm, less than 200 mm, less than 100 mm, less than 75 mm, less than 55 mm, less than 35 mm, and/or other suitable amounts of curvature.

After forming a flexible printed circuit antenna having a composite curvature of the type illustrated in FIG. 126, such a composite curvature flexible printed circuit antenna can be attached to a surface of a dielectric support structure of a device (7.3-10). In an exemplary arrangement, the composite curvature flexible printed circuit antenna is attached to an inner surface of a dielectric member (7.3-13) using a layer of adhesive. FIG. 127 is a cross-sectional side view of an exemplary vacuum laminating tool that can be used to attach an antenna (7.3-40) to a member (7.3-13). As illustrated in FIG. 127, the tool (7.3-70) can have movable upper and lower dies, such as an upper die (7.3-82) having a concave surface (7.3-72) and a lower die (7.3-74) having a convex surface (7.3-76). The surfaces (7.3-72, 7.3-76) may feature a compound curvature (e.g., a compound curvature that matches the compound curvature of the inner and outer surfaces of the member (7.3-13) and the compound curvature of the inner and outer surfaces of the flexible printed circuit antenna (7.3-40). Prior to lamination, a layer of an adhesive, such as an adhesive (7.3-15), may be suspended between the member (7.3-13) and the antenna (7.3-40). During lamination, the tool (7.3-70) may use a vacuum enclosure (7.3-80) to create a vacuum while the member (30) is pressed against the antenna (7.3-40) by moving the die (7.3-82) toward the die (7.3-74). While pressure is applied between the member (7.3-13) and the antenna (7.3-40) in this manner, the dies (7.3-82, 7.3-74) may optionally be heated to facilitate lamination. The presence of a vacuum helps prevent bubbles from forming as the adhesive (7.3-15) is compressed between the member (30) and the antenna (7.3-40).

Figure 128 is a side cross-sectional view of a member (7.3-13) (e.g., layer (7.3-13-2) of Figure 124 or another dielectric antenna support structure) after an antenna (7.3-40) has been laminated with a tool (7.3-70) to adhesively attach the member (7.3-13). Alternatively, the antenna (7.3-40) may be attached to an inner or outer surface of the support member, and such attachment surface may have a convex or concave curvature. In the example of Figure 128, the member (7.3-13) has an inwardly facing concave surface of compound curvature, and the outwardly facing surface of the antenna (7.3-40) has a matching compound curvature.

After the antenna (7.3-40) is attached to the shroud or other dielectric member (e.g., member (7.3-13) of FIG. 124 or another member) using an adhesive (7.3-15), the shroud or other dielectric member may be attached to other portions of the housing (7.3-12) (e.g., using screws or other fasteners, using an adhesive, etc.). In arrangements where the member (7.3-13) is separate from the cover layer (7.3-12CG), attachment of the antenna (7.3-40) to the member (7.3-13) may help preserve the ability of the cover layer (7.3-12CG) to be removed (e.g., to allow rework or repair of the device (7.3-10)).

Figure 129 is a perspective view of an antenna (7.3-40) on a member (7.3-13) taken from the outside of a device (7.3-10) with the cover layer (7.3-12CG) removed. As shown in the example of Figure 129, the antenna (7.3-40) can be mounted on the underside (inner surface) of the member (7.3-13). The outward-facing surface of the member (7.3-13) of Figure 129 is convex. The opposite inward-facing surface of the member (7.3-13) of Figure 129 is concave (e.g., the surface of the member (7.3-13) on the far side of the member (7.3-13) of Figure 129 is concave). The antenna (7.3-40) can have an outward-facing convex surface that is attached to the inward-facing concave surface of the member (7.3-13).

One or more metal structures within the device (7.3-10), such as a metal structure (7.3-90) (e.g., a metal chassis or other metal housing structure), may serve as the antenna ground (7.3-50) of FIG. 125. The member (7.3-13) may have openings (7.3-92) through which leg portions or other protruding portions of the antenna (7.3-40) may pass. In the example of FIG. 129, the protruding portion (7.3-40-1) of the antenna (7.3-40) has a return path metal trace (forming the return path (7.3-54) of FIG. 125) that is shorted to the metal structure (7.3-90) using a metal fastener (7.3-94). The protruding portion (7.3-40-2) of the antenna (7.3-40) may include a metal trace forming a positive feed terminal. A cable or other transmission line (e.g., see transmission line (7.3-62) of FIG. 125) may be coupled to a connector (7.3-96). The connector (7.3-96) may have a positive terminal that couples to a positive feed terminal and a negative terminal that shorts to a metal structure (7.3-90) (e.g., via a metal fastener (7.3-98)). If desired, conductive adhesives, solder, welded connections, and/or other conductive connections may be used to attach the metal trace of the antenna (7.3-40) to the metal structure (7.3-80) and the connector (7.3-96). The use of fasteners (7.3-94, 7.3-98) (e.g., screws) is exemplary. After installing the member (7.3-13) and the antenna (7.3-40) within the device (7.3-10) (e.g., by attaching the member (7.3-13) to the housing (7.3-12) and attaching the antenna (7.3-40) to the structure (7.3-90), a cover layer (7.3-12CG) can be mounted on the front of the housing (7.3-12) to thereby cover the member (7.3-13) and the antenna (7.3-40) as illustrated in FIG. 124.

VIII: The Bent MLB

FIG. 130 illustrates an exemplary drawing of an HMD device (8-100). The HMD device (8-100) may include a logic board system (8-102) including one or more printed circuit boards, processors, other computing components, memory components, circuitry, etc., mounted to one or more components of the HMD (8-100).

FIG. 131 illustrates a plan view of an example logic board (8-102) that may include the main logic board of the HMD (8-100) depicted in FIG. 130. In at least one example, the logic board (8-102) includes a first portion (8-104) and a second portion (8-106) joined together at a transition portion (8-108). As illustrated in the plan view of FIG. 8-23, in at least one example, the first portion (8-104) of the MLB (8-102) may be positioned at an angle θ with respect to the second portion (8-106) of the MLB (8-102). In at least one example, the angle θ may position the first and second portions (8-104, 8-106) of the MLB (8-102) to accommodate the curvature of a user's face. For example, the user's face may be lateral (left-right) curved, and the HMD (8-100) may be curved to accommodate the user's face. This curvature may form a thin profile for the user's face, and may minimize the torque applied to the user's face from the HMD (8-100), including the moment arm and thus components within the HMD (8-100).

To accommodate the curvature of a user's face, not only may the outer or external surfaces of the HMD (8-100) be curved, as illustrated in FIG. 130, but internal components of the HMD (8-100) may similarly be curved to fit tightly and compactly within the HMD (8-100) to minimize bulk and size of the device. For example, in at least one example, the angle θ of the first portion (8-104) with respect to the second portion (8-106) may be from about 5 degrees to about 60 degrees to form a curved MLB (8-102). In one example, the angle θ may be from about 5 degrees to about 60 degrees. In one example, the angle θ may be from about 10 degrees to about 50 degrees. In one example, the angle θ may be from about 12 degrees to about 45 degrees. In one example, the angle θ may be about 15 degrees.

As illustrated in the close-up plan view of 8-24, the transition portion (8-108), which may be referred to as the bend portion (8-108), may be thinner than the first and second portions (8-104, 8-106), as illustrated. In at least one example, the MLB (8-102) may be manufactured and assembled, including application of adhesive tapes and other components, while the MLB (8-102) is not bent. That is, in its resting state, the MLB (8-102) may be planar such that the first portion (8-104) is not disposed at an angle relative to the second portion (8-106). Next, when the MLB (8-102) is placed within the HMD (8-100) during assembly/manufacturing of the HMD (8-100), the MLB (8-102) can be bent at the transition/bending portion (8-108) as shown and fixed in place within the HMD (8-100).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 131-133) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 134 and 135 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 134 and 135 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 131-133.

FIG. 134 illustrates a cross-sectional view of another example of an MLB (8-202) including a first portion (8-204) and a second portion (8-206), with a transition portion (8-208) positioned between the first portion (8-204) and the second portion (8-206). In the illustrated example of FIG. 134, the MLB (8-202) is not bent at the transition portion (8-208), for example, when the MLB (8-202) is not yet bent for assembly within the HMD (8-100). In one example, the transition portion (8-208) is thinner than the first and second portions (8-204, 8-206), so that when the first and second portions (8-204, 8-206) are pressed toward each other, the MLB (8-202) naturally bends at the transition portion (8-208).

In at least one example, the transition portion (8-208) includes a plurality of layers (8-201) including conductive layers, such as copper conductive layers, and insulating layers, including pre-preg insulating layers, disposed between the conductive layers. The thicknesses of the layers for the first, second, and transition portions (8-204, 8-206, 8-208) of the MLB (8-202) may be from about 0.006 mm to about 0.053 mm. The number of layers, the types of layers, and the thicknesses of each of those layers may vary in other examples.

In at least one example, the transition portion (8-208) may include an upper combined coverlay-adhesive layer (8-203). In at least one example, the transition portion (8-208) may include a lower sliver shielding layer (8-205) beneath a lower combined coverlay-adhesive layer (8-207). Copper and prepreg layers may be disposed between the coverlay-adhesive layers (8-203, 8-207). The MLB (8-202) may include a core layer (8-209) disposed between adjacent copper layers and extending from the first portion (8-204), through the transition portion (8-208), and continuing through the second portion (8-206) as a single core layer (8-209). Likewise, any of the other layers mentioned herein may extend as single continuous layers from the first portion (8-204), through the transition portion (8-208), and then through the second portion (8-206) and across the transition portion (8-208). In one example, the transition portion (8-208) is not a separate, unconnected MLB portion positioned between other separate portions. Rather, the transition portion (8-208) may be an integral portion of the MLB (8-202) and may include identical or similar layers of material that electronically or otherwise connect its first and second portions (8-204, 8-206).

In at least one example, one or more layers of core and/or conductive material extend continuously from the first portion (8-204) through the transition portion (8-208) to the second portion (8-206). In at least one example, one or more of these layers can form a thermal connection between the first portion (8-204) and the second portion (8-206). In at least one example, no connectors are required between the first portion (8-204) and the second portion (8-208). In at least one example, the MLB (8-202) can include an aluminum plating for solderability.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIG. 134) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 131-133 and FIG. 135 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 131-133 and FIG. 135 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 134.

FIG. 135 illustrates a top perspective view of a subassembly of an HMD (8-100) including an MLB (8-302) and first and second fans (8-310a, 8-310b) affixed to the MLB (8-302). In at least one example, the first fan (8-310a) is affixed to or adjacent a first portion (8-304) of the MLB (8-302) and the second fan (8-310b) is affixed to or adjacent a second portion (8-306) of the MLB (8-302). In such examples, the fans (8-310a, 8-310b) may be positioned relative to one another at the same angle as the first and second portions (8-304, 8-306) of the MLB (8-302) are positioned relative to one another. In this way, not only the MLB (8-302) but also the fans (310a, 310b) can be compactly placed within the curved HMD (8-100) device, minimizing the device volume.

Additionally, the first and second fans (8-310a, 8-310b) may be secured to the MLB (8-302) such that the thermally conductive housings of the fans (8-310a, 8-310b) are thermally coupled to one or more heat-generating components of the MLB (8-302). In one example, the fans (8-310a, 8-310b) may be secured to the first and second portions (8-304, 8-306) of the MLB (8-302) such that the housings of the fans (8-310a, 8-310b) form at least a portion of one or more electromagnetic interference shields for the components of the MLB (8-302). Further details regarding EMI shielding and thermal conductivity of the fans (8-310a, 8-310b) in relation to the MLB are given elsewhere herein.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIG. 135) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 131 through 134 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 131 through 135 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 135.

IX: Thermals

FIG. 136 illustrates a drawing of an HMD (100) including a thermal management system (102). The thermal management system (102) is described in more detail herein in Section IX.

9.1: Air deflector for cooling system within head-mounted device

Head-mounted devices are an attractive technology for delivering immersive user experiences. For example, head-mounted devices are increasingly popular for delivering VR, AR, and MR experiences for applications such as games, movies, and simulations for professional training, among other potential applications.

Head-mounted devices may employ a wearable device housing that is secured to a user's head, and various electronic components within the housing, such as displays, integrated circuits, memory, audio devices, or electronic circuitry. Like other electronic devices, head-mounted devices may employ a cooling system based on air circulation to maintain the electronic components at desirable operating temperatures. The cooling system may also be used to cool the user's face from heat build-up inside the head-mounted device.

Maintaining efficient operation without unduly degrading the user experience is challenging for head-mounted devices. The shape of a head-mounted device or the layout of its internal components can result in meandering airflow paths for the cooling system. The proximity of the airflow path to the user's head can produce undesirable effects that degrade the user experience, such as excessive noise that significantly interferes with the device's audio. Some head-mounted devices may employ movable components that can block the airflow path, such as adjustable optics that can be moved to accommodate a given user's interpupillary distance (IPD). IPD is defined as the distance between the centers of the user's pupils. This tunability, in turn, can make it difficult to design a cooling system for a given device that is suitable for different users.

According to some embodiments disclosed herein, a cooling system for a head-mounted device may employ an air deflector designed to influence the flow of air within the head-mounted device. The air deflector may be positioned within an airflow path extending through a housing of the head-mounted device and may be designed to reduce turbulence of air within the cooling system. For example, the air deflector may be positioned between a surface of an internal component and an incoming stream of air at a reduced angle relative to the surface of the internal component, thereby creating a smoother or more laminar flow over or across the component. The air deflector may be mounted to a movable component, such as an adjustable display assembly, to influence the flow of air as the movable component adjusts to particular users in a manner that causes partial obscuration of the airflow path by the movable component. The air deflector may be configured to pivot or otherwise move to account for changes in the angle of incidence of air due to changes in the positions of the movable components. The air deflector may include or be coupled to additional thermal structures to enhance heat transfer effects due to the flow of air over the air deflector. For example, the air deflector may include an integrated heat sink to improve heat dissipation from such components and/or may be bonded to the heat-generating components via a thermally conductive interface material.

These and other embodiments are discussed below with reference to FIGS. 137 through 145. However, those skilled in the art will readily recognize that the detailed description provided herein with respect to these drawings is for illustrative purposes only and should not be construed as limiting.

FIG. 137 illustrates an example of a head-mounted device (9.1-100) affixed to the head (9.1-20) of a user (9.1-10). As seen in FIG. 137, the head-mounted device (9.1-100) may include a housing (9.1-110) affixable to the user's head (9.1-20) via a fastening element (9.1-150). The fastening element (9.1-150) may include a band, a strap, a rim, temples of an eyeglass frame, or any other suitable mechanism that serves to fasten and retain the housing (9.1-110) on the head (9.1-20) of the user (9.1-10). The fastening element (9.1-150) may be an integral part of the housing (9.1-110) or may be implemented as a separate component attached thereto. The housing (9.1-110) may additionally include or be coupled to one or more nose pads that serve to place the housing (9.1-110) on the nose of the user (9.1-10).

The housing (9.1-110) may enclose and support various functional components therein, such as integrated circuits, memory devices, processors, electronic circuitry, input/output devices, or other electronic components. In FIG. 137, the housing (9.1-110) is illustrated as including a display (9.1-120), a controller (9.1-130), and an air circulation device (9.1-140) therein. The display (9.1-120) may be positioned in front of the eyes of the user (9.1-10) to provide information within the user's field of vision. The air circulation device (9.1-140) may force air through the housing (9.1-110) and over components such as the display (9.1-120) to cool such components. The controller (9.1-130) may be configured to control the operation of one or more components, such as a display (9.1-120) and/or an air circulation device (9.1-140).

The display (9.1-120) may transmit light from the physical environment for viewing by the user (9.1-10). For example, the display (9.1-120) may include optical elements, such as lenses for vision correction. The display (9.1-120) may be configured to present information in addition to (e.g., overlaid with) the physical environment viewed by the user. Alternatively, the display (9.1-120) may be configured to present information without regard to the physical environment. In either case, the display (9.1-120) may be configured to present graphics, for example, to present a computer-generated reality environment to the user (9.1-10).

The physical environment refers to the physical world that people can perceive and/or interact with without the aid of electronic systems. Physical environments, such as a physical park, include physical objects, such as physical trees, physical buildings, and physical people. People can directly perceive and/or interact with the physical environment through, for example, sight, touch, hearing, taste, and smell.

In contrast, a computer-generated reality (CGR) environment refers to a fully or partially simulated environment that people perceive and/or interact with through electronic systems. In a CGR, a person's physical movements, or a subset of their representations, are tracked, and in response, one or more properties of one or more virtual objects simulated in the CGR environment are adjusted in a manner consistent with at least one physical law. For example, a CGR system may detect a person's head turning, and in response, adjust the graphical content and acoustic field presented to the person in a manner similar to how such views and sounds change in the physical environment. In some circumstances (e.g., for accessibility reasons), adjustments to the properties of virtual object(s) in a CGR environment may be made in response to representations of physical movements (e.g., voice commands).

A person may perceive and/or interact with a CGR object using any one of their senses, including sight, hearing, touch, taste, and smell. For example, a person may perceive and/or interact with audio objects that create a 3D or spatial audio environment that provides a perceptual point of view of audio sources in 3D space. In another example, audio objects may enable audio transparency, which optionally integrates ambient sounds from the physical environment with or without computer-generated audio. In some CGR environments, a person may perceive and/or interact with only audio objects.

Examples of CGR include virtual reality and mixed reality.

A virtual reality (VR) environment refers to a simulated environment designed entirely based on computer-generated sensory inputs for one or more senses. The VR environment includes a plurality of virtual objects that a person can perceive and/or interact with. For example, computer-generated representations of trees, buildings, and avatars representing people are examples of virtual objects. A person can perceive and/or interact with virtual objects in a VR environment through simulations of the person's presence in the computer-generated environment and/or through simulations of a subset of the person's physical movements in the computer-generated environment.

In contrast to VR environments, which are designed to be based entirely on computer-generated sensory inputs, mixed reality (MR) environments are simulated environments designed to incorporate sensory inputs from, or representations of, the physical environment in addition to computer-generated sensory inputs (e.g., virtual objects). Within the virtuality continuum, mixed reality environments lie somewhere between, but do not encompass, a fully physical environment on one side and a fully virtual reality environment on the other.

In some MR environments, computer-generated sensory inputs can respond to changes in sensory input from the physical environment. Furthermore, some electronic systems for presenting MR environments can track position and/or orientation relative to the physical environment, allowing virtual objects to interact with real objects (i.e., physical items or representations of physical items in the physical environment). For example, the system can account for movement to make a virtual tree appear stationary relative to the physical ground.

Head-mounted devices of various types enable a person to sense and/or interact with various CGR environments. Examples include smart glasses, helmets, visors, or goggles. The head-mounted device may have one or more speaker(s) and an integrated opaque display. Alternatively, the head-mounted system may be configured to accommodate an external opaque display (e.g., a smartphone). The head-mounted device may incorporate one or more imaging sensors for capturing images or video of the physical environment, and/or one or more microphones for capturing audio of the physical environment. The head-mounted device may have a transparent or translucent display, rather than an opaque display. The transparent or translucent display may have a medium through which light representing the images is directed toward the human eye. The display may utilize digital light projection, OLEDs, LEDs, uLEDs, a silicon liquid crystal display, a laser scanning light source, or any combination of these technologies. The medium may be an optical waveguide, a holographic medium, an optical combiner, an optical reflector, or any combination thereof. In one embodiment, a transparent or translucent display may be configured to be optionally opaque. Projection-based systems may employ retinal projection technology, which projects graphical images onto a person's retina. Projection systems may also be configured to project virtual objects into the physical environment, for example, as holograms or onto physical surfaces.

FIG. 138 illustrates an example head-mounted device (9.1-100) in a frontal view. As seen in FIG. 138, the display (9.1-120) (FIG. 137) may include a first display assembly (9.1-121a) and a second display assembly (9.1-121b), which collectively form a pair of display assemblies corresponding to the user's two eyes. Each of the display assemblies may include any suitable combination of electronic and optical elements for presenting graphical information to the user. For example, each display assembly may include a display layer having an array of electronically controlled pixels capable of providing visual output. The display assemblies may further include optical elements, such as lenses, mirrors, and/or gaze tracking devices, to facilitate the creation of an enhanced computer-generated reality that is responsive to the user's gaze and/or pose.

A pair of display assemblies may be mounted in a housing (9.1-110) and separated by a distance (9.1-215). The distance (9.1-215) between the pair of display assemblies may be designed to correspond to a user's IPD. The distance (9.1-215) may be adjustable to accommodate different IPDs of different users who may wear the head-mounted device (9.1-100). For example, one or both of the display assemblies may be movably mounted in the housing (9.1-110) to allow the display assemblies to move or translate laterally to make the distance (9.1-215) larger or smaller. Any type of manual or automatic mechanism may be used to allow the distance (9.1-215) between the display assemblies to be an adjustable distance. For example, the display assemblies may be mounted to the housing via slidable tracks or guides that allow manual or electronically actuated movement of one or more of the display assemblies to adjust the distance (9.1-215).

As shown in FIG. 138, an air circulation device (9.1-140) may be positioned within or otherwise mounted to the housing (9.1-110) to pressurize a flow of air through the interior space (9.1-225) of the housing (9.1-110). The housing (9.1-110) may include ports that allow fluid communication between the interior space (9.1-225) and an environment external to the housing (9.1-110) to create a flow path for air within the housing (9.1-110). In FIG. 138, the housing is shown with a pair of inlet ports (9.1-240) on its lower surface and an outlet port (9.1-250) on its upper surface, which create air flow paths (9.1-275) extending from the inlet ports (9.1-240) to the outlet port (9.1-250). Each of the ports may include a vent, a screen, a hole, a porous membrane, and/or other fluid openings that allow fluid communication therethrough. However, it is contemplated that the housing (9.1-110) may generally include any suitable number of inlet ports and outlet ports at any suitable locations relative to the housing to allow the flow of air therein. The air circulation device (9.1-140) may be implemented as a fan configured to draw air into the inlet port(s) (9.1-240) and to pressurize the air out of the outlet port (9.1-250). However, any suitable number of fans or other air circulation devices may be included to pressurize the movement of air.

The airflow path (9.1-275) may extend over or across components, such as heat-generating electronic components, mounted within the housing. For example, a pair of display assemblies may include heat-generating display layers, and the air circulation device (9.1-140) may be configured to generate a flow of air such that the airflow path (9.1-275) extends over each of the display assemblies (9.1-121a, 9.1-121b) to cool the heat-generating layers by dissipating heat from the heat-generating layers. Alternatively, or in combination, the air circulation device (9.1-140) may be configured to circulate air over other electronic components, such as integrated circuit chips, other input/output devices, or across the user's face.

FIG. 139 illustrates an example of a display assembly (9.1-121) and an airflow path (9.1-275) extending over surfaces of the display assembly. The display assembly (9.1-121) may be one of a pair of display assemblies, such as the example illustrated in FIG. 138, wherein each of the first and second display assemblies (9.1-121a, 9.1-121b) may be configured similarly to the display assembly (9.1-121). As seen in FIG. 139, the display assembly (9.1-121) may include a display layer (9.1-314), a heat sink (9.1-342), a circuit board (9.1-370), one or more components (9.1-386) on the circuit board, and an enclosure (9.1-393) that surrounds and supports the aforementioned components.

As illustrated in FIG. 139, the display assembly (9.1-121) may have a front surface for viewing images and a rear surface opposite the front surface. The display layer (9.1-314) may include operative components of a display that form images viewable by a user from its front surface. The display layer (9.1-314) may include any suitable operative display panel having an array of electronically controlled pixels capable of providing visual output, such as, for example, an OLED, uLED, or LCD panel. The display assembly (9.1-121) may further include other optional components that may support special display functions for providing an immersive head-mounted display. For example, the display assembly (9.1-121) may include gaze tracking devices or eye trackers (e.g., positioned next to the display layer (9.1-314)) and/or optics (e.g., positioned in front of the display layer). The optical system may be configured to optically adjust and accurately project image-based content displayed by the display layer (9.1-314) for close-up viewing. The optical system may include one or more lenses, mirrors, or other optical elements.

In the example illustrated in FIG. 139, an airflow path (9.1-275) passes across the rear surface of the display assembly (9.1-121) to dissipate heat generated from the display layer (9.1-314) through the rear surface. To facilitate heat dissipation, a heat sink (9.1-342) may be positioned behind the rear surface of the display layer (9.1-314). The heat sink (9.1-342) may include a plurality of fins (9.1-377) positioned within the airflow path (9.1-275) to increase the surface area of the rear surface exposed to the airflow. The heat sink (9.1-342) can be thermally bonded to the back surface or rear face of the display layer (9.1-314) via a thermal interface (9.1-361), such as a thermally conductive adhesive or other suitable thermally conductive material, to enhance heat transfer (e.g., conduction) from the display layer through the heat sink and into the stream of air.

As can be seen in FIG. 139, the display assembly (9.1-121) may further include other structures, such as a circuit board (9.1-370) (e.g., a flexible or rigid printed circuit board) on a rear surface of the display assembly. The circuit board (9.1-370) may have one or more components (9.1-386) mounted thereon. The components (9.1-386) may be passive or active electronic components surface-mounted to the circuit board (9.1-370), such as, for example, integrated circuit chips, resistors, capacitors, or other structures that may protrude from the surface of the circuit board (9.1-370).

The components (9.1-386) and/or other structures of the display assembly may partially impede or block the free flow of air and may tend to increase turbulence of the air in the flow path. For example, FIG. 139 illustrates an example where increased impedance caused by the presence of components (9.1-386) results in more turbulent flow, which may degrade efficiency or user experience as described above.

Fig. 140 illustrates another example of a display assembly (9.1-121). The example depicted in Fig. 140 employs a similar structure to Fig. 139, but additionally includes an air deflector (9.1-400) positioned within the airflow path (9.1-275). The air deflector (9.1-400) is a structure that can be mounted to surfaces within the head-mounted device to reduce turbulence in air passing through and across the air deflector. The air deflector (9.1-400) can have surfaces designed to create a less turbulent and more laminar flow for air incident on the surface. For example, the air deflector (9.1-400) may provide a smoother surface or lower angle to the incoming air stream generated by the air circulation device (9.1-140) (e.g., FIG. 138) compared to structures within the head-mounted device that the incoming air stream would otherwise contact if the air deflector were not present. The air deflector (9.1-400) may be a rigid component made of any suitable material, such as plastic, ceramic, or metal. In some embodiments, the air deflector (9.1-400) may be configured as a dedicated wall structure that is mounted to the internal structures or inserted into the interior space of the housing solely to influence the characteristics of the flow of air incident therethrough, without providing any other mechanical or electrical functions.

In the example illustrated in FIG. 140, the air deflector (9.1-400) is mounted on the rear surface of the display assembly (9.1-121). The air deflector (9.1-400) is mounted on and attached to the circuit board (9.1-370) and extends at least partially over the component(s) (9.1-386) to at least partially shield the components (9.1-386) from incoming air within the airflow path (9.1-275). The air deflector (9.1-400) may be positioned, for example, downstream from the heat sink (9.1-342) with respect to the airflow path (9.1-275). Compared to the surfaces of the components (9.1-386) without the air deflector (9.1-400), the surface of the air deflector that is within the flow path and positioned to receive the incident air stream may have a smoother surface with fewer bends or steps. Thus, the air deflector (9.1-400) may be configured to make the air flow path (9.1-275) less tortuous.

Although the air deflector (9.1-400) is shown mounted to the circuit board (9.1-370) on the rear surface of the display assembly (9.1-121), it is contemplated that the air deflector (9.1-400) may be mounted at any other desired location within the housing of the head-mounted device where reduced turbulence is desired. For example, the air deflector (9.1-400) may be mounted to a heat sink or other surface on the rear surface of the display assembly (9.1-121), another non-rear surface of the display assembly, or another internal component within the housing of the head-mounted device.

Fig. 141 illustrates another example of an air deflector (9.1-400). In the example illustrated in Fig. 141, the air deflector (9.1-400) is constructed similarly to the example illustrated in Fig. 140, but further includes an integral heat sink to allow the air deflector (9.1-400) to further dissipate heat from components (9.1-386) shielded by the air deflector (9.1-400), which may be heat-generating electronic components. The surface of the air deflector (9.1-400) receiving the incident air may include a plurality of fins (9.1-477) that increase the surface area of the surface receiving the incident air. To maintain a sufficiently laminar flow, the fins (9.1-477) may be configured, for example, as longitudinal fins extending in the direction of the airflow, or as a series of aligned fins arranged in rows extending along the direction of the airflow, among other possible structural arrangements. To facilitate heat transfer, the air deflector (9.1-400) may be manufactured from a material having a sufficiently high thermal conductivity, such as copper or aluminum. The air deflector (9.1-400) may be joined to one or more of the components (9.1-386). To further enhance the ability of the air deflector (9.1-400) to dissipate heat, the air deflector (9.1-400) may be thermally joined to such components via a thermally conductive interface (9.1-461), such as a conductive adhesive or other suitable thermally conductive material.

Fig. 142 illustrates another example of an air deflector (9.1-400). The air deflector (9.1-400) illustrated in Fig. 142 may be configured similarly to the examples of Fig. 140 or Fig. 141, except that in Fig. 142, the air deflector (9.1-400) is movably mounted to a surface (in this case, the surface of the circuit board (9.1-370)) rather than being non-movably or fixedly mounted to the surface as in the previous examples. The movable mounting may allow the air deflector (9.1-400) to have an adjustable angle relative to the incoming stream of air within the air flow path (9.1-275). This may be useful, for example, to allow the adjustable angle to be optimized for reduced turbulence at various positions of the air deflector when the position of the air deflector relative to the flow path or housing is moved differently. When the air deflector (9.1-400) is mounted on a display assembly that is movably adjusted by a distance (9.1-215) (e.g., FIG. 138), the air deflector (9.1-400) may be configured to compensate for its changed position by also moving relative to the display assembly. For example, the air deflector (9.1-400) may be configured to move or rotate relative to the display assembly in response to, or otherwise in accordance with, movement of the display assembly relative to the housing. Movement of the air deflector (9.1-400) may be accomplished using, for example, a piezoelectric actuator or other actuator, and/or a mechanical linkage that synchronizes movement of the display assembly with rotation of the air deflector (9.1-400). In the example illustrated in FIG. 142, the air deflector (9.1-400) is pivotally mounted on a surface of the display assembly (9.1-121). The actuator can be configured to rotate the air deflector (9.1-400) about a pivot point (9.1-603) based on movement of the display assembly (9.1-121) relative to the housing or based on changes in the distance (9.1-215) between the pair of display assemblies, thereby adjusting the angle of incidence of air onto a surface of the air deflector (9.1-400) to account for a new position of the air deflector relative to a flow path extending through the housing.

Figures 143 and 144 illustrate examples of how an air deflector (9.1-400) can reduce air turbulence in a head-mounted device. Figures 143 and 144 illustrate examples of an arrangement without an air deflector and an arrangement with an air deflector, respectively.

FIG. 143 illustrates an arrangement (e.g., similar to FIG. 139) having a component (9.1-386) mounted within a flow path and positioned to receive an incoming stream of air (9.1-735) within the flow path. The component (9.1-386) has a surface (9.1-759) positioned within the flow path to receive the incoming stream of air (9.1-735) thereon. The incoming stream (9.1-735) is incident upon the surface (9.1-759) and forms an angle (9.1-θ) with respect to the surface (9.1-759). In this example, the angle θ between the incoming stream (9.1-735) and the surface of the component (9.1-386) is approximately 90 degrees. In other words, the angle of incidence of the incoming stream (9.1-735) is approximately 0, where the angle of incidence is defined by the angle between the incoming stream and a normal to the incident surface. A large angle between the incoming stream and the incident surface, or equivalently a low angle of incidence, causes abrupt changes in the airflow that tend to produce turbulent patterns as the incoming stream impinges on the component and then continues to flow along a meandering flow path around the component (9.1-386).

FIG. 144 illustrates the same arrangement as FIG. 143, except that an air deflector (9.1-400) is mounted within the flow path to at least partially deflect an inlet stream (9.1-735) of air away from its incidence on the surface (9.1-759) of the component (9.1-386) (e.g., similar to FIG. 140). The inlet stream (9.1-735) is directed toward the surface (9.1-759) of the component (9.1-386) at the same angle (9.1-θ) as shown in FIG. 143. This is represented by the dashed arrow in FIG. 144, which illustrates what the path of the inlet stream (9.1-735) would be if the air deflector (9.1-400) were not present. However, due to the presence of the air deflector (9.1-400), the incoming stream (9.1-735) is deflected, in whole or in part, away from the incidence on the surface (9.1-759) of the component (9.1-386). The air deflector (9.1-400) has a surface (9.1-859) positioned within the flow path to receive the incoming stream (9.1-735) of air thereon, and the surface (9.1-859) of the air deflector (9.1-400) forms an angle (9.1-φ) with respect to the incoming stream (9.1-735) which is less than the angle (9.1-θ). In other words, the angle of incidence of the incoming stream (9.1-735) on the surface (9.1-859) of the air deflector is greater than the angle of incidence on the surface (9.1-759) of the component (9.1-386) in the absence of the air deflector. As a result of such a configuration, air incident upon the air deflector (9.1-400) and then further propagating downstream is deflected less abruptly than if the air deflector (9.1-400) were not present and the air were to strike the component (9.1-386) unimpeded. As a result, the air follows a less tortuous flow path, which may advantageously reduce noise within the device for a given flow rate and/or improve the efficiency of the cooling system.

The air deflector (9.1-400) may be configured as any suitable wall structure that forms a desired turbulence reduction angle relative to the incoming air stream (9.1-735). While the wall is depicted in FIG. 144 as having a straight geometry, in various embodiments the wall may have, for example, a straight, curved, or curved geometry. As depicted in FIG. 144, the air deflector (9.1-400) and the component (9.1-386) may both be mounted to the same common surface (9.1-801), which may be, for example, any suitable surface of the display assembly. As illustrated in FIG. 144, the surface (9.1-859) of the air deflector (air receiving surface) may additionally form an obtuse angle with respect to the surface (9.1-801) on which the air deflector (9.1-400) is mounted, which may be useful for reducing turbulence in cases where the incoming stream (9.1-735) of air propagates in a direction parallel to the surface (9.1-801).

Components of a head-mounted device may be operably connected to provide the performance described herein. FIG. 145 illustrates a simplified block diagram of an example of a head-mounted device (9.1-100).

As illustrated in FIG. 145, the head-mounted device (9.1-100) may include a controller (9.1-130) having one or more processing units that include or are configured to access a memory (9.1-918) having instructions stored therein. The instructions or computer programs may be configured to perform one or more of the operations or functions described with respect to the head-mounted device (9.1-100). The controller (9.1-130) may be implemented as any electronic device capable of processing, receiving, or transmitting data or instructions. For example, the controller (9.1-130) may include one or more of a microprocessor, a central processing unit (CPU), an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a digital signal processor (DSP), or a combination of such devices. As used herein, the term "processor" is intended to encompass a single processor or processing unit, multiple processors, multiple processing units, or other suitably configured computing element or elements.

The memory (9.1-918) may store electronic data usable by the head-mounted device (9.1-100). For example, the memory (9.1-918) may store electrical data or content, such as audio and video files, documents and applications, device settings and user preferences, timing and control signals or data for various modules, data structures or databases, and the like. The memory (9.1-918) may be configured as any type of memory. By way of example only, the memory (9.1-918) may be implemented as random access memory, read-only memory, flash memory, removable memory, or other types of storage elements, or combinations of such devices.

The head-mounted device (9.1-100) may further include a display (9.1-120) for displaying visual information to the user. The display (9.1-120) may provide visual (e.g., image or video) output and may include a pair of display assemblies as described herein. The display (9.1-120) may be or include an opaque, transparent, and/or translucent display. The display (9.1-120) may have a transparent or translucent medium through which light representing images is directed toward the user's eyes. The display (9.1-120) may utilize digital light projection, OLEDs, LEDs, uLEDs, a silicon liquid crystal display, a laser scanning light source, or any combination of these technologies. The medium may be an optical waveguide, a holographic medium, an optical combiner, an optical reflector, or any combination thereof. In some embodiments, the transparent or translucent display may be configured to be selectively opaque. Projection-based systems may employ retinal projection technology to project graphical images onto a person's retina. Projection systems may also be configured to project virtual objects into a physical environment, for example, as holograms or on a physical surface. A head-mounted device (9.1-100) may include an optical system configured to optically adjust and accurately project image-based content displayed by a display (9.1-120) for close-up viewing. The optical system may include one or more lenses, mirrors, or other optical devices.

In some embodiments, the controller (9.1-130) may receive user inputs from the control units (9.1-908) and execute actions in response to the inputs. For example, the controller (9.1-130) may be configured to receive sound from a microphone (9.1-930). In response to receiving the sound, the controller (9.1-130) may execute a voice recognition module to identify voice commands.

The head-mounted device (9.1-100) may include a battery (9.1-920) capable of charging and/or powering components of the head-mounted device (9.1-100). The battery (9.1-920) may also charge and/or power components connected to the head-mounted device (9.1-100), such as a portable electronic device (9.1-902).

The head-mounted device (9.1-100) may include an air circulation device (9.1-140) for cooling components of the head-mounted device (9.1-100). The head-mounted device (9.1-100) may further include an air deflector (9.1-400) disposed within the airflow path and configured to receive an air stream generated by the air circulation device (9.1-140), as further described herein. The air deflector (9.1-400) may optionally be movable by an actuator (9.1-949), as further described herein. The controller (9.1-130) may be configured to operate the actuator (9.1-949) to move or rotate the air deflector based on inputs from a user and/or adjustments to assemblies of the display (9.1-120).

The head-mounted device (9.1-100) may include an input/output component (9.1-926), which may include any suitable component for connecting the head-mounted device (9.1-100) to other devices. Suitable components may include, for example, audio/video jacks, data connectors, or any additional or alternative input/output components.

The head-mounted device (9.1-100) may include communication circuitry (9.1-928) for communicating with one or more servers or other external devices (9.1-90) using any suitable communication protocol. For example, the communication circuitry (9.1-928) may support Wi-Fi (e.g., an 802.11 protocol), Ethernet, Bluetooth, a radio frequency system (e.g., a 900 MHz, 2.4 GHz, and 5.6 GHz communication system), infrared, TCP/IP (e.g., any of the protocols used in each of the TCP/IP layers), HTTP, BitTorrent, FTP, RTP, RTSP, SSH, any other communication protocol, or any combination thereof. The communication circuitry (9.1-928) may also include an antenna for transmitting and receiving electromagnetic signals.

A head-mounted device (9.1-100) may include audio devices, such as a microphone (9.1-930) and/or a speaker (9.1-912). The microphone (9.1-930) may be configured to detect sounds from a user and/or an environment. The microphone (9.1-930) may be operatively connected to a controller (9.1-130) for detecting sound levels and communicating the detections for further processing. The speaker (9.1-212) may be configured to emit sounds to the user and/or the environment. The speaker (9.1-212) may be operatively connected to the controller (9.1-130) for controlling speaker output, including sound levels and/or other sound characteristics.

The head-mounted device (9.1-100) may optionally be connected to a portable electronic device (9.1-902) that may provide certain functions. For the sake of brevity, the portable electronic device (9.1-902) will not be described in detail in FIG. 145. However, it should be appreciated that the portable electronic device (9.1-902) may be implemented in various forms that include various features (e.g., input/output, control elements, processing, battery, etc.) that may be utilized by the head-mounted device (9.1-100). The portable electronic device (9.1-902) may be configured to receive cooling from the operation of the air circulation device (9.1-140). The portable electronic device (9.1-902) may provide a handheld form factor (e.g., a small portable electronic device that is lightweight and fits in a pocket). Examples include, but are not limited to, media players, phones (including smart phones), PDAs, computers, etc. The portable electronic device (9.1-902) may include a screen (9.1-913) for presenting a graphical portion of media to a user. The screen (9.1-913) may be utilized as a primary screen of a head-mounted device (9.1-100).

The head-mounted device (9.1-100) may include a dock (9.1-906) operative to receive the portable electronic device (9.1-902). The dock (9.1-906) may include connectors (e.g., Lightning, USB, FireWire, power, DVI, etc.) that can be plugged into a complementary connector of the portable electronic device (9.1-902). The dock (9.1-906) may include features to assist in aligning the connectors during mating and to physically couple the portable electronic device (9.1-902) to the head-mounted device (9.1-100). For example, the dock (9.1-906) may define a cavity for placement of the portable electronic device (9.1-902). The dock (9.1-906) may also include retention features for securing a portable electronic device (9.1-902) within the cavity. A connector on the dock (9.1-906) may function as a communications interface between the portable electronic device (9.1-902) and the head-mounted device (9.1-100).

The head-mounted device (9.1-100) may include one or more other sensors. Such sensors may be configured to sense substantially any type of characteristic, such as, but not limited to, image, pressure, light, touch, force, temperature, position, motion, and the like. For example, the sensors may be photodetectors, temperature sensors, light or optical sensors, barometric pressure sensors, humidity sensors, magnets, gyroscopes, accelerometers, chemical sensors, ozone sensors, particle count sensors, and the like. As a further example, the sensors may be biosensors for tracking biometric characteristics, such as health and activity metrics. Other user sensors may perform facial feature detection, facial motion detection, facial recognition, eye tracking, user mood detection, user emotion detection, voice detection, and the like. The sensors may include cameras capable of capturing image-based content from the outside world.

9.2: Fan with debris mitigation function

Head-mounted devices, such as head-mounted displays, headsets, visors, smart glasses, and heads-up displays, can perform a variety of functions managed by components (e.g., sensors, circuitry, and other hardware) included in the wearable device. Head-mounted devices can provide immersive or otherwise natural user experiences, allowing users to easily focus on enjoying the experience without being distracted by the mechanisms of the head-mounted device.

Components of head-mounted devices can generate heat during operation. The performance of electronic devices is often limited by their ability to effectively dissipate the heat generated by computing and other workloads. Excessive heat over extended periods can damage components of head-mounted devices and cause user discomfort. Heat can be mitigated in a variety of ways, including by utilizing active mechanisms integrated into the head-mounted device (e.g., fans, blowers, air movers, etc.). Active cooling is sometimes used to effectively dissipate heat within a small form factor. Active cooling refers to a thermal architecture in which heat is dissipated through forced convection.

Active cooling devices (e.g., fans, blowers, air movers, etc.) can create a flow of air from their inlets to their outlets. Such inlets and outlets can define a path for receiving and/or delivering air from the environment outside the head-mounted device. However, by providing such exposure to the external environment, the fan is vulnerable to intrusion by particles or other debris from the external environment. In particular, when the fan is not operating, such particles can collect and become lodged between the fan components. In such a state, the fan may have difficulty resuming operation due to the introduction of particles between the fan's moving components. In particular, particles lodged between stationary components (e.g., the fan housing) and moving components (e.g., the rotor, impeller, etc.) can cause the fan to stall.

The systems of the present disclosure may provide fans that mitigate the ingress of particles and other debris. The fans may include protrusions that create a meandering path to direct incoming particles away from sensitive areas. The fans may include openings to allow particles to exit the fans. The fans may include variable gaps between stationary components (e.g., the fan housing) and moving components (e.g., the rotor, impeller, etc.) to prevent particle collection. The fans may include adhesive pads that collect and retain particles in a location that does not interfere with the operation of the impeller.

These and other embodiments are discussed below with reference to FIGS. 146 through 158. However, those skilled in the art will readily recognize that the detailed description provided herein with respect to these drawings is for illustrative purposes only and should not be construed as limiting.

According to some embodiments, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 146, a head-mounted device (9.2-100) includes a frame (9.2-110) that is worn on a user's head. The frame (9.2-110) may be positioned in front of the user's eyes to provide information within the user's field of view. The frame (9.2-110) may provide nose pads or other features that rest on the user's nose. The frame (9.2-110) may be supported on the user's head by a head engager (9.2-120). The head engager (9.2-120) may wrap or extend along opposing sides of the user's head. The head engager (9.2-120) may include earpieces that are intended to wrap around or otherwise engage or rest on the user's ears. It will be appreciated that other configurations may be employed to secure the head-mounted device (9.2-100) to the user's head. For example, one or more bands, straps, belts, caps, hats, or other components may be used in addition to or instead of the illustrated components of the head-mounted device (9.2-100). As a further example, the head engager (9.2-120) may include multiple components for engaging the user's head.

The frame (9.2-110) may provide a structure around its perimeter area to support any internal components of the frame (9.2-110) in their assembled positions. For example, the frame (9.2-110) may surround and support various internal components (e.g., including integrated circuit chips, processors, memory devices, cameras, displays, lenses, and other circuitry) to provide computing and functional operations for the head-mounted device (9.2-100), as further discussed herein. Any number of components may be included within and/or on the frame (9.2-110) and/or the head engager (9.2-120).

The frame (9.2-110) may include and/or support one or more cameras (9.2-130). The cameras (9.2-130) may be positioned on or near an exterior surface of the frame (9.2-110) to capture images of views outside of the head-mounted device (9.2-100). The captured images may be used for display to a user or stored for any other purpose.

A head-mountable device may be provided with displays that provide visual output for observation by a user wearing the head-mountable device. As further illustrated in FIG. 146, one or more displays (9.2-140) may be positioned on an interior surface (9.2-124) of the head-mountable device (9.2-100), for example, within an eye chamber (9.2-126). For example, a pair of displays (9.2-140) may be provided, wherein each display (9.2-140) is movably positioned so as to be within the field of view of each of the user's two eyes. Each display (9.2-140) may be adjusted to align with a corresponding eye of the user. For example, each display (9.2-140) may be translated along one or more axes until the center of each display (9.2-140) is aligned with the center of the corresponding eye.

The display (9.2-140) may transmit light from the physical environment (e.g., as captured by a camera) for observation by a user. Such a display (9.2-140) may include lenses for vision correction based on optical properties, such as incident light from the physical environment. Additionally or alternatively, the display (9.2-140) may present information as a display within the user's field of view. Such information may be presented outside of a view of the physical environment or in addition to (e.g., overlapping) the physical environment.

A physical environment relates to the physical world that people can sense and/or interact with without necessarily requiring the aid of electronic devices. A computer-generated reality environment relates to a fully or partially simulated environment that people sense and/or interact with with the aid of electronic devices. Examples of computer-generated reality include mixed reality and virtual reality. Examples of mixed realities may include augmented reality and augmented virtuality. Some examples of electronic devices that enable people to sense and/or interact with various computer-generated reality environments include head-mounted systems, projection-based systems, head-up displays (HUDs), vehicle windshields with integrated display capabilities, windows with integrated display capabilities, displays formed as lenses designed to be placed on a person's eyes (e.g., similar to contact lenses), headphones/earphones, speaker arrays, input systems (e.g., wearable or handheld controllers with or without haptic feedback), smartphones, tablets, and desktop/laptop computers. The head-mounted device may have an integrated opaque display, may have a transparent or translucent display, or may be configured to accommodate an external opaque display (e.g., a smartphone).

Referring again to FIG. 146, the head mountable device may be provided with one or more flow channels extending through at least a portion of its frame to provide cooling to components of the head mountable device. As illustrated in FIG. 146, the flow channels may include and/or be connected to a system inlet (9.2-112). The system inlet (9.2-112) may provide airflow directly to one or more components of the head mountable device (9.2-100), such as a fan (9.2-200) and/or a circuit component (9.2-150). Air received by the system inlet (9.2-112) may be directed by the fan (9.2-200) to a system outlet (9.2-116) and/or other outlets for exhausting out of the head mountable device (9.2-100).

Although the system inlet (9.2-112) is shown at the lower portion of the frame (9.2-110) and the system outlet (9.2-116) is shown at the upper portion of the frame (9.2-110), it will be appreciated that the inlets, outlets, and flow channels therebetween may be located at any portion of the head-mountable device (9.2-100). The system outlet (9.2-116) may be provided at a location that allows the exhaust air to be exhausted to an environment that is not obstructive to the user. For example, the system outlet (9.2-116) may be provided at a location and orientation that directs hot air away from the user. Multiple flow channels may be interconnected, such that multiple inlets and/or multiple outlets are interconnected.

One or more fans (9.2-200) may be operable to provide cooling to one or more circuit components (9.2-150) of a head-mounted device (9.2-100). The circuit components (9.2-150) may be electrical components that generate heat during operation. The circuit components (9.2-150) may be components of a circuit board (9.2-152). The circuit components (9.2-150) may be operably and structurally coupled to the circuit board (9.2-152). A portion of the fans (9.2-200) may be thermally coupled to the circuit components (9.2-150).

A fan (9.2-200) may receive a flow of air from a system inlet (9.2-112) and direct the flow of air toward a system outlet (9.2-116). For example, the fan (9.2-200), the circuit component (9.2-150), and/or the circuit board (9.2-152) may be located within an interior chamber (9.2-118) (e.g., a plenum chamber) of the head-mountable device (9.2-100).

Although several components are depicted within the frame (9.2-110), it will be appreciated that some or all of these components may be positioned anywhere within or on the head-mountable device (9.2-100). For example, one or more of these components may be positioned within a head engager (9.2-120) of the head-mountable device (9.2-100).

Referring now to FIG. 147, the fan may provide features for moving air across surfaces to dissipate heat. As illustrated in FIG. 147, the fan (9.2-200) may include a fan housing (9.2-208) including a cover (9.2-210) over an impeller (9.2-220). The cover (9.2-210) may form, for example, a fan inlet (9.2-212) through its upper surface. The cover (9.2-210) may include or be connected to an exhaust duct (9.2-290) that forms a fan outlet (9.2-292) of the fan (9.2-200).

An impeller (9.2-220) of a fan (9.2-200) may be positioned to admit air through a fan inlet (9.2-212) and direct the air toward a fan outlet (9.2-292). The fan (9.2-200) may include a motor for driving rotation of the impeller (9.2-220). For example, the fan (9.2-200) may include a stator and an impeller (9.2-220) configured to rotate about the stator. The impeller (9.2-220) may include a plurality of blades (9.2-224) extending radially outwardly away from a central hub of the impeller. As the impeller (9.2-220) rotates, the blades (9.2-224) receive air from the fan inlet (9.2-212) and direct the air radially outward and toward the fan outlet (9.2-292). The impeller (9.2-220) may be stabilized by one or more bearings between the impeller (9.2-220) and the stator. The bearings may include, for example, a fluid hydrodynamic bearing with oil or other fluid between the impeller (9.2-220) and the stator. It will be appreciated that other types of bearings are contemplated, including mechanical bearings, journal bearings, plain bearings, ball bearings, etc. The bearings may provide radial and/or axial support to the impeller (9.2-220) as the impeller rotates about the stator.

An impeller (9.2-220) may direct air or other gas into, against, or across one or more components of the fan (9.2-200). The fan (9.2-200) may be operated based on one or more controllable operating parameters during use. The operating parameters may be determined, at least in part, based on the need for cooling (e.g., based on the temperature of one or more components). The operating parameters may further be determined based on acceptable sound levels and characteristics to be produced by the fan (9.2-200) and along the flow channel.

Referring now to FIGS. 148 and 149, a fan may be thermally coupled to components to be cooled. As illustrated in FIG. 148, a fan housing (9.2-208) may further include a base plate (9.2-230). The cover (9.2-210) and the base plate (9.2-230) of the fan housing (9.2-208) may together define an interior space (9.2-280) therebetween. An impeller (9.2-220) may be positioned within the interior space (9.2-280) and mounted to the base plate (9.2-230). In this way, the base plate (9.2-230) provides structural support to the impeller (9.2-220) for stable operation (e.g., during rotation).

A heat sink (9.2-240) may provide one or more fins (9.2-242) between an interior space (9.2-280) and a fan outlet (9.2-292) formed by an exhaust duct (9.2-290). The heat sink (9.2-240) is thermally connected to a circuit component (9.2-150) that is operably and structurally coupled to a circuit board (9.2-152). The heat sink (9.2-240) may be thermally connected to the circuit component (9.2-150) by a direct connection (e.g., without an intervening structure) or by a thermal interface (9.2-160). For example, thermal paste or other thermally conductive material may be provided to thermally and/or structurally connect the circuit component (9.2-150) to the heat sink (9.2-240).

The base plate (9.2-230), heat sink (9.2-240), and/or fins (9.2-242) may be made of metal or other material having high thermal conductivity. The material may provide high rigidity and strength to provide support for components mounted on the base plate (9.2-230) and to rigidly mount to other components of the head-mountable device (e.g., frame).

The cover (9.2-210) may be of a material that provides protection to the impeller (9.2-220) and any other components within the interior space. The material may be plastic, metal, and/or other materials. The cover (9.2-210) may be a monolithic, single, and/or single-piece structure, rather than an assembly of parts.

As illustrated in FIGS. 148 and 149, the fan (9.2-200) can generate a flow of air from an inlet (e.g., a system inlet (9.2-112) and/or a fan inlet (9.2-212)) to an outlet (e.g., a system outlet (9.2-116) and/or a fan outlet (9.2-292)). It will be appreciated that the system outlet (9.2-116) can be directly connected to the fan outlet (9.2-292), such that any air directed through the fan outlet (9.2-292) can be further directed to the system outlet (9.2-116). Such inlets and outlets can define a path for receiving and/or delivering air from an environment external to the head-mounted device. During operation of the fan (9.2-200), the airflow can be maintained so that any particles or other debris moving with the airflow are moved through the fan (9.2-200) without remaining inside. In addition, the movement of the impeller (9.2-220) can break up and propel any lying particles until they are released from the fan (9.2-200).

However, by providing such exposure to the external environment, as illustrated in FIG. 150, the fan (9.2-200) is vulnerable to ingress by particles or other debris from the external environment. In particular, when the fan (9.2-200) is not operating (e.g., when the impeller (9.2-220) is not rotating), particles (9.2-2) may collect and become lodged between moving and stationary components of the fan (9.2-200). For example, particles (9.2-2) may enter through the system inlet (9.2-112) and into the fan inlet (9.2-212) and/or through the system outlet (9.2-116) and into the fan outlet (9.2-292), and may become lodged between stationary components (i.e., fan housing, base plate, etc.) and moving components (i.e., rotor, impeller, etc.) of the fan (9.2-200). In such a condition, the fan (9.2-200) may have difficulty in resuming operation due to particles being introduced between the moving and stationary parts of the fan (9.2-200). In particular, particles (9.2-2) lodged between the impeller (9.2-220) and the base plate (9.2-230) may cause the impeller (9.2-220) to stall.

It may be desirable to provide features that mitigate the collection of such particles while the fan (9.2-200) is not operating without reducing the efficiency of the fan while the fan is operating.

Referring now to FIG. 150, the fan may include features that create a meandering path to prevent incoming particles from entering sensitive areas. For example, as shown in FIG. 150, a protrusion (9.2-232) may extend from the base plate (9.2-230) to block and/or redirect the path of incoming particles (9.2-2). For example, the protrusion (9.2-232) may be positioned between at least a portion of the impeller (9.2-220) and the fan outlet (9.2-292). The protrusion (9.2-232) may extend toward the cover (9.2-210) while allowing an airflow path over the protrusion between the impeller (9.2-220) and the fan outlet (9.2-292).

The impeller (9.2-220) may be provided with a support disc (9.2-228) formed on one face of the blades (9.2-224). As illustrated in FIG. 150, when the support disc (9.2-228) is provided, the protrusion (9.2-232) may extend from the base plate (9.2-230) to at least a height of a portion of the support disc (9.2-228). When the blades (9.2-224) are provided, the protrusion (9.2-232) may extend from the base plate (9.2-230) to at least a height of one or more of the blades (9.2-224). In this way, the protrusion (9.2-232) may shield and/or occupy a space between the base plate (9.2-230) and the support disc (9.2-228). It will be appreciated that the meandering path around the protrusion (9.2-232) may connect the fan outlet (9.2-292) to the space between the base plate (9.2-230) and the support disc (9.2-228). However, the protrusion may be formed such that the incoming particles (9.2-2) are instead deflected onto the support disc (9.2-228), preventing them from becoming lodged between the base plate (9.2-230) and the support disc (9.2-228).

In some embodiments, as further illustrated in FIG. 150, the protrusion (9.2-232) may be formed as an annular ring or closed loop. Such a closed loop may surround the periphery of the impeller (9.2-220). For example, the annular ring may surround a portion of each of the support disk (9.2-228) and/or the blades (9.2-224).

In some embodiments, as further illustrated in FIG. 150, the protrusion (9.2-232) defines a surface (9.2-286) facing away from the impeller (9.2-220). This surface (9.2-286) may be where particles (9.2-2) are incident upon entering through the fan outlet (9.2-292). The surface (9.2-286) may be configured to direct the particles away from the space between the base plate (9.2-230) and the impeller (9.2-220). For example, the surface may form an angle that is oblique to the base plate (9.2-230) to form a ramp.

Referring now to FIG. 151, the protrusions (9.2-232) may overlap at least a portion of the impeller (9.2-220). For example, the blades (9.2-224) may be positioned between the cover (9.2-210) and the base plate (9.2-230), each of the blades forming a notch (9.2-288). The protrusions (9.2-232) extend from the base plate (9.2-230) and into at least a portion of the notches (9.2-288). As the impeller (9.2-220) rotates, the notches (9.2-288) pass over the protrusions (9.2-232) without physical contact.

As illustrated in FIG. 151, when a support disk (9.2-228) of the impeller (9.2-220) is provided, the protrusion (9.2-232) may extend from the base plate (9.2-230) to at least a portion of the height of the support disk (9.2-228). In some embodiments, as further illustrated in FIG. 151, the protrusion (9.2-232) may be formed as an annular ring. For example, the annular ring may surround the support disk (9.2-228) without surrounding the blades (9.2-224), but may instead protrude toward the blades (9.2-224) and into the notches (9.2-288). In this way, the protrusion (9.2-232) may block the space between the base plate (9.2-230) and the support disk (9.2-228). It will be appreciated that the meandering path around the protrusion (9.2-232) may connect the fan outlet (9.2-292) to the space between the base plate (9.2-230) and the support disc (9.2-228). However, the protrusion may be formed so that incoming particles are instead deflected onto the support disc (9.2-228), preventing them from becoming lodged between the base plate (9.2-230) and the support disc (9.2-228).

It will be appreciated that any of the protrusions (9.2-232) disclosed herein need not form an annular ring, and various other shapes such as arcs, flat walls, etc. are contemplated. It will be appreciated that any number of protrusions (9.2-232) may be provided. For example, both the protrusion of FIG. 150 (i.e., overlapping the impeller (9.2-220)) and the protrusion of FIG. 151 (i.e., surrounding the impeller (9.2-220)) may be provided in combination.

In some embodiments, the distance between any of the protrusions (9.2-232) disclosed herein and the impeller (9.2-220) (e.g., the support disk (9.2-228) and/or the blades (9.2-224)) may be less than the distance between the base plate (9.2-230) and the impeller (9.2-220) (e.g., the support disk (9.2-228)). The smaller distance between the protrusion (9.2-232) and the impeller (9.2-220) may serve to block particles having a dimension greater than that distance. In this way, only particles smaller than that distance can pass through the protrusion (9.2-232). When such small particles are present between the base plate (9.2-230) and the impeller (9.2-220), the particles will not be large enough to extend to both the base plate (9.2-230) and the impeller (9.2-220), thereby not being able to become lodged therein or impede the motion of the impeller (9.2-220).

Referring now to FIG. 152, the base plate may have features that facilitate particle interception and promote impeller operation. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 152, the base plate (9.2-230) may have variable profiles at different portions thereof and relative to the impeller (9.2-220). For example, the base plate may form a base plate central portion (9.2-262) and one or more base plate peripheral portions (9.2-260). The impeller (9.2-220) may form an impeller central portion (9.2-252) and one or more impeller peripheral portions (9.2-250). The distance (9.2-266) between the center portion of the base plate (9.2-262) and the center portion of the impeller (9.2-252) is greater than the distance (9.2-264) between the periphery portion of the base plate (9.2-260) and the periphery portion of the impeller (9.2-250). The smaller distance (9.2-264) between the center portion of the base plate (9.2-262) and the center portion of the impeller (9.2-252) can act to block particles having a dimension larger than the distance (9.2-264). In this way, only particles smaller than that distance can pass through the gap defined by the distance (9.2-264). When such small particles are present between the base plate center portion (9.2-262) and the impeller center portion (9.2-252), the particles will not be large enough to span the distance (9.2-266) to contact both the base plate center portion (9.2-262) and the impeller center portion (9.2-252), thereby not being able to become lodged therein or impede the motion of the impeller (9.2-220). It will be appreciated that numerous variations may be provided, including any number of different distances and/or transitions therebetween.

Referring now to FIG. 153, the base plate may have features that facilitate particle discharge and/or capture. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 153, the base plate (9.2-230) may define one or more openings (9.2-270) extending completely through the base plate (9.2-230). The impeller (9.2-220) may be positioned to overlap at least a portion of the openings (9.2-270) of the base plate (9.2-230). When particles are introduced between the base plate (9.2-230) and the impeller (9.2-220), the particles may be provided with an exit from such area through the openings (9.2-270). The openings (9.2-270) may be connected to an external environment or a collection chamber to discharge and/or capture the particles. It will be appreciated that any number of openings (9.2-270) may be provided in any arrangement. It will further be appreciated that the openings (9.2-270) may have any size and/or dimension to facilitate particle removal. It will be appreciated that the openings may be provided at any location, including locations other than the base plate (9.2-230).

Referring now to FIGS. 154 and 155, the fan may include a retention mechanism for capturing particles. For example, as shown in FIG. 154, a pad (9.2-272) may be provided on a face of the base plate (9.2-230) facing and/or covering the openings (9.2-270). In such an embodiment, the openings (9.2-270) may be the same as or similar to those described elsewhere herein. As shown in FIG. 155, the pad (9.2-272) may be positioned on a face of the openings opposite the impeller (9.2-220), such as an outer face of the base plate (9.2-230). Rather than releasing particles passing through the apertures (9.2-270), the pads (9.2-272) can capture the particles and keep them away from the impeller (9.2-220).

Once the particles are removed from the interior space (9.2-280) housing the impeller (9.2-220), they can be held in a position that does not interfere with the operation of the impeller (9.2-220). For example, the pad (9.2-272) can provide a surface that holds the particles when the pad (9.2-272) contacts the particles. For example, the pad (9.2-272) can include an adhesive (e.g., a pressure-sensitive adhesive). As used herein, an adhesive can include any material having adhesive properties and/or tackiness, such as polymers, glues, cements, pastes, laminates, and/or other materials that bond to the particles when in contact therewith. As a further example, the pad (9.2-272) can include an uncured or partially cured material that is exposed to the interior space (9.2-280) and/or the openings (9.2-270). In some embodiments, the fan (9.2-200) may include one or more other retention mechanisms, such as an operable electrode or other surface configured to be electrically charged to attract particles. Additionally or alternatively, the fan (9.2-200) may include a mechanically actuated container and/or filter to selectively receive particles moving out of the interior space (9.2-280) and/or through the openings (9.2-270).

Referring now to FIGS. 156 and 157, the fan may include a number of features that provide particle mitigation properties. For example, the fan (9.2-200) of FIGS. 156 and 157 includes one or more protrusions (9.2-232) extending from the base plate (9.2-230) to block and/or deflect the path of incoming particles. Such protrusion(s) (9.2-232) may include any one or more of the features described herein with respect to the fan of FIG. 150 or FIG. 151.

As a further example, the fan (9.2-200) of FIGS. 156 and 157 includes a base plate (9.2-230) having variable profiles at different portions thereof, for example, having a base plate central portion (9.2-262) and one or more base plate peripheral portions (9.2-260), and relative to the impeller (9.2-220). Together with the features of the impeller (9.2-220), the base plate (9.2-230) may define different distances therebetween, as described for the fan of FIG. 152.

As a further example, the fan (9.2-200) of FIGS. 156 and 157 includes a base plate (9.2-230) defining one or more openings (9.2-270) extending completely through the base plate (9.2-230). Such openings (9.2-270) may include any one or more of the features described herein with respect to the fan of FIG. 153.

As a further example, the fan (9.2-200) of FIGS. 156 and 157 includes a pad (9.2-272) on an outer surface of the base plate (9.2-230) to capture particles from the interior space (9.2-280). The pad (9.2-272) may include any one or more of the features described herein with respect to the fan of FIGS. 154 and 155.

It will be appreciated that any number of features described herein may be combined in a single fan to provide particle mitigation. It will further be appreciated that no single feature is required to provide effective particle mitigation in a fan.

Referring now to FIG. 158, components of a head-mountable device may be operatively connected to provide the performance described herein. FIG. 158 depicts a simplified block diagram of an exemplary head-mountable device (9.2-100), according to one embodiment of the present invention. It will be appreciated that the components described herein may be provided in either or both of the frame and/or the head engager of the head-mountable device (9.2-100). It will be appreciated that additional components, different components, or fewer components than those depicted may be utilized within the scope of the present disclosure.

As illustrated in FIG. 158, the head-mountable device (9.2-100) may include a controller (9.2-180) having one or more processing units that include or are configured to access a memory (9.2-182) having instructions stored therein. The instructions or computer programs may be configured to perform one or more of the operations or functions described with respect to the head-mountable device (9.2-100). The controller (9.2-180) may be implemented as any electronic device capable of processing, receiving, or transmitting data or instructions. For example, the controller (9.2-180) may include one or more of a microprocessor, a central processing unit (CPU), an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a digital signal processor (DSP), or a combination of such devices. As used herein, the term "processor" is intended to encompass a single processor or processing unit, multiple processors, multiple processing units, or other suitably configured computing element or elements.

The memory (9.2-182) can store electronic data usable by the head-mounted device (9.2-100). For example, the memory (9.2-182) can store electrical data or content such as audio and video files, documents and applications, device settings and user preferences, timing and control signals or data for various modules, data structures or databases, etc. The memory (9.2-182) can be configured as any type of memory. By way of example only, the memory (9.2-182) can be implemented as random access memory, read-only memory, flash memory, removable memory, or other types of storage elements, or combinations of such devices.

The head-mounted device (9.2-100) may further include a display (9.2-140) for displaying visual information to a user. The display (9.2-140) may provide visual (e.g., image or video) output. The display (9.2-140) may be or include an opaque, transparent, and/or translucent display. The display (9.2-140) may have a transparent or translucent medium through which light representing images is directed toward the user's eyes. The display (9.2-140) may utilize digital light projection, OLEDs, LEDs, uLEDs, a silicon liquid crystal display, a laser scanning light source, or any combination of these technologies. The medium may be an optical waveguide, a holographic medium, an optical combiner, an optical reflector, or any combination thereof. In one embodiment, the transparent or translucent display may be configured to be selectively opaque. Projection-based systems may employ retinal projection technology to project graphical images onto a person's retina. Projection systems may also be configured to project virtual objects into a physical environment, for example, as holograms or onto a physical surface. A head-mounted device (9.2-100) may include an optical subassembly (9.2-214) configured to assist in optically adjusting and accurately projecting image-based content displayed by a display (9.2-140) for close-up viewing. The optical subassembly (9.2-214) may include one or more lenses, mirrors, or other optical devices.

The head-mountable device (9.2-100) may include a fan (9.2-200) and/or any other suitable component for cooling components of the head-mountable device (9.2-100). Suitable components may include, for example, impellers, pipes for transferring heat, vents, openings, holes, any other component suitable for distributing and spreading heat, or any combination thereof. The fan (9.2-200) may also or instead be manufactured from materials selected for their heat dissipation properties. For example, the housing of the head-mountable device (9.2-100) may be configured to dissipate heat away from its components and/or a user.

The head-mountable device (9.2-100) may include a battery (9.2-184) capable of charging and/or powering components of the head-mountable device (9.2-100). The battery (9.2-184) may also charge and/or power components connected to the head-mountable device (9.2-100).

The head-mountable device (9.2-100) may include an input/output component (9.2-186), which may include any suitable component for connecting the head-mountable device (9.2-100) to other devices. Suitable components may include, for example, audio/video jacks, data connectors, or any additional or alternative input/output components. The input/output component (9.2-186) may include buttons, keys, or other features that may act as a keyboard for operation by a user.

The head-mounted device (9.2-100) may include a microphone (9.2-188) as described herein. The microphone (9.2-188) may be operatively connected to a controller (9.2-180) for detecting sound levels and communicating the detections for further processing, as further described herein.

The head-mountable device (9.2-100) may include speakers (9.2-190) as described herein. The speakers (9.2-190) may be operatively connected to a controller (9.2-180) for control of speaker output, including sound levels, as further described herein.

A head-mounted device (9.2-100) may include one or more other sensors. Such sensors may be configured to sense substantially any type of characteristic, such as, but not limited to, image, pressure, light, touch, force, temperature, position, motion, and the like. For example, the sensors may be photodetectors, temperature sensors, light or optical sensors, barometric pressure sensors, humidity sensors, magnets, gyroscopes, accelerometers, chemical sensors, ozone sensors, particle count sensors, and the like. As a further example, the sensors may be biosensors for tracking biometric characteristics, such as health and activity metrics. Other user sensors may perform facial feature detection, facial motion detection, facial recognition, eye tracking, user mood detection, user emotion detection, voice detection, and the like. The sensors may include cameras capable of capturing image-based content from the outside world.

The head-mounted device (9.2-100) may include communication circuitry (9.2-192) for communicating with one or more servers or other devices using any suitable communication protocol. For example, the communication circuitry (9.2-192) may support Wi-Fi (e.g., an 802.11 protocol), Ethernet, Bluetooth, a radio frequency system (e.g., a 900 MHz, 2.4 GHz, and 5.6 GHz communication system), infrared, TCP/IP (e.g., any of the protocols used in each of the TCP/IP layers), HTTP, BitTorrent, FTP, RTP, RTSP, SSH, any other communication protocol, or any combination thereof. The communication circuitry (9.2-192) may also include an antenna for transmitting and receiving electromagnetic signals.

While various embodiments and aspects of the present disclosure are illustrated with respect to head-mounted devices, it will be appreciated that the present techniques encompass and can be applied to other devices. For example, a noise mitigation system according to embodiments disclosed herein may be incorporated with an electronic device that generates heat during operation. Such an electronic device may be or include a desktop computing device, a laptop computing device, a display, a television, a portable device, a telephone, a tablet computing device, a mobile computing device, a wearable device, a watch, and/or a digital media player. Such devices may include an impeller and flow channels to facilitate cooling, as described herein.

Accordingly, embodiments of the present disclosure provide a head-mounted device that provides a fan that effectively manages heat while also mitigating the ingress of particles and other debris. The fans may include protrusions that create a meandering path to direct incoming particles away from sensitive areas. The fans may include openings to allow particles to escape the impeller. The fans may include a variable gap between the impeller and the base plate to avoid collecting particles. The fans may include adhesive pads that collect and retain particles in a location that does not interfere with the operation of the impeller.

9.3: Ventilation

FIG. 159 illustrates an example of a head-mounted display (HMD) (9.3-100). The HMD (9.3-100) may include a ventilation system (9.3-102) for controlling airflow through the HMD (9.3-100) and cooling various components of the HMD (9.3-100) described herein. In at least one example, the ventilation system (9.3-102) may be configured to cool one or more heat-generating components or subsystems of the HMD (9.3-100), including, for example, one or more processors or other heat-generating components of the optical modules (9.3-108a, 9.3-108b) and/or a logic board (9.3-110). The ventilation system (9.3-102) may include a frame assembly (9.3-106) and a fan assembly (9.3-104), which may include a multi-component chassis. The fan assembly (9.3-104) can be coupled to the frame assembly (9.3-106) and the frame assembly (9.3-106) such that the fan assembly (9.3-104) is positioned between the frame assembly (9.3-106) and the logic board (9.3-110).

In at least one example, when the HMD (9.3-100) is assembled, the optical modules (9.3-108a, 9.3-108b) may be coupled to the frame assembly (9.3-106) such that each of the optical modules (9.3-108a, 9.3-108b) aligns with an opening defined by the frame assembly (9.3-106) (illustrated in subsequent drawings, including FIGS. 160 and 169). In this manner, in at least one example, the optical modules (9.3-108a, 9.3-108b) may be in fluid communication with the fan assembly (9.3-104) via the frame assembly (9.3-106) disposed between the optical modules (9.3-108a, 9.3-108b) and the fan assembly (9.3-104). In at least one example, each of the optical modules (9.3-108a, 9.3-108b) may include one or more display screens or other heat-generating electronic components (as illustrated in subsequent drawings, e.g., FIG. 169). For example, the first optical module (9.3-108a) may include a first display screen, and the second optical module (9.3-108b) may include a second display screen, both of which may be oriented toward the user's eyes when wearing the HMD (9.3-100).

Figure 160 illustrates an example of a ventilation system (9.3-202) of an assembled configuration. In at least one example, the ventilation system (9.3-202) includes a first fan (9.3-212a) and a second fan (9.3-212b) coupled to a frame assembly (9.3-206) (e.g., a chassis). In at least one example, the frame assembly (9.3-206) may include an outer frame (9.3-215) and an inner frame (9.3-214) coupled to the outer frame (9.3-215). The frame assembly (9.3-206) may be a structural frame assembly. The outer frame (9.3-215) may be a structural outer frame and may define an outer surface of the HMD (9.3-100), and the inner frame (9.3-214) may be an internal structural frame disposed within an inner volume (9.3-226) defined by the outer frame (9.3-215). As mentioned above with reference to FIG. 159, an optical module including a display screen (not shown in FIG. 160) may be coupled to the frame assembly (9.3-206), for example to the inner frame (9.3-214), and may be aligned with the first opening (9.3-216a) or the second opening (9.3-216b). In one example, a first optical module having a first screen can be aligned with a first opening (9.3-216a), and a second optical module having a second screen can be aligned with a second opening (9.3-216b).

In at least one example, the inner frame (9.3-214) of the frame assembly (9.3-206) of the head-mounted display device can be coupled to the outer frame (9.3-215) at discrete touch points (9.3-218) to minimize contact and heat transfer between the inner frame (9.3-214) and the outer frame (9.3-215). Two discrete touch points (9.3-218) are labeled and illustrated in FIG. 160 and are provided as non-limiting examples. More or fewer touch points than the illustrated touch points (9.3-218) can be included at various locations or points on the inner frame (9.3-214) and the outer frame (9.3-215). The discrete touch points (9.3-218) at which the inner frame (9.3-214) is coupled to the outer frame (9.3-215) may be part of a first set of discrete touch points such that the inner frame (9.3-214) is thermally isolated from the outer frame (9.3-215) via the first set of discrete touch points. The inner frame (9.3-214) may be referred to as an inner frame, and the outer frame (9.3-215) may be referred to as an outer frame.

In at least one example, each touch point (9.3-218) of the first set of discrete touch points may include an insulating member (9.3-220) disposed between the inner frame (9.3-214) and the outer frame (9.3-215). In this manner, the inner frame (9.3-214) may be thermally isolated from the outer frame (9.3-215) by a first set of insulating members, including the insulating members (9.3-220) disposed between the inner frame (9.3-214) and the outer frame (9.3-215) at the first set of discrete touch points, wherein at least one insulating member (9.3-220) of the first set of insulating members is disposed at each discrete touch point (9.3-218) of the first set of discrete touch points.

In at least one example, the outer frame (9.3-215) can comprise a first material, and the inner frame (9.3-214) can comprise a second material different from the first material. The first material of the outer frame (9.3-215) can comprise aesthetically pleasing materials, including aluminum, other metals, plastics, composite materials, and the like. In at least one example, the second material of the inner frame (9.3-214) can comprise a material that is stronger and/or lighter than the first material of the outer frame (9.3-215). In one example, the second material can comprise a magnesium alloy. Other examples of the second material can include other metals that are stiffer and/or stronger than the first material, including metal alloys, carbon fibers, composite materials, and alloys.

The outer/external frame (9.3-215) can define an interior volume (9.3-226) as well as a first opening (9.3-122) (as shown in the front perspective view of the frame assembly (9.3-106) of FIG. 159) and a second opening (9.3-224) opposite the first opening (9.3-122). In at least one example, the outer frame (9.3-215) can define one or more intake ports (9.3-228) between the first opening (9.3-122) and the second opening (9.3-224). The intake ports (9.3-228) can include one or more openings defined by the outer frame (9.3-215) through which the interior volume (9.3-226) can be in fluid communication with an external environment.

In at least one example, the outer/external frame (9.3-215) may define one or more exhaust ports defined by a ventilation system (9.3-102) positioned adjacent to input ports (9.3-230) between a first opening (9.3-122) and a second opening (9.3-224) illustrated on the top surface. The exhaust ports (referenced below as 9.3-1130 in FIG. 169) may include one or more openings defined by the outer frame (9.3-215) through which the interior volume (9.3-226) may be in fluid communication with the external environment. In at least one example, one or more of the exhaust ports may be centrally positioned between the first opening (9.3-216a) and the second opening (9.3-216b) of the inner frame (9.3-214).

In at least one example, the fan assembly (9.3-204) of the HMD (9.3-100) may include a first fan (9.3-212a) disposed within the interior volume (9.3-226) and a second fan (9.3-212b) disposed within the interior volume (9.3-226). The first fan (9.3-212a) may be aligned with the first opening (9.3-216a), and the second fan (9.3-212b) may be aligned with the second opening (9.3-216b). In general, the term "aligned" as used herein may refer to a relative position where two components are adjacent to or near each other. For example, the first fan (9.3-212a) may be aligned with the first opening (9.3-216a) such that the air intake feature or opening of the first fan (9.3-212a) is positioned or configured to admit air into the first fan (9.3-212a) through the first opening (9.3-216a). In at least one example, the first fan (9.3-212a) may be “aligned” with the first opening (9.3-216a) such that the rotational axis of the fan blade assembly (9.3-217a) of the first fan (9.3-212a) passes through the first opening (9.3-216a). In one example, the rotational axis of the fan blade assembly (9.3-217a) may be parallel to, aligned with, close to, or close in proximity and angle to the central normal axis of the first opening (9.3-216a) defined by the inner frame (9.3-214). Accordingly, the term "aligned" is used herein to denote the arrangement of the fans (9.3-212a, 9.3-212b) and their respective openings (9.3-216a, 9.3-216b) as illustrated in FIG. 160. The same usage of the term "aligned" may be used to describe the relative positions of the second opening (9.3-216a) and the second fan (9.3-212b), as illustrated in FIG. 160.

In at least one example, the first fan (9.3-212a) and the second fan (9.3-212b) are configured to draw air into the internal volume (9.3-226) through the intake port (9.3-228) and to push air out of the internal volume (9.3-226) through the exhaust port. As mentioned above, the first and second fans (9.3-212a, 9.3-212b) are aligned with first and second openings (9.3-216a, 9.3-216b) of the inner frame (9.3-214), respectively, so as to draw air into the fans (9.3-212a, 9.3-212b) through the openings (9.3-216a, 9.3-216b) and through the fan inlets (9.3-232a, 9.3-232b). The first fan (9.3-212a) may include a housing (9.3-234a) defining a fan inlet (9.3-232a) through which air may enter the first fan (9.3-212a) before being blown through the exhaust port. Similarly, the second fan (9.3-212b) may include a housing (9.3-234b) defining fan inlets (9.3-232b) through which air may enter the second fan (9.3-212b) before being blown through the exhaust ports. The fan inlets (9.3-232a, 9.3-232b) may be adjacent to and/or aligned with the openings (9.3-216a, 9.3-216b), respectively, such that air may flow through the intake ports (9.3-228), through the openings (9.3-216a, 9.3-216b), and then through the fan inlets (9.3-232a, 9.3-232b) into the interior volume (9.3-226). The fans (9.3-212a, 9.3-212b) are configured to blow air from the internal volume (9.3-226) to the outside through the exhaust ports.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIG. 160) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 161-169 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 161-169 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 160.

Figure 161 illustrates an example of a fan (9.3-312) including a housing (9.3-334). The housing (9.3-334) may include a first housing shell (9.3-336) and a second housing shell (9.3-338) coupled to the first housing shell (9.3-336). The first and second housing shells (9.3-336, 9.3-338) may define an internal fan volume (9.3-340). The first and second housing shells (9.3-336, 9.3-338) may also be referred to as the first and second housings, respectively. In at least one example, a plurality of fan fins or blades (9.3-342) are disposed in the internal fan volume (9.3-340) and are configured or assembled to rotate about a rotational axis (9.3-344). These rotation axes (9.3-344) may be the same rotation axes aligned to pass through the openings (9.3-216a or 9.3-216b) discussed above and illustrated in FIG. 160 with reference to FIG. 160. In at least one example, the first housing shell (9.3-336) and the second housing shell (9.3-338) may define a fan outlet (9.3-346) through which air is pushed by the blades (9.3-342) as they rotate. In at least one example, the second housing shell (9.3-338) may define a fan inlet (9.3-332) through which the blades (9.3-342) are configured to draw air into the internal fan volume (9.3-340).

In at least one example, a fan (9.3-312) may be coupled to a logic board assembly (9.3-310) including one or more printed circuit boards (PCBs) and electronic components. In particular, the first housing shell (9.3-336) may be thermally coupled to, or in direct thermal or mechanical contact with, a heat generating component (9.3-348) of the logic board assembly (9.3-310). In at least one example, the first housing shell (9.3-336) may be formed of or include a thermally conductive material, such as metal, such that heat generated by the heat generating component (9.3-348) is transferred by conduction through the first housing shell (9.3-336) and air blown through the internal fan volume (9.3-340) may cool the first housing shell (9.3-336) by convection. In this way, the heat generated by the heat generating component (9.3-348) is carried out through the fan outlet (9.3-346).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIG. 161) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 160 and 162 through 169 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 160 and 162 through 169 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 161.

Figure 162 illustrates a cross-sectional side view of a fan (9.3-412) including a housing (9.3-434). The housing (9.3-434) may include a first housing shell (9.3-436) and a second housing shell (9.3-438), which may be referred to as a first housing and a second housing, respectively, defining an internal fan volume (9.3-440). In at least one example, a plurality of fan fins or blades (9.3-442) are disposed within the internal fan volume (9.3-440) and configured or assembled to rotate about an axis of rotation (9.3-444). This axis of rotation (9.3-444) may be the same axis of rotation aligned to pass through an opening (9.3-216a or 9.3-216b) discussed above with reference to Figure 160 and illustrated in Figure 160. In at least one example, the first housing shell (9.3-436) and the second housing shell (9.3-438) may define a fan outlet (9.3-446) through which air is pushed by the blades (9.3-442) as they rotate. In at least one example, the second housing shell (9.3-438) may define a fan inlet (not shown in the side view of FIG. 162) through which the blades (9.3-442) are configured to draw air into the internal fan volume (9.3-440).

In at least one example, the fan (9.3-412) may be coupled to a logic board assembly or printed circuit board (PCB) (9.3-410) including one or more electronic components. In particular, the first housing shell (9.3-436) may be thermally coupled to, or in direct thermal or mechanical contact with, a heat generating component (9.3-448) of the PCB (9.3-410). In at least one example, the first housing shell (9.3-436) may be formed of or include a thermally conductive material, such as metal, such that heat generated by the heat generating component (9.3-448) is transferred by conduction through the first housing shell (9.3-436) and air blown through the internal fan volume (9.3-440) may cool the first housing shell (9.3-436) by convection. In this way, the heat generated by the heat generating component (9.3-448) is carried out through the fan outlet (9.3-446).

In at least one example, the first housing shell (9.3-436) may be directly thermally coupled to the heat generating component (9.3-448) via a thermal paste or adhesive (9.3-450) disposed between the heat generating component (9.3-448) and the first housing shell (9.3-436). In this manner, the first housing shell (9.3-436) may be a heat sink disposed within an interior volume of an electronic device, such as the HMD (9.3-100) illustrated in FIG. 159. The housing (9.3-434) of the fan (9.3-412) may include a metal heat sink. As mentioned above and illustrated in FIG. 160, a plurality of fans (9.3-212a, 9.3-212b) may also be positioned within the HMD (9.3-100) such that the fan (9.3-412) illustrated in FIG. 162, which may also function as a heat sink for the heat generating component (9.3-448) and may thus be referred to as such, may be one of a plurality of fans comprising a second fan and heat sink of the HMD or other electronic device.

In at least one example, the system or device illustrated in FIG. 162 may include an electrically conductive fence (9.3-452) coupled to the PCB (9.3-410) and surrounding a periphery of the electronic/thermal component (9.3-448). As noted above, the fan (9.3-412) or fan assembly may include a housing (9.3-434) having a first housing shell (9.3-436) coupled to the fence (9.3-452) and positioned over the electronic/thermal component (9.3-448). The first housing shell (9.3-436) and the fence (9.3-452) may form an electromagnetic interference (EMI) shield around the electronic/thermal component (9.3-448) or any other electronic component coupled to the PCB (9.3-410) or a portion thereof.

In at least one embodiment, the fence (9.3-452), which may also be referred to as an EMI fence (9.3-452), may include a metal portion (9.3-454) and an EMI foam (9.3-456) positioned between the PCB (9.3-410) and the first housing shell (9.3-436), as shown, wherein the EMI foam (9.3-456) is positioned between the metal fence (9.3-452) or fence portion/sidewall (9.3-454) and the second housing shell (9.3-436). The metal fence or fence portion (9.3-454) may be positioned between the EMI foam (9.3-456) and the PCB (9.3-410). In at least one example, a housing (9.3-434) including a second housing shell (9.3-436) may be coupled to a metal EMI fence (9.3-452) or a metal part/sidewall (9.3-454) via an EMI foam (9.3-456). In at least one example, the fence (9.3-452) or sidewall (9.3-454) may extend from the second housing shell (9.3-436) of the housing (9.3-434) of the fan (9.3-412).

In at least one example, the first housing shell (9.3-436) defines or is disposed within a first main plane (9.3-458) that is parallel to the PCB (9.3-410) or parallel to a second main plane (9.3-460) on which the PCB (9.3-410) is disposed or defined by the PCB (9.3-410). In at least one example, the second housing shell (9.3-436) defines or includes a planar portion (9.3-464) that is disposed parallel to the PCB (9.3-410), for example parallel to the second main plane (9.3-460), and the heat generating component (9.3-448) is coupled to the planar portion (9.3-464).

Accordingly, the fan (9.3-412) illustrated in FIG. 162 may be part of an EMI shielding assembly that protects various components of the PCB or electronic components coupled thereto, including the heat generating component (9.3-448). The metal housing (9.3-434), and in particular its second housing shell (9.3-436), may form a shielding volume (9.3-462) in which the heat generating component and other components associated with the PCB (9.3-410) may be placed. The components within the shielding assembly may include one or more antennas or other components sensitive to electromagnetic waves. In at least one example, the heat generating component (9.3-448) may include one or more processors or processing units. The EMI shield assembly may also be referred to as a shield can, and the fan (9.3-412) may be part of a convection-cooled EMI shield can that simultaneously acts to cool various components associated with the PCB (9.3-410) and shield these components from electromagnetic interference.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIG. 162) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 160, 161, and FIGS. 163-169 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 160, 161, and FIGS. 163-169 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 162.

Figure 163 illustrates a plan view of a fan (9.3-512) having a first surface or housing shell (9.3-536). The housing shell (9.3-536) may define a fan inlet (9.3-532) and a plurality of fan blades (9.3-542) may be arranged and configured to draw air into the fan (9.3-512) when rotated. The housing shell (9.3-536) may also at least partially define a fan outlet (9.3-546) that causes air to be exhausted from the fan when the blades (9.3-542) rotate.

In at least one example, the housing or housing shell (9.3-536) may include one or more discrete connection features or points (9.3-566). These discrete connection features or points (9.3-566) may be used to couple the fan (9.3-512) to one or more other components of the electronic device including the HMD (9.3-100) illustrated in 9.3-100 by providing material features through which connectors or connector assemblies may extend to or be coupled to one or more frames, chassis, or other structural components of the HMD (9.3-100). In at least one example, the discrete connecting features or points (9.3-566) may reduce the surface area that contacts other structural components relative to the overall area or periphery of the housing shell (9.3-536), thereby limiting heat transfer from the fan (9.3-512) to user-contactable structural components (as drawn from heat-generating components that the fan may be in contact with, as illustrated in FIG. 162 and described above).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIG. 163) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 160-162 and FIGS. 164-169 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 160-162 and FIGS. 164-169 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 160.

Figure 164 illustrates a plan view of a fan (9.3-612) having a second surface or housing shell (9.3-638). The housing shell (9.3-638) may at least partially define a fan outlet (9.3-646) that allows air to be exhausted from the fan during operation.

In at least one example, the housing or housing shell (9.3-638) may include one or more discrete connection features or points (9.3-666). These discrete connection features or points (9.3-666) may be used to couple the fan (9.3-612) to one or more other components of the electronic device including the HMD (9.3-100) illustrated in 9.3-100 by providing material features through which connectors or connector assemblies may extend to or be coupled to one or more frames, chassis, or other structural components of the HMD (9.3-100). In at least one example, the discrete connecting features or points (9.3-666) may reduce the surface area that contacts other structural components relative to the overall area or periphery of the housing shell (9.3-638), thereby limiting heat transfer from the fan (9.3-612) to user-contactable structural components (as drawn from heat-generating components that the fan may be in contact with, as illustrated in FIG. 162 and described above).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIG. 164) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 160-163 and FIGS. 165-169 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 160-163 and FIGS. 165-169 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 164.

Figure 165 is an exploded perspective view of a fan (9.3-712) that may be similar to the fans (9.3-512, 9.3-612) illustrated in Figures 163 and 164, respectively. The fan (9.3-712) may include a housing comprising a first housing shell (9.3-736) defining an interior volume in which a fan blade assembly comprising a plurality of fan blades (9.3-742) is disposed, and an opposing second housing shell (9.3-738). The first or second housing shells (9.3-736, 9.3-738) may include or be coupled to one or more outlet fins (9.3-768) to direct air outwardly through an outlet of the fan (9.3-712) defined by the first and/or second housing shells (9.3-736, 9.3-738).

In at least one example, the first housing shell (9.3-736) may include or be coupled to one or more discrete connection features or points (9.3-766) similar to the discrete connection features or points (9.3-566, 9.3-666) described above with reference to FIGS. 163 and 164, respectively. In at least one example, the first and second housing shells (9.3-738) may define a fan inlet (9.3-732) through which air is drawn into the interior volume of the fan (9.3-712).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIG. 165) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 160-164 and FIGS. 166-169 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 160-164 and FIGS. 166-169 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 165.

Figure 166 illustrates a perspective view of a fan assembly (9.3-804) including a first fan (9.3-812a) and a second fan (9.3-812b). Each fan (9.3-812a, 9.3-812b) may include respective housings (9.3-836a, 9.3-836b). The housings (9.3-836a, 9.3-836b) may be similar to the first housing shell (9.3-736) illustrated in Figure 165 and the first housing shell (9.3-436) illustrated in Figure 162 and in contact with the heat generating component (9.3-448). In at least one example, the housings (9.3-836a, 9.3-836b) or housing shells may include respective etched portions (9.3-870a, 9.3-870b). The etched portions (9.3-870a, 9.3-870b) may be positioned and shaped to correspond to the EMI fence (9.3-452) illustrated in FIG. 162 such that the EMI fence (9.3-452) is coupled or contacts the housings (9.3-836a, 9.3-836b) of the fans (9.3-812a, 9.3-812b) at the etched portions (9.3-870a, 9.3-870b), respectively. The etched portions (9.3-870a, 9.3-870b) may be formed using chemical etching, laser etching, or other etching processes used to fabricate the surfaces of the housings (9.3-836a, 9.3-836b) for conductive contact with the EMI fence (9.3-452). In at least one example, the etched portions (9.3-870a, 9.3-870b) are more suitable than other portions or surfaces of the housings (9.3-836a, 9.3-836b) for contacting the EMI fence (9.3-452) such that an effective EMI shield is formed at least as described above with reference to FIG. 162.

In at least one example, as illustrated in FIG. 166, the first fan (9.3-812a) may be disposed within or define a first main plane (9.3-872a) and the second fan (9.3-812a) may be disposed within or define a second main plane (9.3-872b). When referring to the main planes (9.3-872a, 9.3-872b), the term "main plane" may include a plane intersecting or defining a cross-sectional area of each fan (9.3-812a, 9.3-812b) that is parallel to the planar surface of the first or second housing shells of the respective housings (9.3-836a, 9.3-836b). The cross-sectional areas of the fans (9.3-812a, 9.3-812b) arranged in the main planes (9.3-872a, 9.3-872b) are larger than the cross-sectional areas of the fans (9.3-812a, 9.3-812b) arranged in planes orthogonal to the main planes (9.3-872a, 9.3-872b). In at least one example, the fans (9.3-812a, 9.3-812b) include blades that rotate about an axis of rotation that is normal to the main planes (9.3-872a, 9.3-872b). These axes of rotation may be similar to the axes of rotation (9.3-444) illustrated in FIG. 162, and the principal planes (9.3-872a, 9.3-872b) may be similar to and/or parallel to the plane (9.3-458) illustrated in FIG. 162.

In at least one example, the first principal plane (9.3-872a) and the second principal plane (9.3-872b) are positioned at an angle (θ) with respect to one another such that the first and second principal planes (9.3-872a, 9.3-872b) are not parallel to one another. The angle (θ) may accommodate the curvature of one or more other components of the HMD (9.3-100) illustrated in FIG. 159, including the frame, the front cover, and the display screen. These curvatures, and the angles (θ) of the principal planes (9.3-872a, 9.3-872b) with respect to one another, may be designed to accommodate and compensate for the curvature of the user's face, including the relative angles of left and right facial features and glabellar/forehead/cheek curvatures. The angle (θ) may be such that the fans (9.3-812a, 9.3-812b) can be positioned so that they fit compactly within the HMD (9.3-100) and with its general curvature, as the fans are aligned with the openings of the inner frame and various MLBs and other components, which are positioned with respect to each other at the same or similar angle (θ).

In at least one example, the fan assembly (9.3-804) can include graphite bridges between the fans (9.3-812a, 9.3-812b). In at least one example, the fan assembly (9.3-804) can include tape disposed between the bodies of the fans (9.3-812a, 9.3-812b) to equalize heat transfer between the fans (9.3-812a, 9.3-812b).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIG. 166) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 160-165 and FIGS. 167-169 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 160-165 and FIGS. 167-169 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 166.

Figure 167 illustrates a partially assembled drawing of an MLB (9.3-910) including one or more heat generating components (9.3-948a, 9.3-948b) surrounded by respective EMI fences (9.3-952a, 9.3-952b). A fan (9.3-912) is illustrated in dashed lines to indicate the location of the fan overlying the MLB (9.3-910) and is coupled to the first EMI fence (9.3-952) to form a first EMI fence around the component (9.3-948) and other components illustrated on the MLB (9.3-910). The fan (9.3-912) is made transparent in the drawing of Figure 167 to illustrate a component that would otherwise be visually obscured.

In at least one example, a barrier (9.3-974) may be coupled to an MLB (9.3-910) surrounding a heat generating component (9.3-948b) to which the housing of the fan may be thermally coupled, as illustrated and described with reference to FIG. 162. The barrier may extend from the MLB (9.3-910) and contact the housing or other surface of the fan (9.3-912) positioned against the heat generating component (9.3-948) to define a containment volume in which the heat generating component (9.3-948b) is disposed. In at least one example, the barrier (9.3-974) is configured to include thermal paste, such as thermal paste (9.3-450) illustrated in FIG. 162, that thermally couples a heat-generating component (9.3-948) and a fan (9.3-948b) that is in contact with the heat-generating component (9.3-948a), which may be similar to the fan (9.3-912) that is shown in contact with the heat-generating component (9.3-948a), although not shown. That is, during assembly, as the fan is pressed toward or against the heat-generating component (9.3-948b), the thermal paste disposed therebetween may expand outward, but the barrier (9.3-974) includes the thermal paste and prevents the thermal paste from contacting or contaminating other components of or on the MLB (9.3-910) outside the barrier (9.3-974). In at least one example, the barrier (9.3-974) may comprise a foam, silicone gel, other compressible materials, or other materials suitable for forming the barrier (9.3-974) as described above.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIG. 167) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 160-166 and FIGS. 168-169 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 160-166 and FIGS. 168-169 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 167.

FIG. 168 illustrates a partial perspective view of an example of a fan (9.3-1012) coupled to an internal frame (9.3-1014) of an HMD device that may be similar to the HMD (9.3-100) illustrated in FIG. 159. In the example of FIG. 168, the housing or housing shell (9.3-1036) of the fan (9.3-1012) may be coupled to the internal frame (9.3-1014) at a discrete touch point (9.3-1018) among a set of discrete touch points that minimize or reduce heat transfer from the fan (9.3-1012) to the internal frame (9.3-1014). In at least one example, the touch point (9.3-1018) may be an assembly comprising one or more insulating members or insulators (9.3-1020a, 9.3-1020b) disposed between the housing shell (9.3-1036) of the fan (9.3-1012) and the inner frame (9.3-1014).

In these examples, the inner/inner frame (9.3-1014) can be thermally isolated from the housing/housing shell (9.3-1036). In at least one example, the touch point (9.3-1018) or touch point assembly can include an interface between the housing or housing shell (9.3-1036) of the fan (9.3-1012) and the housing (9.3-1012) including insulator(s) (9.3-1020a, 9.3-1020b) that thermally isolates the fan (9.3-1012) from the inner frame (9.3-1014).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIG. 168) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 160-167 and FIG. 169 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 160-167 and FIG. 169 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 168.

FIG. 169 illustrates a cross-sectional side view of an example of an HMD (9.3-1100) including an outer frame (9.3-1115) defining a first opening (9.3-1122), a second opening (9.3-1124), and an interior volume (9.3-1126). The outer frame (9.3-1115) may define an outer surface of the HMD (9.3-1100) and may thus be referred to as an outer frame. In at least one example, a front cover assembly (9.3-1176) may be positioned within or across the first opening (9.3-1122), and a curtain assembly (9.3-1178) may obscure the second opening (9.3-1124). In at least one example, the curtain assembly (9.3-1178) may include an elastic layer (9.3-1180) defining an outer surface and an air impermeable layer (9.3-1182) defining an inner volume (9.3-1126).

In at least one example, the outer frame (9.3-1115) may define an intake port (9.3-1128) positioned between the first and second openings (9.3-1122, 9.3-1124) and an exhaust port (9.3-1130) positioned between the first and second openings (9.3-1122, 9.3-1124). In particular, the outer frame may include an upper sidewall (9.3-1113) defining the exhaust port (9.3-1130) and a lower sidewall (9.3-1119) defining the inlet port (9.3-1128). The lower sidewall (9.3-1119) may be positioned opposite the upper sidewall (9.3-1113).

In at least one example, the HMD (9.3-1100) includes an inner or internal frame (9.3-1114) disposed within the interior volume (9.3-1126) and coupled to an outer frame (9.3-1115). The inner frame (9.3-1114) may define an opening (9.3-1116). The HMD (9.3-1100) may also include a fan (9.3-1112) disposed within the interior volume (9.3-1126). The fan may include a housing defining the interior fan volume in which a fan blade assembly (9.3-1117) is disposed. In at least one example, the housing of the fan (9.3-1112) may include a first housing shell (9.3-1136) and a second housing shell (9.3-1138). In one example, the second housing shell (9.3-1138) may define a fan inlet (9.3-1132), and the first and second housing shells (9.3-1136, 9.3-1138) may together define a fan outlet (9.3-1146).

In at least one example, the HMD (9.3-1100) may include an MLB or PCB (9.3-1110) disposed in an interior volume (9.3-1126). The HMD (9.3-1100) may also include one or more heat generating components (9.3-1148) coupled to the MLB (9.3-1110). In at least one example, the first housing shell (9.3-1136) may be thermally coupled to or in direct contact with the PCB (9.3-1110) and in particular the heat generating components (9.3-1148). In one or more examples, the second housing shell (9.3-1138) may be coupled to the inner frame (9.3-1114), and the fan inlet (9.3-1132) may be aligned with an opening (9.3-1116) defined by the inner frame (9.3-1114), as illustrated. The second housing shell (9.3-1138) defining the fan inlet (9.3-1132) may be oriented toward a display assembly including a display screen (9.3-1188) of the optical module (9.3-1108).

In at least one example, the HMD (9.3-1100) may include an optical module (9.3-1108) disposed in an interior volume (9.3-1126) and connected to an interior frame (9.3-1114). In one example, the optical module (9.3-1108) is coupled to the interior frame (9.3-1114) via a bracket (9.3-1184). In one example, the optical module (9.3-1108) may include a housing (9.3-1186), a display screen (9.3-1188), and a display assembly having a lens (9.3-1190) aligned with the display screen (9.3-1188). A fan (9.3-1112) may be disposed between the display assembly of the optical module (9.3-1108) and the PCB (9.3-1110). As illustrated, in at least one example, the curtain assembly (9.3-1178) can be coupled to the outer frame (9.3-1115) and can obscure the second opening (9.3-1124) between the outer frame (9.3-1115) and the lens (9.3-1190).

In at least one example, the fan (9.3-1112) is configured to draw air (represented by a dashed arrow in FIG. 169) from an external environment into the internal volume (9.3-1126) through the intake port (9.3-1128) and to push air out of the internal volume through the exhaust port (9.3-1130). In at least one example, the fan (9.3-1112) may be an air mover configured to draw air into the internal volume (9.3-1126) through the intake port (9.3-1128) and to push air out of the internal volume (9.3-1126) through the exhaust port (9.3-1130).

In at least one example, the air inlet port (9.3-1128), the fan inlet (9.3-1132), the fan outlet (9.3-1146), and the air exhaust port (9.3-1130) may define an airflow path (as indicated by the dashed arrows in FIG. 169) having the air inlet port (9.3-1128) upstream from the fan inlet (9.3-1132), the fan outlet (9.3-1132) upstream from the fan outlet (9.3-1146), and the fan outlet (9.3-1148) upstream from the air exhaust port (9.3-1130). Thus, the airflow path may be defined between the display assembly of the optical module (9.3-1108) and the fan inlet (9.3-1132). In at least one example, the inner frame (9.3-1114) can be coupled to the outer frame (9.3-1115) such that the inner frame (9.3-1114) is positioned between the display assembly including the display screen (9.3-1188) and the fan (9.3-1112) defining a fan inlet (9.3-1132) aligned with the opening (9.3-1116) (or “opening”). In at least one example, the fan (9.3-1112) is coupled to the inner frame (9.3-1114) such that the inner frame (9.3-1114) is disposed between the fan (9.3-1112) and the optical module (9.3-1108) and the fan (9.3-1112) is disposed between the PCB (9.3-1110) and the inner frame (9.3-1114) such that the heat generating component (9.3-1148) is thermally coupled to the fan (9.3-1112). In at least one example, the heat generating component (9.3-1148) may include a processor or multiple processors and components of a processing unit.

In this manner, the fan (9.3-1112) is configured to convectively cool the display assembly including the display screen (9.3-1188) of the optical module (9.3-1108) through air flowing in the airflow path. The fan (9.3-1112) may also be configured to conduction-cool the processor (9.3-1148) through direct contact with the housing or the first housing shell (9.3-1136) of the housing, as illustrated. Air moving through the fan (9.3-1112) via the fan blade assembly (9.3-1117) may convectively cool the first housing shell (9.3-1136) such that the processor (9.3-1148) is indirectly cooled by convection by the fan (9.3-1112). In at least one example, the processor (9.3-1148) is positioned outside the airflow path. In one example, a metal housing shell (9.3-1136) is positioned between the processor (9.3-1148) and the airflow path.

The outer/outer frame (9.3-1115) may be referred to as a housing or an outer housing. In at least one example, the fan (9.3-1112) is configured to draw air through an inlet port (9.3-1128), downstream from the inlet port (9.3-1128) through an opening (9.3-1116) in the inner frame (9.3-1114), downstream from the opening (9.3-1116) through a fan inlet (9.3-1132), and downstream from the fan inlet (9.3-1132) through an exhaust port (9.3-1130). An opening/opening (9.3-1116) defined by an inner frame (9.3-1114) may be aligned with a display screen (9.3-1188), and a fan (9.3-1112) may be positioned between the display screen (9.3-1188) and the processor (9.3-1148). The fan (9.3-1112) may be aligned with the opening. In at least one example, the fan outlet (9.3-1146) is positioned, oriented, and otherwise shaped or configured to generally direct air away from the processor (9.3-1148) and the PCB (9.3-1110) when the fan (9.3-1112) forces air from the internal volume (9.3-1126) through the exhaust port (9.3-1130) to the external environment. The fan outlet (9.3-1146) is configured to direct air toward the exhaust port (9.3-1130).

In at least one example, the inner frame (9.3-1114) can define a first side (9.3-1192) and a second side (9.3-1194) opposite the first side (9.3-1192). In at least one example, an optical module (9.3-1108) including a display screen (9.3-1188) of a display assembly can be coupled to the first side (9.3-1192) of the inner frame (9.3-1114) and aligned with an opening (9.3-1116) defined by the inner frame (9.3-1114). In at least one example, a fan (9.3-1112) can be coupled to the second side (9.3-1194) of the inner frame (9.3-1114) and aligned with the opening (9.3-1116).

In the example HMD (9.3-1100) illustrated in FIG. 169, only one of the fan (9.3-1112), the optical module (9.3-1108), the opening (9.3-1116), the MLB/PCB (9.3-1110), and the heat generating component (9.3-1148) is depicted based on the cross-sectional side view of the HMD (9.3-1100). However, it will be appreciated that the examples of the HMD (9.3-1100) may include multiple such components, including two fans, two optical modules, two openings, two MLB/PCB components, and two heat generating components, as illustrated in the examples of other HMD devices and components illustrated in FIGS. 159-168. Any of the features described with reference to these components in FIG. 169 may be applied to any of these components included in the HMD (9.3-1100).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIG. 169) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 160-168 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 160-168 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 169.

X: Chassis

FIG. 10.0-1 illustrates an exemplary drawing of an HMD (10-100) including a structural frame assembly (10-102). The structural frame assembly (10-102) is described in more detail herein in Section X.

FIG. 171 illustrates a drawing of a head-mounted device (HMD) (10-100) similar to the examples described herein. The HMD (10-100) may include a structural frame assembly (10-102), referred to as a chassis or frame assembly, comprising one or more frame components or subframes coupled thereto. The structural frame assembly (10-102) may be configured to provide mechanical strength and support to one or more other components of the HMD (10-100) coupled thereto. The other components are described herein and may include optical modules, fan assemblies, printed circuit boards, processors and other electronic computing components, sensors, displays, screens, and any other component disclosed herein.

As used herein, the term "structural" may include components that add to the structural rigidity, durability, shape, and strength of the HMD (10-100). As illustrated and mentioned elsewhere with reference to other drawings, the frame assembly (10-102) may define two or more openings, for example, first and second openings (10-104a, 10-104b) that are aligned in position with corresponding fan assemblies (10-106a, 10-106b) each including a fan. The openings (10-104a, 10-104b) may also, when assembled, correspond in position with corresponding optical modules (10-108a, 10-108b), each of which may include a display screen.

FIG. 172 depicts a partially assembled drawing of the HMD (10-100) depicted in FIG. 171, including a frame assembly (10-202) defining first and second openings (10-204a, 10-204b). In at least one example, the frame assembly (10-202) may include an intermediate frame (10-210) defining the openings (10-204a, 10-204b). In at least one example, an optical mounting bracket (10-211) may be coupled to the intermediate frame (10-210) between the openings (10-204a, 10-204b). The display screens of the optical modules (10-108a, 10-108b) illustrated in FIG. 171 can be coupled to the first and second cantilever-type guide rods (10-212a, 10-212b) of the mounting bracket (10-211). The optical modules (10-108a, 10-108b) are not shown in FIG. 172 to illustrate the intermediate frame (10-210), the mounting bracket (10-211), and the cantilevered guide rods (10-212a-b), but when assembled, the optical modules (10-108a, 10-108b) can be coupled to their respective guide rods (10-212a, 10-212b) such that the first optical module (10-108a) is aligned with the first opening (10-204a) at a first position and the second optical module (10-108b) is aligned with the second opening (10-204b).

The optical mounting bracket (10-211) may also be referred to as a mounting frame or an optical mounting frame, wherein the respective display assemblies of the optical modules (10-108a, 10-108b) may be slidably engaged with the guide rods (10-212a, 10-212b). In at least one example, the mounting bracket (10-211) may include first and second cantilever arms (10-214a, 10-214b) from which the respective guide rods (10-212a, 10-212b) extend. In this manner, one or more optical modules, assemblies, display assemblies, display screens, etc. may be coupled to the mounting bracket (10-211) so as to align with the respective openings (10-204a, 10-204b). In this manner, the fans of the fan assemblies (10-216a, 10-216b) coupled to the intermediate frame (10-210) and aligned with the openings (10-204a, 10-204b) as illustrated can convectively cool the displays or display assemblies coupled to the guide rods (10-212a, 10-212b) through the openings (10-204a, 10-204b). The intermediate frame (10-210) can be positioned between the mounting bracket (10-211) and any display assemblies coupled thereto such that the display assemblies are mounted on a first side of the intermediate frame (10-210) and the fan assemblies (10-216a, 10-216b) are mounted on a second side of the intermediate frame (10-210) opposite the first side.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 171 and 172 ) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of the devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 173 through 176 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 173 through 176 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of the devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 171 and 172.

Figure 173 illustrates a perspective view of a subassembly of an HMD similar to the HMD (10-100) of Figure 171. The subassembly illustrated in Figure 161 includes a frame assembly (10-302). The frame assembly (10-302), which may be referred to as a chassis or chassis assembly, may include an outer frame (10-318) and a middle frame (10-310). The outer frame (10-318) may include a first material and may define an interior volume (10-322). In at least one example, the middle frame (10-310) may be disposed within the interior volume (10-322) and coupled to the outer frame (10-318). The middle frame (10-310) may include a second material that is different from the first material. The intermediate frame (10-310) can define a first opening (10-304a) and a second opening (10-304b).

In at least one example, the frame assembly (10-302) can also include an inner frame (10-324) coupled to the intermediate frame (10-310). In at least one example, the inner frame (10-324) can include a third material. In one example, the third material can be different from the first and second materials of each of the outer/outer frame (10-318) and the intermediate frame (10-310). In at least one example, the second material of the intermediate frame (10-310) is stronger than the first material of the outer frame (10-318). In at least one example, the third material of the inner frame (10-324) is stiffer than the first material of the outer frame (10-318) and the second material of the intermediate frame (10-310). In at least one example, the inner frame (10-324) is stiffer due to its geometry and/or size.

In at least one example, the outer frame (10-318) may define an outer viewable surface and an interior volume (10-322) of the HMD (10-100). In at least one example, the intermediate frame (10-310) may be coupled to the outer frame (10-318) and may define a first opening (10-304a) and a second opening (10-304b). In at least one example, the inner frame (10-324) may be coupled to the intermediate frame (10-310) between the first opening (10-304a) and the second opening (10-304b) on a first face (10-326) of the intermediate frame (10-324).

The first material of the outer frame (10-318) may include any number of materials that provide structure to the HMD (10-100) and may include an aesthetically pleasing material that defines an externally visible surface of the HMD (10-100). In at least one example, the first material may include aluminum, titanium, other metals, ceramics, plastics, composites, carbon fibers, and the like. In at least one example, the second material of the middle frame (10-318) may include materials that are stronger than the first material. Examples of second materials may include magnesium and magnesium alloys. In at least one example, the third material of the inner frame may include carbon fiber.

Thus, the first material of the outer frame (10-318) may be aesthetically pleasing and lightweight, as well as color-customizable, while the second material of the middle frame (10-310) may comprise a stronger, machinable material for structural integrity and durability. Accordingly, the middle frame (10-310) may also be machined to include features that are compatible with other components of the HMD (10-100) to which it is coupled. Additionally, the third material of the inner frame (10-324) may be more rigid to provide added structural strength and integrity at the center of the structure between the openings (10-304a, 10-304b) to reduce deformation of the frame assembly (10-302) as a whole, such as in the event of a user drop.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIG. 173) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 171 , 172 , and FIGS. 174 - 176 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 171 , 172 , and FIGS. 174 - 176 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 173.

In at least one example, such as the frame assembly (10-402) illustrated in FIG. 174, the frame assembly (10-402) may include an outer frame (10-418) and an inner frame (10-410). The frame assembly (10-402), which may be referred to as a chassis or chassis assembly, may include the outer frame (10-418) and the intermediate frame (10-410) without any inner frame coupled to the intermediate frame (10-410), as illustrated in the example of FIG. 173, wherein the inner frame (10-324) is coupled to the intermediate frame (10-324). Referring again to FIG. 174, the outer frame (10-418) may include a first material and may define an inner volume (10-422). In at least one example, the intermediate frame (10-410) may be positioned within the inner volume (10-422) and coupled to the outer frame (10-418). The intermediate frame (10-410) may comprise a second material different from the first material. The intermediate frame (10-410) may define a first opening (10-404a) and a second opening (10-404b).

In at least one example, the outer frame (10-418) may define an outer visible surface and an inner volume (10-422) of the HMD (100). In at least one example, the intermediate frame (10-410) may be coupled to the outer frame (10-418) and may define a first opening (10-404a) and a second opening (10-404b).

The first material of the outer frame (10-418) may include any number of materials that provide structure to the HMD (10-100) and may include an aesthetically pleasing material that defines an external viewable surface of the HMD (10-100). In at least one example, the first material may include aluminum, titanium, other metals, ceramics, plastics, composites, carbon fibers, and the like. In at least one example, the second material of the middle frame (10-418) may include materials that are stronger than the first material. Examples of second materials may include magnesium and magnesium alloys.

Thus, the first material of the outer frame (10-418) may be aesthetically pleasing and lightweight, as well as color-customizable, while the second material of the middle frame (10-410) may comprise a stronger, machinable material for structural integrity and durability. Accordingly, the middle frame (10-410) may also be machined to include features that are compatible with other components of the HMD (10-100) to which it is coupled.

In at least one example, the intermediate frame (10-410) may be coupled to the outer frame (10-418) at discrete touch points (10-428) that limit heat transfer between the intermediate frame (10-410) and the outer/outer frame (10-418). In at least one example, the intermediate frame (10-410) is not coupled to the outer/outer frame (10-418) continuously around its outer edge. Rather, a set of discrete touch points (10-428) are the only physical contact between the intermediate frame (10-410) and the outer frame (10-418). In this manner, heat generated by components of the HMD (10-100), such as heat generating components coupled to the intermediate frame (10-410), is substantially not transferred to the user-facing outer surface defining the outer frame (10-418) with which the user can contact. In this manner, the outer/external frame (10-418) may act as a thermal barrier between the user and the intermediate frame (10-410) and any heat generating components coupled thereto.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIG. 174) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 171-173, FIG. 175, and FIG. 176 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 171-173, FIG. 175, and FIG. 176 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 174.

FIG. 175 illustrates a plan view of an example of a frame assembly (10-402) for an HMD device including an outer frame (10-518), a middle frame (10-510) coupled to the outer frame (10-518), and an inner frame (10-524) coupled to the middle frame (10-510). In at least one example, the middle frame (10-510) may define two openings (10-504a, 10-504b), and the inner frame (10-524) may be coupled to the inner frame (10-510) centered between the openings (10-504a, 10-504b).

In at least one example, the inner frame (10-524) can be mechanically coupled to the intermediate frame (10-510) via one or more fasteners or fastener assemblies. In at least one example, the inner frame (10-524) can be coupled to the inner frame (10-510) via an adhesive, such as glue or epoxy. In at least one example, the inner frame (10-524) is bonded to the intermediate frame (10-510) along substantially the entire surface area of the inner frame (10-524) facing the intermediate frame (10-510). In this manner, mechanical stresses are transferred from the intermediate frame (10-510) to substantially the entire inner frame (10-524) to structurally support and reinforce the intermediate frame (10-510) and thus the entire frame assembly (10-502). In at least one example, the outer frame (10-518) surrounds the periphery of the middle frame (10-510).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIG. 175) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 171-174 and FIG. 176 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 171-174 and FIG. 176 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 175.

FIG. 176 illustrates an enlarged cutaway view of an example of touch points (10-628) at which an intermediate frame (10-610) is coupled to an outer frame (10-618). In at least one example, the intermediate frame (10-610) may be coupled to the outer frame (10-618) at discrete connections or touch points (10-628) that limit heat transfer between the intermediate frame (10-610) and the outer/outer frame (10-618). In at least one example, the intermediate frame (10-610) is not coupled to the outer/outer frame (10-618) continuously around its outer edge. Rather, a set of discrete touch points (10-628) are the only physical contact between the intermediate frame (10-610) and the outer frame (9.3-618). In this manner, heat generated by components of the HMD (10-100), such as heat generating components coupled to the intermediate frame (10-610), is substantially not transferred to the user-facing outer surface defining the outer frame (10-618) with which the user can contact. In this manner, the outer/external frame (10-618) may act as a thermal barrier between the user and the intermediate frame (10-610) and any heat generating components coupled thereto.

In at least one example, each of the discrete touch points (10-628) where the intermediate frame (10-610) couples to the outer/outer frame (10-618) includes a fastener (10-630) and one or more insulating members, e.g., a first insulating member (10-632) positioned between the fastener (10-630) and the intermediate frame (10-610) and a second insulating member (10-634) positioned between the fastener (10-630) and the outer frame (10-618). These insulating members (10-632, 10-634) may be referred to as insulating interfaces or may be part of an insulating interface for reducing heat transfer between the intermediate frame (10-610) and the outer frame (10-618). In at least one example, the insulating members (10-632, 10-634) may be O-rings. In at least one example, the insulating members (10-632, 10-634) of the insulating interfaces at the touch points (10-628) may comprise insulating materials such as plastics, rubbers, foams, or other non-conductive insulating materials. In at least one example, the fastener (10-630) may comprise insulating materials such as plastics, rubber, foams, or other non-conductive materials that prevent heat transfer between the intermediate frame (10-610) and the outer frame (10-618).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIG. 176) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 171-175 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 171-175 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 176.

XI: Optical Module

FIG. 177 illustrates an exemplary drawing of an HMD (11-100) including an optical module system (11-102). The optical module system (11-102) is described in more detail herein in Section XI.

11.1: IPD Adjustment

FIG. 178 illustrates a rear perspective view of a display assembly (11.1-102) of an HMD (11.1-100) with one or more components removed, including a curtain assembly, to illustrate various internal components of the HMD (11.1-100). FIG. 1 illustrates a display assembly (11.1-102) that may include a first display module (11.1-104a) and a second display module (11.1-104b). The first display module (11.1-104a) may be slidably engaged/coupled with a first adjustment mechanism (11.1-106a), and the second optical module (11.1-104b) may be slidably engaged/coupled with a second adjustment mechanism (11.1-106b). The first and second adjusting mechanisms (11.1-106a, 11.1-106b) may include first and second respective guide rods (11.1-108a, 11.1-108b) and motors (11.1-110a, 11.1-110b). The first and second guide rods may be similar so that one description applies to the other, wherein the first guide rod (11.1-108a) extends in a first direction away from the bracket (11.1-112) and the second guide rod (11.1-108b) extends in a second direction away from the bracket (11.1-112) opposite to the first direction.

Likewise, the first and second motors (11.1-110a, 11.1-110b) may be similar so that one description applies to the other, wherein the first motor (110a) is mechanically engaged with the first optical module (11.1-104a) to adjust its position via the first guide rod (11.1-108a), and the second motor (11.1-110b) is mechanically engaged with the second optical module (11.1-104b) to adjust its position via the second guide rod (11.1-108b). In at least one example, the HMD (11.1-100) also includes a pressable and/or rotatable button (11.1-114) electrically coupled to the first and second motors (11.1-110a, 11.1-110b). The button (11.1-114) may be in electrical communication with the first and second motors (11.1-110a, 11.1-110b) via the processor or other circuit components to cause the first and second motors (11.1-110a, 11.1-110b) to be activated and the first and second optical modules (11.1-104a, 11.1-104b) to change positions relative to each other, respectively.

In at least one example, the first and second optical modules (11.1-104a, 11.1-104b) may include respective display screens configured to project light toward the user's eyes when the HMD (11.1-100) is worn. In at least one example, the user may operate (i.e., press and/or rotate) a button (11.1-114) to activate positioning of the optical modules (11.1-104a, 11.1-104b) to match the interpupillary distance of the user's eyes. The optical modules (11.1-104a, 11.1-104b) may also include one or more cameras or other sensors/sensor systems for imaging and measuring the user's IPD so that the optical modules (11.1-104a, 11.1-104b) may be adjusted to match the IPD.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 178) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in any of the other drawings illustrated and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated and described with reference to any of the other drawings illustrated and described herein) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 178.

11.1.1: Crown

FIG. 179 illustrates a rear perspective view of an interpupillary distance (IPD) adjustment system (11.1.1-102) including first and second optical modules (11.1.1-104a, 11.1.1-104b) slidably engaged/coupled to respective guide rods (11.1.1-108a, 11.1.1-108b) and motors (11.1.1-110a, 11.1.1-110b) of left and right adjustment subsystems (11.1.1-106a, 11.1.1-106b). The IPD adjustment system (11.1.1-102) can be coupled to the bracket (11.1.1-112) and can include a button (11.1.1-114) in electrical communication with the motors (11.1.1-110a, 11.1.1-110b). In at least one example, the button (11.1.1-114) can be in electrical communication with the first and second motors (11.1.1-110a, 11.1.1-110b) via a processor or other circuitry components to cause the first and second motors (11.1.1-110a, 11.1.1-110b) to be activated and the first and second optical modules (11.1.1-104a, 11.1.1-104b) to change positions relative to each other, respectively.

In at least one example, the first and second optical modules (11.1.1-104a, 11.1.1-104b) may include respective display screens configured to project light toward the user's eyes when wearing the HMD (11.1.1-100). In at least one example, the user may operate (i.e., press and/or rotate) a button (11.1.1-114) to activate positioning adjustment of the optical modules (11.1.1-104a, 11.1.1-104b) to match the interpupillary distance of the user's eyes. The optical modules (11.1.1-104a, 11.1.1-104b) may also include one or more cameras or other sensors/sensor systems for imaging and measuring the user's IPD so that the optical modules (11.1.1-104a, 11.1.1-104b) can be adjusted to match the IPD.

In one example, a user may manipulate a button (11.1.1-114) to cause automatic positioning of the first and second optical modules (11.1.1-104a, 11.1.1-104b). In one example, a user may manipulate a button (11.1.1-114) to cause manual adjustments such that the optical modules (11.1.1-104a, 11.1.1-104b) move farther or closer together, for example, when the user rotates the button (11.1.1-114) in one direction or the other, until the optical modules visually match his or her IPD. In one example, manual adjustments are electronically communicated via one or more circuits, and power for the movements of the optical modules (11.1.1-104a, 11.1.1-104b) via motors (11.1.1-110a, 11.1.1-110b) is provided by an electrical power source. In one example, adjustment and movement of the optical modules (11.1.1-104a, 11.1.1-104b) via operation of a button (11.1.1-114) is mechanically actuated via movement of the button (11.1.1-114).

In at least one example, an IPD adjustment system including buttons (11.1.1-114), motors, guide rods, optical modules (11.1.1-104a, 11.1.1-104b), encoders, sensors, controllers, and/or other IPD adjustment components described herein may include an automatic back-off feature. In such an example, when a user presses the buttons (11.1.1-104a-b) to adjust the optical modules (11.1.1-104a, 11.1.1-104b), the optical modules (11.1.1-104a, 11.1.1-104b) may move closer together, for example, toward the user's nose. During the IPD adjustment, at a predetermined/set position of the optical modules (11.1.1-104a, 11.1.1-104b) - the predetermined position is detected by the encoders or otherwise determined by the controller controlling the IPD adjustment motors - the controller can cause the optical modules (11.1.1-104a, 11.1.1-104b) to reverse direction and move away from each other after the user releases the button (11.1.1-114) and/or even if the user does not release the button (11.1.1-114). In this manner, the automatic back-off operation of the optical modules (11.1.1-104a, 11.1.1-104b) during IPD adjustments may prevent the optical modules (11.1.1-104a, 11.1.1-104b) from contacting or encountering any facial features of the user or from unintentionally contacting any other components of the HMD.

In at least one example, the automatic back-off feature of the IPD adjustment system may cause the optical modules (11.1.1-104a, 11.1.1-104b) to back off or reverse direction so that the optical modules (11.1.1-104a, 11.1.1-104b) move away from each other by a set distance away from where unintended contact or facial feature interference occurs. In at least one example, the automatic back-off function of the IPD adjustment system may cause the optical modules (11.1.1-104a, 11.1.1-104b) to back off or reverse direction such that the optical modules (11.1.1-104a, 11.1.1-104b) move away from each other to a predetermined set position where the optical modules (11.1.1-104a, 11.1.1-104b) are in a position where there is no contact with user facial features or any unintended contact with other HMD components.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 179) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in any of the other drawings illustrated and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated and described with reference to any of the other drawings illustrated and described herein) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 179.

11.1.1.1: Adjustment Mechanism for Head-Mounted Displays

For enhanced performance, head-mounted displays require alignment of optical components, such as lenses, projection units, displays, and screens, to unique facial features across different users to enhance comfort, fit, and performance. During the alignment process, optical components may be physically repositioned relative to other components within the head-mounted display. Because packaging space is constrained within head-mounted displays, physical repositioning mechanisms must be compact and have tightly controlled motion, such as miniature electromechanical actuators. Despite their compact size, the actuators must be able to withstand dynamic events and function properly after experiencing such events. Dynamic events may include shaking, pushing, dropping, impacting, or otherwise handling the head-mounted display in a manner that results in forces being applied to the optical components or subcomponents within the electromechanical actuators.

In instances where the actuator used to reposition the optical components utilizes a lead screw, locking-unlocking mechanisms that allow for disengagement or sliding along the lead screw may be used in conjunction with damping mechanisms that allow for controlled sliding and/or stopping along the guide rail to prevent damage to both the actuator and the optical components undergoing motion through the use of the actuator. The locking-unlocking and damping mechanisms may include linear spring-loaded nut assemblies, torsion spring-loaded plates, drop detection-based locking or disengaging, and motorized lead screw system designs that utilize optical component motion damping during dynamic events. Details of these and other applicable mechanisms that improve the performance of physical repositioning within a head-mounted display are described herein.

In a first aspect, a head-mounted display includes an optical assembly and an actuator. The actuator includes a movement mechanism configured to adjust a position of an optical component within the optical assembly, a locking-unlocking mechanism configured to modify a motion of the movement mechanism upon detection of a dynamic event, and a damping mechanism configured to control changes in position of the optical component during the dynamic event.

In a first aspect, the movement mechanism can be configured to adjust the position of an optical component within the optical assembly to a position prior to the dynamic event upon detection of the end of the dynamic event. The movement mechanism can include a lead screw and a nut assembly, wherein the nut assembly is configured to translate along the lead screw based on rotation of the lead screw. The nut assembly can include first and second separable portions, and the locking-release mechanism can include a spring that linearly biases one of the first and second portions of the nut assembly against the lead screw. A modified operation of the movement mechanism can include disengaging one of the first and second portions of the nut assembly from the lead screw. The damping mechanism can include an electromagnetic component configured to generate an attractive force between the nut assembly and the lead screw during the dynamic event. The movement mechanism can include a lead screw and a plate configured to translate along the lead screw based on rotation of the lead screw. The locking-release mechanism can include a spring that torsionally biases the plate against the lead screw. The modified motion of the movement mechanism may include disengaging the plate from the lead screw. The damping mechanism may include an electromagnetic component configured to generate an attractive force between the plate and the lead screw during the dynamic event. The damping mechanism may include an electromagnetic component configured to push the movement mechanism away from the end portions of the actuator during the dynamic event. The damping mechanism may include a spring or cable configured to limit the motion of the movement mechanism during the dynamic event. The first aspect may include any combination of the features described in this paragraph.

In a second aspect, the method comprises detecting the onset of a dynamic event using a sensor within a head-mounted display. Upon detection of the onset of the dynamic event and using a locking-unlocking mechanism, the method comprises modifying the operation of a movement mechanism. The movement mechanism is configured to adjust a position of an optical component within an optical assembly of the head-mounted display. The method comprises detecting the end of the dynamic event using a sensor within the head-mounted display. Upon detection of the end of the dynamic event and using the movement mechanism, the method comprises adjusting the position of the optical component within the optical assembly to a position prior to the dynamic event.

In a second aspect, and based on detection of the onset of a dynamic event and using a damping mechanism, the method may include controlling positional changes of the movement mechanism during the dynamic event. The damping mechanism may include an electromagnetic component configured to repel components within the movement mechanism during the dynamic event. The damping mechanism may include an electromagnetic component configured to cause an attractive force between components within the movement mechanism during the dynamic event. The damping mechanism may include a spring or cable configured to limit motion of the movement mechanism during the dynamic event. The movement mechanism may include a lead screw and a nut assembly, wherein the nut assembly is configured to translate along the lead screw based on rotation of the lead screw. The nut assembly may include first and second separable portions. The unlocking mechanism may include a spring that linearly biases one of the first and second portions of the nut assembly against the lead screw. The modified operation of the movement mechanism may include disengaging one of the first and second portions of the nut assembly from the lead screw. The translation mechanism may include a lead screw and a plate configured to translate along the lead screw based on rotation of the lead screw. The locking-release mechanism may include a spring that torsionally biases the plate against the lead screw. The modified operation of the translation mechanism may include disengaging the plate from the lead screw. The second aspect may include any combination of the features described in this paragraph.

In a third aspect, the actuator includes a movement mechanism configured to adjust the position of an optical component within an optical assembly of a head-mounted display. The movement mechanism includes a lead screw and a threaded component. The threaded component is configured to translate along the lead screw based on rotation of the lead screw. The actuator also includes a locking-release mechanism configured to modify the motion of the movement mechanism upon detection of a dynamic event. The locking-release mechanism includes a spring configured to bias the threaded component against the lead screw. The modified motion of the movement mechanism includes disengaging the threaded component from the lead screw. The actuator also includes a damping mechanism configured to control changes in position of the movement mechanism during the dynamic event.

In a third aspect, the damping mechanism may include an electromagnetic component configured to generate a force between the threaded component and the lead screw during a dynamic event. The damping mechanism may include an electromagnetic component configured to push the movement mechanism away from the end portions of the actuator during the dynamic event. The third aspect may include any combination of the features described in this paragraph.

FIG. 180 is a plan view of a head-mounted display (11.1.1.1-100) including a display assembly (11.1.1.1-102) and a head support (11.1.1.1-104). The display assembly (11.1.1.1-102) may include various subassemblies and electronics, such as a housing (11.1.1.1-106), and one or more optical assemblies (11.1.1.1-108, 11.1.1.1-110) therein, sensors (11.1.1.1-112) (e.g., for detecting gaze and/or user status), power electronics (11.1.1.1-114), and actuators (11.1.1.1-116). Various parts or subcomponents of the optical assemblies (11.1.1.1-108, 11.1.1.1-110) (such as lenses, projection units, screens, or displays) may be repositionable using one or more actuators (11.1.1.1-116), the details of which are further described herein. The optical assemblies (11.1.1.1-108, 11.1.1.1-110), sensors (11.1.1.1-112), power electronics (11.1.1.1-114), and actuators (11.1.1.1-116) are depicted schematically and in dashed lines to illustrate that they are hidden from view and disposed within the display assembly (11.1.1.1-102).

The head support (11.1.1.1-104) is coupled to the left and right sides of the display assembly (11.1.1.1-102) (e.g., to the housing (11.1.1.1-106)) and extends rearwardly of the display assembly (11.1.1.1-102) and between its left and right sides. When the head-mounted display (11.1.1.1-100) is worn on a user's head, the display assembly (11.1.1.1-102) extends across the front of the user's head (i.e., the user's face), while the head support (11.1.1.1-104) extends rearwardly across the back of the user's head and along the left and right sides of the user's head. Thus, the display assembly (11.1.1.1-102) and the head support (11.1.1.1-104) cooperatively extend around the user's head. The head support (11.1.1.1-104) includes a band (11.1.1.1-118) and one or more circumferential adjustment mechanisms (11.1.1.1-120) (e.g., two as shown on the left and right sides).

The band (11.1.1.1-118) forms a major portion of the head support (11.1.1.1-104), which engages with the user's head to support a head-mounted display (11.1.1.1-100) worn on the user's head. Each of the circumferential adjustment mechanisms (11.1.1.1-120) removably couples the head support (11.1.1.1-104) to the display assembly (11.1.1.1-102), and allows the head support (11.1.1.1-104) to change its overall length by changing the length between the band (11.1.1.1-118) and the circumferential adjustment mechanisms (11.1.1.1-120). Although two circumferential adjustment mechanisms (11.1.1.1-120) are shown acting from opposite faces of the head support (11.1.1.1-104), the head support (11.1.1.1-104) may alternatively employ a single adjustment mechanism.

The band (11.1.1.1-118) may be elastic, flexible, or otherwise deformable to accommodate different shapes of users' heads. The band (11.1.1.1-118) may be formed of or otherwise include an elastic or silicone material. The band (11.1.1.1-118) may also be configured to transmit electrical power from a power source (e.g., an external battery) to the display assembly (11.1.1.1-102). For example, the band (11.1.1.1-118) may include a flexible circuit (11.1.1.1-122) extending from a power connector (11.1.1.1-124) through a circumferential adjustment mechanism (11.1.1.1-120) to a corresponding power connector (not shown) of the display assembly (11.1.1.1-102). The flexible circuit (11.1.1.1-122) (illustrated as a dot-and-dashed line) may be embedded within the elastomeric or silicone material of the band (11.1.1.1-118) or may otherwise be hidden from view by the material of the band (11.1.1.1-118). In this manner, the band (11.1.1.1-118) may supply current to the display assembly (11.1.1.1-102), including the optical assemblies (11.1.1.1-108, 11.1.1.1-110), sensors (11.1.1.1-112), power electronics (11.1.1.1-114), and actuators (11.1.1.1-116).

Figures 181a and 181b are detailed drawings and partially exploded cross-sectional views of an actuator (11.1.1.1-200). The partially exploded cross-sectional view of Figure 181b illustrates the location indicated in Figure 181a. The actuator (11.1.1.1-200) may function as an actuator (11.1.1.1-116) positioned in the head-mounted display (11.1.1.1-100) of Figure 180.

The actuator (11.1.1.1-200) includes a movement mechanism formed by a motor (11.1.1.1-202), a lead screw (11.1.1.1-204), a guide rail (11.1.1.1-206), and a nut assembly (11.1.1.1-208). The nut assembly (11.1.1.1-208) is configured to translate along the lead screw (204) based on rotation of the lead screw (11.1.1.1 11.1.1.1-204) and threaded engagement between the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-208) and the lead screw (11.1.1.1-204). For example, the lead screw (11.1.1.1-204) may be rotationally driven by the motor (11.1.1.1-202) to cause translation of the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-208). In this manner, the movement mechanism is configured to adjust the position of an optical component (e.g., a lens, display, projector, screen, lens and display, not shown) within the optical assembly (e.g., within the optical assemblies (11.1.1.1-108, 11.1.1.1-110) within the head-mounted display (11.1.1.1-100). The threads on the lead screw (11.1.1.1-204), the threads on the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-208), or both, may be coated to provide longer life to the actuator (11.1.1.1-200) and to reduce friction and noise associated with the operation of the actuator (11.1.1.1-200).

Positioning of the optical component(s) can be accomplished using the described movement mechanism, for example, by coupling the optical component(s) requiring repositioning to a portion of the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-208), although the coupling is not shown. The movement mechanism can be used to modify the spacing of the optical components along the focal axis, or, for example, to modify the interpupillary distance between optical assemblies within the same head-mounted display. The nut assembly (11.1.1.1-208) can be designed to prevent unintended rotation, for example, by the use of a guide rail (11.1.1.1-206) extending parallel to the lead screw (11.1.1.1-204), although other anti-rotation features within the actuator (11.1.1.1-200) are also possible. When the guide rail (11.1.1.1-206) is used as illustrated in FIGS. 181a and 181b, the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-208) translates along both the lead screw (11.1.1.1-204) and the guide rail (11.1.1.1-206) based on the rotation of the lead screw (11.1.1.1-204) driven by the motor (11.1.1.1-202).

The actuator (11.1.1.1-200) also includes a locking-unlocking mechanism formed by one or more springs (11.1.1.1-214) capable of linearly biasing the separable halves or portions (11.1.1.1-210, 11.1.1.1-212) of the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-208) against the lead screw (11.1.1.1-204), against the guide rail (11.1.1.1-206), and against the portion (11.1.1.1-210) of the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-208), as best seen in the partially exploded cross-section of FIG. 181b. In this example, the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-208) has a split-nut configuration such that the portion (11.1.1.1-212) of the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-208) is configured to translate away from the portion (11.1.1.1-210) of the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-208) when a sufficient load is experienced to overcome the load generated by the springs (11.1.1.1-214) against the portion (11.1.1.1-212) of the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-208). Sufficient loads of this type may occur during dynamic events (e.g., shaking, pushing, dropping, or impacting a head-mounted display including the actuator (11.1.1.1-200).

During a dynamic event generating sufficient force, the threads on the lead screw (11.1.1.1-204) and the threads on the parts (11.1.1.1-210, 11.1.1.1-212) can be disengaged, allowing the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-208) to slide freely along the lead screw (11.1.1.1-204) and the guide rail (11.1.1.1-206), thereby limiting or avoiding damage to the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-208) and/or to the lead screw (11.1.1.1-204) during the dynamic event based on the operation of the described locking-unlocking mechanism. After a dynamic event, when sufficient loads are no longer experienced by the actuator (11.1.1.1-200), the threads on the lead screw (11.1.1.1-204) and the threads on the portions (11.1.1.1-210, 11.1.1.1-212) of the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-208) can be re-engaged, and the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-208) can once again be driven along the lead screw (11.1.1.1-204) by the motor.

Upon re-engagement, the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-208) may be in a different position along the lead screw (11.1.1.1-204) than it was prior to or during the dynamic event. In such a case, the movement mechanism may be configured to adjust the position of the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-208), and subsequently any optical components coupled or otherwise connected to the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-208), to a position prior to the dynamic event, i.e., a position recorded for the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-208) relative to the lead screw (11.1.1.1-204) prior to the dynamic event. Although both portions (11.1.1.1-210, 11.1.1.1-212) of the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-208) are shown threadedly engaged with the lead screw (11.1.1.1-204) at the interface, in some examples, only portion (11.1.1.1-212) may include threads that do not affect the operation of the actuator (11.1.1.1-200).

To effectively implement the lock-unlock mechanism of the actuator (11.1.1.1-200), a position sensor (not shown) may be used to determine the position of the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-208) relative to the lead screw (11.1.1.1-204) before, during, and after the dynamic event. An accelerometer, an inertial measurement unit, or any other sensor (not shown) may be used to determine the start, duration, and end of the dynamic event. In another example, the magnetic encoder system may include a sensor that determines the landing position of portions (11.1.1.1-210, 11.1.1.1-212) of the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-208) relative to the lead screw (11.1.1.1-204) (or other portion of the actuator (11.1.1.1-200)), and the controller may perform a recalibration to reposition the portions (11.1.1.1-210, 11.1.1.1-212) of the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-208) to their pre-dynamic event positions relative to the lead screw (11.1.1.1-204) after the dynamic event.

Figures 182a and 182b are detailed drawings and partially exploded cross-sections of another actuator (11.1.1.1-300). The partially exploded cross-section of Figure 182b illustrates the location indicated in Figure 182a. The actuator (11.1.1.1-300) may function as the actuator (11.1.1.1-116) disposed in the head-mounted display (11.1.1.1-100) of Figure 180, and may be similar to the actuator (11.1.1.1-200) described with respect to Figures 181a and 181b. The differences between the actuator (11.1.1.1-300) and the actuator (11.1.1.1-200) are highlighted herein.

The actuator (11.1.1.1-300) includes a movement mechanism formed by a motor (11.1.1.1-302), a lead screw (11.1.1.1-304), a guide rail (11.1.1.1-306), and a nut assembly (11.1.1.1-308). The nut assembly (11.1.1.1-308) is configured to translate along the lead screw (11.1.1.1-304) and the guide rail (11.1.1.1-306) based on rotation of the lead screw (11.1.1.1-304) and threaded engagement between the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-308) and the lead screw (11.1.1.1-304). The nut assembly (11.1.1.1-308) may be designed to prevent unintended rotation, for example, by use of a guide rail (11.1.1.1-306) extending parallel to the lead screw (11.1.1.1-304), although other anti-rotation features within the actuator (11.1.1.1-300) are also possible.

The actuator (11.1.1.1-300) also includes a locking-release mechanism formed by one or more springs (11.1.1.1-314) capable of linearly biasing the separable portions (11.1.1.1-310, 11.1.1.1-311, 11.1.1.1-312) of the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-308) against the guide rail (11.1.1.1-306) and the central portion (11.1.1.1-311) of the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-308). Next, the portion (11.1.1.1-311) can be linearly biased against the portion (11.1.1.1-310) of the lead screw (11.1.1.1-304) and nut assembly (11.1.1.1-308), as best seen in the partially exploded cross-section of FIG. 182b. In this example, the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-308) has three sections (11.1.1.1-310, 11.1.1.1-311, 11.1.1.1-312), wherein the sections (11.1.1.1-311, 11.1.1.1-312) of the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-208) are configured to translate away from and disengage from the section (11.1.1.1-310) of the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-208) when a load sufficient to overcome the load generated by the springs (11.1.1.1-314) against the section (11.1.1.1-312) of the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-308) is experienced. Sufficient loads of this type may occur during dynamic events (e.g., shaking, pushing, dropping or impacting a head-mounted display including an actuator (11.1.1.1-300)).

The actuator (11.1.1.1-300) of FIGS. 182a and 182b differs from the actuator (11.1.1.1-200) of FIGS. 181a and 181b in that a nut assembly (11.1.1.1-308) is used instead of a nut assembly (11.1.1.1-208). The actuator (11.1.1.1-300) of FIGS. 182a and 182b may be useful in vertically tight packaging spaces, i.e., the actuator (11.1.1.1-300) may be lower in height than the actuator (11.1.1.1-200) due to the configuration of the nut assemblies (11.1.1.1-208, 11.1.1.1-308). In comparison, the actuator (11.1.1.1-200) of FIGS. 181a and 181b may be useful in horizontally tight packaging spaces, i.e., the actuator (11.1.1.1-200) may be narrower than the actuator (11.1.1.1-300) due to the configuration of the nut assemblies (11.1.1.1-208, 11.1.1.1-308).

Figures 183a and 183b are detailed drawings and partially exploded cross-sections of another actuator (11.1.1.1-400). The partially exploded cross-section of Figure 183b illustrates the location indicated in Figure 183a. The actuator (11.1.1.1-400) may function as an actuator (11.1.1.1-116) disposed in the head-mounted display (11.1.1.1-100) of Figure 180, and may be similar to the actuators (11.1.1.1-200, 11.1.1.1-300) described with respect to Figures 181a, 181b, 182a, and 182b. The differences between the actuator (11.1.1.1-400) and the actuators (11.1.1.1-200, 11.1.1.1-300) are highlighted in this specification.

The actuator (11.1.1.1-400) includes a movement mechanism formed by a motor (11.1.1.1-402), a lead screw (11.1.1.1-404), a guide rail (11.1.1.1-406), and a torsion assembly (11.1.1.1-408). The torsion assembly (11.1.1.1-408) is configured to translate along the lead screw (11.1.1.1-404) and the guide rail (11.1.1.1-406) based on rotation of the lead screw (11.1.1.1-404) and threaded engagement between the torsion assembly (11.1.1.1-408) and the lead screw (11.1.1.1-404). The torsion assembly (11.1.1.1-408) may be designed to prevent unintended rotation, for example, by the use of a guide rail (11.1.1.1-406) extending through the torsion assembly (11.1.1.1-408), although other anti-rotation features within the actuator (11.1.1.1-400) are also possible.

The torsion assembly (11.1.1.1-408) forms a locking-unlocking mechanism of the actuator (11.1.1.1-400) including a plate (11.1.1.1-410), a support (11.1.1.1-412), and a torsion spring (11.1.1.1-414) capable of torsionally biasing the plate (11.1.1.1-410) against the lead screw (11.1.1.1-404). In this example, the torsion spring (11.1.1.1-414) acts against both the plate (11.1.1.1-410) and the support (11.1.1.1-412) such that the plate (11.1.1.1-410) rotates away from and disengages from the lead screw (11.1.1.1-404) when a load sufficient to overcome the load generated by the spring (11.1.1.1-414) is experienced against the plate (11.1.1.1-410) and the support (11.1.1.1-412). Sufficient loads of this type may occur during dynamic events (e.g., shaking, pushing, dropping, or impacting a head-mounted display including the actuator (11.1.1.1-400).

The actuator (11.1.1.1-400) of FIGS. 183a and 183b differs from the actuators (11.1.1.1-200, 11.1.1.1-300) of FIGS. 181a, 181b, 182a, and 182b in that a torsion assembly (11.1.1.1-408) having a rotatable plate (11.1.1.1-410) is used instead of the nut assemblies (11.1.1.1-208, 11.1.1.1-308). Use of the actuator (11.1.1.1-400) of FIGS. 183a and 183b can support unique positional relationships between the lead screw (11.1.1.1-404) and the guide rail (11.1.1.1-406), since these components can be offset both vertically and horizontally while remaining generally parallel. Additionally, less physical engagement exists between the plate (11.1.1.1-410) and the lead screw (11.1.1.1-404) than exists between the nut assemblies (11.1.1.1-208, 11.1.1.1-308) and the lead screws (11.1.1.1-204, 11.1.1.1-304), thereby reducing the possibility of, for example, friction-based and wear-based failures.

The actuators (11.1.1.1-200, 11.1.1.1-300, 11.1.1.1-400) described with respect to FIGS. 181a, 181b, 182a, 182b, 183a, and 183b include split-nut and torsion type movement mechanisms using lead screws (11.1.1.1-204, 11.1.1.1-304, 11.1.1.1-404). Additional designs for the movement mechanisms may include living hinge nut assemblies and reverse-drivable lead screws (not shown). For example, a living hinge nut assembly can be separated along a central axis having mated top and bottom edges such that the faces of the nut assembly can disengage from the lead screw under sufficient force while the top and bottom edges remain mated. In another example, a back-drivable lead screw can be controlled to reduce the forces experienced during a dynamic event by allowing back-drivability during the dynamic event. Additionally, the movement mechanisms can use rack and pinion, pneumatic, hydraulic, piezo-actuated, and electromagnetic designs (not shown) to achieve positioning and repositioning of optical components within the optical assemblies.

The results of using the locking-release mechanisms described with respect to FIGS. 181a, 181b, 182a, 182b, 183a, and 183b are that the nut assemblies (11.1.1.1-208, 11.1.1.1-308) and the torsion assembly (11.1.1.1-408) are engaged with the guide rails (11.1.1.1-206, 11.1.1.1-208, 11.1.1.1-308) and the torsion assembly (11.1.1.1-408) during a dynamic event sufficient to disengage the nut assemblies (11.1.1.1-208, 11.1.1.1-308) and the torsion assembly (11.1.1.1-408) from the lead screws (11.1.1.1-204, 11.1.1.1-304, 11.1.1.1-404). To avoid damage to optical components having motion controlled by actuators (11.1.1.1-200, 11.1.1.1-200, 11.1.1.1-400), various damping mechanisms may be implemented to control positional changes of the otherwise free-slidable optical components during dynamic events.

Figures 184a and 184b are detailed drawings of the magnetic damping mechanisms for an actuator (11.1.1.1-500) similar to the actuators (11.1.1.1-200, 11.1.1.1-300, 11.1.1.1-400) of Figures 181a, 181b, 182a, 182b, 183a, and 183b. The actuator (11.1.1.1-500) may serve as the actuator (11.1.1.1-116) disposed in the head-mounted display (11.1.1.1-100) of Figure 180. The actuator (11.1.1.1-500) includes a movement mechanism formed by a motor (11.1.1.1-502), a lead screw (11.1.1.1-504), a guide rail (11.1.1.1-506), and a nut assembly (11.1.1.1-508). The nut assembly (11.1.1.1-508) is configured to translate along the lead screw (11.1.1.1-504) and the guide rail (11.1.1.1-506) based on rotation of the lead screw (11.1.1.1-504) and threaded engagement between the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-508) and the lead screw (11.1.1.1-504).

Locking-unlocking mechanisms similar to those described with reference to FIGS. 181a, 181b, 182a, and 182b may cause the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-508) to disengage from the lead screw (11.1.1.1-504), for example, during a dynamic event. To minimize free sliding of the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-508), the actuator (11.1.1.1-500) may include an electromagnetic damping mechanism formed by an electromagnetic component (11.1.1.1-516) disposed within or forming a portion of the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-508), as illustrated in dashed lines in FIGS. 184a and 184b.

Referring to FIG. 184a, the electromagnetic damping mechanism may include electromagnetic components (11.1.1.1-518, 11.1.1.1-520) positioned at the ends of the guide rail (11.1.1.1-506), as shown in dashed lines for a concealed representation. In this embodiment, the electromagnetic components (11.1.1.1-518, 11.1.1.1-520) may be controlled to actuate and push the electromagnetic component (11.1.1.1-516) during a dynamic event, thereby slowing the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-508) during sliding or acting as cushions or bumpers to prevent it from impacting the ends of the guide rail (11.1.1.1-506). In other embodiments, the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-508) may include portions formed of ferrite or other material that is sensitive to magnetic repulsion, and the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-508) may be pushed by the electromagnetic components (11.1.1.1-518, 11.1.1.1-520) during dynamic events.

Referring to FIG. 184b, the electromagnetic damping mechanism may include an electromagnetic component (11.1.1.1-522) extending the length of the guide rail (11.1.1.1-506) as illustrated by the dashed lines. In this embodiment, the electromagnetic component (11.1.1.1-522) may be controlled to actuate and attract the electromagnetic component (11.1.1.1-516) during a dynamic event, thereby slowing the motion of the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-508) during the dynamic event due to the attractive force between the electromagnetic components (11.1.1.1-516, 11.1.1.1-522). In other embodiments, the guide rail (11.1.1.1-506) may be formed of a ferrite or other material that is sensitive to magnetic attraction, and the electromagnetic component (11.1.1.1-516) may be attracted to the guide rail (11.1.1.1-506) during dynamic events.

Other magnetic damping mechanisms are also possible. For example, the electromagnetic components (11.1.1.1-516, 11.1.1.1-518, 11.1.1.1-520, 11.1.1.1-522) may be designed to repel in non-powered states and attract in energized states (or vice versa), and some of the electromagnetic components (11.1.1.1-516, 11.1.1.1-518, 11.1.1.1-520, 11.1.1.1-522) may be replaced with non-powered ferrites or other magnetically sensitive materials without changing the overall functionality of the damping mechanism.

Figures 185a and 185b are detailed drawings of a mechanical damping mechanism for an actuator (11.1.1.1-600) similar to the actuators (11.1.1.1-200, 11.1.1.1-300, 11.1.1.1-500) of Figures 181a, 181b, 182a, 182b, 184a, and 184b. The actuator (11.1.1.1-600) may serve as the actuator (11.1.1.1-116) disposed in the head-mounted display (11.1.1.1-100) of Figure 180. The actuator (11.1.1.1-600) includes a movement mechanism formed by a motor (11.1.1.1-602), a lead screw (11.1.1.1-604), a guide rail (11.1.1.1-606), and a nut assembly (11.1.1.1-608). The nut assembly (11.1.1.1-608) is configured to translate along the lead screw (11.1.1.1-604) and the guide rail (11.1.1.1-606) based on rotation of the lead screw (11.1.1.1-604) and threaded engagement between the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-608) and the lead screw (11.1.1.1-604).

Locking-unlocking mechanisms similar to those described with reference to FIGS. 181a, 181b, 182a, and 182b may cause the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-608) to disengage from the lead screw (11.1.1.1-604), for example, during a dynamic event. To minimize free sliding of the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-608), the actuator (11.1.1.1-600) may include a mechanical damping mechanism, such as those described with reference to FIGS. 185a and 185b.

Referring to FIG. 185a, the mechanical damping mechanism may include one or more cables (11.1.1.1-626, 11.1.1.1-628) (two shown in solid and dotted lines) positioned proximate the ends of the lead screw (11.1.1.1-604) and the guide rail (11.1.1.1-606). In this embodiment, the cables (11.1.1.1-626, 11.1.1.1-628) may be wound or unwound during a dynamic event to slow or offset the motion of the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-608) to avoid the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-608) from colliding with the ends of the lead screw (11.1.1.1-604) and the guide rail (11.1.1.1-606) during sliding. For example, the cables (11.1.1.1-626, 11.1.1.1-628) may be engaged under high torque conditions, or the cables (11.1.1.1-626, 11.1.1.1-628) may be designed such that a predetermined amount of unwinding or elongation occurs before stopping movement of the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-608).

Referring to FIG. 185b, the mechanical damping mechanism may include one or more springs (11.1.1.1-630, 11.1.1.1-632) (two are shown) positioned proximate the ends of the lead screw (11.1.1.1-604) and the guide rail (11.1.1.1-606). In this embodiment, the springs (11.1.1.1-630, 11.1.1.1-632) may be compressed or expanded during a dynamic event to slow or offset the motion of the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-608) to avoid the nut assembly (11.1.1.1-608) from impacting the ends of the lead screw (11.1.1.1-604) and the guide rail (11.1.1.1-606) during sliding. In another example, springs (11.1.1.1-630, 11.1.1.1-632) may be coupled to bumpers or electromagnetic components to combine mechanical damping means with electromagnetic damping means (not shown).

FIG. 186 is a flowchart depicting a process (11.1.1.1-700) of operation for an actuator similar to the actuators (11.1.1.1-200, 11.1.1.1-300, 11.1.1.1-400, 11.1.1.1-500, 11.1.1.1-600) of FIG. 181a, FIG. 181b, FIG. 182a, FIG. 182b, FIG. 183a, FIG. 183b, FIG. 184a, FIG. 184b, FIG. 185a, and FIG. 185b) disposed within a head-mounted display similar to the head-mounted display (11.1.1.1-100) of FIG. 180.

In 11.1.1.1-710, the process (11.1.1.1-700) includes detecting the onset of a dynamic event, for example, using a sensor, such as a position sensor, an accelerometer, an inertial measurement unit, or other sensor within or associated with the head-mounted display. The dynamic event may include events such as shaking, pushing, dropping, impacting, or otherwise handling the head-mounted display in a manner that results in forces exceeding a disengagement threshold being applied to components of the actuator and optical components of the optical assembly.

In 11.1.1.1-720, the process (11.1.1.1-700) includes activating a locking-unlocking mechanism, such as the locking-unlocking mechanisms described with reference to actuators (11.1.1.1-200, 11.1.1.1-300, 11.1.1.1-400). The locking-unlocking mechanism may be activated, for example, based on or in response to detection of the onset of a dynamic event. The locking-unlocking mechanism may modify the motion of a movement mechanism within the associated actuator. The movement mechanism may include a lead screw and nut assembly or a torsion assembly. Modifying the motion of the movement mechanism may include disengaging a nut assembly (e.g., nut assemblies (11.1.1.1-208, 11.1.1.1-308)) or a torsion assembly (e.g., torsion assembly (11.1.1.1-408)) from a lead screw (e.g., lead screws (11.1.1.1-204, 11.1.1.1-304, 11.1.1.1-404)).

In 11.1.1.1-730, which is illustrated in dashed lines to indicate an optional feature, the process (11.1.1.1-700) includes activating a damping mechanism, such as the damping mechanisms described with reference to actuators (11.1.1.1-500, 11.1.1.1-600). The damping mechanism may be activated upon detection of the onset of a dynamic event. In another example, the damping mechanism may be activated upon detected motion of the moving mechanism exceeding a predetermined threshold speed or distance that indicates that a dynamic event is in progress. The damping mechanism may include electromagnetic components sensitive to pull or pull, or mechanical components such as springs and cables.

In 11.1.1.1-740, the process (11.1.1.1-700) includes detecting the end of a dynamic event, for example, using a sensor, such as a position sensor, an accelerometer, an inertial measurement unit, or other sensor within or associated with a head-mounted display. The end of the dynamic event may also be detected based on detecting arrested motion of components within the moving mechanism that were previously in motion during the dynamic event.

In 11.1.1.1-750, which is illustrated in dashed lines to indicate an optional feature, process (11.1.1.1-700) includes adjusting the position of an optical component within an optical assembly to a position prior to a dynamic event. A movement mechanism may be used, for example, to move a nut assembly or a torsion assembly within an actuator from its current post-dynamic event position to a pre-dynamic event position. Movement of the optical component is coupled with movement of the movement mechanism in this example. Repositioning supports improved functionality of the entire head-mounted display because the user will not be required to re-adjust the optical components within the optical assemblies after a dynamic event.

FIG. 187 illustrates an example hardware configuration for a controller (11.1.1.1-800) that may be used to implement portions of a head-mounted display (11.1.1.1-100). In the illustrated example, the controller (11.1.1.1-800) includes a processor (11.1.1.1-802), a memory device (11.1.1.1-804), a storage device (11.1.1.1-806), one or more input devices (11.1.1.1-808), and one or more output devices (11.1.1.1-810). These components may be interconnected by hardware, such as a bus (11.1.1.1-812), that allows communication between the components.

The processor (11.1.1.1-802) may be a conventional device, such as a central processing unit, and is operable to execute computer program instructions and perform operations described by the computer program instructions. The memory device (11.1.1.1-804) may be a volatile, high-speed, short-term information storage device, such as a random access memory module. The storage device (11.1.1.1-806) may be a non-volatile information storage device, such as a hard drive or a solid-state drive. The input devices (11.1.1.1-808) may include sensors and/or any type of human-machine interface, such as buttons, switches, a keyboard, a mouse, a touchscreen input device, a gesture input device, or an audio input device. The output devices (11.1.1.1-810) may include any type of device operable to provide an indication of an operational status to a user, such as a display screen, an optical control panel, or an audio output.

11.1.1.2: Crown Input and Feedback for Head-Mountable Devices

To enable user interaction with a head-mounted device, it may be desirable to provide a mechanism for the user to provide inputs to the head-mounted device. It may also be desirable to provide a mechanism for providing feedback to the user. This feedback may be provided in the form of haptic feedback that is transmitted to the user. However, haptic feedback can be unpleasant when applied across the entire device mounted on the user's head. If the user provides tactile inputs by contacting the input element with another part of the body, such as a finger or hand, the haptic feedback can be applied locally to that part of the user's body, thereby allowing the haptic feedback to be delivered to the user in an effective and pleasant manner.

The systems of the present disclosure can provide a head-mounted device with a crown module having an input system that allows a user to provide inputs by rotating or otherwise applying torque to the crown of the crown module. The head-mounted device can interpret the rotation and/or torque as user input. The crown module can further include a feedback system that provides localized haptic feedback at the crown. The haptic feedback can be effectively perceived by the user at the crown without causing the entire head-mounted device to vibrate against the user's head and/or face.

According to some embodiments, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 188, a head-mounted device (11.1.1.2-100) includes a frame (11.1.1.2-110) that is worn on a user's head. The frame (11.1.1.2-110) may be positioned in front of the user's eyes to provide information within the user's field of view. The frame (11.1.1.2-110) may provide nose pads or other features that rest on the user's nose. The frame (11.1.1.2-110) may be supported on the user's head by a fastening element (11.1.1.2-120). The fastening elements (11.1.1.2-120) may encircle or extend along opposing sides of the user's head. The fastening elements (11.1.1.2-120) may include earpieces for encircling the user's ears or otherwise engaging or resting on them. It will be appreciated that other configurations may be employed to secure the head-mounted device (11.1.1.2-100) to the user's head. For example, one or more bands, straps, belts, caps, hats, or other components may be used in addition to or instead of the illustrated components of the head-mounted device (11.1.1.2-100). In a further example, the securing element (11.1.1.2-120) may include multiple components for engaging the user's head.

The frame (11.1.1.2-110) may provide a structure around its perimeter area to support any internal components of the frame (11.1.1.2-110) in their assembled positions. For example, the frame (11.1.1.2-110) may surround and support various internal components (e.g., including integrated circuit chips, processors, memory devices, and other circuitry) to provide computing and functional operations for the head-mounted device (11.1.1.2-100), as further discussed herein. Any number of components may be included within and/or on the frame (11.1.1.2-110) and/or the fixation elements (11.1.1.2-120).

The frame (11.1.1.2-110) may include and/or support one or more cameras (11.1.1.2-50). The cameras (11.1.1.2-50) may be positioned on or near an exterior surface (11.1.1.2-112) of the frame (11.1.1.2-110) to capture images of views outside of the head-mounted device (11.1.1.2-100). As used herein, an exterior surface (11.1.1.2-112) of a portion of a head-mounted device is a surface facing away from a user and/or facing the external environment. The captured images may be used for display to a user or stored for any other purpose.

A head-mounted device may be provided with one or more display screens (11.1.1.2-90) that provide visual output for viewing by a user wearing the head-mounted device. As illustrated in FIG. 188, one or more optical modules including the display screens (11.1.1.2-90) may be positioned on an interior surface (11.1.1.2-114) of a frame (11.1.1.2-110). As used herein, an interior surface of a portion of a head-mounted device is a surface that faces the user and/or faces away from the external environment. For example, a pair of optical modules may be provided, each optical module being movably positioned to be within the field of view of each of the user's two eyes. Each optical module may be adjusted to align with a corresponding eye of the user. Movement of each of the optical modules may be matched with movement of a corresponding camera (11.1.1.2-50). Thus, the optical module can accurately reproduce, simulate, or augment a view based on the view captured by the camera (11.1.1.2-50) in an alignment corresponding to a view that a user would naturally have without a head-mounted device (11.1.1.2-100).

The display screen (11.1.1.2-90) may transmit light from the physical environment (e.g., as captured by a camera) for viewing by a user. Such a display screen may include lenses for vision correction based on optical properties, such as incident light from the physical environment. Additionally or alternatively, the display screen (11.1.1.2-90) may present information as a display within the user's field of view. Such information may be presented outside of the view of the physical environment or in addition to (e.g., overlapping) the physical environment.

As further illustrated in FIG. 188, the head-mountable device (11.1.1.2-100) may include a crown module (11.1.1.2-200) that receives input from a user and provides feedback to the user. The crown module (11.1.1.2-200) may be provided on an exterior surface of the head-mountable device (11.1.1.2-100), for example, on a frame (11.1.1.2-110). As illustrated in FIG. 188, the crown module (11.1.1.2-200) may be provided on a lateral surface (11.1.1.2-116) defined by an outward-facing surface between an exterior surface (11.1.1.2-112) and an interior surface (11.1.1.2-114) of the frame (11.1.1.2-110). It will be appreciated that the crown module (11.1.1.2-200) may be provided on any portion of the head-mountable device (11.1.1.2-100) including any portion of the frame (11.1.1.2-110) (e.g., the outer face (11.1.1.2-112) or the inner face (11.1.1.2-114)) and/or on the fixing element (11.1.1.2-120). It will further be appreciated that multiple crown modules (11.1.1.2-200) may be provided by the head-mountable device (11.1.1.2-100). For example, separate crown modules (11.1.1.2-200) may be provided on the same or opposite faces of the head-mountable device (11.1.1.2-100).

Referring now to FIG. 189, the crown module (11.1.1.2-200) may be provided as a self-contained component that is connected to both other portions of the head-mountable device (11.1.1.2-100). For example, the frame (11.1.1.2-110) or another portion of the head-mountable device (11.1.1.2-100) may provide a recess (11.1.1.2-118) into which the crown module (11.1.1.2-200) may be inserted. By providing the crown module (11.1.1.2-200) as a self-contained component, the crown module (11.1.1.2-200) may be sealed such that its internal components are protected from the external environment.

The crown module (11.1.1.2-200) may include one or more attachment elements configured to enable mechanical coupling or connection of the crown module (11.1.1.2-200) and the frame (11.1.1.2-110) by engaging complementary attachment elements of the frame (11.1.1.2-110) (e.g., within the recess (11.1.1.2-118)). The attachment elements may include protrusions, grooves, locks, latches, snaps, screws, clasps, screws, magnets, and/or pins, and may be included on the crown module (11.1.1.2-200) and/or the frame (11.1.1.2-110) to rigidly attach the crown module (11.1.1.2-200) to the frame (11.1.1.2-110).

Each of the crown module (11.1.1.2-200) and the frame (11.1.1.2-110) may include one or more communication interfaces that enable a communication link between the crown module (11.1.1.2-200) and the frame (11.1.1.2-110) (e.g., a controller within the frame (11.1.1.2-110)). The communication interfaces may include one or more of various features, such as electrical connectors, pogo pins, conductive surfaces, wireless receivers/transmitters, and/or inductive coupling features (e.g., coils) for communicatively coupling components of the frame (11.1.1.2-110) and the crown module (11.1.1.2-200).

Referring now to FIG. 190, the crown module (11.1.1.2-200) may provide an input system (11.1.1.2-230) that enables receiving input from a user and a feedback system (11.1.1.2-240) that provides feedback to the user. For purposes of the following description, the crown module (11.1.1.2-200) described is an example of the device previously illustrated and discussed with respect to FIGS. 188 and 189. However, certain features of the crown module (11.1.1.2-200), including the outer surface geometry, may be simplified or varied relative to aspects of the crown module (11.1.1.2-200) previously discussed.

As illustrated in FIG. 190, the crown module (11.1.1.2-200) may include a housing (11.1.1.2-210) defining at least a portion of an outer periphery of the crown module (11.1.1.2-200) and containing internal components thereof. A crown (11.1.1.2-222) may be provided on an outer portion of the housing (11.1.1.2-210). For example, the crown (11.1.1.2-222) may protrude from a surface of the housing (11.1.1.2-210) so as to be accessible by a user. The crown (11.1.1.2-222) may be connected to a shaft (11.1.1.2-220) extending within the housing (11.1.1.2-210). The crown (11.1.1.2-222) and/or the shaft (11.1.1.2-220) may be supported relative to the housing (11.1.1.2-210) by one or more bearings (11.1.1.2-236) that allow rotation and/or translation of the crown (11.1.1.2-222) and/or the shaft (11.1.1.2-220) relative to the housing (11.1.1.2-210).

The housing (11.1.1.2-210) may define a first chamber (11.1.1.2-232) that is sealed from the external environment. Components of the input system (11.1.1.2-230) may be positioned within the first chamber (11.1.1.2-232). In this way, the components of the input system (11.1.1.2-230) may be protected from ingress of fluids and/or particles that would interfere with the operation of the input system (11.1.1.2-230). The first chamber (11.1.1.2 11.1.1.2-232) may be at least partially defined by one or more seal members (e.g., O-rings) that move with the shaft (220) within the first chamber (11.1.1.2-232) of the housing (11.1.1.2-210).

The housing (11.1.1.2-210) may define a second chamber (11.1.1.2-242) that is also sealed from the external environment. Components of the feedback system (11.1.1.2-240) may be positioned within the second chamber (11.1.1.2-242). In this way, the components of the feedback system (11.1.1.2-240) may be protected from the ingress of fluids and/or particles that would interfere with the operation of the feedback system (11.1.1.2-240). At least one component (e.g., a connector (11.1.1.2-250)) of the feedback system (11.1.1.2-240) (e.g., within the second chamber (11.1.1.2-242)) may be connected to the shaft (11.1.1.2-220) or another component of the input system (11.1.1.2-230) (e.g., within the first chamber (11.1.1.2-232)). The second chamber (11.1.1.2-242) and the first chamber (11.1.1.2-232) may be optionally connected to form a single continuous chamber.

The crown (11.1.1.2-222) and/or the shaft (11.1.1.2-220) may be supported by one or more bearings (11.1.1.2-236) that allow rotation and/or translation of the crown (11.1.1.2-222) and/or the shaft (11.1.1.2-220) relative to the housing (11.1.1.2-210). The connector (11.1.1.2-250) may be supported by one or more bearings (11.1.1.2-246) that allow translation of the connector (11.1.1.2-250) relative to the crown (11.1.1.2-222) and/or the shaft (11.1.1.2-220). The bearings (11.1.1.2-246) may optionally allow rotation of the connector (11.1.1.2-250) relative to the crown (11.1.1.2-222) and/or the shaft (11.1.1.2-220) while coupling the connector (11.1.1.2-250) to the shaft (11.1.1.2-220) for integral translation.

In some embodiments, the crown (11.1.1.2-222) may be used to accept rotational input from a user that may be used to control aspects of the head-mounted device. The crown (11.1.1.2-222) may be knurled or otherwise textured to improve grip by the user's fingers and/or thumb. In some embodiments, the crown (11.1.1.2-222) may be rotated by the user to scroll the display or select from various values. In other embodiments, the crown (11.1.1.2-222) may be rotated to select an icon or move a selection mechanism between various icons displayed on the display, to move a cursor or other type of selection mechanism from a first displayed position to a second displayed position. The crown may also be used to control the volume of the speakers, the brightness of the display screen, the visual output of the head-mounted device, or to control other hardware settings.

In some embodiments, an optical encoder may be used to detect rotational motion of the crown about an axis. More specifically, the example described below with respect to FIG. 190 may use an optical encoder to detect rotational movement, rotational direction, and/or rotational speed of a component of an electronic device. Once the rotational movement, rotational direction, and/or rotational speed is determined, this information may be used to output or modify information and images presented on a display or user interface of the head-mounted device.

As illustrated in an exemplary embodiment of FIG. 190, an optical encoder of the present disclosure includes a light source (11.1.1.2-270), an optical sensor (11.1.1.2-272) (e.g., a photodiode and/or a photodiode array), and a shaft (11.1.1.2-220). In some embodiments, the optical encoder of the present disclosure may utilize an encoding pattern (11.1.1.2-262) disposed directly on the shaft (11.1.1.2-220). For example, the encoding pattern (11.1.1.2-262) may include a plurality of light and dark markings or stripes axially disposed along the shaft (11.1.1.2-220). Each stripe or combination of stripes on the shaft (11.1.1.2-220) can be used to identify the location of the shaft (11.1.1.2-220). For example, when light is emitted from a light source (11.1.1.2-270) and reflected from the shaft (11.1.1.2-220) to an optical sensor (11.1.1.2-272), the location, rotation, direction of rotation, and speed of rotation of the shaft (11.1.1.2-220) can be determined. Once the direction of rotation and speed are determined, this information can be used to output or modify information or images presented on a display or user interface of the head-mounted device.

In other embodiments, the shape or form of the shaft (11.1.1.2-220) of the encoder may be used to determine the position, rotation, direction of rotation, and speed of rotation of the shaft (11.1.1.2-220). For example, the shaft (11.1.1.2-220) may be fluted or may have multiple channels that allow light to be reflected in multiple different directions. Accordingly, the diffraction pattern may be used to determine the rotation, direction of rotation, and speed of rotation of the shaft (11.1.1.2-220).

As illustrated in FIG. 190, the crown assembly may be partially provided within a housing (11.1.1.2-210) of a crown module (11.1.1.2-200) and formed from a crown (11.1.1.2-222) disposed at an end of a shaft (11.1.1.2-220). As previously discussed, the crown module (11.1.1.2-200) includes an optical encoder comprising a shaft (11.1.1.2-220), a light source (11.1.1.2-270), and an optical sensor (11.1.1.2-272). While an optical sensor is specifically mentioned, embodiments disclosed herein may utilize various types of sensors arranged in various configurations for detecting the movement described herein. For example, movement of the shaft (11.1.1.2-220) may be detected by an image sensor, a light sensor such as a CMOS light sensor or imager, a photovoltaic cell or system, a photoresistive component, a laser scanner, or the like.

The optical encoder can generate encoder outputs that are used to determine position data of the crown (11.1.1.2-222). In particular, the optical encoder can generate outputs that are used to detect such movement of the crown (11.1.1.2-222), including direction of movement, speed of movement, etc. The movement can be rotational movement (e.g., about axis (11.1.1.2-290)), translational movement (e.g., along or parallel to axis (11.1.1.2-290)), angular movement (e.g., tilt about axis (11.1.1.2-290)), etc. An optical encoder may also be used to detect the degree of change in rotation of the crown (11.1.1.2-222) and/or the angle of rotation of the crown (11.1.1.2-222), as well as the speed and direction of rotation of the crown (11.1.1.2-222).

The crown (11.1.1.2-222) may be joined to and/or formed monolithically with the shaft (11.1.1.2-220). In some cases, the shaft (11.1.1.2-220) and the crown (11.1.1.2-222) may be formed as a single piece. Since the shaft (11.1.1.2-220) is joined to or otherwise part of the crown (11.1.1.2-222), when the crown (11.1.1.2-222) rotates or moves in a particular direction and at a particular speed, the shaft (11.1.1.2-220) also rotates or moves in the same direction and at the same speed.

As further illustrated in FIG. 190, the feedback system (11.1.1.2-240) may include mechanisms that enable haptic feedback. The feedback system may be implemented as any suitable device configured to provide force feedback, vibration feedback, tactile feedback, etc. For example, in one embodiment, the feedback system may be implemented as a linear actuator configured to provide punctuated haptic feedback, such as a tap or knock.

According to some embodiments, the feedback system (11.1.1.2-240) may include a magnetic element (11.1.1.2-252). The magnetic element (11.1.1.2-252) may be coupled to the shaft (11.1.1.2-220) (e.g., via a connector (11.1.1.2-250)) such that the magnetic element (11.1.1.2-252) moves along an axis (11.1.1.2-290) with respect to the housing (11.1.1.2-210) along the shaft (11.1.1.2-220). For example, the magnetic element (11.1.1.2-252) may be connected directly or indirectly to the shaft (11.1.1.2-220) (e.g., via a connector (11.1.1.2-250) and/or an intermediate bearing (11.1.1.2-246)).

The magnetic element (11.1.1.2-252) may include a temporary magnet of a soft magnetic material or a permanent magnet of a hard magnetic material. As used herein, "magnet" may include a magnet of a hard magnetic material and/or a magnet of a soft magnetic material. Hard magnetic materials include materials that retain their magnetism after removal of an applied magnetic field. Magnets including hard magnetic materials can form permanent magnets. Hard magnetic materials include neodymium (NdFeB), iron-neodymium, iron-boron, cobalt-samarium, iron-chromium-cobalt, and combinations or alloys thereof. Soft magnetic materials include materials that respond to magnetic fields but do not retain their magnetism after removal of the applied magnetic field. Magnets including soft magnetic materials can form temporary magnets. Soft magnetic materials include iron, iron-cobalt, iron-silicon, steel, stainless steel, iron-aluminum-silicon, nickel-iron, ferrites, and combinations or alloys thereof. It will be appreciated that "hard magnetic" and "soft magnetic" do not necessarily refer to the rigidity of the materials.

The feedback system (11.1.1.2-240) may further include a magnetic field generator for inducing a magnetic field in the magnetic element (11.1.1.2-252). For example, one or more coils (11.1.1.2-244) may be positioned on one or more faces of the magnetic element (11.1.1.2-252). The coils (11.1.1.2-244) may include one or more helical turns within one or more layers. It will be appreciated that any number of turns and arrangements of coils may be provided to induce a magnetic field.

It will be appreciated that various arrangements and variations of the above description may be implemented to provide haptic feedback. For example, the magnetic element (11.1.1.2-252) may be interchanged with the coils (11.1.1.2-244) such that the magnetic element (11.1.1.2-252) is movable with the housing (11.1.1.2-210) and the coils (11.1.1.2-244) are movable with the shaft (11.1.1.2-220). The magnetic element (11.1.1.2-252) may have various shapes and sizes. Multiple magnetic elements may be provided. These and other designs may be implemented to facilitate induced magnetic fields and forces between the magnetic elements.

As illustrated in FIG. 190, the coils (11.1.1.2-244) operate to induce a magnetic field near the magnetic element (11.1.1.2-252). When the coils (11.1.1.2-244) are energized by a current, the magnetic element (11.1.1.2-252) moves under the influence of the magnetic force. For example, if the magnetic element (11.1.1.2-252) is a temporary magnet of a soft magnetic material, the magnetic field may cause the magnetic domains of the magnetic element (11.1.1.2-252) to align with the magnetic field. The magnetic element (11.1.1.2-252) will then be attracted in a direction based on the energized coils (11.1.1.2-244). Additionally or alternatively, the magnetic element (11.1.1.2-252) may be a permanent magnet of a hard magnetic material. Based on the alignment (i.e., polarity) of such permanent magnet, a magnetic field causes one or more coils (11.1.1.2-244) to be attracted toward or repelled away from each other when the magnetic element (11.1.1.2-252) is activated.

As the magnetic element (11.1.1.2-252) moves (e.g., along the axis (11.1.1.2-290)), the shaft (11.1.1.2-220) moves relative to the housing (11.1.1.2-210) (e.g., along the axis (11.1.1.2-290)). As described above, the magnetic element (11.1.1.2-252) is connected to the shaft (11.1.1.2-220) and moves with the shaft (11.1.1.2-220), and the coils (11.1.1.2-244) are connected to the housing (11.1.1.2-210) and move with the housing (11.1.1.2-210). In this way, the magnetic forces between the magnetic element (11.1.1.2-252) and the coils (11.1.1.2-244) are transmitted to the shaft (11.1.1.2-220) and the housing (11.1.1.2-210), causing relative movement between them.

The haptic feedback may include movement of the shaft (11.1.1.2-220) relative to the housing of the crown module (11.1.1.2-200) and along the axis (11.1.1.2-290). For example, the magnetic element (11.1.1.2-252) may be aligned along the axis (11.1.1.2-290) of the crown module (11.1.1.2-200). The movement from the haptic feedback may be along the same axis (11.1.1.2-290) about which the crown (11.1.1.2-222) and the shaft (11.1.1.2-220) rotate. Additionally or alternatively, the movement from the haptic feedback may be along another axis or in multiple axes and directions.

In use, the coils (11.1.1.2-244) can be operated to provide haptic feedback while the user is operating the crown (11.1.1.2-222) (e.g., contacting it and/or rotating it). The haptic feedback can be provided based on various conditions and parameters. For example, the haptic feedback can be controlled by providing current to the coils (11.1.1.2-244). The induced and corresponding magnetic force between the magnetic element (11.1.1.2-252) and the coils (11.1.1.2-244) is based on the current within the coils (11.1.1.2-244). As such, the current can have a duration, amplitude, frequency, waveform, duty cycle, or other parameters as required for the desired and corresponding haptic feedback.

For example, the shaft (11.1.1.2-220) can be made to vibrate by applying a control signal to the coils (11.1.1.2-244). The control signal can be a file having a predetermined amplitude and/or frequency. When the control signal is applied, an induced magnetic field causes the shaft (11.1.1.2-220) to vibrate at the frequency of the control signal. The frequency can be in the range of 10 Hz to 5,000 Hz, 50 Hz to 1,000 Hz, or 100 Hz to 500 Hz. The frequency of the control signal can be adjusted to change the moving speed of the shaft (11.1.1.2-220) when a desired vibration is desired. The amplitude of the control signal can be correlated to the magnitude of movement of the shaft (11.1.1.2-220) and can be adjusted to change the intensity of the vibration.

The feedback system (11.1.1.2-240) can provide haptic feedback to a user by moving a shaft (11.1.1.2-220) of a crown module (11.1.1.2-200) relative to a housing (11.1.1.2-210). In contrast to haptic feedback applied directly to the housing (11.1.1.2-210) and/or other portions of the head-mounted device, haptic feedback provided from the shaft (11.1.1.2-220) provides sensations more directly related to the shaft (11.1.1.2-220). For example, the haptic feedback can be provided while the user is operating (e.g., contacting and/or rotating) the crown (11.1.1.2-222). As the shaft (11.1.1.2-220) and crown (11.1.1.2-222) move (e.g., vibrate) relative to the housing (11.1.1.2-210), the remainder of the head-mountable device may remain stationary, such that haptic feedback is not felt by the user at other contact locations. In a further example, while the user is wearing the head-mountable device, the haptic feedback may nevertheless be localized to the crown (11.1.1.2-222), such that the user feels haptic feedback only at that location.

The feedback system (11.1.1.2-240) can provide haptic feedback based on the operation of the crown module (11.1.1.2-200). For example, haptic feedback can be provided while the crown (11.1.1.2-222) and/or the shaft (11.1.1.2-220) is rotated by the user. Incremental and/or periodic haptic feedback can be provided based on the rotation performed by the user. As a further example, the haptic feedback can be provided at a speed corresponding to the rotation speed performed by the user. In this way, the haptic feedback can provide the user with confirmation regarding the input received by the user.

The feedback system (11.1.1.2-240) can provide haptic feedback based on activities performed by the head-mounted device. For example, the haptic feedback can correspond to visual information output to the user by the head-mounted device. In a further example, the visual information can be modified by use or operation of the crown, and the haptic feedback can be provided to indicate how the user can interact with the visual information. For example, the user can rotate the crown in one or both directions to cause the head-mounted device to perform a certain action. Such rotation can be performed to control the volume of a speaker, the brightness of a display screen, the visual output of the head-mounted device, the optical settings of an optical subassembly, or other hardware settings. The rotation can be performed to scroll a list or other set of items visually displayed by the head-mounted device.

As the user rotates the crown, a first type of haptic feedback may be provided, while a second type of haptic feedback may be provided to indicate how the user may interact with the head-mounted device and/or limitations regarding user input. For example, as the user scrolls through a list displayed by the head-mounted device, the first type of haptic feedback may be provided based on the user input (e.g., rotation speed, etc.). As a further example, as the user reaches the end of the list, the second type of haptic feedback may be provided to indicate that the user has reached the end of the list. Additionally or alternatively, different types of feedback may be provided in this manner for other actions, such as zooming in or out of an image, changing volume settings, changing display brightness, etc.

The feedback system (11.1.1.2-240) may provide haptic feedback for one or more different purposes. In some embodiments, the haptic feedback may notify a user based on a message, alert, or alarm. Such notifications may be accompanied by other feedback, including tactile, auditory, and/or visual feedback on the crown module (11.1.1.2-200) and/or an external device. In some embodiments, the haptic feedback may provide confirmation that a user selection (e.g., made using the crown module (11.1.1.2-200)) has been received by the head-mounted device and/or the external device. In some embodiments, the haptic feedback may inform a user about the status or operation of the head-mounted device and/or the external device.

Referring now to FIGS. 191 through 194, a crown module (11.1.1.2-300) may be provided to receive input from a user and provide feedback to the user. The crown module (11.1.1.2-300) may be provided in the head-mountable device as an alternative to and/or in addition to the crown module (11.1.1.2-200). For example, the crown module (11.1.1.2-300) may be a standalone module that is assembled with other components of the head-mountable device as described herein with respect to the crown module (11.1.1.2-200).

As illustrated in FIG. 191, the crown module (11.1.1.2-300) may include a housing (11.1.1.2-310) defining at least a portion of an outer periphery of the crown module (11.1.1.2-300) and containing internal components thereof. A crown (11.1.1.2-322) may be provided on an outer portion of the housing (11.1.1.2-310). For example, the crown (11.1.1.2-322) may protrude from a surface of the housing (11.1.1.2-310) so as to be accessible by a user. The crown (11.1.1.2-322) may be connected to a shaft (11.1.1.2-320) extending within the housing (11.1.1.2-310). The crown (11.1.1.2-322) and/or shaft (11.1.1.2-320) may be supported relative to the housing (11.1.1.2-310) by one or more bearings (11.1.1.2-336).

The housing (11.1.1.2-310) may define a chamber (11.1.1.2-332) that is sealed from the external environment. In this way, components of the crown module (11.1.1.2-300) may be protected from the ingress of fluids and/or particles that would interfere with its operation.

The crown module (11.1.1.2-300) may include a torque sensor (11.1.1.2-330) configured to detect a torque applied by a user to the crown (11.1.1.2-322) and transmitted to the shaft (11.1.1.2-320). For example, the user may apply a torque to the crown (11.1.1.2-322) by forcing the crown (11.1.1.2-322) to rotate about the shaft (11.1.1.2-390). It will be appreciated that such a torque may not result in significant rotation about the shaft (11.1.1.2-390). For example, the crown (11.1.1.2-322) and/or the shaft (11.1.1.2-320) may be coupled to the housing (11.1.1.2-310) such that no significant rotation is achieved. Despite this coupling, torque may be applied to the crown (11.1.1.2-322) and transmitted to the shaft (11.1.1.2-320). As this torque is applied to the shaft (11.1.1.2-320), the torque sensor (11.1.1.2-330) may detect the torque and interpret the torque as input from the user. Mechanisms for detecting the torque are further described herein.

In some embodiments, the crown (11.1.1.2-322) may be used to receive torque input from a user that may be used to control aspects of the head-mounted device. The crown (11.1.1.2-322) may be knurled or otherwise textured to improve grip by the user's fingers and/or thumb. In some embodiments, the crown (11.1.1.2-322) may be operable to provide inputs such as those described for the crown module (11.1.1.2-200). For example, the crown (11.1.1.2-322) may be torqued by a user to scroll a display or select from various values. In other embodiments, the crown (11.1.1.2-322) may be torqued to move a cursor or other type of selection mechanism from a first displayed position to a second displayed position, for selecting an icon or moving a selection mechanism among various icons displayed on the display. The crown may also be used to control the volume of a speaker, the brightness of a display screen, the visual output of a head-mounted device, or other hardware settings.

As further illustrated in FIG. 191, the crown module (11.1.1.2-300) may be provided with a feedback system (11.1.1.2-350) that includes mechanisms for enabling haptic feedback. In some embodiments, the feedback system (11.1.1.2-350) may be identical to or similar to the feedback system (11.1.1.2-240) of the crown module (11.1.1.2-200). For example, the feedback system (11.1.1.2-350) may be coupled to the shaft (11.1.1.2-320) such that components of the feedback system (11.1.1.2-350) move along an axis (11.1.1.2-390) with respect to the housing (11.1.1.2-310) together with the shaft (11.1.1.2-320). Additionally or alternatively, the feedback system (11.1.1.2-350) may include or be coupled to motors, hydraulic actuators, pneumatic actuators, magnetic actuators, piezoelectric actuators, electroactive materials (e.g., polymers), stepper motors, shape memory alloys, etc. to provide mechanical motion as haptic feedback.

As illustrated in FIGS. 192 and 193, the torque sensor (11.1.1.2-330) may include a plurality of strain gauges (11.1.1.2-330A, 11.1.1.2-330B, 11.1.1.2-330C, 11.1.1.2-330D). The strain gauges of the torque sensor (11.1.1.2-330) may operate as resistive sensors formed of a material that exhibits a change in electrical resistance (e.g., conductance) in response to a dimensional change, such as compression, tension, or force. Each of the strain gauges may be a compliant material that exhibits at least one variable electrical property in response to deformation, deflection, or shear of the electrode. The strain gauges may be formed of piezoelectric, piezoresistive, resistive, or other strain-sensitive materials.

As further illustrated in FIGS. 192 and 193, the strain gages (11.1.1.2-330A, 11.1.1.2-330B, 11.1.1.2-330C, 11.1.1.2-330D) may be distributed at different locations on the shaft (11.1.1.2-320). For example, as illustrated in FIG. 192, some of the strain gages may be disposed on a first radial surface of the shaft (11.1.1.2-320), and other strain gages may be disposed on a second radial surface of the shaft (11.1.1.2-320). As a further example, as illustrated in FIG. 193, some of the strain gages may be arranged in a first orientation relative to the axis of the shaft (11.1.1.2-320), while other strain gages may be arranged in a second orientation relative to the axis of the shaft (11.1.1.2-320). In such different orientations, an applied torque will cause some of the strain gages to be arranged in compression, while other strain gages will be arranged in tension (e.g., tensile strain) in response to the torque.

As illustrated in FIG. 194, strain gages (11.1.1.2-330A, 11.1.1.2-330B, 11.1.1.2-330C, 11.1.1.2-330D) can be coupled to one another in an electrical circuit (11.1.1.2-360). The electrical circuit can be configured to monitor one or more electrical properties of the strain gages (e.g., resistance, capacitance, accumulated charge, inductance, etc.) for changes. The electrical circuit (11.1.1.2-360) then quantifies these changes, which can be used to estimate the applied torque. For example, the electrical circuit (11.1.1.2-360) may include a Wheatstone bridge arrangement for measuring electrical resistance by balancing two legs of the bridge circuit with opposing pairs of strain gages. The applied voltage may be compared with the measured voltage within the Wheatstone bridge of the electrical circuit (11.1.1.2-360) to determine the combined effect of torque on the plurality of strain gages (11.1.1.2-330A, 11.1.1.2-330B, 11.1.1.2-330C, 11.1.1.2-330D).

A plurality of strain gages (11.1.1.2-330A, 11.1.1.2-330B, 11.1.1.2-330C, 11.1.1.2-330D) may be connected to approximate the magnitude of the torsional strain (e.g., torque) experienced by the shaft (11.1.1.2-320). In some embodiments, the magnitude of the strain may be obtained by measuring a common property (e.g., parallel and/or series resistance) and/or a different property (e.g., voltage distribution) of the plurality of strain gages. For example, differential property estimates may be combined with or compared to common property estimates. In a further example, the differential property estimates and the common property estimates may be combined by unweighted or weighted averaging. In some embodiments, the maximum or minimum of the two estimates may be utilized. In some embodiments, other methods of combining the two estimates or deciding between them may be used.

Once the resistance of each strain gage is obtained, either through calculation or measurement, each can be compared to a known baseline resistance value to determine whether the strain gages are experiencing tension or compression. In other words, when the force-sensing structure experiences a reaction force, it may deform, causing one or more strain gages to expand (e.g., in tension) or contract (e.g., in compression), which may cause their resistance to change in a mathematically predictable manner. In some cases, the resistance or other electrical properties of the strain gage are measured as relative values, which may take into account environmental influences such as temperature and/or residual or static strain.

For certain materials, the resistance may vary linearly with compression or tension. For other materials, the resistance may vary along a known curve in response to compression or tension. Accordingly, depending on the material selected for the strain gages and the location of the strain gages on the shaft (11.1.1.2-320), a particular resistance and/or measured voltage may be correlated to a particular amount of strain experienced by a particular strain gage, which in turn may be correlated to an amount of force applied to the force-sensing structure, which in turn may be correlated to an amount of torque applied to the crown.

Referring now to FIG. 195, components of a head-mountable device may be operatively connected to provide the performance described herein. FIG. 195 depicts a simplified block diagram of an exemplary head-mountable device (11.1.1.2-100), according to one embodiment of the present invention. It will be appreciated that the components described herein may be provided on either or both of the frame and/or the fixing elements of the head-mountable device (11.1.1.2-100).

As illustrated in FIG. 195, the head-mountable device (11.1.1.2-100) may include a controller (11.1.1.2-70) having one or more processing units that include or are configured to access a memory (11.1.1.2-18) having instructions stored therein. The instructions or computer programs may be configured to perform one or more of the operations or functions described with respect to the head-mountable device (11.1.1.2-100). The controller (11.1.1.2-70) may be implemented as any electronic device capable of processing, receiving, or transmitting data or instructions. For example, the controller (11.1.1.2-70) may include one or more of a microprocessor, a central processing unit (CPU), an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a digital signal processor (DSP), or a combination of such devices. As used herein, the term “processor” is intended to encompass a single processor or processing unit, multiple processors, multiple processing units, or other suitably configured computing element or elements.

The memory (11.1.1.2-18) may store electronic data usable by the head-mounted device (11.1.1.2-100). For example, the memory (11.1.1.2-18) may store electrical data or content, such as audio and video files, documents and applications, device settings and user preferences, timing and control signals or data for various modules, data structures or databases, etc. The memory (11.1.1.2-18) may be configured as any type of memory. By way of example only, the memory (11.1.1.2-18) may be implemented as random access memory, read-only memory, flash memory, removable memory, or other types of storage elements, or combinations of such devices.

A head-mounted device (11.1.1.2-100) may include a camera (11.1.1.2-50) for capturing a view of an environment external to the head-mounted device (11.1.1.2-100). The camera (11.1.1.2-50) may include an optical sensor, such as a photodiode or a photodiode array. Additionally or alternatively, the camera (11.1.1.2-50) may include one or more of various types of optical sensors arranged in various configurations for detecting user inputs described herein. The camera (11.1.1.2-50) may be configured to capture an image of a scene or object positioned within the field of view of the camera (11.1.1.2-50). The image may be stored in a digital file according to any of a number of digital formats. In some embodiments, the head-mounted device (11.1.1.2-100) includes a camera including an image sensor formed of a charge-coupled device (CCD) and/or complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor (CMOS) device, a photovoltaic cell, a photoresistive component, a laser scanner, or the like. It will be appreciated that the camera may include other motion sensing devices.

A head-mountable device (11.1.1.2-100) may include a battery (11.1.1.2-20) capable of charging and/or powering components of the head-mountable device (11.1.1.2-100).

The head-mountable device (11.1.1.2-100) may include one or more other input/output components (11.1.1.2-26), which may include any suitable component for connecting the head-mountable device (11.1.1.2-100) to other devices. Suitable components may include, for example, audio/video jacks, data connectors, and/or any additional or alternative input/output components. The input/output components (11.1.1.2-26) may include a microphone. The microphone may be operatively connected to the controller (11.1.1.2-70) to receive audio input, including voice commands, from a user. The input/output components (11.1.1.2-26) may include one or more speakers. The speakers may be operatively connected to a controller (11.1.1.2-70) for control of speaker output, including sound levels.

The head-mounted device (11.1.1.2-100) may include communication circuitry (11.1.1.2-28) for communicating with one or more servers or other devices using any suitable communication protocol. For example, the communication circuitry (11.1.1.2-28) may support Wi-Fi (e.g., an 802.11 protocol), Ethernet, Bluetooth, a radio frequency system (e.g., a 900 MHz, 2.4 GHz, and 5.6 GHz communication system), infrared, TCP/IP (e.g., any of the protocols used in each of the TCP/IP layers), HTTP, BitTorrent, FTP, RTP, RTSP, SSH, any other communication protocol, or any combination thereof. The communication circuitry (11.1.1.2-28) may also include an antenna for transmitting and receiving electromagnetic signals.

The head-mountable device (11.1.1.2-100) may further include an optical module for displaying visual information for a user, including a display screen (11.1.1.2-90) and/or an optical subassembly (11.1.1.2-14). The head-mountable device (11.1.1.2-100) may include an optical subassembly (11.1.1.2-14) configured to assist in optically adjusting and accurately projecting image-based content displayed by the display (11.1.1.2-90) for close viewing. The optical subassembly (11.1.1.2-14) may include one or more lenses, mirrors, or other optical devices.

The head-mounted device (11.1.1.2-100) may optionally be connected to a portable electronic device (11.1.1.2-22) that may provide certain functions. The portable electronic device (11.1.1.2-22) may provide a handheld form factor (e.g., a small portable electronic device that is lightweight and fits in a pocket). Examples include, but are not limited to, media players, telephones (including smart phones), PDAs, watches, computers, etc. The portable electronic device may include a screen for presenting a graphical portion of the media to the user. The portable electronic device may provide processing capabilities by communicating with a controller (11.1.1.2-70) of the head-mounted device (11.1.1.2-100). A portable electronic device may provide an operation to remove particles from components of a head-mounted device (11.1.1.2-100) by operating a haptic feedback element of the portable electronic device.

A head-mountable device (11.1.1.2-100) may include a dock (11.1.1.2-32) operative to receive a portable electronic device (11.1.1.2-22). The dock (11.1.1.2-32) may include connectors (e.g., Lightning, USB, FireWire, power, DVI, etc.) that may plug into complementary connectors of the portable electronic device (11.1.1.2-22). The dock (11.1.1.2-32) may include features to assist in aligning the connectors during mating and to physically couple the portable electronic device (11.1.1.2-22) to the head-mountable device (11.1.1.2-100). For example, the dock (11.1.1.2-32) may define a cavity for placement of a portable electronic device (11.1.1.2-22). The dock (11.1.1.2-32) may also include retention features for securing the portable electronic device (11.1.1.2-22) within the cavity. A connector on the dock (11.1.1.2-32) may function as a communications interface between the portable electronic device (11.1.1.2-22) and the head-mountable device (11.1.1.2-100).

A head-mounted device (11.1.1.2-100) may include one or more other sensors (11.1.1.2-40). Such sensors may be configured to sense substantially any type of characteristic, such as, but not limited to, image, pressure, light, touch, force, temperature, position, motion, and the like. For example, the sensors may be photodetectors, temperature sensors, light or optical sensors, barometric pressure sensors, humidity sensors, magnets, gyroscopes, accelerometers, chemical sensors, ozone sensors, particle count sensors, and the like. As a further example, the sensors may be biosensors for tracking biometric characteristics, such as health and activity metrics. Other user sensors may perform facial feature detection, facial motion detection, facial recognition, eye tracking, user mood detection, user emotion detection, voice detection, and the like.

A head-mounted device (11.1.1.2-100) may include one or more sensors (e.g., an eye sensor) for tracking features of a user wearing the head-mounted device (11.1.1.2-100). For example, such sensors may perform facial feature detection, facial motion detection, face recognition, eye tracking, user mood detection, user emotion detection, voice detection, etc. For example, the eye sensor may optically capture the view of the eye (e.g., the pupil) and determine the direction of the user's gaze. Such eye tracking may be used to determine the location and/or direction of an object of interest. Subsequently, detection and/or amplification of sound may be focused when sound is received from sources at such location and/or along such direction.

While some embodiments of the touch-based input devices disclosed herein relate to head-mounted devices, it will be appreciated that the present techniques encompass and can be applied to other devices. For example, an input device (e.g., a crown module) according to embodiments disclosed herein may include a phone, a tablet computing device, a mobile computing device, a watch, a laptop computing device, a mouse, a game controller, a remote control, a digital media player, a stylus, and/or any other electronic device. Additionally, an external device may be any device that interacts with a touch-based input device. For example, an external device according to embodiments disclosed herein may include a tablet, a phone, a laptop computing device, a desktop computing device, a wearable device, a mobile computing device, a tablet computing device, a display, a television, a telephone, a digital media player, and/or any other electronic device.

Accordingly, embodiments of the present disclosure provide a head-mountable device with a crown module having an input system that allows a user to provide inputs by rotating or otherwise applying torque to the crown of the crown module. The head-mountable device can interpret the rotation and/or torque as user input. The crown module can further include a feedback system that provides localized haptic feedback at the crown. The haptic feedback can be effectively perceived by the user at the crown without causing the entire head-mountable device to vibrate against the user's head and/or face.

Various examples of aspects of the present disclosure are described below for convenience. These are provided as examples and are not intended to limit the present technology.

Item A: A head-mountable device comprising: a housing; a crown positioned at least partially outside the housing; a shaft positioned within the housing and coupled to the crown and rotating with the crown about an axis; a sensor for detecting rotation of the shaft; a magnetic element coupled to the shaft and moving along the axis with the shaft; and a coil coupled to the housing and configured to induce a magnetic field within the magnetic element, such that when activated, the magnetic element moves the shaft and the crown relative to the housing, thereby providing haptic feedback.

Item B: A head-mountable device comprising: a housing; a crown positioned at least partially outside the housing; a shaft positioned within the housing and connected to the crown to transmit torque applied to the crown; a sensor for detecting the torque transmitted to the shaft; and a haptic feedback device coupled to the housing and configured to provide haptic feedback by moving the shaft and the crown relative to the housing.

Item C: A crown module for a head-mountable device, comprising: a housing configured to be coupled to a frame of the head-mountable device; a crown positioned at least partially outside the housing; a shaft positioned within a sealed chamber of the housing and connected to the crown and rotating with the crown about an axis; a sensor detecting rotation of the shaft and positioned within the sealed chamber; and a haptic feedback device positioned within the sealed chamber of the housing and configured to provide haptic feedback by moving the shaft and the crown along the axis and relative to the housing.

One or more of the above items may include one or more of the features described below. Note that any of the items below may be combined with each other in any combination and may be placed within each independent item, for example, Item A, Item B, or Item C.

Item 1: Frame; Display on the inner surface of the frame; Camera on the outer surface of the frame; Speaker; and Microphone.

Item 2: The shaft is positioned within a sealed chamber of the housing containing the sensor.

Item 3: A pair of seal members each sealingly engaging the inner surface of the housing and the outer surface of the shaft - the sensor being axially positioned between the pair of seal members.

Item 4: The sensor is an optical sensor, and the shaft includes a visual feature for detection by the optical sensor.

Item 5: The magnetic element and coil are located within a sealed chamber of the housing.

Item 6: The magnetic element is coupled to the shaft such that the magnetic element is configured to rotate independently of the shaft.

Item 7: The coil is a first coil on a first axial face of the magnetic element; and the head-mountable device includes a second coil on a second axial face of the magnetic element.

Item 8: A controller configured to actuate a coil in response to a sensor detecting that the shaft is rotating.

Item 9: Torque is about an axis, while haptic feedback involves movement along the axis.

Item 10: The sensor includes a plurality of strain gauges.

Item 11: The sensor comprises a plurality of strain gauges electrically connected to each other in a Wheatstone bridge arrangement.

Item 12: At least two of the plurality of strain gauges have different orientations with respect to the longitudinal axis of the shaft.

Item 13: A haptic feedback device includes an actuator configured to expand toward the shaft and contract away from the shaft.

Item 14: A controller configured to operate a haptic feedback device in response to a sensor detecting that torque is applied to the crown.

Item 15: A pair of seal members each sealingly engaging the inner surface of the housing and the outer surface of the shaft - the sensor being axially positioned between the pair of seal members.

Item 16: The sensor is an optical sensor, and the shaft includes a visual feature for detection by the optical sensor.

Item 17: A haptic feedback device comprises a magnetic element coupled to the shaft and configured to move along the axis with the shaft; and a coil coupled to the housing and configured to induce a magnetic field within the magnetic element, such that when activated, the magnetic element moves the shaft and crown relative to the housing, thereby providing haptic feedback.

11.1.2: Wishbone and Mustache

FIG. 196 illustrates a front perspective view of a portion of an HMD (11.1.2-100) including an inner or intermediate structural frame (11.1.2-104) and an outer structural frame (11.1.2-102) defining first and second openings (11.1.2-106a, 11.1.2-106b). The openings (11.1.2-106a, 11.1.2-106b) are shown in dashed lines in FIG. 196 because the view of the openings (11.1.2-106a, 11.1.2-106b) may be blocked by one or more other components of the HMD (11.1.2-100) coupled to the inner frame (11.1.2-104) and/or the outer frame (11.1.2-102), as illustrated. In at least one example, the HMD (11.1.2-100) may include a first mounting bracket (11.1.2-108) coupled to the inner frame (11.1.2-104). In at least one example, a mounting bracket (11.1.2-108) is attached to the inner frame (11.1.2-104) between the first opening (11.1.2-106a) and the second opening (11.1.2-106b).

The mounting bracket (11.1.2-108) may include an intermediate or center portion (11.1.2-109) coupled to the inner frame (11.1.2-104). In some examples, the intermediate or center portion (11.1.2-109) may not be the geometric intermediate or center of the bracket (11.1.2-108). Rather, the intermediate/center portion (11.1.2-109) may be positioned between a first cantilevered extension arm and a second cantilevered extension arm extending away from the intermediate portion (11.1.2-109). In at least one example, the mounting bracket (108) includes a first cantilever arm (11.1.2-112) and a second cantilever arm (11.1.2-114) extending away from a middle portion (11.1.2-109) of the mounting bracket (11.1.2-108) coupled to the inner frame (11.1.2-104).

As illustrated in FIG. 196, the outer frame (11.1.2-102) may define a curved geometry on its lower surface to accommodate the nose of a user when wearing the HMD (11.1.2-100). The curved geometry may be referred to as a nose bridge (11.1.2-111) and may be centered on the lower surface of the HMD (11.1.2-100) as illustrated. In at least one example, the mounting bracket (11.1.2-108) may be connected to the inner frame (11.1.2-104) between the openings (11.1.2-106a, 11.1.2-106b) such that the cantilevered arms (11.1.2-112, 11.1.2-114) extend downwardly and laterally outwardly away from the middle portion (11.1.2-109) to complement the geometry of the nose bridge (11.1.2-111) of the outer frame (11.1.2-102). In this manner, the mounting bracket (11.1.2-108) is configured to accommodate the user's nose as described above. The nose bridge (11.1.2-111) geometry accommodates the nose in that the nose bridge (11.1.2-111) provides a curvature that curves with, over, around, and around the user's nose for comfort and fit.

The first cantilever arm (11.1.2-112) can extend away from the middle portion (11.1.2-109) of the mounting bracket (11.1.2-108) in a first direction, and the second cantilever arm (11.1.2-114) can extend away from the middle portion (11.1.2-109) of the mounting bracket (11.1.2-10) in a second direction opposite to the first direction. The first and second cantilever arms (11.1.2-112, 11.1.2-114) are referred to as “cantilevered” or “cantilevered” arms because each arm (11.1.2-112, 11.1.2-114) includes a distal free end (11.1.2-116, 11.1.2-118) that is unattached from the inner and outer frames (11.1.2-102, 11.1.2-104), respectively. In this way, the arms (11.1.2-112, 11.1.2-114) cantilever out from the middle portion (11.1.2-109) which can be connected to the inner frame (11.1.2-104) without the distal ends (11.1.2-102, 11.1.2-104) being attached.

In at least one example, the HMD (11.1.2-100) may include one or more components coupled to a mounting bracket (11.1.2-108). In one example, the components include a plurality of sensors (11.1.2-110a through 11.1.2-110f). Each of the plurality of sensors (11.1.2-110a through 11.1.2-110f) may include various types of sensors, including cameras, IR sensors, and the like. In some examples, one or more of the sensors (11.1.2-110a through 11.1.2-110f) may be used for object recognition in three-dimensional space, where maintaining precise relative positions of two or more of the plurality of sensors (11.1.2-110a through 11.1.2-110f) is important. The cantilevered nature of the mounting bracket (11.1.2-108) can protect the sensors (11.1.2-110a to 11.1.2-110f) from damage and altered positioning in the event of accidental drops by the user. Since the sensors (11.1.2-110a to 11.1.2-110f) protrude cantilever-wise over the arms (11.1.2-112, 11.1.2-114) of the mounting bracket (11.1.2-108), stresses and strains of the inner and/or outer frames (11.1.2-104, 11.1.2-102) are not transmitted to the cantilever arms (11.1.2-112, 11.1.2-114) and, accordingly, do not affect the relative positioning of the sensors (11.1.2-110a to 11.1.2-110f) coupled/mounted to the mounting bracket (11.1.2-108).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIG. 196) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 197-200 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 197-200 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 196.

FIG. 197 illustrates a perspective view of an example of a mounting bracket (11.1.2-208) including a middle portion (11.1.2-209) and first and second arms (11.1.2-212, 11.1.2-214) extending from the middle portion (11.1.2-209) to form a nose bridge (11.1.2-211) geometry. One or more components including sensors (11.1.2-210a to 11.1.2-210f) may be coupled to the mounting bracket (11.1.2-208), including being coupled to the cantilever arms (11.1.2-212, 11.1.2-214). In at least one example, the material of the mounting bracket (11.1.2-208) may include a strong, durable, rigid material and/or geometry to maintain the relative position between the sensors (11.1.2-210a to 11.1.2-210f) during a drop event or other forces causing deformation of the frame to which the mounting bracket (11.1.2-209) is coupled. The material of the mounting bracket (11.1.2-208) may include a metal, e.g., aluminum, steel including stainless steel, magnesium or magnesium alloys, rigid plastics, ceramics, composite materials, carbon fiber, or any combination thereof.

In at least one example, a first sensor comprising any of the sensors (11.1.2-210a to 11.1.2-210c) may be coupled to a first cantilever arm (11.1.2-212), and a second sensor comprising any of the sensors (11.1.2-210e to 11.1.2-210f) may be coupled to a second cantilever arm (11.1.2-214). In at least one example, the first sensor may comprise a visual sensor, such as a camera or an infrared sensor. In at least one example, the second sensor may comprise a visual sensor, such as a camera or an infrared sensor.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIG. 197) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 196 and 198 through 200 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 196 and 198 through 200 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 197.

FIG. 198 illustrates a perspective view of a partially assembled HMD (11.1.2-300) including an outer frame (11.1.2-302), an inner frame (11.1.2-304) coupled to the outer frame (11.1.2-302), and a second mounting bracket (11.1.2-320) coupled to the inner frame (11.1.2-304) between first and second openings (11.1.2-306a, 11.1.2-306b) defined by the inner frame (11.1.2-304). In at least one example, the second mounting bracket (11.1.2-320) may include first and second cantilever mounting arms (11.1.2-322, 11.1.2-324) extending in opposite directions from a middle portion (11.1.2-326) of the mounting bracket (11.1.2-320). The first and second cantilever arms (11.1.2-322, 11.1.2-324) may not be attached to any other component or frame of the HMD (11.1.2-300) similar to the cantilever arms (11.1.2-112, 11.1.2-114) of the mounting bracket (11.1.2-108) illustrated in FIG. 196. In at least one example, the mounting bracket (11.1.2-320) may be coupled to the inner frame (11.1.2-304) at a middle portion (11.1.2-326) of the mounting bracket (11.1.2-320).

In at least one example, the first cantilever arm (11.1.2-322) can extend in a first direction from the middle portion (11.1.2-326), and the second cantilever arm (11.1.2-324) can extend in a second direction opposite to the first direction from the middle portion (11.1.2-326). In at least one example, the first guide rod (11.1.2-328) can be coupled to the first cantilever arm (11.1.2-322) and can extend in the first direction, and the second guide rod (11.1.2-330) can be coupled to the second cantilever arm (11.1.2-324) and can extend in a second direction opposite to the first direction.

In at least one example, the first and second optical modules (not shown in FIG. 198) may be slidably/adjustably coupled to the mounting bracket (11.1.2-320) via first and second guide rods (11.1.2-328, 11.1.2-330). The guide rods (11.1.2-328, 11.1.2-330) may each include distal ends (11.1.2-332, 11.1.2-334) that are opposite respective proximal ends (11.1.2-333, 11.1.2-335). The distal ends (11.1.2-332, 11.1.2-334) may not be attached to any other component of the frame (11.1.2-302, 11.1.2-304) of the HMD (11.1.2-300). In this way, the guide rods (11.1.2-328, 11.1.2-330) are cantilevers with floating free ends. In one or more examples, one or more optical modules including display screens, sensors, structural components, and electronic components, as mentioned above, may be slidably coupled to the inner frame (11.1.2-304) via cantilever arms (11.1.2-322, 11.1.2-324) and guide rods (11.1.2-328, 11.1.2-330) of the mounting bracket (11.1.2-320). The sensors, display screens, and other components of the optical module may be configured to operate most effectively when the relative distance between them and their positions are maintained between the first guide rod (11.1.2-328) and the second guide rod (11.1.2-330), even during drop events and when other structural components, including the outer and/or inner frames (11.1.2-302, 11.1.2-304), are inadvertently deformed or bent.

In these contexts, the cantilever characteristics of the mounting bracket (11.1.2-320) can protect the optical modules and their components from damage and displacement in the event of accidental dropping by the user. Since the optical modules are cantilevered over the guide rods (11.1.2-328, 11.1.2-330) and cantilever arms (11.1.2-322, 11.1.2-324) of the mounting bracket (11.1.2-320), stresses and strains of the inner and/or outer frames (11.1.2-304, 11.1.2-302) are not transmitted to the cantilever arms (11.1.2-322, 11.1.2-323) and/or the guide rods (11.1.2-328, 11.1.2-330) and therefore do not affect the relative positioning of the optical modules slidably coupled/mounted on the mounting bracket (11.1.2-320). In accordance with these contexts, the material of the mounting bracket (11.1.2-320) may include a metal, such as aluminum, steel including stainless steel, magnesium or magnesium alloys, rigid plastics, ceramics, composite materials, carbon fiber, or any combination thereof. In at least one example, the guide rods (11.1.2-328, 11.1.2-330) may include low weight, low friction materials. For example, the guide rods (11.1.2-328, 11.1.2-330) may include carbon fiber laminate materials. The guide rods (11.1.2-328, 11.1.2-330) may be formed as hollow tubes to reduce weight.

In at least one example, the first and second cantilever arms (11.1.2-322, 11.1.2-324) and/or the first and second guide rods (11.1.2-328, 11.1.2-330) extending therefrom, respectively, may be positioned at an angle relative to one another. The angle may be such that the associated components, including the bracket (11.1.2-326) and the guide rods (11.1.2-328, 11.1.2-330), the display units connected to the cantilever arms (11.1.2-322, 11.1.2-324), and the guide rods (11.1.2-328, 11.1.2-330), are curved and/or oriented to compensate for the curvature of the user's face. In at least one example, the angle may be between about 5 degrees and about 25 degrees. In one example, the angle may be between about 10 degrees and about 20 degrees, for example, about 15 degrees. In at least one example, the bracket (11.1.2-326) may be manufactured from magnesium and carbon fiber panels on its back surface to provide rigidity.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIG. 198) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 196, 197, 199, and 200 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 196, 197, 199, and 200 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 198.

FIG. 199 illustrates a portion of an HMD (11.1.2-400) including an optical module (11.1.2-436) slidably engaged with a mounting bracket via a guide rod (11.1.2-428) that may be similar to the guide rod (11.1.2-328) illustrated and described above in FIG. 198. The optical module (11.1.2-436) may include a display assembly (11.1.2-438) including a display screen (11.1.2-440), both of which may be slidably engaged with the guide rod (11.1.2-428) as illustrated. As previously mentioned, the components and parts illustrated and described in FIGS. 196-198 may be one of a set of two optical modules as part of a single HMD (11.1.2-400) such that the optical module (11.1.2-428) illustrated in FIG. 199 is one of two optical modules that are slidably engaged/coupled with a guide rod extending in an opposite direction from the guide rod (11.1.2-428) illustrated from the mounting bracket. Similarly, the display assembly (11.1.2-438) and the display screen (11.1.2-440) may be one of a set of two display assemblies and display screens within the single HMD (11.1.2-400).

In at least one example, the optical module (11.1.2-436) may include a micro-OLED display bonded to a heat sink via an adhesive, such as a pressure-sensitive adhesive or other adhesive. In at least one example, the optical module (11.1.2-436) may include a silicon backplane. The heat sink may include magnesium and may not have fins. In one example, one or more drops of a structural adhesive may be applied to the center of the back surface of the display of the optical module (11.1.2-436) during assembly/manufacturing to secure the display to the heat sink. The adhesive may include an epoxy.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIG. 199) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 196-198 and FIG. 200 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 196-198 and FIG. 200 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 199.

FIG. 200 illustrates an example of an HMD (11.1.2-500) comprising a first external structural frame (11.1.2-502) defining an internal volume (11.1.2-542). A front cover (11.1.2-541) and a rear cover (11.1.2-543) positioned opposite the front cover (11.1.2-541) may also define the internal volume (11.1.2-542). In at least one example, the HMD (11.1.2-500) may also comprise a second internal structural frame (11.1.2-504) positioned within the internal volume (11.1.2-542) and coupled to the external frame (11.1.2-502). The inner frame (11.1.2-502) may define a first side (11.1.2-503) and a second side (11.1.2-505) opposite the first side (11.1.2-503).

In at least one example, the HMD (11.1.2-500) may include a first mounting bracket (11.1.2-508) coupled to a first face (11.1.2-503) of an inner frame (11.1.2-504) and a second mounting bracket (11.1.2-520) coupled to a second face (11.1.2-505) of the inner frame (11.1.2-504). In at least one example, the first mounting bracket (11.1.2-508) may be similar to the first mounting brackets (11.1.2-108, 11.1.2-208) illustrated and described above in FIGS. 196 and 197. In at least one example, the second mounting bracket (11.1.2-520) may be similar to the other second mounting bracket (11.1.2-320) described above and illustrated in FIG. 198.

In at least one example, one or more sensors (11.1.2-510a, 11.1.2-510b) may be mounted or coupled to a cantilever arm or a middle portion of a first mounting bracket (11.1.2-508). In at least one example, an optical module (11.1.2-536) may be slidably engaged/coupled to a second mounting bracket (11.1.2-520). The optical module (11.1.2-536) may include a display assembly comprising a display screen (11.1.2-540) and one or more sensors (11.1.2-544a, 11.1.2-544b). In at least one example, at least one of the sensors (11.1.2-544a, 11.1.2-544b) may include a visual sensor, such as a camera. In at least one example, both the first and second sensors (11.1.2-544a, 11.1.2-544b) are cameras.

As oriented in the drawing of FIG. 200, the sensors (11.1.2-510a, 11.1.2-510b) coupled to the first mounting bracket (11.1.2-508) may be oriented in a forward direction, and the sensors (11.1.2-544a, 11.1.2-544b) of the optical module (11.1.2-536) and/or the display screen (11.1.2-540) may be oriented in a rearward direction opposite to the forward direction. In at least one example, the sensors (11.1.2-510a, 11.1.2-510b) coupled to the first mounting bracket (11.1.2-508) may include image capture sensors or other sensors configured to recognize and detect objects in front of or around the HMD (11.1.2-500). The detected, sensed, or captured images and objects may be displayed by a display screen (11.1.2-536) that may be configured to project images and light rearward toward the user's eyes when the user wears the HMD (11.1.2-500).

In at least one example, the HMD (11.1.2-500) may also include a controller electronically coupled to the display screen (11.1.2-540) and the sensors (11.1.2-510a, 11.1.2-510b) including sensors (11.1.2-544a, 11.1.2-544b) and the optical module (11.1.2-536). The controller may be configured to capture an image via one or more of the sensors (11.1.2-510a, 11.1.2-510b) coupled to the first mounting bracket (11.1.2-508) and display the image on the display screen (11.1.2-540) of the optical module (11.1.2-536) coupled to the second mounting bracket (11.1.2-520). To project an accurate representation of objects captured in real space to the user on the display screen (11.1.2-540), the relative positions, distances, angles, and orientations between the sensors (11.1.2-510a, 11.1.2-510b) and the display screen (11.1.2-540) can be maintained even during drop events or when the outer/inner frames (11.1.2-502, 11.1.2-504) are deformed or bumped. The first mounting bracket (11.1.2-508) can be centrally connected to the inner frame (11.1.2-504) in a cantilevered manner from the first face (11.1.2-503) as described above, and the second mounting bracket (11.1.2-520) can be centrally connected to the inner frame (11.1.2-504) in a cantilevered manner from the second face (11.1.2-505). In this way, the positions, orientations, angles, and distances between the sensors (11.1.2-510a, 11.1.2-510b) of the first mounting bracket (11.1.2-508), the sensors (11.1.2-544a, 11.1.2-544b) of the second mounting bracket (11.1.2-520), and the display screen (11.1.2-540) can be maintained.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIG. 200) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 196-199 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 196-199 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 200.

11.1.3: Upper guide rod system

FIG. 201 illustrates a rear perspective view of a display assembly (11.1.3-102) of an HMD (11.1.3-100) with one or more components removed, including a curtain assembly, to illustrate various internal components of the HMD (11.1.3-100). FIG. 201 illustrates a display assembly (11.1.3-102) that may include a first display module (11.1.3-104a) and a second display module (11.1.3-104b). The first display module (11.1.3-104a) may be slidably engaged/coupled with a first adjustment mechanism (11.1.3-106a), and the second optical module (11.1.3-104b) may be slidably engaged/coupled with a second adjustment mechanism (11.1.3-106b). The first and second adjusting mechanisms (11.1.3-106a, 11.1.3-106b) may include first and second respective guide rods (11.1.3-108a, 11.1.3-108b) and motors (11.1.3-110a, 11.1.3-110b). The first and second guide rods may be similar so that one description applies to the other, wherein the first guide rod (11.1.3-108a) extends away from the bracket (11.1.3-112) in a first direction and the second guide rod (11.1.3-108b) extends away from the bracket (11.1.3-112) in a second direction opposite to the first direction.

Likewise, the first and second motors (11.1.3-110a, 11.1.3-110b) may be similar so that one description applies to the other, wherein the first motor (11.1.3-110a) is mechanically engaged with the first optical module (11.1.3-104a) to adjust its position via the first guide rod (11.1.3-108a), and the second motor (11.1.3-110b) is mechanically engaged with the second optical module (11.1.3-104b) to adjust its position via the second guide rod (11.1.3-108b). In at least one example, the HMD (11.1.3-100) also includes a pressable and/or rotatable button (11.1.3-114) electrically coupled to the first and second motors (11.1.3-110a, 11.1.3-110b). The button (11.1.3-114) may be in electrical communication with the first and second motors (11.1.3-110a, 11.1.3-110b) via a processor or other circuitry components to cause the first and second motors (11.1.3-110a, 11.1.3-110b) to activate and cause the first and second optical modules (11.1.3-104a, 11.1.3-104b) to change positions relative to each other, respectively.

In at least one example, the first and second optical modules (11.1.3-104a, 11.1.3-104b) may include respective display screens configured to project light toward the user's eyes when the HMD (11.1.3-100) is worn. In at least one example, the user may operate (i.e., press and/or rotate) a button (11.1.3-114) to activate positioning of the optical modules (11.1.3-104a, 11.1.3-104b) to match the interpupillary distance of the user's eyes. The optical modules (11.1.3-104a, 11.1.3-104b) may also include one or more cameras or other sensors/sensor systems for imaging and measuring the user's IPD so that the optical modules (11.1.3-104a, 11.1.3-104b) can be adjusted to match the IPD.

The first and second optical modules (11.1.3-104a, 11.1.3-104b) may be mechanically and slidably coupled to the first and second guide rods (11.1.3-108a, 11.1.3-108b), respectively. In at least one example, the first optical module (11.1.3-104a) may include an opening, a through hole, or a channel that engages the guide rod (11.1.3-108a) to maintain the optical module (11.1.3-104a) axially in position with the guide rod (11.1.3-108a) as the optical module (11.1.3-104a) slides along the guide rod (11.1.3-108a) during IPD adjustments. The same may also be included in the second optical module (11.1.3-104b). In some examples, the optical modules (11.1.3-104a, 11.1.3-104b) may include guide rods that slidably engage with respective channels of the adjustment mechanism (11.1.3-102).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations depicted in FIG. 201 ) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions depicted in any of the other drawings illustrated and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations depicted in and described with reference to any of the other drawings illustrated and described herein) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions depicted in FIG. 201 .

FIG. 202 illustrates an enlarged view of an example of an HMD (11.1.3-200) and an adjustment mechanism (11.1.3-202) similar to those illustrated in FIG. 201, but with the optical module removed to more clearly illustrate the upper guide rod (11.1.3-208). The guide rod (11.1.3-208) may extend from, near, or above the upper portion or face of the optical module and may guide the optical module axially back and forth along the guide rod (11.1.3-208) during the IPD adjustments described above. In at least one example, the guide rod (11.1.3-208) extends from a center bracket (11.1.3-212) secured to a frame or chassis (11.1.3-216) of the HMD (11.1.3-200). In one example, the guide rod (11.1.3-208) is cantilevered such that a first proximal end (11.1.3-220) of the guide rod (11.1.3-208) is secured to the bracket (11.1.3-212) and a second distal end (11.1.3-222), opposite the first end (11.1.3-220), is not attached to any other structure. In this manner, the guide rod (11.1.3-208) can be cantilevered away from the bracket (11.1.3-212).

In at least one example, the adjustment mechanism (11.1.3 11.1.3-202) also includes a stop (218) positioned at or near the distal end (11.1.3-222) of the guide rod (11.1.3-208). In at least one example, the stop (11.1.3-218) may include a cavity or channel through which the distal end of the guide rod (11.1.3-208) extends. However, in at least one example, no contact is made between the guide rod (11.1.3-208) and the stop (11.1.3-218), such that the guide rod (11.1.3-208) becomes cantilevered as described above. The stop (11.1.3-218) may be configured to prevent the optical module (not shown) from moving distally too far along the guide rod (11.1.3-208) and beyond its distal end (11.1.3-222) during IPD adjustment. The stop (11.1.3-218) may also serve to prevent excessive deformation of the cantilevered guide rod (11.1.3-208) during unintended dropping events or other forces that may cause deformation of the guide rod (11.1.3-208) and movement of the distal end (11.1.3-222) of the guide rod (11.1.3-208). In at least one example, the distal end (11.1.3-222) of the guide rod (11.1.3-208) extends into or is at least partially surrounded by the stop (11.1.3-218) without making contact therewith during normal use of the HMD (11.1.3-200). If unintentionally moved or elastically deformed, the distal end (11.1.3-222) or a portion thereof of the guide rod (11.1.3-208) may make contact with the stop (11.1.3-218), such that the stop (11.1.3-218) prevents excessive deformation of the guide rod (11.1.3-208), and thus prevents plastic deformation and damage of the guide rod (11.1.3-208).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIGS. 201 and 202) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in any of the other drawings illustrated and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated and described with reference to any of the other drawings illustrated and described herein) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 201 and 202.

FIG. 203 depicts another drawing of an example of an adjustment system (11.1.3-302) having a first guide rod (11.1.3-308a) and a second guide rod (11.1.3-308b) that are similar to those depicted in FIGS. 201 and 202, but extending in opposite directions from a center bracket (11.1.3-312). In the illustrated example, the adjustment mechanism (11.1.3-302) also includes a second stop (11.1.3-318a) associated with the distal end of the first guide rod (11.1.3-308a), which may be similar in form and function to the stop (11.1.3-218) described above with reference to FIG. 202.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 203) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in any of the other drawings illustrated and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated and described with reference to any of the other drawings illustrated and described herein) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 203.

11.1.3.1: Motors

FIG. 1 illustrates a rear perspective view of a display assembly (11.1.3.1-102) of an HMD (11.1.3.1-100) with one or more components, including a curtain assembly, removed to illustrate various internal components of the HMD (11.1.3.1-100). FIG. 204 illustrates a display assembly (11.1.3.1-102) that may include a first display module (11.1.3.1-104a) and a second display module (11.1.3.1-104b). The first display module (11.1.3.1-104a) can be slidably engaged/coupled with the first adjustment mechanism (11.1.3.1-106a), and the second optical module (11.1.3.1-104b) can be slidably engaged/coupled with the second adjustment mechanism (11.1.3.1-106b). The first and second adjustment mechanisms (11.1.3.1-106a, 11.1.3.1-106b) can include first and second respective guide rods (11.1.3.1-108a, 11.1.3.1-108b) and motors (11.1.3.1-110a, 11.1.3.1-110b). The first and second guide rods may be similar so that one description applies to the other, wherein the first guide rod (11.1.3.1-108a) extends in a first direction away from the bracket (11.1.3.1-112) and the second guide rod (11.1.3.1-108b) extends in a second direction away from the bracket (11.1.3.1-112) opposite to the first direction.

Likewise, the first and second motors (11.1.3.1-110a, 11.1.3.1-110b) may be similar such that one description applies to the other, wherein the first motor (11.1.3.1-110a) is mechanically engaged with the first optical module (11.1.3.1-104a) to adjust its position via the first guide rod (11.1.3.1-108a), and the second motor (11.1.3.1-110b) is mechanically engaged with the second optical module (11.1.3.1-104b) to adjust its position via the second guide rod (11.1.3.1-108b). In at least one example, the HMD (11.1.3.1-100) also includes a pressable and/or rotatable button (11.1.3.1-114) electrically coupled to the first and second motors (11.1.3.1-110a, 11.1.3.1-110b). The button (11.1.3.1-114) may be in electrical communication with the first and second motors (11.1.3.1-110a, 11.1.3.1-110b) via the processor or other circuit components to cause the first and second motors (11.1.3.1-110a, 11.1.3.1-110b) to be activated and the first and second optical modules (11.1.3.1-104a, 11.1.3.1-104b) to change positions relative to each other, respectively.

In at least one example, the motors (11.1.3.1-110a, 11.1.3.1-110b) are configured to actuate the optical modules (11.1.3.1-104a, 11.1.3.1-104b) inwardly and outwardly relative to the bracket (11.1.3.1-112) and thus to the user's nose. Thus, in at least one example, the motors (11.1.3.1-110a, 11.1.3.1-110b) operate under MS1 safety standards, and the button (11.1.3.1-114) that operates/actuates the motors (11.1.3.1-110a, 11.1.3.1-110b) comprises a “dead-man’s button”, such that the motors (11.1.3.1-110a, 11.1.3.1-110b) are operable only when the button (11.1.3.1-110a, 11.1.3.1-110b) is actuated, e.g., pressed and/or rotated.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations depicted in FIG. 204) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions depicted in any of the other drawings illustrated and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations depicted in and described with reference to any of the other drawings illustrated and described herein) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions depicted in FIG. 204.

Figure 205 illustrates a perspective view of an example motor (11.1.3.1-210) similar to those illustrated in Figure 204 (11.1.3.1-110a, 11.1.3.1-110b). Figure 206 illustrates a cross-sectional view illustrating internal components of the motor (11.1.3.1-210). In at least one example, the motor (11.1.3.1-210) may include a gearbox and separate spring-loaded clutches within a nut (e.g., a "split nut"). The split nut may be configured to prevent forces from being transmitted through the motor (11.1.3.1-210) during a drop event. In at least one example, during use, the motor (11.1.3.1-210) may be operated in a resonant valley to reduce noise.

In at least one example, the motor may include one or more dust covers (not shown) surrounding the housing to prevent dust and other debris from contaminating the internal volume of the motor (11.1.3.1-210) where the lead screw and other components are disposed. In at least one example, the dust covers may include tape wraps. In at least one example, the motor (11.1.3.1-210) may include a split screw/nut to minimize the forces transmitted from the motor (11.1.3.1-210) to the optical module during high-shock scenarios, such as a drop event, thereby reducing noise and forming a separate component to release the optical module driven by the motor (11.1.3.1-210).

In at least one example, the motor (11.1.3.1-210) may include a gear reduction mechanism or assembly, such as a planetary gear reduction assembly. In at least one example, the motor (11.1.3.1-210) may include a clutch for tuning the force to a desired level to release the downward length. In at least one example, the motor (11.1.3.1-210) may include pre-mounted ball bearings to reduce play in the motor (11.1.3.1-210).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 205 and 206) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in any of the other drawings illustrated and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated and described with reference to any of the other drawings illustrated and described herein) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 205 and 206.

11.1.3.1.1: Electronic devices having optical module positioning systems

A head-mounted device may have optical modules that present images to a user's eyes. Each optical module may have a lens barrel having a display and a lens that presents images from the display to a corresponding eye box.

To accommodate users with different pupillary distances, the optical modules can be slidably coupled to guide elements, such as guide rods. Actuators can slide the optical modules along the guide rods toward or away from each other, thereby accommodating different pupillary distances.

The guide rods may be formed of fiber-reinforced composite tubes having one or more end caps that are fastened to the frame in the head-mounted device. A common end cap may be used to connect a pair of guide rods, if desired. The end caps may be formed as separate pieces that are attached to the ends of the fiber-reinforced composite tubes or other guide rod structures, and/or may be integral parts of the fiber-reinforced composite tubes or other guide rod structures.

The guide rods may include a left guide rod or a pair of left guide rods slidably engaged with the left optical module and a right guide rod or a pair of right guide rods slidably engaged with the right optical module. The left and right guide rods may be inclined at a non-zero angle with respect to each other to help guide the optical modules parallel to the surface of the user's face.

The tubes of the guide rods may be partially or completely filled with cores for added strength. Low-friction coatings, such as metallic coatings, may be applied to the tubes and to the corresponding inner surfaces of the optical module structures housing the tubes.

An electronic device, such as a head-mounted device, may have a front surface facing away from the user's head and a rear surface facing toward the user's head. Optical modules on the rear surface may be used to provide images to the user's eyes. The positions of the optical modules may be adjusted to accommodate different user interpupillary distances. The head-mounted device may have actuators and optical module guide structures that allow the positions of the optical modules to be adjusted.

A plan view of an exemplary head-mounted device is illustrated in FIG. 207. As illustrated in FIG. 207, head-mounted devices, such as electronic devices (11.1.3.1.1-10), may have head-mounted support structures, such as housings (11.1.3.1.1-12). The housings (11.1.3.1.1-12) may include portions (e.g., head-mounted support structures (11.1.3.1.1-12T)) that allow the devices (11.1.3.1.1-10) to be worn on a user's head. The support structures (11.1.3.1.1-12T) may be formed of fabric, polymers, metals, and/or other materials. The support structures (11.1.3.1.1-12T) may form straps or other head-mounted support structures that help support the device (11.1.3.1.1-10) on the user's head. The main support structure of the housing (11.1.3.1.1-12) (e.g., the main housing portion (11.1.3.1.1-12M)) may support electronic components such as displays (11.1.3.1.1-14).

The main housing portion (11.1.3.1.1-12M) may include housing structures formed from metal, polymer, glass, ceramic, and/or other materials. For example, the housing portion (11.1.3.1.1-12M) may have housing walls on the front side (F) formed from a rigid polymer or other rigid support structure, and adjacent housing walls on the top, bottom, left, and right sides, which rigid walls may optionally be covered with electrical components, fabric, leather, or other flexible materials. The housing portion (11.1.3.1.1-12M) may also have internal support structures, such as a frame, and/or structures that perform multiple functions, such as airflow control, while providing structural support. The walls of the housing portion (11.1.3.1.1-12M) can surround internal components (11.1.3.1.1-38) of the internal region (11.1.3.1.1-34) of the device (11.1.3.1.1-10) and can separate the internal region (11.1.3.1.1-34) from an environment (external region (11.1.3.1.1-36)) surrounding the device (11.1.3.1.1-10). The internal components (11.1.3.1.1-38) can include integrated circuits, actuators, batteries, sensors, and/or other circuits and structures for the device (11.1.3.1.1-10). The housing (11.1.3.1.1-12) may be configured to be worn on a user's head and may form eyeglasses, a hat, a helmet, goggles, and/or other head-mounted devices. A configuration in which the housing (11.1.3.1.1-12) forms goggles may sometimes be described herein as an example.

A front side (F) of the housing (11.1.3.1.1-12) may face outward from the user's head and face. An opposite rear side (R) of the housing (11.1.3.1.1-12) may face the user. A portion of the housing (11.1.3.1.1-12) on the rear side (R) (e.g., a portion of the main housing (11.1.3.1.1-12M)) may form a cover, such as a cover (11.1.3.1.1-12C) (sometimes referred to as a curtain). The presence of the cover (11.1.3.1.1-12C) on the rear side (R) may help conceal the internal housing structure, internal components (11.1.3.1.1-38), and other structures of the internal area (11.1.3.1.1-34) from the user's view.

A device (11.1.3.1.1-10) may have left and right optical modules (11.1.3.1.1-40). The optical modules (11.1.3.1.1-40) support electrical and optical components, such as light-emitting components and lenses, and may therefore sometimes be referred to as an optical assembly, an optical system, an optical component support structure, a lens and display support structure, an electrical component support structure, or a housing structure. Each optical module may include a support structure, such as a respective display (11.1.3.1.1-14), a lens (11.1.3.1.1-30), and a lens barrel (11.1.3.1.1-32). Lens barrels (11.1.3.1.1-32), which may sometimes be referred to as lens support structures, optical component support structures, optical module support structures, or optical module parts, may include hollow cylindrical structures having open ends or other support structures that accommodate the display (11.1.3.1.1-14) and the lens (11.1.3.1.1-30). The lens barrels (11.1.3.1.1-32) may include, for example, a left lens barrel that supports the left display (11.1.3.1.1-14) and the left lens (11.1.3.1.1-30), and a right lens barrel that supports the right display (11.1.3.1.1-14) and the right lens (11.1.3.1.1-30).

The displays (11.1.3.1.1-14) may include arrays of pixels or other display devices for generating images. The displays (11.1.3.1.1-14) may include, for example, organic light emitting diode pixels formed on substrates having thin film circuitry and/or formed on semiconductor substrates, pixels formed from crystalline semiconductor dies, liquid crystal display pixels, scanning display devices, and/or other display devices for generating images.

The lenses (11.1.3.1.1-30) may include one or more lens elements for providing image light from the displays (11.1.3.1.1-14) to the respective eye boxes (11.1.3.1.1-13). The lenses may be implemented using refractive glass lens elements, mirror lens structures (catadioptric lenses), Fresnel lenses, holographic lenses, and/or other lens systems.

When the user's eyes are positioned on the eye boxes (11.1.3.1.1-13), the displays (display panels) (11.1.3.1.1-14) work together to form a display for the device (11.1.3.1.1-10) (e.g., images provided by each of the left and right optical modules (11.1.3.1.1-40) can be viewed by the user's eyes at the eye boxes (11.1.3.1.1-13) so that a stereo image can be created for the user). While the user views the display, the left image from the left optical module is fused with the right image from the right optical module.

It may be desirable to monitor the user's eyes while the user's eyes are in the eye box (11.1.3.1.1-13). For example, it may be desirable to capture an image of the user's iris (or other part of the user's eye) using a camera for user authentication. It may also be desirable to monitor the user's gaze direction. Gaze tracking information may be used in the form of user input and/or may be used to determine whether image content resolution within the image needs to be locally enhanced in a foveated imaging system. To enable the device (11.1.3.1.1-10) to capture satisfactory eye images while the user's eyes are in the eye box (11.1.3.1.1-13), each optical module (11.1.3.1.1-40) may be provided with a camera, such as a camera (11.1.3.1.1-42), and one or more light sources, such as light emitting diodes (11.1.3.1.1-44) or other light emitting devices, such as lasers, lamps, etc. The camera (11.1.3.1.1-42) and light-emitting diode (11.1.3.1.1-44) may operate at any suitable wavelength (visible, infrared, and/or ultraviolet). For example, the diode (11.1.3.1.1-44) may emit infrared light that is invisible (or nearly invisible) to the user. This allows the eye monitoring operation to be performed continuously without interfering with the user's ability to view the image on the display (11.1.3.1.1-14).

Not all users have the same interpupillary distance (IPD). To provide the device (11.1.3.1.1-10) with the ability to adjust the interpupillary spacing between the modules (11.1.3.1.1-40) along the lateral dimension (X) and thereby adjust the IPD between the eye boxes (11.1.3.1.1-13) to accommodate different user interpupillary distances, the device (11.1.3.1.1-10) may be provided with optical module positioning systems within the housing (11.1.3.1.1-12). The positioning systems may have guide members and actuators (11.1.3.1.1-43) used to position the optical modules (11.1.3.1.1-40) relative to one another.

The actuators (11.1.3.1.1-43) may be manually controlled to move the lens barrels (11.1.3.1.1-32) relative to each other and/or may be computer-controlled actuators (e.g., computer-controlled motors). Information about the positions of the user's eyes may be collected, for example, using cameras (11.1.3.1.1-42). The positions of the eye boxes (11.1.3.1.1-13) may then be adjusted accordingly.

As shown in the rear view of the device (11.1.3.1.1-10) of FIG. 208, the cover (11.1.3.1.1-12C) may cover the rear surface (R) while leaving the lenses (11.1.3.1.1-30) of the optical modules (11.1.3.1.1-40) uncovered (e.g., the cover (11.1.3.1.1-12C) may have openings that are aligned with and accommodate the modules (11.1.3.1.1-40). As the modules (11.1.3.1.1-40) are moved relative to each other along dimension (X) to accommodate different inter-spatial distances for different users, the modules (11.1.3.1.1-40) move relative to fixed housing structures, such as the walls of the main section (11.1.3.1.1-12M), and relative to each other.

A schematic diagram of an exemplary electronic device, such as a head-mounted device or other wearable device, is illustrated in FIG. 209. The device (11.1.3.1.1-10) of FIG. 209 may operate as a standalone device and/or the resources of the device (11.1.3.1.1-10) may be used to communicate with external electronic equipment. For example, communication circuitry in the device (11.1.3.1.1-10) may be used to transmit user input information, sensor information, and/or other information (e.g., wirelessly or via a wired connection) to external electronic devices. Each of these external devices may include components of the type illustrated by the device (11.1.3.1.1-10) of FIG. 209.

As illustrated in FIG. 209, a head-mounted device, such as device (11.1.3.1.1-10), may include control circuitry (11.1.3.1.1-20). The control circuitry (11.1.3.1.1-20) may include storage and processing circuitry to support operation of the device (11.1.3.1.1-10). The storage and processing circuitry may include storage, such as non-volatile memory (e.g., flash memory or other electrically programmable read-only memory configured to form a solid-state drive), volatile memory (e.g., static or dynamic random access memory), etc. Processing circuitry within the control circuitry (11.1.3.1.1-20) may be used to collect input from sensors and other input devices, and may be used to control output devices. The processing circuitry may be based on one or more microprocessors, microcontrollers, digital signal processors, baseband processors, and other wireless communication circuits, power management units, audio chips, application-specific integrated circuits, etc. During operation, the control circuitry (11.1.3.1.1-20) may use display(s) (11.1.3.1.1-14) and other output devices to provide visual and other output to a user.

To support communication between the device (11.1.3.1.1-10) and external equipment, the control circuitry (11.1.3.1.1-20) may communicate using communication circuitry (11.1.3.1.1-22). The circuitry (11.1.3.1.1-22) may include an antenna, radio frequency transceiver circuitry, other wireless communication circuitry, and/or wired communication circuitry. The circuitry (11.1.3.1.1-22), which may sometimes be referred to as control circuitry and/or control and communication circuitry, may support two-way wireless communication between the device (11.1.3.1.1-10) and external equipment (e.g., a companion device, such as a computer, a cellular telephone, or other electronic device, an accessory, such as a pointing device, a computer stylus, or other input device, a speaker, or other output devices, etc.) over a wireless link. For example, the circuitry (11.1.3.1.1-22) may include radio frequency transceiver circuitry, such as wireless local area network transceiver circuitry configured to support communications over a wireless local area network link, near field communication transceiver circuitry configured to support communications over a near field communication link, cellular telephone transceiver circuitry configured to support communications over a cellular telephone link, or transceiver circuitry configured to support communications over any other suitable wired or wireless communication link. The wireless communication may be supported, for example, via a Bluetooth® link, a WiFi® link, a wireless link operating at a frequency between 10 GHz and 400 GHz, a 60 GHz link or other millimeter wave link, a cellular telephone link, or other wireless communication link. If desired, the device (11.1.3.1.1-10) may include power circuitry for transmitting and/or receiving wired and/or wireless power and may include a battery or other energy storage device. For example, the device (11.1.3.1.1-10) may include a coil and a rectifier for receiving wireless power provided to the circuit portion of the device (11.1.3.1.1-10).

The device (11.1.3.1.1-10) may include an input/output device, such as the device (11.1.3.1.1-24). The input/output device (11.1.3.1.1-24) may be used to collect user input, collect information about the user's surroundings, and/or provide output to the user. The device (11.1.3.1.1-24) may include one or more displays, such as the display(s) (11.1.3.1.1-14). The display(s) (11.1.3.1.1-14) may include one or more display devices, such as an organic light emitting diode display panel (a panel having organic light emitting diode pixels formed on a polymer substrate or silicon substrate including pixel control circuitry), a liquid crystal display panel, a microelectromechanical system display (e.g., a two-dimensional mirror array or scanning mirror display device), a display panel having a pixel array formed of crystalline semiconductor light emitting diode dies (sometimes referred to as microLEDs), and/or other display devices.

Sensors (11.1.3.1.1-16) of input/output devices (11.1.3.1.1-24) may include force sensors (e.g., strain gauges, capacitive force sensors, resistive sensors, etc.), audio sensors such as microphones, touch and/or proximity sensors, capacitive sensors such as touch sensors forming buttons, trackpads, or other input devices, and other sensors. If required, sensors (11.1.3.1.1-16) may include optical sensors, e.g., optical sensors that emit and detect light, ultrasonic sensors, optical touch sensors, optical proximity sensors, and/or other touch sensors and/or proximity sensors, monochrome and color ambient light sensors, image sensors, fingerprint sensors, iris scanning sensors, retina scanning sensors, and other biometric sensors, temperature sensors, sensors for measuring three-dimensional non-contact gestures ("air gestures"), pressure sensors, sensors for detecting position, orientation, and/or motion (e.g., accelerometers, magnetic sensors, e.g., compass sensors, gyroscopes, and/or inertial measurement units including some or all of these sensors), health sensors such as blood oxygen sensors, heart rate sensors, blood flow sensors, and/or other health sensors, radio frequency sensors, depth sensors (e.g., to capture three-dimensional images). Structured light sensors and/or depth sensors based on stereo imaging devices that capture information), optical sensors such as self-mixing sensors and light detection and ranging (LIDAR) sensors that collect time-of-flight measurements, humidity sensors, moisture sensors, gaze tracking sensors, electromyography sensors for detecting muscle activity, facial sensors, and/or other sensors. In some arrangements, the device (11.1.3.1.1-10) may use sensors (11.1.3.1.1-16) and/or other input/output devices to collect user input. For example, a button can be used to collect button press input, a touch sensor overlap display can be used to collect user touch screen input, a touchpad can be used to collect touch input, a microphone can be used to collect audio input (e.g., voice commands), and an accelerometer can be used to monitor when a finger touches an input surface and thus can be used to collect finger press input.

If desired, the electronic device (11.1.3.1.1-10) may include additional components (see, e.g., other devices (11.1.3.1.1-18) of the input/output devices (11.1.3.1.1-24)). Additional components may include a haptic output device, an actuator for moving the movable housing structure, an audio output device, e.g., a speaker, a light emitting diode for status indication, a light source, e.g., a light emitting diode for illuminating a portion of the housing and/or display structure, other light output devices, and/or other circuitry for collecting input and/or providing output. The device (11.1.3.1.1-10) may also include a battery or other energy storage device, a connector port for supporting wired communication with and receiving wired power from auxiliary equipment, and other circuitry.

A rear view of the device (11.1.3.1.1-10) is illustrated in FIG. 210. In the example of FIG. 210, the cover (11.1.3.1.1-12C) has been removed to expose internal housing structures, such as a frame (11.1.3.1.1-12FC). The frame (11.1.3.1.1-12FC) may be formed of polymer support structures for the main housing portion (11.1.3.1.1-12M), support structures formed of carbon fiber composite materials and/or other fiber composite materials, metal support structures, glass housing structures, and/or other support structures. Portions of the frame (11.1.3.1.1-12FC) extending horizontally (along the upper and lower edges of the device (11.1.3.1.1-10) parallel to the X-axis of FIG. 210) may be connected by vertically extending edge portions of the frame (11.1.3.1.1-12FC) along the left and right sides of the device (11.1.3.1.1-10) (e.g., see frame edge portions (11.1.3.1.1-12FC-E)) and may be connected at the center of the device (11.1.3.1.1-10) by vertically extending nose bridge portions (e.g., see frame center portion (11.1.3.1.1-12FC-M)).

The optical modules (11.1.3.1.1-40) may be guided using optical module guide structures, such as optical module guide rods (11.1.3.1.1-50). The guide rods (11.1.3.1.1-50) may extend horizontally (e.g., parallel to the X-axis of FIG. 210) across the device (11.1.3.1.1-10). In the example of FIG. 210, the guide rods (11.1.3.1.1-50) include an upper set of left and right guide rods in an upper position (11.1.3.1.1-52) and a lower set of left and right guide rods in a lower position (11.1.3.1.1-54). The device (11.1.3.1.1-10) may have more or fewer guide rods, if desired. Fasteners (11.1.3.1.1-56) (e.g., screws) or other attachment structures (e.g., adhesives, welds, etc.) may be used to attach the guide rods (11.1.3.1.1-50) to the frame (11.1.3.1.1-12FC). As an example, the fasteners may attach the ends of rods (11.1.3.1.1-50) positioned on the left side of the device (11.1.3.1.1-10) between the left frame edge portion (11.1.3.1.1-12FC-E) and the frame center portion (11.1.3.1.1-12FC-M), and may attach the ends of rods (11.1.3.1.1-50) positioned on the right side of the device (11.1.3.1.1-10) between the right frame edge portion (11.1.3.1.1-12FC-E) and the frame center portion (11.1.3.1.1-12FC-M). The guide rods (11.1.3.1.1-50) may also be attached to the frame or to an intermediate subframe. The guide rods may be secured to the frame or subframe at both ends (as illustrated), or each guide rod may be attached to the frame only at a single end. For example, each guide rod may be secured to the frame only at the central portion of the frame.

Each optical module may have portions that slidably engage with the guide rods (11.1.3.1.1-50). For example, each optical module (11.1.3.1.1-40) may have an upper guide rod engagement portion (sometimes referred to as a hanger or hanger portion), such as an optical module portion (11.1.3.1.1-40H) that receives and engages each guide rod (11.1.3.1.1-50) at an upper guide rod location (11.1.3.1.1-52). Each optical module (11.1.3.1.1-40) may also have a lower guide rod engagement portion (sometimes referred to as a toe or toe portion), such as an optical module portion (11.1.3.1.1-40T) that receives and engages a respective guide rod (11.1.3.1.1-50) at a lower guide rod location (11.1.3.1.1-54). The portion (11.1.3.1.1-40T) may be an integral portion of a lens barrel (11.1.3.1.1-32) or other support structure for the optical module (11.1.3.1.1-40), or may be formed from one or more separate structures attached to the lens barrel (11.1.3.1.1-32). The portion (11.1.3.1.1-40H) may be an integral part of the lens barrel (11.1.3.1.1-32) or may be formed from one or more separate optical module structures that are attached to the lens barrel (11.1.3.1.1-32) by fasteners (11.1.3.1.1-60) (e.g., screws), as illustrated in FIG. 210. If desired, the guide rods (11.1.3.1.1-50) may be provided with structures that act as stops to prevent over-travel of the optical modules (11.1.3.1.1-40). For example, each of the guide rods (11.1.3.1.1-50) may have one or more stop structures, such as a plug (11.1.3.1.1-57). During the sliding movement of the optical module (11.1.3.1.1-40), excessive movement will be prevented when the part (11.1.3.1.1-40H) comes into contact with the plug (11.1.3.1.1-57) and is thereby stopped by the plug (11.1.3.1.1-57). The optical module sliding motion stop structures, such as the plug (11.1.3.1.1-57), can be attached to the guide rods (11.1.3.1.1-50) by screw fixation, welding, using an adhesive, or using other attachment structures. The plug (11.1.3.1.1-57) may be a separate structure from the rods (11.1.3.1.1-50) or these structures may be formed as part of the guide rods (11.1.3.1.1-50) (e.g., a metal guide rod or other guide rod may be machined or otherwise formed into a shape that includes an integral sliding motion stop structure).

The guide rods (11.1.3.1.1-50) may have a circular cross-sectional shape (as viewed in the Y-Z plane of FIG. 210) or may have any other suitable cross-sectional shape. Portions of the optical module (11.1.3.1.1-40) that accommodate the guide rods (11.1.3.1.1-50) may have corresponding matching shapes (e.g., full or partial circular openings having inner diameters corresponding to the outer diameters of the guide rods (11.1.3.1.1-50). To prevent sticking, the inner surfaces of the optical module guide rod openings and/or the outer surfaces of the guide rods (11.1.3.1.1-50) may be provided with low-stick surfaces (e.g., using low-stick coatings, a lubricant such as grease, etc.).

The actuators (11.1.3.1.1-43) may have associated threaded members, such as threaded actuator rods (11.1.3.1.1-62). The optical module parts (11.1.3.1.1-40H) may have corresponding threaded nuts (11.1.3.1.1-64) or other threaded parts that accommodate the threaded actuator rods (11.1.3.1.1-62). During operation, the actuators (11.1.3.1.1-43) can rotate the threaded actuator rods (11.1.3.1.1-62) about the actuator rod rotation axes (11.1.3.1.1-66), thereby moving the optical modules (11.1.3.1.1-40) outwardly (away from each other) in the desired directions (11.1.3.1.1-68) or inwardly (toward each other) in the desired directions (11.1.3.1.1-70) to adjust the positions of the optical modules (11.1.3.1.1-40) relative to each other (e.g., adjusting the lens center-to-lens center spacing of the left and right lenses within the device (11.1.3.1.1-10) to accommodate different pupillary distances for different users).

FIG. 211 is an end view of an exemplary portion of an optical module (11.1.3.1.1-40), such as portion (11.1.3.1.1-40H) of FIG. 210. As illustrated in FIG. 211, the optical module portion (11.1.3.1.1-40H) may have a first opening, such as an opening (11.1.3.1.1-72), such as a threaded opening in a nut (11.1.3.1.1-64) or another portion of the optical module portion (11.1.3.1.1-40H). The opening (72) may accommodate a threaded rod (11.1.3.1.1-62).

The optical module portion (11.1.3.1.1-40H) may also have a second opening, such as an opening (11.1.3.1.1-76). The opening (11.1.3.1.1-76) may accommodate a guide rod (e.g., a guide rod positioned at an upper position (11.1.3.1.1-52)). If desired, the optical module portion (11.1.3.1.1-40T) may have an opening, such as an opening (11.1.3.1.1-76), for accommodating a guide rod (e.g., a guide rod positioned at a lower position (11.1.3.1.1-54)). As illustrated in FIG. 211, the interior surfaces of the aperture (11.1.3.1.1-76) may have one or more layers of material forming a low-friction coating (11.1.3.1.1-78). In an exemplary configuration, the optical module (11.1.3.1.1-40) (e.g., the optical module portion (11.1.3.1.1-40H), the lens barrel (11.1.3.1.1-32), and/or the optical module portion (11.1.3.1.1-40T)) is formed of a metal (e.g., aluminum), and the coating (11.1.3.1.1-78) is formed of one or more deposited (e.g., electrodeposited) metal layers (e.g., nickel, etc.). Configurations in which the modules (11.1.3.1.1-40) are formed of a polymer coated with metal and/or in which the modules (11.1.3.1.1-40) are formed of other materials may be used, if desired.

The guide rods (11.1.3.1.1-52) may be formed of elongated guide member structures, such as tubes. The tubes may be cylindrical tubes or may be tubes of other suitable shapes (e.g., tubes having rectangular cross-sectional shapes, etc.). The guide rods (11.1.3.1.1-52) may be formed of completely hollow tubes, partially hollow tubes partially filled with cores, or tubes completely filled with a filler material (e.g., rods formed of tubes completely filled with a core material that is different in composition, density, manufacturing method, or other aspects from the material of the tubes, such as a composite core material formed of fibers or other structures embedded in a polymer, rods formed of a single material, such as a solid cylindrical rod, solid composite rods of fiber composite materials, such as solid cylindrical composite rods, rods formed of other composites, solid rods of metal or polymer, etc.). The use of tubes that are at least partially hollow can help reduce weight and thereby improve the comfort of the user-worn device (11.1.3.1.1-10).

Figure 212 is a cross-sectional view of an exemplary guide rod. As illustrated in Figure 212, the guide rod (11.1.3.1.1-50) may include a guide rod end member, such as a guide rod tube (11.1.3.1.1-82) and an end cap (11.1.3.1.1-86). The guide rod tube (11.1.3.1.1-82) may be hollow and characterized by cylindrical walls surrounding an interior (84). In the example of Figure 212, the tube (11.1.3.1.1-82) extends along a longitudinal axis (11.1.3.1.1-80) and is rotationally symmetric about the axis (11.1.3.1.1-80) (e.g., the tube (11.1.3.1.1-82) is cylindrical). The end cap (11.1.3.1.1-86) can be attached to the end of the tube (11.1.3.1.1-82) by molding a polymeric end cap material over the end of the tube (11.1.3.1.1-82), using adhesives, fasteners, welds, and/or other attachment mechanisms. In an exemplary configuration, the end cap (11.1.3.1.1-86) can have a first opening, such as an opening (11.1.3.1.1-88) (e.g., a through hole opening) for receiving a first fastener (e.g., a first screw), and can have a second opening, such as an opening (11.1.3.1.1-90) (e.g., a through hole opening) for receiving a second fastener (e.g., a second screw). A first screw may be used to attach the end cap (11.1.3.1.1-86) to the end of the tube (11.1.3.1.1-82), and a second screw may be used to attach the end cap (11.1.3.1.1-86) to the main housing portion (11.1.3.1.1-12M) (e.g., frame (11.1.3.1.1-12FC)). A different number of end cap openings and/or different features (e.g., screws) within the end cap (11.1.3.1.1-86) for attaching the end cap (11.1.3.1.1-86) to the end of the tube (11.1.3.1.1-82) may be used, if desired.

Figure 213 is a side view of the guide rod (11.1.3.1.1-50) of Figure 213 after the end cap (11.1.3.1.1-86) has been inserted into the end of the tube (11.1.3.1.1-82). The portion of the end cap (11.1.3.1.1-86) that is inserted into the tube (11.1.3.1.1-82) may have an outer diameter corresponding to the inner diameter of the tube (11.1.3.1.1-82).

As shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 214, fasteners (11.1.3.1.1-92) (e.g., screws) are connected by means of openings (11.1.3.1.1-88) (for attaching the end cap (11.1.3.1.1-86) to the tube (11.1.3.1.1-82)) and by means of openings (11.1.3.1.1-90) (for attaching the end cap (11.1.3.1.1-86) and the remainder of the guide rod (11.1.3.1.1-50) to a housing structure such as a frame (11.1.3.1.1-12FC)) (e.g., by screwing the threaded end of the fastener through openings (11.1.3.1.1-90) into the threaded frame openings (11.1.3.1.1-94). may be accommodated. If desired, the end cap (11.1.3.1.1-86) may have a flattened surface portion, such as a planar surface (96), that mats against a corresponding planar portion of the frame (11.1.3.1.1-12FC) when the end cap (11.1.3.1.1-86) is attached to the frame (11.1.3.1.1-12FC). The presence of mating planar surfaces may help prevent unwanted rotation of the guide rod (11.1.3.1.1-50) about the axis (11.1.3.1.1-80).

As illustrated in FIG. 210, the device (11.1.3.1.1-10) may have left and right guide rods (e.g., upper left and right guide rods and lower left and right guide rods). The left and right guide rods (11.1.3.1.1-50) may have separate end caps (11.1.3.1.1-86) each having a respective opening (90) as illustrated in FIG. 215, or the left and right guide rods (11.1.3.1.1-50) may share one or more openings (90) and a common end cap (11.1.3.1.1-86) as illustrated in FIG. 216. The shared end cap may be straight (e.g., such that the axes (11.1.3.1.1-80) of the left and right guide rods are parallel and aligned with each other, as illustrated by the straight end cap (11.1.3.1.1-86) of FIG. 217) or the shared end cap may be bent (e.g., such that the axes (11.1.3.1.1-80) of the left and right guide rods are not parallel but are inclined at a non-zero angle (A) with respect to each other, as illustrated by the bent end cap (11.1.3.1.1-86) of FIG. 218). Bent end cap structures, such as the bent end cap of FIG. 218, may be formed of single pieces of metal (or other material), or may be formed of two members (e.g., two metal members) connected by a welded joint (e.g., laser welded), adhesive joint, or other joint (11.1.3.1.1-98). Using separate or common end ^cap structures to ^{orient the left and right guide rods (11.1.3.1.1-50) at a non-zero angle (A) with respect to one another (e.g., at least 3 o , at least 6 o , at least} 9 ^o , at least 15 ^o , at least 20 ^o , at least 30 ^o , at least 40 ^o , less than 50 ^o , less than 45 ^o , less than 35 o , less than 25 o , and/or less than 15 o ) may aid in orienting the left and right optical modules of the device (11.1.3.1.1-10) in front of the left and right sides of the user's face (which tend to be slightly inclined away from one another). The left and right guide rods may also be manufactured from a single tube. The single tube may be straight (e.g., the left and right guide rods may be formed from respective left and right portions of a single straight tube), or the left and right guide rods may be formed from respective left and right portions of a single tube that is molded or bent such that the left and right guide rods are oriented at a non-zero angle (A) with respect to one another.

If desired, the rods (11.1.3.1.1-50) may be attached to the housing (11.1.3.1.1-12M) (e.g., the frame (11.1.3.1.1-12FC)) using press-fit connections between the rods (11.1.3.1.1-50) and the housing (11.1.3.1.1-12M), using shrink-fit connections between the rods (11.1.3.1.1-50) and the housing (11.1.3.1.1-12M), and/or using other attachment mechanisms such as glue bonding (e.g., gluing the rods (11.1.3.1.1-50) to the housing (11.1.3.1.1-12M). In some arrangements, some or all of the end caps (11.1.3.1.1-86) may be omitted (e.g., to help reduce weight). For example, the housing (11.1.3.1.1-12M) (e.g., the frame (11.1.3.1.1-12FC)) may include portions configured to be received within the cylindrical hollow interior of the rods (11.1.3.1.1-50) at the ends of the rods (11.1.3.1.1-50) (e.g., the housing (11.1.3.1.1-12M) may have integral housing portions having the shapes of end caps (11.1.3.1.1-84) that are attached to the inside of the rods (11.1.3.1.1-50) using a friction fit from a press-fit or shrink-fit connection and/or using an adhesive), the housing (11.1.3.1.1-12M) may have cylindrical openings or other The rods (11.1.3.1.1-50) may include portions configured to form shapes (e.g., clamp shapes) (e.g., rods (11.1.3.1.1-50) may be inserted into openings of the housing (11.1.3.1.1-12M) to attach the outer surfaces of the ends of the rods (11.1.3.1.1-50) to the housing (11.1.3.1.1-12M) by friction fit and/or adhesive), and/or other housing structures (e.g., portions of the housing (11.1.3.1.1-12M), such as portions of the frame (11.1.3.1.1-12FC)) may directly mount the rods (11.1.3.1.1-50) to the housing (11.1.3.1.1-12M).

If desired, part or all of the interior of each guide rod tube may be filled with a support material. As an example, consider guide rod (11.1.3.1.1-50) of FIG. 219. As illustrated in FIG. 219, each guide rod (11.1.3.1.1-50) within device (11.1.3.1.1-10) may have a pair of end caps (11.1.3.1.1-86) (one for each of the opposite ends of the guide rod tube (11.1.3.1.1-82)). At one or more locations along the length of the tube (11.1.3.1.1-82), such as the exemplary location (11.1.3.1.1-100), the tube (11.1.3.1.1-82) may be provided with a hollow support core (e.g., a polymer core, e.g., a polymer foam core in the shape of a cylindrical rod, a gel core, a low-density thermoplastic polymer, or other low-density core of a polymer, a metal core, a wood core, or a core formed of other support structure), such as the core (11.1.3.1.1-102). The location (11.1.3.1.1-100) may correspond to a central portion of the tube (11.1.3.1.1-82) through which apertures within the optical module (11.1.3.1.1-40), such as (for example) the aperture (11.1.3.1.1-76), travel. The core (11.1.3.1.1-102) may be shear bonded to the inner surface of the tube (11.1.3.1.1-82) and may help provide bending and torsional strength to the guide tube (11.1.3.1.1-50).

The tubes (11.1.3.1.1-82) may be formed of metal, polymer, and/or fiber composite materials, such as carbon fiber materials, fiberglass materials (e.g., fiberglass reinforced structural polymers), other fiber reinforced polymers, etc. The use of fiber composite tubes may help reduce the weight of the rods (11.1.3.1.1-50).

As an example, consider the tube (11.1.3.1.1-82) of FIGS. 220 and 221. As illustrated in the side view of FIG. 220 and the cross-sectional end view of FIG. 221, the fiber composite tube (11.1.3.1.1-82) of FIGS. 220 and 221 can have fibers (11.1.3.1.1-104) embedded in a polymer 11.1.3.1.1-106. The fibers (11.1.3.1.1-104) can be carbon fibers, glass fibers, or strands of other materials to enhance the strength of the polymer (11.1.3.1.1-106). The polymer (11.1.3.1.1-106), sometimes referred to as a binder or resin, may be an epoxy, polyether ether ketone (PEEK), a thermoset polymer, a thermoplastic polymer, and/or other polymeric materials. Materials such as PEEK may exhibit satisfactory wear properties and a low coefficient of friction. If desired, other polymers may be used to form the binder for the tube (11.1.3.1.1-82).

The fibers (11.1.3.1.1-104) may extend in one or more different directions. For example, the fibers (11.1.3.1.1-104) may include fibers that extend longitudinally (parallel to the tube longitudinal axis (11.1.3.1.1-80)), wrap around the circumference of the tube (84) (e.g., about the axis (11.1.3.1.1-80)), and/or have orientations that are oblique to the axis (11.1.3.1.1-80) (e.g., +/- 45 ^o ). These different types of fibers may be formed as a single layer of fibers, or multiple layers of fibers may be stacked. The stack of fiber layers may be wrapped around the tube (11.1.3.1.1-82) and optionally covered with a low-friction coating.

As an example, consider a fiber composite guide rod tube in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 222. In the example of FIG. 222, the guide rod (11.1.3.1.1-50) includes a tube (11.1.3.1.1-82) and an end cap (11.1.3.1.1-86). The end cap (11.1.3.1.1-86) has a hollow tube shape with a hollow inner region (11.1.3.1.1-110). The outer diameter of the end cap (11.1.3.1.1-86) (which includes the hollow portion in the example of FIG. 222) corresponds to the inner diameter of the tube (11.1.3.1.1-82). An optional layer of adhesive (11.1.3.1.1-112) may be used to assist in attaching the end cap (11.1.3.1.1-86) to the tube (11.1.3.1.1-82).

The tube (11.1.3.1.1-82) is hollow and surrounds an inner region (11.1.3.1.1-84). The tube (11.1.3.1.1-82) has a hollow cylindrical fiber composite tube portion formed (in the example of FIG. 222) of fiber composite layers (11.1.3.1.1-114) covered with a low-friction coating (11.1.3.1.1-116). The layers (11.1.3.1.1-114) form a hollow cylindrical fiber composite tube surrounding the inner tube (11.1.3.1.1-84). Any suitable number N of fiber layers may be present within the tube formed by the layers (11.1.3.1.1-114) (e.g., N may be at least one, at least three, at least four, at least six, less than ten, less than eight, less than seven, from 3 to 8, etc.). In the example of FIG. 222, the fiber composite layers (11.1.3.1.1-114) include six fiber composite layers (L1, L2, L3, L4, L5, L6). These layers may have fibers uniaxially aligned and may have fibers oriented at 0 ^o , 90 ^o , 0 ^o , 0 ^o , 90 ^o , and 0 ^o about the axis (11.1.3.1.1-80), respectively. Configurations in which layers (11.1.3.1.1-114) include fibers oriented at +/- 45 ^o or other angles may also be used. Fibers oriented along the length of the tube (11.1.3.1.1-82) may enhance flexural strength. Fibers wrapped around the tube (11.1.3.1.1-82) perpendicular to the axis (11.1.3.1.1-80) may enhance tube strength. Fibers oriented at +/- 45 ^o may enhance torsional stiffness. If desired, different portions along the length of the tube (11.1.3.1.1-82) may have different fiber orientations and/or different numbers of fiber layers.

The coating layer (11.1.3.1.1-116) may, if desired, be formed of one or more metal layers. For example, the first (inner) metal layer (C1) may be a nickel cobalt layer having a thickness of 50 micrometers or other suitable thickness, and the second (outer) metal layer (C2) may be an electroless nickel layer deposited on top of the nickel cobalt layer and having a thickness of 50 to 400 micrometers, 100 to 200 micrometers, or other suitable thickness. The layer (C1) may serve as an adhesion promoting layer. The outer surfaces of the layers (11.1.3.1.1-114) may be etched prior to coating the layers (11.1.3.1.1-114) with the layer (C1) to improve adhesion of the layer (C1) to the layers (11.1.3.1.1-114). The layer (C1) may interlock with the epoxy (or other polymer) within the layers (11.1.3.1.1-114) and may improve the adhesion of the layer (C2). The layer (C2) may help provide low friction to the tube (11.1.3.1.1-82) as it moves back and forth within the opening of the portion (11.1.3.1.1-40H or 11.1.3.1.1-40T) of the optical module (11.1.3.1.1-40) (see, for example, the opening (11.1.3.1.1-76) of FIG. 211, which may have a nickel coating or other low friction coating (11.1.3.1.1-78)). The thickness of the layer (C2) may help improve the strength (e.g., flexural strength) of the tube (11.1.3.1.1-82).

By using guide rods (11.1.3.1.1-50), the lateral positions of the modules (11.1.3.1.1-40) within the device (11.1.3.1.1-10) can be adjusted to accommodate different user interpupillary distances. The optical module positioning adjustments can be automated or manual. The optical positioning system(s) of the device (11.1.3.1.1-10) can use guide structures, such as guide rods (11.1.3.1.1-50), to cause the optical modules (11.1.3.1.1-40) to move along a desired axis. The guide rods and the mounting structures used to attach the guide rods to the housing (11.1.3.1.1-12M) (e.g., frame (11.1.3.1.1-12FC)) may be sufficiently rigid and stiff to resist deformation and misalignment if the device (11.1.3.1.1-10) is inadvertently dropped.

To reduce the load on the actuators (11.1.3.1.1-43) as they rotate the threaded rods (11.1.3.1.1-62) to move the modules (11.1.3.1.1-40) along the guide rods (11.1.3.1.1-50), the guide rods (11.1.3.1.1-50) may be slidably coupled to the modules (11.1.3.1.1-40) using low-friction structures. These low-friction structures may include using low-friction coating materials, such as nickel. The coating layer(s) may be polished (e.g., using a centerless grinding tool) and/or otherwise finished to help reduce friction. If desired, the use of nickel-coated material may be omitted (e.g., when finishing the rods (11.1.3.1.1-50) by burnishing, grinding, or polishing to provide a low-friction surface). The weight of the guide rods (11.1.3.1.1-50), which may affect user comfort, may be reduced by using fiber composites or other lightweight materials in the formation of the guide rod tubes (11.1.3.1.1-82).

An example of a finishing process that can be used to help reduce friction between modules (11.1.3.1.1-40) and rods (11.1.3.1.1-50) is superfinishing. Superfinishing is a microfinishing technique that can be used to improve the surface finish of an article while also improving the accuracy of the contours of the article (e.g., improving the accuracy of the desired shapes of the rods (11.1.3.1.1-50) and/or the accuracy of the desired shapes of the mating portions of the modules (11.1.3.1.1-40), such as improving the cylindricity of the rods (11.1.3.1.1-50). By superfinishing, small amounts of surface material (e.g., 1 to 2 micrometers) are removed by superfinishing equipment using an abrasive. The surface of a superfinished article may be less smoothly polished than when the article is finished using a smooth polishing machine (e.g., there may be residual crosshatched microscratches on the surface of the superfinished article due to vibrations and/or other movements of the abrasive and rotation of the article during finishing). By superfinishing or otherwise treating (e.g., by burnishing, grinding, polishing, etc.) one or more surfaces of parts that slide relative to one another (e.g., surfaces of the rods (11.1.3.1.1-50)), wear may be reduced and smooth sliding operations may be ensured (with or without the use of coatings such as nickel coating layers).

The fiber composite tubes may comprise multiple layers of fiber composite material (e.g., carbon fiber layers having different fiber orientations). The fiber orientations used in the fiber composite layers may be selected to enhance flexural strength, hoop strength (resistance to tube crushing), and/or torsional strength. The end caps (11.1.3.1.1-86) may have solid portions and/or hollow portions and may be formed of one or more metals, polymers, fiber composite materials, etc.

Low-friction coatings for tubes (11.1.3.1.1-82) (see, e.g., coating layers (11.1.3.1.1-116) of FIG. 222) may be formed of metals such as nickel, nickel cobalt, nickel iron, cobalt, chromium (e.g., a top coat of chromium that acts as a friction-reducing hard coat), and/or other low-friction durable (low-wear) coatings.

If desired, the fibers within the tubes (11.1.3.1.1-82) may have different fiber orientations (layups) in different portions of the tubes (11.1.3.1.1-82) (e.g., flexural strength may be improved by fibers that run the length of the tubes (11.1.3.1.1-82), and torsional stiffness may be improved by fibers oriented at +/- 45 ^o with respect to the axis (11.1.3.1.1-80), which fibers may be present along the entire length of the tubes (11.1.3.1.1-82) or only portions of the tubes (11.1.3.1.1-82)), and/or crush/hoop strength may be improved (e.g., particularly if the tubes (11.1.3.1.1-82) are oriented at the ends). The ends of the tubes (11.1.3.1.1-82) attached to the caps (11.1.3.1.1-86) can be improved by using fibers wrapped around the shaft (11.1.3.1.1-80).

The tubes (11.1.3.1.1-82) may be provided with strength enhancing members, such as overmolded polymeric reinforcing members, bonded polymeric and/or metal pieces, if desired. The surface of the tubes (11.1.3.1.1-82) may be treated using acid, laser ablation, primer, sand blasting, and/or other treatments to improve adhesion prior to overmolding operations.

If desired, the tubes (11.1.3.1.1-82) may be provided with tapered sections. As illustrated in FIG. 223, for example, the tubes (11.1.3.1.1-82) may have tapered sections (11.1.3.1.1-82T) formed by grinding and/or machining the ends of the tubes (11.1.3.1.1-82). By forming a tapered outer surface at the end of the tube (11.1.3.1.1-82), the tube (11.1.3.1.1-82) can be precisely aligned with a mating tapered portion of the housing (11.1.3.1.1-12) (e.g., a tapered opening in a portion of the main housing portion (11.1.3.1.1-12M), a portion of the frame (11.1.3.1.1-12FC), or another tapered portion of the housing (11.1.3.1.1-12) that is machined or otherwise formed into the housing). The tapered tube (11.1.3.1.1-82) of FIG. 223 can be retained within the corresponding tapered opening of the housing (11.1.3.1.1-12) using a press-fit connection, using an adhesive, using fasteners, and/or using other suitable attachment mechanisms. In the example of FIG. 223, the tube (11.1.3.1.1-82) is provided with an insert (11.1.3.1.1-120). The insert (11.1.3.1.1-120) may be a solid cylindrical member or tube configured to be received within an end of the hollow center of the tube (11.1.3.1.1-82). Adhesive (11.1.3.1.1-22) or other attachment mechanisms may be used to assist in attaching the insert (11.1.3.1.1-120) to the tube (11.1.3.1.1-82). The insert (11.1.3.1.1-120) may be formed of metal or other suitable materials and may have threads (11.1.3.1.1-124) that mate with corresponding threads within the housing (11.1.3.1.1-12). These threads provide axial retention for the tube (11.1.3.1.1-82) (e.g., the threads (11.1.3.1.1-124) help retain a tapered end of the tube (11.1.3.1.1-82) within a corresponding tapered opening of the housing (11.1.3.1.1-12)). An adhesive may be used, if desired, to lock the threads (11.1.3.1.1-124) in place and/or to help attach the outer surface of the tapered portion (11.1.3.1.1-82T) to the housing (11.1.3.1.1-12) and/or to help reinforce the joint between the tube (11.1.3.1.1-82) and the housing (11.1.3.1.1-12).

11.1.3.1.2: Electronic device having lens position detection capability

To accommodate users with different pupillary distances, the left and right lens assemblies can be moved toward or away from each other. The user may provide the user's pupillary distance to the head-mounted device, and/or an image sensor or other device may be used to measure the pupillary distance and provide it to the head-mounted device, and/or gaze tracking sensors within the head-mounted device may measure the user's pupillary distance while the head-mounted device is worn on the user's head. If desired, other sensing arrays may be used to measure the positions of the lens assemblies relative to the user's nose.

To prevent excessive pressure on the surface of the user's nose, force sensors may be used to determine how much pressure the lenses are applying to the user's nose as the lens-to-lens spacing changes. Control circuitry within the head-mounted device may adjust the left and right lenses to match the user's interpupillary distance as long as the lenses do not apply too much pressure to the user's nose (e.g., as long as the pressure measured by the force sensors does not exceed a threshold). In some situations, the left and right lenses may be spaced such that the lens-to-lens spacing between the left and right lenses matches the user's interpupillary distance. In other situations, the lens-to-lens spacing between the left and right lenses may be slightly larger than the user's interpupillary distance to ensure that the lenses do not press excessively against the user's nose. Sensor circuitry, such as force sensing circuitry, may be used to provide real-time feedback to the control circuitry regarding the pressure applied by the lenses to the user's nose, thereby ensuring that the positions of the left and right lenses are satisfactorily adjusted.

A schematic diagram of an exemplary system having an electronic device having sensor circuitry that ensures satisfactory placement of lenses relative to a user's facial features is illustrated in FIG. 224. As illustrated in FIG. 224, the system (11.1.3.1.2-8) may include one or more electronic devices, such as an electronic device (11.1.3.1.2-10). The electronic devices of the system (11.1.3.1.2-8) may include computers, cellular telephones, head-mounted devices, wristwatch devices, and other electronic devices. Configurations in which the electronic device (11.1.3.1.2-10) is a head-mounted device are sometimes described herein as examples.

As illustrated in FIG. 224, electronic devices such as the electronic device (11.1.3.1.2-10) may have control circuitry (11.1.3.1.2-12). The control circuitry (11.1.3.1.2-12) may include storage and processing circuitry for controlling the operation of the device (11.1.3.1.2-10). The circuitry (11.1.3.1.2-12) may include storage such as hard disk drive storage, non-volatile memory (e.g., electrically programmable read-only memory configured to form a solid state drive), volatile memory (e.g., static or dynamic random access memory), etc. Processing circuitry within the control circuitry (11.1.3.1.2-12) may be based on one or more microprocessors, microcontrollers, digital signal processors, baseband processors, power management units, audio chips, graphics processing units, application specific integrated circuits, and other integrated circuits. Software code may be stored in storage within the circuitry (11.1.3.1.2-12) and executed on the processing circuitry within the circuitry (11.1.3.1.2-12) to implement control operations for the device (11.1.3.1.2-10), such as data acquisition operations, operations involving processing 3D facial image data, operations involving coordinating components using control signals, etc. The control circuitry (11.1.3.1.2-12) may include wired and wireless communication circuitry. For example, the control circuitry (11.1.3.1.2-12) may include radio frequency transceiver circuitry, such as cellular telephone transceiver circuitry, wireless local area network (WiFi®) transceiver circuitry, millimeter wave transceiver circuitry, and/or other wireless communication circuitry.

During operation, the communication circuitry of the devices within the system (11.1.3.1.2-8) (e.g., the communication circuitry of the control circuitry (11.1.3.1.2-12) of the device (11.1.3.1.2-10)) may be used to support communication between the electronic devices. For example, one electronic device may transmit video and/or audio data to another electronic device within the system (11.1.3.1.2-8). The electronic devices within the system (11.1.3.1.2-8) may communicate via one or more communication networks (e.g., the Internet, a local area network, etc.) using wired and/or wireless communication circuitry. The communication circuitry may be used to allow data to be received by the device (11.1.3.1.2-10) from an external device (e.g., a tethered computer, a portable device such as a handheld device or a laptop computer, an online computing device such as a remote server or other remote computing device, or other electronic device) and/or to provide data to the external device.

The device (11.1.3.1.2-10) may include input/output devices (11.1.3.1.2-22). The input/output devices (11.1.3.1.2-22) may be used to allow a user to provide user input to the device (11.1.3.1.2-10). The input/output devices (11.1.3.1.2-22) may also be used to collect information about the environment in which the device (11.1.3.1.2-10) is operating. Output components within the devices (11.1.3.1.2-22) may allow the device (11.1.3.1.2-10) to provide output to the user and may be used to communicate with external electrical equipment.

As illustrated in FIG. 224, the input/output devices (11.1.3.1.2-22) may include one or more displays, such as a display (11.1.3.1.2-14). In some configurations, the display (11.1.3.1.2-14) of the device (11.1.3.1.2-10) may include a left display panel and a right display panel (sometimes referred to as a left portion and a right portion of the display (11.1.3.1.2-14) and/or a left display and a right display) that are aligned with the user's left and right eyes and viewable through the left lens assembly and the right lens assembly, respectively. In other configurations, the display (11.1.3.1.2-14) includes a single display panel that extends across both eyes.

The display (11.1.3.1.2-14) can be used to display images. Visual content displayed on the display (11.1.3.1.2-14) can be viewed by a user of the device (11.1.3.1.2-10). Displays within the device (11.1.3.1.2-10), such as the display (11.1.3.1.2-14), can be organic light-emitting diode displays or other displays based on arrays of light-emitting diodes, liquid crystal displays, liquid-crystal-on-silicon (LCoS) displays, projectors or displays based on projecting light beams directly or indirectly onto a surface through specialized optics (e.g., digital micromirror devices), electrophoretic displays, plasma displays, electrowetting displays, microLED displays, or any other suitable displays.

A display (11.1.3.1.2-14) can present computer-generated content, such as virtual reality content and mixed reality content, to a user. Virtual reality content can be displayed in the absence of real-world content. Mixed reality content, which may sometimes be referred to as augmented reality content, may include computer-generated images overlaid on real-world images. The real-world images may be captured by a camera (e.g., a forward-facing camera) and merged with the overlaid computer-generated content, or an optical coupling system may be used to allow the computer-generated content to be overlaid on top of real-world images. As an example, a pair of mixed reality glasses or other augmented reality head-mounted displays may include a display device that presents images to the user via a beam splitter, prism, holographic coupler, or other optical coupler. Configurations in which the display (11.1.3.1.2-14) is used to display virtual reality content to a user via lenses are described herein as examples.

Input/output devices (11.1.3.1.2-22) may include sensors (11.1.3.1.2-16). Sensors (11.1.3.1.2-16) include, for example, 3D sensors (e.g., structured light sensors that use 2D digital image sensors to emit beams of light and collect image data for 3D images from light spots created when a target is illuminated by the beams of light, binocular 3D image sensors that collect 3D images using two or more cameras in a binocular imaging array, 3D LIDAR (Light Detection and Ranging) sensors, 3D radio frequency sensors, or other sensors that collect 3D image data), cameras (e.g., infrared and/or line-of-sight digital image sensors), gaze tracking sensors (e.g., an gaze tracking system based on an image sensor, and, if desired, a light source that emits one or more beams of light that are then tracked using the image sensor after being reflected from the user's eyes), sensors such as contact sensors based on touch sensors, buttons, force sensors, switches, gas sensors, pressure sensors, The system may include moisture sensors, magnetic sensors, audio sensors (microphones), ambient light sensors, microphones for collecting voice commands and other audio input, sensors configured to collect information regarding motion, position, and/or orientation (e.g., accelerometers, gyroscopes, compasses, and/or inertial measurement units including all or one or a subset of two of these sensors), fingerprint sensors and other biometric sensors, optical position sensors (optical encoders), and/or other position sensors, e.g., linear position sensors, and/or other sensors. As illustrated in FIG. 224, the sensors (11.1.3.1.2-16) may include sensing circuitry (sensor circuitry) configured to measure pressure applied between objects within the system (11.1.3.1.2-8). The sensing circuitry may include one or more sensors, such as one or more force sensors (11.1.3.1.2-20). The sensing circuitry, such as force sensors (11.1.3.1.2-20), may be used to sense the amount of pressure applied to a user's nose by, for example, lens assemblies within the device (11.1.3.1.2-10).

User input and other information may be collected using sensors and other input devices within the input/output devices (11.1.3.1.2-22). If desired, the input/output devices (11.1.3.1.2-22) may include other devices (11.1.3.1.2-24), such as haptic output devices (e.g., vibration components), light-emitting diodes and other light sources, speakers such as ear speakers for generating audio output, and other electrical components. The device (11.1.3.1.2-10) may include circuits for receiving wireless power, circuits for wirelessly transmitting power to other devices, batteries and other energy storage devices (e.g., capacitors), joysticks, buttons, and/or other components.

The electronic device (11.1.3.1.2-10) may have housing structures (e.g., housing walls, straps, etc.), as illustrated by the exemplary support structures (11.1.3.1.2-26) of FIG. 224. In configurations where the electronic device (11.1.3.1.2-10) is a head-mounted device (e.g., a pair of eyeglasses, goggles, a helmet, a hat, a headband, etc.), the support structures (11.1.3.1.2-26) may include head-mounted support structures (e.g., a helmet housing, head straps, temples within a pair of eyeglasses, goggle housing structures, and/or other head-mounted structures). Head-mounted support structures may be configured to be worn on a user's head during operation of the device (11.1.3.1.2-10) and may support display(s) (11.1.3.1.2-14), sensors (11.1.3.1.2-16), other components (11.1.3.1.2-24), other input/output devices (11.1.3.1.2-22), and control circuitry (11.1.3.1.2-12).

FIG. 225 is a plan view of an exemplary configuration of an electronic device (11.1.3.1.2-10) wherein the electronic device (11.1.3.1.2-10) is a head-mounted device. As illustrated in FIG. 225, the electronic device (11.1.3.1.2-10) may include support structures (e.g., see support structures (11.1.3.1.2-26) of FIG. 224) that house components of the device (11.1.3.1.2-10) and are used to mount the device (11.1.3.1.2-10) on a user's head. These support structures may include, for example, structures forming housing walls and other structures for the main unit (11.1.3.1.2-26-2) (e.g., outer housing walls, lens assembly structures, etc.), and other supplementary support structures or straps, such as structures (11.1.3.1.2-26-1) that help maintain the main unit (11.1.3.1.2-26-2) on the user's face such that the user's eyes are positioned within the eye boxes (11.1.3.1.2-60).

The display (11.1.3.1.2-14) may include left and right display panels (e.g., left and right pixel arrays, sometimes referred to as left and right displays or left and right display portions) respectively mounted within left and right display modules (11.1.3.1.2-70) corresponding to the user's left eye (and left eye box (11.1.3.1.2-60)) and right eye (and right eye box), respectively. The modules (11.1.3.1.2-70), which may sometimes be referred to as lens support structures, lens assemblies, lens housings, or lens and display housings, may be individually positioned relative to the housing wall structure of the main unit (11.1.3.1.2-26-2) and relative to the user's eyes using positioning circuitry, such as respective left and right positioners (11.1.3.1.2-58). The positioners (11.1.3.1.2-58) may include stepper motors, piezoelectric actuators, motors, linear electromagnetic actuators, and/or other electronic components for adjusting lens assembly positions. The positioners (11.1.3.1.2-58) may be controlled by the control circuitry (11.1.3.1.2-12) during operation of the device (11.1.3.1.2-10). For example, the positioners (11.1.3.1.2-58) may be used to adjust the spacing between the modules (11.1.3.1.2-70) (and thus the lens-to-lens spacing between the left and right lenses of the modules (11.1.3.1.2-70)) to match the interpupillary distance (IPD) of the user's eyes. This allows the user to view the left and right display portions of the display (11.1.3.1.2-14) from the left and right lens modules. However, in some cases, the lenses may apply excessive pressure to the user's nose when adjusted to the user's IPD. Therefore, sensors may be integrated into the device (11.1.3.1.2-10) to monitor the pressure applied to the user's nose. An exemplary arrangement including force sensors for monitoring the pressure applied to the user's nose is illustrated in FIG. 226.

As illustrated in FIG. 226, a lens assembly (11.1.3.1.2-70) (e.g., one of the two lens modules (11.1.3.1.2-70) illustrated in FIG. 225) may be adjacent to the user's nose (11.1.3.1.2-40) when the device (11.1.3.1.2-10) is worn on the user's head. Although only one of the two lens modules is illustrated in FIG. 226 for simplicity, the other lens assembly (11.1.3.1.2-70) may have an identical structure.

To ensure that the user can view the display (11.1.3.1.2-14) when the user's eyes are positioned within the eye boxes (11.1.3.1.2-60) (Fig. 225), the control circuitry (11.1.3.1.2-12) may attempt to align the lens centers (LC) with the centers (PC) of the user's eyes. At the same time, the control circuitry (11.1.3.1.2-12) may use sensor circuitry, such as force sensors (11.1.3.1.2-20), to monitor the pressure applied to the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40) by the lens modules (11.1.3.1.2-70) to ensure that the lens modules (11.1.3.1.2-70) do not excessively pressurize the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40) and cause discomfort.

In scenarios where the user has a small nose, there may be sufficient space available to align the lens centers (LC) with the eye centers (PC). In scenarios where the user has a larger nose, the control circuitry (11.1.3.1.2-12) may position the modules (11.1.3.1.2-70) as illustrated in FIG. 226. For example, the distance between the lens modules (11.1.3.1.2-70) (lens-to-lens spacing) may be greater than desired for perfect alignment of the lens centers (LC) with the eye centers (PC). The use of this wider lens-to-lens gap helps ensure that the lens modules (11.1.3.1.2-70) will not apply a greater inward force to the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40) than is comfortable for the user while still allowing satisfactory viewing of the content on the display (11.1.3.1.2-14) through the lenses (11.1.3.1.2-72). The lens modules (11.1.3.1.2-70) may be positioned at a non-zero distance (gap) from the side surfaces of the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40) or may be spaced a predetermined distance from the side surfaces of the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40). The user may select which of these options is most comfortable for the user and/or a default setting may be supplied to the control circuitry (11.1.3.1.2-12).

In operation, the positioners (11.1.3.1.2-58) may move the lens modules (11.1.3.1.2-70) (Fig. 225) toward the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40) to attempt to align the lens center (LC) of each lens with the eye centers (PC). Sensors may be integrated into the device (11.1.3.1.2-10) to ensure that no excessive pressure is applied to the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40) by the lens modules (11.1.3.1.2-70). Alternatively, any desired sensor circuitry may be used to measure pressure on the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40). In one example, each lens module (11.1.3.1.2-70) may have one or more force sensors (11.1.3.1.2-20).

A force sensor (11.1.3.1.2-20) may be integrated between the nose flap (11.1.3.1.2-29) and each lens assembly (11.1.3.1.2-70). The nose flap (11.1.3.1.2-29) may be a fabric, polymer, or other material component that allows for a comfortable fit for a user of the device (11.1.3.1.2-10). For example, the nose flap (11.1.3.1.2-29) may be interposed between each lens assembly (11.1.3.1.2-70) and the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40). In some embodiments, the nose flap (11.1.3.1.2-29) may extend along both sides of the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40) and over its top (e.g., over at least a portion of the bridge of the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40)). However, this is merely exemplary. The nose flap (11.1.3.1.2-29) may have two separate portions, one between the left lens assembly (11.1.3.1.2-70) and the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40) and the other between the right lens assembly (11.1.3.1.2-70) and the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40), or may be omitted from the device (11.1.3.1.2-10), if desired.

In embodiments where the nose flap (11.1.3.1.2-29) is included in the device (11.1.3.1.2-10), the force sensors (11.1.3.1.2-20) may be integrated between each lens assembly (11.1.3.1.2-70) (i.e., the left lens assembly (11.1.3.1.2-70) and the right lens assembly (11.1.3.1.2-70)) and the nose flap (11.1.3.1.2-29). However, this location of the force sensors (11.1.3.1.2-20) is merely exemplary. Alternatively, the force sensors (11.1.3.1.2-20) may be included at any desired location within the device (11.1.3.1.2-10). For example, force sensors (11.1.3.1.2-20) may be formed between the nose flap (11.1.3.1.2-29) and the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40) as illustrated by location (11.1.3.1.2-20'), may be formed within or integrated with the nose flap (11.1.3.1.2-29) as illustrated by location (11.1.3.1.2-20''), or may be formed within the lens assembly (11.1.3.1.2-70) as illustrated by location (11.1.3.1.2-20''').

Although FIG. 226 illustrates a single force sensor (11.1.3.1.2-20) between the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40) and the lens assembly (11.1.3.1.2-70), this is merely exemplary. The device (11.1.3.1.2-10) may have a single force sensor (11.1.3.1.2-20) between the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40) and each lens assembly (11.1.3.1.2-70), may have multiple force sensors between the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40) and each lens assembly (11.1.3.1.2-70), may have a single force sensor between the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40) and a single lens assembly (11.1.3.1.2-70), or may have any other desired arrangement of force sensor(s) (11.1.3.1.2-20).

Regardless of where the force sensors (11.1.3.1.2-20) are formed within the device (11.1.3.1.2-10), the force sensors (11.1.3.1.2-20) can monitor the amount of force applied to the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40) by the lens modules (11.1.3.1.2-70) to ensure that excessive pressure is not applied to the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40). The force sensors (11.1.3.1.2-20) can continuously monitor the applied force, or can flag the control circuitry (11.1.3.1.2-12) when the applied force exceeds a threshold. The force sensors (11.1.3.1.2-20) may be any desired type of sensor that monitors the amount of force/pressure applied to the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40). Some examples of force sensors (11.1.3.1.2-20) are illustrated in FIGS. 227a through 227c.

In some examples, the force sensor(s) (11.1.3.1.2-20) may be direct force sensors, such as the force sensor (11.1.3.1.2-20) of FIG. 227a. The direct force sensor (11.1.3.1.2-20) of FIG. 227a may be a pressure-sensitive resistor and may include electrodes formed by interdigitated finger traces (11.1.3.1.2-27). In particular, when pressure is applied directly to the force sensor (11.1.3.1.2-20), the resistance can be determined by the change in distance between portions of the interdigitated finger traces (11.1.3.1.2-27), and circuitry such as the control circuitry (11.1.3.1.2-12) can determine the force applied directly to the force sensor (11.1.3.1.2-20). If the direct force sensor (11.1.3.1.2-20) is positioned at any of the possible locations illustrated in FIG. 226 or otherwise positioned between the user's nose and the lens assembly (11.1.3.1.2-70), the direct force sensor (11.1.3.1.2-20) can be used to determine the force that the lens assembly (11.1.3.1.2-70) applies to the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40) as it is moved toward the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40). The direct force sensor (11.1.3.1.2-20) may be used to continuously measure the pressure against the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40) or may be used as a thresholding sensor (i.e., the control circuitry (11.1.3.1.2-12) may determine that the resistance of the direct force sensor (11.1.3.1.2-20) exceeds a threshold and therefore the force at the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40) is too great).

In other examples, the force sensor(s) (11.1.3.1.2-20) may be formed of conductive strands, yarns, or fibers and may be incorporated into a fabric within the device (11.1.3.1.2-10). For example, the force sensor(s) (11.1.3.1.2-20) may be formed of smart fabrics or other fabrics that include conductive strands. The conductive strands may be arranged to form a force sensor. An example of such an arrangement is illustrated in FIG. 227b.

As illustrated in FIG. 227b, a force sensor (11.1.3.1.2-20) may be integrated into a fabric (11.1.3.1.2-31). In particular, the fabric (11.1.3.1.2-31) may include conductive strands (11.1.3.1.2-28) and non-conductive strands (11.1.3.1.2-33). The conductive strands (11.1.3.1.2-28) may be arranged to form a force sensor. For example, control circuitry, such as control circuitry (11.1.3.1.2-12), may measure capacitance or resistance changes between the conductive strands (11.1.3.1.2-28). Since the capacitance/resistance will vary as the distance between the conductive strands (11.1.3.1.2-28) varies, the capacitance/resistance measurements represent the amount of force on the fabric (11.1.3.1.2-31). The conductive strands may be formed of a metal, such as silver or copper, which may optionally be coated onto the polymer or fabric strands.

Although the conductive strands (11.1.3.1.2-28) are depicted as straight strands in FIG. 227b, this is merely exemplary. In some embodiments, the conductive strands (11.1.3.1.2-28) may have serpentine or other desired shapes, which may impart improved flexibility to the fabric (11.1.3.1.2-31).

Non-conductive strands (11.1.3.1.2-33) may, if desired, be interspersed between at least some of the conductive strands (11.1.3.1.2-28). As illustrated in FIG. 227b, all other strands may be non-conductive strands. However, this is merely exemplary. Any desired number of conductive and non-conductive strands may be incorporated into the fabric (11.1.3.1.2-31) to form the force sensor (11.1.3.1.2-20).

The fabric (11.1.3.1.2-31) may form part or all of the nose flap (11.1.3.1.2-29), or may otherwise cover the nose flap (11.1.3.1.2-29). Since the nose flap (11.1.3.1.2-29) is between the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40) and the lens assembly (11.1.3.1.2-70) when the device (11.1.3.1.2-10) is worn by a user (Fig. 225), the force sensor (11.1.3.1.2-20) may indicate an amount of force applied to the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40) by the lens assembly (11.1.3.1.2-70). Any desired number of force sensors (11.1.3.1.2-20) may be integrated into the nose flap (11.1.3.1.2-29) in this manner.

Alternatively or additionally, the fabric (11.1.3.1.2-31) may be integrated into the device (11.1.3.1.2-10). For example, the fabric (11.1.3.1.2-31) may be integrated into the device (11.1.3.1.2-10) between the support structure (11.1.3.1.2-26-2) and the lenses (11.1.3.1.2-70) (Fig. 225) to form a curtain fabric that conceals the internal components. At least a portion of the curtain fabric having force sensor(s) (11.1.3.1.2-20) may be between the lens assembly (11.1.3.1.2-70) and the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40) (e.g., between the lens assembly (11.1.3.1.2-70) and the nose flap (11.1.3.1.2-29)), thereby measuring a force applied to the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40) by the lens assembly (11.1.3.1.2-70). However, alternatively, the fabric (11.1.3.1.2-31) may be integrated into the device (11.1.3.1.2-10) in any desired manner. Any desired number of force sensors (11.1.3.1.2-20) may be integrated into the fabric (11.1.3.1.2-31).

In other examples, the force sensor(s) (11.1.3.1.2-20) may be integrated into the interior region of the nose flap (11.1.3.1.2-29). An example of an arrangement in which the force sensor(s) is located within the nose flap (11.1.3.1.2-29) is illustrated in FIG. 227c.

As illustrated in FIG. 227c, the nose flap (11.1.3.1.2-29) may have a peripheral region (11.1.3.1.2-29A) surrounding an interior region (11.1.3.1.2-29B) (also referred to collectively herein). The peripheral region (11.1.3.1.2-29A) may be formed of a polymer, rubber, or any other desired material. The interior region (11.1.3.1.2-29B) may be filled with air, gas, liquid, or any other desired substance. A force sensor (11.1.3.1.2-20) may be positioned in the interior region (11.1.3.1.2-29B) and may generate a force measurement in response to increased pressure in the interior region (11.1.3.1.2-29B). For example, as the lens assembly (11.1.3.1.2-70) compresses the nose flap (11.1.3.1.2-29) against the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40) (Fig. 225), the pressure of air, gas, liquid, or other material within the nose flap (11.1.3.1.2-29) may increase, thereby increasing the pressure against the force sensor (11.1.3.1.2-20). In some examples, the force sensor (11.1.3.1.2-20) may be a barometric pressure sensor that measures the increased pressure within the interior region (11.1.3.1.2-29B) when the lens assembly (11.1.3.1.2-70) is moved against the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40). Thus, the force sensor (11.1.3.1.2-20) can generate a force measurement representing the force applied to the user's nose by the lens assembly (11.1.3.1.2-70).

Although FIG. 227c illustrates one side or a portion of the nose flap (11.1.3.1.2-29), this is merely exemplary. Any desired number of force sensors (11.1.3.1.2-20) may be integrated into the interior region (11.1.3.1.2-29B) of the nose flap (11.1.3.1.2-29) on one or both sides of the user's nose. Additionally, although FIG. 227c illustrates the force sensor (11.1.3.1.2-20) being implemented as a pressure sensor within the nose flap (11.1.3.1.2-29), the force sensor (11.1.3.1.2-20) may be a pressure sensor located anywhere between the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40) and the lens assembly (11.1.3.1.2-70) when worn by the user. For example, the pressure sensor (11.1.3.1.2-20) may, if desired, be implemented as a pressure sensor within the edge portion of the lens assembly (11.1.3.1.2-70) (i.e., at location (11.1.3.1.2-20''') of FIG. 226).

As an alternative to the sensors illustrated in FIGS. 227a through 227c, a force sensor (11.1.3.1.2-20) may be implemented to measure the deflection of the nose flap (11.1.3.1.2-29) relative to the lens assembly (11.1.3.1.2-70). An example of this type of force sensor is illustrated in FIG. 228.

As illustrated in FIG. 228, the force sensor (11.1.3.1.2-20) may be mounted on (or within) a portion of the lens assembly (11.1.3.1.2-70). The force sensor (11.1.3.1.2-20) may be a sensor for measuring proximity to the nose flap (11.1.3.1.2-29), such as a capacitive proximity sensor, a resistive proximity sensor, an optical proximity sensor, an ultrasonic proximity sensor, or any other desired type of proximity sensor. Optionally, a magnet (11.1.3.1.2-32) may be embedded within (or mounted to) the nose flap (11.1.3.1.2-29), and the force sensor (11.1.3.1.2-20) may be implemented as a Hall Effect sensor. In this manner, the Hall effect sensor can determine the proximity of the magnet (11.1.3.1.2-32) and thus the proximity of the nose flap (11.1.3.1.2-29). By measuring the proximity of the nose flap (11.1.3.1.2-29) (i.e., the amount the nose flap (11.1.3.1.2-29) has moved), the proximity sensor can provide an output representing the amount of force applied to the user's nose by the lens assembly (11.1.3.1.2-70).

Although previous embodiments included a dedicated force sensor (11.1.3.1.2-20) to ensure that excessive force is not applied to the user's nose, this is merely exemplary. The device (11.1.3.1.2-10) may use other sensors (such as sensors (11.1.3.1.2-16)) to determine whether the force applied to the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40) exceeds a threshold. An example of such an arrangement is illustrated in FIG. 229.

As illustrated in FIG. 229, one or more flexible members (11.1.3.1.2-34) may extend from the lens assembly (11.1.3.1.2-70). The flexible members (11.1.3.1.2-34) may be formed of rubber, polymer, fabric, or any other desired flexible material. The device (11.1.3.1.2-10) may also include a light-emitting component (11.1.3.1.2-36) and a light-detecting component (11.1.3.1.2-42) that may be used in eye tracking or other desired operations. For example, the light-emitting component (11.1.3.1.2-36) may be an infrared light-emitting component, and the light-detecting component (11.1.3.1.2-42) may be an infrared light-detecting component. To determine the line of sight of a user of the device (11.1.3.1.2-10), an infrared emitting component (11.1.3.1.2-36) may emit light toward the user's eye, and reflections from the user's eye may be detected by an infrared light detecting component (11.1.3.1.2-42). These reflections may indicate the direction of the user's line of sight. However, in general, the emitting component (11.1.3.1.2-36) and the light detecting component (11.1.3.1.2-42) may be any desired components and may operate at any desired wavelength.

As the assembly (11.1.3.1.2-70) moves toward the nose flap (11.1.3.1.2-29) (and thus the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40)), it will eventually contact and push against the nose flap (11.1.3.1.2-29) and the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40), causing the flexible members (11.1.3.1.2-34) to move in the direction (11.1.3.1.2-38). When the flexible member (11.1.3.1.2-34) moves sufficiently far (i.e., the amount of force applied to the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40) exceeds or meets a threshold), the flexible member (11.1.3.1.2-34) may block the light-emitting component (11.1.3.1.2-36). As a result, the light-detecting component (11.1.3.1.2-42) may stop detecting light emitted by the light-emitting component (11.1.3.1.2-36). Based on the changed signal from the light detection component (11.1.3.1.2-42), the control circuitry (11.1.3.1.2-12) can stop the positioners (11.1.3.1.2-58) from moving the lens assembly (11.1.3.1.2-70) further toward the user's nose.

Although the flexible members (11.1.3.1.2-34) are shown covering the light emitting components (11.1.3.1.2-36), this is merely exemplary. The flexible members (11.1.3.1.2-34) may also cover the light detecting components (11.1.3.1.2-42) and may be moved only between the light emitting components (11.1.3.1.2-36) and the light detecting components (11.1.3.1.2-42). Additionally, any desired number of flexible members (11.1.3.1.2-34) may be used.

If desired, the position of the lens modules (11.1.3.1.2-70) relative to corresponding surfaces of the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40) can be measured using feedback from motors within the positioners (11.1.3.1.2-58) as the lens modules (11.1.3.1.2-70) are moved into contact with the surfaces of the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40). An exemplary control circuit for a positioner, such as the positioner (11.1.3.1.2-58), is illustrated in FIG. 230. The control circuitry (11.1.3.1.2-12) (FIG. 224) may include a motor controller, such as the controller (11.1.3.1.2-80). The controller (11.1.3.1.2-80) can drive a motor (11.1.3.1.2-86) within the positioner (11.1.3.1.2-58) to move an associated lens module (11.1.3.1.2-70) by supplying a power supply voltage (Vin) to the motor (11.1.3.1.2-86) using a path (11.1.3.1.2-84). While voltage (Vin) is supplied to the motor (11.1.3.1.2-86), a controller (11.1.3.1.2-80) of the control circuitry (11.1.3.1.2-12) monitors the resulting current flow (current (I)) through the path (11.1.3.1.2-84) using a sensor circuit (82) (e.g., a current sense resistor having a corresponding analog-to-digital converter circuit, etc.). The power supply voltage (Vin) can be kept relatively constant while the motor (11.1.3.1.2-86) moves the lens assembly (11.1.3.1.2-70). The positioner (11.1.3.1.2-58) may initially be used to position the edge of the lens assembly (11.1.3.1.2-70) away from the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40). Subsequently, the control circuitry (11.1.3.1.2-12) may instruct the positioner (11.1.3.1.2-58) to move the lens assembly (11.1.3.1.2-70) toward the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40). The controller (11.1.3.1.2-80) of the control circuitry (11.1.3.1.2-12) may monitor the current (I) flowing through the path (11.1.3.1.2-84) and the current (I) sensed by the sensor (82). When the lens assembly (11.1.3.1.2-70) is pressed against the side of the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40), the current (I) will increase. When the current (I) exceeds a desired threshold (related to the force applied to the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40)), the control circuitry (11.1.3.1.2-12) can stop the positioner (11.1.3.1.2-58) from applying more force to the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40) by the lens assembly (11.1.3.1.2-70).

Exemplary operations involved in the operation of a device (11.1.3.1.2-10) in a system (11.1.3.1.2-8) are illustrated in FIG. 231.

During operations of block (11.1.3.1.2-100), information regarding the distance between the user's eyes (interpupillary distance (IPD), sometimes referred to as interpupillary distance) may be collected. In one exemplary arrangement, a device (11.1.3.1.2-10) or other device within the system (11.1.3.1.2-8) collects the user's interpupillary distance from the user by prompting the user to type the interpupillary distance into a data entry box on a display (11.1.3.1.2-14) or other device within the system (11.1.3.1.2-8). The user may also provide the interpupillary distance using voice input or other user input arrangements. In another exemplary arrangement, a sensor within a device (11.1.3.1.2-10) within the system (11.1.3.1.2-8) or another sensor within a standalone computer, portable device, or other equipment may measure the user's interpupillary distance. For example, a sensor, such as a two-dimensional or three-dimensional image sensor, may collect an image of the user's face to measure the interpupillary distance (IPD). After the interpupillary distance measurement is made, the interpupillary distance may be provided to the device (11.1.3.1.2-10) (e.g., via wired or wireless communication paths). If desired, the eye trackers may measure the positions of the centers of the user's eyes (PD), thereby determining the IPD from a direct measurement when the user wears the device (11.1.3.1.2-10) on the user's head.

After collecting the interpupillary distance (IPD), the control circuitry (11.1.3.1.2-12) of the device (11.1.3.1.2-10) can adjust the lens-to-lens spacing between the lens centers (LC) using the positioners (11.1.3.1.2-58) during operations of the block (11.1.3.1.2-102) so that this distance matches the interpupillary distance (IPD) and the centers of the lenses (11.1.3.1.2-72) are aligned with the respective eye centers (PC). While the positioners (11.1.3.1.2-58) are moving the lens modules (11.1.3.1.2-70) and the lenses (11.1.3.1.2-72) (e.g., while the lens-to-lens spacing is reduced to move the modules (11.1.3.1.2-70) toward adjacent surfaces of the user's nose), the control circuitry (11.1.3.1.2-12) uses force sensing circuitry (e.g., force sensor(s) (11.1.3.1.2-20)) to monitor the force applied to the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40) by the lens modules (11.1.3.1.2-70). In some situations, the user's nose (11.1.3.1.2-40) may prevent the lenses (11.1.3.1.2-72) from coming close enough to each other to ensure that the lens-to-lens spacing accurately matches the IPD without causing a risk of discomfort to the user. In other words, the force sensor(s) (11.1.3.1.2-20) may indicate that too much force is being applied to the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40) by the lens modules (11.1.3.1.2-70), or that the force being applied to the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40) by the lens modules (11.1.3.1.2-70) has reached a threshold. Next, the control circuitry (11.1.3.1.2-12) can stop the positioners (11.1.3.1.2-58) from moving the lens modules (11.1.3.1.2-70) further toward the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40). If desired, the positioners (11.1.3.1.2-58) can move the lens modules (11.1.3.1.2-70) away from the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40) by a desired gap (e.g., a gap (G) of at least 0.1 mm, at least 0.2 mm, at least 1 mm, at least 2 mm, less than 5 mm, or other suitable gap).

After positioning the modules (11.1.3.1.2-70) in desired locations relative to the nose (11.1.3.1.2-40) to ensure user comfort while wearing the device (11.1.3.1.2-10), the control circuitry (11.1.3.1.2-12) can present visual content to the user through the lenses (11.1.3.1.2-72) using the display (11.1.3.1.2-14) (block (11.1.3.1.2-104)).

11.1.3.2: Sensors/Encoders

FIG. 232 illustrates a front right perspective view of a portion of an HMD (11.1.3.2-100) including first and second optical modules (11.1.3.2-102a, 11.1.3.2-102b). The first and second optical modules (11.1.3.2-102a, 11.1.3.2-102b) may be secured to an adjustment mechanism configured to change the position of the optical modules (11.1.3.2-102a, 11.1.3.2-102b) relative to other components of the HMD (11.1.3.2-100), for example, relative to a bracket (11.1.3.2-108). For example, the first optical module (11.1.3.2-102a) may include a follower (11.1.3.2-104) that is slidably engaged with the guide rod (11.1.3.2-106) through a channel in the follower (11.1.3.2-104) such that the optical module (11.1.3.2-102a) can be laterally adjusted axially of the guide rod (11.1.3.2-106). In some examples, the optical modules (11.1.3.2-102a, 11.1.3.2-102b) may include a guide rod that is slidably engaged with a follower mechanism or some other sliding tracking system. The illustrated examples are not limiting.

In at least one example, a motor (not shown) may be activated to move and adjust the position of the optical module (11.1.3.2-102a) along the guide rod (11.1.3.2-106). To determine the position of the optical module (11.1.3.2-102a) relative to the second optical module (11.1.3.2-102b) of the HMD (11.1.3.2-100) or relative to other components, the HMD (11.1.3.2-100) may include an encoder (11.1.3.2-109). In one example, the encoder (11.1.3.2-109) is not on or disposed with the motor. Rather, in at least one example, such as the example illustrated in FIG. 232, the encoder (11.1.3.2-109) may be positioned external to the motor and secured to the frame or bracket (11.1.3.2-108) of the HMD (11.1.3.2-100). In one example, the encoder (109) may be secured directly to the frame and/or bracket (108) of the HMD (11.1.3.2-100). In one example, the encoder assembly (11.1.3.2-109) may be indirectly secured to the frame and/or bracket (11.1.3.2-108) of the HMD (11.1.3.2-100) via an encoder bracket.

In one example, the encoder (11.1.3.2-109) assembly may include a magnet (11.1.3.2-110) having a master strip (11.1.3.2-113) and a Nonius strip (11.1.3.2-111) each including pole strips (11.1.3.2-112) forming adjacent pole pairs for interacting with a ferromagnetic or magnetic chip component that is translatable with the optical module (11.1.3.2-102a) as the optical module (11.1.3.2-102a) is moved along a guide rod (11.1.3.2-106). In at least one example, the pole pairs (11.1.3.2-112) of the nonius strip (11.1.3.2-111) are phase shifted with respect to the master strip (11.1.3.2-113) such that the master strip (11.1.3.2-113) can be used for local position detection and the nonius strip (11.1.3.2-111) can be used to determine which pole pair corresponds to a detected position. In this way, the magnets (11.1.3.2-110) of the encoder (11.1.3.2-109) can act as part of an absolute encoder for position detection over the entire range of travel of the optical module (11.1.3.2-102a).

In at least one example, the encoder (11.1.3.2-109) is a non-contact encoder. In one example, the encoder (11.1.3.2-109) is a Hall effect encoder.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 232) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in any of the other drawings illustrated and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated and described with reference to any of the other drawings illustrated and described herein) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 232.

FIG. 233 illustrates a top left perspective view of a portion of an HMD (11.1.3.2-200) including an optical module (11.1.3.2-202) having a guide rod (11.1.3.2-206) and a follower (11.1.3.2-204) slidably engaged therewith. The optical module (11.1.3.2-202) can be slid along the guide rod (11.1.3.2-206) via a motor (not shown). In at least one example, the HMD (11.1.3.2-200) can include an encoder assembly (11.1.3.2-209). The encoder assembly (11.1.3.2-209) may include a magnet (11.1.3.2-210) secured in position to the HMD (11.1.3.2-200), for example, to a chassis, frame, or bracket (11.1.3.2-208) of the HMD (11.1.3.2-200). In at least one example, the encoder assembly (11.1.3.2-209) may include a chip (11.1.3.2-216) or chip assembly including a chip and a housing configured to slide relative to the magnet (11.1.3.2-210) together with an optical module (11.1.3.2-202). The chip (11.1.3.2-216) can be secured to the optical module (11.1.3.2-202) via a flexure bracket (11.1.3.2-214) that is secured to the chip (11.1.3.2-216) (or the chip assembly (11.1.3.2-216)). In at least one example, the flexure bracket (11.1.3.2-214) is secured to the optical module (11.1.3.2-202) at a first end (11.1.3.2-218) and biased against a magnet (11.1.3.2-210) at a second end (11.1.3.2-222). In one example, when the optical module (11.1.3.2-202) is moved via a motor (not shown), the flexure bracket (11.1.3.2-214) biases the chip (11.1.3.2-216) against the magnet (11.1.3.2-210) at its second end (11.1.3.2-222) such that the chip (11.1.3.2-216) is positioned adjacent to the magnet (11.1.3.2-210) and is configured to slide relative to the magnet (11.1.3.2-210).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 233) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in any of the other drawings illustrated and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated and described with reference to any of the other drawings illustrated and described herein) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 233.

FIG. 234 illustrates an example of an encoder assembly (11.1.3.2-309) including a bracket (11.1.3.2-314) that biases a chip (11.1.3.2-316) against a magnet (11.1.3.2-310). In at least one example, the bracket (11.1.3.2-314) includes a first end/portion (11.1.3.2-318) that is secured to an optical module of the HMD device and a second end (11.1.3.2-322) opposite the first end/portion. In at least one example, the flexure bracket (11.1.3.2-314) is secured to the chip (11.1.3.2-316) via an auxiliary flexure bracket (11.1.3.2-320) to correct the angle of the magnet (11.1.3.2-310) during assembly of the encoder assembly (11.1.3.2-309). The auxiliary flexure bracket (11.1.3.2-320) can extend from a distal end (11.1.3.2-322) of the primary flexure bracket (11.1.3.2-317) that is coupled to a proximal end/portion (11.1.3.2-318) configured to be secured to an optical module of the HMD device.

In at least one example, the primary and/or secondary flexure brackets (11.1.3.2-317, 11.1.3.2-320) as well as the proximal portion (11.1.3.2-318) may be formed of a plastic such as Ultum. In one example, the encoder magnet (11.1.3.2-310) may include a low-friction tape, for example, a Teflon tape.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 234) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in any of the other drawings illustrated and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated and described with reference to any of the other drawings illustrated and described herein) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 234.

11.1.3.2.1: Sensor Assembly

The systems of the present disclosure can provide a head-mountable device that securely supports sensors isolated from the external environment within a sealed container, stably supports orientations over time, and avoids excessive stress on the sensors, thereby protecting them from harm. The sensors can be mounted on a flex circuit or circuit board, which is rigidly secured within an enclosure, for example, including a plate and a case. The case and plate can be sealed with the flex circuit extending therethrough (e.g., through an opening formed by a sealing adhesive) and operatively connected to other components.

Accordingly, the sensor assemblies described herein enable the effective performance of the sensors mounted therein. The sensor assemblies provide high robustness throughout the entire service life of the head-mountable device without placing a strain on the sensors themselves. The seal of the enclosure can isolate the sensors from external influences by preventing the ingress of elements through the case and plate. The sensor assemblies further enable the mounting of the sensors on a flex circuit, if desired.

These and other embodiments are discussed below with reference to FIGS. 235 through 239. However, those skilled in the art will readily recognize that the detailed description provided herein with respect to these drawings is for illustrative purposes only and should not be construed as limiting.

According to some embodiments, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 235, a head-mounted device (11.1.3.2.1-100) includes a frame (11.1.3.2.1-110) that is worn on a user's head. The frame module (11.1.3.2.1-110) may be positioned in front of the user's eyes to provide information within the user's field of view. The frame (11.1.3.2.1-110) may provide nose pads or other features that are positioned on the user's nose. The frame (11.1.3.2.1-110) may be supported on the user's head by a head engager (11.1.3.2.1-120). The head engager (11.1.3.2.1-120) may wrap or extend along opposite sides of the user's head. The head engager (11.1.3.2.1-120) may include earpieces for wrapping around or otherwise engaging or resting on the user's ears. It will be appreciated that other configurations may be employed to secure the head-mountable device (11.1.3.2.1-100) to the user's head. For example, one or more bands, straps, belts, caps, hats, or other components may be used in addition to or instead of the illustrated components of the head-mountable device (11.1.3.2.1-100). As a further example, the head engager (11.1.3.2.1-120) may include multiple components for engaging the user's head.

The frame (11.1.3.2.1-110) may provide a structure around its perimeter to support any internal components of the frame (11.1.3.2.1-110) in their assembled positions. For example, the frame (11.1.3.2.1-110) may surround and support various internal components (e.g., including integrated circuit chips, processors, memory devices, and other circuitry) to provide computing and functional operations for the head-mountable device (11.1.3.2.1-100), as further discussed herein. While several components are depicted within the frame (11.1.3.2.1-110), it will be appreciated that any or all of these components may be located anywhere within or on the head-mountable device (11.1.3.2.1-100). For example, one or more of these components may be located within a head engager (11.1.3.2.1-120) of a head-mountable device (11.1.3.2.1-100).

The frame (11.1.3.2.1-110) may include and/or support one or more cameras (11.1.3.2.1-130). The cameras (11.1.3.2.1-130) may be positioned on or near an exterior surface (11.1.3.2.1-122) of the frame (11.1.3.2.1-110) to capture images of views outside of the head-mounted device (11.1.3.2.1-100). As used herein, an exterior surface of a portion of a head-mounted device is a surface facing away from a user and/or facing the external environment. The captured images may be used for display to the user or stored for any other purpose. Each of the cameras (11.1.3.2.1-130) may be movable along the exterior surface (11.1.3.2.1-122). For example, tracking or other guides may be provided to enable movement of the camera (11.1.3.2.1-130) therein.

A head-mountable device (11.1.3.2.1-100) may include displays (11.1.3.2.1-140) that provide visual output for viewing by a user wearing the head-mountable device (11.1.3.2.1-100). One or more displays (11.1.3.2.1-140) may be positioned on or near an interior surface (11.1.3.2.1-124) of the frame (11.1.3.2.1-110). As used herein, an interior surface (11.1.3.2.1-124) of a portion of a head-mountable device is a surface that faces the user and/or faces away from the external environment.

The display (11.1.3.2.1-140) may transmit light from the physical environment (e.g., as captured by a camera) for observation by a user. Such a display (11.1.3.2.1-140) may include lenses for vision correction based on optical properties, such as incident light from the physical environment. Additionally or alternatively, the display (11.1.3.2.1-140) may present information as a display within the user's field of view. Such information may be presented outside of a view of the physical environment or in addition to (e.g., overlapping) the physical environment.

A head-mounted device (11.1.3.2.1-100) may include one or more sensors (11.1.3.2.1-70). The sensors (11.1.3.2.1-70) may be mounted to the frame (11.1.3.2.1-110) in a secure manner, as further described herein. Any number and type of sensors may be provided. For example, the one or more sensors (11.1.3.2.1-70) may be or include an inertial measurement unit ("IMU") that provides information about characteristics of the head-mounted device (11.1.3.2.1-100), such as its inertial angles. For example, the IMU may include a six-degree-of-freedom IMU that calculates position, velocity, and/or acceleration of the head-mounted device (11.1.3.2.1-100) based on six degrees of freedom (x, y, _z , _{θ x} , θ y , and θ z ). The IMU may include one or more of an accelerometer, a gyroscope, and/or a magnetometer. Additionally or alternatively, the sensors (11.1.3.2.1-70) may detect motion characteristics of the head-mounted device (11.1.3.2.1-100) using one or more other motion sensors, such as an accelerometer, a gyroscope, a global positioning sensor, a tilt sensor, etc., to detect movement and acceleration of the head-mounted device (11.1.3.2.1-100). The sensors (11.1.3.2.1-70) may provide data to the controller for processing. Such data may affect other operations of the head-mounted device (11.1.3.2.1-100), such as information provided on the display (11.1.3.2.1-140).

It will be appreciated that the sensors (11.1.3.2.1-70) (e.g., IMUs) and associated assemblies may be coupled to and/or integrated with one or more other components of the head-mountable device (11.1.3.2.1-100). For example, one or more sensors (11.1.3.2.1-70) may be coupled to a component that moves relative to the frame (11.1.3.2.1-110) or other component of the head-mountable device (11.1.3.2.1-100). In a further example, one or more sensors (11.1.3.2.1-70) may be coupled to one or more displays (11.1.3.2.1-140), a frame (11.1.3.2.1-110), and/or other components (11.1.3.2.1-160) (e.g., controllers, input/output devices, etc.) of a head-mounted device (11.1.3.2.1-100). Thus, by operating multiple sensors (11.1.3.2.1-70), the absolute and/or relative position and/or orientation of each of the associated components may be determined. For example, one or more (e.g., a pair) of displays (11.1.3.2.1-140) may be moved relative to each other and/or relative to the frame (11.1.3.2.1-110) to align with the user's eyes, and sensors (11.1.3.2.1-70) coupled to each of the displays (11.1.3.2.1-140) may track this movement. In a further example, sensors (11.1.3.2.1-70) of separate head-mounted devices (11.1.3.2.1-100) (e.g., worn by different users) can share information such that each of the head-mounted devices (11.1.3.2.1-100) can determine the absolute and/or relative position and/or orientation of the other device and optionally output corresponding information (e.g., visual information via displays (11.1.3.2.1-140)) so that the users can be aware of each other's presence in a shared CGR environment, for example.

Solid-state motion sensors, such as IMUs, can be affected by strain, temperature, and humidity. Over time, exposure to these influences can result in a wider and less predictable operating range over the IMU's lifetime. For example, devices relying on absolute measurements of orientation and/or acceleration using MEMS IMUs may require bounded variations in bias, axis orthogonality, and cross-axis sensitivity. Typically, these sensors are surface-mounted on rigid PCBs, and care must be taken to select PCB locations that minimize strain and temperature shifts. However, for some more demanding applications, this is not sufficient to extract all the sensor performance.

Referring now to FIGS. 236-238, a sensor assembly may be provided that securely supports one or more sensors of a head-mountable device while protecting the sensors from exposure to external environments as well as forces applied to the assembly. It will be appreciated that the assembly described herein may be one of a plurality of assemblies and may include one or more other components of the head-mountable device. It will further be appreciated that the sensor assembly may be integrated into the head-mountable device and/or may be provided therein as a module.

As illustrated in FIG. 236, the sensor assembly (11.1.3.2.1-10) may include a sensor (11.1.3.2.1-70) (e.g., an IMU) housed within a protective case. The top case (11.1.3.2.1-20) of the sensor assembly (11.1.3.2.1-10) may be rigidly coupled to the bottom plate (11.1.3.2.1-112) or other components of the head-mountable device. For example, the bottom plate (11.1.3.2.1-112) may be part of, integrated with, and/or coupled to the frame and/or other components of the head-mountable device.

The sensor (11.1.3.2.1-70) may be coupled to the flex circuit (11.1.3.2.1-60). For example, the sensor (11.1.3.2.1-70) may be mounted directly to the surface of the flex circuit (11.1.3.2.1-60). Additionally or alternatively, the sensor (11.1.3.2.1-70) may be mounted to a board that is directly or indirectly coupled to the flex circuit (11.1.3.2.1-60). The flex circuit (11.1.3.2.1-60) may, in turn, directly or indirectly couple the sensor (11.1.3.2.1-70) and/or the board to other components of the sensor assembly (11.1.3.2.1-10), such as the top case (11.1.3.2.1-20) and/or bottom plate (11.1.3.2.1-112).

The sensor (11.1.3.2.1-70) may be implemented as an integrated circuit, such as one or more of an industry standard integrated circuit, an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), an application-specific standard product (ASSP), etc. The sensor (11.1.3.2.1-70) may be housed in a housing structure of an assembly and may have a size and shape that provides desired performance characteristics. For example, the sensor (11.1.3.2.1-70) may be integrated with a wafer and/or board.

One or more sensors (11.1.3.2.1-70) of a sensor assembly (11.1.3.2.1-10) may be mounted on a flex circuit (11.1.3.2.1-60) that operatively connects the sensors (11.1.3.2.1-70) of the sensor assembly (11.1.3.2.1-10) to each other and/or to other components. As used herein, a "flexible circuit" or "flex circuit" is a structure comprising a conductive layer, an insulating layer, and optionally a substrate layer. The flex circuit may be provided to be in electrical communication with at least one electrode, terminal, and/or connector. The flex circuit forms a circuit portion that includes a pattern of conductors of the conductive layer, typically in the form of pads, wherein the conductors are typically formed on a surface of an insulating material of the insulating layer. Such circuit portion is typically metallic, such as copper or a copper alloy. Typically, flex circuits are thin, having a total thickness of about 1 mm to about 30 mm. Flex circuits are generally flexible, allowing them to conform to the contours of other components. A flex circuit may be any suitable size and may be configured into any suitable shape. For example, the size of a flex circuit may be determined by the power requirements of the components connected thereto, the conductivity of the flex circuit, the distance between operably connected components, or any other suitable criteria. Additionally or alternatively, it will be appreciated that a cable or other conductive material surrounded by an insulating layer may be provided. Such a cable may be connected to one or more boards and/or other electronic components via a connector and/or a hot bar and/or wire bonds.

Providing operable connections to and from the sensors (11.1.3.2.1-70) via the flex circuit (11.1.3.2.1-60) can enable such connections while occupying a small space within the head-mountable device. Additionally, the flex circuit (11.1.3.2.1-60) can conform and bend around other components of the head-mountable device. These features can help the head-mountable device maintain a low weight and small size.

The flex circuit (11.1.3.2.1-60) may include multiple segments having different characteristics. For example, a first segment (11.1.3.2.1-62) of the flex circuit (11.1.3.2.1-60) may support a sensor (11.1.3.2.1-70). The first segment (11.1.3.2.1-62) may define terminals and portions of the flex circuit (11.1.3.2.1-60) to reside within an enclosure of the sensor assembly (11.1.3.2.1-10). The flex circuit (11.1.3.2.1-60) may additionally include a second segment (11.1.3.2.1-64) extending from the first segment (11.1.3.2.1-62) and/or within the enclosure. The second segment (11.1.3.2.1-64) may provide strain relief features, such as a shape and/or size that promotes flexibility, bendability, and/or extensibility. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 236, the second segment (11.1.3.2.1-64) may include an S-curve, a serpentine shape, and/or other non-linear shape. Such a shape allows the second segment (11.1.3.2.1-64) to readily change its shape upon application of tension and/or other forces along the length of the flex circuit (11.1.3.2.1-60). For example, tension and/or other forces applied to a third segment (11.1.3.2.1-66) of a flex circuit (11.1.3.2.1-60) remote from the sensor (11.1.3.2.1-70) (e.g., within or outside the enclosure) may be absorbed by adjustments along the second segment (11.1.3.2.1-64) such that such tension and/or other forces are not transmitted to the sensor (11.1.3.2.1-70). These adjustments may include adjustments to the effective length of the second segment (11.1.3.2.1-64) (e.g., between the first segment (11.1.3.2.1-62) and the third segment (11.1.3.2.1-66)), adjustments to the curvature along the second segment (11.1.3.2.1-64), etc. In a further example, the second segment (11.1.3.2.1-64) may change its shape along and/or about one or more axes extending through the second segment (11.1.3.2.1-64). In this way, the sensor (11.1.3.2.1-70) may maintain a consistent position and/or orientation despite the application of external forces.

A base plate (11.1.3.2.1-80) may provide support for the sensor (11.1.3.2.1-70) and the flex circuit (11.1.3.2.1-60). For example, the base plate (11.1.3.2.1-80) may be positioned adjacent to the sensor (11.1.3.2.1-70) on one side of the flex circuit (11.1.3.2.1-60) opposite the sensor (11.1.3.2.1-70). Additionally or alternatively, the flex circuit (11.1.3.2.1-60) may be or include a circuit board that provides electrical connections between components and/or to other components on a rigid substrate. When the flex circuit (11.1.3.2.1-60) includes or forms a rigid circuit board, the base plate (11.1.3.2.1-80) may optionally be omitted.

The sensor assembly (11.1.3.2.1-10) may additionally include a mounting adhesive (11.1.3.2.1-50) positioned between the base plate (11.1.3.2.1-80) and the bottom plate (11.1.3.2.1-112). The mounting adhesive (11.1.3.2.1-50) may bond opposing surfaces of the base plate (11.1.3.2.1-80) and the bottom plate (11.1.3.2.1-112) to each other. The mounting adhesive (11.1.3.2.1-50) can have a coefficient of thermal expansion that is complementary to the coefficients of thermal expansion of the base plate (11.1.3.2.1-80) and/or the bottom plate (11.1.3.2.1-112) to minimize strain on the sensor (11.1.3.2.1-70). As used herein, the coefficient of thermal expansion can refer to either a linear coefficient of thermal expansion and/or a volumetric coefficient of thermal expansion. As used herein, any two coefficients of thermal expansion are "complementary" when one is within ±20%, ±15%, ±10%, ±9%, ±8%, ±7%, ±6%, ±5%, ±4%, ±3%, ±2%, or ±1% of the other, including any intermediate values therebetween. For example, the mounting adhesive (11.1.3.2.1-50) may have a coefficient of thermal expansion that is within ±10%, ±9%, ±8%, ±7%, ±6%, ±5%, ±4%, ±3%, ±2%, or ±1% of the coefficient of thermal expansion of the base plate (11.1.3.2.1-80) and/or the bottom plate (11.1.3.2.1-112).

The top case (11.1.3.2.1-20) forms an opening (11.1.3.2.1-28) that allows electrical communication with a sensor (11.1.3.2.1-70) in, for example, a side portion (11.1.3.2.1-22) of the top case (11.1.3.2.1-20). For example, the flex circuit (11.1.3.2.1-60) may extend through the opening (11.1.3.2.1-28) (e.g., in its third segment (11.1.3.2.1-66)) such that a connector (11.1.3.2.1-68) may be connected to another component at a terminal end of the flex circuit (11.1.3.2.1-60) (e.g., at the opposite end of the sensor (11.1.3.2.1-70) and the first segment (11.1.3.2.1-62)). The connector (11.1.3.2.1-68) coupled to the flex circuit (11.1.3.2.1-60) may be in electrical or otherwise operative communication with the sensor (11.1.3.2.1-70). In this way, the connector (11.1.3.2.1-68) can operatively connect the sensor (11.1.3.2.1-70) to another component, such as a controller of a head-mounted device.

The sensor assembly (11.1.3.2.1-10) further includes a sealing member (11.1.3.2.1-52) disposed within the opening (11.1.3.2.1-28) to seal the enclosure from the external environment and to permit electrical communication with the sensor (11.1.3.2.1-70) along the flex circuit (11.1.3.2.1-60). For example, the sealing member (11.1.3.2.1-52) may entirely surround a portion of the flex circuit (11.1.3.2.1-60) (e.g., along the third segment (11.1.3.2.1-66)). The flex circuit (11.1.3.2.1-60) may extend entirely through the sealing member (11.1.3.2.1-52) and may extend to either side thereof, e.g., into or out of the enclosure. The sealing member (11.1.3.2.1-52) may comprise an adhesive, silicone, and/or other sealing member. The sealing member (11.1.3.2.1-52) may be provided as a liquid that solidifies (e.g., cures) during assembly.

As illustrated in FIG. 237, the sensor assembly (11.1.3.2.1-10) may form an enclosure (11.1.3.2.1-12) to house a sensor (11.1.3.2.1-70) (e.g., an IMU). For example, the top case (11.1.3.2.1-20), the bottom plate (11.1.3.2.1-112), and the sealing member (11.1.3.2.1-52) may form a sealed enclosure (11.1.3.2.1-12) surrounding the sealed volume. Portions of the sensor (11.1.3.2.1-70), the base plate (11.1.3.2.1-80), and the flex circuit (11.1.3.2.1-60) may be contained within the sealed volume.

To form the enclosure (11.1.3.2.1-12), the top case (11.1.3.2.1-20) may be sealingly joined to the bottom plate (11.1.3.2.1-112). For example, the top case (11.1.3.2.1-20) may be welded (e.g., laser welded) to the bottom plate (11.1.3.2.1-112). Other types of joining, such as bonding, gluing, etc., are contemplated. The joining may maintain an opening (11.1.3.2.1-28), for example, in a side portion (11.1.3.2.1-22) of the top case (11.1.3.2.1-20).

A flex circuit (11.1.3.2.1-60) including a connector (11.1.3.2.1-68) may be provided through an opening (11.1.3.2.1-28). A sealing member (11.1.3.2.1-52) may be formed around a portion of the flex circuit (11.1.3.2.1-60) that extends through the opening (11.1.3.2.1-28). The sealing member (11.1.3.2.1-52) may extend from the upper case (11.1.3.2.1-20) to the lower plate (11.1.3.2.1-112). In this way, the sealing member (11.1.3.2.1-52) may fill the only opening (11.1.3.2.1-28) that provides fluid communication between the interior of the enclosure (11.1.3.2.1-12) and the external environment (e.g., the exterior of the enclosure (11.1.3.2.1-12)).

As further illustrated in FIG. 237, the openings (11.1.3.2.1-28) may be confined to a side portion (11.1.3.2.1-22) of the top case (11.1.3.2.1-20). It will be appreciated that the openings (11.1.3.2.1-28) may be provided in any portion of the top case (11.1.3.2.1-20), as further described herein. Regardless of their location, the openings (11.1.3.2.1-28) may be filled around the flex circuit (11.1.3.2.1-60) with a sealing member (11.1.3.2.1-52).

By joining the upper case (11.1.3.2.1-20) to the lower plate (11.1.3.2.1-112) and filling the opening (11.1.3.2.1-28) with a sealing member (11.1.3.2.1-52), the enclosure (11.1.3.2.1-12) can provide a sealed volume for the sensor (11.1.3.2.1-70). As used herein, a "sealed" enclosure, volume, or other space is at least partially and/or selectively isolated from the external environment. For example, the upper case (11.1.3.2.1-20) and the lower plate (11.1.3.2.1-112) can be impermeable, such that they form a barrier to the ingress and/or egress of materials therethrough. The sealing member (11.1.3.2.1-52) may also form a barrier. It will be appreciated that one or more barriers may be selectively permeable while still maintaining a sealed volume and/or enclosure. For example, the sealing member (11.1.3.2.1-52) may be permeable to one or more gases and/or substances at the atomic level. However, the sealing member (11.1.3.2.1-52) may be impermeable to molecules, compounds, and/or liquids (e.g., preventing their ingress or egress). In some embodiments, the enclosure may be hermetically or "hermetically" sealed, although other seals are contemplated.

As illustrated in FIG. 238, the connector (11.1.3.2.1-68) may extend through other portions of the upper case (11.1.3.2.1-20), such as the upper portion (11.1.3.2.1-24) of the upper case (11.1.3.2.1-20). The upper portion (11.1.3.2.1-24) may be a portion of the upper case opposite the bottom plate (11.1.3.2.1-112). One or more openings (11.1.3.2.1-28) may be defined on an upper portion (11.1.3.2.1-24) of an upper case (11.1.3.2.1-20), and corresponding connectors (11.1.3.2.1-68) may extend through the openings (11.1.3.2.1-28). Outside of the enclosure (11.1.3.2.1-12), a mating connector (11.1.3.2.1-90) may be operably coupled to the connectors (11.1.3.2.1-68). For example, the interface between the mating connector (11.1.3.2.1-90) and the connector(s) (11.1.3.2.1-68) may include one or more electrodes, contact plates, wires, pogo pins, or the like.

When the connectors (11.1.3.2.1-68) extend through the openings (11.1.3.2.1-28), one or more sealing members (11.1.3.2.1-52) may be formed to fill the openings (11.1.3.2.1-28) and surround corresponding portions of the connectors (11.1.3.2.1-68). When the openings are formed in the upper portion (11.1.3.2.1-24) of the upper case (11.1.3.2.1-20), the sealing members (11.1.3.2.1-52) need not mate with the lower plate (11.1.3.2.1-112). In this way, the upper case (11.1.3.2.1-20) and the lower plate (11.1.3.2.1-112) can be joined with a continuous seal, such as a weld.

It will be appreciated that the opening(s) (11.1.3.2.1-28) may be provided in any portion of the upper case (11.1.3.2.1-20) and/or the lower plate (11.1.3.2.1-112). Regardless of their location, the openings (11.1.3.2.1-28) may be filled around the flex circuit (11.1.3.2.1-60) and connector(s) (11.1.3.2.1-68) with a sealing member (11.1.3.2.1-52).

The sensor assemblies of the present disclosure can provide predictable performance over the life of a head-mounted device by isolating the sensors from strain and humidity changes. This can enable absolute orientation measurements between multiple sensors over the life of the head-mounted device without requiring repeated calibration. By providing each sensor (e.g., an IMU) with a consistent position and orientation, any one or multiple sensors can be dedicated as a reference sensor for the entire head-mounted device.

Referring now to FIG. 239, components of a head-mountable device may be operatively connected to provide the performance described herein. FIG. 239 depicts a simplified block diagram of an exemplary head-mountable device (11.1.3.2.1-100), in accordance with one embodiment of the present invention. It will be appreciated that the components described herein may be provided in either or both of the frame and/or the head engager of the head-mountable device (11.1.3.2.1-100). It will be appreciated that additional components, different components, or fewer components than those depicted may be utilized within the scope of the present disclosure.

As illustrated in FIG. 239, the head-mountable device (11.1.3.2.1-100) may include a controller (11.1.3.2.1-180) (e.g., control circuitry) having one or more processing units that include or are configured to access a memory (11.1.3.2.1-182) having instructions stored therein. The instructions or computer programs may be configured to perform one or more of the operations or functions described with respect to the head-mountable device (11.1.3.2.1-100). The controller (11.1.3.2.1-180) may be implemented as any electronic device capable of processing, receiving, or transmitting data or instructions. For example, the controller (11.1.3.2.1-180) may include one or more of a microprocessor, a central processing unit (CPU), an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a digital signal processor (DSP), or a combination of such devices. As used herein, the term "processor" is intended to encompass a single processor or processing unit, multiple processors, multiple processing units, or other suitably configured computing element or elements.

Memory (11.1.3.2.1-182) can store electronic data usable by the head-mounted device (11.1.3.2.1-100). Memory (11.1.3.2.1-182) can include memory of the flex circuit (11.1.3.2.1-170) described herein. For example, memory (11.1.3.2.1-182) can store electrical data or content such as, for example, audio and video files, documents and applications, device settings and user preferences, timing and control signals or data for various modules, data structures or databases, etc. Memory (11.1.3.2.1-182) can be configured as any type of memory. By way of example only, memory (11.1.3.2.1-182) may be implemented as random access memory, read-only memory, flash memory, removable memory, or other types of storage elements, or combinations of such devices.

The head-mounted device (11.1.3.2.1-100) may further include a display (11.1.3.2.1-140) for displaying visual information to a user. The display (11.1.3.2.1-140) may provide visual (e.g., image or video) output. The display (11.1.3.2.1-140) may be or include an opaque, transparent, and/or translucent display. The display (11.1.3.2.1-140) may have a transparent or translucent medium through which light representing images is directed toward the user's eyes. The display (11.1.3.2.1-140) may utilize digital light projection, OLEDs, LEDs, uLEDs, silicon liquid crystal displays, a laser scanning light source, or any combination of these technologies. The medium may be an optical waveguide, a holographic medium, an optical combiner, an optical reflector, or any combination thereof. In one embodiment, a transparent or translucent display may be configured to be optionally opaque. Projection-based systems may employ retinal projection technology to project graphical images onto a person's retina. Projection systems may also be configured to project virtual objects into the physical environment, for example, as holograms or onto physical surfaces. A head-mounted device (11.1.3.2.1-100) may include an optical subassembly configured to assist in optically adjusting and accurately projecting image-based content displayed by the display (11.1.3.2.1-140) for close-up viewing. The optical subassembly may include one or more lenses, mirrors, or other optical devices.

A head-mountable device (11.1.3.2.1-100) may include one or more sensors (11.1.3.2.1-70), such as sensors of a sensor assembly as described herein. The head-mountable device (11.1.3.2.1-100) may include one or more other sensors, including sensors of a sealed enclosure assembly and/or other sensors. Such sensors may be configured to sense substantially any type of characteristic, such as, but not limited to, image, pressure, light, touch, force, temperature, position, motion, and the like. For example, the sensors may be photodetectors, temperature sensors, light or optical sensors, barometric pressure sensors, humidity sensors, magnets, gyroscopes, accelerometers, chemical sensors, ozone sensors, particle count sensors, and the like. As a further example, the sensors may be biosensors for tracking biometric characteristics, such as health and activity metrics. Other user sensors can perform facial feature detection, facial motion detection, face recognition, eye tracking, user mood detection, user emotion detection, voice detection, and more. The sensors can include cameras capable of capturing image-based content from the outside world.

The head-mountable device (11.1.3.2.1-100) may include an input/output component (11.1.3.2.1-186), which may include any suitable component for connecting the head-mountable device (11.1.3.2.1-100) to other devices. Suitable components may include, for example, audio/video jacks, data connectors, or any additional or alternative input/output components. The input/output component (11.1.3.2.1-186) may include buttons, keys, or other features that may act as a keyboard for operation by a user.

The head-mounted device (11.1.3.2.1-100) may include a microphone (11.1.3.2.1-188) as described herein. The microphone (11.1.3.2.1-188) may be operatively connected to a controller (11.1.3.2.1-180) for detecting sound levels and communicating the detections for further processing, as further described herein.

The head-mounted device (11.1.3.2.1-100) may include speakers (11.1.3.2.1-190) as described herein. The speakers (11.1.3.2.1-190) may be operatively connected to a controller (11.1.3.2.1-180) for control of speaker output, including sound levels, as further described herein.

The head-mounted device (11.1.3.2.1-100) may include communication circuitry (11.1.3.2.1-192) for communicating with one or more servers or other devices using any suitable communication protocol. For example, the communication circuitry (11.1.3.2.1-192) may support Wi-Fi (e.g., an 802.11 protocol), Ethernet, Bluetooth, a radio frequency system (e.g., a 900 MHz, 2.4 GHz, and 5.6 GHz communication system), infrared, TCP/IP (e.g., any of the protocols used in each of the TCP/IP layers), HTTP, BitTorrent, FTP, RTP, RTSP, SSH, any other communication protocol, or any combination thereof. The communication circuitry (11.1.3.2.1-192) may also include an antenna for transmitting and receiving electromagnetic signals.

The head-mountable device (11.1.3.2.1-100) may include a battery capable of charging and/or powering components of the head-mountable device (11.1.3.2.1-100). The battery may also charge and/or power components connected to the head-mountable device (11.1.3.2.1-100).

While various embodiments and aspects of the present disclosure are illustrated with respect to head-mounted devices, it will be appreciated that the present techniques encompass and can be applied to other devices. For example, a sensor assembly according to embodiments disclosed herein may be included with an electronic device that is moved during use. Such an electronic device may be or include a desktop computing device, a laptop computing device, a display, a television, a portable device, a telephone, a tablet computing device, a mobile computing device, a wearable device, a watch, and/or a digital media player.

Accordingly, the systems of the present disclosure provide a head-mountable device that stably supports sensors in a manner that maintains their positions and orientations over time, while avoiding excessive stress on the sensors, thereby protecting them from harm. Accordingly, the sensor assemblies described herein enable effective performance of the sensors mounted therein. The sensor assembly provides high robustness over the entire service life of the head-mountable device without stressing the sensors themselves. The seal of the enclosure can isolate the sensors from external influences by preventing the ingress of elements through the case and plate. The sensor assemblies further enable mounting the sensors on a flex circuit, if desired.

Various examples of aspects of the present disclosure are described below for convenience. These are provided as examples and are not intended to limit the present technology.

Item A: A sensor assembly for a head-mountable device, comprising: a flex circuit; an inertial measurement unit coupled to the flex circuit; a base plate disposed adjacent the inertial measurement unit on a side of the flex circuit opposite the inertial measurement unit; and an enclosure disposed around a portion of the inertial measurement unit, the base plate, and the flex circuit, the enclosure comprising: a top case; and a bottom plate coupled to the top case, wherein the bottom plate and the top case are positioned to define a sealed volume containing the inertial measurement unit, the base plate, and the portion of the flex circuit.

Item B: A sensor assembly for a head-mountable device, comprising: a flex circuit; an inertial measurement unit coupled to the flex circuit; an enclosure disposed around the inertial measurement unit and a first portion of the flex circuit, the enclosure defining an opening, and a second portion of the flex circuit extending through the opening to permit electrical communication with the inertial measurement unit; and a sealing member disposed within the opening and around the second portion of the flex circuit to seal the enclosure from an external environment.

Item C: A sensor assembly for a head-mountable device, comprising: a flex circuit; an inertial measurement unit coupled to the flex circuit; a connector in electrical communication with the inertial measurement unit and coupled to the flex circuit; an enclosure disposed around the inertial measurement unit and the flex circuit, the enclosure defining an opening, the connector extending through the opening to permit electrical communication with the inertial measurement unit; and a sealing member disposed within the opening and around the connector to seal the enclosure from an external environment.

One or more of the above items may include one or more of the features described below. Note that any of the items below may be combined with each other in any combination and may be placed within each independent item, for example, Item A, Item B, or Item C.

Item 1: The inertial measurement unit includes an accelerometer, gyroscope, or magnetometer.

Item 2: The top case defines an opening to allow electrical communication with the inertial measurement unit.

Item 3: The flex circuit extends through an opening in the top case.

Item 4: Connector that couples to the flex circuit and communicates electrically with the inertial measurement unit - the connector extends through an opening in the upper case.

Item 5: The opening is limited to the side portion of the upper case.

Item 6: The opening is limited to the upper part of the upper case.

Item 7: A sealing member positioned within the opening to seal the enclosure from the external environment and to allow electrical communication with the inertial measurement unit.

Item 8: The sealing member comprises a sealing adhesive or silicone.

Item 9: Mounting adhesive placed between the base plate and the bottom plate - The mounting adhesive has a coefficient of thermal expansion complementary to that of the top case and bottom plate, thereby minimizing strain on the inertial measurement unit.

Item 10: The inertial measurement unit is mounted on a flex circuit that extends fully through the enclosure.

Item 11: A first portion of the flex circuit within the enclosure defines an S-curve portion.

Item 12: The connector includes a plurality of pins extending through the sealing member.

11.1.3.2.2: Electronic devices having movable optical assemblies

The optical assemblies may have eye trackers. The eye trackers may be used to perform pupillary distance measurements and interpupillary distance measurements. Adjustments to the positions of the optical assemblies may be made by motors based on the pupillary distance measurements and interpupillary distance measurements. For example, position adjustments may not be made unless the measured pupillary distance measurement exceeds a pupillary distance threshold and the measured interpupillary distance is less than the interpupillary distance threshold. If the measured pupillary distance measurement is sufficiently large and the measured interpupillary distance is sufficiently small, adjustments to the positions of the optical assemblies may be made, such that for a given measured pupillary distance, a smaller measured interpupillary distance results in a larger adjustment to the position of the optical assemblies than a larger measured interpupillary distance.

FIG. 240 is a schematic diagram of an exemplary electronic device that may include movable components. The device (11.1.3.2.2-10) of FIG. 240 may be a head-mounted device (e.g., goggles, glasses, a helmet, and/or other head-mounted device), a peripheral device (sometimes referred to as a peripheral) such as a cellular phone, a tablet computer, a laptop computer, a wristwatch, headphones, or other electronic equipment. In an exemplary configuration, the device (11.1.3.2.2-10) is a head-mounted device, such as a pair of goggles (sometimes referred to as virtual reality goggles, mixed reality goggles, augmented reality glasses, etc.).

As illustrated in the exemplary plan view of device (11.1.3.2.2-10) of FIG. 240, device (11.1.3.2.2-10) may have a housing (sometimes referred to as a head-mounted support structure or head-mounted support), such as housing (11.1.3.2.2-12). Housing (11.1.3.2.2-12) may include a main portion (sometimes referred to as a main unit or head-mounted unit), such as section (11.1.3.2.2-12M), and other head-mounted support structures, such as a head strap (11.1.3.2.2-12T). When the housing (11.1.3.2.2-12) is worn on a user's head, the front of the housing (11.1.3.2.2-12) may be oriented outwardly away from the user, the rear of the housing (11.1.3.2.2-12) may be oriented toward the user, and the user's eyes may be positioned within the eye boxes (11.1.3.2.2-36).

The device (11.1.3.2.2-10) may have electrical and optical components used to display images to eye boxes (11.1.3.2.2-36) when the device (11.1.3.2.2-10) is worn. These components may include left and right optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20) (sometimes referred to as optical modules). Each optical assembly (11.1.3.2.2-20) may have an optical assembly support (11.1.3.2.2-38) (sometimes referred to as a lens barrel or optical module support) and guide rails (11.1.3.2.2-22) along which the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20) may slide to adjust the optical assembly-to-optical assembly spacing to accommodate different user pupillary distances.

Each assembly (11.1.3.2.2-20) can have a display (11.1.3.2.2-32) and a lens (11.1.3.2.2-34) having an array of pixels for displaying images. The display (11.1.3.2.2-32) and the lens (11.1.3.2.2-34) of each assembly (11.1.3.2.2-20) can be coupled to and supported by a support (11.1.3.2.2-38). During operation, images displayed by the displays (11.1.3.2.2-32) can be presented to the eye boxes (11.1.3.2.2-36) through the lenses (11.1.3.2.2-34) for viewing by a user. Each optical assembly (11.1.3.2.2-20) may also have an eye tracker (11.1.3.2.2-50). Each of the eye trackers (11.1.3.2.2-50) may include one or more light sources (e.g., infrared light emitting diodes providing glints and flood illumination for eye tracking) and an associated camera (e.g., an infrared camera). Using the eye trackers (11.1.3.2.2-50), which may sometimes be referred to as eye tracking systems or eye tracking sensors, the device (11.1.3.2.2-10) may collect data about the eyes of the user positioned within the eye boxes (11.1.3.2.2-36). As an example, the direction in which the user's eyes are pointing (sometimes referred to as the user's gaze point or viewing direction) may be measured. Biometric information, such as iris scan information, may also be collected. Additionally, the eye trackers (11.1.3.2.2-50) may be used to measure the position of the user's eyes relative to the device (11.1.3.2.2-10) and thereby measure the pupillary distance of the user's eyes (e.g., the distance between the lenses of the device (11.1.3.2.2-10) and the eyes) and the distance between the user's left and right eyes (sometimes referred to as the user's interpupillary distance). If desired, the eye trackers (11.1.3.2.2-50) (e.g., cameras of the trackers (11.1.3.2.2-50)) may capture images of the skin of the user's face surrounding the user's eyes (e.g., to measure whether the skin of the user's face is lax or taut).

Each optical assembly may have magnets, clips, and/or other engagement features that allow removable vision correction lenses (sometimes referred to as prescription lenses) to be removably attached to the assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20) in alignment with the lenses (11.1.3.2.2-34) (see, e.g., exemplary optional vision correction lenses (11.1.3.2.2-51)). The lenses (11.1.3.2.2-51) may have magnets that are sensed by sensors (11.1.3.2.2-53) (e.g., magnetic sensors within the assembly (11.1.3.2.2-20)), or the sensors (11.1.3.2.2-53) may be optical sensors, switches, or other sensors configured to collect other information indicating when the lenses (11.1.3.2.2-51) are present.

The housing (11.1.3.2.2-12) may have a flexible curtain (sometimes referred to as a flexible rear housing wall or fabric housing wall), such as a curtain (11.1.3.2.2-12R) on the rear of the device (11.1.3.2.2-10) facing the eye boxes (11.1.3.2.2-36). The curtain (11.1.3.2.2-12R) has openings for receiving the assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20). The edges of the curtain (11.1.3.2.2-12R) surrounding each support (11.1.3.2.2-38) may be joined to that support (11.1.3.2.2-38). The outer perimeter edge of the curtain (11.1.3.2.2-12R) may be attached to the rigid housing walls forming the outer shell portion of the main housing (11.1.3.2.2-12M).

The walls of the housing (11.1.3.2.2-12) may separate an interior region (11.1.3.2.2-28) within the device (11.1.3.2.2-10) from an exterior region (11.1.3.2.2-30) surrounding the device (11.1.3.2.2-10).

The inner ends (11.1.3.2.2-24) of the guide rails (11.1.3.2.2-22) may be attached to the central housing portion (11.1.3.2.2-12C). The opposite outer ends (11.1.3.2.2-26) may, in an exemplary configuration, be unsupported (e.g., the outer end portions of the rails (11.1.3.2.2-22) may not be in direct contact with the housing (11.1.3.2.2-12), such that these ends float in the inner region (11.1.3.2.2-28) relative to the housing (11.1.3.2.2-12).

The device (11.1.3.2.2-10) may include control circuitry and other components, such as components (11.1.3.2.2-40). The control circuitry may include storage, processing circuitry formed from one or more microprocessors, and/or other circuits. To support communication between the device (11.1.3.2.2-10) and external equipment, the control circuitry may include wireless communication circuitry. Components (11.1.3.2.2-40) include sensors such as force sensors (e.g., strain gauges, capacitive force sensors, resistive force sensors, etc.), audio sensors such as microphones, touch and/or proximity sensors such as capacitive sensors, optical sensors such as optical sensors that emit and detect light, ultrasonic sensors, and/or other touch sensors and/or proximity sensors, monochrome and color ambient light sensors, image sensors, sensors for detecting position, orientation, and/or motion (e.g., accelerometers, magnetic sensors such as compass sensors, gyroscopes, and/or inertial measurement units that include some or all of these sensors), radio frequency sensors, depth sensors (e.g., depth sensors based on structured light sensors and/or stereo imaging devices), self-mixing sensors, and optical detection and ranging (LIDAR) sensors that collect time-of-flight measurements. Sensors may include humidity sensors, moisture sensors, visual inertial odometry (VIO) sensors, gaze tracking sensors, and/or other sensors. In some arrangements, the devices (11.1.3.2.2-10) may use the sensors to collect user input (e.g., button press input, touch input, etc.). Additionally, the sensors may be used to collect environmental motion (e.g., device motion measurements, temperature measurements, ambient light readings, etc.) and/or may be used to measure user activities and/or attributes (e.g., gaze point, interpupillary distance, interpupillary distance, etc.). If desired, position sensors such as encoders (e.g., optical encoders, magnetic encoders, etc.) can measure the position and consequent movement (e.g., velocity, acceleration, etc.) of the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20) along the rails (11.1.3.2.2-22).

FIG. 241 is a rear view of an exemplary portion (e.g., an inner left portion) of a device (11.1.3.2.2-10). The device (11.1.3.2.2-10) may have left and right actuators (e.g., motors), such as a motor (11.1.3.2.2-48) used to rotate an elongated threaded shaft, such as a screw (11.1.3.2.2-44). A nut (11.1.3.2.2-46) has threads that engage with threads on the screw (11.1.3.2.2-44). As the motor (11.1.3.2.2-48) on each side of the device (11.1.3.2.2-10) is rotated, the corresponding nut (11.1.3.2.2-46) is driven in the +X or -X direction (depending on whether the screw (11.1.3.2.2-44) is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise). This, in turn, moves the optical assembly (11.1.3.2.2-20) on that side of the device (11.1.3.2.2-10) along its optical assembly guide rail (11.1.3.2.2-22) in the +X or -X direction. If desired, the left and right motors (11.1.3.2.2-48) can be independently adjusted to allow the optical assembly (11.1.3.2.2-20) on the left and right sides of the device (11.1.3.2.2-10) to be moved independently.

Each assembly (11.1.3.2.2-20) (e.g., each support (11.1.3.2.2-38) of FIG. 240) may have sections for receiving a corresponding rail (11.1.3.2.2-22) and guiding the assembly (11.1.3.2.2-20) along the rail (11.1.3.2.2-22). By controlling the activity of the motors (11.1.3.2.2-48) cooperatively or individually, the spacing between the left optical assembly and the right optical assembly of the device (11.1.3.2.2-10) can be adjusted to accommodate the pupillary distances of different users. For example, if the eye trackers (11.1.3.2.2-50) determine that the user has closely spaced eyes, the assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20) may be moved inward (toward each other), and if the user has widely spaced eyes, the assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20) may be moved outward (away from each other). By matching the spacing between the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20) to the user's measured interpupillary distance, the user can view visual content presented by the displays of the optical assemblies satisfactorily.

The position and consequent movement of each optical assembly may be monitored using one or more sensors. In the exemplary configuration of FIG. 241, the motor (11.1.3.2.2-48) (e.g., the motor on the left side of the device (11.1.3.2.2-10)) and the optical module (11.1.3.2.2-20) are provided with an optical assembly position sensor based on a magnetic encoder. The encoder includes a magnetic strip (11.1.3.2.2-54) and a magnetic sensor (11.1.3.2.2-52). The magnetic sensor (11.1.3.2.2-52) may be a Hall effect sensor or other suitable magnetic sensor configured to move with the optical assembly (11.1.3.2.2-20). A magnetic strip (11.1.3.2.2-54) attachable to the housing (11.1.3.2.2-12) has a series of magnetic poles (e.g., N and S poles) extending along the X dimension parallel to the guide rail (11.1.3.2.2-22) and parallel to the X-axis positioning direction associated with the optical assembly (11.1.3.2.2-20). As the optical assembly (11.1.3.2.2-20) is moved along the guide rail (11.1.3.2.2-22), a magnetic encoder (e.g., sensor (11.1.3.2.2-52)) measures changes in the magnetic field caused by the magnetic sensor (11.1.3.2.2-52) passing by different magnets within the strip (11.1.3.2.2-54). In this manner, the optical assembly (11.1.3.2.2-20) is provided with a position reference (e.g., by counting N and S stimuli in the strip (11.1.3.2.2-54). Position measurements made by the position sensor may represent properties of the motion of the optical assembly (11.1.3.2.2-20), such as the velocity of the optical assembly (11.1.3.2.2-20) and, if desired, the acceleration and deceleration of the assembly (11.1.3.2.2-20). Accordingly, a magnetic encoder (or other position sensor) associated with each optical assembly (11.1.3.2.2-30) can be used by the device (11.1.3.2.2-10) to measure the position of that optical assembly so that the spacing between the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20) can be satisfactorily adjusted (e.g., to help ensure that the spacing between the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20) is adjusted to match or nearly match the interpupillary distance of the user). Position readings from the optical assembly position sensors (e.g., magnetic encoders) can also be used to determine the velocities of the optical assemblies as they are moved.

Optical assembly velocity information and/or other information from optical assembly position sensors (e.g., linear position sensors formed of magnetic encoders) can be used to monitor whether the optical assemblies have slowed down their movement due to contact between the optical assemblies and the user's nose. As an example, consider the arrangement of FIG. 242. FIG. 242 is a rear view of a central nose bridge portion (NB) of a device (11.1.3.2.2-10). As depicted in FIG. 242, the nose bridge portion (NB) of the housing portion (11.1.3.2.2-12C) has a nose-shaped recess (11.1.3.2.2-60) configured to accommodate a user's nose (see, e.g., exemplary nose surface (11.1.3.2.2-62)). In some situations (e.g., when a user has a wide pupillary distance), the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20) are at a non-zero distance G (sometimes referred to as a gap G) from the surface (11.1.3.2.2-62) after the motors (11.1.3.2.2-48) have adjusted the positions of the assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20) to match the user's pupillary distance. In other situations, such as when the user has a long pupillary distance and a short interpupillary distance, the motors (11.1.3.2.2-48) can move the optical assemblies inward until the curtain (11.1.3.2.2-12R) (Fig. 240) and the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20) contact the left and right sides of the nasal surface (11.1.3.2.2-62).

When the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20) contact the left and right sides of the nasal surface (11.1.3.2.2-62), the motors (11.1.3.2.2-48) will encounter resistance to further lateral movement of the optical assemblies along the X-axis. This will cause the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20) to move more slowly. The optical assembly position sensors will detect the decrease in speed of the optical assemblies. In this manner, the device (11.1.3.2.2-10) receives information that the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20) are in contact with and pressurizing the nasal surface (11.1.3.2.2-62). To ensure that the device (11.1.3.2.2-10) is comfortable when worn on the user's head, the positions of the optical assemblies may be adjusted outwardly away from the nasal surface (11.1.3.2.2-62) (e.g., by 1 to 3 mm or another suitable amount) in response to such detected nose contact. This outward nudge in the positions of the optical assemblies may be achieved even if the resulting spacing between the optical assemblies is slightly greater than the user's measured interpupillary distance.

After outward adjustment of the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20), a non-zero gap (G) may be created between the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20) and corresponding surface portions of the user's nose (e.g., adjacent portions of the nose surface (11.1.3.2.2-62)) and/or the inward pressure applied to the surfaces of the user's nose by the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20) may be reduced to improve comfort. By monitoring the optical assembly position sensors during optical assembly position adjustment by the motors (11.1.3.2.2-48), the device (11.1.3.2.2-10) can identify a position for the assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20) at which the left and right assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20) are separated by a distance that matches as closely as possible the measured interpupillary distance of the user while ensuring satisfactory comfort for the user.

Another way in which the position of the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20) can be satisfactorily adjusted involves using pupillary distance measurements from the eye trackers (11.1.3.2.2-50). When the device (11.1.3.2.2-10) is placed on the user's head, the eye trackers (11.1.3.2.2-50) can measure the user's interpupillary distance and the user's interpupillary distance. The motors (11.1.3.2.2-48) can then adjust the positions of the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20) based on the measured pupillary distance and the measured interpupillary distance of the user. In an exemplary configuration, the positions of the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20) may be offset by a variable amount depending on both the measured interpupillary distance and the measured interpupillary distance (e.g., the spacing between the assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20) may be pushed outward from a position that matches the user's measured interpupillary distance).

This type of approach is illustrated in the graph of FIG. 243. In the graph of FIG. 243, the lateral offset (ΔX) represents the distance by which the optical assembly is adjusted outward (beyond the nominal position where the optical assembly spacing matches the measured interpupillary distance) to improve the fit. The graph of FIG. 243 includes three exemplary curves. Curve (11.1.3.2.2-64) corresponds to the measured interpupillary distance (IPDA), curve (11.1.3.2.2-66) corresponds to the measured interpupillary distance (IPDB) greater than the interpupillary distance (IPDA), and curve (11.1.3.2.2-68) corresponds to the measured interpupillary distance (IPDC) greater than the interpupillary distance (IPDA) and greater than the interpupillary distance (IPDB). The values of IPDA, IPDB, and IPDC can range from 52 to 74 mm or any other suitable range. In practice, the device (11.1.3.2.2-10) may store a family of curves (e.g., empirically determined curves) for any suitable number of measured pupillary distances and/or may represent relationships implemented in curves such as curves (11.1.3.2.2-64, 11.1.3.2.2-66, 11.1.3.2.2-68) using tables, functions, and/or other data structures.

As the graph of FIG. 243 illustrates, if the user's measured interpupillary distance falls below a predetermined threshold (e.g., ERTH in the example of FIG. 243), the user is unlikely to experience pressure from the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20) on the surfaces of the user's nose. Accordingly, for measured user interpupillary distance values below the interpupillary distance threshold (ERTH), the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20) may be separated along the X-axis by a distance that matches the user's measured interpupillary distance (e.g., there is no need to use a non-zero value of ΔX to adjust the outward position of the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20) after the optical assemblies have reached an appropriate spacing to match the user's interpupillary distance). Therefore, the value of ΔX is 0 for users with measured pupillary distance values below the ERTH (which may be, for example, a value of 18 mm to 22 mm or another suitable pupillary distance threshold).

However, if the measured interpupillary distance of the user exceeds the pupillary distance threshold (ERTH), it may be beneficial for certain users to increase the spacing between the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20) by pushing each optical assembly outward by an amount ΔX. As an example, consider a user having measured interpupillary distances of IPDA. For this class of users, it may be beneficial to adjust the spacing of the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20) outward by values of ΔX that follow the curve (11.1.3.2.2-64). As illustrated by curve (11.1.3.2.2-64), for measured pupillary distance values below the ERTH, ΔX may be zero, while for measured pupillary distance values above the ERTH, ΔX may gradually increase as a function of measured pupillary distance (e.g., up to a maximum ΔX value at the maximum measured pupillary distance value of ERMX, which may be, for example, 25 mm or other suitable value). Users with larger pupillary distances, such as those of IPDB, may benefit from a less aggressive outward increase in optical assembly spacing, as illustrated by curve (11.1.3.2.2-66), where the value of ΔX increases more slowly as a function of increasing measured pupillary distance above the ERTH than does curve (11.1.3.2.2-64).

There may exist an interpupillary distance threshold, regardless of the user's measured pupillary distance, beyond which it is undesirable to perform any ΔX adjustments for the user. For example, when a user has a large measured pupillary distance (e.g., a measured pupillary distance of an IPDC that exceeds the interpupillary distance threshold), there will generally be no comfort benefit to increasing the optical assembly spacing. Consequently, the recommended outward adjustment ΔX of the optical assembly position as a function of measured pupillary distance for users with such larger measured pupillary distances follows the curve (11.1.3.2.2-68) (e.g., ΔX remains zero even for a measured pupillary distance of an ERMX). With this approach, outward adjustments of the optical assembly position will only be used for measured pupillary distances below the interpupillary distance threshold.

The graph of FIG. 243 illustrates how the motors (11.1.3.2.2-48) can position the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20) at positions that vary from the measured positions of the user's eyes. In the example of FIG. 243, the measured pupillary distance and interpupillary distance values were used to determine satisfactory positions for the assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20). In particular, outward adjustments ΔX of the position of the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20) were recommended as a function of the interpupillary distance and interpupillary distance values measured for the user by the eye trackers (11.1.3.2.2-50). If desired, additional factors may be taken into account when performing such optical assembly adjustments (e.g., additional factors that may be used as an alternative to or in combination with using interpupillary distance measurements and intrapupillary distance measurements) and/or other suitable actions may be taken based on data collected by the eye trackers (11.1.3.2.2-50) and/or other sensors within the device (11.1.3.2.2-10).

FIG. 244 is a flowchart illustrating operations involved in using motors (11.1.3.2.2-48) and other components within a device (11.1.3.2.2-10) to perform adjustments to the device (11.1.3.2.2-10) as a function of data collected by eye trackers (11.1.3.2.2-50) and/or other sensors.

During the operations of block (11.1.3.2.2-70), the device (11.1.3.2.2-10) may collect data. The collected data may include, for example, measurements obtained by eye trackers (11.1.3.2.2-50). Such measurements may include, for example, measured interpupillary distance of a user wearing the device (11.1.3.2.2-10), measured interpupillary distance of a user wearing the device (11.1.3.2.2-10), measured skin tautness around the eyes of a user wearing the device (11.1.3.2.2-10), and/or other eye tracker measurements. Measurements of the block (11.1.3.2.2-70) may also include measurements by position sensors (e.g., magnetic encoders) of the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20). For example, when a user wears the device (11.1.3.2.2-10), the motors (11.1.3.2.2-48) may automatically begin moving the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20) to positions associated with the user's measured interpupillary distance from the eye trackers (11.1.3.2.2-50). During this initial movement, or during movement in response to a user input command or other movement, the position sensors may be used to monitor the velocities of the assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20). In response to a detected slowing in the velocity of the inward movement of the assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20), the device (11.1.3.2.2-10) may conclude that the assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20) are beginning to exert pressure on surfaces of the user's nose (e.g., nasal surface (11.1.3.2.2-62)). The locations associated with the measured decrease in optical assembly velocity are other forms of measurement data that may be collected during block (11.1.3.2.2-70).

Additional information that may be collected during operations of the block (11.1.3.2.2-70) relates to the state of the vision correction lenses (11.1.3.2.2-51) on the device (11.1.3.2.2-10). The vision correction lenses (11.1.3.2.2-51) may include magnets that generate a magnetic field. The device (11.1.3.2.2-10) (e.g., the assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20)) may have vision correction lens sensors, such as magnetic sensors (11.1.3.2.2-53), that determine whether the lenses (11.1.3.2.2-51) are present by monitoring the presence of magnetic fields generated by the lenses (11.1.3.2.2-51). In response to the detection of magnetic fields from the lenses (11.1.3.2.2-51) by the sensors (11.1.3.2.2-53), it can be concluded that the lenses (11.1.3.2.2-51) are present.

During operations of block (11.1.3.2.2-72), the device (11.1.3.2.2-10) may take action based on data collected in block (11.1.3.2.2-70). As an example, the positions of the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20) may be adjusted using motors (11.1.3.2.2-48). In some configurations, the positions of the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20) may be displaced outward by an amount ΔX, which is determined from the measured interpupillary distance and pupillary distance values, as described with respect to FIG. 243. If desired, the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20) may be moved slightly inward in some scenarios (e.g., the assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20) may be moved toward each other closer than adjusted by the measured value of the user's interpupillary distance to increase nasal field of view overlap when increasing nasal field of view overlap indicates a low risk of optical assembly-nasal surface contact or when any potential nasal contact may be detected by the optical module position sensor or other sensor). To reduce wrinkles within the posterior curtain (11.1.3.2.2-12R), the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20) may be moved slightly inward or outward to tighten the curtain (11.1.3.2.2-12R). Movement of the optical assembly by the motors (11.1.3.2.2-48) may also be used to provide an alert to the user (e.g., a haptic alert indicating that an incoming message has been received and/or that another condition has been determined to exist). In some arrangements, gaze sensor measurements from the trackers (11.1.3.2.2-50) during block (11.1.3.2.2-70) may be used to determine whether the user's skin surrounding the user's eyes is taut. In response to detecting an increase in skin tension as the assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20) are moved (e.g., as the assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20) are being moved toward each other), it can be concluded that the assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20) are pressing or are about to press against the nasal surface (11.1.3.2.2-62), such that further inward movement of the assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20) can be stopped and/or the assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20) can be pushed outward to compensate. The positions of the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20) can also be adjusted in response to detecting the presence or absence of vision corrective lenses (11.1.3.2.2-51). The presence of lenses (11.1.3.2.2-51) may, for example, increase or decrease the risk of nose contact by the assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20), so that information about the presence of lenses (11.1.3.2.2-51) (and, if desired, a prescription associated with the lenses (11.1.3.2.2-51)) may be taken into account when using the motors (11.1.3.2.2-48) to adjust the position of the assemblies (11.1.3.2.2-20). Alternatively, these types of adjustments and/or other suitable actions may be taken during operations of block (11.1.3.2.2-72) in response to eye tracker measurement data and/or other data measured during operations of block (11.1.3.2.2-70).

11.1.3.2.3: Electronic devices having movable optical assemblies

The force that causes the motor to move toward the central nose bridge portion of the device and thus toward the nasal surfaces located in the nose bridge portion can be limited. The force can be limited using a clutch, such as a magnetic clutch or a physical clutch, based on structures that are decoupled from each other to limit the force. The force can also be limited by monitoring the force and stopping the motors in response to detecting a given amount of force. Sensor measurements and electric motor load measurements can be used to measure the force. If desired, the motor operation can be controlled by a user-operated button. The direction of movement of the optical assembly allowed when accommodating different interpupillary distances can also be controlled.

FIG. 245 is a schematic diagram of an exemplary electronic device that may include movable optical assemblies to accommodate different interpupillary distances. The device (11.1.3.2.3-10) of FIG. 245 may be a head-mounted device (e.g., goggles, glasses, a helmet, and/or other head-mounted device). In an exemplary configuration, the device (11.1.3.2.3-10) is a head-mounted device, such as a pair of goggles (sometimes referred to as virtual reality goggles, mixed reality goggles, augmented reality glasses, etc.).

As illustrated in the exemplary cross-sectional plan view of the device (11.1.3.2.3-10) of FIG. 245, the device (11.1.3.2.3-10) may have a housing (sometimes referred to as a head-mounted support structure, head-mounted housing, or head-mounted support), such as a housing (11.1.3.2.3-12). The housing (11.1.3.2.3-12) may include a forward portion, such as a forward portion (11.1.3.2.3-12F), and a rear portion, such as a rear portion (11.1.3.2.3-12R). When the device (11.1.3.2.3-10) is worn on the user's head, the rear portion (11.1.3.2.3-12R) rests against the user's face and helps block stray light from reaching the user's eyes, and the nose bridge portion (NB) of the housing (11.1.3.2.3-12) rests on the user's nose.

The main portion (11.1.3.2.3-12M) of the housing (11.1.3.2.3-12) can be attached to a head strap (11.1.3.2.3-12T). The head strap (11.1.3.2.3-12T) can be used to assist in mounting the main portion (11.1.3.2.3-12) on the user's head and face. The main portion (11.1.3.2.3-12M) can have a rigid shell formed from housing walls of polymer, glass, metal, and/or other materials. When the housing (11.1.3.2.3-12) is worn on the user's head, the front of the housing (11.1.3.2.3-12) may face away from the user, and the rear of the housing (11.1.3.2.3-12) (and the rear portion (11.1.3.2.3-12R)) may face the user. In this configuration, the rear portion (11.1.3.2.3-12R) may face the user's eyes located within the eye boxes (11.1.3.2.3-36).

The device (11.1.3.2.3-10) may have electrical and optical components used to display images to eye boxes (11.1.3.2.3-36) when the device (11.1.3.2.3-10) is worn. These components may include left and right optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) (sometimes referred to as optical modules). Each optical assembly (11.1.3.2.3-20) may have an optical assembly support (11.1.3.2.3-38) (sometimes referred to as a lens barrel, an optical module support, or a support structure) and guide rails (11.1.3.2.3-22) along which the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) may slide to adjust the optical assembly-to-optical assembly spacing to accommodate different user pupillary distances.

Each assembly (11.1.3.2.3-20) may have a display (11.1.3.2.3-32) having an array of pixels for displaying images and a lens (11.1.3.2.3-34). The lens (11.1.3.2.3-34) may optionally have a removable vision correction lens for correcting user vision defects (e.g., refractive errors such as myopia, hyperopia, and/or astigmatism). In each assembly (11.1.3.2.3-20), the display (11.1.3.2.3-32) and the lens (11.1.3.2.3-34) may be coupled to and supported by a support (11.1.3.2.3-38). During operation, images displayed by the displays (11.1.3.2.3-32) may be presented to the eye boxes (11.1.3.2.3-36) through the lenses (11.1.3.2.3-34) for observation by the user.

The rear portion (11.1.3.2.3-12R) may include flexible structures (e.g., a flexible polymer layer, a flexible fabric layer, etc.) such that the portion (11.1.3.2.3-12R) may be elongated to accommodate movement of the supports (11.1.3.2.3-38) toward and away from each other to accommodate different user interpupillary distances.

The walls of the housing (11.1.3.2.3-12) can separate an interior region (11.1.3.2.3-28) within the device (11.1.3.2.3-10) from an exterior region (11.1.3.2.3-30) surrounding the device (11.1.3.2.3-10). In the interior region (11.1.3.2.3-28), optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) can be mounted on guide rails (11.1.3.2.3-22). The guide rails (11.1.3.2.3-22) can be attached to a central housing portion (11.1.3.2.3-12C). If desired, the outer ends of the guide rails (11.1.3.2.3-22) may be unsupported (e.g., the outer end portions of the rails (11.1.3.2.3-22) may not be in direct contact with the housing (11.1.3.2.3-12), such that these ends float in the inner region (11.1.3.2.3-28) relative to the housing (11.1.3.2.3-12).

The device (11.1.3.2.3-10) may include other components, such as control circuitry and components (11.1.3.2.3-40). The control circuitry may include storage, processing circuitry formed from one or more microprocessors, and/or other circuits. To support communication between the device (11.1.3.2.3-10) and external equipment, the control circuitry may include wireless communication circuitry. Components (11.1.3.2.3-40) include sensors such as force sensors (e.g., strain gauges, capacitive force sensors, resistive force sensors, etc.), audio sensors such as microphones, touch and/or proximity sensors such as capacitive sensors, optical sensors such as optical sensors that emit and detect light, ultrasonic sensors, and/or other touch sensors and/or proximity sensors, monochrome and color ambient light sensors, image sensors, sensors for detecting position, orientation and/or motion (e.g., accelerometers, magnetic sensors such as compass sensors, gyroscopes, and/or inertial measurement units that include any or all of these sensors), radio frequency sensors, depth sensors (e.g., depth sensors based on structured light sensors and/or stereo imaging devices), self-mixing sensors and light detection and ranging (LD) sensors that collect time-of-flight measurements. The devices (11.1.3.2.3-10) may include optical sensors such as LIDAR sensors, humidity sensors, water sensors, visual inertial odometry (VIO) sensors, current sensors, voltage sensors, and/or other sensors. In some arrangements, the devices (11.1.3.2.3-10) may use the sensors to collect user input (e.g., button press input, touch input, etc.). The sensors may also be used to collect environmental motion (e.g., device motion measurements, temperature measurements, ambient light readings, etc.).

The optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) may have eye trackers (11.1.3.2.3-62) (sometimes referred to as eye tracker sensors). The eye trackers (11.1.3.2.3-62), operable through the lenses (11.1.3.2.3-34), may include one or more light sources, such as infrared light emitting diodes, that emit infrared light to illuminate the user's eyes within the eye boxes (11.1.3.2.3-36). The eye trackers (11.1.3.2.3-62) also include infrared cameras for capturing images of the user's eyes and measuring reflections (glitters) of the infrared light from each of the infrared light sources. By processing these eye images, the eye trackers (11.1.3.2.3-62) can track the user's eyes and determine the user's point of gaze. The eye trackers (11.1.3.2.3-62) can also measure the positions of the user's eyes (e.g., the user's eye relief and the user's interpupillary distance).

To accommodate users with different pupillary distances (eye-to-eye gaps), the spacing between the left and right optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) within the device (11.1.3.2.3-10) can be adjusted (e.g., to match or nearly match the measured pupillary distance of the user). The device (11.1.3.2.3-10) can have left and right actuators (e.g., motors), such as motors (11.1.3.2.3-48). Each motor (11.1.3.2.3-48) can be used to rotate an elongated threaded shaft (screw), such as shaft (11.1.3.2.3-44). A nut (11.1.3.2.3-46) is provided on each shaft (11.1.3.2.3-44). The nut has threads that engage with threads on the shaft (11.1.3.2.3-44). As the shaft rotates, the nut on the shaft is driven in the +X or -X direction (depending on whether the shaft is being rotated clockwise or counterclockwise). This in turn moves an optical assembly (11.1.3.2.3-20) attached to the nut along its optical assembly guide rail (11.1.3.2.3-22) in the +X or -X direction. Each assembly (11.1.3.2.3-20) (e.g., support (11.1.3.2.3-38)) may have portions that receive one of the guide rails (11.1.3.2.3-22) such that the assembly is guided along the guide rail. By controlling the activity of the motors (11.1.3.2.3-48), the spacing between the left and right optical assemblies of the device (11.1.3.2.3-10) can be adjusted to accommodate the interpupillary distances of different users. For example, if a user has closely spaced eyes, the assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) can be moved inward (towards each other and towards the nose bridge portion (NB) of the housing (11.1.3.2.3-12)), and if a user has widely spaced eyes, the assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) can be moved outward (away from each other).

When the device (11.1.3.2.3-10) is worn by the user, the user's head is positioned within the area (11.1.3.2.3-68). The presence of the user's head (and thus, whether the device (11.1.3.2.3-10) is worn or not) may be determined using one or more sensors (e.g., gaze trackers (11.1.3.2.3-62) capable of detecting the presence of the user's eyes within the eye boxes (11.1.3.2.3-36), rear-facing sensors such as sensors (11.1.3.2.3-66) on the main housing (11.1.3.2.3-12M), head-facing sensors mounted on a strap (11.1.3.2.3-12T) such as sensors (11.1.3.2.3-64), and/or other head presence sensors). These sensors may include cameras, light sensors (e.g., visible or infrared sensors that measure when ambient light levels are reduced due to shadowing by the user's head), proximity sensors (e.g., sensors that emit light, such as infrared light, and measure the corresponding reflected light from the user's head by an infrared sensor, capacitive proximity sensors, ultrasonic acoustic proximity sensors, etc.), switches that detect head pressure when the user's head is present and/or other force sensing sensors, and/or other head presence sensors.

When the device (11.1.3.2.3-10) is worn and the user's head is within the region (11.1.3.2.3-68), the user's nose will be beneath the nose bridge portion (NB) of the housing (11.1.3.2.3-12). When the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) are moved toward each other so that the assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) are spaced apart by an amount that matches or nearly matches the interpupillary distance of the user, the inner surfaces (11.1.3.2.3-60) of the support structures (11.1.3.2.3-38) within the assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) will move toward the opposite outer surfaces (11.1.3.2.3-61) of the user's nose. By sufficient inward movement of the assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20), the surfaces (11.1.3.2.3-60) can contact and press against the nasal surfaces (11.1.3.2.3-61). As a result, an outward force is generated by the nasal surfaces (11.1.3.2.3-61) on the assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20). To avoid discomfort that may occur if the user's nose is pressurized by more than a desired amount, the device (11.1.3.2.3-10) may be provided with features to limit the inward nasal pressure (e.g., to limit the inward force by the assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20)).

In an exemplary embodiment, whenever the device (11.1.3.2.3-10) is mounted on the user's head, the motors (11.1.3.2.3-48) may be allowed to only move the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) away from each other and never towards each other. This ensures that the surfaces (11.1.3.2.3-60) never move towards each other while the user's nose is present, and thus the user's nose will never be excessively pressed by the moving surfaces (11.1.3.2.3-60).

The operation of the device (11.1.3.2.3-10) in this type of arrangement is illustrated in the flowchart of Fig. 246.

During operations of block (11.1.3.2.3-80), the device (11.1.3.2.3-10) may be powered. The device (11.1.3.2.3-10) may be powered, for example, in response to detection of a user button press on button (11.1.3.2.3-70). During power operation, the power supply supplies power (e.g., power supply voltage) to control circuits, sensors, displays, and other components (11.1.3.2.3-40) of the device (11.1.3.2.3-10).

During operations of block (11.1.3.2.3-82), the motors (11.1.3.2.3-48) may move the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) away from each other in response to detecting a power supply condition (e.g., in response to detecting the presence of a power supply voltage). The eye trackers (11.1.3.2.3-62) can capture images of the user's eyes within the eye boxes (11.1.3.2.3-36) in response to detecting a power supply condition (e.g., in response to a power supply voltage) and use this information to determine a target spacing between the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) (e.g., the eye trackers (11.1.3.2.3-62) can measure the user's interpupillary distance and/or other eye characteristics, such as the user's interpupillary distance, and use the measured interpupillary distance and/or other eye characteristics to establish a target spacing for the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20)). During the operation of block (11.1.3.2.3-82), the motors (11.1.3.2.3-48) can move the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) away from each other until the target spacing (target positions) for the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) is reached.

During the operation of the block (11.1.3.2.3-84), after the motors (11.1.3.2.3-48) have positioned the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) to their desired positions, further movement of the assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) can be stopped, and the device (11.1.3.2.3-10) can be used to present images to the eye boxes (11.1.3.2.3-36) for observation by the user.

After the user has completed observing content by the device (11.1.3.2.3-10), the device (11.1.3.2.3-10) may be powered down for storage. In an exemplary scenario, a button press on the button (11.1.3.2.3-70) or other input is used to instruct the device (11.1.3.2.3-10) to shut down. The optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) may remain in their current positions while the devices (11.1.3.2.3-10) are powered down or moved toward each other in preparation for subsequent outward movement (e.g., see block (11.1.3.2.3-82)). When the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) are moved toward each other (at block (11.1.3.2.3-86) or at other times, such as during initial power-up operations), a head presence sensor may be used to detect whether the user's head is present within the area (11.1.3.2.3-68). The head presence sensor may be used, for example, to verify that the user's head is not present whenever the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-82) are being moved toward each other. For example, during operations of block (11.1.3.2.3-86), motors (11.1.3.2.3-48) may move optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) toward each other in response to a detected user power-down command (e.g., a button press input on button (11.1.3.2.3-70)) if a head is not detected by the head presence sensor.

In another exemplary embodiment illustrated in the flowchart of FIG. 247, the motors (11.1.3.2.3-48) may be configured to move the optical assemblies toward each other only when a user actively permits movement of the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20). As an example, a user input device, such as a button (11.1.3.2.3-70), may be mounted on the housing (11.1.3.2.3-12) (e.g., on an outer surface of the housing (11.1.3.2.3-12M) or on another outer surface of the housing (11.1.3.2.3-12)). The motors (11.1.3.2.3-48) may be configured to inhibit movement of the assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) whenever the button (11.1.3.2.3-70) is not pressed (e.g., the motors (11.1.3.2.3-48) may remain stationary). In response to detecting pressing and continual holding of the button (11.1.3.2.3-70) by a user, the motors (11.1.3.2.3-48) may move the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) to adjust the spacing between the assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20). The motors (11.1.3.2.3-48) can move the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) from an initial configuration where the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) are spaced apart by their maximum spacing or another wide spacing, for example, to a target configuration where the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) are separated by a distance equal to or approximately equal to the measured interpupillary distance associated with the user's eyes (e.g., the assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) can be moved toward their target positions as measured by the eye trackers (11.1.3.2.3-62)).

As illustrated in FIG. 247, the device (11.1.3.2.3-10) may be powered during the operations of block (11.1.3.2.3-90). After the power-up operations, while the device (11.1.3.2.3-10) is worn on the user's head, the gaze trackers (11.1.3.2.3-62) may optionally measure the user's interpupillary distance and/or other eye characteristics of the user's eyes. These measurements may establish a desired spacing (e.g., target locations) for the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20).

During the operation of block (11.1.3.2.3-92), the user has the opportunity to press the button (11.1.3.2.3-70). When a button press input is not detected, the motors (11.1.3.2.3-48) remain stationary, preventing the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) from moving. When a button press input is detected, the motors (11.1.3.2.3-48) are allowed to move to adjust the spacing between the assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20). As an example, the motors (11.1.3.2.3-48) may move the assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) inward toward their target positions. During movement of the assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20), the motors (11.1.3.2.3-48) may be stopped in response to any detected user release of the button (11.1.3.2.3-70). In this manner, the positions of the assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) will be adjusted as long as the button (11.1.3.2.3-70) is pressed, but will be stopped in response to the release of the button (11.1.3.2.3-70) (e.g., when the user wishes to prevent movement of the assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) that may be pressed against the nasal surfaces (11.1.3.2.3-62). In this scenario, the user maintains continuous control of the assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20).

Once the desired positions of the assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) are reached, the device (11.1.3.2.3-10) can be used to observe images while worn by the user. The motors (11.1.3.2.3-48) can automatically stop when the target positions measured by the eye trackers (11.1.3.2.3-62) are reached, or the motors (11.1.3.2.3-48) can stop when the user releases the button (11.1.3.2.3-70). If desired, the direction of movement of the assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) can be controlled by providing two buttons (11.1.3.2.3-70) on the device (11.1.3.2.3-10) (e.g., an inward movement button and an outward movement button) or by providing a first button (11.1.3.2.3-70) for controlling the movement (e.g., a start/stop button) and a second button (e.g., a slider having two positions) used to select between an inward movement setting and an outward movement setting. Arrangements of the device (11.1.3.2.3-10) having microphones for collecting voice commands, non-button user input devices such as touch screen displays, and/or other user input devices can also be used to control the movement of the motors (11.1.3.2.3-48).

The clutches can be used to limit the amount of inward force applied by the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) when the assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) are moved toward the nose surfaces (11.1.3.2.3-61) by the motors (11.1.3.2.3-48).

In the example of FIG. 248, a split nut arrangement is used for the nut (11.1.3.2.3-46), forming a mechanical clutch (sometimes referred to as a force limiter). As shown in FIG. 248, the nut (11.1.3.2.3-46) can be moved (parallel to the X-axis) by rotating the threaded shaft (11.1.3.2.3-44). The nut (11.1.3.2.3-46) may have a split, such as the split (11.1.3.2.3-91). If excessive force is experienced (e.g., when the assembly (11.1.3.2.3-20) begins to press against the nose surface (11.1.3.2.3-61), the nut (11.1.3.2.3-46) will be forced apart in the directions (11.1.3.2.3-93) and will slide over the threads on the shaft (11.1.3.2.3-44) rather than being driven inward by the interaction between the threads on the shaft (11.1.3.2.3-44) and the corresponding threads in the nut (11.1.3.2.3-46). In this way, the excessive force is released, and the clutch provided by the split (11.1.3.2.3-91) helps prevent more than the desired amount of force from being applied to the user's nose. Therefore, the split nut configuration of Fig. 248 acts as a release mechanism to limit pressure from the assembly (11.1.3.2.3-20) on the nose surface (11.1.3.2.3-61).

Poetic magnetic clutches are illustrated in FIGS. 249 and 250. In the magnetic clutch arrangement of FIG. 249, a magnet (11.1.3.2.3-95) is attached to a nut (11.1.3.2.3-46), and a magnet (11.1.3.2.3-96), which is attracted to the magnet (11.1.3.2.3-95), is attached to a support (11.1.3.2.3-38). Optional structures (11.1.3.2.3-98) (e.g., non-magnetic coatings and/or protruding structures that establish an air gap between the magnets (11.1.3.2.3-95, 11.1.3.2.3-96)) may be used to adjust the holding force established by the attractive force between the magnets (11.1.3.2.3-95, 11.1.3.2.3-96). During normal operation, the magnets (11.1.3.2.3-95, 11.1.3.2.3-96) are magnetically coupled to each other, allowing the optical assembly support (11.1.3.2.3-38) to move back and forth along the length of the shaft (11.1.3.2.3-44) (e.g., parallel to the X-axis in the example of FIG. 249), thereby adjusting the spacing between the assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20). However, if the inward movement of the assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) is resisted by contact between the surfaces (11.1.3.2.3-60) and the nose surfaces (11.1.3.2.3-61), the holding force of the magnetic clutch will be exceeded, the magnets (11.1.3.2.3-95, 11.1.3.2.3-96) will disengage, and this disengagement of the magnets (11.1.3.2.3-95, 11.1.3.2.3-96) will prevent further inward movement of the assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20).

In the example of Fig. 250, two rows of magnets are provided so that their exposed poles are opposite each other. By this type of arrangement, the poles of the magnets (11.1.3.2.3-95') attract the poles of the magnets (11.1.3.2.3-96'), so that during normal operations, the nut (11.1.3.2.3-46) is magnetically coupled to the support (11.1.3.2.3-38), thereby allowing movement of the support (11.1.3.2.3-38) and thereby adjustment of the position of the optical assembly associated with the support (11.1.3.2.3-38). When the surface (11.1.3.2.3-60) of the support (11.1.3.2.3-38) presses against the nose surface (11.1.3.2.3-61), the magnetic holding capacity of the magnetic clutch of FIG. 250 will be exceeded, the magnets (11.1.3.2.3-95’, 11.1.3.2.3-96’) will disengage and slide past each other, and further inward movement of the assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) toward the user’s nose will be prevented.

FIG. 251 is a diagram illustrating how interlocking physical features can be used to implement a mechanical version of the magnetic clutch of FIG. 250. In the example of FIG. 251, a pin (11.1.3.2.3-100) is coupled to a nut (11.1.3.2.3-46) and projections (11.1.3.2.3-102) (sometimes referred to as snap features, locking structures, or releasable pin locks), which are coupled to a support (11.1.3.2.3-38). During normal operation, the pin (11.1.3.2.3-100) will not bend and will transmit force along the X direction from the nut (11.1.3.2.3-46) to the support (11.1.3.2.3-38) to move the assembly (11.1.3.2.3-20). If excessive force is generated (e.g., when the assembly (11.1.3.2.3-20) contacts the nose surface (11.1.3.2.3-61), the pin (11.1.3.2.3-100) will bend and slide past the projections (11.1.3.2.3-102) in the pin lock, thereby disengaging the nut (11.1.3.2.3-46) from the support (11.1.3.2.3-38) and preventing further movement of the assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) toward the user's nose.

Figures 252, 253, and 254 illustrate exemplary mechanical clutch designs that may be used to implement a mechanical version of the magnetic clutch of Figure 249. In the arrangement of Figure 252, a pin (11.1.3.2.3-108) is coupled to a nut (11.1.3.2.3-46) and interlocked with a releasable pin lock formed from a snap (11.1.3.2.3-110) on a support (11.1.3.2.3-38). When excessive force is applied, the snap (11.1.3.2.3-110) deforms and the pin (11.1.3.2.3-108) is pulled out of the snap (11.1.3.2.3-110), disengaging the clutch. In the arrangement of Fig. 253, the downward projection of the snap (11.1.3.2.3-110) of Fig. 252 is replaced with a projection (11.1.3.2.3-112) to form a releasable pin lock. In the example of Fig. 254, the releasable pin lock is formed by a spring (11.1.3.2.3-114) and a movable ball (11.1.3.2.3-116) instead of the projection (11.1.3.2.3-112) of Fig. 253.

As illustrated in FIG. 255, force-sensitive components (sometimes referred to as switches or force sensors) may be used to detect when a desired amount of force is being applied to the supports (11.1.3.2.3-38) by the nuts (11.1.3.2.3-46). The motors (11.1.3.2.3-48) are configured to be deactivated in response to detecting such a high amount of force (e.g., a force exceeding a predetermined threshold), thereby preventing excessive nose pressure from the assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20). In the exemplary arrangement of FIG. 255, a protruding structure, such as a pin (11.1.3.2.3-122), is attached to the nuts (11.1.3.2.3-46). A pin (11.1.3.2.3-122) extends between the first and second switches (11.1.3.2.3-120) (or other force sensors such as strain gauges). In the example of FIG. 255, each switch (11.1.3.2.3-120) has a fixed switch body (11.1.3.2.3-124) having a movable plunger (11.1.3.2.3-126) mounted therein. As the nut (11.1.3.2.3-46) is moved back and forth along the X-axis by the rotation of the shaft (11.1.3.2.3-44) from the motors (11.1.3.2.3-48), the pin (11.1.3.2.3-122) pushes the plungers (11.1.3.2.3-126) (e.g., the plunger of the right switch (11.1.3.2.3-120) when the support (11.1.3.2.3-38) is pushed to the right, and the plunger of the left switch (11.1.3.2.3-120) when the support (11.1.3.2.3-38) is pushed to the left). The plungers (11.1.3.2.3-126) are not significantly pressed into the bodies (11.1.3.2.3-124) unless a critical amount of force on the plungers (11.1.3.2.3-126) is exceeded. Thus, the interaction between the pin (11.1.3.2.3-122) and the switches (11.1.3.2.3-120) causes a lateral force to be transmitted from the nut (11.1.3.2.3-46) to the support (11.1.3.2.3-38) such that the support (11.1.3.2.3-38) slides along the rails (11.1.3.2.3-22) parallel to the X-axis. However, when the assembly (11.1.3.2.3-20) contacts the nose surface (11.1.3.2.3-61), the support (11.1.3.2.3-38) will resist further movement, and the pin (11.1.3.2.3-122) will push the plunger (11.1.3.2.3-126) that contacts the pin (11.1.3.2.3-122) with a force exceeding a threshold amount. In response to detecting a change in state of the switch (11.1.3.2.3-120) due to this increased force, the motors (11.1.3.2.3-48) are stopped, thereby preventing the application of a force exceeding a desired amount to the nose surface (11.1.3.2.3-61).

In the example of FIG. 256, a torque sensitive switch mechanism (sometimes referred to as a torque sensor or torque sensitive switch, a switch (11.1.3.2.3-130)) is used to couple a rotating shaft portion (11.1.3.2.3-44-2) of a shaft (11.1.3.2.3-44) to a rotating shaft portion (11.1.3.2.3-44-1) of a shaft (11.1.3.2.3-44). A nut (11.1.3.2.3-46) may be coupled to the portion (11.1.3.2.3-44-1) and may be used to move a support (11.1.3.2.3-38) parallel to the shaft (11.1.3.2.3-44). The motor (11.1.3.2.3-48) can rotate the shaft portion (11.1.3.2.3-44-2) to move the nut (11.1.3.2.3-46). The switch (11.1.3.2.3-130) can have a first switch portion (11.1.3.2.3-130-1) and a second switch portion (11.1.3.2.3-130-2). When a torque less than a critical amount is applied to the portion (11.1.3.2.3-130-2) by the shaft portion (11.1.3.2.3-44-2), the portion (11.1.3.2.3-130-2) transmits the applied torque to the portion (11.1.3.2.3-130-1), which in turn transmits the applied torque to the portion (11.1.3.2.3-44-1). Rotation of the portion (11.1.3.2.3-44-1) moves the nut (11.1.3.2.3-46) laterally to adjust the lateral position of the support (11.1.3.2.3-38) and the assembly (11.1.3.2.3-20). When the support (11.1.3.2.3-38) contacts the nose surface (11.1.3.2.3-61), the support (11.1.3.2.3-38) will resist further lateral motion by the nut (11.1.3.2.3-46). This will create an increase in torque that is detected by the switch (11.1.3.2.3-130). In response, the motor (11.1.3.2.3-48) stops its motion. By stopping the motors (11.1.3.2.3-48) in response to detecting an amount of torque exceeding a predetermined torque threshold, the motors (11.1.3.2.3-48) can be prevented from applying more force than desired to the nose surface (11.1.3.2.3-61).

If desired, the load on the motors (11.1.3.2.3-48) may be electronically monitored so that the motors (11.1.3.2.3-48) may be stopped if a desired motor load is encountered. An exemplary motor control circuit is illustrated in FIG. 257. As illustrated in FIG. 257, the motors (11.1.3.2.3-48) may be driven using a drive circuit, such as a driver (11.1.3.2.3-140). The driver (11.1.3.2.3-140) may apply any suitable drive signal (e.g., a sinusoidal motor drive current, etc.) to the motors (11.1.3.2.3-48). The current sensor (11.1.3.2.3-144) can measure the current (Imeas) flowing through the motor (11.1.3.2.3-48). The voltage sensor (11.1.3.2.3-142) can measure the voltage (Vmeas) across the terminals of the motor (11.1.3.2.3-48). The back electromotive force ("back EMF") generated when the motor (11.1.3.2.3-48) is operated is equal to (Imeas*Rm - Vmeas), where Rm is a known motor resistance associated with the motor (11.1.3.2.3-48). During operation of the motor (11.1.3.2.3-48), the back EMF can be calculated in real time, and the phase difference between Imeas and the back EMF can be monitored to determine the motor load experienced by the motor (11.1.3.2.3-48) (e.g., the motor (11.1.3.2.3-48) can be determined to be unloaded when the measured phase difference is 90 ^° , fully loaded when the measured phase difference is 0 ^° , and experiencing an intermediate amount of load when the measured phase difference is between 0 ^° and 90 ^° ). The motors (11.1.3.2.3-48) can be configured to stop operation in response to a determination that the motor load has exceeded a desired amount (e.g., a determination that the measured phase difference between Imeas and the back EMF is less than a predetermined threshold phase shift value, such as less than 85 ^° or less than 40 ^° ).

If desired, the motor (11.1.3.2.3-48) may be supplied with a rotary encoder as illustrated in the example of Fig. 258. In this example, a magnet (11.1.3.2.3-150) is attached to the shaft (11.1.3.2.3-44) and a magnetic sensor (11.1.3.2.3-152) is used to monitor the magnetic field generated by the magnet (11.1.3.2.3-150). Thus, the sensor (11.1.3.2.3-152) and the magnet (11.1.3.2.3-152) act as an encoder that measures the rotation of the shaft (11.1.3.2.3-44) and thus the rotation of the rotor within the motor (11.1.3.2.3-48). By this arrangement, the phase shift between the rotor angle and the drive current (e.g., Imeas) can be used as a measure of the motor load (for example), or (in an arrangement where the motors (11.1.3.2.3-48) are controlled by establishing a phase shift of 0 ^o between the rotor angle and the drive current) the motor load can be determined by monitoring Imeas and comparing Imeas to a threshold. If the motor load does not increase (e.g., is below a predetermined threshold), the motors (11.1.3.2.3-48) can rotate normally to move the nuts (11.1.3.2.3-46) along the shaft (11.1.3.2.3-44), thereby moving the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20). When the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) come into contact with the nasal surfaces (11.1.3.2.3-61), the motor load will increase beyond a critical amount. In response, the motors (11.1.3.2.3-48) will stop, thereby preventing excessive pressure on the nasal surfaces (11.1.3.2.3-61).

Another exemplary technique for electronically monitoring motor load involves the use of a linear encoder of the type illustrated in FIG. 259. As illustrated in FIG. 259, the encoder (11.1.3.2.3-156) may include a strip of magnets (11.1.3.2.3-158) and a corresponding magnetic sensor (11.1.3.2.3-160). The sensor (11.1.3.2.3-160) may be attached to a nut (11.1.3.2.3-46). The magnets (11.1.3.2.3-158) may be attached to a fixed support surface (e.g., a portion of the housing (11.1.3.2.3-12)). When the motor (11.1.3.2.3-48) rotates the shaft (11.1.3.2.3-44), the nut (11.1.3.2.3-46) moves parallel to the shaft (11.1.3.2.3-44). This causes the sensor (11.1.3.2.3-160) to move past the magnets (11.1.3.2.3-158) while measuring the magnetic fields from the magnets (11.1.3.2.3-158). By monitoring measured changes in magnetic field strength due to movement of the sensor (11.1.3.2.3-160) past the magnets (11.1.3.2.3-158), the motors (11.1.3.2.3-48) can determine the speed of the nut (11.1.3.2.3-46) and when the nut (11.1.3.2.3-46) has stopped and the motors (11.1.3.2.3-48) are stalled (e.g., when current applied to the motors (11.1.3.2.3-48) does not cause lateral motion in the nuts (11.1.3.2.3-46).

The graph in Figure 260 illustrates how stalling detection can be used to measure the forces experienced by assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) when motors (11.1.3.2.3-48) contact nose surfaces (11.1.3.2.3-61). The solid line (11.1.3.2.3-160) represents an increase in the type of force (F) that may be experienced by the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) (e.g., the support (11.1.3.2.3-38) and the nut (11.1.3.2.3-46)) as the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) come into contact with the nasal surfaces (11.1.3.2.3-61) and begin to feel resistance (backward pressure) from the nasal surfaces (11.1.3.2.3-61). Current (Im) can be applied to motors (11.1.3.2.3-48) by drivers (11.1.3.2.3-140) (Fig. 257) in a pattern following the dotted lines (11.1.3.2.3-162) representing the magnitude of the resulting motor force generated by the current (Im).

In the example of Fig. 260, the motor (11.1.3.2.3-48) periodically stalls at the stalling points (11.1.3.2.3-170). This is because the amount of forward force generated by the current (Im) applied to the motor is equal to the rearward pressure (opposing force (F)) generated as the nose surface (11.1.3.2.3-61) resists further forward motion by the optical assembly (11.1.3.2.3-20). By using an encoder, such as the encoder (11.1.3.2.3-156) of Fig. 259, the motion of the nut (11.1.3.2.3-46) and thus the movement of the support (11.1.3.2.3-38) and the optical assembly (11.1.3.2.3-20) can be monitored. Whenever no motion is detected in response to a particular value of the applied current (Im), it can be concluded that the optical assembly (11.1.3.2.3-20) has stopped (e.g., the motor (11.1.3.2.3-48) has stalled at one of the stalling points (11.1.3.2.3-170)). The motor (11.1.3.2.3-48) may be a stepper motor controlled by the application of sets of pulses (e.g., ten pulses at a time). After a stalling event is detected (e.g., when it is detected that the motor (11.1.3.2.3-48) has moved the assembly (11.1.3.2.3-20) less than expected after a given set of current pulses have been applied), the magnitude of the applied current (Im) is initially increased (to ensure further movement) and then decreased until the force produced by the motor (11.1.3.2.3-48) matches the opposing force due to nose surface contact, as illustrated in FIG. 260. In this way, whenever a stalling point (11.1.3.2.3-170) is reached, the amount of current (Im) can be evaluated. By this approach, the magnitude of the current applied to the motor (11.1.3.2.3-48) precisely tracks the increase in force (F) due to nose contact, so that the magnitude of the current can be used as a measure of the pressure on the nose surface (11.1.3.2.3-61). Motors (11.1.3.2.3-48) may be configured to stop in response to the value of Im exceeding a predetermined threshold (e.g., no more current is applied).

The flowchart of FIG. 261 illustrates exemplary operations that may be involved in operating a device (11.1.3.2.3-10) in an arrangement where electrical monitoring of the motor load is used to determine when to stop motor operation and thereby prevent the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) from applying a desired amount of force on the nose surfaces (11.1.3.2.3-61).

During operations of block (11.1.3.2.3-200), the device (11.1.3.2.3-10) may be powered (e.g., in response to a detected button press or other activity).

Once the device (11.1.3.2.3-10) is powered, the eye trackers (11.1.3.2.3-62) can measure the distance between the user's eyes (user interpupillary distance) and other eye characteristics to determine target locations for the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20). The motors (11.1.3.2.3-48) can then rotate the shafts (11.1.3.2.3-44) to move the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) toward the target locations (e.g., by moving the assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) toward the nose bridge portion (NB) of the housing (11.1.3.2.3-12). During motor operation, the motor load may be electrically monitored (e.g., using back EMF measurements, using encoder output, using measurements of applied current, and/or using other measurements of the types described in connection with FIGS. 257, 258, 259, and 260).

When the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) come into contact with the nasal surfaces (11.1.3.2.3-61), the nasal surfaces (11.1.3.2.3-61) will generate a force against the optical assemblies (11.1.3.2.3-20) that tends to resist further movement. The motors (11.1.3.2.3-48) are configured to cease operation in response to detecting a motor load exceeding a desired amount (e.g., see block (11.1.3.2.3-204)). At this point, the device (11.1.3.2.3-10) is operating normally and can be used to present images to the user's eyes within the eye boxes (11.1.3.2.3-36).

After use of the device (11.1.3.2.3-10), the device (11.1.3.2.3-10) may be powered down (e.g., see operations of block (11.1.3.2.3-206)). The device (11.1.3.2.3-10) may be powered down, for example, in response to detecting a user button press or other activities.

11.1.3.3: Hard stops

FIG. 262 illustrates a portion of an example of an HMD (11.1.3.3-100) including a frame (11.1.3.3-102) and an optical module (11.1.3.3-104) adjustably connected to the frame (11.1.3.3-102). The HMD (11.1.3.3-100) may also include a stop bracket (11.1.3.3-106) connected to the frame adjacent to the optical module (11.1.3.3-104). In at least one example, the stop bracket (11.1.3.3-106) may include a first hard stop feature (11.1.3.3-108a) and a second hard stop feature (11.1.3.3-108b) extending/protruding therefrom to form a stop surface that the optical module (11.1.3.3-104) may contact in cases where the optical module (11.1.3.3-104) is laterally moved or adjusted too far during IPD adjustments described elsewhere herein.

In particular, the optical module (11.1.3.3-104) may include a housing (11.1.3.3-110) configured to contact a stop bracket (11.1.3.3-106) or its tabs (11.1.3.3-108a, 11.1.3.3-108b) during a drop event, or when, for example, a user moves or adjusts the optical module (11.1.3.3-104) laterally too far during IPD adjustment.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 262) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in any of the other drawings illustrated and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated and described with reference to any of the other drawings illustrated and described herein) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 262.

FIG. 263 illustrates another drawing of an example of an HMD (11.1.3.3-200) including an optical module (11.1.3.3-204) having a stop bracket (11.1.3.3-206) and a housing (11.1.3.3-210) including a tab (11.1.3.3-208) secured to a frame (11.1.3.3-202). The HMD (11.1.3.3-200) may also include an adjustment mechanism (11.1.3.3-203) for the optical module (11.1.3.3-204) of the HMD (11.1.3.3-200). In at least one example, the adjustment mechanism (11.1.3.3-203) also includes a stop (11.1.3.3-218) positioned at or near the distal end of the guide rod (11.1.3.3-212). The guide rod (11.1.3.3-212) may be at least partially positioned within a follower (11.1.3.3-214) of the optical module (11.1.3.3-204) such that the optical module (11.1.3.3-204) can be translated laterally along the guide rod (11.1.3.3-212) during adjustment to a user IPD.

In at least one example, the stop (11.1.3.3-218) may include a cavity or channel through which the distal end of the guide rod (11.1.3.3-212) extends. However, in at least one example, no contact is made between the guide rod (11.1.3.3-212) and the stop (11.1.3.3-218), such that the guide rod (11.1.3.3-212) becomes cantilevered. The stop (11.1.3.3-218) may be configured to prevent the optical module (11.1.3.3-204) from moving distally too far along the guide rod (11.1.3.3-212) and beyond its distal end during IPD adjustment. The stop (11.1.3.3-218) may also serve to prevent excessive deformation of the cantilevered guide rod (11.1.3.3-212) during unintended dropping events or other forces that may cause deformation of the guide rod (11.1.3.3-212) and movement of the distal end of the guide rod (11.1.3.3-212). In at least one example, the distal end of the guide rod (11.1.3.3-212) extends into or is at least partially surrounded by the stop (11.1.3.3-218) without making contact therewith during normal use of the HMD (11.1.3.3-200). When unintentionally moved or elastically deformed, the distal end or part of the guide rod (11.1.3.3-212) may come into contact with the stop (11.1.3.3-218), so that the stop (11.1.3.3-218) prevents excessive deformation of the guide rod (11.1.3.3-212), and thus prevents plastic deformation and damage of the guide rod (11.1.3.3-212).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 263) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in any of the other drawings illustrated and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated and described with reference to any of the other drawings illustrated and described herein) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 263.

11.1.3.4: Upper bias members

FIG. 264 illustrates an example of an adjustment mechanism (11.1.3.4-102) of an HMD (11.1.3.3-100) including a follower (11.1.3.3-104) of an optical module that slidably engages a guide rod (11.1.3.4-106). The adjustment mechanism (11.1.3.4-102) may also include an encoder (11.1.3.4-110) for position sensing as the optical module is adjusted/translated along the guide rod (11.1.3.4-106) for IPD adjustments.

In at least one example, the adjustment mechanism (11.1.3.4-102) may also include a biasing element (11.1.3.4 11.1.3.4-108) for biasing the guide rod (106) within the follower (11.1.3.4-104) to reduce slack and play between the follower (11.1.3.3-104) and the guide rod (11.1.3.4-106) during adjustments or when stationary. In at least one example, the biasing element (11.1.3.4-108) includes an elongated spring finger and a guide rod (11.1.3.3-106) that are biased toward the follower (11.1.3.3-104) or other optical module component at the fixing points (11.1.3.4-112) and extend through an opening (11.1.3.4-116) of the follower (11.1.3.4-104) and have a distal end (11.1.3.4-114) that contacts the guide rod (11.1.3.4-106) through the opening (11.1.3.4-116).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 264) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in any of the other drawings illustrated and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated and described with reference to any of the other drawings illustrated and described herein) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 264.

Figure 265 illustrates a portion of another example of an adjustment mechanism (11.1.3.4-202) including a guide rod (11.1.3.4-206) and a bias member (11.1.3.4-208). Although the follower is not illustrated in Figure 265 for illustrative purposes, the bias member (11.1.3.4-208) may be secured to the follower at a fixed point (11.1.3.4-212). The distal end (11.1.3.4-214) of the biasing element (11.1.3.4-208) may include a distal spring finger (11.1.3.4-218) or other feature that is biased toward and contacts the guide rod (11.1.3.4-206) within the follower (to which the biasing element (11.1.3.4-208) is secured) to eliminate slack and play between the follower and the guide rod (11.1.3.4-206).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 265 ) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in any of the other drawings illustrated and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated and described with reference to any of the other drawings illustrated and described herein) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 265 .

11.1.4: Lower guide rod system

11.1.4.1: Electronic devices having biased guide rails

Electronic devices may have input/output devices for collecting input and providing output. These devices may include optical components such as cameras, displays, and lenses.

A plan view of an exemplary electronic device is illustrated in FIG. 266. The electronic device (11.1.4.1-10) of FIG. 266 may be a head-mounted device or other suitable device. As illustrated in FIG. 266, the device (11.1.4.1-10) may have a housing, such as a housing (11.1.4.1-12). The housing (11.1.4.1-12) may sometimes be referred to as a housing wall, an outer housing, housing structures, an enclosure, or a case, and may be formed from polymers, glasses, metals, crystalline materials such as sapphire, ceramics, fabrics, foams, wood, other materials, and/or combinations of these materials.

The device (11.1.4.1-10) may have any suitable shape. The housing (11.1.4.1-12) may be configured to form a head-mounted housing in the shape of, for example, a pair of goggles (e.g., goggles having optional head straps, such as straps (11.1.4.1-12T), a nose bridge portion within a nose bridge region (NB) configured to fit over a user's nose and assist in supporting the housing (11.1.4.1-12) on the user's nose) and/or other head-mounted structures. The housing (11.1.4.1-12) may separate an inner region (11.1.4.1-26) from an outer region (11.1.4.1-28). The housing (11.1.4.1-12) may include portions such as side wall portions, such as a front portion (front wall) (11.1.4.1-12F) on a front face (F) of the device (11.1.4.1-10), a rear portion (rear wall) (11.1.4.1-12R) on an opposite rear face (R) of the device (11.1.4.1-10), and side wall portions (11.1.4.1-12W) on faces (W) extending between the front portion (11.1.4.1-12F) and the rear portion (11.1.4.1-12R) such that the housing (11.1.4.1-12) encloses an interior region (11.1.4.1-26).

Electrical and optical components may be mounted within the housing (11.1.4.1-12) (e.g., in the interior region (11.1.4.1-26)). For example, the housing (11.1.4.1-12) may have optical components, such as displays (11.1.4.1-14) and lenses (11.1.4.1-38), in the interior region (11.1.4.1-26). The displays (11.1.4.1-14) and lenses (11.1.4.1-38) may be mounted in optical modules (11.1.4.1-30) (sometimes referred to as lens barrels, display and lens support structures, etc.). Images from the displays (11.1.4.1-14) can be viewed from the eye boxes (11.1.4.1-36) through the lenses (11.1.4.1-38). The left display and left lens of the left optical module (11.1.4.1-30) can be used to present a left eye image to the user's left eye in the left eye box (11.1.4.1-36), and the right display and right lens of the right optical module (11.1.4.1-30) can be used to present a right eye image to the user's right eye in the right eye box (11.1.4.1-36). Manual adjustment mechanisms and/or electrically adjustable actuators (11.1.4.1-13) (e.g., motors or other electrically adjustable positioners) may be used to move the optical modules (11.1.4.1-30) horizontally across the front of the user's face (e.g., to adjust the distance (D) between the modules (11.1.4.1-30) along a direction parallel to or nearly parallel to the X-axis of FIG. 266). The optical modules (11.1.4.1-30) may be moved closer together or farther apart from each other as needed, for example, to accommodate different user interpupillary distances.

A schematic diagram of an exemplary electronic device is illustrated in FIG. 267. The device (11.1.4.1-10) of FIG. 267 may operate as a standalone device and/or the resources of the device (11.1.4.1-10) may be used to communicate with external electronic equipment. As an example, communication circuitry within the device (11.1.4.1-10) may be used to transmit user input information, sensor information, and/or other information to external electronic devices (e.g., wirelessly or via a wired connection) and/or may be used to receive such information from the external electronic devices. Each of these external devices may include components of the type illustrated by the device (11.1.4.1-10) of FIG. 268.

As illustrated in FIG. 267, the electronic device (11.1.4.1-10) may include control circuitry (11.1.4.1-20). The control circuitry (11.1.4.1-20) may include storage and processing circuitry to support operation of the device (11.1.4.1-10). The storage and processing circuitry may include storage, such as non-volatile memory (e.g., flash memory or other electrically programmable read-only memory configured to form a solid-state drive), volatile memory (e.g., static or dynamic random access memory), etc. The processing circuitry within the control circuitry (11.1.4.1-20) may be used to collect input from sensors (e.g., cameras) and other input devices, and may be used to control output devices. The processing circuitry may be based on one or more microprocessors, microcontrollers, digital signal processors, baseband processors, and other wireless communication circuits, power management units, audio chips, application-specific integrated circuits, etc. During operation, the control circuitry (11.1.4.1-20) may use display(s) (11.1.4.1-14) and other output devices to provide visual and other output to a user.

To support communication between the device (11.1.4.1-10) and external equipment, the control circuitry (11.1.4.1-20) may communicate using communication circuitry (11.1.4.1-22). The circuitry (11.1.4.1-22) may include an antenna, radio frequency transceiver circuitry, other wireless communication circuitry, and/or wired communication circuitry. The circuitry (11.1.4.1-22), which may sometimes be referred to as control circuitry and/or control and communication circuitry, may support bidirectional wireless communication between the device (11.1.4.1-10) and external equipment (e.g., a companion device, such as a computer, a cellular telephone, or other electronic device, an accessory, such as a pointing device, a computer stylus, or other input device, a speaker, or other output devices, etc.) over a wireless link. For example, the circuitry (11.1.4.1-22) may include radio frequency transceiver circuitry, such as wireless local area network transceiver circuitry configured to support communications over a wireless local area network link, near field communication transceiver circuitry configured to support communications over a near field communication link, cellular telephone transceiver circuitry configured to support communications over a cellular telephone link, or transceiver circuitry configured to support communications over any other suitable wired or wireless communication link. The wireless communication may be supported, for example, via a Bluetooth® link, a WiFi® link, a wireless link operating at a frequency between 10 GHz and 400 GHz, a 60 GHz link or other millimeter wave link, a cellular telephone link, or other wireless communication link. If desired, the device (11.1.4.1-10) may include power circuitry for transmitting and/or receiving wired and/or wireless power and may include a battery or other energy storage device. For example, the device (11.1.4.1-10) may include a coil and a rectifier for receiving wireless power provided to the circuit portion of the device (11.1.4.1-10).

Device (11.1.4.1-10) may include input/output devices, such as devices (11.1.4.1-24). Electronic components, such as input/output devices (11.1.4.1-24), may be used to collect user input, collect information about the environment surrounding the user, and/or provide output to the user.

The device (11.1.4.1-24) may include one or more displays, such as display(s) (11.1.4.1-14). The display(s) (11.1.4.1-14) may include one or more display devices, such as an organic light emitting diode display panel (a panel having organic light emitting diode pixels formed on a polymer substrate or silicon substrate including pixel control circuitry), a liquid crystal display panel, a microelectromechanical system display (e.g., a two-dimensional mirror array or scanning mirror display device), a display panel having an array of pixels formed of crystalline semiconductor light emitting diode dies (sometimes referred to as microLEDs), and/or other display devices.

The devices (11.1.4.1-24) may also include cameras (11.1.4.1-34). The cameras (11.1.4.1-34) may include visible light cameras, infrared cameras, and/or cameras sensitive to multiple wavelengths, may include three-dimensional camera systems such as depth sensors (e.g., depth sensors based on structured light sensors and/or stereo imaging devices that capture three-dimensional images), may include time-of-flight cameras, and/or may include other cameras. The cameras (11.1.4.1-34) may be directed toward a user of the device (11.1.4.1-10) and/or may be directed away from a user of the device (11.1.4.1-10).

Sensors (11.1.4.1-16) of input/output devices (11.1.4.1-24) may include force sensors (e.g., strain gauges, capacitive force sensors, resistive sensors, etc.), audio sensors such as microphones, touch and/or proximity sensors, capacitive sensors such as touch sensors forming buttons, trackpads, or other input devices, and other sensors. If desired, the sensors (11.1.4.1-16) may include optical sensors, such as optical sensors that emit and detect light, ultrasonic sensors, optical touch sensors, optical proximity sensors, and/or other touch sensors and/or proximity sensors, monochrome and color ambient light sensors, fingerprint sensors, iris scanning sensors, retina scanning sensors, and other biometric sensors, temperature sensors, sensors for measuring three-dimensional non-contact gestures ("air gestures"), pressure sensors, sensors for detecting position, orientation, and/or motion (e.g., accelerometers, magnetic sensors, such as compass sensors, gyroscopes, and/or inertial measurement units including some or all of these sensors), health sensors such as blood oxygen sensors, heart rate sensors, blood flow sensors, and/or other health sensors, radio frequency sensors, optical sensors, such as self-mixing sensors and light detection and The device (11.1.4.1-10) may include sensors (11.1.4.1-16) and/or other input/output devices (11.1.4.1-24) to collect user input. For example, input/output devices such as buttons (11.1.4.1-24) can be used to collect button press input, touch sensors overlapping displays can be used to collect user touch screen input, touch pads can be used to collect touch input, microphones can be used to collect audio input (e.g., voice commands), accelerometers can be used to monitor when a finger makes contact with an input surface and can thus be used to collect finger press input, and so on.

Input/output devices (11.1.4.1-24) may include optical components, such as depth sensors (e.g., structured light sensors or other sensors that collect 3D image data), optical proximity sensors, ambient light sensors (e.g., color ambient light sensors), optical time-of-flight sensors, and other sensors (11.1.4.1-16) that are sensitive to visible and/or infrared light and capable of emitting visible and/or infrared light (e.g., devices (11.1.4.1-24) may include optical sensors that emit and/or detect light). For example, a visible light image sensor in a camera may have a visible light flash or an associated infrared flood illuminator to provide illumination while the image sensor captures 2D and/or 3D images. Infrared cameras, such as infrared structured light cameras that capture 3D infrared images, may have an infrared flood illuminator that emits infrared flood light and/or a dot projector that emits an array of infrared light beams. Infrared proximity sensors may emit infrared light and detect the infrared light after it reflects off a target object.

If desired, the electronic device (11.1.4.1-10) may include additional components (see, e.g., other devices (11.1.4.1-18) of input/output devices (11.1.4.1-24)). Additional components may include haptic output devices, actuators for moving movable structures within the device (11.1.4.1-10), audio output devices such as speakers, light sources such as light emitting diodes for status indicators, light emitting diodes for illuminating portions of the housing and/or display structure, other optical output devices, and/or other circuitry for collecting input and/or providing output. The device (11.1.4.1-10) may also include a battery or other energy storage device, a connector port for supporting wired communication with and receiving wired power from auxiliary equipment, and other circuitry.

To help maintain a desired alignment between the optical modules (11.1.4.1-30) as they are moved by the actuators (11.1.4.1-13) (Fig. 266), the optical modules (11.1.4.1-30) may be mounted on optical module guide structures, such as guide rails or other elongated support members. This type of arrangement is illustrated in the plan view of the device (11.1.4.1-10) of Fig. 268. As illustrated in Fig. 268, the optical modules (11.1.4.1-30) may be slidably coupled to the guide rails (11.1.4.1-44) to allow the modules (11.1.4.1-30) to move horizontally (e.g., laterally along the X-axis to accommodate different user pupillary distances).

The guide rails (11.1.4.1-44) may have circular cross-sectional shapes (e.g., the guide rails (11.1.4.1-44) may be cylindrical rods) or may have other cross-sectional shapes. The guide rods (11.1.4.1-44) may be formed of metal, polymer, and/or other materials. Hollow and/or solid members may be used to form the guide rods (11.1.4.1-44). To help reduce friction between the guide rods (11.1.4.1-44) and the optical modules (11.1.4.1-30), a low-friction coating (e.g., nickel, etc.) may be provided on the mating portions of the guide rods (11.1.4.1-44) and/or the modules (11.1.4.1-30), if desired.

The guide rails (11.1.4.1-44) may span the width of the housing (11.1.4.1-12). Left and right guide rails (11.1.4.1-44) may be present in the device (11.1.4.1-10) that are coupled to a housing support structure aligned with the nose bridge portion (NB), or the left and right guide rails (11.1.4.1-44) may be formed as integral parts of a single guide rail member that extends across the housing (11.1.4.1-12). The rails (11.1.4.1-44) may be straight, or, if desired, may have a slight bend in the nose bridge portion (NB) (e.g., to bring the left and right sides of the guide rails slightly rearward to conform to the shape of a user's face). As shown in the rear view of the device (11.1.4.1-10) of FIG. 269, upper and lower guide rails (11.1.4.1-44), such as an upper guide rail (11.1.4.1-44T) and a lower guide rail (11.1.4.1-44B), may be present on the left and right sides of the device (11.1.4.1-10). If desired, arrangements having fewer or more guide rails may be used.

Figure 270 is a side view of an exemplary optical module (11.1.4.1-30) mounted on guide rails (11.1.4.1-44). In the example of Figure 270, the optical module (11.1.4.1-30) has an upper portion, such as portion (11.1.4.1-30T), and a lower portion, such as portion (11.1.4.1-30B). The parts (11.1.4.1-30T and/or 11.1.4.1-30B) may be integrally formed with the main support structure (11.1.4.1-30M) of the lens barrel structures and/or other support structures of the optical module (11.1.4.1-30), and/or may be separate members that are joined to the main support structure (11.1.4.1-30M) (e.g., using welds, fasteners, adhesives, etc.). The lens (11.1.4.1-38) may be aligned with the display (11.1.4.1-14) such that an image on the display (11.1.4.1-14) may be viewed through the lens (11.1.4.1-38) from the eye box (11.1.4.1-36).

As illustrated in FIG. 270, the optical module (11.1.4.1-30) may have portions that receive and engage the guide rails (11.1.4.1-44) such that the optical module (11.1.4.1-30) can slide along the guide rails (11.1.4.1-44). For example, the upper portion (11.1.4.1-30T) may have a guide rail opening (optical module opening) (11.1.4.1-50) such as an opening (11.1.4.1-50T) that accommodates an upper guide rail (11.1.4.1-44T), and the lower portion (11.1.4.1-30B) may have a guide rail opening such as an opening (11.1.4.1-50B) that accommodates a lower guide rail (11.1.4.1-44B). The openings (11.1.4.1-50T, 11.1.4.1-50B) may be cylindrical openings having circular cross-sectional shapes that receive cylindrical members forming the rails (11.1.4.1-44T, 11.1.4.1-44B) and/or may have other shapes that partially or completely surround the rails (11.1.4.1-44T, 11.1.4.1-44B).

To prevent the rails (11.1.4.1-44) from becoming lodged within the guide rail openings (11.1.4.1-50) of the optical module (11.1.4.1-30), the inner diameter of the optical module openings may be slightly larger (e.g., 2 to 50 micrometers, at least 5 micrometers, less than 100 micrometers, or by another suitable amount) than the outer diameter of the rails (11.1.4.1-44). To prevent excessive motion that could lead to misalignment of the optical modules, the device (11.1.4.1-10) may be provided with guide rail biasing systems. The guide rail biasing systems may have movable biasing members (e.g., pins, plates, spherical members, hemispherical members, etc.) and biasing elements that apply a force to the biasing members. The biasing elements may be springs, such as coil springs, leaf springs, and/or other spring members, and/or may be compressed polymers (e.g., elastomeric materials, foams, etc.), and/or may be magnets, and/or other biasing components that can be used to bias the biasing members in a desired direction.

Using guide rail bias systems, the guide rails (11.1.4.1-44) can be pushed toward desired positions within the openings (11.1.4.1-50) to help eliminate unwanted play between the guide rails (11.1.4.1-44) and the openings (11.1.4.1-50). For example, the guide rails (11.1.4.1-44) may be pressed against the inner surfaces of the openings (11.1.4.1-50) (e.g., at a location on the side of the openings (11.1.4.1-50) facing the eye boxes (11.1.4.1-36) rather than the side facing away from the user) and/or may be pressed against a structure mounted within the openings (11.1.4.1-50), such as a pin or other support member.

As an example, consider a cross-sectional side view of an optical module portion (11.1.4.1-30B) of FIG. 271a. As illustrated in FIG. 271a, the portion (11.1.4.1-30B) may have an opening, such as an opening (11.1.4.1-50B) that accommodates a lower guide rail (11.1.4.1-44B). The lower guide rail bias system (11.1.4.1-52B) may have a lower guide rail bias element such as a lower guide rail bias element (11.1.4.1-54B) (e.g., a spring) and a corresponding movable bias system member such as a bias member (11.1.4.1-56B) (e.g., a pin having a hemispherical head), and/or the system (11.1.4.1-52B) may be formed of other bias structures (e.g., a leaf spring, compression foam, etc.). Under pressure from the bias element (11.1.4.1-54B), the member (11.1.4.1-56B) can be pressed in a direction (11.1.4.1-58) against an adjacent surface of the guide rail (11.1.4.1-44B) (e.g., the face of the rail (11.1.4.1-44B) facing toward the bias system (11.1.4.1-52B) and away from the user). The pin (11.1.4.1-60) can be mounted on the opposite face of the opening (11.1.4.1-50B). As a result of the force imposed on the guide rail (11.1.4.1-44B) in the direction (11.1.4.1-58), the guide rail (11.1.4.1-44B) may be supported against the member (11.1.4.1-56) (or, if desired, the inner surface of the opening (11.1.4.1-50B)) at the contact location (11.1.4.1-62) (e.g., at a location on the surface of the opening (11.1.4.1-50B) facing the user and eye boxes). This creates a well-defined position for the guide rail (11.1.4.1-44B) relative to the structures of the optical module (11.1.4.1-30), helps prevent the rail (11.1.4.1-44B) from moving excessively in the Y and/or Z dimensions within the opening (11.1.4.1-50B), thereby helping to ensure that the optical module (11.1.4.1-30) is satisfactorily aligned with respect to the eye box (11.1.4.1-30). Although additional friction and resistance to sliding of the optical modules (11.1.4.1-30) along the X-axis is created by the use of a bias system, such as the bias system (11.1.4.1-52B) of FIG. 271a, sufficient force along the X-dimension can be applied to overcome this friction when it is desired to move the optical modules (11.1.4.1-30) relative to each other to adjust the spacing of the optical modules to accommodate the user's interpupillary distance.

If desired, the spring (11.1.4.1-54B) and the bias element (11.1.4.1-56B) may be positioned on opposite sides of the guide rail (11.1.4.1-44B). As an example, consider the exemplary configuration of the bias system (11.1.4.1-52B) illustrated in FIG. 271B. In this configuration, the bias system (11.1.4.1-52B) has a bias member (11.1.4.1-57) having a portion forming the bias element (11.1.4.1-56B). The bias member (11.1.4.1-57) may be attached to a portion (11.1.4.1-30B) of the optical module (11.1.4.1-30) using an attachment mechanism such as a screw (11.1.4.1-67) or other fastener. The screw (11.1.4.1-67) may have a threaded shaft or other structure fixedly attached to the portion (11.1.4.1-30B). The shaft of the screw (11.1.4.1-67) may be received within a slot within the member (11.1.4.1-57). The slot may extend parallel to the Y-axis of FIG. 271b to allow the bias member (11.1.4.1-57) to slide back and forth parallel to the Y-axis.

A biasing element, such as a spring (11.1.4.1-54B) (e.g., a compression spring or other bias spring), may be used to bias the member (11.1.4.1-57) in the -Y direction. The spring (11.1.4.1-54B) may have a first end that presses against a surface of the member (11.1.4.1-57), such as surface (11.1.4.1-61), and an opposite second end that presses against a surface of the portion (11.1.4.1-30B), such as surface (11.1.4.1-63). When the member (11.1.4.1-57) is moved in the direction (11.1.4.1-65), the spring (11.1.4.1-59) is compressed. Thereafter, the spring (11.1.4.1-59) presses against the surface (11.1.4.1-61) and biases a portion of the member (11.1.4.1-57) forming the element (11.1.4.1-54B) in the direction (11.1.4.1-58) with respect to the portion (11.1.4.1-30B). This causes the member (11.1.4.1-57) to contact the rail (11.1.4.1-44B) at the contact location (11.1.4.1-69), thereby biasing the opposite face of the rail (11.1.4.1-44B) against the pin (11.1.4.1-60) at the contact location (11.1.4.1-62).

The member (11.1.4.1-57) may be formed from one or more materials. For example, the member (11.1.4.1-57) may be formed from a metal (e.g., aluminum, stainless steel, etc.). The metal may be covered with a hard, low-friction coating, such as an electroless nickel coating, to improve wear resistance. As another example, the member (11.1.4.1-57) may be formed from a polymer (e.g., a low-friction composite polymer filled with carbon fibers, glass fibers, or other fibers). The low-friction composite polymer may be formed from a polymer, such as polyether ether ketone (PEEK) or another polymer (e.g., a polymer that can be shaped by a molding process such as injection molding).

Examples of FIGS. 271A and 271B illustrate how the lower guide rail (11.1.4.1-44B) may be provided with an associated guide rail bias system (exemplary system 11.1.4.1-52B). If desired, the upper guide rails (11.1.4.1-44T) may also be provided with guide rail bias systems. As illustrated in the cross-sectional side view of the upper portion (11.1.4.1-30T) of the optical module (11.1.4.1-30), the optical module (11.1.4.1-30) may have bias systems (11.1.4.1-52T-1, 11.1.4.1-52T-2). The system (11.1.4.1-52T-1) may have a biasing element (11.1.4.1-54T-1) for urging the movable biasing member (11.1.4.1-56T-1) in a direction (11.1.4.1-66) against an adjacent surface of the guide rail (11.1.4.1-44T) (or may have other biasing structures such as leaf springs, compression foams, etc.). The system (11.1.4.1-52T-2) may have a biasing element (11.1.4.1-54T-2) for urging the movable biasing member (11.1.4.1-56T-2) against an adjacent surface of the guide rail (11.1.4.1-44) (or may have other biasing structures such as leaf springs, compression foams, etc.). Using the systems (11.1.4.1-52T-1, 11.1.4.1-52T-2), the guide rail (11.1.4.1-44T) can be biased to the left such that the surface of the guide rail (11.1.4.1-44T) contacts the inner surface of the aperture (11.1.4.1-50T) at a nominal bias position (11.1.4.1-68) (e.g., a position on the surface of the aperture (11.1.4.1-50T) facing the eye boxes associated with the user and device (11.1.4.1-10)). Gravity tends to pull downward (in the -Z direction of FIG. 272) on the guide rail (11.1.4.1-44T). To compensate for the force of gravity and thereby ensure that the position (11.1.4.1-68) is positioned to the left of the guide rail (11.1.4.1-44T) (towards the user and eye box (11.1.4.1-36)) as shown in Fig. 272, the bias element (11.1.4.1-54T-1) may be stronger than the bias element (11.1.4.1-54T-2).

During operation of the device (11.1.4.1-10), the user's face and/or other external objects may exert forces on the optical modules (11.1.4.1-30). This creates the possibility of three different types of misalignment between the left and right optical modules in the device (11.1.4.1-10).

Rotation of the optical modules (11.1.4.1-30) about the X-axis, which may sometimes be referred to as splay, may cause a first type of misalignment in which one image is seen at a different height than the other. For example, splay may rotate the left eye image from the left optical module upward relative to the left eye box while rotating the right eye image from the right optical module downward relative to the right eye box.

Rotation of the optical modules (11.1.4.1-30) about the Y-axis, which may sometimes be referred to as image rotation, may produce a second type of misalignment in which the left and/or right images from the modules (11.1.4.1-30) appear tilted with respect to the horizon. For example, the left eye image may be rotated counterclockwise and the right eye image may be rotated clockwise.

Another type of misalignment that may occur between optical modules (11.1.4.1-30) concerns the rotation of one or both optical modules (11.1.4.1-30) about the Z-axis. This type of misalignment, which may sometimes be referred to as vergence, may be characterized by a situation where the left and/or right optical module is pointing too far to the left or right in the X-Y plane.

All of these types of misalignment are preferably kept to low levels (e.g., less than +/- 0.5 ^o , less than +/- 0.4 ^o , less than +/- 0.3 ^o , or less than +/- 0.2 ^o , as examples) ^. In some situations, splay is the least desirable type of misalignment for users, so minimizing splay can be particularly helpful in improving user comfort.

The use of guide rail bias systems, such as the exemplary bias systems of FIGS. 271a, 271b, and 272, can help minimize optical module misalignment. When the bias systems (11.1.4.1-52T-1, 11.1.4.1-52T-2) are satisfactorily performed, the left optical module will be biased against the upper rail (11.1.4.1-44T) at a position such as position (11.1.4.1-68) of Fig. 272 and against the lower rail (11.1.4.1-44B) at a position such as position (11.1.4.1-62) of Fig. 271a or Fig. 271b, while the right optical module will likewise be biased against the upper rail (11.1.4.1-44T) at a position such as position (11.1.4.1-68) of Fig. 272 and against the lower rail (11.1.4.1-62) of Fig. 271a or Fig. 271b. will be biased against the rails (11.1.4.1-44B). In this case, both the left and right optical modules will have the same position relative to the guide rails (11.1.4.1-44T, 11.1.4.1-44B), and there will be no splay. The possibility of splay may arise when stress from a drop event or other unexpected excessive force causes the biasing system to fail.

As an example, consider a worse case splay scenario where the bias system (11.1.4.1-52T-2) within the left optical module fails due to excessive force, and the bias system (11.1.4.1-52T-1) within the right optical module fails due to excessive force. Although this type of asymmetric failure would change the bias positions of the left and right optical modules, the bias arrangement of FIG. 272 helps prevent unwanted splay from occurring. A failure of the bias system (11.1.4.1-52T-2) within the left optical module will cause the guide rail (11.1.4.1-44T) within the left optical module to be positioned against the inner surface of the aperture (11.1.4.1-50T) at a location (11.1.4.1-72), whereas a failure of the bias system (11.1.4.1-52T-1) within the right optical module will cause the guide rail (11.1.4.1-44T) within the right optical module to be positioned against the inner surface of the aperture (11.1.4.1-50T) at a different location, such as at a location (11.1.4.1-70).

In the example of Fig. 272, the system (11.1.4.1-52T-2) is positioned at an angle (A)=+45 ^o with respect to the Y axis, and the system (11.1.4.1-52T-1) is positioned at an angle (A)=-45 ^o with respect to the Y axis. When the systems (11.1.4.1-52T-2, 11.1.4.1-52T-1) are operating satisfactorily, the guide rail (11.1.4.1-44T) presses against the inner side wall of the opening (11.1.4.1-50T) at the position (11.1.4.1-68). When the aperture (11.1.4.1-50T) in the right optical module contacts the rail (11.1.4.1-44T) at position (11.1.4.1-70) while the aperture (11.1.4.1-50T) in the left optical module contacts the rail (11.1.4.1-44T) at position (11.1.4.1-72), both the left and right optical modules will be positioned further to the right (in the orientation of FIG. 272) than when they are in their desired nominally biased positions. The lower guide rod (11.1.4.1-44B) is satisfactorily biased at position (11.1.4.1-62) relative to the lower optical module portion (11.1.4.1-30B) for both the left and right optical modules (in this example). As a result, both the left and right optical modules tilt slightly forward (by a small amount of rotation about the X-axis) under outward pressure from the user's face. Although both the left and right optical modules tilt forward in this manner, the amount of tilt of the left optical module affected by the lateral displacement of the rail (11.1.4.1-44T) that it experiences when the rail (11.1.4.1-44T) contacts the aperture (11.1.4.1-50T) at location (11.1.4.1-72) is equal to the amount of tilt of the right optical module affected by the lateral displacement of the rail (11.1.4.1-44T) that it experiences when the rail (11.1.4.1-44T) contacts the aperture (11.1.4.1-50T) at location (11.1.4.1-70). Therefore, no splay will occur. Because the configuration of the bias systems of FIG. 272 tends to prevent splay from occurring, this configuration may sometimes be referred to as a splay-optimized or splay-immune bias scheme. If desired, other bias schemes may be used (e.g., schemes for the upper guide rail having more bias systems per optical module, schemes having fewer bias systems per optical module, schemes where the bias systems press in different directions, such as the +Z direction, the -Y direction, etc.). The configuration of FIG. 272 is exemplary.

Figures 273 and 274 illustrate how a kinematic mounting method can be used to couple guide rails (11.1.4.1-44) and optical modules (11.1.4.1-30). As illustrated in Figure 273, the upper guide rails (11.1.4.1-44T) can be biased in the -Y direction by a bias system (11.1.4.1-70). The bias system (11.1.4.1-70) may include a bias element (11.1.4.1-72) and a movable bias member (11.1.4.1-74) that contacts an adjacent portion of the guide rail (11.1.4.1-44T) and pushes the guide rail (11.1.4.1-44T) in a direction (11.1.4.1-78), or may include other bias structures (e.g., leaf springs, compression foam, etc.). The bias system (11.1.4.1-80) can have a bias element, such as a bias element (11.1.4.1-82), that pushes the bias member (11.1.4.1-84) (e.g., a cylindrical pin) in the direction (11.1.4.1-86) until the motion of the member (11.1.4.1-84) is stopped by the stop structures (11.1.4.1-88). The bias system (11.1.4.1-90) can have a bias element, such as a bias element (11.1.4.1-92), that pushes the bias member (11.1.4.1-94) in the direction (11.1.4.1-96) until the motion of the member (11.1.4.1-94) is stopped by the stop structures (11.1.4.1-88). In this configuration, the guide rail (11.1.4.1-44T) is biased to contact the member (11.1.4.1-84) at a known location (11.1.4.1-100) and to contact the member (11.1.4.1-94) at a known location (11.1.4.1-102). The lower guide rail (11.1.4.1-44B) can be biased to a known location (11.1.4.1-62) using a biasing system such as the system (11.1.4.1-52B) of FIG. 271a or FIG. 271b.

Figure 274 is a rear view of an optical module (11.1.4.1-30) having this type of kinematic rail mounting arrangement. As shown in Figure 274, in addition to two of the bias systems (11.1.4.1-70), there may be two of the bias systems (11.1.4.1-80) within a portion (11.1.4.1-30T) of the module (11.1.4.1-30) and two of the bias systems (11.1.4.1-90) within a portion (11.1.4.1-30T) of the module (11.1.4.1-30). This establishes a first pair of base contact positions (e.g., a first position (11.1.4.1-100) and a first position (11.1.4.1-102)) towards the right end of the rail (11.1.4.1-44T) and a second pair of base contact positions (e.g., a second position (11.1.4.1-100) and a second position (11.1.4.1-102)) at different positions along the length of the rail (11.1.4.1-44T), for example, towards the left end of the rail (11.1.4.1-44T). In the lower part (11.1.4.1-30B), the position of the optical module relative to the guide rail (11.1.4.1-44B) is established at a known position (11.1.4.1-62). Determining these five known positions on the optical module (11.1.4.1-30) where the rails (11.1.4.1-44) contact the module (11.1.4.1-30) (e.g., two positions (11.1.4.1-100) of the upper portion (11.1.4.1-30T), two positions (11.1.4.1-102) of the upper portion (11.1.4.1-30T), and one position (11.1.4.1-62) of the lower portion (11.1.4.1-30B)) helps constrain five of the six degrees of freedom for motion of the module (11.1.4.1-30) relative to the rails (11.1.4.1-44) and other support structures of the device (11.1.4.1-10). The sixth degree of freedom (motion along the X-axis) is unconstrained except by the motion of the actuator (11.1.4.1-13), so that the actuator (11.1.4.1-13) can be used to adjust the X-axis position of the module (11.1.4.1-30) to accommodate different user interpupillary distances.

If desired, the control circuitry (11.1.4.1-20) may utilize one or more sensors (11.1.4.1-16) to monitor the position of the optical modules (11.1.4.1-30). If misalignment is detected, corresponding actions may be taken. For example, positioners may be adjusted to compensate for the misalignment, image data for the display and/or camera may be warped to compensate for the misalignment, and warnings may be provided to the user and/or others.

An exemplary optical module sensor system is illustrated in FIGS. 275 and 276. FIG. 275 is a perspective view of an exemplary guide rail position sensor. The sensor (11.1.4.1-120) of FIG. 275 has a biasing member, such as a leaf spring member (11.1.4.1-122), having a protruding portion, such as a portion (11.1.4.1-124). A strain gauge (11.1.4.1-126) may be coupled to the member (11.1.4.1-122) and monitored by the control circuit (11.1.4.1-20) to detect bending of the member (11.1.4.1-122). As illustrated in FIG. 276, the sensor (11.1.4.1-120) of FIG. 275 can be attached to the optical module (11.1.4.1-30) by a fastener such as a screw (11.1.4.1-128) or other attachment mechanism such that the protruding portion (11.1.4.1-124) protrudes into the opening (11.1.4.1-50) and contacts the adjacent surface of the guide rail (11.1.4.1-44). Changes in the position of the guide rail (11.1.4.1-44) will produce changes in the strain detected by the sensor (11.1.4.1-120), such that the sensor (11.1.4.1-120) can monitor the position of the guide rail (11.1.4.1-44) relative to the optical module (11.1.4.1-30) along the axis (11.1.4.1-130). If desired, additional sensors, such as the sensor (11.1.4.1-120), can be positioned at additional positions around the rail (11.1.4.1-44) (see, e.g., the exemplary orthogonal position (11.1.4.1-120') of FIG. 276, which allows position measurements along the axis (11.1.4.1-132)).

11.1.4.2: Lower guide rods

FIG. 277 illustrates a subassembly of an HMD (11.1.4.2-100) including a display bracket (11.1.4.2-106) having upper arms (11.1.4.2-110a, 11.1.4.2-110b) extending outward in opposite directions and lower arms (11.1.4.2-112a, 11.1.4.2-112b) extending in opposite directions, respectively. The subassembly may include a first optical module (11.1.4.2-108a) slidably coupled to the display bracket (11.1.4.2-106) from a first upper guide rod (11.1.4.2-102a) and a first lower guide rod (11.1.4.2-104a), as well as a second optical module (11.1.4.2-108b) slidably coupled to the display bracket (11.1.4.2-106) from a second upper guide rod (11.1.4.2-102b) and a second lower guide rod (11.1.4.2-104b). The first and second optical modules (11.1.4.2-108a, 11.1.4.2-108b) can be laterally adjusted relative to each other and/or relative to the display bracket (11.1.4.2-106) along the guide rods (11.1.4.2-102a, 11.1.4.2-102b, 11.1.4.2-104a, 11.1.4.2-104b) during IPD adjustments. The first and second upper guide rods (11.1.4.2-102a, 11.1.4.2-102b) may be part of an upper guide rod assembly (11.1.4.2-102), and the first and second lower guide rods (11.1.4.2-104a, 11.1.4.2-104b) may be part of a lower guide rod assembly (11.1.4.2-104).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations depicted in FIG. 277) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions depicted in any of the other drawings illustrated and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations depicted in any of the other drawings illustrated and described herein) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions depicted in FIG. 277.

11.1.4.2.1: Electrical contacts

FIG. 278 illustrates a lower guide rod system (11.1.4.2.1-102) of an HMD (11.1.4.2.1-100) including a lower guide rod (11.1.4.2.1-106) configured to guide the movement of an optical module (11.1.4.2.1-104). In at least one example, the lower guide rod system (11.1.4.2.1-102) also includes a stop (11.1.4.2.1-108) similar to other stops described herein to protect a cantilevered guide rod (11.1.4.2.1-106), wherein the cantilevered guide rod does not contact the stop (11.1.4.2.1-108) during normal use, but through the cantilevered guide rod, the distal end of the guide rod (11.1.4.2.1-106) can be extended to contact the stop (11.1.4.2.1-108) in the event of a drop or other circumstance that causes deflection of the distal end of the guide rod (11.1.4.2.1-106). In at least one example, the stop (11.1.4.2.1-108) may also prevent the optical module (11.1.4.2.1-104) from moving too far along the guide rod (11.1.4.2.1-106).

In at least one example, the lower guide rod system (11.1.4.2.1-102) may also include an electrical contact (11.1.4.2.1-110) biased against the guide rod (11.1.4.2.1-106). Thus, the biased electrical contact (11.1.4.2.1-110) may maintain contact with the guide rod (11.1.4.2.1-106) during operation, including movements of the position of the guide rod (11.1.4.2.1-106), vibrations, and other disturbances during use. The biased electrical contact (11.1.4.2.1-110) may maintain electrical contact for the purpose of electrical grounding and to form other electrical paths between the guide rod (11.1.4.2.1-106) of the HMD (11.1.4.2.1-100) and other components.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations depicted in FIG. 278) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions depicted in any of the other drawings illustrated and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations depicted in any of the other drawings illustrated and described herein) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions depicted in FIG. 278.

11.1.4.2.2: Bias Absences

Figure 279 illustrates a perspective view of an example of an adjustment mechanism or assembly (11.1.4.2.2-100) including a lower guide rod (11.1.4.2.2-102) and a stop (11.1.4.2.2-104). The adjustment assembly (11.1.4.2.2-100) may also include a spring (11.1.4.2.2-106) that biases a guide rod (11.1.4.2.2-106) passing through the stop (11.1.4.2.2-104). The spring (11.1.4.2.2-106) may urge the guide rod (11.1.4.2.2-106) against the stop (11.1.4.2.2-104) to allow some flexure of the guide rod (11.1.4.2.2-102) during use, thereby eliminating any slack or play between the guide rod (11.1.4.2.2-102) and the stop (11.1.4.2.2-104). In at least one example, the spring (11.1.4.2.2-106) may be a conductive bias member that provides other electrical paths between the guide rod (11.1.4.2.2-102) of the HMD and one or more other components, or that maintains contact with the guide rod (11.1.4.2.2-102) for electrical grounding.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations depicted in FIG. 279) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions depicted in any of the other drawings illustrated and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations depicted in any of the other drawings illustrated and described herein) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the examples of devices, features, components, and portions depicted in FIG. 279.

11.2: Barrels and Baskets

11.2.1: Lens Mounting Systems

The lenses can be mounted within the head-mounted device using support structures that help minimize lens stress. In an exemplary embodiment, the lenses are mounted to rigid lens supports, such as metal lens barrels, using lens mounts based on flexures. The flexures help prevent stress on the lenses even when the electronic devices experience changes in operating temperature that cause the lenses to expand and contract.

FIG. 280 is a schematic diagram of an exemplary electronic device that may include lenses equipped with flexures. The device (11.2.1-10) of FIG. 280 may be a head-mounted device (e.g., goggles, glasses, a helmet, and/or other head-mounted device). In an exemplary configuration, the device (11.2.1-10) is a head-mounted device, such as a pair of goggles (sometimes referred to as virtual reality goggles, mixed reality goggles, augmented reality glasses, etc.).

As illustrated in the exemplary cross-sectional plan view of the device (11.2.1-10) of FIG. 280, the device (11.2.1-10) may have a housing (sometimes referred to as a head-mounted support structure, a head-mounted housing, or a head-mounted support), such as a housing (11.2.1-12). The housing (11.2.1-12) may include a front portion, such as a front portion (11.2.1-12F), and a rear portion, such as a rear portion (11.2.1-12R). When the device (11.2.1-10) is worn on a user's head, the rear portion (11.2.1-12R) rests against the user's face and helps block stray light from reaching the user's eyes.

The main portion (11.2.1-12M) of the housing (11.2.1-12) may be attached to a head strap (11.2.1-12T). The head strap (11.2.1-12T) may be used to help secure the main portion (11.2.1-12) on the user's head and face. The main portion (11.2.1-12M) may have a rigid shell formed from housing walls of polymer, glass, metal, and/or other materials. When the housing (11.2.1-12) is worn on the user's head, the front of the housing (11.2.1-12) may face outwardly away from the user, and the rear portion (11.2.1-12R) of the housing (11.2.1-12) may face toward the user. In this configuration, the rear portion (11.2.1-12R) can be directed towards the user's eyes located within the eye boxes (11.2.1-36).

The device (11.2.1-10) may have electrical and optical components used to display images to eye boxes (11.2.1-36) when the device (11.2.1-10) is worn. These components may include left and right optical assemblies (11.2.1-20) (sometimes referred to as optical modules). Each optical assembly (11.2.1-20) may have an optical assembly support (11.2.1-38) (sometimes referred to as a lens barrel, an optical module support, or a support structure). The supports (11.2.1-38) may have hollow tubular shapes or other suitable shapes. The optical assemblies (11.2.1-20) may slide laterally along guide rails to adjust the optical-assembly-to-optical-assembly separation to accommodate different user interpupillary distances. The rear portion (11.2.1-12R) may include flexible structures (e.g., a flexible polymer layer, a flexible fabric layer, etc.), such that the portion (11.2.1-12R) may be elongated to accommodate movement of the assemblies (11.2.1-20).

Each assembly (11.2.1-20) may have a display (11.2.1-32) coupled to one end of the support (11.2.1-38) and a lens mounted on the opposite end of the support (11.2.1-38). The display (11.2.1-32) has an array of pixels for displaying images. The lens (11.2.1-34) may optionally have a removable vision correction lens for correcting user vision defects (e.g., refractive errors such as myopia, hyperopia, and/or astigmatism). During operation, images displayed by the displays (11.2.1-32) may be presented to the eye boxes (11.2.1-36) through the lenses (11.2.1-34) for viewing by the user.

To help meet design constraints (e.g., low weight, compact size, wide field of view, high resolution, etc.), the lenses (11.2.1-34) may be catadioptric lenses. Catadioptric lenses integrate optical components such as polarizers and waveplates to create a folded optical path, which can help reduce lens size. However, the use of such polarization-sensitive optical components can make the lenses (11.2.1-34) susceptible to performance degradation due to stress-induced birefringence effects. The lenses (11.2.1-34) may include lens elements formed from polymers (e.g., COC polymers (cyclic olefin copolymers) or other suitable polymers) that help minimize lens weight, but which can exhibit birefringence when subjected to excessive stress.

Satisfactory operation of the lenses (11.2.1-34) may be achieved by mounting the lenses (11.2.1-34) using a lens mount that helps isolate the lenses (11.2.1-34) from sources of stress. In an exemplary configuration, the supports (11.2.1-38) may be formed of strong, rigid materials, such as metal (e.g., aluminum). When operating the device (11.2.1-10) over a wide temperature range (e.g., 0 to 50 ^o C), there is a risk that expansion and contraction of the materials of the assemblies (11.2.1-20), and in particular mismatches in coefficients of thermal expansion between the polymer of the lenses (11.2.1-34) and the metal of the supports (11.2.1-38), may generate unwanted stresses in the lenses (11.2.1-34), leading to unwanted stress-induced birefringence in the lenses (11.2.1-34). Unwanted temperature change-induced stresses can be avoided by mounting the lenses (11.2.1-34) within the supports (11.2.1-38) using lens mounts based on flexures.

FIG. 281 is a front view of an exemplary lens for a device (11.2.1-10). As illustrated in FIG. 281, the lens (11.2.1-34) may be surrounded by a flexible lens mount (11.2.1-40). The lens mount (11.2.1-40) may include one or more flexures. In an exemplary embodiment, the lens mount (11.2.1-40) includes a ring-shaped flexure that extends around the entire periphery of the lens (11.2.1-34). Arrangements may also be used in which the mounting portion (11.2.1-40) comprises a plurality of discrete segments (e.g., see exemplary segment (SG)) each having a distinct strip-shaped flexure segment, or in which the mounting portion (11.2.1-40) comprises discrete flexures, such as exemplary discrete flexures (DL) (e.g., a set of three discrete flexures attached to the periphery of the lens (11.2.1-34) at three evenly spaced locations along the periphery). The support (11.2.1-38) may be attached to the mounting portion (11.2.1-40) along the outer peripheral edge of the mounting portion (11.2.1-40), or the support (11.2.1-38) may be attached to the mounting portion (11.2.1-40) such that the support (11.2.1-38) overlaps the mounting portion (11.2.1-40) (see, e.g., FIG. 282).

FIG. 282 is a side cross-sectional view of an exemplary peripheral portion of a lens (11.2.1-38) and a mounting portion (11.2.1-40) of FIG. 281 taken along line (11.2.1-42) of FIG. 281 and viewed in direction (11.2.1-44). As shown in FIG. 282, the support (lens barrel) (11.2.1-38) can be overlapped by the mounting portion (11.2.1-40). The mounting portion (11.2.1-40) can be formed of a polymer, metal, or other material that is shaped to form a flexure. In the example of FIG. 282, the mounting portion (11.2.1-40) is a ring-shaped flexure having a U-shaped cross-section that extends along the ring-shaped peripheral edge of the lens (11.2.1-34). A first part (11.2.1-40-1) of the flexure is attached to the peripheral edge of the lens (11.2.1-34) by a first ring of adhesive (11.2.1-50), and a second part (11.2.1-40-2) of the flexure is attached to the support (11.2.1-38) by a second ring of adhesive (11.2.1-52). A bending part (11.2.1-40-3) extends along the mounting part (11.2.1-40) between the parts (11.2.1-40-1, 11.2.1-4-2) to allow the mounting part (11.2.1-40) to bend. For example, the portion (11.2.1-40-1) can move radially outward toward the portion (11.2.1-40-2) when the lens (11.2.1-34) expands radially due to an increase in operating temperature. Although the metal of the support (11.2.1-38) has a significantly lower coefficient of thermal expansion than the polymer of the lens (11.2.1-34), it is separated from the edge of the lens (11.2.1-34) by an air gap, such that the lens (11.2.1-34) can expand radially outward without contacting the support (11.2.1-38) and thus is not stressed due to pressure from contact with the support (11.2.1-38).

The mounting portion (11.2.1-40) may, if desired, be formed of a material such as polyetherimide (PEI) or another rigid polymer exhibiting a high yield strength and a high elongation-to-failure value. For example, the elastic modulus of the material forming the mounting portion (11.2.1-40) may be, for example, at least 1.5 GPa, at least 2 GPa, or at least 3 GPa. The high strength and high rigidity of the material forming the mounting portion (11.2.1-40) help the mounting portion (11.2.1-40) to accurately hold the lens (11.2.1-34) in place. The material of the mounting portion (11.2.1-40) may exhibit a yield strength (e.g., at least 30 MPa, at least 70 MPa, or at least 100 MPa), so that the mounting portion (11.2.1-40) exhibits a good yield strength-to-rigidity ratio. To provide satisfactory durability to the mounting portion (11.2.1-40), it may be desirable for the material of the mounting portion to have an elongation at break value of at least 25%, at least 35%, or at least 40%. To ensure satisfactory attachment of the mounting portion (11.2.1-40) by the adhesive (11.2.1-52, 11.2.1-50), the material of the mounting portion (11.2.1-40) also preferably exhibits satisfactory compatibility (bond strength) with the adhesive (11.2.1-52, 11.2.1-50). The adhesives (11.2.1-52, 11.2.1-50) may be, for example, an epoxy, such that the material of the mounting portion (11.2.1-40) preferably forms satisfactory bonds with the epoxy. The coefficient of thermal expansion of the material of the mounting portion (11.2.1-40) may be matched to the coefficient of thermal expansion of the material of the lens (11.2.1-34) (e.g., within 20%, within 10%, within 5%, or within 2%). In this way, lens stresses that would otherwise be imposed by the mounting portion (11.2.1-40) on the lens (11.2.1-34) may be avoided, for example, if the periphery of the mounting portion (11.2.1-40) expands less rapidly than the periphery of the lens (11.2.1-34) as a function of increasing operating temperature, thereby restraining expansion of the lens (11.2.1-34). If desired, other types of materials may be used to form the mounting portion (11.2.1-40). The use of polyetherimide, which has a coefficient of thermal expansion matching that of the polymer of the lens (11.2.1-34) and exhibits high yield strength and high elongation at break values, is exemplary.

If desired, thermally induced lens stresses can be minimized using a reverse flange adhesive attachment arrangement of the type illustrated in FIG. 283. With this type of arrangement, the lens (11.2.1-34) can be provided with a milled flange that is bonded to a surface of the support (11.2.1-38) that faces radially outward (away from the lens (11.2.1-34)). As illustrated in FIG. 283, an adhesive (11.2.1-50) (e.g., a soft adhesive) can be used to attach the outward-facing surface (11.2.1-53) of the support (11.2.1-38) to the inward-facing milled flange surface (11.2.1-54) of the lens (11.2.1-34) that is opposite the outward-facing surface. An air gap, such as air gap (11.2.1-56), is preferably present between the outer peripheral edge surface (11.2.1-58) of the lens (11.2.1-34) and the inward facing surface (11.2.1-60) of the support (11.2.1-38), thereby ensuring that the periphery of the lens (11.2.1-34) (surface 11.2.1-58) will not contact the support (11.2.1-38) and thus will not be stressed by the support (11.2.1-38) as the lens (11.2.1-34) expands radially outwardly as a function of increasing operating temperature.

If desired, a set of discretely positioned flexures, such as the exemplary flexures of FIGS. 284 and 285, may also be used to support the lens (11.2.1-34) (e.g., at three points along the periphery of the lens (11.2.1-34)). In the examples of FIGS. 284 and 285, the lens (11.2.1-34) is viewed from the rear of the device (11.2.1-10) (e.g., along the Z axis). One side of the exemplary flexures (11.2.1-64, 11.2.1-66) can be attached to the periphery of the lens (11.2.1-34) using an adhesive (11.2.1-68), and the other side of the flexures (11.2.1-64, 11.2.1-66) can be attached to the support (11.2.1-38) (e.g., using an adhesive, screws, or other fasteners). During variations in operating temperature, the lens (11.2.1-34) can expand radially outward and contract radially inward. With the flexure arrangements of FIGS. 284 and 285, the flexures (11.2.1-64, 11.2.1-66) can radially flex to accommodate lens expansion and contraction while maintaining a precise desired mounting location for the lens (11.2.1-34) within the support (11.2.1-38). In arrangements where the flexures are positioned at discrete locations (e.g., three discrete locations) around the periphery of the lens (11.2.1-34), sealing structures (e.g., ring-shaped elastomeric boots) can be used to seal the periphery of the lens (11.2.1-34) against the support (11.2.1-38) and thereby help prevent dust and moisture from entering the assembly (11.2.1-20). Like the ring-shaped flexures of FIGS. 281 and 282, the discrete flexures of FIGS. 284 and 285 can be used to maintain the lens (11.2.1-34) in a satisfactory position (without significant lateral shifts in the X and Y positions and without significant tilt away from the Z axis) while flexing to accommodate expansion and contraction due to temperature changes. The strength of the mounting portion (11.2.1-40) can help the assemblies (11.2.1-20) resist plastic deformation and other damage during drop events and other undesirable impacts that lead to excessive stresses.

Figures 286, 287, 288, and 289 are cross-sectional side views of exemplary flexures for the mounting portion (11.2.1-40). The flexures of Figures 286, 287, 288, and 289 may extend as a continuous ring around the periphery of the lens (11.2.1-34), may be formed of multiple segments extending around the lens (11.2.1-34), or may be formed of discretely positioned flexures (e.g., as illustrated in Figures 284 and 285). In the arrangements of Figures 286, 287, and 288, the mounting portion (11.2.1-40) has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape.

In the example of FIG. 286, a screw (11.2.1-70) attaches the mounting portion (flexure) (11.2.1-40) to the support (11.2.1-38) and an adhesive (11.2.1-78) attaches the mounting portion (11.2.1-40) to the lens (11.2.1-34). When using a screw, such as a screw (11.2.1-70), to attach the mounting portion (11.2.1-40) to the support (11.2.1-38) instead of an adhesive, a separate seal, such as a seal (11.2.1-72), may be used to seal the lens (11.2.1-34) to the support (11.2.1-38) and thereby help prevent moisture and dust from entering the interior of the assembly (11.2.1-20). The seal (11.2.1-72) may be an O-ring formed of an elastomeric gasket material, may be a ring of adhesive (e.g., a pressure sensitive adhesive or other flexible sealing adhesive), or may be another sealant. If desired, an adhesive (11.2.1-76) may be provided at the interface between the mounting portion (11.2.1-40) and the support portion (11.2.1-38) (e.g., an epoxy or other rigid adhesive) and may be used both to attach the mounting portion (11.2.1-40) to the support portion (11.2.1-38) and to seal the mounting portion (11.2.1-40) to the support portion (11.2.1-38). The use of screws such as the screws (11.2.1-70) of Fig. 286 to attach the mounting member (11.2.1-40) to the support (11.2.1-38) is exemplary.

The exemplary configurations of FIGS. 287, 288, and 289 may also involve the use of screws (11.2.1-70), adhesives (11.2.1-76), and/or seals (11.2.1-72) to attach and seal the mounting portion (11.2.1-40) to the support (11.2.1-38). In the example of FIG. 287, the mounting portion (11.2.1-40) protrudes inwardly below the outer edge of the lens (11.2.1-34). In the example of FIG. 288, the screw (11.2.1-70) extends radially inwardly toward the center of the lens (11.2.1-34). In the example of Fig. 289, the flexure formed by the mounting portion (11.2.1-40) does not have a central bend, but rather depends on its length to ensure that sufficient flexure bend is available to accommodate the radial outward expansion of the lens (11.2.1-34) as operating temperatures increase.

The drawing of FIG. 290 illustrates how adhesive (11.2.1-78) may be dispensed to attach a mounting portion (11.2.1-40) to the outer edge of a lens (11.2.1-34). In the example of FIG. 290, the lens (11.2.1-34) and mounting portion (11.2.1-40) are upside down with respect to the orientation of FIG. 282. As illustrated in FIG. 290, the mounting portion (11.2.1-40) may have a chamfer, such as a chamfer (11.2.1-84), that locally widens the gap between the lens (11.2.1-34) and the mounting portion (11.2.1-40) to allow introduction of liquid adhesive into this gap. The adhesive may be dispensed in liquid form from the dispenser (11.2.1-80) in a direction (11.2.1-82) and then drawn into the gap between the mounting portion (11.2.1-40) and the lens (11.2.1-34) by capillary action. After the liquid adhesive material is drawn into the gap, the adhesive may be cured (e.g., using a two-part adhesive arrangement, such as using ultraviolet curing) to form the adhesive (11.2.1-78). To help control the downward progression of the adhesive (11.2.1-78) while it is liquid, the mounting portion (11.2.1-40) may be provided with a stop feature, such as a step (11.2.1-86). The presence of a step (11.2.1-86) on the inward facing surface of the mounting portion (11.2.1-40) creates a surface tension break that stops the downward flow of the adhesive (11.2.1-78) as it flows into the joint between the lens (11.2.1-34) and the mounting portion (11.2.1-40). In this manner, the distribution of the adhesive (11.2.1-78) can be restricted to the desired bonding area between the mounting portion (11.2.1-40) and the lens (11.2.1-34).

11.3: Rear-facing cameras

11.3.1: Optical Module for Head-Mounted Devices

One aspect of the present disclosure is an optical module for a head-mounted device configured to present content to a user. The optical module includes an optical module housing assembly, a display assembly, and an eye camera. The optical module housing assembly has a first end and a second end. A lens is connected to the optical module housing assembly and positioned at the first end of the optical module housing assembly. A display assembly is connected to the optical module housing assembly and positioned at the second end of the optical module housing assembly. The display assembly is configured to display content to the user through the lens. An eye camera is connected to the optical module housing assembly and positioned at the second end of the optical module housing assembly. The eye camera is configured to capture images through the lens.

In some embodiments of the optical module, the optical module housing assembly includes a first portion connected to a second portion, and the lens is held between the first portion and the second portion. In some embodiments of the optical module, protrusions are defined on the lens and channels are defined on the first portion of the optical module housing assembly, such that the protrusions are positioned within the channels and engage with the first portion of the optical module housing assembly within the channels to secure the lens relative to the optical module housing assembly and prevent movement of the lens relative to the optical module housing assembly. In some embodiments of the optical module, the lens and the display assembly are connected to the optical module housing assembly in a side-by-side arrangement. In some embodiments of the optical module, the optical module housing assembly defines an interior space between the lens and the display assembly.

In some embodiments of the optical module, the optical module also includes a ventilation port that allows air to move between the interior space and the external environment, and a filter element that prevents foreign particles from entering the interior space. In some embodiments of the optical module, the optical module also includes a dust trap located in the interior space and configured to retain foreign particles.

In some embodiments of the optical module, the optical module also includes a reference marker formed on the lens and visible in images acquired by the eye camera for use in calibration. In some embodiments of the optical module, the lens is a catadioptric lens. In some embodiments of the optical module, the lens is part of a catadioptric optical system.

Another aspect of the present disclosure is an optical module for a head-mounted device configured to present content to a user. The optical module includes an optical module housing assembly defining an interior space, a lens connected to the optical module housing assembly, and a display assembly connected to the optical module housing assembly. The display assembly is configured to display content to a user through the lens. An infrared emitter is positioned between the lens and the display assembly in the interior space of the optical module housing assembly. The infrared emitter is configured to emit infrared radiation through the lens.

In some embodiments of the optical module, the infrared emitter includes a flexible circuit and emitting components coupled to the flexible circuit and configured to emit infrared radiation. In some embodiments of the optical module, the emitting components are arranged in an array about an optical axis of the optical module housing assembly. In some embodiments of the optical module, the flexible circuit extends through an electrical port formed through the optical module housing assembly, and a sealing element is formed on the flexible circuit and engages the optical module housing assembly at the electrical port. In some embodiments of the optical module, the optical module housing assembly defines an optical path opening adjacent the display assembly and is configured to allow light to pass from the display assembly to a lens, a base surface extending around the optical path opening, the infrared emitter being positioned on the base surface, and a perimeter wall positioned outward from the base surface.

In some embodiments of the optical module, the optical module also includes an eye camera configured to acquire images showing reflected portions of infrared radiation emitted by the infrared emitter. In some embodiments of the optical module, the eye camera is connected to the optical module housing assembly and is configured to acquire images through a lens. In some embodiments of the optical module, the lens is a catadioptric lens. In some embodiments of the optical module, the lens is part of a catadioptric optical system.

Another aspect of the present disclosure is a head-mounted device configured to present content to a user. The head-mounted device includes a housing, a first optical module positioned within the housing, and a second optical module positioned within the housing. A pupillary distance adjustment assembly supports the first optical module and the second optical module relative to the housing to enable adjustment of a distance between the first optical module and the second optical module. The head-mounted device also includes a first front-facing camera connected to the first optical module and movable integrally with the first optical module by the pupillary distance adjustment assembly, and a second front-facing camera connected to the second optical module and movable integrally with the second optical module by the pupillary distance adjustment assembly. Adjusting the distance between the first optical module and the second optical module by the pupillary distance adjustment assembly also adjusts the distance between the first front-facing camera and the second front-facing camera.

In some implementations of the head-mounted device, the housing includes one or more optically transmissive panels through which the first front-facing camera and the second front-facing camera can acquire images of the environment.

In some implementations of the head-mounted device, the optical axis of the first front-facing camera is aligned with the optical axis of the first optical module, and the optical axis of the second front-facing camera is aligned with the optical axis of the second optical module.

In some implementations of the head-mounted device, the first front-facing camera is connected in a fixed relationship to the first optical module, and the second front-facing camera is connected in a fixed relationship to the second optical module.

In some implementations of the head-mounted device, the interpupillary distance adjustment assembly maintains a first distance between an optical axis of the first optical module and an optical axis of the second optical module to be substantially equal to a second distance between an optical axis of the first front-facing camera and an optical axis of the second front-facing camera during adjustment of the distance between the first optical module and the second optical module.

Figure 291 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a hardware configuration for a head-mounted device (11.3.1-100). The head-mounted device (11.3.1-100) is intended to be worn on a user's head and includes components configured to display content to the user. Components included in the head-mounted device (11.3.1-100) may be configured to track the movement of parts of the user's body, such as the user's head and hands. Motion tracking information acquired by the components of the head-mounted device may be utilized as inputs for controlling aspects of the generation and display of content to the user, such that the content displayed to the user may be part of a CGR experience in which the user can view and interact with virtual environments and virtual objects. In the illustrated example, a head-mounted device (11.3.1-100) includes a device housing (11.3.1-102), a face seal (11.3.1-104), a support structure (11.3.1-106), a processor (11.3.1-108), memory (11.3.1-110), a storage device (11.3.1-112), a communication device (11.3.1-114), sensors (11.3.1-116), a power source (11.3.1-118), and optical modules (11.3.1-120). The head-mounted device (11.3.1-100) includes two optical modules (11.3.1-120) for displaying content to a user's eyes. The optical modules (11.3.1-120) may each include an optical module housing (11.3.1-122), a display assembly (11.3.1-124), and a lens assembly (11.3.1-126).

The device housing (11.3.1-102) is a structure that supports various other components included within the head-mounted device. The device housing (11.3.1-102) may be a sealed structure that protects certain components of the head-mounted device (11.3.1-100) from damage by being contained within the device housing (11.3.1-102).

A face seal (11.3.1-104) is connected to the device housing (11.3.1-102) and positioned in areas around the periphery of the device housing (11.3.1-102) that are likely to come into contact with the user's face. The face seal (11.3.1-104) functions to conform to portions of the user's face so that the support structure (11.3.1-106) is tensioned enough to resist motion of the device housing (11.3.1-102) relative to the user's head. The face seal (11.3.1-104) may also function to reduce the amount of light from the physical environment around the user reaching the user's eyes. The face seal (11.3.1-104) may come into contact with areas of the user's face, such as the user's forehead, temples, and cheeks. The face seal (11.3.1-104) may be formed from a compressible material such as open-cell foam or closed-cell foam.

A support structure (11.3.1-106) is connected to the device housing (11.3.1-102). The support structure (11.3.1-106) is a component or a collection of components that function to secure the device housing (11.3.1-102) in position relative to the user's head to prevent the device housing (11.3.1-102) from moving relative to the user's head and to maintain a comfortable position during use. The support structure (11.3.1-106) may be implemented using rigid structures, elastic flexible straps, or inelastic flexible straps.

A processor (11.3.1-108) is a device operable to execute computer program instructions and to perform operations described by the computer program instructions. The processor (11.3.1-108) may be implemented using a conventional device, such as a central processing unit, and has computer-executable instructions that cause the processor (11.3.1-108) to perform specific functions. The processor (11.3.1-108) may be a special-purpose processor (e.g., an application-specific integrated circuit or a field-programmable gate array) that implements a limited set of functions. The memory (11.3.1-110) may be a volatile, high-speed, short-term information storage device, such as a random access memory module.

Storage devices (11.3.1-112) are intended to allow long-term storage of computer program instructions and other data. Examples of devices suitable for use as storage devices (11.3.1-112) include various types of non-volatile information storage devices, such as flash memory modules, hard drives, or solid-state drives.

The communication device (11.3.1-114) supports wired or wireless communication with other devices. Any suitable wired or wireless communication protocol may be used.

Sensors (11.3.1-116) are components integrated into the head-mounted device (11.3.1-100) to provide inputs to the processor (11.3.1-108) for use in generating CGR content. Sensors (11.3.1-116) include components that facilitate motion tracking (e.g., head tracking and optionally six degrees of freedom handheld controller tracking). Sensors (11.3.1-116) may also include additional sensors used by the device to create and/or enhance the user experience in any manner. Sensors (11.3.1-116) may include conventional components such as cameras, infrared cameras, infrared emitters, depth cameras, structured light sensing devices, accelerometers, gyroscopes, and magnetometers. The sensors (11.3.1-116) may also include biometric sensors operable to detect physical or physiological characteristics of a person, for example, for use in user identification and authorization. Biometric sensors may include fingerprint scanners, retina scanners, and facial scanners (e.g., two-dimensional and three-dimensional scanning components operable to obtain images and/or three-dimensional surface representations). Other types of devices may be integrated into the sensors (11.3.1-116). Information generated by the sensors (11.3.1-116) is provided as inputs to other components of the head-mounted device (11.3.1-100), such as the processor (11.3.1-108).

The power source (11.3.1-118) provides electrical power to components of the head-mounted device (11.3.1-100). In some implementations, the power source (11.3.1-118) is a wired connection for electrical power. In some implementations, the power source (11.3.1-118) may include any suitable type of battery, such as a rechargeable battery. In implementations that include a battery, the head-mounted device (11.3.1-100) may include components that facilitate wired or wireless recharging.

In some implementations of the head-mounted device (11.3.1-100), some or all of these components may be contained within a separate, removable device. For example, any or all of the processor (11.3.1-108), memory (11.3.1-110), and/or storage device (11.3.1-112), communication device (11.3.1-114), and sensors (11.3.1-116) may be integrated into a device, such as a smartphone, that is connected to other parts of the head-mounted device (11.3.1-100) (e.g., by docking).

In some implementations of the head-mounted device (11.3.1-100), the processor (11.3.1-108), the memory (11.3.1-110), and/or the storage device (11.3.1-112) are omitted, and the corresponding functions are performed by an external device that communicates with the head-mounted device (11.3.1-100). In such implementations, the head-mounted device (11.3.1-100) may include components that support a data transfer connection with the external device using a wired connection or a wireless connection established using the communication device (11.3.1-114).

Components included within the optical modules support the ability to display content to a user in a manner that supports a CGR experience. The optical modules (11.3.1-120) are assemblies each comprising a plurality of components, including an optical module housing (11.3.1-122), a display assembly (11.3.1-124), and a lens assembly (11.3.1-126), as further described herein.

Other components may also be included within each of the optical modules. Although not shown in FIGS. 292 and 293, the optical modules (11.3.1-120) may be supported by adjustment assemblies that allow the positions of the optical modules (11.3.1-120) to be adjusted. For example, the optical modules (11.3.1-120) may each be supported by a pupillary distance adjustment mechanism that allows the optical modules (11.3.1-120) to slide laterally toward or away from each other. As another example, the optical modules (11.3.1-120) may be supported by an interpupillary distance adjustment mechanism that allows adjustment of the distance between the optical modules (11.3.1-120) and the user's eyes.

FIG. 292 is an exemplary plan view illustrating a head-mounted device (11.3.1-100) including a device housing (11.3.1-102), a face seal (11.3.1-104), and a support structure (11.3.1-106). FIG. 293 is an exemplary rear view taken along line A-A of FIG. 292. In the illustrated example, the device housing (11.3.1-102) is a generally rectangular structure having a width selected to be similar to the width of a typical human head and a height selected to extend approximately from the forehead of a typical human to the base of the nose. This configuration is exemplary, and other shapes and sizes may be used.

The eye chamber (11.3.1-328) is defined by the device housing (11.3.1-102) and is bordered at its outer periphery by a face seal (11.3.1-104). The eye chamber (11.3.1-328) is open to the exterior of the head-mounted device (11.3.1-100) such that a user's face can be positioned adjacent the eye chamber (11.3.1-328), but is otherwise surrounded by the device housing (11.3.1-102). The face seal (11.3.1-104) may extend around a portion of the entire periphery of the device housing (11.3.1-102) adjacent the eye chamber (11.3.1-328). The face seal (11.3.1-104) may function to prevent some of the light from the environment surrounding the head-mounted device (11.3.1-100) from entering the eye chamber (11.3.1-328) and reaching the user's eyes.

In the illustrated example, the support structure (11.3.1-106) is a headband type device that is connected to the left and right sides of the device housing (11.3.1-102) and is intended to extend around the user's head. Other configurations for the support structure (11.3.1-106) may be used, such as a halo-type configuration in which the device housing (11.3.1-102) is supported by a structure that is connected to the upper portion of the device housing (11.3.1-102) and engages the user's forehead over the device housing (11.3.1-102) and extends around the user's head, or a mohawk-type configuration in which the structure extends over the user's head. Although not shown, the support structure (11.3.1-106) may include passive or active adjustment components, which may be mechanical or electromechanical, that allow portions of the support structure (11.3.1-106) to expand and contract to adjust the fit of the support structure (11.3.1-106) to the user's head.

The optical modules (11.3.1-120) are positioned within the device housing (11.3.1-102) and extend outwardly into the eye chamber (11.3.1-328). Portions of the optical modules (11.3.1-120) are positioned within the eye chamber (11.3.1-328) such that a user can view content displayed by the optical modules (11.3.1-120). The optical modules (11.3.1-120) are positioned within the eye chamber (11.3.1-328) at positions intended to be adjacent to the user's eyes. For example, a head-mounted device (11.3.1-100) may be configured to position portions of the lens assemblies (11.3.1-126) of the optical modules (11.3.1-120) approximately 15 millimeters from the user's eyes.

FIG. 294 is a perspective view example of one of the optical modules (11.3.1-120) including an optical module housing (11.3.1-122), a display assembly (11.3.1-124), and a lens assembly (11.3.1-126). The display assembly (11.3.1-124) and the lens assembly (11.3.1-126) are each connected to the optical module housing (11.3.1-122). In the illustrated example, the lens assembly (11.3.1-126) is positioned at a front end of the optical module (11.3.1-120), and the display assembly (11.3.1-124) is positioned at a rear end of the optical module (11.3.1-120). The optical module housing (11.3.1-122) defines an internal space between the display assembly (11.3.1-124) and the lens assembly (11.3.1-126), allowing light to travel from the display assembly (11.3.1-124) to the lens assembly (11.3.1-126) in a sealed environment that protects sensitive components from damage and is protected from external contaminants.

The display assembly (11.3.1-124) includes a display screen configured to display content, such as images, in response to signals received from the processor (11.3.1-108) and/or from an external device using the communication device (11.3.1-114) to output CGR content to a user. For example, the display assembly (11.3.1-124) may output still images and/or video images in response to the received signals. The display assembly (11.3.1-124) may include, for example, an LED screen, an LCD screen, an OLED screen, a micro LED screen, or a micro OLED screen.

The lens assembly (11.3.1-126) includes one or more lenses that direct light toward the user's eye in a manner that allows viewing of the CGR content. In some embodiments, the lens assembly (11.3.1-126) is a catadioptric optical system that utilizes both reflection and refraction to achieve desired optical properties in a small package size. In some embodiments, reflection may be achieved by internal reflection at boundaries between material layers of a single lens. Thus, in some embodiments, the lens assembly (11.3.1-126) may be implemented using a single multilayer catadioptric lens.

The lens assembly (11.3.1-126) may be partially positioned within the optical module housing (11.3.1-122). As further described herein, the optical module housing (11.3.1-122) may include two or more components configured to hold the lens assembly in a desired position and orientation.

FIG. 295 is an exploded side view illustrating components of an optical module (11.3.1-520) according to a first example. FIG. 295 is a schematic diagram intended to illustrate positional relationships between various features and does not include specific structural details of the components of the optical module (11.3.1-520). The optical module (11.3.1-520) may be implemented in the context of a head-mounted display (e.g., a head-mounted device (11.3.1-100)) and may be implemented in accordance with the description of the optical module (11.3.1-120) and further descriptions herein. The optical module (11.3.1-520) includes an optical module housing assembly (11.3.1-522), a display assembly (11.3.1-524), a lens (11.3.1-526), an eye camera (11.3.1-530), and an infrared emitter (11.3.1-532). As further described herein, these components are arranged along the optical axis (11.3.1-521) of the optical module (11.3.1-520) such that images generated using the display assembly are projected to a user along the optical axis (11.3.1-521).

Although the lens (11.3.1-526) is described herein as a single element, it should be understood that the lens (11.3.1-526) may be part of an assembly of optical elements, or may be an assembly of optical elements as described with respect to the lens assembly (11.3.1-126). Thus, for example, the lens (11.3.1-526) may be a catadioptric lens, or the lens (11.3.1-526) may be part of a catadioptric optical system.

The optical module housing assembly (11.3.1-522) may include a plurality of interconnected parts. In the illustrated example, the optical module housing assembly (11.3.1-522) includes a housing body (11.3.1-534) and a retainer (11.3.1-536). The housing body (11.3.1-534) is configured to be connected to other structures within the housing of the head-mounted display (e.g., within the device housing (11.3.1-102) of the head-mounted device (11.3.1-100)). The housing body (11.3.1-534) also provides a structure to which other components of the optical module (11.3.1-520) can be attached, including a display assembly (11.3.1-524), an eye camera (11.3.1-530), and an infrared emitter (11.3.1-532). Major portions of the optical module housing assembly (11.3.1-522), such as the housing body (11.3.1-534) and the retainer (11.3.1-536), can be manufactured from a rigid material, such as plastic or aluminum. The optical module housing assembly (11.3.1-522) is arranged around the optical axis (11.3.1-521), such that both visible light and infrared radiation can be incident on surfaces of the optical module housing assembly (11.3.1-522). For this reason, portions of the optical module housing assembly (11.3.1-522) may be coated with materials (e.g., paints or other coating materials) that exhibit low reflectivity of both visible and infrared wavelengths of electromagnetic radiation.

A retainer (11.3.1-536) is connected to an outer (e.g., user-facing) end of a housing body (11.3.1-534) of an optical module (11.3.1-520). For example, the retainer (11.3.1-536) may be connected to the housing body (11.3.1-534) by fasteners or by an adhesive. The retainer (11.3.1-536) and the housing body (11.3.1-534) of the optical module housing assembly (11.3.1-522) are configured such that a lens (11.3.1-526) is retained between the retainer (11.3.1-536) and the housing body (11.3.1-534), as further described herein. The retainer (11.3.1-536) and the housing body (11.3.1-534) have a ring-shaped configuration along the optical axis (11.3.1-521) to allow light from the display assembly (11.3.1-524) to pass through the lens (11.3.1-526) toward the user.

The display assembly (11.3.1-524) includes a seal (11.3.1-538), a bezel (11.3.1-540), a display module (11.3.1-542), a thermal interface (11.3.1-544), and a heat sink (11.3.1-546). The display assembly (11.3.1-524) is connected to the optical module housing assembly (11.3.1-522). For example, the display assembly (11.3.1-524) may be connected to the optical module housing assembly (11.3.1-522) by screws or other fasteners that allow disassembly of the display assembly (11.3.1-524) from the optical module housing assembly (11.3.1-522) (e.g., to allow for inspection and/or repair). The seal (11.3.1-538) is any suitable type of sealing material configured to prevent foreign particles (e.g., dust) from entering at the interface of the optical module housing assembly (11.3.1-522) and the display assembly (11.3.1-524). The bezel (11.3.1-540) is a structural component that supports the display module (11.3.1-542) and protects it from damage. For example, the bezel (11.3.1-540) may be connected to the heat sink (11.3.1-546) (e.g., by screws of other fasteners) to capture the display module (11.3.1-542) and the heat sink (11.3.1-546). The seal (11.3.1-538) can be interlocked with the bezel (11.3.1-540) and the optical module housing assembly (11.3.1-522) to seal the interface between them.

The seal (11.3.1-538) and bezel (11.3.1-540) have a ring-shaped configuration with central openings along the optical axis (11.3.1-521) to avoid blocking light emission from the display module (11.3.1-542) toward the lens (11.3.1-526).

The display module (11.3.1-542) includes a display screen that displays images (e.g., by emitting light using a grid of light-emitting elements to define an image). The display module (11.3.1-542) may be implemented using any suitable display technology, including light-emitting diode-based display technologies, organic light-emitting diode-based display technologies, and micro-light-emitting diode-based display technologies. In some implementations, a layer of cover glass is attached to the display surface of the display module (11.3.1-542) (e.g., by lamination) to provide strength, serve as a mounting feature, and serve as a sealing interface.

A thermal interface (11.3.1-544) is a thermally conductive and electrically non-conductive material positioned between the display module (11.3.1-542) and the heat sink (11.3.1-546) to facilitate heat transfer from the display module (11.3.1-542) to the heat sink (11.3.1-546). The thermal interface (11.3.1-544) is a compliant material capable of filling gaps that would otherwise exist between the display module (11.3.1-542) and the heat sink (11.3.1-546) and reduce the efficiency of heat transfer. As an example, the thermal interface can be a distributable thermal gel applied to the display module (11.3.1-542) or the heat sink (11.3.1-546). Reprocessable materials may be used in thermal interfaces (11.3.1-544), for example materials applied by room temperature vulcanization.

A heat sink (11.3.1-546) is a rigid structure (e.g., formed of metal) configured to readily conduct heat and dissipate heat to the surrounding environment. For example, the heat sink (11.3.1-546) may include structures that increase surface area, such as fins, to facilitate heat dissipation, and/or may include features, such as heat pipes, that conduct heat away from heat-generating components (e.g., the display module (11.3.1-542)).

FIG. 296 is an exemplary front view illustrating a lens (11.3.1-526) according to an example, and FIG. 297 is an exemplary cross-sectional view taken along line B-B of FIG. 296 illustrating the lens (11.3.1-526). The lens (11.3.1-526) is an optical element (or a combination of multiple optical elements, e.g., multiple lenses) configured to refract and/or reflect light incident on the lens (11.3.1-526). In the illustrated example, the lens (11.3.1-526) is formed of a molded transparent plastic, although glass may be used. Surface configurations that cause the refracting and/or reflecting of light (e.g., convex and concave portions) are not depicted in the drawings for simplicity and clarity, and these features may be defined as needed for the desired performance of the optical system.

The lens (11.3.1-526) includes a lens body (11.3.1-648) and protrusions (11.3.1-649) extending outwardly from the lens body (11.3.1-648). The lens body (11.3.1-648) extends from an outer surface (11.3.1-750) (oriented toward the user) to an inner surface (11.3.1-751) (oriented toward the display assembly (11.3.1-524)). The lens body (11.3.1-648) will typically have a width (or range of widths) greater than a height of the lens body (11.3.1-648) measured along an optical axis (11.3.1-521) of the optical module (11.3.1-520). The lens body (11.3.1-648) can be formed into any shape (as viewed from an end along the optical axis (11.3.1-521)), such as a generally cylindrical, oval, rounded rectangular, or irregular shape. The protrusions (11.3.1-649) can have a height (in the direction of the optical axis (11.3.1-521)) that is less than the height of the lens body (11.3.1-648), such as 10% to 50% of the height of the lens body (11.3.1-648). As described herein, the protrusions (11.3.1-649) facilitate alignment and retention of the lens (11.3.1-526) relative to the optical module housing assembly (11.3.1-522).

In the illustrated example, the peripheral wall of the lens body (11.3.1-648) extends from the outer surface (11.3.1-750) to the inner surface (11.3.1-751) without tapering, such that the peripheral wall is generally aligned with the optical axis (11.3.1-521) and the outer surface (11.3.1-750) and the inner surface (11.3.1-751) are generally identical in shape and size (except for minor deviations, such as protrusions (11.3.1-649)). In other implementations, the peripheral wall of the lens body (11.3.1-648) may be tapered. For example, the peripheral wall of the lens body (11.3.1-648) can be tapered so as to gradually move away from the optical axis (11.3.1-521) in a direction of travel extending from the outer surface (11.3.1-750) to the inner surface (11.3.1-751), such that the size of the outer surface (11.3.1-750) is smaller than the size of the inner surface (11.3.1-751).

FIG. 298 is an example front view illustrating a housing body (11.3.1-534) of an optical module housing assembly (11.3.1-522), and FIG. 299 is an example cross-sectional view taken along line C-C of FIG. 298 illustrating the housing body (11.3.1-534). The housing body (11.3.1-534) includes a base portion (11.3.1-852), an optical path opening (11.3.1-853) formed through the base portion (11.3.1-852), and a peripheral wall (11.3.1-854) extending around the optical path opening (11.3.1-853).

The base portion (11.3.1-852) extends generally perpendicular to the optical axis (11.3.1-521) of the optical module (11.3.1-520). The base portion (11.3.1-852) may include features that allow attachment of other components to the optical module housing assembly (11.3.1-522). As an example, the display assembly (11.3.1-524) may be attached to the base portion (11.3.1-852) (e.g., by fasteners or an adhesive). As another example, the eye camera (11.3.1-530) may be attached to the base portion (11.3.1-852) (e.g., by fasteners or an adhesive).

The peripheral wall (11.3.1-854) extends outwardly from the base portion (11.3.1-852) in a direction generally oriented toward the user and generally aligned with the optical axis (11.3.1-521) of the optical module (11.3.1-520). When viewed along the optical axis (11.3.1-521), the shape and size of the peripheral wall (11.3.1-854) are similar to the shape of the outer periphery of the lens (11.3.1-526), because the peripheral wall (11.3.1-854) is part of a structure that supports and retains the lens (11.3.1-526), as further described herein. A ventilation port (11.3.1-855) may be formed through the main wall (11.3.1-854) and may extend between an inner surface and an outer surface of the main wall (11.3.1-854) in a direction generally perpendicular to, for example, an optical axis (11.3.1-521) of the optical module (11.3.1-520). An electrical port (11.3.1-856) may be formed through the main wall (11.3.1-854) and may extend between an inner surface and an outer surface of the main wall (11.3.1-854) in a direction generally perpendicular to, for example, an optical axis (11.3.1-521) of the optical module (11.3.1-520).

A base surface (11.3.1-857) is defined on the base portion (11.3.1-852) and is positioned inwardly from the perimeter wall (11.3.1-854). The base surface (11.3.1-857) is adjacent to and extends around an optical path opening (11.3.1-853), which is an opening defined by the housing body (11.3.1-534) that allows light to travel from the display assembly (11.3.1-524) to the lens (11.3.1-526). A camera opening (11.3.1-858) is formed through the base surface (11.3.1-857) and is adjacent to but separated from the optical path opening (11.3.1-853). The camera aperture (11.3.1-858) extends through the base surface (11.3.1-857) generally in a direction facing the user. For example, the camera aperture (11.3.1-858) may extend through the base surface (11.3.1-857) in a direction generally aligned with the optical axis (11.3.1-521) of the optical module (11.3.1-520), or within 45 degrees of a line parallel to the optical axis (11.3.1-521) of the optical module (11.3.1-520).

FIG. 300 is an exemplary front view illustrating a retainer (11.3.1-536) of an optical module housing assembly (11.3.1-522), and FIG. 301 is an exemplary cross-sectional view taken along line D-D of FIG. 300 illustrating the retainer (11.3.1-536). The retainer (11.3.1-536) includes a peripheral wall (11.3.1-1060) extending around an optical path opening (11.3.1-1061). The peripheral wall (11.3.1-1060) includes an upper inner peripheral portion (11.3.1-1062) extending around and forming a boundary around the optical path opening (11.3.1-1061). The upper inner peripheral portion (11.3.1-1062) is configured to accommodate a lens body (11.3.1-648) of a lens (11.3.1-526). Channels (11.3.1-1063) are formed within the upper inner peripheral portion (11.3.1-1062) and open to the optical path aperture (11.3.1-1061). The size and position of the channels (11.3.1-1063) correspond to the size and position of the protrusions (11.3.1-649) of the lens (11.3.1-526) such that the protrusions (11.3.1-649) are accommodated within the channels (11.3.1-1063) to secure the lens (11.3.1-526) relative to the housing body (11.3.1-534) and prevent relative movement. The periphery wall (11.3.1-1060) includes a lower inner periphery portion (11.3.1-1064) that forms a boundary around the optical path opening (11.3.1-1061) and extends therethrough. The lower inner periphery portion (11.3.1-1064) is configured to be connected to the periphery wall (11.3.1-854) of the housing body (11.3.1-534).

Figure 302 is a front view example of an infrared emitter (11.3.1-532). The infrared emitter (11.3.1-532) includes a flexible circuit (11.3.1-1266), emitting components (11.3.1-1267), an electrical connector (11.3.1-1268), and a sealing element (11.3.1-1269). The flexible circuit (11.3.1-1266) is a flexible substrate having electrical conductors formed thereon. The flexible substrate may be a non-conductive polymer film. The electrical conductors may be conductive traces formed of copper. For example, the flexible circuit (11.3.1-1266) may be formed by multiple layers of a non-conductive polymer film with conductive traces formed between adjacent layers of the film. As further described herein, the shape of the flexible circuit (11.3.1-1266) may be arranged to conform to the shape of a portion of the optical module housing assembly (11.3.1-522) such that the infrared emitter may be positioned within or connected to the optical module housing assembly (11.3.1-522). In the illustrated example, the flexible circuit (11.3.1-1266) has a c-shaped configuration that allows the flexible circuit (11.3.1-1266) to extend around the optical axis (11.3.1-521) of the optical module (11.3.1-520), such that the emitting components (11.3.1-1267) can be arranged around the optical axis (11.3.1-521) within the array without blocking the optical path (the path along which light can travel) between the display assembly (11.3.1-524) and the lens (11.3.1-526) of the optical module (11.3.1-520).

The emitting components (11.3.1-1267) are components configured to emit infrared radiation within one or more wavelength bands. Infrared radiation emitted by the emitting components (11.3.1-1267) and reflected by the user's eye can be imaged by the eye camera (11.3.1-530) for use in imaging tasks.

The emitting components (11.3.1-1267) may be, for example, infrared light emitting diodes. In one implementation, the emitting components (11.3.1-1267) include a first group of components configured to emit infrared radiation in a first wavelength band and a second group of components configured to emit infrared radiation in a second wavelength band. The first and second wavelength bands may correspond to different imaging tasks. For example, the first wavelength band may be configured for use in biometric identification by an iris scanner (e.g., a wavelength band including 850 nanometers), and the second wavelength band may be configured for use in eye gaze direction tracking (e.g., a wavelength band including 940 nanometers).

The electrical connector (11.3.1-1268) of the infrared emitter (11.3.1-532) is any suitable type of standard component that allows connection to other components to provide power and optionally operating commands to the infrared emitter (11.3.1-532). A sealing element (11.3.1-1269) is formed on the flexible circuit (11.3.1-1266) between the electrical connector (11.3.1-1268) and the emitting components (11.3.1-1267). As best seen in FIG. 303, which is an example of a cross-sectional view showing a portion of a flexible circuit and a peripheral wall (11.3.1-854) of a housing body (11.3.1-534) of an optical module housing assembly (11.3.1-522), the flexible circuit (11.3.1-1266) extends through and is surrounded by a sealing element (11.3.1-1269). The sealing element (11.3.1-1269) is formed of a resilient flexible material configured to engage a portion of the optical module housing assembly (11.3.1-522) such that the flexible circuit (11.3.1-1266) can exit the interior of the optical module housing assembly (11.3.1-522) without providing a path for foreign particles (e.g., dust particles) to enter the interior of the optical module housing assembly (11.3.1-522). As an example, the sealing element (11.3.1-1269) can be formed of silicone overmolded onto the flexible circuit (11.3.1-1266) such that the flexible circuit extends through the sealing element (11.3.1-1269). In the illustrated example, the flexible circuit (11.3.1-1266) extends through the electrical port (11.3.1-856) of the housing body (11.3.1-534), such that a sealing element (11.3.1-1269) is positioned within the electrical port (11.3.1-856) and engages the housing body (11.3.1-534) and the electrical port (11.3.1-856) to define a seal and occupy the electrical port (11.3.1-856) to prevent the ingress of foreign particles.

Figure 304 is an example cross-sectional view illustrating an optical module (11.3.1-520).

The lens (11.3.1-526) is positioned between the housing body (11.3.1-534) and the retainer (11.3.1-536). The housing body (11.3.1-534) is connected to the retainer (11.3.1-536) such that the lens (11.3.1-526) is positioned between the housing body (11.3.1-534) and the retainer (11.3.1-536). Thus, the housing body (11.3.1-534) and the retainer (11.3.1-536) engage the lens (11.3.1-526) such that movement of the lens (11.3.1-526) is prevented relative to the housing body (11.3.1-534) and the retainer (11.3.1-536). To protect the lens (11.3.1-526) from damage (e.g., if the head-mounted device (11.3.1-100) is dropped), a layer of adhesive may be present between the lens (11.3.1-526) and portions of the housing body (11.3.1-534) and/or the retainer (11.3.1-536). The adhesive used for this purpose is strong enough to hold the lens (11.3.1-526) in a desired alignment, and flexible and resilient enough to cushion the lens (11.3.1-526) in the event of vibration or impact shock and allow the lens (11.3.1-526) to return to its original position.

A ventilation port (11.3.1-855) is formed through a peripheral wall (11.3.1-854) of the housing body (11.3.1-534) and allows air to enter and exit the interior space (11.3.1-1470) of the optical module (11.3.1-520). The interior space (11.3.1-1470) is defined within the optical module housing assembly (11.3.1-522) and between the lens (11.3.1-526) and the display assembly (11.3.1-524) by the housing body (11.3.1-534) and the retainer (11.3.1-536). The interior space (11.3.1-1470) is sealed from the external environment except at the ventilation port (11.3.1-855). The vent port (11.3.1-885) is a passageway that allows air to move between the interior space (11.3.1-1470) and the external environment located around the optical module (11.3.1-520). By allowing air to enter and exit the interior space (11.3.1-1470), the air pressure within the interior space (11.3.1-1470) is maintained at or near the ambient (e.g., external to the optical module (11.3.1-520)) air pressure. To exclude foreign particles from the interior space (11.3.1-1470), a filter element (11.3.1-1471) is connected to the vent port (11.3.1-885) such that any air passing through the vent port (11.3.1-855) must pass through the filter element (11.3.1-1471). The filter element (11.3.1-1471) is configured to prevent foreign particles from entering the interior space through the ventilation port (11.3.1-885) (e.g., by preventing entry of foreign particles larger than the pore size of the filter material). For example, the filter element (11.3.1-1471) may be positioned within or on the ventilation port (11.3.1-855). The filter element (11.3.1-1471) has a small pore size intended to exclude small particles (e.g., dust particles) from the interior space (11.3.1-1470). As an example, the filter element (11.3.1-1471) may be formed of a polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) filter material. To capture particles present inside the interior space (11.3.1-1470), a dust trap (11.3.1-1472) may be positioned within the interior space (11.3.1-1470), for example, connected to an inner surface of the housing body (11.3.1-534). The dust trap (11.3.1-1472) is configured to retain foreign particles on its surface, so that the foreign particles do not settle on surfaces where they may cause optical aberrations. For example, the dust trap (11.3.1-1472) may be an adhesive element, such as a sheet coated within an adhesive material, to which airborne particles within the interior space (11.3.1-1470) may adhere, preventing the particles from adhering to the display assembly (11.3.1-524) or lens (11.3.1-526), which may cause perceptible optical aberrations to a user (e.g., visual artifacts similar to dead pixels).

An eye camera (11.3.1-530) is a still image camera or video camera configured to acquire images. In use, the images acquired by the eye camera (11.3.1-530) may include a visual representation of part or all of a user's eye, such that the acquired images may be used for biometric identification (e.g., verifying a user's identity based on an image of the user's eye) and gaze tracking. In embodiments discussed herein, the eye camera (11.3.1-530) is sensitive to infrared light (i.e., electromagnetic radiation within the infrared portion of the electromagnetic spectrum). Accordingly, the eye camera (11.3.1-530) may be configured to acquire images showing reflected portions of infrared radiation emitted by the infrared emitter (11.3.1-532), and these reflected portions of the infrared radiation as represented in the images, useful for observing and identifying features of the user's eye, which may be done using a machine vision-based system implemented in software executed by the head-mounted device (11.3.1-100). In alternative implementations, the eye camera (11.3.1-530) may instead be implemented using a visible spectrum camera, or may be supplemented by using a visible spectrum camera in addition to the infrared spectrum camera.

The eye camera (11.3.1-530) is connected to the housing body (11.3.1-534) of the optical module housing assembly (11.3.1-522) adjacent the camera opening (11.3.1-858) of the housing body (11.3.1-534) such that the optical axis (11.3.1-1431) of the eye camera (11.3.1-530) extends through the camera opening (11.3.1-858). In the illustrated example, the eye camera (11.3.1-530) is oriented such that the optical axis (11.3.1-1431) of the eye camera (11.3.1-530) is substantially aligned with the optical axis (11.3.1-521) of the optical module (11.3.1-520). However, the eye camera (11.3.1-530) is positioned near the outer periphery of the lens (11.3.1-526) and is thus offset and directed outwardly from the optical axis (11.3.1-521) of the optical module (11.3.1-520). Thus, the housing body (11.3.1-534) and/or the eye camera (11.3.1-530) may be configured (e.g., by an inclined mounting surface) such that the optical axis (11.3.1-1431) of the eye camera (11.3.1-530) is inclined toward the optical axis (11.3.1-521) of the optical module (11.3.1-520), as illustrated in FIG. 305, which is a cross-sectional view illustrating an alternative embodiment of an optical module (11.3.1-520).

Returning to FIG. 304, in some implementations, a fiducial marker (11.3.1-1465) may be formed on the lens (11.3.1-526). The fiducial marker (11.3.1-1465) is any marking scheme that can be recognized and located in images acquired by the eye camera (11.3.1-530). The fiducial marker (11.3.1-1465) is visible in images acquired by the eye camera (11.3.1-530) for use in calibration. The head-mounted device (11.3.1-100) is calibrated to account for manufacturing conditions, user attributes, and/or other factors that may cause visual aberrations. During initial calibration, the location of the fiducial marker (11.3.1-1465) is determined and stored. The lens (11.3.1-526) may shift relative to other components, such as the optical module housing assembly (11.3.1-522), for example, if the head-mounted device (11.3.1-100) is dropped. The changed position of the lens (11.3.1-526) may be identified by comparing the position of the lens (11.3.1-526) in images acquired by the eye camera (11.3.1-530) with the position of the lens (11.3.1-526) in images acquired during calibration. In response to determining that the lens position has changed, calibration is re-performed to address any visual aberrations that may result from the shift in the position of the lens (11.3.1-526).

An infrared emitter (11.3.1-532) is positioned on a base surface (11.3.1-857) of a housing body (11.3.1-534) and extends around an optical axis (11.3.1-521) within an interior space (11.3.1-1470) defined within the optical module housing assembly (11.3.1-522) and between the lens (11.3.1-526) and the display assembly (11.3.1-524) by the housing body (11.3.1-534) and the retainer (11.3.1-536). The display assembly (11.3.1-524) is connected to the housing body (11.3.1-534) of the optical module housing assembly (11.3.1-522) adjacent to the optical path opening (11.3.1-853) of the housing body (11.3.1-534).

In one embodiment, the optical module (11.3.1-520) includes an optical module housing assembly (11.3.1-522), a display assembly (11.3.1-524), a lens (11.3.1-526), and an eye camera (11.3.1-530). The lens (11.3.1-526) is positioned at a first end of the optical module housing assembly (11.3.1-522), the display assembly and the eye camera (11.3.1-530) are positioned at a second end of the optical module housing assembly (11.3.1-522), and an interior space (11.3.1-1470) is defined within the optical module housing assembly (11.3.1-522) between the first end and the second end. The lens (11.3.1-526) is positioned to capture images of the user's eye through the lens (11.3.1-526). The lens (11.3.1-526) may be connected to the optical module housing assembly (11.3.1-522) so as to be positioned adjacent to the display assembly (11.3.1-524), for example, in a parallel arrangement relative to the display assembly (11.3.1-524).

In one embodiment, the optical module (11.3.1-520) includes an optical module housing assembly (11.3.1-522), a display assembly (11.3.1-524), a lens (11.3.1-526), and an infrared emitter (11.3.1-532). The lens (11.3.1-526) is positioned at a first end of the optical module housing assembly (11.3.1-522), the display assembly is positioned at a second end of the optical module housing assembly (11.3.1-522), and an interior space (11.3.1-1470) is defined within the optical module housing assembly (11.3.1-522) between the first end and the second end. An infrared emitter (11.3.1-532) is positioned within an interior space (11.3.1-1470) between a lens (11.3.1-526) and a display assembly (11.3.1-524). The infrared emitter (11.3.1-532) is positioned to project infrared radiation through the lens (11.3.1-526) onto a user's eye. The optical module (11.3.1-520) also includes an eye camera (11.3.1-530) connected to the optical module housing assembly (11.3.1-522) such that the infrared emitter (11.3.1-532) is positioned between the eye camera (11.3.1-530) and the lens (11.3.1-526) (e.g., along an optical axis (11.3.1-521)).

The lens (11.3.1-526) may be connected to the optical module housing assembly (11.3.1-522) so as to be positioned adjacent to the display assembly (11.3.1-524), for example, in a parallel arrangement relative to the display assembly (11.3.1-524).

In the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 304, the infrared emitter (11.3.1-532) is positioned on the base surface (11.3.1-857) of the housing body (11.3.1-534) within the interior space (11.3.1-1470). FIG. 306 is an exemplary cross-sectional view illustrating an optical module (11.3.1-520) according to an alternative embodiment in which the infrared emitter (11.3.1-532) is positioned on the exterior of the housing body (11.3.1-534) of the optical module housing assembly (11.3.1-522). In this embodiment, the infrared emitter (11.3.1-532) is connected to the exterior surface of the housing body (11.3.1-534) (e.g., by an adhesive) so as to be positioned adjacent to and extending around the display assembly (11.3.1-524).

An infrared-transparent panel (11.3.1-1673) is formed in the housing body (11.3.1-534) so as to allow infrared radiation emitted by the infrared emitter (11.3.1-532) to pass through the optical module housing assembly (11.3.1-522) and the lens (11.3.1-526). The infrared-transparent panel (11.3.1-1673) is formed from a material that allows infrared radiation to pass through it without significant loss. For example, the infrared-transparent panel (11.3.1-1673) can be formed from glass or from an infrared-transparent plastic. In the illustrated example, the infrared-transparent panel (11.3.1-1673) extends through an opening formed through the base surface (11.3.1-857). The infrared-transparent panel (11.3.1-1673) may be a single panel extending along the base surface (11.3.1-857) adjacent all of the emitting components (11.3.1-1267) of the infrared emitter (11.3.1-532), or may be multiple panels extending through separate openings formed through the base surface (11.3.1-857) adjacent to individual emitting components of the emitting components (11.3.1-1267). In some implementations, the infrared-transparent panel (11.3.1-1673) may be omitted in favor of forming part or all of the optical module housing assembly (11.3.1-522) (e.g., the housing body (11.3.1-534)) of an infrared-transparent material.

In the examples illustrated in FIGS. 304-306, the optical module (11.3.1-120) is depicted as including a single eye camera, represented by the eye camera (11.3.1-530). The optical module (11.3.1-120) may instead include more than one eye camera (e.g., two eye cameras), each configured to acquire images showing infrared radiation reflected from the user's eye. The eye cameras may be positioned at different locations (e.g., opposite lateral faces of the user's eye) and oriented at different angular orientations. Images output by multiple eye cameras may provide a more complete view of the user's eye.

FIG. 307 is a side view illustration of a display module (11.3.1-542) according to one embodiment. The display module (11.3.1-542) includes a silicon wafer (11.3.1-1775) and a display element layer (11.3.1-1776) (e.g., an organic light emitting diode layer) positioned on the silicon wafer (11.3.1-1775). The display element layer (11.3.1-1776) may be covered by a glass layer (11.3.1-1777). The display connector (11.3.1-1778) includes a first portion (11.3.1-1779) and a second portion (11.3.1-1780). A first portion (11.3.1-1779) of a display connector (11.3.1-1778) is a flexible connector (e.g., a two-layer flexible connector) that is connected to the silicon wafer (11.3.1-1775) by an electrical connection (11.3.1-1781) that connects individual conductors formed on the silicon wafer (11.3.1-1775) to individual conductors formed on the first portion (11.3.1-1779) of the display connector (11.3.1-1778). For example, the electrical connection (11.3.1-1781) may include an anisotropic film that bonds the display connector (11.3.1-1778) to the silicon wafer (11.3.1-1775) while allowing electrical communication.

A second portion (11.3.1-1780) of the display connector (11.3.1-1778) is a multilayer (e.g., six-layer) flexible connector of the type commonly referred to as a "rigid flex" connector. The second portion (11.3.1-1780) may include a cavity (11.3.1-1782) defined by the removal of one or more layers of the multilayer structure of the second portion (11.3.1-1780). A driver integrated circuit (11.3.1-1783) is positioned within the cavity (11.3.1-1782) to protect the driver integrated circuit (11.3.1-1783). The function of the driver integrated circuit (11.3.1-1783) is to receive display signals in a first format (e.g., encoded or multiplexed) and interpret the signals into a second format usable by the display element layer (11.3.1-1776) of the display module (11.3.1-542) to output images. A connector (11.3.1-1784) (e.g., a micro-coaxial connector) may be positioned on and electrically connected to a second portion (11.3.1-1780) of the display connector (11.3.1-1778) for connecting the display module (11.3.1-542) to other components (e.g., to a computing device that provides content to be displayed).

FIG. 308 is a plan view example of interpupillary distance adjustment mechanisms (11.3.1-1885) each supporting one of the optical modules (11.3.1-520) (i.e., left and right optical modules) relative to the device housing (11.3.1-102). The interpupillary distance adjustment mechanisms (11.3.1-1885) are examples of interpupillary distance adjustment assemblies configured to adjust the distance between the optical modules (11.3.1-520) that display content to the left and right eyes of a user to match the distance between the optical modules (11.3.1-520) with the distance between the user's eyes.

The optical modules (11.3.1-520) can be supported such that an optical axis (11.3.1-521) of each of the optical modules (11.3.1-520) extends generally in the anterior-posterior direction of the device housing (11.3.1-102). The interpupillary distance adjustment mechanisms (11.3.1-1885) include support rods (11.3.1-1886) and actuator assemblies (11.3.1-1887) configured to cause movement of the optical modules (11.3.1-520) along the support rods (11.3.1-1886) in response to a control signal. The actuator assemblies (11.3.1-1887) may include conventional motion control components, such as electric motors, that are connected to the optical modules (11.3.1-520) by components such as lead screws or belts to cause movement. The mounting brackets (11.3.1-1888) may be connected to the optical modules (11.3.1-520) such that support rods (11.3.1-1886) are connected to the mounting brackets (11.3.1-1888), such as by extending through openings (11.3.1-1889) formed through the mounting brackets (11.3.1-1888). The interpupillary distance adjustment mechanisms (11.3.1-1885) may also include biasing elements, such as springs, that engage the mounting brackets (11.3.1-1888) to reduce or eliminate unintended motion of the mounting brackets (11.3.1-1888) and/or the optical modules (11.3.1-520) relative to the support rods (11.3.1-1886). The support rods (11.3.1-1886) may be inclined relative to the lateral (e.g., side-to-side) dimension of the device housing (11.3.1-102) such that they move toward the user when moved outward. For example, the support rods may be inclined by 5 degrees relative to the lateral dimension.

FIG. 309 is a side view illustration of one of the interpupillary distance adjustment mechanisms (11.3.1-1885). The support rods (11.3.1-1886) may include upper and lower support rods for each of the optical modules (11.3.1-520) that support the optical modules (11.3.1-520) such that the optical axis (11.3.1-521) of each optical module (11.3.1-520) is slightly inclined downward, for example, by 5 degrees. Springs (11.3.1-1990) (e.g., leaf springs) may be seated within the openings (11.3.1-1889) of the mounting brackets (11.3.1-1888) and positioned forward from the support rods (11.3.1-1886) to bias the optical modules (11.3.1-520) toward the user.

FIG. 310 is a plan view cross-sectional example showing forward-facing cameras (11.3.1-2091) supported by respective optical modules (11.3.1-520). Apertures or optically transmissive panels (11.3.1-2092) (e.g., transparent plastic) are included within the device housing (11.3.1-102) to allow the forward-facing cameras (11.3.1-2091) to obtain images of the surrounding environment through the optically transmissive panels (11.3.1-2092). A single panel or separate panels may be used for the optically transmissive panels (11.3.1-2092), and as such, the device housing (11.3.1-102) may include one or more of the optically transmissive panels (11.3.1-2092). Accordingly, the device housing (11.3.1-102) may include one or more optically transmissive panels (11.3.1-2092) from which the front-facing cameras can acquire images of the environment from a point of view that simulates the user's point of view.

The forward-facing cameras (11.3.1-2091) can be connected to and supported by a corresponding optical module among the optical modules (11.3.1-520). The forward-facing cameras (11.3.1-2091) can be positioned such that they are positioned on and substantially aligned with an optical axis (11.3.1-521) of a corresponding optical module among the optical modules (11.3.1-520) (e.g., the optical axes of the forward-facing cameras (11.3.1-2091) can be substantially aligned with the optical axes of the optical modules (11.3.1-520)). The forward-facing cameras (11.3.1-2091) are oriented away from the user and are supported such that they are moved by the interpupillary distance adjustment mechanisms (11.3.1-1885). Accordingly, when the user adjusts the interpupillary distance between the optical modules (11.3.1-520), the distance between the front-facing cameras (11.3.1-2091) is also adjusted. Accordingly, when displayed to the user, images from the front-facing cameras (11.3.1-2091) are captured at the user's own interpupillary distance and are therefore presented more accurately in stereo vision. Accordingly, in some implementations, the optical axis of a first camera among the front-facing cameras (11.3.1-2091) is aligned with the optical axis of a first optical module among the optical modules (11.3.1-520), and the optical axis of a second camera among the front-facing cameras (11.3.1-2091) is aligned with the optical axis of a second optical module among the optical modules (11.3.1-520). Thus, in some implementations, a first camera among the front-facing cameras (11.3.1-2091) is connected in a fixed relationship to a first optical module among the optical modules (11.3.1-520), and a second camera among the front-facing cameras (11.3.1-2091) is connected in a fixed relationship to a second optical module among the optical modules (11.3.1-520). Accordingly, in some implementations, the interpupillary distance adjustment mechanisms adjust, during the adjustment of the distance between the optical modules (11.3.1-520), a first distance between an optical axis of a first optical module among the optical modules (11.3.1-520) and an optical axis of a second optical module among the optical modules (11.3.1-520) to be substantially the same as a second distance between an optical axis of a first camera among the front-facing cameras (11.3.1-2091) and an optical axis of a second camera among the front-facing cameras (11.3.1-2091).

FIG. 311 is an example illustrating connection of an eye camera (11.3.1-530) and an infrared emitter (11.3.1-532) to a computing device (11.3.1-2193) by an optical module jumper board (11.3.1-2194). The computing device (11.3.1-2193) may be, for example, a computing device including a processor (11.3.1-108) of a head-mounted device (11.3.1-100). The optical module jumper board (11.3.1-2194) has data connections to the eye camera (11.3.1-530) and the infrared emitter (11.3.1-532) and to the computing device (11.3.1-2193) through which signals and data are transmitted. The optical module jumper board (11.3.1-2194) also has separate data connections for each of the eye camera (11.3.1-530) and the infrared emitter (11.3.1-532). Additional components may be included within the optical module (11.3.1-520) and connected to the optical module jumper board (11.3.1-2194) by additional separate connections. The optical module jumper board (11.3.1-2194) may be mounted to the optical module (11.3.1-520) and thus may move integrally with the optical module (11.3.1-520) during pupillary distance adjustment. This reduces the number and size of electrical connections made to components not mounted to the optical module (e.g., the computing device (11.3.1-2193)). The optical module jumper board (11.3.1-2194) may be, for example, a rigid circuit board, a flexible circuit board, or a printed component board.

11.3.2: Cameras and LEDs

FIG. 312 illustrates an example of an optical module (11.3.2-100) for use in an electronic device, such as an HMD, including the HMD devices described herein. As illustrated in one or more other examples described herein, the optical module (11.3.2-100) may be one of two optical modules within the HMD, each aligned to project light toward a user's eye. In this manner, a first optical module may project light toward a user's first eye through a display screen, and a second optical module of the same device may project light toward a user's second eye through a different display screen.

In at least one example, the optical module (11.3.2-100) may include an optical frame or housing (11.3.2-102), which may also be referred to as a barrel or optical module barrel. The optical module (11.3.2-100) may also include a display (11.3.2-104) comprising a display screen or multiple display screens, coupled to the housing (11.3.2-102). The display (11.3.2-104) may be coupled to the housing (11.3.2-102) such that the display (11.3.2-104) is configured to project light toward the user's eyes when the HMD, of which the display module (11.3.2-100) is a component, is worn during use. In at least one example, the housing (11.3.2-102) may surround the display (11.3.2-104) and provide connection features for coupling other components of the optical modules described herein.

In one example, the optical module (11.3.2-100) may include one or more cameras (11.3.2-106) coupled to a housing (11.3.2-102). The cameras (11.3.2-106) may be positioned relative to the display (11.3.2-104) and the housing (11.3.2-102) such that the cameras (11.3.2-106) are configured to capture one or more images of a user's eye during use. In at least one example, the optical module (11.3.2-100) may also include a light strip (11.3.2-108) surrounding the display (11.3.2-104). In one example, the light strip (11.3.2-108) is positioned between the display (11.3.2-104) and the cameras (11.3.2-106). The light strip (11.3.2-108) may include a plurality of lights (11.3.2-110). The plurality of lights may include one or more light emitting diodes (LEDs) or other lights configured to project light toward the user's eyes when the HMD is worn. The individual lights (11.3.2-110) of the light strip (11.3.2-108) may be spaced around the strip (11.3.2-108) and thus uniformly or unevenly spaced around the display (11.3.2-104) at various locations on the strip (11.3.2-108) and around the display (11.3.2-104).

In at least one example, the housing (11.3.2-102) defines a viewing aperture (11.3.2-101) through which a user can view a display (11.3.2-104) when the HMD device is worn. In at least one example, the LEDs are configured and arranged to emit light through the viewing aperture (11.3.2-101) and toward the user's eye. In one example, the camera (11.3.2-106) is configured to capture one or more images of the user's eye through the viewing aperture (11.3.2-101).

As noted above, each of the components and features of the optical module (11.3.2-100) illustrated in FIG. 312 may be replicated in another (e.g., a second) optical module that is positioned with the HMD to interact with the user's other eye (e.g., project light and capture images).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIG. 312) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 313-316 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 313-316 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 312.

FIG. 313 illustrates a cross-sectional view of an example of an optical module (11.3.2-200) including a housing (11.3.2-202), a display assembly (11.3.2-204) coupled to the housing (11.3.2-202), and a lens (11.3.2-216) coupled to the housing (11.3.2-202). In at least one example, the housing (11.3.2-202) defines a first opening or channel (11.3.2-212) and a second opening or channel (11.3.2-214). The channels (11.3.2-212, 11.3.2-214) may be configured to slidably engage respective rails or guide rods of the HMD device to allow the optical module (11.3.2-200) to adjust its position relative to the user's eyes to match the user's interpupillary distance (IPD). The housing (11.3.2-202) may slidably engage the guide rods to secure the optical module (11.3.2-200) in place within the HMD.

In at least one example, the optical module (11.3.2-200) may also include a lens (11.3.2-216) that is positioned between the display assembly (11.3.2-204) and the user's eyes when the HMD is worn and is coupled to the housing (11.3.2-202). The lens (11.3.2-216) may be configured to direct light from the display assembly (11.3.2-204) to the user's eyes. In at least one example, the lens (11.3.2-216) may be part of a lens assembly that includes a corrective lens removably attached to the optical module (11.3.2-200). In at least one example, the lens (11.3.2-216) is positioned over the light strip (11.3.2-208) and one or more eye tracking cameras (11.3.2-206) such that the camera (11.3.2-206) is configured to capture images of the user's eye through the lens (11.3.2-216), and the light strip (11.3.2-208) includes lights configured to project light through the lens (11.3.2-216) into the user's eye during use.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIG. 313) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 312 and 314 through 316 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 312 and 314 through 316 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 313.

FIG. 314 illustrates an enlarged cutaway view of an example of an optical module (11.3.2-304) for use in the HMD devices described herein. The illustrated example includes a display assembly (11.3.2-304), a lens (11.3.2-316), and an optical strip (11.3.2-308) comprising a plurality of lights (11.3.2-310) coupled to an optical module barrel/housing (11.3.2-302). In at least one example, the optical strip (11.3.2-308) is secured to the housing (11.3.2-302) via a strip or portion of adhesive (11.3.2-318). The adhesive (11.3.2-318) may include a pressure-sensitive adhesive, an epoxy, or other adhesive. The display assembly (11.3.2-304) may include a display housing (11.3.2-319) that couples various layers, including display layers and covers, of the display assembly (11.3.2-304) to the housing (11.3.2-302). In at least one example, the display housing (11.3.2-319) of the display assembly (11.3.2-304) may be coupled to the optical module housing (11.3.2-302) via a dust seal component (11.3.2-320). The dust seal component (11.3.2-320) may be configured to prevent dust and debris from the air and/or external environment from penetrating into the display assembly (11.3.2-304) and the lens (11.3.2-316) and the space therebetween. In at least one example, the dust seal component (11.3.2-320) may include an adhesive. In one example, the dust seal component (11.3.2-320) may include a foam. In one example, the dust seal component (11.3.2-320) may include a block or section of material positioned between the display assembly housing (11.3.2-319) and the optical module housing (11.3.2-302).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIG. 314) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 312, 313, 315, and 316 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 312, 313, 315, and 316 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 314.

FIG. 315 illustrates a plan view of a portion of an example optical module (11.3.2-400) for use in HMD devices described herein. The optical module (11.3.2-400) may include a structural frame or housing (11.3.2-402) defining a viewing aperture (11.3.2-401) and a display screen (11.3.2-404) coupled to the housing (11.3.2-402). The display screen (11.3.2-404) may be part of a multi-component/layered display assembly. The display screen (11.3.2-404) may include or define an inside edge (11.3.2-422), an outside edge (11.3.2-424) opposite the inside edge (11.3.2-422), a bottom edge (11.3.2-426) extending between the inside edge (11.3.2-422) and the outside edge (11.3.2-424), and an upper edge (11.3.2-428) opposite the bottom edge (11.3.2-426) and also extending between the inside edge (11.3.2-422) and the outside edge (11.3.2-424). The optical module (11.3.2-400) may also include a first camera (11.3.2-406a) and a second camera (11.3.2-406b) coupled to the housing (11.3.2-402).

In at least one example, the first and second cameras (11.3.2-406a, 11.3.2-406b) may be positioned to visualize and capture images of the user's pupil without obstruction of the view by other facial features of the user, including eyelids, eyelashes, cheek protrusions, etc. Thus, in at least one example, the first camera (11.3.2-406a) may be positioned adjacent to the inner edge (11.3.2-422) and the second camera (11.3.2-406b) may be positioned adjacent to the lower edge (11.3.2-426). In one example, the first camera (11.3.2-406a) may be positioned closer to the lower edge (11.3.2-426) than to the upper edge (11.3.2-428). In one example, the second camera (11.3.2-406b) may be positioned closer to the outer edge (11.3.2-424) than to the inner edge (11.3.2-422).

In at least one example, the optical module (11.3.2-400) may include a light strip (11.3.2-408) positioned on the housing (11.3.2-402) between the first and second cameras (11.3.2-406a, 11.3.2-406b) and the display screen (11.3.2-404). The light strip (11.3.2-408) may be positioned around the periphery of the display screen (11.3.2-404). In at least one example, the light strip (11.3.2-408) may include a plurality of lights (11.3.2-410), which may include one or more types of lights or light sources, such as LEDs.

As described above with reference to FIG. 312, the optical modules described herein may be one of two optical modules of the HMD, each optical module configured to align and project light to one eye of the user. Accordingly, the inner edge (11.3.2-422), outer edge (11.3.2-424), lower edge (11.3.2-426), and upper edge (11.3.2-428) of the display screen (11.3.2-404) illustrated in FIG. 315 may each be one of a set of inner edges, outer edges, lower edges, and upper edges of two adjacent display screens within the HMD. In this example, the inner edges of adjacent display screens of adjacent optical modules within a single HMD device may be positioned between the respective outer edges.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIG. 315) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 312-314 and FIG. 316 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 312-314 and FIG. 316 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 315.

In examples of optical modules illustrated and described with reference to FIGS. 312-316 and elsewhere herein, a controller of the HMD may be electrically coupled to a plurality of lights (11.3.2-410) of a light strip (11.3.2-408) as well as the first and second cameras (11.3.2-406a, 11.3.2-406b). The controller may be configured to determine the gaze direction of the user's eyes by analyzing a pattern of light projected by the plurality of lights (11.3.2-410) and reflected from the eyes. In at least one example, determining the gaze direction may include assigning a first weight to a first pattern of reflected light from a plurality of lights (11.3.2-410) and captured by a first camera (11.3.2-410a) and assigning a second weight to a second pattern of reflected light from a plurality of lights (11.3.2-410) and captured by a second camera (11.3.2-410b). The controller may then determine a weighted average pattern from the first pattern and the second pattern. The first weight and the second weight may be set based on a position of the display screen relative to the user's eyes.

The position of the display screen (11.3.2-404) relative to the user's eyes may be determined by a first image captured by a first camera (11.3.2-406a) and a second image captured by a second camera (11.3.2-406b). In at least one example, the controller may be configured to change the first weight and the second weight as the position of the display screen (11.3.2-404) relative to the eyes changes. That is, as the user moves the gaze direction of the eye so that the position of the pupil relative to the display screen (11.3.2-404) and the first and second cameras (11.3.2-406a, 11.3.2-406b) changes, the weighting given to the images captured by the first and second cameras (11.3.2-406a, 11.3.2-406b) may change to rely more on the camera (11.3.2-406a, 11.3.2-406b) being positioned for the best determination of the gaze direction based on the new position of the pupil. Additionally, changes in the overall position of the cameras (11.3.2-406a, 11.3.2-406b) and screen (11.3.2-404) relative to the user's eyes, e.g., as the HMD device shifts slightly from side to side over time during use or as the device is adjusted for comfort by the user, may cause the weights to change to optimize gaze direction measurement and determination. Other factors, such as optical module adjustments for IPD adjustments, may also affect the weight given to each camera (11.3.2-406a, 11.3.2-406b) during gaze detection determination.

FIG. 316 illustrates a partial cutaway view of an example of an optical module (11.3.2-500) including a display assembly (11.3.2-504) and a camera (11.3.2-506) mounted on or coupled to a housing (11.3.2-502). The display assembly (11.3.2-504) can include a display screen disposed within, parallel to, or defining a first major plane (11.3.2-530). The major plane (11.3.2-530) can define a first normal axis (11.3.2-532) that is perpendicular to the major plane (11.3.2-530). The display screen of the display assembly (11.3.2-504) is configured to direct light in a direction parallel to the first normal axis (11.3.2-532). The camera (11.3.2-506) may include a lens (11.3.2-534) positioned within, parallel to, or defining a second normal axis (11.3.2-538) that is perpendicular to the second principal plane (11.3.2-536).

In at least one example, the first normal axis (11.3.2-532) is positioned at a first angle relative to the second normal axis (11.3.2-538) such that the first normal axis (11.3.2-532) and the second normal axis (11.3.2-528) are not parallel. The first camera (406a) of FIG. 315 exemplifies a similar first lens (11.3.2-434), and the second camera (11.3.2-406b) includes a second lens (11.3.2-440). In at least one example, the second lens (11.3.2-440) can define a normal axis positioned at a second angle relative to the first normal axis (11.3.2-532). The first angle can be different from the second angle. The normal axis defined by the second lens (11.3.2-440) of the second camera (11.3.2-406b) may also be non-parallel or at an angle to the second normal axis (11.3.2-538) of the other camera (11.3.2-406a) (or 11.3.2-506 as illustrated in FIG. 316). The first angle may be different from the second angle relative to the first principal plane (530) defined by the display screen of the display assembly (11.3.2-504). The angles of the cameras and their lenses may be configured to provide an unobstructed, direct visualization of the user's pupil for capturing images and tracking the user's gaze.

In at least one example, cameras, including cameras (11.3.2-506) as illustrated in FIG. 316, are positioned between a viewing aperture (11.3.2-501) defined by a housing (11.3.2-502) and/or an HMD frame and a display assembly (11.3.2-504).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIG. 316) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 312-315 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 312-315 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 316.

11.4: Display

11.4.1: Display system with interchangeable lenses

FIG. 317 illustrates a drawing of an HMD (11.4.1-100) including a display assembly (11.4.1-102). The display assembly (11.4.1-102) is described in more detail in Sections 11.4.1 through 11.4.3 herein.

Different users may have different refractive errors in their eyes, and thus require different corrective lenses. Embodiments of display systems are disclosed herein. In one embodiment, the display system includes a display, a removable lens assembly, and a lens detection sensor. The removable lens is removably connectable to the display. The lens detection sensor detects the removable lens assembly connected to the display. The display system may further include a head-mounted display unit including the display and the lens detection sensor. The display system may determine lens information from the removable lens using the lens detection sensor, and may provide an indicator of the removable lens based on the lens information.

In another embodiment, a method for operating a head-mounted display unit is provided, the method comprising: identifying a removable lens coupled to a display module of the head-mounted display unit; and providing an indication based on the identification of the removable lens. The indication may be a different configuration indication between the removable lens and another removable lens coupleable to the display module. The method may further comprise identifying a user while the indication may be an indication of compatibility between the removable lens and the user.

In another embodiment, a display system includes a head-mounted display unit and a removable lens assembly. The head-mounted display unit includes a display module. The removable lens assembly includes a lens element and a frame coupled to the lens element. The removable lens assembly can be removably coupled to the display module in a single orientation using magnetic attachment features coupled to the frame and surrounding the lens element. The removable lens assembly can be removably coupled to the display module using an interference fit, for example, using a removable lens that includes a compliant annular protrusion that axially receives a lens mount portion of the display module therein. The removable lens assembly can be removably coupled to the display module using sprung latch mechanisms.

In one embodiment, a display system includes a head-mounted display unit and a removable lens assembly. The head-mounted display unit includes a display module and corresponding mechanical coupling features. The removable lens assembly includes a corrective lens element, a frame coupled to the corrective lens element, and a mechanical coupling feature coupled to the frame. The mechanical coupling feature is receptive to the corresponding mechanical coupling feature for removably coupling the removable lens assembly to the head-mounted display unit.

The mechanical coupling feature can engage a corresponding mechanical coupling feature to prevent movement of the removable lens assembly relative to the head-mounted display unit across, along, and/or about the optical axis of the corrective lens element. The removable lens assembly can further include a magnetic coupling feature spaced from the mechanical coupling feature, whereby the removable lens assembly is magnetically coupled to the head-mounted display unit. The display module can include a lens mount including a corresponding mechanical coupling feature, and the removable lens assembly can be removably coupled to the display module.

Embodiments of display systems including a head-mounted display unit and one or more interchangeable lenses are disclosed herein. The interchangeable lenses can be configured according to the characteristics of different eyes of different users (e.g., according to eyeglass prescriptions). For example, one pair of interchangeable lenses may be associated with one user (e.g., prescribed for one user), while another pair of interchangeable lenses may be associated with another user. The interchangeable lenses are mountable to the head-mounted display unit in an interchangeable manner such that different lenses can be mounted to the head-mounted display unit to accommodate different users with different eye characteristics. The interchangeable lenses can be mounted to the head-mounted display unit in a variety of different ways. The display system can also identify the interchangeable lenses mounted to the head-mounted display unit and/or identify a user and perform various actions in response thereto.

Referring to FIGS. 318 and 319, a display system (11.4.1-100) generally includes a head-mounted display unit (11.4.1-110) and one or more removable lens assemblies (11.4.1-120). The head-mounted display unit (11.4.1-110) typically includes a housing (11.4.1-112), a head support (11.4.1-114), one or more display modules (11.4.1-116) (e.g., two; one for each eye), and various other electronics (e.g., a controller or computing device, a communication interface, audio input and/or output devices, sensors, a battery or other power electronics; see also FIG. 329). The display system (11.4.1-100) is configured to provide a computer-generated reality (e.g., virtual reality or mixed reality), in which case the display system (11.4.1-100) may be considered a computer-generated reality system or a computer-generated reality display system, a virtual reality system or a virtual reality display system, or a mixed reality display system or a mixed reality system. The terms computer-generated reality, virtual reality, and mixed reality are discussed in more detail below.

A housing (11.4.1-112) may include or otherwise be coupled to one or more display modules (11.4.1-116) and other electronic devices. The housing (11.4.1-112) may also include various compliant components (not shown) coupled to the housing for engaging the user's face to be supported thereon. A head support (11.4.1-114) is coupled to the housing (11.4.1-112) to support a head-mounted display unit (11.4.1-110) on the user's head while positioning the one or more display modules (11.4.1-116) in suitable positions relative to the user's eyes. As illustrated, the head support (11.4.1-114) may be configured as a strap or band configured to extend around the user's head. The display module (11.4.1-116) is coupled to the housing (11.4.1-112) in a fixed position (as shown).

Referring to FIGS. 320a and 320b, the display module (11.4.1-116) generally includes a display (11.4.1-316a), a main lens (11.4.1-316b), and a lens mount (11.4.1-316c). The display (11.4.1-316a) is configured to display graphics to a user. The display (11.4.1-316a) may be a display screen, such as, for example, a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light emitting diode (OLED) display, or other suitable display. The display (11.4.1-316a) may be coupled to a circuit board or other support.

A primary lens (11.4.1-316b) is coupled to the display (11.4.1-316a). The primary lens (11.4.1-116b) is positioned between the display (11.4.1-116a) and the user's eye and refracts light emitted from the display (11.4.1-316a) before reaching the user's eye. The primary lens (11.4.1-316b) may be omitted depending on the configurations of the display (11.4.1-316a) and/or the removable lens assemblies (11.4.1-120).

The lens mount (11.4.1-316c) is configured to be coupled to and support the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) between the display (11.4.1-316a) and the user's eye (i.e., the primary lens (11.4.1-316b) is between the display (11.4.1-316a) and the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120). As illustrated, the lens mount (11.4.1-316c) may additionally be coupled to and support the primary lens (11.4.1-316b) relative to the display (11.4.1-316a), for example, by being coupled to a circuit board or other support of the display (11.4.1-316a). The lens mount (11.4.1-316c) may surround the main lens (11.4.1-316b) (e.g., forming a bezel or barrel structure of the main lens (11.4.1-316b)).

A removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) generally includes a lens element (11.4.1-330) and a lens frame (11.4.1-340). The lens frame (11.4.1-340) is coupled to the lens element (11.4.1-330) and is configured to be removably coupled to a lens mount (11.4.1-316c) to support the lens element (11.4.1-330) at a predetermined location on the display module (11.4.1-116) (e.g., relative to the display (11.4.1-316a) and/or the primary lens (11.4.1-316b)). The lens frame (11.4.1-340) is coupled, for example, to an outer peripheral surface of the lens element (11.4.1-330). Variations of the lens mount (11.4.1-316c) and its interaction with the lens frame (11.4.1-340) are discussed in more detail below. The removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) may also be referred to as an interchangeable lens assembly, an interchangeable lens, a removable lens, or a lens.

The lens element (11.4.1-330) may be a corrective lens for addressing refractive errors of a user's eye, such as, for example, myopia, hyperopia, and/or astigmatism. The removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) and the lens element (11.4.1-330) may be associated with a particular user by having specific lens characteristics to address specific refractive errors (e.g., eye characteristics) of the particular user's eye. Such lens characteristics and eye characteristics may each include a myopia power (sphere), an astigmatism power (cylinder), an astigmatism axis, and/or other parameters traditionally used to define eyeglass prescriptions or refractive errors of one or more users' eyes.

The lens characteristics of the lens element (11.4.1-330) and the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) thereby may also include a center (e.g., an optical axis) that is aligned with the user's pupil. Accordingly, the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) can be mounted to the lens mount (11.4.1-316c) at predetermined positions (i.e., upper/lower, left/right, and rotational positions) to ensure proper spatial positioning of the lens element (11.4.1-330) with respect to the user's eye.

Alternatively, the lens element (11.4.1-330) may be a non-corrective lens that protects the primary lens (11.4.1-316b) from contact by the user and/or debris that might otherwise interfere with the user viewing the display (11.4.1-316a) (e.g., by blocking the view or scratching it). For example, one pair of removable lens assemblies (11.4.1-120) may include corrective lens elements (11.4.1-330) for use by a particular user, while another pair of removable lens assemblies (11.4.1-120) may include non-corrective lens elements (11.4.1-330) for use by other users (e.g., users who do not require corrective lenses).

Referring to FIGS. 321 through 323, the outer periphery of the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) can have different shapes. As illustrated in FIG. 321, the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) has an outer periphery formed by the lens frame (11.4.1-340) and is oval (i.e., having curved left and right ends; as illustrated). The outer periphery may instead be circular (see lens frame (11.4.1-540) of lens assembly (11.4.1-520) of FIG. 322), or rectangular (see lens frame (11.4.1-640) of lens assembly (11.4.1-620) of FIG. 323). As discussed in more detail below, these lens assemblies having rotationally symmetrical (e.g., oval, circular, rectangular, or other suitable shapes) outer peripheries may be further configured to be engaged with the lens mount (11.4.1-316c) at different rotational positions about the optical axis of the lens element (11.4.1-330) for use with the display module (11.4.1-116). Alternatively, the removable lens assemblies (11.4.1-120) may have rotationally asymmetric outer peripheries such that the lens mount (11.4.1-316c) is engageable at only one position for use with the display module (11.4.1-116).

Referring again to FIGS. 320a and 321, light is emitted by the display (11.4.1-316a) and passes through the primary lens (11.4.1-316b) and subsequently through the lens element (11.4.1-330) before reaching the user's eye. For example, light emitted from the outer edges (11.4.1-360a) of the display (11.4.1-316a) may generally follow an external light path (11.4.1-360) (e.g., a ray trace), whereby light emitted from the display (11.4.1-316a) is refracted by the primary lens (11.4.1-316b) and subsequently by the lens element (11.4.1-330). The external optical path (11.4.1-360) passes through the main lens (11.4.1-316b), typically the passage location (11.4.1-360b). The external optical path (11.4.1-360) enters the entrance side (11.4.1-330a) of the lens element (11.4.1-330) at the entrance point (11.4.1-360c) and exits the exit side (11.4.1-330b) of the optical path from the entrance point (11.4.1-360c). As the external optical path (11.4.1-360) moves from the entrance side (11.4.1-330a) to the exit side (11.4.1-330b) through the lens element (11.4.1-330), the external optical path (11.4.1-360) narrows and focuses toward the user's eye.

Regions of the lens element (11.4.1-330) outside the entry point (11.4.1-360c) and the exit point (11.4.1-360d) (i.e., radially outward toward the edges of the lens element (11.4.1-330)) do not function to refract light toward the user's eye and may be considered non-functional (e.g., non-refractive). Such non-functional regions of the lens element (11.4.1-330) may be removed and/or blocked by the lens frame (11.4.1-340), thereby allowing different structural configurations of the lens frame (11.4.1-340). As illustrated in FIG. 321, the functional area of the lens element (11.4.1-330) may be smaller than the functional area of the main lens (11.4.1-316b) as illustrated (e.g., smaller in area, width, and/or height than the functional passage location (11.4.1-360b) on the inlet side (11.4.1-330a) of the inlet point (11.4.1-360c) and/or on the outlet side (11.4.1-330b) of the outlet point (11.4.1-360d). The functional area of the lens element (11.4.1-330) may also be smaller than the display (11.4.1-316a), as illustrated (e.g., smaller in area, width, and/or height than the emitting area of the display (11.4.1-316a) on the inlet side (11.4.1-330a) of the inlet point (11.4.1-360c) and/or on the outlet side (11.4.1-330b) of the outlet point (11.4.1-360d). The functional area of the primary lens (11.4.1-316b) may be larger than the display (11.4.1-316a), as illustrated (e.g., larger in area, width, and/or height than the emitting area of the display (11.4.1-316a). Additionally, the functional areas of the main lens (11.4.1-316b) and lens element (11.4.1-330) may allow any eye camera (11.4.1-319) of the head-mounted display unit (11.4.1-110) (e.g., of the display module (11.4.1-116)) to observe light traveling in a direction opposite to that emitted by the user's eye (e.g., light traveling in a direction opposite to that emitted by the display (11.4.1-316a)).

Still referring to FIGS. 320a and 320b, an outer periphery of a lens element (11.4.1-330) is coupled to an inner periphery of a lens frame (11.4.1-340), for example, by engaging and/or attaching the lens frame. The outer periphery of the lens element (11.4.1-330) and the inner periphery of the lens frame (11.4.1-340) have corresponding shapes that allow coupling therebetween, for example, being linear (e.g., having the same cross-sectional shape moving axially) or tapered (e.g., widening as moving toward the display module (11.4.1-116)). The outer periphery of the lens element (11.4.1-330) may have substantially the same size as the main lens (11.4.1-316b) (e.g., substantially the same area, width, and/or height), which defines a non-functional region of the lens element (11.4.1-330).

Referring to FIGS. 324 to 326 and as mentioned above, the non-functional area of the lens elements (11.4.1-330) can be reduced such that the lens elements (11.4.1-330) are smaller than the main lens (11.4.1-316b).

As illustrated in FIG. 324, the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-720) is a variation of the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) and generally includes a lens element (11.4.1-730) and a lens frame (11.4.1-740). The lens element (11.4.1-730) is a variation of the lens element (11.4.1-330) by being smaller, for example, smaller (e.g., smaller in area, width, and/or height) than the main lens (11.4.1-316b). The lens frame (11.4.1-740) is a variation of the lens frame (11.4.1-340) that has a smaller inner periphery (e.g., smaller in area, width, and/or height) than the main lens (11.4.1-316b) and/or lens mount (11.4.1-316c) by extending radially inwardly further than the lens frame (11.4.1-740).

Referring to FIG. 325, a removable lens assembly (11.4.1-820) is a variation of the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) and generally includes a lens element (11.4.1-830) and a lens frame (11.4.1-840). The lens element (11.4.1-830) is a variation of the different lens element (11.4.1-830) by having edges that are angled (e.g., tapered) to more closely conform to the angle (e.g., angle of refraction) at which the external optical path (11.4.1-360) passes through the lens element (11.4.1-830). For example, the outer peripheral surface of the lens element (11.4.1-830) can extend at an angle measured relative to the optical axis of the lens element that is greater than 0, such as from 15 to 75 degrees, such as from 30 to 60 degrees. The edges of the outer peripheral surface on the entrance and exit sides of the lens element (11.4.1-830) can be smaller (e.g., smaller in area, width, and/or height) than the peripheral dimensions of the main lens (11.4.1-316b). The edge of the peripheral surface on the exit side of the lens element (11.4.1-830) can be smaller (e.g., reduced in size, moved away from the main lens (11.4.1-316b) toward the user's eye) than the edge of the peripheral surface on the entrance side of the lens element. The lens frame (11.4.1-840) is a variation of the lens frame (11.4.1-340) by extending radially inwardly further than the lens frame (11.4.1-340), for example by having an inner periphery that is smaller than the main lens (11.4.1-316b) on one or both of the inlet and outlet sides of the lens element (11.4.1-830). The lens frame (11.4.1-840) is coupled to an outer periphery surface of the lens element (11.4.1-830) and can follow or otherwise accommodate the shape (e.g., have a matching slope or contour) of the periphery surface of the lens element (11.4.1-830).

Referring to FIG. 326, a removable lens assembly (11.4.1-920) is a variation of the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) and generally includes a lens element (11.4.1-930) and a lens frame (11.4.1-940). The lens element (11.4.1-930) is a variation of the lens element (11.4.1-330) by having non-functional areas (which may be planar) on the exit side (e.g., or otherwise concave side) that are coupled to the lens frame (11.4.1-940) and form a front surface that surrounds the functional areas of the lens element (11.4.1-930). The lens frame (11.4.1-940) is a modification of the lens frame (11.4.1-340) by being joined to the front surface of the exit side (11.4.1-930b) of the lens element (11.4.1-930) and protruding inwardly from the lens mounting portion (11.4.1-316c).

Referring again to FIGS. 320-321, the lens mount (11.4.1-316c) and the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) are cooperatively configured such that the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) is removably coupled to the lens mount (11.4.1-316c) to be supported thereby. As illustrated, the lens mount (11.4.1-316c) and the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) each include cooperative coupling features (11.4.1-316d, 11.4.1-322). The cooperative coupling features (11.4.1-316d, 11.4.1-322) are magnetic and may be referred to as magnetic coupling features. The magnetic coupling features (11.4.1-316d, 11.4.1-322) are arranged at corresponding positions of the lens mount (11.4.1-316c) and the lens frame (11.4.1-340) of the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) relative to the lens mount (11.4.1-316c) to support the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) at one or more predetermined positions (i.e., vertically, laterally, and rotationally) where the lens element (11.4.1-330) is properly aligned with the user's eye.

For each pair of corresponding magnetic coupling features (11.4.1-316d, 11.4.1-322), one may be a permanent magnet, while the other is an attractor element (e.g., an attractor plate made of a ferromagnetic material) or another permanent magnet of a suitable orientation. For example, the magnetic coupling features (11.4.1-316d) of the lens mount (11.4.1-316c) may be attractor plates, while the magnetic coupling features (11.4.1-322) of the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) are permanent magnets.

The magnetic coupling features (11.4.1-316d, 11.4.1-322) are provided in a suitable size, number, and position relative to the lens mount (11.4.1-316c) to adequately support the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) during use while still allowing the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) to be readily removed by a user. For example, as illustrated, the lens mount (11.4.1-316c) and the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) may include approximately six pairs of magnetic coupling features (11.4.1-316d, 11.4.1-322).

The removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) and the lens mount (11.4.1-316c) can be configured such that the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) is mounted to the lens mount (11.4.1-316c) at only one predetermined location. For example, the lens element (11.4.1-330) can have an optical axis that is positioned off-center with respect to the lens mount (11.4.1-316c), thereby requiring the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) to be engaged with the lens mount (11.4.1-316c) at one predetermined location. Alternatively, if the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) were coupled to the lens mount (11.4.1-316c) at a different position rotated therefrom, the optical axis would be shifted relative to the lens mount (11.4.1-316c) and thereby relative to the display (11.4.1-316a) and the user's eye, resulting in reduced image quality perceived by the user.

The magnetic coupling features (11.4.1-316d, 11.4.1-322) may be configured to prevent incorrect positioning of the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) relative to the lens mount (11.4.1-316c). For example, as illustrated in FIG. 321, where the magnetic coupling features (11.4.1-322) are illustrated as dashed lines in FIG. 321 (e.g., embedded, concealed, or otherwise coupled to the lens frame (11.4.1-340)), the magnetic coupling features (11.4.1-316d, 11.4.1-322) may be asymmetrically positioned and/or distributed to prevent alignment of corresponding pairs of magnetic coupling features (11.4.1-316d, 11.4.1-322) and thereby prevent engagement of the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) to the lens mount (11.4.1-316c) at a different position (e.g., rotated by 180 degrees). Alternatively or additionally, the magnetic properties of the magnetic coupling features (11.4.1-316d, 11.4.1-322) (e.g., orientation and whether they are attractor plates or permanent magnets) may prevent magnetic coupling of these non-coupling features (11.4.1-316d) in different positions (e.g., rotated orientations). For example, if the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) is rotated 180 degrees, the aligned but non-coupling magnetic coupling features (11.4.1-316d, 11.4.1-322) may not attract each other (e.g., two attractor plates) or may repel each other (e.g., permanent magnets with common poles positioned adjacent to each other).

The lens mount (11.4.1-316c) and the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) may be further configured to mechanically prevent misalignment thereof. For example, the lens mount (11.4.1-316c) and the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) may each further include mechanical engagement features (11.4.1-316e, 11.4.1-324). The mechanical engagement features (11.4.1-316e, 11.4.1-324) mechanically engage with each other to ensure proper positioning and/or alignment between the lens mount (11.4.1-316c) and the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120). The mechanical engagement features (11.4.1-316e, 11.4.1-324) may further interlock with each other to further prevent relative movement of the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) to the lens mount (11.4.1-316c) (e.g., in the perpendicular and left-right directions relative to the optical axis, while the magnetic coupling features (11.4.1-316d, 11.4.1-322) prevent movement along the optical axis).

The mechanical engagement features (11.4.1-316e, 11.4.1-324) may be, for example, recesses and protrusions received by the recesses, respectively, or vice versa. If the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) were arranged at a different position relative to the lens mount (11.4.1-316c), the protrusions would instead engage another surface of the lens mount (11.4.1-316c) to prevent alignment of the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) therewith. Alternatively, the axially facing (e.g., mating) surfaces of the display module (11.4.1-116) (e.g., of the lens mount (11.4.1-316c)) and the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) (e.g., of the lens frame (11.4.1-340)) can have three-dimensional contours that prevent misalignment of the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) relative to the lens mount (11.4.1-316c).

Instead of having only one mounting position, the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) and lens mount (11.4.1-316c) can be configured such that the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) can be mounted to the lens mount (11.4.1-316c) in more than one position. For example, the lens frame (11.4.1-340) and the lens mount (11.4.1-316c), engagement features, and/or mechanical alignment features can be cooperatively configured such that the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) is engaged with the lens mount (11.4.1-316c) at two or more (e.g., three or four) predetermined locations (e.g., by two-fold rotational symmetry) and is not engaged with the lens mount (11.4.1-316c) at other locations.

Referring to FIGS. 327a through 328b, variations of the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) and the lens mount (11.4.1-316c) are configured to mechanically couple the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) to the lens mount (11.4.1-316c).

As illustrated in FIGS. 327a and 327b, the display module (11.4.1-1016) includes a lens mount (11.4.1-1016c) that is removably engageable with (e.g., forms an interference fit) with interlocking structures, such as a removable lens assembly (11.4.1-1020). The removable lens assembly (11.4.1-1020) includes a lens element (11.4.1-330) and a lens frame (11.4.1-1040), which are coupled to each other and may be otherwise configured in the manners previously described (e.g., see FIGS. 320a through 326). A lens frame (11.4.1-1040) includes a barrel (11.4.1-1042) having an annular protrusion (11.4.1-1044) (e.g., a lip or a circumferential lip). The barrel (11.4.1-1042) extends axially rearwardly (e.g., of the lens element (11.4.1-330)), while the annular protrusion (11.4.1-1044) projects radially inwardly therefrom. The lens frame (11.4.1-1040) may further define an annular recess (11.4.1-1046) (e.g., a circumferential channel; not labeled) extending radially outwardly from the annular protrusion (11.4.1-1044) and positioned axially outwardly (i.e., away from the display (11.4.1-316a)). The annular protrusion (11.4.1-1044) and the annular recess (11.4.1-1046) extend circumferentially, or substantially entirely (e.g., greater than 80%), about an axis of the lens element (11.4.1-330).

The lens mounting portion (11.4.1-1016c) includes a barrel (11.4.1-1016d) having an annular projection (11.4.1-1016e). The barrel (11.4.1-1016d) extends axially forwardly, while the annular projection (11.4.1-1016e) projects radially outwardly therefrom. The annular projection (11.4.1-1016e) further defines an annular recess (11.4.1-1016f) (e.g., a circumferential channel) positioned axially forwardly and extending radially inwardly therefrom. The annular projection (11.4.1-1016e) and the annular recess (1016f) defined thereby extend entirely or substantially entirely circumferentially about an axis of the lens element (11.4.1-330).

The barrel (11.4.1-1042) of the lens frame (11.4.1-1040) is configured to receive therein a barrel (11.4.1-1016d) of the lens mount (11.4.1-1016c) to removably couple the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-1020) to the lens mount (11.4.1-1016c). The annular projection (11.4.1-1044) of the lens frame (11.4.1-1040) is received by and retained within the annular recess (11.4.1-1016f) of the lens mount (11.4.1-1016c), while the annular projection (11.4.1-1016e) of the lens mount (11.4.1-1016c) is received by and retained within the annular recess (11.4.1-1046) of the lens frame (11.4.1-1040).

The inner periphery of the annular projection (11.4.1-1044) of the lens frame (11.4.1-1040) is smaller than the outer periphery of the annular projection (11.4.1-1016e) of the lens mounting portion (11.4.1-1016c), so that the axial surfaces of the annular projections (11.4.1-1044, 11.4.1-1016e) radially overlap each other and axially engage each other, thereby preventing unintentional disengagement of the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-1020) from the display module (11.4.1-1016). An annular projection (11.4.1-1044), which may be a barrel (11.4.1-1042), of the lens frame (11.4.1-1040) is formed of a compliant material, such as rubber or other polymer, that allows an inner periphery of the annular projection (11.4.1-1044) to expand and expand over the annular projection (11.4.1-1016e) of the lens mount (11.4.1-1016c). The lens frame (11.4.1-1040) formed of or otherwise including the compliant material forming the annular projection (1.4.1-1044) may also provide a soft material that can be incidentally contacted or otherwise engaged with a user's face. Alternatively, the barrel (11.4.1-1042) and/or the annular protrusion (11.4.1-1044) may form a flexure. In another alternative, the barrel (11.4.1-1042) and the annular protrusion (11.4.1-1044) of the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-1020) are rigid, while the barrel (11.4.1-1016d) and/or the annular protrusion (11.4.1-1016e) of the display module (11.4.1-1016) are compliant or form a flexure.

Although the lens frame (11.4.1-1040) and the lens mount (11.4.1-1016c) are shown and described as being accommodated within the lens frame (11.4.1-1040) (e.g., the barrel (11.4.1-1016d) and the annular projection (11.4.1-1016e)), the lens frame (11.4.1-1040) and the lens mount (11.4.1-1016c) may be arranged in the opposite manner in which the lens frame (11.4.1-1040) accommodates the lens mount (11.4.1-1016c).

As illustrated in FIGS. 328a and 328b, the display module (11.4.1-1116) includes a lens mount (11.4.1-1116c) having a removable lens assembly (11.4.1-1120) removably coupled with spring-loaded mechanisms. The removable lens assembly (11.4.1-1120) includes retractable latches (11.4.1-1122) (e.g., latch members) that typically protrude radially outwardly for reception into receptacles (11.4.1-1116d) of a corresponding lens mount (11.4.1-1116c). For example, the retractable latches (11.4.1-1122) extend axially rearwardly from a rear axial surface of the lens frame (11.4.1-1140) and include internal ends (11.4.1-1124) (e.g., hook-shaped or outwardly protruding ends) that extend radially outwardly therefrom (e.g., hook-shaped ends). When the retractable latches (11.4.1-1122) are retracted (e.g., by a user pressing on the exposed ends of the protrusions), the retractable latches (11.4.1-1122) are axially insertable into or removable from receptacles (11.4.1-1116d) within the front axial surface of the corresponding lens mount (11.4.1-1116c). The inner ends of the retractable latches (11.4.1-1122) are received behind the lips (11.4.1-1116e) of the receptacles (11.4.1-1116d). Springs (schematically shown; not labeled) bias the retractable latches (11.4.1-1122) radially outward when released by the user such that the inner ends of the retractable latches (11.4.1-1122) are arranged behind and engage the lips (11.4.1-1116e) of the receptacles (11.4.1-1116d) to retain the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-1120) on the lens mount (11.4.1-1116c). Although the retractable latches (11.4.1-1122) are shown and described as being part of the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-1120), the retractable latches may instead be provided on the display module (11.4.1-1116) for releasably engaging the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-1120) in a similar manner (e.g., for engaging receptacles within the outer peripheral surface of the lens frame (11.4.1-1140)).

Referring to FIGS. 329a and 329b, in other examples, variations of the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) may be coupled to the lens mount (11.4.1-1216c) in different ways. For example, the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-1220) and the lens mount (11.4.1-1216c) may include corresponding mating features (11.4.1-1222, 11.4.1-1223) (e.g., tabs and detents or protrusions) that allow engagement of the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-1220) to the lens mount (11.4.1-1216c) using one or more of axial motion (11.4.1-1222a), vertical motion (11.4.1-1222b), or rotational motion (11.4.1-1222c). Axial motion (11.4.1-1222a), vertical motion (11.4.1-1222b), or rotational motion (11.4.1-1222c) (e.g., 1/4 turn) causes engagement and engagement of the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-1220) with the lens mount (11.4.1-1216c) via corresponding mating features (11.4.1-1222, 11.4.1-1223).

Referring further to FIG. 329c, the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-1220') is coupled to the display unit (11.4.1-1216') via friction or a press fit. In particular, the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-1220) includes a lens frame (11.4.1-1240') that is received by a lens mount (11.4.1-1216c') of the display unit (11.4.1-1216') and thereby retained via friction (e.g., the lens frame (11.4.1-1240') is compressed radially inwardly by the lens mount (11.4.1-1216c').

Referring further to FIG. 329d, the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-1220') is coupled to the display unit (11.4.1-1216') via retractable pins (11.4.1-1216d). For example, the display unit (11.4.1-1216') includes a lens mount (11.4.1-1216c') that receives a lens frame (11.4.1-1240') of the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-1220') therein, and retractable pins (11.4.1-1216d) that selectively extend into corresponding recesses of the lens frame (11.4.1-1240'). For example, the pins (11.4.1-1216d') may be spring biased radially inward to be accommodated by the lens frame (11.4.1-1240').

Referring to FIGS. 330A-330F, in another example, the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-1320) includes a mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1322) (e.g., a male component, or a protrusion) which may be referred to as a lens mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1322), while the display module (11.4.1-1310) includes a corresponding mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1312) (e.g., a female component, a recess, or a receptacle) which may be referred to as a display mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1312). The lens mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1322) and the display mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1312) are mechanically mated to each other to mechanically couple the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-1320) to the display module (11.4.1-1310). For example, as discussed in more detail below, the lens mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1322) and the display mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1312) may prevent movement of the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-1320) relative to the display module (11.4.1-1310) in directions that are generally perpendicular to, generally parallel to, and/or about the optical axis of the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-1320).

The removable lens assembly (11.4.1-1320) may further include one or more magnetic coupling features (11.4.1-1324), which may be referred to as lens magnetic coupling features (11.4.1-1324), while the display module (11.4.1-1310) includes one or more corresponding magnetic coupling features (11.4.1-1314), which may be referred to as display magnetic coupling features (11.4.1-1314). The lens magnetic coupling features (11.4.1-1324) and the display magnetic coupling features (11.4.1-1314) are magnetically coupled to each other to magnetically couple the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-1320) to the display module (11.4.1-1310). For example, as discussed in more detail below, the lens magnetic coupling feature (11.4.1-1324) and the display magnetic coupling feature (11.4.1-1314) can prevent movement of the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-1320) relative to the display module (11.4.1-1310) in directions generally parallel to the optical axis of the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-1320).

The lens mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1322) of the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-1320) can be arranged on a first side (e.g., left, right, upper, lower, inner, or outer) of the removable lens assembly, while one or more lens magnetic coupling features (11.4.1-1324) can be arranged on a second side (e.g., right, left, lower, upper, outer, or inner, respectively, with the lens element (11.4.1-330) positioned therebetween) of the removable lens assembly, which can be spaced apart from the first side and/or opposite the first side. The lens mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1322) may be formed by (e.g., formed integrally with) the lens frame (11.4.1-340), while one or more lens magnetic coupling features (11.4.1-1324) are coupled to the lens frame (11.4.1-340). The lens magnetic coupling features (11.4.1-1324) may be or include one or more permanent magnets and/or an attractor material (e.g., a ferromagnetic material or component).

The display module (11.4.1-1310) includes a lens mount (11.4.1-1311) having a lens mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1322) and one or more lens magnetic coupling features (11.4.1-1324). As discussed in more detail below, the display mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1312) of the lens mount (11.4.1-1311) is configured to receive the lens mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1322) therein. The one or more display magnetic coupling features (11.4.1-1314) of the lens mount (11.4.1-1311) are magnetically coupled to the lens magnetic coupling features (11.4.1-1324) (e.g., permanent magnets of opposite polarity or attractor materials).

As mentioned above, the lens mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1322) of the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-1320) and the display mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1312) of the display module (11.4.1-1310) are configured to mate with each other, and in particular, the lens mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1322) is received by the display mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1312). When received thereby, the lens mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1322) engages the display mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1312) to prevent relative movement therebetween. For example, the lens mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1322) engages the display mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1312) to prevent relative shearing movement between the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-1320) and the display module (11.4.1-1310), such as upward movement, lateral movement (e.g., in a direction generally perpendicular to the optical axis of the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-1320)), and/or rotational movement of the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-1320) relative to the display module (11.4.1-1310) (e.g., about the optical axis of the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-1320)).

To prevent relative upward movement, the upward-facing surface of the lens mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1322) mates with the downward-facing surface of the display mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1312). To prevent relative downward movement, the downward-facing surface of the lens mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1322) mates with the upward-facing surface of the display mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1312). For example, the upper and lower ends of the lens mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1322) mate with the respective upper and lower ends of the display mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1312) (see FIGS. 330a and 330b). Alternatively, the upward and downward facing surfaces at intermediate heights of the lens mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1322) and the display mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1312) are interdigitated to prevent relative upward and downward movement.

To prevent relative lateral outward movement (e.g., away from the user's nose), the lateral outward facing surface of the lens mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1322) mates with the lateral inward facing surface of the display mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1312) (e.g., the left facing surface and the right facing surface, respectively, for the left removable lens assembly (11.4.1-1320). As illustrated in FIG. 330f, to prevent relative lateral inward movement (e.g., toward the user's nose), the lateral inward facing surface of the lens mechanical engagement feature (11.4.1-1322) mates with the lateral outward facing surface of the display mechanical engagement feature (11.4.1-1312) (e.g., the right-facing surface and the left-facing surface, respectively, for the left removable lens assembly (11.4.1-1320). For example, as illustrated, the lens mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1322) and the display mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1312) have curved shapes such that outwardly and inwardly facing sides (e.g., concave and convex surfaces, respectively) of the lens mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1322) mate with respective outwardly and inwardly facing sides (e.g., convex and concave surfaces, respectively) of the display mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1312).

To prevent relative rotational movement, the lens mechanical engagement feature (11.4.1-1322) engages the display mechanical engagement feature (11.4.1-1312) on its opposite sides at spaced locations on their opposite sides (e.g., two on each side). For example, as clockwise torque is applied to the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-1320), the upper inner surfaces and lower outer surfaces of the lens mechanical engagement feature (11.4.1-1322) and the display mechanical engagement feature (11.4.1-1312) engage each other to restrain (e.g., prevent) relative clockwise rotation therebetween. For example, as counterclockwise torque is applied to the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-1320), the upper outer surface and lower inner surface of the lens mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1322) and the display mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1312) engage each other to constrain (e.g., prevent) relative counterclockwise rotation therebetween.

The lens mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1322) and the display mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1312) may additionally be configured to prevent normal movement away from the display module (11.4.1-1310) (e.g., in the general direction of the optical axis). For example, the display mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1312) may include a forward-facing surface (e.g., an undercut or toe-in feature) that engages a rearward-facing surface of the lens mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1322).

Referring to FIG. 330e, as discussed in more detail below, to couple the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-1320) to the display module (11.4.1-1310), the lens mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1322) is first inserted into the display mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1312), and the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-1320) is rotated to bring the magnetic coupling features (11.4.1-1324, 11.4.1-1314) closer together to magnetically couple them.

As mentioned above, the lens magnetic coupling features (11.4.1-1324) of the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-1320) and the display magnetic coupling features (11.4.1-1314) of the display module (11.4.1-1310) are magnetically coupled to each other. The lens magnetic coupling features (11.4.1-1324) and the display magnetic coupling features (11.4.1-1314) are arranged at corresponding positions and with corresponding magnetic properties (e.g., opposite polarity, or one is a ferromagnetic material and the other is a permanent magnet). The lens magnetic coupling features (11.4.1-1324) and the display magnetic coupling features (11.4.1-1314) are magnetically coupled to each other using a force applied therebetween generally in the direction of the optical axis. The lens magnetic coupling features (11.4.1-1324) and the display magnetic coupling features (11.4.1-1314) are also spaced from the pivot axis defined by the display mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1312), such that the magnetic coupling therebetween prevents rotation about the pivot axis defined by the display mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1312). For example, as illustrated, the lens magnetic coupling features (11.4.1-1324) and the display magnetic coupling features (11.4.1-1314) are positioned generally opposite the lens mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1322) and the display mechanical coupling feature (11.4.1-1312), respectively.

Variations of the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-1320) and display module (11.4.1-1310) are contemplated. For example, the lens mechanical engagement feature (11.4.1-1322) and the display mechanical engagement feature (11.4.1-1312) may have different shapes (e.g., rectilinear), may be provided in different numbers (e.g., two or more sets of these at spaced locations to prevent movement as described above, e.g., pins and openings), and/or may be provided at different locations (e.g., on the top, bottom, or inside thereof). Furthermore, the display mechanical coupling features (11.4.1-1312) may be provided by different parts of the head-mounted display unit (11.4.1-110), for example, to the housing (11.4.1-112) (e.g., a curtain or other structure surrounding the display module (11.4.1-1310)). Additionally, instead of the magnetic coupling features (11.4.1-1324, 11.4.1-1314), the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-1320) and the display module (11.4.1-1310) may instead or additionally include mechanical coupling features (e.g., interlocking structures or latches as described above).

It should be noted that for each of the methods for coupling described above with respect to FIGS. 320a, 320b, and 327a through 330f, the lens mount may be coupled to another portion of the head-mounted display unit (11.4.1-110), such as the housing (11.4.1-112) (e.g., a chassis), as opposed to the display module (11.4.1-116) or variations thereof.

Referring to FIGS. 331a through 333, the display system (11.4.1-100) and the removable lens assemblies (11.4.1-120) are cooperatively configured to cause the display system (11.4.1-100) to detect a removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) coupled to a head-mounted display unit (11.4.1-110). For example, the head-mounted display unit (11.4.1-110) includes one or more lens detection sensors (11.4.1-1418a) for detecting one or more removable lens assemblies (11.4.1-120) coupled thereto. Upon detection of a removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120), the display system (11.4.1-100) may determine whether any of the removable lens assemblies (11.4.1-120) are coupled to the display module (11.4.1-116) (e.g., using proximity sensors, image recognition, and/or mechanical switches), whether the removable lens assembly (120) is properly coupled (e.g., using proximity sensors, image recognition, or Hall sensors with magnets coupled to the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120)), and/or other information about the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) (e.g., whether it is calibrated or uncalibrated, serial or model number, associated user, and/or lens characteristics using other types of lens detection sensors (11.4.1-1418a) discussed below). The display system (11.4.1-100) may provide an indication of whether a removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) is coupled to a display module (11.4.1-116), an indication of whether the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) is properly positioned relative to the display module (11.4.1-116), and/or other indications (e.g., of a lens configuration and/or lens compatibility as discussed below).

Each removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) may further include a lens tag (11.4.1-1428) that is in communication with or otherwise readable by one or more lens detection sensors (11.4.1-1418a). Upon detection of a removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120), the display system (11.4.1-100) may perform one or more subsequent actions, which may include changing an output of the display module (11.4.1-116), providing an indicator of the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120), and/or providing an indicator of compatibility of the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) with a user. The display system also includes a controller (11.4.1-1450) that controls the operation of the head-mounted display unit (11.4.1-110), for example, to detect and/or perform subsequent operations in response to removable lens assemblies (11.4.1-120) coupled thereto. The controller (11.4.1-1450) may be physically integrated, in whole or in part, within the head-mounted display unit (11.4.1-110) (as indicated by the dashed lines), or may be physically separate therefrom and provided, in whole or in part, (e.g., on an external computing device). An exemplary hardware configuration for the controller (11.4.1-1450) is discussed below with reference to FIG. 331.

Upon detection of a removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120), the display system (11.4.1-100) may identify or determine information about the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120), which may be referred to as lens information. The lens information may include an identifier and/or technical characteristics of the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120). The identifier may be of the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) itself (e.g., a serial number or model number; referred to as a lens identifier), a user associated with the lens (e.g., a user name or user ID; referred to as an associated user identifier), and/or other identifying information (e.g., manufacturer, date; referred to as manufacturing information). The technical characteristics may include refractive characteristics such as myopia, astigmatism, and/or astigmatic axis parameters, and/or optical axis position of the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120), which may be referred to as lens characteristics, lens characteristic information, or prescription information. The lens information determined by the display system (11.4.1-100) may then be used by the display system (11.4.1-100) to perform subsequent operations as mentioned above and described in more detail below.

The display system (11.4.1-100) can determine lens information of a removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) that is actively coupled (e.g., is being coupled or is currently coupled) to the head-mounted display unit (11.4.1-110) in a number of different ways and using different devices. The display system (11.4.1-100) can determine lens information from the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120), for example, using a lens detection sensor (11.4.1-1418a) from a lens tag (11.4.1-1428). In a first example, the lens tag (11.4.1-1428) is an electronic device that stores or otherwise electrically provides lens information. For example, the lens tag (11.4.1-1428) of each removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) may be an electrically erasable programmable read-only memory device (EEPROM), a radio frequency identification device (RFID), or an internal resistance device (e.g., an electrical resistor or resistor). The lens detection sensor (11.4.1-1418a) is a corresponding electrical device or system configured to receive and/or otherwise receive lens information from the lens tag (11.4.1-1428), read signals of the RFID, and/or measure or otherwise determine a resistance signature of the resistance device, for example, by being in wireless or physical communication with the EEPROM.

In a second example, the lens tag (11.4.1-1428) has a magnetic signature. The removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) includes various magnets (e.g., magnetic coupling features (11.4.1-322)) or other magnets, which may have various strengths and/or positions to provide the magnetic signature, and are detected by the lens detection sensor (11.4.1-1418a), which may include one or more Hall sensors or other magnetic sensors that detect the magnetic fields of the magnets. The combination of magnetic fields detected by the lens detection sensor (11.4.1-1418a) provides lens information (e.g., a lens identifier of a particular magnetic signature). The Hall sensors may instead or additionally be used to determine whether the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) is properly engaged.

In a third example, the lens tag (11.4.1-1428) is an optical marking that displays or otherwise communicates lens information. For example, the lens tag (11.4.1-1428) may be an optical or infrared (IR) marking on the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120), such as a quick response code (QR code), a bar code, or alphanumeric characters. The lens detection sensor (11.4.1-1418a) of the head-mounted display unit (11.4.1-110) is a corresponding optical reading device, such as a camera or a combined illuminator/sensor device (e.g., a QR code scanner), which may be an eye camera (11.4.1-319) that also observes the eye, as previously described. In one specific example, the lens tag (11.4.1-1428) is an infrared bar code.

The display system (11.4.1-100) may determine lens information required for one or more additional operations directly from the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) itself. Alternatively or additionally, the display system (11.4.1-100) may determine additional lens information from other sources to perform subsequent operations. For example, the display system (11.4.1-100) may receive only initial lens information (e.g., a lens identifier or an associated user identifier) from the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120), while other lens information (e.g., an associated user identifier and/or lens characteristics) is stored by the display system (11.4.1-100) in association with the initial lens information (e.g., by storage in the controller (11.4.1-1450)). Thus, by determining initial lens information from the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120), the display system (11.4.1-100) can determine (e.g., retrieve) other lens information to support subsequent operations.

Lens information of a removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) coupled to a display module (11.4.1-116) may be used to control various functions of the display system (11.4.1-100), including operating the display (11.4.1-316a), providing indications to a user of the removable lens assemblies (11.4.1-120) coupled thereto, and/or determining compatibility of the user with the removable lens assemblies (11.4.1-120). The operation of the display (11.4.1-316a) can be performed according to lens information of a removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) coupled to the display module (11.4.1-116), such that the operation of the display (11.4.1-316a) can differ between one of the removable lens assemblies (11.4.1-120) having one set of lens characteristics and another of the removable lens assemblies (11.4.1-120) having a different set of lens characteristics (e.g., different brightness and/or pixel output to account for different characteristics of the optical system formed by the main lens (11.4.1-316b) and the lens elements (11.4.1-330) or different lens characteristics).

Alternatively or additionally, the lens information of the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) coupled to the display module (11.4.1-116) may be used to provide indications to users or potential users of the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) coupled thereto, which indications may be referred to as lens configuration indications. The lens configuration indications are different for different removable lens assemblies (11.4.1-120) among the removable lens assemblies, e.g., for those removable lens assemblies (11.4.1-120) associated with different users. A first lens configuration indicia is provided for one of the removable lens assemblies (11.4.1-120) (or for a pair of removable lens assemblies (11.4.1-120) associated with each other), while a different second lens configuration indicia is provided for another of the removable lens assemblies (11.4.1-120) (or for another pair of removable lens assemblies (11.4.1-120) associated with each other). The display indicia (e.g., or output instructions) may be stored in association with lens information (e.g., a lens identifier, an associated user identifier, or lens characteristics), for example, by the display system (11.4.1-100), and retrieved upon determining the lens identifier. The configuration indicia may be provided independently of the user (e.g., without detecting or identifying the user).

The lens configuration indicator may be provided, for example, as an external optical indicator, a display indicator, or an audible indicator. An external optical indicator may be provided, for example, as an external visual indicator (11.4.1-1418b) (e.g., a light emitting diode) of the head-mounted display unit (11.4.1-110), which is visible to potential users before donning the head-mounted display unit (11.4.1-110) and which may differ, for example, by color (e.g., red versus blue to distinguish between a first user and a second user). The display indicator is provided by the display (11.4.1-316a) and is visible to the user or potential users through the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120). The display indicators may be, for example, a set of colors, symbols, or letters that are identifiable to different users and to potential users who have low acuity for the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) (e.g., the display (11.4.1-316a) may appear blurry). The audible indicators may be provided by an audio output device (11.4.1-1418c) (e.g., a speaker or headphones) of or associated with the head-mounted display unit (11.4.1-110) and may be audible to potential users before or after donning the head-mounted display unit (11.4.1-110). The auditory indicators may be, for example, spoken words (e.g., identifying a user associated with the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120)) or tones for different users associated with the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120).

Referring to FIGS. 331a and 331b, a method (11.4.1-1400) for displaying a lens configuration is provided, the method generally comprising a first operation (11.4.1-1410) for identifying a removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) coupled to a display module (11.4.1-116), a second operation (11.4.1-1420) for retrieving configuration indicator instructions, and a third operation (11.4.1-1430) for providing a configuration indication according to the instructions. A first operation (11.4.1-1410) for identifying an interchangeable lens assembly is performed using a lens detection sensor (11.4.1-1418a) and a controller (11.4.1-1450) for determining lens information from a lens tag (11.4.1-1428) of one or more removable lens assemblies (11.4.1-120) coupled to one or more display modules (11.4.1-116) of a head-mounted display unit (11.4.1-110). A second operation (11.4.1-1420) for retrieving configuration display instructions is performed by, for example, a controller (11.4.1-1450) for retrieving instructions associated with the lens information from a storage. A third operation (11.4.1-1430) providing a configuration indication is provided by a display module (11.4.1-116), an external visual indicator (11.4.1-1418b), and/or an audio output device (11.4.1-1418c), for example, as operated by a controller (11.4.1-1450).

Referring to FIGS. 331a through 333, instead or additionally, the display system (11.4.1-100) may use lens information of a removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) coupled thereto to determine compatibility with a user and provide a compatibility indicator to the user accordingly (e.g., only incompatibility is determined). In addition to determining lens information of a removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) coupled to a head-mounted display unit (11.4.1-110), the display system (11.4.1-100) may identify a current user and compare user information to the lens information to determine compatibility.

The display system (11.4.1-100) may identify a user in a variety of ways, such as by detecting biometrics, receiving user credentials, and/or authenticating with another device. To identify a user via biometrics, the display system (11.4.1-100) may include a biometric sensor (11.4.1-1418d) for identifying a user using biometrics (e.g., facial recognition, fingerprint recognition, voice recognition, iris recognition, and/or other biometric parameters such as ear geometry, bone conduction or density characteristics, forehead characteristics, or skin recognition). The biometric sensor (11.4.1-1418d) is, for example, physically coupled to a head-mounted display unit. For example, when using iris detection to identify a user, the biometric sensor (11.4.1-1418d) may be the eye camera (11.4.1-319) previously described, which may be the same sensor for identifying the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120). To identify a user via user credentials, the display system (11.4.1-100) receives user credentials (e.g., a username and password) from an input device of or associated with the display system (11.4.1-100), such as a microphone of the head-mounted display unit, or an external device (11.4.1-1460) in communication with the controller (11.4.1-1450) or the head-mounted display unit (11.4.1-110). To identify a user by authentication from another device, an external device (11.4.1-1460) may authenticate the user (e.g., via biometrics or credentials) and communicate such authentication to the controller (11.4.1-1450). The external device (11.4.1-1460) may be considered part of the display system (11.4.1-100), but may function independently therefrom (e.g., a smartphone).

The display system (11.4.1-100) stores or otherwise receives user information. The user information may include a user identifier (e.g., a user name or user number) stored in association with an associated lens identifier (e.g., a serial number or model number of one or more of the removable lens assemblies (11.4.1-120) associated with the user) and/or eye characteristic information (e.g., myopia, astigmatism, and/or astigmatism axis parameters; referred to herein as eye characteristics).

The display system (11.4.1-100) can receive user information during an initialization process in which the user information is associated with lens information. During the initialization process, the user information can be entered by the user or received from another source (e.g., an external device (11.4.1-1460)). The lens information can be obtained from the removable lens assemblies (11.4.1-120) when coupled to the display module (11.4.1-116) as described above (e.g., electronically and/or optically), or can be entered by the user (e.g., by entering the serial or model number of the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120)) or received from another source (e.g., an external device (11.4.1-1460)).

Referring to FIG. 332, to determine compatibility, the display system (11.4.1-100) compares lens information (11.4.1-1510) with user information (11.4.1-1520), for example, using a compatibility determiner (11.4.1-1500). For example, one or more of (a) lens information (11.4.1-1510) of a lens identifier (11.4.1-1512) is compared to user information (11.4.1-1520) of an associated lens identifier (11.4.1-1522), (b) lens information (11.4.1-1510) of an associated user identifier (11.4.1-1514) is compared to user information (11.4.1-1520) of a user identifier (11.4.1-1524), or (c) lens information (11.4.1-1510) of lens characteristics (11.4.1-1516) is compared to user information (11.4.1-1520) of eye characteristics (11.4.1-1526). The display system (11.4.1-100) determines one or more removable lens assemblies (11.4.1-120) as compatible if the lens information matches (e.g., is identical to) the user information, or incompatible if the lens information does not match.

If determined to be compatible, the compatibility indication may provide a positive indication (e.g., indicating that the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) is compatible with the user) or may be omitted (e.g., proceeding with normal operation). If determined to be incompatible, the compatibility indication is negative (e.g., indicating that the removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) is incompatible with the user). Such negative indication may include, for example, an icon graphically indicating the incompatibility, text instructions or information, and/or audible instructions or information.

Referring to FIG. 333, a method (11.4.1-1600) for operating a display system (11.4.1-100) to determine and indicate compatibility of a user with a removable lens assembly (11.4.1-120) is provided. The method includes a first operation (11.4.1-1610) of identifying one or more removable lens assemblies (11.4.1-120) coupled to one or more display modules (11.4.1-116), a second operation (11.4.1-1620) of identifying a user, a third operation (11.4.1-1630) of comparing lens information with user information, and a fourth operation (11.4.1-1640) of indicating compatibility. A first operation (11.4.1-1610) of identifying one or more removable lens assemblies (11.4.1-120) may be performed by one or more lens detection sensors (11.4.1-1418a) in cooperation with a controller (11.4.1-1450). The first operation (11.4.1-1610) may also include determining lens information. A second operation (11.4.1-1620) of identifying a user may be performed biometrically (e.g., by a biometric sensor (11.4.1-1418d) in cooperation with a controller (11.4.1-1450)) by receiving credentials from a user and/or by user authentication using an external device (11.4.1-1460). The second operation (11.4.1-1620) may also include determining user information. The third operation (11.4.1-1630) for determining lens compatibility is performed by comparing lens information with user information, for example, using the controller (11.4.1-1450) according to the compatibility determiner (11.4.1-1500). The fourth operation (11.4.1-1640) for indicating compatibility is performed by using the head-mounted display unit (11.4.1-110), for example, as operated by the controller (11.4.1-1450). If compatible, a positive indication is provided, which may be a normal operation of the display system (11.4.1-100). If incompatible, a negative indication is provided reflecting the incompatibility (for example, by the head-mounted display unit (11.4.1-110) as operated by the controller (11.4.1-1450).

Referring to FIG. 334, an exemplary hardware configuration of a controller (11.4.1-1450) is illustrated. The controller (11.4.1-1450) is a computing device that may generally include a processing device (11.4.1-1710) (e.g., a processor or CPU), memory (11.4.1-1720) (e.g., a volatile short-term memory such as a random access memory module), storage (11.4.1-1730) (e.g., a long-term storage device such as a hard disk or solid-state drive), a communication interface (11.4.1-1740) that allows the controller to transmit and/or receive signals to and/or from other components (e.g., a display module (11.4.1-116) and various sensors), and a bus (11.4.1-1750) that allows other components of the controller (11.4.1-1450) to communicate with one another. The controller (11.4.1-1450) may be physically connected to or otherwise in communication with the head-mounted display unit (11.4.1-110). The display system (11.4.1-100) may include additional controllers (11.4.1-1450) or components thereof. The controller (11.4.1-1450) may include software programming (e.g., stored on storage (11.4.1-1730)) comprising instructions executable by the processing device (11.4.1-1710) to perform the methods and operations described herein.

11.4.2: Electronic device system with complementary lenses

Some users of head-mounted devices have visual impairments, such as nearsightedness, farsightedness, astigmatism, or presbyopia. Ensuring that the optical system within a head-mounted device operates satisfactorily for these users can be challenging. Without careful consideration, users with visual impairments may find it difficult or impossible to properly focus on displayed content.

A head-mounted device may have a display that displays content for a user. Head-mounted support structures within the device may support the device on the user's head. A non-removable lens system may be supported by the head-mounted support structures and may be used to present content on the display to eye boxes. The user may view the content when the user's eyes are positioned within the eye boxes.

The head-mounted support structures may be configured to accommodate a removable complementary lens system aligned with a non-removable lens system. Magnetic coupling structures or other coupling structures may be used to removably couple the complementary lens system to the head-mounted device.

A removable supplementary lens system can be used to adjust the lens characteristics of a non-removable lens system, thereby customizing a head-mounted display to accommodate a user's vision. For example, a removable supplementary lens system can include left and right supplementary lenses that are aligned with the corresponding left and right lenses in a non-removable lens system and include astigmatic lens characteristics and other characteristics that enable the head-mounted device to be used by a user with astigmatism or other visual impairments.

Removable complementary lens systems associated with different users can be configured to operate with a shared head-mounted device. To ensure that the head-mounted device can customize its operation for each user, each user's removable complementary lens system can be provided with information identifying the user associated with that removable complementary lens system and other stored information. This information can be stored in the removable complementary lens system using barcodes or other optically readable patterns, programmable memory, or other data storage. A memory reader, an eye tracking system, or other sensors can be used to retrieve the stored information.

Information stored in the removable complementary lens system may include information about the optical characteristics of the removable complementary lens system, user information such as the user's eyeglass prescription, and/or other information. When the removable complementary lens system is installed in a head-mounted device, control circuitry within the head-mounted device may retrieve the stored information and take appropriate action. For example, the control circuitry may use lens positioners to adjust the lens spacing and other operating parameters of the lens systems based on the user's interpupillary distance and other information about the user.

A head-mounted device may include a display formed from one or more display panels (displays) for displaying visual content to a user. A lens system may be used to allow a user to focus on the display and view the visual content. To ensure that a wide range of users can clearly focus on the display and view the visual content, the head-mounted device may accommodate removable supplementary lenses. The supplementary lenses may address visual deficiencies of users not otherwise addressed by the lens system. For example, a user with astigmatism may have supplementary lenses that correct astigmatism. When such a user wishes to view content with the head-mounted device, the supplementary lenses may be installed within the head-mounted device to help correct the user's astigmatism. In one exemplary arrangement, the supplementary lenses may be coupled to the head-mounted support structures using magnets or other removable fasteners that attach the supplementary lenses to non-removable lenses within the device.

If desired, the removable supplementary lenses may be provided with the ability to store information that is subsequently retrieved and used by the head-mounted device. This information, which may sometimes be referred to as supplementary lens information or stored information, may include lens power information and other information specific to the supplementary lenses and/or user information about the user associated with the lenses (e.g., user name, eyeglass prescription information, etc.). Storage circuitry, such as a programmable read-only memory, may be used to store the supplementary lens information, and/or the supplementary lens information may be stored in other ways (e.g., using bar codes, text on the supplementary lenses, other patterned optically readable information, etc.). During operation, after a user installs the supplementary lenses within the head-mounted device, the head-mounted device may retrieve and use the supplementary lens information. For example, information about the optical properties of a lens may be used by the head-mounted device to help correct optical aberrations within the lenses (e.g., spherical aberration, chromatic aberration, pincushion distortion, barrel distortion, etc.), and information about the user may be used to adjust the interpupillary distance of the lenses, or may be used to present the user with a login screen pre-populated with the user's user name, etc.

A schematic diagram of an exemplary system that may utilize complementary head-mounted display lenses is illustrated in FIG. 335. As illustrated in FIG. 335, the system (11.4.2-8) may include one or more electronic devices, such as an electronic device (11.4.2-10). The electronic devices of the system (11.4.2-8) may include computers, cellular telephones, head-mounted devices, wristwatch devices, and other electronic devices. Configurations in which the electronic device (11.4.2-10) is a head-mounted device are sometimes described herein as examples.

As illustrated in FIG. 335, electronic devices, such as electronic device (11.4.2-10), may have control circuitry (11.4.2-12). Control circuitry (11.4.2-12) may include storage and processing circuitry for controlling the operation of device (11.4.2-10). Circuitry (11.4.2-12) may include storage, such as hard disk drive storage, non-volatile memory (e.g., electrically programmable read-only memory configured to form a solid-state drive), volatile memory (e.g., static or dynamic random access memory), etc. Processing circuitry within control circuitry (11.4.2-12) may be based on one or more microprocessors, microcontrollers, digital signal processors, baseband processors, power management units, audio chips, graphics processing units, application specific integrated circuits, and other integrated circuits. Software code may be stored in storage within the circuitry (11.4.2-12) and executed on processing circuitry within the circuitry (11.4.2-12) to implement control operations for the device (11.4.2-10), such as data acquisition operations, operations involving processing 3D facial image data, operations involving coordinating components using control signals, etc. The control circuitry (11.4.2-12) may include wired and wireless communication circuitry. For example, the control circuitry (11.4.2-12) may include radio frequency transceiver circuitry, such as cellular telephone transceiver circuitry, wireless local area network (WiFi®) transceiver circuitry, millimeter wave transceiver circuitry, and/or other wireless communication circuitry.

During operation, the communication circuitry of the devices within the system (11.4.2-8) (e.g., the communication circuitry of the control circuitry (11.4.2-12) of the device (11.4.2-10)) may be used to support communication between the electronic devices. For example, one electronic device may transmit video and/or audio data to another electronic device within the system (11.4.2-8). The electronic devices within the system (11.4.2-8) may communicate over one or more communication networks (e.g., the Internet, a local area network, etc.) using wired and/or wireless communication circuitry. The communication circuitry may be used to allow data to be received by the device (11.4.2-10) from an external device (e.g., a portable device such as a tethered computer, a handheld device, or a laptop computer, an online computing device such as a remote server or other remote computing device, or other electronic device) and/or to provide data to the external device.

The device (11.4.2-10) may include input/output devices (11.4.2-22). The input/output devices (11.4.2-22) may be used to allow a user to provide user input to the device (11.4.2-10). The input/output devices (11.4.2-22) may also be used to collect information about the environment in which the device (11.4.2-10) is operating. Output components within the devices (11.4.2-22) may allow the device (11.4.2-10) to provide output to the user and may be used to communicate with external electrical equipment.

As illustrated in FIG. 335, the input/output devices (11.4.2-22) may include one or more displays, such as display(s) (11.4.2-14). In some configurations, the display (11.4.2-14) of the device (11.4.2-10) includes a left display panel and a right display panel aligned with the user's left and right eyes, respectively. In other configurations, the display (11.4.2-14) includes a single display panel extending across both eyes.

A display (11.4.2-14) may be used to display images. Visual content displayed on the display (11.4.2-14) may be viewed by a user of the device (11.4.2-10). Displays within the device (11.4.2-10), such as the display (11.4.2-14), may be organic light-emitting diode displays or other displays based on arrays of light-emitting diodes, liquid crystal displays, liquid-crystal-on-silicon (LCoS) displays, projectors or displays based on projecting light beams directly or indirectly onto a surface through specialized optics (e.g., digital micromirror devices), electrophoretic displays, plasma displays, electrowetting displays, or any other suitable displays.

A display (11.4.2-14) can present computer-generated content, such as virtual reality content and mixed reality content, to a user. Virtual reality content can be displayed in the absence of real-world content. Mixed reality content, which may sometimes be referred to as augmented reality content, can include computer-generated images overlaid on real-world images. The real-world images can be captured by a camera (e.g., a forward-facing camera) and merged with the overlaid computer-generated content, or an optical coupling system can be used to allow the computer-generated content to be overlaid on top of real-world images. As an example, a pair of mixed reality glasses or other augmented reality head-mounted displays can include a display device that presents images to the user via a beam splitter, prism, holographic coupler, or other optical coupler. Configurations in which the display (11.4.2-14) is used to display virtual reality content to a user via lenses are described herein as examples.

The input/output circuitry (11.4.2-22) may include sensors (11.4.2-16). Sensors (11.4.2-16) include, for example, 3D sensors (e.g., structured light sensors that emit beams of light and use 2D digital image sensors to collect image data for 3D images from light spots created when a target is illuminated by the beams of light, binocular 3D image sensors that collect 3D images using two or more cameras in a binocular imaging array, 3D LIDAR (Light Detection and Ranging) sensors, 3D radio frequency sensors, or other sensors that collect 3D image data), cameras (e.g., infrared and/or line-of-sight digital image sensors), gaze tracking sensors (e.g., an gaze tracking system based on an image sensor, and, if desired, a light source that emits one or more beams of light that are then tracked using the image sensor after being reflected from the user's eyes), touch sensors, buttons, capacitive proximity sensors, light-based (optical) proximity sensors, other proximity sensors, force sensors, Sensors may include sensors such as contact sensors based on sensors, switches, gas sensors, pressure sensors, moisture sensors, magnetic sensors, audio sensors (microphones), ambient light sensors, microphones for collecting voice commands and other audio input, sensors configured to collect information regarding motion, position, and/or orientation (e.g., accelerometers, gyroscopes, compasses, and/or inertial measurement units including all or one or a subset of two of these sensors), and/or other sensors.

User input and other information may be collected using sensors and other input devices within the input/output devices (11.4.2-22). If desired, the input/output devices (11.4.2-22) may include other devices (11.4.2-24), such as haptic output devices (e.g., vibration components), light-emitting diodes and other light sources, speakers such as ear speakers for generating audio output, and other electrical components. The device (11.4.2-10) may include circuits for receiving wireless power, circuits for wirelessly transmitting power to other devices, batteries and other energy storage devices (e.g., capacitors), joysticks, buttons, and/or other components.

The electronic device (11.4.2-10) may have housing structures (e.g., housing walls, straps, etc.), as illustrated by the exemplary support structures (11.4.2-26) of FIG. 335. In configurations where the electronic device (11.4.2-10) is a head-mounted device (e.g., a pair of eyeglasses, goggles, a helmet, a hat, etc.), the support structures (11.4.2-26) may include head-mounted support structures (e.g., a helmet housing, head straps, temples within a pair of eyeglasses, goggle housing structures, and/or other head-mounted structures). Head-mounted support structures may be configured to be worn on a user's head during operation of the device (11.4.2-10) and may support display(s) (11.4.2-14), sensors (11.4.2-16), other components (11.4.2-24), other input/output devices (11.4.2-22), and control circuitry (11.4.2-12).

FIG. 336 is a plan view of an exemplary configuration of an electronic device (11.4.2-10) wherein the electronic device (11.4.2-10) is a head-mounted device. As illustrated in FIG. 336, the electronic device (11.4.2-10) may include support structures (e.g., see support structures (11.4.2-26) of FIG. 335) that house components of the device (11.4.2-10) and are used to mount the device (11.4.2-10) on a user's head. These support structures may include, for example, structures forming housing walls and other structures for the main unit (11.4.2-26-2), and other supplementary support structures or straps, such as structures (11.4.2-26-1) that help maintain the main unit (11.4.2-26-2) on the user's face so that the user's eyes are positioned within the eye boxes (11.4.2-60).

The display (11.4.2-14) may include left and right display panels (e.g., left and right pixel arrays, sometimes referred to as left and right displays) respectively mounted within left and right display modules (11.4.2-70) corresponding to the user's left eye (and left eye box (11.4.2-60)) and right eye (and right eye box), respectively. The modules (11.4.2-70), which may sometimes be referred to as lens support structures or lens housings, may be individually positioned with respect to the user's eye and with respect to the housing wall structures of the main unit (11.4.2-26-2) using respective left and right positioners (11.4.2-58) (e.g., stepper motors, piezoelectric actuators, motors, linear electromagnetic actuators, and/or other electronic components for adjusting position). The positioners (11.4.2-58) may be controlled by the control circuitry (11.4.2-12) during operation of the device (11.4.2-10). For example, the positioners (11.4.2-58) may be used to adjust the spacing between the modules (11.4.2-70) (and thus the lens-to-lens spacing between the lenses of the modules (11.4.2-70)) to match the interpupillary distance (IPD) of the user's eyes.

The device (11.4.2-10) may include a non-removable lens system (sometimes referred to as a permanent lens system or a fixed lens system) to which a user of the device (11.4.2-10) may attach removable supplementary lenses to adjust the user's vision (e.g., astigmatism). In the absence of a removable supplementary lens, the user may use a non-removable lens system. Users with certain visual defects (e.g., astigmatism) may benefit from the attachment of removable supplementary lenses to non-removable lenses. When the supplementary lenses are aligned with the non-removable lenses and coupled to the device (11.4.2-10), the supplementary lenses and the non-removable lenses operate together to form a combined lens system having combined optical characteristics determined by both the non-removable lenses and the supplementary lenses.

As illustrated in FIG. 336, for example, each lens module (11.4.2-70) may include a non-removable lens (11.4.2-72). The lenses (11.4.2-72) may be Fresnel lenses, single-element or multi-element lenses formed from transparent materials such as glass or plastic, mirror lenses, catadioptric lenses, and/or other types of lenses. The positions of the lenses (11.4.2-72) along the X-axis may be adjusted so that the lenses (11.4.2-72) are separated by a distance that matches the interpupillary distance (IPD) of the user. The positions of the lenses (11.4.2-72) along the Z-axis may be adjusted to assist the user in focusing on the display (11.4.2-14).

The amount of movement available to the lenses (11.4.2-72) may be limited and/or the lenses (11.4.2-72) may have properties that make it difficult for all users to use the lenses (11.4.2-72) alone to view content on the display (11.4.2-14). For example, a user may have astigmatism, or may be severely nearsighted or farsighted. In such situations, the lenses (11.4.2-72) may not be able to correct the user's vision when used alone. To ensure that the user's vision is fully corrected, supplementary lenses (11.4.2-76) may be combined with the lenses (11.4.2-72) to provide additional adjustment. For example, if the user has astigmatism, the supplementary lenses (11.4.2-76) may be configured to compensate for the user's astigmatism. When there are multiple users associated with the device (11.4.2-10), each of the multiple users may potentially have a different set of complementary lenses (11.4.2-76). The lenses (11.4.2-76) may be combined together to form a complementary lens system based on a single complementary lens module, or may be housed in separate lens modules to form a multi-lens module complementary lens system.

As illustrated in FIG. 336, for example, the supplementary lenses (11.4.2-76) may be mounted within supplementary lens modules (sometimes referred to as supplementary lens support structures or housings), such as the supplementary lens modules (11.4.2-74). The lens modules (11.4.2-74) may be removably coupled to the support structures (11.4.2-26) using the coupling structures (11.4.2-78) within the non-removable lens modules (11.4.2-70) and corresponding coupling structures (11.4.2-78) that mate with the coupling structures, e.g., coupling structures (11.4.2-80) within the removable lens modules (11.4.2-74) for coupling the lens modules (11.4.2-74) to the lens modules (11.4.2-70). The joining structures (11.4.2-78, 11.4.2-80) may be formed from magnetic couplers (e.g., magnets and/or magnetic structures such as iron bars), clips, hook-and-loop fasteners, snaps, screws and other threaded fasteners, temporary adhesives, spring-loaded joining structures, and/or other joining mechanisms.

The device (11.4.2-10) may include a gaze detection system configured to monitor the eyes of a user within the eye boxes (11.4.2-60). The gaze detection system may, for example, use optical eye monitoring components to monitor the direction of a user's gaze when the user is using the device (11.4.2-10). In one exemplary configuration, a gaze tracker, such as an gaze tracker (11.4.2-86), may be positioned within each lens module (11.4.2-70). In this position, the gaze tracker (11.4.2-86) within each lens module (11.4.2-70) may monitor the eyes of the user within each eye box (11.4.2-60) via each lens (11.4.2-72) and each matching complementary lens (11.4.2-76). The gaze trackers (11.4.2-86) may be positioned on the peripheral portions of the lens modules (11.4.2-70) such that the gaze trackers (11.4.2-86) do not block the user's view of the display (11.4.2-14) through the removable lenses (11.4.2-76) and non-removable lenses (11.4.2-72).

If desired, the removable lens system of FIG. 336 (e.g., a single removable lens holder configured to support one or both of the lens modules (11.4.2-74) and/or both of the removable lenses (11.4.2-76)) may be provided with electronic storage, such as a storage (11.4.2-84). The storage (11.4.2-84) may be a programmable read-only memory (e.g., an electrically programmable read-only memory, a memory formed from laser-programmed fuses, and/or other programmable memory), and may be formed from a pattern of metal traces and/or resistive elements (e.g., to encode information in the form of a pattern of conductive paths, a pattern of resistors and/or their associated resistance values, and/or other circuitry configured to act as a storage for storing data in the removable lenses for electrical retrieval by the device (11.4.2-10)). A storage (11.4.2-84) that may be formed as part of a removable lens system (e.g., as part of one or more of the modules (11.4.2-74) and associated removable lenses (11.4.2-76)) may be used to electrically store lens information, user information, and/or other information. When the removable lens system is coupled to a non-removable lens system (e.g., one or both of the lens modules (11.4.2-70), such as the storage (11.4.2-84)), an electrically stored information reader (11.4.2-82) may retrieve data stored in the storage (11.4.2-84). The information reader (11.4.2-82) may be, for example, an electrically programmed read-only memory reader, a memory reader that reads laser-programmed storage or other programmable memory, circuitry that electrically measures the storage (11.4.2-84) (e.g., to detect the pattern of conductive traces and/or resistive elements being used to store data), and/or other reader circuitry.

Information such as lens information, user information, and other information may also be stored using non-electrical storage. Such storage may include, for example, barcodes, text, patterns of dots, and/or other information that can be detected optically. Optical data reading operations may be performed using an infrared camera and/or a line-of-sight camera or other equipment that reads optically encoded information (e.g., barcode scanning equipment). As an example, optical data reading equipment that reads data on a removable lens by imaging the removable lens, such as infrared digital image sensors and/or visible light digital image sensors within eye tracking sensors (11.4.2-86), may be used to read barcodes, text, and/or other optically encoded information.

Gaze trackers (11.4.2-86) (sometimes referred to as gaze monitoring systems, gaze tracking systems, eye monitoring systems, etc.) may monitor the eyes of a user within the eye boxes (11.4.2-60) during operation of the device (11.4.2-10). The gaze trackers (11.4.2-86) may include light sources and light detection components, such as image sensors. Each gaze tracker (11.4.2-86) may include a light source, such as a light emitting diode light source or a laser light source, which generates an array of light beams (e.g., infrared light beams that do not interfere with the user's vision). Blanket (flood) illumination at infrared wavelengths and/or visible wavelengths may also be provided. Each eye tracker (11.4.2-86) may also include a respective infrared image sensor (and/or visible light image sensor) directed toward the user's eye within each eye box (11.4.2-60) and capable of capturing images of the user's eye through the lenses (11.4.2-72) and lenses (11.4.2-76) while the user's eye is illuminated with light beams from a light source of such eye tracker. During normal operation, the control circuitry (11.4.2-20) may track the user's eye using the eye trackers (11.4.2-86) (e.g., so that images being displayed on the display (11.4.2-14) may be adjusted based on the user's eye direction, etc.). When it is desired to read information within the optically stored removable lens system (e.g., by encoding information in the form of a barcode, text, etc.), one or more image sensors, such as one or more infrared image sensors within one or more eye trackers (11.4.2-86), can optically read information from the complementary lens system (e.g., from one or more lens modules (11.4.2-74)).

FIG. 337 is a front view of an exemplary removable lens module showing arrays that may be used to store information in the lens module. As depicted in FIG. 337, the lens module (11.4.2-74) may include lens support structures (11.4.2-74H). The support structures (11.4.2-74H) may be formed of polymers, metals, and/or other materials, and may surround or otherwise support the lenses (11.4.2-76) to form the lens module (11.4.2-74). The coupling structures (11.4.2-80) can be supported by the support structures (11.4.2-74H) such that the coupling structures (11.4.2-80) retain the lens module (11.4.2-74) to the lens module (11.4.2-70) and support the structures (11.4.2-26) when the coupling structures (11.4.2-80) are coupled to the matching coupling structures (11.4.2-78) within the lens module (11.4.2-70).

Lens information, user information, and other information may be stored in the removable lens module (11.4.2-74) using one or more approaches. In one exemplary arrangement, an electrical storage (11.4.2-84) is included within the lens module (11.4.2-74). Data may be stored in the electrical storage (11.4.2-84). When the removable lens module (11.4.2-74) is coupled to the non-removable lens module (11.4.2-70), a reader (11.4.2-82) may be coupled to the electrical storage (11.4.2-84) and may retrieve the stored data from the electrical storage (11.4.2-84).

In another exemplary arrangement, a barcode, such as barcode (11.4.2-92), may be included in the lens module (11.4.2-74). The barcode (11.4.2-92) may be, for example, an infrared barcode formed from ink that is opaque to infrared light (e.g., infrared light at a wavelength emitted by an infrared light source in the eye tracker (11.4.2-86)) and visibly transparent, or another barcode structure that is transparent to visible light and opaque at infrared wavelengths. With this type of arrangement, the barcode (11.4.2-92) would be transparent to the user, and would not obstruct the user's view of the content on the display (11.4.2-14), even if the barcode (11.4.2-92) were formed on the lens (11.4.2-76). Simultaneously, the gaze tracker (11.4.2-86) is directed towards the lens (11.4.2-76) so that the gaze tracker (11.4.2-86) can capture an image of the barcode (11.4.2-92) at infrared wavelengths.

Barcodes, text information, or other visible light (and/or infrared light) markings may be formed from laser markings, patterned inks, patterned metal coatings, and/or other markings formed on areas such as areas (11.4.2-90). This type of visible light encoded information (e.g., optically stored information) may be read by a visible light image sensor within the lens module (11.4.2-70) or an image sensor elsewhere within the device (11.4.2-10) (e.g., a visible light image sensor within sensors (11.4.2-16)). In some situations, the visible light encoded information, such as text, icons, or other optically readable patterns, may include user-perceivable information (e.g., user-readable text such as the user's name or username, user-perceivable icons, etc.). User-identifiable information may be used to label lens modules (11.4.2-74) so that lens modules belonging to different users are not confused. An image sensor within the device (11.4.2-10) (e.g., the image sensor within the eye tracker (11.4.2-87) and/or other image sensors) may optically read text, icons, or other patterned structures on the removable lens system that are also identifiable to the user, and/or the image sensor may read patterns such as barcodes and other patterns that do not include user-identifiable text or icons.

In some situations, it may be desirable to encrypt information stored within the removable lens module (11.4.2-74). The stored information may be encrypted using an encryption key. The control circuitry (11.4.2-12) may decrypt the encrypted information using a corresponding encryption key suitable for decryption (which may be the same as or related to the encryption key). The control circuitry (11.4.2-12) may obtain the key from the user (e.g., using the input/output device (11.4.2-22)). If desired, the control circuitry (11.4.2-12) may obtain the key from a remote server (e.g., an online service). A user password, user name, or other information, if desired, may be collected from storage within the user and/or device (11.4.2-10) and used by the control circuitry (11.4.2-12) when obtaining the key from the online service. In some arrangements, keys may be stored in the control circuitry (11.4.2-12) for use in decrypting encrypted information stored in the lens module (11.4.2-74) (e.g., when the device (11.4.2-10) is used only by members of a single household). These exemplary arrangements and/or other arrangements for encrypting and decrypting information stored in the removable lens module (11.4.2-74) may be used to enhance privacy for stored user information.

Exemplary steps involved in using the system (11.4.2-8) are illustrated in Figure 338.

During the operation of block (11.4.2-100), a user who desires to use the device (11.4.2-10) but has certain visual defects (such as astigmatism) may attach a removable lens system associated with the user to the device (11.4.2-10). During attachment of the removable lens system, removable lens support structures, such as lens modules (11.4.2-74), may be aligned with non-removable lens support structures, such as lens modules (11.4.2-70), such that the lenses (11.4.2-76) are aligned with the corresponding lenses (11.4.2-72). Coupling structures (11.4.2-82, 11.4.2-84) may be used to hold the lens modules (11.4.2-74, 11.4.2-72) together. The presence of lenses (11.4.2-76) aligned with lenses (11.4.2-72) allows the optical properties of the lenses (11.4.2-76) to modify the optical properties of the lenses (11.4.2-72) (e.g., to increase or decrease lens power, to add lens asymmetry to compensate for user astigmatism, etc.). In this manner, the optical system of the device (11.4.2-10) can be adapted to the user's vision.

During the operations of block (11.4.2-102), the control circuitry (11.4.2-12) of the head-mounted device (11.4.2-10) may read information stored in the removable lens system (e.g., using eye trackers (11.4.2-86), a visible light image sensor, a memory reader such as reader (11.4.2-82), etc.). The information read may be stored using barcodes, text, other optically readable patterns (e.g., patterned ink, patterned metal, or other patterned structures), and/or using electrical data storage arrays (see, e.g., barcodes (11.4.2-92), visible information (11.4.2-90), and electrically stored information in storage (11.4.2-84) of FIG. 337).

In general, any suitable data can be stored in the removable lens system. This information may include, for example, information about the user associated with the removable lens system, such as the user's eyeglass prescription (e.g., the spherical component of the user's prescription to be handled by a spherical lens power, the astigmatic component of the user's prescription to be handled by an aspherical lens power, and/or the interpupillary distance of the user's prescription), prescription date, prescription expiration date, the user's username and other user credentials, manufacturing information, such as the manufacture date, manufacturer name, serial number, lot number, and model name or other model type information of the removable lens system, lens materials for the lenses (11.4.2-76), lens powers (e.g., spherical lens power and/or aspheric lens power), and/or other optical properties of the lenses (11.4.2-76), such as known aberrations that may be corrected later using compensatory image wrapping operations performed by the control circuitry (11.4.2-12) during video playback, and/or other information.

After reading this information from the removable lens system during the operations of block (11.4.2-102), the control circuitry (11.4.2-12) may, if desired, make adjustments to components within the device (11.4.2-10). These adjustments may be made based on real-time measurements from the eye trackers (11.4.2-86) and/or based on stored data obtained from the removable lens system. For example, the control circuitry (11.4.2-12) may adjust the lens-to-lens spacing based on real-time measurements of the user's pupillary distance determined from the positions of the user's pupils measured by the eye trackers (11.4.2-86) and/or based on stored pupillary distance information for the user obtained from the removable lens modules (11.4.2-74). The control circuitry (11.4.2-12) may also adjust the positions of the lenses within the device (11.4.2-10) along the Z-axis of FIG. 336 to position the lenses (11.4.2-72) and associated complementary lenses (11.4.2-76) in a satisfactory position to allow the user to view content on the displays (11.4.2-14). These focusing adjustments using the lenses (11.4.2-72, 11.4.2-76) may be made based on the user's prescription, the refractive powers of the lenses (11.4.2-76), and other information obtained using stored information within the lenses (11.4.2-76). In arrangements where the lenses (11.4.2-72) have adjustable power (e.g., when the lenses (11.4.2-72) are tunable lenses), the control circuitry (11.4.2-12) can adjust the lenses (11.4.2-72) to implement the spherical component of the user's prescription. The asymmetric component of the user's prescription can be handled using the asymmetric portion of the complementary lenses (11.4.2-76) (as an example).

After making adjustments to the device (11.4.2-10) based on information from the complementary lens system formed by the lenses (11.4.2-76), the user can place the device (11.4.2-10) on the user's head.

During operations of block (11.4.2-104), control circuitry (11.4.2-12) may make additional adjustments to components within the device (11.4.2-10). For example, control circuitry (11.4.2-12) may use positioners (11.4.2-58) to adjust the lens-to-lens spacing of the left and right lenses (11.4.2-72) (and left and right lenses (11.4.2-76)) based on information from sensors within the device (11.4.2-10) (e.g., based on measured interpupillary distances collected using eye trackers (11.4.2-86)).

During the operations of block (11.4.2-104), an iris scanner, a fingerprint sensor, input/output devices that collect username and password information, or other components may be used to authenticate a user. The user may be instructed to supply a username and password (block (11.4.2-108)), for example, to enable control circuitry (11.4.2-12) to establish a communication link with an online service providing media content. If the user is not authenticated by control circuitry (11.4.2-12) (e.g., if the user's username and password or other credentials (e.g., biometric information) are not authenticated), control circuitry (11.4.2-12) may, during the operations of block (11.4.2-110), prevent the user from accessing the online service, selectively block the content, and/or take other appropriate action. If desired, in scenarios where the user fails authentication during the actions of block (11.4.2-106), the user may be allowed to override the authentication process in block (11.4.2-110) and/or additional authentication techniques may be used.

In some configurations of the device (11.4.2-10), the lenses (11.4.2-76) may contain user information (e.g., user game preferences, user movie preferences, etc.). In such configurations, the control circuitry (11.4.2-12) may refrain from decoding such information during the operations of block (11.4.2-106) until the user is authenticated and an appropriate decryption key (e.g., the user's password) is obtained.

In some embodiments, user information is stored by the control circuitry (11.4.2-12). The user information may include information about the user's eyeglass prescription (e.g., the required optical prescription strength). The information stored in the lenses (11.4.2-76) may include information about the optical prescription strength of the lenses (11.4.2-76). After determining the user of the device (11.4.2-10) and retrieving the user's stored prescription from the control circuitry (11.4.2-12), the control circuitry (11.4.2-12) may compare the retrieved user prescription information with the prescription of the lenses (11.4.2-76) to determine whether a satisfactory match exists. If the prescription of the lens (11.4.2-76) does not match the user's prescription, the control circuitry (11.4.2-12) may use the display (11.4.2-14) and/or other output circuitry to issue a visual and/or audible warning to the user and, if desired, may refuse to display content on the display (11.4.2-14).

In scenarios where the information stored within the lenses (11.4.2-76) includes optical aberration information (e.g., information indicating that the lenses (11.4.2-76) exhibit a particular amount of barrel distortion, pincushion distortion, spherical aberration, chromatic aberration, etc.), the control circuitry (11.4.2-12) may, during playback operations of block (11.4.2-108), apply geometric transformations or other video processing to the content being displayed on the display (11.4.2-14) that compensate for such distortions. In this manner, a user may view content with little or no aberrations. As an example, if the lenses (11.4.2-76) exhibit a particular amount of pincushion distortion, information about such amount of pincushion distortion may be stored within the lenses (11.4.2-76). During playback operations, the control circuitry (11.4.2-12) may apply compensatory (barrel) image wrapping to the content for the display (11.4.2-14) to ensure that the displayed content exhibits low distortion and aberrations, thereby improving the user's viewing experience of the content. Alternatively, the control circuitry (11.4.2-12) may apply any image processing corrections that help improve image quality and the user's viewing experience. For example, corrections may be applied to correct chromatic aberration, spherical aberration, etc.

According to one embodiment, a system is provided, comprising a head-mounted support structure, a display coupled to the head-mounted support structure, control circuitry configured to provide content using the display, a non-removable lens coupled to the head-mounted support structure, the non-removable lens configured to present content from the display within an eye box, and a removable supplemental lens removably coupled to the head-mounted support structure between the non-removable lens and the eye box, the removable supplemental lens being configured to store information retrieved by the control circuitry.

According to another embodiment, a system includes an eye tracking system having a light emitter and an infrared image sensor, wherein a removable supplemental lens has a barcode storing information, the barcode being opaque at infrared wavelengths and transparent at visible wavelengths, and the image sensor is configured to read the barcode while the removable supplemental lens is removably coupled to a head-mounted support structure.

In another embodiment, the barcode comprises infrared-opaque-and-visible-light-transparent ink on a clear lens element within a removable complementary lens.

In another embodiment, the information includes information selected from the group consisting of an eyeglass prescription, an eyeglass prescription expiration date, a user name, a manufacturing date, a manufacturer, a serial number, a manufacturing lot number, a model name, a model type, and information about optical characteristics of the removable supplementary lens.

According to another embodiment, the system includes a data readout device coupled to a head-mounted support structure, and the control circuitry is configured to obtain information from a removable supplemental lens using the data readout device.

In another embodiment, the information includes an eyeglass prescription.

According to another embodiment, the removable supplemental lens includes a memory, and the data reading device is configured to obtain information from the memory.

In another embodiment, the removable supplementary lens comprises text, and the data reading device is configured to obtain information by optically reading the text.

According to another embodiment, the removable supplemental lens includes circuitry configured to store data, and the data reading device is configured to obtain information from the circuitry.

According to another embodiment, the removable supplementary lens includes a programmable read-only memory, and the data reading device is configured to obtain information from the programmable read-only memory, the information including lens characteristics of the removable supplementary lens.

In another embodiment, the lens characteristics include lens power associated with a removable complementary lens.

In another embodiment, the lens characteristics include aspheric lens power associated with a removable complementary lens.

In another embodiment, the lens characteristics include optical aberrations associated with a removable compensating lens.

In another embodiment, the control circuitry is configured to obtain information when the removable supplemental lens is coupled to the head-mounted support structure.

According to another embodiment, the information includes information selected from the group consisting of a user name, a serial number, optical characteristics of a removable supplementary lens, and eyeglass prescription information.

According to one embodiment, a head-mounted device is provided, comprising head-mounted support structures, a display configured to display content, left and right positioners, a non-removable lens system having left and right lenses positioned by the left and right positioners, respectively, a removable lens system having removable left and right complementary lenses removably coupled to the head-mounted support structures and aligned with the right and left lenses, respectively, and control circuitry configured to acquire information stored in the removable lens system.

In another embodiment, the information includes a pupillary distance for the user, and the control circuitry is configured to adjust a lens center-to-lens center distance associated with the left and right lenses using the left and right positioners to match the pupillary distance.

In another embodiment, the head-mounted device includes an optically readable pattern on a removable lens system that stores information.

In another embodiment, the head-mounted device includes an image sensor that optically reads an optically readable pattern to retrieve information from the removable lens system.

In another embodiment, the image sensor comprises an infrared image sensor within the eye tracking system.

According to another embodiment, the information includes a user's eyeglass prescription, and the control circuitry is configured to adjust the left and right positioners based on the user's eyeglass prescription.

According to one embodiment, an electronic device is provided that is configured to operate with a removable supplementary lens system, the device comprising a display for displaying content, control circuitry, a non-removable lens system configured to allow the display content to be viewed from eye boxes, a removable supplementary lens system, and head-mounted support structures that support the display and support the non-removable lens system between the eye boxes and the display, wherein the removable supplementary lens system is configured to be supported between the non-removable lenses and the eye boxes, the removable supplementary lens system is configured to store information, and the control circuitry is configured to obtain information from the removable supplementary lens system when the removable supplementary lens system is between the non-removable lenses and the eye boxes.

In another embodiment, the electronic device includes lens positioners, and the control circuitry is configured to adjust a lens-to-lens spacing associated with left and right lenses in a non-removable lens system based on information obtained from a removable complementary lens system using the lens positioners.

In another embodiment, the information includes an optical prescription associated with the removable supplementary lens system, and the control circuitry is configured to issue an alert to the user in response to determining that a mismatch exists between the optical prescription associated with the removable supplementary lens system and the user's prescription.

According to another embodiment, the information includes distortion information specifying optical distortion associated with the complementary lens system, and the control circuitry is configured to apply compensation correction to content being displayed on the display based on the distortion information.

The foregoing is merely exemplary, and various modifications may be made to the described embodiments. The above-described embodiments may be implemented individually or in any combination.

11.4.3: RX lenses

FIG. 339 illustrates an optical assembly (11.4.3-100) for use in an HMD device such as those described herein. The optical assembly (11.4.3-100) may be configured to project light toward the eyes of a user when wearing the HMD. In at least one example, the optical assembly (11.4.3-100) may include a removably attachable prescription (“Rx”) lens (11.4.3-102). The Rx lens (11.4.3-102) may be removably coupled to a rim (11.4.3-104). The rim (11.4.3-104) may be secured to an outer housing (11.4.3-106) of the optical assembly (11.4.3-106). The Rx lens (11.4.3-102) may be interchangeable to accommodate the vision correction needs of various users of the HMD. The optical assembly (11.4.3-100) may also include a display, such as a display screen (not shown), configured to project light toward the user's eye(s) through the Rx lens (11.4.3-102).

FIG. 340 illustrates an optical assembly (11.4.3-100) with the Rx lens removed to illustrate another lens (11.4.3-108) of the optical assembly. The fixed lens (11.4.3-108) illustrated in FIG. 340 may be positioned below/behind the Rx lens (11.4.3-102) illustrated in FIG. 339 (e.g., the Rx lens (11.4.3-102) is positioned between the fixed lens (11.4.3-108) and the user's eye (11.4.3-108) during use) and may be substantially non-removably secured to the optical assembly (11.4.3-100), for example, to a rim (11.4.3-104) of the optical assembly (11.4.3-100).

FIG. 341 illustrates another example of an optical assembly with the Rx lens (11.4.3 11.4.3-102), rim (104), and housing (11.4.3-106) removed to illustrate an array of magnets (11.4.3-110) arranged in the periphery for the lens (11.4.3-108) and the Rx lens (11.4.3-102). The magnets (11.4.3-110) may be embedded in the rim or otherwise secured to the optical assembly (11.4.3-100) as shown to provide magnetic fixation of the Rx lens (11.4.3-102), which may also include a complementary array of magnets for removably attaching the Rx lens (11.4.3-102) to the optical assembly (11.4.3-100) over the fixed lens (11.4.3-108).

The magnet array (11.4.3-110) can be used for macro alignment of the Rx lens (11.4.3-102) with respect to the assembly (11.4.3-100) to ensure that the Rx lens (11.4.3-102) rotates accurately with respect to the rest of the assembly (11.4.3-100) including the fixed lens (11.4.3-108) and the rim (11.4.3-104) and the housing (11.4.3-106).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof depicted in FIGS. 339-341 ) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions depicted in any of the other drawings illustrated and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof depicted in and described with reference to any of the other drawings illustrated and described herein) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the examples of devices, features, components, and portions depicted in FIGS. 339-341 .

Figure 342 illustrates an example of an optical assembly (11.4.3-200) configured to accommodate a removably attachable Rx lens. Figure 342 depicts the assembly (11.4.3-200) in an assembled state, as well as an exploded view thereof. Two magnet arrays (11.4.3-210, 11.4.3-212) are also depicted. The assembly (11.4.3-200) may include a housing (11.4.3-206), a rim (11.4.3-204), a first magnet array (11.4.3-210), and a second magnet array (11.4.3-212). In at least one example, an Rx lens (not shown) may be coupled to the rim (11.4.3-204) such that the Rx lens and rim (11.4.3-204) are removably secured to the housing (11.4.3-206). A second magnet array (11.4.3-212) may be embedded in or otherwise secured to the rim (11.4.3-204) such that the second magnet array (11.4.3-212) magnetically couples to the first magnet array (11.4.3-210) to removably secure the Rx lens and rim (11.4.3-204) to the housing (11.4.3-206).

In at least one example, any of the magnet arrays (11.4.3-210, 11.4.3-212), those secured to the rim (11.4.3-204), or those secured to the Rx lens can be mapped when the lenses are installed by the user to ensure proper lens alignment with the system/assembly (11.4.3-200) to ensure that a corrective lens (Rx lens) is installed. The Rx lens itself can be mapped during user installation (e.g., automatically mapped by imaging components such as a rear-facing camera including an eye tracking camera, etc.) to ensure that the corrective lens is secured by the user.

FIG. 343 illustrates left and right magnet arrays (11.4.3-310a, 11.4.3-310b) that may be used to attach left and right Rx lenses, respectively. In at least one example, the left and right arrays (11.4.3-310a-b) may include individual magnets having alternating polarities, wherein the polarities of the left magnet array (11.4.3-310a) are opposite to the corresponding magnets of the right magnet array (11.4.3-310b). The polarities of the individual magnets of the left and right arrays (11.4.3-310a, 11.4.3-310b) may be flipped about a line of symmetry (11.4.3-314) between the user's eyes and/or between the left and right arrays (11.4.3-310a, 11.4.3-310b).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIGS. 342 and 343) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in any of the other drawings shown and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in any of the other drawings shown and described herein) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 342 and 343.

Figures 344 and 345 illustrate perspective and side/cross-sectional views of an example Rx lens 11.4.3-402 configured to be removably attached to an optical assembly/module of an HMD device. Depending on the prescription of the Rx lens (11.4.3-402), one or more proximal peripheral edges of the lens (11.4.3-402) may be positioned around a housing or rim of the optical assembly. In at least one example, the proximal peripheral edge (11.4.3-416) of the lens (11.4.3-402) may include a rounded and/or chamfered geometry to reduce sharp or steep edge features.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 344 and 345 ) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in any of the other drawings shown and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated and described with reference to any of the other drawings shown and described herein) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 344 and 345.

FIG. 346 illustrates an example of an Rx lens assembly comprising an Rx lens (11.4.3-502) secured to a rim (11.4.3-504) and a magnet array (11.4.3-512) embedded in the rim (11.4.3-504). In at least one example, the magnets of the magnet array (11.4.3-512) may be molded into the rim (11.4.3-504). In at least one example, the assembly includes a notch feature (11.4.3-520), wherein a protruding feature (11.4.3-524) of the lens (11.4.3-502) extends into a recess (11.4.3-522) of the rim (11.4.3-504) to form a mechanical fit between the lens (11.4.3-502) and the rim (11.4.3-504). In at least one example, the notch feature (11.4.3-520) includes a protruding portion of the rim (11.4.3-504) that extends into a cavity of the lens (11.4.3-502). In at least one example, the rim (11.4.3-504) is removably affixable to the housing of the optical module via magnets of the magnet array (11.4.3-512), and the lens (11.4.3-502) is removably affixable to the rim (11.4.3-504) via a notch feature (502). Additionally, in at least one example, the optical assemblies described herein may include a plurality of notch assemblies, similar to the notch assembly (11.4.3-520) illustrated in FIG. 8, between the lens (11.4.3-502) and the rim (11.4.3-504), which include one or more notch features that secure the rim (11.4.3-504) to the housing or other component of the optical assembly and/or a notch assembly that secures the optical assembly to another component of the HMD. In at least one example, the magnets of the magnet array (11.4.3-512) can be sized to achieve the desired attractive forces, wherein the magnets of the magnet array (11.4.3-512) include corners with unnecessary portions removed or chamfered to accommodate lens edges adjacent to the magnets.

In at least one example, the assembly can include one or more opaque films or inks applied to the proximal peripheral edges (11.4.3-526, 11.4.3-528) of the lens (11.4.3-502) and the rim (11.4.3-504), respectively, to minimize edge glare and other distracting optical features at the peripheral edges of the assembly. In at least one example, as illustrated in FIG. 346, the proximal peripheral edge (11.4.3-526) of the lens (11.4.3-502) can extend beyond the proximal peripheral edge (11.4.3-528) of the rim (11.4.3-504).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations depicted in FIG. 346 ) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions depicted in any of the other drawings illustrated and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations depicted in any of the other drawings illustrated and described herein) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the examples of devices, features, components, and portions depicted in FIG. 346 .

FIG. 347 illustrates another example of a removable Rx lens assembly comprising an Rx lens (11.4.3-602) secured to a rim (11.4.3-604) in a notch feature (11.4.3-620). The assembly may also include one or more magnets of a magnet array (11.4.3-612) embedded within the rim (11.4.3-604), for example molded therewith. In the illustrated example of FIG. 347, a proximal peripheral edge (11.4.3-628) of the rim (11.4.3-604) extends beyond a proximal peripheral edge (11.4.3-626) of the lens (11.4.3-602).

FIG. 348 illustrates another example of a removable Rx lens assembly comprising an Rx lens (11.4.3-702) secured to a rim (11.4.3-704) in a notch feature (11.4.3-720). The assembly may also include one or more magnets of a magnet array (11.4.3-712) embedded within, for example molded therewith, the rim (11.4.3-704). In the illustrated example of FIG. 348, a proximal peripheral edge (11.4.3-728) of the rim (11.4.3-704) extends beyond a proximal peripheral edge (11.4.3-726) of the lens (11.4.3-702). In the illustrated example of FIG. 348, a film or ink (11.4.3-718) may be applied to the edge (11.4.3-728) of the rim (11.4.3-702) to reduce glare and edge/lens effects around the periphery of the assembly.

FIG. 349 illustrates another example of a removable Rx lens assembly comprising an Rx lens (11.4.3-802) secured to a rim (11.4.3-804) at a notch feature (11.4.3-820). The assembly may also include one or more magnets of a magnet array (11.4.3-812) embedded within, for example molded therewith, the rim (11.4.3-804). In the illustrated example of FIG. 349, a proximal peripheral edge (11.4.3-828) of the rim (11.4.3-804) may be substantially coplanar with a proximal peripheral edge (11.4.3-826) of the lens (802).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof depicted in FIGS. 346-349) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions depicted in any of the other drawings illustrated and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof depicted in any of the other drawings illustrated and described herein) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the examples of devices, features, components, and portions depicted in FIGS. 346-349.

In at least one example of the present disclosure, the lenses of the HMD devices disclosed herein, including the Rx lenses disclosed herein, may include lenses stacked together as multiple layers or layers. In at least one example, the HMD lens stack may include three or more lenses or layers of lenses stacked together to form a single lens. In at least one example, the lens stack may include four or more lenses. In at least one example, a four-lens stack may include a first lens, a second lens coupled to the first lens, a third lens coupled to the second lens and positioned between the second lens and the first lens, and a fourth lens coupled to the third lens and positioned between the second lens and the second lens. In such an example, the fourth lens may be an Rx lens customized to a user's prescription. In one example, the lens stack may include the first, second, and third lenses, wherein the second lens is positioned between the third lens and the first lens. In such examples, the third lens may comprise an Rx lens customized to the user's prescription. In such examples, for example, if the third lens of a 3-stack lens is an Rx lens or the fourth lens of a 4-stack lens is an Rx lens, the other lenses may be standard lenses of the HMD across different SKUs or HMD devices. The Rx lenses of the stacks may be permanently affixed to the other lenses or lens layers of the stack, or the Rx lenses may be removably coupled thereto to allow for replacement.

In at least one example, any of the lenses, including the Rx lenses, of the HMD devices described herein may include identification features recognizable by the HMD device via the various cameras, sensors, and controllers of the optical systems of the HMD to recognize and verify that the corrective lenses are attached for a given user. In one example, the lenses described herein may include radio frequency identification features detectable by the HMD. In one example, the lenses may include IR visible barcodes detectable by the IR sensors/cameras of the HMD. In one example, the lenses may include QR codes or other codes or visual identification features that the HMD may detect and compare to server-based data or other data to verify the corrective lenses for a given user and/or for lens calibration purposes. In at least one example, a sensor system of the optical module of the HMD, including cameras, sensors, and controllers/processors, can be used to detect distortion of light through the Rx lens and match the distortion to a given prescription and/or user associated with the prescription to verify that corrective lenses are being used for a given user.

In at least one example of the present disclosure, any of the lenses described herein, including the Rx lenses described herein, can be configured to accommodate a prescription based on a visual/focal distance provided to the user by the display/lens system of the HMD, which can be determined based on the user's traditional prescription based on standard prescription distances of infinity and 60 cm. In one example, if the user provides a standard prescription, for example, a prescription associated with a visual distance of infinity and 60 cm or other distances common in standard prescriptions, the Rx lenses of the HMD can be manufactured based on that prescription to be a prescription for a visual distance of 1 meter. 1 meter is used as a non-limiting example of a focal distance of the optical display system of the HMD. If the effective focal distance displayed by the HMD is a distance other than 1 meter, other distances can be used to match the effective focal distance provided by the HMD.

XII: Curtain

FIG. 350 illustrates a drawing of an HMD (12.0-100) including a curtain assembly (12.0-102). The curtain assembly (12.0-102) is described in more detail herein in Section XII.

12.1: Electronic devices having flexible fabric covers

Electronic devices, such as head-mounted electronic devices, may include displays for presenting images to users. To accommodate variations in interpupillary distances associated with different users, the head-mounted devices may have left-eye and right-eye optical modules that move relative to each other. Each optical module may include a display device for generating an image and associated optical components, such as a lens, for presenting the image to an associated eye box where the user's eyes are positioned for viewing the image. The optical modules, which may sometimes be referred to as an optical system, a display system, a lens system, a lens and display assembly, etc., may each have a support structure, such as a lens barrel, that supports the respective display and lens.

Actuators may be used to position the lens barrel within the housing of the head-mounted device. To conceal the actuators and other electrical components, such as integrated circuits, batteries, sensors, etc., and to hide potentially unsightly internal housing structures from view, a decorative covering may be provided on the rear of the head-mounted device facing the user. Openings in the decorative covering may accommodate the lens barrels of the optical modules. The decorative covering may be configured to accommodate movement of the positions of the optical modules for different interpupillary distances.

The covering may be a stretchable fabric cover having first strands forming a warp knit layer having diamond-shaped openings, and second strands zigzag back and forth within the diamond-shaped openings. The first strands may be elastic and provide stretch in the warp direction, while the second strands may be covered strands providing stretch in the weft direction. The covered strands may have a drawn textured yarn covering that forms a fuzzy and opaque layer to conceal electrical components.

If desired, the cover may be a jacquard fabric having different regions of extensibility, opacity, and/or other properties. For example, the cover may have a bridge region interposed between the eye regions. The bridge region may have greater opacity and less extensibility than the eye regions. Arrays in which the cover is formed of a three-dimensional fabric having cylindrical sections that move relative to each other in response to movement of the optical module may also be used.

An electronic device, such as a head-mounted device, may have a front surface facing away from the user's head and a corresponding rear surface facing toward the user's head. Optical modules on the rear surface may be used to provide images to the user's eye. The positions of the optical modules may be adjusted to accommodate different user interpupillary distances. Internal device structures may be concealed from view by the user by covering the rear surface of the device with a curtain. The curtain, which may sometimes be referred to as a cover, covering structure, rear housing cover, rear housing wall, rear housing structure, or decorative covering, may help block potentially unsightly internal structures from view while accommodating the movement of the optical modules.

A plan view of an exemplary head-mounted device having a curtain is illustrated in FIG. 351. As illustrated in FIG. 351, head-mounted devices, such as electronic devices (12.1-10), may have head-mounted support structures, such as a housing (12.1-12). The housing (12.1-12) may include portions (e.g., support structures (12.1-12T)) that allow the device (12.1-10) to be worn on a user's head. The support structures (12.1-12T) may be formed of fabric, polymers, metals, and/or other materials. The support structures (12.1-12T) may form straps or other head-mounted support structures that assist in supporting the device (12.1-10) on the user's head. A main support structure (e.g., a main housing portion (12.1-12M)) of a housing (12.1-12) may support electronic components, such as displays (12.1-14). The main housing portion (12.1-12M) may include housing structures formed from metal, polymer, glass, ceramic, and/or other materials. For example, the housing portion (12.1-12M) may have housing walls on the top, bottom, left, and right sides adjacent to a housing wall on the front side (F) formed from a rigid polymer or other rigid support structure, and these rigid walls may optionally be covered with electrical components, fabric, leather, or other flexible material. The walls of the housing portion (12.1-12M) may enclose internal components (12.1-38) of the internal region (12.1-34) of the device (12.1-10) and may separate the internal region (12.1-34) from the environment (external region (12.1-36)) surrounding the device (12.1-10). The internal components (12.1-38) may include integrated circuits, actuators, batteries, sensors, and/or other circuits and structures for the device (12.1-10). The housing (12.1-12) may be configured to be worn on a user's head and may form eyeglasses, a hat, a helmet, goggles, and/or other head-mounted devices. A configuration in which the housing (12.1-12) forms goggles may sometimes be described herein as an example.

A front side (F) of the housing (12.1-12) may face outward from the user's head and face. An opposite rear side (R) of the housing (12.1-12) may face the user. Portions of the housing (12.1-12) on the rear side (R) (e.g., portions of the main housing (12.1-12M)) may form a cover, such as a curtain (12.1-12C). In an exemplary configuration, the curtain (12.1-12C) includes a fabric layer that separates the interior region (12.1-34) from the exterior region to the rear of the device (12.1-10). Other structures may be used to form the curtain (12.1-12C), if desired. The presence of a curtain (12.1-12C) on the rear surface (R) may help conceal the internal housing structures, internal components (12.1-38) and other structures of the internal area (12.1-34) from the user's view.

The device (12.1-10) may have left and right optical modules (12.1-40) (sometimes referred to as optical assemblies). Each optical module may include a respective display (12.1-14), a lens (12.1-30), and a support structure (12.1-32). The support structures (12.1-32), which may sometimes be referred to as lens barrels or optical module support structures, may include hollow cylindrical structures having open ends or other support structures for housing the displays (12.1-14) and lenses (12.1-30). The support structures (12.1-32) may include, for example, a left lens barrel supporting a left display (12.1-14) and a left lens (12.1-30), and a right lens barrel supporting a right display (12.1-14) and a right lens (12.1-30). The displays (12.1-14) may include arrays of pixels or other display devices for generating images. The displays (12.1-14) may include, for example, organic light emitting diode pixels formed on substrates having thin film circuitry and/or formed on semiconductor substrates, pixels formed of crystalline semiconductor dies, liquid crystal display pixels, scanning display devices, and/or other display devices for generating images. The lenses (12.1-30) may include one or more lens elements for providing image light from the displays (12.1-14) to the respective eye boxes (12.1-13). The lenses may be implemented using refractive glass lens elements, mirror lens structures (catadioptric lenses), holographic lenses, and/or other lens systems. When the user's eye is positioned on the eye boxes (12.1-13), the displays (display panels) (12.1-14) work together to form a display for the device (12.1-10) (e.g., images provided by the respective left and right optical modules (12.1-40) may be viewed by the user's eye at the eye boxes (12.1-13) so that a stereo image may be generated for the user). While the user views the display, the left image from the left optical module is fused with the right image from the right optical module.

Not all users have the same interpupillary distance (P). To provide the device (12.1-10) with the ability to adjust the interpupillary spacing between the modules (12.1-40) along the lateral dimension (X) and thereby adjust the spacing (P) between the eye boxes (12.1-13) to accommodate different user interpupillary distances, the device (12.1-10) may be provided with actuators (12.1-42). The actuators (12.1-42) may be manually controlled to move the support structures (12.1-32) relative to one another and/or may be computer-controlled actuators (e.g., computer-controlled motors).

As illustrated in FIG. 352, the curtain (12.1-12C) may cover the rear face (R) while leaving the lenses (12.1-30) of the optical modules (12.1-40) uncovered (e.g., the curtain (12.1-12C) may have openings aligned with and accommodating the modules (12.1-40). As the modules (12.1-40) are translated relative to one another along the dimension (X) to accommodate different pupillary distances for different users, the modules (12.1-40) move relative to fixed housing structures, such as the walls of the main portion (12.1-12M), and relative to one another. To prevent undesirable wrinkling and buckling of the curtain (12.1-12C) as the optical modules (12.1-40) move relative to the rigid portions of the housing (12.1-12M) and relative to each other, a fabric layer or other covering layer in the curtain (12.1-12C) may be configured to slide, stretch, open, and/or otherwise adjust to accommodate the optical module movement.

A schematic diagram of an exemplary electronic device, such as a head-mounted device or other wearable device, is illustrated in FIG. 353. The device (12.1-10) of FIG. 353 may operate as a standalone device and/or the resources of the device (12.1-10) may be used to communicate with external electronic equipment. For example, communication circuitry in the device (12.1-10) may be used to transmit user input information, sensor information, and/or other information (e.g., wirelessly or via a wired connection) to external electronic devices. Each of these external devices may include components of the type illustrated by the device (12.1-10) of FIG. 353.

As illustrated in FIG. 353, a head-mounted device, such as device (12.1-10), may include control circuitry (12.1-20). Control circuitry (12.1-20) may include storage and processing circuitry to support operation of device (12.1-10). Storage and processing circuitry may include storage, such as non-volatile memory (e.g., flash memory or other electrically programmable read-only memory configured to form a solid-state drive), volatile memory (e.g., static or dynamic random access memory), etc. Processing circuitry within control circuitry (12.1-20) may be used to collect input from sensors and other input devices, and may be used to control output devices. Processing circuitry may be based on one or more microprocessors, microcontrollers, digital signal processors, baseband processors, and other wireless communication circuits, power management units, audio chips, application-specific integrated circuits, etc. During operation, the control circuitry (12.1-20) may use display(s) (12.1-14) and other output devices to provide visual and other outputs to the user.

To support communication between the device (12.1-10) and external equipment, the control circuitry (12.1-20) may communicate using communication circuitry (12.1-22). The circuitry (12.1-22) may include an antenna, radio frequency transceiver circuitry, other wireless communication circuitry, and/or wired communication circuitry. The circuitry (12.1-22), which may sometimes be referred to as control circuitry and/or control and communication circuitry, may support bidirectional wireless communication between the device (12.1-10) and external equipment (e.g., a companion device, such as a computer, a cellular telephone, or other electronic device, an accessory, such as a pointing device, a computer stylus, or other input device, a speaker, or other output devices, etc.) over a wireless link. For example, the circuitry (12.1-22) may include radio frequency transceiver circuitry, such as wireless local area network transceiver circuitry configured to support communication over a wireless local area network link, near field communication transceiver circuitry configured to support communication over a short range communication link, cellular telephone transceiver circuitry configured to support communication over a cellular telephone link, or transceiver circuitry configured to support communication over any other suitable wired or wireless communication link. The wireless communication may be supported, for example, via a Bluetooth® link, a WiFi® link, a wireless link operating at a frequency between 10 GHz and 400 GHz, a 60 GHz link or other millimeter wave link, a cellular telephone link, or other wireless communication link. If desired, the device (12.1-10) may include power circuitry for transmitting and/or receiving wired and/or wireless power and may include a battery or other energy storage device. For example, the device (12.1-10) may include a coil and a rectifier for receiving wireless power provided to the circuit portion of the device (12.1-10).

The device (12.1-10) may include an input/output device, such as the device (12.1-24). The input/output device (12.1-24) may be used to collect user input, collect information about the user's surroundings, and/or provide output to the user. The device (12.1-24) may include one or more displays, such as the display(s) (12.1-14). The display(s) (12.1-14) may include one or more display devices, such as an organic light emitting diode display panel (a panel having organic light emitting diode pixels formed on a polymer substrate or silicon substrate including pixel control circuitry), a liquid crystal display panel, a microelectromechanical system display (e.g., a two-dimensional mirror array or scanning mirror display device), a display panel having an array of pixels formed of crystalline semiconductor light emitting diode dies (sometimes referred to as microLEDs), and/or other display devices.

The sensors (12.1-16) of the input/output devices (12.1-24) may include force sensors (e.g., strain gauges, capacitive force sensors, resistive sensors, etc.), audio sensors such as microphones, touch and/or proximity sensors, capacitive sensors such as touch sensors forming buttons, trackpads, or other input devices, and other sensors. If desired, sensors (12.1-16) may include optical sensors, e.g., optical sensors that emit and detect light, ultrasonic sensors, optical touch sensors, optical proximity sensors, and/or other touch sensors and/or proximity sensors, monochrome and color ambient light sensors, image sensors, fingerprint sensors, iris scanning sensors, retina scanning sensors, and other biometric sensors, temperature sensors, sensors for measuring three-dimensional non-contact gestures ("air gestures"), pressure sensors, sensors for detecting position, orientation, and/or motion (e.g., accelerometers, magnetic sensors, e.g., compass sensors, gyroscopes, and/or inertial measurement units including some or all of these sensors), health sensors such as blood oxygen sensors, heart rate sensors, blood flow sensors, and/or other health sensors, radio frequency sensors, depth sensors (e.g., stereo imaging devices that capture three-dimensional images). The device (12.1-10) may include sensors (12.1-16) and/or other input/output devices to collect user input. For example, buttons may be used to collect button press input, touch sensors overlapping the displays may be used to collect user touch screen input, touch pads may be used to collect touch input, microphones may be used to collect audio input, accelerometers may be used to monitor when a finger is in contact with an input surface and thus may be used to collect finger press input, and so on.

If desired, the electronic device (12.1-10) may include additional components (see, e.g., other devices (12.1-18) of the input/output device (12.1-24)). Additional components may include a haptic output device, an actuator for moving the movable housing structure, an audio output device, e.g., a speaker, a light emitting diode for status indication, a light source, e.g., a light emitting diode for illuminating a portion of the housing and/or display structure, other light output devices, and/or other circuitry for collecting input and/or providing output. The device (12.1-10) may also include a battery or other energy storage device, a connector port for supporting wired communication with and receiving wired power from auxiliary equipment, and other circuitry.

Figures 354 and 355 are plan views of the device (12.1-10) illustrating how the optical modules of the device (12.1-10) are moved relative to each other along the lateral dimension (X) to accommodate different interpupillary distances (P) (the distance between the user's left and right eyes). In the example of Figure 354, the left optical module (12.1-40L) and the right optical module (12.1-40R) are moved toward each other to accommodate a small interpupillary distance. In the example of Figure 355, the left optical module (12.1-40L) and the right optical module (12.1-40R) are moved away from each other to accommodate a large interpupillary distance.

The curtain (12.1-12C) has edge portions such as a left portion (12.1-12C-L) between the left housing wall (12.1-12M-L) and the left optical module (12.1-40L) and a right portion (12.1-12C-R) between the right housing wall (12.1-12M-R) and the right optical module (12.1-40R). A middle portion (12.1-12C-M) of the curtain (12.1-12C) extends between the left optical module (12.1-40L) and the right optical module (12.1-40R). In the configuration of FIG. 354, the optical modules (12.1-40L, 12.1-40R) are relatively close to each other, so the middle portion (12.1-12C-M) is relatively small, and the portions (12.1-12C-L, 12.1-12C-R) are relatively large. In the configuration of FIG. 355, the optical modules (12.1-40L, 12.1-40R) are relatively far from each other, so the left portion (12.1-12C-L) and the right portion (12.1-12C-R) are shorter along the lateral dimension (X), and the middle portion (12.1-12C-M) is enlarged compared to the configuration of FIG. 354.

To help accommodate differences in size for the curtain (12.1-12C) (e.g., length variations for portions of the curtain (12.1-12C) along the lateral dimension (X), the curtain (12.1-12C) may include a cover layer, such as a cover layer (12.1-12CC), formed of a stretchable material, such as fabric. The cover layer (12.1-12CC) may be supported by a rigid frame. The fabric of the cover layer (12.1-12CC) may have a main elastic band that helps the fabric slide relative to the frame while remaining firmly held on the frame, thereby also helping the curtain (12.1-12C) to dynamically adjust without exhibiting undesirable buckling and wrinkling. The cover layer (12.1-12CC) may have left and right openings to accommodate left and right optical modules (12.1-40L, 12.1-40R) respectively.

The cover layer (12.1-12CC) may have a desired opacity (e.g., sufficiently opaque to conceal electronic components in the device (12.1-10), extensibility (e.g., the cover (12.1-12CC) may be configured to elongate by at least 50%, at least 75%, at least 100%, or at least 150% of its length to allow dynamic expansion and contraction of the cover (12.1-12CC) as the optical modules (12.1-40L, 12.1-40R) are adjusted), elastic modulus (e.g., the elastic modulus of the cover (12.1-12CC) may be sufficiently low so that less electrical power is required for the actuators (12.1-42) to stretch the cover (12.1-12CC), and durability (e.g., the cover (12.1-12CC) may be exposed to skin oils and/or other chemicals). (e.g., can be formed into a fabric having decorative appeal, and/or other suitable properties) that can be configured to maintain dimensional stability over long-term use by avoiding wrinkling after repeated stretching, etc.

Figure 356 is a front view of an exemplary cover layer for curtains (12.1-12C). As illustrated in Figure 356, the cover layer (12.1-12CC) may comprise a fabric formed of a fabric, such as fabric (12.1-62). The fabric (12.1-62) may be a warp knit fabric, a weft knit fabric, or another knit fabric (e.g., to promote extensibility), a woven fabric, a knitted fabric, a non-woven fabric, etc. If desired, a layer of extensible plastic may be attached to the fabric (12.1-62), and/or an elastic polymer layer may be used in the formation layer (12.1-12CC) in place of part or all of the fabric (12.1-62). The fabric (12.1-62) may be formed of interlaced (entangled) strands of materials such as polymeric strands, strands of cotton or other natural materials, synthetic materials, and/or other materials. The strands in the fabric (12.1-62) may include monofilament strands and/or multifilament strands. In an exemplary configuration, some of the strands in the fabric (12.1-62) may be selected to provide strength to the fabric (12.1-62), and some of the strands in the fabric (12.1-62) may be formed of an elastomeric material that enhances the elongation capabilities of the fabric (12.1-62) (and has a lower modulus of elasticity than the strands that provide strength to the fabric (12.1-62). Examples of stretchable strand materials include elastomeric materials such as silicone, spandex, and thermoplastic polyurethane (TPU). Examples of strength enhancing strand materials include polyester, nylon, etc. If desired, other materials may be used to form the strands in the fabric (12.1-62).

The strands in the fabric (12.1-62) may be dyed at the fabric level (e.g., after the strands have been knitted, woven, or otherwise interlaced to form the fabric (12.1-62)), at the strand or yarn level (e.g., after the material is made from monofilament or multifilament strands), and/or at the polymerization level (e.g., before the material is made from monofilament or multifilament strands). Yarn dyeing may cause some shrinkage, which should be taken into account when determining the appropriate amount of elongation for the fabric (12.1-62).

In the example of FIG. 356, the fabric (12.1-62) includes warp knit strands (12.1-44) and zigzag strands (12.1-46). The warp knit strands (12.1-44) may be warp knit strands forming a pattern of openings, such as diamond-shaped openings (12.1-64). If desired, the openings (12.1-64) may have other shapes. The use of diamond shapes for the openings (12.1-64) is merely exemplary. The warp strands (12.1-44) may be formed of an elastic material such as silicone, spandex, thermoplastic polyurethane (TPU), and/or other elastic material, or the warp strands (12.1-44) may be formed of a strength-enhancing strand material such as polyester, nylon, or the like. If desired, other materials may be used to form the strands (12.1-44).

The zigzag strands (12.1-46) may be interlaced with the warp strands (12.1-44) and zigzag multiple times (e.g., in the weft or x-direction) within each of the diamond-shaped openings (12.1-64). The zigzag strands (12.1-46) (sometimes referred to as running strands, accordion strands, etc.) may be formed of an elastic material such as silicone, spandex, thermoplastic polyurethane (TPU), and/or other elastic material, or the zigzag strands (12.1-46) may be formed of a strength-enhancing strand material such as polyester, nylon, or the like. If desired, other materials may be used to form the strands (12.1-46). The strands (12.1-46) may be covered strands, if desired, including a covering. The covering may be of a different material from the core. For example, the core may be a stretchy material such as spandex, and the covering may be of a less stretchy material such as polyester or polyethylene terephthalate. If desired, the covering may be relatively "fuzzy" (e.g., frayed or otherwise textured) to increase the opacity of the cover (12.1-12CC).

In some arrangements, the warp strands (12.1-44) and the zigzag strands (12.1-46) are formed within the same layer (e.g., formed within a single layer). In other arrangements, the warp strands (12.1-44) may be formed ahead of or behind the zigzag strands (12.1-46) (e.g., the warp strands (12.1-44) may be formed within a first layer and the zigzag strands (12.1-46) may be formed within a second layer overlapping the first layer). In one exemplary arrangement, the zigzag strands (12.1-46) are positioned on the side closer to the user's face, and the warp strands (12.1-44) are positioned on the side closer to the electrical components within the device (12.1-10). In configurations where the zigzag strands (12.1-46) include a covering (e.g., a covering of polyester, polyethylene terephthalate, and/or other suitable material), positioning the zigzag strands (12.1-46) on the user-facing side of the cover (12.1-12CC) may help protect the elastic strands (e.g., the core of the strands (12.1-44) and/or the strands (12.1-46)) in the fabric (12.1-62) from facial chemicals, such as oils, that may otherwise cause abrasion to the elastic strands in the fabric (12.1-62). If desired, the warp knit strands (12.1-44) may be smooth strands and the zigzag strands (12.1-46) may be textured fuzzy strands.

The use of warp knit strands (12.1-44) and zigzag strands (12.1-46) can provide covers (12.1-12CC) with different characteristics. For example, the warp knit strands (12.1-44) can extend in the warp direction, thereby promoting shrinkage in the warp direction and increasing elongation. In contrast, the zigzag strands (12.1-46) can zigzag in the weft direction, thereby promoting shrinkage in the weft direction and increasing elongation. For example, when the fabric (12.1-62) is in an unstretched state, each diamond-shaped opening (12.1-64) has a dimension (D1) in a vertical (warp) direction (e.g., parallel to the y-axis of FIG. 356) and a dimension (D2) in a horizontal (weft) direction (e.g., parallel to the x-axis of FIG. 356). When the fabric (12.1-62) is in an stretched state, as illustrated in FIG. 357, each diamond-shaped opening (12.1-64) has a dimension (D3) in a vertical (warp) direction (e.g., parallel to the y-axis of FIG. 357) and a dimension (D4) in a horizontal (weft) direction (e.g., parallel to the x-axis of FIG. 357). Dimension D3 may be greater than dimension D1, and dimension D4 may be greater than dimension D2. In other words, the openings (12.1-64) can be opened and expanded when the cover (12.1-12CC) is stretched. The warp knit strands (12.1-44) are stretched in the warp direction, thereby allowing the opening and closing of the openings (12.1-64), while the zigzag strands (12.1-44) are stretched in the weft direction, thereby providing four-way stretch capabilities to the fabric (12.1-62). The opacity provided by the fuzzy covering over the zigzag strands (12.1-46) can also serve to conceal electrical components when the openings (12.1-64) are expanded.

Another factor that can affect the stretchability of the fabric (12.1-62) of the cover (12.1-12CC) is heat setting. In arrangements where the fabric (12.1-62) is heat set, the fabric (12.1-62) can be stretched and heat set to remove wrinkles. However, this may reduce some of the stretchability of the fabric (12.1-62). If desired, the fabric (12.1-62) of the cover (12.1-12CC) can be produced without any heat setting (e.g., only washed, dyed, and dried) to maintain the desired stretchability of the fabric (12.1-62).

FIG. 358 is a side view of exemplary strands (12.1-44) that may be used to form the warp knit strands (12.1-44) of the fabric (12.1-62). In the example of FIG. 358, the strands (12.1-44) may be single strands of a material such as spandex, silicone, thermoplastic polyurethane (TPU), and/or other stretchable material, or the strands (12.1-44) may be single strands of a strength enhancing strand material such as polyester, nylon, or the like. In one exemplary configuration, the strands (12.1-44) are single strands of spandex having a denier of 20 denier, 40 denier, 30 denier, 15 to 60 denier, 20 to 50 denier, greater than 40 denier, less than 40 denier, or the like. This is merely exemplary. If required, the strands (12.1-44) may be formed from other suitable materials and/or may have other denier values.

Figure 359 is a side view of an exemplary strand (12.1-46) that may be used to form zigzag strands (12.1-46) of a fabric (12.1-62). In the example of Figure 359, the strand (12.1-46) may include a core, such as a core (12.1-48). The core (12.1-48) may be an elastic core formed from one or more strands of a material such as spandex, silicone, thermoplastic polyurethane (TPU), and/or other stretchable material, or the core (12.1-48) may be one or more strands of a strength-enhancing strand material such as polyester, nylon, or the like. In one exemplary configuration, the core (12.1-48) is an elastic core formed from a single strand of spandex having a denier of 20, 40, 30, 15 to 60, 20 to 50, greater than 40, less than 40, etc. The denier value of the core (12.1-48) of the zigzag strands (12.1-46) may be less than the denier value of the warp knit strands (12.1-44), for example. This is merely exemplary. If desired, the strands (12.1-46) may be formed of other suitable materials and/or may have other denier values.

As illustrated in FIG. 359, the core (12.1-48) of the strands (12.1-46) may be covered with one or more covering strands (12.1-50). The covering strands (12.1-50) may be formed of a strength enhancing strand material such as polyester, nylon, or the like, or the covering strands (12.1-50) may be formed of an elastic material such as spandex, silicone, thermoplastic polyurethane (TPU), and/or other stretchable material. The covering (12.1-50) may have any suitable denier value, such as 30 denier, 20 denier, 40 denier, 15 to 60 denier, 20 to 50 denier, greater than 40 denier, less than 40 denier, or the like. The denier value of the cover (12.1-50) of the zigzag strand (12.1-46) can be, for example, greater than the denier value of the core (12.1-48) of the strands (12.1-46). The covering strand (12.1-50) can be a single filament covering or can include a plurality of filaments, such as 24 filaments, 30 filaments, 20 filaments, more than 20 filaments, less than 20 filaments, etc. The covering strand (12.1-50) can be textured, non-textured, bright, semi-dull, etc. In one exemplary configuration, the covering strand (12.1-50) is a drawn textured yarn of polyester that is simultaneously twisted and drawn to provide a textured, fuzzy covering over the core (12.1-48). Because polyester is less sensitive to facial chemicals, such as oils, than spandex, the covering core (12.1-48) having a fuzzy yarn, such as the strand (12.1-50), ensures that the majority of the surface facing the user is polyester, and thus more durable during continuous use. The use of drawn textured yarn in the covering (12.1-50) may also increase the opacity of the cover (12.1-12CC), thereby helping to conceal electronic components even when the cover (12.1-12CC) and curtain (12.1-12C) are stretched and the openings (12.1-64) are expanded.

If desired, the covering strands (12.1-50) may be formed of a conductive material. Using conductive strands in the covering (12.1-50) can provide a conductive layer on the fabric (12.1-62) where the conductive covering strands (12.1-50) contact each other across the surface of the fabric. In other configurations, the strands (12.1-46) may be polycarbonate or a braided cord having an electrically conductive core. Arrangements in which the strands (12.1-46) comprise multicomponent yarns having different polymers that run together within each filament may also be used. When exposed to heat, the different polymers may shrink to different degrees, thereby creating a smooth spiral crimp. This can provide texture to the strands (12.1-46) while still allowing the strands (12.1-46) to maintain durable stretch and recovery properties.

If desired, the covers (12.1-12CC) may have regions having different levels of stretchability, opacity, and/or other properties. This type of arrangement is exemplified in FIG. 360. As shown in FIG. 360, the covers (12.1-12CC) may have regions having different fabric properties, such as eye regions (12.1-54) and nose regions (12.1-56). The eye regions (12.1-54) may enclose left and right openings, such as lens barrel openings (12.1-52) for accommodating respective left and right lenses (12.1-30) of respective left and right optical modules (12.1-40). The nose region (12.1-56) may be interposed between the eye regions (12.1-54) and may be configured to overlap the bridge of the user's nose when the device (12.1-10) is mounted on the user's head.

If desired, the fabric (12.1-62) of the covers (12.1-12CC) may be a jacquard knit fabric that allows different regions of the fabric to have different characteristics, such as different fabric constructions, different strand material(s), different stretch capabilities, different opacity levels, etc. For example, the nose region (12.1-56) may be configured to have higher opacity and/or lower stretch capabilities than the eye regions (12.1-54). For example, to reduce the stretchability in the nose region (12.1-56) relative to the eye regions (12.1-54), the zigzag strands (12.1-46) may be omitted from the fabric (12.1-62) in the regions (12.1-56) and may be present only in the eye regions (12.1-54). Additionally or alternatively, the strands in the nose region (12.1-56) may be formed mostly or entirely of a less stretchy material, such as polyester, instead of spandex. If desired, there may be more textured yarns in the nose region (12.1-56) than in the eye region (12.1-54) to increase the opacity of the nose region (12.1-56) compared to the eye region (12.1-54).

Figure 361 is a perspective view of an example in which a cover (12.1-12CC) is formed of a three-dimensional fabric (12.1-62). The three-dimensional fabric (12.1-62) of Figure 361 may have a fabric structure similar to a pair of pants, wherein the fabric (12.1-62) forms left and right cylindrical portions around the openings (12.1-52). Instead of being mostly flat in the z-direction, the fabric (12.1-62) may have a non-zero dimension P1 in the z-direction and a dimension P2 in the x-direction, and the openings (12.1-52) have a diameter P3 and are separated by a distance P4. With this type of configuration, movement of the optical modules (12.1-40) can be accommodated by moving the "legs" of the fabric (12.1-62) around the openings (12.1-52) toward or away from each other (e.g., by moving the left and right cylindrical portions of the fabric (12.1-62) relative to each other), which involves less extensibility of the fabric (12.1-62) and instead involves moving the entire piece of the fabric (12.1-62) in a given direction. The use of the three-dimensional fabric (12.1-62) of FIG. 361 is merely exemplary. If desired, the cover (12.1-12CC) can be formed from a mostly flat fabric (12.1-62).

According to one embodiment, a fabric cover for a head-mounted device having a first lens and a second lens is provided, comprising: first strands forming a warp knit layer having diamond-shaped openings, the warp knit layer configured to extend in a warp direction; second strands interlaced with the first strands and zigzagged reciprocally within the diamond-shaped openings, the second strands configured to extend in a weft direction; and first and second openings for accommodating the first lens and the second lens, respectively.

According to another embodiment, the first strands comprise elastic strands.

In another embodiment, the second strands comprise covered strands.

In another embodiment, the covered strands each comprise an elastic core and a covering strand.

In another embodiment, the covering strand comprises a drawn textured yarn that increases opacity within the diamond-shaped openings.

In another embodiment, the drawn textured yarn comprises polyester.

In another embodiment, the elastic strands each have a first denier value and the elastic core has a second denier value less than the first denier value.

In another embodiment, at least some of the first strands and the second strands are dyed at the polymerization level.

In another embodiment, at least some of the first strands and the second strands are dyed at the fabric level.

According to another embodiment, the fabric cover also includes a nose bridge region interposed between the first opening and the second opening, wherein the nose bridge region has higher opacity and lower stretchability than other portions of the fabric cover.

According to an embodiment, a head-mounted device is provided, comprising a housing, the housing separating an interior region from an exterior region surrounding the housing, a first lens and a second lens within the housing configured to provide images to a first eye box and a second eye box, respectively, and a fabric cover configured to block the interior region from view, wherein the fabric cover comprises: a first cover opening and a second cover opening aligned with the first lens and the second lens, respectively; smooth strands extending in a first direction; and textured strands extending in a second direction.

In another embodiment, the textured strands comprise an elastic core and a fuzzy covering.

In another embodiment, the smooth strands comprise warp-knit strands.

In another embodiment, the warp knit strands have a higher denier value than the elastic core.

In another embodiment, the elastic core is less than 40 denier.

In another embodiment, the smooth strands form a pattern of apertures, and the textured strands zigzag back and forth within the apertures.

In another embodiment, the apertures comprise diamond-shaped apertures.

In another embodiment, the first direction is the warp direction and the second direction is the weft direction.

According to an embodiment, a head-mounted device is provided, comprising a housing, a left lens and a right lens supported by the housing, the left lens configured to provide a left image to a left eye box and the right lens configured to provide a right image to a right eye box, the left lens and the right lens configured to move relative to each other, and a three-dimensional fabric cover having a left cylindrical portion aligned with the left lens and a right cylindrical portion aligned with the right lens, the three-dimensional fabric cover configured to block an interior region of the housing from being viewed, the left cylindrical portion and the right cylindrical portion being configured to move relative to each other in response to movement of the right lens and the left lens to accommodate different interpupillary distances.

In another embodiment, the three-dimensional fabric cover includes a nose bridge portion joined between the first cylindrical portion and the second cylindrical portion.

The foregoing is merely exemplary, and various modifications may be made to the described embodiments. The above-described embodiments may be implemented individually or in any combination.

12.2: Curtain Assembly

FIG. 362 illustrates an exemplary drawing of an HMD (12.2-100) including a frame assembly (12.2-102) and first and second optical modules (12.2-104a, 12.2-104b) configured to be coupled to the frame assembly (12.2-102). In at least one example, the frame assembly (12.2-102) defines a rear-facing viewing aperture through which a user wearing the HMD (12.2-100) can view light projected from the display screens of the optical modules (12.2-104a, 12.2-104b). The frame assembly (12.2-102) of the HMD (12.2-100) may define first and second openings that are aligned with the first and second optical modules (12.2-104a, 12.2-104b) as illustrated in FIG. 362 and described elsewhere herein with reference to other drawings.

In at least one example, the optical modules (12.2-104a, 12.2-104b) may include optical components and assemblies, such as display screens, lenses, etc. The HMD (12.2-100) may also include a curtain assembly (12.2-106) coupled to the frame assembly (12.2-102) and extending across the viewing aperture between the frame assembly (12.2-102) and the optical modules (12.2-104a, 12.2-104b), for example, between the lenses of the frame assembly (12.2-102) and the optical modules (12.2-104a, 12.2-104b). The curtain assembly may include a number of components, sections, and layers to manage airflow through the HMD (12.2-100) due to cooling systems having fans that blow air through the interior volume of the HMD (100).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIG. 362) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 363-374 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 363-374 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 362.

FIG. 363 illustrates a rear perspective view of an HMD (12.2-200) including a frame assembly (12.2-202) defining an outer surface of the device, an interior volume (12.2-208), and a rear-facing viewing aperture (12.2-210), which may also be referred to as an opening or viewing aperture. The HMD (12.2-200) also includes a display module (12.2-204) including a lens (12.2-218), through which a user can view light projected from a display screen of an optical module (12.2-204) disposed in the interior volume (12.2-208). In at least one example, the HMD (12.2-200) also includes a curtain assembly (12.2-206) that obscures the viewing aperture (12.2-210) between the lens (12.2-218) and the frame assembly (12.2-202).

In at least one example, the HMD (12.2-200) may include one or more motors mechanically coupled to the optical module (12.2-204) to change the position of the optical module (12.2-204) including the lens (12.2-218) relative to the frame assembly (12.2-202). Such motors are illustrated in other drawings and described elsewhere herein. Such motors may be used to adjust the optical module(s) (12.2-204) of the HMD (12.2-200) to match the interpupillary distance defined by the user's eyes. In at least one example, the curtain assembly (12.2-206) may be elastically deformable or stretchable to accommodate different possible positions of the optical module (12.2-204) including the lens (12.2-218), such that the curtain assembly may obscure the viewing aperture/aperture (12.2-210) between the frame assembly (12.2-202) and the optical module(s) (12.2-204) or its lens(es) (12.2-218), regardless of the position or movement of the optical module (12.2-204) and the lens (12.2-218).

The HMD (12.2-200) illustrated in FIG. 363 includes a first optical module (12.2-204) configured to align with the user's left eye, but does not show a second optical module configured to align with the user's right eye, thereby making the interior volume (12.2-208) and the fan (12.2-212) visible. The HMD (12.2-200) may include one or more fans (12.2-212) in the interior volume. The HMD (12.2-200) may include an invisible second fan aligned with the illustrated optical module (12.2-204). The frame assembly (12.2-202) can define one or more intake ports (12.2-214) and one or more exhaust ports (12.2-216) on a side of the frame assembly (12.2-202) opposite the intake ports (12.2-214). The fan (12.2-212) can be configured to draw air into the interior volume (12.2-208) through the intake ports (12.2-214) and to expel air from the interior volume (12.2-208) through the exhaust ports (12.2-216).

The fan (12.2-212) may be configured to draw air into and out of the interior volume (12.2-208) to cool various heat-generating components within the HMD (12.2-200). Such components may include processors, display screens of the optical module(s) (12.2-204), sensors, etc. In this example, the curtain assembly (12.2-206) may be configured to prevent airflow through the HMD (12.2-200) from reaching the user's eyes when the HMD (12.2-200) is worn so as not to dry the eyes and cause discomfort.

Thus, to serve the dual purpose of preventing airflow from reaching the user's eyes and maintaining an aesthetically pleasing elastomeric barrier obscuring the viewing aperture/aperture (12.2-210), the curtain assembly (12.2-206) may include a first layer defining an outer surface of the HMD (12.2-200) and a second layer defining an interior volume (12.2-208), wherein the first layer is elastomeric and the second layer is inelastic and/or air impermeable. In one example, the second layer may be semi-elastic or slightly elastic, but may remain air impermeable when stretched or deformed.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIG. 363) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 362 and 364 through 374 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 362 and 364 through 374 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 363.

FIG. 364 illustrates a rear plan view of an example HMD (12.2-300) similar to the HMD (12.2-200) illustrated in FIG. 363, including a frame (12.2-302) defining an interior volume (12.2-308), an observation aperture (12.2-310), intake ports (12.2-314), and exhaust ports (12.2-316). The HMD (12.2-300) may also include first and second fans (12.2-312a, 12.2-312b) disposed within the interior volume (12.2-308) and drawing air through the interior volume (12.2-308) through the intake ports (12.2-314) and exhaust ports (12.2-316). FIG. 364 does not include optical modules to visualize the interior volume (12.2-308) and fans (12.2-312a, 12.2-312b) aligned with the apertures and optical module locations. The HMD (12.2-300) may also include a curtain assembly (12.2-306) similar to the curtain assembly (12.2-206) illustrated in FIG. 363, wherein the curtain assembly (12.2-306) obscures the viewing aperture (12.2-310) between the frame (12.2-302) and the optical modules.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIG. 364) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 362, 363, and 365-374 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 362, 363, and 365-374 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 364.

FIG. 365 illustrates a cross-sectional side view of an example of an HMD (12.2-400) worn by a user (12.2-401). The HMD (12.2-400) may include a frame, also referred to as a housing (12.2-402), defining an interior volume (12.2-408) and a fan assembly (12.2-412) disposed within the interior volume (12.2-408). The housing (12.2-402) can define an intake port (12.2-414) and an exhaust port (12.2-416), and the fan assembly (12.2-412) can be configured to draw air (12.2-424) into the internal volume through the intake port (12.2-414) and to force air (12.2-424) from the internal volume (12.2-408) through the exhaust port (12.2-416).

In at least one example, the HMD (12.2-400) may include an optical module (12.2-404) that directs light from the display screen toward the user's eyes and an optical seal (12.2-420) that extends around the periphery of the HMD (12.2-400) between the housing (12.2-402) and the user's face when the user (12.2-401) wears the HMD (12.2-400), as shown. In at least one example, the HMD (12.2-400) also includes a curtain assembly (12.2-406) that extends between the housing (12.2-402) and the optical module (12.2-404). The curtain assembly (12.2-406) can be configured to block air (12.2-424) from entering the space (12.2-422) between the eyes/face of the user (12.2-401), the space being defined by the user (12.2-401), the optical seal (12.2-420), the optical module (12.2-404), and the curtain assembly (12.2-406).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIG. 365) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 362, 364, and 366-374 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 362, 364, and 366-374 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 365.

FIG. 366 illustrates a perspective view of a curtain assembly (12.2-506) for use in the HMD devices described herein. The curtain assembly (12.2-506) may define first and second openings (12.2-526a, 12.2-526b). As described above, examples of curtain assemblies may include multiple layers, including a first elastic layer and a second inelastic, air-impermeable layer. For reference, FIG. 364 depicts a user facing a face of the curtain assembly (12.2-306) including a first elastic layer (12.2-334). The drawing of FIG. 366 depicts an interior face or surface of the curtain assembly (12.2-506) including a second interior air-impermeable layer (12.2-528) defining an interior volume of the HMD.

In at least one example, the second layer can extend between curtain trim rings (12.2-530a, 12.2-530b) and a structural curtain backplate (12.2-532). The rings (12.2-530a, 12.2-530b) and the backplate (12.2-532) can be made of a more rigid structural material, including plastic, metal, or the like, to provide structure and shape to the first and second layers of the curtain assembly (12.2-506) attached thereto.

In at least one example, the layers of the curtain assembly (12.2-506) including the second layer (12.2-528) illustrated in FIG. 366 may be coupled to one or more optical assemblies and/or rings (12.2-530a, 12.2-530b) at the second and third inner edges (12.2-544) of the layers, respectively, forming or defining the openings (12.2-526a, 12.2-526b) to the backplate (12.2-532) around its first peripheral edge (12.2-542).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIG. 366) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 362, 365, and 367-374 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 362, 365, and 367-374 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 366.

Figure 367 depicts a drawing of a curtain assembly (12.2-606) that may be similar to the assembled curtain assembly (12.2-506) depicted in Figure 366. The drawing of Figure 367 illustrates the curtain assembly (12.2-606) including a structural backplate (12.2-632), trim rings (12.2-630), a second air impermeable layer (12.2-628), and a first elastic layer (12.2-634). The curtain assembly (12.2-606) may also include first adhesive portions or layers (12.2-636) bonding the second layer (12.2-628) to the back plate (12.2-632) and trim rings (12.2-630) disposed therebetween, and second adhesive portions or layers (12.2-638) bonding the second layer (12.2-628) to the first layer (12.2-634) and disposed therebetween. The curtain assembly may also include additional stiffener components or assemblies (12.2-640) bonded to the first layer (12.2-634).

In at least one example, the first and second layers (12.2-628, 12.2-634) are coupled to one another and/or to the backplate (12.2-632) and/or the stiffener components (12.2-640) around a first peripheral edge of the layers (12.2-628, 12.2-634). The layers (12.2-628, 12.2-634) may also be coupled to one another at second edges defining openings in the optical modules and/or trim rings (12.2-630). In at least one example, the layers (12.2-628, 12.2-634) are positionally fixed to one another only at these edges and are not attached to one another between the edges. That is, the layers (12.2-628, 12.2-634) can extend between the first and second edges (i.e., the peripheral edge and the opening edge) that are not attached to each other. In this manner, the layers (12.2-628, 12.2-634) of the curtain assembly (12.2-606) are fixed to each other at the edges (12.2-542, 12.2-544), but are free to move with respect to each other between the edges (12.2-542, 12.2-544).

In at least one example, the first elastic layer (12.2-634) comprises a woven fabric material/textile. In at least one example, the first elastic layer (634) comprises an elastomeric material. In at least one example, the first elastic layer (12.2-634) comprises natural woven fibers. In at least one example, the first elastic layer (12.2-634) comprises synthetic woven fibers. In at least one example, the second air impermeable and/or inelastic layer (12.2-628) comprises a plastic or other inelastic material configured to prevent air from passing through the curtain assembly (12.2-606).

In at least one example, the first layer (12.2-634) of the curtain assembly (12.2-606) extends in tension between the frame and the lens of the HMD, as described above. As such, as the lens moves relative to the housing/frame of the HMD, certain portions or areas of the first layer (12.2-634) are reduced in size or span shorter distances, such that portions or areas of the layer (12.2-634) remain in tension during use to avoid wrinkling or folding. In at least one example, the second layer (628) of the curtain assembly (12.2-606) extends in compression between the frame and the lens of the HMD, as described above, such that certain portions or areas of the second layer (12.2-628) are expanded to cover a greater distance or area as the lens connected to the second edge (12.2-544) moves.

In this context, in at least one example, the first and second layers (12.2-634, 12.2-628) occupy the same area between the frame and the lenses of the HMD, as described above, but have different surface areas. That is, in at least one example, the first layer (12.2-634) may include a first surface area and the second layer (12.2-628) may include a second surface area that is larger than the first surface area, while the first and second layers (12.2-634, 12.2-628) extend across the same area defined between the optical modules/lenses and the frame/housing of the HMD, as illustrated in other drawings. In this way, as the lenses move relative to the frame, the inelastic second layer (12.2-628) can accommodate the movement without tearing or becoming damaged, and the first layer (12.2-634) can accommodate the movement while remaining taut.

In at least one example, the second layer (12.2-632) can include one or more materials including, but not limited to, acrylic copolymers, silicones, TPU silicone blends, TPU, nitrile rubber, to achieve opacity as well as low crimp noise as the optical modules are adjusted. In at least one example, the second layer (12.2-632) can be thermoformed to include dimples.

In at least one example, the curtain assembly (12.2-606) may prevent dust and chemicals from entering the HMD device, and reliability performance may be improved due to the curtain assembly (12.2-606).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIG. 367) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 362-366 and FIGS. 368-374 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 362-366 and FIGS. 368-374 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 367.

FIG. 368 illustrates a plan view of an example of a curtain assembly (12.2-706) including first and second layers (12.2-734, 12.2-728) each coupled to a frame or backplate (12.2-732) at an outer peripheral edge (12.2-742) and extending to inner edges (12.2-744a, 12.2-744b) each coupled to trim rings (12.2-730a, 12.2-730b) and/or optical modules (12.2-704a, 12.2-704b). In at least one example, the first layer may extend to cover substantially the entire area between the trim rings (12.2-744a, 12.2-744b) that couple the layers (12.2-734, 12.2-728) to the optical modules (12.2-704a, 12.2-704b) and the backplate (12.2-732). In the plan view of FIG. 368, the second layer (12.2-728) is overlaid on the first layer (12.2-734) such that a large portion of the first layer (12.2-734) is not visible. However, as mentioned above, the first layer (12.2-734) may cover substantially all of the openings/apertures between the lenses of the optical modules (12.2-704a, 12.2-704b) and the frame or backplate (12.2-732).

In at least one example, the second layer (12.2-728) can extend between the frame or backplate (12.2-732) and the lenses and/or trim rings (12.2-730a, 12.2-730b) of the optical modules (12.2-704a, 12.2-704b) to define laterally positioned gaps (12.2-746a, 12.2-746b), wherein the second layer (12.2-728) does not extend between the frame/backplate (12.2-732) and the lenses/optical modules (12.2-704a, 12.2-704b). In at least one example, the second layer (12.2-728) covers about 70% to about 90% of the area between the frame/backplate (12.2-732) and the optical modules (12.2-704a, 12.2-704b)/trim rings (12.2-730a, 12.2-730b). In some examples, the second layer (12.2-728) covers about 75% to about 90% of the area, for example, about 80% to about 85% of the area. The gaps (12.2-746a, 12.2-746b) may also allow some airflow through the curtain assembly (12.2-706) and into the user's eyes, which may keep the user's face and eye area cool as well as provide frost-resistant airflow to the lenses of the HMD and the screens of the displays.

The curtain assembly (12.2-706) can define a middle portion (12.2-748) extending between the first lens or optical module (12.2-704a) and the second lens or optical module (12.2-704b). The curtain assembly (12.2-706) can also define a first side portion (12.2-750) extending between the first lens or optical module (12.2-704a) and the frame/backplate (12.2-732) and a second side portion (12.2-752) extending between the second lens or optical module (12.2-704b) and the frame/backplate (12.2-732). In this example, the gaps (12.2-746a, 12.2-746b) may be positioned or located in the first and second side portions (12.2-750, 12.2-752), respectively. In this way, as the lenses/optical modules (12.2-704a, 12.2-704b) are moved laterally in the direction indicated by the arrows (12.2-754), the absence of material of the second layer (12.2-728) in the gaps (12.2-746a, 12.2-746b) may reduce the forces opposing the static positioning of the optical modules (12.2-704a, 12.2-704b) and/or the forces opposing the motors configured to move the optical modules (12.2-704a, 12.2-704b) relative to the frame/backplate (12.2-732).

In at least one example, the curtain assembly (12.2-706) can bias the optical modules relative to the guide rods to eliminate looseness or backlash between components of the IPD adjustment system.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIG. 368) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 362-367 and FIGS. 369-374 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 362-367 and FIGS. 369-374 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 368.

FIG. 369 illustrates a partial view of an example of a curtain assembly (12.2-806) comprising first and second layers (12.2-834, 12.2-828) coupled to an optical module (12.2-804). In particular, FIG. 369 depicts the first and second layers (12.2-834, 12.2-828) coupled to a housing (12.2-856) of the optical module (12.2-804) coupled to a lens (12.2-818). In at least one example, the layers (12.2-834, 12.2-828) may be pressed or coupled between the housing (12.2-856) and the curtain trim ring (12.2-830), as shown. In at least one example, the layers (12.2-834, 12.2-828) can be bonded to the housing (12.2-856) and the ring (12.2-830) of the optical module (12.2-804) via opposing adhesive portions (12.2-860a, 12.2-860b). In the illustrated example, the layers (12.2-834, 12.2-828) can be curved around the ring (12.2-830) and between the ring (12.2-830) and the housing (12.2-856) such that the ring (12.2-830) is concealed from view from a user's perspective.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIG. 369) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 362-368 and FIGS. 370-374 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 362-368 and FIGS. 370-374 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 369.

Figures 370 through 374 illustrate partial cross-sectional views of examples of curtain assemblies. Figures 370 through 374 illustrate various examples of how various parts of the curtain assemblies may be joined to one another. For example, Figure 370 illustrates that the first and second layers (12.2-934, 12.2-928) of the curtain assembly (12.2-906) may be joined to the backplate (12.2-932) with various adhesive layers and glue portions. In one example, the first adhesive layer (12.2-960a) is disposed between the reinforcement (12.2-940) and the first layer (12.2-934) and joins them. The first layer (12.2-934) can include an end that abuts or is adjacent to a side wall (12.2-933) of the back plate (12.2-932). A second adhesive layer (12.2-960b) can be disposed between and bonding the second layer (12.2-928) and the first layer (12.2-934). A third adhesive layer (12.2-960c) can be disposed between and bonding the second layer (12.2-928) and the back plate (12.2-932). A glue portion (12.2-961) can be disposed between and bonding the first layer (12.2-934) and the back plate (12.2-932), and can extend between the end of the second layer (12.2-928) and the side wall (12.2-933).

FIG. 371 illustrates an example of a curtain assembly (12.2-1006) comprising a first adhesive layer between and bonding a reinforcing member (12.2-1040) and a first layer (12.2-1034), a second adhesive layer (12.2-1060b) between and bonding the first layer (12.2-1034) and a second layer (12.2-1028), and a third adhesive layer (12.2-1060c) between and bonding the second layer (12.2-1028) and a backplate (12.2-1032). In one example, the glue portion (12.2-1061) can bond the various adhesive layers (12.2-1060a to 12.2-1060c), as well as the reinforcement (12.2-1040), the first layer (12.2-1034), and the second layer (12.2-1028) to the backplate (12.2-1032) at the ends of the various components and layers between the sidewall (12.2-1033) and the layers (12.2-1034, 12.2-1028). In at least one example, a space remains between the glue portion (12.2-1061) and the sidewall (12.2-1033) of the backplate (12.2-1032).

FIG. 372 illustrates an example of a curtain assembly (12.2-1106) comprising a first adhesive layer (12.2-1160a) between and bonding a reinforcing member (12.2-1140) and a first layer (12.2-1134), a second adhesive layer (12.2-1160b) between and bonding the first layer (12.2-1134) and a second layer (12.2-1128), and a third adhesive layer (12.2-1160c) between and bonding the second layer (12.2-1128) and a backplate (12.2-1132). An end of the first layer (12.2-1134) may be disposed adjacent to or abutting a side wall (12.2-1133) of the backplate (12.2-1132), and a glue portion (12.2-1161) may be disposed between the end of the second layer (12.2-1128) and the side wall (12.2-1133). The glue portion (12.2-1161) may be disposed between and join the first layer (12.2-1134) and the backplate (12.2-1132). In at least one example, the backplate (12.2-1132) may define an opening (12.2-1162) through which the glue portion (12.2-1162) may be distributed and at least partially disposed, as illustrated.

FIG. 373 illustrates an example of a curtain assembly (12.2-1206) comprising a first adhesive layer (12.2-1260a) positioned between and bonding a reinforcing member (12.2-1240) and a first layer (12.2-1234), a second adhesive layer (12.2-1260b) positioned between and bonding the first layer (12.2-1234) and a second layer (12.2-1228), and a third adhesive layer positioned between and bonding the second layer (12.2-1228) and a backplate (12.2-1232). In the illustrative example of FIG. 373, the first layer (12.2-1234) may be curved around the backplate (12.2-1232), and the first layer may be bonded to the backplate via a fourth adhesive layer (12.2-1260d) such that a portion of the backplate is positioned between opposing portions of the first layer (1234) within its curved geometry.

FIG. 374 illustrates an example of a curtain assembly (12.2-1306) comprising a first adhesive layer between and bonding a reinforcing member (12.2-1340) and a first layer (12.2-1334), a second adhesive layer (12.2-1360b) between and bonding the first layer (12.2-1334) and a second layer (12.2-1328), and a third adhesive layer (12.2-1360c) between and bonding the second layer (12.2-1328) and a backplate (12.2-1332). In one example, the glue portion (12.2-1361) can bond the various adhesive layers (12.2-1360a to 12.2-1360c), as well as the reinforcement (12.2-1340), the first layer (12.2-1334), and the second layer (12.2-1328) to the backplate (12.2-1332) at the ends of the various components and layers between the sidewall (12.2-1333) and the layers (12.2-1334, 12.2-1328). In at least one example, the glue portion (12.2-1361) may extend substantially completely between the ends of the layers (12.2-1334, 12.2-1328) and the side wall (12.2-1333) of the backplate (12.2-1332).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 370-374) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of the devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 362-369 and described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 362-369 and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of the devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 370-374.

XIII: The Light Seal

FIG. 375 illustrates a drawing of an HMD (13.0-100) including an optical seal (13.0-102). The optical seal (13.0-102) is described in more detail herein in Section XIII.

FIG. 376A illustrates a front perspective view of a device seal (13.0-202), according to one embodiment. FIG. 376B illustrates a bottom rear perspective view of the device seal (13.0-202). FIG. 376C illustrates a back view of the device seal (13.0-202). The device seal (13.0-202) illustrated in FIGS. 376A-376C may be substantially similar to the device seals or optical seals described herein and may include some or all of their features.

In some examples, the device seal (13.0-202) may be configured and designed as illustrated in FIGS. 376A through 376C. The device seal (13.0-202) may include a facial interface (13.0-216) that contacts the wearer's face. The facial interface (13.0-216) may include a compressible material, such as a foam, that is conformable and comfortable to the wearer's face.

The device seal (13.0-202) may include a cover (13.0-214) extending from the facial interface (13.0-216) and defining an opening through which the user can view the display of the HMD. The cover (13.0-214) may help block light from the external environment. The device seal (13.0-202) may include a nose relief (13.0-215) positioned, sized, and shaped to accommodate the user's nose. While other designs and configurations are envisioned, those illustrated in FIGS. 376a-376c provide the user with an excellent user experience and engagement with the HMD.

13.1: Electronic devices having covering structures

An electronic device, such as a head-mounted device, is configured to be worn on a user's head. The head-mounted device may have left and right optical systems that present images to the user's left and right eyes. Not all users have the same physical distance between their eyes. To accommodate differences in pupillary distance between different users, the head-mounted device may have a mechanism for adjusting the positions of the left and right optical systems.

An electronic device, such as a head-mounted device, may have a front surface facing away from the user's head and a corresponding rear surface facing toward the user's head. Optical modules on the rear surface may be used to provide images to the user's eye. The positions of the optical modules may be adjusted to accommodate different user interpupillary distances. Internal device structures may be concealed from view by the user by covering the rear surface of the device with a curtain. The curtain, which may sometimes be referred to as a cover, covering structure, rear housing cover, rear housing wall, rear housing structure, or decorative covering, may help block potentially unsightly internal structures from view while accommodating the movement of the optical modules.

A plan view of an exemplary head-mounted device having a curtain is illustrated in FIG. 377. As illustrated in FIG. 377, head-mounted devices, such as electronic devices (13.1-10), may have head-mounted support structures, such as a housing (13.1-12). The housing (13.1-12) may include portions (e.g., support structures (13.1-12T)) that allow the device (13.1-10) to be worn on a user's head. The support structures (13.1-12T) may be formed of fabric, polymers, metals, and/or other materials. The support structures (13.1-12T) may form straps or other head-mounted support structures that assist in supporting the device (13.1-10) on the user's head. A main support structure (e.g., a main housing portion (13.1-12M)) of a housing (13.1-12) may support electronic components, such as displays (13.1-14). The main housing portion (13.1-12M) may include housing structures formed from metal, polymer, glass, ceramic, and/or other materials. For example, the housing portion (13.1-12M) may have housing walls on the top, bottom, left, and right sides adjacent to the housing walls of the front face (F) formed from rigid polymer or other rigid support structures, and these rigid walls may optionally be covered with electrical components, fabric, leather, or other flexible materials. The walls of the housing portion (13.1-12M) may enclose internal components (13.1-38) of the internal region (13.1-34) of the device (13.1-10) and may separate the internal region (13.1-34) from the environment (external region (13.1-36)) surrounding the device (13.1-10). The internal components (13.1-38) may include integrated circuits, actuators, batteries, sensors, and/or other circuits and structures for the device (13.1-10). The housing (13.1-12) may be configured to be worn on a user's head and may form eyeglasses, a hat, a helmet, goggles, and/or other head-mounted devices. A configuration in which the housing (13.1-12) forms goggles may sometimes be described herein as an example.

The front side (F) of the housing (13.1-12) may face outward from the user's head and face. The opposite rear side (R) of the housing (13.1-12) may face the user. Portions of the housing (13.1-12) on the rear side (R) (e.g., portions of the main housing (13.1-12M)) may form a cover, such as a curtain (13.1-12C). In an exemplary configuration, the curtain (13.1-12C) includes a fabric layer that separates the interior region (13.1-34) from the exterior region to the rear of the device (13.1-10). Other structures may be used to form the curtain (13.1-12C), if desired. The presence of a curtain (13.1-12C) on the rear surface (R) may help conceal the internal housing structure, internal components (13.1-38) and other structures of the internal area (13.1-34) from the user's view.

A device (13.1-10) may have left and right optical modules (13.1-40). Each optical module may include a respective display (13.1-14), a lens (13.1-30), and a support structure (13.1-32). The support structures (13.1-32), which may sometimes be referred to as lens barrels or optical module support structures, may include hollow cylindrical structures having open ends or other support structures for housing the displays (13.1-14) and lenses (13.1-30). The support structures (13.1-32) may include, for example, a left lens barrel supporting the left display (13.1-14) and the left lens (13.1-30), and a right lens barrel supporting the right display (13.1-14) and the right lens (13.1-30). The displays (13.1-14) may include arrays of pixels or other display devices for generating images. The displays (13.1-14) may include, for example, organic light-emitting diode pixels formed on substrates having thin film circuitry and/or formed on semiconductor substrates, pixels formed from crystalline semiconductor dies, liquid crystal display pixels, scanning display devices, and/or other display devices for generating images. The lenses (13.1-30) may include one or more lens elements for providing image light from the displays (13.1-14) to the respective eye boxes (13.1-13). The lenses may be implemented using refractive glass lens elements, mirror lens structures (catadioptric lenses), holographic lenses, and/or other lens systems. When the user's eyes are positioned on the eye boxes (13.1-13), the displays (display panels) (13.1-14) work together to form a display for the device (13.1-10) (e.g., images provided by the respective left and right optical modules (13.1-40) can be viewed by the user's eyes at the eye boxes (13.1-13) so that a stereo image can be created for the user). While the user views the display, the left image from the left optical module is fused with the right image from the right optical module.

Not all users have the same interpupillary distance (IPD). To provide the device (13.1-10) with the ability to adjust the interpupillary spacing between the modules (13.1-40) along the lateral dimension (X) and thereby adjust the spacing (IPD) between the eye boxes (13.1-13) to accommodate different user interpupillary distances, the device (13.1-10) may be provided with actuators (13.1-42). The actuators (13.1-42) may be manually controlled to move the support structures (13.1-32) relative to one another and/or may be computer-controlled actuators (e.g., computer-controlled motors).

As illustrated in FIG. 378, the curtain (13.1-12C) may cover the rear face (F) while leaving the lenses (13.1-30) of the optical modules (13.1-40) uncovered (e.g., the curtain (13.1-12C) may have openings aligned with and accommodating the modules (13.1-40). As the modules (13.1-40) are translated relative to one another along the dimension (X) to accommodate different pupillary distances for different users, the modules (13.1-40) move relative to fixed housing structures, such as the walls of the main portion (13.1-12M), and relative to one another. To prevent undesirable wrinkling and buckling of the curtain (13.1-12C) as the optical modules (13.1-40) move relative to the rigid portions of the housing (13.1-12M) and relative to each other, a fabric layer or other covering layer in the curtain (13.1-12C) may be configured to slide, stretch, open, and/or otherwise adjust to accommodate the optical module movement.

A schematic diagram of an exemplary electronic device, such as a head-mounted device or other wearable device, is illustrated in FIG. 379. The device (13.1-10) of FIG. 379 may operate as a standalone device and/or the resources of the device (13.1-10) may be used to communicate with external electronic equipment. For example, communication circuitry in the device (13.1-10) may be used to transmit user input information, sensor information, and/or other information (e.g., wirelessly or via a wired connection) to external electronic devices. Each of these external devices may include components of the type illustrated by the device (13.1-10) of FIG. 379.

As illustrated in FIG. 379, a head-mounted device, such as device (13.1-10), may include control circuitry (13.1-20). Control circuitry (13.1-20) may include storage and processing circuitry to support operation of device (13.1-10). Storage and processing circuitry may include storage, such as non-volatile memory (e.g., flash memory or other electrically programmable read-only memory configured to form a solid-state drive), volatile memory (e.g., static or dynamic random access memory), etc. Processing circuitry within control circuitry (13.1-20) may be used to collect input from sensors and other input devices, and may be used to control output devices. Processing circuitry may be based on one or more microprocessors, microcontrollers, digital signal processors, baseband processors, and other wireless communication circuits, power management units, audio chips, application-specific integrated circuits, etc. During operation, the control circuitry (13.1-20) may use display(s) (13.1-14) and other output devices to provide visual and other outputs to the user.

To support communication between the device (13.1-10) and external equipment, the control circuitry (13.1-20) may communicate using communication circuitry (13.1-22). The circuitry (13.1-22) may include an antenna, radio frequency transceiver circuitry, other wireless communication circuitry, and/or wired communication circuitry. The circuitry (13.1-22), which may sometimes be referred to as control circuitry and/or control and communication circuitry, may support bidirectional wireless communication between the device (13.1-10) and external equipment (e.g., a companion device, such as a computer, a cellular telephone, or other electronic device, an accessory, such as a pointing device, a computer stylus, or other input device, a speaker, or other output devices, etc.) over a wireless link. For example, the circuitry (13.1-22) may include radio frequency transceiver circuitry, such as wireless local area network transceiver circuitry configured to support communication over a wireless local area network link, near field communication transceiver circuitry configured to support communication over a short range communication link, cellular telephone transceiver circuitry configured to support communication over a cellular telephone link, or transceiver circuitry configured to support communication over any other suitable wired or wireless communication link. The wireless communication may be supported, for example, via a Bluetooth® link, a WiFi® link, a wireless link operating at a frequency between 10 GHz and 400 GHz, a 60 GHz link or other millimeter wave link, a cellular telephone link, or other wireless communication link. If desired, the device (13.1-10) may include power circuitry for transmitting and/or receiving wired and/or wireless power and may include a battery or other energy storage device. For example, the device (13.1-10) may include a coil and a rectifier for receiving wireless power provided to the circuit portion of the device (13.1-10).

The device (13.1-10) may include an input/output device, such as the device (13.1-24). The input/output device (13.1-24) may be used to collect user input, collect information about the user's surroundings, and/or provide output to the user. The device (13.1-24) may include one or more displays, such as the display(s) (13.1-14). The display(s) (13.1-14) may include one or more display devices, such as an organic light-emitting diode display panel (a panel having organic light-emitting diode pixels formed on a polymer substrate or silicon substrate including pixel control circuitry), a liquid crystal display panel, a microelectromechanical system display (e.g., a two-dimensional mirror array or scanning mirror display device), a display panel having an array of pixels formed of crystalline semiconductor light-emitting diode dies (sometimes referred to as microLEDs), and/or other display devices.

The sensors (13.1-16) of the input/output devices (13.1-24) may include force sensors (e.g., strain gauges, capacitive force sensors, resistive sensors, etc.), audio sensors such as microphones, touch and/or proximity sensors, capacitive sensors such as touch sensors forming buttons, trackpads, or other input devices, and other sensors. If desired, sensors (13.1-16) may include optical sensors, e.g., optical sensors that emit and detect light, ultrasonic sensors, optical touch sensors, optical proximity sensors, and/or other touch sensors and/or proximity sensors, monochrome and color ambient light sensors, image sensors, fingerprint sensors, iris scanning sensors, retina scanning sensors, and other biometric sensors, temperature sensors, sensors for measuring three-dimensional non-contact gestures ("air gestures"), pressure sensors, sensors for detecting position, orientation, and/or motion (e.g., accelerometers, magnetic sensors, e.g., compass sensors, gyroscopes, and/or inertial measurement units including some or all of these sensors), health sensors such as blood oxygen sensors, heart rate sensors, blood flow sensors, and/or other health sensors, radio frequency sensors, depth sensors (e.g., stereo imaging devices that capture three-dimensional images). The device (13.1-10) may include sensors (13.1-16) and/or other input/output devices to collect user input. For example, buttons may be used to collect button press input, touch sensors overlapping the displays may be used to collect user touch screen input, touch pads may be used to collect touch input, microphones may be used to collect audio input, accelerometers may be used to monitor when a finger is in contact with an input surface and thus may be used to collect finger press input, and so on.

If desired, the electronic device (13.1-10) may include additional components (see, e.g., other devices (13.1-18) of the input/output device (13.1-24)). Additional components may include a haptic output device, an actuator for moving the movable housing structure, an audio output device, e.g., a speaker, a light emitting diode for status indication, a light source, e.g., a light emitting diode for illuminating a portion of the housing and/or display structure, other light output devices, and/or other circuitry for collecting input and/or providing output. The device (13.1-10) may also include a battery or other energy storage device, a connector port for supporting wired communication with auxiliary equipment and for receiving wired power, and other circuitry.

Figures 380 and 381 are plan views of the device (13.1-10) illustrating how the optical modules of the device (13.1-10) are moved relative to each other along the lateral dimension (X) to accommodate different interpupillary distances (IPD) (the distance between a user's left and right eyes). In the example of Figure 380, the left optical module (13.1-40L) and the right optical module (13.1-40R) are moved toward each other to accommodate a small interpupillary distance. In the example of Figure 381, the left optical module (13.1-40L) and the right optical module (13.1-40R) are moved away from each other to accommodate a large interpupillary distance.

The curtain (13.1-12C) has edge portions such as a left portion (13.1-12C-L) between the left housing wall (13.1-12M-L) and the left optical module (13.1-40L) and a right portion (13.1-12C-R) between the right housing wall (13.1-12M-R) and the right optical module (13.1-40R). A middle portion (13.1-12C-M) of the curtain (13.1-12C) extends between the left optical module (13.1-40L) and the right optical module (13.1-40R). In the configuration of FIG. 380, the optical modules (13.1-40L, 13.1-40R) are relatively close to each other, so the middle portion (13.1-12C-M) is relatively small, and the portions (13.1-12C-L, 13.1-12C-R) are relatively large. In the configuration of FIG. 381, the optical modules (13.1-40L, 13.1-40R) are relatively far from each other, so the left portion (13.1-12C-L) and the right portion (13.1-12C-R) are shorter along the lateral dimension (X), and the middle portion (13.1-12C-M) is enlarged compared to the configuration of FIG. 380.

To help accommodate differences in size for the curtain (13.1-12C) (e.g., length variations for portions of the curtain (13.1-12C) along the lateral dimension (X), the curtain (13.1-12C) may include a cover layer formed of a flexible material, such as fabric. The cover layer may be supported by a rigid frame. The fabric may have a main elastic band that helps the fabric slide relative to the frame while remaining firmly held on the frame, thereby also helping the curtain (13.1-12M) to dynamically adjust without exhibiting undesirable buckling and wrinkling.

FIG. 382 is a side view of a device (13.1-10) showing how the device (13.1-10) may include cooling features to assist in cooling the display (13.1-14) and other internal components (13.1-38), if desired. For example, as shown in FIG. 382, the device (13.1-10) may have a fan, such as a fan (13.1-50). The fan (13.1-50) may be mounted within the housing (13.1-12) (e.g., a fan housing within the housing (13.1-12)) in a configuration that allows the fan (13.1-50) to exhaust air from the housing (13.1-12). The curtain (13.1-12C) may be permeable to air to allow cooling air to move past the user's face while cooling electrical components within the interior region (13.1-34), such as the display (13.1-14) and internal components (13.1-38). The curtain (13.1-12C) may, for example, have one or more airflow facilitating openings. In some examples, the curtain (13.1-12C) is formed of a knitted or woven fabric having a knit or weave that is sufficiently loose to allow air to flow through the interstitial gaps between adjacent strands of material within the fabric (e.g., between warp and weft strands). The openings may also be formed by laser cutting and/or other opening forming techniques. In examples where the curtain (13.1-12C) is permeable to air, air can flow through the curtain (13.1-12C) into the device (13.1-10), past the display (13.1-14) and other internal components (13.1-38), and exit the internal region (13.1-34) via the fan (13.1-50). Air can flow in this manner to cool the device (13.1-10) while the device (13.1-10) is worn on the user's head. If desired, the housing (13.1-12) may have additional openings (e.g., slot-shaped openings on the top wall, side walls, and/or bottom wall) that provide additional paths for airflow.

To allow the cover layer within the curtain (13.1-12C) to slide reciprocally during adjustments to the positions of the modules (13.1-40), the curtain (13.1-12C) may be provided with a rigid frame that supports the cover layer without unduly restricting lateral movement of the cover layer. Fig. 383 is an exploded perspective view of a left portion of an exemplary curtain. As depicted in Fig. 383, the curtain (13.1-12C) may include a frame (13.1-12CF) and a cover layer (13.1-12CC). The cover layer (13.1-12CC) may have left and right openings, such as lens barrel openings (13.1-52), to accommodate the left and right optical modules (13.1-40), respectively. The frame (13.1-54) may have corresponding left and right openings, such as the exemplary opening (13.1-54). The opening (13.1-54) may be larger than the opening (13.1-52) to accommodate lateral movement of the module (13.1-40). When mounted on the device (13.1-10), the cover layer (13.1-12CC) may be attached to the frame (13.1-12CF) such that the cover layer (13.1-12CC) may be extendable and/or slidable relative to the frame (13.1-12CF).

If desired, the cover layer (13.1-12CC) may comprise multiple layers of material. As illustrated in the plan view of FIG. 384, for example, the cover layer (13.1-12CC) may comprise an outer layer (13.1-56) and an inner layer (13.1-58). The outer layer (13.1-56) may be, for example, a fabric layer. The inner layer (13.1-58) may be, for example, a layer of fabric formed from thermoformed polymer strands in an accordion configuration. In this type of arrangement, the outer layer (13.1-56) may be a fabric having a desired visual appearance, while the inner layer (13.1-58) may be a fabric or other layer that provides the cover layer (13.1-12CC) with a desired opacity to help block internal device components from view. The layer (13.1-12CC) may be attached to the module (13.1-40) using attachment structures (13.1-60). The structures (13.1-60) may include retaining rings, screws and other fasteners, clips, and other structures that mechanically attach the layer (13.1-12CC) to the support structures (13.1-32) of the module (13.1-40) and/or may include an adhesive for attaching the layer (13.1-12CC) to the module (13.1-40).

If desired, the layers (13.1-12CC) may be provided with a main elastic band. An arrangement of this type is illustrated in FIG. 385. As illustrated in FIG. 385, the cover layers (13.1-12CC) may have a fabric (13.1-62) and a main elastic band (13.1-64). The fabric (13.1-62) may be a warp knit fabric, a weft knit fabric, or another knit fabric (e.g., to promote extensibility), a woven fabric, a knitted fabric, a non-woven fabric, etc. If desired, a layer of extensible plastic may be attached to the fabric (13.1-62), and/or an elastic polymer layer may be used in the cambium layers (13.1-12CC) in place of part or all of the fabric (13.1-62). The fabric (13.1-62) may be formed of interlaced (entangled) strands of materials such as polymeric strands, strands of cotton or other natural materials, synthetic materials, and/or other materials. The strands in the fabric (13.1-62) may include monofilament strands and/or multifilament strands. In some examples, some of the strands in the fabric (13.1-62) may be selected to provide strength to the fabric (13.1-62), while other strands within the fabric (13.1-62) may be formed of an elastomeric material that enhances the elongation capabilities of the fabric (13.1-62) (and has a lower modulus of elasticity than the strands that provide strength to the fabric (13.1-62). Examples of stretchable strand materials include elastomeric materials such as silicone and thermoplastic polyurethane (TPU). Examples of reinforcing strand materials include polyester, nylon, etc. The elastic band (13.1-64) may be formed from strands of an elastomeric material, such as strands of silicone or thermoplastic polyurethane or other elastic material. If desired, other materials may be used to form the strands within the fabric (13.1-62).

The elastic band (13.1-64) may be attached along the outer edge of the fabric (13.1-62) by sewing, knitting the band (13.1-64) into the knitted fabric, using an adhesive, using crimped connections or other fasteners, and/or otherwise attaching the band (13.1-64) to the periphery of the fabric (13.1-62). If desired, the band (13.1-64) may be formed from warp strands and weft strands within the woven fabric (see, e.g., band (13.1-64) of fabric (13.1-62) of FIG. 386).

The fabric or other material forming the cover layer (13.1-12CC) may be stretchable. As illustrated in FIG. 387, for example, the layer (13.1-12CC) may be configured to elongate without damage from a first shape characterized by a length (13.1-L1) along dimension (X) to a second, larger shape characterized by a length (13.1-L2) along dimension (X). The amount of elongation (13.1-L2/13.1-L1) that the layer (13.1-12CC) can accommodate may be, for example, at least 50%, at least 75%, at least 100%, or at least 150%.

When attaching the cover layer (13.1-12CC) to the frame (13.1-12CC), the band (13.1-64) may be fitted over the outer side of the frame (13.1-12CC). The band (13.1-64) may then be tugged inwardly on portions of the cover layer (13.1-12CC) that overlap the edges of the frame. This, in turn, will help to tension the main portion of the layer (13.1-12CC) outwardly (e.g., in the lateral dimensions (X, Y)), thereby ensuring that the cover layer (13.1-12CC) remains taut. At the same time, there may be at least some allowed lateral slippage of the reciprocating layer (13.1-12CC) as necessary to accommodate changes in the positions of the modules (13.1-40).

An exemplary shape for a frame (13.1-12CF) of a curtain (13.1-12C) is illustrated in FIG. 388. As illustrated in FIG. 388, the frame (13.1-12CF) may have left and right openings (13.1-54) that overlap a desired range of positions achievable by the modules (13.1-40). The frame (13.1-12CF) may have an outer ring-shaped portion (13.1-66) that is bridged to a portion of the frame (13.1-12CF) that overlaps the user's nose by bridging a middle portion (13.1-68). The openings (13.1-54) may be rectangular, oval, teardrop-shaped, circular, and/or may have other suitable shapes.

FIG. 389 illustrates how the elastic band (13.1-64) may help to provide the fabric (13.1-62) of the cover (13.1-12CC) with the ability to slide laterally relative to the frame to accommodate movement of the optical modules (13.1-40) while helping to maintain the fabric (13.1-62) taut. The elastic band (13.1-64) is normally in a stretched state. As a result, the band (13.1-64) tends to contract and, in doing so, tends to pull the fabric (13.1-62) in the direction (13.1-74) around the frame (13.1-12CF). Thus, on the inner side of the frame (13.1-12CF), the tightening force from the band (13.1-64) typically pulls the fabric (13.1-62) in the direction (13.1-76), whereas on the opposite outer (rear-facing) side of the frame (13.1-12CF), the tightening force of the band (13.1-64) tends to pull the fabric (13.1-62) in the direction (13.1-78) toward the periphery of the frame (13.1-12CF). Thus, the presence of the band (13.1-64) helps to tighten the fabric (13.1-62) and prevent wrinkles within the cover layer (13.1-12CC).

When the optical module (13.1-40) is to be moved, the fabric (13.1-62) can be slid back and forth over the frame (13.1-12CF) as needed. As an example, consider a scenario where the module (13.1-40) is moved in the direction (13.1-70). This pulls the fabric (13.1-62) in the direction (13.1-80) on the outer surface of the frame (13.1-12CF) (e.g., frame portion (13.1-66)). On the inner surface of the frame (13.1-12CF), the edge of the fabric (13.1-62) is pulled in the direction (13.1-72), causing the band (13.1-64) to slightly elongate and expand (e.g., so that the band (13.1-64) moves to position (13.1-64')). Due to the pulling in the direction (13.1-80) of the fabric (13.1-62), the fabric (13.1-62) slides in the direction (13.1-82) around the frame (13.1-12CF) and across the outer surface of the frame (13.1-12CF), thereby helping to accommodate the movement of the module (13.1-40) without wrinkling the cover layer (13.1-12CC).

To facilitate sliding movement of the cover (13.1-12CC) around the edges of the frame (13.1-12CF) in this manner, at least the left and right edges of the cover (13.1-12CC) (and adjacent portions along the upper and lower edges of the cover (13.1-12CC)) may not be fixedly attached to the frame (13.1-12CF) or the housing (13.1-12). An exemplary configuration for mounting the curtain (13.1-12C) within the housing portion (13.1-12M) of the housing (13.1-12) of the device (13.1-10) is illustrated in FIG. 390. In the example of FIG. 390, the housing portion (13.1-12M) has a central support, such as the housing structure (13.1-84). The curtain (13.1-12C) may be fixedly attached to the structure (13.1-84) using an attachment mechanism (13.1-86). The mechanism (13.1-86) may include, for example, glue and/or mechanical structures that grip the fabric (13.1-62) and/or other portions of the curtain (13.1-12C) to securely hold the curtain (13.1-12C) in place within the device (13.1-10). The mechanism (13.1-86) may include interlocking structures (e.g., snap features) that allow the curtain (13.1-12C) to be removed and replaced with another curtain, if desired. However, when mounted to the device (13.1-10), the mechanism (13.1-86) will securely hold the curtain (13.1-12C).

As illustrated in FIG. 390, the device (13.1-10) may, if desired, have an opaque optical seal in the shape of a ring, such as an optical seal (13.1-90). The optical seal (13.1-90) may be configured to be removable (e.g., so that the optical seal (13.1-90) can be replaced when worn). Foam or other flexible materials may be used to form the optical seal (13.1-90).

The attachment structures used in the mechanism (13.1-86) of FIG. 390 may or may not allow the fabric (13.1-62) to slide freely relative to the frame (13.1-12CF). To allow the fabric (13.1-62) to slide freely relative to the frame (13.1-12CF) of the curtain (13.1-12C) elsewhere within the curtain (13.1-12C) (e.g., at the left and right edges of the curtain (13.1-12C) and other portions of the curtain (13.1-12C) away from the attachment mechanism (13.1-86), the curtain (13.1-12C) may float relative to the housing (13.1-12M) (excluding the attachment mechanism (13.1-86)). For example, the opposite ends of the curtain (13.1-12C) at the left and right edges of the curtain (13.1-12C) can be separated from adjacent portions of the housing portion (13.1-12M) by air gaps (13.1-88). This prevents the fabric of the layer (13.1-12CC) from becoming caught between the frame (13.1-12CF) and the housing (13.1-12). FIG. 391 illustrates how attachment structures (13.1-86) can be used to join a bridging central portion of the frame (13.1-12CF), such as portion (13.1-68), to the housing structure (13.1-84) at the center of the frame (13.1-12C), e.g., along the upper and lower edges of the curtain (13.1-12C).

FIG. 392 is a cross-sectional view of a curtain (13.1-12C) showing how an attachment mechanism (13.1-86) for attaching the curtain (13.1-12) to the housing structure (13.1-84) may include a trim member (13.1-94). An adhesive (13.1-92) may be used to attach the fabric (13.1-62) and the frame (13.1-12CF) to the trim member (13.1-94) (e.g., near the attachment mechanism (13.1-86) in areas of the curtain (13.1-12C) that overlap the bridging portion (13.1-86) of the frame (13.1-12CF). The trim member (13.1-94) and the housing structure (13.1-84) may have mating engagement structures. For example, the trim member (13.1-94) may have a snap, such as a snap (13.1-96), that mates with a corresponding hook, such as a hook (13.1-98), on the housing structure (13.1-84). When the curtain (13.1-12C) is to be snapped into place, the curtain (13.1-12C) can be pressed into the housing (13.1-12M) in the -Z direction. If desired, the curtain (13.1-12C) can be removed by disengaging (e.g., unsnapping) the engaging structure (e.g., when removing or replacing the curtain (13.1-12C)).

If desired, the curtain (13.1-12C) may be used in equipment other than the devices (13.1-10). As an example, consider the arrangement of FIG. 393. As illustrated in FIG. 393, the device (13.1-100) may have a movable member, such as a movable member (13.1-102). The device (13.1-100) may be, for example, a joystick or a car gear lever, and the movable member (13.1-102) may be a movable shaft. The movable member (13.1-102) may be movable in one or more directions (13.1-104). The curtain (13.1-12C) may have a covering layer (13.1-12CC) formed of fabric (13.1-62) or other covering material, and may have a main elastic band (13.1-64). The cover layer (13.1-12CC) may be mounted on a frame, such as the frame (13.1-12CF). This allows the cover layer (13.1-12CC) to slide and/or stretch during movement of the member (13.1-102), thereby helping to avoid wrinkling in the curtain (13.1-12C).

13.2: Device having a removable cushion

A head-mounted device may include a head-mounted support structure that allows the device to be worn on a user's head. The head-mounted device may have displays supported by the head-mounted support structure to present visual content to the user. The head-mounted device may also have sensors, such as front-facing cameras and other sensors, to collect information about the environment surrounding the device.

A head-mounted device may include a removable cushion configured to be attached to a head-mounted support structure. The removable cushion may come into contact with the user's face when the head-mounted device is worn by the user. There are many advantages to using this type of removable cushion in a head-mounted device. Because the cushion comes into contact with the user's face during operation, the cushion may tend to become contaminated over time. If the cushion is not removable, cleaning it may be difficult. However, a removable cushion is easy to remove from the head-mounted device for cleaning. Therefore, the removable cushion is easy to maintain cleanliness during repeated use.

In addition to making the cushion easier to clean, its removable nature can also make it easier to replace. If the cushion becomes worn or damaged over time, the removable cushion can be simply replaced with a new one. This extends the life of the head-mounted device.

Removable cushions can also be customizable. If the cushion is not removable, the cushion characteristics of the head-mounted device are fixed. For removable cushions, the optimal removable cushion can be selected from a number of options. For example, the user can select a removable cushion with a desired color, softness, size, etc. In this way, the user can select a customized removable cushion that is most comfortable for them.

FIG. 394 is a plan view of a head-mounted electronic device (13.2-10). As shown in FIG. 394, the head-mounted device (13.2-10) may include a housing (13.2-12). The housing (13.2-12) is configured to be worn on a user's head and may sometimes be referred to as a head-mounted housing or a head-mounted support structure. The housing (13.2-12) may have curved head-shaped surfaces, a nose bridge portion, such as a portion (NB) configured to rest on the user's nose when the device (13.2-10) is on the user's head, a strap (13.2-12T) for supporting the device (13.2-10) on the user's head, and/or other features that allow the device (13.2-10) to be worn by the user. The housing (13.2-12) may have walls or other structures that separate an interior region of the device (13.2-10), such as the interior region (13.2-42), from an exterior region surrounding the device (13.2-10), such as the exterior region (13.2-44). Electrical components (13.2-40) (e.g., integrated circuits, sensors, control circuitry, light emitting diodes, lasers, and other light emitting devices, other control circuits, and input/output devices, etc.) may be mounted on printed circuits and/or other structures within the device (13.2-10) (e.g., within the interior region (13.2-42)).

To present images to a user for viewing from eye boxes, such as eye boxes (13.2-34), the device (13.2-10) may include rear-facing displays within the optical modules (13.2-16) (sometimes referred to as optical assemblies, etc.). For example, there may be a left rear-facing display within a left optical module (13.2-16L) for presenting images from a left eye box to a user's left eye through a left lens, and a right rear-facing display within a right optical module (13.2-16R) for presenting images from a right eye box to a user's right eye through a right lens.

When the inward facing surface (13.2-18) of the housing (13.2-12) is placed against an outer surface of the user's face, the user's eyes are positioned within the eye boxes (13.2-34) on the rear surface (R) of the device (13.2-10). On the rear surface (R), the housing (13.2-12) may have cushion structures (sometimes referred to as optical seal structures) to enhance the user's comfort as the surface (13.2-18) is placed against the user's face.

The device (13.2-10) may have forward-facing components, such as forward-facing cameras (13.2-20) on a front surface (F) facing outwardly away from the user. The cameras (13.2-20) may be generally oriented in the +Y direction of FIG. 394. If desired, to improve overall coverage of the cameras (13.2-20), the left camera may be oriented slightly to the left and the right camera may be oriented slightly to the right. During operation, images captured by the cameras (13.2-20) (sometimes referred to as pass-through video and/or pass-through images) and/or computer-generated content, such as text, graphics, etc., may be displayed to the user by displays within the modules (13.2-16).

Fig. 395 is a cross-sectional view of an optical module (13.2-16). As illustrated in Fig. 395, the optical module (13.2-16) may include a display (13.2-14) and a lens (13.2-22) mounted in an optical module housing (13.2-24). The display (13.2-14) presents images within an eye box (13.2-34).

FIG. 396a is a cross-sectional view of a head-mounted device (13.2-10) with a removable cushion (13.2-60) in its unattached (removed) state. As shown in FIG. 396a, the head-mounted support structure (13.2-12) may include a rigid front structure (13.2-52) (sometimes referred to as a front portion rigid structure, etc.) on the front face (F) of the head-mounted device (13.2-10). The head-mounted support structure (13.2-12) further includes support posts (13.2-54) (sometimes referred to as rigid support posts, rigid side wall portions, side portions, side wall portions, support structures, etc.). The support structures (13.2-54) extend from the front portion (13.2-52) toward the rear face (R). The support structures (13.2-54) can couple the front portion (13.2-52) to the flexible rear portion (13.2-56) (sometimes referred to as a flexible structure, a flexible ring, a flexible optical seal structure, etc.) of the head-mounted support structure (13.2-12). An interior (13.2-42) (having associated optical modules (13.2-16L/13.2-16R) and other electronic components) is formed within the volume between the front portion (13.2-52) and the rear portion (13.2-56).

In some examples, the side walls extending in the -Y direction from the anterior structure (13.2-52) may be formed continuously around the periphery of the anterior structure (13.2-52). In some examples, to minimize the weight of the head-mounted support structure (13.2-12), individual support posts (13.2-54) may be distributed around the periphery of the anterior structure (13.2-52). Each of the support posts is coupled between the rigid anterior structure (13.2-52) and the flexible posterior structure (13.2-56). Air-filled gaps (or gaps filled with other desired optical filler material) may separate adjacent support posts (13.2-54).

The front structure (13.2-52) may be an opaque structure extending across the entire front face of the device (13.2-10). Alternatively, the front structure (13.2-52) may be a ring-shaped structure extending in a ring shape around the front face of the device (13.2-10). The flexible rear structure (13.2-56) may be a ring-shaped structure extending in a ring shape around part or all of the rear face of the device (13.2-10). The flexible rear structure (13.2-56) may be ring-shaped (having a central opening) to allow a user to view the optical modules (13.2-16) while the device (13.2-10) is being worn by the user.

The head-mounted support structure (13.2-12) may optionally be covered on one or more sides by a fabric layer (13.2-64) (sometimes referred to as a fabric layer or the like). The fabric layer (13.2-64) may be formed of an opaque or light-shielding material (e.g., black yarn), or may be formed of an underlying material coated with an opaque or light-shielding material (e.g., black dye or ink). The fabric layer (13.2-64) may be formed of a woven fabric or a non-woven fabric. By way of example, the fabric layer (13.2-64) may be formed of any suitable type of fabric, such as a knitted fabric, a woven fabric, a braided fabric, or the like.

In addition to the head-mounted support structure (13.2-12), the head-mounted device includes a removable cushion (13.2-60) (sometimes referred to as a removable cushion member, a removable foam, a removable foam member, a cushion, a foam, etc.). The removable cushion (13.2-60) includes a cushion member (13.2-58) (sometimes referred to as a cushion, a cushion structure, a foam member, a foam structure, a foam, etc.) that is optionally covered by a fabric layer (13.2-62). The cushion member (13.2-58) may be formed of foam or other desired compressible material. The fabric layer (13.2-62) may be formed of an opaque or light-shielding material (e.g., black yarn), or may be formed of an underlying material coated with an opaque or light-shielding material (e.g., black dye or ink). The fabric layer (13.2-62) may be formed of a woven fabric or a nonwoven fabric. As examples, the fabric layer (13.2-62) may be formed of any suitable type of fabric, such as a knitted fabric, a woven fabric, a braided fabric, or the like.

A removable cushion may be attached to a flexible structure (13.2-56) of a head-mounted support structure (13.2-12). FIG. 396b is a cross-sectional view of a head-mounted device (13.2-10) having a removable cushion (13.2-60) attached to an associated head-mounted support structure (13.2-12). As shown, when attached, the removable cushion (13.2-60) may be adjacent to the flexible rear structure (13.2-56). The flexible structure (13.2-56) and the removable cushion (13.2-60) may be combined to form optical seal structures (13.2-66) for the head-mounted device (13.2-10). Accordingly, the flexible structure (13.2-56) may sometimes be referred to as a light seal structure, a flexible light seal structure, a non-removable light seal structure, etc. The removable cushion (13.2-60) may sometimes be referred to as a light seal structure, a cushion-type light seal structure, a removable light seal structure, etc.

When the head-mounted device (13.2-10) is worn on the user's head, the optical seal structures (13.2-66) can conform to the user's face. To provide an immersive experience to the viewer and to preserve high contrast in the display viewed by the user during operation, it may be desirable to block ambient light from reaching the user's eyes. This ensures that the only light the user sees comes from the display within the head-mounted device (13.2-10). The optical seal structures (13.2-66) may be sufficiently flexible and/or compressible to conform to the user's face during operation, thereby preventing stray light from entering the head-mounted device (13.2-10).

The flexible optical seal structure (13.2-56) may be formed of a flexible plastic structure. The flexible plastic structure may be sufficiently flexible to conform to the shape of a user's face when worn by a user. However, the flexible plastic structure may be sufficiently rigid to maintain its shape while worn (e.g., and not be biased toward or away from the user's face while worn). The flexible optical seal structure (13.2-56) may not be compressible (e.g., less compressible than the cushion (13.2-60)). The removable cushion (13.2-60) may also be sufficiently flexible to conform to the shape of a user's face when worn by a user. The cushion (13.2-60) may be compressible. The compressible cushion may be pressed against the user's face to form a tight optical seal while still maintaining comfort for the user.

There are many advantages to using a removable cushion, as illustrated in FIGS. 396a and 396b, in a head-mounted device (13.2-10) (as opposed to a permanently attached cushion). Because the cushion (13.2-60) contacts the user's face during operation, the cushion (13.2-60) may tend to become contaminated over time. If the cushion (13.2-60) were not removable, cleaning the cushion (13.2-60) could be difficult. However, a removable cushion (13.2-60) is easy to remove from the head-mounted device (13.2-10) for cleaning. Therefore, the removable cushion (13.2-60) is easy to keep clean during repeated use. The removable cushion (13.2-60) may be formed using materials that are not damaged by water to facilitate easy cleaning. The removable cushion (13.2-60) can be formed using materials that dry quickly so that the removable cushion (13.2-60) is ready for use quickly after cleaning.

In addition to making the cushion (13.2-60) easier to clean, its removable nature can make it easier to replace. If the cushion (13.2-60) becomes worn or damaged over time, the removable cushion (13.2-60) can be simply replaced with a new removable cushion (13.2-60). This extends the life of the head-mounted device (13.2-10).

The removable cushion (13.2-60) may also be customizable. If the cushion (13.2-60) is not removable, the cushion characteristics of the head-mounted device (13.2-10) are fixed. In the case of a removable cushion (13.2-60), the optimal removable cushion (13.2-60) can be selected by the user from among multiple options. For example, the user can select a removable cushion (13.2-60) with a desired color and/or dimensions. In this way, the user can select a customized removable cushion (13.2-60) that is most comfortable for him/her.

The removable cushion (13.2-60) has various dimensions that can be customized for different users. One such dimension is the cushion thickness (13.2-92) (e.g., the dimension parallel to the Y direction), as illustrated in Figure 396b. Some users may prefer a thicker cushion (13.2-60) for maximum comfort, while others may prefer a thinner cushion (13.2-60) for maximum comfort.

The thickness of the cushion (13.2-92) can also affect the pupillary distance of the optical system. The pupillary distance is defined as the distance (13.2-94) between the optical module and each eye box that views such optical module. Therefore, the thickness (13.2-92) of the removable cushion (13.2-60) affects the pupillary distance (13.2-94). A thicker removable cushion (13.2-60) can result in a larger associated pupillary distance, while a thinner removable cushion (13.2-60) can result in a smaller associated pupillary distance.

In some instances, a particular pupillary distance may be desirable depending on the characteristics of the user's eyes (e.g., the user's eyeglass prescription). For example, a first user may not require eyeglasses. For the first user, a first pupillary distance may be optimal. A second user may have an eyeglass prescription. The optical module may be customized to the user's eyeglass prescription (e.g., by adding removable lenses to the optical module). In such a scenario, a second pupillary distance different from the first pupillary distance may be optimal for the second user. In such a situation, the first user may use a first removable cushion having a first thickness (which produces the first pupillary distance), while the second user may use a second removable cushion having a second thickness different from the first thickness (and producing the second pupillary distance).

The thickness (13.2-92) can be any desired size (e.g., 1.5 millimeters to 2.5 millimeters, 2.5 millimeters to 3.5 millimeters, 3.5 millimeters to 4.5 millimeters, 1 millimeter to 5 millimeters, 1 millimeter to 10 millimeters, etc.).

Therefore, the removable cushion selected by the user may have a thickness (13.2-92) that is optimized for his comfort and/or that optimizes the interpupillary distance for the system.

Instead of (or in addition to) customizing the thickness (or other dimensions) of the removable cushion, users can customize the material of the removable cushion. For example, some users may prefer a softer foam in their removable cushion, while others may prefer a firmer foam. Accordingly, different options for removable cushions may have the same dimensions but be formed from different materials.

FIG. 397 is a perspective view of a head-mounted support structure (13.2-12) (without a removable cushion (13.2-60)). As shown, the front structure (13.2-52) covers the entire front surface of the head-mounted device (13.2-10) (e.g., the front structure (13.2-52) does not have a central opening). In contrast, the flexible rear structure (13.2-56) is ring-shaped with a central opening (e.g., the flexible rear structure (13.2-56) defines the central opening). A user can view the optical modules (13.2-16) through the central opening while using the head-mounted device. As shown in FIG. 397, support posts (13.2-54) connect the flexible rear structure (13.2-56) to the rigid front structure (13.2-52). An inner volume (13.2-42) (having associated optical modules (13.2-16) and other electronic components) is formed between the front structure (13.2-52) and the rear structure (13.2-56). Any desired number of support structures may be included in the device. The support structures may be distributed around the periphery of the device to ensure that the central opening having the optical modules (13.2-16) is not blocked.

Each support structure can optionally be attached to the flexible structure (13.2-56) using a pivot portion having a spherical joint. The spherical joint can allow the flexible structure (13.2-56) to be pressed against the user's face at any desired angle, thereby allowing the flexible structure (13.2-56) to conform to the user's face as much as possible (which can promote a tight optical seal).

It should be noted that, similarly to what was illustrated and discussed with respect to FIG. 396a, the head-mounted support structure (13.2-12) of FIG. 397 may also be covered by a fabric layer (13.2-64). In FIG. 397, the fabric layer is omitted to avoid obscuring the drawing.

Figure 398a is a rear view of the flexible structure (13.2-56). As shown, the flexible structure (13.2-56) may have a ring shape that extends partially or completely around the central opening (13.2-70). The flexible structure (13.2-56) may have a gap along its lower edge to accommodate a user's nose during operation. If desired, an optional nose-mounted structure (13.2-72) configured to rest on the user's nose may bridge the gap between the first and second ends of the flexible structure. The structure (13.2-72) may conform to the user's facial topology around the nose area and may block light from entering the head-mounted device during operation. Alternatively, the nose-mounted structure (13.2-72) may be omitted, and the flexible structure (13.2-56) may form a complete ring around the central opening such that a portion of the flexible structure (13.2-56) rests on the user's nose during operation of the head-mounted device (13.2-10).

The flexible structure (13.2-56) is attached to support posts (13.2-54) at various points around the flexible structure. FIG. 398a illustrates an example of four support posts (13.2-54) being coupled to the flexible structure. As previously mentioned, each support post may be coupled to the flexible structure having a spherical joint to accommodate the different curvatures of the faces of different users.

Figure 398b is a rear view of a removable cushion (13.2-60). As shown, the removable cushion (13.2-60) may have a ring shape that extends partially or completely around a central opening (13.2-74). The cushion (13.2-60) may have a gap along its lower edge to accommodate a user's nose during operation. If desired, an optional nose-mounted structure (13.2-76) configured to rest on the user's nose may bridge the gap between the first and second ends of the removable cushion. The structure (13.2-76) may conform to the user's facial topography around the nose area and may block light from entering the head-mounted device during operation. Alternatively, the nose-mounted structure (13.2-76) may be omitted and the cushion (13.2-60) may form a complete ring around the central opening such that a portion of the cushion (13.2-60) rests on the user's nose during operation of the head-mounted device.

While it is generally preferred that the cushion (13.2-60) be compressible (for user comfort and a tight optical seal), the cushion (13.2-60) may include one or more high-stiffness sections (13.2-60-1). The high-stiffness sections (13.2-60-1) may provide sufficient structural integrity to prevent the cushion (13.2-60) from being completely compressed. This may, for example, prevent the user's face from striking internal electronic components of the head-mounted device and/or the flexible structure (13.2-56) during an impact event. The high-stiffness sections (13.2-60-1) are distributed across the cushion (13.2-60). The low-stiffness sections (13.2-60-2) are interposed in the remaining areas of the cushion (e.g., between adjacent pairs of high-stiffness sections (13.2-60-1)).

The high-stiffness portions (13.2-60-1) have higher stiffness and lower compressibility than the low-stiffness portions (13.2-60-2). The high-stiffness portions (13.2-60-1) may be formed of a different material from the low-stiffness portions (13.2-60-2). That is, the cushion structure (13.2-58) (see FIGS. 396a and 396b) includes high-stiffness portions (13.2-60-1) formed of a first material and low-stiffness portions (13.2-60-2) formed of a second material different from the first material. As another example, the entire cushion structure (13.2-58) may be formed of the same base material. However, the high-strength portions (13.2-60-1) may include an additive (e.g., a second material) that increases the stiffness compared to the low-strength portions ( 13.2-60-2 ).

As illustrated in FIG. 398b, the cushion (13.2-60) may have approximately the same footprint (when viewed from the rear) as the flexible rear structure (13.2-56) from FIG. 398a. Additionally, the high-stiffness portions (13.2-60-1) may be positioned to overlap (in the Y direction) the support posts (13.2-54) when the removable cushion (13.2-60) is attached to the flexible rear structure (13.2-56). In other words, each high-stiffness portion (13.2-60-1) is aligned (in the Y direction) with a respective portion of the flexible structure (13.2-56) attached to the support post. Thus, each high-stiffness portion (13.2-60-1) is aligned (in the Y direction) with a respective support post. This type of arrangement can ensure that the high-stiffness sections (13.2-60-1) provide targeted structural integrity to the cushion (13.2-60) while minimizing user detection. The presence of the support posts (13.2-54) makes the flexible structure (13.2-56) more rigid at these locations. Therefore, positioning the high-stiffness sections (13.2-60-1) at the same locations reinforces the high-stiffness sections.

Figure 398b illustrates another dimension (13.2-96) of a removable cushion that can be customized. The dimension (13.2-96) may be referred to as the height of the cushion along its upper edge (e.g., in the Z direction). The upper edge of the cushion may be adjacent to the user's forehead during use and, therefore, may sometimes be referred to as the forehead portion of the cushion. Some users may prefer a higher upper edge height (13.2-96) than others for maximum comfort. Accordingly, a user may select a removable cushion (13.2-60) having an optimal upper edge height (13.2-96) according to his or her needs. Height (13.2-96) can be greater than 3 millimeters, greater than 5 millimeters, greater than 10 millimeters, greater than 15 millimeters, greater than 20 millimeters, greater than 30 millimeters, greater than 50 millimeters, less than 3 millimeters, less than 5 millimeters, less than 10 millimeters, less than 15 millimeters, less than 20 millimeters, less than 30 millimeters, less than 50 millimeters, 5 millimeters to 30 millimeters, etc.

Dimension (13.2-98) (as shown in FIG. 398b) can also be customized. Dimension (13.2-98) can be referred to as the total height of the cushion (e.g., in the Z direction). The total height can influence factors such as the distance between the upper edge of the cushion and the user's eyebrows. Some users may prefer a greater distance between the upper edge of the cushion and the user's eyebrows for maximum comfort than others. Accordingly, the user can select a removable cushion (13.2-60) having an optimal height (13.2-98) according to his or her needs. Height (13.2-98) can be more than 5 centimeters, more than 8 centimeters, more than 10 centimeters, more than 15 centimeters, more than 20 centimeters, less than 8 centimeters, less than 10 centimeters, less than 15 centimeters, less than 20 centimeters, 5 centimeters to 15 centimeters, etc.

The head-mounted support structure (13.2-12) and/or the removable cushion (13.2-60) may include attachment structures used to secure the removable cushion (13.2-60) to the head-mounted support structure. FIG. 399a is a rear view of the flexible posterior structure (13.2-56) (of the head-mounted support structure (13.2-12)) showing how the flexible posterior structure may include one or more primary attachment structures (13.2-82P) and optionally one or more auxiliary attachment structures (13.2-82A). FIG. 399b is a rear view of the removable cushion (13.2-60) showing how the removable cushion may include one or more primary attachment structures (13.2-84P) and optionally one or more auxiliary attachment structures (13.2-84A).

Each primary attachment structure (13.2-82P) within the flexible rear structure (13.2-56) can be configured to be attached to a corresponding primary attachment structure (13.2-84P) within the removable cushion (13.2-60). Similarly, each secondary attachment structure (13.2-82A) within the flexible rear structure (13.2-56) can be configured to be attached to a corresponding secondary attachment structure (13.2-84A) within the removable cushion (13.2-60). As illustrated in FIG. 399a, each primary attachment structure (13.2-82P) within the flexible rear structure (13.2-56) can be aligned in the Y direction with a corresponding primary attachment structure (13.2-84P) within the removable cushion (13.2-60), and each secondary attachment structure (13.2-82A) within the flexible rear structure (13.2-56) can be aligned in the Y direction with a corresponding secondary attachment structure (13.2-84A) within the removable cushion (13.2-60).

A variety of attachment structures can be used in the attachment structures (13.2-82P, 13.2-84P, 13.2-82A, 13.2-84A). The attachment structure can include a protrusion, a recess, a groove, a post, a magnet, a flexible fabric, a hook, a loop, a snap, a button, a suction cup, a drawstring, a zipper, an adhesive (e.g., tape), a flexible band, or any other desired type of attachment structure.

As some specific examples of possible attachment structures, the primary attachment structures (13.2-82P) on the flexible structure (13.2-56) may be protrusions configured to mate with (interlock with) corresponding recesses (13.2-84P) on the cushion (13.2-60). The primary attachment structures (13.2-82P) on the flexible structure (13.2-56) may be magnets (e.g., permanent magnets) configured to magnetically couple with corresponding magnets (13.2-84P) on the cushion (13.2-60). The primary attachment structures (13.2-82P, 13.2-84P) may form hook-loop fasteners (e.g., hooks on the structures (13.2-56) and loops on the cushion (13.2-60) or vice versa). The primary attachment structures (13.2-82P, 13.2-84P) may form snap fasteners. First halves of the snaps may be formed on the structures (13.2-56) and may have recesses, and second halves of the snaps may be formed on the cushion (13.2-60) and may have protrusions having grooves that snap into place when pressed into the recesses (or vice versa). As another example, the primary attachment structures (13.2-82P) on the flexible structure (13.2-56) may be grooves configured to mate with (interlock with) corresponding posts (13.2-84P) on the cushion (13.2-60). As another example, the primary attachment structures (13.2-82P) on the flexible structure (13.2-56) may be posts. The cushion (13.2-60) may have a layer (ring) of flexible fabric configured to stretch around the posts. As another example, the rear flexible structure (13.2-56) may include an attached fabric channel. A removable cushion is then placed in the fabric channel during operation.

The specific examples of locations for the main attachment structures (13.2-82P, 13.2-84P) of FIGS. 399a and 399b are merely exemplary. Alternatively, the main attachment structures may be included in any desired locations.

The primary attachment structures may be the primary mechanism by which the removable cushion is secured to the head-mounted support structure. However, auxiliary attachment structures (13.2-82A, 13.2-84A) may also be included to provide additional attachment strength and/or ensure a tight light seal. As illustrated in FIG. 399B, the auxiliary attachment structures (13.2-82A, 13.2-84A) may be included along the left and right edges of the posterior flexible structure and the removable cushion. The posterior flexible structure and the removable cushion may typically have a high degree of curvature in these areas (due to the curvature of the user's face) when the head-mounted device is in operation. This high degree of curvature may make the cushion and the posterior flexible structure vulnerable to light leakage (e.g., through the gap between the cushion and the posterior flexible structure when the cushion and the posterior flexible structure are bent to conform to the user's face). The auxiliary attachment structures (13.2-82A, 13.2-84A) in these high-risk areas can ensure a tight seal around the entire periphery of the removable cushion and the rear flexible structure. The specific examples of locations for the auxiliary attachment structures (13.2-82A, 13.2-84A) in FIGS. 399A and 399B are merely exemplary. Alternatively, the auxiliary attachment structures can be included in any desired locations (e.g., adjacent to/between any desired primary attachment structures).

The auxiliary attachment structures (13.2-82A, 13.2-84A) may form hook-loop fasteners (e.g., hooks on the structures (13.2-56) and loops on the cushion (13.2-60) or vice versa). The auxiliary attachment structures (13.2-82A, 13.2-84A) may alternatively form snap fasteners. First halves of the snaps may be formed on the structures (13.2-56) and may have recesses, and second halves of the snaps may be formed on the cushion (13.2-60) and may have protrusions with grooves that snap into place when pressed into the recesses (or vice versa). Alternatively, any of the attachment structures described above may be used in the auxiliary attachment structures.

If desired, multiple types of attachment structures may be used at each attachment point to ensure secure attachment between the removable cushion (13.2-60) and the head-mounted support structure (13.2-12). FIG. 400 is a cross-sectional plan view of an exemplary head-mounted device illustrating how protrusions, recesses, and magnets may be used to secure the removable cushion (13.2-60) to the head-mounted support structure (13.2-12). As depicted in FIG. 400, the protrusions (13.2-82P-2) extend from the flexible rear structure (13.2-56) in the -Y direction (e.g., toward the removable cushion (13.2-60)). The removable cushion (13.2-60) has corresponding recesses (13.2-84P-2). Each recess (13.2-84P-2) can mate with a corresponding protrusion (13.2-82P-2).

In addition to the protrusions and recesses, magnets are also used as attachment structures for the head-mounted device. As illustrated in FIG. 400, magnets (13.2-82P-1) may be embedded within protrusions (13.2-82P-2). A single magnet may be embedded within each protrusion, or multiple magnets may be embedded within each protrusion. A corresponding magnet (13.2-84P-1) may be formed in a cushion structure (13.2-58) adjacent to each recess (13.2-84P-2). When the removable structure (13.2-60) is attached to the head-mounted support structure, the protrusions (13.2-82P-2) extend into and mate with the recesses (13.2-84P-2). When the protrusions (13.2-82P-2) and recesses (13.2-84P-2) are aligned, the magnets (13.2-82P-1) will also be magnetically coupled to the magnets (13.2-84P-1). This provides additional security for the attachment of the removable cushion and prevents the removable cushion from falling off the head-mounted support structure due to gravity.

The example of Fig. 400 is merely exemplary. In addition to the primary attachment structures of protrusions, recesses, and magnets, auxiliary attachment structures such as snaps or hook-and-loop fasteners may also be included to secure the removable cushion to the head-mounted support structure (13.2-12) and ensure a tight optical seal.

In some examples, the protrusions (13.2-82P-2) may be formed integrally with the rear flexible structure (13.2-56) or may be formed of a separate material that is attached to the rear flexible structure (13.2-56). Alternatively, in the arrangement of FIG. 400, the protrusions (13.2-82P-2) are formed integrally with the support posts (13.2-54). That is, portions of the support posts (13.2-54) extend through openings in the rear flexible structure (13.2-56) to form the attachment structures (13.2-82P-2). The support posts (13.2-54) may also extend through openings in a fabric layer (13.2-64) (that covers the head-mounted support structure (13.2-12)). In this manner, the support post protrusions (13.2-82P-2) serve as visual indicators to indicate to the user that the head-mounted support structure is not yet attached to the removable cushion. The support post protrusions (13.2-82P-2) also provide recognizable alignment markers that allow the user to easily align and attach the removable cushion to the head-mounted support structure.

Figure 401 is a rear view of an exemplary removable cushion (13.2-60). As shown in Figure 401, the removable cushion may have one or more integrated hinge structures (13.2-86). The hinge structures (13.2-86) may be formed by highly flexible portions of the cushion member. Alternatively, the collapsible portions (13.2-86) may be formed by posts formed separately from the cushion member. The hinge structures (13.2-86) allow rotation of portions of the cushion member relative to other portions of the cushion member. Each hinge structure (13.2-86) may allow rotation of the cushion member about a respective bending axis (13.2-88). Therefore, the presence of the hinge structures (13.2-86) may allow the cushion member to be folded to have a smaller footprint than when unfolded, thereby increasing the portability of the cushion member.

In one possible arrangement, each hinge structure (13.2-86) may be formed by a post that allows rotation of adjacent cushion sections relative to one another. The post may optionally also function as an attachment structure for attaching the removable cushion to the head-mounted support structure. For example, the head-mounted support structure may have a groove, and the post (defining the hinge structure for the cushion) may slide into the groove for attaching the removable cushion to the head-mounted support structure.

The example of two hinge structures included in a removable cushion is merely exemplary. Alternatively, any desired number of hinge structures may be included in a removable cushion.

FIG. 402 is a schematic diagram of a system (13.2-200) including a head-mounted support structure (13.2-12) (having optical modules (13.2-16L/13.2-16R) and other associated electronics therein) and a plurality of removable cushions (13.2-60). As previously illustrated and discussed, one of the removable cushions may be attached to the head-mounted support structure to form a head-mounted device (13.2-10) having the attached cushion.

The system (13.2-200) may include any desired number of removable cushions (13.2-60-1 to 13.2-60-N) having different characteristics. As previously discussed, the various characteristics of the removable cushions may include color, thickness, top edge height, overall height, any other desired dimension, material ductility, or any other desired characteristic.

For example, a user may select a removable cushion in a desired color from a variety of color options. A user may select a removable cushion with a thickness that optimizes the optical characteristics (e.g., interpupillary distance) of the head-mounted device. A user may select a removable cushion with a desired top height to maximize comfort when wearing the head-mounted device.

The system (13.2-200) may include any desired number of removable cushions, each having a unique set of characteristics. As an example, a user may purchase a head-mounted device and receive a head-mounted support structure and a plurality of removable cushions having various sizes (e.g., thicknesses and/or overall heights). The plurality of removable cushions may include a small removable cushion, a medium removable cushion that is at least one size larger than the small removable cushion, and a large removable cushion that is at least one size larger than the medium removable cushion. The user may attach his or her preferred removable cushion to the head-mounted support structure prior to using the head-mounted device.

As another example, a user may select his or her preferred removable cushion (e.g., preferred color, size, etc.) when purchasing a head-mounted device. The user may receive his or her preferred removable cushion in addition to the head-mounted support structure, and may attach his or her preferred removable cushion to the head-mounted support structure prior to using the head-mounted device. The removable cushion may then be repeatedly removed and cleaned throughout the life of the head-mounted device.

According to some examples, a head-mounted device is provided, comprising a head-mounted support structure comprising a rigid structure, a flexible structure, and support structures coupling the flexible structure to the rigid structure, the flexible structure at least partially defining a central opening, left and right optical assemblies configured to display images, the left and right optical assemblies being coupled to the head-mounted support structure, and a removable cushion configured to be selectively attached to the flexible structure, the removable cushion at least partially surrounding the central opening.

According to some examples, the left and right optical assemblies are observable through a central opening, the head-mounted support structure is covered by a first fabric layer, the removable cushion is covered by a second fabric layer, the removable cushion has first portions having a first stiffness and second portions having a second stiffness, the removable cushion has recesses and first magnets, at least one of the first magnets is adjacent to each recess, the head-mounted support structure includes protrusions in a flexible structure extending away from the rigid structure, each protrusion configured to mate with a respective recess of the removable cushion when the removable cushion is attached to the flexible structure, and second magnets, at least one of the second magnets being positioned in each protrusion, the first magnets being configured to magnetically couple to the second magnets when the removable cushion is attached to the flexible structure.

In some embodiments, the left and right optical assemblies are viewable through a central opening. In some embodiments, the head-mounted support structure is covered by a fabric layer. In some embodiments, the support structures are configured to protrude past the flexible structure and through the openings in the fabric layer. In some embodiments, the removable cushion has recesses configured to receive protruding portions of the support structures when the removable cushion is attached to the flexible structure. In some embodiments, first magnets are formed in the removable cushion adjacent the recesses, second magnets are formed in the protruding portions of the support structures, and the first magnets are configured to magnetically couple to the second magnets when the removable cushion is attached to the flexible structure.

In some examples, the flexible structure includes a first auxiliary attachment structure between the first and second protrusions, the removable cushion includes a second auxiliary attachment structure between the first and second recesses, and the first auxiliary attachment structure is configured to engage the second auxiliary attachment structure when the removable cushion is attached to the flexible structure. In some examples, the first and second auxiliary attachment structures include hook-and-loop fasteners. In some embodiments, the removable cushion includes a cushion covered by a fabric layer.

According to some embodiments, the first magnets are formed on the removable cushion, the second magnets are formed on the head-mounted support structure, and the first magnets are configured to magnetically couple to the second magnets when the removable cushion is attached to the flexible structure. In some examples, the removable cushion has first portions having a first stiffness and second portions having a second stiffness less than the first stiffness. In some examples, each of the first portions is aligned with a respective support structure. In some examples, the removable cushion includes a hinge structure that allows the first portion of the removable cushion to rotate relative to the second portion of the removable cushion.

According to some examples, a head-mounted device is provided, comprising: a head-mounted support structure, the head-mounted support structure including a flexible portion configured to conform to a face when the head-mounted support structure is worn, a rigid portion separated from the flexible portion by a gap, side portions bridging the gap between the rigid portion and the flexible portion, protrusions on the flexible portion extending away from the rigid portion, and a first set of magnets each positioned on each of the protrusions; and a removable cushion configured to be selectively attached to the flexible portion, the removable cushion being configured to conform to and directly contact the face when the head-mounted support structure is worn while the removable cushion is attached, the removable cushion including recesses configured to mate with the protrusions of the head-mounted support structure and a second set of magnets configured to magnetically couple to the first set of magnets. In some examples, the head-mounted support structure is covered by a fabric layer and the protrusions extend through openings in the fabric layer. In some examples, the protrusions are formed by side portions. In some examples, the head-mounted device includes left and right optical assemblies configured to display images, the left and right optical assemblies being formed within an interior volume of the head-mounted support structure.

According to some examples, a system is provided that includes a head-mounted support structure, left and right optical assemblies configured to display images, the left and right optical assemblies being coupled to the head-mounted support structure, and a plurality of removable cushions, each of the removable cushions being configured to be selectively attached to the head-mounted support structure, each of the plurality of removable cushions having a characteristic unique to that characteristic within the remaining removable cushions. In some examples, the characteristic comprises a characteristic selected from the group consisting of color, thickness, cushion material, total height, and top edge height.

13.3: Electronic devices having light-blocking fabrics

An electronic device, such as a head-mounted device, may have a front surface facing away from a user's head and a rear surface facing toward the user's head. The head-mounted device may include a main housing portion having displays for displaying images and optical modules through which images are viewable from eye boxes. A face frame coupled to the main housing portion may form an optical seal around the eye boxes. The optical seal may include one or more fabric layers, such as knitted fabric layers. The optical seal may include inner and outer fabric layers, a face portion that rests against the user's face, and a nose bridge portion that accommodates the user's nose. The outer fabric layer may be a seamless tube of knitted fabric that forms the outermost layer of the optical seal. The inner fabric layer may be a light-blocking fabric that lines the inner surface of the seamless tube of knitted fabric. The knitted fabric may have a modified bird's eye pattern that includes knit stitches and chin stitches. The tuck stitches can provide additional longitudinal stretch to the fabric to prevent the optical seal fabric from buckling when the head-mounted device is placed on the user's head. The tuck stitches also allow the differently colored strands to be visible on the outer surface of the optical seal.

The light-blocking fabric may include a dark-colored weft knit layer facing the eye box, a light-colored weft knit layer facing the seamless tubes of the knitted fabric, and an intermediate layer connecting the light-colored weft knit layer and the dark-colored weft knit layer. The light-colored weft knit layer may match the color of the seamless tubes of the knitted fabric. The dark-colored weft knit layer may ensure sufficient opacity so that light is not visible through the seamless tubes of the knitted fabric.

A plan view of an exemplary head-mounted device that may include a fabric optical seal is illustrated in FIG. 403. As illustrated in FIG. 403, head-mounted devices, such as electronic devices (13.3-10), may have head-mounted support structures, such as a housing (13.3-12). The housing (13.3-12) may include portions (e.g., support structures (13.3-12T)) that allow the device (13.3-10) to be worn on a user's head. The support structures (13.3-12T) (sometimes referred to as temple housing structures or temple housing portions) may be formed of fabric, polymer, metal, and/or other materials. The support structures (13.3-12T) may form straps or other head-mounted support structures that assist in supporting the device (13.3-10) on the user's head. Partial or full portions of the temple housing portions (13.3-12T) may overlap the user's temples when the device (13.3-10) is worn on the user's head. A main support structure of the housing (13.3-12) (e.g., main housing portion (13.3-12M)) may support electronic components, such as displays (13.3-14). The main housing portion (13.3-12M) may include housing structures formed from metal, polymer, glass, ceramic, and/or other materials. For example, the housing portion (13.3-12M) may have housing walls on the top, bottom, left, and right sides adjacent to a housing wall on the front side (F) formed from a rigid polymer or other rigid support structure, and these rigid walls may optionally be covered with electronic components, fabric, leather, or other flexible material. The walls of the housing portion (13.3-12M) may enclose internal components (13.3-38) of the internal region (13.3-34) of the device (13.3-10) and may separate the internal region (13.3-34) from an environment (external region (13.3-36)) surrounding the device (13.3-10). The internal components (13.3-38) may include integrated circuits, actuators, batteries, sensors, and/or other circuits and structures for the device (13.3-10). The housing (13.3-12) may be configured to be worn on a user's head and may form eyeglasses, a hat, a helmet, goggles, and/or other head-mounted devices. A configuration in which the housing (13.3-12) forms goggles may sometimes be described herein as an example.

The front side (F) of the housing (13.3-12) may face outward from the user's head and face. The opposite rear side (R) of the housing (13.3-12) may face the user. Portions of the housing (13.3-12) on the rear side (R) (e.g., portions of the main housing (13.3-12M)) may form a cover, such as a curtain (13.3-12C). In some examples, the curtain (13.3-12C) includes a fabric layer that separates the interior region (13.3-34) from the exterior region to the rear of the device (13.3-10). Other structures may be used to form the curtain (13.3-12C), if desired. The presence of a curtain (13.3-12C) on the rear surface (R) may help conceal the internal housing structure, internal components (13.3-38) and other structures of the internal area (13.3-34) from the user's view.

The device (13.3-10) may have left and right optical modules (13.3-40). Each optical module may include a respective display (13.3-14), a lens (13.3-30), and a support structure (13.3-32). The support structures (13.3-32), which may sometimes be referred to as lens barrels or optical module support structures, may include hollow cylindrical structures having open ends or other support structures for housing the displays (13.3-14) and lenses (13.3-30). The support structures (13.3-32) may include, for example, a left lens barrel supporting the left display (13.3-14) and the left lens (13.3-30), and a right lens barrel supporting the right display (13.3-14) and the right lens (13.3-30). The displays (13.3-14) may include arrays of pixels or other display devices for generating images. The displays (13.3-14) may include, for example, organic light-emitting diode pixels formed on substrates having thin film circuitry and/or formed on semiconductor substrates, pixels formed from crystalline semiconductor dies, liquid crystal display pixels, scanning display devices, and/or other display devices for generating images. The lenses (13.3-30) may include one or more lens elements for providing image light from the displays (13.3-14) to the respective eye boxes (13.3-13). The lenses may be implemented using refractive glass lens elements, mirror lens structures (catadioptric lenses), holographic lenses, and/or other lens systems. When the user's eyes are positioned on the eye boxes (13.3-13), the displays (display panels) (13.3-14) work together to form a display for the device (13.3-10) (e.g., images provided by each of the left and right optical modules (13.3-40) can be viewed by the user's eyes at the eye boxes (13.3-13) so that a stereo image can be created for the user). While the user views the display, the left image from the left optical module is fused with the right image from the right optical module.

Not all users have the same interpupillary distance (P). To provide a device (13.3-10) having the ability to adjust the interpupillary spacing between the modules (13.3-40) along the lateral dimension (X) and thereby adjust the spacing (P) between the eye boxes (13.3-13) to accommodate different user interpupillary distances, the device (13.3-10) may be provided with one or more actuators (13.3-42). The actuators (13.3-42) may be manually controlled to move the support structures (13.3-32) relative to one another and/or may be computer-controlled actuators (e.g., computer-controlled motors).

As illustrated in FIG. 404, the curtain (13.3-12C) may cover the rear face (F) while leaving the lenses (13.3-30) of the optical modules (13.3-40) uncovered (e.g., the curtain (13.3-12C) may have openings aligned with and accommodating the modules (13.3-40). As the modules (13.3-40) are translated relative to one another along the dimension (X) to accommodate different pupillary distances for different users, the modules (13.3-40) move relative to fixed housing structures, such as the walls of the main portion (13.3-12M), and relative to one another. To prevent undesirable wrinkling and bending of the curtain (13.3-12C) as the optical modules (13.3-40) move relative to the rigid portions of the housing (13.3-12M) and relative to each other, a fabric layer or other covering layer in the curtain (13.3-12C) may be configured to slide, stretch, open, and/or otherwise adjust to accommodate the optical module movement.

A schematic diagram of an exemplary electronic device, such as a head-mounted device or other wearable device, is illustrated in FIG. 405. The device (13.3-10) of FIG. 405 may operate as a standalone device and/or the resources of the device (13.3-10) may be used to communicate with external electronic equipment. For example, communication circuitry in the device (13.3-10) may be used to transmit user input information, sensor information, and/or other information (e.g., wirelessly or via a wired connection) to external electronic devices. Each of these external devices may include components of the type illustrated by the device (13.3-10) of FIG. 405.

As illustrated in FIG. 405, a head-mounted device, such as device (13.3-10), may include control circuitry (13.3-20). The control circuitry (13.3-20) may include storage and processing circuitry to support the operation of the device (13.3-10). The storage and processing circuitry may include storage, such as non-volatile memory (e.g., flash memory or other electrically programmable read-only memory configured to form a solid-state drive), volatile memory (e.g., static or dynamic random access memory), etc. Processing circuitry within the control circuitry (13.3-20) may be used to collect input from sensors and other input devices, and may be used to control output devices. The processing circuitry may be based on one or more microprocessors, microcontrollers, digital signal processors, baseband processors, and other wireless communication circuits, power management units, audio chips, application-specific integrated circuits, etc. During operation, the control circuitry (13.3-20) may use display(s) (13.3-14) and other output devices to provide visual and other outputs to the user.

To support communication between the device (13.3-10) and external equipment, the control circuitry (13.3-20) may communicate using communication circuitry (13.3-22). The circuitry (13.3-22) may include an antenna, radio frequency transceiver circuitry, other wireless communication circuitry, and/or wired communication circuitry. The circuitry (13.3-22), which may sometimes be referred to as control circuitry and/or control and communication circuitry, may support bidirectional wireless communication between the device (13.3-10) and external equipment (e.g., a companion device, such as a computer, a cellular telephone, or other electronic device, an accessory, such as a pointing device, a computer stylus, or other input device, a speaker, or other output devices, etc.) over a wireless link. For example, the circuitry (13.3-22) may include radio frequency transceiver circuitry, such as wireless local area network transceiver circuitry configured to support communication over a wireless local area network link, near field communication transceiver circuitry configured to support communication over a near field communication link, cellular telephone transceiver circuitry configured to support communication over a cellular telephone link, or transceiver circuitry configured to support communication over any other suitable wired or wireless communication link. The wireless communication may be supported, for example, via a Bluetooth® link, a WiFi® link, a wireless link operating at a frequency between 10 GHz and 400 GHz, a 60 GHz link or other millimeter wave link, a cellular telephone link, or other wireless communication link. If desired, the device (13.3-10) may include power circuitry for transmitting and/or receiving wired and/or wireless power and may include a battery or other energy storage device. For example, the device (13.3-10) may include a coil and a rectifier for receiving wireless power provided to the circuit portion of the device (13.3-10).

The device (13.3-10) may include an input/output device, such as the device (13.3-24). The input/output device (13.3-24) may be used to collect user input, collect information about the user's surroundings, and/or provide output to the user. The device (13.3-24) may include one or more displays, such as the display(s) (13.3-14). The display(s) (13.3-14) may include one or more display devices, such as an organic light emitting diode display panel (a panel in which organic light emitting diode pixels are formed on a polymer substrate or a silicon substrate including pixel control circuitry), a liquid crystal display panel, a microelectromechanical system display (e.g., a two-dimensional mirror array or scanning mirror display device), a display panel having an array of pixels formed of crystalline semiconductor light emitting diode dies (sometimes referred to as microLEDs), and/or other display devices.

The sensors (13.3-16) of the input/output devices (13.3-24) may include force sensors (e.g., strain gauges, capacitive force sensors, resistive sensors, etc.), audio sensors such as microphones, touch and/or proximity sensors, capacitive sensors such as touch sensors forming buttons, trackpads, or other input devices, and other sensors. If desired, sensors (13.3-16) may include optical sensors, e.g., optical sensors that emit and detect light, ultrasonic sensors, optical touch sensors, optical proximity sensors, and/or other touch sensors and/or proximity sensors, monochrome and color ambient light sensors, image sensors, fingerprint sensors, iris scanning sensors, retina scanning sensors, and other biometric sensors, temperature sensors, sensors for measuring three-dimensional non-contact gestures ("air gestures"), pressure sensors, sensors for detecting position, orientation, and/or motion (e.g., accelerometers, magnetic sensors, e.g., compass sensors, gyroscopes, and/or inertial measurement units including some or all of these sensors), health sensors such as blood oxygen sensors, heart rate sensors, blood flow sensors, and/or other health sensors, radio frequency sensors, depth sensors (e.g., stereo imaging devices that capture three-dimensional images). The device (13.3-10) may include sensors (13.3-16) and/or other input/output devices to collect user input. For example, buttons may be used to collect button press input, touch sensors overlapping the displays may be used to collect user touch screen input, touch pads may be used to collect touch input, microphones may be used to collect audio input, accelerometers may be used to monitor when a finger makes contact with an input surface and thus collect finger press input, and so on.

If desired, the electronic device (13.3-10) may include additional components (see, e.g., other devices (13.3-18) of the input/output device (13.3-24)). Additional components may include a haptic output device, an actuator for moving the movable housing structure, an audio output device, e.g., a speaker, a light emitting diode for status indication, a light source, e.g., a light emitting diode for illuminating a portion of the housing and/or display structure, other light output devices, and/or other circuitry for collecting input and/or providing output. The device (13.3-10) may also include a battery or other energy storage device, a connector port for supporting wired communication with auxiliary equipment and for receiving wired power, and other circuitry.

FIG. 406 is a perspective view of a device (13.3-10) showing how a facial frame may form an optical seal around the eye boxes (13.3-13) (FIG. 403) to help prevent external light from leaking into the viewing area of the head-mounted device (13.3-10). As illustrated in FIG. 406, the device (13.3-10) may include a main housing portion (13.3-12M) configured to be mounted on a user's head. To help block external light (e.g., ambient light in the user's environment that is not emitted by the displays (13.3-14) of the device (13.3-10)) from entering the viewing area of the head-mounted device (13.3-10) where the eye boxes (13.3-13) are positioned, an optical seal, such as an optical seal (13.3-52), may be formed between the main housing portion (13.3-12M) and the user's face. For example, the optical seal (13.3-52) may extend between the main housing portion (13.3-12M) and the temple housing portions (13.3-12T) (FIG. 403) to help prevent light from entering any gaps between the device (13.3-10) and the user's face.

The optical seal (13.3-52) (sometimes referred to as a face frame (13.3-52)) may include one or more rigid structures, such as a rigid inner frame member or other rigid structure, and one or more flexible materials, such as fabric, foam, polymer, or other suitable materials. For example, the optical seal (13.3-52) may include a ring-shaped or horseshoe-shaped frame surrounding the eye box (13.3-13) (FIG. 403) and covered by one or more layers of fabric. As illustrated in FIG. 406, the optical seal (13.3-52) may include one or more different fabric layers, such as an outer fabric layer (13.3-72), an inner fabric layer (13.3-58), a nose bridge fabric (13.3-60), and a face fabric (13.3-56). The face fabric (13.3-56) may be positioned against the user's face when the device (13.3-10) is worn on the user's head. The face fabric (13.3-56) may include one or more layers of foam covered with one or more layers of fabric (e.g., a warp knit fabric, a weft knit fabric, a spacer fabric, a woven fabric, and/or any other suitable fabric). The nose bridge fabric (13.3-60) may be formed of a stretchable fabric to accommodate different nose shapes.

The outer fabric layer (13.3-72) may be a seamless tube of fabric that loops around the optical axes (A) of the lenses (13.3-30) of the optical modules (13.3-40). The optical axis (A) of each lens (13.3-30) extends parallel to the Y-direction of FIG. 406. The longitudinal direction (L) of the outer fabric layer (13.3-72) may extend parallel to the optical axes (A) of the lenses (13.3-30) (and thus parallel to the Y-axis of FIG. 406), while the width direction (W) of the outer fabric layer (13.3-72) may extend perpendicular to the optical axes (A) of the lenses (13.3-30) of the optical modules (13.3-40). In a knitted fabric, rows of loops (referred to as courses) extend in the width direction (W), while columns of loops (referred to as wales) extend in the length direction (L).

An outer fabric layer (13.3-72) may, if desired, form the outermost surface of the device (13.3-10). The outer layer (13.3-72) may be formed of a fabric, such as a knitted fabric (e.g., a warp knit fabric, a weft knit fabric), a woven fabric, a spacer fabric (e.g., inner and outer knit layers separated by a gap and connected by a spacer layer, such as monofilament strands), a braided fabric, and/or any other suitable fabric. In some examples, the outer fabric layer (13.3-72) is a stretchable, seamless tube of a weft knit fabric having (for example) a bird's eye pattern or other suitable two-color pattern. Arrangements in which the outer layer (13.3-72) is formed of non-fabric materials, such as polymers, silicones, or elastomers, may also be used. Arrangements in which the outer fabric layer (13.4-72) of the optical seal (13.4-52) is formed of a stretch fabric are sometimes described as examples herein.

If desired, the outer fabric layer (13.3-72) can be formed as a knitted fabric having a bird's eye pattern using two types of strands, such as strands having a first characteristic (e.g., a first color, material, fuzziness, denier, elasticity, etc.) and strands having a second characteristic (e.g., a second color, material, fuzziness, denier, elasticity, etc.). The two types of strands can be visible on the outer surface of the outer fabric layer (13.3-72) to provide color variations, material variations, texture variations, etc. on the outer surface of the outer fabric layer (13.3-72). For example, the color variations on the outer surface of the outer fabric layer (13.3-72) can form a checker pattern, a stripe pattern, a diamond pattern, a grid pattern, a dot pattern, or any other suitable pattern alternating between the first color and the second color (e.g., black and white, white and gray, gray and black, etc.).

If not careful, the outer fabric layer (13.3-72) may not have sufficient elongation in the longitudinal direction (L), which may then cause the outer fabric layer (13.3-72) to buckle (e.g., form wrinkles) when the face seal (13.3-52) is pressed against the user's face. To avoid buckling in the outer fabric layer (13.3-72), the outer fabric layer (13.3-72) may include one or more tuck stitches. The tuck stitches may be used in place of miss stitches (sometimes referred to as float stitches) to add elongation in the longitudinal direction (L). The tuck stitches provide additional elongation in the longitudinal direction (L) of the outer fabric layer (13.3-72) while allowing the outer fabric layer (13.3-72) to have a bird's eye pattern (to allow for color variation across the outer surface of the outer fabric layer (13.3-72).

The inner fabric layer (13.3-58) may be a light-blocking fabric that lines the inner surface of the outer fabric layer (13.3-72) of the light seal (13.3-52). The inner fabric layer (13.3-58) may be formed of one or more opaque (e.g., black) fabric layers. The inner fabric layer (13.3-58) may include one or more layers of knitted fabric, warp knit fabric, weft knit fabric, woven fabric, spacer fabric, braided fabric, and/or any other suitable type of fabric. It may be desirable to use a dark-colored fabric for the inner fabric layer (13.3-58) to help maintain a sufficiently dark viewing area around the eye boxes (13.3-13) while the user views images on the displays (13.3-14) of the device (13.3-10). However, if care is not taken, the dark color of the inner fabric layer (13.3-58) may be visible through the outer fabric layer (13.3-72). For example, if the outer fabric layer (13.3-72) is a light color, such as white or gray, and the inner fabric layer (13.3-58) is a dark color, such as black, the black of the inner fabric layer (13.3-58) may be visible through gaps or openings between the strands within the outer fabric layer (13.3-72), which may be visually distracting. If the inner fabric layer (13.3-58) is instead made of a light colored fabric, such as white or gray, the inner fabric layer (13.3-58) may not be visible through the outer fabric layer (13.3-72), but the opacity of the inner fabric layer (13.3-58) may be reduced, which may lead to an unsatisfactory viewing experience if care is not taken.

To prevent the inner fabric layer (13.3-58) from being excessively visible through the outer fabric layer (13.3-72) without compromising opacity, the inner fabric layer (13.3-58) may include one or more dark-colored inner fabric layers on the viewing side (e.g., facing the lenses (13.3-30) and eye boxes (13.3-13) of the optical modules (13.3-40)) and one or more light-colored outer fabric layers on the non-viewing side (e.g., facing the outer fabric layer (13.3-72)). The dark-colored inner fabric layer of the inner fabric layer (13.3-58) may be black, dark gray, or other suitable dark color, while the light-colored outer fabric layer of the inner fabric layer (13.3-58) may be white, gray, light gray, cream, off-white, or other suitable light color. The dark inner layer and the light outer layer of the inner fabric layer (13.3-58) may be overknit layers, if desired, joined by an intermediate spacer layer. For example, a spacer layer formed of multifilament or monofilament strands may be used to connect the dark inner layer and the light outer layer of the inner fabric layer (13.3-58). The spacer layer may be a drawn textured yarn having a low denier value, such as 20D or other suitable denier value, so that the spacer layer has sufficient density to block external light from entering the viewing area. If desired, the strands constituting the inner fabric layer (13.3-58) may be extruded, solution-dyed strands having high texture and high elongation, thereby increasing the shrinkage and opacity of the inner fabric layer (13.3-58).

A knitting machine or other equipment may be used to form a fabric for the device (13.3-10), such as an inner fabric layer (13.3-58). FIG. 407A is a schematic diagram of an exemplary knitting system. As shown in FIG. 407A, a strand source (13.3-66) within the knitting system (13.3-64) may be used to supply strands (13.3-68) to guide and needle structures (13.3-70). The structures (13.3-70) may include strand guide structures (e.g., a system of movable guide bars having eyelets that guide the strands (13.3-68)) and needle systems (e.g., needle guide systems that guide sets of individually adjustable needles such that the needles interact with strands dispensed by the guide bars). During the operations, the controller can control electrically adjustable positioners within the system (13.3-64) to manipulate the positions of the guide bars and needles within the system (13.3-64) to knit the strands (13.3-68) into the fabric (13.3-58). A take down (13.3-74) (e.g., a pair of matching rollers or other equipment forming a take down system) can be used to collect the fabric (13.3-58) produced during knitting.

A knitting machine or other equipment may be used to form a fabric for the device (13.4-10), such as an outer fabric layer (13.4-72). FIG. 407b is a schematic diagram of an exemplary knitting system. As shown in FIG. 407b, a strand source (13.4-66) within the knitting system (13.4-64) may be used to supply strands (13.4-68) to guide and needle structures (13.4-70). The structures (13.4-70) may include strand guide structures (e.g., a system of movable guide bars having eyelets that guide the strands (13.4-68)) and needle systems (e.g., needle guide systems that guide sets of individually adjustable needles such that the needles interact with strands dispensed by the guide bars). During the operations, the controller can control electrically adjustable positioners within the system (13.4-64) to manipulate the positions of the guide bars and needles within the system (13.4-64) to knit the strands (13.4-68) into the fabric (13.4-72). A take-down (13.4-74) (e.g., a pair of matching rollers or other equipment forming a take-down system) can be used to collect the fabric (13.4-72) produced during knitting.

Figure 408 is a drawing of a layer of a knit fabric that may be included in an inner fabric layer (13.3-58). A knit fabric, such as fabric (13.3-58), may be composed of courses (13.3-78) (e.g., rows of loops formed by strands (13.3-68)) and wales (13.3-76) (e.g., columns of loops formed by strands (13.3-68)). In a knit fabric of the type illustrated in Figure 408 (sometimes referred to as a flat knit fabric), the strands (13.3-68) form loops that extend horizontally across the fabric. Among the strands (13.3-68), an exemplary strand (13.3-68') is highlighted to show the horizontal path taken by each strand (13.3-68) within the fabric (13.3-72). In contrast, the warp knit fabric includes wales (13.3-76) formed by the strands (13.3-68) that follow zigzag paths vertically down the fabric.

A cross-sectional side view of a portion of an optical seal (13.3-52) of a device (13.3-10) is illustrated in FIG. 409. As depicted in FIG. 409, the optical seal (13.3-52) may include an inner fabric layer (13.3-58) and an outer fabric layer (13.3-72). The outer fabric layer (13.3-72) may form the outermost surface of the optical seal (13.3-52) and may be observed by an external observer, such as an observer (13.3-80), in a direction (13.3-82). The inner fabric layer (13.3-58) may line the inner surface of the outer fabric layer (13.3-72) and may face eye boxes, such as eye boxes (13.3-13). When the device (13.3-10) is placed on the user's head, the user's eyes may be positioned within eye boxes, such as the eye box (13.3-13).

The inner fabric layer (13.3-58) may have inner and outer fabric layers, such as a light-colored outer fabric layer (13.3-58L) and a dark-colored inner fabric layer (13.3-58D), joined by a spacer layer, such as a spacer layer (13.3-58M). The light-colored outer fabric layer (13.3-58L) may be white, off-white, cream, gray, light gray, or any other suitable light color. The light-colored outer fabric layer (13.3-58L) may, for example, match the color of the outer fabric layer (13.3-72). The dark-colored inner fabric layer (13.3-58D) may be black, dark gray, dark blue, or any other suitable dark color. The dark colored inner fabric layer (13.3-58D) and the light colored outer fabric layer (13.3-58L) can be overknit layers (e.g., of the type illustrated in FIG. 408) and formed from strands (13.3-68) having a denier value of 40D (or 2-ply 20D strands) or other suitable denier value (e.g., drawn textured yarns).

The spacer layer (13.3-58M) (sometimes referred to as a middle layer, etc.) may be formed of one or more multifilament strands (13.3-68) having a lower denier value, such as 20D, 25D or other suitable denier value. The spacer layer (13.3-58M) may be formed of black strands, white strands, gray strands, or strands of any other suitable color. By selecting strands (13.3-68) for the spacer layer (13.3-58M) having a denier value half that of the strands (13.3-68) of the light-colored inner fabric layer (13.3-58L) and the dark-colored inner fabric layer (13.3-58D), the fabric (13.3-58) can appear pure white (or other suitable light color) when viewed in the direction (13.3-82) and pure black (or other suitable dark color) when viewed in the eye box (13.3-13), regardless of the color of the spacer layer (13.3-58M).

The strands of the light-colored inner fabric layer (13.3-58L), the dark-colored outer fabric layer (13.3-58D), and the spacer layer (13.3-58M) may be formed of an elastic material such as nylon, polyester, spandex, or other suitable material. Generally, nylon is bulkier than polyester due to fewer intermixing points and greater intermixing strength between individual filaments. If polyester strands are used, the polyester may be modified to reduce intermixing between filaments so that the filaments of each polyester strand spread out more and block more light.

The inner fabric layer (13.3-58) can be formed using a circular knitting machine. The circular knitting machine can have a high gauge, such as 80 gauge or another suitable gauge, to ensure a greater number of strands per inch in the fabric. The higher the number of strands per inch in the fabric (13.3-58), the higher the opacity. For example, the fabric (13.3-58) can have strands (13.3-68) greater than 80 strands per inch, greater than 90 strands per inch, greater than 100 strands per inch, less than 100 strands per inch, or other suitable density. Additionally, the fabric (13.3-58) may include stretch strands (e.g., strands formed of spandex or other elastic material) to add shrinkage to the fabric (13.3-58) and further increase the opacity of the optical seal (13.3-52). The fabric (13.3-58) may be heat set at a low heat setting (or not heat set at all) to help maintain opacity and stretch.

Figure 410 is a perspective view of an inner fabric layer (13.3-58). As shown in Figure 410, the inner fabric layer (13.3-58) may include a dark colored inner fabric layer (13.3-58D) facing the eye box (13.3-13) and a light colored outer fabric layer (13.3-58L) facing external observers, such as an observer (13.3-80) viewing the light seal (13.3-52) in a direction (13.3-82). The spacer layer (13.3-58M) may include one or more multifilament strands, such as multifilament strands (13.3-68M), bonded between the dark colored inner fabric layer (13.3-58D) and the light colored outer fabric layer (13.3-58L). The spacer layer (13.3-58M) may be a lower denier yarn (e.g., 20D, 25D or other suitable denier value) to increase fabric density and minimize the gap (G) between the dark colored inner fabric layer (13.3-58D) and the light colored outer fabric layer (13.3-58L).

The strands (13.3-68D) of the dark colored inner fabric layer (13.3-58D) and the strands (13.3-68L) of the light colored outer fabric layer (13.3-58L) may have a denier value that is twice that of the spacer strand (13.3-68M) so that the fabric (13.3-58) appears pure white (or other light color) when viewed from the observer (13.3-80) in the direction (13.3-82) and pure black (or other dark color) when viewed from the eye box (13.3-13) (e.g., strands (13.3-68M) may have a denier value of 20D, while strands (13.3-68D, 13.3-68L) may have a denier value of 40D, or each ply may have a denier value of 20D). (The strands (13.3-68L, 13.3-68D, 13.3-68M) may be formed of any suitable material, such as nylon, polyester, spandex or other elastic material. If desired, the strands (13.3-68D, 13.3-68L) may be two-ply strands each comprising an elastic strand having a denier value of 20D and a polyester strand having a denier value of 20D.

Figure 411 is a cross-sectional side view of an optical seal (13.3-52) in which the outer fabric layer (13.3-72) is omitted. With this type of arrangement, the light-colored outer fabric layer (13.3-58L) can form the outermost surface of the optical seal (13.3-52) and can be directly viewed by an observer (13.3-80) from the direction (13.3-82). Due to the presence of the intermediate layer (13.3-58M), the dark-colored fabric (13.3-58D) can be hidden through the light-colored outer fabric layer (13.3-58L). In other words, the fabric layer (13.3-58) can appear pure white (or another light color) when viewed from the direction (13.3-82) and pure black (or another dark color) when viewed from the eye box (13.3-13).

13.4: Electronic devices having flexible fabrics

Figures 412, 413, and 414 illustrate exemplary types of stitches that may be included within the fabric (13.4-72) to adjust the amount of elongation within the fabric.

In the example of FIG. 412, fabric (13.4-72) is a knitted fabric composed of courses (13.4-78) (e.g., rows of loops formed by strands (13.4-68)) and wales (13.4-76) (e.g., columns of loops formed by strands (13.4-68)). In a knitted fabric of the type illustrated in FIG. 412 (sometimes referred to as a flat knit fabric), strands (13.4-68) form loops that extend horizontally across the fabric. An exemplary strand (13.4-68') of strands (13.4-68) is highlighted to show the horizontal path taken by each strand (13.4-68) within fabric (13.4-72). In contrast, the warp knit fabric contains wales (13.4-76) formed by strands (13.4-68) that follow zigzag paths vertically down the fabric.

The example of Figure 412 illustrates courses (rows) (13.4-78) comprised entirely of knit stitches. This is sometimes referred to as plain jersey or single jersey fabric. If desired, color variations can be incorporated into the fabric (13.4-72) by including miss stitches and/or slits. Miss stitches are illustrated in Figure 413.

As illustrated in FIG. 413, the fabric (13.4-72) may include courses (13.4-78), such as a first course (13.4-78-1), a second course (13.4-78-2), a third course (13.4-78-3), and a fourth course (13.4-78-4). Each of the first course (13.4-78-1), the third course (13.4-78-3), and the fourth course (13.4-78-4) includes a series of knit stitches (13.4-80). The legs of each knit stitch loop are connected to the head of the previous loop in the previous course. The second course (13.4-78-2) includes a miss stitch (13.4-84). To create a miss stitch, such as the miss stitch (13.4-84) during knitting, a given strand is not picked up by the needle, allowing the strand to float behind the needle while remaining connected to loops on either side of the miss stitch (13.4-84). If the strands in the courses (13.4-78) contain different colors, the miss stitch (13.4-84) will create a double-color pattern on each side of the fabric.

If desired, the outer fabric layer (13.4-72) may have a bird's eye pattern comprising alternating knit stitches (13.4-80) and miss stitches (13.4-84). For example, the outer fabric layer (13.4-72) may have a four-row repeat pattern. In the first and second rows, the odd wales (13.4-76) may be knit stitches (13.4-80), while the even wales (13.4-76) may be tuck stitches (13.4-84). In the third and fourth rows, the odd wales (13.4-76) may be tuck stitches (13.4-84), while the even wales (13.4-76) may be knit stitches (13.4-80). This pattern can be repeated to create a two-color bird's eye pattern on the outer surface of the outer fabric layer (13.4-72).

As illustrated in Figure 413, the miss stitches (13.4-84) extend in the width direction (W) of the fabric (13.4-72) and float horizontally across the fabric. If additional elongation is required in the length direction (L) of the fabric (13.4-72), some or all of the miss stitches (13.4-84) may be replaced with tuck stitches. This type of arrangement is exemplified in Figure 414.

As illustrated in FIG. 414, the fabric (13.4-72) may include courses (13.4-78), such as a first course (13.4-78-1), a second course (13.4-78-2), and a third course (13.4-78-3). Each of the first course (13.4-78-1), the second course (13.4-78-2), and the third course (13.4-78-3) may include alternating knitting stitches (13.4-80) and tuck stitches (13.4-82). The tuck stitches (13.4-82) may be created by placing two strands (13.4-68) on a single needle, thereby tucking an extra strand (13.4-68) behind the first strand (13.4-68). The legs of the tuck stitch (13.4-82) are not connected to the head of the previous loop. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 414, the legs of each tuck stitch (13.4-82) in course (13.4-78-3) are not connected to the head (13.4-84) of the previous loop in course (13.4-78-2).

If desired, the outer fabric layer (13.4-72) may have a bird's eye pattern comprising alternating knit stitches (13.4-80) and tuck stitches (13.4-82). For example, the outer fabric layer (13.4-72) may have a four-row repeat pattern of the type illustrated in FIG. 415.

As illustrated in FIG. 415, the odd wales of the first course may be tuck stitches (13.4-82) (represented as "V" in FIG. 415), while the even wales of the first course may be knit stitches (13.4-80) (represented as "O" in FIG. 415). The second course may be all knit stitches (13.4-80). The odd wales of the third course may be knit stitches (13.4-80), while the even wales of the second course may be tuck stitches (13.4-82). The fourth course may be all knit stitches (13.4-80). This pattern may be repeated to create a two-color modified bird's eye pattern on the outer surface of the outer fabric layer (13.4-72).

The inclusion of the tuck stitches (13.4-82) provides additional elongation in the longitudinal direction (L) because the tuck stitches (13.4-82) have strand segments that extend in the L direction to form the tuck stitch. The longer stitch length in the longitudinal direction (L) from including one or more tuck stitches (13.4-82) allows the seamless tube of fabric (13.4-72) to elongate and retract in the L direction without buckling or wrinkling when the device (13.4-10) is placed on a user's head and the optical seal (13.4-52) is pressed against the user's face. If desired, the strands (13.4-68) of the fabric (13.4-72) may include strands of a first color and a second color to create a two-color pattern on the outside of the optical seal (13.4-52). However, this is merely exemplary. If desired, more than two colors may be used or the strands (13.4-68) may have different distinct characteristics (e.g., different deniers, different amounts of fuzziness, different textures, different diameters, different materials, etc.).

If desired, the fabric (13.4-72) may be placed in boiling water after the fabric (13.4-72) has been formed. A post-processing step of boiling the fabric (13.4-72) may cause additional shrinkage in the longitudinal direction (L) of the fabric (13.4-72), which may ultimately reduce the tendency of the optical seal (13.4-52) to buckle when pressed against a user's face. The boiling step may, for example, cause more shrinkage in the longitudinal direction (L) of the fabric (13.4-72) than in the width direction (W) of the fabric (13.4-72). Additionally, the increased longitudinal (L) elongation of the modified bird's eye fabric (13.4-72) creates greater frame mobility and deflection (e.g., the optical seal (13.4-52) may be more mobile and deflect more easily when covered by the fabric (13.4-72) with increased longitudinal elongation), which significantly increases user comfort.

The patterns of FIGS. 414 and 415 are merely exemplary. If desired, the fabric (13.4-72) may include both miss stitches (13.4-84) and tuck stitches (13.4-82), depending on the amount of elongation required in the longitudinal direction (L). For example, if more or maximum elongation in the longitudinal direction (L) is desired, the fabric (13.4-72) may be free of miss stitches (13.4-84) and follow the four-row repeat pattern of FIG. 415.

13.5: Non-contact sensors for head-mounted devices

The following disclosure relates to a facial interface within a head-mounted device. More specifically, the present embodiments relate to a facial interface comprising sensor-transparent materials for head-mounted devices used in AR/VR experiences. Such facial interfaces may enable sensors to interact with a user through the sensor-transparent materials. As used herein, the term "sensor-transparent materials" includes materials that allow the transmission of sensor signals therethrough.

In one example, a head-mounted device of the present disclosure includes a display and an optical seal portion (hereinafter, "optical seal"). The optical seals may allow a user to experience an optically shielded environment, wherein external ambient light and possibly other environmental items are blocked from the user's view. The shielded environment allows for better user interaction and a more immersive experience. As a facial interface, the optical seal may be customized to the user's facial profile such that the optical seal physically interacts with the user's face to fit snugly over or around the forehead, eyes, nose, and other features or bone structures, such as the maxillary regions, which may vary from user to user. Additionally, the optical seal may include components that connect the display to the facial interface, such as webbing, a housing, or a frame positioned between the display and the facial interface.

Conventional optical seals for conventional head-mounted devices are passive and do not include a facial interface with transparent materials to the sensor. In effect, passive optical seals create a light-shielding environment, but do not incorporate active components that enable contactless readings from sensors embedded in the facial interface. Therefore, conventional optical seals do not provide contactless readings from the user through transparent materials to the sensor.

In contrast, the optical seal of the present invention includes a facial interface with transparent materials for sensors for integration of active components. Optical seals with active components have advantages over conventional passive optical seals. Optical seals with transparent materials for sensors can include active components that monitor user responses without direct contact, thereby providing improved user comfort while wearing the head-mounted device. These non-contact sensors can also avoid biological ingress from the user's skin (e.g., lotion, makeup, sunscreen, etc.). A head-mounted device that monitors such user responses can also create a highly customized user experience (unlike sensors in conventional head-mounted devices that are "unaware" of the user experience).

Sensors can be crucial for creating personalized user experiences. Active light seals may include sensors to measure user responses or engagement through indicators such as core body temperature, sweat, heart rate, electrical signals from the heart (e.g., ECG, EKG, EXG, etc.), brain activity (e.g., EEG signals, prefrontal cortex activity), and more. Additionally, sensor data can be used as feedback data, for example, to monitor user fatigue or obtain activity-specific metrics.

The sensors of the present disclosure may be implemented on or within the facial interface in a number of different ways. For example, the sensor may be oriented toward the user and positioned on the surface of the facial interface opposite the surface that contacts the user. In other examples, the sensor may be oriented toward the user and embedded within the facial interface. In these or other examples, the sensor may include a field of view that projects toward the user and through at least a portion of the facial interface. Accordingly, these portions of the facial interface may be transparent to the sensor, allowing the sensor to acquire sensor readings through at least a portion of the facial interface.

Sensors may also be implemented in different ways for different facial interfaces. That is, the head-mounted device of the present disclosure may implement a facial interface with a base layer and an interchangeable layer. The interchangeable layer may be interchangeable or replaced with a different interchangeable layer. In some examples, the different interchangeable layers may correspond to different user activities, such as a yoga activity versus a movie-watching activity. In certain implementations, the yoga interchangeable layer may include a different sensor array than the movie-watching interchangeable layer (e.g., to obtain different activity-specific metrics).

These and other embodiments are discussed below with reference to FIGS. 416-422b. However, those skilled in the art will readily recognize that the detailed description provided herein with respect to these figures is for illustrative purposes only and should not be construed as limiting. Moreover, as used herein, a system, method, article, component, feature, or sub-feature that includes at least one of the first option, the second option, or the third option should be understood to refer to a system, method, article, component, feature, or sub-feature that can include one of each of the listed options (e.g., only one of the first option, only one of the second option, or only one of the third option), multiple of a single listed option (e.g., two or more of the first option), two options simultaneously (e.g., one of the first option and one of the second option), or a combination thereof (e.g., two of the first option and one of the second option).

FIG. 416 illustrates a plan view profile of a head-mounted device (13.5-100) worn on a user's head. The head-mounted device (13.5-100) may include a display (13.5-102) (e.g., one or more optical lenses or display screens in front of the user's eyes). The display (13.5-102) may include a display for presenting augmented reality visualizations, virtual reality visualizations, or other suitable visualizations.

The head-mounted device (13.5-100) also includes a facial interface (13.5-103) and a sensor (13.5-108) positioned on (e.g., attached to or embedded within) the facial interface (13.5-103). As used herein, the terms "facial interface" or "engaging interface" refer to a portion of the head-mounted device (13.5-100) that engages with the user's face through direct contact. In particular, the facial interface includes portions of the head-mounted device (13.5-100) that conform to (e.g., compress against) areas of the user's face. The facial interface may include a flexible (or semi-flexible) facial track that extends over the forehead, wraps around the eyes, contacts the zygomatic and maxillary regions of the face, and bridges the nose. Additionally, the facial interface may include various components forming the structure, webbing, cover, fabric, or frame of the head-mounted device disposed between the display (13.5-102) and the user's skin. In certain implementations, the facial interface may include a seal (e.g., an optical seal, an environmental seal, a dust seal, an air seal, etc.). It will be appreciated that the term "seal" may include partial seals or inhibitors in addition to complete seals (e.g., a partial optical seal that blocks some ambient light when the head-mounted device is worn, and a complete optical seal that blocks all ambient light).

Additionally, the term "sensor" refers to one or more different sensing devices, such as a camera or imaging device, a temperature device, an oxygen device, a motion device, a brain activity device, a sweat activity device, a respiratory activity device, a muscle contraction device, etc. Some specific examples of sensors include an electrooculography sensor, an electrocardiogram sensor, an EKG sensor, a heart rate variability sensor, a blood volume pulse sensor, an SpO2 sensor, a compact pressure sensor, an electromyography sensor, a core body temperature sensor, a galvanic skin sensor, an accelerometer, a gyroscope, a magnetometer, an inclinometer, a barometer, an infrared sensor, a global positioning system sensor, etc.

In one example, the head-mounted device (13.5-100) includes a sensor controller (13.5-104). The sensor controller (13.5-104) may include a processor (e.g., a system on a chip, an integrated circuit, a driver, a microcontroller, an application processor, a crossover processor, etc.). Additionally, the sensor controller (13.5-104) may include one or more memory devices (e.g., discrete non-volatile memory, embedded non-volatile memory in the processor, random access memory, memory integrated circuits, DRAM chips, stacked memory modules, storage devices, memory partitions, etc.). In certain implementations, the sensor controller (13.5-104) is located within one or both arms (13.5-105, 13.5-106) of the head-mounted device (13.5-100) (e.g., for integration with an HMD processor/memory component). In alternative implementations, the sensor controller (13.5-104) is physically integrated within the sensors (13.5-108) themselves.

The sensor controller (13.5-104) may perform a myriad of different functions. For example, the memory device may store computer-executable instructions that, when executed by the processor, cause the sensor controller (13.5-104) to receive sensor data from sensors (13.5-108) and transmit signals based on the sensor data. For example, the sensor controller (13.5-104) may transmit the sensor signal to the display (13.5-102). In response to the sensor signal, the display (13.5-102) may power down, present a digital notification (e.g., a user-generated notification, a push notification, a context-generated notification, a system-generated notification, a smart notification, etc.), or render at least one of an avatar or an avatar emotional response. As used herein, the term "avatar" is a visual representation of a person for use in a digital context, such as by a head-mounted device (13.5-100). Avatars may include animated characters, animals, objects, emoticons, etc. capable of depicting human emotions (e.g., as detected by sensors (13.5-108) of a head-mounted device (13.5-100)). The depiction of human emotions through an avatar constitutes an avatar emotional response.

Additionally, the head-mountable device (13.5-100), illustrated in FIG. 416, includes one or more arms (13.5-105, 13.5-106). The arms (13.5-105, 13.5-106) are connected to the display (13.5-102) and extend distally toward the back of the head. The arms (13.5-105, 13.5-106) are configured to secure the display (13.5-102) in a position relative to the head (e.g., such that the display (13.5-102) remains in front of the user's eyes). For example, the arms (13.5-105, 13.5-106) extend over the user's ears (13.5-107). In certain examples, the arms (13.5-105, 13.5-106) are positioned over the user's ears (13.5-107) to secure the head-mounted device (13.5-100) to the head through friction between the arms (13.5-105, 13.5-106) and the head. Additionally or alternatively, the arms (13.5-105, 13.5-106) may be seated against the head. For example, the arms (13.5-105, 13.5-106) may apply opposing pressures to the sides of the head to secure the head-mounted device (13.5-100) to the head. Optionally, the arms (13.5-105, 13.5-106) may be connected to each other via straps (illustrated in dotted lines) that can compress the head-mountable device (13.5-100) against the head.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 416 ) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in other drawings and described with reference to them) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 416 .

Figures 417a and 417b illustrate side and front profile views, respectively, of an exemplary head-mountable device (13.5-100). As discussed above, the head-mountable device (13.5-100) includes a display (13.5-102), a facial interface (13.5-103), a sensor controller (13.5-104), and sensors (13.5-108). In practice, at least one sensor (13.5-108) is positioned on or within the facial interface (13.5-103). Additionally, the facial interface (13.5-103) may surround the eyes (13.5-201) and bridge the user's nose (13.5-202). The head-mounted device (13.5-100) may also include connectors (13.5-206) that movably constrain the display (13.5-102) and the facial interface (13.5-103) (e.g., in the forehead and cheek areas of the user's face). Examples of connectors (13.5-206) include pivot connectors, spring connectors, and the like.

The sensors (13.5-108) can be positioned in countless different configurations. In one example, at least one of the sensors (13.5-108) is positioned in a flexible region (13.5-212) of the facial interface (13.5-103) between the connectors (13.5-206). The "flexible region" refers to the portion(s) of the facial interface (13.5-103) that is positioned between the connectors (13.5-206), wherein the facial interface (13.5-103) is highly flexible and conformable. In certain implementations, one or more of the sensors (13.5-108) is positioned in a middle portion of the flexible region (13.5-212) (approximately equidistant from the connectors (13.5-206). By positioning one or more sensors (13.5-108) within the flexible region (13.5-212), pressure points felt by the user can be alleviated. Additionally or alternatively, the sensors (13.5-108) can be positioned in predetermined configurations depending on the desired location (of the user) to be sensed (e.g., forehead area, eye area, nose area, etc.).

Additionally, the term "forehead region" refers to the anatomical region of the human head between the eyes and the scalp. Additionally, the term "nasal region" refers to the anatomical region of the human nose.

Additionally, as illustrated in FIGS. 417a and 417b, the head-mounted device (13.5-100) may include a power source (13.5-203). In some examples, the power source (13.5-203) may include one or more electrochemical cells having connections for supplying power to the electrical device. For example, in some examples, the power source (13.5-203) may include a lithium-ion battery, an alkaline battery, a carbon-zinc battery, a lead-acid battery, a nickel-cadmium battery, a nickel-metal hydride battery, or the like. Accordingly, it will be appreciated that the power source (13.5-203) may be disposable or rechargeable, as desired. In certain implementations, the power source (13.5-203) is connected to the sensor controller (13.5-104) via one or more electrical connections. In some examples, although not required, the power supply (13.5-203) is mounted on the sensor controller (13.5-104).

The head-mounted device (13.5-100) may also include an interface (13.5-210), which may be electromechanical or wireless. The interface (13.5-210) may communicatively couple the sensors (13.5-108) to at least one of a power source (13.5-203), a sensor controller (13.5-104), or an HMD processor/memory component (not shown).

In some examples, the sensor (13.5-108) may be communicatively coupled to the sensor controller (13.5-104) (or an HMD processor/memory component, not shown) via certain wireless communication protocols, such as a wireless local area network protocol, a wireless area network protocol, a wireless personal area network protocol, a wide area network protocol, etc. Some specific examples of wireless communication via such protocols include Wi-Fi-based communication, mesh network communication, Bluetooth® communication, short-range communication, low energy communication, Zigbee communication, Z-wave communication, and 6LoWPAN communication. In certain implementations, the sensor (13.5-108) is communicatively coupled to the sensor controller (13.5-104) (or an HMD processor/memory component, not shown) via a wireless 60 GHz frequency.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIGS. 417a and 417b ) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 417a and 417b .

As discussed above, the sensors may be positioned on or within the facial interface of the present disclosure. According to one or more such examples, FIG. 418 illustrates one of the sensors (13.5-108) positioned on a surface of the facial interface (13.5-103). Specifically, as depicted in FIG. 418, the sensor (13.5-108) is positioned on a first surface (13.5-318) oriented toward the user side (13.5-324) (and away from the display side (13.5-326)). Additionally, the sensor (13.5-108) includes a field of view (13.5-320) across the interface material (13.5-301) from the first surface (13.5-318) to a second surface (13.5-322) opposite the first surface (13.5-318). Therefore, a portion of the interface material (13.5-301) corresponding to the field of view (13.5-320) between the first surface (13.5-318) and the second surface (13.5-322) can be transparent to the sensor - forming a transparent window to the sensor through the interface material (13.5-301).

The term "transparent to the sensor" refers to a type of material through which a sensor measurement signal is permeable without substantial loss in quality or accuracy of the sensor measurement signal (wherein "substantial" means a discrepancy of about 5%, about 10%, about 25%, about 50%, or greater than 50%). For example, a material that is transparent to the sensor may allow a heart rate sensor to accurately detect electrical, magnetic, or audio cardiac data indicative of heart palpitations, heartbeats, heart rhythms, etc., even though the material that is transparent to the sensor is disposed between the heart rate sensor and a user. Thus, the sensor measurement signal is a wireless signal to and/or from the sensor, and the wireless signal includes wavelike characteristics (e.g., frequency, amplitude, etc.) that allow the wireless signal to propagate through a material that is transparent to the sensor.

In this regard, the term "window transparent to the sensor" refers to a portion of the interface material (13.5-301) that is transparent to the sensor. In some examples, the window transparent to the sensor includes the entirety of the interface material (13.5-301). In other examples, the window transparent to the sensor includes at least a portion of the interface material (13.5-301) with respect to the field of view (13.5-320). In these or other examples, the window transparent to the sensor may be sized and shaped according to the field of view (13.5-320).

An interface material (13.5-301) comprises or defines (at least partially) a facial interface (13.5-103). The interface material (13.5-301) may include a first surface (13.5-318) and a second surface (13.5-322) opposite the first surface (13.5-318), as illustrated in at least FIG. 418. In at least some examples, the second surface (13.5-322) is configured to contact a user's skin.

Additionally, the interface material (13.5-301) may include at least one of a foam, a gel, or a fabric. Similarly, the interface material (13.5-301) may include a combination of foams (e.g., polyurethane foam cushion, cotton foam), gels (e.g., silicone, polyurethane, etc.), or fabrics (e.g., cotton, leather, faux leather, etc.). For example, the interface material (13.5-301) may include multiple different layers (e.g., an outer faux leather layer forming the second surface (13.5-322) and an underlying foam layer forming the first surface (13.5-318). The combinations described are exemplary only, and other embodiments, materials, configurations, and/or combinations are contemplated herein.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 418) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference to them) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 418.

Other sensor arrays are also within the scope of the present disclosure. According to one or more examples, FIG. 419 illustrates a facial interface (13.5-103) that may include transparent windows for the sensors through which sensor measurement signals to or from the sensors (13.5-108a, 13.5-108b) may pass. The sensors (13.5-108a, 13.5-108b) may detect physiological or biological changes in the user's body through corresponding fields of view (13.5-320a, 13.5-320b). For example, the head-mounted device (13.5-100) may detect changes in the user's body temperature or thermal profile via an infrared sensor. Other biological sensors may be added or replaced as desired.

In particular, FIG. 419 depicts a sensor (13.5-108a) in the same or similar position as described above with respect to FIG. 418. The sensor (13.5-108a) is positioned as a non-contact sensor on the first surface (13.5-318) (i.e., on the display side (13.5-326)). Additionally, FIG. 419 depicts a facial interface (13.5-103) including a sensor (13.5-108b) positioned between the first surface (13.5-318) and the second surface (13.5-322). That is, the sensor (13.5-320b) is embedded within the facial interface (13.5-103) such that the sensor (13.5-320b) is invisible and inaccessible from the second surface (13.5-322) (i.e., the skin-facing surface). By being offset from the second surface (13.5-322), the sensor (13.5-108b) is also a non-contact sensor.

In one or more examples, the sensors (13.5-108a, 13.5-108b) are sensors of the same type (although differently positioned). In other examples, the sensors (13.5-108a, 13.5-108b) are sensors of different types. Similarly, the sensors (13.5-108a, 13.5-108b) may have the same field of view or different fields of view, as desired. Alternative embodiments may also include the same or different sensors having alternative fields of view. For example, the fields of view (13.5-320a, 13.5-320b) may be oriented or angled toward a particular location along the second surface (13.5-322) (e.g., to measure a particular location on the user). Additionally or alternatively, the fields of view (13.5-320a, 13.5-320b) may intersect, overlap, and/or include mutually exclusive measurement areas.

Those skilled in the art will appreciate that the sensor depth for the sensor (13.5-320b) can vary from the first surface (13.5-318) to the second surface (13.5-322). An example of sensor depth variation is shown where the sensor (13.5-108a) is on the first surface (13.5-318) of the interface material (13.5-301), which increases the sensor field of view (13.5-320a). Similarly, the sensor (13.5-108b) is at a distance from the first surface (13.5-318) disposed within the interface material (13.5-301), and is therefore closer to the second surface (13.5-322) than the sensor (13.5-108a). In some cases, positioning the sensor (13.5-108b) closer to the second surface (13.5-322) may correspondingly reduce the field of view (13.5-320b). This is only one exemplary variation of sensor depth, as multiple sensors may be positioned on the first surface (13.5-318) of the interface material (13.5-301), or within the interface material (13.5-301), between the first surface (13.5-318) and the second surface (13.5-322). In one example, the second surface (13.5-322) is adjacent to the forehead region or the nose region of the user's head when the head-mounted device (13.5-100) is worn.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations depicted in FIG. 419) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions depicted in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations depicted in and described with reference to the other drawings) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions depicted in FIG. 419.

FIG. 420 illustrates another example of a facial interface (13.5-103) that may include a plurality of sensors embedded within an interface material (13.5-301). FIG. 420 also illustrates that none of the sensors (13.5-108a, 13.5-108b) are positioned on the first surface (13.5-318). In this example, the sensors (13.5-108a, 13.5-108b) may be wirelessly coupled to a power source and/or HMD memory/processor components. In practice, the sensors (13.5-108a, 13.5-108b) may be powered by an inductive coil operating through a head-mounted device (13.5-100) (e.g., adjacent the first surface (13.5-318)). Similarly, sensors (13.5-108a, 13.5-108b) may be communicatively coupled to the HMD memory/processor component via a wireless communication protocol (e.g., to transmit sensor data/sensor signals or receive sensor feedback).

As further illustrated in FIG. 420, sensors (13.5-108a) and sensors (13.5-108b) are positioned within interface material (13.5-301). The sensors (13.5-108a, 13.5-108b) may be positioned (e.g., laterally or depth-wise) in different locations than those illustrated in FIG. 420. Similarly, the sensor (13.5-108a) may differ from the sensor (13.5-108b) in type and configuration, transmit power, shape, and size (as illustrated above). The field of view (13.5-320a) of the sensor (13.5-108a) may differ from the field of view (13.5-320b) of the sensor (13.5-108b). In another example, the fields of view (13.5-320a, 13.5-320b) may have the same configuration (also shown above).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 420 ) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 420 .

Figures 421a and 421b illustrate another example of a facial interface (13.5-103) comprising multiple layers of interface material. In the particular example illustrated in Figures 421a and 421b, the interface material comprises a base layer (13.5-624) and a replaceable layer (13.5-626). The base layer (13.5-624) is attached to a head mountable device (13.5-100) - thereby forming a permanent portion of the facial interface (13.5-103). In contrast, the interchangeable layer (13.5-626) is removably attached to the base layer (13.5-624) (e.g., via fasteners (13.5-628a, 13.5-628b)) such that the interchangeable layer (13.5-626) can be exchanged with a different interchangeable layer (e.g., supporting or designated for different user activities).

The fasteners (13.5-628a, 13.5-628b) may include a myriad of different fasteners. For example, the fasteners (13.5-628a, 13.5-628b) may include brooches, buttons, buckles, clasps, eyelets, fabric ties, frog closures, grommets, hook-and-loop buttons, laces, loop fasteners, pins, poppers, push buttons, snap fasteners, toggles, hook-and-loop Velcro® tape, zippers, and the like. Additionally, a temporary adhesive (e.g., tape, glue, tack, etc.) may be implemented rather than the fasteners. It will be appreciated that more than two fasteners may be utilized. Additionally, only a single fastener may be implanted in certain instances.

In one example, FIG. 421a illustrates a configuration in which a replaceable layer (13.5-626) of a facial interface (13.5-103) can be removably attached to a base layer (13.5-624) via fasteners (13.5-628a, 13.5-628b). The replaceable layer (13.5-626) can include a sensor (13.5-108a) having a field of view (13.5-320a). The sensor (13.5-108a) can be a wireless biometric sensor, such as a temperature sensor, a respiration sensor, a cardiac activity sensor, or a brain activity sensor. Additionally or alternatively, the sensor (13.5-108a) can include a sensor that indicates certain biological responses (e.g., a stress response). The sensor (13.5-108a) may be positioned to detect user-specific characteristics when the sensor field of view (13.5-320a) is oriented toward the facial area. In a specific example, the sensor (13.5-108a) may include an infrared sensor capable of detecting user characteristics such as body temperature or changes in body temperature.

In another example, FIG. 421b illustrates a configuration in which an additional replaceable layer (13.5-630) of a facial interface (13.5-103) can be removably attached to a base layer (13.5-624). The additional replaceable layer (13.5-630) can be removably attached to the base layer (13.5-624) via fasteners (13.5-628a, 13.5-628b), similarly to those described above. Unlike the replaceable layer (13.5-626), the additional replaceable layer (13.5-630) can include an additional sensor (13.5-108b) having an additional field of view (13.5-320b). Here, the sensor (13.5-108b) and the corresponding field of view are different from those of the sensor (13.5-108a). In this way, the facial interface (13.5-103) can be compatible with a myriad of different interchangeable layers as desired for different user activities (or different types of users, such as children or adults).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIGS. 421a and 421b) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 421a and 421b.

FIG. 422A illustrates a perspective view of an electronic device (13.5-700) including a wearable display (13.5-702), an engagement interface (13.5-726), and a non-contact sensor (13.5-714) coupled to the engagement interface (13.5-726). In one or more examples, the electronic device (13.5-700) is the same as or similar to the head-mountable device (13.5-100) described above. For example, the engagement interface (13.5-726) may be the same as or similar to the facial interface (13.5-103) described above. Similarly, the wearable display (13.5-702) may be the same as or similar to the display (13.5-102) described above.

The interlocking interface (13.5-726) is adjustable to accommodate different sizes, shapes, and contours of facial features. For example, the interlocking interface (13.5-726) can flexibly conform to the user's face via connectors (13.5-628a to 13.5-628d) (e.g., identical or similar to the connectors (13.5-206) described above). By way of example, each of the connectors (13.5-628a to 13.5-628d) comprises pivot connectors. However, the connectors (13.5-628a to 13.5-628d) can be adjusted to include different types of connectors (e.g., form hard stops, leaf springs, compliant mechanisms, etc.).

In another example, the interfacing interface (13.5-726) may include an interfacing material (13.5-727), and the non-contact sensor (13.5-714a) may be invisible and inaccessible through the skin-facing surface of the interfacing material (13.5-727). The non-contact sensor (13.5-714a) may be oriented toward a first facial area (13.5-725a), such as the user's forehead, when the device is worn.

In another example, the electronic device includes additional non-contact sensors (13.5-714b, 13.5-714c) coupled to the interlocking interface (13.5-726). The additional non-contact sensors (13.5-714b, 13.5-714c) may be mounted on (or within) the interlocking interface (13.5-732) (e.g., a nose piece). The additional non-contact sensors (13.5-714b, 13.5-714c) may be oriented toward a second facial area (13.5-730), such as the user's nose, that is different from the first facial area (13.5-725a) when the device is worn. In this manner, the non-contact sensors (13.5-714a-13.5-714c) can be oriented away from the wearable display (13.5-702) (and instead, can be oriented toward the user's head or skin, not shown).

FIG. 422b illustrates an exploded perspective view of an electronic device (13.5-700) having sensors (13.5-714a, 13.5-714b, 13.5-714c). In one example, the sensors may be removably attached to the interlocking interfaces (13.5-726, 13.5-732) (e.g., for interchangeability with different sensors). In other examples, the sensors are permanently attached to the interlocking interfaces (13.5-726, 13.5-732). Additionally, the sensors (13.5-714a to 13.5-714c) may be positioned on the interlocking interfaces (13.5-726, 13.5-732) such that the sensors are positioned over the transparent windows (13.5-734a to 13.5-734c) for the corresponding sensors. The transparent windows (13.5-734a, 13.5-734b, 13.5-734c) for the sensors allow sensor measurement signals to pass to and from the sensors (13.5-714a to 13.5-714c).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIGS. 422a and 422b ) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 422a and 422b .

13.6: Integrated Health Sensors

The following disclosure relates to a facial interface for a head-mounted device. More specifically, the present embodiments relate to a facial interface for a head-mounted device that includes health sensors used to acquire biometric information of a user and perform actions in response to the detected biometric information. These facial interfaces may enable the health sensors to interact with the user to collect biometric information. In some examples, a processor causes a component of the head-mounted display (HMD) to perform an action in response to the biometric information collected by the sensors. As used herein, "action" or "performing an action" may refer to any electrical or mechanical operation that causes a change in one or more components of the HMD. For example, an action may include displaying a notification to the user, or activating or deactivating one or more components. In some examples, the sensors may collect biometric information of a user who is exercising. The biometric information may relate to temperature, respiration, stress response, heart activity, brain activity, or any other relevant data. Additionally, in response to the collected data, the system can perform actions (e.g., notify a user of the collected data).

Head-mounted devices equipped with sensors are used for a variety of purposes, detecting limited user feedback, such as movement or positioning feedback, and providing limited information in response to the user. For example, a user may experience an increase in heart rate or brain activity while performing an action or movement. Conventional head-mounted devices are not adequately equipped to capture all the necessary biometric information generated during use.

In contrast, the head-mounted devices of the present disclosure include a facial interface that may be integrated with or incorporate sensors configured to collect user data, such as biometric information including heart rate, respiration, brain activity, and the like. By capturing user data, the facial interface sensors can provide enhanced and increased feedback to the user. A head-mounted device with sensors that monitor user biometric or health feedback can create highly customized user experiences, unlike sensors in conventional head-mounted devices that cannot consider, respond to, or further enhance the user experience.

Sensors positioned on the facial interface are crucial for creating a personalized user experience. The head-mounted device of the present invention may include sensors for measuring a user's responsiveness or engagement through indicators such as heart rate, electrical signals from the heart (e.g., ECG, EKG, EXG, etc.), brain activity (e.g., EEG signals, prefrontal cortex activity), core body temperature, etc. Additionally, sensor data may be used as feedback data, for example, to monitor user fatigue, facial expressions, or obtain activity-specific metrics.

A head-mounted device may have different sensors implemented in different ways. For example, a head-mounted device of the present disclosure may implement sensors removably attached to a facial interface. In some examples, the removably attached sensors correspond to different user activities, such as exercise, learning activities, health, clinical environments, and the like. In certain implementations, the exercise sensors may include different sensors, such as heart rate monitor sensors, while the learning activity sensors may include brain activity sensors. The sensors may be implemented in different applications and arrangements/combinations to obtain different activity biometric readings.

These and other embodiments are discussed below with reference to FIGS. 423 through 428. However, one of ordinary skill in the art will readily recognize that the detailed description provided herein with respect to these drawings is for illustrative purposes only and should not be construed as limiting. Moreover, as used herein, a system, method, article, component, feature, or sub-feature that includes at least one of the first option, the second option, or the third option should be understood to refer to a system, method, article, component, feature, or sub-feature that can include one of each of the listed options (e.g., only one of the first option, only one of the second option, or only one of the third option), multiple of a single listed option (e.g., two or more of the first option), two options simultaneously (e.g., one of the first option and one of the second option), or a combination thereof (e.g., two of the first option and one of the second option).

FIG. 423 illustrates a block diagram of a head-mounted device (13.6-100) comprising a frame (13.6-116), a display (13.6-108), a facial interface (13.6-112), and a support or retention band (13.6-123). The display (13.6-108) may include one or more optical lenses or display screens in front of the user's eyes. The display (13.6-108) may include a display or display unit for presenting augmented reality visualizations, virtual reality visualizations, or other suitable visualizations to the user. Additionally, the display (13.6-108) may be positioned within or on the frame (13.6-116). Similarly, the facial interface (13.6-112) may be connected to the frame (13.6-116). In some examples, the frame (13.6-116) may be a housing for the display (13.6-108). Alternatively, a separate housing may form an outer portion of the head-mountable device (13.6-100).

The facial interface (13.6-112) may include one or more sensors (13.6-124), support attachments (13.6-132), display attachments (13.6-128), and feedback or output modules (13.6-136). The sensors (13.6-124) may be removably attached to the facial interface (13.6-112). As used herein, the term "facial interface," "engaging interface," or "optical seal" refers to a portion of the head-mountable device (13.6-100) that engages (i.e., contacts or conforms to) a user's face. In particular, the facial interface (13.6-112) may include portions of the head-mountable device that conform to or press against areas of the user's face. A facial interface (13.6-112) may be positioned between the display (13.6-108) and the user's face. In some examples, the facial interface (13.6-112) may include a flexible (or semi-flexible) facial track or lumen that extends across the forehead, wraps around the eyes, contacts other areas of the face (e.g., the zygomatic and maxillary regions), and bridges the nose.

Additionally, the facial interface (13.6-112) may include various components forming a frame, structure, or webbing of the head-mounted device disposed between the display (13.6-108) and the user's skin. In certain implementations, the facial interface (13.6-112) may include a seal (e.g., an optical seal, an environmental seal, a dust seal, an air seal, etc.). It will be appreciated that the term “seal” may include partial seals or blockers in addition to complete seals (e.g., a partial optical seal that blocks some ambient light when the head-mounted device (13.6-100) is worn, and a complete optical seal that blocks all ambient light). The facial interface (13.6-112) may be removably attached to the frame (13.6-116) and may be in electrical communication with the display (13.6-108).

A sensor (13.6-124) of the facial interface (13.6-112) can collect biometric information, such as a user's vital signs (including body temperature, pulse data, respiration data, and blood pressure). The sensor (13.6-124) can generate a signal based on the collected user information and, in response to the signal (i.e., in response to the biometric information collected by the sensor (13.6-124)), transmit the signal to a processor that causes the output unit (13.6-136) to perform an action. For example, a user may perform a high-intensity activity, such as lifting weights or exercising, while wearing the HMD (13.6-100). During such an activity, the user's heart rate or other vital signs may increase or change and be detectable by the sensor (13.6-124). The sensor (13.6-124) can generate one or more signals based on the received input. The sensor (13.6-124) can transmit signals to one or more components of the HMD (13.6-100) (e.g., to the display (13.6-108), to the output (13.6-136)). The display (13.6-108), in electrical communication with the facial interface (13.6-112), can receive the electrical communication and provide feedback (e.g., visual feedback, audio feedback, haptic feedback, etc.) to the user related to the user's biometric readings. The feedback can include determining when the user needs to take a break, or when the difficulty of an activity needs to be lowered or increased, and the output can include scheduling various activities for the user or recommending adjustments to the HMD.

As used herein, the term "sensor" refers to one or more different sensing devices, such as a camera or imaging device, a temperature device, an oxygen device, a motion device, a brain activity device, a sweat activity device, a respiratory activity device, a muscle contraction device, etc. As used herein, the term "biometric", "biometric information", or "biometric characteristic" may refer to vital signs, including heart rate, pulse, respiration rate, respiration amplitude, or any other health-related data. The term "biometric", "biometric information", or "biometric characteristic" may also refer to biological measurements or physical characteristics, such as facial expressions or emotions. In some examples, a sensor may detect or sense biometric characteristics, including features of the autonomic nervous system. Some specific examples of sensors include electrooculography (EOG) sensors, electrocardiogram (ECG or EKG) sensors, photoplethysmography (PPG) sensors, heart rate sensors, heart rate variability sensors, blood volume pulse sensors, oxygen saturation (SpO2) sensors, compact pressure sensors, electromyography (EMG) sensors, core temperature sensors, galvanic skin response (GSR) sensors, functional near-infrared spectroscopy (FNIR) sensors, non-contact passive infrared (IR) sensors, accelerometers, gyroscopes, magnetometers, inclinometers, barometers, infrared sensors, global positioning system sensors, and the like. Additional sensor examples may include contact microphones (e.g., pressure-based MEMS), bioelectrical activity sensors, UV exposure sensors, or particle sensors. In some examples, certain sensors may be used to assess stress and emotion. The HMD may then provide feedback or output related to the detected stress and emotion. In some examples, the sensors may operate via coin cell batteries or a Bluetooth connection. In some examples, the sensors are powered by the HMD's primary battery.

The sensors described herein can monitor the autonomic nervous system (ANS), enabling the monitoring of relaxation and stress indicators, mental health, medical treatments, and more. Using the sensors, physicians and caregivers can obtain live feedback on biometric measurements. Use cases may include fitness environments, user content, workplaces, telepresence, clinical settings, education, training, pain management, and therapy. In some examples, the sensors can be used to capture facial expressions. This is particularly relevant when the user's face is covered by a head-mounted display (HMD). For example, the HMD could use MEMS or motion tracking sensors to detect facial expressions.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 423) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference to them) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 423.

FIG. 424 illustrates a head-mountable device (13.6-200). The head-mountable device (13.6-200) may be substantially similar to the head-mountable devices described herein, such as the head-mountable device (13.6-100), and may include some or all of their features. In some examples, the head-mountable device (13.6-200) includes a controller (13.6-213) (e.g., a sensor controller). While the controller (13.6-213) is illustrated as being positioned on the support (13.6-223), the location of the controller (13.6-213) is not limited to the support (13.6-223), but may be positioned within/on the facial interface (13.6-212) or within the HMD display housing. The controller (13.6-213) may include a processor and a memory device storing computer-executable instructions that, when executed by the processor, cause the controller to receive biometric data from one or more sensors (13.6-224), transmit a signal based on the sensor data, and generate a signal that causes a component to perform an action in response to the signal.

The controller (13.6-213) may include one or more processors (e.g., a system on a chip, an integrated circuit, a driver, a microcontroller, an application processor, a crossover processor, etc.). Additionally, the controller (13.6-213) may include one or more memory devices (e.g., discrete non-volatile memory, embedded non-volatile memory in the processor, random access memory, memory integrated circuits, DRAM chips, stacked memory modules, storage devices, memory partitions, etc.). In certain implementations, the controller (13.6-213) is communicatively coupled to a power source (e.g., a battery).

In some examples, the controller (13.6-213) stores sensor data received from the sensor(s) (13.6-224) in memory. The controller (13.6-213) may receive and/or transmit signals based on the sensor data. For example, as described below, the controller (13.6-213), via the processor and the memory, may transmit a signal to the display (13.6-208) based on the sensor data (e.g., causing the display (13.6-208) or the head-mounted device (13.6-200) to perform an action, such as presenting a predetermined message, turning off the power supply, responding to biometric feedback, etc.).

The controller (13.6-213) may perform any number of different functions. For example, the memory device may store computer-executable instructions that, when executed by the processor, cause the controller to receive sensor data from the sensors (13.6-224) and transmit signals based on the sensor data. For example, the controller (13.6-213) may transmit the sensor signals to the display (13.6-208). In response to the controller (13.6-213), the display (13.6-208) may perform a wide range of actions, including powering the display off or on, responding to user-generated facial expressions, and presenting digital notifications (e.g., user-generated notifications, push notifications, context-generated notifications, system-generated notifications, smart notifications, etc.). In some examples, the memory device stores computer-executable instructions that, when executed by the processor, cause the controller (13.6-213) to receive biometric data from the sensor(s) (13.6-224), to transmit a signal based on the sensor data, and to perform an action in response to the signal.

As illustrated, a head-mounted device (e.g., a wearable electronic device) (13.6-200) may include a display (13.6-208), a facial interface (13.6-212), and sensor(s) (13.6-224) coupled to the engagement interface (13.6-212). The sensors (13.6-224) may be embedded, encapsulated, deposited, adhered, or otherwise attached to the facial interface (13.6-212). The sensors (13.6-224) may be non-contact sensors or may be in direct contact or contact with the user's head. The sensor(s) (13.6-224) may be configured to detect biometric characteristics of the user (13.6-220). The sensor(s) (13.6-224) may transmit a signal to a component of the head-mountable device (13.6-200) that causes the head-mountable device (13.6-200) to perform an action when detecting a signal from the biometric feature. For example, the head-mountable device (13.6-200) may change shape (i.e., tighten or loosen), move, vibrate, rotate, recalibrate, or reposition in response to the sensor signal from the biometric feature.

A head-mountable device (13.6-200) may include a support, headband, or retention band (13.6-223) connected to a display (13.6-208) and/or a frame (13.6-216). The retention band (13.6-223) is configured to secure the display (13.6-108) and/or the frame (13.6-216) to the user's head (13.6-220) (e.g., such that the display (13.6-208) remains in front of the user's eyes). The retention band (13.6-223) may be composed of an elastomeric material, an inelastic material, or a combination of elastomeric and inelastic materials. The retention band (13.6-223) is adjustable so that the retention band (13.6-223) conforms to various shapes and sizes of the user's head (13.6-220). In some examples, the retention band (13.6-223) secures the head-mounted device (13.6-200) through friction between the user's head (13.6-220) and the retention band (13.6-223). In some examples, the retention band (13.6-223) resiliently secures the head-mounted device (13.6-200) to the user's head (13.6-220). In some examples, the retention band (13.6-223) is coupled to a ratchet system or mechanism that secures the head-mounted device (13.6-200) to the user's head (13.6-220). In some examples, the retention band (13.6-223) is positioned over or on an ear (13.6-221) of the user (13.6-220) to support the head-mounted device (13.6-200).

In some examples, the housing or frame (13.6-216) of the head-mountable display (13.6-200) is connected to the facial interface (13.6-212) via a connector (13.6-215), and a retention band (13.6-223) is connected to the frame (13.6-216) and/or the facial interface (13.6-212) to secure the head-mountable device (13.6-200) to the user's head (13.6-220) over or beyond the user's ears (13.6-221).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 424) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 424.

FIG. 425 illustrates a rear view of a head-mountable device (13.6-300). The head-mountable device (13.6-300) may be substantially similar to the head-mountable devices described herein, such as head-mountable devices (13.6-100, 13.6-200), and may include some or all of their features. The head-mountable device (13.6-300) may include a facial interface (e.g., a facial engagement feature) (13.6-312) and a retention band (13.6-323). The head-mounted device (13.6-300) further includes connectors (13.6-332a, 13.6-332b) (collectively referred to as connector(s) (13.6-332)) that connect the retention band (13.6-323) to the facial engagement interface (13.6-312). In some examples, the facial interface (13.6-312) is adjustable to fit the user's head in a comfortable and secure manner while shielding the user from ambient light.

A connector (13.6-332) connecting a retention band (13.6-323) to a facial engagement interface (13.6-312) includes a first connector side (13.6-332a) that attaches to the retention band (13.6-323) and a second connector side (13.6-332b) that attaches to the facial engagement feature (13.6-312). In addition to forming a mechanical attachment between the retention band (13.6-323) and the facial interface (13.6-312), the connector (13.6-332) may include various types of electrical connections, such as pogo-pin connections, or other types of connections for electrically connecting the retention band (13.6-323) to the facial interface (13.6-312). When mated, the first connector side (13.6-332a) and the second connector side (13.6-332b) are mated such that the connectors (13.6-332) are in mechanical and electrical contact (e.g., mechanically mated, magnetically mated via magnets, electrically mated, etc.). When the first connector side (13.6-332a) and the second connector side (13.6-332b) are connected in this manner, electrical signals can be relayed from the retention band (13.6-323) to the face-mating interface (13.6-312), or vice versa. That is, when connected, the face-mating interface (13.6-312) can provide data and/or power to the retention band (13.6-323), for example, to a sensor or electrical component (13.6-324c) of the retention band. Likewise, when connected via connector (13.6-332), the maintenance band (13.6-323) may provide data and/or power to the facial interface (13.6-312), for example, to sensors (13.6-324a and/or 13.6-324b). In some examples, the connectors (13.6-332a, 13.6-332b) may be magnetically aligned or coupled to one another to transmit information via a wireless communication link and receive power from a wireless power source (e.g., an inductive charger).

A head-mounted device (13.6-300) includes one or more sensor(s) (13.6-324a, 13.6-324b, 13.6-324c) (collectively, "sensors (13.6-324)"). In some examples, the sensors (13.6-324) may be in contact (either directly or indirectly) with a user. For example, the sensors are positioned to receive input from the user's forehead, cheek, nose, temple area, back of the head, or any location on the user's head/face. In some examples, the sensors (13.6-324) may be indirectly in contact with the user. For example, the sensors (13.6-324) may detect biometric features of the user via infrared, IR, optical, imaging, or other means of detecting biometric features in an indirect or non-contact manner. The sensors may be biometric or health sensors, such as any of those described above.

In some examples, the sensors (13.6-324) include a first sensor (13.6-324a) oriented toward a first facial region (e.g., forehead) and coupled to an engagement interface (13.6-312), a second sensor (13.6-324b) oriented toward a second facial region (e.g., nose region) and coupled to the engagement interface (13.6-312), and a third sensor or set of sensors (13.6-324c) coupled to a retention band (13.6-323) and configured to contact a side or back of the user's head. When the head-mountable device (13.6-300) is worn, the first sensor (13.6-324a) is oriented toward the first facial region and has a different orientation and location than the second sensor (13.6-324) which is oriented toward the second facial region. It will be understood by those skilled in the art that other configurations are contemplated herein and that the above examples are for illustrative purposes only.

The sensors (13.6-324) may be positioned at various locations on the head-mounted device (13.6-300) and may have different functions or sensing capabilities depending on where the sensors are positioned. For example, the sensors (13.6-324b) may be positioned on the interdigital interface (13.6-312) proximate the user's nose and may sense the user's respiratory biometrics, providing feedback to the user indicating oxygen saturation (e.g., _SPO2 ). In some examples, the sensors (13.6-324a) are positioned on the interdigital interface (13.6-312) in contact with the user's forehead. In some examples, the sensors (13.6-324a) detect pulse, facial expression, brain activity, or stress response during an activity. In some examples, the sensor (13.6-324c) is positioned on the retention band (13.6-323) adjacent to the user's temple(s) or at another location where the retention band (13.6-323) is in contact with the user. In some examples, sensor fusion exists where one or more of the sensors (13.6-324) coordinate and communicate with each other and/or other sensors on the HMD (13.6-300) to collectively collect user data.

In some examples, forehead sensors, such as sensor (13.6-324a), may be used for brain imaging and central nervous system observation. While a single forehead sensor (13.6-324a) is illustrated in FIG. 425b, it will be appreciated that multiple sensors or arrays of sensors may be positioned on the facial interface (13.6-312) so as to contact or be in proximity to the user's head. In some examples, the sensors may be configured to perform electroencephalography (EEG) or functional near-infrared spectroscopy (FNIR).

In some examples, the location of the forehead sensors (13.6-324a) can be tuned or adjusted to detect brain regions associated with language, learning, memory, understanding, sleep, stress, pain, attention, fear, discomfort, etc. In some examples, the facial interface (13.6-312) can be integrated with a sensor array including one or more transmitters that emit signals. The transmitter(s) can be positioned a predetermined distance away from one or more detectors that detect the emitted signals. Based on the signals received by the detectors, the processor can infer or determine a predetermined brain activity. In some examples, the sensors (13.6-324a) can form a brain-computer interface (BCI), such as a non-invasive neural interface. In some examples, the integrated sensor array can be used to detect the prefrontal neural network of the brain.

In some examples, sensors (13.6-324a, 13.6-324c) may be used to perform EEG detections. Sensors (13.6-324a, 13.6-324c) may measure electrical activity of the cerebral cortex (the outer layer of the brain). Sensors (13.6-324a, 13.6-324c) may include electrodes placed on the user's head, which may then noninvasively detect brain waves from the subject. EEG sensors (13.6-324a, 13.6-324c) may record up to thousands of snapshots of electrical activity generated in the brain every second. Recorded brain waves may be transmitted to an amplifier and then to a local processor, a remote electronic device, or the cloud for data processing.

In some examples, the sensors (13.6-324a, 13.6-324c) may be used to perform functional near-infrared spectroscopy (FNIR). The sensors (13.6-324a, 13.6-324c) may use low levels of non-ionizing light to record changes in cerebral blood flow in the brain via optical sensors positioned on the surface of the head.

The sensors described herein can perform both passive and active EEG. Passive electrode signals can be transmitted to a remote processor for analysis. Amplification of the active EEG signals can be performed locally on-site to eliminate coexistence and interference that may exist with the passive signals.

The HMD may include an output or feedback module that provides feedback based on sensor readings. Feedback from the system may include displaying visualizations to the user. For example, the feedback may include breathing visualizations, visualizations related to the user's attention, prompts or suggestions for the user to take a break or change activities, or other suggestions or notifications to the user.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 425 ) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 425 .

FIG. 426 illustrates a side or cross-sectional view of a portion of a facial interface (13.6-412) in which sensor(s) (13.6-424) are embedded in the facial interface (13.6-412). The facial interface (13.6-412) includes a first side or surface (13.6-407) facing the display side (13.6-429) (i.e., facing the HMD display) and a second side or surface (13.6-409) facing the user side (13.6-427). In some examples, the first surface (13.6-407) is attached to the frame of the HMD. In some examples, the second surface (13.6-409) directly contacts or abuts the user's head when the HMD is worn or being worn by the user.

The facial interface (13.6-412) may include one or more sensors (13.6-424a, 13.6-424b, 13.6-424c) (collectively, the "sensors (13.6-424)"). The sensor (13.6-424a) may be positioned on a first surface (13.6-407) of the facial interface (13.6-412). In some examples, the first surface (13.6-409) may be internal to the facial interface (13.6-412) and the second surface (13.6-409) may be external thereto. Thus, the sensor (13.6-424a) may be positioned internally to the facial interface (13.6-412). In some examples, the facial interface (13.6-412) may include a sensor (13.6-424b) that is embedded, encapsulated, or otherwise surrounded by the facial interface (13.6-412). The facial interface (13.6-412) may include a sensor (13.6-424c), wherein the sensor (13.6-424c) is positioned such that a portion thereof is exposed through the second surface (13.6-409). In other words, the sensor (13.6-424c) may at least partially define the second surface (13.6-409) and may directly contact or be in contact with the user's skin. In some examples, the sensor (13.6-424c) may be partially surrounded or embedded within the facial interface (13.6-412). In some examples, the sensor (13.6-424c) is located on the exterior of the facial interface (13.6-412) and on the exterior of the facial interface (13.6-409).

The sensors (13.6-424a, 13.6-424b) may each have corresponding sensor regions (13.6-425a, 13.6-425b). The sensor regions (13.6-425a, 13.6-425b) may represent a field of view or cone of influence transparent to the signals emitted by the sensors (13.6-424a, 13.6-424b). In some examples, the field of view of the sensors (13.6-424) may be approximately 50 degrees. The sensors (13.6-424a, 13.6-424b) may detect physiological, biological, and/or biometric changes of a user's body through the corresponding sensor regions (13.6-425a, 13.6-425b). For example, sensors (13.6-424a, 13.6-424b) may detect changes to the user through the material of the facial interface (13.6-412). Other sensors may be added or replaced as desired. In some examples, sensor regions (13.6-425a, 13.6-425b) may comprise a different material than the remainder of the facial interface (13.6-412). For example, sensor regions (13.6-425a, 13.6-425b) may be transparent to certain signals from the sensors (13.6-424a, 13.6-424b) or from the user, while the remainder of the facial interface (13.6-412) is not transparent or transmissive to such signals.

The sensor (13.6-424b) is positioned at a distance from the first surface (13.6-407) and within the facial interface (13.6-412), and thus closer to the second surface (13.6-409) than the sensor (13.6-424a). In some cases, positioning the sensor (13.6-424b) closer to the second surface (13.6-409) may correspondingly reduce the field of view (13.6-425b). In some examples, the sensor (13.6-424c) may be flush with the second surface (13.6-409) and/or may be in direct contact with the user's face and/or skin. This is just one example of sensor depth variation, as multiple sensors may be positioned on the first surface (13.6-407) of the facial interface (13.6-412) or between the first surface (13.6-407) and the second surface (13.6-409) of the facial interface (13.6-412). In some examples, the second surface (13.6-409) (e.g., the user side (13.6-427)) is adjacent to the forehead area or the nose area of the user's head when the head-mountable device (13.6-100) is worn.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 426 ) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 426 .

FIG. 427 illustrates a front perspective view of a facial interface (13.6-512). The facial interface (13.6-512) may be substantially similar to, and may include some or all of the features of, the facial interfaces described herein, such as facial interfaces (13.6-112, 13.6-212, 13.6-312, 13.6-412). In some examples, the facial interface (13.6-512) may include a frame or clamshell design. In some examples, various components and/or circuitry may be discretely positioned within the volume of the clamshell design. The facial interface (13.6-512) may include a first side (13.6-540a) and a second side (13.6-540b). The first side (13.6-540a) may be proximate to the user when worn. In some examples, the first side (13.6-540a) may contact the user's face. The second side (13.6-540b) may be positioned between the first side (13.6-540a) and the display of the HMD. In some examples, the second side (13.6-540b) is attached to the display housing.

The first side (13.6-540a) may include a connector (13.6-532) configured to attach the facial interface (13.6-512) to a component, such as a retaining band. The connector (13.6-532) may be mechanical and/or electrical. In some examples, the connector (13.6-532) is electrically connected to a sensor (13.6-524c). The first side (13.6-540a) may be configured to contact the face of a user. The first side (13.6-540a) may include sensors (13.6-524a, 13.6-524b, 13.6-524c, 13.6-524d) configured to detect biometric feature(s) of the user. In some examples, the facial interface includes a nose support (13.6-539). The nasal support (13.6-539) may be configured to contact the user's nose. The nasal support (13.6-539) may include at least one sensor (13.6-524b).

In some examples, the facial interface (13.6-512) may be interchangeable with a different facial interface having different sensors or structures. For example, a user may exercise with a head-mounted device (13.6-100) using a first facial interface having specific sensors for exercise. The same user may then play a game or engage in a leisure activity using a head-mounted device (13.6-100) equipped with a different facial interface having different sensors or structures for these activities. This is merely one example, and those skilled in the art will recognize that other examples are contemplated herein.

In some examples, the sensors (13.6-524) are removably attached to the facial interface (13.6-512). For example, a user may wish to replace certain sensors or add additional sensors to the facial interface (13.6-512). The user can selectively attach or remove the sensors (13.6-524) and replace them with other sensors depending on the user's activity or the purpose of the sensor. In this way, the sensors can accommodate the user's needs or desires for specific activities that require specific sensors without having to replace the entire HMD or facial interface (13.6-512).

In some examples, the facial interface (13.6-512) includes a connector (13.6-536). The connector (13.6-536) may be electrically connected to one or more of the sensors (13.6-524) via a wired or wireless connection (13.6-543). In some examples, the facial interface (13.6-512) is in electrical communication with the display via the wired connection link (13.6-543) and/or the connector (13.6-536), such as a braided electrical cable, a pogo connection, or another type of wired connection. In some examples, the facial interface (13.6-512) may be in electrical communication with the display (13.6-208) via a wireless connection (e.g., a low energy Bluetooth BLE connection). In some examples, data or signals from the sensors (13.6-524) are transmitted via link (13.6-543) to connector (13.6-536), where they are further transmitted to the HMD itself to be processed. Thus, in some examples, the facial interface (13.6-512) serves as an interconnection between the retention band and the display unit. In some examples, the retention band may be directly mated into the display unit, bypassing the facial interface (13.6-612). In some examples, the facial interface (13.6-512) may include an Orion style connection (e.g., three contact pads and three contact pins).

In some examples, the facial interface (13.6-512) includes a bridging feature (13.6-541) that structurally connects the first side (13.6-540a) and the second side (13.6-540b). In some examples, the bridging feature (13.6-541) may provide a conduit for wires or electronic devices, such as a link (13.6-543). In some examples, the bridging feature (13.6-541) is flexible, allowing the facial interface first side (13.6-540a) to move, pivot, or change shape relative to the facial interface second side (13.6-540b). In some examples, the bridging feature (13.6-541) is rigid, so that the facial interface first side (13.6-540a) does not move relative to the facial interface second side (13.6-540b).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 427) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 427.

FIG. 428 illustrates a perspective view of selected components of a head-mounted device (13.6-600). The HMD (13.6-600) may be substantially similar to the HMDs described herein and may include some or all of their features. The HMD (13.6-600) may include a chassis or frame (13.6-609) that can at least partially house a display, and a facial interface (13.6-612) that can contact a user's face. In some examples, the HMD (13.6-600) changes shape in response to signals from one or more sensor(s) (13.6-624a, 13.6-624b, 13.6-624c) (collectively, the "sensors (13.6-624)"). The frame (13.6-609) can be connected to the facial interface (13.6-612) via connector(s) (13.6-615). In some examples, the connectors (13.6-615) are electrical and/or mechanical connectors configured to establish electrical and/or mechanical connections between the frame (13.6-609) and the facial interface (13.6-612). In some examples, the connectors (13.6-615) are articulated or movable, such that the connectors (13.6-615) can move to change the shape of the HMD (13.6-600). In some examples, the HMD (13.6-600) can include strain gauges or point load pressure sensors that can be used in the posts (13.6-615) to act as pressure sensors to extrapolate the tension of the retention band. The system may then guide the user to adjust the HMD for a proper fit (e.g., by prompting them to tighten or loosen the band or change its angle). In some examples, the display may show the user how to adjust the band up or down based on the detected tension. In some examples, the semiconductor(s) may be embedded within the facial interface (e.g., within the form of the facial interface).

In some examples, the facial interface (13.6-612) may be integrated with one or more feedback modules or outputs (13.6-650, 13.6-653). The sensors (13.6-624) may receive biometric input from a user. Based on the input detected by the sensors (13.6-624), the outputs (13.6-650, 13.6-653) may perform some action. The outputs (13.6-650, 13.6-653) may include LEDs, haptics, speakers, motors, displays, or any other feedback devices that generate output in response to signals of biometric information from the sensors (13.6-624). For example, one or more of the sensors (13.6-624) may detect when the HMD is being worn, e.g., via capacitive or pressure sensors. Next, the sensors (13.6-624) may generate a signal that may be analyzed by the processor. The processor may then cause a first feedback output (13.6-650), such as causing an LED to emit light of a predetermined color to indicate that the head-mounted device (13.6-600) is being worn. In some examples, the second feedback output (13.6-653) may be a feedback output, such as a haptic feedback output that notifies the user of a notification (e.g., a message notification, a text notification, an email notification, etc.). In some examples, the output (13.6-653) may be a display that is visible to the user and may extend the user's peripheral view. It should be appreciated by those skilled in the art that the above example is one example and that other examples of feedback outputs are contemplated herein.

In some examples, the chassis or frame (13.6-609) may at least partially define an exterior surface of the HMD (13.6-600). In some examples, health sensors (13.6-616) may be mounted, attached, or otherwise integrated into/on the chassis (13.6-609). While two health sensors (13.6-616) are illustrated, it will be appreciated that one, two, or more than two sensors may be used and are contemplated by the present disclosure. The health sensors (13.6-616) may be substantially similar to the sensors described herein (e.g., sensors (13.6-624)) and may include some or all of the features thereof. In some examples, the health sensors (13.6-616) may be non-contact sensors (i.e., the health sensors (13.6-616) may collect intended data without requiring direct physical contact with a user). The health sensors (13.6-616) may be positioned on a lower surface of the chassis (13.6-609). The health sensors (616) may at least partially define an outer surface of the HMD (13.6-600).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations depicted in FIG. 428) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions depicted in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations depicted in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions depicted in FIG. 428.

13.7: Health Detection Maintenance Band

According to some aspects of the present disclosure, a head-mounted device may include a housing, a display positioned within the housing, a processor positioned within the housing, and a retention band connected to the housing and including a sensor for monitoring brain activity of the user.

In some examples, the maintenance band includes a sensor array positionable adjacent to the back of the user's head when the head-mounted device is worn by the user. The sensor array can detect the user's brain activity. The sensors can transmit signals based on biometric information to the processor. The processor can analyze the signals and, in response to the analysis of the signals, cause the head-mounted device to perform an action. The action can be at least one of providing visual feedback, providing audio feedback, or providing haptic feedback.

In some examples, the retention band is removably attached to the housing.

The sensor may be removably attached to a retention band. The retention band may be in electrical communication with the display. The retention band may be pivotally attached to the housing.

According to some embodiments, a headband for a head-mountable device may include a first end for attaching to the head-mountable device, a second end for attaching to the head-mountable device, and a sensor positioned between the first end and the second end. The sensor may detect brain activity of a user and generate a signal based on the detected brain activity.

In some examples, the sensor may be embedded within the headband. The headband may include a transparent region to the signal emitted by the sensor. The headband may be articulated relative to a head-mounted device. The headband may include an expandable surface area. The signal may include a display command signal.

According to some embodiments, a wearable electronic device includes a display, a retention band attached to the display and having a first orientation and a second orientation, and a sensor connected to the retention band. The sensor can detect brain activity of the user and generate a signal based on the brain activity. The processor can perform a first analysis of the signal in response to the retention band being in the first orientation, and a second analysis of the signal in response to the retention band being in the second orientation.

In some examples, the wearable electronic device can perform an action in response to a signal. The wearable electronic device may include a head-mounted device. The retention band may be adjustable. The sensor may perform at least one of functional near-infrared spectroscopy or electroencephalography.

In some examples, the retention band is movable between a first position and a second position. The sensor may be oriented toward a first brain region in the first position and toward a second brain region in the second position when the wearable electronic device is worn by a user. The retention band may generate at least one of visual feedback, audio feedback, or haptic feedback in response to a signal from the sensor. The sensor may be the first sensor. The wearable device may further include a second sensor connected to the retention band. The second sensor may collect vital signs.

The present disclosure includes details of a retention band for a head-mounted device integrated with health sensors. The integrated retention band may enable both optical and electrical neuroimaging of a user's head. In some examples, the sensor-integrated headband may be used for brain imaging. For example, the sensors may be configured to perform functional near-infrared spectroscopy (FNIR). In some examples, the sensors may be used to perform electroencephalography (EEG).

The retention band can be adjustable or articulated to position the sensors in desired locations on the user's head. By adjusting the retention band, the sensors can monitor specific brain regions. For example, the position of the sensors can be tuned or adjusted to monitor brain regions associated with language, learning, memory, comprehension, sleep, stress, pain, attention, fear, and discomfort.

In some examples, the maintenance band may be integrated with a sensor array comprising one or more transmitters that emit signals. The transmitter(s) may be positioned at a predetermined distance from one or more detectors that detect the emitted signals. Based on the signals received by the detectors, the processor may infer or determine a predetermined brain activity. In some examples, the integrated sensors on the maintenance band form a brain-computer interface (BCI), such as a noninvasive neural interface. In some examples, the integrated sensor array may be used to detect prefrontal neural networks in the brain.

The HMD may include an output or feedback module that provides feedback based on sensor readings. Feedback from the system may include displaying visualizations to the user. For example, the feedback may include breathing visualizations, visualizations related to the user's attention, prompts or suggestions for the user to take a break or change activities, or other suggestions or notifications to the user.

These and other embodiments are discussed below with reference to FIGS. 429 through 434. However, one of ordinary skill in the art will readily recognize that the detailed description provided herein with respect to these drawings is for illustrative purposes only and should not be construed as limiting. Moreover, as used herein, a system, method, article, component, feature, or sub-feature that includes at least one of the first option, the second option, or the third option should be understood to refer to a system, method, article, component, feature, or sub-feature that may include one of each of the listed options (e.g., only one of the first option, only one of the second option, or only one of the third option), multiple of a single listed option (e.g., two or more of the first option), two options simultaneously (e.g., one of the first option and one of the second option), or a combination thereof (e.g., two of the first option and one of the second option).

FIG. 429 illustrates a schematic block diagram of a head-mounted device (13.7-100) including a display (13.7-104), a retention band (13.7-108), memory (13.7-106), and a processor (13.7-120). The display (13.7-104) may include one or more optical lenses or display screens in front of the user's eyes. The display (13.7-104) may present augmented reality visualizations, virtual reality visualizations, or other suitable visualizations to the user. Additionally, the display (13.7-104) may be positioned within or on a housing or frame that supports the display (13.7-104) and additional electronic components. The display (13.7-104) in combination with the frame or housing and other electronic components supported by the housing may be referred to as a display unit (13.7-104) and the display (13.7-104). The maintenance band (13.7-108) can be connected to the frame or housing of the display (13.7-104).

In some examples, the retention band (13.7-108) may include a support, strap, headband, belt, arms, or any other attachment mechanism capable of supporting the HMD (13.7-100) on the user's head. In some examples, the retention band (13.7-108) may include a flexible (or semi-flexible) material or fabric that partially wraps around the user's head.

The retention band (13.7-108) may be made of a flexible material and may fit securely and snugly around the user's head. The retention band (13.7-108) may be made of a woven fabric, leather, polymer, or any other material that is compatible with integration with the sensors (13.7-112) and has electromagnetically transparent properties. In some examples, the retention band (13.7-108) may be made of silicone or thermoplastic polyurethane (TPU). In some examples, the retention band (13.7-108) may be made of compression molded materials, such as rubber. The sensors (13.7-112) may be integrated into the compression molded materials. In some examples, the retention band (13.7-108) is semi-rigid. For example, the retention band (13.7-108) may be rigid where the sensors (13.7-112) are positioned. The sensors (13.7-112) may be flexible or deformable relative to one another such that the sensor array may move, bend, or stretch along with the retention band (13.7-108). The retention band (13.7-108) may include rigid sections where the electronic components are positioned.

The retention band (13.7-108) may include two ends, straps or side bands (13.7-108a) that are connected to the display (13.7-104). The retention band (13.7-108) may include a middle section (13.7-108b) positioned between the ends (13.7-108a) of the retention band (13.7-108). The middle section (13.7-108b) may be configured to contact the back of the user's head, while the side bands (13.7-108a) may be considered to contact the sides of the user's head. The retention band (13.7-108) may include pivots (13.7-115). The pivots (13.7-115) may be positioned between the display (13.7-104) and the sidebands (13.7-108a) such that the entire retaining band (13.7-108) may pivot or rotate relative to the display (13.7-104). In some examples, the pivots (13.7-115) may be positioned between the sidebands (13.7-108a) and the middle section (13.7-108b) such that the middle section (13.7-108b) may pivot or rotate relative to the sidebands (13.7-108b) and the display (13.7-104). Additional details of the pivots will be provided below with respect to FIGS. 432a-432c.

The retention band (13.7-108) may include one or more sensors (13.7-112). It will be understood that references to "sensors" throughout this disclosure may refer to one or more sensors. The phrase "sensors" allows for multiple sensors, but does not necessarily require multiple sensors. In some examples, the sensors (13.7-112) may be removably attached to the retention band (13.7-108). The retention band (13.7-108) may be removably attached to the display (13.7-104) and may be in electrical communication with the display (13.7-104). In other words, the sensors (13.7-112) may be in electrical communication with the display (13.7-104).

The sensors (13.7-112) of the wristband (13.7-108) can collect biometric information such as brain activity and vital signs (including body temperature, pulse data, respiration data, and blood pressure). The sensors (13.7-112) can generate signals based on the collected user information and transmit the signals to the processor (13.7-120) for analysis. In some examples, the memory (13.7-106) can include programmed instructions that respond to the signals from the sensors (13.7-112). In some examples, the instructions can cause an output or feedback module to perform an action in response to the signals (i.e., in response to the biometric information collected by the sensors (13.7-112)). In some examples, the maintenance band (13.7-108) itself provides feedback (e.g., via LEDs, tactile or haptic feedback, changing its shape, color, etc.) based on the collected biometric information.

For example, a user may be in a meditation or psychological awareness session enabled by the HMD (13.7-100). During the activity, the user's brain waves or other biometrics may change in a detectable manner by sensors (13.7-112). The sensors (13.7-112) may generate one or more signals based on the received input. The sensors (13.7-112) may transmit the signals to a processor (13.7-120) that may cause actions by one or more components of the HMD (13.7-100) (e.g., to a display (13.7-104) to provide visual feedback to the user). The display (13.7-104), in electrical communication with the wristband (13.7-108), may receive the electrical communications and provide feedback to the user (e.g., visual feedback, audio feedback, haptic feedback, etc.) related to the user's biometric readings. Feedback may include determining when the user needs to take a break, or when the difficulty of an activity needs to be lowered or increased, and output may include scheduling different activities for the user or recommending adjustments to the HMD (13.7-100).

The sensors (13.7-112) may include a variety of different sensing devices. The sensors (13.7-112) may include, but are not limited to, brain activity sensors, cameras or imaging devices, temperature devices, oxygen devices, motion devices, brain activity devices, sweat activity devices, respiratory activity devices, muscle contraction devices, and the like. In some examples, the sensors may detect or sense biometric features, including features of the autonomic nervous system.

Some specific examples of sensors include electrooculography (EOG) sensors, electrocardiography (ECG or EKG) sensors, electroencephalography (EEG), photoplethysmography (PPG) sensors, heart rate sensors, heart rate variability sensors, blood volume pulse sensors, oxygen saturation (SpO2) sensors, compact pressure sensors, electromyography (EMG) sensors, core body temperature sensors, galvanic skin response (GSR) sensors, functional near-infrared spectroscopy (FNIR) sensors, functional magnetic infrared imaging (FMRI) sensors, non-contact passive infrared (IR) sensors, accelerometers, gyroscopes, magnetometers, inclinometers, barometers, infrared sensors, global positioning system sensors, etc.

In some examples, the sensors (13.7-112) may include contact microphones (e.g., pressure-based MEMS), bioelectrical activity sensors, UV exposure sensors, or particle sensors. In some examples, certain sensors may be used to assess stress and emotion. In some examples, the sensors may operate via coin cell batteries or a Bluetooth connection. In some examples, the sensors are powered by the HMD's primary battery.

The sensors (13.7-112) described herein can monitor the autonomic nervous system (ANS), enabling the monitoring of relaxation and stress indicators, mental health, medical treatments, and more. Using the sensors, physicians and caregivers can obtain live feedback on biometric measurements. Use cases may include fitness environments, user content, workplaces, telepresence, clinical settings, education, training, pain, and therapy. In some examples, the sensors can be used to capture facial expressions. This is particularly relevant when the user's face is covered by a head-mounted display (HMD). For example, the HMD may use MEMS or motion tracking sensors to detect facial expressions.

In some examples, sensors (13.7-112) may be used to perform EEG detections. The sensors (13.7-112) may measure electrical activity of the cerebral cortex (the outer layer of the brain). The sensors (13.7-112) may include electrodes placed on the participant's head, which may then noninvasively detect brain waves from the subject. The EEG sensors (13.7-112) may record up to thousands of snapshots of electrical activity generated in the brain every second. The recorded brain waves may be transmitted to an amplifier and then to a processor (13.7-120), a remote electronic device, or the cloud for data processing.

In some examples, the sensors (13.7-112) may be used to perform functional near-infrared spectroscopy (FNIR). The sensors (13.7-112) may use low levels of non-ionizing light to record changes in cerebral blood flow in the brain via optical sensors (13.7-112) placed on the surface of the scalp. The signals may be recorded via flexible fiber optic cables.

The HMD (13.7-100) may include electronic components that are communicatively coupled to each other and to sensors (13.7-112) via wired or wireless communication links. The communication links may be physical connections, such as electrical wires, or wireless connections, such as Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, proximity sensors, etc. In some examples, the HMD (13.7-100) may be communicatively coupled to a companion electronic device, such as a remote control, or a personal computing device, such as a smartphone, smartwatch, laptop, tablet, HMD, or any other form of electronic device. As described in more detail below, signals from the sensors (13.7-112) may affect the HMD (13.7-100). For example, the sensors (13.7-112) may affect the visual information, content, style, frequency, and behavior of the content provided by the sensors (13.7-112).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 429) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 429.

FIG. 430 illustrates a plan view of a head-mounted device (HMD) (13.7-200). The HMD (13.7-200) may be substantially similar to the head-mounted devices described herein, such as the HMD (13.7-100), and may include some or all of their features. The HMD (13.7-200) may include a display unit (13.7-204) and a retention band (13.7-208). The display unit (13.7-204) may include electronic components such as a display, a processor, memory, a controller, a battery, and other circuitry and electronics. The display unit (13.7-204) may include a frame or housing that structurally supports the electronic components. In some examples, the display (13.7-204) includes an opaque, partially transparent, transparent, or translucent screen including any number of lenses for presenting visual data.

The frame may at least partially border one or more edges of the display. In some examples, the frame may be configured to contact the user's head or face. In some examples, the frame may block external light and limit the user's peripheral view. Various components of the display unit (13.7-204) may be housed within the frame. For example, hardware and electronics that enable the functionality of the HMD may be housed within the frame. In some examples, the frame may include attachment points for connecting the display unit (13.7-204) to the retention band (13.7-208). For example, the frame may include mechanical attachment points, magnetic attachment points, or any other suitable connector for attaching the retention band (13.7-208) to the display unit (13.7-204).

The HMD (13.7-200) may be worn on the user's head such that the display unit (13.7-204) is positioned over the user's face and over one or both of the user's eyes. In some examples, the retention band (13.7-208) may be positioned against (i.e., in contact with or press against) the side and/or back of the user's head when worn. In some examples, the retention band (13.7-208) may be positioned at least partially over the user's ear or ears. In some examples, the retention band (13.7-208) may be positioned adjacent to the user's ear or ears. The display unit (13.7-204) and the retention band (13.7-208) may form a loop defining an opening (13.7-205) for the user's head. However, it should be understood that this configuration is only an example of how the components of the HMD (13.7-200) may be arranged, and that in some examples, a different number of connector straps and/or retention bands may be included.

In some examples, the retention band (13.7-208) includes a first sensor array (13.7-212a) comprising one or more sensors. The sensor array (13.7-212a) may be positioned on the back of the retention band (13.7-208) positioned to contact or be proximate to the back of the user's head when the HMD (13.7-200) is worn by the user. In some examples, the retention band (13.7-208) includes a second sensor array (13.7-212b) comprising one or more sensors. The second sensor array (13.7-212b) may be positioned on a side strap or arm of the retention band (13.7-208) positioned to contact or be proximate to the side of the user's head when the HMD (13.7-200) is worn by the user. In some examples, the first sensor array (13.7-212a) and the second sensor array (13.7-212b) are separate and distinct in both form and function. The first sensor array (13.7-212a) may include different sensors than the second sensor array (13.7-212b).

In some examples, the first sensor array (13.7-212a) can be translated or moved along the retention band (13.7-208). For example, the first sensor array (13.7-212a) can slide from a first location on the retention band (13.7-208) (e.g., at the back of the band) to a second location on the retention band (13.7-208) (e.g., at the side strap). The translation of the sensor array (13.7-212a) can be manually or automatically actuated. In this manner, the sensor array (13.7-212a) can be moved to monitor different areas of the user's head.

In some examples, the first sensor array (13.7-212a) and the second sensor array (13.7-212b) (collectively referred to as "sensors (13.7-212)") include identical sensors and are considered part of a single array of sensors. The sensors (13.7-212) may be positioned on the inner surface (13.7-207) of the retention band (13.7-208). In some examples, the sensors (13.7-212) are positioned within the retention band (13.7-208) (i.e., between the inner surface (13.7-207) and the outer surface (13.7-209)). In some examples, the sensors (13.7-212) may span substantially the entire length of the retention band (13.7-208). As discussed in more detail herein, the sensors (13.7-212) may be integrated with the maintenance band (13.7-208) in a variety of ways.

In some examples, sensors (13.7-212) may be used to perform EEG detections. The sensors (13.7-212) may measure electrical activity of the cerebral cortex (the outer layer of the brain). The sensors (13.7-212) may include electrodes placed on the participant's head, which may then noninvasively detect brain waves from the subject. The EEG sensors (13.7-212) may record up to thousands of snapshots of electrical activity generated in the brain every second. The recorded brain waves may be transmitted to an amplifier and then to a head-mounted display computer, a remote electronic device, or the cloud for data processing.

In some examples, the sensors (13.7-212) may be used to perform functional near-infrared spectroscopy (FNIR). The sensors (13.7-212) may use low levels of non-ionizing light to record changes in cerebral blood flow in the brain via optical sensors (13.7-212) placed on the surface of the scalp. The signals may be recorded via flexible fiber optic cables.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations depicted in FIG. 430 ) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions depicted in other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations depicted in other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions depicted in FIG. 430 . Additional details regarding the integration of sensors into the HMD retention band are described below with reference to FIG. 431 .

FIG. 431 illustrates a cross-sectional side view of a head-mounted device (HMD) (13.7-300). The HMD (13.7-300) may be substantially similar to the head-mounted devices described herein, such as the HMDs (13.7-100, 13.7-200), and may include some or all of their features. In some examples, sensor(s) (13.7-312) positioned within/on the retainer band (13.7-308) may be operatively coupled to one or more electronic components within the display unit (13.7-304). For example, the sensors (13.7-312) may be electrically coupled to a power source, such as a battery (13.7-335), disposed within or on the housing of the display unit (13.7-304) via electrical connectors (13.7-311). The sensor (13.7-312) may be communicatively coupled to a processor (13.7-320) or other controller housed within the head-mounted device (13.7-300). The battery (13.7-335) and/or the processor (13.7-320) may be located within the housing of the display unit (13.7-304), within the retention band (13.7-108), external to the housing of the display unit (13.7-304) and the retention band (13.7-108), or combinations thereof. The sensor (13.7-312) may generate signals reflecting the user's biometrics and transmit them to the processor (13.7-320). The processor (13.7-320) may then cause commands or instructions to be issued.

Although the sensors (13.7-312) are shown as being connected to the battery (13.7-335) and the processor (13.7-320) via wired connections (13.7-311), in some examples, the sensors (13.7-312) may wirelessly receive data and/or power from the battery (13.7-335) and/or the processor (13.7-320) by any desired method or technique. In some examples, the sensors (13.7-312) may be communicatively coupled to an external device not located on the HMD (13.7-300).

Additionally, although the components of the wearable electronic device (13.7-300) are depicted as being connected to one another at specific locations, it should be understood that any of the components of the HMD (13.7-300) may be electrically and/or mechanically connected to one or more of any other components of the HMD (13.7-300) in any manner and location as desired.

In some examples, the maintenance band (13.7-308) may include other operating or functional components in addition to the sensors (13.7-312). For example, the maintenance band (13.7-108) may include a battery (13.7-335) that may be in electrical communication with the display unit (13.7-304) and/or the sensors (13.7-312).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 431 ) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 431 .

FIG. 432A illustrates a rear perspective view of a retention band (13.7-408). The retention band (13.7-408) may be substantially similar to the retention bands described herein, such as retention bands (13.7-108, 13.7-208, 13.7-308), and may include some or all of their features. Although FIG. 432A illustrates that the sensors (13.7-412) are visible from the exterior of the retention band (13.7-408), it will be appreciated that in some instances, the sensors (13.7-412) are hidden or concealed behind a cover or layer of the retention band (13.7-408). The sensors (13.7-412) may be configured to make direct contact or abut the user's head. In some instances, the sensors (13.7-412) are non-contact sensors. In some examples, the retention band (13.7-408) comprises multiple components. For example, the retention band (13.7-408) may include side bands or arms (13.7-408a) and a middle section or rear portion (13.7-408b) (collectively the retention band (13.7-408)). The rear portion (13.7-408b) may be connected to the arms (13.7-408a) via pivots (13.7-415) at each end.

In some examples, the sensors (13.7-412) may be interconnected (i.e., electrically connected) via wires (13.7-411). The wires (13.7-411) may further define a communication link between the display unit and the retention band (13.7-408). The sensors (13.7-412) may be positioned substantially across the entire rear portion (13.7-408b) of the retention band (13.7-408). In some examples, the sensors (13.7-412) may be intentionally positioned to align with specific portions of the user's head when worn. As illustrated in more detail with reference to FIGS. 432b and 432c, the retention band (13.7-408) may be articulated. By adjusting, articulating, or moving the position of the support band (13.7-408) on the HMD, the sensors (13.7-412) can be positioned in various areas of the user's head.

In some examples, the sensors (13.7-412) may include ground sensors. For example, one or more of the sensors (13.7-412) may be a ground sensor used as a reference sensor. Detections from the sensors (13.7-412) may be compared to the ground reference sensor to analyze the detections. In some examples, the sensors (13.7-412) may include rounded edges and/or elastomeric or flexible material that are transparent to the signals generated by the sensors (13.7-412). The rounded edges and flexible material may help reduce discomfort when the sensors (13.7-412) are in contact with the user's head. In some examples, the geometry of the sensors (13.7-412) may be specifically designed to assist in parting the user's hair to ensure efficient contact with the user's head. In some examples, the sensors move (e.g., vibrate, rotate, or oscillate) to help ensure proper contact with the user's skull.

In some examples, the retention band (13.7-408) is a specialized band that can be interchanged with other headbands tailored for different applications. For example, there may be individually customized retention bands for education, sports, industrial applications, health, learning, training, and other applications. Each different retention band may be integrated with sensors specific to its needs.

In some examples, the retention band (13.7-408) may be detachable or removable from the HMD. In other words, the HMD may include a standard headband that is replaced or modified with the retention band (13.7-408). In some examples, the retention band (13.7-408) may be an add-on component that is added to the HMD when desired or needed. The retention band (13.7-408) may include electrical/mechanical attachment mechanisms for attaching to the HMD. For example, the retention band (13.7-408) may include attachment mechanisms (13.7-418) that can electrically, mechanically, and/or magnetically connect the retention band (13.7-408) to the HMD. In some examples, the retention band is wirelessly connected to the HMD to transmit data. The retention band (13.7-408) may include its own power source and processing capabilities.

In some examples, the retention band (13.7-408) may be expandable to expose additional sensors (13.7-412). For example, the retention band (13.7-408) may be folded or overlapped to reduce the surface area of the retention band (13.7-408). Subsequently, if desired, the retention band (13.7-408) may be stretched, unfolded, or expanded to reveal additional sensors previously covered.

FIG. 432b illustrates a side view of an upwardly rotated retention band (13.7-408). As illustrated, the rear portion (13.7-408b) of the retention band (13.7-408) can rotate relative to the side arms (13.7-408a) via pivots (13.7-415). In some examples, the entire retention band (13.7-408) can rotate relative to the housing or frame of the HMD (i.e., the pivots (13.7-415) can be positioned on the HMD housing). Movement of the retention band (13.7-408) can be manual or automated. In some examples, the user is prompted, guided, or instructed to move the retention band (13.7-408) into a predetermined position or configuration. For example, the system may prompt the user to adjust the retention band (13.7-408) to optimize the ability of the sensors (13.7-412) to detect desired biometric data. In this configuration, the sensors (13.7-412) would be positioned on or near the top of the user's head.

In some examples, the HMD includes multiple retention bands (13.7-408). For example, the HMD may include a back-of-the-head band that wraps around the back of the user's head and an over-the-head band that wraps over the user's head. Each of the bands may include sensors described herein. In some examples, the retention band (13.7-408) may be a bifurcated strap having sensors on each bifurcated section to increase the coverage area of the sensors on the head.

FIG. 432c illustrates a side view of a downwardly rotated retention band (13.7-408). As illustrated, the rear portion (13.7-408b) of the retention band (13.7-408) can rotate relative to the side arms (13.7-408a) via pivots (13.7-415). In some examples, the entire retention band (13.7-408) can rotate relative to the housing or frame of the HMD (i.e., the side straps (13.7-408a) also rotate and the pivots (13.7-415) are positioned on the HMD housing). Movement of the retention band (13.7-408) can be manual or automated. In some examples, the user is prompted, guided, or instructed to move the retention band (13.7-408) into a predetermined position or configuration. For example, the system may prompt the user to adjust the retention band (13.7-408) downward to optimize the ability of the sensors (13.7-412) to detect desired biometric data. In such a configuration, the sensors (13.7-412) would be positioned near the top of the neck, at or near the bottom of the user's head. In such a configuration, the sensors (13.7-412) could be used to detect information about neck muscles. In some examples, the location or position of the retention band (13.7-408) may determine what type of analysis is performed by the processor. For example, the processor may interpret the signal differently based on the detected location of the retention band (13.7-408) relative to the HMD and/or the user when the signal was acquired. In some examples, the signal analysis varies based on which area of the brain is being monitored by the sensors (13.7-412). In some examples, the operation of the sensors themselves varies based on the location of the retention band (13.7-408). For example, different sensors may be used to monitor different brain regions, or different sensor emissions/detections may be used based on the location of the sensors relative to the user. In one example, a position-detecting IMU, sensor, encoder, or the like may be positioned within the retention band (13.7-408) to detect the relative position of the band and generate a signal indicative of the position. The processor may then use such a signal to determine the type of analysis to be performed on the data collected from the sensors (13.7-412).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 432a through 432c) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference to them) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 432a through 432c.

FIG. 433 illustrates an exploded perspective view of an HMD (13.7-500). The HMD (13.7-500) may be substantially similar to any of the HMDs described herein, such as HMDs (13.7-100, 13.7-200, 13.7-300, 13.7-500), and may include some or all of their features. The HMD (13.7-500) may include a display unit (13.7-504) and a retention band (13.7-508). The retention band (13.7-508) may include an inner portion (13.7-507) that contacts a user's head when worn, and an outer portion (13.7-509) that at least partially defines an outer surface of the wearable device (13.7-500). The outer portion (13.7-509) may be formed integrally with the inner portion (13.7-507). In other words, the inner portion (13.7-507) and the outer portion (13.7-509) may be manufactured from a single piece of material (illustrated separately here for simplicity). In some examples, the outer portion (13.7-509) and the inner portion (13.7-507) may be joined to each other using, for example, an adhesive, screws, or other joining techniques.

In some examples, the HMD (13.7-500) may include a first sensor array (13.7-512a) and a second sensor array (13.7-512b) (collectively referred to as "sensors (13.7-512)"). In some examples, the inner portion (13.7-507) may include a material that is transparent to the sensors (13.7-512). The sensors (13.7-512) may be positioned between the inner portion (13.7-507) and the outer portion (13.7-509) such that the sensors (13.7-512) are positioned within the retention band (13.7-508). In some examples, the inner portion (13.7-507) of the retention band (13.7-508) may include a perforated section adjacent to the sensors (13.7-512). The perforated section may include holes, gaps or openings formed in the material of the inner portion (13.7-507).

The apertures within the inner portion (13.7-507) may correspond to the locations of the sensors (13.7-512) and may allow signals from the sensors, or the sensors themselves, to pass through the apertures. In other words, the sensors (13.7-512) may be exposed and accessible in the inner portion (13.7-507), for example, to make contact with the user's head. In some examples, the sensors (13.7-512) are embedded or sandwiched between the inner portion (13.7-507) and the outer portion (13.7-509) of the retention band (13.7-508). In some examples, the sensors (13.7-512) may be positioned adjacent to a window (13.7-530) that is transparent or transmissive to the sensor, allowing transmission and reception of signals between the user's head and the sensors (13.7-512). The sensors (13.7-512) may be electrically coupled to an electronic component (13.7-520) within the display unit (13.7-504), such as a processor or a battery, via one or more electrical connections (13.7-511).

In some examples, the sensor array (13.7-512) may be flexible and may bend or curve according to the shape of the retention band (13.7-508) on the user's head. In some examples, the sensors (13.7-512) include flex cables and/or optical fibers or fiber optic cables woven into the fabric of the retention band (13.7-508). In some examples, the retention band (13.7-508) may include conductive fibers woven into the fabric of the retention band (13.7-508).

The retention band (13.7-508) may be made of a flexible material and may fit securely and snugly around the user's head. The retention band (13.7-508) may be made of a woven fabric, leather, polymer, or any other material that is compatible with micro-perforations or has electromagnetically transparent properties. In some examples, the retention band (13.7-508) may be made of silicone or thermoplastic polyurethane (TPU). In some examples, the retention band (13.7-508) may be made of compression molded materials, such as rubber. The sensors (13.7-512) may be integrated into the compression molded materials. In some examples, the retention band (13.7-508) is semi-rigid. For example, the retention band (13.7-508) may be rigid where the sensors (13.7-512) are positioned.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 433) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference to them) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 433.

FIG. 434 illustrates a side or cross-sectional view of a portion of a retention band (13.7-608). The retention band (13.7-608) may be substantially similar to the retention bands described herein, such as retention bands (13.7-108, 13.7-208, 13.7-308, 13.7-408, 13.7-508), and may include some or all of their features. The retention band (13.7-608) may include one or more sensors (13.7-612a, 13.7-612b, 13.7-612c) (collectively referred to as "sensors (13.7-612)"). The sensors (13.7-612) may be partially or fully embedded or encapsulated within the retention band (13.7-608). The retention band (13.7-608) may include a first inner surface (13.7-607) that faces the user's head when worn, and a second outer surface (13.7-609) that faces away from the user and defines an exterior of the retention band (13.7-608). In some examples, the first surface (13.7-607) directly contacts or abuts the user's head when the HMD is worn or being worn by the user.

The sensor (13.7-612a) may be positioned on an outer surface (13.7-609) of the retention band (13.7-608). In some examples, the first surface (13.7-607) may define an interior of the retention band (13.7-608), and the second surface (13.7-609) may be an exterior of the retention band. Thus, the sensor (13.7-612a) may be positioned on an exterior of the retention band (13.7-608). In some examples, the retention band (13.7-608) may include a sensor (13.7-612b) embedded in, encapsulated in, or otherwise surrounded by the retention band (13.7-608). The retention band (13.7-608) may include a sensor (13.7-612c), wherein the sensor (13.7-612c) is positioned such that a portion thereof is exposed through the interior surface (13.7-607). In other words, the sensor (13.7-612c) may at least partially define the interior of the retention band (13.7-608) and may directly contact or be in contact with the user's head. In some examples, the sensor (13.7-612c) may be partially enclosed or embedded within the retention band (13.7-608). In some examples, the sensor (13.7-612c) is externally attached to the retention band (13.7-608) and positioned on the interior of the retention band (13.7-608).

The sensors (13.7-612a, 13.7-612b) may each have corresponding sensor regions (13.7-625a, 13.7-625b). The sensor regions (13.7-625a, 13.7-625b) may represent a field of view or cone of influence transparent to the signals emitted by the sensors (13.7-612a, 13.7-612b). In some examples, the field of view of the sensors (13.7-612) may be approximately 50 degrees. The sensors (13.7-612a, 13.7-612b) may detect physiological, biological, and/or biometric changes of a user's body through the corresponding sensor regions (13.7-625a, 13.7-625b). For example, the sensors (13.7-612a, 13.7-612b) may detect changes to the user through the material of the retention band (13.7-608). Other sensors may be added or replaced as desired. In some examples, the sensor regions (13.7-625a, 13.7-625b) may comprise a different material than the remainder of the retention band (13.7-608). For example, the sensor regions (13.7-625a, 13.7-625b) may be transparent to certain signals from the sensors (13.7-612a, 13.7-612b) or from the user, while the remainder of the retention band (13.7-608) is not transparent or transmissive to such signals.

In some cases, positioning the sensor (13.7-612b) closer to the first surface (13.7-607) than the sensor (13.7-612a) may correspondingly reduce the field of view (13.7-625b). In some examples, the sensor (13.7-612c) may be flush with the inner surface (13.7-607) and/or may be in direct contact with the user's head. This is only one example of sensor depth variation, as multiple sensors may be positioned on the first surface (13.7-607) of the retention band (13.7-608) or between the first surface (13.7-607) and the second surface (13.7-609) of the retention band (13.7-608).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 434) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in other drawings and described with reference to them) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 434.

13.8: Conductive Fabric Architecture

In some examples, a head-mountable device includes a display, a housing at least partially surrounding the display, a facial interface attached to the housing, and a cover positioned between the housing and the facial interface and including a conductive fabric.

In some examples of head-mounted devices, the facial interface contacts directly the user's face, the cover blocks ambient light, the conductive fabric elastically deforms in response to movement of the cover, and the electrical properties of the conductive fabric detectably change in response to movement.

In further examples, the conductive fabric is elastic. Additionally, the conductive fabric may be interwoven with the cover. During use, the geometry of the conductive fabric may change in response to user input. In other examples, the conductive fabric is configured to detect a change in distance between the housing and the facial interface. In still other examples, the conductive fabric forms a thread pattern. In some cases, the conductive fabric includes an array of parallel conductive threads arranged perpendicular to the direction of deformation of the cover, wherein the distance between two of the parallel conductive threads changes in response to the user's facial movement. The conductive fabric may include a user input member.

In some examples, a wearable electronic device may include a display, a frame at least partially surrounding the display, and a light-blocking material attached to the frame and including a conductive fabric.

In some examples, the conductive fabric elastically deforms in response to the user's facial movements. Additionally, the capacitance of the conductive fabric can detectably change in response to the deformation of the conductive fabric. In some examples, the conductive fabric includes or acts as a switch. In other examples, the conductive fabric electrically connects the first electronic component and the second electronic component. In other examples, the conductive fabric is in direct contact with the user's skin. In some cases, the conductive fabric includes a touch-sensitive input element.

In other embodiments, a facial interface for a head-mounted device may include a facial contact, a conductive component integrated into the facial contact, the conductive component configured to generate a signal based on a change in capacitance of the conductive component, and a processor coupled to the conductive component.

In some examples, the facial contact portion is positioned adjacent to the nose area when the head-mounted device is worn by the user. In other examples, the conductive component is configured to detect a facial expression.

The following embodiments relate to an optical seal of a head-mounted device comprising a conductive fabric. As used herein, "conductive fabric" may refer to a material or fabric into which conductive elements are incorporated, or may refer to the conductive elements themselves, separate from the material or fabric into which they are incorporated. The conductive fabric may act as sensors, input elements, and electrical interconnects, allowing the sensors and other electronic components to interact with each other. The input elements may be any button, switch, capacitive surface, dial, slider, or other physically activated input system that may be used to provide an indication of a user's intent to a processor.

Conventional head-mounted devices equipped with sensors are used for a variety of purposes, detecting limited user feedback, such as movement or positioning feedback, and providing limited information in response to the user. These conventional sensors and electrical interconnects are often located in non-ideal and cumbersome locations, occupying significant space and preventing seamless integration with existing HMD architectures.

In contrast, the head-mounted device of the present disclosure comprises an optical seal having a conductive fabric capable of collecting user information, capturing changes in user motion, such as facial movements, and receiving user input, such as touch input. This can be achieved by carefully integrating the conductive fabric with the optical seal. A head-mounted device comprising such conductive fabrics achieves increased functionality without adding burdensome components or structures.

There are many different applications for the "smart" conductive fabrics described herein. For example, the disclosed conductive fabrics may be used to detect breathing patterns and amplitudes when the HMD is being handled or worn by a user, to receive user input (such as touch/force inputs and playback controls), to detect facial expressions, to detect tension or force on the user's face from a facial interface and/or headband support, to raise or lower the temperature of an optical seal, to detect moisture, and for low-power "on-head" detection.

These and other embodiments are discussed below with reference to FIGS. 435a through 441. However, one of ordinary skill in the art will readily recognize that the detailed description provided herein with respect to these drawings is for illustrative purposes only and should not be construed as limiting. Moreover, as used herein, a system, method, article, component, feature, or sub-feature that includes at least one of the first option, the second option, or the third option should be understood to refer to a system, method, article, component, feature, or sub-feature that may include one of each of the listed options (e.g., only one of the first option, only one of the second option, or only one of the third option), multiple of a single listed option (e.g., two or more of the first option), two options simultaneously (e.g., one of the first option and one of the second option), or a combination thereof (e.g., two of the first option and one of the second option).

FIG. 435A illustrates a block diagram of a head-mounted device (13.8-100) comprising a frame (13.8-104), a display (13.8-105), a support (13.8-109), and an optical seal (13.8-112). The display (13.8-105) may include one or more optical lenses or display screens in front of the user's eyes. The display (13.8-105) may include a display for presenting augmented reality visualizations, virtual reality visualizations, or other suitable visualizations. Additionally, the display (13.8-105) may be positioned at least partially within or on the frame (13.8-104). Similarly, the optical seal (13.8-112) may be connected to the frame (13.8-104). In some examples, the optical seal (13.8-112) includes the frame (13.8-104) (i.e., the frame (13.8-104) is part of the optical seal (13.8-112)).

The optical seal (13.8-112) may include electrical components (e.g., sensors (13.8-120)), a cover (13.8-113), a facial interface (13.8-108), and a conductive fabric (13.8-116). The frame (13.8-104) may be a housing for the display (13.8-105). Additionally, the frame (13.8-104) may also be considered part of or separate from the optical seal (13.8-112). As used herein, the term "optical seal" may refer to a portion of a head-mounted device (13.8-100) that engages with or shields a user's face. In particular, the optical seal (13.8-112) includes parts that conform to, contact with, or press against areas of the user's face (e.g., a facial interface).

The optical seal (13.8-112) may include a flexible (or semi-flexible) facetrack or face-engaging component that spans the forehead, wraps around the eyes, contacts other areas of the face (e.g., the zygomatic and maxillary regions), and bridges the nose. Additionally, the optical seal (13.8-112) may include various components, such as a cover (13.8-113), that form the frame, structure, or webbing of the head-mounted device positioned between the display (13.8-105) and the user's skin. The cover (13.8-113) may include a seal, an environmental seal, a dust seal, an air seal, etc., positioned between the gap between the display (13.8-105) and the user's face. The cover (13.8-113) may be a non-rigid or deformable woven fabric. The cover (13.8-113) may be elastically deformable. In some examples, the cover (13.8-113) may be made of a plastic, rubber, or polymeric material. In some examples, the cover (13.8-113) may be rigid.

The cover (13.8-113) may form an eye box that allows the user to view the display (13.8-105). It will be appreciated that the term “seal” may include partial seals or blockers in addition to complete seals (e.g., a partial light seal that blocks some ambient light when the head-mounted device (13.8-100) is worn, and a complete light seal that blocks all ambient light).

An optical seal (13.8-112) may be removably attached to the frame (13.8-104) and may be in electrical communication with a display (13.8-105). The optical seal (13.8-112) may include an electrical component (13.8-120), such as a sensor (13.8-120). The sensor (13.8-120) may collect user or environmental data, such as biometric information. The sensor (13.8-120) may transmit signals to the HMD, particularly to the display (13.8-105). The sensor (13.8-120) may transmit signals to an output configured to perform an action in response to information collected by the sensor (13.8-120).

The optical seal (13.8-112) may include a conductive fabric (13.8-116). In some examples, the conductive fabric (13.8-116) may include highly elastic copper threads that can be compressed and stretched while still maintaining electrical connectivity. The conductive fabric (13.8-116) may be elastically deformable (i.e., capable of temporary changes in length, volume, or shape). In some examples, the conductive fabric (13.8-116) may include electrically conductive carbon fibers. In some examples, the conductive fabric (13.8-116) may collect biometric information of the user. More specifically, the biometric information of the user may manifest itself as movements of the user's face (e.g., nose movements indicating breathing or breathing patterns). Such movements may cause changes (i.e., stretching or compressing) of the conductive fabric. The degree or amount by which the conductive fabric moves due to the user's facial movements can be detected by the conductive fabric and used to generate signals that can be analyzed by a processor of the HMD (13.8-100). As described in more detail below, the conductive fabric can be a thread, line, wire, plate, or any other structure capable of conducting electricity. The conductive fabric (13.8-116) can be integrated with the optical seal (13.8-112). For example, the conductive fabric (13.8-116) can be embedded in, interwoven with, or encapsulated in the cover (13.8-113) or the facial interface (13.8-108).

A display (13.8-105) in electrical communication with the optical seal (13.8-112), and more specifically, the conductive fabric (13.8-116), can receive electrical communications and provide feedback to a user (e.g., visual feedback, audio feedback, haptic feedback, etc.) related to readings of the conductive fabric (13.8-116).

As used herein, the term "sensor" refers to one or more different sensing devices, such as a camera or imaging device, a temperature device, an oxygen device, a motion device, a brain activity device, a sweat activity device, a respiratory activity device, a muscle contraction device, etc. In some examples, the sensor can sense biometric features including features of the autonomic nervous system. Some specific examples of sensors include a safety sensor, an electrocardiogram sensor, an EKG sensor, a heart rate variability sensor, a blood volume pulse sensor, an SpO2 sensor, a compact pressure sensor, an electromyogram sensor, a core body temperature sensor, a galvanic skin sensor, an accelerometer, a gyroscope, a magnetometer, an inclinometer, a barometer, an infrared sensor, a global positioning system sensor, etc. Additional sensor examples can include contact microphones (e.g., pressure-based MEMS), bioelectrical activity sensors, UV exposure sensors, or particle sensors.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 435a) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in other drawings and described with reference to them) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 435a.

FIG. 435b illustrates a partial plan view of a head-mountable device (13.8-100). The head-mountable device (13.8-100) of FIG. 435 may be substantially similar to the head-mountable device (13.8-100) described in FIG. 435a and may include some or all of its features. The HMD (13.8-100) may include a display (also referred to as a display unit or housing) (13.8-105) and a retention band (13.8-109). The display (13.8-105) may include any number of internal electronic components (13.8-107). The HMD (13.8-100) may include a frame (13.8-104) (also referred to as a housing) attached to the display (13.8-105). In some examples, the display (13.8-105) comprises an opaque, partially transparent, transparent, or translucent screen comprising any number of lenses for presenting visual data. The frame (13.8-104) can at least partially border one or more edges of the display (13.8-105). The frame (13.8-104) can be attached to the cover (13.8-128) at one end of the cover (13.8-128). At the opposite end, the cover (13.8-128) can form or be attached to the facial interface (13.8-108). In some examples, the frame (13.8-104), the cover (13.8-113), and the facial interface (13.8-108) together can form an optical seal (13.8-112). However, it will be understood that the optical seal (13.8-112) may contain fewer or more components than those listed or illustrated.

The HMD (13.8-100) may be worn on the user's head (13.8-102) such that the display (13.8-105) is positioned over the user's face and over one or both of the user's eyes. The display (13.8-105) may be connected to a retention band (13.8-109) and/or an optical seal (13.8-112). In some examples, the retention band (13.8-109) may be positioned against and in contact with a side of the user's head (13.8-102). In some examples, the retention band (13.8-109) may be positioned at least partially over the user's ear or ears. In some examples, the retention band (13.8-109) may be positioned adjacent to the user's ear or ears. The retention band (13.8-109) may extend around the user's head (13.8-102). In this manner, the display (13.8-105) and the retention band (13.8-109) may form a loop that may hold the wearable electronic device (13.8-100) on the user's head (13.8-102). However, it should be understood that this configuration is only one example of how the components of the modular wearable electronic device (13.8-100) may be arranged, and that in some examples, a different number of connector straps and/or retention bands may be included. Although a particular component (13.8-100) may be referred to as an HMD, it should be understood that the terms wearable device, wearable electronic device, HMD, HMD device, and/or HMD system may be used to refer to any wearable device, including smart glasses.

In some examples, the frame (13.8-104) is attached to the facial interface (13.8-108). The facial interface (13.8-108) may contact the user's head and/or face. In some examples, the cover (13.8-113) may be a light-blocking component extending between the frame (13.8-104) and the facial interface (13.8-108). The light-blocking component may cover or surround a periphery of the facial interface (13.8-108) and/or the frame (13.8-104).

The cover (13.8-113) may be cloth, fabric, woven material, plastic, rubber, or any other suitable opaque or semi-opaque material. In some examples, the cover (13.8-113) is flexible and has the ability to be repeatedly stretched, compressed, and deformed. The cover (13.8-113) may be elastically or inelastically deformable. The facial interface (13.8-108) in combination with the cover (13.8-113) may block external light and limit the peripheral view of the user (13.8-102). In some examples, the cover (13.8-113) and the facial interface (13.8-108) are the same or are an integral component. As discussed in more detail below, the optical seal (13.8-112) may include a conductive fabric that may provide a number of functions and may provide added benefits and functionality to the HMD (13.8-100).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 435b) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 435b.

Figure 436 illustrates a bottom perspective view of selected components of the optical seal (13.8-212). The optical seal (13.8-212) may be substantially similar to the optical seals described herein, such as the optical seal (13.8-112), and may include some or all of their features. The optical seal (13.8-212) may be implemented on an HMD, such as the HMD (13.8-100).

The optical seal (13.8-212) can be integrated with conductive fabrics (13.8-216a, 13.8-216b, 13.8-216c, 13.8-216d, 13.8-216e) (collectively referred to as the conductive fabric (13.8-216)). The conductive fabric (13.8-216) or threads can be positioned at various locations on the optical seal (13.8-212). For example, the conductive fabric (13.8-216) can be positioned on or within the cover (e.g., embedded, encapsulated, or woven within the cover).

In some examples, the conductive fabric (13.8-216) may be positioned on the facial interface (13.8-208) of the optical seal (13.8-212). In one example, the conductive fabric (13.8-216) may be in direct contact with the user, such as touching the user's forehead, cheek, nose, temple area, back of the head, or any location where the HMD makes contact with the user.

The optical seal (13.8-212) may include a nose region (13.8-218) configured to contact the user's nose. The nose region (13.8-218) may be considered part of the facial interface (13.8-208) and/or the cover (13.8-213), or may be a separate section of the optical seal (13.8-212) itself. The nose region (13.8-218) may include two sections corresponding to each side of the user's nose. As illustrated in FIG. 436, conductive threads (13.8-216a) may be positioned in the nose region (13.8-218). In some examples, the conductive thread (13.8-216a) is a single continuous wire that spans the nose region (13.8-218) (i.e., on both sides of the nose and across the bridge of the nose). In some examples, each side of the nose region (13.8-218) of the optical seal (13.8-212) may include separate or distinct conductive threads (13.8-216a).

The conductive thread (13.8-216a) may be intentionally positioned to detect movements of the user's nose. For example, when the user breathes, the nose may move a predetermined amount based on the intensity or amplitude of the breath. Consequently, this movement may cause the nose region (13.8-218) of the optical seal (13.8-212) to change shape or move (e.g., compress or expand). The conductive thread (13.8-216a) may be ideally positioned so that the nose region (13.8-218) moves in response to the nose movements. Similarly, the conductive threads (13.8-216) may expand or contract in response to the nose movements.

Movement of the conductive threads (13.8-216a) may result in detectable changes in the conductivity and/or capacitance of the conductive threads (13.8-216), which may be used to infer respiration or facial expression data. As used herein, "detectable" may refer to a change in a signal generated by the conductive fabric that may be recognized and analyzed by the processor. In some examples, the conductive threads (13.8-216) may be in direct contact with the user's nose and may be influenced by the capacitance of the user's nose. In some examples, the conductive threads (13.8-216a) are embedded, encapsulated, or woven into the material of the nose region (i.e., the fabric of the cover (13.8-213) and/or the facial interface (13.8-208)) such that the conductive threads (13.8-216a) do not directly contact the user's skin but still respond to movements of the user's face relative to the optical seal (13.8-212).

The optical seal (13.8-212) may include a forehead region configured to contact the user's forehead when the HMD is worn by the user. The forehead region may be influenced by (e.g., moved by) movements of the user's forehead and/or eyebrows. As illustrated in FIG. 436, conductive threads (13.8-216d) may be positioned in the forehead region of the cover (13.8-213). In some examples, the conductive thread (13.8-216d) is a single continuous wire that extends over a substantial portion of the forehead region. In some examples, the forehead region of the cover (13.8-213) includes multiple conductive threads (13.8-216d) (e.g., one over each eyebrow).

The conductive thread (13.8-216d) may be intentionally positioned to detect movement of the user's forehead and/or eyebrows. For example, the user's facial expression may be inferred from the position and movement of the forehead. This movement, in turn, may cause movements of the optical seal (13.8-212). The conductive thread (13.8-216d) may be ideally positioned so that the conductive thread (13.8-216d) similarly stretches or compresses as the forehead moves. This movement of the conductive thread (13.8-216d) may cause detectable changes in the electrical properties (e.g., conductivity and/or capacitance) of the conductive thread (13.8-216d), which may be used to infer biometric information, such as facial expressions. In some examples, the conductive threads (13.8-216d) may be in direct contact with the user's skin and may be excited by the capacitance of the user's skin. In some examples, the conductive threads (13.8-216d) are embedded, encapsulated, or woven into the material of the nose region (i.e., the fabric of the cover (13.8-213) and/or the facial interface (13.8-208)) such that the conductive threads (13.8-216d) do not directly contact the user's skin but still respond to movements of the user's face relative to the optical seal (13.8-212).

The optical seal (13.8-212) may include a facial interface (13.8-208) configured to directly contact and conform to the user's face when the HMD is worn by the user. The facial interface (13.8-208) may be separate components from the cover (13.8-213) or may be a single, integral piece of the cover (13.8-213). For example, the facial interface (13.8-208) may include a form that attaches to the cover (13.8-213). The facial interface may be influenced (e.g., moved) by movements of the user's face. As illustrated in FIG. 436, conductive threads (13.8-216e) may be positioned within/on the facial interface (13.8-208).

The conductive threads (13.8-216e) may be intentionally positioned to detect movement of the user's face. Movement of the user's face may be transmitted as movement of the facial interface (13.8-208) and movements of the conductive threads (13.8-216e), resulting in detectable changes in the electrical properties (e.g., conductivity and/or capacitance) of the conductive threads (13.8-216e). In some examples, the conductive threads (13.8-216e) may be in direct contact with the user's skin and may be excited by the capacitance of the user's skin. In some examples, the conductive threads (13.8-216e) may be embedded, encapsulated, or woven into the material of the facial interface such that the conductive threads (13.8-216e) do not directly contact the user's skin but still respond to movements of the user's face relative to the optical seal (13.8-212). In some examples, the conductive fabric (13.8-216e) can be woven into the facial interface (13.8-208) while still being exposed and in contact with the user's face.

The optical seal (13.8-212) may include one or more electronic components (13.8-220). The electronic components (13.8-220) may be any type of module, sensor, unit, input, or output that performs the function of the optical seal (13.8-212) and/or the HMD. For example, the components (13.8-220) may be a battery, a processor, a haptic actuator, an LED, a display, a speaker, a biometric sensor, etc.

The component (13.8-220) can be positioned at various locations on the optical seal (13.8-212). The component (13.8-220) can be positioned on or within the cover (e.g., embedded, encapsulated, or woven into the cover). In some examples, the component (13.8-220) can be positioned on the frame of the facial interface (13.8-208) or the optical seal (13.8-212). In one example, the component (13.8-220) can be in direct contact with the user, such as touching the user's forehead, cheek, nose, temple area, back of the head, or any location where the optical seal (13.8-212) contacts the user's head.

In some examples, the conductive fabric (13.8-216c) may be electrically connected to the component (13.8-220). The conductive fabric (13.8-216c) may be an interconnect for electrically connecting the components to other components of the HMD. In some examples, the component (13.8-220) is a processor configured to analyze signals transmitted/generated by the conductive thread (13.8-216c).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 436) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in other drawings and described with reference to them) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 436.

FIG. 437 illustrates a plan view of a head-mounted device (HMD) (13.8-300). The HMD (13.8-300) may be substantially similar to the devices described herein, such as the HMD (13.8-100) and the optical seal (13.8-212), and may include some or all of their features. In some examples, the HMD (13.8-300) may include an electronic module (13.8-307). The electronic module (13.8-307) may be positioned on or housed within the display unit (13.8-305). The electronic module (13.8-307) may be a battery, a processor, a display, a camera, or any other electronic component. In some examples, the electronic module (13.8-307) may be attached to the frame (13.8-304). The electronic module (13.8-307) can be in electrical communication with an electronic component (13.8-320) attached to the optical seal (13.8-312).

In some examples, the electronic component (13.8-307) and the electronic module (13.8-320) may be electrically connected by a conductive fabric (13.8-316a) that extends through the cover (13.8-313) of the optical seal (13.8-312). In some examples, the conductive fabric (13.8-316a) extends through or across the headband or support (13.8-309). In some examples, the conductive fabric (13.8-316a) extends through or across the frame (13.8-304). In this manner, the conductive fabric (13.8-316a) serves as an interconnection (i.e., an electrical connection) between the electronic component (13.8-320) and the electronic module (13.8-307) on the optical seal (13.8-312). In some examples, the sensing of the conductive fabrics (13.8-216) may be combined with other sensors, either onboard or remotely from the HMD (13.8-300), to collect data in a sensor fusion manner. For example, conductive threads in combination with user-facing cameras may be used to detect facial expressions.

In some examples, the HMD (13.8-300) may include a conductive fabric (13.8-316b) integrated on and/or within a support (13.8-309) of the HMD (13.8-300). The support (13.8-309) may be a headband having flexible sections. The conductive fabric (13.8-316b) may be configured to stretch or compress in response to stretching or compressing the headband (13.8-309). In some examples, the conductive fabric (13.8-316b) may generate signals indicating the tightness or position of the headband. In some examples, the user may be notified based on the signals generated by the conductive fabric (13.8-316b). The headband (13.8-309) may automatically adjust based on the signals generated by the conductive fabric (13.8-316b).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 437) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 437.

Figure 438a illustrates a conductive fabric (13.8-416) in a neutral or resting state. In some examples, the conductive fabric (13.8-416) is positioned in a longitudinal pattern (curved, wavy, or meandering in a repeating pattern). As illustrated in Figure 438a, in the resting or neutral state (i.e., when no external forces are acting on the conductive fabric (13.8-416), nodes or peaks of the conductive fabric (13.8-416) can be a distance (d ₁ ) from each other. The distance (d ₁ ) can be visualized as a wavelength or distance between parallel sections of the conductive fabric (13.8-416).

By monitoring the current passing through the conductive fabric, the processor can determine the amount and direction of strain the fabric is experiencing. In some examples, the conductive fabric (13.8-416) arranged in a serpentine pattern can be excited using a 100 to 140 kHz sine wave or square wave to generate a capacitive field. The system can then monitor changes in the alternating current (AC) component over time (e.g., to determine respiration data). In some examples, a frequency sweep is performed to obtain a frequency/phase dependent signal.

In some examples, the geometry or shape of the conductive threads (13.8-416) may be tuned depending on what is being monitored and the required sensitivity levels. In some examples, the system primarily monitors changes in the capacitance of the conductive threads (13.8-416).

FIG. 438b illustrates a conductive fabric (13.8-416) in a compressed state. The compressed state may be a result of a user acting on an optical seal (such as a cover and/or facial interface). In the compressed state, the distance separating peaks or parallel sections of the conductive fabric is distance d ₂ . The distance d ₂ may be less than the distance d ₁ . As a result, the conductive properties (e.g., capacitance) of the conductive fabric may change in a detectable manner. Thus, it may be determined that the conductive fabric (13.8-416) is compressed, and even the degree to which the conductive fabric (13.8-416) is compressed. From this, biometric information, facial expressions, breathing patterns, user input, and other user information may be determined.

FIG. 438c illustrates a conductive fabric (13.8-416) in a stretched state. The stretched state may be a result of a user acting on an optical seal (such as a cover and/or facial interface). In the stretched state, the distance separating peaks or parallel sections of the conductive fabric is distance d ₃ . The distance d ₃ may be greater than the remaining distance d ₁ . Consequently, the conductive properties of the conductive fabric change in a detectable manner as the area and geometry of the conductive fabric (13.8-416) are modified. Thus, it is possible to determine whether the conductive fabric (13.8-416) is stretched, and even to what extent the conductive fabric (13.8-416) is stretched. From this, biometric information, facial expressions, breathing patterns, user input, and other user information can be determined.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 438a through 438c) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 438a through 438c.

FIG. 439a illustrates a conductive component (13.8-516a) on the exterior (13.8-517) of a cover (13.8-513). The conductive component (13.8-516a) may be substantially similar to the conductive fabrics described herein, such as conductive fabrics (13.8-216, 13.8-316, 13.8-416), and may include some or all of their features. As described herein, the optical seal may include a cover (13.8-513) extending between the HMD and the user's face. The cover (13.8-513) may define a hollow portion, an opening, or an opening forming an internal volume or eye box. Thus, the cover (13.8-513) may include an inner or internal surface (13.8-515) defining an internal volume, and an outer surface (13.8-517) defining an exterior of the optical seal.

As illustrated in FIG. 439a, the conductive component (13.8-516a) may be positioned on the exterior surface (13.8-517). In some examples, the conductive component (13.8-516a) at least partially defines the exterior of the optical seal. In some examples, the conductive component (13.8-516a) is accessible to the user from the exterior of the HMD. For example, the conductive component (13.8-516a) may be responsive to a user's touch or deformation of the conductive component (13.8-516a). In this manner, a user wearing the HMD may control or provide input by touching (e.g., tapping or sliding a finger) or physically manipulating (e.g., deforming) the conductive component (13.8-516a) with their hand. The conductive component (13.8-516a) may be attached to the cover (13.8-513) using any suitable method, including but not limited to, adhesives, molding, mechanical fasteners, friction, weaving, magnets, etc.

FIG. 439b illustrates a conductive component (13.8-516b) woven into a cover (13.8-513). The conductive component (13.8-516b) may be substantially similar to the conductive fabrics described herein, such as the conductive fabrics (13.8-216, 13.8-316, 13.8-416, 13.8-516a), and may include some or all of their features. As described herein, the optical seal may include a cover (13.8-513) extending between the HMD and the user's face. The cover (13.8-513) may be made of a fabric or material having a predetermined thickness onto which the conductive component (13.8-516b) may be deposited.

As illustrated in FIG. 439b, the conductive component (13.8-516b) may be positioned (e.g., surrounded, encapsulated, embedded, woven, etc.) within the cover (13.8-513). In some examples, the conductive component (13.8-516b) at least partially defines the exterior of the optical seal. In some examples, at least a portion of the conductive component (13.8-516b) is accessible to the user from the exterior of the HMD while being woven into the cover (13.8-513). For example, the conductive component (13.8-516b) may be responsive to a user's touch or deformation of the conductive component (13.8-516b). In this manner, a user wearing the HMD may control or provide input by touching or physically manipulating the conductive component (13.8-516b) (e.g., with his or her hand). The conductive component (13.8-516b) may be attached to the cover (13.8-513) using any suitable method, including but not limited to, adhesives, molding, mechanical fasteners, friction, weaving, magnets, etc. Additionally, it will be appreciated that as the cover (13.8-513) deforms (e.g., by movements of the user's face), the embedded or woven conductive component (13.8-516b) may likewise deform. This deformation may change the conductive properties of the conductive component (13.8-516b) in a detectable manner, which may in turn cause the HMD to perform an action.

FIG. 439c illustrates a conductive component (13.8-516c) on the interior (13.8-515) of a cover (13.8-513). The conductive component (13.8-516c) may be substantially similar to the conductive fabrics described herein, such as the conductive fabrics (13.8-216, 13.8-316, 13.8-416, 13.8-516a, 13.8-516b), and may include some or all of their features. As described herein, the optical seal may include a cover (13.8-513) extending between the HMD and the user's face. The cover (13.8-513) may define a hollow portion, an opening, or an opening forming an internal volume or eye box. Thus, the cover (13.8-513) may include an inner or internal surface (13.8-515) defining an internal volume, and an outer surface (13.8-517) defining an exterior of the optical seal.

As illustrated in FIG. 439c, the conductive component (13.8-516c) may be positioned on the interior surface (13.8-515). In some examples, the conductive component (13.8-516c) at least partially defines the interior surface of the optical seal. In some examples, the conductive component (13.8-516c) is accessible to the user's face from the interior of the optical seal. For example, the conductive component (13.8-516c) may respond to touches or movements of the user's face. The conductive component (13.8-516c) may be attached to the cover (13.8-513) using any suitable method, including but not limited to, adhesives, molding, mechanical fasteners, friction, weaving, magnets, and the like.

Figure 439d illustrates free-floating conductive components. In some examples, the optical seal comprises a continuous conductive plate (13.8-519) that is free-floating (i.e., not anchored) within/on the cover (13.8-513) in a location that covers, overlays, overlaps, or is adjacent to conductors (13.8-521) deposited on the cover (13.8-513). In this manner, the deposited conductors (13.8-521) can move freely and still provide signals indicative of deformations of the cover (13.8-513), even though they are not galvanically connected to the plate (13.8-519). It will be appreciated that the optical seal may comprise multiple conductive components, conductive fabrics, and plates. For example, the cover (13.8-513) may comprise one or more of the conductive component arrangements described with reference to Figures 439a-439d. In some examples, the conductive components include metallic materials that are deposited on the fabric of the cover and/or facial interface (e.g., using laser direct structuring (LDS) methods). In some examples, the conductive components may be a combination of rigid conductive materials and flexible conductive materials.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 439a-439d ) may be incorporated into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings, including any of FIGS. 439a-439d described herein, alone or in any combination. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 439a-439c , alone or in any combination.

FIG. 440 illustrates a side perspective view of an optical seal (13.8-612). The optical seal (13.8-612) may be substantially similar to any of the optical seals described herein, such as optical seals (13.8-112, 13.8-212, 13.8-312), and may include some or all of the features thereof. The optical seal (13.8-612) may include a frame (13.8-604) configured to be attached to a display unit, a facial interface (13.8-608) configured to contact and conform to a user's face, and a cover (13.8-613) extending between the frame (13.8-604) and the facial interface (13.8-608) and establishing or shielding a light blocking component.

The cover (13.8-613) may include a first conductive fabric (13.8-616a) connected to the cover (13.8-613) in the manner described herein. The first conductive fabric (13.8-616a) may comprise wires or threads arranged generally in a helical pattern or a zigzag pattern. In some examples, the first conductive fabric (13.8-616a) may include a geometric structure that is responsive to (i.e., movable) a force in a vertical direction (as oriented in FIG. 440).

The configuration of the conductive fabric (13.8-616a) may be ideal for receiving user input. For example, a user may press or pinch the cover (13.8-613) along a vertical axis to provide input to the system. In some examples, the conductive fabric (13.8-616a) may be configured to detect an inward force perpendicular to the surface plane of a side of the cover (13.8-613). For example, the conductive fabric (13.8-616a) may detect a user using his or her finger to push the cover inward (e.g., toward the user's temple).

In some examples, the cover (13.8-613) may include a second conductive fabric (13.8-616b) connected to the cover (13.8-613) in the manner described herein. The second conductive fabric (13.8-616b) may be oriented substantially perpendicular to the first conductive fabric (13.8-616a). In other words, the longitudinal axis of the first conductive fabric (13.8-616a) may be perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the second conductive fabric (13.8-616b). It will be appreciated that the optical seal (13.8-612) may include one or both of the first conductive fabric (13.8-616a) and the second conductive fabric (13.8-616b). The conductive fabric (13.8-616b) may comprise wires or threads arranged in a substantially perpendicular or zigzag pattern. In some examples, the conductive fabric (13.8-616b) may include a geometric structure that responds to a force in the horizontal direction (as oriented in FIG. 440).

The configuration of the conductive fabric (13.8-616b) may be ideal for receiving user input. For example, a user may press or pinch the cover (13.8-613) along a horizontal axis to provide input to the system. In some examples, the conductive fabric (13.8-616b) is sensitive to changes in distance between the frame (13.8-604) and the facial interface (13.8-608). The user may provide input by pressing the display unit or the frame (13.8-604) toward the facial interface (13.8-608). In some examples, the conductive fabric (13.8-616b) may be configured to detect an inward force perpendicular to the surface plane of the side of the cover (13.8-613). For example, the conductive fabric (13.8-616b) may detect when a user uses his or her finger to slide the cover inward (e.g., toward the user's temple). In some examples, the optical seal (13.8-612) may include a plurality of conductive threads in a meandering pattern that run parallel to one another.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 440 ) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in other drawings and described with reference to them) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 440 .

FIG. 441 illustrates a bottom perspective view of an optical seal (13.8-712). The optical seal (13.8-712) may be substantially similar to any of the optical seals described herein, such as optical seals (13.8-112, 13.8-212, 13.8-312, 13.8-612), and may include some or all of the features thereof. The optical seal (13.8-712) may include a cover (13.8-713) and first and second nose sections (13.8-718a, 13.8-718b) (collectively referred to as nose sections (13.8-718)). In some examples, the optical seal may include an array of conductive threads (13.8-716a, 13.8-716b) (collectively referred to as the array of conductive threads (13.8-716)). The array of conductive threads (13.8-716) may be arranged parallel to one another such that changes in the distance separating the parallel threads are detectable and may be used to infer nasal movements and respiration data, such as instantaneous estimates of breath amplitude. The parallel conductive threads (13.8-716) may be arranged perpendicular to the direction of movement or deformation of the nasal regions (13.8-718).

For example, it can be seen in FIG. 441 that the distances separating the first array of conductive threads (13.8-716a) are smaller than the distances between the threads of the second array of conductive threads (13.8-716b). Accordingly, it can be determined (e.g., by the processor) that the first nose section (13.8-718a) is being compressed and/or the second nose section (13.8-718b) is being extended.

It will be appreciated that the location of the array of conductive threads (13.8-716) is not limited to the nose sections (13.8-718). For example, any of the conductive fabrics described herein may instead be arranged as a parallel array of conductive threads.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 441 ) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference to them) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 441 .

13.9: Facial interface with integrated health sensors

The following disclosure relates to a facial interface for a head-mounted device. More specifically, the present embodiments relate to a facial interface for a head-mounted device that includes a pressure sensor assembly used to obtain biometric information. It will be appreciated that the head-mounted device (HMD) of the present disclosure may be applied to AR/VR headsets and also to smart computer glasses. In some examples, a processor causes a component of the HMD to perform an action in response to biometric information collected by the sensor(s). As used herein, "action" or "performing an action" may refer to any electrical or mechanical operation that causes a change in one or more of the components of the HMD. For example, an action may include displaying a notification to a user and/or activating or deactivating one or more components.

In some examples, the sensor may collect biometric information from the nose and/or forehead of a user wearing the device, including when the user is performing an activity such as exercising. The biometric information may relate to pulse, respiration, facial expression, heart rate, blood pressure, changes in cartilage, chewing, or any other relevant data. In some examples, a combination of sensors (sensor fusion) may be used to determine the biometric information. For example, facial expressions may be determined using both the pressure-based MEMS sensors described herein as well as the internal facing camera of the HMD. Additionally, in response to the collected data, the system may perform an action, such as notifying the user of the collected data.

Head-mounted devices equipped with sensors are used for various purposes, such as detecting user feedback, such as positioning or movement feedback, and provide limited information in response to the user. For example, a user may experience increased breathing or heart rate while performing a movement or action. Conventional head-mounted devices are not adequately equipped to capture all the desired biometric information.

In contrast, the head-mounted devices of the present disclosure include a facial interface that can be merged or integrated with a sensor(s), such as a pressure sensor assembly, configured to collect user data, such as biometric information including pulse, respiration, facial expressions, heart rate, blood pressure, and the like. By capturing user data, the pressure sensor assembly of the facial interface can provide increased and improved feedback to the user. A head-mounted device having sensors that monitor user biometrics or health feedback creates a highly customized user experience, unlike sensors in conventional head-mounted devices that cannot take user experience into account to such an extent.

Pressure sensor assemblies positioned on the facial interface can be used to create customized user experiences. A head-mounted device of the present disclosure may include pressure sensors to measure a user's responsiveness or engagement through indicators such as pulse, respiration, facial expressions, heart rate, blood pressure, and the like. Additionally, sensor data can be used to monitor user fatigue, facial expressions, changes in user status, or to obtain activity-specific metrics.

A head-mountable device may include sensors integrated on or within the facial interface in a variety of different ways. For example, a head-mountable device of the present disclosure may be implemented such that a first facial interface having a first sensor assembly is interchangeable with a second facial interface having a second sensor assembly. In some examples, the removably attached sensor assemblies may respond to different user activities, such as exercise, health, clinical settings, learning activities, and the like.

These and other embodiments are discussed below with reference to FIGS. 442 through 447. However, one of ordinary skill in the art will readily recognize that the detailed description provided herein with respect to these drawings is for illustrative purposes only and should not be construed as limiting. Moreover, as used herein, a system, method, article, component, feature, or sub-feature that includes at least one of the first option, the second option, or the third option should be understood to refer to a system, method, article, component, feature, or sub-feature that may include one of each of the listed options (e.g., only one of the first option, only one of the second option, or only one of the third option), multiple of a single listed option (e.g., two or more of the first option), two options simultaneously (e.g., one of the first option and one of the second option), or a combination thereof (e.g., two of the first option and one of the second option).

FIG. 442 illustrates a block diagram of a head-mounted device (13.9-100) comprising a frame or housing (13.9-116), a display (13.9-108), a facial interface (13.9-112), and a support (13.9-123). The display (13.9-108) may include one or more optical lenses or display screens in front of the user's eyes. The display (13.9-108) may include a screen or display unit for presenting augmented reality visualizations, virtual reality visualizations, or other suitable visualizations to the user. Additionally, the display (13.9-108) may be positioned within or on the housing (13.9-116). Similarly, the facial interface (13.9-112) may be connected to the housing (13.9-116). In some examples, the housing (13.9-116) may support or house various electronic components, including a display (13.9-108).

The facial interface (13.9-112) may include one or more sensors (e.g., a pressure sensor) (13.9-124), support attachments (13.9-132), display attachments (13.9-128), and feedback or output modules (13.9-136). The sensors (13.9-124) may be removably attached to the facial interface (13.9-112). As used herein, the term "facial interface," "engaging interface," or "optical seal" refers to a portion of the head-mountable device (13.9-100) that engages (i.e., contacts or conforms to) a user's face.

In particular, the facial interface (13.9-112) may include portions of a head-mounted device that conform to or press against areas of a user's face. The facial interface (13.9-112) may be positioned between the display (13.9-108) or the frame (13.9-116) and the user's face. In some examples, the facial interface (13.9-112) may include a flexible (or semi-flexible) facial track or lumen that extends across the forehead, wraps around the eyes, contacts other areas of the face (e.g., the zygomatic and maxillary regions), and bridges the nose.

Additionally, the facial interface (13.9-112) may include various components forming a frame, structure, housing, or webbing of the head-mounted device (13.9-100) positioned between the display (13.9-108) and the user's skin. In some examples, the facial interface (13.9-112) may include a seal (e.g., an optical seal, an environmental seal, a dust seal, an air seal, etc.). As used herein, the term “seal” may include partial seals or blockers in addition to complete seals (e.g., a partial optical seal that blocks some ambient light when the head-mounted device (13.9-100) is worn, and a complete optical seal that blocks all ambient light). The facial interface (13.9-112) can be removably attached to the housing (13.9-116) and can be in electrical communication with the display (13.9-108).

The sensor(s) (13.9-124) of the facial interface (13.9-112) can collect biometric information such as the user's vital signs (including pulse data, respiration data, and blood pressure). The pressure sensor assembly (13.9-124) can generate a signal based on the collected user information and transmit the signal to a processor that can cause the output unit (13.9-136) to perform an action in response to the signal (i.e., in response to the collected biometric information). For example, a user may perform a high-intensity activity, such as lifting weights or exercising, while wearing the HMD (13.9-100). During such an activity, the user's heart rate or other vital signs may increase or change, which may be detectable by the sensor (13.9-124).

The sensor (13.9-124) may generate one or more signals based on the received input. The sensor (13.9-124) may transmit the signals to one or more components of the HMD (13.9-100) (e.g., to the display (13.9-108) and/or the output (13.9-136)). The display (13.9-108), in electrical communication with the facial interface (13.9-112), may receive the electrical communication and provide feedback (e.g., visual feedback, audio feedback, haptic feedback, etc.) to the user related to the user's biometric readings. The feedback may include determining when the user needs to take a break, or when the difficulty of an activity needs to be lowered or increased, and the output (13.9-136) may include scheduling various activities for the user or recommending adjustments to the HMD (13.9-100).

As used herein, the terms "sensor," "sensors," "pressure sensor assembly," or "sensor assembly" may refer to one or more sensing devices, such as a MEMS pressure sensor. In some examples, the HMD (13.9-100) includes a pressure sensing assembly having a deformable pad that deflects in response to movement of the user's face, thereby generating an increase or decrease in internal pressure of a pressure channel (e.g., a fluid volume connecting the deformable pad and a pressure sensor in fluid communication with the deformable pad) that changes in response to the deflection. Changes in internal pressure caused by movement of the user's face can be detected by a pressure sensor fluidly connected to the channel and attached to the deformable pad.

In some examples, the sensor can detect a deflection of the deformable pad as small as 10 micrometers. In some examples, the sensor can detect a deflection of the deformable pad that is less than 10 micrometers. In some examples, the sensor can detect a deflection of the deformable pad as small as 20 micrometers. In some examples, the sensor can detect a deflection of the deformable pad as small as 50 micrometers. In some examples, the sensor can detect a deflection of the deformable pad as small as 100 micrometers. In some examples, the sensor can detect a deflection of the deformable pad that is greater than 100 micrometers. In some examples, the sensor can detect a deflection of the deformable pad that is approximately 100 nanometers or less.

The term "pressure sensor" or "sensor" as used within the context of the present application may refer to a sensor capable of detecting pressure, such as a miniature based microphone (e.g., a MEMS sensor) having a sensitivity of about 2.5 millibars. In some examples, the pressure-based MEMS sensor may have a sensitivity of about 250 pascals. In some examples, the pressure-based MEMS sensor may include an electrical circuit, such as a Winston bridge, to detect nano-metric deflections of the deformable pad. The pressure sensor or sensors used in such applications may be sufficiently sensitive to detect pulse, respiration, or other pressure-related feedback associated with the user.

In some cases, a pressure sensor or a change in pressure detected by the sensor may generate an electrical signal that can be interpreted by the controller/processor as a facial expression. In some examples, the pressure assembly is tuned to capture a specific pressure range applicable to a given activity requiring different sensitivity values, including approximately 1 millibar, 1.5 millibar, 3 millibar, or 4.5 millibar. When the pressure sensor is paired with another pressure sensor, ratios such as blood volume, pulse rate, or other applicable and interpretable ratios from the cardiovascular system may be captured.

In some examples, certain sensors may be used to assess stress and emotion through changes in pressure through direct contact with the user's face. The HMD may then provide feedback or output related to the detected stress and emotion. In some examples, the sensors may operate via a coin cell battery or a Bluetooth connection. In some examples, the sensors are powered by the HMD's primary battery.

The sensors described herein can allow for monitoring of the cardiovascular system and respiration, thereby monitoring indicators of relaxation and stress, mental health, medical treatments, and more. Using the disclosed sensors integrated into a facial interface, physicians and caregivers can have live feedback on biometric measurements. Use cases may include fitness environments, user content, workplaces, telepresence, clinical settings, education, training, pain, and therapy. In some examples, the sensors can be used to capture facial expressions. This is particularly relevant given that the user's face is covered by the HMD when worn. For example, the HMD could include a microelectromechanical system (MEMS) to detect changes in blood vessel diameter, blood pressure, pulse, heart rate, respiration, and facial expressions.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 442) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 442.

FIG. 443A illustrates a head-mountable device (13.9-200). The head-mountable device (13.9-200) may be substantially similar to the head-mountable devices described herein, such as the head-mountable device (13.9-100), and may include some or all of their features. In some examples, the head-mountable device (13.9-200) includes a controller (13.9-213) (e.g., a sensor controller). While the controller (13.9-213) is illustrated as being positioned on a support (e.g., a support arm) (13.9-223), the location of the controller (13.9-213) is not limited to the support (13.9-223), and the controller (13.9-213) may be positioned within/on the facial interface (13.9-212) or within the HMD display housing.

The controller (13.9-213) may include a processor and a memory device storing computer-executable instructions that, when executed by the processor, cause the controller to receive biometric data from one or more pressure sensor assemblies (13.9-224), transmit a signal based on the sensor data, and generate a signal that causes a component to perform an action in response to the received signal.

The controller (13.9-213) may include one or more processors (e.g., a system on a chip, an integrated circuit, a driver, a microcontroller, an application processor, a crossover processor, etc.). Additionally, the controller (13.9-213) may include one or more memory devices (e.g., discrete non-volatile memory, embedded non-volatile memory in the processor, random access memory, memory integrated circuits, DRAM chips, stacked memory modules, storage devices, memory partitions, etc.). In certain implementations, the controller (13.9-213) is communicatively coupled to a power source (e.g., a battery).

In some examples, the controller (13.9-213) stores sensor data received from the sensor assembly (13.9-224) in memory. The controller (13.9-213) can receive and/or transmit signals based on the sensor data. For example, as described below, the controller (13.9-213), via the processor and the memory, can transmit a signal to the display (13.9-208) based on the sensor data from the pressure sensor (e.g., causing the display (13.9-208) or the head-mounted device (13.9-200) to perform an action, such as presenting a predetermined message, turning off the power supply, responding to biometric feedback, etc.).

The controller (13.9-213) may perform any number of different functions. For example, the memory device may store computer-executable instructions that, when executed by the processor, cause the controller to receive sensor data from the sensor assemblies (13.9-224) and transmit signals based on the sensor data. For example, the controller (13.9-213) may transmit the sensor signals to the display (13.9-208).

In response to the controller (13.9-213), the display (13.9-208) can perform a wide range of actions, including turning the display (13.9-208) off or on, responding to user-generated facial expressions, presenting digital notifications (e.g., user-generated notifications, push notifications, context-generated notifications, system-generated notifications, smart notifications, etc.). In some examples, the memory device can store computer-executable instructions that, when executed by the processor, cause the controller (13.9-213) to receive biometric data from the sensor assemblies (13.9-224), to transmit a signal based on the sensor data, and to perform an action in response to the signal.

As illustrated, a head-mounted device (e.g., a wearable electronic device) (13.9-200) may include a display (13.9-208), a facial interface (13.9-212), and pressure sensor(s) (13.9-224) coupled to the facial interface (13.9-212). The pressure sensor assembly (13.9-224) may be embedded, encapsulated, deposited, adhered, or otherwise attached to the facial interface (13.9-212). A portion of the pressure sensor assembly (13.9-224), such as a deformable pad configured to contact a user's face, may deflect in response to movements of the user's face.

A pressure sensor assembly (13.9-224) may be configured to detect a biometric feature of a user (13.9-220). The pressure sensor assembly (13.9-224) may transmit a signal to a component of the head-mountable device (13.9-200) that causes the head-mountable device (13.9-200) to perform an action upon detecting a signal from the biometric feature. For example, the head-mountable device (13.9-200) may change shape (i.e., tighten or loosen), move, vibrate, rotate, recalibrate, or reposition in response to a sensor signal from the biometric feature.

A head-mountable device (13.9-200) may include a headband, retention band, strap, or support (13.9-223) connected to the display (13.9-208) and/or the frame (13.9-216). The support (13.9-223) may secure the display (13.9-108) and/or the housing (13.9-216) to the user's head (13.9-220) (e.g., such that the display (13.9-208) remains in front of the user's eyes). The support (13.9-223) may be constructed of an elastomeric material, an inelastic material, or a combination of elastomeric and inelastic materials.

The support (13.9-223) may be adjustable to conform to various shapes and sizes of the user's head (13.9-220). In some examples, the support (13.9-223) secures the head-mountable device (13.9-200) through friction between the user's head (13.9-220) and the retention band (13.9-223). In some examples, the support (13.9-223) resiliently secures the head-mountable device (13.9-200) to the user's head (13.9-220). In some examples, the support (13.9-223) is coupled to a ratchet system or mechanism that secures the head-mountable device (13.9-200) to the user's head (13.9-220). In some examples, the support (13.9-223) is positioned on or above the ear (13.9-221) of the user's head (13.9-220) to support the head-mounted device (13.9-200).

In some examples, the housing or frame (13.9-216) of the head-mountable display (13.9-200) is connected to the facial interface (13.9-212) via a connector (13.9-215), and a retention band (13.9-223) is connected to the frame (13.9-216) and/or the facial interface (13.9-212) to secure the head-mountable device (13.9-200) to the user's head (13.9-220) over or beyond the user's ears (13.9-221).

FIG. 443b illustrates an exemplary facial interface (13.9-212) including one or more deformable pads (13.9-225a, 13.9-225b) (collectively referred to as “deformable pads (13.9-225)”) disposed on the facial interface (13.9-212). The deformable pads (13.9-225) may include thin membranes or sheets. The deformable pads (13.9-225) may be expandable membranes or pillows. While multiple deformable pads (13.9-225) are illustrated, it will be appreciated that a single deformable pad (13.9-225) and sensor (13.9-224) may be used to achieve the same or similar results. The deformable pads (13.9-225) can be in fluid communication with one or more pressure sensors (13.9-224a, 13.9-224b) (collectively referred to as “pressure sensors (13.9-224)”).

It will be noted that due to the use of the deformable pads (13.9-225), the pressure sensors (13.9-225) do not need to be in direct contact with the user's skin. This allows the sensors (13.9-225) to be more securely housed within the facial interface (13.9-212), where motions on the user's skin can be transmitted to the deformable pads (13.9-225) through various materials of the facial interface (13.9-212). The deformable pads (13.9-225) may be positioned at any location on the facial interface (13.9-212) that allows them to make contact with the user's face. In some examples, the deformable pads (13.9-225a) are positioned on/over the user's nose when the head-mounted device is worn. The deformable pads (13.9-225a) may be in fluid communication with the pressure sensors (13.9-224a). Pressure sensors (13.9-224a) can detect changes in pressure caused by movement of the deformable pads (13.9-225a).

The movement of the deformable pads (13.9-225a) may be caused by movement of the user's face. For example, the user may breathe through his nose, thereby deflecting the deformable pads (13.9-225a), thereby detecting a change in internal pressure of the pressure sensor assembly. The pressure sensors (13.9-224) may detect a change in pressure and transmit a signal based on the change via an electrical signal to a head-mounted device, such as the head-mounted device (13.9-200) illustrated in FIG. 443a. In some examples, the change in pressure may cause a piezoelectric response, a change in resistance, or a diaphragm deflection to generate the signal.

Similarly, the deformable pads (13.9-225b) may be positioned near the forehead area of the user's face when the facial interface (13.9-212) is worn. The deformable pads (13.9-225b) may be in fluid communication with the pressure sensors (13.9-224b). The pressure sensors (13.9-224b) may detect changes in pressure caused by the movement of the deformable pads (13.9-225b) in response to movement of the user's face. For example, the user may perform an activity such as making a facial expression or exercising, which increases the user's blood pressure and thereby causes detectable forehead vasculature to dilate.

As the forehead vasculature expands, the deformable pads (13.9-225b) deflect, causing a change in internal pressure relative to the pressure assembly. The pressure sensors (13.9-224b) detect the change in pressure and communicate the pressure change by generating an electrical signal in response to the pressure change, which signal can then be transmitted to the head-mounted device. Similarly, a change in the user's facial expression can cause a deflection of the deformable pads (13.9-225b), which can be detected by the pressure sensors (13.9-224b). The pressure sensors (13.9-224b) then generate an electrical signal in response to the detected deflection, which signal can then be analyzed by the processor to infer characteristics of the user's facial expression.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIGS. 443a and 443b ) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference to them) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 443a and 443b .

FIG. 444 illustrates a rear perspective view of a head-mountable device (13.9-300). The head-mountable device (13.9-300) may be substantially similar to the head-mountable devices described herein, such as the head-mountable devices (13.9-100, 13.9-200), and may include some or all of their features. A head-mountable device (13.9-300) illustrated in FIG. 444 includes a support (13.9-323), a facial interface (13.9-312), overmolded portions (13.9-313a, 13.9-313b) connected to the facial interface (13.9-312) (collectively referred to as “overmolded portions (13.9-313)”), deformable pads (13.9-325), channels (13.9-326), and sensors (13.9-324).

The channel (13.9-326) allows fluid communication between the deformable pad (13.9-325) and the sensor (13.9-324). As described in more detail with respect to FIGS. 445A and 445B, the channel (13.9-326) may define an internal volume. In some examples, the channel (13.9-326) defines a support arm for the deformable pad (13.9-325). The channel (13.9-326) may be adjustable so that the position of the deformable pad (13.9-325) relative to the user's nose can be modified for various applications or users. For example, one user may have a particular nose shape, and another user may have a substantially different nose shape. The channel (13.9-326) may be adjusted so that the nose shape can be comfortably and precisely accommodated.

In some examples, the deformable pads (13.9-325) may be adjustable. For example, the deformable pads (13.9-325) may move or pivot relative to the facial interface (13.9-312). The deformable pads (13.9-325) may change their pitch, yaw, or roll to establish a better fit and comfort on the user's face. In some examples, the stiffness or rigidity of the deformable pads (13.9-325) may be adjusted or tuned based on needs and preferences. The stiffness of the deformable pads (13.9-325) may be adjusted based on pressure within the channels (13.9-326). In some examples, the deformable pads (13.9-325) automatically adjust based on the user or application. Additional details regarding the deformable pads are provided below with reference to FIGS. 445A and 445B.

In some instances, a user may perform high-impact activities that require a firmer contact with the deformable pad (13.9-325). The deformable pad (13.9-325) may be replaced with a more rigid deformable pad. In some instances, the deformable pad (13.9-325) may be replaced with a less rigid deformable pad to accommodate other desired activities, such as test-taking or learning activities.

The overmolded portion (13.9-313) may include portions that contact the user's face. For example, the overmolded portion (13.9-313b) may contact the maxillary and/or zygomatic facial regions to create a comfortable, conformable fit on the user's face. Similarly, the overmolded portion (13.9-313a) may contact the user's forehead to conform to the unique properties of each user's forehead, thereby providing a comfortable, customized fit for each individual user. In some examples, the overmolded portion (13.9-313) may be considered part of the facial interface (13.9-312). The overmolded portions (13.9-313) may secure the sensor assembly to the facial interface (13.9-312) to create an aesthetically pleasing head-mounted display. In some examples, the overmolded portions (13.9-313) may create or define channels (13.9-326). In some examples, the overmolded portions (13.9-313) may form a housing for housing or concealing sensors (13.9-324) and/or channels (13.9-326).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 444) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 444.

FIG. 445A illustrates a perspective view of a portion of a facial interface (13.9-412). The facial interface (13.9-412) may be substantially similar to the facial interfaces described herein, such as the facial interfaces (13.9-112, 13.9-212, 13.9-312), and may include some or all of their features. The facial interface (13.9-412) may include an arm or channel (13.9-426) defining an interior volume (13.9-428). The interior volume (13.9-428) may establish fluid communication between the deformable pad (13.9-425) and the sensor (13.9-424). In some examples, the interior volume comprises air or some other gas. In some examples, the interior volume (13.9-428) comprises a liquid or pneumatic fluid. The sensor (13.9-424) may be a pressure-based MEMS sensor (13.9-424). The sensor (13.9-424) may be positioned within the arm (13.9-426) of the facial interface (13.9-412). In some examples, the sensor (13.9-424) is positioned on the exterior of the arm (13.9-426).

The deformable pad (13.9-425) may include an expandable member that is capable of bending or deforming in response to an external force. The deformable pad (13.9-425) may be removably attached to the arm (13.9-426) via a connector (13.9-433). The connector (13.9-433) may include any suitable mechanical or magnetic attachment mechanisms. In some examples, the connector (13.9-433) may include a barbed configuration that removably secures the deformable pad (13.9-425) to the arm (13.9-426). The deformable pad (13.9-425) may include a female connector (13.9-435) for receiving a male connector (13.9-433) on the arm (13.9-426). In some examples, the connector (13.9-433) may be threaded such that the deformable pad (13.9-425) is threaded onto the connector (13.9-433).

The term "barbed" as used within the context of the present application may define one end of a component that connects to another end of a different component. For example, a deformable pad may be connected to a facial interface (13.9-412) via a barbed connection. The connection may be physical and may include exit portions on one component and entry portions on another component. These exit portions and entry portions may form a threaded fit, snap fit, compression fit, or other fit that may create fluid communication between the deformable pad (13.9-425) and the sensor (13.9-424).

As illustrated in FIG. 445b, in some examples, the connector (13.9-433) can establish a substantially airtight seal between the deformable pad (13.9-425) and the interior volume (13.9-428) of the channel. In some examples, a gasket, O-ring, or other type of seal is positioned around the connector (13.9-433) to improve the seal. In some examples, as the deformable pad (13.9-425) moves, a known and predetermined amount of air is allowed to escape the interior volume (13.9-428). By controlling the amount of air that escapes, the pressure sensor can still infer facial movement.

The deformable pad (13.9-425) may comprise an elastomeric material. The deformable pad (13.9-425) may comprise a soft material that is comfortable on the user's skin. The deformable pad (13.9-425) may comprise any of, but is not limited to, natural rubber, polyisoprene, butyl rubber (IIR, isobutene-isoprene), chloroprene (CR, Neoprene®), ethylene propylene diene (EPDM), fluorocarbon (FMK, Viton®), fluorosilicone (FSI), nitrile butadiene (NBR), saturated nitrile (HNBR), silicone rubber (SI, gum and liquid), styrene butadiene (SBR), and urethane (PU, polyurethane).

In some examples, the deformable pad may comprise a compressible elastomer, such as a durable, wear-resistant silicone material. The deformable pad may be resilient and flexible against moisture, such as sweat. In some examples, the deformable pad may be overmolded or may be a standalone piece attached to the facial interface.

Additionally, the deformable pad (13.9-425) may be tailored to specific needs or users. For example, one deformable pad may be composed of one elastomeric material for one application or user, and another deformable pad may include an elastomeric material designed for a different application or user. In some examples, the deformable pad (13.9-425) may be shaped or manufactured to increase or decrease the sensitivity of the deformable pad (13.9-425) to a given activity. In some examples, the deformable pad (13.9-425) may be composed of a combination of materials, such as two or more types of elastomeric materials.

An exemplary operation of the sensor module may occur when a user wearing the HMD experiences facial movement. The facial movement may include movement of the nose, forehead, cheeks, or any other part of the face/head. The facial movements may indicate breathing, pulse, or facial expressions. Because the deformable pad (13.9-425) is in close proximity to or in contact with the user, the facial movement may push or deflect the deformable pad (13.9-425) by a predetermined amount. The deflection of the deformable pad (13.9-425) may cause a temporary increase in pressure within the channel (13.9-428). The change in pressure may be detected by a sensor (13.9-424) that transmits a signal based on the pressure change to be processed (e.g., by a processor onboard the HMD). In some examples, the sensor (13.9-424) may be integrated into other components of the HMD (e.g., integrated into the headband of the HMD).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIGS. 445a and 445b) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 445a and 445b.

FIG. 446A illustrates a rear view of a facial interface (13.9-512). The facial interface (13.9-512) may be substantially similar to the facial interfaces described herein, such as facial interfaces (13.9-112, 13.9-212, 13.9-312, 13.9-412), and may include some or all of their features. In some examples, the facial interface (13.9-512) may include a pressure sensor positioned in a forehead contact area of the facial interface (13.9-512). The pressure sensor may include a deformable pad (e.g., an inflatable member) (13.9-525). In some examples, the deformable pad is overmolded onto the facial interface (13.9-512) to seal the deformable pad (13.9-525) and create a pressure chamber, wherein the user's facial movements cause the deformable pad (13.9-525) to deflect or deform. Deflection of the deformable pad (13.9-525) creates a change in pressure within the pressure chamber. The change in pressure may be detectable by a pressure sensor, which may then generate a signal that is analyzed or interpreted by the processor/controller.

As illustrated in FIG. 446a, the deformable pad (13.9-525) may include an elongated shape. The elongated shape of the deformable pad (13.9-525) may span a substantial portion of the user's forehead when the user is wearing the HMD. The elongated horizontal shape of the deformable pad (13.9-525) may be predetermined to cover a maximum amount of veins/vessels on the forehead. In some examples, the deformable pad (13.9-525) may be centered on the facial interface (13.9-512) and thus positioned to contact the center of the user's forehead. However, other positions are also possible. In some examples, the deformable pad (13.9-525) is off-centered from the center or middle of the facial interface (13.9-512). In some examples, the facial interface (13.9-512) partially wraps around the user's head so that the deformable pad (13.9-525) can be positioned close to the user's temple when the HMD is worn.

FIG. 446b illustrates a rear view of a facial interface (13.9-512) having a plurality of deformable pads (13.9-525a, 13.9-525b, 13.9-525c, 13.9-525d) (collectively referred to as “deformable pads (13.9-525)”). Each of the deformable pads (13.9-525) can be deflected to cause a change in pressure. In some examples, the facial interface (13.9-512) includes a plurality of pressure chambers. The pressure chambers can be isolated and distinct or can be in fluid communication with one another. The pressure within the channel(s) can be equalized. In some examples, each deformable pad (13.9-525) can be fluidly connected to a single sensor.

In some examples, the system includes a plurality of sensors, each of which is fluidly connected to one or more of the deformable pads (13.9-525). An increased number of deformable pads (13.9-525) can increase the accuracy and sensitivity of a head-mounted device used in combination with a facial interface (13.9-512). In some examples, a combination of deformable pads (13.9-525) can be used to detect or track motions along a user's forehead. For example, using at least pads (13.9-525a) and (13.9-525b), a vertical signal or input can be monitored or tracked as it traverses the user's forehead. Similarly, using at least pads (13.9-525c) and (13.9-525d), a horizontal signal or input can be tracked as it traverses horizontally across the user's forehead.

In some examples, a combination of pads (13.9-525) can detect a user's pulse transit time (e.g., the time it takes a pulse wave to travel between two pulse locations). For example, deformable pads (13.9-525a) and deformable pads (13.9-525b) can be positioned over the trochlear artery (e.g., the arterial supply to the forehead and frontal portion of the scalp) to measure the pulse transit time from deformable pad (13.9-525a) to deformable pad (13.9-525b). Similarly, any artery or combination thereof can be used to measure arterial functions such as pulse transit times in a vertical, horizontal, or combination manner.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIGS. 446a and 446b ) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 446a and 446b .

Figure 447 illustrates a cross-sectional side view of a portion of a sensor module of a facial interface (13.9-612). The facial interface (13.9-612) may be substantially similar to the facial interfaces described herein, such as the facial interfaces (13.9-112, 13.9-212, 13.9-312, 13.9-412, 13.9-512), and may include some or all of their features. The sensor module of Figure 447 includes a deformable pad (13.9-625), a contact portion (13.9-627) configured to make contact with a user's head, and a sensor (13.9-624).

A channel (13.9-628) may define an interior volume in which a deformable pad (13.9-625) and a sensor (13.9-624) are fluidly connected. In some examples, the deformable pad (13.9-625) may be deformable in response to facial movements. The deformable pad (13.9-625) may be composed of a compressible elastomeric material. The facial interface (13.9-612) may include an overmolded portion (13.9-627). The overmolded portion (13.9-627) may contact a user's face and may provide comfortable contact points on the user's forehead, nose, around the user's eyes, and other contact areas where the overmolded portion contacts the user's face.

In some examples, the overmolded portion (13.9-627) is formed of a flexible elastomeric material that is resilient to sweat/sweat droplets from the user. As illustrated, a pressure-based MEMS sensor (13.9-624) may be embedded or housed within the facial interface (13.9-612). The MEMS sensor may have dimensions of approximately 2 mm x 2 mm. FIG. 447 illustrates that the deformable pad (13.9-625) protrudes (extends or protrudes) from the facial interface (13.9-612). However, in some examples, the deformable pad (13.9-625) may be flush with the facial interface (13.9-612), and in particular, flush with the section of the facial interface (13.9-612) that contacts or abuts the user's forehead.

An exemplary operation of the sensor module may occur when a user wearing the HMD experiences facial movement. The facial movement may include movement of the nose, forehead, cheeks, or any other part of the face/head. The facial movements may indicate breathing, pulse, or facial expressions. Since the deformable pad (13.9-625) is in close proximity to or in contact with the user, the facial movement may push or deflect the deformable pad (13.9-625) by a predetermined amount.

Deflection of the deformable pad (13.9-625) causes a temporary increase in pressure within the channel (13.9-628). The change in pressure may be detected by a sensor (13.9-624) that transmits a signal based on the pressure change to be processed (e.g., by a processor mounted on the HMD). In some examples, the sensor (13.9-624) may be integrated into other components of the HMD (e.g., integrated into a headband of the HMD).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 447) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference to them) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 447.

13.10: Touch-sensitive input surfaces

The following disclosure relates to a head-mountable device. More specifically, the present embodiments relate to an optical seal for a head-mountable device that includes passive touch-sensitive input surfaces for a user wearing the head-mountable device to provide commands to the head-mountable device. As used herein, the term "conductive fabric" may refer to a material or fabric into which conductive elements are integrated, or may refer to the conductive elements themselves, separate from the material or fabric into which they are integrated. The conductive fabric may include a plurality of conductive fibers. The conductive fabric may act as sensors, input elements, and electrical interconnects, allowing the sensors and other electronic components to interact with each other. A passive input sensor may be a physically activated input system that may be used to provide an indication of a user's intent to a processor.

The head-mountable device of the present disclosure includes a passive input sensor utilizing a touch-sensitive surface that receives user input, such as a touch input. This can be achieved by carefully integrating the touch-sensitive surface with an optical seal. A head-mountable device having such touch-sensitive sensing surfaces adds another way for a user to provide input or commands to the head-mountable device, adding functionality without adding burdensome components or structures.

These and other embodiments are discussed below with reference to FIGS. 448A through 455B. However, one of ordinary skill in the art will readily recognize that the detailed description provided herein with respect to these drawings is for illustrative purposes only and should not be construed as limiting. Moreover, as used herein, a system, method, article, component, feature, or sub-feature that includes at least one of the first option, the second option, or the third option should be understood to refer to a system, method, article, component, feature, or sub-feature that can include one of each of the listed options (e.g., only one of the first option, only one of the second option, or only one of the third option), multiple of a single listed option (e.g., two or more of the first option), two options simultaneously (e.g., one of the first option and one of the second option), or a combination thereof (e.g., two of the first option and one of the second option).

FIG. 448A illustrates a block diagram of a head-mounted device ("HMD") (13.10-100) including a frame (13.10-104), a display (13.10-105), a support (e.g., a retaining band (13.10-109)), and an optical seal or cover (13.10-112). The display (13.10-105) may include one or more optical lenses or display screens in front of the user's eyes. The display (13.10-105) may include a display for presenting augmented reality visualizations, virtual reality visualizations, or other suitable visualizations. Additionally, the frame (13.10-104) may at least partially surround the display (13.10-105). Similarly, the optical seal (13.10-112) may be connected to the frame (13.10-104). In some examples, the optical seal (13.10-112) includes the frame (13.10-104) (i.e., the frame (13.10-104) is part of the optical seal (13.10-112)).

The optical seal (13.10-112) may include electrical components (e.g., sensors (13.10-120)), a cover (13.10-113), a facial interface (13.10-108), and a conductive fabric (13.10-116). The frame (13.10-104) may be a housing for the display (13.10-105). Additionally, the frame (13.10-104) may also be considered to be part of or separate from the optical seal (13.10-112). As used herein, the term "optical seal" may refer to a portion of the HMD (13.10-100) that engages with or shields the user's face. In particular, the optical seal (13.10-112) includes parts (e.g., a facial interface) that conform to, contact with, or press against areas of the user's face.

The optical seal (13.10-112) includes a body having an inner surface and an outer surface. The outer surface is exposed to the external environment, and the inner surface is positioned within a space formed by the HMD (13.10-100) and the user's face. The optical seal may include a flexible (or semi-flexible) facetrack or face-engaging component that extends over the forehead, wraps around the eyes, contacts other areas of the face (e.g., the zygomatic and maxillary regions), and bridges the nose. Additionally, the optical seal (13.10-112) may include various components, such as a cover (13.10-113), that form a frame, structure, or webbing of the head-mounted device positioned between the display (13.10-105) and the user's skin. The cover (13.10-113) may include a seal, an environmental seal, a dust seal, an air seal, etc., positioned between the gap between the display (13.10-105) and the user's face. The cover (13.10-113) may be a non-rigid or deformable woven fabric. The cover (13.10-113) may be elastically deformable. In some examples, the cover (13.10-113) may be a plastic, rubber, or polymeric material. In some examples, the cover (13.10-113) may be rigid.

The cover (13.10-113) may form an eye box that allows the user to view the display (13.10-105). It will be appreciated that the term “seal” may include partial seals or blockers in addition to complete seals (e.g., a partial light seal that blocks some ambient light when the HMD (13.10-100) is worn, and a complete light seal that blocks all ambient light).

The optical seal (13.10-112) may have a removable fastener that allows the optical seal to be removably attached to the frame (13.10-104) and to be in electrical communication with the display (13.10-105). The optical seal (13.10-112) may include an electrical component, such as a sensor (13.10-120). The sensor (13.10-120) may collect user or environmental data, such as biometric information. The sensor (13.10-120) may receive input from a user, such as a user physically touching the sensor to input or command the HMD (13.10-100) as an indication of the user's intent. The sensor (13.10-120) may transmit signals to the HMD (13.10-100), and in particular to the display (13.10-105). The sensor (13.10-120) can transmit signals to an output unit configured to perform an action in response to information collected by the sensor (13.10-120).

The optical seal (13.10-112) may include a conductive fabric (13.10-116). In some examples, the conductive fabric (13.10-116) may include highly elastic copper threads that can be compressed and stretched while still maintaining electrical connectivity. The conductive fabric (13.10-116) may be elastically deformable (i.e., capable of temporary changes in length, volume, or shape). In some examples, the conductive fabric (13.10-116) may include electrically conductive carbon fibers. In some examples, the conductive fabric (13.10-116) may collect input from a user by engaging the conductive fabric through touch, for example, with a finger or digits. These movements may cause changes (i.e., stretching or compressing) of the conductive fabric (13.10-116). The degree or amount of movement of the conductive fabric (13.10-116) by the user's finger may be detectable by the conductive fabric (13.10-116) and used to generate signals that may be analyzed by the processor of the HMD (13.10-100). As described in more detail below, the conductive fabric (13.10-116) may be a thread, line, wire, plate, or any other structure capable of conducting electricity. The conductive fabric (13.10-116) may be integrated with the optical seal (13.10-112). For example, the conductive fabric (13.10-116) may be embedded in, interwoven with, or encapsulated in the cover (13.10-113) or the facial interface (13.10-108).

A display (13.10-105) in electrical communication with the optical seal (13.10-112), and more specifically, the conductive fabric (13.10-116), can receive electrical communications and provide feedback to a user (e.g., visual feedback, audio feedback, haptic feedback, etc.) related to readings of the conductive fabric (13.10-116).

As used herein, the term "sensor" refers to one or more different sensing devices, such as a camera or imaging device, strain gauges, capacitance sensors, proximity sensors, touch-sensitive sensors, accelerometers, and the like. Additional sensors may include temperature sensors, oxygen sensors, motion sensors, brain activity sensors, sweat activity sensors, respiratory activity sensors, muscle contraction sensors, and the like. In some examples, the sensor may detect biometric characteristics including characteristics of the autonomic nervous system. Some examples of sensors include a safety sensor, an electrocardiogram sensor, an EKG sensor, a heart rate variability sensor, a blood volume pulse sensor, an SpO2 sensor, a compact pressure sensor, an electromyogram sensor, a core body temperature sensor, a galvanic skin sensor, an accelerometer, a gyroscope, a magnetometer, an inclinometer, a barometer, an infrared sensor, a global positioning system sensor, and the like. Additional sensor examples may include contact microphones (e.g., pressure-based MEMS), bioelectrical activity sensors, UV exposure sensors, or particle sensors.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 448a) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in other drawings and described with reference to them) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 448a.

FIG. 448b illustrates a partial plan view of an HMD (13.10-100). The HMD (13.10-100) of FIG. 448b may be substantially similar to the HMD (13.10-100) described in FIG. 448a and may include some or all of its features. The HMD (13.10-100) may include a display (also referred to as a display unit) (13.10-105). The display (13.10-105) may include any number of internal electronic components (13.10-107). The HMD (13.10-100) may include a frame (13.10-104) (also referred to as a housing) attached to the display (13.10-105). In some examples, the display (13.10-105) comprises an opaque, partially transparent, transparent, or translucent screen comprising any number of lenses for presenting visual data. The frame (13.10-104) may at least partially border one or more edges of the display (13.10-105). The frame (13.10-104) may be attached to the cover (13.10-128) at one end of the cover (13.10-128). At the opposite end, the cover (13.10-128) may form or be attached to the facial interface (13.10-108). In some examples, the frame (13.10-104), the cover (13.10-113), and the facial interface (13.10-108) together may form an optical seal (13.10-112). However, it will be understood that the optical seal (13.10-112) may contain fewer or more components than those listed or illustrated.

The HMD (13.10-100) may be worn on a user's head (13.10-20) such that the display (13.10-105) is positioned over the user's face and over one or both of the user's eyes. The HMD (13.10-100) may further include a retention band (13.10-109). The retention band (13.10-109) may secure the HMD (13.10-100) to the user's head (13.10-20) during use so that the user may enjoy the experience provided by the HMD (13.10-100). The display (13.10-105) may be connected to the retention band (13.10-109) and/or the optical seal (13.10-112). In some examples, the retention band (13.10-109) may be positioned against and in contact with the side of the user's head (13.10-20). In some examples, the retention band (13.10-109) may be positioned at least partially over the user's ear or ears. In some examples, the retention band (13.10-109) may be positioned adjacent to the user's ear or ears. The retention band (13.10-109) may extend around the user's head (13.10-20). In this manner, the display (13.10-105) and the retention band (13.10-109) may form a loop that may retain the HMD (13.10-100) on the user's head (13.10-20). However, it should be understood that this configuration is only one example of how the components of the HMD (13.10-100) may be arranged, and that in some examples, a different number of connector straps and/or retention bands may be included. Although the HMD (13.10-100) is referred to as an HMD, it should be understood that the terms wearable device, wearable electronic device, head-mounted device, HMD, HMD device, and/or HMD system may be used to refer to any wearable device, including smart glasses.

In some examples, the frame (13.10-104) is attached to a facial interface (13.10-108). The facial interface (13.10-108) may contact the user's head (13.10-20) and/or face. In some examples, the cover (13.10-113) may be a light-blocking component extending between the frame (13.10-104) and the facial interface (13.10-108). The light-blocking component may cover or surround a periphery of the facial interface (13.10-108) and/or the frame (13.10-104).

The cover (13.10-113) may be cloth, fabric, woven material, plastic, rubber, or any other suitable opaque or semi-opaque material. In some examples, the cover (13.10-113) is flexible and has the ability to be repeatedly stretched, compressed, and deformed. The cover (13.10-113) may be elastically or inelastically deformable. The facial interface (13.10-108) in combination with the cover (13.10-113) may block external light and limit the user's peripheral view. In some examples, the cover (13.10-113) and the facial interface (13.10-108) are the same or are an integral component. As discussed in more detail below, the optical seal (13.10-112) may include a conductive fabric (13.10-116) that may provide a number of functions and may provide added benefits and functionality to the HMD (13.10-100).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 448b) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in other drawings and described with reference to them) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 448b.

Figure 449 illustrates a bottom perspective view of selected components of the optical seal (13.10-212). The optical seal (13.10-212) may be substantially similar to the optical seals described herein, such as the optical seal (13.10-112), and may include some or all of their features. The optical seal (13.10-212) may be implemented on an HMD, such as the HMD (13.10-100).

The optical seal (13.10-212) may be integrated with conductive fabrics (13.10-216a, 13.10-216b) (collectively referred to as the conductive fabric (13.10-216)). The conductive fabric (13.10-216) or threads may be positioned at various locations on the optical seal (13.10-212). For example, the conductive fabric (13.10-216) may be positioned on or within the cover (13.10-213) (e.g., embedded, encapsulated, or woven within the cover).

In some examples, the conductive fabric (13.10-216) may be positioned on the facial interface (13.10-208) of the optical seal (13.10-212). In one example, the conductive fabric (13.10-216) may be in direct contact with the user, such as touching the user's forehead, cheek, nose, temple area, back of the head, or any location where the HMD makes contact with the user. In some examples, the conductive fabrics (13.10-216) are positioned on an outer surface of the optical seal (13.10-212).

In the illustrated example of FIG. 449, conductive fabrics (13.10-216a) are positioned on the left side of the optical seal, and conductive fabrics (13.10-216b) are positioned on the right side of the optical seal (13.10-212). Conductive fabrics (13.10-216a) may be positioned on a particular touch-sensitive surface (13.10-218a), and conductive fabrics (13.10-216b) may be positioned on a touch-sensitive surface (13.10-218b). The touch-sensitive surfaces (13.10-218a, 13.10-218b) may be passive input sensors for receiving input from a user by manually or physically touching the touch-sensitive surfaces (13.10-218a, 13.10-218b) to provide input and/or commands to the HMD (13.10-100). However, the conductive fabric (13.10-216) may be positioned at various different locations on the optical seal (13.10-212).

FIG. 450A illustrates a plan view of an HMD (13.10-300). The HMD (13.10-300) may be substantially similar to the devices described herein, such as the HMD (13.10-100) and the optical seal (13.10-212), and may include some or all of their features. In some examples, the HMD (13.10-300) may include an electronic component (e.g., a sensor (13.10-320)). The electronic component may be positioned on or housed within the display unit (13.10-305). The electronic component may be a battery, a processor, a display, a camera, or any other electronic component. In some examples, the electronic module may be attached to the frame (13.10-304).

In some examples, an electronic component (e.g., a sensor (13.10-320)) may be electrically connected by a conductive fabric (13.10-316) that extends through a cover (13.10-313) of an optical seal (13.10-312). In some examples, the conductive fabric (13.10-316) extends through or across a retaining band (13.10-309). In some examples, the conductive fabric (13.10-316) extends through or across a frame (13.10-304). In this manner, the conductive fabric (13.10-316) serves as an interconnection (i.e., an electrical connection) between the sensor (13.10-320) on the optical seal (13.10-312). In some examples, the detections of the conductive fabrics (13.10-316) may be combined with other sensors onboard or remotely from the HMD (13.10-300) to collect data in a sensor fusion manner. In the illustrated example, the light seal (13.10-312) includes a conductive fabric (13.10-316a) positioned on the left side of the light seal (13.10-312) and a conductive fabric (13.10-316b) positioned on the right side of the light seal (13.10-312). The conductive fabric (13.10-316a) may be positioned on a particular touch-sensitive surface (13.10-318a) and the conductive fabric (13.10-316b) may be positioned on a particular touch surface (13.10-318b). These specific touch-sensitive surfaces (13.10-318a, 13.10-318b) are configured to allow a user to provide input to the HMD (13.10-100) by touching the specific touch-sensitive surfaces (13.10-318a, 13.10-318b).

In the illustrated example, the optical seal (13.10-312) includes two touch-sensitive surfaces (13.10-318a, 13.10-318b), although the present disclosure is not so limited and may include more or fewer touch-sensitive surfaces than two. In some examples, the entire optical seal (13.10-312) may be a touch-sensitive surface that allows a user to input information or commands into the HMD (13.10-300) from any location on the optical seal (13.10-312). In some examples, there may be a distinct number of touch-sensitive surfaces that enable a user to input information or commands into the HMD (13.10-300). In some examples, each distinct touch-sensitive surface may be dedicated to a particular type of input or function. For example, one touch-sensitive surface may be for volume control, another touch-sensitive input may be for scrolling, etc. The HMD (13.10-300) may include an indicator that directs the user to the location of a separate touch-sensitive surface on the exterior surface of the optical seal (13.10-312).

In some examples, the HMD (13.10-300) may include conductive fabrics (13.10-316c, 13.10-316d) integrated onto and/or into a retention band (13.10-309) of the HMD (13.10-300). The retention band (13.10-309) may be a headband having flexible sections. The conductive fabrics (13.10-316c, 13.10-316d) may be configured to stretch or compress in response to stretching or compressing the retention band (13.10-309). In some examples, the conductive fabrics (13.10-316c, 13.10-316d) may generate signals indicative of the tightness or position of the retention band (13.10-309). In some examples, the user may be notified based on signals generated by the conductive fabrics (13.10-316c, 13.10-316d). The retention band (13.10-309) may be automatically adjusted based on signals generated by the conductive fabrics (13.10-316c, 13.10-316d). In the illustrated example, the retention band (13.10-309) includes a conductive fabric (13.10-316c) positioned on the left side of the retention band (13.10-309) and a conductive fabric (13.10-316d) positioned on the right side of the retention band (13.10-309), and may be connected to electrical components (13.10-320) on the frame (13.10-304) of the HMD (13.10-300).

FIG. 450b illustrates a plan view of a user interacting with a touch-sensitive surface (13.10-318b). For ease of illustration, the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-318b) depicts a single conductive fiber, but may include multiple conductive fibers. In some examples, the conductive fabric (13.10-316b) is woven into a strain gauge pattern and the conductive fabric (13.10-316b) is electrically connected to an electrical component of the HMD (13.10-300) (e.g., a sensor (13.10-320)). The user's interaction with the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-318b) may be interpreted as an input for providing commands to the HMD (13.10-300).

In some examples, the conductive fabric (13.10-316b) is physically connected to the sensor (13.10-320). The sensor (13.10-320) may be a strain gauge and the conductive fabric (13.10-316b) is physically coupled to the strain gauge (13.10-320). The strain gauge (13.10-320) may measure a displacement of the conductive fabric (13.10-316b) and may interpret or convert the displacement of the conductive fabric (13.10-316b) into an input for the HMD (13.10-300).

In some examples, the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-318b) includes a yarn physically connected to a strain gauge (13.10-320). Any yarn positioned within the periphery of the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-318b) can be physically connected to the strain gauge (13.10-320). The touch-sensitive surface (13.10-318b) utilizes the elastic properties of the yarn. In other words, as a user presses or touches a yarn of the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-318b), strain is transmitted to the strain gauge (13.10-320) positioned away from the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-318b), and the strain gauge can measure the displacement of the yarn and interpret the displacement as an input to the HMD (13.10-300). In some examples, the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-318) may include both a conductive fabric (13.10-316b) and yarn.

FIG. 450b illustrates a user pushing or poking a particular touch-sensitive surface (13.10-318b) with a finger (13.10-10), which displaces a conductive fabric (13.10-316b) and transmits the displacement to a strain gauge (13.10-320), which interprets the displacement as a command or input to the HMD (13.10-300). However, the user may use a number of different gestures with his finger (13.10-10) to provide input to the HMD (13.10-300). As discussed above, the user may press (e.g., poke) the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-318b). The user may also slide his finger (13.10-10) along the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-318b). A user may use two fingers to stretch the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-318b) to stretch the conductive fabric (13.10-316b) between the two fingers, or may push the conductive fabric (13.10-316b) closer together. Such gestures may be interpreted as zooming in or out. The user may also pinch the conductive fabric (13.10-316). Such gestures may be interpreted as taking a picture. In some examples, the number of fingers used in a gesture may indicate different types of input. For example, a two-finger swipe may be interpreted by the system as a different input than a single-finger swipe or a three-finger swipe.

The strain gauge (13.10-320) may be integrated into the frame (13.10-304) of the HMD (13.10-300). In some examples, the strain gauge (13.10-320) may be positioned on the frame (13.10-304) of the HMD (13.10-300). In some examples, the strain gauge (13.10-320) may be positioned within the frame (13.10-304). For example, the frame (13.10-304) may include a slot into which the strain gauge (13.10-320) is positioned, and yarn and/or conductive fabric (13.10-316b) may enter to physically connect to the strain gauge (13.10-320). Therefore, the strain gauge (13.10-320) is shielded from environmental conditions such as sweat, fluids, debris, etc.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 450 ) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference to them) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 450 .

FIG. 451 illustrates a touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418) on an optical seal (13.10-412) of an HMD (13.10-400). The HMD (13.10-400) may be substantially similar to the devices described herein, such as the HMDs (13.10-100, 13.10-300) and the optical seal (13.10-212), and may include some or all of their features. The touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418) may include a distinct periphery (13.10-419). In the illustrated example, the periphery (13.10-419) of the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418) is circular, but the periphery (13.10-419) may include a plurality of different shapes. For example, the periphery (13.10-419) may be semicircular, oval, rectangular, trapezoidal, polygonal, triangular, and various other shapes. As discussed above, the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418) may include a conductive fabric having conductive fibers (not shown) and/or yarns that may be connected to a strain gauge.

The touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418) may include indicators to indicate or guide the user toward the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418). For example, when a user is wearing the HMD (13.10-400), the user cannot see the outer surface of the light seal (13.10-412) or the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418) on the light seal (13.10-412) because the HMD (13.10-400) intentionally blocks his view of the light seal (13.10-412) and the outside of the HMD (13.10-400). Therefore, when the user is wearing the HMD (13.10-400), the user attempts to engage the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418) without being seen. The indicator can provide feedback to the user to help locate the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418) in a number of different ways, allowing the user to input commands into the HMD (13.10-400) using the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418).

In the illustrated example of FIG. 451, the indicator may use tactile feedback to guide a user's finger (13.10-10) toward a touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418). For example, a plurality of protrusions (13.10-417) or bumps may protrude outwardly from the surface of the light seal (13.10-412) along a periphery (13.10-419) of the touch-sensitive surface. Thus, when a user slides his or her finger (13.10-10) over the protrusions (13.10-417), the user will feel a tactile sensation at the tip of his or her finger (13.10-10). These tactile sensations may orient and inform the user toward the periphery of the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418). In other words, as the user's finger (13.10-10) approaches the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418), the protrusions (13.10-417) provide tactile feedback to the user, indicating that he has reached the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418). The protrusions (13.10-417) may be spaced apart along the periphery (13.10-419) of the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418). The space between adjacent protrusions (13.10-417) may be narrower than the width of the fingertip, allowing the user to feel it. In some examples, the protrusions (13.10-417) may be continuous protrusions that extend along the entire periphery (13.10-419) of the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418). In this way, the user becomes aware when he is approaching the periphery (13.10-419) of the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418) from the outside of the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418) or from the inside of the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418).

The protrusions (13.10-417) may have various different shapes. In the illustrated example, the protrusions (13.10-417) have a circular shape. However, the scope of the present disclosure includes various different shapes for the protrusions, such as rectangular, triangular, polygonal, etc.

In some examples, the protrusions (13.10-417) may be positioned in patterns to help orient the user. For example, the lower portion of the periphery (13.10-419) may have a different pattern than the rest of the periphery (13.10-419). For example, the lower portion of the periphery may have a cluster of three protrusions (13.10-419) that are closer together to indicate to the user that the user is approaching the lower portion of the periphery (13.10-419) of the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418). Similarly, the upper portion of the periphery (13.10-419) may have a pattern similar to the lower portion of the different pattern. The same applies to the left portion of the periphery (13.10-419) and the right portion of the periphery (13.10-419).

In some instances, the tactile feedback may be dynamic. In other words, in some instances, the protrusions (13.10-417) may be felt, and in other instances, the protrusions (13.10-417) may not be felt. For example, in situations where the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418) is turned on and activated, the protrusions (13.10-417) may be felt, and in situations where the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418) is turned off and not activated, the protrusions (13.10-417) may not be felt. In some examples, the protrusions (13.10-417) may be part of an expandable bladder that expands to cause the protrusions (13.10-417) to protrude outwardly from the outer surface of the light seal (13.10-412) and contracts to cause the protrusions (13.10-417) to retract back into the light seal (13.10-412). In some other examples, the protrusions (13.10-417) may be selectively activated by a solenoid or other electrically actuated system that extends the protrusions (13.10-417) outwardly from the outer surface of the optical seal (13.10-412) when the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418) is activated and retracts the protrusions (13.10-417) when the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418) is not activated. As discussed in more detail below, the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418) may be activated when the position sensor detects a proximity touch. When a proximity touch is detected, the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418) may be turned on and the protrusions (13.10-417) may be activated and extended.

In other examples, the indicator may include visual feedback that directs or guides the user's finger (13.10-10) toward the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418). The visual feedback may be displayed to the user on a display (13.10-405) of the HMD (13.10-400). The HMD (13.10-400) may include a sensor, such as a camera, disposed on the frame (13.10-404) of the HMD (13.10-400). The sensor may capture images or video of the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418) on an exterior surface of the light seal (13.10-412). Accordingly, the display (13.10-405) may display images or videos directly from the sensor to the user on the display (13.10-405) to show the user where the user's finger (13.10-10) is in relation to the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418) to assist the user in finding and using the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418).

In another example, the display (13.10-405) may simply display animations or visual cues to the user to orient the user's finger (13.10-10) toward the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418). For example, the display (13.10-405) may display an animation to the user rather than a real-time video or image of how close the user's finger (13.10-10) is to the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418). The animations or visual cues may be displayed in a corner on the periphery of the display (13.10-405) so that the animations or visual cues do not overlap the central area of the display (13.10-405).

In another example, the interior surface of the light seal (13.10-412) may include a plurality of light emitting diodes. The light emitting diodes may be used to provide feedback to the user to guide the user to the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418). In some examples, the light emitting diodes may form an outline of the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418) on the interior surface of the light seal (13.10-412). When the light emitting diodes are illuminated, the user can determine the relative position of the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418), even from the inside of the light seal (13.10-412). In some examples, light emitting diodes on the inner surface of the light seal (13.10-412) may light up to indicate to the user the current position of the user's finger (13.10-10) from the inside of the light seal so that the user can know the approximate position of his finger (13.10-10) relative to the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418).

In another example, the color of the light emitting diodes may change based on the position of the user's finger (13.10-10) relative to the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418). For example, the light emitting diode may transition from red to yellow to green based on the position of the finger (13.10-10). The light emitting diode may be red when the finger (13.10-10) is not near the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418), may transition to yellow as the finger (13.10-10) moves closer to the periphery (13.10-419) of the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418), and may become green when the finger (13.10-10) engages the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418).

In some examples, the indicator may include haptic feedback. The optical seal (13.10-412) may include a haptic engine (13.10-434) electrically connected to the processor (13.10-430) via a wire (13.10-432). The haptic engine is configured to provide haptic feedback (e.g., vibration) to the user when the user's finger (13.10-10) approaches the peripheral portion (13.10-419) of the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418). The vibration of the haptic engine (13.10-434) may orient and notify the user toward the peripheral portion (13.10-419) of the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418). In other words, as the user's finger (13.10-10) approaches the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418), the haptic engine (13.10-434) vibrates to provide feedback to the user that the user has reached the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418). In this way, the user knows when he is approaching the periphery (13.10-419) of the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418) from the outside of the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418) or from the inside of the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418).

The processor (13.10-430) may also perform a variety of different functions, including communicating with each of the feedback mechanisms discussed above. The processor (13.10-430) may function as a triggering device that can turn the touch-sensitive surface on and off. In an attempt to conserve power, the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418) may be turned on when a user provides input to the HMD (13.10-400) and turned off when the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418) is not in use. The processor (13.10-430) may communicate with a number of different sensors.

The processor (13.10-430) can communicate with a proximity sensor that detects a proximity touch, which occurs when a user's finger (13.10-10) or hand is within a predetermined distance of the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418). For example, the processor (13.10-430) can communicate with a plurality of proximity sensors that are disposed around a periphery (13.10-419) of the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418) or within the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418). The proximity sensors can detect a proximity touch. Accordingly, when the proximity sensors detect a proximity touch, the processor (13.10-430) triggers the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418) to turn on so that the user can engage the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418). In other words, the processor (13.10-430) can turn on the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418) when the sensor detects a proximity touch.

In another example, the processor (13.10-430) may communicate with a camera that captures images and/or video of the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418). The camera monitors the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418) on an exterior surface of the optical seal (13.10-412) and captures images and/or video of the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418). When the camera detects a proximity touch, the processor (13.10-430) determines that a user is attempting to touch the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418) and triggers the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418) to turn on so that the user can engage the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418).

The HMD (13.10-400) may use a number of different position sensors, such as proximity sensors, cameras, capacitance sensors, or any other type of sensor, to detect proximity touch (e.g., the approach of a user's finger, hand, etc. to trigger turning on the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418). These systems may be used to avoid having environmental factors such as fluids, water, moisture, sweat, accidental engagement with the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-418), or triggering input to the HMD (13.10-400) when the user did not intend to do so.

Figures 452 through 455b illustrate additional ways in which a user may provide input to an HMD in a variety of different ways. Figure 452 illustrates an HMD (13.10-500) having a frame (13.10-504). The frame (13.10-504) of the HMD (13.10-500) is coupled to an optical seal (13.10-512). The optical seal (13.10-512) includes a touch-sensitive surface (13.10-518) disposed on an outer surface of the optical seal (13.10-512). In the illustrated example, the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-518) may include a plurality of conductive fabrics (13.10-516) organized in a particular pattern (e.g., woven). In the illustrated example, the conductive fabric (13.10-516) is organized in a matrix pattern. When the conductive fabric (13.10-516) is organized in this pattern, the conductive fabric (13.10-516) can track the movement of a finger (13.10-10) along the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-518). The conductive fabric (13.10-516) can be spaced apart by a predetermined distance such that environmental factors do not adversely affect the input to the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-518).

Figure 453 illustrates an HMD (13.10-600) having a frame (13.10-604). The frame (13.10-604) of the HMD (13.10-600) is connected to an optical seal (13.10-612). The optical seal (13.10-612) includes a touch-sensitive surface (13.10-618) disposed on an outer surface of the optical seal (13.10-612). In the illustrated example, the touch-sensitive surface (13.10-618) includes a plurality of planes (13.10-616) woven into the optical seal (13.10-612) and spaced perpendicularly from one another. The planes (13.10-616) can obtain capacitance readings to track the movement of a user's finger (13.10-10). In other words, the finger (13.10-10) can perform a vertical swiping motion or gesture, and the planes (13.10-616) can track the movement. Such gestures can be used for volume control or scrolling. In some examples, the planes (13.10-616) can be spaced horizontally from each other, and the user can perform a horizontal swiping motion or gesture.

Figure 454 illustrates an HMD (13.10-700) having a frame (13.10-704). The frame (13.10-704) may include a sensor (13.10-720). The sensor (13.10-720) may be an accelerometer capable of detecting vibrations in the frame (13.10-704). Accordingly, a user may tap the frame (13.10-704) of the HMD (13.10-700) with his or her finger (13.10-10). Tapping on the frame (13.10-704) may be interpreted as user input to the HMD (13.10-700).

Figures 455a and 455b illustrate an HMD (13.10-800) having a frame (13.10-804). The frame (13.10-804) may include a sensor (13.10-820). The sensor (13.10-820) may be a strain gauge capable of detecting mechanical deflection of the frame (13.10-804). Figure 455a illustrates the frame (13.10-804) in a natural or unconstrained state. Figure 455b illustrates the frame (13.10-804) in a constrained state, where a user presses the top and bottom of the frame (13.10-804) toward each other, thereby mechanically deflecting the frame (13.10-804). The deflection of the frame (13.10-804) can be interpreted as an input to the HMD (13.10-800). For example, as illustrated, pressing the HMD (13.10-800) can be interpreted as a command to take a picture of the display of the HMD (13.10-800).

13.11: Facial interlocking structures

The following disclosure relates to wearable electronic devices (e.g., head-mounted devices). More specifically, the present embodiments relate to connections between a display and a facial interface of the head-mounted device. Additionally, the present embodiments relate to lightweight variations of the facial interface.

When wearing or using a head-mounted device, the position and weight of the device can impact the quality of the user experience. Indeed, conventional head-mounted devices can be heavy due to the mass of the materials (or combination of materials) used in their manufacture. The additional weight can exert excessive pressure on the user's face, causing discomfort and pressure points in certain areas of the face. This user discomfort can degrade the overall AR/VR experience.

When weight factors are exacerbated, areas of the face that come into contact with a head-mounted device may have unique facial characteristics, such as variations in skull width or length, or variations in facial bones (e.g., frontal bone, zygomatic bone, maxilla, etc.). Therefore, these areas of high facial variability may experience rapid pressure or lead to more rapid user fatigue.

The connectors of the present disclosure address these and other issues of conventional head-mounted devices by providing dynamic adjustment. In fact, the connectors of the present disclosure can dynamically adjust to the user's facial variability to provide a comfortable user experience. Additionally, the connectors (and associated connector positioning) of the present disclosure can better distribute applied loads across the user's face for improved comfort compared to conventional head-mounted devices. These connectors can range from mechanically based connectors, which provide a greater mechanical range of motion, to organic connectors, which provide a greater organic range of motion.

For example, the connectors may be positioned in various locations (e.g., the maxilla, zygomatic bone, frontal bone, etc.). The connectors may include various types of joints (e.g., pivot joints, flexible joints, flexure joints, spring joints, etc.). The connectors may be combined to provide a comfortable pressure distribution.

Additionally or alternatively to the connectors, the head-mountable device of the present disclosure includes a facial interface having a flexible (or flexure) portion. The flexure portion of the facial interface may comprise an elastomeric material capable of returning to its original shape after being bent or stretched. In certain cases, the flexure region includes a specific pattern (e.g., a serpentine pattern) that can naturally bend, move, and conform to the user's face.

Additionally, the embodiments described below provide examples of adjustment mechanisms, connectors, and facial interfaces for head-mountable devices that are lighter and more comfortable than conventional head-mountable devices. For example, the head-mountable device may include a display frame having relief cutouts (e.g., lozenge-shaped through holes, cored-out portions, dimples, etc.). The relief cutouts may reduce the weight of the head-mountable device while maintaining the structural integrity of the head-mountable device.

In another example, a head-mounted device includes a stiffener member that allows for a reduced amount of material (and thus weight savings) to be implemented. The stiffener member may be positioned between the display frame and the facial interface. The stiffener member may also be implemented as an additional shot of material during manufacturing. Additionally or alternatively, the stiffener member may be overmolded to reinforce certain areas (e.g., at connection points).

These and other embodiments are discussed below with reference to FIGS. 456 through 468. However, one of ordinary skill in the art will readily recognize that the detailed description provided herein with respect to these drawings is for illustrative purposes only and should not be construed as limiting. Moreover, as used herein, a system, method, article, component, feature, or sub-feature that includes at least one of the first option, the second option, or the third option should be understood to refer to a system, method, article, component, feature, or sub-feature that may include one of each of the listed options (e.g., only one of the first option, only one of the second option, or only one of the third option), multiple of a single listed option (e.g., two or more of the first option), two options simultaneously (e.g., one of the first option and one of the second option), or a combination thereof (e.g., two of the first option and one of the second option).

FIG. 456 illustrates a plan view of a head-mountable device (100) worn on a user's head (13.11-101). The head-mountable device may include a display (13.11-102) (e.g., one or more optical lenses or display screens in front of the user's eyes). The display (13.11-102) may include a display for presenting virtual reality visualizations, augmented reality visualizations, or other suitable visualizations.

The head-mounted device (13.11-100) also includes a facial interface (13.11-104). As used herein, the term “facial interface” refers to a portion of the head-mounted device (13.11-100) that engages the user’s face through direct contact. In particular, the facial interface includes portions of the head-mounted device (13.11-100) that conform to (e.g., compress against) areas of the user’s face. For example, the facial interface may include a flexible (or semi-flexible) facial track that spans the forehead, wraps around the eyes, contacts the zygomatic and maxillary regions of the face, and bridges the nose. The facial interface may also include various components that form a structure, webbing, cover, fabric, or frame of the head-mounted device that is positioned between the display (13.11-102) and the user’s skin. In certain implementations, the facial interface may include a seal (e.g., an optical seal, an environmental seal, a dust seal, an air seal, etc.). It will be appreciated that the term “seal” may include partial seals or blockers in addition to complete seals (e.g., a partial optical seal that blocks some ambient light when the head-mounted device is worn, and a complete optical seal that blocks all ambient light).

Additionally, the head-mountable device (13.11-100) includes connector(s) (13.11-106). As used herein, the term "connector" or "joint" refers to a coupling between the display (13.11-102) and the facial interface (13.11-104). In some examples, the connector allows the facial interface (13.11-104) to be translated or rotated relative to the display (13.11-102) via the connector. In other examples, the connector allows the facial interface (13.11-104) to be translated and rotated relative to the facial interface (13.11-104). For example, the connector(s) (13.11-106) may, when actuated, translate the facial interface (13.11-104) toward or away from the display (13.11-102) (e.g., in a linear manner). In another example, the connector(s) (13.11-106) may, when actuated, rotate the facial interface (13.11-104) up or down (e.g., in an inclined manner) relative to the display (13.11-102). In certain implementations, the connector(s) (13.11-106) movably constrain the facial interface (13.11-104) to the display (13.11-102) at a forehead position, a zygomatic position, or a maxillary position.

In this manner, the connection(s) (13.11-106) can movably constrain the display (13.11-102) relative to the facial interface (13.11-104). As used herein, the term “movably constraining” refers to a type of connection that can dynamically move (e.g., translate or rotate) but still maintain control over the movement or position of certain elements. For example, “movably constraining” means that the connection(s) (13.11-106) can constrain the movement of the display (13.11-102) within two degrees of freedom (e.g., along a horizontal plane and along an additional plane that is non-planar with the horizontal plane) relative to the facial interface (13.11-104).

As used herein, the term “forehead region” refers to the region of the human face between the human eye and the scalp. Additionally, the term “zygomatic region” refers to the region of the human face corresponding to the zygomatic bone structure of the human face. Similarly, the term “maxillary region” refers to the region of the human face corresponding to the maxillary bone structure of the human face. Furthermore, the term “temple region” refers to the region of the human face between each eye and ear on a particular side of the face (e.g., between the cheekbones and the forehead region). It will be appreciated that the aforementioned regions may correspond to specific structures of the head-mounted device (13.11-100). However, such structures of the head-mounted device (13.11-100) are not dependent on the user’s face.

The connector(s) (13.11-106) allow the facial interface (13.11-104) to freely conform to a wide range of facial topographies, thereby allowing the facial interface (13.11-104) to pivot and flex relative to the display (13.11-102). The connector(s) (13.11-106) may also distribute loads evenly across the user's face (e.g., forces exerted from different facial topographies or compression from the strap (13.11-103). The connector(s) (13.11-106) may include one or more joints (e.g., pivot joints, flexible joints, flexure joints, spring joints, etc.) that allow (or actively provide) translation or rotation of the facial interface (13.11-104) relative to the display (13.11-102).

Additionally, the positions of the connector(s) (13.11-106) may be modified or adjusted, as may the number of connections. For example, the positions and/or number of the connector(s) (13.11-106) may be correlated to the amount of force or pressure applied to the user at any one datum (e.g., forehead area, maxillary area, zygomatic area, etc.). As other examples, the positions and/or number of the connector(s) (13.11-106) may correspond to the stiffness (or variations in stiffness) between the connector(s) (13.11-106).

Additionally, the head-mountable device (13.11-100), illustrated in FIG. 456, includes one or more arms (13.11-108, 13.11-110). The arms (13.11-108, 13.11-110) are connected to a display (13.11-102) and extend distally toward the back of the head. The arms (13.11-108, 13.11-110) are configured to secure the display in a position relative to the user's head (13.11-101) (e.g., such that the display (13.11-102) remains in front of the user's eyes). For example, the arms (13.11-108, 13.11-110) extend over the user's ears (13.11-112). In certain examples, the arms (13.11-108, 13.11-110) are positioned over the user's ears (13.11-112) to secure the head-mountable device (13.11-100) to the user's head (13.11-101) through friction between the arms (13.11-108, 13.11-110) and the user's head (13.11-101). For example, the arms (13.11-108, 13.11-110) may apply opposing pressures to the sides of the user's head (13.11-101) to secure the head-mountable device (13.11-100) to the user's head (13.11-101). Optionally, the arms (13.11-108, 13.11-110) may be connected to each other via a strap (13.11-103) (illustrated in dotted lines) that can compress the head-mountable device (13.11-100) against the user's head (13.11-101).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 456) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 456.

Figures 457a and 457b illustrate side and front profile views, respectively, of an example of a head-mountable device (13.11-100). As discussed above, the head-mountable device (13.11-100) includes a display (13.11-102), a facial interface (13.11-104), and connector(s) (13.11-106). In particular, as illustrated in Figures 457a and 457b, the facial interface (13.11-104) may actually wrap around the eye (13.11-201), bridge the nose (13.11-202), span the forehead (13.11-203), and contact the maxillary region (13.11-204) and the zygomatic region (13.11-205).

Additionally, FIG. 457b illustrates locations of connector(s) (13.11-106). In certain examples, the connector(s) (13.11-106) are located in the forehead (13.11-203), the maxillary facial region (13.11-204), and the zygomatic facial region (13.11-205). Other locations of the connector(s) (13.11-106) are contemplated herein. However, at least in these locations, the connector(s) (13.11-106) can provide a dynamic yet stable connection between the display (13.11-102) and the facial interface (13.11-104).

It will be appreciated that the connector(s) (13.11-106) at different locations may be identical, or in certain instances, different. For example, the connector(s) (13.11-106) may include a first joint (e.g., a socket joint, a flexible joint, a molded hinge joint, a butterfly flexure joint, a cam pivot joint, a cross-axis pivot joint, etc.) located at the forehead (13.11-203). Additionally, the connector(s) (13.11-106) may include a second joint that is different from the first joint, such as a pivot joint, an elastomeric spring joint, a flexible joint, a single ball joint, etc. In practice, different arrangements and types of connector(s) (13.11-106) may be implemented to provide specific force profiles, amounts of stiffness, etc.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIGS. 457a and 457b ) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 457a and 457b .

As previously discussed, the head-mountable device (13.11-100) may include connectors at various locations. The forehead location of the connector(s) will now be discussed below.

FIG. 458a illustrates an example of connector(s) (13.11-106) located on the forehead (13.11-203). The connector(s) (13.11-106) may translate and/or rotate the facial interface (13.11-104) relative to the display (13.11-102) via the connector(s) (13.11-106). The connector(s) (13.11-106) may have varying degrees of mobility (e.g., ranging from mechanical to organic), as discussed below. Specifically, FIGS. 458b-458e illustrate several examples of connector(s) (13.11-106), namely connectors (13.11-300 through 13.11-306), respectively.

Figure 458b illustrates a connector (13.11-300). The connector (13.11-300) includes a single degree of freedom. In particular, the connector (13.11-300) may include a pivot connection that rotatably connects the display (13.11-102) to the facial interface (13.11-104). For example, the facial interface (13.11-104) may pivot laterally relative to the display (13.11-102) if the display (13.11-102) includes a pivot point. In these or other examples, the connector (13.11-300) limits the amount of motion (e.g., to predetermined angular thresholds relative to the pivot point).

FIG. 458c illustrates a connector (13.11-302). The connector (13.11-302) includes translation in addition to one degree of freedom. In certain implementations, the connector (13.11-302) includes a cam pivot. The connector (13.11-302) may be rotationally pivoted similarly to the connector (13.11-300). Additionally, the connector (13.11-302) may be slidable laterally so that the pivot point may also move. In this manner, the connector (13.11-302) may slidably and rotatably connect the display (13.11-102) to the facial interface (13.11-104). Due to the greater range of motion, the connector (13.11-302) allows for more fluid motion than the connector (13.11-300).

FIG. 458d illustrates a connector (13.11-304). The connector (13.11-304) includes a cross-axis pivot joint connector (e.g., a butterfly flexure). Accordingly, the connector (13.11-304) includes a cross-axis design that allows each contact point on the face interface (13.11-104) to move independently in a plane (e.g., an x-y plane). The thickness of the cross-axis pivot joint can vary in flexure depending on the thickness of the cross-axis member. For example, increasing the thickness (e.g., cross-sectional area) or decreasing the length of the cross-axis member(s) increases the flexural strength of the cross-axis pivot joint. Conversely, decreasing the thickness or increasing the length of the cross-axis member(s) decreases the flexural strength of the cross-axis pivot joint. For example, a cross-section member with a larger cross-sectional area while maintaining the length of the cross-section member(s) increases the amount of compressive force required to deflect the cross-section member(s). Additionally, the flexural strength can be altered by changing the material type or durometer.

Figure 458e illustrates a connector (13.11-306). The connector (13.11-306) includes a flexure joint connector (e.g., a compliant mechanism capable of storing strain energy in one or more deformable/elastic members). The connector (13.11-306) may include a symmetrical design. Additionally, the connector (13.11-306) may include a predetermined amount of stiffness in one or more directions, and a predetermined amount of flexibility in one or more different directions. The topology or architecture of the flexure joint may be matched to desired stiffness/flexibility characteristics in specific directions to provide mobility and/or support of the facial interface (13.11-104) to the display (13.11-102).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 458A through 458E) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 458A through 458E.

FIG. 459a illustrates connector(s) (13.11-106) positioned in the zygomatic facial region (13.11-205). The connector(s) (13.11-106) may movably attach the facial interface (13.11-104) to the display (13.11-102) in a manner identical or similar to that discussed above. The connector(s) (13.11-106) may include several different connectors. Examples of the connector(s) (13.11-106), namely connectors (13.11-400 through 13.11-414), are discussed below with respect to FIGS. 459b through 459e, respectively.

Figure 459b illustrates a connector (13.11-400). The connector (13.11-400) may include a pivot joint (e.g., a single ball joint). The connector (13.11-400) includes a male portion and a female portion. The male portion is positioned on the display (13.11-102), and the female portion is positioned on the facial interface (13.11-104). When the male and female portions of the connector (13.11-400) are coupled, the facial interface (13.11-104) is movable relative to the display (13.11-102). In particular, the connector (13.11-400) may allow spherical motion between the facial interface (13.11-104) and the display (13.11-102) of about 5 degrees, about 10 degrees, about 25 degrees, about 50 degrees, about 70 degrees, or more.

Figure 459c illustrates a connector (13.11-402). The connector (13.11-402) may include a spring joint connector (e.g., a metal spring, an elastomeric spring, a plastic spring, a composite spring, etc.) positioned at a zygomatic location. The connector (13.11-402) may be translatable and rotatable (e.g., to accommodate cheek or eye movements, or specific facial features of a user). The connector (13.11-402) may be rigidly attached to the display (13.11-102) while being rotatably and translationally connected to the facial interface (13.11-104).

Figures 459d and 459e illustrate connectors (13.11-406, 13.11-408), respectively. Connectors (13.11-406, 13.11-408) include flexible joints having compressible sections (13.11-407). The term “flexible joint” refers to a joint that can be compressed and decompressed. For example, a flexible joint may include reference points or hardstops between which the flexible joint can be compressed. Connector (13.11-406) includes two compressible sections (13.11-407), while connector (13.11-408) includes a single compressible section. The compressible sections (13.11-407) can be positioned between the rigid sections of the connectors (13.11-406, 13.11-408). Additionally, the positioning of the compressible sections (13.11-407) within the connectors (13.11-406, 13.11-408) can provide corresponding movement in a predetermined direction. For example, a connector (13.11-406) having two of the compressible sections (13.11-407) can include movement in a first direction (e.g., compressibility) and movement in a second direction different from the first direction. The connector (13.11-408) includes movement in at least the first direction by a single compressible section.

In one example, the compressible portions (13.11-407) comprise a foam material. The foam material may be bonded (e.g., glued, pasted, melted, etc.) between portions of the connectors (13.11-406, 13.11-408). Additionally or alternatively, the compressible portions (13.11-407) may comprise materials having properties that impart flexibility, ductility, compressibility, deformability, etc. Examples of such materials may include silicones, polymers, elastomers, hydrogels, etc. Additionally, the compressible portions (13.11-407) may comprise a molded material, a printed material, a cast material, etc.

Figures 459f and 459g illustrate cross-sectional views of connectors (13.11-410, 13.11-412), respectively. Connector (13.11-410) comprises a socket connector. Connector (13.11-412) comprises a mini socket connector. Connectors (13.11-410, 13.11-412) are similar to connector (13.11-400), each including a male portion and a female portion. The female portion (i.e., the socket) corresponds to the facial interface (13.11-104), and the male portion (i.e., the pins and balls) corresponds to the display (13.11-102). However, in particular, connectors (13.11-410, 13.11-412) include a pivot center located at a specific location. For example, the connector (13.11-410) includes a pivot center (13.11-411) positioned on the surface of the facial interface (13.11-104). In contrast, the connector (13.11-412) includes a pivot center (13.11-413) that is offset from the surface of the facial interface (13.11-104) (e.g., by about 0.5 mm to about 5 mm, or by about 1.4 mm). In at least some examples, these variations of the pivot center may provide different rotational mobility.

FIG. 459h illustrates a connector (13.11-414). The connector (13.11-414) is identical to the connector (13.11-306) discussed above with reference to FIG. 458e. In practice, the connector (13.11-414) may include a flexure joint that provides compliant mechanism-based mobility between the facial interface (13.11-104) and the display (13.11-102).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 459a through 459h) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 459a through 459h.

As briefly described above, examples of head-mountable devices disclosed herein include a facial interface having one or more flexure portions that conform to a myriad of facial profiles and contours, thereby evenly distributing pressure and providing a comfortable user experience. These flexure portions may, via the connectors described above, allow the facial interface (13.11-104) to more easily translate or rotate relative to the display (13.11-102). According to one or more such examples, FIGS. 460A-460G illustrate exemplary facial interfaces having flexure portions.

FIG. 460a illustrates a perspective view of a head-mountable device (13.11-500) including a display (13.11-102), a facial interface (13.11-502), and connector(s) (13.11-106). The facial interface (13.11-502) includes a flexure portion (13.11-504).

As used herein, the term “flexure portion” refers to a section of a facial interface that is independently movable from other sections of the facial interface. In certain instances, the flexure portion is movable, bendable, flexible, deformable, translatable, rotatable (i.e., twistable), etc., relative to one or more other sections of the facial interface (13.11-104). The flexure portion may include various patterns, relief cutouts, slits, holes, etc., defined by the facial interface (13.11-104) to impart the desired flexibility. In certain implementations, the flexure portion includes a serpentine pattern (e.g., windings, turns, curvatures, folds, etc.). Additionally, the flexure portion may comprise the same material as other non-flexure (e.g., solid) sections of the facial interface (13.11-104). In other examples, the flexure portion comprises a different material than the other non-flexure sections of the facial interface (13.11-104).

As described below with respect to FIGS. 460b to 460g, the flexure portions (13.11-504) may be positioned at various locations (e.g., an upper corner region, a lower corner region, a forehead region, a temple region, etc.). In particular, the various flexure portions will be described positionally with respect to the connectors (13.11-106a to 13.11-106f). The connectors (13.11-106a, 13.11-106b) correspond to forehead connectors for engaging with the forehead of the face. The connectors (13.11-106c, 13.11-106d) correspond to zygomatic connectors for engaging with the zygomatic region of the face. Connectors (13.11-106e, 13.11-106f) correspond to maxillary connectors for interlocking with the maxillary region of the face.

FIG. 460b illustrates a facial interface (13.11-506). The facial interface (13.11-506) has no flexure portion. That is, each section between the connectors (13.11-106a to 106f) comprises a solid section.

In contrast, FIG. 460c illustrates a facial interface (13.11-508) having flexure portions (13.11-510a, 13.11-510b) positioned in the temple region of the face. In practice, the flexure portions (13.11-510a, 13.11-510b) are positioned between the forehead connectors (i.e., connectors (13.11-106a, 13.11-106b)) and the zygomatic connectors (i.e., connectors (13.11-106c, 13.11-106d)), respectively. The flexure portions (13.11-510a, 13.11-510b) may span the entire section of the facial interface (13.11-508) between the forehead connectors and the zygomatic connectors. In other implementations, the flexure portions (13.11-510a, 13.11-510b) may span a partial section of the facial interface (13.11-508) between the forehead connectors and the zygomatic connectors. For example, the flexure portions (13.11-510a, 13.11-510b) may be suspended in a connector support area encompassing a critical distance around one or more of the connectors (13.11-106a to 13.11-106d), thereby leaving a more supportive area beneath and immediately adjacent to the connectors (13.11-106a to 13.11-106d).

In Fig. 460c, solid sections of the facial interface (13.11-508) - without flexure portions - are also present. In particular, the forehead region between the connectors (13.11-106a, 13.11-106b) includes a solid section. Similarly, the lower corner region between the zygomatic connectors and the maxillary connectors is a solid section.

FIG. 460d illustrates a facial interface (13.11-512) having flexure portions (13.11-514a, 13.11-514b) positioned in the temple region and flexure portions (13.11-514c, 13.11-514d) positioned in the lower corner region. In particular, the flexure portions (13.11-514a, 13.11-514b) are similarly positioned between the forehead connectors (i.e., connectors (13.11-106a, 13.11-106b)) and the zygomatic connectors (i.e., connectors (13.11-106c, 13.11-106d)). Additionally, the flexure portions (13.11-514c, 13.11-514d) are positioned between the zygomatic connectors and the maxillary connectors (i.e., connectors (13.11-106e, 13.11-106f)), respectively. FIG. 460d also illustrates a solid section in the forehead region between the connectors (13.11-106a, 13.11-106b).

FIG. 460e illustrates a facial interface (13.11-516) having flexure portions (13.11-518a to 13.11-518e). The flexure portions (13.11-518a, 13.11-518c) are positioned in the temple regions of the face between the forehead connectors (i.e., connectors (13.11-106a, 13.11-106b)) and the zygomatic connectors (i.e., connectors (13.11-106c, 13.11-106d)), respectively. The flexure portion (13.11-518b) is positioned in the forehead region of the face (i.e., between connectors (13.11-106a, 13.11-106b)). The flexure portions (13.11-518d, 13.11-518e) are positioned in the lower corner region between the zygomatic connectors and the maxillary connectors (i.e., connectors (13.11-106e, 13.11-106f)). As further illustrated in FIG. 460e, the only portions of the facial interface (13.11-516) that do not have flexure portions include the regions (and surrounding radii) of the joints or the connectors themselves.

FIG. 460f illustrates a facial interface (13.11-520) having flexure portions positioned in a forehead region and an inferior temple region (as a temple flare). In particular, the facial interface (13.11-520) includes a flexure portion (13.11-522a) positioned in a forehead region of the face between connectors (13.11-106a, 13.11-106b). Additionally, the facial interface (13.11-520) includes flexure portions (13.11-522b, 13.11-522c) positioned between the forehead connectors and the zygomatic connectors, respectively, and adjacent the zygomatic connectors (i.e., connectors (13.11-106c, 13.11-106d)). In FIG. 460f, the solid regions without flexure portions also include portions of the forehead region, portions of the temple region, and all lower corner regions between the zygomatic bone connectors and the maxillary bone connectors.

FIG. 460g illustrates a facial interface (13.11-524) having flexure portions (13.11-526a to 13.11-526e). The flexure portions (13.11-526a, 13.11-526e) are positioned between the forehead connectors and the zygomatic connectors, respectively, and adjacent the zygomatic connectors (i.e., connectors (13.11-106c, 13.11-106d)). The flexure portions (13.11-526b, 13.11-526d) are positioned between the forehead connectors and the zygomatic connectors, respectively, and adjacent the forehead connectors (i.e., connectors (13.11-106a, 13.11-106b)). Additionally, the flexure portion (13.11-526c) is positioned in the forehead area of the face between the connectors (13.11-106a, 13.11-106b). In Fig. 460g, the solid areas without flexure portions include portions of the temple area and all lower corner areas between the zygomatic bone connectors and the maxillary bone connectors.

It will be appreciated that the aforementioned examples of flexure portions can be implemented to provide various degrees (and locations) of flexibility and conformability. In this manner, the head-mounted device of the present disclosure can provide numerous different forms of flexibility as desired.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 460A through 460G) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 460A through 460G.

The head-mountable device of the present disclosure can be manufactured in a myriad of different ways. Some methods or manufacturing processes may offer various advantages (e.g., reduced material consumption, weight savings, manufacturing friendliness, etc.). The following description, with reference to FIGS. 461a through 467, describes manufacturing and/or associated device aspects.

Figures 461a and 461b illustrate an exemplary assembly (13.11-600) of a head-mountable device implementing a dual shot of a material according to one or more examples of the present disclosure. As shown, the assembly (13.11-600) includes the connectors (13.11-106a through 13.11-106f) described above. Additionally, the assembly (13.11-600) includes a facial interface (13.11-602) having flexure portions (13.11-604). The flexure portions (13.11-604) may be identical to or similar to the flexure portions (13.11-510a, 13.11-510b) described above with respect to Figure 460c.

In certain embodiments, the assembly (13.11-600) of FIG. 461a includes only a first shot of material. In some examples, the first shot of material includes an injection molded material. For example, the first shot of material includes a more rigid material, such as at least one of Pebax, TPU, TPE, PP, ABS, etc. In other examples, the first shot of material is less rigid (and more flexible).

Additionally, as illustrated in FIG. 461a, the assembly (13.11-600) may include tooling inserts (13.11-606). The tooling inserts (13.11-606) may be positioned at locations configured to receive a second shot of material. The tooling inserts (13.11-606) may be positioned at various locations along the facial interface (13.11-602). However, in certain implementations, the tooling inserts (13.11-606) are positioned in the forehead region between the connectors (13.11-106a, 13.11-106b) and in the temple regions between the forehead connectors and the zygomatic connectors (i.e., between connectors (13.11-106a, 13.11-106b) and connectors (13.11-106c, 13.11-106d)).

In FIG. 461b, the assembly (13.11-600) includes a second shot of material applied to the tooling inserts (13.11-606). In one or more examples, the second shot of material includes an overmolded flexible material. For example, the second shot of material includes an elastomeric material (e.g., neoprene, EVA, PVC, acrylonitrile butadiene rubber, ethylene propylene, fluoroelastomer, silicone, etc.). Thus, in some examples, the first shot of material and the second shot of material may be different. In these or other examples, an assembly (13.11-600) implementing dual shots of material may provide various advantages, such as strategically positioned supports, improved flexibility, etc.

In alternative examples, more than two shots of the material may be implemented. Additionally, in some alternative examples, only a single shot of the material is implemented. For example, the assembly (13.11-600) may comprise a single lightweight material (e.g., all aluminum).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIGS. 461a and 461b) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 461a and 461b.

Other variations of the combined materials are also contemplated herein. For example, some head-mountable devices of the present disclosure include a display frame of a display (13.11-102), wherein the display frame includes a combination of frame shells forming a box-shaped frame enclosure. According to one or more such examples, FIGS. 462A and 462B illustrate an exemplary display (13.11-700) of a head-mountable device. In particular, FIGS. 462A and 462B illustrate assembled and exploded views, respectively, of the display (13.11-700).

As illustrated, the display (13.11-700) includes a first frame shell (13.11-702) and a second frame shell (13.11-704). The first frame shell (13.11-702) includes a pocket (13.11-706) defined by a surface of the first frame shell (13.11-702). The pocket (13.11-706) may include one or more recesses, cutouts, etc. In certain implementations, the pocket (13.11-706) is defined by tooling surfaces (e.g., for injection molding, casting, etc.). The pocket (13.11-706) may additionally include webbing, such as mold webbing (indicated by dashed lines) that divides or separates different portions of the pocket (13.11-706).

In some examples, the first frame shell (13.11-702) and the second frame shell (13.11-704) comprise different materials (although this is not required). For example, the first frame shell (13.11-702) may comprise a plastic material, and the second frame shell (13.11-704) may comprise a metal material. In this manner, the second frame shell (13.11-704) may be combined with the first frame shell (13.11-702) to increase rigidity or stiffness across the display (13.11-700). In practice, the second frame shell (13.11-704) as a reinforcing member may provide structural support, thereby stabilizing the display frame and increasing resistance to stresses (e.g., torsional stress, compressive stress, tensile stress, etc.).

The first frame shell (13.11-702) and the second frame shell (13.11-704) can be formed or assembled in a number of different ways. In some examples, the first frame shell (13.11-702) and the second frame shell (13.11-704) can be manufactured using molding techniques (e.g., injection molding, casting, etc.). In certain embodiments, the first frame shell (13.11-702) comprises a first shot mold, and the second frame shell (13.11-704) comprises a second shot mold.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIGS. 462a and 462b ) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference to them) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 462a and 462b .

As discussed above, displays (specifically, display frames) may comprise a combination of materials. Additionally or alternatively, the display frames may have one or more relief cutouts. According to one or more such examples, FIGS. 463a and 463b illustrate exemplary displays (13.11-800).

As illustrated, the display (13.11-800) includes relief cutouts (13.11-802) defined by a surface of the display frame. As used herein, the term “relief cutout” refers to a through hole, dimple, slit, slot, core-out, recess, or the like. Additionally, the relief cutout provides weight advantages over conventional head-mountable devices while maintaining the structural integrity (e.g., deflection integrity, stress integrity, etc.) of the display frame.

Here, the relief cutouts (13.11-802) comprise through holes within the display frame. The through holes can be sized and shaped in a myriad of different ways. In some examples, the through holes are rectangular, square, triangular, circular, etc. In other examples, the through holes are lozenge-shaped (e.g., cylindrical, pill-shaped) through holes. The relief cutouts (13.11-802) also comprise a spacing that can be optimized or adjusted (as desired). In practice, the relief cutouts (13.11-802) can be spaced to satisfy (e.g., meet or exceed) a critical force or stress/strain profile of the display (13.11-800). Additionally or alternatively, the relief cutouts (13.11-802) can be spaced to provide a certain amount of flexibility or stiffness. In certain embodiments, relief cutouts (13.11-802) are omitted from certain areas (e.g., connector support areas corresponding to the connector(s) (13.11-106)). Thus, some connector support areas do not have relief cutouts (13.11-802).

Additionally, as illustrated in FIG. 463b, the display (13.11-800) includes a support structure (13.11-804) and an overmolding (13.11-806). The support structure (13.11-804) may be rigid (e.g., of a metallic material). Conversely, the overmolding (13.11-806) may include a plastic material, an elastomeric material, or the like. The support structure (13.11-804) may be positioned at predetermined regions of the display (13.11-800), for example, regions corresponding to the connector(s) (13.11-106) (e.g., for increased rigidity and/or structural integrity according to finite element analysis). For example, the support structure (13.11-804) is positioned directly below the connector(s) (13.11-106) and extends a distance beyond at least one relief cutout. In certain implementations, the support structure (13.11-804) is positioned along the entire display (13.11-800).

In certain embodiments, the support structure (13.11-804) is positioned at an offset distance (13.11-808) from the overmolding (13.11-806). The offset distance (13.11-808) may range from about 0.2 mm to about 4 mm. In certain examples, the offset distance (13.11-808) is about 0.75 mm.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIGS. 463a and 463b ) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 463a and 463b .

The frames of head-mountable devices, and particularly the displays of the present disclosure, can be formed from a variety of materials and with different geometrical variations. Such exemplary display frames can provide various advantages, including reduced weight. According to one or more such examples, FIGS. 464a and 464b illustrate exemplary head-mountable devices (13.11-900a, 13.11-900b) having exemplary displays (13.11-902, 13.11-904), respectively.

In FIG. 464a, a head-mounted device (13.11-900a) includes a display (13.11-902) connected to a facial interface (13.11-104) via connector(s) (13.11-106). In this example, the display (13.11-902) includes a frame comprising a single lightweight material. For example, the display (13.11-902) includes an all-metal frame. In certain implementations, the display (13.11-902) includes stainless steel (e.g., SUS 17-4PH). In other implementations, the display (13.11-902) includes aluminum (e.g., AL 6061). In alternative embodiments, the display (13.11-902) comprises at least one of a composite material (e.g., carbon fiber), a polycarbonate or thermoplastic material (e.g., Lexan), or other suitable material having a higher strength-to-weight ratio (e.g., titanium, magnesium, graphene, ceramic, etc.).

In FIG. 464b, a head-mounted device (13.11-900b) similarly includes a display (13.11-904) connected to a facial interface (13.11-104) via connector(s) (13.11-106). The display (13.11-904) may include one or more materials as just described for the display (13.11-902). However, in particular, the display (13.11-904) includes a frame that includes core-out regions (13.11-906) within the forehead and temple regions of the face. The core-out regions (13.11-906) may reduce the amount of material of the display (13.11-904), thereby reducing the weight of the display (13.11-904). In certain implementations, the core-out regions (13.11-906) correspond to regions of the display (13.11-904) between the connector(s) (13.11-106). However, it will be appreciated that the core-out regions (13.11-906) may be located at additional or alternative locations along the frame of the display (13.11-904), as desired.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIGS. 464a and 464b ) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference to them) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 464a and 464b .

The present disclosure also contemplates stiffener members positioned between a facial interface (13.11-104) and a display (13.11-102). According to one or more such examples, FIGS. 465a and 465b illustrate head-mountable devices (13.11-1000a, 13.11-1000b). In particular, FIG. 465a illustrates, similarly to the foregoing, a head-mountable device (13.11-1000a) including a display (13.11-1002a) (i.e., a display frame) connected to the facial interface (13.11-104) via connector(s) (13.11-106). Additionally, the head-mounted device (13.11-1000a) includes a stiffener member (13.11-1004a) positioned between the display (13.11-1002a) and the facial interface (13.11-104). The stiffener member (13.11-1004a) may include an additional frame, frame, hoop, or support structure. The stiffener member (13.11-1004a) may extend partially along the display (13.11-1002a) (e.g., to the zygomatic bone connector) or, in certain cases, may extend entirely along the display (13.11-1002a) (e.g., to the maxillary bone connector).

In certain implementations, a gap exists between the stiffener member (13.11-1004a) and the display (13.11-1002a). In such cases, the connectors (13.11-106) may bridge the gap between the stiffener member (13.11-1004a) and the display (13.11-1002a).

The display (13.11-1002a) additionally includes core-out areas (13.11-1006). The core-out areas (13.11-1006) may provide weight savings, as desired.

Likewise, FIG. 465b illustrates a head-mountable device (13.11-1000b) including a display (13.11-1002b) connected to a facial interface (13.11-104) via connector(s) (13.11-106), similar to that described above. Additionally, the head-mountable device (13.11-1000b) includes a stiffener member (13.11-1004b) positioned between the display (13.11-1002b) and the facial interface (13.11-104). The stiffener member (13.11-1004b) may include an additional frame, skeleton, hoop, or support structure. The reinforcing member (13.11-1004b) may extend partially along the display (13.11-1002b) (e.g., to the zygomatic bone connector) or, in certain cases, entirely along the display (13.11-1002a) (e.g., to the maxillary bone connector). The display (13.11-1002b) additionally includes core-out regions (13.11-1010) similar to the core-out regions (13.11-1006) described above.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIGS. 465a and 465b) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 465a and 465b.

As described above, the head-mountable devices of the present disclosure may include core-out portions of numerous different configurations. According to one or more such examples, FIGS. 466a through 466c illustrate display frames (13.11-1100a through 13.11-1100c) each having core-out portions (e.g., through holes, partial holes, recesses, etc.). In particular, FIG. 466a illustrates that the display frame (13.11-1100a) includes core-out portions (13.11-1102a through 13.11-1102d) in the forehead and temple regions of the face. FIG. 466b illustrates a display frame (13.11-1100b) including core-out portions (13.11-1102a, 13.11-1102b) (and thus including only core-out areas on the forehead). Additionally, FIG. 466c illustrates a display frame (13.11-1100c) including core-out portions (13.11-1104). The core-out portions (13.11-1104) are defined by one or more rear surfaces oriented toward a facial interface (not shown). Thus, the core-out portions (13.11-1104) are perpendicular to the core-out portions illustrated in FIGS. 466a and 466b.

It will be appreciated that the core-out portions of the display frames (13.11-1100a to 13.11-1100c) may be positioned in various locations and in various configurations or patterns (e.g., to reduce the overall weight of the display frame). The core-out portions may also be configured to maintain the structural stability of the display frame.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 466a through 466c) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 466a through 466c.

FIG. 467 illustrates a display frame (13.11-1200) including an array of holes (13.11-1202) according to one or more examples of the present disclosure. The array of holes (13.11-1202) may reduce the amount of material (and thus the weight) of the display frame (13.11-1200). The array of holes (13.11-1202) may include a hole density such that at least (or at most) a predetermined number of holes are found within a predetermined area of the display frame (13.11-1200). As an alternative to the array of holes (13.11-1202), dimples or non-through holes may similarly be implemented in the display frame (13.11-1200).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 467) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 467.

FIG. 468 illustrates a display frame (13.11-1300) according to one or more examples of the present disclosure. As illustrated, the display frame (13.11-1300) comprises a single-shot plastic portion (13.11-1302). Various different plastics may be implemented. Furthermore, the single-shot plastic portion (13.11-1302) may take on any number of different shapes and forms (although schematically illustrated as a block with various straight and curved edges).

Additionally, the display frame (13.11-1300) may include metal reinforcements (13.11-1304). Examples of the metal reinforcements (13.11-1304) include sheets or pieces of metal (whether molded, shaped, cast, etc.). Additionally, the metal reinforcements (13.11-1304) may be arranged in different ways. For example, the metal reinforcements (13.11-1304) may be arranged in an array that structurally couples or connects them to one another (e.g., via attachment mechanisms (13.11-1308) and fasteners (13.11-1310)). For example, the metal reinforcements (13.11-1304) may be arranged partially around the periphery of the single-shot plastic part (13.11-1302). In other examples, the metal reinforcements may be arranged entirely around the periphery of the single shot plastic part (13.11-1302).

Attachment mechanisms (13.11-1308) may include various pins, latches, hinges, cams, swivels, balls, knuckles, springs, etc. Similarly, fasteners (13.11-1310) may include screws, bolts, pins, press fits, welds, bonds, etc.

In some examples, the display frame (13.11-1300) includes adhesives (not shown) to structurally join the metal stiffeners (13.11-1304) (and associated attachment mechanisms (13.11-1308)) and the single-shot plastic portion (13.11-1302). Examples of adhesives include glue, epoxies, thermal adhesives, tape strips, etc. In alternative examples, the metal stiffeners (13.11-1304) and the single-shot plastic portion (13.11-1302) do not include adhesives between these components. For example, the metal stiffeners (13.11-1304) and the single-shot plastic portion (13.11-1302) may be held together via applied pressure from one or more additional frame layers, fabric, etc.

In some examples, the display frame (13.11-1300) may include additional layers (not shown). For example, the display frame (13.11-1300) may include a final plastic “cover” to provide decoration and/or additional rigidity properties to the display frame (13.11-1300). The additional cover may be attached to the metal stiffeners (13.11-1304) in a manner similar to or identical to that just described between the metal stiffeners (13.11-1304) and the single-shot plastic portion (13.11-1302).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 468) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 468.

FIG. 469a illustrates a plan view of a frame (13.11-1410) of a device seal according to one embodiment. The frame (13.11-1410) may be substantially similar to the frames described herein and may include some or all of their features.

In some examples, the frame (13.11-1410) may include one or more stiffeners. For example, the frame (13.11-1410) may include a top stiffener (13.11-1421) positioned on the upper forehead region of the frame (13.11-1410). The top stiffener (13.11-1421) may be curved or angled to match the curve of the frame (13.11-1410). In some examples, the curve of the top stiffener (13.11-1421) and the top of the frame (13.11-1410) is designed to match the curvature of the user's forehead. In some examples, the curvature of the top stiffener (13.11-1421) and the top of the frame (13.11-1410) is designed to allow for a gap between the user's forehead and the frame (13.11-1410). The top stiffener (13.11-1421) may help maintain a gap between the frame (13.11-1410) and the user's forehead. Thus, the top stiffener (13.11-1421) may provide structural support to the frame (13.11-1410) and may be used to modify the rigidity and/or structural integrity of the frame. In some examples, the forehead region of the frame (13.11-1410) may have multiple top stiffeners, each having different profiles, geometries, and/or material properties that contribute to the characteristics imparted to the frame (13.11-1410).

The top stiffener (13.11-1421) may comprise or be made of any suitable rigid or stiff material capable of maintaining its shape under the large amounts of stress typically encountered in use of the HMD, thereby increasing comfort and predictability for the user. In some examples, the top stiffener (13.11-1421) may undergo elastic deformation. The top stiffener (13.11-1421) may comprise sheet metal, aluminum, steel, carbon fiber, plastic, a combination thereof, or any other suitable material capable of reinforcing the frame (13.11-1410).

The top reinforcement (13.11-1421) may be secured to the frame (13.11-1410) using any suitable attachment method. In some examples, the top reinforcement (13.11-1421) is secured to the frame (13.11-1410) using fastening screws (13.11-1423). In some examples, the fastening screws (13.11-1423) may attach ends of the top reinforcement (13.11-1421) to metal anchors (13.11-1425) of the frame (13.11-1410), which are then connected to posts (13.11-1427) that engage the facial interface of the device seal. In some examples, the top reinforcement (13.11-1421) may be laser welded to the frame (13.11-1410), for example, via a metal anchor (13.11-1425) of the frame (13.11-1410). In some examples, the top reinforcement (13.11-1421) may be bonded to the frame (13.11-1421) using any suitable adhesive.

In some examples, the frame (13.11-1410) may include one or more side stiffeners (13.11-1429) positioned along the side region of the frame (13.11-1410). The side stiffeners (13.11-1429) may be curved or angled to match the curvature of the frame (13.11-1410). In some examples, the curve of the side stiffeners (13.11-1429) and the side of the frame (13.11-1410) is designed to match the curvature of the user's forehead, temples, and/or cheeks. In some examples, the curvature of the side stiffeners (13.11-1429) and the side of the frame (13.11-1410) is designed to allow for a gap between the user's face and the frame (13.11-1410). The side reinforcements (13.11-1429) may help maintain a gap between the frame (13.11-1410) and the user's face. Thus, the side reinforcements (13.11-1429) may provide added comfort and structural support to the frame (13.11-1410).

The side stiffeners (13.11-1429) may comprise or be made of any suitable rigid or stiff material. In some examples, the side stiffeners (13.11-1429) may experience elastic deformation during use. For example, the side stiffeners (13.11-1429) may comprise sheet metal, aluminum, steel, carbon fiber, a polymer, or any other suitable material capable of reinforcing the frame (13.11-1410). The side stiffeners (13.11-1429) may be made of the same material as the top stiffener (13.11-1421) or a different material.

The side stiffeners (13.11-1429) may be secured to the frame (13.11-1410) using any suitable attachment methods or systems. In some examples, the side stiffeners (13.11-1429) are secured to the frame (13.11-1410) using fastening screws (13.11-1423). In some examples, the fastening screws (13.11-1423) may attach ends of the side stiffeners (13.11-1429) to metal anchors (13.11-1425) of the frame (13.11-1410), which are then connected to posts (13.11-1427) that engage the facial interface of the device seal. In some examples, the side reinforcements (13.11-1429) may be laser welded to the frame (13.11-1410), for example, to a metal anchor (13.11-1425) of the frame (13.11-1410). In some examples, the side reinforcements (13.11-1429) may be bonded to the frame (13.11-1421) using any suitable adhesive.

FIG. 469b illustrates a cross-sectional view of a frame (13.11-1410) of a device seal according to one embodiment. As illustrated, a reinforcement (13.11-1421) may be positioned within the housing of the frame (13.11-1410). For example, the frame (13.11-1410) may include an upper portion (13.11-1411) and a lower portion (13.11-1412) that are interlocked to form an interior volume. The upper portion (13.11-1411) and the lower portion (13.11-1412) may be plastic, metal, or any other suitable material for the frame (13.11-1410). The reinforcement (13.11-1421) can be positioned directly on the lower portion (13.11-1412) of the frame (13.11-1410) to directly reinforce and stabilize the frame (13.11-1410). In some examples, the reinforcement (13.11-1421) is held in place by an adhesive (13.11-1433). The adhesive (13.11-1433) can be positioned at multiple locations between the reinforcement (13.11-1421) and the lower portion (13.11-1412). The adhesive can also be positioned between the reinforcement (13.11-1421) and the upper cover (13.11-1411). In this manner, the forces experienced by the lower portion (13.11-1412) and the upper cover (13.11-1411) can be supported by the reinforcement (13.11-1421) through the adhesive (13.11-1433). In some examples, the reinforcement (13.11-1421) is held in place by being sandwiched or pressed between the upper cover (13.11-1411) and the lower portion (13.11-1412) of the frame (13.11-1410).

In some examples, the stiffener (13.11-1421) may include a beveled edge. For example, the edge of the stiffener (13.11-1421) closest to the user's face may be beveled so as to run substantially perpendicular or flat against the user's face. The beveled edge may prevent the stiff or sharp edge of the stiffener from being directed toward the user, thereby enhancing long-lasting user comfort. The beveled edge of the stiffener (13.11-1421) may also help secure the stiffener (13.11-1421) in place and prevent movement within the interior volume of the frame (13.11-1410).

FIG. 469c illustrates a bottom view of a frame (13.11-1410) of a device seal according to an exemplary embodiment. The frame (13.11-1410) may include one or more stiffeners along side portions of the frame (13.11-1410). For example, the frame (13.11-1410) may include two stiffeners (13.11-1429) along each side of the frame (13.11-1410). In some examples, the frame (13.11-1410) may include a nose stiffener (13.11-1431) positioned along the nose region (13.11-1415).

The nose stiffener (13.11-1431) may be substantially similar to the stiffeners described herein, such as the top stiffener (13.11-1421) and the side stiffeners (13.11-1429), and may include some or all of their features. In some examples, the nose region (13.11-1415) of the frame (13.11-1410) may have multiple nose stiffeners.

The nose reinforcement (13.11-1431) may be curved or angled to match the curve of the nose region (13.11-1415). In some examples, the curves of the nose reinforcement (13.11-1431) and the nose region (13.11-1415) are designed to match the curvature of the user's nose. In some examples, the curvatures of the nose reinforcement (13.11-1431) and the nose region (13.11-1415) are designed to allow a gap between the user's nose and the frame (13.11-1410). The nose reinforcement (13.11-1431) may help maintain the gap between the frame (13.11-1410) and the user's nose. Accordingly, the nose stiffener (13.11-1431) can provide structural support to the frame (13.11-1410). The nose stiffener (13.11-1431) can be manufactured from the same or different material as the top stiffener (13.11-1421) or the side stiffeners (13.11-1429). The nose stiffener (13.11-1431) can be attached to the nose region (13.11-1415) of the frame (13.11-1410) by at least one of laser welding, fastening screws, an adhesive, or any other suitable joining method.

FIG. 469d illustrates a plan view of a frame (13.11-1410) including reinforcements (13.11-1421, 13.11-1429) to improve structural stability and rigidity of the frame (13.11-1410). In some examples, an adhesive (13.11-1433) may be disposed on the top surfaces of the reinforcements (13.11-1421, 13.11-1429) to secure the reinforcements to the top cover of the frame (as shown in FIG. 469b).

In some examples, the frame (13.11-1410) may include a hard stop component (13.11-1435). The hard stop component (13.11-1435) may be an adhesive or any other suitable bonding agent to firmly secure the ends of the reinforcements and the anchor (13.11-1425) in place on the frame (13.11-1410). Thus, when a force is applied to the post (13.11-1427), the hard stop component (13.11-1435) may prevent the anchor (13.11-1425) from moving relative to the frame (13.11-1410) and the reinforcements (13.11-1421, 13.11-1429). Thus, the hard stop component (13.11-1435) acts as a deflection limiter. If the hard stop component (13.11-1435) is an adhesive, it may be the same or a different adhesive than the adhesives applied on the reinforcements (13.11-1433).

As previously described, many different types of connectors between the facial interface and the display frame are contemplated herein. The following description of FIGS. 469 through 474 corresponds to an exemplary connector that includes a floating connection between the facial interface and the display frame. As a floating connection, the connector may be attached to either the display frame or the facial interface, but not both, as will be described in more detail below.

FIG. 469 illustrates a perspective view of an exemplary connector (13.11-1400) according to one or more examples of the present disclosure. The connector (13.11-1400) may include a floating connection. Accordingly, the connector (13.11-1400) may include a bumper, a compliant stop, or a contact mechanism positioned between the display frame (13.11-1402) and the facial interface (13.11-1404). The display frame (13.11-1402) and the facial interface (13.11-1404) are the same as or similar to the display frames and facial interfaces described above, respectively. However, as specifically illustrated in FIG. 469, the connector (13.11-1400) is attached only to the display frame (13.11-1402) (i.e., not to the facial interface (13.11-1404)). This forms a floating connection in which the connector (13.11-1400) can contact or abut the facial interface (13.11-1404), but can also move relative to the facial interface (13.11-1404). For example, the connector (13.11-1400) can translate or rotate along the surface of the facial interface (13.11-1404). In certain examples, rounded edges or smooth surfaces of the connector (13.11-1400) can facilitate such movement or range of motion. As another example, the connector (13.11-1400) can be compressed relative to the facial interface (13.11-1404) (or have greater surface area contact therewith), such as when wearing a head-mounted device. In another example, the connector (13.11-1400) may be retracted or biased away from the facial interface (13.11-1404). Thus, the connector (13.11-1400) may provide desired flexibility and conformability (e.g., for improved comfort when wearing or adjusting a head-mounted device), but may also provide desired stiffness, support, and load-bearing capabilities.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 469) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in other drawings and described with reference to them) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 469.

FIG. 470A illustrates a side view of an exemplary connector positioned between a display frame and a facial interface, according to one or more embodiments of the present disclosure. As depicted, the connector (13.11-1400) may include one or more posts. In certain implementations, the connector (13.11-1400) includes a post (13.11-1502a). In other implementations, the connector (13.11-1400) includes a post (13.11-1502b).

In these or other examples, the post may include elements having rigid and/or flexible portions. In some examples, the post may include a flexible outer portion and a rigid inner portion (e.g., a sheath or sheet metal overmolded with a more flexible cushioning material). The post may include a contact mechanism for contacting the facial interface (13.11-1404). Additionally or alternatively, the post may include an arm, a bumper, a mechanical stop, a damper, a shock absorber, a spring, an actuator, a crumple element, a mechanical fuse, a break-away element, and the like. In at least some examples, the post may include surfaces, joints, and the like that include a radius (or curvature) that allows movement, deflection, and/or energy absorption.

As illustrated in FIG. 470a, the post (13.11-1502a) is longer than the post (13.11-1502b). It will be appreciated that the length of the posts (13.11-1502a, 13.11-1502b) may determine the gap or distance between the connector (13.11-1400) and the facial interface (13.11-1404). For example, the post (13.11-1502a) is positioned at a distance (13.11-1506) from the contact surface (13.11-1508) of the facial interface (13.11-1404). Similarly, the post (13.11-1502b) is positioned at a distance (13.11-1504) from the contact surface (13.11-1508) of the facial interface (13.11-1404).

In addition to the length of the posts (13.11-1502a, 13.11-1502b), the angle of the posts (13.11-1502a, 13.11-1502b) relative to the display frame (13.11-1402) may also affect the distances (13.11-1504, 13.11-1506) relative to the facial interface (13.11-1404). The post (13.11-1502a) is positioned at an angle (13.11-1510) relative to the display frame (13.11-1402). The post (13.11-1502b) is positioned at an angle (13.11-1512) relative to the display frame (13.11-1402). These angles may be preset, adjustable, or operable. In certain examples, the angles (13.11-1510, 13.11-1512) may be dynamically modified (e.g., decreased) in response to the post making contact with the contact surface (13.11-1508) and deflecting upward. The angles (13.11-1510, 13.11-1512) may also correspond to an angle of incidence or contact with the contact surface (13.11-1508). Similarly, the angles (13.11-1510, 13.11-1512) may affect the point of contact with the contact surface (13.11-1508). The point of contact and the angle of incidence (as well as the distances (13.11-1504, 13.11-1506)) may include adjustable factors to adjust comfort, fit, adjustability, load responsiveness, etc., as desired.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 470a) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in other drawings and described with reference to them) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 470a.

With respect to the facial interface (13.11-1404), it will be appreciated that the facial interface (13.11-1404) may include many different variations. In some examples, the facial interface (13.11-1404) may include thicker regions and/or thinner regions at predetermined locations along the facial interface (13.11-1404), may be fixed or removable, and may be removably attached by any number of systems, such as hook and loop, magnets, fasteners, and the like. According to one or more such examples, FIG. 470b illustrates a cross-sectional view of the facial interface (15-1502). Figure 15c illustrates a cross-sectional view of a forehead region (13.11-15-1503) of a facial interface (13.11-15-1502), while Figure 15d illustrates a cross-sectional view of a cheek region (13.11-15-1505) of the facial interface (13.11-15-1502). The facial interface (13.11-15-1502) may be substantially similar to the facial interfaces described herein and may include some or all of their features.

In some examples, the facial interface (13.11-15-1502) includes a compressible portion that may include a central region (13.11-15-1509) and an extension region (13.11-15-1507). In some examples, the central region (13.15-1509) and the extension region (13.11-15-1507) may be a single, integral component (e.g., a foam piece). In some examples, the central region (13.11-15-1509) may be a separate material (e.g., two different types of foam pieces) separate from the extension region (13.11-15-1507). The central region (13.11-15-1509) may be shaped, sized, and positioned to correspond to the base of the frame. In other words, the central region (13.11-15-1509) may be directly adjacent to the base plastic. In contrast, the extended region (13.11-15-1507) may extend beyond the footprint of the base, such that the extended region (13.11-15-1507) overhangs the base.

In some examples, the extension region (13.11-15-1507) may extend along the entire facial interface (13.11-15-1502). The compressible portion (or the combination of the extension region (13.11-15-1507) and the central region (13.11-15-1509)) may have a variable cross-section or may be asymmetrical about the base. For example, the extension region (13.11-15-1507) may taper as it moves from the forehead region (13.11-15-1503) to the cheek region (13.11-15-1505). In other words, the extension region (13.11-15-1507) may decrease in size as it approaches the cheek region (13.11-15-1505), such that it becomes wider at the forehead and less wide at the cheek. For example, in the forehead region (13.11-15-1503) illustrated in FIG. 470c, the extension region (13.11-15-1507) may overhang the base by approximately 3.4 mm or more. In contrast, in the cheek region (13.11-15-1505) illustrated in FIG. 470c, the extension region (13.11-15-1507) may overhang the base by approximately 3.4 mm or less. Thus, the extension region (13.11-15-1507) may extend beyond the center region (13.11-15-1509) and the base plastic, or may overhang both above and below, as oriented in the drawings. The variable asymmetric cross-section of the extension region (13.11-15-1507) may be intentionally varied to correspond to user facial features, thereby increasing the comfort and fit of the head-mounted device.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIGS. 470b-470d) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 470b-470d.

As mentioned above, the connector of the present disclosure may include multiple parts having different material properties. According to one or more such examples, FIG. 471 illustrates a cross-sectional view of a connector (13.11-1400) including a connector frame (13.11-1600) relative to a post (13.11-1602). The cross-sectional view of FIG. 471 is taken along the cross-sectional cutaway shown in FIG. 470a.

As illustrated in FIG. 471, the connector frame (13.11-1600) may include a rigid or semi-rigid core extending at least partially through the post (13.11-1602). The connector frame (13.11-1600) may provide the post (13.11-1602) with a desired rigidity or shape. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 471, the connector frame (13.11-1600) includes a portion attached to the display frame (1402) and a bend adjacent the post (13.11-1602) extending away from the display frame (13.11-1402). In certain examples, the post (13.11-1602) is overmolded onto, bonded to, or fastened to the connector frame (13.11-1600). In other examples, the post (13.11-1602) is formed integrally with the connector frame (13.11-1600). In at least one example, the connector frame (13.11-1600) comprises sheet metal, and the peripheral portion of the post (13.11-1602) may comprise an elastomeric material, rubber, silicone, a composite, plastic, or any combination thereof.

As further illustrated below in connection with FIG. 472, the connector frame (13.11-1600) may include one or more elements for attaching the connector (13.11-1400) to the display frame (13.11-1402).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 471 ) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 471 .

FIG. 472 illustrates a plan view of an exemplary connector according to one or more examples of the present disclosure. As depicted, the connector (13.11-1400) may include the connector frame (13.11-1600) discussed above. In particular, the connector frame (1600) may include one or more through holes (13.11-1700). Through the through holes (13.11-1700), the connector frame (13.11-1600) may be fastened to a display frame (13.11-1402) (having corresponding holes alignable with the connector frame (13.11-1600). In this manner, the connector frame (13.11-1600) may be secured to the display frame (13.11-1402).

In some examples, the connector (13.11-1400) may be attached to a stiffener (13.11-1604). The stiffener (13.11-1604) may provide certain material property advantages to the connector (13.11-1400). For example, the stiffener (13.11-1604) may be used to adjust the spring force, bias strength, flexibility, etc. of the connector frame (13.11-1600). Additionally or alternatively, the spring force, bias strength, flexibility, etc. of the connector (13.11-1400) as a whole may be adjusted by pre-biasing the connector frame (13.11-1600) according to a predetermined force-displacement curve. In other examples, the spring force, bias strength, flexibility, etc. for the connector (13.11-1400) can be adjusted via overmolded material for the post (13.11-1602) or by adding a spring member, torsion bar, or actuator to the connector (13.11-1400).

Additionally or alternatively, the stiffener (13.11-1604) may provide a fiducial surface (e.g., a flat mating surface) for the connector frame (1600). In certain examples, a fixture bias may be implemented to properly position, orient, and/or attach the connector frame (13.11-1600) to the stiffener (13.11-1604). Additionally or alternatively to the stiffener being used as a fiducial, an adhesive may be used to float it to a desired location and solidify into a fiducial-like element relative to the connector frame (13.11-1600).

Additionally, in certain examples, the connector frame (13.11-1600) (and the connector (13.11-1400) as a whole) may be removed from the display frame (13.11-1402). For example, fasteners (not shown) may be removed from the through-holes (13.11-1700) to allow removal of the connector (13.11-1400) from the display frame (13.11-1402). In some examples, the fasteners and through-holes (13.11-1700) may be user-accessible and/or manufacturer-accessible to replace the connector (13.11-1400) with a connector having a post having a different angle relative to the display frame and/or a post of a different size (e.g., a shorter or longer post as shown in FIG. 470a). Therefore, in some examples, the connector (13.11-1400) is modular.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 472) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in other drawings and described with reference to them) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 472. For example, the connector (13.11-1606) illustrated in the background of FIG. 471 may include one or more other connectors described above in this disclosure.

It will be appreciated that one or more of the connectors of the present disclosure may be modified to exhibit desired material properties (e.g., increased strength, elasticity, flexibility, etc.). According to one or more such examples, FIG. 473 illustrates a side perspective view of the base of a connector attached to a display frame. In particular, FIG. 473 illustrates a gusset (13.11-1800) formed on a surface of a connector frame (13.11-1600). The gusset (13.11-1800) may include features on the connector (13.11-1400) that help reinforce the connector attachment to the display frame (13.11-1402) (e.g., via the stiffener (13.11-1604)). In some examples, the gusset (13.11-1800) comprises a plate that is bonded, joined, welded, or molded onto the connector frame (13.11-1600). In certain examples, the gusset (1800) comprises a reinforcing joint. In at least one example, the gusset (13.11-1800) is shaped to distribute loads without concentrating them around the fasteners (13.11-1802) on the connector frame (13.11-1600).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 473) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 473.

Figure 474 illustrates another cross-sectional view of a connector (13.11-1400) according to one or more examples of the present disclosure. As shown in Figure 474, the connector frame (13.11-1600) may be discontinuous at certain regions of the connector frame (1600). For example, the connector frame (13.11-1600) may include one or more reliefs (13.11-1900) (e.g., cut-outs for added flexibility, reduced weight, or less material consumption). In these or other examples, the post (13.11-1602) may include corresponding portions positioned inside the reliefs (13.11-1900) that are solid plastic, elastomer, or other material.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations depicted in FIG. 474) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions depicted in other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations depicted in other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions depicted in FIG. 474. The following discussion discusses exemplary adhesives in a head-mountable device. Indeed, a head-mountable device of the present disclosure may include a variety of different adhesives that perform various functions and/or impart certain properties.

In particular, FIGS. 475 and 476 illustrate perspective and plan views, respectively, of exemplary adhesives in an exemplary head-mountable device. The term adhesive may refer to one or more types of glue, epoxy adhesive, polyurethane adhesive, polyimide adhesive, paste adhesive, liquid adhesive, film adhesive, pellet adhesive, strip adhesive, hot melt, thermosetting adhesive, pressure-sensitive adhesive, contact adhesive, structural adhesive, non-structural adhesive, semi-structural adhesive, tape, bond, weld, and the like.

Specifically, as illustrated, the display frame (13.11-1402) is shown with a cover or housing portion removed for illustrative purposes (e.g., to expose various adhesives that may be included within the display frame (13.11-1402). In some examples, the display frame (13.11-1402) includes a connector (13.11-2000) as described above. In at least certain implementations, the connector (13.11-2000) may comprise a different material than the stiffener (13.11-1604). For example, in one example, the connector (13.11-2000) may comprise 13.11-316 stainless steel, and the stiffener (13.11-1604) may comprise 17-4 steel. In such an example, laser welding of dissimilar materials may result in oxidation, such as oxidation of chromium in 13.11-316 stainless steel. In certain examples, the adhesives (13.11-2002) may help prevent oxidation (or at least reduce the amount of oxidation) of one or both of the connector (2000) or the stiffener (13.11-1604). Thus, the adhesives (13.11-2002) may be positioned on the surface of the stiffener (13.11-1604) at an end portion adjacent to the connector (13.11-2000). In at least one example, the adhesives (13.11-2002) are positioned at least partially around the fasteners that attach the stiffener (13.11-1604) to the display frame (13.11-1402). In these or other examples, the adhesives (13.11-2002) may interact with the surfaces of the reinforcement (13.11-1604) and/or the connector (13.11-2000) to inhibit oxidation (e.g., when under thermal load from a laser welding application). Other decorative benefits may also be imparted by the adhesives (13.11-2002), as desired.

The display frame (13.11-1402) may also include adhesives (13.11-2004). The adhesives (13.11-2004) are strips of adhesive that can be positioned longitudinally along the upper surface of the stiffener (13.11-1604). In particular, the adhesives (13.11-2004) can bond an outer portion or shell (removed for internal illustrative purposes) of the display frame to the stiffener (13.11-1604). This bonding - by utilizing the stiffness of the stiffener (13.11-1604) - can impart increased stiffness to the display frame (13.11-1402) as a whole (and in particular, can impart greater stiffness to a less rigid or less rigid outer shell).

Additionally, the display frame (13.11-1402) may include adhesives (13.11-2006). The adhesives (13.11-2006) may include adhesives positioned beneath the stiffener (13.11-1604). The adhesives (13.11-2006) may specifically bond the stiffener (13.11-1604) to the lower housing or shell of the display frame (13.11-1402).

In some examples, the display frame (13.11-1402) may include adhesives (13.11-2008). The adhesives (13.11-2008) may include discontinuous glue strips between the top shell and the bottom shell of the display frame (13.11-1402). In at least one example, the gaps between the adhesives (13.11-2008) may provide thermal advantages. For example, the adhesives (13.11-2008) may reduce or eliminate deformation of the display frame (13.11-1402) caused by different coefficients of thermal expansion in response to higher heat and/or humidity environments.

In one or more examples, the display frame (13.11-1402) may include an adhesive (13.11-2010). The adhesive (13.11-2010) may include a gap filler or hard stop glue to limit movement of the connector (13.11-2000). For example, the adhesive (13.11-2010) may restrict movement of the connector (2000) toward the optical system such that the adhesive (13.11-2010) acts as a mechanical stop. In these or other examples, the adhesive (13.11-2010) may include an adhesive having a higher compressive stiffness than other adhesives. For example, the adhesive (13.11-2010) may be load-bearing (e.g., to at least partially transfer an applied load to the connector (13.11-2000).

In addition to or alternatively to the adhesives discussed above, it will be appreciated that other examples are also contemplated. For example, in some implementations, the display frame (13.11-1402) may include a near net molding (which may eliminate one or more of the adhesives discussed above).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 475 and 476) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 475 and 476. The following discussion discusses exemplary adhesives in a head mountable device. Indeed, a head mountable device of the present disclosure may include a variety of different adhesives that perform various functions and/or impart certain properties.

In addition to forming the frame in the manner described herein, it will be noted that forming the frame and its structural components using machined components, carbon fiber components, 3D modeled components, fixed molded components, and the like is also contemplated.

13.12: Facial interlocking structures

The following disclosure relates to connectors for head-mounted devices used in AR/VR experiences. More specifically, the present embodiments relate to connectors positioned in the maxillary region (and nearby zygomatic regions) of the face when the head-mounted device is worn. These connectors can be dynamically adjusted to different heads, as well as dynamically adjusted in real time in response to force events. The connectors can also include various different types of connectors, as described below.

In one example, a head-mounted device includes a connector between a display and a facial interface. In certain implementations, the connector between the display and the facial interface has a stop (e.g., a hard stop). The connector allows free movement (or multiple degrees of freedom) of the facial interface while still maintaining extreme restraint. Because the facial interface is free to react to the user's face, pressure can be more evenly distributed on the user's face. This improved load distribution across the user's face can create a pleasant and enjoyable AR/VR experience for the user.

Conventional head-mountable devices do not include connections with stops. In contrast, the head-mountable device of the present disclosure includes connections with stops. The stops can stabilize the HMD and internal components (and, in some cases, protect them from excessive force distribution). The stops can also improve HMD robustness by preventing damage to sensitive components and efficiently transferring force loads through the stops (e.g., to force dissipation elements, force spreader elements, or predetermined facial features), thereby improving user comfort.

In one example, a head-mounted device of the present disclosure includes a facial interface having a display and a connector positioned in the maxillary facial region. The connector may include two degrees of freedom and may be a pin-and-bowl connection.

In another example, the connector may include a foam stop bonded to the facial interface. In certain implementations, the foam stop is also bonded to the display. For example, the foam stop may be pre-mounted so that it remains in a "home" (e.g., unbiased or biased) position until the head-mounted device is worn.

In another example, the connector may include a slidable post that can slide relative to the facial interface or display as desired.

Accordingly, the devices and systems described herein can provide facial feature adjustments and connections that can increase user customization, reduce facial pressure, and improve the distribution of force loads on a head-mounted device, thereby increasing comfort.

These and other embodiments are discussed below with reference to FIGS. 477-484b. However, one of ordinary skill in the art will readily recognize that the detailed description provided herein with respect to such drawings is for illustrative purposes only and should not be construed as limiting. Moreover, as used herein, a system, method, article, component, feature, or sub-feature that includes at least one of the first option, the second option, or the third option should be understood to refer to a system, method, article, component, feature, or sub-feature that can include one of each of the listed options (e.g., only one of the first option, only one of the second option, or only one of the third option), multiple of a single listed option (e.g., two or more of the first option), two options simultaneously (e.g., one of the first option and one of the second option), or a combination thereof (e.g., two of the first option and one of the second option).

FIG. 477 illustrates a plan view profile of a head-mounted device (13.12-100) worn on a user's head (13.12-101). The head-mounted device (13.12-100) may include a display (13.12-102) (e.g., one or more optical lenses or display screens in front of the user's eyes). The display (13.12-102) may include a display for presenting augmented reality visualizations, virtual reality visualizations, or other suitable visualizations.

The head-mounted device (13.12-100) also includes a facial interface (13.12-104). As used herein, the term “facial interface” refers to a portion of the head-mounted device (13.12-100) that engages with the user’s face through direct contact. In particular, the facial engagement portion includes portions of the head-mounted device (13.12-100) that conform to (e.g., press against) areas of the user’s face. The facial interface may include a flexible (or semi-flexible) facial track that spans the forehead, wraps around the eyes, contacts the zygomatic and maxillary regions of the face, and bridges the nose. Additionally, the facial interface may include various components that form a structure, webbing, cover, fabric, or frame of the head-mounted device that is positioned between the display (13.12-102) and the user’s skin. In certain implementations, the facial interface may include a seal (e.g., an optical seal, an environmental seal, a dust seal, an air seal, etc.). It will be appreciated that the term “seal” may include partial seals or blockers in addition to complete seals (e.g., a partial optical seal that blocks some ambient light when the head-mounted device is worn, and a complete optical seal that blocks all ambient light).

The head-mountable device (13.12-100) further includes connector(s) (13.12-103). As used herein, the term "connector" refers to a connection or touch point between the display (13.12-102) and the facial interface (13.12-104). For example, the connector may movably bind the facial interface (13.12-104) to the display (13.12-102). In certain implementations, the connector includes a joint that physically connects the display (13.12-102) and the facial interface (13.12-104). In these or other implementations, the connector includes a floating joint or mechanical stop that allows the facial interface (13.12-104) and the display (13.12-102) to contact each other (e.g., at rest, after a predetermined amount of deflection, etc.).

For example, the connector(s) (13.12-103) may allow the facial interface (13.12-104) to translate within one plane (e.g., side-to-side, up-down). Additionally or alternatively, the connector(s) (13.12-103) may allow the facial interface (13.12-104) to translate within another plane (e.g., depth-wise) relative to the display (13.12-102). For example, the connector(s) (13.12-103) may allow the facial interface (13.12-104) to move between a first state (e.g., a home state when the head-mountable device (13.12-100) is not worn by a user) and a second state (e.g., a home state when the head-mountable device (13.12-100) is worn by a user). The connector(s) (13.12-103) help to enable the facial interface (13.12-104) to flexibly accommodate the user's facial profile by deflecting according to the user's facial features. When the head-mountable device (13.12-100) is removed from the user's head (13.12-101), the connector(s) (13.12-103) can return to the first state, thereby causing the facial interface (13.12-104) to move correspondingly.

The connector(s) (13.12-103) may include one or more components (e.g., pins, bowls, slidable posts, forms, mechanical stops, dampers, spring connections, etc.) that can allow (or actively provide) translation within one or more planes (e.g., in the maxillary region of the face). The connector(s) (13.12-103) may include protruding engagement portions (e.g., pins, slidable posts) and recessed engagement portions (e.g., receptacles, cups, slidable post-tracks). The protruding engagement portions and the recessed engagement portions may mate to form a floating connection (e.g., a receptacle, touch point, mechanical stop, etc. that restrains the post from moving in predetermined directions or beyond predetermined distances or depths).

Additionally, as illustrated in FIG. 477, the head-mountable device (13.12-100) may include one or more arms (13.12-108, 13.12-110). The arms (13.12-108, 13.12-110) are connected to the display (13.12-102) and extend distally toward the back of the head. The arms (13.12-108, 13.12-110) are configured to secure the display (13.12-102) in a position relative to the user's head (13.12-101) (e.g., such that the display remains in front of the user's eyes). For example, the arms (13.12-108, 13.12-110) extend over the user's ears (13.12-106). In certain examples, the arms (13.12-108, 13.12-110) are positioned over the user's ears (13.12-106) to secure the head-mountable device (13.12-100) to the user's head (13.12-101) through friction between the arms (13.12-108, 13.12-110). Optionally, the arms (13.12-108, 13.12-110) may be connected to each other via a strap (13.12-112) (illustrated in dashed lines) that can compress the head-mountable device (13.12-100) against the user's head (13.12-101).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 477) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 477.

Figures 478a and 478b illustrate side profile and front profile views, respectively, of an example of a head-mountable device (13.12-100). As discussed above, the head-mountable device (13.12-100) includes a display (13.12-102), a facial interface (13.12-104), and connector(s) (13.12-103). In particular, as illustrated in FIGS. 478a and 478b, the facial interface (13.12-104) may actually wrap around the eyes (13.12-206), bridge the nose (13.12-208), span the forehead region (13.12-203), contact the zygomatic facial region (13.12-202), and contact the maxillary facial region (13.12-204).

Additionally, the connector(s) (13.12-103) may be positioned along the maxillary facial region (13.12-204) and may be directly (e.g., with a direct connection) or indirectly (e.g., with a floating connection) connected to the facial interface (13.12-104) and the display (13.12-102). The connector(s) (13.12-103) may similarly be positioned along the maxillary facial region (13.12-202) and/or the forehead region (13.12-203). In at least some examples, the connector(s) (13.12-103) are spatially configured to provide a particular force profile when worn and/or during a force event that applies a force load to the display (13.12-102).

Additionally, below, the present disclosure further describes in more detail how the connector(s) (13.12-103) may be configured. For example, the connector(s) (13.12-103) may include pivot connectors, floating connectors, foam connectors, stop connectors, or other connection types (e.g., sliding connectors, rigid connectors) - including combinations thereof (such as hybrid elastomeric and mechanical sliders).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIGS. 478a and 478b ) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 478a and 478b .

The connector(s) (13.12-103) can provide a stable, flexible interface between the facial interface (13.12-104) and the display (13.12-102). Additionally or alternatively, the connector(s) (13.12-103) include a travel (e.g., a possible displacement). The connector(s) (13.12-103) can also provide a reference point or hard stop that limits the travel of the display (13.12-102) to a particular separation distance (e.g., a maximum displacement) relative to the facial interface (13.12-104). These connector(s) (13.12-103) may also increase the movement of the facial interface (13.12-104) in the maxillofacial region (13.12-204) in a manner that allows the facial interface (13.12-104) to freely interact with (e.g., conform to) the user's face without again applying undue pressure to the user's face.

According to one or more such examples of the present disclosure, FIG. 479 illustrates an example of a head-mountable device (13.12-100) comprising a display (13.12-102), a facial interface (13.12-104), and connector(s) (13.12-103) (i.e., connectors (13.12-303a through 13.12-303f)). The connector(s) (13.12-103) (although they may be located at different locations) may be positioned particularly in the maxillary facial region (13.12-204) to distribute pressure applied on the user's face. For example, when wearing a head-mounted device (13.12-100), elastic forces applied by a strap (13.12-112) (not shown) can be distributed in a comfortable manner from the display (13.12-102) to the facial interface (13.12-104) via connectors (13.12-303a to 13.12-303f). In particular, connectors (13.12-103a, 13.12-103b) located in the maxillary facial region (13.12-204) can conform to the user's face (e.g., by bending, pivoting, rotating, etc.) to evenly distribute the weight of the head-mounted device (13.12-100) over the maxillary facial region (13.12-204), thereby helping to provide increased comfort to the user.

As illustrated in FIG. 479, the connectors (13.12-303a, 13.12-303b) in the maxillary facial region (13.12-204) include a pivot connection. The pivot connection may include one or more different connections that allow pivotal action relative to the anchored portion. Thus, the pivot connection may include a ball-and-socket joint, a hinge joint, a condyloid joint, an atlantoaxial joint, a radioulnar joint, serial manipulators, and the like.

In some implementations, the anchored portion of the pivot connection for the connectors (13.12-303a, 13.12-303b) is positioned on the display (13.12-102). Thus, the facial interface (13.12-104) can move or pivot relative to the display (13.12-102) (e.g., for a comfortable and conformal fit on a user's face). However, in other implementations, the anchored portion of the pivot connection for the connectors (13.12-303a, 13.12-303b) is positioned on the facial interface (13.12-104).

The pivot connection for the connectors (13.12-303a, 13.12-303b) may include a range of movement limited by the amount of possible deflection or linear distance movement. In some cases, the pivot connection includes a range of movement of about 2 mm to about 20 mm. In certain embodiments, the pivot connection includes a range of movement of about 6 mm. It will be appreciated that the pivot connection may also include a stop (e.g., a portion of a socket joint) that restricts the movement.

In at least some examples, the head-mounted device (13.12-100) implements additional connectors to modify the pressure profile to reduce or avoid "hot-spot loading" that leads to rapid pressure against the user's face. For example, the head-mounted device (13.12-100) includes connectors (13.12-303e, 13.12-303f) located in the zygomatic facial region (13.12-202) to at least partially eliminate the applied force distributed through connectors (13.12-303a, 13.12-303b) in the maxillary facial region (13.12-204). In some implementations, the connectors (13.12-303e, 13.12-303f) include the same type of connection as the connectors (13.12-303a, 13.12-303b). In other implementations, the connectors (13.12-303e, 13.12-303f) include a different type of connection than the connectors (13.12-303a, 13.12-303b). For example, the connectors (13.12-303e, 13.12-303f) may include a floating foam joint or a plate spring joint, and the connectors (13.12-303a, 13.12-303b) may include a pivot connection.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations depicted in FIG. 479) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions depicted in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations depicted in and described with reference to the other drawings) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions depicted in FIG. 479.

As mentioned above, the head-mountable device of the present disclosure may implement a pin-bowl connection between the display (13.12-102) and the facial interface (13.12-104). According to one or more such examples, FIG. 480A illustrates an example of a head-mountable device (13.12-100) including a display (13.12-102), a facial interface (13.12-104), and connector(s) (13.12-103) (i.e., connectors (13.12-402)). FIGS. 480B and 480C illustrate frontal and side profile views, respectively, of the connectors (13.12-402) positioned in the maxillary facial region (13.12-204).

As illustrated, the connectors (13.12-402) include pin-bowl connections. In particular, the connectors (13.12-402) include a bowl (13.12-404) and a pin (13.12-405). The bowl (13.12-404) includes a receptacle defined within the display (13.12-102) configured to receive a pin (13.12-405) attached to the facial interface (13.12-104). In certain implementations, the bowl (13.12-404) is sized and shaped to receive a portion of the pin (13.12-405) (e.g., the entire pin (13.12-405), a end portion of the pin (13.12-405), or a predetermined depth of the pin (13.12-405)).

In these or other examples, the bowl (13.12-404) includes a stop (13.12-410) (e.g., an axial dead stop) coupled to the display (13.12-102). The stop (13.12-410) can control the penetration depth of the pin (13.12-405) into the bowl (13.12-404). Specifically, the stop (13.12-410) allows a maximum displacement or penetration of the pin (13.12-405) in the axial direction (13.12-412). When the pin (13.12-405) contacts the stop (13.12-410), the pin (13.12-405) is stopped and cannot advance any further in the axial direction (13.12-412) - in this respect, the facial interface (13.12-104) and the display (13.12-102) are positioned at a predetermined distance from each other (e.g., a minimum separation distance).

The stop (13.12-410) can also control other movements of the pin (13.12-405) within the bowl (13.12-404). In particular, the stop (13.12-410) can limit or restrict the translational movement of the pin (13.12-405) in directions perpendicular to the axial direction (13.12-412).

In certain implementations, the connectors (13.12-402) include two degrees of freedom. As illustrated in FIG. 480b, the first degree of freedom includes a translational degree of freedom within a first plane (e.g., defined by the first axis (13.12-406) and the second axis (13.12-408)). The second degree of freedom includes depth-based motion in the axial direction (13.12-412), as illustrated in FIG. 480c. The combination of the first and second degrees of freedom allows the facial interface (13.12-104) to conform to a user's face while also providing stiffness and stability where appropriate.

In some examples, the connector (13.12-402) can move along the first degree of freedom (i.e., along the first axis (13.12-406)) when the pin (13.12-405) is positioned at various different depths along the axial direction (13.12-412). For example, the connectors (13.12-402) can move along the first axis (13.12-406) even when the pin (13.12-405) is fully recessed (i.e., when the pin (13.12-405) is stationary). In this manner, the connectors (13.12-402) can move in response to various forces, such as at least one of an applied load or a shear force. Nonetheless, this movement of the connectors (13.12-402) may be restrained by the pins (13.12-405) retained within the bowl (13.12-404).

The pin (13.12-405) may include various components and/or materials. In one example, the pin (13.12-405) includes a contact portion (13.12-418). The contact portion (13.12-418) may be rigid and rigid. In other examples, the contact portion (13.12-418) is flexible or compressible. In some examples, the contact portion (13.12-418) includes a material such as a foam, an elastomer, a gel, silicone, a metal, or a thermoplastic.

The pin (13.12-405) may also include a variety of different shapes and sizes. In some examples, the pin (13.12-405) is conical. In some cases, the conical shape may allow for greater freedom of motion due to greater separation distances between the display (13.12-102) and the facial interface (13.12-104). That is, as the pin (13.12-405) is further compressed into the bowl (13.12-404), the conical shape of the pin (13.12-405) fills more and more of the volume of the bowl (13.12-404), resulting in little or no motion for the pin (13.12-405). However, other shapes are contemplated herein. For example, the pin (13.12-405) may be shaped to resemble a square, rectangular, cylindrical, oval, triangular, or other suitable shape.

Additionally, the connectors (13.12-402) may include one or more mechanisms (not shown) for retaining the pin (13.12-405) within the bowl (13.12-404). For example, the tip of the pin (13.12-405) may be sized larger than the opening of the bowl (13.12-404). In another example, the pin (13.12-405) and/or the bowl (13.12-404) may be sized and shaped such that the pin (13.12-405) cannot exit the bowl (13.12-404). For example, the pin (13.12-405) and/or the bowl (13.12-404) may be sized larger than the amount of pin displacement between positional states. In another example, the bowl (13.12-404) may include a socket-shaped structure that holds a pin (13.12-405).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 480A through 480C) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 480A through 480C.

In one example, the connectors of the present disclosure are pre-loaded (e.g., via springs, elastic materials, etc.) to return to a predetermined position or state after being moved. According to one or more such examples, FIGS. 481A and 481B each illustrate states (or positions) of the connectors (13.12-402) described above. In particular, FIG. 481A illustrates a first state (13.12-500) of the connectors (13.12-402) in which the pin (13.12-405) is stationary (i.e., dropped to the bottom) within the bowl (13.12-404). When in the first state (13.12-500), the display (13.12-102) and the facial interface (13.12-104) are positioned at a predetermined separation distance (e.g., a minimum separation distance). In the first state (13.12-500), further movement of the pin (13.12-405) into the bowl (13.12-404) is not permitted.

In some examples, the first state (13.12-500) includes a home state. The home state refers to the position to which the connectors (13.12-402) return after being deflected. In particular, the home state is the unperturbed position of the connectors (13.12-402).

However, in other examples, the first state (13.12-500) includes a deflection state. The deflection state refers to a position that the connectors (13.12-402) can achieve in response to deflection (e.g., when wearing a head-mounted device or during a force event).

FIG. 481b illustrates a second state (13.12-502) of the connectors (13.12-402) in which the pin (13.12-405) is only partially positioned within the bowl (13.12-404). In certain cases, the pin (13.12-405) is fully extended from the bowl (13.12-404). When in the second state (13.12-502), the display (13.12-102) and the facial interface (13.12-104) are movable (closer or farther apart) relative to each other. In the second state (13.12-502), further movement of the pin (13.12-405) within the bowl (13.12-404) is permitted.

Similar to the first state (13.12-500), the second state (13.12-502) may include a home state. In other implementations, the second state (13.12-502) includes a bias state.

In at least some examples, the fabric (13.12-504) illustrated in FIGS. 481a and 481b can be stretched or tensioned to accommodate the first state (13.12-500) and the second state (13.12-502) just described. The fabric (13.12-504) can include an adjustable outer shell that flexes in response to movement of the display (13.12-102) and the facial interface (13.12-104). Thus, as the connector (13.12-402) moves into and out of the first state (13.12-500) and the second state (13.12-502), the fabric (13.12-504) can be correspondingly adjusted (e.g., stretched, tightened, loosened, wrinkled, folded, etc.).

In some examples, the fabric (13.12-504) illustrated in FIGS. 481A and 481B may be configured to bias the connectors of the present disclosure. For example, the fabric (13.12-504) may be stretched or tensioned to bias the connectors (13.12-402) into a particular home state or biased state. In at least some examples, the induced biasing of the connectors (13.12-402) (provided by tension from the fabric (13.12-504)) may enable a wide variety of connector architectures, various motions, etc.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIGS. 481a and 481b ) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference to them) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 481a and 481b .

As described above, the connectors of the present disclosure may include a variety of different connectors, including form connectors positioned in the maxillary facial region. According to one or more such examples, FIG. 482a illustrates another example of a head-mounted device (13.12-100) comprising a display (13.12-102), a facial interface (13.12-104), and connector(s) (13.12-103) (i.e., connectors (13.12-602)).

In these or other examples, the connectors (13.12-602) comprise foam connectors. Specifically, the connectors (13.12-602) comprise a foam portion (13.12-604) attached to the facial interface (13.12-104) and a base (13.12-606) attached to the display (13.12-102). The base (13.12-606) is sized and shaped to accommodate the foam portion (13.12-604). In certain embodiments, the foam portion (13.12-604) is permanently attached to the base (13.12-606) via an attachment portion (13.12-608). The attachment portion (13.12-608) may comprise glue, bond, or other types of adhesives. Additionally or alternatively, the attachment (13.12-608) includes a fastener such as a bolt, screw, etc.

In at least one example, the connectors (13.12-602) include a compressible portion (13.12-610), as illustrated in FIG. 482b. The compressible portion (13.12-610) may also include foam or other compressible material. In certain implementations, the compressible portion (13.12-610) may include a predefined thickness (e.g., about 2 mm, about 3 mm, about 10 mm, etc.) that affects a corresponding amount of displacement or compression.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIGS. 482a and 482b ) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 482a and 482b .

As previously described, the connectors of the present disclosure may be moved between states or positions. Similarly, the form connectors may be moved between states or positions. According to one or more such examples, FIGS. 483a and 483b illustrate positional states of the connectors (13.12-602).

A first state (13.12-700) of the connector (13.12-602) is illustrated in FIG. 483a. In the first state (13.12-700), the compressible portion (13.12-610) is not compressed and has a first thickness. A second state (13.12-702) of the connector (13.12-602) is illustrated in FIG. 483b. Specifically, in the second state (13.12-702), the compressible portion (13.12-610) is compressed (e.g., the thickness is reduced from the first thickness) and has a second thickness that is thinner than the first thickness. The compressible portion (13.12-610) in the second state (13.12-702) need not be completely compressed. In practice, the compressible portion (13.12-610) may be partially or fully compressed, as the case may be (e.g., when wearing a head-mounted device or during a force event).

It will be appreciated that the first state (13.12-700) and the second state (13.12-702) may be home states and bias states, respectively. However, in certain implementations, the first state (13.12-700) and the second state (13.12-702) may be configured conversely (i.e., bias states and home states, respectively).

In at least some examples, the fabric (13.12-504) described above can be correspondingly moved and flexed to accommodate the first state (13.12-700) and the second state (13.12-702) for the connectors (13.12-602). Alternatively, the fabric (13.12-504) can be attached to non-deflecting portions (e.g., excluding the compressible portion (13.12-610)) so that the fabric (13.12-504) does not need to be flexed or moved.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIGS. 483a and 483b ) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference to them) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 483a and 483b .

Additionally, as discussed above, the connectors of the present disclosure may include sliding posts that slide relative to the display (13.12-102) or the facial interface (13.12-104). Such sliding connectors may provide an improved range of motion (e.g., lateral motion in the maxillary region) while still maintaining comfortable stability and rigidity. According to one or more such examples, FIGS. 484a and 484b illustrate connectors (13.12-802a, 13.12-802b) positioned in the maxillary region of the facial interface (13.12-104).

As illustrated in FIG. 484a, a connector (13.12-802a) is attached to a facial interface (13.12-104) and slidably engages a display (13.12-102). In particular, the connector (13.12-802a) includes a slidable post having a protruding engagement portion (13.12-801). The protruding engagement portion (13.12-801) interfaces with a recessed engagement portion (13.12-804) positioned within the display (13.12-102). The recessed engagement portion (13.12-804) may include a slidable post track (e.g., a slide mechanism, a track, a guide, a groove, a recess, or a raceway) defined by one or more surfaces of the display (13.12-102). The recessed engagement portion (13.12-804) can guide the range of motion of the connector (13.12-802a) along the direction (13.12-808). In this manner, the connector (13.12-802a) allows the facial interface (13.12-104) to comfortably conform to or move with the user's face in a stable manner.

Alternatively, as illustrated in FIG. 484b, a connector (13.12-802b) is attached to the display (13.12-102) and slidably engages the facial interface (13.12-104). The connector (13.12-802b) is identical to the connector (13.12-802a) except that it is configured in a different positional relationship. In particular, the connector (13.12-802b) includes a slidable post having a protruding engagement portion (13.12-801). The protruding engagement portion (13.12-801) interfaces with a recessed engagement portion (13.12-804) positioned within the facial interface (13.12-104). The protruding interlocking portion (13.12-801) can move along the direction (13.12-808) within the facial interface (13.12-104).

According to some examples, the mechanical slider examples illustrated in FIGS. 484a and 484b can be implemented using a variety of different materials. For example, at least one of the protruding engagement portion (13.12-801) or the recessed engagement portion (13.12-804) can be an elastomeric material, a metallic material, a plastic material, a composite material, or the like.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIGS. 484a and 484b ) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 484a and 484b .

Numerous different types of connectors are contemplated herein. For example, the connector(s) (13.12-106) of the present disclosure may include a piston-based mechanism. According to one or more such examples, FIGS. 485A-485F illustrate a head-mountable device (13.12-900) having a maxillary connector (13.12-902) and a zygomatic connector (13.12-904). The maxillary connector (13.12-902) and the zygomatic connector (13.12-904) movably connect the facial interface (13.12-104) and the display (13.12-102) as similarly described above.

However, as illustrated, the maxillary connector (13.12-902) comprises a piston connection, and the zygomatic connector (13.12-904) comprises a pivot connection. The maxillary connector (13.12-902) can move inward and outward in response to the application and release of compressive force in the maxillary region of the face. As the maxillary connector (13.12-902) moves, the zygomatic connector (13.12-904) moves correspondingly (e.g., pivots).

FIG. 485b illustrates a maxillary connector (13.12-902) comprising a cap (13.12-906), a plunger (13.12-908), a compression spring (13.12-910), and a housing (13.12-912). The cap (13.12-906) holds the components of the maxillary connector (13.12-902) in place. The plunger (13.12-908) moves in and out of the housing (13.12-912) against the resistance provided by the compression spring (13.12-910). The plunger (13.12-908) is also a stop, wherein the compression of the plunger (13.12-908) is mechanically stopped by the body of the plunger (13.12-908) contacting the bottom of the housing (13.12-912).

Figure 485c illustrates the maxillary connector (13.12-902) in a nominal (e.g., uncompressed) position. Figure 485d illustrates the maxillary connector (13.12-902) in a compressed position.

Figures 485e and 485f illustrate the positional relationship of the maxillary connector (13.12-902) with respect to the zygomatic connector (13.12-904) at depth positions (13.12-914, 13.12-918) of the maxillary connector (13.12-902). The maxillary connector (13.12-902) is positioned perpendicularly to the zygomatic connector (13.12-904). In particular, the maxillary connector (13.12-902) is positioned perpendicularly to the zygomatic connector (13.12-904) at a central (i.e., middle) position, i.e., depth position (13.12-916). By aligning the piston direction of the maxillary connector (13.12-902) to be perpendicular to the depth position (13.12-916), the amount of horizontal displacement can be minimized or reduced. Additionally, the risk of the maxillary connector (13.12-902) becoming entangled due to horizontal displacement is also minimized or reduced.

Specifically, the displacement distance (13.12-920) in FIG. 485f corresponds to the piston alignment with the depth position (13.12-916). Additionally, the displacement distance (13.12-922) corresponds to an alternative piston alignment (i.e., with the depth position (13.12-914)). In comparison, the displacement distance (13.12-922) is significantly greater than the displacement distance (13.12-920). In certain implementations, the displacement distance (13.12-920) is (for example) about 0.2 mm, and the displacement distance (13.12-922) is (for example, for a 0 to 15 degree rotation of the zygomatic connector (13.12-904) and a radial distance of about 24 mm) is about 0.8 mm. Numerous different positional relationships of the maxillary connector (13.12-902) to the zygomatic connector (13.12-904) are contemplated herein.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 485a through 485f) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 485a through 485f.

FIG. 486 illustrates a cutaway view of an exemplary connector (13.12-1000) according to one or more examples of the present disclosure. As depicted, the connector (13.12-1000) includes a spring element (13.12-1002). The spring element (13.12-1002) may bias internal portions of the connector (13.12-1000) (e.g., to allow for greater or lesser movement or compression of the connector (13.12-1000).

In addition to or alternatively to the spring element (13.12-1002) (or other suitable internal biasing components), the connector (13.12-1000) may include external biasing component(s). For example, a fabric (13.12-1004) forming an outer surface of the connector (13.12-1000) may also bias the connector (13.12-1000). In practice, the fabric (13.12-1004) may be stretched over or otherwise positioned on the connector (13.12-1000) to bias the internal components of the connector (13.12-1000). In these or other examples, the fabric (13.12-1004) may include silicone, an extensible fabric (e.g., spandex, polyester, etc.), or other suitable materials.

It will be appreciated that the connector (13.12-1000) may be implemented in a variety of ways. In some examples, the connector (13.12-1000) includes a floating connection that does not integrally secure the display (13.12-102) and the facial interface (13.12-104). Rather, the connector (13.12-1000) may make contact with (and compress against) the display (13.12-102) or the facial interface (13.12-104).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 486) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 486.

As discussed above, the connectors of the present disclosure may comprise a variety of different materials. According to one or more examples of the present disclosure, FIG. 487 illustrates an exemplary connector (13.12-1100) having an elastomeric portion (13.12-1102) adjacent a display (13.12-102) and a facial interface (13.12-104). In some examples, the elastomeric portion (13.12-1102) may comprise a predetermined amount of thickness (e.g., based on a force-displacement profile). Additionally, in some examples, the elastomeric portion (13.12-1102) may vary in thickness (e.g., in a tapered manner). In these or other examples, the elastomeric portion (13.12-1102) may include several different types of elastomeric materials, such as cis-polyisoprene (natural rubber), cis-polybutadiene (butadiene rubber), styrene-butadiene rubber, and ethylene-propylene monomers. Additionally or alternatively, the elastomeric portion (13.12-1102) may include a hybrid elastomeric material (e.g., partially elastomeric and partially inelastic).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 487) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 487.

Figure 488 illustrates another exemplary connector (13.12-1200) according to one or more examples of the present disclosure. As illustrated, the connector (13.12-1200) includes a ball joint (13.12-1202) and a plate spring (13.12-1204). In this manner, the connector (13.12-1200) may allow at least some pivoting or torsion about the ball joint (13.12-1202). Additionally, the connector (13.12-1200) may allow for tensioned (and tunable) depth adjustment via the plate spring (13.12-1204). In practice, the leaf spring (13.12-1204) may include a variety of different lengths, thicknesses, etc. to provide the desired rigidity (or flexibility) of the connection between the display (13.12-102) and the facial interface (13.12-104). As with other connectors, the leaf spring (13.12-1204) may also be formed from a variety of materials, such as metal, plastic, or composite materials.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 488) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 488.

13.13: Coordination Mechanism

The following disclosure relates to adjustment mechanisms for head-mounted devices (e.g., for AR/VR experiences). More specifically, the present embodiments relate to adjustment mechanisms for head-mounted devices for changing the angle and/or distance of the head-mounted device relative to a user's head (or eyes). Such adjustment mechanisms include depth (e.g., translational) adjustments and/or angular (e.g., rotational) adjustments.

In one example, a head-mounted device includes a connection between a display and a facial interface. The connection allows the display to be translated or rotated relative to the facial interface. The translational or rotational movements allow the head-mounted device to achieve positions and combinations of positions that would otherwise be unattainable.

Conventional head-mounted devices do not include connections between the display and the facial interface that allow for translational or rotational movements. Therefore, conventional head-mounted devices do not allow the movement necessary to adjust depth for interpupillary distance or angle adjustments to optimize viewing. Consequently, conventional head-mounted devices cannot accommodate different facial profiles, viewing preferences, visual abilities, and the like.

In contrast, the head-mountable device of the present disclosure provides connections that allow translational or rotational motion of the facial interface. Such a head-mountable device has many advantages over conventional head-mountable devices. A head-mountable device having connections that allow movement of the display relative to a user's face allows the user to adjust the depth and angle of the display screen as needed to accommodate their personal preferences or requirements. Additionally, a head-mountable display having connections allows motion of the display relative to the faces of different users, thereby enhancing the shareability of the head-mountable device over conventional HMDs.

As disclosed herein, controlling the movement (e.g., linear translation or angular tilt) of a head-mounted display involves user-friendly and simple operational controls (e.g., levers, buttons, dials, rockers, sliders, toggles, etc.) that are easy to operate and intuitive. Some examples of such devices are discussed below.

In one example, a head-mounted device includes a display, a strap connected to the display (e.g., a display frame), a facial interface customizable to a user's facial profile, and a connector. The connector may be between the display and the facial interface such that the display is translatable and/or rotatable relative to the facial interface via the connector.

In another example, a head-mounted device includes a display, a strap connected to the display (e.g., a display frame), a facial interface customizable to the user's facial profile, and an actuator. The actuator may movably constrain the display relative to the facial interface.

In another example, a head-mounted device includes a display, a facial interface customizable to a user's facial profile, and angular and linear adjustment connections between the display and the facial interface.

Accordingly, the devices and systems described herein provide angular and linear adjustments for the display of a head-mounted device in a user-friendly manner, creating an enhanced and more customizable user experience.

These and other embodiments are discussed below with reference to FIGS. 489 through 514b. However, one of ordinary skill in the art will readily recognize that the detailed description provided herein with respect to such drawings is for illustrative purposes only and should not be construed as limiting. Moreover, as used herein, a system, method, article, component, feature, or sub-feature that includes at least one of the first option, the second option, or the third option should be understood to refer to a system, method, article, component, feature, or sub-feature that may include one of each of the listed options (e.g., only one of the first option, only one of the second option, or only one of the third option), multiple of a single listed option (e.g., two or more of the first option), two options simultaneously (e.g., one of the first option and one of the second option), or a combination thereof (e.g., two of the first option and one of the second option).

FIG. 489 illustrates a plan view profile of a head-mountable device (13.13-100) worn on a user's head (13.13-101). While the present systems and methods are described in the context of a head-mountable device (13.13-100), the systems and methods may be used with any wearable device, or any device or system that can be physically attached to a user's body, but are particularly directed to electronic devices worn on a user's head. The head-mountable device (13.13-100) may include a display (13.13-102) (e.g., one or more optical lenses or display screens in front of the user's eyes). The display (13.13-102) may include a display for presenting augmented reality visualizations, virtual reality visualizations, or other suitable visualizations. The display (13.13-102) may also include a display frame (13.13-105) that houses optical components of the display (13.13-102). Thus, when reference is made to the display (13.3-102) herein, it will be appreciated that the display frame (13.3-105) may be implemented as part of certain aspects or functionality of the display (13.3-102). For example, the connection(s) (13.3-106) (described further below) may connect the facial interface (13.3-104) to at least one of the display (13.3-102) (e.g., optical elements of the display (13.3-102)) or structural elements of the display (13.3-102) (e.g., the display frame (13.3-105)).

The head-mounted device (13.13-100) also includes a facial interface (13.13-104) and connection(s) (13.13-106) between the display (13.13-102) (e.g., the display frame (13.13-105)) and the facial interface (13.13-104). As used herein, the term “facial interface” refers to a portion of the head-mounted device (13.13-100) that engages the user’s face through direct contact. In particular, the facial interface includes portions of the head-mounted device (13.13-100) that conform to (e.g., compress against) areas of the user’s face. The facial interface may include a flexible (or semi-flexible) facial track that extends over the forehead, wraps around the eyes, contacts the zygomatic and maxillary regions of the face, and bridges the nose. Additionally, the facial interface may include various components forming the structure, webbing, cover, fabric, or frame of the head-mounted device disposed between the display (13.13-102) and the user's skin. In certain implementations, the facial interface may include a seal (e.g., an optical seal, an environmental seal, a dust seal, an air seal, etc.). It will be appreciated that the term "seal" may include partial seals or blockers in addition to complete seals (e.g., a partial optical seal that blocks some ambient light when the head-mounted device is worn, and a complete optical seal that blocks all ambient light).

Additionally, the term "connection" refers to a joint between a display (13.13-102) (e.g., a display frame (13.13-105)) and a facial interface (13.13-104). In some examples, the connection allows the display (13.13-102) to translate or rotate relative to the facial interface (13.13-104). In other examples, the connection allows the display (13.13-102) to both translate and rotate relative to the facial interface (13.13-104). For example, the connection(s) (13.13-106) may, when adjusted, slide (e.g., translate) the display (13.13-102) toward or away from the facial interface (13.13-104) (e.g., in a linear manner). In another example, the connector(s) (13.13-106) may, when adjusted, rotate the display (13.13-102) upwards or downwards (e.g., in an inclined manner) relative to the facial interface (13.13-104). Thus, the connector(s) may be slidably connected to the display (13.13-102) or may be rotatably connected to the facial interface (13.13-104).

In this manner, the connection(s) (13.13-106) can movably constrain the display (13.13-102) relative to the facial interface (13.13-104). As used herein, the term “movably constrain” or “movably constraining” refers to a type of connection that can dynamically move (e.g., translate or rotate) but still maintain control over the movement or position of a particular element. For example, “movably constrain” means that the connection(s) (13.13-106) can constrain the movement of the display (13.13-102) within two degrees of freedom (e.g., along a horizontal plane and along an additional plane that is non-planar with the horizontal plane) relative to the facial interface (13.13-104).

The connection(s) (13.13-106) may include one or more components (e.g., actuators, sliders, gears, levers, mechanical advantage devices, posts, mechanical stops, dampers, etc.) that may allow (or actively provide) translation or rotation of the display (13.13-102) relative to the facial interface (13.13-104). The connection(s) (13.13-106) may have an adjustable resolution, which may be continuous or discontinuous and transition between states (e.g., between a first display position and a second display position). The connection(s) (13.13-106) may include a manual actuator control or an automatic actuator control operable from a single interface position (or multiple interface positions).

In certain implementations, the connection(s) (13.13-106) are positioned between an inner surface and an outer surface of the head-mountable device (13.13-100). As used herein, an "outer surface" refers to an outer surface of the head-mountable device (13.13-100) that faces outward toward the surrounding environment. In contrast, as used herein, an "inner surface" refers to an outer surface of the head-mountable device (13.13-100) that is oriented toward (or in contact with) a human face or skin.

Additionally, the connection (13.13-106) may include various different adjusting mechanisms, members, or moving mechanisms or movable connectors (e.g., bearings/bushings, dovetail slides, scissor mechanisms, sarrus linkages, gears, movable arms, etc.), cables (e.g., tension cables), actuators (e.g., mechanical, electromechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic, piezoelectric, etc.), and locking mechanisms (toggles, latches, ratchets, clamps, friction brakes, tooth brakes, hydraulic brakes, pneumatic bladders, non-reversible mechanisms, etc.), and other components. The positions of the connection (13.13-106) may be modified or tuned, as may the number of connection portions. For example, the location and/or number of the connection(s) (13.13-106) may be correlated to the amount of force or pressure applied to the user at any one reference point (e.g., forehead region, maxillary region, zygomatic region, etc.). In other cases, the location and/or number of the connection(s) (13.13-106) may correspond to the stiffness (or stiffness changes) between the connection(s) (13.13-106).

As used herein, the term "forehead region" refers to the region of the human face between the eyes and the scalp. Additionally, the term "zygomatic region" refers to the region of the human face corresponding to the zygomatic bone structure. Similarly, the term "maxillary region" refers to the region of the human face corresponding to the maxillary bone structure.

Additionally, the head-mountable device (13.13-100), illustrated in FIG. 489, includes one or more arms (13.13-108, 13.13-110). The arms (13.13-108, 13.13-110) are connected to a display (13.13-102) and extend distally toward the back of the head. The arms (13.13-108, 13.13-110) are configured to secure the display (13.13-102) in a position relative to the user's head (13.13-101) (e.g., such that the display (13.13-102) remains in front of the user's eyes). For example, the arms (13.13-108, 13.13-110) extend over the user's ears (13.13-112). In certain examples, the arms (13.13-108, 13.13-110) are positioned over the user's ears (13.13-112) to secure the head-mountable device (13.13-100) to the user's head (13.13-101) through friction between the arms (13.13-108, 13.13-110) and the user's head (13.13-101). For example, the arms (13.13-108, 13.13-110) may apply opposing pressures to the sides of the user's head (13.13-101) to secure the head-mountable device (13.13-100) to the user's head (13.13-101). Optionally, the arms (13.13-108, 13.13-110) may be connected to each other via a strap (13.13-103) (illustrated in dashed lines) that can compress the head-mounted device (13.13-100) about the user's head (13.13-101). In certain examples, the strap (13.13-103) is connected to at least the frame of the display (13.13-102) or the facial interface (13.13-104).

In certain examples, the arms (13.13-108, 13.13-110) are connected to the display (13.13-102) via a pivot joint (13.13-114) (via the display frame (13.13-105)). The pivot joint (13.13-114) may be external or internal to the arms (13.13-108, 13.13-110) and/or the display frame (13.13-105). In these or other examples, the pivot joint (13.13-114) may allow the display frame (13.13-105) to rotate about the pivot joint (13.13-114) independently of the arms (13.13-108, 13.13-110). For this purpose, the pivot joint (13.13-114) may include a stop hinge, a friction hinge, a manual hinge, a fully lock-out hinge, etc.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 489) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 489.

Figures 490a and 490b illustrate side profile and front profile views, respectively, of an example of a head-mountable device (13.13-100). As discussed above, the head-mountable device (13.13-100) includes a display (13.13-102), a facial interface (13.13-104), and connection(s) (13.13-106). In particular, as illustrated in Figures 490a and 490b, the facial interface (13.13-104) may actually wrap around the eyes (13.13-201), bridge the nose (13.13-202), span the forehead (13.13-203), and contact the zygomatic and maxillary regions (13.13-205) of the face.

As further illustrated in FIGS. 490A and 490B, the head-mounted device (13.13-100) includes sensors (13.13-204) that can be attached to (or embedded within) the facial interface (13.13-104). As used herein, the term "sensor" refers to one or more different sensing devices, such as a camera or imaging device, a temperature device, an oxygen device, a motion device, a brain activity device, a sweat activity device, a respiratory activity device, a muscle contraction device, and the like. Some specific examples of sensors include a safety sensor, an electrocardiogram sensor, an EKG sensor, a heart rate variability sensor, a blood pressure pulse sensor, an SpO2 sensor, a compact pressure sensor, an electromyogram sensor, a core body temperature sensor, a galvanic skin sensor, an accelerometer, a gyroscope, a magnetometer, an inclinometer, a barometer, an infrared sensor, a global positioning system sensor, and the like.

Further below, the present disclosure further details how the connecting portion(s) (13.13-106) may be positioned within a head-mountable device (13.13-100) as adjustment mechanisms. Additionally, subsequent portions of the present disclosure provide additional details regarding user interactions for controlling or operating the adjustment mechanisms.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIGS. 490A and 490B ) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 490A and 490B .

The location and positioning of the connector(s) (13.13-106) can provide a stable, yet flexible, adjustable interface between the facial interface (13.13-104) and the display (13.13-102). According to one or more examples of the present disclosure, FIGS. 491A-491D illustrate multiple locations where the connector(s) (13.13-106) can be positioned between the display (13.13-102) and the facial interface (13.13-104). While FIGS. 491A-491D illustrate specific locations, it will be appreciated that the locations of the connector(s) (13.13-106) can be modified within the scope of the present disclosure.

In one example, FIG. 491a illustrates that the connector(s) (13.13-106) include a single adjustment mechanism positioned on the user's forehead (13.13-203). The connector(s) (13.13-106) may be configured to provide a linear or angular connection between the display (13.13-102) and the facial interface (13.13-104). In certain implementations, the connector(s) (13.13-106) only provides angular (tilt) adjustment by pivoting the display (13.13-102) relative to the facial interface (13.13-104).

In at least some cases, a single-point system, such as that illustrated in FIG. 491a, may provide the simplest and most direct means of adjustment. For example, the connection(s) (13.13-106) of FIG. 491a may avoid potential angular misalignment or racking issues of multi-point systems. As another example, the connection(s) (13.13-106) of FIG. 491a may enable one-handed user adjustment of a head-mounted device (13.13-100).

FIG. 491b illustrates another example in which the connector(s) (13.13-106) include two adjustment mechanisms positioned oppositely between the facial interface (13.13-104) and the display (13.13-102). Specifically, the connector(s) (13.13-106) of FIG. 491b includes a first adjustment mechanism on the left (e.g., near the user's eye areas) and a second adjustment mechanism on the right. Similarly, in another example, the connector(s) (13.13-106) may be positioned near the zygomatic or maxillary regions (13.13-205) of the face. The two connectors may provide at least two points of angular or linear adjustment of the display (13.13-102) relative to the facial interface (13.13-104). For example, both of the connection portions (13.13-106) of FIG. 491b may be linearly adjustable together to provide depth adjustment, or may be angularly adjustable together to provide vertical (up/down) tilt adjustment. In another example, one of the connection portions (13.13-106) may extend outward (to provide left/right or horizontal tilt adjustment) and the other of the connection portions (13.13-106) may be pushed inward.

FIG. 491c illustrates that the connection(s) (13.13-106) comprises three adjustment mechanisms - one near the forehead (13.13-203) and two at the lower corner regions in the zygomatic or maxillary regions. Additionally, FIG. 491d illustrates that the connection(s) (13.13-106) comprises four connection(s) (13.13-106) - two at the upper corners and two at the lower corners. In at least some examples, multi-point systems such as those illustrated in FIGS. 491b-491d may provide improved load distribution and/or stiffness. Multi-point systems, such as those illustrated in FIGS. 491b through 491d, can also accommodate greater load requirements, such as increased loads during a sudden impact event on a head-mounted device (13.13-100). For multi-point systems, synchronization mechanisms may be added to ensure that each of the connection(s) (13.13-106) moves in lockstep.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 491a-491d) may be incorporated, singly or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, singly or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 491a-491d. Furthermore, although not illustrated, more than four of the connection(s) (13.13-106) are also contemplated, and it will be appreciated that the locations of any one of the connection(s) (13.13-106) illustrated may vary in location and point relative to the drawings in which they are illustrated.

As mentioned above, the connector(s) (13.13-106) may include adjustment mechanisms that allow (or provide) movement of the display (13.13-102) relative to the facial interface (13.13-104). Such movement may include motion having a single degree of freedom or multiple degrees of freedom. According to one or more such examples, FIGS. 492a through 492c illustrate examples of depth adjustment via depth adjustment mechanisms (13.13-402) (e.g., linear adjustment connectors). For example, FIG. 492a illustrates the display (13.13-102) positioned relative to the facial interface (13.13-104) in a home state. In the home state, the depth adjustment mechanisms (13.13-402) may be positioned at a default position, a customized position, etc., where the display (13.13-102) is a predetermined distance (i.e., pupillary distance) from the facial interface (13.13-104). In other cases, the home state may include the current positioning of the display (13.13-102) relative to the display (13.13-102).

FIG. 492b illustrates the depth adjustment mechanisms (13.13-402) in an extended state. In the extended state, the depth adjustment mechanisms (13.13-402) are extended or otherwise changed from the home state (or other state) to increase the relative distance between the display (13.13-102) and the facial interface (13.13-104).

FIG. 492c illustrates the depth adjustment mechanisms (13.13-402) in a retracted state. In the retracted state, the depth adjustment mechanisms (13.13-402) are retracted or otherwise changed from a home state (or other state) to reduce the relative distance between the display (13.13-102) and the facial interface (13.13-104).

In some examples, the various states illustrated in FIGS. 492a-492c may include discrete or predefined positions of the display (13.13-102) relative to the facial interface (13.13-104), wherein the predefined positions are distinguished by set (or customizable) step sizes. For example, the depth adjustment mechanisms (13.13-402) may be used to change the position of the display (13.13-102) relative to the facial interface (13.13-104) in position steps from 0 mm pupillary distance in a fully retracted state to 6 mm pupillary distance in a fully extended state. However, in other examples, the various states illustrated in FIGS. 492a through 492c may include non-discrete positions of the display (13.13-102) relative to the facial interface (13.13-104) - where the positions are configurable through continuous adjustment of the depth adjustment mechanisms (13.13-402) due to the continuous interface providing continuous adjustment resolution by incrementally adjusting over a substantially smooth surface.

Adjustment of the depth adjustment mechanisms (13.13-402) may be performed in different ways. In some examples, user interactions with the depth adjustment mechanisms (13.13-402) (e.g., via one or more user controls) may actuate or move the depth adjustment mechanisms (13.13-402). Additionally or alternatively, the depth adjustment mechanisms (13.13-402) may actuate in response to one or more sensors of the head-mounted device (13.13-100) that detect voice commands or gestures (e.g., eye gestures, hand gestures, touch, etc.). Still further, in some examples, the head-mounted device (13.13-100) may automatically adjust the depth adjustment mechanisms (13.13-402) (e.g., based on one or more sensors of the head-mounted device (13.13-100) that detect a user's field of view indicating that an adjustment is necessary). Accordingly, in certain embodiments, the head-mountable device (13.13-100) includes a motor for automatically driving a predetermined operation. In this example, the motor may mechanically interface with the connecting elements or adjusting mechanisms to automatically or controllably drive the adjusting mechanisms.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 492a-492c) may be incorporated, singly or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, singly or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 492a-492c. Furthermore, although not illustrated, more than four of the connection(s) (13.13-106) are also contemplated, and it will be appreciated that the locations of any one of the connection(s) (13.13-106) illustrated may vary in location and point relative to the drawings in which they are illustrated.

The connector(s) (13.13-106) may also allow (or provide) angular or rotational adjustment of the display (13.13-102) relative to the facial interface (13.13-104). According to one or more such examples, FIGS. 493a-493c illustrate examples of tilt adjustment via angle adjustment mechanisms (13.13-502) (e.g., angle adjustment connectors). By adjusting the angle adjustment mechanisms (13.13-502), the display (13.13-102) may be pivoted (e.g., rotated) up or down relative to the facial interface (13.13-104) by an angular displacement, as illustrated in FIGS. 493a-493c.

In particular, FIG. 493a illustrates the angle adjustment mechanisms (13.13-502) in a home state (e.g., without angular tilt). However, it will be appreciated that alternative home states with angular tilt are contemplated herein.

FIG. 493b illustrates the angle adjustment mechanisms (13.13-502) in a negative angular state (e.g., downward angular tilt) relative to the home state. In contrast, FIG. 493c illustrates the angle adjustment mechanisms (13.13-502) in a positive angular state (e.g., upward angular tilt) relative to the home state.

As with the depth adjustment mechanisms (13.13-402) described above, the angle adjustment mechanisms (13.13-502) may also be adjusted in a myriad of different ways. For example, the angle adjustment mechanisms (13.13-502) may be manually adjusted (e.g., via user controls, voice commands, or user gestures). As another example, the head-mounted device (13.13-100) may automatically adjust the angle adjustment mechanisms (13.13-502) based on the detected user's field of view.

In certain implementations, the angular state can have an angular range of negative 7.5 degrees in a fully extended negative angular tilt state to positive 7.5 degrees in a fully extended positive angular tilt state. The angular state can be discrete (e.g., having limited positional states) or continuous (e.g., having unbounded positional states).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 493a through 493c) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 493a through 493c.

In some cases, the connection(s) (13.13-106) may be statically adjustable, customizable, or configurable. For example, the connection(s) (13.13-106) may be adjusted when the head-mountable device (13.13-100) is initially worn, and thereafter the connection(s) (13.13-106) are configured without the ability to externally modify the connection(s) (13.13-106). That is, neither the connection(s) (13.13-106) nor the corresponding actuator controls may be externally accessible when the device is worn (e.g., without some degree of disassembly of the head-mountable device (13.13-100). According to one or more of these examples, FIGS. 494a and 494b illustrate an exemplary head-mountable device (13.13-600) having accommodating connections (13.13-602) between a display (13.13-102) and a facial interface (13.13-104). In particular, FIG. 494a illustrates a head-mountable device assembly, while FIG. 494b provides an enlarged view of one of the accommodating connections (13.13-602).

The accommodating connectors (13.13-602) can be operatively coupled to the display (13.13-102) at a distance from the facial interface (13.13-104) (as similarly described above with respect to the connector(s) (13.13-106)). The accommodating connectors (13.13-602) can be positioned in numerous different locations. However, as illustrated, the accommodating connectors (13.13-602) are positioned within the upper corner of the forehead region and in the zygomatic region.

Additionally, the adjustable connectors (13.13-602) as shown include an adjustable post (13.13-604). The adjustable post (13.13-604) is configured to slide inwardly and outwardly of the adjustable connector. Specifically, the adjustable post (13.13-604) moves relative to a base (13.13-603) of the adjustable connector. The adjustable post (13.13-604) is connected to the facial interface (13.13-104), and the base (13.13-603) is connected to the display (13.13-102). Alternatively, opposite configurations are contemplated herein (e.g., where the adjustable post (13.13-604) is connected to the display (13.13-102) and the base (13.13-603) is connected to the facial interface (13.13-104). Thus, adjusting the adjustable post (13.13-604) (either inwardly or outwardly from the base (13.13-603)) causes a corresponding change in the distance between the display (13.13-102) and the facial interface (13.13-104). The adjustable post (13.13-604) further includes holes (13.13-606) configured to receive set screws (or other fasteners) that allow the adjustable post (13.13-604) to be fixed in position when set to a desired position.

The adjustable posts (13.13-604) may include a variety of different specifications (e.g., depending on the desired load distribution). For example, in some cases, the adjustable posts (13.13-604) are configured to withstand the compressive force of a strap (13.13-103) (not shown) that pulls the display (13.13-102) toward the facial interface (13.13-104). In certain implementations, the adjustable connectors (13.13-602) can distribute an applied load of up to 6 kN (e.g., from the display (13.13-102) along the facial interface (13.13-104)).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIGS. 494a and 494b ) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 494a and 494b .

In contrast to static adjustments, the following descriptions of FIGS. 495A through 515 discuss various examples of dynamic adjustments (e.g., for different users, head sizes, head shapes, etc.)—wherein “dynamic” refers to on-the-fly or real-time adjustments as desired for a given user at a given time. Furthermore, as discussed above, the head-mountable devices of the present disclosure may include single-point systems having a single adjustment mechanism. According to one or more examples of the present disclosure, FIGS. 495A and 495B illustrate an exemplary head-mountable device (13.13-700) that includes a display (13.13-102) and a facial interface (13.13-104). In particular, the head-mounted device (13.13-700) includes an angle-adjustable connection (13.13-702) that movably constrains the display (13.13-102) relative to the facial interface (13.13-104).

The angle adjustment connection (13.13-702) specifically includes a linkage (13.13-704) attached to the display (13.13-102). The linkage (13.13-704) includes notches (13.13-706) configured to receive a locking element (13.13-708), wherein the locking element (13.13-708) is connected to the facial interface (13.13-104). The notches (13.13-706) correspond to locations where the locking element (13.13-708) can engage with the linkage (13.13-704) to maintain the position of the linkage (13.13-704).

The display (13.13-102) can be moved (e.g., rotated) by sliding the linkage (13.13-704) relative to the locking element (13.13-708). For example, the linkage (13.13-704) allows the display (13.13-102) to pivot relative to the facial interface (13.13-104) when the linkage (13.13-704) is extended or when the linkage (13.13-704) is retracted relative to the locking element (13.13-708).

In certain implementations, the linkage (13.13-704) moves automatically in response to direct manipulation of the display (13.13-102). For example, the linkage (13.13-704) may extend or retract relative to the locking element (13.13-708) in response to a user manipulation of the display (13.13-102), e.g., tilting of the user's hand.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIGS. 495a and 495b) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 495a and 495b.

The head-mounted device of the present disclosure may also include a multi-point system in which multiple adjustment mechanisms may be combined to allow (or provide) multiple degrees of freedom (e.g., multiple directions of display movement). According to one or more such examples, FIG. 496 illustrates a display (13.13-102) and a facial interface (13.13-104) connected by adjustable connectors (13.13-802a through 13.13-802d). The adjustable connectors (13.13-802a through 13.13-802d) are positioned between the display (13.13-102) and the facial interface (13.13-104). Each of the adjustable connectors (13.13-802) may be individually adjusted to allow the display to be displaced linearly and/or inclinedly.

For example, the adjustable connectors (13.13-802a, 13.13-802b) can be adjusted such that the top of the display is at a first distance (d1) from the facial interface. The adjustable connectors (13.13-802c, 13.13-802d) can be adjusted differently from the adjustable connectors (13.13-802a, 13.13-802b) such that the bottom of the display is at a second distance (d2) from the facial interface (13.13-104). In downward tilting cases, the second distance (d2) can be less than the first distance (d1). In contrast, in upward tilting cases, the second distance (d2) can be greater than the first distance (d1). In this manner, the adjustable connectors (13.13-802a to 13.13-802d) form an angular adjustable connection between the facial interface (13.13-104) and the display (13.13-102), and the adjustable connectors (13.13-802) form a linear adjustable connection between the facial interface (13.13-104) and the display (13.13-102).

As another example, the adjustable connectors (13.13-802a to 13.13-802d) may be adjusted in different ways. For example, the adjustable connectors (13.13-802a to 13.13-802d) may be adjusted in the same or similar manner (e.g., all extended or retracted the same distance) to linearly translate the display (13.13-102) toward or away from the facial interface (13.13-104).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 496) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in other drawings and described with reference to them) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 496.

While FIGS. 494-496 depict exemplary adjustment mechanisms without actuator controls (which instead move via direct user manipulation or configuration of the head-mounted device), the subsequent drawings depict adjustment mechanisms with dynamic actuator controls. Indeed, as noted above, the connectors (i.e., adjustment mechanisms or actuators) of the present disclosure may include adjustment controls configured for numerous different modes of user input and in various locations. According to one or more of these embodiments, FIGS. 497A-512B depict exemplary adjustment mechanism variations of a head-mounted device (13.13-100). In particular, the head-mounted device (13.13-100) includes a display (13.13-102), a facial interface (13.13-104), and a strap (13.13-103) (each described above).

Additionally, FIGS. 497a through 512b illustrate front and side profile views of head-mountable devices (13.13-900 through 13.13-2400) having corresponding connectors (13.13-902 through 13.13-2402) (identical or similar to connector(s) (13.13-106) also described above), respectively. Connectors (13.13-902 through 13.13-2402) movably constrain the display (13.13-102) relative to the facial interface (13.13-104). Thus, connectors (13.13-902 through 13.13-2402) may include numerous different types of connectors (e.g., mechanical connectors), as previously described. Additionally, the connectors (13.13-902 to 13.13-2402) may include any number of different types of control mechanisms (e.g., actuator controls) that operate the connectors (13.13-902 to 13.13-2402) in response to user input.

In many examples, the head-mountable devices (13.13-900 to 13.13-2400) include actuator controls such as levers (e.g., side peel lever, vertical slide lever, etc.), buttons (push buttons, side push buttons, top push buttons, auto-release buttons, etc.), dials (vertical scroll wheel dial, horizontal scroll wheel dial, top scroll wheel dial, etc.), rockers, sliders, or toggles. The actuator controls can be combined with a number of control mechanisms. For example, a sliding actuator control can include a lever that locks the head-mountable device in place in a desired viewing state by a user. In another example, the combined actuator control unit may include a rocker coupled to a scroll wheel, such that the scroll wheel rotates when engaged by the rocker, thereby causing a change in distance between the display (13.13-102) and the facial interface (13.13-104). It will be appreciated that numerous variations and examples are contemplated herein and that the examples provided below serve to illustrate some possible configurations.

Figures 497a and 497b illustrate a head-mountable device (13.13-900) having a connection portion (13.13-902). The connection portion (13.13-902) includes an actuator control portion (13.13-904). The actuator control portion (13.13-904) is positioned on a side portion of a display (13.13-102) or a facial interface (13.13-104). The actuator control portion (13.13-904) includes a side push button (13.13-906). In response to an actuation (e.g., an inward push, press, or tap) of the side push button (13.13-906), the connector (13.13-902) can translate the display (13.13-102) into or out of a first state (13.13-908), a second state (13.13-910), or a third state (13.13-912). While FIGS. 497a and 497b illustrate discrete states or positions (i.e., a first state (13.13-908), a second state (13.13-910), and a third state (13.13-912)), it will be appreciated that the head-mountable device (13.13-900) may include more or fewer positional states. In certain implementations, the head-mounted device (13.13-900) includes continuous resolution of position states (as opposed to predetermined discrete position states).

In one or more examples, the side push button (13.13-906) may be actuated in a variety of ways. For example, the side push button (13.13-906) may include a push-to-release button, a push-and-hold button, slide-push buttons, top-push buttons, etc. The buttons may be located in various locations of the head-mounted device (13.13-900) on the display (13.13-102) or on the facial interface (13.13-104), such as on the top portion, the side portion, the bottom portion, etc.

Figures 498a and 498b illustrate a head-mountable device (13.13-1000) having a connection portion (13.13-1002). The connection portion (13.13-1002) includes an actuator control portion (13.13-1004). The actuator control portion (13.13-1004) is similar to the actuator control portion (13.13-904). In particular, the actuator control portion (13.13-1004) includes a top push button positioned on an upper portion of the display (13.13-102) or the facial interface (13.13-104) (e.g., on one or both of the upper corners of the head-mountable device (13.13-1000)). When the actuator control (13.13-1004) is pressed, the connection (13.13-1002) can translate the display (13.13-102) to or from a first state (13.13-908), a second state (13.13-910), or a third state (13.13-912), as described above.

In another example, a head-mounted device (13.13-100) includes actuating components having actuator controls that slide or twist (e.g., by levers, buttons, rotatable components, etc.) to cause the display (13.13-102) to move relative to the facial interface (13.13-104). Figures 499a through 502b illustrate such examples.

In particular, FIGS. 499a and 499b illustrate a head-mountable device (13.13-1100) having a connection portion (13.13-1102). The connection portion (13.13-1102) includes an actuator control portion (13.13-1104). The actuator control portion (13.13-1104) is positioned on a side portion of the display (13.13-102) or the facial interface (13.13-104). The actuator control portion (13.13-1104) includes a side fill lever. A side fill lever of the actuator control (13.13-1104) releases a lock (e.g., a cam lock) when pulled downward, allowing the connection (13.13-1102) to move the display (13.13-102) relative to the facial interface (13.13-104). Additionally, the actuator control (13.13-1104) causes the connection (13.13-1102) to lock the display (13.13-102) into a position relative to the facial interface (13.13-104) when pushed upward into a locked position.

Figures 500a and 500b illustrate a head-mountable device (13.13-1200) having a connection portion (13.13-1202). The connection portion (13.13-1202) includes an actuator control portion (13.13-1204). The actuator control portion (13.13-1204) is also positioned on a side portion of the display (13.13-102) or the facial interface (13.13-104). The actuator control portion (13.13-1204) includes a torsional sleeve lever. Accordingly, the torsional sleeve lever of the actuator control member (13.13-1204) may be rotated (e.g., clockwise outwardly) to allow the connection member (13.13-1202) to move the display (13.13-102) relative to the facial interface (13.13-104). Similarly, the actuator control member (13.13-1204) may be rotated in the opposite direction (e.g., counterclockwise inwardly) to allow the connection member (13.13-1202) to position the display (13.13-102) relative to the facial interface (13.13-104).

Figures 501a and 501b illustrate a head-mountable device (13.13-1300) having a connection portion (13.13-1302). The connection portion (13.13-1302) includes an actuator control portion (13.13-1304). The actuator control portion (13.13-1304) is similarly positioned on a side portion of the display (13.13-102) or the facial interface (13.13-104). The actuator control portion (13.13-1304) includes a finger pinch slider. The finger pinch slider of the actuator control unit (13.13-1304) can slide forward and backward, allowing the connection unit (13.13-1302) to position (or lock) the display (13.13-102) relative to the facial interface (13.13-104).

Figures 502a and 502b illustrate a head-mountable device (13.13-1400) having a connection portion (13.13-1402). The connection portion (13.13-1402) includes an actuator control portion (13.13-1404). The actuator control portion (13.13-1404) is positioned on a side portion of the display (13.13-102) or the facial interface (13.13-104). The actuator control portion (13.13-1404) includes a sleeve slide. The sleeve slide of the actuator control unit (13.13-1404) can slide along the actuator control unit (13.13-904) to allow the connection unit (13.13-1402) to move the display (13.13-102) relative to the facial interface (13.13-104).

Figures 503a and 503b illustrate a head-mountable device (13.13-1500) having a connection portion (13.13-1502). The connection portion (13.13-1502) includes an actuator control portion (13.13-1504). The actuator control portion (13.13-1504) is positioned along an outer periphery of the head-mountable device (13.13-1500) (e.g., from an upper corner to a lower corner on a side portion of the display (13.13-102) or the facial interface (13.13-104)). The actuator control portion (13.13-1504) includes a vertical slide that moves approximately up and down along the outer periphery of the head-mountable device (13.13-1500). The vertical slide of the actuator control unit (13.13-1504) can be toggled between positions (e.g., a first state (13.13-908), a second state (13.13-910), and a third state (13.13-912)). Additional details of this embodiment are further discussed below with respect to FIGS. 513a through 513d.

Figures 504a and 504b illustrate a head-mountable device (13.13-1500) having a connection portion (13.13-1602). The connection portion (13.13-1602) includes an actuator control portion (13.13-1604). The actuator control portion (13.13-1604) is positioned on a side portion of the display (13.13-102) or the facial interface (13.13-104). The actuator control portion (13.13-1604) includes a side temple squeeze button (e.g., a spring button) that, when compressed, allows the connection portion (13.13-1602) to simultaneously move the display (13.13-102) relative to the facial interface (13.13-104). The side temple squeeze button of the actuator control unit (13.13-1604) may be automatically released upon reaching one of the first state (13.13-908), the second state (13.13-910), or the third state (13.13-912). The side temple squeeze button of the actuator control unit (13.13-1604) may have a button oriented upward (or alternatively downward) with respect to the head-mountable device (13.13-1600).

Figures 505a and 505b illustrate a head-mountable device (13.13-1700) having a connection portion (13.13-1702). The connection portion (13.13-1702) includes an actuator control portion (13.13-1704). The actuator control portion (13.13-1704) is positioned on a side portion of the display (13.13-102) or the facial interface (13.13-104). The actuator control portion (13.13-1704) includes a scroll wheel rotatable about an axis (13.13-1706) extending inwardly and outwardly of the head-mountable device (13.13-1700). In some examples, the scroll wheel of the actuator control unit (13.13-1704) rotates in response to tangential forces (e.g., a forward-to-back or up-and-down finger swipe). In other examples, the scroll wheel of the actuator control unit (13.13-1704) rotates in response to a twist of the fingers. The scroll wheel of the actuator control unit (13.13-1704) may cause the connection unit (13.13-1702) to correspondingly adjust the distance between the display (13.13-102) and the facial interface (13.13-104) when rotated about the axis (13.13-1706).

Figures 506a and 506b illustrate a head-mountable device (13.13-1800) having a connection portion (13.13-1802). The connection portion (13.13-1802) includes an actuator control portion (13.13-1804). The actuator control portion (13.13-1804) is positioned on a side portion of the display (13.13-102) or the facial interface (13.13-104). The actuator control portion (13.13-1804) includes a scroll wheel rotatable about an axis (13.13-1806). The actuator control unit (13.13-1804) may be responsive to tangential forces (e.g., a finger swipe up or down), such as the actuator control unit (13.13-1704). The scroll wheel of the actuator control unit (13.13-1804) may, when rotated about an axis (13.13-1806), cause the connection unit (13.13-1802) to correspondingly adjust the distance between the display (13.13-102) and the facial interface (13.13-104).

Figures 507a and 507b illustrate a head-mountable device (13.13-1900) having a connection portion (13.13-1902). The connection portion (13.13-1902) includes an actuator control portion (13.13-1904). The actuator control portion (13.13-1904) is positioned on a side portion of the display (13.13-102) or the facial interface (13.13-104). The actuator control portion (13.13-1904) is similar to the actuator control portion (13.13-1804). In particular, the actuator control portion (13.13-1904) includes a scroll wheel rotatable about an axis (13.13-1906). Accordingly, the scroll wheel of the actuator control unit (13.13-1904) can respond to tangential forces (e.g., a finger swipe from forward to backward and vice versa). In response to such user interaction, the connector (13.13-1902) can move the display (13.13-102) relative to the facial interface (13.13-104).

Figures 508a and 508b illustrate a head-mountable device (13.13-2000) having a connection portion (13.13-2002). The connection portion (13.13-2002) includes an actuator control portion (13.13-2004). The actuator control portion (13.13-2004) includes a slider (e.g., a toggle) positioned on an upper region of a display (13.13-102) or a facial interface (13.13-104) (e.g., along a forehead region). The actuator control unit (13.13-904) moves laterally (e.g., inwardly and outwardly) to cause the connection unit (13.13-2002) to adjust the distance between the display (13.13-102) and the facial interface (13.13-104) (e.g., forwardly or backwardly).

Figures 509a and 509b illustrate a head-mountable device (13.13-2100) having a connection portion (13.13-2102). The connection portion (13.13-2102) includes an actuator control portion (13.13-2104). The actuator control portion (13.13-2104) includes a rocker positioned on an upper region of a display (13.13-102) or a facial interface (13.13-104). The actuator control portion (13.13-2104) moves up or down about a pivot (13.13-2106). In response to the upward/downward movement of the actuator control unit (13.13-2104), the connection unit (13.13-2102) adjusts the distance between the display (13.13-102) and the facial interface (13.13-104).

Figures 510a through 512b illustrate an actuator control unit including a scroll wheel positioned on the top of a head-mounted device. The scroll wheel can be rotated around different axes to adjust the distance between the display (13.13-102) and the facial interface (13.13-104). Additional details are provided below.

In particular, FIGS. 510a and 510b illustrate a head-mountable device (13.13-2200) having a connection portion (13.13-2202). The connection portion (13.13-2202) includes the actuator control portion (13.13-1804) described above. However, here, the actuator control portion (13.13-1804) is positioned on the upper portion of the display (13.13-102) or the facial interface (13.13-104). In practice, the actuator control portion (13.13-1804) includes a scroll wheel rotatable about an axis (13.13-2204). The scroll wheel of the actuator control unit (13.13-1804) causes the connection unit (13.13-2202) to adjust the distance between the display (13.13-102) and the facial interface (13.13-104) when rotated up or down about the axis (13.13-2204).

Figures 511a and 511b illustrate a head-mountable device (13.13-2300) having a connection portion (13.13-2302). The connection portion (13.13-2302) also includes the actuator control portion (13.13-1804) described above. Alternatively, however, the actuator control portion (13.13-1804) is positioned on the upper portion of the display (13.13-102) or the facial interface (13.13-104). The actuator control portion (13.13-1804) also includes a scroll wheel rotatable about an axis (13.13-2304). The scroll wheel of the actuator control unit (13.13-1804) causes the connection unit (13.13-2302) to adjust the distance between the display (13.13-102) and the facial interface (13.13-104) when rotated up or down about the axis (13.13-2304).

Figures 512a and 512b illustrate a head-mountable device (13.13-2400) having a connection portion (13.13-2402). The connection portion (13.13-2402) includes the actuator control portion (13.13-1704) described above, although positioned differently in Figures 512a and 512b. In particular, the actuator control portion (13.13-1704) is positioned on the upper portion of the display (13.13-102) or the facial interface (13.13-104). The actuator control portion (13.13-1704) includes a scroll wheel rotatable about an axis (13.13-2404). The scroll wheel of the actuator control unit (13.13-1704) causes the connection unit (13.13-2402) to adjust the distance between the display (13.13-102) and the facial interface (13.13-104) when rotated about the axis (13.13-2404).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 497a and 512b) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 497a and 512b.

As discussed above, the head-mountable device of the present disclosure may include connecting portions (e.g., adjustment mechanisms) that can be toggled from one position to another via a sliding operation. According to one or more such examples, FIG. 513a illustrates a perspective view of the head-mountable device (13.13-1500) illustrated in FIGS. 503a and 503b. The head-mountable device (13.13-1500) includes connecting portions (13.13-2502a, 13.13-2502b) having an actuator control portion (13.13-1504). The actuator control unit (13.13-1504) includes a handle or lever protruding from the head-mountable device (13.13-1500) for convenient user manipulation of the connecting portions (13.13-2502a, 13.13-2502b) (e.g., sliding motion along the periphery of the head-mountable device (13.13-1500)).

As illustrated, user interaction with the actuator control unit (13.13-1504) can move the connectors (13.13-2502a, 13.13-2502b) by toggling the connectors (13.13-2502a, 13.13-2502b) between three discrete states (e.g., positions), including a first state (13.13-908), a second state (13.13-910), and a third state (13.13-912). The connectors (13.13-2502a, 13.13-2502b) are independently movable. However, in other implementations, the connectors (13.13-2502a, 13.13-2502b) are movably connected to one another. It will be appreciated that the connectors (13.13-2502a, 13.13-2502b) can move within the head-mountable device (13.13-1500) in a myriad of different ways. In certain examples, the connectors (13.13-2502a, 13.13-2502b) follow a track having a constant radius.

As the connectors (13.13-2502a, 13.13-2502b) move, the display (13.13-102) moves correspondingly relative to the facial interface (13.13-104). The specific movement of the connectors (13.13-2502a, 13.13-2502b) that causes the head-mounted device to adjust is described below with respect to FIGS. 513b-513d (which illustrate the connector (13.13-2502a) in more detail). In particular, FIG. 513b illustrates the connector (13.13-2502a) including the stepped adjustment portion (13.13-2503) in a first state. In the first state, the facial interface (13.13-104) and the display (13.13-102) are positioned at a distance (13.13-2504a) (e.g., about 0 mm) apart.

In contrast, FIG. 513c illustrates the connection (13.13-2502a) moving to the left, as indicated by the provided arrow. In doing so, the stepped adjustment portion (13.13-2503) correspondingly moves in a stepped manner, thereby creating an increased separation between the display (13.13-102) and the facial interface (13.13-104) by a distance (13.13-2504b) (e.g., about 3 mm) into the second position state. Still further, FIGS. 489 through 513d illustrate the connection (13.13-2502a) moving further to the left, as indicated by the provided arrow. By this additional movement, the stepped adjustment portion (13.13-2503) is moved one step further, creating a greater separation between the display (13.13-102) and the facial interface (13.13-104) by a distance (13.13-2504c) (e.g., about 6 mm) in the third position state. Thus, the geometry or structure of the stepped adjustment portion (13.13-2503) can provide a desired stepped resolution between the position states by causing the display (13.13-102) to move away from (or toward) the facial interface (13.13-104).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 513a through 513d) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference to them) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 513a through 513d.

As briefly mentioned above, multiple connectors of a head-mountable device may be linked together as a single connector. The links between the connectors of the head-mountable device form a timing mechanism that causes the connectors to move together in a uniform manner. According to one or more of these examples, FIGS. 514 and 515 illustrate respective perspective views of assemblies (13.13-2600-2700) for head-mountable devices.

In particular, FIG. 514 depicts an assembly (13.13-2600) for a head-mounted device having a movably adjustable connection (13.13-2602) via an actuator control (13.13-2604). The actuator control (13.13-2604) is positioned along the forehead region, but is oriented downwardly (although numerous other orientations are contemplated herein). In response to actuation of the actuator control (13.13-2604), the stepped adjustment portions (13.13-2606) each move integrally in a stepped manner (as similarly described for the stepped adjustment portions (13.13-2603) with respect to FIGS. 513b-513d). The linkage arms (13.13-2608) provide a timing mechanism that movably connects portions of the connection member (13.13-2602) to transmit motion in a coordinated manner. While FIG. 514 illustrates stepped adjustment portions (13.13-2606), the adjustment portions may have additional steps, or even a progressively inclined surface, providing finer adjustment capabilities.

In contrast to stepped adjustment sections, FIG. 515 depicts an assembly (13.13-2700) for a head-mounted device having a connection portion (13.13-2702) having toggle links. In particular, the connection portion (13.13-2702) is movably adjustable via an actuator control portion (13.13-2604). In response to actuation of the actuator control portion (13.13-2604), the toggle links (13.13-2704) toggle between a retracted position and a locked position. When the toggle links (13.13-2704) move in unison, the display (13.13-102) moves correspondingly relative to the facial interface (13.13-104). Moreover, in this configuration, the connection (13.13-2702) moves in a two-component manner between the first position state and the second position state. The linkage arms (13.13-2608) of Fig. 515 also provide a timing mechanism for movably connecting portions of the connection (13.13-2702) to transmit motion in a coordinated manner.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 514 and 515 ) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 514 and 515 . The following drawing descriptions for FIGS. 516 through 521 relate to exemplary head-mounted devices, wearable apparatuses, or wearable electronic devices that may implement two degrees of freedom—i.e., linear translation and angular tilt toward and away from a user's face. In these examples, the linear slide may be implemented with a predetermined structure to control the operation of the linear slide (whether in response to user input or applied force).

Figures 516 through 518 illustrate plan, front, and side views, respectively, of a head-mountable device (13.13-2800) according to one or more examples of the present disclosure. As illustrated, the head-mountable device (13.13-2800) may include a display frame (13.13-2802), a facial interface (13.13-2804), and connectors (13.13-2806a through 13.13-2806d). The display frame (13.13-2802) and associated display may be the same as or similar to the display frame (13.13-105) (and associated display (13.13-102)) discussed above. The facial interface (13.13-2804) may be the same as or similar to the facial interface (13.13-104) discussed above. Likewise, the connectors (13.13-2806a to 13.13-2806d) may be identical to or similar to the connector(s) (13.13-106) discussed above.

However, in particular, the head-mountable device (13.13-2800) may include actuators (13.13-2808, 13.13-2810). The actuators (13.13-2808, 13.13-2810) may include several different actuators. In certain examples, the actuators (13.13-2808, 13.13-2810) include linear actuators of a linear adjustment system (e.g., enabling translational movement of the facial interface (13.13-2804) toward or away from the display frame (13.13-2802). For example, the actuators (13.13-2808, 13.13-2810) may include linear slides and/or linear springs that can translate inwardly and outwardly to change the distance (e.g., depth distance, interpupillary distance, etc.) between the facial interface (13.13-2804) and the display frame (13.13-2802). In particular, the actuators (13.13-2808) correspond to forehead actuators or upper actuators, and the actuators (13.13-2810) correspond to zygomatic actuators or lateral actuators. It will be appreciated that additional or alternative configurations of the actuators (13.13-2808, 13.13-2810) are contemplated herein. For example, the actuators may be positioned along the lower portion of the head-mounted device (13.13-2800) in the cheek (maxillary region). Additional details regarding the actuators (13.13-2808, 13.13-2810) are described below with reference to FIGS. 519-521.

In some examples, the actuators (13.13-2808, 13.13-2810) are controlled or manipulated via at least one of the actuator controls (13.13-2812a, 13.13-2812b). In these or other examples, the actuator controls (13.13-2812a, 13.13-2812b) may include various different types of controls, such as levers, buttons, dials, rockers, sliders, or toggles (as described above). The actuator controls (13.13-2812a, 13.13-2812b) may be engaged via manual operation and/or via hands-free or automated methods (also referred to above). The actuator controls (13.13-2812a, 13.13-2812b) may be positioned at various locations on or within the head-mounted device (13.13-2800). In certain examples, the actuator controls (13.13-2812a, 13.13-2812b) may be positioned adjacent to the maxillary region of the human face when the head-mounted device (13.13-2800) is worn. Other exemplary locations for the actuator controls (13.13-2812a, 13.13-2812b) may include the zygomatic region, the forehead region, on the arms (not shown), or within an interior portion of the optical space adjacent to the display.

In these or other examples, the actuator controls (13.13-2812a, 13.13-2812b) can control or manipulate the actuators in various ways. In some examples, the actuator controls (13.13-2812a, 13.13-2812b) are connected to flexible drive shafts (13.13-2814, 13.13-2816). In certain examples, the flexible drive shafts (13.13-2814, 13.13-2816) can transfer energy or movement from the engagement (e.g., pressing) of at least one of the actuator controls (13.13-2812a, 13.13-2812b) to the actuators (13.13-2808, 13.13-2810) (or associated locks as described below). Examples of the flexible drive shafts (13.13-2814, 13.13-2816) can include cables, tension wires, rods, dowels, and the like. In some examples, the flexible drive shafts (13.13-2814, 13.13-2816) are positioned internally (concealed from external view) of the display frame (13.13-2802). In other examples, the flexible drive shafts (13.13-2814, 13.13-2816) are positioned externally (e.g., on an outer surface of the display frame (13.13-2802)).

In at least some examples, the flexible drive shafts (13.13-2814, 13.13-2816) can provide synchronized or parallel motion for each of the actuators (13.13-2808, 13.13-2810). For example, the flexible drive shafts (13.13-2814, 13.13-2816) can be connected to each other via a linkage (13.13-2818). Examples of the linkage (13.13-2818) include a gear system, a pulley system, a pivot connection, and the like.

The flexible drive shafts (13.13-2814, 13.13-2816) may be motion-synchronized via a linkage (13.13-2818) to mitigate (or prevent) non-uniform translation between the actuators (13.13-2808, 13.13-2810). Additionally, in some examples, the linkage (13.13-2818) may allow a single input to one of the actuators (13.13-2808, 13.13-2810) to control both flexible drive shafts (13.13-2814, 13.13-2816). That is, in certain implementations, engagement of both actuator controls (13.13-2812a, 13.13-2812b) is not required to operate all actuators (13.13-2808, 13.13-2810) (and/or their corresponding locks described below).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof depicted in FIGS. 516-518) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions depicted in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof depicted in and described with reference to the other drawings) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions depicted in FIGS. 516-518. The following drawing descriptions with respect to FIGS. 519-521 relate to specific examples of the actuators (13.13-2808, 13.13-2810) discussed above. In practice, the actuators (13.13-2808, 13.13-2810) may include a linear adjustment connection between the display and the facial interface, wherein the linear adjustment connection includes a linear slide actuator having a locking mechanism.

FIGS. 519 through 521 illustrate a perspective view of a lock-slider disengagement, a front view of a lock-slider disengagement, and a front view of a lock-slider engagement, respectively, of a portion of a linear adjustment connection (13.13-3100) according to one or more examples of the present disclosure. In these or other examples, the linear adjustment connection (13.13-3100) includes an actuator (13.13-3102) (i.e., a linear slide), an actuator lock (13.13-3104) (otherwise referred to as a lock), and an actuator control (e.g., actuator controls (13.13-2808, 13.13-2810) not shown). As discussed below, in response to the actuator control, the actuator lock (13.13-3104) may engage the actuator (13.13-3102) to hold the actuator (13.13-3102) in position or otherwise disengage the actuator (13.13-3102) for desired adjustability.

As illustrated, the actuator (13.13-3102) can be designed to translate in the slide direction (13.13-3116) (e.g., to move the facial interface (13.13-2804) away from the display frame (13.13-2802). The actuator (13.13-3102) can also be freely translated in the opposite direction of the slide direction (13.13-3116) when the actuator lock (13.13-3104) is disengaged from the actuator (13.13-3102) (e.g., to move the facial interface (13.13-2804) toward the display frame (13.13-2802). To perform this function, the actuator (13.13-3102) may include certain structures. For example, the actuator (13.13-3102) may include teeth (13.13-3106) positioned on a top surface (13.13-3107). The teeth (13.13-3106) may extend upwardly from the top surface (13.13-3107) for a tooth height (13.13-3110). In some examples, the tooth height (13.13-3110) may be tuned based on various design factors. For example, the tooth height (13.13-3110) may affect the stack thickness of one or more portions of the display frame (13.13-2802). As another example, the tooth height (13.13-3110) may affect the ability of the actuator lock (13.13-3104) to deflect upward in the direction (13.13-3122) (e.g., without damage to the actuator lock (13.13-3104)). Therefore, in some examples, the tooth height (13.13-3110) may be minimized or reduced.

As a further example, the teeth (13.13-3106) may include a tooth pitch (e.g., the number of teeth per inch defining the distance between teeth (13.13-3112)). Like the tooth height (13.13-3110), the tooth pitch may also be tuned based on various design factors. For example, a finer tooth pitch (e.g., a smaller distance (13.13-3112) or more teeth per inch) may be utilized as the tooth height (13.13-3110) is reduced. Additionally or alternatively, the tooth pitch and/or the tooth height (13.13-3110) may be tuned for a desired amount of force that may cause backdrivability (or, in some examples, to prevent backdrivability entirely). In these or other examples, the term "back-actuation" or "back-drag" refers to translation of the actuator (13.13-3102) in a direction opposite to the slide direction (13.13-3116) (e.g., when the facial interface (13.13-2804) and the display frame (13.13-2802) move toward each other in response to an applied force from either the display frame (13.13-2802) or the facial interface (13.13-2804).

More specifically, the teeth (13.13-3106) may include leading tips (13.13-3114). The leading tips (13.13-3114) may include a lead-in structure with which the teeth (13.13-3108) of the actuator lock (13.13-3104) (and specifically the leading tips (13.13-3118)) may begin to engage. The leading tips (13.13-3114, 13.13-3118) may include tapered or beveled portions of the teeth (13.13-3106, 13.13-3108) that act as ramps (e.g., to avoid dead-band or tooth misalignment/blunt impacts that prevent the actuator lock (13.13-3104) from engaging the actuator (13.13-3102). That is, when transitioning from slider-lock disengagement (as shown in FIG. 520) to slider-lock engagement (as shown in FIG. 521), the leading tips (13.13-3114, 13.13-3118) allow the teeth (13.13-3108) of the actuator lock to smoothly slide into and settle between the teeth (13.13-3106) of the actuator (13.13-3102).

Specifically with respect to FIG. 520, the actuator lock (13.13-3104) can be translated in a lock translation direction (13.13-3120) (e.g., perpendicular to the slide direction (13.13-3116)). In particular, the actuator lock (13.13-3104) can be translated in the lock translation direction (13.13-3120) in response to at least one of the actuator control members (13.13-2812a, 13.13-2812b) being engaged (e.g., pressed) and the flexible drive shafts (13.13-2814, 13.13-2816) correspondingly engaging the actuator lock (13.13-3104). Thereafter, the actuator (13.13-3102) can be adjusted to translate the facial interface (13.13-2804) toward or away from the display frame (13.13-2802) (or an associated display). Additionally, upon release of the actuator controls (13.13-2812a, 13.13-2812b), the actuator lock (13.13-3104) can be moved into an engaged position (as shown in FIG. 521) where the teeth (13.13-3106) and the teeth (13.13-3108) are engaged with each other or otherwise positioned adjacent to each other. In this position, the actuator (13.13-3102) is locked in place to inhibit translation of the facial interface (13.13-2804) toward or away from the display frame (13.13-2802) (or associated display). As further illustrated in FIG. 521, the leading tips (13.13-3114) can extend beyond the teeth (13.13-3108), and the leading tips (13.13-3118) can extend beyond the teeth (13.13-3106).

When the teeth (13.13-3106, 13.13-3108) are engaged (as shown in FIG. 521), the actuator lock (13.13-3104) can be deflected upward in the lock deflection direction (13.13-3122). The lock deflection direction (13.13-3122) can be perpendicular to both the slide direction (13.13-3116) and the lock translation direction (13.13-3120). In these or other examples, the actuator lock (13.13-3104) may be biased in the lock bias direction (13.13-3122) during a back-actuation or back-drag event in which the actuator (13.13-3102) moves opposite to the slide direction (13.13-3116). To enable such back-actuation or back-drag, the actuator lock (13.13-3104) may act as a cantilever spring to bias in the lock bias direction (13.13-3122) in response to an applied force at the facial interface (13.13-2804) or the display frame (13.13-2802). In some examples, the actuator lock (13.13-3104) can be tuned to deflect in response to a predetermined amount of force (e.g., from about 5 Newtons to about 500 Newtons per actuator, from about 10 Newtons to about 100 Newtons per actuator, or from about 20 Newtons per actuator to about 40 Newtons per actuator). In these or other examples, various design factors for the actuator lock (13.13-3104), such as tooth angles or bending stiffness, can be adjusted to provide the desired force tuning.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations depicted in FIGS. 519-521 ) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions depicted in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations depicted in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions depicted in FIGS. 519-521 . The following description provides a more detailed description of an exemplary implementation of multiple linear adjustment connections coupled to a flexible drive shaft (or multiple flexible drive shafts).

FIG. 522 illustrates a perspective view of a portion of a head-mountable device (13.13-3400) according to one or more examples of the present disclosure. As depicted, the head-mountable device (13.13-3400) includes a plurality of actuators (e.g., a plurality of linear adjustment connections (13.13-3100a through 13.13-3100d)) discussed above for the linear adjustment connection (13.13-3100). As also noted, each of the linear adjustment connections (13.13-3100a through 13.13-3100d) can be actuated via flexible drive shafts (13.13-2814, 13.13-2816). The flexible drive shafts (13.13-2814, 13.13-2816) may be motion-synchronized via a linkage (13.13-2818) to mitigate (or prevent) uneven translation between each of the linear adjustment connections (13.13-3100a through 13.13-3100d). Additionally, in some examples, the linkage (13.13-2818) may allow a single input (e.g., a single button press) to actuate each of the linear adjustment connections (13.13-3100a through 13.13-3100d). The following description of FIG. 522 provides an exemplary implementation in which this may be accomplished.

As illustrated in FIG. 522, the head-mountable device (13.13-3400) may include actuator controls (13.13-3401a, 13.13-3401b) (which may be identical or similar to the actuator controls (13.13-2812a, 13.13-2812b) discussed above). In response to a force (13.13-3402a) applied to the actuator control (13.13-3401a), the lock (13.13-3104a) may deflect, translate, or otherwise move correspondingly to release the slide (13.13-3102a) of the linear adjustment connection (13.13-3100a). Additionally, the flexible drive shaft (13.13-2816) may be attached to a joint (13.13-3404) (e.g., a ball joint) connected to the lock (13.13-3104a). As the lock (13.13-3104a) deflects, translates, or otherwise moves in response to the applied force (13.13-3402a), the flexible drive shaft (13.13-2816) may be tensioned or pulled in the direction (13.13-3406).

A flexible drive shaft (13.13-2816) can be attached to a gear anchor (13.13-3410) such that when the flexible drive shaft (13.13-2816) is pulled in the direction (13.13-3406), a first gear (13.13-3409a) connected to the gear anchor (13.13-3410) rotates in the direction (13.13-3412). In turn, a lock (13.13-3104b) (movably attached to the first gear (13.13-3409)) is pulled back away from a slide (13.13-3102b) of a linear adjustment connection (13.13-3100b) as the first gear (13.13-3409) rotates in the direction (13.13-3412).

Additionally, rotation of the first gear (13.13-3409a) in the direction (13.13-3412) can simultaneously induce rotation of the second gear (13.13-3409b) in the direction (13.13-3414). Rotation of the second gear (13.13-3409b) in the direction (13.13-3414) can cause the lock (13.13-3104c) (movably attached to the second gear (13.13-3409b)) to be pulled back away from the slide (13.13-3102c) of the linear adjustment connection (13.13-3100c).

Additionally, rotation of the second gear (13.13-3409b) in the direction (13.13-3414) may cause the gear anchor (13.13-3416) connected to the second gear (13.13-3409b) to push the flexible drive shaft (13.13-2814). Specifically, the flexible drive shaft (13.13-2814) may be connected to the gear anchor (13.13-3416) such that, when the second gear (13.13-3409b) rotates in the direction (13.13-3414), the flexible drive shaft (13.13-2814) is pushed in the direction (13.13-3408). Pushing of the flexible drive shaft (13.13-2814) may disengage the lock (13.13-3104d) from the slide (13.13-3102d) of the linear adjustment connection (13.13-3100d). For example, the flexible drive shaft (13.13-2814) may be connected to the lock (13.13-3104d) in the same or similar manner as the flexible drive shaft (13.13-2816) is attached to the lock (13.13-3104a) to impart slide-lock engagement.

Additionally or alternatively, it will be appreciated that the force (13.13-3402b) may be applied to an actuator control (13.13-3401b) that is in mechanical communication with the lock (13.13-3104d) (in the same or similar manner as the actuator control (13.13-3401a) is mechanically coupled to the lock (13.13-3104a). Thus, dual inputs through both actuator controls (13.13-3401a, 13.13-3401b) may be applied for synchronized operation of the linear adjustment connections (13.13-3100a to 13.13-3100d), respectively, but are not required. Alternatively, the applied force (13.13-3402b) may be used alone (i.e., without the applied force (13.13-3402a)) to actuate each of the linear adjustment connections (13.13-3100a to 13.13-3100d).

Additionally, in some examples, additional or alternative modes of actuating the linear adjustment connections (13.13-3100a to 13.13-3100d) may be implemented. For example, solenoids or small motors (with or without flexible drive shafts (13.13-2814, 13.13-2816)) may be utilized to actuate the linear adjustment connections (13.13-3100a to 13.13-3100d). Similarly, in some examples, the actuator controls (13.13-3401a, 13.13-3401b) may include alternative types of actuator controls. For example, the actuator controls (13.13-3401a, 13.13-3401b) may be arch sliders that move in an arc path (e.g., along an unillustrated display frame of a head-mounted display (13.13-3400)). The arch sliders may be connected to flexible drive shafts (13.13-2814, 13.13-2816) as discussed above to actuate linear adjustment connections (13.13-3100a to 13.13-3100d).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 522 ) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 522 .

13.14: Nosepiece

Head-mounted devices include head-mounted support structures that allow the devices to be worn on a user's head. The head-mounted support structures may include device housings for housing components, such as displays, used to present visual content to the user. The head-mounted devices may also include a light-shielding nosepiece that rests on the user's nose. The light-shielding nosepiece may include an elastomeric layer having a plurality of perforations and a fabric covering the elastomeric layer. The elastomeric layer having the perforations may allow the light-shielding nosepiece to conform to the user's nose while the device is worn, while maintaining sufficient rigidity to be wrapped by a low-force, high-extension fabric or other low-force, high-extension material. Additional structures, such as rigid structures or semi-rigid structures, may be included in the light-shielding nosepiece to provide additional support for the device while it is worn.

A schematic diagram of an exemplary system having an electronic device having a light-shielding nosepiece is illustrated in FIG. 523. As illustrated in FIG. 523, the system (13.14-8) may include one or more electronic devices, such as an electronic device (13.14-10). The electronic devices of the system (13.14-8) may include computers, cellular telephones, head-mounted devices, wristwatch devices, and other electronic devices. Configurations in which the electronic device (13.14-10) is a head-mounted device are sometimes described herein as examples.

As illustrated in FIG. 523, electronic devices such as the electronic device (13.14-10) may have control circuitry (13.14-12). The control circuitry (13.14-12) may include storage and processing circuitry for controlling the operation of the device (13.14-10). The circuitry (13.14-12) may include storage such as hard disk drive storage, non-volatile memory (e.g., electrically programmable read-only memory configured to form a solid-state drive), volatile memory (e.g., static or dynamic random access memory), etc.

Processing circuitry within the control circuitry (13.14-12) may be based on one or more microprocessors, microcontrollers, digital signal processors, baseband processors, power management units, audio chips, graphics processing units, application-specific integrated circuits, and other integrated circuits. Software code may be stored in storage within the circuitry (13.14-12) and executed on the processing circuitry within the circuitry (13.14-12) to implement control operations for the device (13.14-10), such as data acquisition operations, operations involving processing three-dimensional facial image data, operations involving coordination of components using control signals, etc. The control circuitry (13.14-12) may include wired and wireless communication circuitry. For example, the control circuitry (13.14-12) may include radio frequency transceiver circuitry, such as cellular telephone transceiver circuitry, wireless local area network (WiFi®) transceiver circuitry, millimeter wave transceiver circuitry, and/or other wireless communication circuitry.

During operation, the communication circuitry of the devices within the system (13.14-8) (e.g., the communication circuitry of the control circuitry (13.14-12) of the device (13.14-10)) may be used to support communication between the electronic devices. For example, one electronic device may transmit video and/or audio data to another electronic device within the system (13.14-8). The electronic devices within the system (13.14-8) may communicate via one or more communication networks (e.g., the Internet, a local area network, etc.) using wired and/or wireless communication circuitry. The communication circuitry may be used to allow data to be received by the device (13.14-10) from an external device (e.g., a portable device such as a tethered computer, a handheld device, or a laptop computer, an online computing device such as a remote server or other remote computing device, or other electronic device) and/or to provide data to the external device.

The device (13.14-10) may include input/output devices (13.14-22). The input/output devices (13.14-22) may be used to allow a user to provide user input to the device (13.14-10). The input/output devices (13.14-22) may also be used to collect information about the environment in which the device (IO) is operating. Output components within the devices (13.14-22) may allow the device (13.14-10) to provide output to the user and may be used to communicate with external electrical equipment.

As illustrated in FIG. 1, the input/output devices (13.14-22) may include one or more displays, such as the display (13.14-14). In some configurations, the display (13.14-14) of the device (13.14-10) may include a left display panel and a right display panel (sometimes referred to as a left portion and a right portion of the display (13.14-14) and/or a left display and a right display) that are aligned with the user's left and right eyes and viewable through the left lens assembly and the right lens assembly, respectively. In other configurations, the display (13.14-14) includes a single display panel that extends across both eyes.

The display (13.14-14) can be used to display images. Visual content displayed on the display (13.14-14) can be viewed by a user of the device (13.14-10). Displays within the device (13.14-10), such as the display (13.14-14), can be organic light emitting diode displays or other displays based on arrays of light emitting diodes, liquid crystal displays, LCoS displays, projectors or displays based on projecting light beams directly or indirectly onto a surface via special optics (e.g., digital micromirror devices), electrophoretic displays, plasma displays, electrowetting displays, microLED displays, or any other suitable displays.

The display (13.14-14) can present computer-generated content, such as virtual reality content and mixed reality content, to a user. Virtual reality content can be displayed in the absence of real-world content. Mixed reality content, which may sometimes be referred to as augmented reality content, may include computer-generated images overlaid on real-world images. The real-world images may be captured by a camera (e.g., a forward-facing camera) and merged with the overlaid computer-generated content, or an optical coupling system may be used to allow the computer-generated content to be overlaid on top of real-world images. As an example, a pair of mixed reality glasses or other augmented reality head-mounted displays may include a display device that presents images to the user via a beam splitter, prism, holographic coupler, or other optical coupler. Configurations in which the display (13.14-14) displays virtual reality content to the user via lenses are described herein as examples.

The input/output devices (13.14-22) may include sensors (13.14-16). Sensors (13.14-16) include, for example, 3D sensors (e.g., structured light sensors that use 2D digital image sensors to emit beams of light and collect image data for 3D images from light spots created when a target is illuminated by the beams of light, binocular 3D image sensors that collect 3D images using two or more cameras in a binocular imaging array, 3D LIDAR (Light Detection and Ranging) sensors, 3D radio frequency sensors, or other sensors that collect 3D image data), cameras (e.g., infrared and/or line-of-sight digital image sensors), gaze tracking sensors (e.g., gaze tracking systems based on image sensors, and, if desired, light sources that emit one or more beams of light that are then tracked using the image sensors after being reflected from the user's eyes), sensors such as contact sensors based on touch sensors, buttons, force sensors, switches, gas sensors, pressure sensors, moisture sensors, magnetic The device may include sensors, audio sensors (microphones), ambient light sensors, microphones for collecting voice commands and other audio input, sensors configured to collect information regarding motion, position, and/or orientation (e.g., accelerometers, gyroscopes, compasses, and/or inertial measurement units including all or a subset of one or two of these sensors), fingerprint sensors and other biometric sensors, optical position sensors (optical encoders), and/or other position sensors, e.g., linear position sensors, and/or other sensors.

User input and other information may be collected using sensors and other input devices within the input/output devices (13.14-22). If desired, the input/output devices (13.14-22) may include other devices (13.14-24), such as haptic output devices (e.g., vibration components), light-emitting diodes and other light sources, speakers such as ear speakers for generating audio output, and other electrical components. The device (13.14-10) may include circuits for receiving wireless power, circuits for wirelessly transmitting power to other devices, batteries and other energy storage devices (e.g., capacitors), joysticks, buttons, and/or other components.

The electronic device (13.14-10) may have housing structures (e.g., housing walls, straps, etc.), as illustrated by the exemplary support structures (13.14-26) of FIG. 523. In configurations where the electronic device (IO) is a head-mounted device (e.g., a pair of eyeglasses, goggles, a helmet, a hat, a headband, etc.), the support structures (13.14-26) may include head-mounted support structures (e.g., a helmet housing, head straps, temples within a pair of eyeglasses, goggle housing structures, and/or other head-mounted structures). Head-mounted support structures may be configured to be worn on a user's head during operation of the device (IO) and may support display(s) (13.14-14), sensors (13.14-16), other components (13.14-24), other input/output devices (13.14-22), and control circuitry (13.14-12).

In some embodiments, the support structures (13.14-26) may include a light-shielding nosepiece. The light-shielding nosepiece may be attached to the support structures (13.14-26), such as the main housing portion of the electronic device (13.14-10), and may rest on the user's nose while the device (13.14-10) is worn. The light-shielding nosepiece may be flexible, such as to be wrapped by fabric or other material, to allow the nosepiece to conform to the user's nose while maintaining sufficient rigidity to support the device (13.14-10) on the user's face while being worn (i.e., to maintain the shape of the device on the user's nose while being worn). If desired, the light-shielding nosepiece may also include stiffeners or other components that help maintain the nosepiece on the user's nose to prevent light from reaching the user's eyes. An example of an electronic device having a nosepiece is illustrated in FIG. 524.

As illustrated in FIG. 524, a head-mounted device (13.14-10) may include support structures (13.14-26) that may include a head-mounted housing (sometimes referred to as a main housing, a main housing unit, a head-mounted support structure, etc.). The housing may have walls or other structures that separate an interior housing region from an exterior region surrounding the housing. For example, the housing may have walls formed of polymers, glass, metal, and/or other materials. Electrical and optical components may be mounted in the housing. These components may include components such as integrated circuits, sensors, control circuitry, input/output devices, etc.

To present images to a user for viewing from eye boxes (e.g., eye boxes where a user's eyes are positioned when the device (13.14-10) is worn on the user's head), the device (13.14-10) may include displays and lenses. These components may be mounted on optical modules or other support structures within the housing to form respective left and right optical systems. For example, there may be a left display for presenting images from the left eye box to the user's left eye through the left lens, and a right display for presenting images from the right eye box to the user's right eye through the right lens.

If desired, the housing may have forward-facing components, such as cameras and other sensors, on the front side for collecting sensor measurements and other input, and may have a soft cushion on the opposite rear side of the housing. The rear side of the housing may have openings that allow the user to view images (image optics (13.14-32)) from the left and right optical systems (e.g., when the rear side of the housing is resting on the user's head).

If desired, the device (13.14-10) may have an adjustable strap or headband, and, if desired, other structures to help maintain the housing on the user's head (e.g., an over-the-head strap).

As illustrated in FIG. 524, when worn by a user, the device (13.14-10) may include a nosepiece, such as a nosepiece (13.14-28), that rests on the nasal region of the user's head (e.g., on the user's nose). In particular, the nosepiece (13.14-28) (sometimes referred to herein as a light shielding structure or light shielding nosepiece) may serve as an extension of the housing that rests on the user's nose and bridges between the user's opposing cheeks. If desired, the nosepiece (13.14-28) may be attached to the housing and/or may include one or more members formed from a portion of the housing. In some embodiments, the nosepiece (13.14-28) may be part of or attached to an optical seal that extends around a portion or all of a perimeter of the housing (e.g., the optical seal is attached to the housing around the perimeter). When the device (13.14-10) is in use, the optical seal is compressed against the user's face, preventing interference from ambient light. However, in general, the nosepiece (13.14-28) may be attached to the housing in any desired manner.

The nosepiece (13.14-28) may be configured as a light-shielding structure and thus may sometimes be referred to as a light-shielding structure (13.14-28) or a light-shielding nosepiece (13.14-28). As an example, it may be desirable to improve the viewing experience of the user when the device (13.14-10) is worn by the user by blocking external environmental light from entering the interior of the device (13.14-10) (e.g., entering the eye boxes). The nosepiece (13.14-28) may conform to the user's facial topology around the user's nose and block light from entering the eye boxes. In some exemplary configurations, the nosepiece (13.14-28) may be adjustable to accommodate different facial topologies of different users (e.g., portions of the nosepiece (13.14-28) may be differently deformed based on the nose shapes of the users).

A nosepiece (13.14-28) may be mounted to a housing portion of an electronic device (13.14-10), such as head-mounted support structures (13.14-26), at mounting points (13.14-30). The housing may include a housing frame extending along the periphery of the device (13.14-10). If desired, the housing frame may be overlapped by a cushioning member on the rear side of the housing facing the user. As an example, the cushioning member may include foam structures or other soft compressible structures attached to the housing frame. A fabric may overlap and extend over the housing frame and/or the cushioning member on the rear side of the housing. If desired, the fabric may surround only the cushioning member, or the cushioning member surrounded by the fabric may be removably coupled to the housing frame.

The mounting points (13.14-30) may be located at a lower portion of the housing frame (e.g., a lower portion of the support structures (13.14-26)). As examples, the mounting points (13.14-30) may include coupling mechanisms such as magnets, adhesives, hinges, or any other suitable coupling mechanisms.

In the example of FIG. 524, the nosepiece (13.14-28) is attached to the support structures (13.14-26) such that the nosepiece (13.14-28) extends into a portion of the support structures (13.14-26). This is merely exemplary. If desired, the housing frame, cushioning member, and/or fabric may be segmented into multiple sections to surround the nosepiece (13.14-28). As an example, the fabric-encased cushioning member may extend forward of the nosepiece (13.14-28), and the housing frame may extend behind the nosepiece (13.14-28). In general, the housing sections, cushioning member, and/or fabric may define an opening within which the nosepiece (13.14-28) is positioned.

In some exemplary embodiments, the nosepiece (13.14-28) may be removably coupled (via magnets) to the housing frame or other portions of the housing. In some exemplary embodiments, a portion of the nosepiece (13.14-28) may form an integral part of the housing frame and/or may not be removable from the housing.

Support structures (13.14-26) (e.g., housing frames) and nosepieces (13.14-28) (along with other desired structures) may define the periphery of the eye boxes of the device (13.14-10) where the user's eyes are positioned. Components such as displays, lenses, sensors, etc. may be overlapped and/or positioned within the eye boxes of the device (13.14-10) and may be surrounded by and/or mounted to the support structures (13.14-26) and/or nosepiece (13.14-28). As exemplarily illustrated in FIG. 524, the display (13.14-14) emits image light (13.14-32) through the lens into the eye box. The nosepiece (13.14-28) may be configured to block ambient light from outside the device (13.14-10) from entering the eye box and interfering with the image light (13.14-24). An example of a nosepiece that may be used in the device (13.14-10) is illustrated in FIG. 525.

As illustrated in FIG. 525, a nosepiece, such as nosepiece (13.14-28), may include an elastomeric material (13.14-34) (also referred to herein as an elastomeric layer (13.14-34)). The elastomeric material (13.14-34) may be any desired elastomeric material, such as thermoplastic polyurethane (TPU), nitrile butadiene rubber (NBR), or silicone (e.g., low durometer silicone). The elastomeric material (13.14-34) may have a thickness of greater than 0.1 mm, greater than 0.25 mm, greater than 0.5 mm, about 1 mm, less than 2 mm, less than 5 mm, or the like.

In some embodiments, the elastomer (13.14-34) may include perforations (13.14-36). The perforations (13.14-36) may allow the elastomer (13.14-34) to bend (in the horizontal left-right directions of FIG. 525) to accommodate the user's nose while maintaining sufficient rigidity to support the device (IO) on the user's nose (i.e., in the vertical up-down directions of FIG. 525). The rigidity of the elastomer (13.14-34) may also allow the elastomer (13.14-34) to be wrapped by a fabric (13.14-38) or other low force, high extensibility material.

The perforations (13.14-36) may be formed in any desired pattern. In the example of FIG. 525, the perforations (13.14-36) are formed as an array of perforations across the entire surface of the elastomer (13.14-34). The perforations (13.14-36) may be formed in a brick pattern as in FIG. 525, or in any other desired pattern. Additionally, any desired number of perforations (13.14-36) may be formed in the elastomer (13.14-34), such as at least one perforation, at least five perforations, or any other desired number of perforations. The perforations (13.14-36) may extend completely through the elastomer (13.14-34), or may extend partially through the elastomer (13.14-34).

The elastomer (13.14-34) may have a shape that generally conforms to the user's nose, such as a V-shape as illustrated in FIG. 525, or any other desired shape, such as a round or rectangular shape. The elastomer (13.14-34) may be covered by a fabric (13.14-38). In particular, the fabric (13.14-38) may overlap and/or encapsulate the elastomer (13.14-34) in a region (13.14-40). The fabric region (13.14-40) may have the same shape as the elastomer (13.14-34), as illustrated in FIG. 525, or may have a different shape than the elastomer (13.14-34). The fabric members (13.14-40 and/or 13.14-38) may serve as a light shielding member or layer for the light shielding structure (13.14-28). In particular, exemplary configurations in which the fabric (13.14-40/38) is a fabric cover (sometimes referred to as a fabric cover layer or cover layer) are described herein as exemplary examples. To serve as light shielding functions, the fabric cover may be formed of an opaque or light shielding material (e.g., black yarn), or may be formed of an underlying material coated with an opaque or light shielding material (e.g., black dye or ink). As examples, the fabric cover may be formed of any suitable type of fabric, such as a knitted fabric, a woven fabric, a braided fabric, etc.

The fabric (13.14-40) may be tented over the elastomeric material (13.14-34). Tenting of the fabric cover over the substructure may be achieved by the substructure contacting or otherwise supporting the fabric cover at one or more support points or areas as the fabric cover extends over one or more sides of the substructure. Tenting of the fabric cover over the substructure may cause the fabric cover to follow the general contours of the substructure, particularly around the support areas. If desired, differences in the contours of the fabric cover and of the substructure may exist, particularly in areas remote from the support areas, thereby allowing some portions of the fabric cover to be suspended in air and thus readily deflectable. As an example, the fabric cover may be deflectable to the boundary of the substructure (or even beyond the boundary of the substructure, if the boundary is defined by a flexible or deformable member).

The rigidity of the elastomer (13.14-34) maintained in the vertical direction by the perforations (13.14-36) may allow the elastomer (13.14-34) to be wrapped by the fabric (13.14-40) (or other low force, high extensibility fabric, or other low force, high extensibility material) without deformation. In other words, the elastomer (13.14-34) may be sufficiently rigid to maintain its shape while the fabric (13.14-40) is applied to and wrapped around the elastomer (13.14-34) (as well as to maintain its shape when the device is worn by a user), but sufficiently flexible so that it can conform to the nose of a user.

In such a manner, the fabric cover may have a three-dimensional shape (based on the contours of the substructure) that includes more confined portions (e.g., directly supported by the substructure) and less confined and more flexible or pliable portions (e.g., not directly supported by the substructure, suspended in air, etc.). These less confined portions (e.g., flexible fabric surfaces) may help form flexible boundaries, such as those for an opening configured to accommodate a user's nose.

As a specific illustrative example, the substructure may have surfaces defining an opening for accommodating a user's nose. The surfaces may be surrounded by peripheral edges. A fabric cover may be tented over the substructure such that the fabric cover is directly supported by the substructure along one or more of the peripheral edges of the substructure, and may be suspended in the air around the opening, thereby providing a fabric surface deflectable by the user's nose. This may help improve user comfort when the light-shielding structure is placed on the user's nose, as well as provide a more conformal fit.

Regardless of the shape of the fabric region (13.14-40), the fabric region (13.14-40) (and/or the elastomer (13.14-34)) may be bonded to the support structures (13.14-26) (e.g., a housing frame) using an adhesive (13.14-42). However, the use of the adhesive (13.14-42) is merely exemplary. The fabric (13.14-40) and/or the elastomer (13.14-34) may be formed integrally with the support structures (13.14-26) or may be attached to the support structures (13.14-26) using any desired attachment mechanism.

Although the nosepiece (13.14-28) is shown as including both an elastomer (13.14-34) and a fabric (13.14-40), this is merely exemplary. If desired, the nosepiece (13.14-28) may include the elastomer (13.14-34) without an overlapping fabric layer. In such a case, another layer, such as a polymer or rubber, may overlap the elastomer (13.14-34), or the elastomer (13.14-34) may be in direct contact with the user's nose when the device (13.14-10) is worn by the user. Alternatively, the nosepiece (13.14-28) may include the fabric (13.14-40) without the elastomer (13.14-34), if desired. In such cases, the fabric (13.14-40) may be a flat knit fabric to provide sufficient stretch over the user's nose while providing sufficient support for the device (13.14-10).

Although the fabric (13.14-38/40) is described as a fabric, this is for illustrative purposes only. In general, the fabric (13.14-38/40) may be any low strength, high elongation material, such as a low strength, high elongation fabric.

In some embodiments, the elastomeric body (13.14-34) may be rigid enough to support the device (13.14-10) on the user's nose (i.e., in the vertical direction of FIG. 525) and be wrapped by the fabric, although it may be desirable to add additional rigid or semi-rigid structures to the nosepiece. An exemplary example of a nosepiece having rigid structures is illustrated in FIG. 526.

As illustrated in FIG. 526, the nosepiece (13.14-28) may include a fabric (13.14-40) (which may cover an elastomeric layer, such as an elastomeric material (13.14-34)) and an adhesive (13.14-42), which may in turn attach the fabric (13.14-40) to a structural frame (13.14-43). The structural frame (13.14-43) may, for example, be a plastic frame. The structural frame (13.14-43) may provide additional rigidity to ensure that the nosepiece (13.14-28) maintains its shape and support when worn by a user.

Although Fig. 526 illustrates the use of adhesive (13.14-42), this is merely exemplary. Adhesive (13.14-42) may be omitted if desired. In some examples, elastomer (13.14-34) may be co-molded into structural frame (13.14-43). Alternatively, elastomer (13.14-34) may be fitted into a recessed portion of structural frame (13.14-43) or otherwise attached to structural frame (13.14-43).

Additionally, although FIG. 526 illustrates a structural frame (13.14-43) on three sides of the fabric (13.14-40)/elastomer (13.14-34), this is merely exemplary. The structural frame (13.14-43) may be attached to one side (e.g., the bottom side) of the fabric (13.14-40)/elastomer (13.14-34) or to any other desired number of sides. Regardless of the attachment of the structural frame (13.14-43) to the elastomer (13.14-34) and/or the fabric (13.14-40), the fabric (13.14-40) may extend over all or part of both the frame (13.14-43) and/or the elastomer (13.14-34). An example of a stack-up of nosepieces (13.14-28) is shown in Fig. 527.

As illustrated in FIG. 527, the nosepiece (13.14-28) may include a fabric (13.14-40) illustrated having fabric portions (13.14-40-1, 13.14-40-2) on either side of the elastomer (13.14-34). If desired, the fabric (13.14-40) may be bonded to the elastomer (13.14-34) at a periphery of the elastomer (13.14-34), which is illustrated as points (13.14-44) in FIG. 527. For example, the fabric (13.14-40) may be bonded to the elastomer (13.14-34) around a periphery of the elastomer layer (e.g., the entire periphery or a portion of the periphery). The fabric (13.14-40) may be bonded to the elastomer (13.14-34) using an adhesive or other desired attachment mechanism. In some instances, it may be desirable to allow the elastomer (13.14-34) to move to a greater degree, thus maintaining the elastomer (13.14-34) unbonded from the fabric (13.14-40). For example, the elastomer (13.14-34) may be completely enclosed by the fabric (13.14-40) and float within the fabric. In some embodiments, portions of the fabric (13.14-40) may be bonded directly to each other rather than to the elastomer (13.14-34). In this manner, the elastomer (13.14-34) may float within the fabric (13.14-40), which may allow the elastomer (13.14-34) to move more freely.

Because the nosepiece (13.14-28) is designed to block light from reaching the eye boxes of a user wearing the device (13.14-10), it may be desirable to ensure a tight fit between the nosepiece (13.14-28) and the user's nose, and a similar tight fit between the nosepiece (13.14-28) and the device (13.14-10). An example of an extension piece that may allow the nosepiece (13.14-28) to be tightly fitted with the device (13.14-10) is illustrated in FIG. 528.

As illustrated in FIG. 528, an extension piece (13.14-46) may be added beneath the nosepiece (13.14-28). In particular, if the user's nose bridge protrudes only a small amount, the nosepiece (13.14-28) may not reach the user's nose. Accordingly, the extension piece (13.14-46) may be attached between the support structures of the device (13.14-10), such as the support structures (13.14-26) and the nosepiece (13.14-28). The extension piece (13.14-28) may be formed of fabric, foam, plastic, and/or any other desired material. In some cases, the extension piece (13.14-28) may allow the nosepiece (13.14-28) to align with other light-blocking structures within the device (13.14-10), such as a foam member that fits against the user's face. In this manner, light may be prevented from reaching the user's eye boxes and interfering with the user's view of the display within the device (13.14-10).

In addition to or as an alternative to the extension piece (13.14-46), it may be desirable to ensure a close fit to the user's nose to prevent light from entering the user's eye boxes. Examples of nosepieces with additional structures to improve the fit to the user's nose are illustrated in FIGS. 529 and 530.

As illustrated in FIG. 529, the service loop (13.14-49) may be incorporated within the nosepiece (13.14-28). In particular, the service loop (13.14-49) (and, if desired, other portions of the nosepiece (13.14-28)) may be attached to supports (13.14-50-1, 13.14-50-2). The service loop (13.14-49) may be tightened and loosened as desired to conform the nosepiece (13.14-28) to the user's nose. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 529, the service loop (13.14-49) may be tightened to move the nosepiece (13.14-28) into position (13.14-28') by moving the nosepiece (13.14-28) downward in direction (13.14-56), rightward in direction (13.14-52), and leftward in direction (13.14-54) toward the user's nose. In this manner, the service loop (13.14-49) may allow the nosepiece (13.14-28) to fit more securely to the user's nose, thereby preventing light from entering the user's eye boxes through gaps between the nosepiece (13.14-28) and the nose.

Alternatively or additionally, the nosepiece (13.14-28) may include foam (13.14-48). The foam (13.14-48) may fill a gap between the nosepiece (13.14-28) and the user's nose and may be compressible to allow a secure fit between the nosepiece (13.14-28) and the nose. The foam (13.14-48) may be in direct contact with the user's nose (e.g., on a surface of a fabric layer, such as the fabric (13.14-40)), embedded within the nosepiece (13.14-28) (e.g., covered by a fabric, such as the fabric (13.14-40)), or otherwise attached to the nosepiece (13.14-28), as illustrated in FIG. 529.

Instead of the service loop (13.14-49), a deformable stiffener, such as a deformable stiffener (13.14-58), may be incorporated into the nosepiece (13.14-28). As illustrated in FIG. 530, the deformable stiffener (13.14-58) may allow the nosepiece (13.14-28) to be adjusted in directions (13.14-52, 13.14-54, 13.14-56) toward the user's nose to conform the nosepiece (13.14-28) to the user's nose at position (13.14-28'). The deformable reinforcement (13.14-58) may be formed within the nosepiece (13.14-28) as illustrated in FIG. 530 (i.e., covered by the fabric), or may be formed on a surface of the fabric (e.g., an inner or outer surface of the fabric (13.14-40)). Although not illustrated in FIG. 530, a gap-filling foam, such as the foam (13.14-48) of FIG. 529, may be incorporated within or on the nosepiece (13.14-28) in addition to the deformable reinforcement (13.14-58).

In some embodiments, to ensure that the nosepiece (13.14-28) is tightly sealed to the user's nose, internal components of the device (13.14-10), such as fans, may be used to move air toward the nosepiece (13.14-28), thereby sealing the nosepiece (13.14-28) around the user's nose.

In addition to improving the fit of the nosepiece (13.14-28) to prevent light from entering the user's eye boxes, it may also be desirable to incorporate layers into the nosepiece (13.14-28) that improve user comfort. Examples of various modifications that can be made to the nosepiece (13.14-28) to improve user comfort are illustrated in FIGS. 531a through 531g.

As illustrated in FIG. 531A, a nosepiece (e.g., nosepiece 13.14-28) comprising an elastomer (13.14-34) and a fabric (13.14-40) may have a rolled edge and may approach the user's nose at a shallow contact angle to conform to the curved portion of the nose (13.14-60). The rolled edge may prevent the elastomer (13.14-34) from digging into the user's skin on the nose (13.14-60), while the shallower contact angle may allow the nosepiece to move over the user's nose rather than directly hitting the user's nose. Thus, by having a rolled edge and/or a shallower contact angle, the nosepiece (13.14-28) may improve comfort for a user of the device (13.14-10).

Alternatively or additionally, the nosepiece may include a foam, such as foam (13.14-62), between part or all of the elastomer (13.14-34) and the fabric (13.14-40), as illustrated in FIG. 531b. In particular, the foam (13.14-62) may be at an edge portion of the nosepiece that contacts the user's nose, thereby preventing the elastomer (13.14-34) from injuring or causing discomfort to the user's nose when the nosepiece is pushed against the nose.

In some examples, it may be desirable to have a series of openings in the elastomer (13.14-34) that may or may not be filled with different materials, such as foam. For example, in FIG. 531c, the openings (13.14-64) may be provided in a portion of the nosepiece that will contact the user's nose. The openings (13.14-64) may be through openings, partial openings, may be filled with another material, such as foam, or may otherwise be more flexible than the surrounding areas of the elastomer (13.14-34). When the nosepiece pushes against the user's nose, the openings (13.14-64) may crumple, thereby preventing or reducing discomfort to the user.

If desired, a portion of the fabric may extend from the portion that contacts the user's nose to provide additional buffering between the nose and the elastomer (13.14-34). As illustrated in FIG. 531d, the fabric portion (13.14-66) may extend from the fabric (13.14-40). When worn by a user, the fabric portion (13.14-66) may first contact the user's nose, thereby increasing the amount of fabric between the nose and the elastomer (13.14-34), which may improve user comfort. In some examples, the fabric portion (13.14-66) may be a hemmed edge of the fabric (13.14-40).

If desired, at least some portions of the elastomeric material (13.14-34) that would otherwise contact the user's nose may be cut off and replaced with a more flexible material, such as foam. As illustrated in FIG. 531e, the foam portions (13.14-68) may replace portions of the elastomeric material (13.14-34) that would otherwise contact the user's nose. While the fabric (13.14-40) does not cover the foam portions (13.14-68) of FIG. 531e, the fabric (13.14-40) may overlap the foam portions (13.14-68), if desired.

In addition to or instead of the variations of FIGS. 531a-531e in which the edge portion of the nosepiece is modified to prevent the elastomeric material from causing discomfort to the user's nose, the lower portion of the nosepiece may be modified. As illustrated in FIG. 531f, a segmented material (13.14-69) may be added to the lower surface of the nosepiece (13.14-28). For example, the segmented material (13.14-69) may contact the top of the user's nose (i.e., the nose bridge) and prevent the nosepiece (13.14-28) from making direct contact with the nose, which may cause discomfort. The material (13.14-69) may be foam or elastomeric flaps.

Although FIG. 531f depicts the material (13.14-69) as segmented and non-overlapping, the material (13.14-69) may be segmented and overlapping, or may be a single connected piece of material, if desired. For example, in FIG. 531g, a foam (13.14-73) may be provided between the nosepiece (13.14-28) and the user's nose while the device (13.14-10) is worn. If desired, an optional deformable stiffener (13.14-71) may be provided on the lower surface of the nosepiece (13.14-28) to improve the fit of the nosepiece (13.14-28) on the user's nose. When the reinforcement (13.14-71) is included, the foam (13.14-73) can also prevent the reinforcement (13.14-71) from coming into direct contact with the user's nose and causing discomfort.

All of the examples in FIGS. 531A through 531G are merely illustrative examples of how to improve user comfort while ensuring a secure fit of the nosepiece to the user's nose. The examples are not limiting and may be implemented individually or together in any combination. Regardless of whether any of the structures in FIGS. 531A through 531G are used, it may be desirable to reinforce portions of the nosepiece (13.14-28). While the use of a structural frame was described with respect to FIG. 526, in some cases such a frame may add unnecessary bulk or excessive rigidity to the nosepiece (13.14-28). Therefore, a semi-rigid member may be used. An example of the use of a semi-rigid member on a nosepiece is illustrated in FIG. 532.

As illustrated in FIG. 532, a nosepiece, such as nosepiece (13.14-28), may include portions (13.14-70, 13.14-72). Portion (13.14-70) may include an elastomeric material, such as elastomer (13.14-34), and/or a fabric, such as fabric portion (13.14-72), may be bonded to portion (13.14-70) and may include a semi-rigid member. In particular, the semi-rigid member may be formed on a lower portion of the nosepiece (13.14-28) (i.e., toward the lower portion of the user's nose when the device (13.14-10) is worn) and may provide additional rigidity to the nosepiece (13.14-28). The semi-rigid members may be formed of any desired material, such as rubber or plastic. In this way, the nosepiece (13.14-28) can remain sufficiently flexible to conform to the shape of the user's nose while the device conforms to the shape of the user's nose and retains its shape after the device is worn by the user.

The foregoing is merely exemplary, and various modifications may be made to the described embodiments. The above-described embodiments may be implemented individually or in any combination.

13.15: Removable facial interface

According to some aspects of the present disclosure, a head-mounted device (HMD) may include a display; a facial interface frame at least partially surrounding the display; a removable facial interface attached to the facial interface frame; a first attachment mechanism attached to one of the facial interface frame or the removable facial interface; and a second attachment mechanism attached to the other of the facial interface frame or the removable facial interface. In some examples, the removable facial interface may be attached to the facial interface frame by the first attachment mechanism and the second attachment mechanism.

In some examples, the first attachment mechanism and the second attachment mechanism may include magnets. In some examples, the first attachment mechanism may include a spherical magnetic receptacle. The second attachment mechanism may include a spherical magnet. In some examples, the first attachment mechanism may include a capsule dish-shaped magnetic receptacle. The second attachment mechanism may include a spherical magnet. In some examples, the first attachment mechanism may include a magnetic post. The second attachment mechanism may include a magnetic protrusion. The first attachment mechanism may be configured to slidably engage and disengage with the second attachment mechanism.

In some examples, the first attachment mechanism and the second attachment mechanism may include hook-and-loop fasteners. In some examples, the first attachment mechanism may include a post and a flange on the post. The second attachment mechanism may include a spring-snap feature. The spring-snap feature may include an opening; a detent adjacent to the opening; and a spring attached to the detent.

In some examples, the first attachment mechanism may include a receptacle and a first magnet within the receptacle. The second attachment mechanism may include a protrusion and a second magnet within the protrusion. The protrusion may have a first shape complementary to a second shape of the receptacle.

In some examples, the first attachment mechanism and the second attachment mechanism may include interlocking elastic fasteners. In some examples, the first attachment mechanism may include a suction cup. The second attachment mechanism may include a curved surface shaped to interface with the suction cup.

In some examples, the removable facial interface may be C-shaped. The facial interface frame may include a C-shaped base complementary to the removable facial interface.

In some examples, the removable facial interface may include a fabric material surrounding one of the first attachment mechanism or the second attachment mechanism. The facial interface frame may include a compressible material surrounding the other of the first attachment mechanism or the second attachment mechanism. The first attachment mechanism may be directly attached to the second attachment mechanism.

According to some aspects, a wearable electronic device may include a display; a facial interface frame physically coupled to the display; and a removable facial interface removably attached to a connector of the facial interface frame by a first attachment mechanism. The facial interface frame may include a frame partially surrounding the display; a connector attached to the frame; and a base attached to the connector. The connector may extend through the base.

In some examples, the first attachment mechanism may include a magnetic attachment mechanism. The magnetic attachment mechanism may include a post on one of the connector or the removable facial interface and a receptacle on the other of the connector or the removable facial interface.

In some examples, the first attachment mechanism may include a hook-and-loop attachment mechanism. The hook-and-loop attachment mechanism may include a post on one of the connector or the removable facial interface and a receptacle on the other of the connector or the removable facial interface.

In some examples, the wearable electronic device may further include a compressible member attached to the base. The compressible member may surround the connector, and the connector may be exposed through the compressible member.

In some embodiments, an optical seal for a head-mounted device may include a facial interface frame. The optical seal may include a base; a compressible portion; and a magnet attached to the base.

In some examples, the optical seal may further include a hook-and-loop fastener attached to the base. In some examples, the optical seal may further include an interlocking fastener attached to the base. In some examples, the optical seal may further include a receptacle attached to the base.

The following disclosure relates to wearable electronic devices (e.g., head-mounted devices (HMDs)) including those that include a removable facial interface. Prolonged use of a head-mounted device can cause components of the head-mounted device to wear out and become dirty. In particular, components of the head-mounted device that contact a user's face can wear out and become dirty due to contact with the user's face. It may be desirable to clean portions of the head-mounted device that contact the user's face to remove oils, sweat, and the like. However, a head-mounted device may include sensitive components, small components, and oddly shaped components that are difficult to clean in situ. Additionally, to obtain a more comfortable fit for certain users based on other user preferences, etc., it may be desirable to replace portions of the head-mounted device that contact the user's face as those portions wear out.

A head-mounted device of the present disclosure includes a removable facial interface. As discussed in detail below, the removable facial interface can be attached to the facial interface frame via a variety of attachment mechanisms, such as magnets, interlocking features, sliding features, hook-and-loop features (e.g., Velcro), spring snaps, suction features, bi-stable features, extension features, reusable adhesives, mating posts, and combinations thereof. The removable facial interface can be easily removed from the facial interface frame and reinstalled on the facial interface frame to allow the removable facial interface to be cleaned, replaced, etc. Allowing the removable facial interface to be removed and cleaned increases the life of the removable facial interface. Replacing the removable facial interface improves the life of the head-mounted device, reduces user costs, provides users with a choice of removable facial interfaces based on fit and personal preferences, and provides additional benefits.

These and other examples are discussed below with reference to FIGS. 533a through 547c. However, one of ordinary skill in the art will readily recognize that the detailed description provided herein with respect to such drawings is for illustrative purposes only and should not be construed as limiting. Moreover, as used herein, a system, method, article, component, feature, or sub-feature that includes at least one of the first option, the second option, or the third option should be understood to refer to a system, method, article, component, feature, or sub-feature that can include one of each of the listed options (e.g., only one of the first option, only one of the second option, or only one of the third option), multiple of a single listed option (e.g., two or more of the first option), two options simultaneously (e.g., one of the first option and one of the second option), or a combination thereof (e.g., two of the first option and one of the second option).

FIG. 533A illustrates a block diagram of a head-mounted device (HMD) (13.15-100) including a display (13.15-106), a frame (13.15-104), a device seal (13.15-116), and a retention band (13.15-118). The display (13.15-106) may include one or more optical lenses or display screens configured to be positioned in front of the user's eyes. The display (13.15-106) may be configured to present augmented reality visualizations, virtual reality visualizations, or other suitable visualizations to the user. The display (13.15-106) may be positioned at least partially within or on the frame (13.15-104). The frame (13.15-104) may be a housing for the display (13.15-106). The device seal (13.15-116) may be physically coupled to the frame (13.15-104). A retention band (13.15-118) may be physically coupled to the device seal (13.15-116) and/or the frame (13.15-104) and may be used to secure the HMD (13.15-100) on the user's head. In some examples, the device seal (13.15-116) includes the frame (13.15-104) (e.g., the frame (13.15-104) is part of the device seal (13.15-116)).

The device seal (13.15-116) includes a facial interface frame (13.15-112), a removable facial interface (13.15-110), a cover (13.15-114), and electrical components (e.g., sensors (13.15-120)). The device seal (13.15-116) may also be referred to as an optical seal. In some examples, the device seal (13.15-116) may refer to a portion of the HMD (13.15-100) that engages or shields the user's face. The device seal (13.15-116) may include portions of the HMD (13.15-100) that conform to, contact with, or press against areas of the user's face (e.g., a facial interface frame (13.15-112) and a removable facial interface (13.15-110)).

The removable facial interface (13.15-110) refers to the portion of the HMD (13.15-100) that comes into direct contact with the user's face. The facial interface frame (13.15-112) refers to the portion of the HMD (13.15-100) to which the removable facial interface (13.15-110) is attached and which is physically coupled between the removable facial interface (13.15-110) and the frame (13.15-104). The removable facial interface (13.15-110) and/or the facial interface frame (13.15-112) may also be referred to as a facial track. The removable facial interface (13.15-110) and the facial interface frame (13.15-112) may conform to regions of the user's face (e.g., compress against them and take their shape). In some examples, the removable facial interface (13.15-110) and facial interface frame (13.15-112) comprise a flexible (or semi-flexible) material that extends over the forehead, partially surrounds the eyes, and contacts the zygomatic and maxillary regions of the user's face.

In some examples, the facial interface frame (13.15-112) may be formed of a relatively rigid or stiff material, while the removable facial interface (13.15-110) may be formed of a relatively soft and deformable elastomeric material. In some examples, the facial interface frame (13.15-112) may be formed of plastics, metals, polymers, combinations thereof, and the like. The removable facial interface (13.15-110) may be formed of plastics, metals, polymers, fabrics, foams, rubbers, silicones, elastomers, hydrogels, combinations thereof, and the like. In some examples, the removable facial interface (13.15-110) may include reinforcement, which may be formed of metals, plastics, polymers, combinations thereof, and the like. The removable facial interface (13.15-110) may include a flexible material surrounding a reinforcement, which may be formed of rubbers, foams, polymers, silicones, elastomers, hydrogen gels, or combinations thereof. The flexible material may be formed around the reinforcement, such as by overmolding. The removable facial interface (13.15-110) may further include a fabric material surrounding the flexible material. The fabric material may be wrapped around the flexible material. The reinforcement may provide a desired degree of rigidity to the removable facial interface (13.15-110). The flexible material may be flexible or semi-flexible and may be provided to increase user comfort. The fabric material may be configured to contact the user's skin and may also be provided to increase user comfort.

The removable facial interface (13.15-110) can be attached to the facial interface frame (13.15-112) via a variety of attachment mechanisms. For example, the attachment mechanisms can include magnets, interlocking features, sliding features, hook-and-loop features (e.g., Velcro), spring snaps, suction features, bi-stable features, stretch features, reusable adhesives, mating posts, combinations thereof, and the like. The attachment mechanisms can be provided on both the removable facial interface (13.15-110) and the facial interface frame (13.15-112). For example, a male attachment mechanism can be provided on the removable facial interface (13.15-110) and a female attachment mechanism can be provided on the facial interface frame (13.15-112), or vice versa. The attachment mechanisms can be self-aligning or can involve user-assisted alignment. The attachment mechanisms may be configured to allow the removable facial interface (13.15-110) to be removed from and attached to the facial interface frame (13.15-112) with one-handed movements. Each of the attachment mechanisms may either reference the removable facial interface (13.15-110) relative to the facial interface frame (13.15-112), or may allow the removable facial interface (13.15-110) to float or move relative to the facial interface frame (13.15-112). Each of the attachment mechanisms may have variable shapes and/or sizes around the peripheries of the removable facial interface (13.15-110) and the facial interface frame (13.15-112), which may improve the ability to replace different removable facial interfaces (13.15-110) and facial interface frames (13.15-112). More specifically, variable shapes and/or sizes of the attachment mechanisms around the peripheries of the removable facial interface (13.15-110) and the facial interface frame (13.15-112) may allow removable facial interfaces (13.15-110) and facial interface frames (13.15-112) of different shapes to be connected to each other.

Providing a removable facial interface (13.15-110) and facial interface frame (13.15-112) allows the removable facial interface (13.15-110) to be easily removed and cleaned. The removable facial interface (13.15-110) can be replaced based on wear, user preferences, etc. For example, specific removable facial interfaces (13.15-110) can be provided based on different facial structures of different users. The removable facial interfaces (13.15-110) can be provided based on different intended user uses, such as a specific removable facial interface (13.15-110) designed for sports use. Providing a removable facial interface (13.15-110) allows the portion of the HMD (13.15-100) that experiences the most wear to be inexpensively and easily replaced.

The cover (13.15-114) may include a seal, such as an environmental seal, a dust seal, an air seal, an optical seal, etc. The cover (13.15-114) may be positioned in the gap between the display (13.15-106) and the user's face. The cover (13.15-114) may form an eye box that allows the user to view the display (13.15-106). It will be understood that the term "seal" may include partial seals or blockers in addition to complete seals. For example, the seal may be a partial optical seal that blocks some ambient light. In some examples, the seal may be a complete optical seal that blocks all ambient light when the HMD (13.15-100) is worn.

The cover (13.15-114) may be a non-rigid or deformable woven fabric. The cover (13.15-114) may be elastically deformable. In some examples, the cover (13.15-114) may be formed of a plastic, rubber, polymeric material, or the like. The cover (13.15-114) may be a decorative fabric material having extensibility and may feature an open mesh pattern. In some examples, the cover (13.15-114) may be rigid. Providing a removable facial interface (13.15-110) separate from the cover (13.15-114) allows the covering materials of the cover (13.15-114) and the removable facial interface (13.15-110) to be formed of different materials, for example, the cover (13.15-114) to be formed of a decorative material and the removable facial interface (13.15-110) to be formed of a comfortable material. In some examples, the coverings of the cover (13.15-114) and the removable facial interface (13.15-110) may be formed of the same materials.

The device seal (13.15-116) may be removably attached to the frame (13.15-104). The device seal (13.15-116) may be electrically coupled to the display (13.15-106). The device seal (13.15-116) may include various electrical components, such as sensors (13.15-120). The sensors (13.15-120) may include various sensors, such as sensors that collect user data or environmental data. In some examples, the sensors (13.15-120) may collect biometric information. The sensors (13.15-120) may transmit signals to other components of the HMD (13.15-100), such as the display (13.15-106). The sensors (13.15-120) can transmit signals to various outputs, such as outputs configured to perform actions in response to information collected by the sensors (13.15-120).

FIG. 533b illustrates a plan view of an HMD (13.15-100). The HMD (13.15-100) of FIG. 533b may be substantially similar to the HMD (13.15-100) described with respect to FIG. 533a and may include some or all of its features. The HMD (13.15-100) includes a display (also referred to as a display unit) (13.15-106) and a retention band (13.15-118). In some examples, the display (13.15-106) includes an opaque, partially transparent, transparent, or translucent screen including any number of lenses for presenting visual data to a user. The display (13.15-106) may include any number of internal electronic components (13.15-108). The HMD (13.15-100) can be mounted on the user's head (13.15-102) using a retention band (13.15-118).

The HMD (13.15-100) further includes a frame (13.15-104) (also referred to as a housing), a facial interface frame (13.15-112), a removable facial interface (13.15-110), and a cover (13.15-114). The frame (13.15-104) can be physically coupled to the display (13.15-106). The frame (13.15-104) can at least partially border one or more edges of the display (13.15-106). One end of the cover (13.15-114) can be attached to the frame (13.15-104), and an opposite end of the cover (13.15-114) can be attached to the facial interface frame (13.15-112). The facial interface frame (13.15-112) and the removable facial interface (13.15-110) provide an interface between the user's head (13.15-102) and the frame (13.15-104). The combination of the frame (13.15-104), the facial interface frame (13.15-112), the removable facial interface (13.15-110), and the cover (13.15-114) can form a device seal (13.15-116). However, it will be appreciated that the device seal (13.15-116) can include fewer or additional components than those listed or illustrated.

The HMD (13.15-100) may be worn on the user's head (13.15-102) such that the display (13.15-106) is positioned on the user's face and in front of one or both of the user's eyes. The display (13.15-106) may be physically coupled to a retention band (13.15-118) and/or a device seal (13.15-116). In some examples, the retention band (13.15-118) may be positioned against and in contact with the sides of the user's head (13.15-102). In some examples, the retention band (13.15-118) may be positioned at least partially over the user's ear or ears. In some examples, the retention band (13.15-118) may be positioned adjacent to the user's ear or ears. The retention band (13.15-118) may extend around the user's head (13.15-102). In this manner, the display (13.15-106) and the retention band (13.15-118) may form a loop configured to retain the HMD (13.15-100) on the user's head (13.15-102). However, it should be understood that this configuration is only one example of how the components of the HMD (13.15-100) may be arranged. In some examples, a different number of connector straps and/or retention bands may be included. Although the HMD (13.15-100) is referred to as an HMD, it should be understood that the terms wearable device, wearable electronic device, HMD device, and/or HMD system may be used to refer to any wearable device, including smart glasses.

In some examples, the frame (13.15-104) is physically coupled to the facial interface frame (13.15-112). A removable facial interface (13.15-110) is removably attached to the facial interface frame (13.15-112). The removable facial interface (13.15-110) can contact a user's head (13.15-102), such as the user's face. In some examples, the cover (13.15-114) can be a light-blocking component that extends between the frame (13.15-104) and the removable facial interface (13.15-110), for example, along portions of the facial interface frame (13.15-112). The cover (13.15-114) may cover or surround the periphery of the frame (13.15-104) and/or the facial interface frame (13.15-112).

The cover (13.15-114) may be formed of cloth, fabric, woven material, plastic, rubber, or any other suitable opaque or semi-opaque material. In some examples, the cover (13.15-114) is flexible and has the ability to be repeatedly stretched, compressed, and deformed. The cover (13.15-114) may be elastically or inelastically deformable. The facial interface frame (13.15-112), the cover (13.15-114), and the removable facial interface (13.15-110) may be configured to block external light and limit the user's peripheral view. In some examples, the cover (13.15-114) and the facial interface frame (13.15-112) are the same or are part of an integral component.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 533a and 533b ) may be incorporated into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings, including any of FIGS. 533a and 533b , alone or in any combination. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 533a and 533b , alone or in any combination.

FIG. 534A illustrates a perspective view of a device seal (13.15-200). The device seal (13.15-200) may be substantially similar to the device seals described herein, such as the device seal (13.15-116), and may include some or all of their features. The device seal (13.15-200) may be implemented on an HMD, such as the HMD (13.15-100) described with reference to FIGS. 533A and 533B. The device seal (13.15-200) may include a removable facial interface (13.15-202), a facial interface frame (13.15-204), and a cover (13.15-206). The removable facial interface (13.15-202), facial interface frame (13.15-204), and cover (13.15-206) may be substantially similar to the removable facial interface (13.15-110), facial interface frame (13.15-112), and cover (13.15-114), respectively, and may include some or all of their features. The cover (13.15-206) may be included in the device seal (13.15-200) to provide a seal between the device seal (13.15-200) and an external environment.

A facial interface frame (13.15-204) may include a frame (13.15-210), connectors (13.15-212), a base (13.15-214), and a compressible portion (13.15-216). The frame (13.15-210) may be physically coupled to a display of an HMD, and the frame (13.15-210) may be configured to provide an interface between the display and the facial interface frame (13.15-204). A removable facial interface (13.15-202) may be removably attached to the base (13.15-214), and the base (13.15-214) may be configured to provide an interface between the removable facial interface (13.15-202) and the facial interface frame (13.15-204). The connectors (13.15-212) may be configured to provide a desired distance between the display and the user's eyes when the HMD is worn by the user. The connectors (13.15-212) and/or the base (13.15-214) may include attachment mechanisms used to attach the removable facial interface (13.15-202) to the facial interface frame (13.15-204).

The compressible portion (13.15-216) may be incorporated into the facial interface frame (13.15-204) to fill the gap between the base (13.15-214) and the removable facial interface (13.15-202), thereby providing improved user comfort. The compressible portion (13.15-216) may also be referred to as a compressible member or a compressible material. In some examples, connectors (13.15-212) (e.g., attachment mechanisms) may extend through the compressible portion (13.15-216). The compressible portion (13.15-216) may surround portions of the connectors (13.15-212) that extend through the compressible portion (13.15-216). The connectors (13.15-212) may also extend through the base (13.15-214), and attachment mechanisms provided on the connector (13.15-212) may be exposed through both the compressible portion (13.15-216) and the base (13.15-214) for access and connection. In some examples, the compressible portion (13.15-216) may comprise a foam material. In some examples, the compressible portion (13.15-216) may comprise materials having properties that impart flexibility, ductility, compressibility, deformability, and the like. Examples of materials that may be used for the compressible portion (13.15-216) include silicones, polymers, elastomers, hydrogels, combinations thereof, and the like. The compressible portion (13.15-216) may be formed by molding, printing, casting, and the like. In some examples, attachment mechanisms, such as peripheral attachments, may be incorporated into the compressible portion (13.15-216). The compressible portion (13.15-216) provides a ductile and flexible deformable interface between the removable facial interface (13.15-202) and rigid components of the removable facial interface (13.15-202), such as the frame (13.15-210), connectors (13.15-212), and base (13.15-214). Such an interface provides improved user comfort when the HMD is worn.

The removable facial interface (13.15-202) is a removable component configured to contact a user's face. The removable facial interface (13.15-202) may be formed of compliant and comfortable materials. The removable facial interface (13.15-202) is configured to be easily removed from and attached to the facial interface frame (13.15-204). This allows the removable facial interface (13.15-202) to be removed, cleaned, replaced, and the like. In some examples, the attachment mechanisms used to attach the removable facial interface (13.15-202) to the facial interface frame (13.15-204) may be simple mechanisms that allow the removable facial interface (13.15-202) to be removed from and attached to the facial interface frame (13.15-204) in a one-handed manner. Alignment features may be provided on the removable facial interface (13.15-202) and/or the facial interface frame (13.15-204) to assist in alignment of the removable facial interface (13.15-202) with respect to the facial interface frame (13.15-204). Providing the removable facial interface (13.15-202) as a removable component allows the removable facial interface (13.15-202) to be easily cleaned, replaced as a result of wear, replaced due to user preferences, etc. This reduces maintenance costs for HMDs that include the removable facial interface (13.15-202).

The removable facial interface (13.15-202) may be formed of a relatively flexible material, while the components of the facial interface frame (13.15-204) are formed of relatively rigid materials. This allows the removable facial interface (13.15-202) to conform to the shape of the facial interface frame (13.15-204) and to the shape of the user's face or head when the user wears the HMD. As illustrated in FIG. 534a, the base (13.15-214), the compressible portion (13.15-216), and the removable facial interface (13.15-202) may be C-shaped and may have corresponding shapes. In other words, the removable facial interface (13.15-202) is C-shaped, and the base (13.15-214) and the compressible portion (13.15-216) are also C-shaped and complementary to the C-shaped removable facial interface (13.15-202). This provides a visual cue to the user that the removable facial interface (13.15-202) is about to be attached to the base (13.15-214) when the removable facial interface (13.15-202) is removed from the base (13.15-214). In some examples, the attachment mechanisms on the removable facial interface (13.15-202) and the facial interface frame (13.15-204) may be visible when the removable facial interface (13.15-202) is removed from the facial interface frame (13.15-204), which provides additional visual cues as to how the removable facial interface (13.15-202) is intended to attach to the facial interface frame (13.15-204). Furthermore, upon viewing the attachment mechanisms on the facial interface frame (13.15-204), a user may perceive that something is missing from the facial interface frame (13.15-204) when the removable facial interface (13.15-202) is removed from the facial interface frame (13.15-204).

FIG. 534b illustrates a perspective view of a facial interface frame (13.15-204). The facial interface frame (13.15-204) may include a frame (13.15-210), connectors (13.15-212), and a base (13.15-214). The frame (13.15-210), connectors (13.15-212), and base (13.15-214) of the facial interface frame (13.15-204) may be formed of relatively rigid materials, such as plastics, metals, polymers, combinations thereof, and the like. In some examples, the base (13.15-214) may be formed of a relatively flexible material, such that the base (13.15-214) is allowed to flex when an HMD including the facial interface frame (13.15-204) is worn by a user. In some examples, the frame (13.15-210), connectors (13.15-212), and/or base (13.15-214) may include rigid materials that may be coated with relatively soft materials such as polymers, fabrics, foams, rubbers, silicones, elastomers, hydrogels, combinations thereof, or the like to increase user comfort.

The frame (13.15-210) can provide an interface between the display of the HMD and the facial interface frame (13.15-204). For example, the frame (13.15-210) can be physically coupled to the display of the HMD and can hold the display in a desired position. The connectors (13.15-212) can control the distance between the display and the user's face. For example, depending on the length of the connectors (13.15-212), the display can be positioned closer to or further from the user's face. The base (13.15-214) and/or the connectors (13.15-212) can provide an interface between the facial interface frame (13.15-204) and the removable facial interface. For example, attachment mechanisms may be included on the base (13.15-214) and/or the connectors (13.15-212) and may be used to removably attach a removable facial interface to the base (13.15-214) and/or the connectors (13.15-212).

In some examples, post attachments may be provided on the connectors (13.15-212) and peripheral attachments may be provided on the base (13.15-214). As discussed in detail below, the post attachments and corresponding attachment mechanisms on the removable facial interface may be configured to remain fixed with respect to one another or to have limited movement when the removable facial interface is mounted to the facial interface frame (13.15-204). The peripheral attachments and corresponding attachment mechanisms on the removable facial interface may be configured to slide with respect to one another when the removable facial interface is mounted to the facial interface frame (13.15-204). Including both post attachments and peripheral attachments allows the removable facial interface to be securely mounted on the facial interface frame (13.15-204) while allowing the removable facial interface to comfortably conform to a user's face.

FIG. 534c illustrates a perspective view of portions of a removable facial interface (13.15-202) and a facial interface frame (13.15-204). The removable facial interface (13.15-202) may include a body portion (13.15-220), a side mounting portion (13.15-222), a top mounting portion (13.15-224), and a mounting area (13.15-226). The body portion (13.15-220) may be formed of materials such as plastics, metals, polymers, fabrics, foams, rubbers, silicones, elastomers, hydrogels, combinations thereof, and the like. The facial interface frame (13.15-204) may include a frame (13.15-210), connectors (13.15-212), and a base (13.15-214).

The side mount portion (13.15-222), the top mount portion (13.15-224), and the mounting area (13.15-226) are examples of attachment mechanisms that may be included in the removable facial interface (13.15-202). The side mount portion (13.15-222), the top mount portion (13.15-224), and the mounting area (13.15-226) may be used to removably attach the removable facial interface (13.15-202) to the facial interface frame (13.15-204). In some examples, post attachment portions may be provided on the connectors (13.15-212) corresponding to the side mount portion (13.15-222) and the top mount portion (13.15-224). The peripheral attachment portion may be provided on the base (13.15-214) corresponding to the mounting area (13.15-226). Specifically, when the removable facial interface (13.15-202) is aligned with and mounted to the facial interface frame (13.15-204), the side mounting portion (13.15-222) and the top mounting portion (13.15-224) are aligned with the corresponding post attachment portions on the connectors (13.15-212), and the mounting area (13.15-226) is aligned with the corresponding peripheral attachment portions on the base (13.15-214).

The side mount portion (13.15-222), the top mount portion (13.15-224), and the corresponding post attachment portions of the connectors (13.15-212) may include attachment mechanisms configured to remain fixed relative to one another or to have relatively little movement relative to one another (e.g., the attachment mechanisms may float relative to one another). In some examples, the side mount portion (13.15-222) and the corresponding post attachment portion may be configured to remain fixed relative to one another, and the top mount portion (13.15-224) and the corresponding post attachment portion may be configured to have some movement relative to one another. In some examples, the side mounts (13.15-222), the top mounts (13.15-224), and the corresponding post attachments may include magnets, interlocking features, sliding features, hook-and-loop features (e.g., Velcro), spring snaps, suction features, bi-stable features, elongation features, reusable adhesives, mating posts, combinations thereof, and the like. The posts and corresponding holes or other self-aligning features may be included in the side mounts (13.15-222), the top mounts (13.15-224), and the post attachments to align the removable facial interface (13.15-202) with the facial interface frame (13.15-204). Male features may be provided on the side mounts (13.15-222) and the top mounts (13.15-224) and corresponding female features may be provided on the post attachments of the facial interface frame (13.15-204), or vice versa. By using prescribed attachment mechanisms and fixing the positions of the side mounts (13.15-222) and the top mounts (13.15-224) relative to the post attachments, the removable facial interface (13.15-202) may be aligned with the facial interface frame (13.15-204). Furthermore, the relative positions of the removable facial interface (13.15-202) and the facial interface frame (13.15-204) may be fixed to each other during use of the HMD by a user. This prevents misalignment of the removable facial interface (13.15-202) and facial interface frame (13.15-204) from negatively impacting the user experience when using the HMD.

The mounting area (13.15-226) and the corresponding peripheral attachment portions of the facial interface frame (13.15-204) may include attachment mechanisms configured to slide relative to one another. For example, the mounting area (13.15-226) and the corresponding peripheral attachment portions may include longitudinal interlocking features, rows of interlocking features, rows of magnets, lengths of flexible magnets, lengths of hook-and-loop fasteners, combinations thereof, and the like. Male features may be provided in the mounting area (13.15-226) and corresponding female features may be provided in the peripheral attachment portions of the facial interface frame (13.15-204), or vice versa. In some examples, the mounting area (13.15-226) and the corresponding peripheral attachments are positioned in curved or corner areas of the removable facial interface (13.15-202) and the facial interface frame (13.15-204), respectively. The mounting area (13.15-226) and the corresponding peripheral attachments may be positioned in areas of the removable facial interface (13.15-202) and the facial interface frame (13.15-204) that move or bend when the removable facial interface (13.15-202) is mounted on the facial interface frame (13.15-204) and when the HMD including the removable facial interface (13.15-202) and the facial interface frame (13.15-204) is worn by a user. This causes the arc length of the mounting area (13.15-226) and the corresponding peripheral attachments to vary. By using the provided attachment mechanisms, the mounting area (13.15-226) and the corresponding peripheral attachments are allowed to slide relative to one another, and the removable facial interface (13.15-202) is firmly attached to the facial interface frame (13.15-204) even when the removable facial interface (13.15-202) moves relative to the facial interface frame (13.15-204).

In the example of FIG. 534c, a single top mount (13.15-224) and a single side mount (13.15-222) are illustrated. The top mount (13.15-224) may be configured to be positioned adjacent to the user's forehead when the HMD is worn, and the side mount (13.15-222) may be configured to be positioned adjacent to the user's cheekbones when the HMD is worn. However, any number of top mounts (13.15-224) and side mounts (13.15-222) may be included in the removable facial interface (13.15-202), and the top mounts (13.15-224) and side mounts (13.15-222) may be configured to be positioned adjacent to any portion of the user's face or head when the HMD is worn. Furthermore, although the mounting area (13.15-226) is illustrated as being in a corner area of the removable facial interface (13.15-202) between the top mounting portion (13.15-224) and the side mounting portion (13.15-222), the mounting area (13.15-226) may be located in any area along the periphery of the removable facial interface (13.15-202), and any number or length of mounting areas (13.15-226) may be included.

FIG. 534d illustrates a cross-sectional view of a facial interface shim (13.15-219). The facial interface shim (13.15-219) may be used in conjunction with connectors of the HMD to control the gap between the display of the HMD and the user's face. In some examples, the facial interface shim (13.15-219) may be positioned between a removable facial interface and a connector of the facial interface frame. For example, the facial interface shim (13.15-219) may be positioned in a mounting opening (13.15-218) of the removable facial interface to which a connector of the facial interface frame attaches. In some examples, the facial interface shim (13.15-219) may be positioned between a base of the facial interface frame and a connector of the facial interface frame. For example, a connector may pass through a mounting opening (13.15-218), and a facial interface shim (13.15-219) may be positioned between the connector and the base. The facial interface shim (13.15-219) may have a thickness in a range of about 2 mm to about 4 mm. The facial interface shim (13.15-219) allows for a change in the distance between the display of the HMD and the user's face while using standard length connectors, which reduces manufacturing costs.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 534a-534d ) may be incorporated into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings, including any of FIGS. 534a-534d described herein, alone or in any combination. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 534a-534d , alone or in any combination.

Figures 535a and 535b illustrate perspective views of a device seal (13.15-200) and a plan view of a removable facial interface (13.15-202), respectively. The device seal (13.15-200) includes a removable facial interface (13.15-202), a facial interface frame (13.15-204), and a cover (13.15-206). The device seal (13.15-200) may be substantially similar to the device seals described herein, such as device seals (13.15-116, 13.15-200), and may include some or all of their features. The device seal (13.15-200) can be implemented on an HMD such as the HMD (13.15-100) described with reference to FIGS. 533a and 533b.

Figures 535a and 535b illustrate examples in which attachment mechanisms used to attach a removable facial interface (13.15-202) to a facial interface frame (13.15-204) include magnets. In some examples, six connectors (13.15-212) may be provided between the frame (13.15-210) of the facial interface frame (13.15-204) and the base (13.15-214). Four circular receptacles (13.15-250) may be provided corresponding to four of the connectors (13.15-212). The connectors (13.15-212) may extend through the base (13.15-214) such that the attachment mechanisms provided on the connectors (13.15-212) are exposed through the base (13.15-214). The circular receptacles (13.15-250) may be positioned along portions of a facial interface frame (13.15-204) configured to be positioned adjacent to the user's cheekbones when the HMD including the device seal (13.15-200) is worn. A spherical dish-shaped magnet (13.15-252) may be positioned in each of the circular receptacles (13.15-250). Each of the circular receptacles (13.15-250) may be referred to as a spherical magnetic receptacle in combination with a corresponding spherical dish-shaped magnet (13.15-252). Two stadium- or lozenge-shaped receptacles (13.15-254) may be provided corresponding to two of the connectors (13.15-212). Stadium or lozenge shaped receptacles (13.15-254) may be positioned along portions of a facial interface frame (13.15-204) configured to be positioned adjacent to a user's forehead when the HMD is worn. Capsule dish magnets (13.15-256) may be positioned in each of the stadium or lozenge shaped receptacles (13.15-254). Each of the stadium or lozenge shaped receptacles (13.15-254) may be referred to as a capsule dish magnet receptacle in combination with a corresponding capsule dish magnet (13.15-256).

In the example of FIG. 535b, four circular receptacles (13.15-260) may be provided on the interchangeable facial interface (13.15-202). The circular receptacles (13.15-260) may be positioned along portions of the interchangeable facial interface (13.15-202) configured to be positioned adjacent to the user's cheekbones when the HMD is worn. A spherical magnet (13.15-262) may be positioned on each of the circular receptacles (13.15-260). Two stadium- or lozenge-shaped receptacles (13.15-264) may be provided on the interchangeable facial interface (13.15-202). Stadium or lozenge shaped receptacles (13.15-264) may be positioned along portions of a replaceable facial interface (13.15-202) configured to be positioned adjacent to a user's forehead when the HMD is worn. Spherical magnets (13.15-266) may be positioned in each of the stadium or lozenge shaped receptacles (13.15-264). While the receptacles (13.15-250, 13.15-254, 13.15-260, 13.15-264) and magnets (13.15-252, 13.15-256, 13.15-262, 13.15-266) are described as having various round shapes, any suitable shapes may be used.

The spherical magnets (13.15-262) can be configured to interface with the spherical dish magnets (13.15-252), and the spherical magnets (13.15-266) can be configured to interface with the capsule dish magnets (13.15-256). The spherical magnets (13.15-262) and the spherical dish magnets (13.15-252) can have corresponding shapes, which provide a small amount of relative movement between the spherical magnets (13.15-262) and the spherical dish magnets (13.15-252) in the x- and y-directions, as illustrated in FIGS. 535a and 535b. The spherical magnets (13.15-266) and the capsule dish magnets (13.15-256) can have corresponding shapes, which provide a small amount of relative movement between the spherical magnets (13.15-266) and the capsule dish magnets (13.15-256) in the y direction as illustrated in FIGS. 535a and 535b. The capsule dish magnets (13.15-256) have a longitudinal axis extending in the x direction as illustrated in FIG. 535a. This provides a larger amount of relative movement between the spherical magnets (13.15-266) and the capsule dish magnets (13.15-256) in the x direction as illustrated in FIGS. 535a and 535b. The distances and directions in which each of the magnets (13.15-252, 13.15-256, 13.15-262, 13.15-266) is allowed to move relative to each other can be controlled by appropriately selecting the sizes and shapes of each of the magnets (13.15-252, 13.15-256, 13.15-262, 13.15-266).

In the examples illustrated in FIGS. 535a and 535b, the receptacles (13.15-250, 13.15-254) and magnets (13.15-252, 13.15-256) within the facial interface frame (13.15-204) and the receptacles (13.15-260, 13.15-264) and magnets (13.15-262, 13.15-266) within the removable facial interface (13.15-202) are visible to the user. Additionally, the base (13.15-214) of the facial interface frame (13.15-204) and the removable facial interface (13.15-202) are C-shaped and have corresponding shapes. This provides a visual cue to the user that the removable facial interface (13.15-202) is about to be mounted on the facial interface frame (13.15-204). Furthermore, if the removable facial interface (13.15-202) is not attached to the facial interface frame (13.15-204), the facial interface frame (13.15-204) appears to be missing a piece. This encourages the user to mount the removable facial interface (13.15-202) on the facial interface frame (13.15-204) so that the HMD can be comfortably worn. In some examples, any of the receptacles (13.15-250, 13.15-254, 13.15-260, 13.15-264) and/or the magnets (13.15-252, 13.15-256, 13.15-262, 13.15-266) may be covered or otherwise concealed from view.

The magnets (13.15-252, 13.15-262) can be aligned with respect to one another (e.g., maintain fixed positions relative to one another), and the magnets (13.15-256, 13.15-266) can float with respect to one another (e.g., move with respect to one another). Although the magnets (13.15-252, 13.15-256, 13.15-262, 13.15-266) are illustrated in specific locations in the examples of FIGS. 535a and 535b, any of the magnets (13.15-252, 13.15-256, 13.15-262, 13.15-266) may be positioned at any desired locations relative to the removable facial interface (13.15-202) and facial interface frame (13.15-204) depending on which areas of the removable facial interface (13.15-202) and facial interface frame (13.15-204) are desired to remain fixed or floating. Furthermore, the magnets (13.15-252, 13.15-256, 13.15-262, 13.15-266) and receptacles (13.15-250, 13.15-254, 13.15-260, 13.15-264) may have varying shapes and sizes that may improve the ability to replace various removable facial interfaces (13.15-202) and facial interface frames (13.15-204) and may aid in alignment of the removable facial interface (13.15-202) with respect to the facial interface frame (13.15-204). In some examples, the variable shapes and/or sizes of the magnets (13.15-252, 13.15-256, 13.15-262, 13.15-266) and receptacles (13.15-250, 13.15-254, 13.15-260, 13.15-264) around the periphery of the removable facial interface (13.15-202) and the facial interface frame (13.15-204) may allow different shaped removable facial interfaces (13.15-202) and facial interface frames (13.15-204) to be connected to each other.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIGS. 535a and 535b ) may be incorporated into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings, including any of FIGS. 535a and 535b , alone or in any combination. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 535a and 535b , alone or in any combination.

FIG. 536 illustrates a cross-sectional view of a magnetic attachment mechanism (13.15-300) that is an example of a post mount. The magnetic attachment mechanism (13.15-300) includes a connector (13.15-301) that can be magnetically attached to a base (13.15-310). The connector (13.15-301) may be substantially similar to the connectors described herein, such as connectors (13.15-212), and may include some or all of their features. The base (13.15-310) may be substantially similar to the reinforcements described herein, such as the reinforcements of the removable facial interfaces (13.15-202), and may include some or all of their features. The connector (13.15-301) can be physically coupled to a receptacle (13.15-302) which can be physically coupled to a magnet (13.15-304). The base (13.15-310) can be physically coupled to a protrusion (13.15-312) which can surround or otherwise accommodate a magnet (13.15-316).

As illustrated in FIG. 536, the protrusion (13.15-312) and the receptacle (13.15-302) may have shapes configured to correspond to each other. For example, the receptacle (13.15-302) may include a square opening, and the protrusion (13.15-312) may have a square shape configured to fit into the square opening of the receptacle (13.15-302). The protrusion (13.15-312) may be an alignment post. Providing corresponding shapes on the protrusion (13.15-312) and the receptacle (13.15-302) helps self-align the removable facial interface with the facial interface frame when the removable facial interface is attached to the facial interface frame. The magnets (13.15-304) and magnets (13.15-316) are attracted to each other and hold the protrusion (13.15-312) within the receptacle (13.15-302).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 536) may be incorporated into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings, including any of FIG. 536, alone or in any combination. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference to them) may be incorporated into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 536, alone or in any combination.

FIG. 537A illustrates a cross-sectional view of an interlocking attachment mechanism (13.15-400), which is an example of a post mounting portion. The interlocking attachment mechanism (13.15-400) may be referred to as an interlocking fastener. The interlocking attachment mechanism (13.15-400) includes a connector (13.15-401) to which a base (13.15-410) may be attached. The connector (13.15-401) may be substantially similar to the connectors described herein, such as the connectors (13.15-212), and may include some or all of their features. The base (13.15-410) may be substantially similar to the reinforcements described herein, such as the reinforcements of the removable facial interfaces (13.15-202), and may include some or all of their features. The connector (13.15-401) may be physically coupled to a receptacle (13.15-402) which may include one or more openings (13.15-404). In the cross-sectional view illustrated in FIG. 537a, the receptacle (13.15-402) includes three openings (13.15-404). However, the receptacle (13.15-402) of FIG. 537a may include two openings (13.15-404) which are circular or annular in shape in a bottom view. Any number of openings (13.15-404) may be included in the receptacle (13.15-402). The base (13.15-410) may be physically coupled to the protrusions (13.15-412). The protrusions (13.15-412) may have shapes corresponding to the openings (13.15-404), such as circular or annular shapes in a plan view. In some examples, the openings (13.15-404) and the protrusions (13.15-412) may have triangular shapes, rectangular shapes, or any other suitable shapes. Providing corresponding shapes to the openings (13.15-404) and the protrusions (13.15-412) helps self-align the base (13.15-410) with the connector (13.15-401).

The protrusions (13.15-412) may be configured to interface with openings (13.15-404) in the receptacle (13.15-402) to attach the base (13.15-410) to the connector (13.15-401) when the base (13.15-410) and the connector (13.15-401) are pressurized together. The protrusions (13.15-412) and the receptacle (13.15-402) may be formed of an elastic, flexible material having a high coefficient of friction. In examples where the protrusions (13.15-412) and the receptacle (13.15-402) are formed of elastic materials, the interlocking attachment mechanism (13.15-400) may be referred to as an interlocking elastic fastener. Forming the protrusions (13.15-412) and the receptacle (13.15-402) from flexible materials allows the protrusions (13.15-412) to be inserted into the openings (13.15-404). Forming the protrusions (13.15-412) and the receptacle (13.15-402) from an elastomeric material having a high coefficient of friction helps to retain the protrusions (13.15-412) within the openings (13.15-404) once the protrusions (13.15-412) are inserted into the openings (13.15-404). In some examples, the protrusions (13.15-412) and the receptacle (13.15-402) may be formed of polymers, elastomers, plastics, combinations thereof, or the like. Providing corresponding shapes to the openings (13.15-404) and protrusions (13.15-412) within the receptacle (13.15-402) helps self-align the removable facial interface with the facial interface frame when the removable facial interface is attached to the facial interface frame.

FIG. 537b illustrates a cross-sectional view of an interlocking attachment mechanism (13.15-420), which is an example of a peripheral mounting portion. The interlocking attachment mechanism (13.15-420) may be referred to as an interlocking fastener. The interlocking attachment mechanism (13.15-420) includes a base (13.15-421) that is physically attachable to a base (13.15-430). The base (13.15-421) may be substantially similar to the bases of the facial interface frames described herein, such as the base (13.15-214), and may include some or all of their features. The base (13.15-430) may be substantially similar to the reinforcements described herein, such as the reinforcements of the removable facial interfaces (13.15-202), and may include some or all of their features. The base (13.15-421) can be physically coupled to the outer layer (13.15-424). The base (13.15-421) can include one or more protrusions (13.15-422), and the outer layer (13.15-424) can include one or more protrusions (13.15-426). The base (13.15-430) can be physically coupled to the outer layer (13.15-434). The base (13.15-430) can include one or more protrusions (13.15-436), and the outer layer (13.15-434) can include one or more protrusions (13.15-436). Any number of protrusions may be included in the base (13.15-421), the outer layer (13.15-424), the base (13.15-430), and the outer layer (13.15-434).

The projections (13.15-432, 13.15-436) of the base (13.15-430) can have shapes corresponding to the projections (13.15-422, 13.15-426) of the base (13.15-421). For example, the projection (13.15-422) can have a shape corresponding to the opening between the projections (13.15-432); the projections (13.15-432) can have shapes corresponding to the openings between the projections (13.15-422) and the projections (13.15-426); and the projections (13.15-426) can have shapes corresponding to the openings between the projections (13.15-432) and the projections (13.15-436). The protrusions (13.15-422, 13.15-426, 13.15-432, 13.15-436) may have longitudinal shapes having longitudinal axes extending inward and outward from the page in the drawing of FIG. 537b and open ends. This allows the base (13.15-430) to slide relative to the base (13.15-421). This may aid in attaching the removable facial interface of the HMD to the facial interface frame of the user. Additionally, this allows the removable facial interface to conform to the user's face when the user wears the HMD.

The protrusions (13.15-432, 13.15-436) of the base (13.15-430) can be configured to interface with the protrusions (13.15-422, 13.15-426) of the base (13.15-421) to attach the base (13.15-430) to the base (13.15-421) when the base (13.15-430) and the base (13.15-421) are pressurized together. The protrusions (13.15-422, 13.15-426, 13.15-432, 13.15-436), the outer layers (13.15-424, 13.15-434), and the bases (13.15-421, 13.15-430) may be formed of an elastic, flexible material having a high coefficient of friction. In examples where the protrusions (13.15-422, 13.15-426, 13.15-432, 13.15-436) are formed of elastic materials, the interlocking attachment mechanism (13.15-420) may be referred to as an interlocking elastic fastener. The outer layers (13.15-424, 13.15-434) and bases (13.15-421, 13.15-430) can be formed of any combination of materials, such as the base (13.15-421) and outer layer (13.15-424) being formed of the same or different materials and the base (13.15-430) and outer layer (13.15-434) being formed of the same or different materials. Forming the protrusions (13.15-422, 13.15-426, 13.15-432, 13.15-436) from flexible materials allows the protrusions (13.15-422, 13.15-426, 13.15-432, 13.15-436) to be inserted into corresponding openings. Forming the protrusions (13.15-422, 13.15-426, 13.15-432, 13.15-436) from elastic materials having a high coefficient of friction helps to maintain the protrusions (13.15-422, 13.15-426, 13.15-432, 13.15-436) within the corresponding openings once the protrusions (13.15-422, 13.15-426, 13.15-432, 13.15-436) are inserted into the corresponding openings. In some examples, the protrusions (13.15-422, 13.15-426, 13.15-432, 13.15-436), the outer layers (13.15-424, 13.15-434), and the bases (13.15-421, 13.15-430) can be formed of polymers, elastomers, plastics, combinations thereof, and the like.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIGS. 537a and 537b ) may be incorporated into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings, including any of FIGS. 537a and 537b , alone or in any combination. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 537a and 537b , alone or in any combination.

FIG. 538 illustrates a cross-sectional view of a magnetic slide attachment mechanism (13.15-500), which is an example of a post mount. The magnetic slide attachment mechanism (13.15-500) includes a connector (13.15-501) to which a base (13.15-510) may be attached. The connector (13.15-501) may be substantially similar to the connectors described herein, such as connectors (13.15-212), and may include some or all of their features. The base (13.15-510) may be substantially similar to the reinforcements described herein, such as the reinforcements of the removable facial interfaces (13.15-202), and may include some or all of their features.

The connector (13.15-501) can be physically coupled to a magnetic post (13.15-504) via a fastener (13.15-502). The magnetic post (13.15-504) can include a flange (13.15-506). The base (13.15-510) can be physically coupled to a magnetic protrusion (13.15-512). The magnetic post (13.15-504) is magnetically attracted to the magnetic protrusion (13.15-512), which helps align the connector (13.15-501) with the base (13.15-510) and secures the flange (13.15-506) of the magnetic post (13.15-504) under the lip (13.15-514) of the magnetic protrusion (13.15-512). The magnet (13.15-516) of the magnetic protrusion (13.15-512) is positioned below the lip (13.15-514) of the magnetic protrusion (13.15-512) so as to pull the magnetic post (13.15-504) into the opening (13.15-518) of the magnetic protrusion (13.15-512) below the lip (13.15-514) of the magnetic protrusion (13.15-512). In the drawing of FIG. 538, the magnetic post (13.15-504) can move from left to right as the connector (13.15-501) is attached to the base (13.15-510). In other words, the magnetic post (13.15-504) can be slidably engaged with the magnetic projection (13.15-512) by sliding the flange (13.15-506) under the lip (13.15-514). The connector (13.15-501) can be removed from the base (13.15-510) by moving the magnetic post (13.15-504) from right to left and then moving the magnetic post (13.15-504) upward once the flange (13.15-506) of the magnetic post (13.15-504) has left the lip (13.15-514) of the projection (13.15-512). In other words, the magnetic post (13.15-504) can be slidably disengaged from the magnetic projection (13.15-512) by sliding the flange (13.15-506) outward from beneath the lip (13.15-514).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations depicted in FIG. 538) may be incorporated into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions depicted in any of the other drawings, including any of FIG. 538, described herein, alone or in any combination. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations depicted in and described with reference to other drawings) may be incorporated into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions depicted in FIG. 538, alone or in any combination.

FIG. 539 illustrates a cross-sectional view of a hook-and-loop attachment mechanism (13.15-600) that is an example of a post mount. The hook-and-loop attachment mechanism (13.15-600) includes a connector (13.15-601) to which a base (13.15-610) may be attached. The connector (13.15-601) may be substantially similar to the connectors described herein, such as the connectors (13.15-212), and may include some or all of their features. The base (13.15-610) may be substantially similar to the reinforcements described herein, such as the reinforcements of the removable facial interfaces (13.15-202), and may include some or all of their features.

The connector (13.15-601) can be physically coupled to a hook-and-loop feature (13.15-604) via a fastener (13.15-602). The hook-and-loop feature (13.15-604) can include a post (13.15-606). The base (13.15-610) can be physically coupled to the hook-and-loop feature (13.15-612). The hook-and-loop feature (13.15-604) can include an opening (13.15-614) configured to receive the post (13.15-606). In the example of FIG. 539, the post (13.15-606) and the opening (13.15-614) can have corresponding frustum shapes, although any suitable shapes may be used. The opening (13.15-614) and post (13.15-606) may be included to aid in self-aligning the connector (13.15-601) and base (13.15-610); however, in some examples, the opening (13.15-614) and post (13.15-606) may be omitted.

One of the hook-loop feature (13.15-604) or the hook-loop feature (13.15-612) can include a plurality of hooks, and the other of the hook-loop feature (13.15-604) or the hook-loop feature (13.15-612) can include a plurality of loops. The hooks of the hook-loop feature (13.15-604) or the hook-loop feature (13.15-612) are retained within corresponding loops of the hook-loop feature (13.15-604) or the hook-loop feature (13.15-612) to attach the base (13.15-610) to the connector (13.15-601). Velcro is an example of a hook-and-loop attachment mechanism that may be used in the hook-and-loop feature (13.15-604) and the hook-and-loop feature (13.15-612). The hook-and-loop feature (13.15-604) and/or the hook-and-loop feature (13.15-612) may be provided with microscopic hook and loop features to reduce the sound of the connector (13.15-601) and the base (13.15-610) being separated from each other.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 539) may be incorporated into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings, including any of FIG. 539, alone or in any combination. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference to them) may be incorporated into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 539, alone or in any combination.

FIG. 540 illustrates a cross-sectional view of a magnetic attachment mechanism (13.15-700) that is an example of a post mount. The magnetic attachment mechanism (13.15-700) includes a connector (13.15-701) that can be magnetically attached to a base (13.15-710). The connector (13.15-701) may be substantially similar to the connectors described herein, such as the connectors (13.15-212), and may include some or all of their features. The base (13.15-710) may be substantially similar to the reinforcements described herein, such as the reinforcements of the removable facial interfaces (13.15-202), and may include some or all of their features.

The connector (13.15-701) can be physically coupled to the magnet (13.15-706) via the fastener (13.15-702). The connector (13.15-701) can further be physically coupled to a post (13.15-704) that houses the magnet (13.15-706). In some examples, the post (13.15-704) can be referred to as a protrusion, and the magnet (13.15-706) can be positioned within the protrusion. The base (13.15-710) can be physically coupled to the magnet (13.15-714), and the receptacle (13.15-712) can be physically coupled to the base (13.15-710) and/or the magnet (13.15-714). In some examples, the magnet (13.15-714) may be positioned within the receptacle (13.15-712). As illustrated in FIG. 540, the receptacle (13.15-712) may include an opening configured to receive the post (13.15-704). In the example of FIG. 540, the openings of the post (13.15-704) and the receptacle (13.15-712) may have corresponding frustum shapes, although any suitable shape may be used. In some examples, the post (13.15-704) (e.g., a protrusion) and the receptacle (13.15-712) have complementary shapes relative to one another such that they may overlap, stack, or receive one another. The opening and post (13.15-704) of the receptacle (13.15-712) may be included to aid in self-aligning the connector (13.15-701) and the base (13.15-710); however, in some examples, the opening and post (13.15-704) of the receptacle (13.15-712) may be omitted. The magnets (13.15-706, 13.15-714) are magnetically attracted to each other, maintaining the post (13.15-704) of the connector (13.15-701) within the opening of the receptacle (13.15-712) of the base (13.15-710).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 540 ) may be incorporated into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings, including any of FIG. 540 , alone or in any combination. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference to them) may be incorporated into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 540 , alone or in any combination.

FIG. 541 illustrates a cross-sectional view of a spring-snap attachment mechanism (13.15-800) that is an example of a post mount. The spring-snap attachment mechanism (13.15-800) includes a connector (13.15-801) that can be physically attached to a base (13.15-801). The connector (13.15-801) may be substantially similar to the connectors described herein, such as connectors (13.15-212), and may include some or all of their features. The base (13.15-810) may be substantially similar to the reinforcements described herein, such as the reinforcements of the removable facial interfaces (13.15-202), and may include some or all of their features.

The connector (13.15-801) is physically coupled to a spring-snap feature (13.15-804) via a fastener (13.15-802). The spring-snap feature (13.15-804) includes detents (13.15-806) that attach to the spring-snap feature (13.15-804) via springs within the spring-snap feature (13.15-804). The base (13.15-810) is physically coupled to a post (13.15-812) that includes a flange (13.15-814). When the base (13.15-810) is attached to the connector (13.15-801), the flange (13.15-814) of the post (13.15-812) pushes the stoppers (13.15-806) outwardly relative to the post (13.15-812) and into the opening in the spring-snap feature (13.15-804). Once the flange (13.15-814) passes the detents (13.15-806), the springs in the spring-snap feature (13.15-804) push the detents (13.15-806) against the post (13.15-812) to maintain the flange (13.15-814) of the post (13.15-812) within the opening of the spring-snap feature (13.15-804). In other words, the spring force of the spring-snap feature (13.15-804) urging the detents (13.15-806) against the post (13.15-812) adjacent the flange (13.15-814) retains the post (13.15-812) within the spring-snap feature (13.15-804), thereby attaching the base (13.15-810) to the connector (13.15-801). When the base (13.15-810) is removed from the connector (13.15-801), this same process occurs in reverse. In the example of FIG. 541, the openings in the post (13.15-812) and the spring-snap feature (13.15-804) that receive the post may have corresponding cylindrical shapes, although any suitable shape may be used. The opening and post (13.15-812) of the spring-snap feature (13.15-804) help self-align the connector (13.15-801) and base (13.15-810).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 541 ) may be incorporated into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings, including any of FIG. 541 , alone or in any combination. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference to them) may be incorporated into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 541 , alone or in any combination.

FIG. 542 illustrates a cross-sectional view of an interlocking attachment mechanism (13.15-900), which may be an example of a post mount or peripheral mount. The interlocking attachment mechanism (13.15-900) may be referred to as an interlocking fastener. The interlocking attachment mechanism (13.15-900) includes a base (13.15-910) that may be interlocked with a base (13.15-901). The base (13.15-901 or 13.15-910) may be substantially similar to the bases of the facial interface frames described herein, such as the base (13.15-214), and may include some or all of their features. Other of the bases (13.15-901 or 13.15-910) may be substantially similar to the reinforcements described herein, such as the reinforcements of the removable facial interfaces (13.15-202), and may include some or all of their features. The base (13.15-901) may include a plurality of protrusions (13.15-902), such as the two protrusions (13.15-902) in the example of FIG. 542. The base (13.15-910) may include a protrusion (13.15-912). In some examples, any number of protrusions (13.15-912, 13.15-902) may be included in the base (13.15-910) and the base (13.15-901).

As illustrated in FIG. 542, the protrusions (13.15-912) can be configured to interlock with the protrusions (13.15-902). The protrusions (13.15-912) can be mushroom-shaped and have flanges at the ends of the posts. The protrusions (13.15-902) can define an opening and include lips adjacent to the protrusions (13.15-912) when the protrusions (13.15-912) are inserted into the opening defined by the protrusions (13.15-902). The lips of the protrusions (13.15-902) and the flanges of the protrusions (13.15-912) can secure the protrusions (13.15-912) within the opening defined between the protrusions (13.15-902).

In some examples, the protrusions (13.15-902, 13.15-912) may have longitudinal shapes having longitudinal axes extending inward and outward from the page in the drawing of FIG. 542 and open ends. This allows the base (13.15-901) to slide relative to the base (13.15-910). This may aid in attaching the removable facial interface of the HMD to the facial interface frame of the user. Additionally, this may allow the removable facial interface to conform to the user's face when the HMD is worn by the user. In some examples, the protrusions (13.15-912) may have a circular shape in a bottom view, and the protrusions (13.15-902) may have an annular shape in a top view. In some examples, the protrusions (13.15-902, 13.15-912) may have triangular, rectangular, or other shapes in the bottom and top views, respectively. Providing corresponding shapes to the protrusions (13.15-902, 13.15-912) helps self-align the base (13.15-901) with the base (13.15-910).

The protrusions (13.15-902, 13.15-912) may be formed of an elastic, flexible material having a high coefficient of friction. In instances where the protrusions (13.15-902, 13.15-912) are formed of an elastic material, the interlocking attachment mechanism (13.15-900) may be referred to as an interlocking elastic fastener. The protrusions (13.15-902, 13.15-912) may be formed of the same or different materials. Forming the protrusions (13.15-902, 13.15-912) of a flexible material allows the protrusions (13.15-912) to be inserted into corresponding openings between the protrusions (13.15-902). Forming the protrusions (13.15-902, 13.15-912) from an elastic material having a high coefficient of friction helps to maintain the protrusions (13.15-912) within the corresponding openings between the protrusions (13.15-902). In some examples, the protrusions (13.15-902, 13.15-912) may be formed from polymers, elastomers, plastics, combinations thereof, or the like.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 542) may be incorporated into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings, including any of FIG. 542, alone or in any combination. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference to them) may be incorporated into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 542, alone or in any combination.

FIG. 543 illustrates a cross-sectional view of a suction attachment mechanism (13.15-1000) that is an example of a post mount. The suction attachment mechanism (13.15-1000) includes a connector (13.15-1010) that can be attached to a base (13.15-1001) via suction. The connector (13.15-1010) may be substantially similar to the connectors described herein, such as the connectors (13.15-212), and may include some or all of their features. The base (13.15-1001) may be substantially similar to the reinforcements described herein, such as the reinforcements of the removable facial interfaces (13.15-202), and may include some or all of their features.

The base (13.15-1001) may include a curved opening (13.15-1002) formed in its upper surface. In some examples, the curved opening (13.15-1002) may be referred to as a curved surface. The suction cup (13.15-1012) may be physically coupled to the connector (13.15-1010). The base (13.15-1001) may be attached to the connector (13.15-1010) by pressing the suction cup (13.15-1012) into the curved opening with sufficient force. The connector (13.15-1010) may be removed from the base (13.15-1001) by pulling the connector (13.15-1010) away from the base (13.15-1001) with sufficient force. Removal of the connector (13.15-1010) from the base (13.15-1001) can be aided by tilting the connector (13.15-1010) relative to the base (13.15-1001). The curved opening (13.15-1002) of the base (13.15-1001) can have a smooth, rigid surface that can be surrounded by softer surfaces, such as fabrics. This helps self-align the base (13.15-1001) and the connector (13.15-1010), since the suction cup (13.15-1012) cannot be easily mounted to portions of the base (13.15-1001) that surround the curved opening (13.15-1002).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 543) may be incorporated into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings, including any of FIG. 543, alone or in any combination. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference to them) may be incorporated into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 543, alone or in any combination.

FIG. 544 illustrates a cross-sectional view of a bi-stable attachment mechanism (13.15-1100) of an example post mount. The bi-stable attachment mechanism (13.15-1100) includes a connector (13.15-1101) that can be attached to a base (13.15-1110) via suction. The connector (13.15-1101) may be substantially similar to the connectors described herein, such as the connectors (13.15-212), and may include some or all of their features. The base (13.15-1110) may be substantially similar to the reinforcements described herein, such as the reinforcements of the removable facial interfaces (13.15-202), and may include some or all of their features.

The connector (13.15-1101) may include a curved opening (13.15-1102) formed in its lower surface. The bistable element (13.15-1114) may be physically coupled to the base (13.15-1110) via a joint (13.15-1112). The bistable element (13.15-1114) may be stable in two positions, such as a first position (13.15-1114A) and a second position (13.15-1114C). The third position (13.15-1114B) is an intermediate position between the first position (13.15-1114A) and the second position (13.15-1114C). The bistable element (13.15-1114) can flip between a first position (13.15-1114A) and a second position (13.15-1114C). For example, when the connector (13.15-1101) is pressed into the base (13.15-1110), the bistable element (13.15-1114) can move from the first position (13.15-1114A) to the second position (13.15-1114C). When the connector (13.15-1101) is pulled from the base (13.15-1110), the bistable element (13.15-1114) can move from the second position (13.15-1114C) to the first position (13.15-1114A). The connector (13.15-1101) can be attached to the base (13.15-1110) by suction, similar to the suction attachment mechanism (13.15-1100). Tilting the connector (13.15-1101) relative to the base (13.15-1110) can aid in removing the connector (13.15-1101) from the base (13.15-1110). The curved opening (13.15-1102) of the connector (13.15-1101) can have a smooth, rigid surface that can be surrounded by softer surfaces, such as fabrics. This helps to self-align the base (13.15-1110) and the connector (13.15-1101), as the bistable element (13.15-1114) cannot be easily mounted to the portions of the connector (13.15-1101) surrounding the curved opening (13.15-1102).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 544) may be incorporated into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings, including any of FIG. 544, alone or in any combination. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference to them) may be incorporated into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 544, alone or in any combination.

Figures 545A and 545B are plan views of removable facial interfaces (13.15-1200A, 13.15-1200B), respectively. The removable facial interfaces (13.15-1200A, 13.15-1200B) each include a base (13.15-1204A) and a base (13.15-1204B). A flexible material (13.15-1202) may be formed surrounding each of the bases (13.15-1204A, 13.15-1204B). The top mounts (13.15-1214), side mounts (13.15-1210), and bottom mounts (13.15-1208) can be physically coupled to the respective bases (13.15-1204A, 13.15-1204B) via the flexible material (13.15-1202). Any of the aforementioned attachment mechanisms, such as post attachments, can be provided on the top mounts (13.15-1214), side mounts (13.15-1210), and bottom mounts (13.15-1208). Additional attachment mechanisms, such as peripheral attachments, may be provided on the removable facial interfaces (13.15-1200A, 13.15-1200B), for example, along the bases (13.15-1204A, 13.15-1204B) between the upper mountings (13.15-1214), the side mountings (13.15-1210), and the lower mountings (13.15-1208). Figures 545A and 545B illustrate magnets (13.15-1212, 13.15-1206) physically coupled to the upper mountings (13.15-1214) and the lower mountings (13.15-1208), respectively. Six mounting points are illustrated as being provided for removable facial interfaces (13.15-1200A, 13.15-1200B); however, any number of mounting points may be provided.

In the example of FIG. 545A, the base (13.15-1204A) includes thick portions and thin portions. The thick portions may be included to provide rigidity to the removable facial interface (13.15-1200A), while the thin portions may be included to provide flexibility to the removable facial interface (13.15-1200A). In the example of FIG. 545B, the base (13.15-1204B) includes slits formed along a periphery of the base (13.15-1204B). The slits may be included to provide flexibility to the removable facial interface (13.15-1200B). Any suitable base having any suitable configuration may be included to provide desired flexibility and rigidity to the removable facial interfaces.

The bases (13.15-1204A, 13.15-1204B) can be formed of metals, plastics, polymers, combinations thereof, and the like. The flexible material (13.15-1202) can be formed of rubbers, foams, polymers, silicones, elastomers, hydrogen gels, combinations thereof, and the like. The removable facial interfaces (13.15-1200A, 13.15-1200B) further include a fabric material surrounding the flexible material (13.15-1202), the top mounting portions (13.15-1214), the side mounting portions (13.15-1210), and the bottom mounting portions (13.15-1208). The fabric material can surround the top mounting portions (13.15-1214), the side mounting portions (13.15-1210), and the bottom mounting portions (13.15-1208), and the top mounting portions (13.15-1214), the side mounting portions (13.15-1210), and the bottom mounting portions (13.15-1208) can be exposed through the fabric material. The bases (13.15-1204A, 13.15-1204B) can provide a desired degree of rigidity to the removable facial interfaces (13.15-1200A, 13.15-1200B). The flexible material (13.15-1202) can be flexible or semi-flexible and can be provided to increase user comfort. The fabric material may be configured to come into contact with the user's skin and may also be provided to increase the user's comfort.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIGS. 545a and 545b ) may be incorporated into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings, including any of FIGS. 545a and 545b , alone or in any combination. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 545a and 545b , alone or in any combination.

In some examples, the device seal may include an asymmetrical compressible portion that contacts the user's face. The asymmetry in the design of the compressible portion improves comfort and reduces contact between the user's face and the rigid edges of the device seal. While the asymmetrical compressible portion is described herein as part of a removable device seal, the asymmetrical compressible portion may similarly be part of a fixed or non-removable facial interface for use with an HMD.

Figure 546 illustrates a cross-sectional view of a device seal (13.15-1400). The device seal (13.15-1400) may be substantially similar to the device seals described herein and may include some or all of their features. The device seal (13.15-1400) may include a facial interface (13.15-1402) and a cover (13.15-1406). The cover (13.15-1406) may be included in the device seal (13.15-1400) to provide a seal between the device seal (13.15-1400) and the external environment.

The device seal (13.15-1400) may include a frame (13.15-1410), a base (13.15-1414), and a compressible portion (13.15-1416). The frame (13.15-1410) may be physically coupled to a display portion of the HMD, and the frame (13.15-1410) may be configured to provide an interface between the display portion and a facial interface (13.15-1402). The facial interface (13.15-1402) may be removably attached to the base (13.15-1414) or may be non-removably secured to the base.

The compressible portion (13.15-1416) can fill the gap between the base (13.15-1414) and the facial interface (13.15-1402) and can provide improved user comfort compared to traditional interfaces. The compressible portion (13.15-1416) can also be referred to as a compressible member or compressible material. In some examples, the compressible portion (13.15-1416) can include a foam material. In some examples, the compressible portion (13.15-1416) can include materials having properties that impart flexibility, softness, compressibility, deformability, and the like. Examples of materials that can be used for the compressible portion (13.15-1416) include, but are not limited to, silicones, polymers, elastomers, hydrogels, combinations thereof, and the like. The compressible portion (13.15-1416) may be formed by molding, printing, casting, or the like. In some examples, attachment mechanisms, such as peripheral attachments, may be included on the compressible portion (13.15-1416). The compressible portion (13.15-1416) provides a ductile, flexible, and deformable interface between the removable facial interface (202) and rigid components of the removable facial interface (13.15-1402), such as the frame (13.15-1410), connectors, and base (13.15-1414). Such an interface may provide improved user comfort when the HMD is worn.

In some examples, the compressible portion (13.15-1416) extends beyond the edges of the base (13.15-1414). In other words, the compressible portion (13.15-1416) may be wider than the base (13.15-1414), such that the compressible portion (13.15-1416) overhangs the base (13.15-1414). The compressible portion (13.15-1416) may overhang, extend from, or protrude from the cover (13.15-1406). For example, the compressible portion (13.15-1416) may extend a distance (d) above the edge of the base (13.15-1414). In some examples, the distance "d" may be approximately 3.4 mm. However, as discussed in more detail below, the width of the compressible portion (13.15-1416) may vary based on the position of the compressible portion (13.15-1416) relative to the user's face when worn. In some examples, the lower portion of the compressible portion (13.15-1416) is substantially parallel or coplanar with the lower edge of the base (13.15-1416), while the upper portion of the compressible portion (13.15-1416) protrudes from or extends beyond the upper edge of the base (13.15-1414).

The increased width of the compressible portion (13.15-1416) advantageously increases the comfort and wearability of the HMD. As the HMD is worn, the compressible portion (13.15-1416) may bend or fold around the upper edge of the base (13.15-1414). The base (13.15-1414) may, in some instances, be made of a rigid material, such as plastic. Thus, the protruding compressible portion (13.15-1416) may shield the user's face from the edges of the base (13.15-1414) during use. The protruding compressible portion (13.15-1416) may also, in some instances, become more conformable over time, thereby improving comfort.

Figure 547a illustrates a cross-sectional view of a facial interface (13.15-1502). Figure 547b illustrates a cross-sectional view of a forehead region (13.15-1503) of the facial interface (13.15-1502). Figure 547c illustrates a cross-sectional view of a cheek region (13.15-1505) of the facial interface (13.15-1502). The facial interface (13.15-15) may be substantially similar to the facial interfaces described herein and may include some or all of their features.

In some examples, the compressible portion (13.15-1516) may include a central region (13.15-1509) and an extension region (13.15-1507). In some examples, the central region (13.15-1509) and the extension region (13.15-1507) may be a single integral component (e.g., a foam piece). In some examples, the central region (13.15-1509) may be a separate material (e.g., two different types of foam pieces) separate from the extension region (13.15-1507). The central region (13.15-1509) may be shaped, sized, and positioned to correspond to the base of the frame. In other words, the central region (13.15-1509) may be directly adjacent to the base plastic. In contrast, the extension area (13.15-1507) may extend beyond the footprint of the base, causing the extension area (13.15-1507) to overhang the base.

In some examples, the extension region (13.15-1507) may extend along the entire facial interface (13.15-1502). The compressible portion (13.15-1516) may have a variable cross-section or may be asymmetrical about the base. The extension region (13.15-1507) may taper as it moves from the forehead region (13.15-1503) to the cheek region (13.15-1505). In other words, the extension region (13.15-1507) may decrease in size as it approaches the cheek region (13.15-1505), such that it becomes wider at the forehead and less wide at the cheek. For example, in the forehead region (13.15-1503), the extension region (13.15-1507) may overhang the base by approximately 3.4 mm or more, while in the forehead region (13.15-1505), the extension region (13.15-1507) may overhang the base by approximately 3.4 mm or less, as illustrated in FIG. 547b. As illustrated, the compressible portion (13.15-1516) may extend or overhang both above and below the central region (13.15-1509) and the base plastic, as oriented in the drawing. The variable asymmetric cross-section of the extension region (13.15-1507) may be intentionally varied to correspond to user facial features, thereby increasing the comfort and fit of the device seal (13.15-1400) during use.

13.16: Electronic devices having optical blocking structures

Head-mounted devices include head-mounted support structures that allow the devices to be worn on a user's head. The head-mounted support structures may include device housings for housing components, such as displays, used to present visual content to the user. The head-mounted devices may also include a light-shielding nosepiece that rests on the user's nose. The light-shielding nosepiece may include an elastomeric layer having a plurality of perforations and a fabric covering the elastomeric layer. The elastomeric layer having the perforations may allow the light-shielding nosepiece to conform to the user's nose while the device is worn, while maintaining sufficient rigidity to be wrapped by a low-force, high-extension fabric or other low-force, high-extension material. Additional structures, such as rigid structures or semi-rigid structures, may be included in the light-shielding nosepiece to provide additional support for the device while it is worn.

A schematic diagram of an exemplary system having an electronic device having a light-shielding nosepiece is illustrated in FIG. 548. As illustrated in FIG. 548, the system (13.16-8) may include one or more electronic devices, such as an electronic device (13.16-10). The electronic devices of the system (13.16-8) may include computers, cellular telephones, head-mounted devices, wristwatch devices, and other electronic devices. Configurations in which the electronic device (13.16-10) is a head-mounted device are sometimes described herein as examples.

As illustrated in FIG. 548, electronic devices such as the electronic device (13.16-10) may have control circuitry (13.16-12). The control circuitry (13.16-12) may include storage and processing circuitry for controlling the operation of the device (13.16-10). The circuitry (13.16-12) may include storage such as hard disk drive storage, non-volatile memory (e.g., electrically programmable read-only memory configured to form a solid-state drive), volatile memory (e.g., static or dynamic random access memory), etc. The processing circuitry within the control circuitry (13.16-12) may be based on one or more microprocessors, microcontrollers, digital signal processors, baseband processors, power management units, audio chips, graphics processing units, application specific integrated circuits, and other integrated circuits. Software code may be stored in storage within the circuitry (13.16-12) and executed on processing circuitry within the circuitry (13.16-12) to implement control operations for the device (13.16-10), such as data acquisition operations, operations involving processing three-dimensional facial image data, operations involving coordinating components using control signals, etc. The control circuitry (13.16-12) may include wired and wireless communication circuitry. For example, the control circuitry (13.16-12) may include radio frequency transceiver circuitry, such as cellular telephone transceiver circuitry, wireless local area network (WiFi®) transceiver circuitry, millimeter wave transceiver circuitry, and/or other wireless communication circuitry.

During operation, the communication circuitry of the devices within the system (13.16-8) (e.g., the communication circuitry of the control circuitry (13.16-12) of the device (13.16-10)) may be used to support communication between the electronic devices. For example, one electronic device may transmit video and/or audio data to another electronic device within the system (13.16-8). The electronic devices within the system (13.16-8) may communicate over one or more communication networks (e.g., the Internet, a local area network, etc.) using wired and/or wireless communication circuitry. The communication circuitry may be used to allow data to be received by the device (13.16-10) from an external device (e.g., a portable device such as a tethered computer, a handheld device, or a laptop computer, an online computing device such as a remote server or other remote computing device, or other electronic device) and/or to provide data to the external device.

The device (13.16-10) may include input/output devices (13.16-22). The input/output devices (13.16-22) may be used to allow a user to provide user input to the device (13.16-10). The input/output devices (13.16-22) may also be used to collect information about the environment in which the device (13.16-10) is operating. Output components within the devices (13.16-22) may allow the device (13.16-10) to provide output to the user and may be used to communicate with external electrical equipment.

As illustrated in FIG. 548, the input/output devices (13.16-22) may include one or more displays, such as the display (13.16-14). In some configurations, the display (13.16-14) of the device (13.16-10) may include a left display panel and a right display panel (sometimes referred to as a left portion and a right portion of the display (13.16-14) and/or a left display and a right display) that are aligned with the user's left and right eyes and viewable through the left lens assembly and the right lens assembly, respectively. In other configurations, the display (13.16-14) includes a single display panel that extends across both eyes.

The display (13.16-14) can be used to display images. Visual content displayed on the display (13.16-14) can be viewed by a user of the device (13.16-10). Displays within the device (13.16-10), such as the display (13.16-14), can be organic light emitting diode displays or other displays based on arrays of light emitting diodes, liquid crystal displays, LCoS displays, projectors or displays based on projecting light beams directly or indirectly onto a surface through specialized optics (e.g., digital micromirror devices), electrophoretic displays, plasma displays, electrowetting displays, microLED displays, or any other suitable displays.

The displays (13.16-14) can present computer-generated content, such as virtual reality content and mixed reality content, to a user. Virtual reality content can be displayed in the absence of real-world content. Mixed reality content, which may sometimes be referred to as augmented reality content, may include computer-generated images overlaid on real-world images. The real-world images may be captured by a camera (e.g., a forward-facing camera) and merged with the overlaid computer-generated content, or an optical coupling system may be used to allow the computer-generated content to be overlaid on top of real-world images. As an example, a pair of mixed reality glasses or other augmented reality head-mounted displays may include a display device that presents images to the user via a beam splitter, prism, holographic coupler, or other optical coupler. Configurations in which the displays (13.16-14) are used to display virtual reality content to a user via lenses are described herein as examples.

The input/output devices (13.16-22) may include sensors (13.16-16). Sensors (13.16-16) include, for example, 3D sensors (e.g., structured light sensors that use 2D digital image sensors to emit beams of light and collect image data for 3D images from light spots created when a target is illuminated by the beams of light, binocular 3D image sensors that collect 3D images using two or more cameras in a binocular imaging array, 3D LIDAR (Light Detection and Ranging) sensors, 3D radio frequency sensors, or other sensors that collect 3D image data), cameras (e.g., infrared and/or line-of-sight digital image sensors), gaze tracking sensors (e.g., an gaze tracking system based on an image sensor, and, if desired, a light source that emits one or more beams of light that are then tracked using the image sensor after being reflected from the user's eyes), sensors such as contact sensors based on touch sensors, buttons, force sensors, switches, gas sensors, pressure sensors, moisture sensors, magnetic The device may include sensors, audio sensors (microphones), ambient light sensors, microphones for collecting voice commands and other audio input, sensors configured to collect information regarding motion, position, and/or orientation (e.g., accelerometers, gyroscopes, compasses, and/or inertial measurement units including all or a subset of one or two of these sensors), fingerprint sensors and other biometric sensors, optical position sensors (optical encoders), and/or other position sensors, e.g., linear position sensors, and/or other sensors.

User input and other information may be collected using sensors and other input devices within the input/output devices (13.16-22). If desired, the input/output devices (13.16-22) may include other devices (13.16-24), such as haptic output devices (e.g., vibration components), light-emitting diodes and other light sources, speakers such as ear speakers for generating audio output, and other electrical components. The device (13.16-10) may include circuits for receiving wireless power, circuits for wirelessly transmitting power to other devices, batteries and other energy storage devices (e.g., capacitors), joysticks, buttons, and/or other components.

The electronic device (13.16-10) may have housing structures (e.g., housing walls, straps, etc.), as illustrated by the exemplary support structures (13.16-26) of FIG. 548. In configurations where the electronic device (13.16-10) is a head-mounted device (e.g., a pair of eyeglasses, goggles, a helmet, a hat, a headband, etc.), the support structures (13.16-26) may include head-mounted support structures (e.g., a helmet housing, head straps, temples within a pair of eyeglasses, goggle housing structures, and/or other head-mounted structures). Head-mounted support structures may be configured to be worn on a user's head during operation of the device (13.16-10) and may support display(s) (13.16-14), sensors (13.16-16), other components (13.16-24), other input/output devices (13.16-22), and control circuitry (13.16-12).

In some embodiments, the support structures (13.16-26) may include a light-shielding nosepiece. The light-shielding nosepiece may be attached to the support structures (13.16-26), such as the main housing portion of the electronic device (13.16-10), and may rest on the user's nose while the device (13.16-10) is worn. The light-shielding nosepiece may be flexible, such as to be wrapped by fabric or other material, to allow the nosepiece to conform to the user's nose while maintaining sufficient rigidity to support the device (13.16-10) on the user's face while being worn (i.e., to maintain the shape of the device on the user's nose while being worn). If desired, the light-shielding nosepiece may also include stiffeners or other components that help maintain the nosepiece on the user's nose to prevent light from reaching the user's eyes. An example of an electronic device having a nosepiece is illustrated in FIG. 549.

As illustrated in FIG. 549, a head-mounted device (13.16-10) may include support structures (13.16-26) that may include a head-mounted housing (sometimes referred to as a main housing, a main housing unit, a head-mounted support structure, etc.). The housing may have walls or other structures that separate an interior housing region from an exterior region surrounding the housing. For example, the housing may have walls formed of polymers, glass, metal, and/or other materials. Electrical and optical components may be mounted in the housing. These components may include components such as integrated circuits, sensors, control circuitry, input/output devices, etc.

To present images to a user for viewing from eye boxes (e.g., eye boxes where a user's eyes are positioned when the device (13.16-10) is worn on the user's head), the device (13.16-10) may include displays and lenses. These components may be mounted on optical modules or other support structures within the housing to form respective left and right optical systems. For example, there may be a left display for presenting images from the left eye box to the user's left eye through the left lens, and a right display for presenting images from the right eye box to the user's right eye through the right lens.

If desired, the housing may have forward-facing components, such as cameras and other sensors, on the front side for collecting sensor measurements and other input, and may have a soft cushion on the opposite rear side of the housing. The rear side of the housing may have openings that allow the user to view images (image optics (13.16-32)) from the left and right optical systems (e.g., when the rear side of the housing is resting on the user's head).

If desired, the device (13.16-10) may have an adjustable strap or headband, and, if desired, other structures to help maintain the housing on the user's head (e.g., an over-the-head strap).

As illustrated in FIG. 549, when worn by a user, the device (13.16-10) may include a nosepiece, such as a nosepiece (13.16-28), that rests on the nasal region of the user's head (e.g., on the user's nose). In particular, the nosepiece (13.16-28) (sometimes referred to herein as a light shielding structure or light shielding nosepiece) may serve as an extension of the housing that rests on the user's nose and bridges between the user's opposing cheeks. If desired, the nosepiece (13.16-28) may be attached to the housing and/or may include one or more members formed from a portion of the housing. In some embodiments, the nosepiece (13.16-28) may be part of or attached to an optical seal that extends around a portion or all of a perimeter of the housing (e.g., the optical seal is attached to the housing around the perimeter). When the device (13.16-10) is in use, the optical seal is compressed against the user's face, preventing interference from ambient light. However, in general, the nosepiece (13.16-28) may be attached to the housing in any desired manner.

The nosepiece (13.16-28) may be configured as a light-shielding structure and thus may sometimes be referred to as a light-shielding structure (13.16-28) or a light-shielding nosepiece (13.16-28). As an example, it may be desirable to improve the viewing experience of the user when the device (13.16-10) is worn by the user by blocking external environmental light from entering the interior of the device (13.16-10) (e.g., entering the eye boxes). The nosepiece (13.16-28) may conform to the user's facial topology around the user's nose and block light from entering the eye boxes. In some exemplary configurations, the nosepiece (13.16-28) may be adjustable to accommodate different facial topologies of different users (e.g., portions of the nosepiece (13.16-28) may be differently deformed based on the nose shapes of the users).

The nosepiece (13.16-28) may be mounted to a housing portion of an electronic device (13.16-10), such as a head-mounted support structure (13.16-26), at mounting points (13.16-30). The housing may include a housing frame extending along the periphery of the device (13.16-10). If desired, the housing frame may be overlapped by a cushioning member on the rear side of the housing facing the user. As an example, the cushioning member may include foam structures or other soft compressible structures attached to the housing frame. A fabric may overlap and extend over the housing frame and/or the cushioning member on the rear side of the housing. If desired, the fabric may surround only the cushioning member, or the cushioning member surrounded by the fabric may be removably coupled to the housing frame.

The mounting points (13.16-30) may be located at a lower portion of the housing frame (e.g., a lower portion of the support structures (13.16-26)). As examples, the mounting points (13.16-30) may include coupling mechanisms such as magnets, adhesives, hinges, or any other suitable coupling mechanisms.

In the example of FIG. 549, the nosepiece (13.16-28) is attached to the support structures (13.16-26) such that the nosepiece (13.16-28) extends into a portion of the support structures (13.16-26). This is merely exemplary. If desired, the housing frame, cushioning member, and/or fabric may be segmented into multiple sections to surround the nosepiece (13.16-28). As an example, the fabric-encased cushioning member may extend forward of the nosepiece (13.16-28), and the housing frame may extend behind the nosepiece (13.16-28). In general, the housing sections, cushioning member, and/or fabric may define an opening within which the nosepiece (13.16-28) is positioned.

In some exemplary embodiments, the nosepiece (13.16-28) may be removably coupled (via magnets) to the housing frame or other portions of the housing. In some exemplary embodiments, a portion of the nosepiece (13.16-28) may form an integral part of the housing frame and/or may not be removable from the housing.

Support structures (13.16-26) (e.g., housing frames) and nosepieces (13.16-28) (along with other desired structures) may define the periphery of the eye boxes of the device (13.16-10) where the user's eyes are positioned. Components such as displays, lenses, sensors, etc. may be overlapped and/or positioned within the eye boxes of the device (13.16-10) and may be surrounded by and/or mounted to the support structures (13.16-26) and/or nosepiece (13.16-28). As exemplarily illustrated in FIG. 549, the display (13.16-14) emits image light (13.16-32) through the lens into the eye box. The nosepiece (13.16-28) may be configured to block ambient light from outside the device (13.16-10) from entering the eye box and interfering with the image light (13.16-24). An example of a nosepiece that may be used in the device (13.16-10) is illustrated in FIG. 550.

As illustrated in FIG. 550, a nosepiece, such as nosepiece (13.16-28), may include an elastomeric material (13.16-34) (also referred to herein as an elastomeric layer (13.16-34)). The elastomeric material (13.16-34) may be any desired elastomeric material, such as thermoplastic polyurethane (TPU), nitrile butadiene rubber (NBR), or silicone (e.g., low durometer silicone). The elastomeric material (13.16-34) may have a thickness of greater than 0.1 mm, greater than 0.25 mm, greater than 0.5 mm, about 1 mm, less than 2 mm, less than 5 mm, or the like.

In some embodiments, the elastomer (13.16-34) may include perforations (13.16-36). The perforations (13.16-36) may allow the elastomer (13.16-34) to bend (in the horizontal left-right directions of FIG. 550) to accommodate the user's nose while maintaining sufficient rigidity to support the device (13.16-10) on the user's nose (i.e., in the vertical up-down directions of FIG. 550). The rigidity of the elastomer (13.16-34) may also allow the elastomer (13.16-34) to be wrapped by a fabric (13.16-38) or other low force, high extensibility material.

The perforations (13.16-36) may be formed in any desired pattern. In the example of FIG. 550, the perforations (13.16-36) are slits formed as an array of perforations across the entire surface of the elastomer (13.16-34). The perforations (13.16-36) may be formed in a brick pattern as in FIG. 550, or in any other desired pattern. Additionally, any desired number of perforations (13.16-36) may be formed in the elastomer (13.16-34), such as at least one perforation, at least five perforations, or any other desired number of perforations. The perforations (13.16-36) may extend completely through the elastomer (13.16-34), or may extend partially through the elastomer (13.16-34).

As illustrated in Figure 550, the use of slits formed in a brick pattern is merely exemplary. Other exemplary examples of perforations within the elastomer (13.16-34) are illustrated in Figures 551a and 551b.

As illustrated in FIG. 551a, the elastomer (13.16-34) may include three-part openings (13.16-37). The three-part openings (13.16-37) may be arranged in a brick pattern similar to the slits of FIG. 550. Alternatively, the three-part openings (13.16-37) may be formed in any other suitable pattern.

The three-part openings (13.16-37) may allow the elastomer (13.16-34) to stretch/deform in two or more axes. As a result, the elastomer (13.16-34) (and thus the nosepiece (13.16-28)) may more accurately contour to the user's nose (e.g., the elastomer (13.16-34) may deform to the user's nose and thus adapt to the shape of the user's nose). In this manner, the elastomer (13.16-34) may be sealed to the user's nose and may prevent light from interfering with displays within the head-mounted device.

Different types of perforations may be utilized in a single elastomeric member. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 551b, slits (13.16-36) may be formed on the upper half of the elastomeric member (13.16-34), while three-part openings (13.16-37) may be formed on the lower half of the elastomeric member (13.16-34). In some embodiments, utilizing three-part openings (13.16-37) in the lower portion of the elastomeric member (13.16-34) may allow the elastomeric member (13.16-34) to stretch more (e.g., along two or more axes) within the user's nose. However, the examples of the upper half of the elastomer (13.16-34) having slits (13.16-36) and the lower half having three-piece openings (13.16-37) are merely exemplary. Alternatively, the slits (13.16-36) and the three-piece openings (or other suitable perforations) may be formed anywhere on the elastomer (13.16-34) and may fill any suitable portion of the elastomer (13.16-34) to allow the elastomer (13.16-34) to conform to a user's nose.

The elastomeric body (13.16-34) may have a shape that generally conforms to the user's nose, such as a V-shaped shape as illustrated in FIG. 550, or any other desired shape, such as a rounded shape or a rectangular shape.

As illustrated in FIG. 550, the elastomer (13.16-34) may be covered by a fabric (13.16-38). In particular, the fabric (13.16-38) may overlap and/or encapsulate the elastomer (13.16-34) in a region (13.16-40). The fabric region (13.16-40) may have the same shape as the elastomer (13.16-34), as illustrated in FIG. 550, or may have a different shape than the elastomer (13.16-34). The fabric elements (13.16-40 and/or 13.16-38) may serve as a light shielding element or layer for the light shielding structure (13.16-28). In particular, exemplary configurations in which the fabric (13.16-40/13.16-38) is a fabric cover (sometimes referred to as a fabric cover layer or cover layer) are described herein as exemplary examples. To serve as light shielding functions, the fabric cover may be formed of an opaque or light shielding material (e.g., black yarn), or may be formed of an underlying material coated with an opaque or light shielding material (e.g., black dye or ink). As examples, the fabric cover may be formed of any suitable type of fabric, such as a knitted fabric, a woven fabric, a braided fabric, or the like.

The fabric (13.16-40) may be tented over the elastomeric (13.16-34). Tenting of the fabric cover over the substructure may be achieved by the substructure contacting or otherwise supporting the fabric cover at one or more support points or areas as the fabric cover extends over one or more sides of the substructure. Tenting of the fabric cover over the substructure may cause the fabric cover to follow the general contour of the substructure, particularly around the support areas. If desired, differences in the contours of the fabric cover and of the substructure may exist, particularly in some areas remote from the support areas, thereby allowing some portions of the fabric cover to be suspended in air and thus readily deflectable. As an example, the fabric cover may be deflectable to the boundary of the substructure (or even beyond the boundary of the substructure, if the boundary is defined by a flexible or deformable member).

The rigidity of the elastomer (13.16-34) maintained in the vertical direction by the perforations (13.16-36) may allow the elastomer (13.16-34) to be wrapped by the fabric (13.16-40) (or other low force, high extensibility fabric, or other low force, high extensibility material) without deformation. In other words, the elastomer (13.16-34) may be sufficiently rigid to maintain its shape while the fabric (13.16-40) is applied to and wrapped around the elastomer (13.16-34) (as well as to maintain its shape when the device is worn by a user), but sufficiently flexible so that it can conform to the nose of a user.

In such a manner, the fabric cover may have a three-dimensional shape (based on the contours of the substructure) that includes more confined portions (e.g., directly supported by the substructure) and less confined and more flexible or pliable portions (e.g., not directly supported by the substructure, suspended in air, etc.). These less confined portions (e.g., flexible fabric surfaces) may help form flexible boundaries, such as those for an opening configured to accommodate a user's nose.

As a specific illustrative example, the substructure may have surfaces defining an opening for accommodating a user's nose. The surfaces may be surrounded by peripheral edges. A fabric cover may be tented over the substructure such that the fabric cover is directly supported by the substructure along one or more of the peripheral edges of the substructure, and may be suspended in the air around the opening, thereby providing a fabric surface deflectable by the user's nose. This may help improve user comfort when the light-shielding structure is placed on the user's nose, as well as provide a more conformal fit.

Regardless of the shape of the fabric region (13.16-40), the fabric region (13.16-40) (and/or the elastomer (13.16-34)) may be bonded to the support structures (13.16-26) (e.g., a housing frame) using an adhesive (13.16-42). However, the use of the adhesive (13.16-42) is merely exemplary. The fabric (13.16-40) and/or the elastomer (13.16-34) may be formed integrally with the support structures (13.16-26) or may be attached to the support structures (13.16-26) using any desired attachment mechanism.

Although the nosepiece (13.16-28) is shown as including both an elastomer (13.16-34) and a fabric (13.16-40), this is merely exemplary. If desired, the nosepiece (13.16-28) may include the elastomer (13.16-34) without an overlapping fabric layer. In such a case, another layer, such as a polymer or rubber, may overlap the elastomer (13.16-34), or the elastomer (13.16-34) may be in direct contact with the user's nose when the device (13.16-10) is worn by the user. Alternatively, the nosepiece (13.16-28) may include the fabric (13.16-40) without the elastomer (13.16-34), if desired. In such cases, the fabric (13.16-40) may be a flat knit fabric to provide sufficient stretch over the user's nose while providing sufficient support for the device (13.16-10).

Although the fabric (13.16-38/13.16-40) is described as a fabric, this is for illustrative purposes only. Generally, the fabric (13.16-38/13.16-40) can be any low strength, high elongation material, such as a low strength, high elongation fabric.

In some embodiments, the elastomeric body (13.16-34) may be rigid enough to support the device (13.16-10) on the user's nose (i.e., in the vertical direction of FIG. 550) and be wrapped by the fabric, although it may be desirable to add additional rigid or semi-rigid structures to the nosepiece. An exemplary example of a nosepiece having rigid structures is illustrated in FIG. 552.

As illustrated in FIG. 552, the nosepiece (13.16-28) may include a fabric (13.16-40) (which may cover an elastomeric layer, such as an elastomeric material (13.16-34)) and an adhesive (13.16-42), which may in turn attach the fabric (13.16-40) to a structural frame (13.16-43). The structural frame (13.16-43) may, for example, be a plastic frame. The structural frame (13.16-43) may provide additional rigidity to ensure that the nosepiece (13.16-28) maintains its shape and support when worn by a user.

Although FIG. 552 illustrates the use of adhesive (13.16-42), this is merely exemplary. Adhesive (13.16-42) may be omitted if desired. In some examples, elastomer (13.16-34) may be co-molded into structural frame (13.16-43). Alternatively, elastomer (13.16-34) may be fitted into a recessed portion of structural frame (13.16-43) or otherwise attached to structural frame (13.16-43).

Additionally, although FIG. 552 illustrates a structural frame (13.16-43) on three sides of the fabric (13.16-40)/elastomer (13.16-34), this is merely exemplary. The structural frame (13.16-43) may be attached to one side (e.g., the bottom side) of the fabric (13.16-40)/elastomer (13.16-34) or to any other desired number of sides.

Regardless of the attachment of the structural frame (13.16-43) to the elastomer (13.16-34) and/or the fabric (13.16-40), the fabric (13.16-40) may extend over all or part of both the frame (13.16-43) and/or the elastomer (13.16-34). An example of a stack up of the nosepiece (13.16-28) is illustrated in FIG. 553.

As illustrated in FIG. 553, the nosepiece (13.16-28) may include a fabric (13.16-40) illustrated having fabric portions (13.16-40-1, 13.16-40-2) on either side of the elastomer (13.16-34). If desired, the fabric (13.16-40) may be bonded to the elastomer (13.16-34) at a periphery of the elastomer (13.16-34), which is illustrated as points (13.16-44) in FIG. 553. For example, the fabric (13.16-40) may be bonded to the elastomer (13.16-34) around a periphery of the elastomer layer (e.g., the entire periphery or a portion of the periphery). The fabric (13.16-40) can be bonded to the elastomer (13.16-34) using an adhesive or other desired mounting mechanism.

In some instances, it may be desirable to allow the elastomer (13.16-34) to move to a greater degree, thereby maintaining the elastomer (13.16-34) unbonded from the fabric (13.16-40). For example, the elastomer (13.16-34) may be completely enclosed within the fabric (13.16-40) and may float within the fabric. In some embodiments, portions of the fabric (13.16-40) may be directly bonded to each other rather than to the elastomer (13.16-34). In this manner, the elastomer (13.16-34) may float within the fabric (13.16-40), which may allow the elastomer (13.16-34) to move more freely.

Because the nosepiece (13.16-28) is designed to block light from reaching the eye boxes of a user wearing the device (13.16-10), it may be desirable to ensure a tight fit between the nosepiece (13.16-28) and the user's nose, and a similar tight fit between the nosepiece (13.16-28) and the device (13.16-10). An example of an extension piece that may allow the nosepiece (13.16-28) to be tightly fitted with the device (13.16-10) is illustrated in FIG. 554.

As illustrated in FIG. 554, an extension piece (13.16-46) may be added beneath the nosepiece (13.16-28). In particular, if the user's nose bridge protrudes only a small amount, the nosepiece (13.16-28) may not reach the user's nose. Accordingly, the extension piece (13.16-46) may be attached between the support structures of the device (13.16-10), such as the support structures (13.16-26) and the nosepiece (13.16-28). The extension piece (13.16-28) may be formed of fabric, foam, plastic, and/or any other desired material. In some cases, the extension piece (13.16-28) may allow the nosepiece (13.16-28) to align with other light-blocking structures within the device (13.16-10), such as a foam member that fits against the user's face. In this manner, light may be prevented from reaching the user's eye boxes and interfering with the user's view of the display within the device (13.16-10).

In addition to or as an alternative to the extension piece (13.16-46), it may be desirable to ensure a close fit to the user's nose to prevent light from entering the user's eye boxes. Examples of nosepieces with additional structures to improve the fit to the user's nose are illustrated in FIGS. 555 and 556.

As illustrated in FIG. 555, the service loop (13.16-49) may be incorporated within the nosepiece (13.16-28). In particular, the service loop (13.16-49) (and, if desired, other portions of the nosepiece (13.16-28)) may be attached to supports (13.16-50-1, 13.16-50-2). The service loop (13.16-49) may be tightened and loosened as desired to conform the nosepiece (13.16-28) to the user's nose. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 554, the service loop (13.16-49) may be tightened to move the nosepiece (13.16-28) into position (13.16-28') by moving the nosepiece (13.16-28) downward in direction (13.16-56), rightward in direction (13.16-52), and leftward in direction (13.16-54) toward the user's nose. In this manner, the service loop (13.16-49) may allow the nosepiece (13.16-28) to fit more securely to the user's nose, thereby preventing light from entering the user's eye boxes through gaps between the nosepiece (13.16-28) and the nose.

Alternatively or additionally, the nosepiece (13.16-28) may include foam (13.16-48). The foam (13.16-48) may fill a gap between the nosepiece (13.16-28) and the user's nose and may be compressible to allow a secure fit between the nosepiece (13.16-28) and the nose. The foam (13.16-48) may be in direct contact with the user's nose (e.g., on a surface of a fabric layer, such as the fabric (13.16-40)), embedded within the nosepiece (13.16-28) (e.g., covered by a fabric, such as the fabric (13.16-40)), or otherwise attached to the nosepiece (13.16-28), as illustrated in FIG. 555.

Instead of the service loop (13.16-49), a deformable stiffener, such as a deformable stiffener (13.16-58), may be incorporated into the nosepiece (13.16-28). As illustrated in FIG. 556, the deformable stiffener (13.16-58) may allow the nosepiece (13.16-28) to be adjusted in directions (13.16-52, 13.16-54, 13.16-56) toward the user's nose to conform the nosepiece (13.16-28) to the user's nose at position (13.16-28'). The deformable reinforcement (13.16-58) may be formed within the nosepiece (13.16-28) as illustrated in FIG. 556 (i.e., covered by the fabric), or may be formed on a surface of the fabric (e.g., an inner or outer surface of the fabric (13.16-40)). Although not illustrated in FIG. 556, a gap-filling foam, such as the foam (13.16-48) of FIG. 555, may be incorporated within or on the nosepiece (13.16-28) in addition to the deformable reinforcement (13.16-58).

In some embodiments, to ensure that the nosepiece (13.16-28) is tightly sealed to the user's nose, internal components of the device (13.16-10), such as fans, may be used to move air toward the nosepiece (13.16-28), thereby sealing the nosepiece (13.16-28) around the user's nose.

In addition to improving the fit of the nosepiece (13.16-28) to prevent light from entering the user's eye boxes, it may also be desirable to incorporate layers into the nosepiece (13.16-28) that improve user comfort. Examples of various modifications that can be made to the nosepiece (13.16-28) to improve user comfort are illustrated in FIGS. 557a through 557g.

As illustrated in FIG. 557A, a nosepiece (e.g., nosepiece 13.16-28) comprising an elastomer (13.16-34) and a fabric (13.16-40) may have a rolled edge and approach the user's nose at a shallow contact angle to conform to the curved portion of the nose (13.16-60). The rolled edge may prevent the elastomer (13.16-34) from digging into the user's skin on the nose (13.16-60), while the shallower contact angle may allow the nosepiece to move over the user's nose rather than directly hitting the user's nose. Thus, by having a rolled edge and/or a shallower contact angle, the nosepiece (13.16-28) may improve comfort for a user of the device (13.16-10).

Alternatively or additionally, the nosepiece may include a foam, such as foam (13.16-62), between part or all of the elastomer (13.16-34) and the fabric (13.16-40), as illustrated in FIG. 557b. In particular, the foam (13.16-62) may be at an edge portion of the nosepiece that contacts the user's nose, thereby preventing the elastomer (13.16-34) from injuring or causing discomfort to the user's nose when the nosepiece pushes against the nose.

In some examples, it may be desirable to have a series of openings in the elastomer (13.16-34) that may or may not be filled with different materials, such as foam. For example, in FIG. 557c, the openings (13.16-64) may be provided in a portion of the nosepiece that will contact the user's nose. The openings (13.16-64) may be through openings, partial openings, may be filled with another material, such as foam, or may otherwise be more flexible than the surrounding areas of the elastomer (13.16-34). When the nosepiece pushes against the user's nose, the openings (13.16-64) may crumple, thereby preventing or reducing discomfort to the user.

If desired, a portion of the fabric may extend from the portion that contacts the user's nose to provide additional buffering between the nose and the elastomer (13.16-34). As illustrated in FIG. 557d, the fabric portion (13.16-66) may extend from the fabric (13.16-40). When worn by a user, the fabric portion (13.16-66) may first contact the user's nose, thereby increasing the amount of fabric between the nose and the elastomer (13.16-34), which may improve user comfort. In some examples, the fabric portion (13.16-66) may be a hemmed edge of the fabric (13.16-40).

If desired, at least some portions of the elastomeric material (13.16-34) that would otherwise contact the user's nose may be cut off and replaced with a more flexible material, such as foam. As illustrated in FIG. 557e, the foam portions (13.16-68) may replace portions of the elastomeric material (13.16-34) that would otherwise contact the user's nose. While the fabric (13.16-40) does not cover the foam portions (13.16-68) of FIG. 557e, the fabric (13.16-40) may overlap the foam portions (13.16-68), if desired.

In addition to or instead of the variations of FIGS. 557a-557e in which the edge portion of the nosepiece is modified to prevent the elastomeric material from causing discomfort to the user's nose, the lower portion of the nosepiece may be modified. As illustrated in FIG. 557f, a segmented material (13.16-69) may be added to the lower surface of the nosepiece (13.16-28). For example, the segmented material (13.16-69) may contact the top of the user's nose (i.e., the nose bridge) and prevent the nosepiece (13.16-28) from making direct contact with the nose, which may cause discomfort. The material (13.16-69) may be foam or elastomeric flaps.

Although FIG. 557f depicts the material (13.16-69) as segmented and non-overlapping, the material (13.16-69) may be segmented and overlapping, or may be a single connected piece of material, if desired. For example, in FIG. 557g, a foam (13.16-73) may be provided between the nosepiece (13.16-28) and the user's nose while the device (13.16-10) is worn. If desired, an optional deformable stiffener (13.16-71) may be provided on the lower surface of the nosepiece (13.16-28) to improve the fit of the nosepiece (13.16-28) on the user's nose. When the reinforcement (13.16-71) is included, the foam (13.16-73) can also prevent the reinforcement (13.16-71) from coming into direct contact with the user's nose and causing discomfort.

All of the examples in FIGS. 557A through 557G are merely illustrative examples of how to improve user comfort while ensuring a secure fit of the nosepiece to the user's nose. The examples are not limiting and may be implemented individually or together in any combination. Regardless of whether any of the structures in FIGS. 557A through 557G are used, it may be desirable to reinforce portions of the nosepiece (13.16-28). While the use of a structural frame was described with respect to FIG. 552, in some cases such a frame may add unnecessary bulk or excessive rigidity to the nosepiece (13.16-28). Therefore, a semi-rigid member may be used. An example of the use of a semi-rigid member on a nosepiece is illustrated in FIG. 558.

As illustrated in FIG. 558, a nosepiece, such as nosepiece (13.16-28), may include portions (13.16-70, 13.16-72). Portion (13.16-70) may include an elastomeric material, such as elastomer (13.16-34), and/or a fabric, such as fabric (13.16-40). Portion (13.16-72) may be coupled to portion (13.16-70) and may include a semi-rigid member. In particular, the semi-rigid member may be formed on a lower portion of nosepiece (13.16-28) (i.e., toward the lower portion of the user's nose when device (13.16-10) is worn) and may provide additional rigidity to nosepiece (13.16-28). The semi-rigid members can be formed from any desired material, such as rubber or plastic. In this way, the nosepiece (13.16-28) can remain sufficiently flexible to conform to the shape of the user's nose and maintain that shape after the device is worn by the user.

While nosepieces such as nosepiece (13.16-28) have been described as including an elastomeric member such as elastomer (13.16-34), this is merely exemplary. In some embodiments, elastomer (13.16-34) may be omitted. For example, in the example of FIG. 550, elastomer (13.16-34) may be omitted or replaced with a thicker fabric, which may be surrounded by a thinner, more extensible fabric. In the illustrative example of FIG. 559, nosepiece (13.16-28) may include fabric (13.16-73), which may be formed of fabric layers (13.16-74, 13.16-76). The fabric layers (13.16-74, 13.16-76) may be joined at points (13.16-78), for example, by laser welding, ultrasonic welding, or adhesive. The use of two (or more) fabric layers (13.16-74, 13.16-76) may thicken the fabric (13.16-73), thereby providing more support to the user's nose area. However, in general, the fabric (13.16-73) may include any suitable number of fabric layers.

The foregoing is merely exemplary, and various modifications may be made to the described embodiments. The above-described embodiments may be implemented individually or in any combination.

XIV: Powerstraps and Retaining Bands

FIG. 560 illustrates a drawing of an HMD (14.0-100) including power straps (14.0-102) and a fixation band (14.0-104). The power straps (14.0-102) and the fixation band (14.0-104) are described in more detail in this Section XIV.

14.1: Electrical Connectors

Portable electronic devices such as smartphones, laptops, tablet computing devices, smartwatches, head-mounted devices (also known as head-mounted displays (HMDs)), and headphones are becoming commonplace for people engaging in everyday activities such as travel, communication, education, entertainment, and employment. Indeed, portable electronic devices can assist in completing everyday tasks and errands, such as watching instructional videos or monitoring progress during and after exercise routines. However, some electronic devices incorporate temporary or permanent cable connections for their operation (e.g., to charge the device, provide electrical power to electronic components, and interconnect peripheral input or output devices).

With respect to HMDs, the electronic device may include one or more cable connections, each of which may have unique and specific requirements. As an example, a temporary or permanent cable connection may be coupled to the display portion of the HMD. The HMD may include one or more battery packs or electrical power sources that require periodic charging to operate the HMD for extended periods of time. However, the cable connection to the display portion may prevent the user from operating the HMD while charging (e.g., by getting caught on the user or objects around the user during use) or may otherwise restrict the user from operating the HMD.

In some examples of the present disclosure, the display portion of the HMD may receive electrical power and/or control signals via a support electrically coupled to the display portion. The support may include a plug connector that is (structurally and electrically) connected within a receptacle connector of the display portion. While connected, the support may define an electrical path that allows electrical power and/or control signals to pass between the display portion and another electronic device electrically coupled to the support (e.g., an electrical power source such as a battery pack). The support may include a receptacle connector configured to electrically connect the electronic device to the support.

One aspect of the present disclosure relates to an electronic device (e.g., an HMD) comprising an enclosure and a receptacle connector coupled or connected to the enclosure. The receptacle connector may include a housing defining an opening and an interior volume. In some examples, the housing is configured to receive a plug connector of a support within the interior volume. The receptacle connector may include one or more electrical contacts that are at least partially disposed within the interior volume and contact one or more associated electrical contacts on the plug connector. In some examples, the plug connector and the receptacle connector may define respective convex surfaces and respective concave surfaces such that the cross-sectional shape of the plug connector and/or the receptacle connector has a curved longitudinal axis. The electrical contacts of the receptacle connector may be coupled or connected to the housing at angles perpendicular to the concave and convex surfaces of the plug connector, which provides improved electrical contact between the electrical contacts of the receptacle connector and the electrical contacts of the plug connector. In some examples, the receptacle connector may include a spring-actuated fastener configured to retain the plug connector within the receptacle connector and configured to release the plug connector in response to tool action. Bumpers may be provided within the housing to provide ejection force to the plug connector, and seals may be provided adjacent the opening of the cavity to provide sealing and/or ejection force to the plug connector.

In some instances, the abrupt or accidental removal of electrical power and/or control signals from an electronic device may damage components of the electronic device and/or data stored on the electronic device. As such, cable connections that are resistant to unintentional or accidental disconnection may be desirable. In some instances, a cable assembly is provided that reliably interlocks with the electronic device to prevent unintentional or accidental extraction of the cable assembly. In some instances, a connection is provided that requires more force to remove the connection than to establish the connection (e.g., disconnecting the cable assembly from a port versus inserting the cable assembly into a port). In some instances, the cable assembly and the receptacle connector of the electronic device may be configured to prevent damage to the electronic device and loss of data even if the cable assembly is accidentally or unintentionally extracted from the receptacle connector.

One aspect of the present disclosure relates to an electronic device comprising an enclosure and a receptacle connector attached to the enclosure. The receptacle connector may form a recess that interlocks or otherwise engages with a plug connector of a cable assembly. In some examples, the plug connector may include a boot, a center member coupled to the boot, and one or more protrusions extending laterally from the center member. The one or more protrusions may extend laterally into a channel formed within the recess of the receptacle connector, or into each of the channels.

In some examples, the receptacle connector may include one or more detents disposed within the recess. Each of the one or more detents may interlock with a respective protrusion of the central member. The detents may be biased to extend into the recess by one or more leaf springs, canted coil springs, resilient foams, a combination thereof, or other biasing elements. Each of the detents may form a sloped surface that interfaces with a respective protrusion to retain the plug connector within the receptacle connector. At least one of the spring force of the biasing elements and/or the angle of the sloped surface may be correlated to a force required to extract the plug connector from the receptacle connector. In some examples, the angle of each of the sloped surfaces may be variable, such that the plug connector may be more easily extracted by lifting one side of the plug connector (e.g., the non-cable side) than the other side (e.g., the cable side of the plug connector).

In some examples, the center member may be rotatable to interlock (or unlock) the plug connector and the receptacle connector. In other words, the plug connector may be rotatably received within the receptacle connector. Alternatively, a push button, latch, slide button, or other actuating mechanism may be used to interlock (or unlock) the plug connector and the receptacle connector. For example, the actuating mechanism may be incorporated within a boot of the plug connector. Additionally or alternatively, one or more magnets may be disposed within the plug connector and/or the receptacle connector to orient the plug connector relative to the receptacle connector and/or to retain the plug connector in the receptacle connector.

One aspect of the present disclosure relates to an electronic device comprising a housing defining an exterior surface of the electronic device. The housing may define an opening within the exterior surface. An electronic component may be disposed within the housing and may include a receptacle connector coupled to the electronic component. The receptacle connector may be engaged with a trim ring that is engageable with the housing. The housing, the trim ring, and the receptacle connector may form an electrical port. The electronic device may further include a cable having a first engagement feature and a plug connector. The plug connector may include a boot, a plug, and a second engagement feature. The boot may be receivable within the opening formed in the exterior surface of the housing and may be receivable within the trim ring. The plug may be receivable within the receptacle connector to electrically couple the electronic device to the cable. The second engagement feature may interconnect or otherwise engage with the first engagement feature to retain the cable to the electronic device.

In some examples, the first and second engagement features can be one or more of biasing elements, latches, arms, protrusions, recesses, channels, magnets, canted coil springs, rotating members, sliding members, other types of engagement features, or combinations thereof. In some examples, the first engagement feature can be included within the trim ring, the second engagement feature can be included within the boot, and the first and second engagement features can latchet, interlock, or otherwise secure the boot within the trim ring such that the cable is interconnected with the electronic device. In some examples, the first engagement feature and the second engagement feature can include a lesser force for connecting the cable to the electronic device (e.g., inserting the plug connector into an electrical port) and a greater force for disconnecting the cable from the electronic device (e.g., removing the plug connector from the electrical port). In other words, the force required to extract the plug connector from the electrical port may be sufficiently large to prevent or limit unwanted or accidental removal of the cable from the electronic device. In some examples, the first engagement feature and the second engagement feature may be spring-actuated features that are actuated by the tool to disengage the plug connector from the electrical port. In other words, the action of the tool to extract the plug connector from the electrical port may prevent or limit unwanted or accidental removal of the cable from the electronic device.

Although electronic devices are described herein as HMDs, the electronic devices may include smartphones, laptops, tablet computing devices, smartwatches, headphones, or any other electronic device.

These and other examples are discussed below with reference to FIGS. 561a through 595b. However, those skilled in the art will readily recognize that the detailed description provided herein with respect to these drawings is for illustrative purposes only and should not be construed as limiting. Moreover, as used herein, a system, method, article, component, feature, or sub-feature that includes at least one of the first option, the second option, or the third option should be understood to refer to a system, method, article, component, feature, or sub-feature that can include one of each of the listed options (e.g., only one of the first option, only one of the second option, or only one of the third option), multiple of a single listed option (e.g., two or more of the first option), two options simultaneously (e.g., one of the first option and one of the second option), or a combination thereof (e.g., two of the first option and one of the second option).

Figures 561a and 561b illustrate a first electronic device (14.1-100), a cable assembly (14.1-140), and a second electronic device (14.1-130). In some examples, the first electronic device (14.1-100) may be a head-mounted display (HMD) that includes a display portion (14.1-102) and one or more supports (14.1-120). While the first electronic device (14.1-100) is illustrated as an HMD, the first electronic device (14.1-100) may in other examples be a tablet computing device, a smartphone, a smartwatch, or any other electronic device. The display portion (14.1-102) may output visual content viewable by a user of the electronic device (14.1-100). For example, the display portion (14.1-102) may be a light emitting diode (LED) display, an organic light emitting diode (OLED) display, a liquid crystal display (LCD) display, a micro-LED display, etc. In some examples, the display portion (14.1-102) may be any type of display currently known in the art or developed in the future.

Supports (14.1-120) can hold an electronic device (14.1-100) against a user's head (14.1-110). In some examples, a first electronic device (14.1-100) can include a first support (14.1-120) positioned on a first side of the user's head (14.1-110) and illustrated in FIGS. 561A and 561B, and a second support (14.1-120) (not separately illustrated) coupled to the display portion (14.1-102) and positioned on a second side of the user's head (14.1-110) opposite the side of the user's head (14.1-110) illustrated in FIGS. 561A and 561B. In some examples, a single support (14.1-120) may be included, which may be a band (14.1-123) or may include a band portion coupled to the display portion (14.1-102). The support (14.1-120) may be configured to encircle or otherwise surround a portion of the user's head (14.1-110) and may be coupled to the display portion (14.1-102) at two or more locations. In some examples where the support (14.1-120) includes a band (14.1-123) or a band portion, the support (14.1-120) may be made of an elastomeric material that is capable of bending or stretching and thereafter returning to its initial state. In other examples, the supports (14.1-120) may be separate structural straps that contain electronics, processors, speakers, plugs, and/or other functional elements. These structural straps may then be connected to a band (14.1-123) that flexibly engages the user's head to provide retention in the system relative to the facial engagement points. As used herein, supports will be described as separate structural straps that include wires, electronics, speakers, and/or other functional elements.

The supports (14.1-120) may include plug connectors (14.1-122) that may be coupled to receptacle connectors (14.1-104) of the display portion (14.1-120). The receptacle connectors (14.1-104) may include recesses configured to receive portions of the supports (14.1-120), such as the plug connectors (14.1-122). As illustrated in FIG. 561a, the plug connectors (14.1-122) may be positioned at proximal ends of the supports (14.1-120). The plug connectors (14.1-122) and the receptacle connectors (14.1-104) may each include one or more electrical contacts (not separately illustrated) that electrically couple the plug connectors (14.1-122) and the supports (14.1-120) to the display portion (14.1-102). In other words, as illustrated in FIG. 561b, the supports (14.1-120) can be electrically coupled to the display portion (14.1-102) via the plug connectors (14.1-122) and the receptacle connectors (14.1-104) when the plug connectors (14.1-122) are coupled to the receptacle connectors (14.1-104) (e.g., when the plug connectors (14.1-122) are at least partially disposed within the recesses of the receptacle connectors (14.1-104). Examples of the plug connectors (14.1-122) and the receptacle connectors (14.1-104) will be discussed in more detail below with reference to FIGS. 562 through 575. In some examples, the supports (14.1-120) may be welded, bonded, fastened, crimped, clipped, mechanically interlocked, or otherwise retained to the display portion (14.1-102).

Each of the supports (14.1-120) may include an enclosure (14.1-121) (referred to as a housing) formed of a polymer, metal, ceramic, or combinations thereof. In some examples, the enclosure (14.1-121) may form a channel or cavity extending between a receptacle connector (14.1-124) and a plug connector (14.1-122) of each support (14.1-120). The supports (14.1-120) are electrically coupled to the plug connector (14.1-122) (and the display portion (14.1-102) via the plug connector (14.1-122) and the receptacle connector (14.1-104)) such that electrical signals and/or electrical power received at the receptacle connector (14.1-124) can be provided to the plug connector (14.1-122) or other electronic components of the first electronic device (14.1-100). For example, one or more electronic components (e.g., printed circuit boards, processors, electrical wires, digital logic circuitry, digital processing circuitry, etc.) may be positioned within a cavity formed within the enclosure (14.1-121) and extend between the receptacle connector (14.1-124) and the plug connector (14.1-122) to form an electrical path between the receptacle connector (14.1-124) and the plug connector (14.1-122).

Each of the supports (14.1-120) may include a receptacle connector (14.1-124) disposed on or within the enclosure (14.1-121). The receptacle connector (14.1-124) may form a recess (14.1-126) capable of receiving a portion of a cable assembly (14.1-140). The cable assembly (14.1-140) may include a plug connector (14.1-142) at a distal end of the cable assembly (14.1-140). The plug connector (14.1-142) may include a boot (14.1-143) and a center member (14.1-145) at least partially disposed within the boot (14.1-143). The center member (14.1-145) may include one or more electrical contacts (not separately illustrated) that electrically couple the plug connector (14.1-142) to the first electronic device (14.1-100). In other words, as illustrated in FIG. 561b, the first electronic device (14.1-100) may be electrically coupled to the second electronic device (14.1-130) via the cable assembly (14.1-140) when the plug connector (14.1-142) is at least mated to the receptacle connector (14.1-124) (e.g., when the center member (14.1-145) is at least partially disposed within the recess (14.1-126). Examples of receptacle connectors (14.1-124) and plug connectors (14.1-142) will be discussed in more detail below with reference to FIGS. 576a through 585b.

As illustrated in FIGS. 561a and 561b, each receptacle connector (14.1-124) may be positioned on or within an enclosure (14.1-121) of a respective support (14.1-120). In some examples, the receptacle connector (14.1-124) may be positioned on the enclosure (14.1-121) and disposed a distance from the display portion (14.1-102). The plug connector (14.1-142) may be operatively coupled to the enclosure (14.1-121) (e.g., via the receptacle connector (14.1-124) of the enclosure (14.1-121)) rather than directly coupling the plug connector (14.1-142) to the display portion (14.1-102). The receptacle connector (14.1-124) may be positioned on or within the enclosure (14.1-121) such that the display portion (14.1-102) and the receptacle connector (14.1-124) are positioned on opposite sides of the user's ear (14.1-112). In some examples, the display portion (14.1-102) may be coupled to a proximal end of the support (14.1-120) and the receptacle connector (14.1-124) may be positioned on or within a distal end of the support (14.1-120) opposite the display portion (14.1-102). In some examples, the receptacle connector (14.1-124) may be positioned on or within the enclosure (14.1-121) between the proximal and distal ends of the support (14.1-120) such that the display portion (14.1-102) and the user's ear (14.1-112) are positioned on opposite sides of the receptacle connector (14.1-124) (as shown in FIGS. 561a and 561b). In some examples, the receptacle connector (14.1-124) may be positioned within the enclosure (14.1-121) closer to the distal end than to the proximal end. In some examples, the receptacle connector (14.1-124) may be positioned within the enclosure (14.1-121) closer to the proximal end than to the distal end. In some examples, the receptacle connector (14.1-124) may be positioned behind the user's ear (14.1-112) such that the user's ear (14.1-112) is between the display portion (14.1-102) and the receptacle connector (14.1-124).

Some HMDs utilize a rechargeable power source (e.g., a battery) attached to the HMD to provide electrical power to electronic components (e.g., processors, displays, speakers, etc.). The size or capacity of the rechargeable power source may be limited by the desired size, shape, and weight of the HMD. After the rechargeable power source is substantially depleted, the user may be prompted to stop using the HMD to allow the power source to recharge.

In some aspects of the present disclosure, rather than relying on a power source located within the HMD (e.g., the first electronic device (14.1-100)), at least one power source (e.g., the second electronic device (14.1-130)) may additionally or alternatively be electrically coupled to the HMD by a cable connection (e.g., a cable assembly (14.1-140)) that is electrically coupled to the enclosure (14.1-121) of the support (14.1-120) via a receptacle connector (14.1-124). It may be advantageous to electrically couple the power source (e.g., the second electronic device (14.1-130)) to the receptacle connector (14.1-124) of the support (14.1-120). For example, electrical power and/or electrical signals may be provided to a first electronic device (14.1-100) while a second electronic device (14.1-130) is disposed within a case, pocket, pouch, or otherwise held by a user. Relocating the electrical power source away from the first electronic device (14.1-100) may accommodate a greater electrical power source than may be disposed directly on the first electronic device (14.1-100), which may provide for expanded use of the first electronic device (14.1-100). Positioning the receptacle connector (14.1-124) between the proximal and distal ends of the support (14.1-120) may be advantageous in at least partially limiting user contact with the cable assembly (14.1-140) by positioning the cable assembly (14.1-140) at the side of the user rather than hanging or suspending the cable assembly (14.1-140) in front of the user near the first electronic device (14.1-100).

Electrically coupling a power source (e.g., a second electronic device (14.1-130)) to a receptacle connector (14.1-124) of the support (14.1-120) may also enable a reduction in weight and/or size of the display portion (14.1-102) as opposed to placing the power source directly on the display portion (14.1-102). A reduction in weight and/or size of the display portion (14.1-102) may make the first electronic device (14.1-100) more comfortable to use, more convenient to transport, and more convenient to store.

Although the receptacle connectors (14.1-124) and plug connectors (14.1-142) are illustrated in FIGS. 561A and 561B as having cubic or square cross-sections, the receptacle connectors (14.1-124) and plug connectors (14.1-142) may, in some instances, define other shapes and cross-sections. For example, the cross-sections of the receptacle connectors (14.1-124) and plug connectors (14.1-142) may be circular or rounded to allow rotation of the plug connectors (14.1-142) relative to the receptacle connectors (14.1-124). In other words, the plug connectors (14.1-142) may be rotatably received within the receptacle connectors (14.1-124).

In some examples, the second electronic device (14.1-130) may provide electrical power and/or electrical signals to the first electronic device (14.1-100) via the cable assembly (14.1-140). For example, the second electronic device (14.1-130) may be an external electrical power source, such as a lithium battery pack or other device capable of supplying electrical power to the first electronic device (14.1-100). The cable assembly (14.1-140) may include a plug connector (14.1-144) that may be coupled to a receptacle connector (14.1-132) of the second electronic device (14.1-130).

The plug connector (14.1-144) may include a boot (14.1-146) and a plug (14.1-147) at least partially disposed within the boot (14.1-146). The receptacle connector (14.1-132) of the second electronic device (14.1-130) may include a recess configured to receive portions of the plug connector (14.1-144). The plug (14.1-147) may include one or more electrical contacts (not shown) electrically coupling the plug connector (14.1-144) to the receptacle connector (14.1-132) of the second electronic device (14.1-130). In other words, as illustrated in FIG. 561b, the second electronic device (14.1-130) can be electrically coupled to the cable assembly (14.1-140) via a plug connector (14.1-144) and a receptacle connector (14.1-132). The second electronic device (14.1-130) can be electrically coupled to the first electronic device (14.1-100) via the cable assembly (14.1-140) and supports (14.1-120). Examples of the receptacle connector (14.1-132) and the plug connector (14.1-144) will be discussed in more detail below with reference to FIGS. 586a through 595b.

As discussed in detail below, the various plug connectors and receptacle connectors included within the HMD (e.g., coupling the first electronic device (14.1-100) and the second electronic device (14.1-130)) may be mated to one another via various mating mechanisms. In some examples, the mating mechanisms may require a relatively small force to mate the plug connector and the receptacle connector, and a relatively large force to unmate the plug connector and the receptacle connector. In some examples, once the plug connector and the receptacle connector are mated, tool action may be required to unmate the plug connector and the receptacle connector. In some examples, various seals may be provided on the plug connectors and/or the receptacle connectors to provide a seal between the plug connectors and the receptacle connectors. The seals may provide forces, such as ejection forces, between the plug connector and the receptacle connector to assist in removal of the plug connector from the receptacle connector.

FIGS. 562 through 575 illustrate various examples of receptacle connectors and plug connectors that can be used as receptacle connectors (14.1-104) of the display portion (14.1-102) and plug connectors (14.1-122) of the supports (14.1-120).

FIG. 562 illustrates a first electronic device (14.1-200) comprising a display portion (14.1-202), supports (14.1-210), and a cable assembly (14.1-220). In some examples, the first electronic device (14.1-200) may be a head-mounted device (HMD). While the first electronic device (14.1-200) is illustrated as an HMD, the first electronic device (14.1-200) may be a tablet computing device, a smartphone, a smartwatch, headphones, or any other electronic device. The display portion (14.1-202) may output visual content viewable by a user of the first electronic device (14.1-200). The first electronic device (14.1-200), the display portion (14.1-202), the supports (14.1-210), and the cable assembly (14.1-220) may be similar to or identical to the first electronic device (14.1-100), the display portion (14.1-102), the supports (14.1-120), and the cable assembly (14.1-140) discussed above with respect to FIGS. 561a and 561b, respectively.

The supports (14.1-210) can hold the first electronic device (14.1-200) against the user's head. As illustrated in FIG. 562, the first electronic device (14.1-200) can include two supports (14.1-210) coupled to the display portion (14.1-202) and configured to be positioned on either side of the user's head. The supports (14.1-210) can be connected to the display portion (14.1-202) at two or more locations.

The supports (14.1-210) may each include a housing or enclosure (14.1-212) formed of a polymer, metal, ceramic, combinations thereof, or the like. In some examples, the enclosure (14.1-212) may form a channel or cavity extending between a receptacle connector (14.1-222) of the support (14.1-210) and a plug connector (14.1-214) of the support (14.1-210). The support (14.1-210) may be electrically coupled to the display portion (14.1-202) such that electrical signals and/or electrical power received at the receptacle connector (14.1-222) may be provided to the display portion (14.1-202) via the plug connector (14.1-214). For example, one or more electronic components (e.g., printed circuit boards, processors, electrical wires, digital logic circuitry, digital processing circuitry, etc.) may be positioned within a cavity formed within the enclosure (14.1-212) and extend between the receptacle connector (14.1-222) and the plug connector (14.1-214) to form an electrical path between the receptacle connector (14.1-222) and the plug connector (14.1-214).

In some examples, the support (14.1-210) may be coupled to the display portion (14.1-202). For example, the support (14.1-210) may be welded, bonded, fastened, crimped, clipped, or otherwise retained within a receptacle connector (14.1-206) of the display portion (14.1-202). In some examples, the proximal end of the support (14.1-210) may include, or may be electrically conductive, a plug connector (14.1-214) that allows electrical power and/or electrical signals received by the receptacle connector (14.1-222) of the support (14.1-210) to be transmitted to the display portion (14.1-202) via the plug connector (14.1-214) and the receptacle connector (14.1-206).

As illustrated in FIG. 562, each of the supports (14.1-210) may include a plug connector (14.1-214) disposed at a proximal end of the support (14.1-210). The plug connector (14.1-214) may be coupled (e.g., electrically and structurally) to the display portion (14.1-202) by positioning the proximal end of the support (14.1-210) within a receptacle connector (14.1-206) coupled to the housing (14.1-204) of the display portion (14.1-202). The receptacle connector (14.1-206) may be positioned on or within the housing (14.1-204) of the display portion (14.1-202). In some examples, the receptacle connector (14.1-206) of the display portion (14.1-202) may be in electrical communication with the receptacle connector (14.1-222) of the support (14.1-210). That is, the cable assembly (14.1-220) may be operatively coupled to the receptacle connector (14.1-222) of the support (14.1-210) rather than directly coupled to the display portion (14.1-202) such that electrical power and/or electrical signals may be transmitted between the receptacle connector (14.1-222) of the support (14.1-210) and the receptacle connector (14.1-206) of the display portion (14.1-202).

The plug connector (14.1-214) may include one or more electrical contacts (14.1-216A, 14.1-216B, 14.1-216C) that electrically couple to respective electrical contacts (14.1-208A, 14.1-208B, 14.1-208C) disposed within the receptacle connector (14.1-206) while the plug connector (14.1-214) is disposed within the receptacle connector (14.1-206). One or more electrical contacts (14.1-216A, 14.1-216B, 14.1-216C) and one or more associated electrical contacts (14.1-208A, 14.1-208B, 14.1-208C) may provide electrical signals, electrical power, a ground path, other electrical communication, or a combination thereof between the support (14.1-210) and the display portion (14.1-202).

Electrically coupling a power source (e.g., a second electronic device (104)) to a receptacle connector (14.1-222) within the support (14.1-210) may also enable a reduction in weight and/or size of the display portion (14.1-202), as opposed to placing the power source directly on the display portion (14.1-202). A reduction in weight and/or size of the display portion (14.1-202) may make the first electronic device (14.1-200) more comfortable to use, more convenient to transport, and more convenient to store. Although the receptacle connector (14.1-206) and plug connector (14.1-214) are illustrated in FIG. 562 as having a cubic or square cross-section, the receptacle connector (14.1-206) and plug connector (14.1-214) may define other shapes and cross-sections in other examples. For example, the cross-sections of the receptacle connector (14.1-206) and plug connector (14.1-214) may be elongated and/or curved such that the support (14.1-210) can only be inserted into the receptacle connector (14.1-206) of the display portion (14.1-202) in a single orientation.

Figures 563a and 563b illustrate perspective views of a receptacle connector (14.1-300) and a plug connector (14.1-320). The receptacle connector (14.1-300) can be used as a receptacle connector (14.1-104) or a receptacle connector (14.1-206), and the plug connector (14.1-320) can be used as a plug connector (14.1-122) or a plug connector (14.1-214) of the first electronic device (14.1-100/14.1-200) of Figures 561a to 562. A receptacle connector (14.1-300) may include a receptacle housing (14.1-304), one or more electrical contacts (e.g., electrical contacts (14.1-308A, 14.1-308B, 14.1-308C)), a cover member (14.1-302), and a printed circuit board (PCB) (14.1-316).

In some examples, the receptacle housing (14.1-304) may be manufactured from an electrically insulating material, such as a polymer or ceramic, and may be manufactured by molding, machining, casting, stamping, or a combination thereof. The receptacle housing (14.1-304) may include one or more side walls defining a recess (14.1-310). The recess (14.1-310) may be configured to receive and retain a plug connector (14.1-320). For example, at least a portion of the plug connector (14.1-320) may be inserted into and received within the recess (14.1-310). The recess (14.1-310) may define a cross-sectional shape having a curved or bent longitudinal axis. For example, the recess (14.1-310) may have a cross-sectional shape that substantially conforms to the cross-sectional shape of the plug connector (e.g., plug connector (14.1-320)). In other words, the side walls of the receptacle housing (14.1-304) may define convex and concave surfaces whose size, shape, and contour correlate with the convex and concave surfaces of the plug connector (14.1-320).

One or more electrical contacts (e.g., electrical contacts (14.1-308A, 14.1-308B, 14.1-308C)) may extend from a sidewall of the receptacle connector (14.1-300) into a recess (14.1-310). The electrical contacts may provide electrical signals, electrical power, a ground path, other electrical communications, or a combination thereof to the PCB (14.1-316). In some examples, a first set of electrical contacts, including electrical contacts (14.1-308A, 14.1-308B, 14.1-308C), may be disposed on a first side of the recess (14.1-310), and a second set of electrical contacts (not separately illustrated) may be disposed on an opposite second side of the recess (14.1-310). As discussed in detail below, the electrical contacts may be attached to the receptacle housing (14.1-304) at angles perpendicular to the surface of the plug connector (14.1-320) such that the electrical contacts are configured to make contact. This provides improved contact between the electrical contacts of the receptacle connector (14.1-300) and the electrical contacts of the plug connector (14.1-320).

In FIG. 563b, the plug connector (14.1-320) may define a top surface and a bottom surface. The top surface may be a convex outer surface or may otherwise define a radius of curvature. The bottom surface may be a concave outer surface extending parallel or substantially parallel to the top surface. One or more electrical contacts (e.g., electrical contacts 14.1-324A, 14.1-324B, 14.1-324C) may be disposed on the top surface and/or the bottom surface of the plug connector (14.1-320). In some examples, the electrical contacts may be provided on the bottom surface of the plug connector (14.1-320), and the top surface of the plug connector (14.1-320) may be free of any electrical contacts; Alternatively, the electrical contacts may be provided on the top surface of the plug connector (14.1-320), and the bottom surface of the plug connector (14.1-320) may be free from any electrical contacts.

In some examples, the plug connector (14.1-320) may include one or more guide channels (14.1-328) and one or more retaining channels (14.1-326). The guide channels (14.1-328) and/or the retaining channels (14.1-326) may be formed on a top surface, a bottom surface, or other surfaces (e.g., side surfaces) of the plug connector (14.1-320). The guide channels (14.1-328) may accommodate guide rails of a receptacle connector of the display portion (e.g., guide rails (14.1-313) illustrated in FIG. 565a) to limit or inhibit movement between the support including the plug connector (14.1-320) and the display portion. The guide channels (14.1-328) may also be advantageous in enabling insertion of the plug connector (14.1-320) into the receptacle connector in a limited combination of configurations. For example, the guide rail may prevent insertion of the plug connector (14.1-320) into the receptacle connector unless the plug connector (14.1-320) has an associated guide channel (14.1-328).

The retention channels (14.1-326) can accommodate latches (14.1-312) of the receptacle connector (14.1-300) to retain the plug connector (14.1-320) within the recess (14.1-310) of the receptacle connector (14.1-300). The retention channels (14.1-326) and the latches (14.1-312) can prevent unwanted removal of the plug connector (14.1-320) from the recess (14.1-310). In some examples, the retention channels (14.1-326) and latches (14.1-312) may retain the plug connector (14.1-320) within the recess (14.1-310) of the receptacle connector (14.1-300) in a position where the electrical contacts of the plug connector (14.1-320) align with the electrical contacts of the receptacle connector (14.1-300).

As discussed in detail below, the receptacle connector (14.1-314) may include a push block (14.1-314) operatively coupled to latches (14.1-312). The push block (14.1-314) may be actuated by a tool, and actuation of the push block (14.1-314) may rotate the latches (14.1-312) outwardly from the recess (14.1-310) such that the plug connector (14.1-320) may be removed from the recess (14.1-310). The latches (14.1-312) can be configured so that a large force is required to pull the plug connector (14.1-320) out of the recess (14.1-310), but a small force is required to pull the plug connector (14.1-320) out of the recess (14.1-310) when the push block (14.1-314) is actuated and the latches (14.1-312) release the plug connector (14.1-320). This allows the plug connector (14.1-320) to be removed when necessary, but prevents accidental or unintentional removal of the plug connector (14.1-320) from the receptacle connector (14.1-300).

The guide channels (14.1-328) and the retaining channels (14.1-326) are illustrated as partial cylindrical shapes. However, any suitable shapes may be used for the guide channels (14.1-328) and the retaining channels (14.1-326), and the guide channels (14.1-328) and the retaining channels (14.1-326) may have square, rectangular, semicircular, triangular, U-shaped, V-shaped, other geometric shapes, combinations thereof, or similar cross-sectional shapes. In some examples, the cross-sectional shapes of the guide channels (14.1-328) and the retaining channels (14.1-326) may vary along the length of the channels. For example, the guide channels (14.1-328) and the retaining channels (14.1-326) may form rectangular cross-sectional shapes that taper to square cross-sectional shapes along the length of the respective channels.

The receptacle connector (14.1-300) may include a face seal (14.1-306) adjacent to the recess (14.1-310). The face seal (14.1-306) may surround at least a portion of the recess (14.1-310), such as a distal portion of the recess (14.1-310). The face seal (14.1-306) may act as a seal to prevent or limit the ingress of contaminants (e.g., liquids, dust, lint, debris, etc.) into the receptacle connector (14.1-300) through the recess (14.1-310), for example, when a plug connector (14.1-320) is inserted into the recess (14.1-310) of the receptacle connector (14.1-300). In some examples, the face seal (14.1-306) may be configured to provide an ejection force to the plug connector (14.1-320). This may, for example, assist a user in removing the plug connector (14.1-320) from the receptacle connector (14.1-300) when the push block (14.1-314) is actuated.

The cover member (14.1-302) may include an upper portion and a lower portion. The upper portion and the lower portion may be machined, molded, stamped, extruded, or otherwise manufactured from one or more materials, such as metal, ceramic, or polymer. In some examples, the lower portion may at least partially define apertures, which may be used to mount the receptacle connector to a housing or enclosure of the display portion. Each of the upper portion and the lower portion may provide a support structure for the receptacle connector (14.1-300). The upper portion and the lower portion may shield the receptacle connector (14.1-300) from propagating errant electromagnetic waves from the receptacle connector (14.1-300).

The PCB (14.1-316) may be electrically coupled to electrical contacts of the receptacle connector (14.1-300) (e.g., electrical contacts (14.1-308A, 14.1-308B, 14.1-308C)). For example, the PCB (14.1-316) may include one or more electrical traces that conduct electrical signals and/or electrical power from the electrical contacts to an electronic component (e.g., a processor, electrical wires, digital logic circuitry, digital processing circuitry, etc.) disposed on the PCB (14.1-316). The PCB (14.1-316) and/or one or more electronic components electrically coupled to the PCB (14.1-316) may be electrically coupled to one or more electrical wires (not shown) to form at least a portion of an electrical path for conveying electrical signals, electrical power, electrical ground, other electrical communications, or a combination thereof, between the receptacle connector (14.1-300) and the display or other electronic components within the display portion (e.g., the display portion (14.1-102/14.1-202)). Similarly, the PCB (14.1-316) may form at least a portion of an electrical path for conveying electrical signals, electrical power, electrical ground, other electrical communications, or a combination thereof, between the receptacle connector (14.1-300) and the plug connector (14.1-320).

FIG. 564 illustrates an exploded view of a receptacle connector (14.1-300) including a receptacle housing (14.1-304). The receptacle housing (14.1-304) may form slits or slots within sidewalls of the receptacle housing (14.1-304) that allow a first set of electrical contacts (e.g., electrical contacts (14.1-308A, 14.1-308B, 14.1-308C)) to extend through the sidewalls and into the recess (14.1-310). In some examples, the receptacle housing (14.1-304) may further include slits or slots in the sidewalls that allow a second set of electrical contacts (e.g., electrical contacts (14.1-309A, 14.1-309B, 14.1-309C)) to extend through the sidewalls of the receptacle housing (14.1-304) and into the recess (14.1-310). The second set of electrical contacts may extend from the first set of electrical contacts through a different sidewall of the receptacle housing (14.1-304) and into the recess (14.1-310). In some examples, the plug connector (14.1-320) may not have electrical contacts that make contact with both the first set of electrical contacts and the second set of electrical contacts. In other words, an example of a support may include electrical contacts that utilize only one of the sets of electrical contacts illustrated in FIG. 564. Another example of a support may include electrical contacts that utilize two sets of electrical contacts illustrated in FIG. 564. Thus, a single configuration of a receptacle connector (14.1-300) having two sets of electrical contacts may be operable with multiple configurations of supports (e.g., supports having different electrical contact configurations).

As illustrated in FIG. 564, in some examples, each of the electrical contacts of the first set of electrical contacts may be provided with a corresponding electrical contact of the second set of electrical contacts. Each set of corresponding electrical contacts may be disposed within and coupled to the receptacle housing (14.1-304) at an angle oblique to a longitudinal axis of the recess (14.1-310) (e.g., a lateral axis of the receptacle housing (14.1-304)). Each set of electrical contacts may be coupled to the receptacle housing (14.1-304) at an angle perpendicular to a surface of the plug connector (14.1-310) with which the electrical contacts are configured to make contact. This improves electrical contact between the electrical contacts of the receptacle connector (14.1-300) and the plug connector (14.1-320). Each set of electrical contacts may also be positioned within the receptacle housing (14.1-304) at an oblique angle with respect to other sets of electrical contacts, such as adjacent sets of electrical contacts, and coupled thereto.

The receptacle connector (14.1-300) may include a locking mechanism for retaining the plug connector (14.1-320) within the recess (14.1-310). In the example illustrated in FIG. 564, the locking mechanism includes a push block (14.1-314), a spring (14.1-318), a guide rail (14.1-319), and latches (14.1-312). The latches (14.1-312) extend through openings in the receptacle housing (14.1-304) into the recess (14.1-310). The latches (14.1-312) are pivotally coupled to the receptacle housing (14.1-304). The latches (14.1-312) may be in an engaged configuration when the latches (14.1-312) are pivoted into the recess (14.1-310) or in an unengaged configuration when the latches are pivoted out of the recess (14.1-310).

A push block (14.1-314) is coupled to latches (14.1-312), a spring (14.1-319), and a guide rail (14.1-319). The push block (14.1-314) is configured to slide along the guide rail (14.1-319) and to rotate the latches (14.1-312) between an engaged configuration and a non-engaged configuration. The spring (14.1-318) is configured to retain the push block (14.1-314) in an initial position in which the latches (14.1-312) are in the engaged configuration. A user can apply force to the push block (14.1-314) using a tool or the like and push the push block (14.1-314) along the guide rail (14.1-319). This rotates the latches (14.1-312) into the non-engaged configuration. Once the latches are in the disengaged configuration, the plug connector (14.1-320) can be released from the recess (14.1-310) and removed from the receptacle connector (14.1-300). The spring (14.1-318) resists the force applied to the push block (14.1-314) and the movement of the push block (14.1-314), and once the force is no longer applied to the push block (14.1-314), the latches (14.1-312) return the push block (14.1-314) to its initial position with the engaged configuration. In this way, the latches (14.1-312), push block (14.1-314), spring (14.1-318), and guide rail (14.1-319) are used to retain the plug connector (14.1-320) within the recess (14.1-310) of the receptacle connector (14.1-300) and to release the plug connector (14.1-320) from the receptacle connector (14.1-300).

A face seal (14.1-306) can be coupled to a front surface of the receptacle housing (14.1-304) and can surround a recess (14.1-310). The face seal (14.1-306) can be molded, bonded, welded, fastened, or otherwise secured to the surface of the receptacle housing (14.1-304). In some examples, the face seal (14.1-306) can include an elastomeric material that can be stretched around a lip of the receptacle housing (14.1-304) and secured to the receptacle housing (14.1-304) by interference with the receptacle housing (14.1-304). Bumpers (14.1-307) may be coupled to the receptacle housing (14.1-304) at the rear surface of the recess (14.1-310). The bumpers (14.1-307) may be molded, glued, welded, fastened, or otherwise secured to the surface of the receptacle housing (14.1-304). The bumpers (14.1-307) and the face seal (14.1-306) may provide an ejection force to a plug connector (14.1-320) inserted into the recess (14.1-310) of the receptacle connector (14.1-300). For example, the bumpers (14.1-307) and the face seal (14.1-306) may provide resistance to the plug connector (14.1-320) as it is inserted into the recess (14.1-310) and may assist in releasing the plug connector (14.1-320) from the recess (14.1-310) when the latches (14.1-312) are rotated into an unengaged configuration. This may allow the plug connector (14.1-320) to be released from the recess by actuating the push block (14.1-314) with a tool, without requiring the user to otherwise pull on the plug connector (14.1-320). The bumpers (14.1-307) and face seals (14.1-306) may also retain the electrical contacts of the plug connector (14.1-320) in a desired position relative to the electrical contacts of the receptacle connector (14.1-300).

The cover member (14.1-302) may include an upper portion (14.1-302A), a lower portion (14.1-302B), front portions (14.1-302C), and a rear portion (14.1-302D). Each of the portions of the cover member (14.1-302) may be coupled to the receptacle housing (14.1-304). For example, the portions of the cover member (14.1-302) may be bonded, fastened, welded, or otherwise attached to the receptacle housing (14.1-304) (e.g., by a polymer-based adhesive tape). The cover member (14.1-302) may provide a shielding and support structure for the receptacle housing (14.1-304).

Figures 565a and 565b illustrate front views of a receptacle connector (14.1-300). As illustrated in Figure 565a, a face seal (14.1-306) may surround a recess (14.1-310) of a receptacle housing (14.1-304). Bumpers (14.1-307) may be positioned on a rear surface of the receptacle housing (14.1-304) adjacent to the recess (14.1-310). When a plug connector (14.1-320) is inserted into the recess (14.1-310), the bumpers (14.1-307) may be positioned between the rear inner surface of the receptacle housing (14.1-304) and the plug connector (14.1-320). Each of the bumpers (14.1-307) and face seals (14.1-306) may provide release force to the plug connector (14.1-320), as previously discussed.

As illustrated in FIG. 565a, the receptacle housing (14.1-304) may include one or more guide rails (14.1-313). Each guide rail (14.1-313) may be disposed on a respective side wall of the receptacle housing (14.1-304) and may extend into a recess (14.1-310). The guide rails (14.1-313) may be molded, co-molded, or otherwise formed with the receptacle housing (14.1-304) as a single, unitary structure. The guide rails (14.1-313) may be accommodated within the guide channels (14.1-328) of the plug connector (14.1-320) to provide a rigid connection between the support including the plug connector (14.1-320) and the display portion including the receptacle connector (14.1-300). In other words, the guide rails (14.1-313) and the guide channels (14.1-328) may limit the motion or free play between the support and the display portion. Additionally or alternatively, the guide rails (14.1-313) may limit or prevent the plug connector (14.1-320) from being inserted into the receptacle connector (14.1-300) in an undesirable orientation and/or configuration.

FIG. 565b illustrates orientations of electrical contacts (e.g., electrical contacts 14.1-308A, 14.1-308B, 14.1-308C, 14.1-309A, 14.1-309B, 14.1-309C) of a receptacle connector (14.1-300) relative to a receptacle housing (14.1-304). As illustrated in FIG. 565b, each of the electrical contacts may be arranged at an oblique angle relative to the lateral and vertical axes of the receptacle housing (14.1-304). The electrical contacts may be arranged such that surfaces of the electrical contacts configured to contact the plug connector (14.1-320) are perpendicular to a surface of the plug connector (14.1-320) that the electrical contacts are configured to contact. This provides improved contact between the electrical contacts of the receptacle connector (14.1-300) and the electrical contacts of the plug connector (14.1-320) by configuring the surfaces of the electrical contacts of the receptacle connector (14.1-300) to contact the plug connector (14.1-320) rather than just the edges or corners. Each of the electrical contacts of the receptacle connector (14.1-300) may also be arranged at an oblique angle to adjacent electrical contacts.

Figures 566a and 566b illustrate cross-sectional side views of receptacle connectors. In Figure 566a, a receptacle connector (14.1-400A) includes an electrical contact (14.1-402A) stitched vertically to a receptacle housing (14.1-404A). The electrical contact (14.1-402A) may have a longitudinal axis extending horizontally, and the electrical contact (14.1-402A) may be stitched vertically to the receptacle housing (14.1-404A). The electrical contact (14.1-402A) may be stitched to the receptacle housing (14.1-404A) in a direction perpendicular to the insertion direction of the plug connector. The electrical contacts (14.1-402A) are configured to make contact with the plug connector when the plug connector is inserted into the recess (14.1-410) of the receptacle housing (14.1-404A).

A cover member (14.1-406) may be provided around the receptacle housing (14.1-404A) to provide support for and shielding of the receptacle housing (14.1-404A). A face seal (14.1-408) may be provided along an inner surface of the receptacle housing (14.1-404A) adjacent to a recess (14.1-410) into which the plug connector is to be inserted. A bumper (14.1-412) may be provided along an inner surface of the receptacle housing (14.1-404A) adjacent to the recess (14.1-410) at a rear surface of the recess (14.1-410) for an opening of the recess (14.1-410) into which the plug connector is to be inserted. The bumper (14.1-412) provides a stop when the plug connector is inserted into the recess (14.1-410), and the bumper (14.1-412) and the face seal (14.1-408) can provide an ejection force to the plug connector when the plug connector is unlatched from the receptacle connector (14.1-400A). The bumper (14.1-412) and the face seal (14.1-408) are configured to be positioned between the plug connector and the receptacle housing (14.1-404A) when the plug connector is inserted into the recess (14.1-410).

In FIG. 566b, a receptacle connector (14.1-400B) includes an electrical contact (14.1-402B) that is horizontally stitched into a receptacle housing (14.1-404B). The electrical contact (14.1-402B) may have a longitudinal axis extending horizontally, and the electrical contact (14.1-402B) may be stitched into the receptacle housing (14.1-404B) in a horizontal direction. The electrical contact (14.1-402B) may be stitched into the receptacle housing (14.1-404B) in a direction parallel to an insertion direction of the plug connector. The electrical contact (14.1-402B) is configured to make contact with the plug connector when the plug connector is inserted into the recess (14.1-410) of the receptacle housing (14.1-404B).

A cover member (14.1-406) may be provided around the receptacle housing (14.1-404B) to provide support for and shielding of the receptacle housing (14.1-404B). A face seal (14.1-408) may be provided along an inner surface of the receptacle housing (14.1-404B) adjacent to a recess (14.1-410) into which the plug connector is to be inserted. A bumper (14.1-412) may be provided along an inner surface of the receptacle housing (14.1-404B) adjacent to the recess (14.1-410) at a rear surface of the recess (14.1-410) for an opening of the recess (14.1-410) into which the plug connector is to be inserted. The bumper (14.1-412) provides a stop when the plug connector is inserted into the recess (14.1-410), and the bumper (14.1-412) and the face seal (14.1-408) can provide an ejection force to the plug connector when the plug connector is unlatched from the receptacle connector (14.1-400B). The bumper (14.1-412) and the face seal (14.1-408) are configured to be positioned between the plug connector and the receptacle housing (14.1-404B) when the plug connector is inserted into the recess (14.1-410).

Figures 567a and 567b illustrate perspective views of a receptacle connector (14.1-500) and a plug connector (14.1-520), respectively. The receptacle connector (14.1-500) includes a receptacle housing (14.1-504) defining a recess (14.1-505) and a cover member (14.1-502) coupled to the receptacle housing (14.1-504). The recess (14.1-505) may be configured to receive the plug connector (14.1-520). The cover member (14.1-502) may be configured to provide support and shielding for the receptacle housing (14.1-504).

A face seal (14.1-510) may be coupled to the receptacle housing (14.1-504), for example, adjacent the recess (14.1-505). The face seal (14.1-510) may surround or enclose the recess (14.1-505) within the receptacle housing (14.1-504). The face seal (14.1-510) may provide a seal between the receptacle housing (14.1-504) and the plug connector (14.1-520) when the plug connector is received within the recess (14.1-505). A bumper (14.1-512) may be coupled to the receptacle housing (14.1-504). The bumper (14.1-512) can be engaged with the surface of the receptacle housing (14.1-504) at the rear of the recess (14.1-505). The bumper (14.1-512) can be configured to be positioned between the receptacle housing (14.1-504) and the plug connector (14.1-520) when the plug connector (14.1-520) is inserted into the recess (14.1-505). The bumper (14.1-512) and/or the face seal (14.1-510) can be configured to provide an ejection force to the plug connector (14.1-520). For example, the bumper (14.1-512) and/or the face seal (14.1-510) may resist movement of the plug connector (14.1-520) as the plug connector (14.1-520) is inserted into the recess (14.1-505). After the plug connector (14.1-520) is latched within the recess (14.1-505), the bumper (14.1-512) and/or the face seal (14.1-510) may provide an ejection force to the plug connector (14.1-520) such that the plug connector (14.1-520) is ejected from the recess (14.1-505) when the plug connector is unlatched from the receptacle housing (14.1-504).

The receptacle housing (14.1-504) may further include a latch (14.1-506) rotatably or pivotally coupled to the receptacle housing (14.1-504). The latch (14.1-506) may correspond to a retaining channel (14.1-526) formed in a body portion (14.1-522) of the plug connector (14.1-520). The latch (14.1-506) may be pivotable between an engaged configuration and a non-engaged configuration. When the latch (14.1-506) is in the engaged configuration, the latch (14.1-506) extends into a recess (14.1-505) of the receptacle housing (14.1-504), as illustrated in FIG. 567a. Although the latch (14.1-506) is illustrated as extending into a side portion of the recess (14.1-505), the latch (14.1-506) may be provided at an upper portion, a lower portion, etc., of the recess (14.1-505). When the latch (14.1-506) is in an unengaged configuration, the latch (14.1-506) may be disposed outside the recess (14.1-505), or a smaller portion of the latch (14.1-506) may be disposed within the recess (14.1-505). The latch (14.1-506) may be biased into an engaged configuration by a spring or the like, and may be unlatched by the user, for example, by tool action.

A retention channel (14.1-526) may be disposed on a side wall of the plug connector (14.1-520). The retention channel (14.1-526) may be etched, drilled, molded, co-molded, or otherwise formed together with the plug connector (14.1-520) as a single, unitary structure. As illustrated in FIG. 567b, the retention channel (14.1-526) may be disposed within the body portion (14.1-522) at an angle perpendicular to an insertion direction (14.1-528) in which the plug connector (14.1-520) is inserted into a recess (14.1-505) of the receptacle connector (14.1-500), which may assist in retention of the plug connector (14.1-520) by the latch (14.1-506). The latch (14.1-506) can be received within a retention channel (14.1-526) of the plug connector (14.1-520) to retain the plug connector (14.1-520) within the recess (14.1-505) of the receptacle connector (14.1-500) when the latch (14.1-506) is in an engaged configuration. Subsequently, the latch (14.1-506) can be transitioned to an unengaged configuration to release the plug connector (14.1-520) from the recess (14.1-505) of the receptacle connector (14.1-500).

The receptacle housing (14.1-504) may further include a guide rail (14.1-508) that may correspond to a guide channel (14.1-524) formed in a body portion (14.1-522) of the plug connector (14.1-520). The guide rail (14.1-508) may be disposed on a side wall of the receptacle housing (14.1-504) and may extend into the recess (14.1-505). The guide rail (14.1-508) may be molded, co-molded, or otherwise formed together with the receptacle housing (14.1-504) as a single, unitary structure. The guide channel (14.1-524) may be disposed on a side wall of the plug connector (14.1-520). The guide channel (14.1-524) may be etched, drilled, molded, co-molded, or otherwise formed together with the plug connector (14.1-520) as a single, single structure. As illustrated in FIG. 567b, the guide channel (14.1-524) may be positioned within the body portion (14.1-522) at an angle parallel to the insertion direction (14.1-528) in which the plug connector (14.1-520) is inserted into the recess (14.1-505) of the receptacle connector (14.1-500). The guide rail (14.1-508) may be accommodated within the guide channel (14.1-524) of the plug connector (14.1-520) to provide a rigid connection between the support including the plug connector (14.1-520) and the display portion including the receptacle connector (14.1-500). In other words, the guide rail (14.1-508) and the guide channel (14.1-524) may limit motion or free play between the support and the display portion. Additionally or alternatively, the guide rail (14.1-508) may limit or prevent the plug connector (14.1-520) from being inserted into the receptacle connector (14.1-500) in an undesirable orientation and/or configuration.

As illustrated in FIG. 567a, a fastener (14.1-514) may extend through holes formed in the receptacle housing (14.1-504) and the cover member (14.1-502). The fastener (14.1-514) may be used to attach the receptacle connector to an enclosure or housing of the display portion.

Figure 568a illustrates a cross-sectional view of a support (14.1-620) including a plug connector (14.1-624) retained in a receptacle connector (14.1-600). Figure 568b illustrates a detailed view of a region (14.1-610) of Figure 568a. The receptacle connector (14.1-600) may include a receptacle housing (14.1-602), a latch (14.1-604) extending through the receptacle housing (14.1-602) and configured to retain the plug connector (14.1-622), a face seal (14.1-606) coupled to the receptacle housing (14.1-602), and a bumper seal (14.1-608) coupled to the receptacle housing (14.1-602). The support (14.1-620) may include a plug connector (14.1-624), an enclosure (14.1-622), and retention channels (14.1-626) formed in the plug connector (14.1-624).

The latches (14.1-604) may be configured to retain the plug connector (14.1-624) within a recess of the receptacle connector (14.1-600). As illustrated in FIG. 568b, the latches (14.1-604) may extend through a cover member (14.1-612) or the like, which may be coupled to the receptacle housing (14.1-602). The latches (14.1-604) may have trapezoidal shapes, and the retention channels (14.1-626) within the plug connector (14.1-624) may have corresponding trapezoidal shapes. In some examples, the latches (14.1-604) and retention channels may have round shapes, U shapes, V shapes, triangular shapes, or any other suitable shapes. The latches (14.1-604) may have widths smaller than the widths of the retaining channels (14.1-626), which may provide deeper engagement of the latches (14.1-604) in the retaining channels (14.1-626). In some examples, the latches (14.1-604) may have widths equal to or greater than the widths of the retaining channels (14.1-626), such that only portions of the latches (14.1-604) extend into the retaining channels (14.1-626). This may result in a shallower engagement between the latches (14.1-604) and the retaining channels (14.1-626), but may also provide a stronger connection between the latches (14.1-604) and the retaining channels (14.1-626), and may reduce wobble or other movement between the plug connector (14.1-624) and the receptacle connector (14.1-600).

A face seal (14.1-606) may be coupled to a receptacle housing (14.1-602) adjacent to a recess configured to receive a plug connector (14.1-624). The face seal (14.1-606) may provide a seal between the plug connector (14.1-624) and the receptacle housing (14.1-602). Bumpers (14.1-608) may be provided on a surface of the receptacle housing (14.1-602) at the rear of the recess, such that the bumpers (14.1-608) are between the plug connector (14.1-624) and the receptacle housing (14.1-602) when the plug connector (14.1-624) is positioned within the recess. The face seal (14.1-606) and bumpers (14.1-608) may each be configured to provide an ejection force to the plug connector (14.1-624). For example, when the latches (14.1-604) are in an unengaged configuration, the face seal (14.1-606) and/or bumpers (14.1-608) may eject the plug connector (14.1-624) from a recess within the receptacle housing (14.1-602), or may assist in ejecting the plug connector (14.1-624) from a recess within the receptacle housing (14.1-602).

FIGS. 569A through 569F illustrate various configurations of latches and retention channels that may be included in receptacle connectors and plug connectors. FIGS. 569A, 569C, and 569E illustrate cross-sectional views, and FIGS. 569B, 569D, and 569F illustrate detailed views of regions 14.1-710A, 14.1-710B, and 14.1-710C of FIGS. 569A, 569C, and 569E, respectively.

In FIGS. 569A and 569B, a latch (14.1-706A) of a receptacle connector (14.1-700A) extends through a cover member (14.1-704) adjacent to the receptacle housing (14.1-702) and the face seal (14.1-702). The latch (14.1-706A) extends into a retention channel (14.1-722A) formed in the plug connector (14.1-720). The retention channel (14.1-722A) and the latch (14.1-706A) may have corresponding trapezoidal cross-sectional shapes; however, any suitable corresponding shapes may be used. The latch (14.1-706A) extends into the retaining channel (14.1-722A) a distance (14.1-L ₁ ) ranging from about 0 mm to about 10 mm, from about 1 mm to about 2 mm, from about 2 mm to about 5 mm, from about 0 mm to about 2 mm, or the like. In some examples, the side surfaces of the latch (14.1-706A) and the retaining channel (14.1-722A) may be tapered at an angle ranging from about 0° to about 10°. In the examples of FIGS. 569A and 569B , the tolerances between the latch (14.1-706A) and the retaining channel (14.1-722A) may be relatively large, which results in the latch (14.1-706A) extending further into the retaining channel (14.1-722A). For example, the ratio of the width of the retaining channel (14.1-722A) to the width of the latch (14.1-706A) can range from about 0.8 to about 1.2, from about 1.0 to about 1.2, from about 0.5 to about 2.0, from about 1.0 to about 1.5, and the like.

In FIGS. 569c and 569d, a latch (14.1-706B) of a receptacle connector (14.1-700B) extends through a cover member (14.1-704) adjacent to the receptacle housing (14.1-702) and the face seal (14.1-702). The latch (14.1-706B) extends into a retention channel (14.1-722B) formed in the plug connector (14.1-720). The retention channel (14.1-722B) and the latch (14.1-706B) may have corresponding trapezoidal cross-sectional shapes; however, any suitable corresponding shapes may be used. The latch (14.1-706B) extends into the retaining channel (14.1-722B) a distance (14.1-L ₂ ) ranging from about 0 mm to about 10 mm, from about 1 mm to about 2 mm, from about 2 mm to about 5 mm, from about 0 mm to about 2 mm, or the like. In some examples, the side surfaces of the latch (14.1-706B) and the retaining channel (14.1-722B) may be tapered at an angle ranging from about 0° to about 10°. In the examples of FIGS. 569c and 569d, the tolerances between the latch (14.1-706B) and the retaining channel (14.1-722B) can be intermediate, resulting in the latch (14.1-706B) extending less far into the retaining channel (14.1-722B) than in the examples of FIGS. 569a and 569b. For example, the ratio of the width of the retaining channel (14.1-722B) to the width of the latch (14.1-706B) can range from about 0.8 to about 1.2, from about 1.0 to about 1.2, from about 0.5 to about 2.0, from about 1.0 to about 1.5, and the like.

In FIGS. 569e and 569f, a latch (14.1-706C) of a receptacle connector (14.1-700C) extends through a cover member (14.1-704) adjacent to the receptacle housing (14.1-702) and the face seal (14.1-702). The latch (14.1-706C) extends into a retention channel (14.1-722C) formed in the plug connector (14.1-720). The retention channel (14.1-722C) and the latch (14.1-706C) may have corresponding trapezoidal cross-sectional shapes; however, any suitable corresponding shapes may be used. The latch (14.1-706C) extends into the retention channel (14.1-722C) a distance (14.1-L ₃ ) ranging from about 0 mm to about 10 mm, from about 1 mm to about 2 mm, from about 2 mm to about 5 mm, from about 0 mm to about 2 mm, or the like. In some examples, the side surfaces of the latch (14.1-706C) and the retention channel (14.1-722C) may be tapered at an angle ranging from about 0° to about 10°. In the examples of FIGS. 569e and 569f, the tolerances between the latch (14.1-706C) and the retaining channel (14.1-722C) can be tight, resulting in the latch (14.1-706C) extending less far into the retaining channel (14.1-722C) than in the examples of FIGS. 569a through 569d. For example, the ratio of the width of the retaining channel (14.1-722C) to the width of the latch (14.1-706C) can range from about 0.8 to about 1.2, from about 1.0 to about 1.2, from about 0.5 to about 2.0, from about 1.0 to about 1.5, and the like.

Examples with larger tolerances between the latch and the retention channel may result in the latch extending deeper into the retention channel, but may cause play or other movement between the latch and the retention channel and between the plug connector and the receptacle connector. On the other hand, examples with tighter tolerances may result in the latch extending a smaller distance into the retention channel, but may cause less play or other movement between the latch and the retention channel and between the plug connector and the receptacle connector. Forming a latch and retention channel with tolerances that are too tight, or in which the latch has a width that is too large relative to the width of the retention channel, may result in the latch not being able to engage the retention channel.

FIG. 570 illustrates the operation of a push block (14.1-806) of a receptacle connector (14.1-800) by a tool (14.1-840) that can be used to release a plug connector (14.1-820) from a receptacle connector (14.1-800). The receptacle connector (14.1-800) may include a receptacle housing (14.1-802) and a cover member (14.1-804) coupled to the receptacle housing (14.1-804). The engagement mechanism of the receptacle connector (14.1-800) may include a push block (14.1-806), a spring (14.1-808), and a guide rail (14.1-810). Although not shown separately in FIG. 570, the push block (14.1-806) may be engaged with latches that interact with retaining channels of the plug connector (14.1-820) to retain the plug connector (14.1-820) within the receptacle connector (14.1-800). A spring (14.1-808) retains the push block (14.1-806) in an initial position in the latches-engaged configuration. The spring (14.1-808) also resists a force applied to the push block (14.1-806) by a tool (14.1-840). When the push block (14.1-806) is pushed by the force of the tool (14.1-840), the push block (14.1-806) slides or translates along the guide rail (14.1-810). As the push block (14.1-806) moves along the guide rail (14.1-810), the push block (14.1-806) pivots the latches from an engaged configuration to an unengaged configuration, which allows the plug connector (14.1-820) to be removed from the receptacle connector (14.1-800). Once force is no longer supplied by the tool (14.1-840), a spring (14.1-808) returns the push block (14.1-806) to its initial position, and the latches pivot from the unengaged configuration back to an engaged configuration.

The receptacle connector (14.1-800) additionally includes a face seal (14.1-814) and bumpers (14.1-812). The face seal (14.1-814) and bumpers (14.1-812) can be positioned between the plug connector (14.1-820) and the receptacle housing (14.1-802) in a direction parallel to the insertion/extraction direction of the plug connector (14.1-820). This helps the face seal (14.1-814) and/or bumpers (14.1-812) provide an ejection force to the plug connector (14.1-820). For example, when the latches are in an unengaged configuration, the face seal (14.1-814) and/or the bumpers (14.1-812) may provide a release force to the plug connector (14.1-820) to push the plug connector (14.1-820) out of the receptacle connector (14.1-800). This allows the user to remove the plug connector (14.1-820) by operating the push block (14.1-806) with the tool (14.1-840) without having to apply a separate force to the plug connector (14.1-820). In some examples, the ejection force of the face seal (14.1-814) and bumpers (14.1-812) may be relatively small, and a pulling force on the plug connector (14.1-820) may be used in addition to the ejection force to eject the plug connector (14.1-820) from the receptacle connector (14.1-800). In some examples, the bumpers (14.1-812) and face seal (14.1-814) do not provide an ejection force. For example, the bumpers (14.1-812) may be provided to ensure proper alignment of the electrical contacts of the plug connector (14.1-820) with the electrical contacts of the receptacle connector (14.1-800). A face seal (14.1-814) can provide a seal between a plug connector (14.1-820) and a receptacle connector (14.1-800).

The receptacle connector (14.1-800) may be mounted in an enclosure (14.1-830) (also referred to as a housing) of the display. In some examples, the receptacle connector (14.1-800) may be mounted in the enclosure (14.1-830) using a fastener; however, any suitable mounting means may be used. The enclosure (14.1-830) may include an opening through which a plug connector (14.1-820) may be inserted into a recess of the receptacle connector (14.1-800). The enclosure (14.1-830) may further include an opening through which a tool (14.1-840) may be inserted for interacting with a push block (14.1-806).

Figures 571A through 571D illustrate various configurations of tools that may be used to release a plug connector from a receptacle connector. In Figures 571A through 571D, a display (14.1-904) is provided within an enclosure (14.1-902) (also referred to as a housing), and a support (14.1-906) is coupled to the enclosure (14.1-902). The support (14.1-906) may include a plug connector that may be retained in a receptacle connector provided within the enclosure (14.1-902). In Figure 571A, the tool (14.1-900A) may include a stadium-shaped handle having a stadium-shaped cutout therein and a cylindrical protrusion. The cylindrical protrusion of the tool (14.1-900A) can be inserted into a hole in the enclosure (14.1-902) and actuated by a push block or the like to release the plug connector of the support (14.1-906) from the receptacle connector of the enclosure (14.1-902).

In FIG. 571b, the tool (14.1-900B) may include a stadium-shaped handle and a cylindrical protrusion. The cylindrical protrusion of the tool (14.1-900B) may be inserted into a hole in the enclosure (14.1-902) and actuated by a push block or the like to release the plug connector of the support (14.1-906) from the receptacle connector of the enclosure (14.1-902).

In FIG. 571c, the tool (14.1-900C) may include a cylindrical handle and a cylindrical protrusion. The cylindrical protrusion of the tool (14.1-900C) may be inserted into a hole in the enclosure (14.1-902) and actuated by a push block or the like to release the plug connector of the support (14.1-906) from the receptacle connector of the enclosure (14.1-902).

In FIG. 571d, the tool (14.1-900D) may include a handle and a cylindrical protrusion that interface with the support (14.1-906). The handle of the tool (14.1-900D) may be slidably attached to the support (14.1-906) and may be used to align the cylindrical protrusion with a hole in the enclosure. The cylindrical protrusion of the tool (14.1-900D) may be inserted into a hole in the enclosure (14.1-902) and actuate a push block or the like to release the plug connector of the support (14.1-906) from the receptacle connector of the enclosure (14.1-902).

Figures 572a and 572b illustrate the configuration of a guide rail (14.1-1006) of a receptacle connector (14.1-1000) and a guide channel (14.1-1014) of a plug connector (14.1-1010). The receptacle connector (14.1-1000) may include a receptacle housing (14.1-1002) having a recess (14.1-1004) formed therein. The recess (14.1-1004) may be configured to receive and retain the plug connector (14.1-1010). The guide rail (14.1-1006) may be formed within the receptacle housing (14.1-1002) and may extend into a portion of the recess (14.1-1004). The plug connector (14.1-1012) may include a body portion (14.1-1012) having a guide channel (14.1-1014) formed therein. As illustrated in FIGS. 572a and 572b, the guide rail (14.1-1006) and the guide channel (14.1-1014) may be formed at longitudinally central portions of the receptacle housing (14.1-1002) and the body (14.1-1012) of the plug connector (14.1-1010), respectively. The guide rail (14.1-1006) and the guide channel (14.1-1014) may be disposed on corresponding portions of the receptacle housing (14.1-1002) and the body (14.1-1012), and may have corresponding shapes. The guide rail (14.1-1006) may be accommodated within the guide channel (14.1-1014) of the plug connector (14.1-1010) to provide a rigid connection between the support including the plug connector (14.1-1010) and the display portion including the receptacle connector (14.1-1000). In other words, the guide rail (14.1-1006) and the guide channel (14.1-1014) may limit motion or free play between the support and the display portion. Additionally or alternatively, the guide rail (14.1-1006) may limit or prevent the plug connector (14.1-1010) from being inserted into the receptacle connector (14.1-1000) in an undesirable orientation and/or configuration.

Figures 573a through 573d illustrate various configurations of face seals that may be included within a receptacle connector (14.1-1100). Figures 573b through 573d illustrate details of the region (14.1-1108) illustrated in Figure 573a. As illustrated in Figure 573a, the receptacle connector (14.1-1100) may include a receptacle housing (14.1-1102) defining a recess (14.1-1104). A plug connector may be received within the recess (14.1-1104). A face seal (14.1-1106) may be coupled to the receptacle housing (14.1-1102) adjacent to the recess (14.1-1104) and may be used to provide a seal between the receptacle housing (14.1-1102) and the plug connector. The face seal (14.1-1106) may provide additional ejection force to the plug connector to assist in removal of the plug connector from the recess (14.1-1104) of the receptacle connector (14.1-1100).

In FIG. 573b, a face seal (14.1-1106A) coupled to a receptacle housing (14.1-1102) in an area (14.1-1108A) extends from the receptacle housing (14.1-1102) at an angle perpendicular to the insertion/extraction direction of the plug connector into the recess (14.1-1104). The face seal (14.1-1106A) then angles downward and extends distally past the receptacle housing (14.1-1102).

In FIG. 573c, a face seal (14.1-1106B) coupled to a receptacle housing (14.1-1102) in an area (14.1-1108B) extends from the receptacle housing (14.1-1102) at an angle perpendicular to the insertion/extraction direction of the plug connector into the recess (14.1-1104). The face seal (14.1-1106B) then angles downward and extends distally past the receptacle housing (14.1-1102). The face seal (14.1-1106B) may extend a lesser distance from the receptacle housing (14.1-1102) relative to the face seal (14.1-1106A) and may be tapered from the proximal edge to the distal edge by a lesser degree relative to the face seal (14.1-1106A). This provides less resistance to insertion and extraction of the plug connector while still providing a good seal between the plug connector and the receptacle housing (14.1-1102).

In FIG. 573d, a face seal (14.1-1106C) coupled to a receptacle housing (14.1-1102) in an area (14.1-1108C) extends from a plane flush with the receptacle housing (14.1-1102), is angled outwardly from the receptacle housing (14.1-1102), and then is angled back toward the receptacle housing (14.1-1102). The face seal (14.1-1106C) extends distally past the receptacle housing (14.1-1102). The face seal (14.1-1106C) may extend a smaller distance from the receptacle housing (14.1-1102) than the face seals (14.1-1106A, 14.1-1106B) and may be angled at a smaller angle than the face seals (14.1-1106A, 14.1-1106B). This provides less resistance to insertion and extraction of the plug connector while still providing a good seal between the plug connector and the receptacle housing (14.1-1102).

Figures 574a and 574b illustrate perspective and cross-sectional views of a receptacle connector (14.1-1200). Figures 574a and 574b illustrate gaskets (14.1-1208) that may be provided with fasteners (14.1-1206) for fastening a receptacle housing (14.1-1202) of the receptacle connector (14.1-1200) to an enclosure or housing, such as a display portion. The receptacle housing (14.1-1202) may include a cover member (14.1-1204) coupled thereto, which provides structural support and shielding for the receptacle housing (14.1-1202). Holes may be provided in the receptacle housing (14.1-1202) and the cover member (14.1-1204), and gaskets (14.1-1208) and fasteners (14.1-1206) may be provided in the holes extending through the receptacle housing (14.1-1202) and the cover member (14.1-1204). The fasteners (14.1-1206) may be used to fasten the receptacle housing (14.1-1202) and the cover member (14.1-1204) to an enclosure of the display portion. Gaskets (14.1-1208) may be provided between the fasteners (14.1-1206) and the cover member (14.1-1204)/receptacle housing (14.1-1202) to provide flexibility or pliability between the receptacle connector (14.1-1200) and the enclosure. The gaskets (14.1-1208) may be formed of a relatively soft material, such as rubber, polymer, elastomer, or the like. Providing the gaskets (14.1-1208) allows the receptacle connector (14.1-1200) and a plug connector inserted into the receptacle connector (14.1-1200) to move together and relative to the enclosure. Large forces can be transmitted between the plug connector and the receptacle connector (14.1-1200), and providing gaskets (14.1-1208) limits any negative effects of these forces from being transmitted between the receptacle connector (14.1-1200) and the enclosure.

A plurality of electrical contacts (14.1-1210A, 14.1-1210B, 14.1-1210C, 14.1-1211A, 14.1-1211B, 14.1-1211B) may be coupled to a receptacle housing (14.1-1202). As illustrated in FIG. 574a, the electrical contacts may be coupled to the receptacle housing (14.1-1202) along a radius of curvature, wherein each electrical contact is provided at an oblique angle relative to other electrical contacts, such as adjacent electrical contacts. This allows the surfaces of the electrical contacts that will make contact with a plug connector inserted into the receptacle connector to be arranged at an angle that is perpendicular to the surfaces of the plug connector with which the electrical contacts will make contact. This provides improved electrical contact between the electrical contacts of the receptacle connector (14.1-1200) and the electrical contacts of the plug connector.

A mating mechanism may be provided in the receptacle connector (14.1-1200). The mating mechanism may include a primary push block (14.1-1212), a spring (14.1-1214), latches (14.1-1220), a secondary push block (14.1-1222), and a guide rail (14.1-1224). The mating mechanism may be provided to transition the latches (14.1-1220) between an engaged configuration and an unengaged configuration, which may be used to retain and release the plug connector within the receptacle connector (14.1-1200). The spring (14.1-1214) may be coupled to the cover member (14.1-1204) and/or the receptacle housing (14.1-1202). A primary push block (14.1-1212) can be pivotally coupled to a spring (14.1-1214) and a cover member (14.1-1204) and/or a receptacle housing (14.1-1202). The primary push block (14.1-1212) can be configured to interact with a tool to transition the latches (14.1-1220) between an engaged configuration and a non-engaged configuration. The spring (14.1-1214) retains the primary push block (14.1-1212) in an initial position in which the latches (14.1-1220) are in the engaged configuration. The spring (14.1-1214) also resists a force applied to the primary push block (14.1-1212) by the tool.

The secondary push block (14.1-1222) transmits movement between the primary push block (14.1-1212) and the latches (14.1-1220). The secondary push block (14.1-1222) can be configured to translate along the guide rail (14.1-1224) such that the secondary push block (14.1-1222) can move back and forth in a single direction. A tool for actuating the primary push block (14.1-1212) is used to translate the secondary push block (14.1-1222) along the guide rail (14.1-1224), thereby pivoting the latches (14.1-1220) from an engaged configuration to an unengaged configuration. After the force from the tool is removed from the primary push block (14.1-1212), the secondary push block (14.1-1222) returns to its initial position and the latches (14.1-1220) return to their engaged configuration. Thus, the engagement mechanism is used to retain and release the plug connector relative to the receptacle connector (14.1-1200).

Figure 575 illustrates an example in which a support (14.1-1320) is fastened to a receptacle connector (14.1-1300) and/or an enclosure (14.1-1330) using a fastener (14.1-1338). The fastening mechanism of Figure 575 may be used additionally or alternatively to the fastening mechanisms of Figures 563a through 574b. The receptacle connector (14.1-1300) may include a receptacle housing (14.1-1302) having a recess (14.1-1304) formed therein. The recess (14.1-1304) may be configured to receive and retain the support (14.1-1320). The fasteners (14.1-1306) can extend through holes in the receptacle housing (14.1-1302) and can be used to fasten the receptacle connector (14.1-1300) to the enclosure (14.1-1330).

The enclosure (14.1-1330) (also referred to as a housing) may be an enclosure for a display portion, etc. The enclosure (14.1-1330) may include a housing body (14.1-1332), openings (14.1-1334), and openings (14.1-1336). The openings (14.1-1336) may be configured to receive fasteners (14.1-1306) and may be used to mount a receptacle connector (14.1-1300) to the enclosure (14.1-1330). As discussed in more detail below, a support (14.1-1320) may be fastened to the enclosure (14.1-1330) via the openings (14.1-1334).

The support (14.1-1320) includes a plug connector (14.1-1322) and an enclosure (14.1-1324). Openings (14.1-1326) may be included in the plug connector (14.1-1322) and/or the enclosure (14.1-1324). The plug connector (14.1-1322) may include electrical contacts (14.1-1328A, 14.1-1328B, 14.1-1328C). Fasteners (14.1-1338) may be provided and extend through the openings (14.1-1326) in the support (14.1-1320) into the openings (14.1-1334) in the enclosure (14.1-1330). In some examples, the openings (14.1-1334) may be provided on the receptacle connector (14.1-1300) rather than the enclosure (14.1-1330). Attaching the support (14.1-1320) to the enclosure (14.1-1330) and/or the receptacle connector (14.1-1300) prevents unwanted disconnection of the support (14.1-1320) from the receptacle connector (14.1-1300) and/or the enclosure (14.1-1330). The fastening holes (14.1-1338) may be contained within the enclosure (14.1-1330) so as to be hidden from the user, thereby avoiding accidental removal by the user. Directly fastening the support (14.1-1320) to the enclosure (14.1-1330) by means of fasteners (14.1-1338) further ensures that the support (14.1-1320) does not move relative to the chassis (14.1-1330).

FIGS. 576a through 585b illustrate various examples of receptacle connectors and plug connectors that can be used as receptacle connectors (14.1-124) of the supports (14.1-120) and plug connectors (14.1-142) of the cable assembly (14.1-140) illustrated in FIGS. 561a and 561b.

Figure 576a illustrates a side cross-sectional view of a cable assembly (14.1-1420) including a receptacle connector (14.1-1400) and a plug connector (14.1-1422) inserted into and retained by the receptacle connector (14.1-1400). Figure 576b illustrates electrical contacts of the plug connector (14.1-1422) and a raised portion of the receptacle connector (14.1-1400). The cable assembly (14.1-1420) includes a shielded cable (14.1-1426) coupled to the plug connector (14.1-1422). The plug connector (14.1-1422) may include a boot (14.1-1424) and a center member (14.1-1430). In some examples, the boot (14.1-1424) may have a circular or semicircular cross-sectional shape. The plug connector (14.1-1422) may be centered or substantially centered about a central axis of the circular cross-sectional shape of the boot (14.1-1424). The boot (14.1-1424) may form a cavity or volume, and at least a portion of the central member (14.1-1430) and/or a portion of the shielded cable (14.1-1426) may be disposed within the volume.

The center member (14.1-1430) may extend from the boot (14.1-1424). In some examples, the center member (14.1-1430) may have a cylindrical shape that allows rotation of the center member (14.1-1430) within the receptacle connector (14.1-1400). The center member (14.1-1430) may define an outer surface and an inner surface. In some examples, the center member (14.1-1430) may include one or more protrusions (14.1-1428) extending laterally from or substantially perpendicular to the outer surface. In some examples, the center member (14.1-1430) may define a cavity or a volume. For example, the inner surface may define a cavity or a volume. One or more electrical contacts, such as the electrical contacts (14.1-1425) illustrated in FIG. 576b, may be positioned on the inner surface. The one or more electrical contacts may extend from the inner surface into the volume of the central member (14.1-1430). The one or more electrical contacts may define an electrical ground path, provide electrical power, and/or provide one or more control signals to the receptacle connector (14.1-1400).

A shielded cable (14.1-1426) may comprise one or more wires (e.g., metal wires capable of transmitting electrical signals and/or electrical power). The one or more wires may be individually shielded or collectively shielded. The shielding may prevent one or more wires from contacting each other. Additionally or alternatively, the shielding may prevent or limit the influence of electromagnetic waves on one or more wires.

A receptacle connector (14.1-1400) may be disposed on an enclosure of an electronic device (e.g., supports (14.1-120) of a first electronic device (14.1-100). In some examples, the receptacle connector (14.1-1400) may be disposed on or within the enclosure such that a trim ring (14.1-1402) of the receptacle connector (14.1-1400) is at least partially disposed within the enclosure. In some examples, the trim ring (14.1-1402) may be disposed on or within the enclosure such that the trim ring (14.1-1402) is flush with an outer surface of the enclosure.

In some examples, a receptacle connector (14.1-1400) may include a trim ring (14.1-1402), a base, one or more detents (14.1-1406), and a raised portion (14.1-1404). The trim ring (14.1-1402) may be coupled to the base to form a recess and one or more undercut regions at a periphery of the recess. Each of the undercut regions may house or retain a respective detent (14.1-1406). When a central member (14.1-1430) of a cable assembly (14.1-1420) is positioned within the recess, the protrusion (14.1-1428) may extend into a channel defined by each detent (14.1-1406). In some examples, each of the stops (14.1-1406) may be biased toward the raised portion (14.1-1404) by a biasing element. In other words, each stop (14.1-1406) may translate radially toward and away from the raised portion (14.1-1404) within the respective undercut regions.

In some examples, the raised portion (14.1-1404) may be positioned at the center of the recess so that the recess forms a ring within the receptacle connector (14.1-1400). The raised portion (14.1-1404) may be a separate component of the receptacle connector (14.1-1400). For example, the raised portion (14.1-1404) may be attached, fastened, interlocked, welded, or otherwise joined to the base. In some examples, one or more electrical contacts (14.1-1407A, 14.1-1407B) may be disposed on the raised portion (14.1-1404) and may be used to provide connections between the raised portion (14.1-1404) and an electrical contact (14.1-1422), e.g., an electrical contact (14.1-1425) of the plug connector (14.1-1422). Each of the one or more electrical contacts (14.1-1407A, 14.1-1407B) may physically contact one or more electrical contacts (e.g., electrical contact (14.1-1425)) of the plug connector (14.1-1422) when the plug connector (14.1-1422) is mated to the receptacle connector (14.1-1400). The raised portion (14.1-1404) may additionally include one or more electrical contacts (14.1-1409A, 14.1-1409B) that provide connections between the raised portion (14.1-1404) and electronic components contained within the enclosure (e.g., processors, electrical wires, digital logic circuitry, digital processing circuitry, etc.).

In some examples, the raised portion (14.1-1404) may include a body (14.1-1414) and a cap (14.1-1412). In some examples, the body (14.1-1414) may be made of a material that electrically insulates one or more electrical contacts (14.1-1407A, 14.1-1407B, 14.1-1409A, 14.1-1409B) such that each of the one or more electrical contacts is electrically insulated from one another. For example, each of the one or more electrical contacts may be at least partially disposed within a respective through hole defined within the body (14.1-1414). The cap (14.1-1412) may be coupled to the body (14.1-1414).

The raised portion (14.1-1404) may include a seal (14.1-1408) extending around the periphery of the body (14.1-1414). As illustrated in FIG. 576b, the seal (14.1-1408) may surround the body (14.1-1414) of the raised portion (14.1-1404). The seal (14.1-1408) may act as a seal to prevent or limit the ingress of contaminants (e.g., liquids, dust, lint, debris, etc.) into the receptacle connector (14.1-1400) through the recess, for example, when the plug connector (14.1-1422) is inserted into the receptacle connector (14.1-1400).

Figures 577a and 577b illustrate side and bottom views, respectively, of a cable assembly (14.1-1500) including a plug connector (14.1-1502) and a shielded cable (14.1-1504). The plug connector (14.1-1502) may include a boot (14.1-1506) and a center member (14.1-1508). In some examples, the boot (14.1-1506) may have a circular or semicircular cross-sectional shape. The plug connector (14.1-1502) may be centered or substantially centered about a central axis of the circular cross-sectional shape of the boot (14.1-1506). For example, as illustrated in FIG. 577a, the center member (14.1-1508) may be centered about an axis (A) extending through the center of the boot (14.1-1506). The boot (14.1-1506) may form a cavity or volume, and at least a portion of the center member (14.1-1508) and/or a portion of the shielded cable (14.1-1504) may be positioned within the volume.

A center member (14.1-1508) may extend from the boot (14.1-1506). In some examples, the center member (14.1-1508) may have a cylindrical shape that allows rotation of the center member (14.1-1508) within a receptacle connector (e.g., receptacle connector (14.1-1400) of FIG. 576a). The center member (14.1-1508) may define an outer surface (14.1-1510) and an inner surface (14.1-1512). In some examples, the center member (14.1-1508) may include one or more protrusions (14.1-1514) extending laterally from or substantially perpendicular to the outer surface (14.1-1510). In some examples, the central member (14.1-1508) can form a cavity or volume, for example, the inner surface (14.1-1512) can form a cavity or volume (14.1-1516). One or more electrical contacts (14.1-1518) can be disposed on the inner surface (14.1-1512) such that the one or more electrical contacts (14.1-1518) extend from the inner surface (14.1-1512) into the volume (14.1-1516). The one or more electrical contacts (14.1-1518) can define an electrical ground path, provide electrical power, and/or provide one or more control signals to the receptacle connector.

A shielded cable (14.1-1504) may comprise one or more wires (e.g., metal wires capable of transmitting electrical signals and/or electrical power). The one or more wires may be individually shielded or collectively shielded. The shielding may prevent one or more wires from contacting each other. Additionally or alternatively, the shielding may prevent or limit the influence of electromagnetic waves on one or more wires.

FIGS. 578a and 578b illustrate perspective and plan views of a receptacle connector (14.1-1600) disposed on an enclosure (14.1-1602) of an electronic device (e.g., supports (14.1-120) of the first electronic device (14.1-100) of FIGS. 561a and 561b). In some examples, the receptacle connector (14.1-1600) may be disposed on or within the enclosure (14.1-1602) such that a trim ring (14.1-1604) of the receptacle connector (14.1-1600) is at least partially disposed within the enclosure (14.1-1602). Alternatively, the trim ring (14.1-1604) may be positioned on or within the enclosure (14.1-1602) such that the trim ring (14.1-1604) is flush with the outer surface (14.1-1606) of the enclosure (14.1-1602).

In some examples, a receptacle connector (14.1-1600) may include a trim ring (14.1-1604), a base (14.1-1608), one or more detents (14.1-1610), and a raised portion (14.1-1612). The trim ring (14.1-1604) may be coupled to the base (14.1-1608) to form a recess (14.1-1614) and one or more undercut areas at a periphery of the recess (14.1-1614). Each of the one or more undercut areas may house or retain a respective detent (14.1-1610). A central member (e.g., central member (14.1-1508) of FIGS. 577a and 577b) may be positioned within a recess (14.1-1614), while a protrusion (e.g., protrusion (14.1-1514) of FIGS. 577a and 577b) may extend into a channel defined by each of the detents (14.1-1610). In some examples, each of the detents (14.1-1610) may be biased toward the raised portion (14.1-1612) by a biasing element. In other words, each detent (14.1-1610) may translate radially toward and away from the raised portion (14.1-1612) within the respective undercut regions.

In some examples, the raised portion (14.1-1612) may be centered in the recess (14.1-1614) such that the recess (14.1-1614) forms a ring within the receptacle connector (14.1-1600). The raised portion (14.1-1612) may be a separate component of the receptacle connector (14.1-1600). For example, the raised portion (14.1-1612) may be attached, fastened, interlocked, welded, or otherwise coupled to the base (14.1-1608). In some examples, one or more electrical contacts (14.1-1618) may be disposed on the raised portion (14.1-1612). Each of the one or more electrical contacts (14.1-1618) may physically contact one or more electrical contacts of the plug connector (e.g., electrical contacts (14.1-1518) of FIGS. 577a and 577b) when the plug connector is mated to the receptacle connector (14.1-1600).

Figure 578c illustrates a cross-sectional view of the receptacle connector of Figures 578a and 578b. As illustrated in Figure 578c, biasing elements (14.1-1611) may be housed within the trim ring (14.1-1604) between the detents (14.1-1610) and the trim ring (14.1-1604). The biasing elements (14.1-1611) may be configured to radially bias the detents (14.1-1610) toward the protrusions of the plug connector when the plug connector is inserted into and retained within the recess (14.1-1614) of the receptacle connector (14.1-1600). In other words, each of the detents (14.1-1610) can be radially translated within their respective undercut regions toward and away from the raised portions (14.1-1612) to engage and disengage respective protrusions of the plug connector. The biasing elements (14.1-1611) can provide forces to the detents (14.1-1610) to engage the protrusions of the plug connector and resist disengagement of the detents from the protrusions of the plug connector by maintaining the detents (14.1-1610) in a radially extended position. Although the biasing elements (14.1-1611) are exemplified as inclined coils, various biasing elements (14.1-1611) can be included, such as coiled springs, elastic foams, leaf springs, etc.

The raised portion (14.1-1612) may include a body (14.1-1626) and a cap (14.1-1628). In some examples, the body (14.1-1626) may be made of a material that electrically insulates one or more electrical contacts of the raised portion (14.1-1612), such that each of the one or more electrical contacts is electrically insulated from one another. For example, each of the one or more electrical contacts may be at least partially disposed within a respective through hole defined within the body (14.1-1626). The cap (14.1-1628) may be coupled to the body (14.1-1626).

The raised portion (14.1-1612) may include a seal (14.1-1632) extending around the periphery of the body (14.1-1626). As illustrated in FIG. 578c, the seal (14.1-1632) may surround the body (14.1-1626) of the raised portion (14.1-1612). The seal (14.1-1632) may act as a seal to prevent or limit the ingress of contaminants (e.g., liquids, dust, lint, debris, etc.) into the receptacle connector (14.1-1600) through the recess (14.1-1614), for example, when the plug connector is inserted into the receptacle connector (14.1-1600). In the example of FIG. 578c, a seal (14.1-1632) is positioned between the body (14.1-1626) of the raised portion (14.1-1612) and the base (14.1-1608). The seal (14.1-1632) can further prevent the ingress of contaminants between the raised portion (14.1-1612) and the base (14.1-1608).

FIG. 578d illustrates a cable assembly (14.1-1500) including a plug connector (14.1-1502) and a shielded cable (14.1-1504) of FIGS. 577a and 577b being pulled away from a receptacle connector (14.1-1600) of FIGS. 578a through 578c. The plug connector (14.1-1502) may be unintentionally and abruptly extracted from the receptacle connector (14.1-1600), for example, when the shielded cable (14.1-1504) is caught on an object and pulls the plug connector (14.1-1502) away from the receptacle connector (14.1-1600) (as represented by the arrows shown in FIG. 578d). When the plug connector (14.1-1502) is abruptly and/or undesirably extracted from the receptacle connector (14.1-1600), the electrical contacts (14.1-1518A, 14.1-1518B) of the plug connector (14.1-1502) may be pulled out of contact with the associated electrical contacts (14.1-1618A, 14.1-1618B) of the receptacle connector (14.1-1600), resulting in loss of electrical power, control signals, electrical ground, or a combination thereof. A sudden loss of electrical power, electrical ground, or one or more control signals may damage the electronic device and/or may corrupt or corrupt information stored in the electronic device.

In some examples, at least one of the electrical contacts within the receptacle connector (14.1-1600) (e.g., electrical contact (14.1-1618A)) can detect when the plug connector (14.1-1502) is being removed from the receptacle connector (14.1-1600). For example, the electronic device can detect undesired extraction of the plug connector (14.1-1502) from the receptacle connector (14.1-1600) when the electrical contact (14.1-1518A) of the plug connector (14.1-1502) is pulled out of contact with the electrical contact (14.1-1618A) of the receptacle connector (14.1-1600). Undesirable extraction of the plug connector (14.1-1502) from the receptacle connector (14.1-1600) may occur when the plug connector (14.1-1502) is pulled away from the receptacle connector (14.1-1600) from the side of the plug connector (14.1-1502) where the shielded cable (14.1-1504) enters the boot (14.1-1506). This undesirable extraction scenario would most likely occur because the shielded cable (14.1-1504) could become caught on an object (as illustrated by the arrow) that would pull the plug connector (14.1-1502) away from the receptacle connector (14.1-1600).

In some examples, the electrical contacts (14.1-1618) may be arranged around the raised portion (14.1-1612) such that the electrical contacts (14.1-1518A) of the plug connector (14.1-1502) move out of contact with the electrical contacts (14.1-1618B) of the receptacle connector (14.1-1600) before the electrical contacts (14.1-1518B) of the plug connector (14.1-1502) move out of contact with the electrical contacts (14.1-1618A). A predetermined duration may elapse while the electrical contacts (14.1-1518A) are out of contact with the electrical contacts (14.1-1618A) but before the electrical contacts (14.1-1518B) of the plug connector (14.1-1502) move out of contact with the electrical contacts (14.1-1618B) of the receptacle connector (14.1-1600). The duration may be sufficient to enable the electronic device to mitigate any destructive effects of unintentionally extracting the plug connector (14.1-1502) from the receptacle connector (14.1-1600). The size, shape, and position of each of the electrical contacts (14.1-1518, 14.1-1618) can affect the duration of time that the electrical contact (14.1-1518A) moves out of contact with the electrical contact (14.1-1618A) but before the electrical contacts (14.1-1518B) move out of contact with the electrical contact (14.1-1618B).

In some examples, the contact area defined by an electrical contact (14.1-1618A) (e.g., a surface area of an electrical contact (14.1-1618) that can be engaged by one or more of the electrical contacts (14.1-1518)) may be different from the contact area defined by an electrical contact (14.1-1618B). In other words, each electrical contact (14.1-1618A, 14.1-1618B) may be sized or shaped such that one or more of the associated electrical contacts (14.1-1518) can physically contact the contact area defined by each of the respective electrical contacts (14.1-1618). As illustrated in FIG. 578d, the contact area of an electrical contact (14.1-1618B) may be larger than the contact area of an electrical contact (14.1-1618A). In this way, the electrical contact (14.1-1618B) can interface with more than one corresponding electrical contact (14.1-1518B) while the plug connector (14.1-1502) is inserted into the receptacle connector (14.1-1600). The size, shape, and location of the contact area of each electrical contact (14.1-1518, 14.1-1618) can affect the duration of time that the electrical contact (14.1-1518A) moves out of contact with the electrical contact (14.1-1618A) but before the electrical contacts (14.1-1518B) move out of contact with the electrical contact (14.1-1618B).

A loss of an electrical signal passing between the electrical contacts (14.1-1518A, 14.1-1618A) may alert an electronic device (e.g., a processor of the electronic device) that an unexpected or undesirable extraction of the plug connector (14.1-1502) has occurred. Accordingly, the electronic device may respond to the loss of signal by implementing one or more actions to protect the electronic device's electrical components and information. For example, a processor within the electronic device may draw power from one or more electronic components, cause data to be stored, or perform other preventative tasks or actions. Although FIG. 578d illustrates the plug connector (14.1-1502) being extracted from the receptacle connector (14.1-1600) from the side of the plug connector (14.1-1502) adjacent the shielded cable (14.1-1504) (e.g., being rocked out of the receptacle connector (14.1-1600) starting from the side of the plug connector (14.1-1502) adjacent the shielded cable (14.1-1504)), the plug connector (14.1-1502) may in some instances be undesirably separated from the other side of the plug connector (14.1-1502).

FIG. 578e illustrates various configurations of the raised portion (14.1-1612) that may be used to vary the force required to insert and extract the plug connector (14.1-1502) into and from the receptacle connector (14.1-1600). As illustrated in FIG. 578e, the side surfaces of the raised portion (14.1-1612) may be positioned at different angles relative to the base (14.1-1608). In some examples, the angle (14.1-θ ₁ ) between the side surfaces of the raised portion (14.1-1612) and the base (14.1-1608) can range from about 95° to about 105°, from about 90° to about 180°, from about 90° to about 120°, from about 95° to about 135°, from about 92° to about 110°, and the like. In some examples, the angle (14.1-θ ₂ ) between the side surfaces of the raised portion (14.1-1612) and the base (14.1-1608) may be relatively greater than the angle (14.1-θ ₁ ) and may range from about 95° to about 105°, from about 90° to about 180°, from about 90° to about 120°, from about 95° to about 135°, from about 92° to about 110°, etc. Providing the angle (14.1-θ ₂ ) between the raised portion (14.1-1612) and the base (14.1-1608) allows the plug connector (14.1-1502) to be inserted into and extracted from the receptacle connector (14.1-1600) with relatively little force. Providing an angle (14.1-θ ₁ ) between the raised portion (14.1-1612) and the base (14.1-1608) allows the plug connector (14.1-1502) to be inserted into and extracted from the receptacle connector (14.1-1600) with relatively large forces. Thus, the angle between the raised portion (14.1-1612) and the base (14.1-1608) can be selected based on the forces required to insert the plug connector (14.1-1502) into the receptacle connector (14.1-1600) and to extract the plug connector (14.1-1502) from the receptacle connector (14.1-1600).

Figures 579a through 579m illustrate various configurations of stoppers (14.1-1710) that may be included in a receptacle connector (14.1-1700). The receptacle connector (14.1-1700) may include a trim ring (14.1-1704), a base (14.1-1708), a raised portion (14.1-1712), and a recess between the trim ring (14.1-1704) and the raised portion (14.1-1712). The stoppers (14.1-1710) may be positioned within a cavity formed in the trim ring (14.1-1704).

Figures 579a through 579c illustrate a stopper (14.1-1710A) including a central region (14.1-1711) and peripheral regions (14.1-1713) on either side of the central region (14.1-1711). The central region (14.1-1711) may be notched to form a channel (14.1-1733) capable of accommodating a protrusion (14.1-1724) of a plug connector (14.1-1720). For example, a lower portion of the central region (14.1-1711) may be notched to form an undercut portion of the stopper (14.1-1710A) in the central region (14.1-1711). Notches may be omitted from the peripheral regions (14.1-1713), which may prevent, limit, or reduce rotation of the plug connector (14.1-1720). Including non-notched peripheral regions (14.1-1713) may also increase mating and de-mating forces between the plug connector (14.1-1720) and the receptacle connector (14.1-1700).

FIG. 579c illustrates a cross-sectional view taken along reference line A-A' of FIG. 579a of a protrusion (14.1-1724) of a plug connector (14.1-1720) disposed within a channel (14.1-1733) and interfacing with a stopper (14.1-1710A). In some examples, the stopper (14.1-1710A) may define the channel (14.1-1733) such that a first surface (14.1-1731) of the channel (14.1-1733) is inclined relative to a second surface (14.1-1732) of the channel (14.1-1733) such that the first surface (14.1-1731) of the channel (14.1-1733) forms an angle (14.1-θ ₃ ). The protrusion (14.1-1714) may engage or contact the first surface (14.1-1730) while positioned within the channel (14.1-1733). The angle (14.1-θ ₃ ) may be directly related to the force required to overcome the biasing element coupled to the protrusion (14.1-1710A) to allow the protrusion (14.1-1724) to move away from the center member (14.1-1712) and to enable extraction of the protrusion (14.1-1724) from the channel (14.1-1733) (e.g., to enable extraction of the plug connector (14.1-1720) from the receptacle connector (14.1-1700). For example, a relatively smaller angle (14.1-θ ₃ ) may require a relatively larger force to extract the plug connector (14.1-1720) from the receptacle connector (14.1-1700). Alternatively, a relatively larger angle (14.1-θ ₃ ) may require a relatively smaller force to extract the plug connector (14.1-1720) from the receptacle connector (14.1-1700). The angle (14.1-θ ₃ ) may be about 30 degrees, about 30 degrees to about 60 degrees, about 60 degrees to about 90 degrees, about 90 degrees to about 120 degrees, about 120 degrees to about 150 degrees, about 150 degrees to about 180 degrees, or less than 180 degrees. A third surface (14.1-1730) adjacent to the first surface (14.1-1731) may extend in a direction parallel to the second surface (14.1-1732).

Figures 579d to 579f illustrate a stopper (14.1-1710B) including a central region (14.1-1711) and peripheral regions (14.1-1713) on either side of the central region (14.1-1711). The central region (14.1-1711) may be notched to form a channel (14.1-1733) capable of accommodating a protrusion (14.1-1724) of a plug connector (14.1-1720). For example, a lower portion of the central region (14.1-1711) may be notched to form an undercut portion of the stopper (14.1-1710B) in the central region (14.1-1711). Additionally, the upper portion of the central region (14.1-1711) may be notched to form a sloped upper surface of the detent (14.1-1710B) in the central region (14.1-1711). The notches may be omitted from the peripheral regions (14.1-1713), which may prevent, limit, or reduce rotation of the plug connector (14.1-1720). Including non-notched peripheral regions (14.1-1713) may also increase mating and de-mating forces between the plug connector (14.1-1720) and the receptacle connector (14.1-1700). In the examples of FIGS. 579d-579f, one of the peripheral regions (14.1-1713) may be unnotched, and the other peripheral region (14.1-1713) may be notched, which reduces separation forces (e.g., reduces unmating forces). The notched upper surface of the stop (14.1-1710B) may reduce the mating force required to mate the plug connector (14.1-1720) in the receptacle connector (14.1-1700). In other words, the notched upper surface of the stop (14.1-1710B) may reduce the force required to move the protrusions (14.1-1724) past the stop (14.1-1710B) and into the channel (14.1-1733). Additionally, the peripheral regions (14.1-1713) may extend radially inwardly relative to the central region (14.1-1711) and may include protrusions, etc. In the examples of FIGS. 579d to 579f, the protrusions may be included in both peripheral regions (14.1-1713). This may increase the mating force and/or de-mating force of the plug connector (14.1-1720) relative to the receptacle connector (14.1-1700).

FIG. 579f illustrates a cross-sectional view taken along reference line A-A' of FIG. 579d of a protrusion (14.1-1724) of a plug connector (14.1-1720) disposed within a channel (14.1-1733) and interfacing with a stopper (14.1-1710B). In some examples, the stopper (14.1-1710B) may define the channel (14.1-1733) such that a first surface (14.1-1737) of the channel (14.1-1733) is inclined relative to a second surface (14.1-1738) of the channel (14.1-1733) such that the first surface (14.1-1737) of the channel (14.1-1733) forms an angle (14.1-θ ₄ ). The protrusion (14.1-1714) may engage or contact the first surface (14.1-1737) while positioned within the channel (14.1-1733). The angle (14.1-θ ₄ ) may be directly related to the force required to overcome the biasing element coupled to the protrusion (14.1-1710B) to allow the protrusion (14.1-1724) to move away from the center member (14.1-1712) and to enable extraction of the protrusion (14.1-1724) from the channel (14.1-1733) (e.g., to enable extraction of the plug connector (14.1-1720) from the receptacle connector (14.1-1700). For example, a relatively smaller angle (14.1-θ ₄ ) may require a relatively larger force to extract the plug connector (14.1-1720) from the receptacle connector (14.1-1700). Alternatively, a relatively larger angle (14.1-θ ₄ ) may require a relatively smaller force to extract the plug connector (14.1-1720) from the receptacle connector (14.1-1700). The angle (14.1-θ ₄ ) may be about 30 degrees, about 30 degrees to about 60 degrees, about 60 degrees to about 90 degrees, about 90 degrees to about 120 degrees, about 120 degrees to about 150 degrees, about 150 degrees to about 180 degrees, or less than 180 degrees. A third surface (14.1-1736) adjacent to the first surface (14.1-1737) may extend in a direction parallel to the second surface (14.1-1738).

In some examples, the top surface of the stop (14.1-1710B) is also notched. As such, the fourth surface (14.1-1734) of the stop (14.1-1710B) can be angled relative to the third surface (14.1-1736) of the stop (14.1-1710B) to form an angle. The protrusion (14.1-1714) can engage or contact the fourth surface (14.1-1734) as the protrusion (14.1-1714) is inserted into the channel (14.1-1733). The angle may be directly correlated to the force required to overcome a biasing element coupled to the detent (14.1-1710B) to allow the detent (14.1-1710B) to move away from the center member (14.1-1712) and to allow insertion of the protrusion (14.1-1724) into the channel (14.1-1733) (e.g., to allow insertion of the plug connector (14.1-1720) into the receptacle connector (14.1-1700). For example, a relatively smaller angle may require a relatively larger force to extract the plug connector (14.1-1720) from the receptacle connector (14.1-1700). Alternatively, a relatively larger angle may require a relatively smaller force to extract the plug connector (14.1-1720) from the receptacle connector (14.1-1700). The angle may be about 30 degrees, about 30 degrees to about 60 degrees, about 60 degrees to about 90 degrees, about 90 degrees to about 120 degrees, about 120 degrees to about 150 degrees, about 150 degrees to about 180 degrees, or less than 180 degrees.

Figures 579g and 579h illustrate a stopper (14.1-1710C) comprising a central region (14.1-1711) and a peripheral region (14.1-1713) on one side of the central region (14.1-1711). The central region (14.1-1711) may be notched to form a channel (14.1-1733) capable of accommodating a protrusion (14.1-1724) of a plug connector (14.1-1720). The central region (14.1-1711) may also be notched to form a notched top surface. For example, a lower portion of the central region (14.1-1711) may be notched to form an undercut portion of the stop (14.1-1710C) in the central region (14.1-1711). Additionally, an upper portion of the central region (14.1-1711) may be notched to form a sloped upper surface of the stop (14.1-1710C) in the central region (14.1-1711). The notches may be omitted from the peripheral region (14.1-1713), which may prevent, limit, or reduce rotation of the plug connector (14.1-1720). Including an unnotched peripheral region (14.1-1713) may also increase mating and de-mating forces between the plug connector (14.1-1720) and the receptacle connector (14.1-1700). In the examples of FIGS. 579g and 579h, the peripheral region (14.1-1713) may not be notched, which may increase the mating force and/or de-mating force between the plug connector (14.1-1720) and the receptacle connector (14.1-1700). The notched upper surface of the stop (14.1-1710C) may reduce the mating force required to mate the plug connector (14.1-1720) in the receptacle connector (14.1-1700). In other words, the notched upper surface of the stop (14.1-1710C) may reduce the force required to move the protrusions (14.1-1724) past the stop (14.1-1710C) and into the channel (14.1-1733). Additionally, the peripheral region (14.1-1713) may extend radially inwardly relative to the central region (14.1-1711) and may include a protrusion or the like. In the examples of FIGS. 579g and 579h, the protrusion may be included in the non-notched peripheral region (14.1-1713) of the stopper (14.1-1710C). This may increase the mating force and/or de-mating force of the plug connector (14.1-1720) relative to the receptacle connector (14.1-1700). The cross-sectional view of the stopper (14.1-1710C) taken along section A-A' of FIG. 579g may be identical to or similar to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 579f discussed above.

Figures 579i to 579k illustrate a stopper (14.1-1710D) including a central region (14.1-1711) and a peripheral region (14.1-1713) on one side of the central region (14.1-1711). The central region (14.1-1711) may be notched to form a channel (14.1-1733) capable of receiving a protrusion (14.1-1724) of a plug connector (14.1-1720). For example, a lower portion of the central region (14.1-1711) may be notched to form an undercut portion of the stopper (14.1-1710D) in the central region (14.1-1711). Additionally, the upper portions of the central region (14.1-1711) and the peripheral region (14.1-1713) may be notched to form an inclined upper surface of the stopper (14.1-1710D) in the central region (14.1-1711) and the peripheral region (14.1-1713). In the examples of FIGS. 579i to 579k, the notched portions of the stopper (14.1-1710D) may reduce the mating force and/or the de-mating force of the plug connector (14.1-1720) relative to the receptacle connector (14.1-1700). The peripheral region (14.1-1713) may extend radially inwardly with respect to the central region (14.1-1711) and may include protrusions, etc. In the examples of FIGS. 579i to 579k, the protrusion may be included in a peripheral region (14.1-1713) having a non-notched lower portion and a notched upper portion. This may increase the mating and/or de-mating force of the plug connector (14.1-1720) relative to the receptacle connector (14.1-1700).

FIG. 579k illustrates a cross-sectional view taken along reference line A-A' of FIG. 579i of a protrusion (14.1-1724) of a plug connector (14.1-1720) disposed within a channel (14.1-1733) and interfacing with a stopper (14.1-1710D). In some examples, the stopper (14.1-1710D) may define the channel (14.1-1733) such that a first surface (14.1-1744) of the channel (14.1-1733) is inclined relative to a second surface (14.1-1746) of the channel (14.1-1733) such that the first surface (14.1-1744) of the channel (14.1-1733) forms an angle (14.1-θ ₅ ). The protrusion (14.1-1714) may engage or contact the first surface (14.1-1744) while positioned within the channel (14.1-1733). The angle (14.1-θ ₅ ) may be directly related to the force required to overcome the biasing element coupled to the protrusion (14.1-1710D) to allow the protrusion (14.1-1724) to move away from the center member (14.1-1712) and to enable extraction of the protrusion (14.1-1724) from the channel (14.1-1733) (e.g., to enable extraction of the plug connector (14.1-1720) from the receptacle connector (14.1-1700). For example, a relatively smaller angle (14.1-θ ₅ ) may require a relatively larger force to extract the plug connector (14.1-1720) from the receptacle connector (14.1-1700). Alternatively, a relatively larger angle (14.1-θ ₅ ) may require a relatively smaller force to extract the plug connector (14.1-1720) from the receptacle connector (14.1-1700). The angle (14.1-θ ₅ ) may be about 30 degrees, about 30 degrees to about 60 degrees, about 60 degrees to about 90 degrees, about 90 degrees to about 120 degrees, about 120 degrees to about 150 degrees, about 150 degrees to about 180 degrees, or less than 180 degrees. A third surface (14.1-1742) adjacent to the first surface (14.1-1744) may extend in a direction parallel to the second surface (14.1-1746).

In some examples, the top surface of the stop (14.1-1710D) is also notched. As such, the fourth surface (14.1-1740) of the stop (14.1-1710D) may be inclined relative to the third surface (14.1-1742) of the stop (14.1-1710D) to form an angle (14.1-θ ₆ ). The protrusion (14.1-1714) may engage or contact the fourth surface (14.1-1740) as the protrusion (14.1-1714) is inserted into the channel (14.1-1733). The angle (14.1-θ ₆ ) may be directly correlated to the force required to overcome the biasing element coupled to the detent (14.1-1710D) to allow the detent (14.1-1710D) to move away from the center member (14.1-1712) and to allow insertion of the protrusion (14.1-1724) into the channel (14.1-1733) (e.g., to allow insertion of the plug connector (14.1-1720) into the receptacle connector (14.1-1700). For example, a relatively smaller angle (14.1-θ ₆ ) may require a relatively larger force to extract the plug connector (14.1-1720) from the receptacle connector (14.1-1700). Alternatively, a relatively larger angle (14.1-θ ₆ ) may require a relatively smaller force to extract the plug connector (14.1-1720) from the receptacle connector (14.1-1700). The angle (14.1-θ ₆ ) may be about 30 degrees, about 30 degrees to about 60 degrees, about 60 degrees to about 90 degrees, about 90 degrees to about 120 degrees, about 120 degrees to about 150 degrees, about 150 degrees to about 180 degrees, or less than 180 degrees.

Figures 579l and 579m illustrate a stopper (14.1-1710E) including a central region (14.1-1711) and a peripheral region (14.1-1713) on one side of the central region (14.1-1711). The central region (14.1-1711) may be notched to form a channel (14.1-1733) capable of accommodating a protrusion (14.1-1724) of a plug connector (14.1-1720). For example, a lower portion of the central region (14.1-1711) may be notched to form an undercut portion of the stopper (14.1-1710E) in the central region (14.1-1711). Notches may be omitted from the lower portion of the peripheral regions (14.1-1713), which may prevent, limit, or reduce rotation of the plug connector (14.1-1720). Including non-notched peripheral regions (14.1-1713) may also increase mating and de-mating forces between the plug connector (14.1-1720) and the receptacle connector (14.1-1700). The center region (14.1-1711) and the peripheral region (14.1-1713) may be notched to form a notched top surface. The notched top surface of the detent (14.1-1710E) may reduce the mating force for mating the plug connector (14.1-1720) in the receptacle connector (14.1-1700). In other words, the notched upper surface of the stop (14.1-1710E) can reduce the force required to move the protrusions (14.1-1724) past the stop (14.1-1710E) and into the channel (14.1-1733). The cross-sectional view of the stop (14.1-1710E) taken along section A-A' of FIG. 579g can be identical to or similar to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 579l discussed above.

Figures 580a and 580b illustrate different configurations of a cable assembly (14.1-1800) for a receptacle connector (14.1-1802). Figures 580a and 580b illustrate a portion of a cable assembly (14.1-1800) inserted into a receptacle connector (14.1-1802). The cable assembly (14.1-1800) may be substantially similar to any of the previously described cable assemblies and may include some or all of their features. For example, the cable assembly (14.1-1800) may include a shielded cable (14.1-1803), and a plug connector (14.1-1804) having a boot (14.1-1806) and a center member (14.1-1808A/14.1-1808B). The central member (14.1-1808) can form an outer surface (14.1-1810) and an inner surface (14.1-1812). In some examples, the central member (14.1-1808) can include one or more protrusions (14.1-1814) extending laterally from or substantially perpendicular to the outer surface (14.1-1810). In some examples, the central member (14.1-1808) can form a cavity or a volume, for example, the inner surface (14.1-1812) can form a cavity or a volume.

The receptacle connector (14.1-1802) may be substantially similar to the previously described receptacle connectors and may include some or all of their features. For example, the receptacle connector (14.1-1802) may include a trim ring (14.1-1816), one or more detents (14.1-1818A/14.1-1818B/14.1-1818C) (collectively referred to as the detents (14.1-1818)), and a raised portion (14.1-1820). The trim ring (14.1-1816) may form one or more undercut areas that house or retain the detent (14.1-1818). While the center member (14.1-1808) is positioned within the receptacle connector (14.1-1802), the protrusions (14.1-1814) may extend into respective channels defined by the detents (14.1-1818). In some examples, each detent (14.1-1818) may be biased toward the raised portion (14.1-1820) by a biasing element. In other words, each detent (14.1-1818) may be radially translatable within the respective undercut regions toward and away from the raised portion (14.1-1820) to engage and disengage with the respective protrusions (14.1-1814).

Each of the detents (14.1-1818) may include different configurations and different biasing elements to tailor the mating and de-mating forces for each of the detents (14.1-1818). Specific configurations of the detents (14.1-1818) and the shielded cable (14.1-1803) for the detents (14.1-1818) may be used to provide different mating and de-mating forces and to provide different separation forces. In the example of FIG. 580a, the detents (14.1-1818A, 14.1-1818C) are offset distally from the shielded cable (14.1-1803) with respect to the shielded cable (14.1-1803) (e.g., the shielded cable (14.1-1803) splits the detents (14.1-1818A, 14.1-1818B)), and the detent (14.1-1818B) is aligned proximally with the shielded cable (14.1-1803) with respect to the shielded cable (14.1-1803). The protrusions (14.1-1814) distal to the shielded cable (14.1-1803) are offset from the shielded cable (14.1-1803) (e.g., the shielded cable (14.1-1803) divides the protrusions (14.1-1814)), and the protrusions (14.1-1814) proximal to the shielded cable (14.1-1803) are aligned with the shielded cable (14.1-1803). In the example of FIG. 580b, the detents (14.1-1818A, 14.1-1818C) are offset proximally from the shielded cable (14.1-1803) with respect to the shielded cable (14.1-1803) (e.g., the shielded cable (14.1-1803) splits the detents (14.1-1818A, 14.1-1818B)), and the detent (14.1-1818B) is aligned distally with the shielded cable (14.1-1803) with respect to the shielded cable (14.1-1803). The protrusions (14.1-1814) proximal to the shielded cable (14.1-1803) are offset from the shielded cable (14.1-1803) (e.g., the shielded cable (14.1-1803) divides the protrusions (14.1-1814)), and the protrusions (14.1-1814) distal to the shielded cable (14.1-1803) are aligned with the shielded cable (14.1-1803). The stoppers (14.1-1818) may comprise any of the stoppers previously described, such as the stoppers described with respect to FIGS. 579a through 579m, and the biasing elements may comprise any of the biasing elements previously described. Any combination of the stoppers (14.1-1818) and the biasing elements may be provided.

Figures 581a and 581b illustrate an example in which a receptacle connector (14.1-1802) includes protrusions (14.1-1830) and a plug connector (14.1-1804) includes openings (14.1-1831) configured to receive the protrusions. The protrusions (14.1-1830) and the openings (14.1-1831) may be configured to ensure that the plug connector (14.1-1804) is aligned with and properly oriented relative to the receptacle connector (14.1-1802). Figures 581a and 581b additionally illustrate the protrusions (14.1-1832) as dashed lines. In some examples, the receptacle connector (14.1-1802) includes a single protrusion (14.1-1830); The receptacle connector (14.1-1802) may include protrusions (14.1-1832) in addition to or instead of the protrusion (14.1-1830), and the plug connector (14.1-1804) may include any number of openings (14.1-1831) configured to receive the protrusion (14.1-1830) and/or the protrusions (14.1-1832). In some examples, the receptacle connector (14.1-1802) may include one protrusion (14.1-1830); one protrusion (14.1-1830) and one protrusion (14.1-1832); one protrusion (14.1-1830) and two protrusions (14.1-1832); or more protrusions.

Figures 581a and 581b illustrate alternative angular spacings of the protrusions (14.1-1830/14.1-1832) of the receptacle connector (14.1-1802). In Figure 581a, the protrusions (14.1-1830/14.1-1832) are evenly spaced from each other, and the angles (14.1-θ ₇ , 14.1-θ ₈ , 14.1-θ ₉ ) are about 60°. The protrusions (14.1-1830) and (14.1-1832) distal to the shielded cable (14.1-1803) can be offset from the shielded cable (14.1-1803) (e.g., the shielded cable (14.1-1803) divides the protrusions (14.1-1830) and (14.1-1832)), and the protrusions (14.1-1832) proximal to the shielded cable (14.1-1803) can be aligned with the shielded cable (14.1-1803). Any rotational configuration of the protrusions (14.1-1830/14.1-1832) relative to the shielded cable (14.1-1803) can be provided. In FIG. 581b, the protrusions (14.1-1830/14.1-1832) are spaced apart from each other at different intervals. The angles (14.1-θ ₁₀ , 14.1-θ ₁₁ , 14.1-θ ₁₂ ) between adjacent protrusions (14.1-1830/14.1-1832) can be about 30 degrees, about 30 degrees to about 60 degrees, about 60 degrees to about 90 degrees, about 90 degrees to about 120 degrees, about 120 degrees to about 150 degrees, about 150 degrees to about 180 degrees, or less than 180 degrees. The protrusions (14.1-1830) and (14.1-1832) distal to the shielded cable (14.1-1803) can be offset from the shielded cable (14.1-1803) (e.g., the shielded cable (14.1-1803) divides the protrusions (14.1-1830) and (14.1-1832)), and the protrusions (14.1-1832) proximal to the shielded cable (14.1-1803) can also be offset from the shielded cable (14.1-1803). Any rotational configuration of the protrusions (14.1-1830/14.1-1832) for the shielded cable (14.1-1803) can be provided. Various configurations of the protrusions (14.1-1830/14.1-1832) can be used to ensure proper alignment of the plug connector (14.1-1804) with the receptacle connector (14.1-1802), and can also be used to ensure that incompatible plug connectors are not inadvertently installed in the receptacle connector (14.1-1802).

Figures 582a through 582e illustrate side cross-sectional views of a plug connector (14.1-1904) of a cable assembly (14.1-1900) disposed within a receptacle connector (14.1-1902). The plug connector (14.1-1904) includes a center member (14.1-1908) having a protrusion (14.1-1914). The protrusion (14.1-1914) engages a channel of a stop (14.1-1918). The stop (14.1-1918) is biased toward a raised portion (14.1-1920) of the receptacle connector (14.1-1902) by a biasing element (14.1-1924). A bias element (14.1-1924) and a detent (14.1-1918) are disposed within a trim ring (14.1-1916) that is coupled to a base (14.1-1930) of a receptacle connector (14.1-1902). An outer surface (14.1-1910) of the center member (14.1-1908) includes a protrusion (14.1-1914) configured to engage the detent (14.1-1918). An inner surface (14.1-1912) of the center member (14.1-1908) includes an electrical contact (14.1-1919) that is electrically coupled to a raised portion (14.1-1920) of the receptacle connector (14.1-1902).

Figures 582a through 582e illustrate various seals (14.1-1932) positioned between a center member (14.1-1908) and a receptacle connector (14.1-1902) at various locations to prevent the ingress of contaminants, such as fluids, dust, liquids, and other substances, into the receptacle connector (14.1-1902) that may impair or interfere with the function of the plug connector (14.1-1904) and the receptacle connector (14.1-1902). The seals (14.1-1932) may be attached to any surface of the plug connector (14.1-1904) and/or the receptacle connector (14.1-1902). For example, the seal (14.1-1932) may be molded, bonded, welded, fastened, or otherwise secured to the surface of the plug connector (14.1-1904) and/or the receptacle connector (14.1-1902).

Figure 582a illustrates a seal (14.1-1932A) positioned between a base (14.1-1930) and a center member (14.1-1908). As illustrated in Figure 582a, an opening (14.1-1934A) may be provided in a lower portion of the center member (14.1-1908), and the seal (14.1-1932A) may be positioned in the opening (14.1-1934A) within the center member (14.1-1908).

FIG. 582B illustrates a seal (14.1-1932B) disposed between a base (14.1-1930) and a center member (14.1-1908). As illustrated in FIG. 582B, an opening (14.1-1934B) may be provided in a portion of the base (14.1-1930) adjacent to a lower portion of the center member (14.1-1908), and the seal (14.1-1932B) may be disposed in the opening (14.1-1934B) within the base (14.1-1930).

FIG. 582c illustrates a seal (14.1-1932C) disposed between the raised portion (14.1-1920) and the center member (14.1-1908). As illustrated in FIG. 582c, an opening (14.1-1934C) may be provided in a portion of the raised portion (14.1-1920) adjacent to a lower portion of the center member (14.1-1908), and the seal (14.1-1932C) may be disposed in the opening (14.1-1934C) within the raised portion (14.1-1920).

Figure 582d illustrates a seal (14.1-1932D) disposed between a trim ring (14.1-1916) and a center member (14.1-1908). As illustrated in Figure 582d, the seal (14.1-1932D) may be coupled to the center member (14.1-1908) between the center member (14.1-1908) and the trim ring (14.1-1916). The seal (14.1-1932D) may include a protrusion that interacts with the trim ring (14.1-1916) to provide a seal between the center member (14.1-1908) and the trim ring (14.1-1916).

Figure 582e illustrates a seal (14.1-1932E) disposed between a trim ring (14.1-1916) and a center member (14.1-1908). As illustrated in Figure 582e, the seal (14.1-1932E) can be coupled to the center member (14.1-1908) between the center member (14.1-1908) and the trim ring (14.1-1916). The seal (14.1-1932E) can include an opening, which provides flexibility to the seal (14.1-1932E) as it interacts with the trim ring (14.1-1916) to provide a seal between the center member (14.1-1908) and the trim ring (14.1-1916). While FIGS. 582a through 582e illustrate only a single seal (14.1-1932) positioned between a central member (14.1-1908) and a receptacle connector (14.1-1902) in each example, other examples may include multiple seals (14.1-1932), each of which is positioned at one of a plurality of locations within the receptacle connector (14.1-1902) and/or the central member (14.1-1908).

Figures 583a through 583g illustrate various configurations of seals (14.1-2002) that may be included between the raised portion (14.1-2000) and base (14.1-2006) of the receptacle connector and the center member (14.1-2008) of the plug connector. The seals (14.1-2002) may be positioned at various locations and may include different sizes and shapes to prevent the ingress of contaminants, such as fluids, dust, liquids, and other materials, into the receptacle connector that may impair or interfere with the function of the plug connector and receptacle connector. The seals (14.1-2002) may be attached to any surface of the plug connector and/or the receptacle connector. For example, the seals (14.1-2002) may be molded, bonded, welded, fastened, or otherwise secured to the surface of the plug connector and/or receptacle connector.

FIG. 583A illustrates a seal (14.1-2002A) positioned vertically between the base (14.1-2006) and the raised portion (14.1-2000) and horizontally between the raised portion (14.1-2000) and the center member (14.1-2008). The seal (14.1-2002A) may include a triangular portion interfacing with the center member (14.1-2008). An opening (14.1-2004A) may be provided in the raised portion (14.1-2000), and the seal (14.1-2002A) may be positioned within the opening (14.1-2004A). The seal (14.1-2002A) may include a protrusion (14.1-2012A) that interfaces with the opening (14.1-2010A) of the base (14.1-2006). The protrusion (14.1-2012A) may be generally rectangular. The seal (14.1-2002A) may be attached to the raised portion (14.1-2000). The seal (14.1-2002A) may be further attached to the base (14.1-2006) via the protrusion (14.1-2012A).

FIG. 583b illustrates a seal (14.1-2002B) positioned vertically between the base (14.1-2006) and the raised portion (14.1-2000) and horizontally between the raised portion (14.1-2000) and the center member (14.1-2008). The seal (14.1-2002B) may be generally L-shaped, with a rectangular portion interfacing with the center member (14.1-2008). An opening (14.1-2004B) may be provided in the raised portion (14.1-2000), and the seal (14.1-2002B) may be positioned within the opening (14.1-2004B). The seal (14.1-2002B) may be attached to the raised portion (14.1-2000).

FIG. 583c illustrates a seal (14.1-2002C) positioned vertically between the base (14.1-2006) and the raised portion (14.1-2000) and horizontally between the raised portion (14.1-2000) and the center member (14.1-2008). The seal (14.1-2002C) may include a rounded portion that interfaces with the center member (14.1-2008). An opening (14.1-2004C) may be provided in the raised portion (14.1-2000), and the seal (14.1-2002C) may be positioned within the opening (14.1-2004C). The seal (14.1-2002C) may include a protrusion (14.1-2012C) that interfaces with the opening (14.1-2010C) of the base (14.1-2006). The protrusion (14.1-2012C) may be generally round. The seal (14.1-2002C) may be generally D-shaped. The seal (14.1-2002C) may be attached to the raised portion (14.1-2000). The seal (14.1-2002C) may be further attached to the base (14.1-2006) via the protrusion (14.1-2012C).

FIG. 583D illustrates a seal (14.1-2002D) positioned vertically between the base (14.1-2006) and the raised portion (14.1-2000) and horizontally between the raised portion (14.1-2000) and the center member (14.1-2008). The seal (14.1-2002D) may further extend vertically below the top surface of the base (14.1-2006) and laterally adjacent the base (14.1-2006) in a direction opposite to the center member (14.1-2008). The seal (14.1-2002D) may include a rounded/generally rectangular portion that interfaces with the center member (14.1-2008). An opening (14.1-2004D) may be provided in the raised portion (14.1-2000), and a seal (14.1-2002D) may be disposed within the opening (14.1-2004A). The seal (14.1-2002A) may include a protrusion (14.1-2012D) that interfaces with the opening (14.1-2010D) of the base (14.1-2006). The opening (14.1-2010D) of the base may be laterally opposite to the center member (14.1-2008). The seal (14.1-2002D) may additionally include an opening (14.1-2014D) disposed therein, which may be generally U-shaped. The opening (14.1-2014D) may provide additional flexibility to the seal (14.1-2002D) and may improve the sealing between the center member (14.1-2008) and the receptacle connector. The seal (14.1-2002D) may be attached to the base (14.1-2006) via a protrusion (14.1-2012D) within the opening (14.1-2010D). The seal (14.1-2002D) may additionally be attached to the raised portion (14.1-2000).

FIG. 583e illustrates a seal (14.1-2002E) positioned vertically between the base (14.1-2006) and the raised portion (14.1-2000) and horizontally between the raised portion (14.1-2000) and the center member (14.1-2008). The seal (14.1-2002E) may include a rounded portion interfacing with the center member (14.1-2008). An opening (14.1-2004E) may be provided in the raised portion (14.1-2000), and the seal (14.1-2002E) may be positioned within the opening (14.1-2004E). The seal (14.1-2002E) may be generally stadium-shaped or rectangular with rounded corners. The seal (14.1-2002E) can be attached to the raised portion (14.1-2000). The seal (14.1-2002E) can additionally be attached to the base (14.1-2006).

FIG. 583F illustrates a seal (14.1-2002F) positioned vertically between the base (14.1-2006) and the raised portion (14.1-2000) and horizontally between the raised portion (14.1-2000) and the center member (14.1-2008). The seal (14.1-2002F) may include a rounded portion that interfaces with the center member (14.1-2008). An opening (14.1-2004F) may be provided in the raised portion (14.1-2000), and the seal (14.1-2002F) may be positioned within the opening (14.1-2004F). The seal (14.1-2002F) may be generally stadium-shaped or rectangular with rounded corners. In the example of FIG. 583f, the corners of the seal (14.1-2002F) proximal to the center member (14.1-2008) are more rounded than the corners of the seal (14.1-2002F) distal to the center member (14.1-2008). The seal (14.1-2002F) may be attached to the raised portion (14.1-2000). The seal (14.1-2002F) may additionally be attached to the base (14.1-2006).

FIG. 583g illustrates a seal (14.1-2002G) disposed vertically between a base (14.1-2006) and a raised portion (14.1-2000) and horizontally between the raised portion (14.1-2000) and a center member (14.1-2008). The seal (14.1-2002G) may include a rounded portion interfacing with the center member (14.1-2008). An opening (14.1-2004G) may be provided in the raised portion (14.1-2000), and the seal (14.1-2002G) may be disposed within the opening (14.1-2004G). The seal (14.1-2002G) may be generally stadium-shaped or rectangular with rounded corners. In the example of FIG. 583g, the seal (14.1-2002E) further includes an opening (14.1-2014G) on its lower surface adjacent to the base (14.1-2006). The opening (14.1-2014G) may provide improved flexibility to the seal (14.1-2002G). The seal (14.1-2002G) may be attached to the raised portion (14.1-2000). The seal (14.1-2002G) may further be attached to the base (14.1-2006).

While FIGS. 583a through 583g illustrate only a single seal (14.1-2002) positioned between the center member (14.1-2008) and the raised portion (14.1-2000) and base (14.1-2006) of the receptacle connector in each example, other examples may include multiple seals, each positioned at one of a plurality of locations within the receptacle connector and/or the center member. The seals (14.1-2002) of FIGS. 583a through 583g may be used in addition to or instead of any of the seals discussed above, such as the seals discussed with respect to FIGS. 582a through 582e.

Figures 584a and 584b illustrate exploded views of a receptacle connector (14.1-2100). The receptacle connector (14.1-2100) includes a base (14.1-2102), a raised portion (14.1-2110), mounting clips (14.1-2114), a lower mounting ring (14.1-2116), and an upper mounting ring (14.1-2122). The mounting clips (14.1-2114), the lower mounting ring (14.1-2116), and the upper mounting ring (14.1-2122) can attach the raised portion (14.1-2110) to the base (14.1-2102). For example, an upper mounting ring (14.1-2122) and a lower mounting ring (14.1-2116) may be coupled to a base (14.1-2102). The base (14.1-2102) may include a protrusion (14.1-2106) and a raised electronic component (14.1-2104). The upper mounting ring (14.1-2122) may include openings (14.1-2124) configured to receive the protrusions (14.1-2106) of the base (14.1-2102). The lower mounting ring (14.1-2116) may include openings (14.1-2120) configured to receive the protrusions (14.1-2106) of the base (14.1-2102). The openings (14.1-2124) and the openings (14.1-2120) can have shapes corresponding to the shapes of the protrusions (14.1-2106) (e.g., capsule shapes, round shapes, rectangular shapes, etc.). The lower mounting ring can further include an opening (14.1-2118) configured to receive a raised electronic component (14.1-2104) of the base (14.1-2102). The opening (14.1-2118) can have a shape corresponding to the shape of the raised electronic component (14.1-2104) (e.g., capsule shapes, round shapes, rectangular shapes, etc.).

The mounting clips (14.1-2114) can be configured to receive a raised component (14.1-2112) of the raised portion (14.1-2110). Each of the mounting clips (14.1-2114) can be generally L-shaped, wherein the outer surface of the mounting clips (14.1-2114) is rounded. The central portions of the mounting clips (14.1-2114) can receive the raised component (14.1-2112). The lower mounting ring (14.1-2116) and the upper mounting ring (14.1-2122) can be attached to the base (14.1-2102), and the mounting clips (14.1-2114) can attach the raised component (14.1-2112) of the raised portion (14.1-2110) to the lower mounting ring (14.1-2116), the upper mounting ring (14.1-2122), and the base (14.1-2102). The upper mounting ring (14.1-2122) and the lower mounting ring (14.1-2116) can be attached to the base (14.1-2102), the mounting clips (14.1-2114) can be attached to the raised component (14.1-2112), and the raised portion (14.1-2110) can be attached to the base (14.1-2102) by adhesives, adhesive tapes, fasteners, welding, a combination thereof, or any other mechanism that permanently or temporarily secures the various components to one another.

In the example of FIG. 584b, the mounting clips (14.1-2114) are replaced with mounting clips (14.1-2126). The mounting clips (14.1-2126) interface with openings (14.1-2128) in the lower mounting ring (14.1-2116) to attach the raised portion (14.1-2110) to the base (14.1-2102) via the lower mounting ring (14.1-2116).

Figures 585a and 585b illustrate exploded views of a receptacle connector (14.1-2200). The receptacle connector (14.1-2200) includes a raised portion comprising a base (14.1-2210) and a body (14.1-2204) and a cap (14.1-2202). The base includes a contact tab (14.1-2212) having contacts (14.1-2214) disposed within an opening (14.1-2218) within the raised portion (14.1-2216) of the base (14.1-2210). In the example of Figure 585a, the contact tab (14.1-2212) is relatively wider and includes a greater number of contacts, such as six contacts. In the example of FIG. 585b, the contact tab (14.1-2212) is relatively narrower and includes a smaller number of contacts, such as three contacts. Any number of contacts and any suitable width of the contact tab (14.1-2212) may be provided. Providing a contact tab (14.1-2212) with a larger width and a larger number of contacts improves the strength of the connection between the body (14.1-2204) and the base (14.1-2210) and provides more electrical connections between the receptacle connector (14.1-2200) and other electronic components, such as plug connectors.

Figures 585a and 585b further illustrate different configurations of contacts (14.1-2206) included in openings (14.1-2208) within a body (14.1-2204). In the example of Figure 585a, four contacts (14.1-2206) are included in openings (14.1-2208) within a body (14.1-2204). In the example of Figure 585b, two contacts (14.1-2206) are included in openings (14.1-2208) within a body (14.1-2204). Any number of contacts (14.1-2206) may be provided. Providing a greater number of contacts (14.1-2206) within the body (14.1-2204) provides more electrical connections between the receptacle connector (14.1-2200) and other electronic components such as plug connectors.

FIGS. 586a through 595b illustrate various examples of receptacle connectors and plug connectors that can be used as plug connectors (14.1-144) of the cable assembly (14.1-140) and receptacle connectors (14.1-132) of the second electronic device (14.1-130) illustrated in FIGS. 561a and 561b.

FIG. 586a illustrates an electronic device (14.1-2300) having a housing (14.1-2302) that forms an outer surface (14.1-2304) of the electronic device (14.1-2300). The housing (14.1-2302) may define or define one or more openings (14.1-2306, 14.1-2308). Each of the one or more openings (14.1-2306, 14.1-2308) may accommodate a connector for an electrical cord or cable (see cable (14.1-2310) of FIG. 586b) for electrically coupling the electronic device (14.1-2300) to another electronic device (not shown) and/or to a power source (e.g., a wall-mounted electrical outlet).

The electronic device (14.1-2300) may be a smartphone, a laptop, a tablet computing device, a smartwatch, a head-mounted display (HMD), headphones, a combination thereof, or any other electronic device. Alternatively or additionally, the electronic device (14.1-2300) may be a sub-component or accessory for one or more of the electronic devices listed above, such as an external power supply or electrical power source, a display, a user interface, an audio component or speaker, or a combination thereof. As such, the electronic device (14.1-2300) may be electrically and/or communicatively coupled to one or more other electronic devices (not shown) via electrical receptacle connectors or ports disposed within one or more openings (14.1-2306, 14.1-2308).

The housing (14.1-2302) may define a cavity or volume in which one or more electronic components may be disposed. For example, the one or more electronic components disposed within the housing (14.1-2302) may be a battery (e.g., a lithium battery pack), a processor, a wireless communication module, one or more antennas, or any other component or assembly housed within the portable electronic device. In some examples, the one or more electronic components may be electrically coupled to a receptacle connector (see receptacle connector (2424) of FIG. 587a) accessible by a cable or cord inserted into one of the openings (14.1-2306, 14.1-2308). For example, the one or more electronic components may provide power to the receptacle connector, and the cable or cord may transfer the electrical power to another electronic device (i.e., the electronic device (14.1-2300) may be a power source or external battery electrically coupled to the portable electronic device). The housing (14.1-2302) may be molded, machined, cast, stamped, or otherwise fabricated from metal, polymer, ceramic, or combinations thereof.

The opening (14.1-2306) may be formed in or defined by an outer surface (14.1-2304) of the housing (14.1-2302). The opening (14.1-2306) may be sized and shaped to receive and retain a plug connector of a cable (see cable (14.1-2310) of FIG. 586b). In some examples, a cable operably coupled to a receptacle connector within the opening (14.1-2306) may transmit electrical power to the electronic device (14.1-2300) while the plug connector is positioned within the opening (14.1-2306). In other words, the receptacle connector within the opening (14.1-2306) can be configured to receive electrical power (e.g., from a wall-mounted electrical outlet) and to transmit the electrical power to one or more components within the housing (14.1-2302) (e.g., to charge a battery disposed within the housing (14.1-2302).

An opening (14.1-2308) may be formed in or defined by an outer surface (14.1-2304) of a housing (14.1-2302). The opening (14.1-2308) may be sized and shaped to receive a plug connector of a cable. In some examples, a cable operably coupled to a receptacle connector within the opening (14.1-2308) may transmit electrical power from the electronic device (14.1-2300) while the plug connector is positioned within the opening (14.1-2308). In other words, the receptacle connector within the opening (14.1-2308) may be configured to transmit or provide electrical power from one or more components within the housing (14.1-2302) to a portable electronic device electrically coupled to the cable.

Although the openings (14.1-2306, 14.1-2308) are shown as being located on a particular side of the housing (14.1-2302), the openings (14.1-2306, 14.1-2308) may be formed or otherwise located at any location on the outer surface (14.1-2304) of the housing (14.1-2302). Similarly, although the openings (14.1-2306, 14.1-2308) are shown as being adjacent or substantially adjacent to each other, in some examples, the openings (14.1-2306, 14.1-2308) may be formed or otherwise positioned at non-adjacent locations on the outer surface (14.1-2304) of the housing (14.1-2302) (e.g., on opposite sides of the housing (14.1-2302)). Although the openings (14.1-2306, 14.1-2308) are illustrated as having different dimensions (i.e., opening (14.1-2306) is illustrated as being relatively smaller than opening (14.1-2308), the openings (14.1-2306, 14.1-2308) may in some examples have the same dimensions or substantially similar dimensions. While two openings (e.g., openings (14.1-2306, 14.1-2308)) are illustrated in FIGS. 586a and 586b, some examples may have more or fewer openings. For example, the housing (14.1-2302) may define a single opening operable to provide electrical power and/or signals to the portable electronic device and further operable to receive electrical power and/or signals (e.g., from the portable electronic device and/or a wall-mounted electrical outlet). In some examples, the housing (14.1-2302) may define two openings, e.g., a first opening operable to provide electrical power and/or signals to the portable electronic device and further operable to receive electrical power and/or signals (e.g., from the portable electronic device and/or a wall-mounted electrical outlet), and a second opening operable to receive a tool that can be used to remove a cable from the first opening.

FIG. 586b illustrates an electronic device (14.1-2300) and a cable (14.1-2310) receptacled within one or more of openings (14.1-2306, 14.1-2308). The cable (14.1-2310) may have a plug connector (14.1-2312) having a plug (14.1-2314) and a boot (14.1-2316). The plug connector (14.1-2312) may be electrically coupled to a length of shielded wire (14.1-2318). The shielded wire (14.1-2318) may be one or more wires (e.g., metal wires capable of transmitting electrical signals and/or electrical power). The one or more wires may be individually shielded or may be collectively shielded. The shielding may prevent one or more wires from contacting each other. Additionally or alternatively, the shielding may prevent or limit the influence of electromagnetic waves on one or more wires. The plug connector (14.1-2312) may be received within one of the openings (14.1-2306, 14.1-2308) to electrically couple the cable (14.1-2310) to the electronic device (14.1-2300). For example, the plug (14.1-2314) may be inserted into a receptacle connector (e.g., receptacle connector (14.1-2424) of FIG. 587a) disposed within the housing (14.1-2302) of the electronic device (14.1-2300) to enable transmission of electrical power and/or signals to the electronic device (14.1-2300). A boot (14.1-2316) may be inserted into a trim ring (e.g., a trim ring (14.1-2422) of FIG. 587a) disposed within the housing (14.1-2302) of the electronic device (14.1-2300) between the receptacle connector and the housing (14.1-2302). One or more of the plug (14.1-2314), the boot (14.1-2316), the openings (14.1-2306, 14.1-2308), the receptacle connector, and the trim ring may include one or more mating features that retain the plug connector (14.1-2312) to the electronic device (14.1-2300). Mechanisms and components that may interconnect the cable (14.1-2310) and the electronic device (14.1-2300) will be discussed in more detail below with reference to FIGS. 587a through 595b.

FIG. 587a illustrates an electronic device (14.1-2400) and a cable (14.1-2410). The electronic device (14.1-2400) may be substantially similar to the electronic device (14.1-2300) and may include some or all of its features. For example, the electronic device (14.1-2400) may include a housing (14.1-2402) forming a cavity or volume (14.1-2420). One or more electronic components may be disposed within the volume (14.1-2420). For example, one or more electronic components disposed within the volume (14.1-2420) may include a trim ring (14.1-2422) and a receptacle connector (14.1-2424) operably coupled to a battery (14.1-2426), a processor (14.1-2428), a combination thereof, or any other electronic component. The trim ring (14.1-2422) and the receptacle connector (14.1-2424) may form an electrical port disposed within the volume (14.1-2420). In some examples, an outer surface (14.1-2404) of the housing (14.1-2402) may form an opening (14.1-2408) capable of receiving a plug connector (14.1-2412) of a cable (14.1-2410). The trim ring (14.1-2422) may be positioned adjacent the opening (14.1-2408) such that the boot (14.1-2416) of the plug connector (14.1-2412) is positioned within the trim ring (14.1-2422). The receptacle connector (14.1-2424) may be positioned adjacent the trim ring (14.1-2422) such that the plug of the plug connector (14.1-2412) is positioned within the receptacle connector (14.1-2424). The trim ring (14.1-2422) and the receptacle connector (14.1-2424) will be discussed in detail below with reference to FIG. 587b.

Figure 587b illustrates a partially exploded view of a cable (14.1-2410), a trim ring (14.1-2422), and a receptacle connector (14.1-2424). The cable (14.1-2410) may be substantially similar to the cable (14.1-2310) and may include some or all of its features. For example, the cable (14.1-2410) may include a plug connector (14.1-2412) having a plug (14.1-2414) and a boot (14.1-2416). The plug connector (14.1-2412) may be electrically coupled to a length of shielded wire (14.1-2418).

In some examples, the boot (14.1-2416) may be sized or otherwise shaped to be at least partially receivable within a cavity (14.1-2430) formed within the trim ring (14.1-2422). In some examples, the boot (14.1-2416) may be sized or otherwise shaped to be at least partially receivable within the cavity (14.1-2430) of the trim ring (14.1-2422) and partially receivable within the opening (14.1-2408) of the housing (14.1-2402). The cavity (14.1-2430) may be shaped as a cube, a cylinder, a triangle, or any other geometric shape. The boot (14.1-2416) may form a corresponding geometric shape, which may be inserted into or otherwise positioned within the cavity (14.1-2430). In some examples, the boot (14.1-2416) may be partially disposed within the cavity (14.1-2430) such that a portion of the boot (14.1-2416) protrudes from the cavity (14.1-2430). In some examples, the boot (14.1-2416) may be entirely surrounded or substantially surrounded by the trim ring (14.1-2422) and within the cavity (14.1-2430) such that a wire-side surface (14.1-2434) of the boot (14.1-2416) adjacent the shielded wire (14.1-2418) is flush or substantially flush with a surface (14.1-2436) of the trim ring (14.1-2422) adjacent the cavity (14.1-2430). In some examples, the surface (14.1-2432) of the boot (14.1-2416) may be disposed within the cavity (14.1-2430) of the trim ring (14.1-2422) such that the wire-side surface (14.1-2434) is flush or substantially flush with the outer surface (14.1-2404) of the housing (14.1-2402) and the boot (14.1-2416) is substantially hidden or concealed within the cavity (14.1-2430) of the trim ring (14.1-2422). In some examples, while the boot (14.1-2416) is disposed within the cavity (14.1-2430), the boot (14.1-2416) may be substantially covered by the trim ring (14.1-2422). This prevents the boot (14.1-2416) from being gripped (e.g., by a user) and pulled from the trim ring (14.1-2416). In other words, a substantial portion of the boot (14.1-2416) may be positioned within the cavity (14.1-2430) such that the boot (14.1-2416) is inaccessible to gripping for pulling the plug connector (14.1-2412) from the trim ring (14.1-2422) and the receptacle connector (14.1-2424).

The plug (14.1-2414) may include one or more electrical contacts (14.1-2438A, 14.1-2438B, 14.1-2438C) that may provide electrical signals, electrical power, a ground path, other electrical communications, or a combination thereof between the shielded wire (14.1-2418) and the receptacle connector (14.1-2424).

The trim ring (14.1-2422) may be molded, machined, cast, stamped, or otherwise manufactured from metal, polymer, ceramic, or a combination thereof. For example, the trim ring (14.1-2422) may be molded or co-molded from a thermoplastic or other polymer. The cavity (14.1-2430) formed within the trim ring (14.1-2422) may be at least partially defined by interior walls (14.1-2440). In some examples, the boot (14.1-2416) may contact one or more of the inner walls (14.1-2440) while the boot (14.1-2416) is positioned within the cavity (14.1-2430) such that the boot (14.1-2416) is at least partially retained within the cavity (14.1-2430) by frictional engagement between the boot (14.1-2416) and the inner walls (14.1-2440).

In some examples, the receptacle connector (14.1-2424) may be bonded, molded, welded, fastened, or otherwise attached to the trim ring (14.1-2422). For example, the receptacle connector (14.1-2424) may define one or more receptacle openings (14.1-2444A, 14.1-2444B) corresponding to and aligned with respective trim ring openings (14.1-2442A, 14.1-2442B) of the trim ring (14.1-2422). Each fastener (not shown) may be positioned within a receptacle opening (14.1-2444A) and a trim ring opening (14.1-2442A) to couple the receptacle connector (14.1-2424) to the trim ring (14.1-2422). Similarly, each fastener (not shown) may be positioned within a receptacle opening (14.1-2444B) and a trim ring opening (14.1-2442B) to couple the receptacle connector (14.1-2424) to the trim ring (14.1-2422). The fasteners may be pins, rivets, screws, bolts, combinations thereof, or any other fastener.

The boot (14.1-2416) may be molded, machined, cast, stamped, or otherwise manufactured from metal, polymer, ceramic, or a combination thereof. As illustrated in FIG. 587b, the boot (14.1-2416) may include recesses (14.1-2462A, 14.1-2462B) formed on opposite sides of the boot (14.1-2416). The recesses (14.1-2462A, 14.1-2462B) may be machined, molded, etched, or otherwise recessed into an outer surface of the boot (14.1-2416). In the example of FIG. 587b, the recesses (14.1-2462A, 14.1-2462B) extend along only a portion of the periphery of the boot (14.1-2416). For example, the recesses (14.1-2462A, 14.1-2462B) may extend along one or more faces (e.g., two faces in the example of FIG. 587b) of the boot (14.1-2416). In some examples, the recesses may extend along the entire periphery of the boot (14.1-2416). In other words, the recesses may form a channel surrounding the boot (14.1-2416). The recesses (14.1-2462A, 14.1-2462B) may be formed between the wire-side surface and the plug-side surface of the boot (14.1-2416). In some examples, the recesses (14.1-2462A, 14.1-2462B) may extend parallel to and between the wire-side surface and the plug-side surface of the boot (14.1-2416). The recesses (14.1-2462A, 14.1-2462B) may be included to interface with structures of the trim ring (14.1-2422) to retain the boot (14.1-2416) and the plug connector (14.1-2412) within the channel (14.1-2430). The trim ring (14.1-2422) and boot (14.1-2416) will be discussed in more detail below with reference to FIGS. 588a through 588f.

In some examples, the receptacle connector (14.1-2424) may include an outer portion (14.1-2446) and an inner portion (14.1-2448). For example, the outer portion (14.1-2446) may at least partially encompass the inner portion (14.1-2448). In other words, the outer portion (14.1-2446) may act as a sleeve or shell that at least partially surrounds the inner portion (14.1-2448). The outer portion (14.1-2446) and the inner portion (14.1-2448) may be interlocked or attached to each other. For example, the outer portion (14.1-2446) may include a through hole (14.1-2450) that receives a protrusion (14.1-2452) of the inner portion (14.1-2448) when the inner portion (14.1-2448) is attached within the outer portion (14.1-2446). In some examples, the receptacle connector (14.1-2424) may be formed as a single or monolithic structure in place of the outer portion (14.1-2446) and the inner portion (14.1-2448). The receptacle connector (14.1-2424) may define a slot (14.1-2454) capable of receiving and retaining a plug (14.1-2414).

FIG. 588a illustrates a cross-sectional view of a cable assembly (14.1-2500) including a plug connector (14.1-2502) accommodated within an opening (14.1-2522) of a trim ring (14.1-2520) and a slot (14.1-2554) of a receptacle connector (14.1-2550). In some examples, one or more internal contacts (14.1-2512A, 14.1-2512B, 14.1-2512C) are positioned within a slot (14.1-2554) of a receptacle connector (14.1-2550) such that the contacts (14.1-2512A, 14.1-2512B, 14.1-2512C) of a plug connector (14.1-2502) contact or otherwise engage with the internal contacts (14.1-2552A, 14.1-2552B, 14.1-2552C) positioned within the slot (14.1-2554). In some examples, the internal contacts (14.1-2552A, 14.1-2552B, 14.1-2552C) positioned within the slot (14.1-2554) may be one or more metal prongs that are biased to engage the contacts (14.1-2512A, 14.1-2512B, 14.1-2512C) while the plug connector (14.1-2502) is positioned within the slot (14.1-2554). The internal contacts (14.1-2552A, 14.1-2552B, 14.1-2552C) may be electrically connected to a printed circuit board (PCB), a processor, one or more wires, a combination thereof, or other component located within a housing (e.g., housings (14.1-2302, 14.1-2402) discussed above with respect to FIGS. 586a-587b).

A cable assembly (14.1-2500) comprises a plug connector (14.1-2502) and a shielded cable (14.1-2508). The plug connector (14.1-2502) comprises a plug (14.1-2504) having a boot (14.1-2506) having openings (14.1-2510) formed on side surfaces and contacts (14.1-2512A, 14.1-2512B, 14.1-2512C).

In the examples of FIGS. 588a-f, the trim ring (14.1-2520) includes a detent element (14.1-2530) that may be configured to interface with recesses (14.1-2510) of the boot (14.1-2506) to retain the plug connector (14.1-2502) within the cavity (14.1-2522). While a single detent element (14.1-2530) is illustrated in FIGS. 588a-f, some examples may include multiple detent elements (14.1-2530). For example, in some examples, the trim ring (14.1-2520) may include two detent elements (14.1-2530) positioned on opposite sides of the plug connector (14.1-2502) when the plug connector (14.1-2502) is inserted into the cavity (14.1-2522). While the plug connector (14.1-2502) is positioned within the cavity (14.1-2522), the detent elements (14.1-2530) may be inserted into recesses (14.1-2510) defined within the boot (14.1-2506).

FIG. 588a illustrates a plug connector (14.1-2502) and a detent element (14.1-2530) when the plug connector (14.1-2502) is inserted into a cavity (14.1-2522). The detent element (14.1-2530) includes a protrusion (14.1-2532) that is used to couple the detent element (14.1-2530) to a lever arm (14.1-2540). The lever arm (14.1-2540) may be incorporated into a trim ring (14.1-2520) to apply a force, such as a spring force, to the detent element (14.1-2530). The lever arm (14.1-2540) may be rotatable about a pivot (14.1-2542). A spring (not illustrated in FIG. 588a) may be wrapped around the pivot (14.1-2542) to apply force to the lever arm (14.1-2540) in the direction (14.1-D ₁ ). The lever arm (14.1-2540) includes protrusions (14.1-2544) that interface with protrusions (14.1-2532) of a detent element (14.1-2530). The detent element (14.1-2530) is physically coupled to the lever arm (14.1-2540) via the protrusions (14.1-2532) and the protrusions (14.1-2544). The lever arm (14.1-2540) can apply force to the detent element (14.1-2530) via the protrusions (14.1-2544) and the protrusions (14.1-2532) in the direction (14.1-D ₂ ) to hold the detent element (14.1-2530) in an initial position (illustrated in FIG. 588a) before the plug connector (14.1-2502) is inserted into the cavity (14.1-2522). When the plug connector (14.1-2502) is further inserted into the cavity (14.1-2522) (illustrated in FIG. 588c), the force applied by the lever arm (14.1-2540) may cause friction between the detent element (14.1-2530) and the boot (14.1-2506). Once the plug connector (14.1-2502) is fully inserted into the cavity (14.1-2522), the force applied by the lever arm (14.1-2540) causes the detent element (14.1-2530) to slide into one of the recesses (14.1-2510) (illustrated in FIG. 588d).

The lever arm (14.1-2540) may be rotatable about a pivot (14.1-2542) in a direction (14.1-D ₁ ) and a direction (14.1-D ₃ ) opposite to the direction (14.1-D ₁ ) (illustrated in FIGS. 588c and 588e ). The lever arm (14.1-2540) may include a spring that applies a force to the lever arm (14.1-2540) in the direction (14.1-D ₁ ). The lever arm (14.1-2540) may include a protrusion (14.1-2546) that may be used to rotate the lever arm (14.1-2540) in the direction (14.1-D ₃ ). The stop element (14.1-2530) can translate or slide in the direction (14.1-D ₂ ) and in the direction (14.1-D ₄ ) opposite to the direction (14.1-D ₂ ) (illustrated in FIGS. 588c and 588e).

The boot (14.1-2506) and the detent element (14.1-2530) of the plug connector (14.1-2502) may each include angled portions (14.1-2534, 14.1-2511). The angled portions (14.1-2534, 14.1-2511) are provided on the detent element (14.1-2530) and the boot (14.1-2506) to allow the boot (14.1-2506) and the detent element (14.1-2530) to slide relative to each other as the plug connector (14.1-2502) is inserted into the cavity (14.1-2522). This reduces the magnitude of the force required to translate the detent element (14.1-2530) in the direction (14.1-D ₄ ) as the plug connector (14.1-2502) is inserted into the cavity (14.1-2522), and reduces the force required to insert the plug connector (14.1-2502) into the cavity (14.1-2522). The inclined portions (14.1-2534, 14.1-2511) of the detent element (14.1-2530) and the boot (14.1-2506) will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. 588b.

Figure 588b illustrates details of the stop element (14.1-2530) and the boot (14.1-2506). Specifically, Figure 588b illustrates details of the sloped portions (14.1-2534, 14.1-2511) of the stop element (14.1-2530) and the boot (14.1-2506). Figure 588b also illustrates details of the sloped portion (14.1-2514) of the boot (14.1-2506) adjacent to the recess (14.1-2510).

In the example of FIG. 588b, the stop element (14.1-2530) includes an inclined portion (14.1-2534) adjacent to a linear portion (14.1-2536). In some examples, the inclined portion (14.1-2534) may be curved rather than inclined. The linear portion (14.1-2536) and the inclined portion (14.1-2534) may form a first angle (14.1-θ ₁₃ ). The first angle (14.1-θ ₁₃ ) may be less than 90 degrees, such as between about 89 degrees and about 60 degrees, between about 60 degrees and about 30 degrees, between about 30 degrees and about 5 degrees, or greater than about 5 degrees.

The boot (14.1-2506) includes an inclined portion (14.1-2511) adjacent to a linear portion (14.1-2513). In some examples, the inclined portion (14.1-2511) may be curved rather than inclined. The linear portion (14.1-2513) and the inclined portion (14.1-2511) may form a second angle (14.1-θ ₁₄ ). The second angle (14.1-θ ₁₄ ) may be less than 90 degrees, for example, between about 89 degrees and about 60 degrees, between about 60 degrees and about 30 degrees, between about 30 degrees and about 5 degrees, or greater than about 5 degrees. In some examples, the second angle (14.1-θ ₁₄ ) may be the same as the first angle (14.1-θ ₁₃ ), or the second angle (14.1-θ ₁₄ ) may be different from the first angle (14.1-θ ₁₃ ).

In some examples, the force required to insert the plug connector (14.1-2502) into the cavity (14.1-2522) may be correlated to the first angle (14.1-θ ₁₃ ) and/or the second angle (14.1-θ ₁₄ ). For example, a relatively smaller first angle (14.1-θ ₁₃ ) (e.g., about 5 degrees to 45 degrees) may result in a relatively larger force required to insert the plug connector (14.1-2502) into the cavity (14.1-2522). Similarly, a relatively smaller second angle (14.1-θ ₁₄ ) (e.g., about 5 degrees to 45 degrees) may result in a relatively larger force required to insert the plug connector (14.1-2502) into the cavity (14.1-2522). Alternatively, a relatively larger first angle (14.1-θ ₁₃ ) (e.g., about 45 degrees to 89 degrees) may result in a relatively smaller force required to insert the plug connector (14.1-2502) into the cavity (14.1-2522). A relatively larger second angle (14.1-θ ₁₄ ) (e.g., about 45 degrees to 89 degrees) may result in a relatively smaller force required to insert the plug connector (14.1-2502) into the cavity (14.1-2522). In other words, the dimensions of the first angle (14.1-θ ₁₃ ) and the second angle (14.1-θ ₁₄ ) can be selected to generate a desired force required to insert the plug connector (14.1-2502) into the cavity (14.1-2522) (i.e., to move the detent element (14.1-2530) out of the path of the boot (14.1-2506) when the plug connector (14.1-2502) is inserted into the cavity (14.1-2522). The force required to insert the plug connector (14.1-2502) into the cavity (14.1-2522) may be in the range of about 1 kgf to about 1.2 kgf, in the range of about 1 kgf to about 2 kgf, in the range of about 0.5 kgf to about 5 kgf, in the range of about 0 kgf to about 1 kgf, in the range of about 1 kgf to about 10 kgf, etc.

In the example of FIG. 588b, the boot (14.1-2506) includes an inclined portion (14.1-2514) adjacent to a linear portion (14.1-2512). The inclined portion (14.1-2514) defines a side surface of the recess (14.1-2510). In some examples, the inclined portion (14.1-2514) may be curved rather than inclined. The linear portion (14.1-2512) and the inclined portion (14.1-2514) may form a third angle (14.1-θ ₁₅ ). The third angle (14.1-θ ₁₅ ) may be less than 90 degrees, such as between about 89 degrees and about 60 degrees, between about 60 degrees and about 30 degrees, between about 30 degrees and about 5 degrees, or greater than about 5 degrees.

In some examples, the force required to remove the plug connector (14.1-2502) from the cavity (14.1-2522) may be correlated to the third angle (14.1-θ ₁₅ ). For example, a relatively smaller third angle (14.1-θ ₁₅ ) (e.g., about 5 degrees to about 45 degrees) may result in a relatively smaller force required to remove the plug connector (14.1-2502) from the cavity (14.1-2522). Alternatively, a relatively larger third angle (14.1-θ ₁₅ ) (e.g., about 45 degrees to about 89 degrees) may result in a relatively larger force required to remove the plug connector (14.1-2502) from the cavity (14.1-2522). In other words, the magnitude of the third angle (14.1-θ ₁₅ ) can be selected to generate the desired force required to remove the plug connector (14.1-2502) from the cavity (14.1-2522) (i.e., to move the detent element (14.1-2530) out of the path of the boot (14.1-2506) when the plug connector (14.1-2502) is removed from the cavity (14.1-2522). The force required to remove the plug connector (14.1-2502) from the cavity (14.1-2522) may be in the range of about 5 kgf to about 7 kgf, in the range of about 1 kgf to about 12 kgf, in the range of about 10 kgf to about 20 kgf, in the range of about 5 kgf to about 50 kgf, in the range of about 1 kgf to about 10 kgf, in the range of about 10 kgf to about 100 kgf, etc.

FIG. 588c illustrates the plug connector (14.1-2502) and the detent element (14.1-2530) when the plug connector (14.1-2502) is inserted into the cavity (14.1-2522). As illustrated in FIG. 588c, inserting the boot (14.1-2506) into the cavity (14.1-2522) causes the detent element (14.1-2470) to slide/translate in the direction (14.1-D ₄ ). Movement of the detent element (14.1-2530) causes the lever arm (14.1-2540) to rotate in the direction (14.1-D ₃ ) about the pivot (14.1-2542) via the protrusions (14.1-2544) and the protrusions (14.1-2532). A spring in the lever arm (14.1-2540) applies force to the detent element (14.1-2530) in the direction (14.1-D ₂ ), which creates friction between the detent element (14.1-2530) and the boot (14.1-2506) as the plug connector (14.1-2502) is inserted into the cavity (14.1-2522). The force required to insert the plug connector (14.1-2502) into the cavity (14.1-2522) may be in the range of about 1 kgf to about 1.2 kgf, in the range of about 1 kgf to about 2 kgf, in the range of about 0.5 kgf to about 5 kgf, in the range of about 0 kgf to about 1 kgf, in the range of about 1 kgf to about 10 kgf, etc.

FIG. 588d illustrates the plug connector (14.1-2502) and the detent element (14.1-2530) after the plug connector (14.1-2502) is fully inserted into the cavity (14.1-2522). As illustrated in FIG. 588d, a spring in the lever arm (14.1-2540) applies force to the detent element (14.1-2530). This rotates the lever arm (14.1-2540) in the direction (14.1-D ₁ ) and translates the detent element (14.1-2530) in the direction (14.1-D ₂ ) so that the detent element (14.1-2530) slides into the recess (14.1-2510). The detent element (14.1-2530) can contact a side surface of the boot (14.1-2506) when the plug connector (14.1-2502) is fully inserted into the cavity (14.1-2522) (e.g., when the detent element (14.1-2530) is fully inserted into the recess (14.1-2510). For example, the detent element (14.1-2530) can contact a side surface of the boot (14.1-2506) adjacent to the recess (14.1-2510) and the inclined portion (14.1-2514).

As described above, the inclined portion (14.1-2514) of the boot (14.1-2506) can be configured such that the force required to remove the plug connector (14.1-2502) from the cavity (14.1-2522) can be in the range of about 5 kgf to about 7 kgf, in the range of about 1 kgf to about 12 kgf, in the range of about 10 kgf to about 20 kgf, in the range of about 5 kgf to about 50 kgf, in the range of about 1 kgf to about 10 kgf, in the range of about 10 kgf to about 100 kgf, etc. The ratio of the force required to remove the plug connector (14.1-2502) from the cavity (14.1-2522) to the force required to insert the plug connector (14.1-2502) into the cavity (14.1-2522) can range from about 1 to about 10, from about 1.5 to about 3, from about 2 to about 4, from about 3 to about 5, from about 1.5 to about 5, and the like. In some examples, the detent element (14.1-2530) can also include a ramped portion, which can be configured to interface with the ramped portion (14.1-2514) and reduce the force required to remove the plug connector (14.1-2502) from the cavity (14.1-2522). As illustrated in FIG. 588d, in some examples, when the plug connector (14.1-2502) is positioned within the trim ring (14.1-2520), the boot (14.1-2506) may be flush with the trim ring (14.1-2520) (i.e., the outer facing surface of the boot (14.1-2506) may be flush with the outer facing surface of the trim ring (14.1-2520)).

FIG. 588e illustrates a detent element (14.1-2530) and a lever arm (14.1-2540) after a tool (14.1-2560) has been used to release a plug connector (14.1-2502). In some examples, the trim ring (14.1-2520) may include an opening (14.1-2524) capable of receiving the tool (14.1-2560). The tool (14.1-2560) may be shaped as a cube, cylinder, triangle, or any other geometric shape. The opening (14.1-2524) may form a corresponding geometric shape into which the tool (14.1-2560) may be inserted or otherwise positioned. The user can use the tool (14.1-2560) to rotate the lever arm (14.1-2540) in the direction (14.1-D ₃ ), which moves the detent element (14.1-2530) in the direction (14.1-D ₄ ). This slides the detent element (14.1-2530) out of the recess (14.1-2510), allowing the plug connector (14.1-2502) to be removed from the cavity (14.1-2522). Once the detent element (14.1-2530) is moved out of the recess (14.1-2510), the force required to remove the plug connector (14.1-2502) from the cavity (14.1-2522) may be in the range of about 1 kgf to about 1.2 kgf, in the range of about 1 kgf to about 2 kgf, in the range of about 0.5 kgf to about 5 kgf, in the range of about 0 kgf to about 1 kgf, in the range of about 1 kgf to about 10 kgf, etc. The force required to use the tool (14.1-2560) to remove the stop element (14.1-2530) from the recess (14.1-2519) may be in the range of about 1 kgf to about 1.2 kgf, in the range of about 1 kgf to about 2 kgf, in the range of about 0.5 kgf to about 5 kgf, in the range of about 0 kgf to about 1 kgf, in the range of about 1 kgf to about 10 kgf, etc.

FIG. 588f illustrates a perspective view of a lever arm (14.1-2540). As illustrated in FIG. 588f, the lever arm (14.1-2540) includes a body portion rotatable about a pivot (14.1-2542). The pivot (14.1-2542) may be a pin, a rivet, a screw, a bolt, a combination thereof, or any other fastener. A spring (14.1-2541) is disposed within the body portion and wrapped around the pivot (14.1-2542). The spring (14.1-2541) is configured to apply a spring force to the body portion of the lever arm (14.1-2540) in a direction (14.1-D ₁ ). The body portion of the lever arm (14.1-2540) includes protrusions (14.1-2544) and protrusions (14.1-2546). Protrusions (14.1-2544) may be used to physically interact with a detent element, as previously discussed. Protrusions (14.1-2546) may be used to interact with a tool, as previously discussed, and may be used to assist in removing the plug connector from the trim ring.

Providing a detent element (14.1-2530) and a lever arm (14.1-2540) to retain the plug connector (14.1-2502) within the cavity (14.1-2522) allows the plug connector (14.1-2502) to be inserted into the cavity (14.1-2522) with relatively little force, and requires relatively much force to remove the plug connector (14.1-2502) from the cavity (14.1-2522). This prevents the plug connector (14.1-2502) from being unintentionally or accidentally disconnected from the electronic device. Furthermore, by providing the opening (14.1-2524) and the tool (14.1-2560), the plug connector (14.1-2502) can be easily removed when required.

Figures 589a through 589e illustrate seals (14.1-2626) that may be included in a trim ring (14.1-2620) to provide a seal between a boot (14.1-2606) of a plug connector (14.1-2602) of a cable assembly (14.1-2600) and a trim ring (14.1-2620). The cable assembly (14.1-2600) includes a plug connector (14.1-2602) and a shielded cable (14.1-2608) coupled to the plug connector (14.1-2602). The plug connector (14.1-2602) includes a plug (14.1-2604) and a boot (14.1-2606) mated to the plug (14.1-2604) and a shielded cable (14.1-2608).

A plug connector (14.1-2602) can be accommodated within a cavity (14.1-2622) of an enclosure (14.1-2610) and a trim ring (14.1-2620). The trim ring (14.1-2620) can be coupled to the enclosure (14.1-2610), and a receptacle connector (14.1-2650) can be coupled to the trim ring (14.1-2620). The trim ring (14.1-2620) can include a detent element (14.1-2630) and a lever arm (14.1-2640). The detent element (14.1-2630) can include a protrusion (14.1-2632) configured to interface with the lever arm (14.1-2640). The detent element (14.1-2630) may be configured to interface with openings (14.1-2609) in the boot (14.1-2606) to engage the plug connector (14.1-2602) within the cavity (14.1-2622). The lever arm (14.1-2640) may be rotatable about a pivot (14.1-2642) and may include protrusions (14.1-2644) configured to interface with the protrusions (14.1-2632) of the detent element (14.1-2632). The lever arm (14.1-2640) may further include a protrusion (14.1-2646) configured to interface with a tool (14.1-2660) for disengaging the plug connector (14.1-2602) from the cavity (14.1-2622). An opening (14.1-2624) may be provided in the trim ring (14.1-2620) and the enclosure (14.1-2610) to provide access to the tool (14.1-2660). As such, the tool (14.1-2660) may extend through the enclosure (14.1-2610) and the trim ring (14.1-2620) to interface with the protrusion (14.1-2646).

Figure 589a illustrates a cross-sectional view of a cable assembly (14.1-2600), an enclosure (14.1-2610), a trim ring (14.1-2620), and a receptacle connector (14.1-2650). As shown in Figure 589a, the seal (14.1-2626) may be L-shaped in the cross-sectional view. The seal (14.1-2626) may be provided between the trim ring (14.1-2620) and the enclosure (14.1-2610), and on the trim ring (14.1-2620). This provides a seal between the trim ring (14.1-2620) and the enclosure (14.1-2610). A seal (14.1-2626) is also provided between the body of the trim ring (14.1-2620) and the cavity (14.1-2622) of the trim ring (14.1-2620). This provides a seal between the boot (14.1-2606) of the plug connector (14.1-2602) and the trim ring (14.1-2620). Positioning the seal (14.1-2626) in this configuration provides a seal between both the trim ring (14.1-2620) and the boot (14.1-2606) and the enclosure (14.1-2610). The seal (14.1-2626) may include an elastic material that can be stretched around the lip of the trim ring (14.1-2620) and secured to the trim ring (14.1-2620) by interference with the lip of the trim ring (14.1-2620).

Figure 589b illustrates a cross-sectional view of a cable assembly (14.1-2600), an enclosure (14.1-2610), a trim ring (14.1-2620), and a receptacle connector (14.1-2650). Figure 589e illustrates a perspective view of a lever arm (14.1-2640). The lever arm (14.1-2640) includes a spring (14.1-2641) that is wrapped around a pivot (14.1-2642) and configured to apply a spring force to a body portion of the lever arm (14.1-2640). A seal (14.1-2647) is coupled to a protrusion (14.1-2646) of the lever arm (14.1-2640). A spring (14.1-2641) can apply spring force to a lever arm (14.1-2640) that urges a seal (14.1-2647) against an enclosure (14.1-2610). This provides a seal between the exterior of the electronic device and the trim ring (14.1-2620). A tool (14.1-2660) can be configured to pass through an opening (14.1-2643) in the seal (14.1-2647) when the tool (14.1-2660) is used to actuate the projection (14.1-2646). The seal (14.1-2647) can be a flexible gasket or the like.

Figure 589c illustrates a perspective view of a plug connector (14.1-2602) and a trim ring (14.1-2620), and Figure 589d illustrates a partial cross-sectional view of the trim ring (14.1-2620). In some examples, the boot (14.1-2606), the plug (14.1-2604), and the cavity (14.1-2622) may have a stadium shape in the cross-sectional view. In some examples, the boot (14.1-2606), the plug (14.1-2604), and the cavity (14.1-2622) may be rectangular, triangular, round, or may have any other shape in the cross-sectional view. The trim ring (14.1-2620) can include a first cavity portion (14.1-2622A) configured to receive a boot (14.1-2606) and a second cavity portion (14.1-2622B) configured to receive a plug (14.1-2604). The trim ring (14.1-2620) can include a third cavity portion (14.1-2622C) configured to receive a detent element (14.1-2630). The third cavity portion (14.1-2622C) can be adjacent to the first cavity portion (14.1-2622A) and can align openings (14.1-2609) and 14.1-2630 within side surfaces of the boot (14.1-2606).

Figures 589c and 589d further illustrate details of the seal (14.1-2626). As illustrated in Figure 589d, the seal (14.1-2626) may have an L-shape in cross-section. The seal (14.1-2626) may be wrapped around at least a portion of the body of the trim ring (14.1-2620), such as the lip of the trim ring (14.1-2620). The seal (14.1-2626) may be formed of an elastic material, and the elastic force of the elastic material may maintain the seal (14.1-2626) on the lip of the trim ring (14.1-2620). In some examples, an adhesive or the like may be provided between the seal (14.1-2626) and the body of the trim ring (14.1-2620) to secure the seal (14.1-2626) to the trim ring (14.1-2620).

The seal (14.1-2626) may act as a seal to prevent or limit the ingress of contaminants (e.g., liquids, dust, lint, debris, etc.) into the trim ring (14.1-2620) and the receptacle connector (14.1-2650) through the cavity (14.1-2622) when, for example, the plug connector (14.1-2602) is inserted into the cavity (14.1-2622). The seal (14.1-2626) may provide a seal between the trim ring (14.1-2620) and the plug connector (14.1-2602) and between the trim ring (14.1-2620) and the enclosure (14.1-2610). The seal (14.1-2647) may act as a seal to prevent or limit the ingress of contaminants (e.g., liquids, dust, lint, debris, etc.) into the trim ring (14.1-2620) and through the opening (14.1-2624).

Figures 590a through 590c illustrate a seal (14.1-2726) included on a trim ring (14.1-2720) and a seal (14.1-2705) included on a plug connector (14.1-2702) of a cable assembly (14.1-2700). The seal (14.1-2726) can provide a seal between the enclosure (14.1-2710) and the trim ring (14.1-2720) and between the trim ring (14.1-2720) and the plug connector (14.1-2702). The seal (14.1-2705) can provide a seal between the plug connector (14.1-2702) and the enclosure (14.1-2710). The plug assembly (14.1-2700) includes a plug connector (14.1-2702) mated to a shielded cable (14.1-2708). The plug connector (14.1-2702) includes a plug (14.1-2704) and a boot (14.1-2706) mated to the plug (14.1-2704) and the shielded cable (14.1-2708).

A plug connector (14.1-2702) can be accommodated within a cavity (14.1-2722) of an enclosure (14.1-2710) and a trim ring (14.1-2720). The trim ring (14.1-2720) can be coupled to the enclosure (14.1-2710), and a receptacle connector (14.1-2750) can be coupled to the trim ring (14.1-2720). The trim ring (2620) can include a detent element (14.1-2730) and a lever arm (14.1-2740). The detent element (14.1-2730) may be configured to interface with openings (14.1-2709) in the boot (14.1-2706) to engage the plug connector (14.1-2702) within the cavity (14.1-2722). The lever arm (14.1-2740) may be rotatable about a pivot. The lever arm (14.1-2740) may include a protrusion (14.1-2746) configured to interface with a tool to disengage the plug connector (14.1-2702) from the cavity (14.1-2722).

The seal (14.1-2705) may be coupled to the boot (14.1-2706) between the shielded cable (14.1-2708) and the openings (14.1-2709). In the example illustrated in FIG. 590b, the seal (14.1-2705) may be provided adjacent to the enclosure (14.1-2710). Providing the seal (14.1-2705) in this location provides a seal between the boot (14.1-2706) and the enclosure (14.1-2710), which also seals the trim ring (14.1-2720) from the external environment. In the example illustrated in FIG. 590c, the seal (14.1-2705) may be provided adjacent to the enclosure (14.1-2710) and the trim ring (14.1-2720). Providing the seal (14.1-2705) in this location may provide a seal between the boot (14.1-2706) and the enclosure (14.1-2710) and the trim ring (14.1-2720), respectively, and may also provide a seal between the enclosure (14.1-2710) and the trim ring (14.1-2720). Although the seal (14.1-2705) is illustrated as being between the seal (14.1-2726) and the shielded cable (14.1-2708), the seal (14.1-2705) may be positioned at any point along the boot (14.1-2706), such as between the seal (14.1-2726) and the plug (14.1-2704), between the seal (14.1-2726) and the openings (14.1-2709), between the openings (14.1-2704) and the plug (14.1-2704), etc. Furthermore, the seal (14.1-2705) may be provided instead of or in addition to the seal (14.1-2726).

Figure 590b illustrates a cross-sectional view of a cable assembly (14.1-2700), an enclosure (14.1-2710), a trim ring (14.1-2720), and a receptacle connector (14.1-2750). As shown in Figure 590b, the seal (14.1-2726) may be L-shaped in the cross-sectional view. The seal (14.1-2726) may be provided between the trim ring (14.1-2720) and the enclosure (14.1-2710), and on the trim ring (14.1-2720). This provides a seal between the trim ring (14.1-2720) and the enclosure (14.1-2710). A seal (14.1-2726) is also provided between the body of the trim ring (14.1-2720) and the cavity (14.1-2722) of the trim ring (14.1-2720). This provides a seal between the boot (14.1-2706) of the plug connector (14.1-2702) and the trim ring (14.1-2720). Positioning the seal (14.1-2726) in this configuration provides a seal between both the trim ring (14.1-2720) and the boot (14.1-2706) and the enclosure (14.1-2710). The seal (14.1-2726) may include an elastic material that can be stretched around the lip of the trim ring (14.1-2720) and secured to the trim ring (14.1-2720) by interference with the lip of the trim ring (14.1-2720).

FIG. 590c illustrates a cross-sectional view of a cable assembly (14.1-2700), an enclosure (14.1-2710), a trim ring (14.1-2720), and a receptacle connector (14.1-2750). As shown in FIG. 590c, the seal (14.1-2726) may be rectangular in the cross-sectional view. Other shapes, such as round, triangular, etc., may be used for the seal (14.1-2726). A seal (14.1-2726) may be provided between the body of the trim ring (14.1-2720) and the boot (14.1-2706), between an outer surface of the trim ring (14.1-2720) facing the enclosure (14.1-2710) and an inner surface of the trim ring (14.1-2720) facing the receptacle connector (14.1-2750). The seal (14.1-2726) may provide a seal between the trim ring (14.1-2720) and the boot (14.1-2706).

The seal (14.1-2726) may act as a seal to prevent or limit the ingress of contaminants (e.g., liquids, dust, lint, debris, etc.) into the trim ring (14.1-2720) and the receptacle connector (14.1-2750) through the cavity (14.1-2722) when, for example, the plug connector (14.1-2702) is inserted into the cavity (14.1-2722). The seal (14.1-2726) may provide a seal between the trim ring (14.1-2720) and the plug connector (14.1-2702) and between the trim ring (14.1-2720) and the enclosure (14.1-2710). The seal (14.1-2705) may act as a seal to prevent or limit the ingress of contaminants (e.g., liquids, dust, lint, debris, etc.) into the trim ring (14.1-2720) and the receptacle connector (14.1-2750) through the cavity (14.1-2722) when, for example, the plug connector (14.1-2702) is inserted into the cavity (14.1-2722). The seal (14.1-2705) may provide a seal between the plug connector (14.1-2702) and the enclosure (14.1-2710), between both the plug connector (14.1-2702) and the trim ring (14.1-2720) and the enclosure (14.1-2710), etc.

Figures 591a and 591b illustrate cross-sectional views of a plug connector (14.1-2800) inserted into a receptacle connector (14.1-2820) and engaged by a stopper element (14.1-2830). The plug connector (14.1-2800) includes a boot (14.1-2804) and a plug (14.1-2802) coupled to the boot (14.1-2804). The boot includes recesses (14.1-2806) formed on its side surfaces. The stop element (14.1-2830) can interface with the recesses (14.1-2806) to retain the boot (14.1-2806) and plug connector (14.1-2800) within the cavity of the trim ring and receptacle connector (14.1-2820).

The detent element (14.1-2830) includes a protrusion (14.1-2832) configured to interface with a lever arm (14.1-2810). The detent element (14.1-2830) and the lever arm (14.1-2810) may be contained within a trim ring as previously discussed in the examples. The lever arm (14.1-2810) includes protrusions (14.1-2814) configured to interface with the protrusions (14.1-2832) of the detent element (14.1-2830). The lever arm (14.1-2810) may include a spring and may be configured to provide spring force to the detent element (14.1-2830) via protrusions (14.1-2814) and protrusions (14.1-2832) to maintain the detent element (14.1-2830) in an engaged configuration (as illustrated in FIG. 591a). The lever arm (14.1-2810) may include a protrusion (14.1-2816) configured to interact with a tool (14.1-2840) to transition the lever arm (14.1-2810) and the detent element (14.1-2830) from an engaged configuration to an unengaged configuration (as illustrated in FIG. 591b). In this way, the lever arm (14.1-2810) can be used to maintain the detent element (14.1-2830) in an engaged configuration and to transition the detent element (14.1-2830) to a non-engaged configuration. The detent element (14.1-2830) can also include fasteners (14.1-2834) that can couple the detent element (14.1-2830) to the body of the trim ring. The detent element (14.1-2830) can be translated relative to the fasteners (14.1-2834) as the detent element (14.1-2830) moves from an engaged configuration to a non-engaged configuration.

The lever arm (14.1-2810) may include a protrusion (14.1-2811) configured to interact with a spring (14.1-2819). The spring (14.1-2819) may interact with the protrusion (14.1-2811) to resist movement of the lever arm (14.1-2810). In some examples, the spring (14.1-2819) may provide a desired feel to a user using a tool (14.1-2840) to unlatch the detent element (14.1-2830) and the lever arm (14.1-2810). For example, as illustrated in FIGS. 591a and 591b, the spring (14.1-2819) may move over the protrusion (14.1-2811) as the lever arm (14.1-2810) rotates from an engaged configuration (as shown in FIG. 591a) to an unengaged configuration (as shown in FIG. 591b). This may provide a physical click via the tool (14.1-2840) that indicates to the user that the lever arm (14.1-2810) and detent element (14.1-2830) are unlatched and the plug connector (14.1-2800) can be removed from the trim ring and receptacle connector (14.1-2820). The positions of the spring (14.1-2819) and the protrusion (14.1-2811), as well as the lengths of the spring (14.1-2819), the angles of the spring (14.1-2819), and the shapes of the protrusion (14.1-2811), can be changed to change the force required to rotate the lever arm (14.1-2810) as well as the feel to the user of moving the lever arm (14.1-2810).

In some examples, the receptacle connector (14.1-2820) may include an outer portion (14.1-2824) and an inner portion (14.1-2822). For example, the outer portion (14.1-2824) may at least partially encompass the inner portion (14.1-2822). In other words, the outer portion (14.1-2824) may act as a sleeve or shell that at least partially surrounds the inner portion (14.1-2822). The outer portion (14.1-2824) and the inner portion (14.1-2822) may be interlocked or attached to each other. In some examples, the receptacle connector (14.1-2820) may be formed as a single or monolithic structure instead of the outer portion (14.1-2824) and the inner portion (14.1-2822). The receptacle connector (14.1-2820) can form a slot capable of receiving and retaining a plug connector (14.1-2800).

Figures 592a through 592c illustrate a method of assembling a trim ring (14.1-2930) and a plug connector (14.1-2940) in an enclosure (14.1-2900). In Figure 592a, a frame (14.1-2910) is attached to the enclosure (14.1-2900). The enclosure may include a side surface (14.1-2902), an opening (14.1-2904) for receiving a plug connector, a bottom surface (14.1-2906), and a top surface (14.1-2908). The frame (14.1-2910) may be attached to structures of the bottom surface (14.1-2906) and the side surface (14.1-2902) via fasteners (14.1-2920). The fasteners (14.1-2920) can extend longitudinally from the top surface (14.1-2908) toward the bottom surface (14.1-2906) and can pull the frame (14.1-2910) downward toward the bottom surface (14.1-2906). While three fasteners (14.1-2920) are illustrated for attaching the frame (14.1-2910) to the enclosure (14.1-2900), any number of fasteners (14.1-2920) can be included.

In FIG. 592b, a trim ring (14.1-2930) is attached to a frame (14.1-2910). The trim ring (14.1-2930) can be attached to the frame (14.1-2910) via fasteners (14.1-2922). The fasteners (14.1-2922) can extend into the openings (14.1-2912) of the frame (14.1-2910) illustrated in FIG. 592a. The fasteners (14.1-2922) can extend longitudinally in a direction parallel to the bottom surface (14.1-2906) and can pull the trim ring (14.1-2930) toward the side surface (14.1-2902) of the frame (14.1-2910) and the enclosure (14.1-2900). A dummy trim ring can be inserted through the opening (14.1-2904) of the enclosure (14.1-2900) and into the opening (14.1-2932) of the trim ring (14.1-2930) to align the trim ring (14.1-2930) with the enclosure (14.1-2900). Three fasteners (14.1-2922) are illustrated for attaching the trim ring (14.1-2930) to the frame (14.1-2910), but any number of fasteners (14.1-2922) may be included.

In FIG. 592c, a receptacle connector (14.1-2940) is attached to a trim ring (14.1-2930). The receptacle connector (14.1-2940) can be attached to the trim ring (14.1-2930) via fasteners (14.1-2924). The fasteners (14.1-2924) can extend into openings (14.1-2934) of the trim ring (14.1-2930) illustrated in FIG. 592a. The fasteners (14.1-2924) can extend longitudinally in a direction parallel to the bottom surface (14.1-2906) and can pull the receptacle connector (14.1-2940) toward the trim ring (14.1-2930), the frame (14.1-2910), and the side surface (14.1-2902) of the enclosure (14.1-2900). A dummy trim ring can be inserted through an opening (14.1-2904) in the enclosure (14.1-2900), an opening (14.1-2932) in the trim ring (14.1-2930), and into an opening in the receptacle connector (14.1-2940) to align the receptacle connector (14.1-2940) with the trim ring (14.1-2930) and the enclosure (14.1-2900). While two fasteners (14.1-2924) are illustrated for attaching the receptacle connector (14.1-2940) to the trim ring (14.1-2930), any number of fasteners (14.1-2924) may be included.

Figures 593a through 593f illustrate examples of a plug connector (14.1-3000) inserted into a receptacle connector (14.1-3030) and engaged within the receptacle connector (14.1-3030) by a lever arm (14.1-3010). The plug connector (14.1-3000) includes a boot (14.1-3002) and a plug (14.1-3004) engaged with the boot (14.1-3002). The boot (14.1-3002) includes recesses (14.1-3003).

A lever arm (14.1-3010) may be included in a trim ring coupled to a receptacle connector (14.1-3030). The lever arm (14.1-3010) is rotatable about a pivot (14.1-3012). The lever arm (14.1-3010) includes a protrusion (14.1-3014) configured to interact with recesses (14.1-3003) of a boot (14.1-3002) to retain the plug connector (14.1-3000) within the trim ring and the receptacle connector (14.1-3030). The lever arm (14.1-3010) may be rotatable between an engaged configuration in which the projections (14.1-3014) are positioned within each recess (14.1-3003) and an unengaged configuration in which the projections (14.1-3014) are retracted from the recesses (14.1-3003).

The lever arm (14.1-3010) further includes a protrusion (14.1-3016). The protrusion (14.1-3016) can be configured to interact with a tool (14.1-3060) to transition the lever arm (14.1-3010) from an engaged configuration to a disengaged configuration. The lever arm (14.1-3010) includes a protrusion (14.1-3018) configured to interact with a spring mechanism (14.1-3020). The spring mechanism (14.1-3020) can interact with the protrusion (14.1-3018) to maintain the lever arm (14.1-3010) in the engaged configuration and can resist movement or forces of the lever arm (14.1-3010) transitioning to the disengaged configuration.

The spring mechanism (14.1-3020) may include a center member (14.1-3022) extending into the spring (14.1-3024) and a stop (14.1-3026). A projection (14.1-3018) interacts with the center member (14.1-3022) to compress the spring (14.1-3024) into the stop (14.1-3026). This compression of the spring (14.1-3024) applies a spring force to the projection (14.1-3018) via the center member (14.1-3022) to maintain the lever arm (14.1-3010) in an engaged configuration and resist transition of the lever arm (14.1-3010) into a disengaged configuration.

In some examples, the receptacle connector (14.1-3030) may include an outer portion (14.1-3034) and an inner portion (14.1-3032). For example, the outer portion (14.1-3034) may at least partially encompass the inner portion (14.1-3032). In other words, the outer portion (14.1-3034) may act as a sleeve or shell that at least partially surrounds the inner portion (14.1-3032). The outer portion (14.1-3034) and the inner portion (14.1-3032) may be interlocked or attached to each other. In some examples, the receptacle connector (14.1-3030) may be formed as a single or monolithic structure instead of the outer portion (14.1-3034) and the inner portion (14.1-3032). The receptacle connector (14.1-3030) can form a slot capable of receiving and retaining a plug connector (14.1-3000).

FIG. 593b is a detailed view of area (14.1-3050) of FIG. 593a. As illustrated in FIGS. 593a and 593b, as the plug connector (14.1-3000) is inserted into the trim ring and receptacle connector (14.1-3030), the protrusion (14.1-3014) extends along the side surface of the boot (14.1-3002). Once the plug connector (14.1-3000) is fully inserted into the trim ring and receptacle connector (14.1-3030), the protrusion (14.1-3014) may extend into the recess (14.1-3003), retaining the plug connector (14.1-3000) within the trim ring and receptacle connector (14.1-3030). The projection (14.1-3014) can extend through the body portion (14.1-3046) of the trim ring. The spring (14.1-3024) of the spring mechanism (14.1-3020) is in a compressed state and pushes the projection (14.1-3014) of the lever arm (14.1-3010) against the side surface of the boot (14.1-3002) through the interaction between the central member (14.1-3022) and the projection (14.1-3018). The lever arm (14.1-3010) is configured to interlock such that the lever arm (14.1-3010) applies a clockwise force against the boot (14.1-3002).

Figures 593c and 593d illustrate the lever arm (14.1-3010) after the plug connector (14.1-3000) is fully inserted into the trim ring and receptacle connector (14.1-3030) such that the protrusion (14.1-3014) extends into the recess (14.1-3003). Spring force from the spring (14.1-3024) of the spring mechanism (14.1-3020) through the central member (14.1-3022) and the protrusion (14.1-3018) causes the lever arm (14.1-3010) to rotate counterclockwise. The protrusion (14.1-3014) extends through the body portion (14.1-3046) of the trim ring into the recess (14.1-3003) of the boot (14.1-3002). This is an interlocking configuration in which the protrusion (14.1-3014) secures and engages the boot (14.1-3002) into the trim ring and receptacle connector (14.1-3030). The spring (14.1-3024) of the spring mechanism (14.1-3020) is in a partially extended state and, through the interaction between the central member (14.1-3022) and the projection (14.1-3018), pushes the projection (14.1-3014) of the lever arm (14.1-3010) against the side surface of the boot (14.1-3002) adjacent to the recess (14.1-3003). The lever arm (14.1-3010) is configured to be interlocked so that the lever arm (14.1-3010) applies a force in a clockwise direction against the boot (14.1-3002).

Figures 593e and 593f illustrate the lever arm (14.1-3010) after the tool (14.1-3060) is used to actuate the lever arm (14.1-3010) to transition the lever arm (14.1-3010) from an engaged configuration to an unengaged configuration. The force from the tool (14.1-3060) overcomes the spring force of the spring (14.1-3024) of the spring mechanism (14.1-3020) and causes the lever arm (14.1-3010) to rotate clockwise. The projection (14.1-3014) retracts from the recess (14.1-3003) through the body portion (14.1-3046) of the trim ring so that the plug connector (14.1-3000) can be removed from the trim ring and receptacle connector (14.1-3030). This is an unengaged configuration in which the projection (14.1-3014) no longer secures and engages the boot (14.1-3002) into the trim ring and receptacle connector (14.1-3030). The spring (14.1-3024) of the spring mechanism (14.1-3020) is in a compressed state and resists the force supplied by the tool (14.1-3060). The lever arm (14.1-3010) is in a non-engaged configuration, which prevents the lever arm from applying force against the boot (14.1-3002).

The spring mechanism (14.1-3020) may be part of the trim ring or part of the receptacle connector (14.1-3030) and may be engaged with the receptacle connector (14.1-3030). The lever arm (14.1-3010) and the spring mechanism (14.1-3020) may overlap with portions of the plug connector (14.1-3000) and the receptacle (14.1-3030), which may enable the engagement of FIGS. 593a-593f to be formed into a smaller package, thereby providing more space within the enclosure for other components or providing a smaller enclosure.

Figures 594a and 594b illustrate perspective views of a cable assembly (14.1-3006) inserted into a trim ring (14.1-3040) and a receptacle connector (14.1-3030). The cable assembly (14.1-3006) includes a shielded cable (14.1-3007) and a plug connector (14.1-3000). The plug connector (14.1-3002) includes a boot (14.1-3002). The boot includes recesses (14.1-3003) formed on its side surfaces.

The trim ring (14.1-3040) includes a lever arm (14.1-3010) and a spring mechanism (14.1-3020). The lever arm (14.1-3010) is provided to engage the plug connector (14.1-3030) within the trim ring (14.1-3040) and the receptacle connector (14.1-3030). A lever arm (14.1-3010) includes a protrusion (14.1-3014) configured to be inserted into each recess (14.1-3003) of a boot (14.1-3002) (e.g., by rotation about a pivot (14.1-3012)) and to retain a plug connector (14.1-3002) within a trim ring (14.1-3040) and a receptacle connector (14.1-3030). The lever arm (14.1-3010) includes a protrusion (14.1-3016) configured to interact with a tool to disengage the lever arm (14.1-3010) from an engaged configuration and to disengage the plug connector (14.1-3000) from the trim ring (14.1-3040) and the receptacle connector (14.1-3030). The lever arm (14.1-3010) includes a projection (14.1-3018) configured to interact with the spring mechanism (14.1-3020), to maintain the lever arm in an engaged configuration, and to resist a force supplied by the tool via the projection (14.1-3016).

A spring mechanism (14.1-3020) is provided to maintain the lever arm (14.1-3010) in an engaged configuration. The spring mechanism (14.1-3020) includes a center member (14.1-3022), a spring (14.1-3024), and a stop (14.1-3026). The center member (14.1-3022) is provided to interact with a projection (14.1-3018) of the lever arm (14.1-3010). The spring (14.1-3024) is provided to provide a spring force to the center member (14.1-3022) to maintain the lever arm (14.1-3010) in an engaged configuration via the projection (14.1-3018). A stop (14.1-3026) is provided to compress the spring (14.1-3024), thereby supplying spring force to the center member (14.1-3022).

As illustrated in FIGS. 594a and 594b, the lever arm (14.1-3010) may be positioned on a side surface of the trim ring (14.1-3040), and the spring mechanism (14.1-3020) may be positioned on a top surface of the trim ring (14.1-3040) and/or the receptacle connector (14.1-3030). The lever arm (14.1-3010) may include components that extend through a portion of the side wall of the trim ring (14.1-3040), which allows the trim ring (14.1-3040) and the lever arm (14.1-3010) to occupy less space within the enclosure. The spring mechanism (14.1-3020) may be positioned in different locations to maximize space utilization within the enclosure.

In some examples, the receptacle connector (14.1-3030) may include an outer portion (14.1-3034) and an inner portion (14.1-3032). For example, the outer portion (2824) may at least partially encompass the inner portion (14.1-3032). In other words, the outer portion (14.1-3034) may act as a sleeve or shell that at least partially surrounds the inner portion (14.1-3032). The outer portion (14.1-3034) and the inner portion (14.1-3032) may be interlocked or attached to each other. In some examples, the receptacle connector (14.1-3030) may be formed as a single or monolithic structure instead of the outer portion (14.1-3034) and the inner portion (14.1-3032). The receptacle connector (14.1-3030) may form a slot capable of receiving and retaining a plug connector (14.1-3000). The receptacle connector (14.1-3030) may additionally include a printed circuit board (PCB) (14.1-3036). The PCB (14.1-3036) may be coupled to a plug of the plug connector (14.1-3000) via an inner portion (14.1-3032). The receptacle connector (14.1-3030) may be coupled to a trim ring (14.1-3040) via a portion of the inner portion (14.1-3032).

Figures 595a and 595b illustrate exploded views and cross-sectional side views of a receptacle connector (14.1-3100). The receptacle connector (14.1-3100) includes an inner portion (14.1-3102), electrical contacts (14.1-3110), a contact block (14.1-3112), an anchor (14.1-3114), and an outer portion (14.1-3120). The inner portion (14.1-3102) includes an opening (14.1-3104) for receiving a plug of a plug connector, openings (14.1-3106A, 14.1-3106B, 14.1-3106C) for receiving electrical contacts (14.1-3110) (e.g., electrical contacts (14.1-3110A, 14.1-3110B, 14.1-3110C) respectively), and openings (14.1-3108) for fastening the inner portion (14.1-3102) to a trim ring or the like.

Electrical contacts (14.1-3110) are provided within openings (14.1-3106) of the inner portion (14.1-3102). A contact block (14.1-3112) may be used to isolate the electrical contacts (14.1-3110) from each other and to assist in positioning the electrical contacts (14.1-3110) relative to the openings (14.1-3106) of the inner portion (14.1-3102). The electrical contacts (14.1-3110) may be stitched to anchors (14.1-3114), which may be stitched to the interior portion (14.1-3102) of the receptacle connector (14.1-3100) to couple the electrical contacts (14.1-3110) to the interior portion (14.1-3102). In some examples, the electrical contacts (14.1-3110) may be stitched to the contact block (14.1-3112) and/or the anchor (14.1-3114).

The outer portion (14.1-3120) can surround at least a portion of the inner portion (14.1-3102). The outer portion can include openings (14.1-3122) for fastening the outer portion (14.1-3120) to a trim ring or the like. The openings (14.1-3122) can also fasten the outer portion (14.1-3120) to the inner portion (14.1-3102).

The following description relates to certain exemplary connectors illustrated in FIGS. 596A-601B (including exemplary method steps for manufacturing such connectors). In particular, the description below will include examples of electrical connectors in which a protective overmold is on a flexible circuit board in the wire termination region. In some examples, the structural features of these electrical connectors may help mitigate potential problems (e.g., solder cracks, electrical discontinuities, load stresses, thermal stresses, etc.) associated with overmolded components (e.g., flex circuit boards and wires) having lower mechanical rigidity. In certain embodiments, and as discussed below, a stiffener element and a wrap element may allow such sensitive components to be overmolded in an effective manner. For example, at least one of the stiffener element or the wrap element may help reduce high temperature exposure to the flexible circuit board and wires during the overmolding process.

Figures 596a and 596b illustrate, respectively, a translucent and a stereoscopic view of an electrical connector portion (14.1-3600) according to one or more examples of the present disclosure. In Figure 596a, the connector assembly (14.1-3612) is concealed (or made partially transparent) for illustrative purposes; whereas in Figure 596b, the connector assembly (14.1-3612) is shown visible. The connector assembly (14.1-3612) may include an assembled (or partially assembled) harness having prongs, sleeves, frame members, etc. Accordingly, the connector assembly (14.1-3612) may be sized and shaped to receive electrical components within a receptacle (14.1-3616) defined by the interior walls of the connector assembly (14.1-3612). In certain implementations, the connector assembly (14.1-3612) is sized and shaped such that one or more electrical components can be withdrawn from inside the receptacle (14.1-3616) to expose at least a portion of one or more of these components during manufacturing (as discussed below and as illustrated in FIG. 596a). Once these manufacturing steps have been performed, the electrical components can be reinserted (e.g., pushed) into the receptacle (14.1-3616) (as also discussed below and as illustrated in FIG. 596b).

Figures 596a and 596b illustrate an electrical connector portion (14.1-3600) including a wrap (14.1-3602). The wrap (14.1-3602) may include one or more elements that may assist in supporting or protecting wires (14.1-3606) leading to a termination region. In certain examples, the wrap (14.1-3602) may assist in reinforcing the wires (14.1-3606) (e.g., to reduce bending or flexing at the wire termination region). Additionally or alternatively, the wrap (14.1-3602) may assist in preventing the wires (14.1-3606) from abrading under pressure from the overmolded tooling. In these or other examples, the wrap (14.1-3602) comprises a jacket, coating, or tape that at least partially wraps around the wires (14.1-3606) and provides the aforementioned functionality. To this end, the wrap (14.1-3602) may be made of various materials. However, in certain examples, the wrap (14.1-3602) comprises at least one of a silicone jacket or an acetate tape.

The electrical connector portion (14.1-3600) further includes an overmold (14.1-3608) positioned adjacent to (e.g., over, around, at least partially surrounding, etc.) the wire termination area. The overmold (14.1-3608) may be injection molded, molded, or the like. The overmold may include a variety of materials. In some examples, the overmold (14.1-3608) includes a polymeric material. In specific examples, the overmold (14.1-3608) includes a liquid crystal polymer material.

Additionally, the electrical connector portion (14.1-3600) may include stiffeners (14.1-3610, 14.1-3614). The stiffeners (14.1-3610) may include stiffener surfaces that can be used to bond and weld to portions of the connector assembly (14.1-3612). Additionally or alternatively, the stiffeners (14.1-3610) may include stiffener surfaces that can be used to bond or weld to portions of the flex circuit (14.1-3604). In these or other examples, the attachment areas on the stiffener surfaces of the stiffeners (14.1-3610) may help prevent assembly load stresses from being transferred to the electrical components (e.g., the flex circuit (14.1-3604)). Accordingly, the reinforcement (14.1-2610) can help increase the possibility of electrical continuity after the overmold and product assembly processes.

The stiffener (14.1-3610) also includes surfaces that serve as contact points for overmolded tooling components (e.g., heated tooling surfaces). In some examples, the surfaces of the stiffener (14.1-3610) may also include reference surfaces (e.g., to guide or center overmolded parts relative to the tool structure, thereby reducing the risk of scalding due to high temperatures).

In these or other examples, the stiffener (14.1-3610) includes one or more surfaces for hotbar termination of the flex circuit (14.1-3604) to the interface connector (as shown in FIG. 600). In these or other examples, one or more surfaces of the stiffener (14.1-3610) may be exposed (e.g., may be withdrawn from inside the receptacle (14.1-3616)) for performing the hotbar termination, which reduces the manufacturing complexity of having to perform the hotbar termination inside the connector assembly (14.1-3612).

The reinforcement (14.1-3610) may comprise various materials. In some examples, the reinforcement (14.1-3610) may comprise a rigid material. In some examples, the reinforcement (14.1-3610) comprises a conductive material. In some examples, the reinforcement (14.1-3610) comprises a metallic material. In certain examples, the reinforcement (14.1-3610) comprises a steel reinforcement.

The following description provides more detail regarding at least one or more stiffener surfaces (e.g., reference surfaces). Figures 597-598 illustrate plan and bottom views, respectively, of the electrical connector portion (14.1-3600) discussed above. As mentioned, the stiffener (14.1-3610) may include reference surfaces for contacting the overmolded tooling. Examples of such reference surfaces are depicted as reference surfaces (14.1-3702). The reference surfaces (14.1-3702) may include extensions, wings, protrusions, arms, flaps, flat spots, faces, curved surfaces, and the like designed to contact the overmolded tooling at specific locations. In these or other examples, the reference surfaces (14.1-3702) may be specifically designed for custom tooling. Alternatively, the reference surfaces (14.1-3702) can be designed for many different overmold toolings.

The following description provides exemplary method steps for manufacturing the electrical connector portion (14.1-3600) discussed above. In fact, FIG. 599 illustrates exemplary method steps 1 through 6 for manufacturing the electrical connector portion (14.1-3600) according to one or more examples of the present disclosure. It will be appreciated that the following steps may be modified, omitted, or added (as desired).

In step 1, a flex circuit (14.1-3604) is provided. In step 2, at least a portion of a stiffener (14.1-3610) is attached to the flex circuit (14.1-3604). For example, the stiffener (14.1-3610) is bonded (e.g., via a pressure-sensitive adhesive) or fastened via a screw or the like.

In step 3, the wire (14.1-3606) (wrapped by the wrap (14.1-3602)) is terminated onto the flex circuit (14.1-3604). In this step, the stiffener (14.1-3610) acts as a support during the termination process. In step 4, the overmold (14.1-3608) is applied to the termination area. In step 5, the wire harness portion assembled thus far can be inserted into the receptacle (14.1-3616) of the connector assembly (14.1-3612). In step 6, the end area of the electrical connector portion (14.1-3600) is left exposed for hot bar termination (now discussed below with reference to FIG. 600).

FIG. 600 illustrates exemplary method steps for providing an interface connector to an electrical connector portion (14.1-3600) discussed above in accordance with one or more examples of the present disclosure. In step 1, an electrical connector portion (14.1-3600) is provided (e.g., as discussed above with reference to FIG. 599). In step 2, an end region (14.1-3900) of the electrical connector portion (14.1-3600) is exposed.

In step 3, a connection (14.1-4002) is formed between the stiffener (14.1-3610) and the interface connector (14.1-4000) (e.g., a plug-in connection, a prong connection, a magnetic connection, etc.). In these or other examples, the connection (14.1-4002) includes a hot bar connection, a welded connection, a solder connection, a metal bond connection, etc. In some examples, the stiffener (14-3610) is used to transfer load stresses from the interface connector (14.1-4000), thereby bypassing the stresses to sensitive electrical components (e.g., a flex circuit board). In step 4, the interface connector (14.1-4000) is pushed back into (e.g., flush with) the electrical connector portion (3600).

FIGS. 601A and 601B illustrate schematic side views of assembling an interface connector (14.1-4000) to an electrical connector portion (14.1-3600), according to one or more examples of the present disclosure. In particular, FIG. 601A illustrates an end region (14.1-3900) of the electrical connector portion (3600) exposed for attachment of the interface connector (14.1-4000). Subsequently, FIG. 601B illustrates the end region (14.1-3900) of the electrical connector portion (3600) being pushed into the interior of a receptacle of the connector assembly (with the interface connector (14.1-4000) being flush with the electrical connector portion (14.1-3600).

As described above with respect to FIG. 600, the stiffener (14.1-3610) may prevent the transfer of stress between interface connectors. To this end, the stiffener (14.1-3610) may include one or more attachment areas for various components. For example, the stiffener (14.1-3610) may be attached to the flex circuit (14.1-3604) at an attachment area (14.1-4104) positioned adjacent to the interface connector (14.1-4000) on the underside of the stiffener (14.1-3610). Additionally or alternatively, the top side of the stiffener (14.1-4110) may be attached to the flex circuit (14.1-3604) at an attachment area (14.1-4108) positioned adjacent to the overmold (14.1-3608). The underside of the reinforcement (14.1-4110) can be attached to a connector assembly (14.1-3612) (e.g., a frame member of the connector assembly).

Additionally, as illustrated, the underside of the stiffener (14.1-3610) may be attached to the top side of the interface connector (14.1-4000) at the attachment area (14.1-4102). Additionally, the top side of the flex circuit (14.1-3604) may be attached to the bottom side of the interface connector (14.1-4000). Additionally, the wires (14.1-3606) may be attached to the flex circuit (14.1-3604) at the attachment area (14.1-4100).

By virtue of the aforementioned attachments in the discussed attachment areas, the stiffener (14.1-3610) can avoid transferring load stress from the interface connector (14.1-4000) to either the flex circuit (14.1-3604) (at the associated attachment areas) or the wires (and associated attachment areas). The aforementioned configuration can also enable the flex circuit (14.1-3604) to be folded or rolled up (e.g., in a threaded pattern) for positioning/storing extended portions of the flex circuit (14.1-3604).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 596-601b) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings described herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in the other drawings and described with reference thereto) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 596-601b.

14.2: Modular Components for Wearable Electronic Devices

As virtual reality (VR) and mixed reality (MR) become more widespread, the demand for user-friendly head-mounted displays with high-quality components is increasing. Traditionally, these VR/MR systems have consisted of a wearable display component, commonly referred to as a head-mounted display (HMD), and a complementary unit. The complementary unit may be part of the HMD or a separate component permanently connected to the HMD via cables, wires, or other conductors. The complementary unit may provide power and/or additional processing capabilities to the system. The components of these systems are not interchangeable and therefore have a single configuration. VR/MR systems are increasingly used in a variety of environments and scenarios. Therefore, it may be desirable for VR/MR systems to have different properties depending on the intended use or applications.

For example, certain components may maximize comfort and audio quality, while others may reduce the weight of the wearable and maximize device stability. The modular nature of wearable VR/MR systems and their associated components may allow for the selection of specific components to be integrated into the device. For example, in scenarios where the user may wear the device for extended periods of time, components that maximize comfort and audio quality may be selected, while in scenarios where the user is highly mobile, components that maximize weight reduction and stability may be selected.

Furthermore, existing VR/MR systems, including HMD systems and devices, have packaged most or all of the device's components in a housing worn on the user's face. Even in systems that include a separate processing unit, nearly all of the electronic components of the HMD portion are packaged in a single housing that mounts on the user's head. In addition to reducing the customizability of the HMD device, this type of design can concentrate the device's weight in a single location, potentially reducing user comfort. In contrast, the HMD devices and systems described herein include multiple modular and connectable components that can distribute the device's electronic and functional components across two or more locations, thereby increasing both modularity and user comfort.

These and other embodiments are discussed below with reference to FIGS. 602 through 614. However, those skilled in the art will readily recognize that the detailed description provided herein with respect to these drawings is for illustrative purposes only and should not be construed as limiting. Moreover, as used herein, a system, method, article, component, feature, or sub-feature that includes at least one of the first option, the second option, or the third option should be understood to refer to a system, method, article, component, feature, or sub-feature that can include one of each of the listed options (e.g., only one of the first option, only one of the second option, or only one of the third option), multiple of a single listed option (e.g., two or more of the first option), two options simultaneously (e.g., one of the first option and one of the second option), or a combination thereof (e.g., two of the first option and one of the second option).

FIG. 602a illustrates a wearable electronic device (14.2-100) worn on a user's head (14.2-101). The wearable electronic device (14.2-100) may include a number of modular components. For example, the wearable device (14.2-100) may include a housing (14.2-105), a head-mounted display (HMD) (14.2-110) including a display (14.2-107) (illustrated in FIG. 602b) attached to the housing for displaying images to the user, one or more intermediate members, flexible straps, or connector straps (14.2-130), a retention band (14.2-120), which may be a flexible band or a band moldable to the user's head, and optional supplementary units (14.2-140), such as an external power supply, memory components, and/or a processor. Although referred to as a wearable electronic device (14.2-100), it should be understood that the device (14.2-100) may include a number of modular components or devices and may be interchangeably referred to as a wearable electronic device, a wearable electronic device system, and/or a wearable electronic system. Additionally, while a particular component (14.2-110) may be referred to as an HMD, it should be understood that the terms HMD, HMD device, and/or HMD system may be used to refer to the wearable device (14.2-100) as a whole.

In some examples, and as illustrated, the device (14.2-100) may be worn on the user's head (14.2-101) such that the HMD (14.2-110) is worn on the user's face and positioned over one or both eyes. The HMD may be removably and/or releasably connected to a connector strap or straps (14.2-130) as further described herein. In some examples, the connector straps (14.2-130) may be positioned against and in contact with the side of the user's head (14.2-101). In some examples, the connector straps (14.2-130) may be positioned over the user's ear (14.2-150) or ears, as illustrated. In some examples, the connector straps (14.2-130) may be positioned adjacent to the user's ear or ears. The connector straps (14.2-130) can be removably connected to a retention band (14.2-120) that can extend around the user's head (14.2-101) and can be removably connected to another connector strap (not shown) among the connector straps (14.2-130). In this manner, the HMD, the connector straps (14.2-130), and the retention band (14.2-120) can form a loop that can retain the wearable electronic device (14.2-100) on the user's head (14.2-101). As illustrated in FIG. 602a, the connector straps (14.2-130) may be mechanically and electrically connected to the HMD (14.2-110) at an HMD connection location (14.2-154) that may include an electrical input or electrical connector that attaches to the housing (14.2-105) (as illustrated in FIG. 603) and electrically connects to the display (14.2-107). This location may be identified as a temple area "Y" that may be defined as an area near the user's temple adjacent to the user's eyes, and may extend along the side of the user's head approximately 1-1.5 inches past the outer corner of the user's eye from in front of the user's eyes. Similarly, the connector straps (14.2-130) may be connected to the retention band (14.2-120) at retention band connection locations (14.2-152) identified as ear areas "X" that may span an area above the user's ears (14.2-150) or within 0.5 inches of the outer edge of each ear. In this manner, the connector straps (14.2-130) may provide structural support between the HMD (14.2-110) and the user's ears (14.2-150) while firmly connecting the retention band (14.2-120) and transmitting the retention forces of the retention band through the wearable electronic device (14.2-100). However, it should be understood that this configuration is only an example of how components of a modular wearable electronic device (14.2-100) may be arranged, and that in some cases, different numbers of connector straps and/or retention bands may be included.

FIG. 602b illustrates a plan view of a wearable electronic device (14.2-100) and, in some examples, how components of the device (14.2-100) may be mechanically and/or electrically connected to one another. In the example illustrated in FIG. 602b, a first connector strap (14.2-130) and a second connector strap (14.2-131) may be removably connected or coupled to opposite sides of an HMD (14.2-110), respectively. In some examples, the connector straps (14.2-130, 14.2-131) may be electrically and mechanically coupled or coupled to the HMD and may act as an intermediate member positioned between the HMD and a retention band (14.2-120). In some examples, one of the connector straps (14.2-130, 14.2-131) may be mechanically connected to the HMD, but not electrically connected. The connector straps (14.2-130, 14.2-131) may each be connected to the retention band (14.2-120) at different locations on the connector straps (14.2-130, 14.2-131) other than the connection to the HMD. For example, the HMD may be connected to a first end of each of the connector straps (14.2-130, 14.2-131), and the retention band (14.2-120) may be connected to an opposite second end of each of the connector straps (14.2-130, 14.2-131).

In some examples, and as illustrated, at least one of the connector straps (14.2-130) may also be connected to a supplemental unit (14.2-140). The supplemental unit (14.2-140) may include one or more processors, batteries or power supplies, antennas, and any other electrical and/or processing components, as desired. In some examples, power and/or data from the supplemental unit may be provided to the HMD via the connector strap (14.2-130) via a connection between the supplemental unit (14.2-140) and the connector strap (14.2-130), as described herein. In this example, a conductor or cable (14.2-142) may electrically connect the complementary unit (14.2-140) to the connector strap (14.2-130), thereby allowing the complementary unit to provide power and/or communicate with the HMD (14.2-110), the second connector strap (14.2-131), and/or the retention band (14.2-120).

Although the supplemental unit (14.2-140) is shown as being connected to the connector strap (14.2-130) via a wired connection (14.2-142), it should be understood that in some examples, the supplemental unit (14.2-140) may be wirelessly connected to or communicate data and/or power with the connector strap (14.2-130) and/or the HMD (14.2-110) by any desired method or technique. Additionally, in some examples, the supplemental unit (14.2-140) may be integrated into, or be an integral part of, one or more of the other components of the device (14.2-100), including the retention band (14.2-120), the connector straps (14.2-130, 14.2-131), and/or the HMD (14.2-110). Additionally, although the components of the wearable electronic device (14.2-100) are shown as being connected to one another at specific locations, it should be understood that any of the components of the device (14.2-100) may be electrically and/or mechanically connected to one or more of any other components of the device (14.2-100) in any manner and location as desired.

FIG. 602c illustrates an exploded view of a wearable electronic device (14.2-100) including the locations of connectors on various components as described herein. As can be seen, the connector strap (14.2-130) may include a first connector (14.2-132), also referred to as an HMD connector, to provide electrical communication between the connector strap (14.2-130) and the HMD (14.2-110) by removably or releasably attaching to a corresponding connector (14.2-112) on the HMD (14.2-110). As used herein, providing electrical communication between two elements may include providing any type of electrical signal, including power and/or data. Additionally, in some examples, the intermediate component may include a conductive element that is in electrical communication with two or more components and may transmit an electrical signal from one component to another. That is, a plurality of components may be in electrical communication with each other, including components that conduct electrical signals as well as components that transmit or receive electrical signals. A first connector (14.2-132) may be positioned at a first end of the connector strap (14.2-130) and/or its flexible housing. The connector strap (14.2-130) may also include a second connector (14.2-134) positioned at a second end, such as the opposite end of the connector strap (14.2-130). The second connector (14.2-134) may be referred to as a retention band connector or a flexible band connector and may be removably connectable to the retention band (14.2-120) by attaching to a corresponding connector (14.2-124) on the retention band (14.2-120). The second connector (14.2-134) may at least partially define an outer surface of the connector strap (14.2-130).

The connector strap (14.2-130) may further include a third connector (14.2-136), also referred to as a complementary unit connector, which may provide electrical communication between the connector strap (14.2-130) and the complementary unit (14.2-140), for example via a corresponding connector (14.2-141) that may be coupled to a connector conductor (14.2-142). In some examples, the complementary unit connector (14.2-136) may be located at or near an end of the flexible housing of the connector strap (14.2-130), opposite the first end. In some examples, the connector (14.2-136) may include a mechanical connector surrounding the electrical connector, and the connector (14.2-141) may be configured to rotate relative to the complementary unit connector (14.2-136) when connected to allow for relative freedom and placement for positioning the complementary unit (14.2-140).

Similar to the connector strap (14.2-130), the second connector strap (14.2-131) may include a first connector (14.2-133), also referred to as an HMD connector or display connector, and a second connector (14.2-135), also referred to as a retention band connector. These connectors (14.2-133, 14.2-135) may be positioned at or near opposite ends of the housing of the connector strap (14.2-131). The connectors (14.2-133, 14.2-135) may have substantially the same or similar functionality as any one of the connectors (14.2-132, 14.2-134, 14.2-136). In some examples, connector (14.2-133) may be releasably attached to a corresponding connector of an HMD (not shown), and connector (14.2-135) may be releasably attached to a corresponding connector (14.2-125) of a retention band (14.2-120).

Any number or variety of components of any of the configurations described herein may be included in a wearable electronic device, such as the HMD devices and/or HMD systems described herein. The components may include any combination of the features described herein and may be arranged in any of the various configurations described herein. The concepts relating to the structure and arrangement of the components of the device, as well as their use, may be applied to any number of embodiments in any combination, as well as to the specific examples discussed herein. Various examples of electronic devices and electronic device components, including some examples having various features in various arrangements, are described below with reference to FIGS. 603A through 605 .

FIG. 603A illustrates an exploded view of a wearable electronic device (14.2-200) that may include modular components that may be selectively and removably or releasably attached or coupled to one another as described herein. In some examples, the device (14.2-200) may be substantially similar to, or may include some or all of the features of, other wearable electronic devices described herein. Like the electronic device (14.2-100), the device (14.2-200) may include a head mounted display (HMD) (14.2-210), a retention band (14.2-220), and one or more connector straps (14.2-230, 14.2-231). The device (14.2-200) may also include a complementary unit (not shown) that may be connected to one or more components of the device (14.2-200) to provide additional functionality, power, processing speed, etc.

Similar to the connector strap (14.2-130), the connector strap (14.2-230) may include an HMD connector (14.2-232) that may be releasably coupled to a corresponding connector (14.2-212), a retention band connector (14.2-234) that may be releasably coupled to a corresponding connector (14.2-224), and a supplemental unit connector (14.2-236) that may be releasably coupled to a supplemental unit. In some examples, the supplemental unit connector (14.2-236) includes a battery input and/or a data input, and may alternatively be referred to as a power connector and/or a data connector. In some examples, the HMD connector (14.2-232) may be located on an edge of the connector strap (14.2-230), while the retention band connector (14.2-234) and/or the complementary unit connector (14.2-236) may be located on a main surface(s), such as a side surface(s), of the connector strap (14.2-230).

In some examples, and as illustrated, the retaining band connector (14.2-234) and its associated connector (14.2-224) on the retaining band (14.2-220) may include multiple connection points. In some examples, these multiple connection points may be aligned in a single line, thereby rotatably securing the connector strap (14.2-230) and the retaining band (14.2-220) to each other. In some examples, any other type of connection that can provide rotational securing between the connector strap (14.2-230) and the retaining band (14.2-220) may be implemented. In some examples, where the device (14.2-200) includes a second connector strap (14.2-231), such connector strap (14.2-231) may also include a retention band connector (14.2-235) that can be releasably coupled to the HMD connector (14.2-233) and the corresponding connector (14.2-225) so as to be rotatably secured thereto.

In some examples, and as further described herein, one or more of the connector straps (14.2-230, 14.2-231) may include one or more operating elements or components (14.2-237, 14.2-238) that are at least partially disposed within an interior volume defined by a housing of the connector strap (14.2-230, 14.2-231). The operating elements, components, or components (14.2-237, 14.2-238) may include any number of functional and/or electrical components, including output components, such as an audio module or component, a display module, or a data output component, input components, such as a touch sensor or touch-sensitive element or component, a button, a toggle, a switch, a fingerprint sensor, a camera, or other type of sensor, or any other functional and/or operating component desired. Additional details of the connector straps (14.2-230, 14.2-231) are described below with reference to FIGS. 603b through 603d.

FIG. 603b illustrates a side view of a connector strap (14.2-231) of the electronic device (14.2-200) illustrated in FIG. 603a, including an HMD connector (14.2-233) positioned at an end of the strap (14.2-231), and a retention band connector (14.2-235) having a plurality of connection locations positioned at an opposite end of the strap (14.2-231). As can be seen, the actuation component (14.2-237) can be positioned at least partially within the interior volume of the strap (14.2-231) and between the HMD connector (14.2-233) and the retention band connector (14.2-235). In some examples, and as further described herein, the housing of the strap (14.2-231) can be offset or elevated from the location of the actuation component (14.2-237), as desired. In some examples, the operating component (14.2-237) itself may at least partially define an outer surface of the strap (14.2-231). Additionally, and as described with respect to FIG. 14.2-2d, the operating component (14.2-237) may be electrically connected to at least one of the first connector (14.2-233) or the second connector (14.2-235).

FIG. 603c illustrates a side view of another connector strap (14.2-230) of a wearable electronic device (14.2-200). The connector strap (14.2-231) of FIG. 603b may include an HMD connector (14.2-233) and a retention strap connector (14.2-235) but may not include a complementary unit connector, whereas the connector strap (14.2-230) of FIG. 603c includes an HMD connector (14.2-232), a retention band connector (not shown), and a complementary unit connector (14.2-236). As with the connector strap (14.2-231), the strap (14.2-230) may be positioned between the HMD connector (14.2-232) and the complementary unit connector (14.2-236) and may include an actuation component (14.2-238) that may be at least partially positioned within an interior volume defined by a housing (14.2-239) of the strap (14.2-230).

FIG. 603d illustrates a cross-sectional or partial cutaway view of the connector strap (14.2-230) illustrated in FIGS. 603a and 603c. In this drawing, portions of the housing (14.2-239) as well as the operating component (14.2-238) are not shown to illustrate the interior volume of the strap (14.2-230). As can be appreciated, in some examples, the HMD connector (14.2-232) may be electrically connected to the complementary unit connector (14.2-236). In this particular example, a transmitting array or transmitting component(s) (14.2-251, 14.2-253), such as wires or other conductive elements, may be positioned in the interior volume to electrically connect the HMD connector (14.2-232) and the complementary unit connector (14.2-236), for example, to provide data and/or power therebetween. In some examples, the transmission array may include a plurality of conductors, cables, wires, or other transmission lines (14.2-251, 14.2-253) for transmitting data and/or power between the HMD connector (14.2-232) and the supplemental unit connector (14.2-236). In some examples, the lines (14.2-251, 14.2-253) may communicate with the connector via connection points (14.2-250), as illustrated. Additionally, in some examples, the supplemental unit connector (14.2-236) may include a printed circuit board (14.2-256) that may be at least partially disposed within the interior volume. In some examples, the connector strap (14.2-230) may include a processor or processing unit (14.2-257). The conductors (14.2-251, 14.2-253) of the transmitting array may be coupled to one or more locations on such printed circuit board (14.2-256) and/or may be directly connected to a complementary unit connector (14.2-236).

In some examples, the housing (14.2-239) of the strap (14.2-230) may comprise a relatively flexible material, such as a polymeric material, a fabric, and/or any desired flexible material or materials. In some examples, the strap (14.2-230) may further comprise a reinforcing component or stiffener (14.2-254) disposed at least partially within the interior volume defined by the housing (14.2-239). In some examples, the stiffener (14.2-254) may be positioned at any desired location or locations within the interior volume and may extend along any portion of the length of the strap (14.2-230). In some examples, the stiffener (14.2-254) may be disposed adjacent to internal components associated with one or both of the HMD connector (14.2-232), the supplemental unit connector (14.2-236), and/or the retention band connector (not shown).

In some instances, such as when the housing (14.2-239) of the strap (14.2-230) is relatively flexible, the stiffener (14.2-254) may serve to provide structural support to the strap (14.2-230) in one or more directions. For example, the stiffener (14.2-254) may be flexible along a first axis and rigid along at least one axis perpendicular to the first axis. In some instances, the stiffener (14.2-254) may be flexible along the first axis and rigid along two axes perpendicular to the first axis and to each other. That is, the stiffener (14.2-254) may be flexible along a first bending direction, such as a direction extending into and out of the page of FIG. 603d, while being rigid in one or more other bending directions, such as one or more directions parallel to the plane of the page of FIG. 603d. In some examples, the reinforcement (14.2-254) may comprise a polymeric material, a metallic material, and/or a combination thereof. In some examples, the reinforcement (14.2-254) may have a higher rigidity than the material comprising the housing (14.2-239) in at least one bending direction or axis. In some examples, the reinforcement (14.2-254) may comprise metal in the form of a metal sheet. Additional details regarding the connector strap of the modular wearable electronic device are provided with reference to FIGS. 604 and 605, including details regarding its operating components.

FIG. 604 illustrates a side view of a component (14.2-330) that may be used as part of a modular wearable electronic device as described herein. In some examples, the component (14.2-330) may be a connector strap (14.2-330), which may be substantially similar to, or may include some or all of the features of, other connector straps and/or electronic devices described herein. The example illustrated in FIG. 604 may be substantially similar to the connector strap (14.2-230) illustrated in FIG. 603, and may include an HMD connector (14.2-332), a supplemental unit connector (14.2-336), and a retention band connector (not shown) disposed on an opposite side of the supplemental unit connector (14.2-336).

In the example illustrated in FIG. 604, the operating component (14.2-338) of the strap (14.2-330) may include a data output component. That is, the operating component (14.2-338) may be configured to transmit data from the strap (14.2-330) and/or any component of the wearable device that communicates with the strap, such as the HMD and/or the supplemental unit, to another electronic device. In some examples, the output device (14.2-338) may output data at a relatively high bit rate. In some examples, the output component (14.2-338) may have a direct electrical connection to the auxiliary device via a conductor or cable (14.2-339), as illustrated. However, in some examples, the output component (14.2-338) may include one or more antennas to wirelessly transmit data to the auxiliary device as desired.

In some examples, a user may include a strap (14.2-330) including an output component (14.2-338) in place of the strap (14.2-230) illustrated in FIGS. 603a, 603c, and 603d in a modular electronic device, for example, in situations where high throughput transfer of data from the wearable device to an auxiliary device is desired. However, in other scenarios where this functionality may not be needed or desired, the strap (14.2-230) may instead be included in the wearable device.

FIG. 605 illustrates a side view of a component (14.2-430) that may be used as part of a modular wearable electronic device as described herein. In some examples, the component (14.2-430) may be a connector strap (14.2-430) and may be substantially similar to, or may include some or all of the features of, other connector straps and/or electronic devices described herein. The example illustrated in FIG. 605 may be substantially similar to the connector strap (230) illustrated in FIG. 603, and may include an HMD connector (14.2-432), a supplemental unit connector (14.2-436), and a retention band connector (not shown) disposed on an opposite side of the supplemental unit connector (14.2-436).

The strap (14.2-430) may also include an operative component (14.2-439) that includes a visual or display component. In the example illustrated in FIG. 605, the operative component (14.2-439) may take the form of one or more LEDs that can be selectively illuminated to visually display information. In some examples, the operative component (14.2-439) may include any other type of display or display technology, or a combination thereof. In some examples, the display (14.2-439) may be used to present visual information to others than the user when the wearable electronic device of the strap (14.2-430) is part of the strap. In some examples, the display (14.2-439) may be configured to present visual information to the user when the wearable device is not being worn. For example, the display (14.2-439) may communicate the battery level of the device before the user puts the device on. Additionally, as illustrated, the strap (14.2-430) may include an additional second motion component (14.2-438) in addition to the display (14.2-439).

Any number or variety of components of any of the configurations described herein may be included in a wearable electronic device, such as an HMD device and/or HMD system, described herein. The components may include any combination of the features described herein and may be arranged in any of the various configurations described herein. The concepts relating to the structure and arrangement of the components of the device, as well as their use, may be applied to any number of embodiments in any combination, as well as to the specific examples discussed herein. Various examples of electronic devices and electronic device components, including some examples having various features in various arrangements, are described below with reference to FIGS. 606A through 611C.

FIG. 606A illustrates a plan view of a component (14.2-530) that may be part of, or used with, a wearable electronic device as described herein. In some examples, the component (14.2-530) may be a connector strap (14.2-530) and may be substantially similar to, or include some or all of the features of, other connector straps and/or electronic devices described herein. Like other connector straps described herein, the connector strap (14.2-530) may include a first connector (14.2-532), which may be an HMD connector (14.2-532), a second connector (14.2-536), which may be a complementary unit connector, and a third connector (14.2-534), which may be a retention band connector. As described herein, in some examples, the retention band connector (14.2-534) may include multiple connecting portions. In the example illustrated in FIG. 606a, the retention band connector (14.2-534) may include a first connecting portion and a second connecting portion (14.2-534') spaced from the first connecting portion on the same side of the connector strap (14.2-530).

The connector strap (14.2-530) may have a housing (14.2-539) that can at least partially define an interior volume and an offset surface protruding from a major surface of the housing (14.2-539). That is, the housing may define a protrusion or protrusion portion (14.2-538), and one or more movable components may be positioned within or on such protrusion (14.2-538). Additionally, in some examples, one or more connectors of the connector strap (14.2-530) may also be positioned on or within such protrusion (14.2-538). For example, a complementary unit connector (14.2-536) may be positioned at least partially on an outer surface of the housing (14.2-539) that is defined by the protrusion (14.2-538). In some examples, the outer surface of the housing may include an exterior surface of the housing. In some additional examples, the outer surface may further include an outer surface of the housing that is oriented away from the user's head when worn by the user.

FIG. 606b illustrates a side view of a connector strap (14.2-530). In addition to defining an interior volume and an exterior surface of the connector strap (14.2-530), a housing (14.2-539) of the connector strap (14.2-530) may define one or more openings or ports (14.2-533). In some examples, the housing (14.2-539) may define one or more audio ports (14.2-533) that are acoustically connected to an audio module or speaker, and may allow the audio module or speaker located in the interior volume defined by the housing (14.2-539) to communicate with the surrounding environment. In some examples, the housing (14.2-539) may define two opposing major surfaces, and the audio port (14.2-533) may be located on a minor surface or edge connecting the two opposing surfaces. Additionally, one of the main surfaces, such as the main surface illustrated in FIG. 606b, may be interrupted by a protrusion (14.2-538), but at least one of the main surfaces (not illustrated) may extend the full length of the connector strap (14.2-530) and/or the full length of the interior volume of the strap (14.2-530).

FIG. 606c illustrates a cross-sectional view of a connector strap (14.2-530) in the position shown in FIG. 606b, but not showing a major surface of a housing (14.2-539) to illustrate the positioning of components within the interior volume. In this example, the strap (14.2-530) may include two or more actuating components (14.2-557, 14.2-558), at least one of which may be positioned on the protrusion (14.2-538). In some examples, a first actuating component (14.2-557) may include a first audio module disposed within the interior volume and configured to output a first range of audio frequencies, while a second actuating component (14.2-558) may include a second audio module disposed within the interior volume and configured to output a second range of audio frequencies, the second range being different from the first range. Additionally, the drivers of the first and/or second audio modules (14.2-557, 14.2-558) may communicate with the audio port (14.2-533) to output sound. In some examples, one or more of the audio modules (14.2-557, 14.2-558) may have an open box or ported speaker configuration or a closed box or sealed speaker configuration. In some examples, one audio module (14.2-557) may function as a tweeter while the second audio module (14.2-558) may function as a woofer.

As with other straps (14.2-530) described herein, the strap (14.2-530) may include a reinforcement (14.2-552) that is flexible in a first direction and rigid in at least one direction perpendicular to the first direction. One or more of the movable components (14.2-557, 14.2-558) and/or connectors (14.2-536) may be positioned on or connected to a printed circuit board (14.2-556) positioned within the interior volume. The printed circuit board (14.2-556) may also include components or electronic elements, including memory and processors, positioned thereon. In some examples, the strap (14.2-530) may also include a rigid support member (14.2-553) positioned between the printed circuit board (14.2-556) and the stiffener (14.2-552), wherein the rigid support member (14.2-553) may be stiffer than the stiffener in the first direction.

In this particular example, a transmitting array or transmitting component(s) (14.2-551) may be positioned within the interior volume to electrically connect the HMD connector (14.2-532) to a printed circuit board (14.2-556), a supplemental unit connector (14.2-536), and/or one or more operating components (14.2-557, 14.2-558). In some examples, the transmitting component (14.2-551) may extend along a centerline of the housing (14.2-539). In some examples including multiple conductors or transmitting components, a first conductor may be positioned or disposed adjacent to one inner surface of the housing of the strap (14.2-530), and a second conductor may be positioned or disposed adjacent to another different inner surface of the housing of the strap. In some examples, different conductors may be positioned on either side of internal components, such as a printed circuit board (14.2-556), operative components (14.2-557, 14.2-558), stiffeners, etc. In some examples, the components of the strap (14.2-530) may be held in desired positions by attachment features and/or internal fasteners that are defined by or attached to the housing (14.2-539). In some examples, such as where the housing (14.2-539) comprises a relatively flexible material, such as a polymeric material, the housing (14.2-539) is at least partially overmolded around at least some of the components of the strap (14.2-530), including the printed circuit board (14.2-556), operative components (14.2-557, 14.2-558), and/or connectors (14.2-532, 14.2-536). Additional details of connector straps for wearable electronic devices are described with reference to FIGS. 607a through 607c.

FIG. 607A illustrates a plan view of a component (14.2-630) that may be part of, or used with, a wearable electronic device as described herein. In some examples, the component (14.2-630) may be a connector strap (14.2-630) and may be substantially similar to, or include some or all of the features of, other connector straps and/or electronic devices described herein. Like other connector straps described herein, the connector strap (14.2-630) may include a first connector (14.2-632), which may be an HMD connector (14.2-632), a second connector (14.2-636), which may be a complementary unit connector, and a third connector (14.2-634), which may be a retention band connector. As described herein, in some examples, the retaining band connector (14.2-634) may include a plurality of connecting portions. The connector strap (14.2-630) may have a housing (14.2-639) that at least partially defines an interior volume and an offset surface that protrudes from a major surface of the housing (14.2-639). That is, the housing may define a protrusion or protrusion portion (14.2-638), and one or more operating components may be positioned within or on such protrusion portion (14.2-638). The protrusion portion (14.2-638) may be a portion of the housing that is wider than another portion in any direction.

FIG. 607b illustrates a side view of a connector strap (14.2-630). In addition to defining an interior volume and an exterior surface of the connector strap (14.2-630), a housing (14.2-639) of the connector strap (14.2-630) may define one or more openings or ports (14.2-633). In some examples, the housing (14.2-639) may define one or more audio ports (14.2-633) that may allow an audio module or speaker located within the interior volume defined by the housing (14.2-639) to communicate with the surrounding environment. Additionally, as illustrated, the connector strap (14.2-630) may not have a constant height or thickness along its entire length. In some examples, a portion of the housing may be enlarged relative to other portions of the strap (14.2-630), for example, to provide space for the motion components and/or to position the motion components closer to a desired location relative to the user.

FIG. 607c illustrates a cross-sectional view of a connector strap (14.2-630) in the position shown in FIG. 607b, but not showing a major surface of a housing (14.2-639) to illustrate the positioning of components within the interior volume. In this example, the strap (14.2-630) may include two or more actuating components (14.2-657, 14.2-658), at least one of which may be positioned on the protrusion (14.2-638). In some examples, a first actuating component (14.2-657) may include a first audio module disposed within the interior volume and configured to output a first range of audio frequencies, while a second actuating component (14.2-658) may include a second audio module disposed within the interior volume and configured to output a second range of audio frequencies, the second range being different from the first range. Additionally, the drivers of the first and/or second audio modules (14.2-657, 14.2-658) may communicate with the audio port (14.2-633) to output sound. In some examples, one or more of the audio modules (14.2-657, 14.2-658) may have an open box speaker configuration or a closed box speaker configuration. In some examples, one audio module (14.2-657) may function as a tweeter, while the second audio module (14.2-658) may function as a woofer. In some examples, the strap (14.2-630) may include one or more sensors, e.g., sensors that may detect the position of the user's ear relative to the strap and assist in transmitting sound from the audio port (14.2-633) to the user's ear.

As with other straps (14.2-630) described herein, the strap (14.2-630) may include a reinforcement (14.2-652) that is flexible in a first direction and rigid in at least one direction perpendicular to the first direction. One or more of the movable components (14.2-657, 14.2-658) and/or connectors (14.2-636) may be positioned on or connected to a printed circuit board (14.2-656) positioned within the interior volume. The printed circuit board (14.2-656) may also include components including memory and processors positioned thereon. In some examples, the strap (14.2-630) may also include a support member (14.2-653) positioned between the printed circuit board (14.2-656) and the stiffener (14.2-652), wherein the support member (14.2-653) may be stiffer than the stiffener in the first direction.

In this particular example, a transmitting array or transmitting component(s) (14.2-650, 14.2-651) may be positioned within the interior volume to electrically connect the HMD connector (14.2-632) to a printed circuit board (14.2-656), a supplemental unit connector (14.2-636), and/or one or more operating components (14.2-657, 14.2-658). In some examples, the transmitting components (14.2-650, 14.2-651) may extend along a centerline (“C”) of the housing (14.2-639). In some examples, the components of the strap (14.2-630) may be held in desired positions by attachment features and/or internal fasteners that are defined by or attached to the housing (14.2-639). In some examples, such as where the housing (14.2-639) comprises a relatively flexible material, such as a polymeric material, the housing (14.2-639) is at least partially overmolded around at least some of the components of the strap (14.2-630), including the printed circuit board (14.2-656), the operating components (14.2-657, 14.2-658), and/or the connectors (14.2-632, 14.2-636).

In some examples, the housing (14.2-639) may include a first portion, such as a portion including a stiffener (14.2-652), and a second portion, such as a portion including a first audio module (14.2-657) and a second audio module (14.2-658). In some examples, this second portion may have a greater height than the first portion, as shown. Additionally, since this second portion may also be located where the protrusion (14.2-638) is positioned, the second portion may also have a greater thickness or width than the thickness or width of the first portion. Additional details of connector straps for wearable electronic devices are described with respect to FIGS. 608A-608C.

FIG. 608A illustrates a plan view of a component (14.2-730) that may be part of, or used with, a wearable electronic device as described herein. In some examples, the component (14.2-730) may be a connector strap (14.2-730) and may be substantially similar to, or include some or all of the features of, other connector straps and/or electronic devices described herein. Like other connector straps described herein, the connector strap (14.2-730) may include a first connector (14.2-732), which may be an HMD connector (14.2-732), a second connector (14.2-736), which may be a complementary unit connector, and a third connector (14.2-734), which may be a retention band connector. As described herein, in some examples, the retaining band connector (14.2-734) may include a plurality of connecting portions. The connector strap (14.2-730) may have a housing (14.2-739) that at least partially defines an interior volume and an offset surface that protrudes from a major surface of the housing (14.2-739). That is, the housing may define a protrusion or protrusion portion (14.2-738), and one or more operating components may be positioned within or on such protrusion (14.2-738).

FIG. 608b illustrates a side view of the strap (14.2-730). As can be seen in FIGS. 608a and 608b, in some examples, the protrusion (14.2-738) defined by the housing (14.2-739) of the strap (14.2-730) can be positioned at any desired location on the strap (14.2-730). Additionally, the protrusion (14.2-738) can be spaced apart from the audio port (14.2-733) defined by the housing (14.2-739). Additionally, as can be seen in FIG. 608c, this means that an operating component, such as an audio module (14.2-758), can be positioned within the interior volume of the strap (14.2-730) away from the audio port (14.2-733). However, it may still be desirable for the audio module (14.2-758) and/or its driver to communicate with the audio port (14.2-733) (illustrated in dashed lines). To enable this communication, the strap (14.2-730) may include an audio guide (14.2-759) that may include one or more channels that communicate with the audio module (14.2-758) and the audio port (14.2-733). In this manner, the audio module (14.2-758) may be positioned remotely from the audio port (14.2-733), yet still direct sound from the audio port (14.2-733) toward the user. In some examples, the audio guide (14.2-759) may comprise any desired material, including metals or polymers. In some examples, the acoustic guide (14.2-759) may be flexible and may bend or flex along with the strap (14.2-730) while still providing acoustic communication. In some examples, the acoustic guide (14.2-759) may not be a separate or discrete component, but may be at least partially confined by the housing (14.2-739) itself.

The strap (14.2-730) may also include some or all of the other components and features of other straps described herein. For example, an audio module (14.2-758) may be located remotely from the audio port (14.2-733) and communicate with the audio port (14.2-733) via an audio guide (14.2-759), but the strap (14.2-730) may include another audio module (14.2-757) that may be located proximate the audio port (14.2-733) to communicate therewith. The strap may also include a printed circuit board that may be connected to other connectors (14.2-732) and/or components (14.2-757, 14.2-758) of the strap (14.2-730) via various transmitting components (14.2-751). Additional details of connector straps for wearable electronic devices are described with reference to FIGS. 609a through 609c.

FIG. 609A illustrates a plan view of a component (14.2-830) that may be part of, or used with, a wearable electronic device as described herein. In some examples, the component (14.2-830) may be a connector strap (14.2-830) and may be substantially similar to, or include some or all of the features of, other connector straps and/or electronic devices described herein. Like other connector straps described herein, the connector strap (14.2-830) may include a first connector (14.2-832), which may be an HMD connector (14.2-832), a second connector (14.2-836), which may be a complementary unit connector, and a third connector (14.2-834), which may be a retention band connector. As described herein, in some examples, the retaining band connector (14.2-834) may include a plurality of connecting portions. The connector strap (14.2-830) may have a housing (14.2-839) that at least partially defines an interior volume and an offset surface that protrudes from a major surface of the housing (14.2-839). That is, the housing may define a protrusion or protrusion portion (14.2-838), and one or more operating components may be positioned within or on such protrusion (14.2-838).

As shown in the side view of FIG. 609b, the strap (14.2-830) may have a similar configuration to other straps described herein, such as straps (14.2-530, 14.2-630), with a protrusion (14.2-838) positioned at an end of the strap that includes a complementary unit connector (14.2-836). In addition to the audio port (14.2-833), the housing (14.2-839) may also define a vent, outlet, or rear port (14.2-835), which may be positioned on the opposite end of the strap from the audio port (14.2-833). In some examples, the rear port (14.2-835) may also be positioned on the opposite end of the strap (14.2-830) from the audio port (14.2-833). In some instances, it may be desirable to position the rear port (14.2-835) on the strap (14.2-830) as far from the audio port as possible or feasible.

FIG. 609c illustrates a cross-sectional view of a strap (14.2-830) including first and second audio modules (14.2-857, 14.2-858), a printed circuit board (14.2-856), and a transmitting component (14.2-851) including conductors such as cables or wires. In this example, the strap (14.2-830) also includes an audio guide (14.2-859) capable of communicating with the audio module (14.2-858) or its driver. While the sound guide (14.2-759) illustrated in FIG. 608c is configured to direct sound generated by the audio module (14.2-758) toward the audio port (14.2-733), the sound guide (14.2-859) may be configured to direct rear waves generated by the driver of the audio module (14.2-858) toward the rear port, thereby directing them away from the user's ears. Thus, the audio module (14.2-858) may include an open-box or open-back speaker, and the sound guide (14.2-859) may communicate with the rear or rear surface of the speaker's diaphragm to relieve back pressure and/or direct negative sound waves generated by the speaker away from the user's ears. Accordingly, this configuration may enable the audio modules (14.2-857, 14.2-858) to produce high quality audio in a relatively small package. Additional details of connector straps for wearable electronic devices are described with reference to FIGS. 610a through 610c.

FIG. 610A illustrates a plan view of a component (14.2-930) that may be part of, or used with, a wearable electronic device as described herein. In some examples, the component (14.2-930) may be a connector strap (14.2-930) and may be substantially similar to, or include some or all of the features of, other connector straps and/or electronic devices described herein. Like other connector straps described herein, the connector strap (14.2-930) may include a first connector (14.2-932), which may be an HMD connector (14.2-932), a second connector (14.2-936), which may be a complementary unit connector, and a third connector (14.2-934), which may be a retention band connector. As described herein, in some examples, the retaining band connector (14.2-934) may include a plurality of connecting portions. The connector strap (14.2-930) may have a housing (14.2-939) that at least partially defines an interior volume and an offset surface that protrudes from a major surface of the housing (14.2-939). That is, the housing may define a protrusion or protrusion portion (14.2-938), and one or more operating components may be positioned within or on such protrusion (14.2-938).

FIG. 610b illustrates a side view of the strap (14.2-930). As can be seen in FIGS. 610a and 610b, in some examples, the protrusion (14.2-938) defined by the housing (14.2-939) of the strap (14.2-930) can be positioned at any desired location on the strap (14.2-930). Additionally, the protrusion (14.2-938) can be spaced apart from the audio port (14.2-933) defined by the housing (14.2-939). Additionally, as can be seen in FIG. 610c, this means that an operating component, such as an audio module (14.2-958), can be positioned in the interior volume of the strap (14.2-930) away from the audio port (14.2-933). In some examples, the strap (14.2-930) may include an audio guide (14.2-959) that may include one or more channels that communicate with the audio module (14.2-958) and the audio port (14.2-933). In some examples, the audio guide (14.2-959) may define two or more, three or more, four or more, or more channels. In some examples, the audio guide (14.2-959) may define three channels. In some examples, the audio guide (14.2-959) may also function as a reinforcement for the strap (14.2-930). That is, the audio guide (14.2-959) may be flexible along a first bending direction and rigid along a different second bending direction. In some instances, the acoustic guide (14.2-959) may thus be considered a flexible acoustic guide, or a semi-rigid acoustic guide.

The strap (14.2-930) may also include some or all of the other components and features of other straps described herein. For example, an audio module (14.2-958) may be located remotely from the audio port (14.2-933) and communicate with the audio port (14.2-933) via an audio guide (14.2-959), while the strap (14.2-930) may include another audio module (14.2-957) that may be located proximate the audio port (14.2-933) to communicate therewith. The strap may also include a printed circuit board that may be connected to other connectors (14.2-932) and/or components (14.2-957, 14.2-958) of the strap (14.2-930) via various transmitting components (14.2-951). Additional details of connector straps for wearable electronic devices are described with reference to FIGS. 611a through 611c.

FIG. 611A illustrates a plan view of a component (14.2-1030) that may be part of, or used with, a wearable electronic device as described herein. In some examples, the component (14.2-1030) may be a connector strap (14.2-1030) and may be substantially similar to, or include some or all of the features of, other connector straps and/or electronic devices described herein. Like other connector straps described herein, the connector strap (14.2-1030) may include a first connector (14.2-1032), which may be an HMD connector (14.2-1032), a second connector (14.2-1036), which may be a complementary unit connector, and a third connector (14.2-1034), which may be a retention band connector. As described herein, in some examples, the retaining band connector (14.2-1034) may include a plurality of connecting portions. The connector strap (14.2-1030) may have a housing (14.2-1039) that at least partially defines an interior volume and an offset surface that protrudes from a major surface of the housing (14.2-1039). That is, the housing may define a protrusion or protrusion portion (14.2-1038), and one or more operating components may be positioned within or on such protrusion (14.2-1038).

FIG. 611b illustrates a side view of the strap (14.2-1030). As can be seen in FIGS. 611a and 611b, in some examples, the protrusion (14.2-1038) defined by the housing (14.2-1039) of the strap (14.2-1030) can be positioned at any desired location on the strap (14.2-1030). Additionally, the protrusion (14.2-1038) can be spaced apart from the audio port (14.2-1033) defined by the housing (14.2-1039). Additionally, as can be seen in FIG. 611c, this means that an operating component, such as an audio module (14.2-1058), can be positioned within the interior volume of the strap (14.2-1030) away from the audio port (14.2-1033). In some examples, the strap (14.2-1030) may include an audio guide (14.2-1059) that may include one or more channels that communicate with the audio module (14.2-1058) and the audio port (14.2-1033). In some examples, the audio guide (14.2-1059) may include multiple channels. In some examples, the multiple channels of the audio guide (14.2-1059) may have the same size and cross-sectional area, or different sizes and/or cross-sectional areas. In some examples, one or more of the channels defined by the audio guide (14.2-1059) may have a rectangular cross-sectional shape, a round or circular cross-sectional shape, or any cross-sectional shape or shapes, as desired. In some examples, the number of channels and their cross-sectional areas may allow the audio guide (14.2-1059) to be relatively flexible in at least one direction while being relatively resistant to compression or collapse in other directions.

The strap (14.2-1030) may also include some or all of the other components and features of other straps described herein. For example, an audio module (14.2-1058) may be located remotely from the audio port (14.2-1033) and communicate with the audio port (14.2-1033) via an audio guide (14.2-1059), but the strap (14.2-1030) may include another audio module (14.2-1057) that may be located proximate the audio port (14.2-1033) to communicate therewith. The strap may also include a printed circuit board that may be connected to other connectors (14.2-1032) and/or components (14.2-1057, 14.2-1058) of the strap (14.2-1030) via various transmitting components (14.2-1051).

Any number or variety of components of any of the configurations described herein may be included in a wearable electronic device, such as an HMD device and/or HMD system, described herein. The components may include any combination of the features described herein and may be arranged in any of the various configurations described herein. The concepts relating to the structure and arrangement of the components of the device, as well as their use, may be applied to any number of embodiments in any combination, as well as to the specific examples discussed herein. Various examples of electronic devices and electronic device components, including some examples having various features in various arrangements, are described below with reference to FIGS. 612-614.

FIG. 612 illustrates an exploded view of a wearable electronic device (14.2-1100) that may include modular components that may be selectively and removably or releasably attached or coupled to one another as described herein. In some examples, the device (14.2-1100) may be substantially similar to, or may include some or all of the features of, other wearable electronic devices described herein. Like the electronic device (14.2-200), the device (14.2-1100) may include a head mounted display (HMD) (14.2-1110), a retention band (14.2-1120), and one or more connector straps (14.2-1130, 14.2-1131).

The connector straps (14.2-1130, 14.2-1131) may include a plurality of connectors, such as HMD connectors (14.2-1132, 14.2-1133), that can be releasably coupled to corresponding connectors on the HMD, such as connector (14.2-1112). While the straps (14.2-230, 14.2-231) of FIG. 603a included separate retention band connectors and complementary unit connectors, the device (14.2-1100) may include a retention band (14.2-1120) that includes an integrated complementary unit (14.2-1122). Accordingly, the straps (14.2-1130, 14.2-1131) may mechanically couple the straps (14.2-1130, 14.2-1131) to the retention band (14.2-1120) and may include combined retention band and complementary unit connectors (14.2-1136, 14.2-1137) capable of electrically communicating data and/or power with a complementary unit (14.2-1122) of the retention band (14.2-1120). The retention band (14.2-1120) itself may include corresponding connectors (14.2-1126, 14.2-1127) that are releasably coupleable to the retention band connectors (14.2-1136, 14.2-1137).

Additionally, as described above, the connector straps (14.2-1130, 14.2-1131) may include a stiffener (14.2-1152) disposed in the flexible housing, wherein the stiffener (14.2-1152) may be flexible along a first bending direction, such as a direction extending into and out of the page of FIG. 612, indicated by the "Z" direction. Additionally, the stiffener (14.2-1152) may be rigid in one or more other bending directions, such as one or more directions parallel to the plane of the page of FIG. 612, indicated by the "X" and "Y" directions, each of which is substantially perpendicular to the "Z" direction. The rigidity in the "X" and "Y" directions allows the connector straps (14.2-1130, 14.2-1131) to support both the HMD (14.2-1110) and the retention band (14.2-1120) during operation against moments or rotational forces induced by the HMD (14.2-1110) and the retention band (14.2-1120). In this manner, the connector straps (14.2-1130, 14.2-1131) provide sufficient structural rigidity to maintain the relative positions of the respective components in the system during use. At the same time, the flexibility provided in the "Z" direction provides a snug and comfortable fit on the side of the user's head during use, and can maintain and enhance the secured fit provided by the retention band (14.2-1120). In some examples, the stiffener (14.2-1152) may include a polymeric material, a metallic material, and/or a combination thereof. In some examples, the reinforcement (14.2-1152) may have a higher stiffness in at least one bending direction or axis than the material forming the majority of the connector straps (14.2-1130, 14.2-1131). In some examples, the reinforcement (14.2-1152) may comprise metal in the form of a metal sheet.

In one example, the shape and material of the connector straps (14.2-1130, 14.2-1131) provide a desired combination of flexibility in the "Z" direction and stiffness in the "X" and "Y" directions, even without reinforcement (14.2-1152). In this example, the approximately rectangular cross-sectional profile of the connector straps (14.2-1130, 14.2-1131) having a height between approximately 5 and 10 times, 10 and 20 times, 20 and 50 times, or 50 and 100 times their width allows for bending or low-force buckling of the connector strap in the "Z" direction, while resisting buckling in the "X" and "Y" directions. That is, buckling the connector straps (14.2-1130, 14.2-1131) in the "X" and "Y" directions may require 10, 20, 30, 50, or more times the force required to buckle the connector straps in the "Z" direction. Additional modifications, such as profile curves or directional stiffeners, may be added to the connector straps (14.2-1130, 14.2-1131) to further strengthen the connector straps in the desired directions.

In some examples, the retention band (14.2-1120) may additionally, or alternatively, include other operating or functional components to the supplementary unit (14.2-1122). For example, the component (14.2-1122) may include a battery module capable of electrically communicating with the straps (14.2-1130, 14.2-1131). Additionally, the device (14.2-1100) may include a separate processing unit (not shown), such as the supplementary unit (14.2-140) illustrated in FIG. 602c, which may be connected to the strap (14.2-1130), while the retention band (14.2-1120) includes an additional second processing unit (14.2-1122). Additional details regarding various components of wearable electronic devices are discussed with respect to FIG. 613.

FIG. 613 illustrates an exploded view of a wearable electronic device (14.2-1200) that may include modular components that may be selectively and removably or releasably attached or coupled to one another as described herein. In some examples, the device (14.2-1200) may be substantially similar to, or may include some or all of the features of, other wearable electronic devices described herein. Like the electronic device (14.2-100), the device (14.2-1200) may include a head mounted display (HMD) (14.2-1210), a retention band (14.2-1220), and one or more connector straps (14.2-1230, 14.2-1231), and a complementary unit (14.2-1240).

The connector straps (14.2-1230, 14.2-1231) may include a plurality of connectors, such as HMD connectors (14.2-1232, 14.2-1233), which may be releasably coupled to corresponding connectors on the HMD, such as connector (14.2-1212). The connector straps (14.2-1230, 14.2-1231) may also include retention band connectors (14.2-1234, 14.2-1235), which may be releasably coupled to corresponding connectors (14.2-1224, 14.2-1225) on the retention band (14.2-1220). The connector strap (14.2-1230) may include a complementary unit connector (14.2-1236) that is releasably coupled to the complementary unit (14.2-1240) via a conductor or cable (14.2-1242). In some examples, the retention band (14.2-1220) may include a band (14.2-1222) designed to secure the device (14.2-1200) to the user, and a pocket or compartment (14.2-1226) that can be attached to the band (14.2-1222) and configured to hold or retain the complementary unit (14.2-1240). In this manner, the complementary unit (14.2-1240) may be fully portable on the device (14.2-1200) without the need to attach the complementary unit (14.2-1240) to the user at another location.

FIG. 614 illustrates an exploded view of a wearable electronic device (14.2-1300) that may include modular components that may be selectively and removably or releasably attached or coupled to one another as described herein. In some examples, the device (14.2-1300) may be substantially similar to, or may include some or all of the features of, other wearable electronic devices described herein. Like the electronic device (14.2-100), the device (14.2-1300) may include a head mounted display (HMD) (14.2-1310), a retention band (14.2-1320), and one or more connector straps (14.2-1330, 14.2-1331).

The connector straps (14.2-1330, 14.2-1331) may include a plurality of connectors, such as HMD connectors (14.2-1332, 14.2-1333), which may be releasably coupled to corresponding connectors on the HMD, such as connector (14.2-1312). The connector straps (14.2-1330, 14.2-1331) may also include retention band connectors (14.2-1334, 14.2-1335), which may be releasably coupled to corresponding connectors (14.2-1324, 14.2-1325) on the retention band (14.2-1320). The connector strap (14.2-1330) may include a complementary unit connector (14.2-1336) that may be releasably coupled to the complementary unit (14.2-1340) via a conductor or cable (14.2-1342). While some examples described herein may include two or more modular or separate connector straps, in some examples the connector straps (14.2-1330, 14.2-1331) may be releasably or permanently connected to one another, for example, by a third strap or head strap (14.2-1339). In some examples, such a head strap (14.2-1339) may extend over the head of a user when the wearable electronic device (14.2-1300) is worn by the user. Accordingly, the head strap (14.2-1339) may be secured to the user and provide a comfortable fit. Additionally, in instances where the strap (14.2-1339) is removably or releasably attached to the straps (14.2-1330, 14.2-1331), the user may choose whether to use the straps (14.2-1339) depending on a particular usage scenario of the device (14.2-1300). In some instances, the strap (14.2-1339) may comprise any material desired, including polymeric materials, fabric materials, and any of the materials described with respect to the connector straps and/or retention bands.

14.3: Modular Straps for Electronic Devices

As virtual reality (VR) and mixed reality (MR) become more widespread, the demand for user-friendly head-mounted displays with high-quality components is increasing. Traditionally, these VR/MR systems have consisted of a wearable display component, commonly referred to as a head-mounted display (HMD), and a complementary unit. The complementary unit may be part of the HMD or may be a separate component permanently or removably connected to the HMD via cables, wires, or other conductors. The complementary unit may provide power and/or additional processing capabilities to the system.

The devices of the present disclosure include one or more additional dongles for improved connectivity to these complementary components. For example, the HMD system of the present disclosure includes a first dongle for attaching a power supply to a first removable strap (e.g., a modular band of the HMD system). Additionally, the HMD system includes a second dongle for attaching an external computing device or display to a second removable strap (e.g., another modular band of the HMD system). By having separate designated dongles (e.g., one for power and one for data transmission), the HMD system of the present disclosure can significantly improve throughput. Advantageously, this can enable developers or programmers to quickly upload and download data from the HMD system while still powering the devices individually.

Additionally, the present disclosure relates to various thermal ergonomic improvements for removable straps. Removable straps may contain various electrical components, including (to name a few) batteries, integrated circuits, and speakers. Such electrical components can generate significant amounts of heat energy, particularly for longer usage periods and high-load computing applications. Therefore, considering the location of the removable strap (and its associated electrical components) next to the user's head, managing heat output is important.

To reduce or mitigate hot spots along removable straps, the present disclosure includes electrical pods positioned along the removable straps. These electrical pods may include a thermal shell and other thermal elements that provide a combination of heat shielding and heat dissipation. Thus, the removable straps may provide increased comfort to the user. Additionally, the removable straps may reduce (or more efficiently dissipate) heat load.

These and other embodiments are discussed below with reference to FIGS. 615 through 622. However, those skilled in the art will readily recognize that the detailed description provided herein with respect to these drawings is for illustrative purposes only and should not be construed as limiting. Moreover, as used herein, a system, method, article, component, feature, or sub-feature that includes at least one of the first option, the second option, or the third option should be understood to refer to a system, method, article, component, feature, or sub-feature that can include one of each of the listed options (e.g., only one of the first option, only one of the second option, or only one of the third option), multiple of a single listed option (e.g., two or more of the first option), two options simultaneously (e.g., one of the first option and one of the second option), or a combination thereof (e.g., two of the first option and one of the second option).

FIG. 615 illustrates a plan view of a wearable electronic device (14.3-100) worn on a user's head (14.3-101). The wearable electronic device (14.3-100), as well as other wearable electronic devices disclosed herein, may also be referred to as HMD systems, electronic devices, or simply devices. The device (14.3-100) may include a number of modular components. For example, the device (14.3-100) may include a head-mounted display (HMD) (14.3-102) that includes a housing (14.3-104) and a display (14.3-106) attached to the housing (14.3-104) for displaying images to the user.

The HMD may also be referred to as a display portion or display module having a display (14.3-106). The display portion may include a housing (14.3-104) that at least partially constitutes the HMD and a display (14.3-106). In one or more examples, including the example illustrated in FIG. 615 and other examples illustrated in other drawings, the HMD (14.3-102) may also be referred to as an output component, output module. Such output components, modules, or portions may include one or more outputs other than visual outputs from the display. For example, an output module similar to the HMD (14.3-102) may include a speaker that outputs sound instead of or in addition to the display (14.3-106) illustrated in FIG. 615.

Additionally, an example of a device (14.3-100) may include a modular fastening assembly (14.3-108) that fastens an HMD (14.3-102) to a user's head (14.3-101). The modular fastening assembly (14.3-108) includes removable straps (14.3-110, 14.3-112). The modular fastening assembly (14.3-108) further includes a retention band (14.3-114). Accordingly, the modular fastening assembly (14.3-108) is configured to removably fasten a wearable electronic device (14.3-100) including an HMD (14.3-102) to a user's head (14.3-101) when the removable straps (14.3-110, 14.3-112) and the retention band (14.3-114) are connected as illustrated in FIG. 615.

In certain examples, the removable straps (14.3-110, 14.3-112) are removably (e.g., detachably) connected to both the HMD (14.3-102) and the retention band (14.3-114). For example, each of the removable straps (14.3-110, 14.3-112) may be removably connected to the HMD (14.3-102) (or its housing or display portion) and the retention band (14.3-114) at opposite ends of each of the removable straps (14.3-110, 14.3-112), as illustrated in FIG. 615. In this example, the modular fastening assembly (14.3-108) is modular in that each of the removable straps (14.3-110, 14.3-112) and the retention band (14.3-114) can be connected and disconnected as desired. For example, each of the removable straps (14.3-110, 14.3-112) can be removed from the modular fastening assembly (14.3-108) and replaced with one or more other modules, straps, or electronic components.

One or more other examples of the device (14.3-100) may include alternative configurations of the removable straps (14.3-110, 14.3-112) illustrated in FIG. 615. For example, the device (14.3-100) may be positioned elsewhere along the modular fastening assembly (14.3-108) (differently than illustrated in FIG. 615). Additionally, one or more examples of the wearable electronic devices described herein may include one or more intermediate members, flexible straps, or other optional supplementary components and electronic modules, such as external power supplies, memory components, and/or processors.

In the example illustrated in FIG. 615, when the device (14.3-100) is worn on a user's head, the removable strap (14.3-110) is positioned on the left side of the user's head and the removable strap (14.3-112) is positioned on the right side of the user's head. The retention band (14.3-114) may be spanned between the removable straps (14.3-110, 14.3-112) to wrap around the back of the user's head (14.3-101) as illustrated.

In some examples, and as illustrated, the device (14.3-100) may be worn on the user's head (14.3-101) such that the HMD (14.3-102) is worn on the user's face and positioned over one or both eyes. The HMD (14.3-102) may be removably and/or releasably connected to one or more of the removable straps (14.3-110, 14.3-112) as described above. In some examples, the removable straps (14.3-110, 14.3-112) may be positioned against and in contact with the side of the user's head (14.3-101). In some examples, the removable straps (14.3-110, 14.3-112) may be positioned over the user's ear or ears. In some examples, the removable straps (14.3-110, 14.3-112) may be positioned adjacent to the user's ear or ears. The removable straps (14.3-110, 14.3-112) may be removably connected to a retention band (14.3-114) that may extend around the user's head (14.3-101) and may be removably connected to another connector strap among the removable straps (14.3-110, 14.3-112). In this manner, the HMD (14.3-102), the removable straps (14.3-110, 14.3-112), and the retention band (14.3-114) may form a loop that may retain the wearable electronic device (14.3-100) on the user's head (14.3-101).

As illustrated in FIG. 615, the removable straps (14.3-110, 14.3-112) may be mechanically and electrically connected to the HMD (14.3-102). In certain examples, the removable straps (14.3-110, 14.3-112) may receive and/or relay at least one of data or power through these connections. In these or other examples, the removable straps (14.3-110, 14.3-112) may be connected to the HMD (14.3-102) at an HMD connection location that may include an electrical input or electrical connector that is attached to the housing (14.3-104) and electrically connected to the display (14.3-106). This location may be identified as the temple area, which may be defined as the area near the user's temple adjacent to the user's eyes, and may extend along the side of the user's head (14.3-101) from in front of the user's eyes to approximately 1 to 1.5 inches past the outer corner of the user's eyes.

Similarly, the removable straps (14.3-110, 14.3-112) may be connected to the retention band (14.3-114) at a retention band connection location identified as an area that can span over the user's ears or within 0.5 inches of the outer edge of each ear. In this manner, the removable straps (14.3-110, 14.3-112) may provide structural support between the HMD (14.3-102) and the user's ears while firmly connecting the retention band (14.3-114) and transmitting the retention forces of the retention band (14.3-114) through the electronic device (14.3-100). However, it should be understood that this configuration is only an example of how components of a modular wearable electronic device (14.3-100) may be arranged and that some may include a different number of removable straps and/or retention bands.

Although a user wearing an HMD (14.3-102) on his head (14.3-101) is illustrated as an example of a wearable electronic device, the modular components, features, and advantages of the various examples of electronic devices disclosed herein may also be applied to other wearable electronic devices having fastening mechanisms, including but not limited to wearable smart watches, fitness trackers, smart glasses, medical monitor devices, and the like. For example, the housing (14.3-104) and display (14.3-106) of the HMD (14.3-102) illustrated in FIG. 615 may also be configured as a housing and display for a smart watch module that is fastened to the user's arm or wrist via a modular fastening mechanism or assembly similar to the fastening assembly (14.3-108) illustrated in FIG. 615. Although referred to as a wearable electronic device (14.3-100), it should be understood that the device (14.3-100) may include a number of modular components or devices and may be interchangeably referred to as a wearable electronic device, a wearable electronic device system, and/or a wearable electronic system. Additionally, while a particular component (14.3-102) may be referred to as an HMD, it should be understood that the terms HMD, HMD device, and/or HMD system may be used to refer to the wearable device (14.3-100) as a whole.

In certain instances, the device (14.3-100) (or HMD system) includes one or more dongles (14.3-116, 14.3-118) connectable to external components or devices, as will now be discussed. As used herein, the term "dongle" may refer to a single piece of electrical hardware, such as a connector, adapter, or mating portion, between an external device/component and one or more components of the device (14.3-100) to provide additional functionality or to enable pass-through to another device that adds functionality. The dongle may include electrical connections for data and/or power transmission through the dongle. In certain instances, the dongle may be unidirectional or bidirectional in terms of data and/or power transmission.

As illustrated in FIG. 615, a dongle (14.3-116) connects a removable strap (14.3-110) to a power supply (14.3-120). As used herein, the term "power supply" refers to any power source that supplies power to one or more components of the device (14.3-100) (e.g., to power a microcontroller, such as a microcontroller within the removable strap (14.3-110), or to charge a battery). For example, the power supply may include fuel cells, battery cells, generators, alternators, solar power converters, motion-based converters (e.g., that convert vibrations or oscillations into power), and the like. In certain implementations, the power supply may convert alternating current to direct current (or vice versa) to charge or recharge components of the device (14.3-100). Some specific examples of power supplies may include switched mode power supplies, uninterruptible power supplies, AC power supplies, DC power supplies, stabilized power supplies, programmable power supplies, computer power supplies, and linear power supplies.

As further illustrated in FIG. 615, the dongle (14.3-118) connects the removable strap (14.3-112) to an external device or display (DoD) (14.3-122). The external device may include a smartphone, tablet, smart television, desktop computer, laptop computer, server/network device, virtual reality device, augmented reality device, smart watch, sound/speaker device, camera device, or other computing device. Additionally, the external display may include a monitor, a device screen (e.g., a display screen for a laptop, television, phone, tablet, etc.), a projector, or other suitable visual medium.

In at least some examples, the external DoD (14.3-122) includes a developer computer (e.g., for receiving and/or transmitting data from one or more components of the device (14.3-100)). In certain examples, the external DoD (14.3-122) uploads computer-executable instructions to one or more components of the device (14.3-100) (e.g., the removable strap (14.3-112)) via the dongle (14.3-118). Additionally or alternatively, the external DoD (14.3-122) may also provide data to and/or receive data from certain component(s) of the device (14.3-100) (e.g., the removable strap (14.3-110)) via the dongle (14.3-116) or other dongle configurations, such as a split-dongle configuration (described below with respect to FIG. 620).

In some examples, the external DoD (14.3-122) receives performance data (e.g., thermal data, power data, data throughput data, etc.). In certain implementations, the external DoD (14.3-122) provides power to one or more components of the device (14.3-100). For example, the external DoD (14.3-122) may power or charge components of the removable strap (14.3-112) by providing power through the dongle (14.3-118). In other examples, the external DoD (14.3-122) does not provide power when the power supply (14.3-120) is capable of providing power to components of both the removable strap (14.3-110) and the removable strap (14.3-112). For example, the power supply (14.3-120) may relay power to the removable strap (14.3-112) via electrical connections between the power supply (14.3-120) and the removable strap (14.3-110) and the HMD (14.3-102) and the removable strap (14.3-112). Alternatively, the power supply (14.3-120) may relay power to the removable strap (14.3-112) via alternative dongle configurations (as described below with respect to FIG. 620).

Additionally or alternatively, the external DoD (14.3-122) includes a display that outputs visual information. For example, the external DoD (14.3-122) includes a monitor that outputs the same visual content depicted in the display (14.3-106). Thus, advantageously, the external DoD (14.3-122) can provide visual feedback (e.g., to developers or programmers) without requiring the user to wear the device (14.3-100). Similarly, the external DoD (14.3-122) can provide visual feedback (e.g., on a developer computer screen) simultaneously while the user is wearing the device (14.3-100).

In one or more examples of the present disclosure, the dongles (14.3-116, 14.3-118) may include various bandwidth capabilities. In certain examples, the dongle (14.3-116) includes a first bandwidth, and the dongle (14.3-118) includes a second bandwidth greater than the first bandwidth. For example, the dongle (14.3-118) may provide increased throughput of at least one of data or power (relative to the dongle (14.3-116)). In this manner, the dongle (14.3-118) may enable larger and/or faster data uploads and downloads (for developer work or testing on the device (14.3-100)).

In some examples, the dongles (14.3-116, 14.3-118) may also include variable bandwidths that can be reduced (e.g., decreased) or increased as desired. For example, the dongles (14.3-116, 14.3-118) may include bandwidths that are adjusted based on one or more performance metrics (e.g., throughput rates, visual content quality/resolution, thermal output, etc.). Indeed, as discussed further below with respect to FIGS. 618 and 619, the electronic device pods of one or both of the removable straps (14.3-110, 14.3-112) may generate thermal output that is diffused or dissipated into the surrounding environment (e.g., to reduce heat transfer to the user). To help reduce the heat output (and/or the amount of heat output to be dissipated) of the electronic device pod, one or more components of the device (14.3-100) may change (e.g., reduce) the bandwidth via the dongles (14.3-116, 14.3-118). As used herein, the term "bandwidth" refers to the rate of power transfer (e.g., power bandwidth) or data transfer (e.g., data bandwidth) via electrical wiring and connections or otherwise wirelessly. In some cases, the term bandwidth may include the maximum transfer rate over a given path.

In these or other examples, at least one of the data bandwidth or power bandwidth through the dongles (14.3-116, 14.3-118) may be reduced when the thermal output reaches a threshold thermal output (e.g., a predetermined temperature reading). For example, the microcontroller (discussed below) may reduce the bandwidth through at least one of the dongles (14.3-116, 14.3-118) in response to a temperature sensor within the removable straps (14.3-110, 14.3-112) indicating a temperature exceeding a predetermined temperature, such as 100 degrees Fahrenheit.

Any of the features, components, and portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 615) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings. Likewise, any of the features, components, and portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 615.

FIG. 616 illustrates a perspective view of an example of a wearable electronic device (14.3-200) including a display portion (14.3-202) in the form of an HMD having a housing (14.3-204). The display portion (14.3-202) can be secured to a user's head via a modular fastening assembly (14.3-208) that can include a first removable strap (14.3-210), a second removable strap (14.3-212), and a retention band (14.3-214). The first removable strap (14.3-210) can be removably connected to the display portion (14.3-202) or its housing (14.3-204) at a first end (14.3-216) of the first removable strap (14.3-210). A second end (14.3-218) of a first removable strap (14.3-210) can be removably connected to a first end (14.3-220) of a retention band (14.3-214). Similarly, a second removable strap (14.3-212) can be removably connected to the display portion (14.3-202) or its housing (14.3-204) at a first end (14.3-222) of the second removable strap (14.3-212). A second end (14.3-224) of the second removable strap (14.3-212) can be removably connected to a second end (14.3-226) of the retention band (14.3-214).

FIG. 617 illustrates an exploded perspective view of an example of a wearable electronic device (14.3-300) similar to the device (14.3-200) illustrated in FIG. 616. The device (14.3-300) of FIG. 617 includes a display portion (14.3-302) in the form of an HMD having a housing (14.3-304). The display portion (14.3-302) can be secured to a user's head via a modular fastening assembly (14.3-308) that can include a first removable strap (14.3-310), a second removable strap (14.3-312), and a retention band (14.3-314). A first removable strap (14.3-310) can be removably connected to the display portion (14.3-302) or its housing (14.3-304) at a first end (14.3-316) of the first removable strap (14.3-310). A second end (14.3-318) of the first removable strap (14.3-310) can be removably connected to a first end (14.3-320) of the retention band (14.3-314). Similarly, a second removable strap (14.3-312) can be removably connected to the display portion (14.3-302) or its housing (14.3-304) at a first end (14.3-322) of the second removable strap (14.3-312). A second end (14.3-324) of a second removable strap (14.3-312) can be removably connected to a second end (14.3-326) of a retention band (14.3-314).

An example of a device (14.3-300) of FIG. 617 is shown in an exploded view to illustrate the modularity of the fixed assembly (14.3-308), wherein each of the first and second removable straps (14.3-310, 14.3-312) can be individually removed or replaced and removably connected to a retaining band (14.3-314) and a display portion (14.3-302) or other display component or other output component, such as a speaker component or module.

Any of the features, components, or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIGS. 616 and 617) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in the other drawings. Likewise, any of the features, components, and portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in the other drawings) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 616 and 617. For example, at least one of the dongles (14.3-116, 14.3-118) illustrated in FIG. 615 above may be implemented correspondingly with the removable straps (14.3-210, 14.3-212) and/or the removable straps (14.3-310, 14.3-312) of FIG. 616 and FIG. 617.

FIG. 618 illustrates a side profile view of an exemplary removable strap of an HMD system according to one or more examples of the present disclosure. In particular, FIG. 618 illustrates a removable strap (14.3-412) including an electronics pod (14.3-400), a heat spreader (14.3-402), and a heat spreader (14.3-404). While a single removable strap is depicted, it will be appreciated that both removable straps of an HMD system of the present disclosure may include the same or similar structure depicted and described with respect to FIG. 618.

As used herein, the term "electronics pod" refers to a subassembly, enclosure, or shell dedicated for housing a given electronic device. In certain implementations, the electrical components of the electronics pod (14.3-400) are communicatively coupled to the HMD (14.3-102) (e.g., via wire(s) (14.3-534) illustrated in FIG. 619). Additionally or alternatively, the electronics pod (14.3-400) may be coupled to one or more dongles (e.g., dongles (14.3-116, 14.3-118) discussed above).

Additionally, the electronic device pod (14.3-400) may generate thermal energy or heat as a result of its operation. In some instances, it is desirable to dissipate this thermal energy or heat away from the user (e.g., toward the surrounding environment and away from the user's head). In some instances, it is also desirable to dissipate this thermal energy or heat away from the electronic device pod (14.3-400) (e.g., by using heat spreaders (14.3-402, 14.3-404)). In certain instances, the heat spreader (14.3-404) dissipates thermal energy from inside the electronic device pod (14.3-400). Optionally, the heat spreader (14.3-402) also dissipates thermal energy from inside the electronic device pod (14.3-400).

As shown below, the heat spreaders (14.3-402, 14.3-404) are in thermal communication with the electronics pod (14.3-400). For example, the heat spreaders (14.3-402, 14.3-404) contact conductive portions of the electronics pod (14.3-400). In certain examples, the heat spreaders (14.3-402, 14.3-404) are positioned beyond the electronics pod (14.3-400). In these or other examples, the term "beyond" refers to an external or outer positioning relative to a boundary/perimeter. For example, the heat spreaders (14.3-402, 14.3-404) are positioned at least partially past the electronics pod (14.3-400) (e.g., outside the outer shell of the electronics pod (14.3-400)).

As used herein, the term "heat spreader" refers to a material that transfers or distributes heat from a hotter source to a cooler source. In some examples, a heat spreader is a thermally conductive element that disperses or dissipates thermal energy from an electronic device pod (14.3-400). By way of example, heat spreaders may include conductive wires, foils, strips, sheets, layers, contacts, and the like. Heat spreaders may also include a variety of materials. For example, heat spreaders may include copper, graphite, diamond, silver, gold, silken carbide, aluminum, tungsten, zinc, carbon fibers (e.g., pitched carbon fibers), and the like. In the example of pitched carbon fibers, it will be appreciated that the fibers may be oriented in one or more predetermined directions for directional heat transfer.

FIG. 619 illustrates a planar cross-sectional profile view of an exemplary electronic device pod according to one or more examples of the present disclosure. As depicted, the electronic device pod (14.3-400) includes a thermal shell (14.3-500) and a cover (14.3-502). The thermal shell (14.3-500) and the cover (14.3-502) together define an interior volume (14.3-504). A number of electrical components may be housed within the interior volume (14.3-504). These electrical components may also generate thermal energy during operation.

Additionally, the thermal shell (14.3-500) and cover (14.3-502) may form a cross-section that is at least partially enclosed, such as a bowl or U shape. In particular, the exemplary thermal shell (14.3-500) includes a plateaued surface. In some examples, the plateaued surface may be oriented toward the user's head. In this manner, audio may be transmitted from the electronic device pod (14.3-400) in a directional manner toward the user's ears. In alternative examples, the plateaued surface of the electronic device pod (14.3-400) may be in contact with the user's skin (e.g., for vibratory sound via bone conduction).

In certain examples, the cover (14.3-502) comprises one or more of various materials. In some examples, the cover (14.3-502) comprises at least one of a foam portion or an aluminum portion. In certain examples, the cover (14.3-502) comprises a stainless steel portion. Additionally, in some examples, the cover (14.3-502) forms a complete enclosure over the interior volume (14.3-504). In other examples, the cover (14.3-502) forms a partial enclosure over the interior volume (14.3-504).

In these or other examples, the bottom surface of the cover (14.3-502) may be attached to the removable strap. Additionally or alternatively, the cover (14.3-502) may be integrated into the removable strap itself. Additionally, in some examples, the thermal shell (14.3-500) includes various layers of materials. In some examples, the thermal shell (14.3-500) includes a clad (e.g., an overmolded clad). The clad may include a first metal layer (14.3-508), a thermal interface material (14.3-510), and a second metal layer (14.3-512).

The metal layers (14.3-508, 14.3-512) may include one or more of a variety of metallic materials. In some examples, the metal layers (14.3-508, 14.3-512) include stainless steel. In other examples, the metal layers (14.3-508, 14.3-512) include chromium, titanium, or the like. However, it will be appreciated that the metal layers (14.3-508, 14.3-512) need not be metallic. For example, the layers (14.3-508, 14.3-512) may be various insulating materials, such as foam, plastic, rubber, ceramic, or the like. It will also be appreciated that the layers (14.3-508, 14.3-512) may be of different materials, as desired.

In some examples, the thermal interface material (14.3-510) may include various thermally conductive materials. As used herein, the term "thermal interface material" refers to a material that is inserted between components or surfaces to enhance thermal coupling therebetween and/or provide a thermal path. Examples of thermal interface materials include thermal epoxies, thermal pastes, thermal adhesives, thermal gap fillers, thermally conductive pads, thermal tapes, phase change materials, or thermally conductive coatings (e.g., metal coatings, diamond coatings, etc.). Accordingly, the thermal interface material may have high thermal conductivity. In certain examples, the thermal interface material (14.3-510) includes one or more copper layers. In one or more examples, the thermal interface material (14.3-510) may be molded into, formed into, or otherwise conformed to the shape of the electronic device pod (14.3-400). Moreover, as discussed below, the thermal interface material (14.3-510) can transfer or dissipate thermal energy to the exterior of the internal volume (14.3-504).

An overmold (14.3-506) may be positioned over the thermal shell (14.3-500). The overmold (14.3-506) may comprise a variety of materials. By way of example, the overmold (14.3-506) may comprise softer materials, textured materials, fabric materials, etc. In certain examples, the overmold (14.3-506) comprises an elastomeric material. For example, the overmold (14.3-506) comprises a fluorocarbon rubber (e.g., Viton® rubber). In these or other examples, the overmold (14.3-506) may conform to the shape of the thermal shell (14.3-500). Additionally or alternatively, the overmold (14.3-506) may provide rigidity or support to the thermal shell (14.3-500).

As mentioned, the electronic device pod (400) may house various electrical components. As illustrated in FIG. 619, the electrical components may include a printed circuit board (PCB) (14.3-514), a battery (14.3-516), a processor such as a microcontroller (14.3-518), a system on a chip (SoC) (14.3-520), and a speaker (14.3-522).

The term "PCB" or "printed circuit board" refers to a logic assembly that includes electronic components. The PCB (14.3-514) includes electrical connections and circuitry for mounting various components, including the SoC (14.3-520). The PCB (14.3-514) may also relay power from a power supply (e.g., a battery, not separately illustrated) to the mounted electrical components. In certain examples, the PCB (14.3-514) is a main logic board. The PCB (14.3-514) may be a rigid board (e.g., composed of a glass epoxy compound). In some examples, the PCB (14.3-514) is a multilayer PCB (e.g., a laminated sandwich structure of conductive and insulating layers). In some examples, the PCB (14.3-514) is flexible (e.g., having flexible circuitry made of polyimide). In some examples, the PCB (14.3-514) includes reinforcements added via lamination or pressure-sensitive adhesive.

The battery (14.3-516) may include a number of different types of batteries or power sources. In practice, the battery (14.3-516) may include one or more electrochemical cells having external connections for powering electrical devices or electrical components. For example, in some embodiments, the battery (14.3-516) includes a lithium-ion battery, an alkaline battery, or the like. In a specific example, the battery (14.3-516) includes a rechargeable battery. In other words, the battery (14.3-516) may be disposable or rechargeable, as desired.

A microcontroller (14.3-518) may direct the operation of one or more other components (e.g., within an electronics pod (14.3-400), a display (14.3-106), etc.). As used herein, the term "microcontroller" refers to a device that can generate an electrical (or digital) signal in response to sensor data from a sensor. In one or more embodiments, the microcontroller includes any of a variety of processors (e.g., a system on a chip, an integrated circuit, a driver, an application processor, a crossover processor, etc.). In some embodiments, the microcontroller further includes one or more memory devices (e.g., discrete nonvolatile memory, embedded nonvolatile memory in a processor, random access memory, memory integrated circuits, DRAM chips, stacked memory modules, storage devices, memory partitions, etc.). In certain embodiments, the microcontroller further includes one or more of input/output ports, counters, timers, etc. It will be appreciated that such microcontrollers may be mounted on a printed circuit board (e.g., a rigid circuit board or a flexible printed circuit board).

The SoC (14.3-520) may include an integrated circuit that integrates a combination of electrical components for the operation of the HMD system. The terms "SoC" and "system on a chip" refer to an electronic chip that generates thermal energy during operation. One or more of the SoC (14.3-520), the microcontroller (14.3-518), or the battery (14.3-516) may be a "heat source," which terms generally refer to a component(s) capable of generating thermal energy. In some examples, the SoC (14.3-520) may include a microchip for generating (e.g., driving) visualizations presented on the display (14.3-106) (as shown in FIG. 615). It will be appreciated that the thermal energy or heat generated by the SoC (14.3-520) may increase over time. Similarly, the thermal energy or heat generated by the SoC (14.3-520) may increase when executing more data-intensive operations (e.g., for more complex or high-fidelity visualizations).

A speaker (14.3-522) may include one or more audio generating components. Exemplary components of the speaker (14.3-522) include a transducer, a magnet, a coil, a diaphragm/driver, etc.

Numerous other components may be included within the electronics pod (14.3-400) (although not explicitly shown in FIG. 619). For example, the electronics pod (14.3-400) may include a heat sink, a microphone, an antenna, one or more sensors (e.g., temperature sensors, pressure sensors, accelerometers, magnetometers, etc.), or other suitable electronic elements.

In one or more examples, components of the electronics pod (14.3-400) may be electrically coupled to a power supply located on the exterior of the electronics pod (14.3-400). For example, wire(s) (14.3-534) may extend through a wire opening (14.3-536) defined by the cover (14.3-502). The wire(s) (14.3-534) may be connected to the PCB (14.3-514) at one end, and the wire(s) (14.3-534) may be connected to a power supply (not shown) at the other end. In this manner, the wire(s) (14.3-534) may provide power to each component electrically coupled to the PCB (14.3-514).

Components of the electronics pod (14.3-400) may also be thermally coupled to the ambient environment or at least one of various thermal elements external to the electronics pod (14.3-400). For example, the electronics pod (14.3-400) includes a thermal conduit. As used herein, the term "thermal conduit" refers to a thermal path for heat flow. A thermal conduit may be conceptualized as linear or direct (e.g., following wire paths). However, a thermal conduit is not limited to such flow paths. In fact, thermal paths may be linear or curved (e.g., non-linear) as a function of the thermal properties of a given medium (whether solid, liquid, or gas). Additionally, a thermal conduit is not limited to two-dimensional space. It will be appreciated that the thermal conduits of the present disclosure include three-dimensional thermal paths through a given volume. However, in at least some examples, the thermal conduit of the present disclosure includes at least one of a thermal connector (14.3-524) or a thermal connector (14.3-526), both of which may be comprised of one or more wires (e.g., copper wires) for conductive heat transfer.

In some examples, the thermal conduit includes a thermal connector (14.3-524). The thermal connector (14.3-524) is positioned inside the interior volume (14.3-504) and connects the PCB (14.3-514) and each associated component to the thermal interface material (14.3-510) at a connection point (14.3-528). Alternatively, the thermal connector (14.3-524) connects a specific component of the electronic device pod (14.3-400), e.g., the SoC (14.3-520), to the thermal interface material (14.3-510).

Thermal energy can be transferred by conduction from components of the electronic device pod (14.3-400) through a thermal connector (14.3-524). The thermal energy can then spread or dissipate along a thermal interface material (14.3-510). In at least some examples, the thermal conduit includes a thermal connector (14.3-526). The thermal connector (14.3-526) is attached to the thermal interface material (14.3-510) at a connection point (14.3-528). The thermal connector (14.3-526) then extends between the clad layers of the thermal shell (14.3-500) (or over the thermal shell (14.3-500) under the overmold (14.3-506) as illustrated). The thermal connector (14.3-526) extends further past the electronics pod (14.3-400) to a connection (14.3-538), where the thermal connector (14.3-526) and the thermal interface material (14.3-510) are thermally coupled to the heat spreader (14.3-404). By coupling the thermal connector (14.3-526) and the thermal interface material (14.3-510) to the heat spreader (14.3-404), thermal energy from the electronics pod (14.3-400) can be further dissipated or spread along the removable strap. In certain instances, the heat spreader (14.3-404) directs this thermal energy toward a second end (14.3-424) opposite the first end (14.3-422) of the removable strap (14.3-412). In this way, heat energy is directed away from the user's temples.

However, as indicated by the dashed line, the removable strap (14.3-412) may include a heat spreader (14.3-402) and associated heat dissipation elements. Like the heat spreader (14.3-404), the heat spreader (14.3-402) may be connected to the thermal interface material (14.3-510) and the thermal connector in a manner similar to that discussed immediately above. In this manner, thermal energy from the electronic device pod (14.3-400) may be directed along the heat spreader (14.3-402) toward the first end (14.3-422) of the removable strap (14.3-412), as desired (e.g., to reduce the heat load through the thermal connector (14.3-524), the thermal connector (14.3-526), and/or the heat spreader (14.3-404).

To accommodate these and/or other thermal couplings of the present disclosure, the thermal shell (14.3-500) includes certain etched portions that expose segments of the thermal interface material (14.3-510). In practice, the thermal shell (14.3-500) includes etched openings (14.3-530) and etched openings (14.3-532). The etched openings (14.3-530, 14.3-532) may be formed in a variety of ways. In some examples, chemical etching may be used to form the etched openings (14.3-530, 14.3-532). In other examples, laser etching may be used to form the etched openings (14.3-530, 14.3-532). In these examples, the etched opening (14.3-530) is defined by a removed portion of the metal layer (14.3-512). Similarly, the etched opening (14.3-532) is defined by a removed portion of the metal layer (14.3-508). Through the etched openings (14.3-530, 14.3-532), the thermal interface material (14.3-510) is exposed for one or more conductive connections (e.g., for conductive heat transfer).

Additionally or alternatively to the thermal connector (14.3-524), heat may be transferred from the electrical components of the electronic device pod (14.3-400) to the thermal interface material (14.3-510) via forced or unforced convection. For example, thermal energy may travel by convection through the etched opening (14.3-530) and impinge on the thermal interface material (14.3-510). As used herein, the term "conduction" or "natural conduction" refers to heat transfer through components connected by conduction. In contrast, the term "unforced convection" refers to free or natural convection in which air movement is caused by natural, buoyancy forces resulting from density variations caused by variations in thermal temperature within the air. Unforced convection differs from forced convection in which the fluid (e.g., air) is forced to flow by internal sources such as fans, stirring, or pumps to create artificially induced convective flow.

FIG. 620 illustrates a plan view of a wearable electronic device (14.3-600) worn on a user's head (14.3-101). The wearable electronic device (14.3-600) is identical or similar to the wearable electronic device (100) discussed above with reference to FIG. 615. However, unlike the wearable electronic device (14.3-600), the wearable electronic device (14.3-600) includes a dongle (14.3-618). As illustrated, the dongle (14.3-618) is a split dongle. In particular, the dongle (14.3-618) includes a first portion (14.3-619) that connects a removable strap (14.3-112) and an external DoD (14.3-122). Additionally, the dongle (14.3-618) includes a second portion (14.3-621) that connects the removable strap (14.3-112) to at least one of the power supply (14.3-120) or the removable strap (14.3-110).

Advantageously, the dongle (14.3-618) can provide various use-case applications. For example, the power supply (14.3-120) can additionally provide power to the removable strap (14.3-112) via the second portion (14.3-621). In another example, an external DoD (14.3-122) can provide data to both the removable straps (14.3-110, 14.3-112) via the dongle (14.3-618). In at least some examples, the dongle (14.3-618) can improve bandwidth through the wearable electronic device (14.3-600) (e.g., by bypassing the HMD (14.3-102) for transmitting data around the wearable electronic device (14.3-600). By transmitting data to the removable strap (14.3-110) via the dongle (14.3-618) and in particular via the second portion (14.3-621), the wearable electronic device (14.3-600) may also include reduced thermal loads on bypassed components (e.g., via the removable strap (14.3-112) and the HMD (14.3-102)).

Figures 621 and 622 illustrate schematic diagrams of exemplary cable management mechanisms for HMD systems according to one or more examples of the present disclosure. In particular, Figure 621 depicts a dongle (14.3-718) connected to a removable strap (14.3-112). The dongle (14.3-718) may be identical or similar to the dongles (14.3-118, 14.3-618) discussed above. The dongle (14.3-718) also includes a slack (14.3-702) (e.g., a portion of the cable for routing to an external DoD (14.3-122)). To help prevent unwanted positioning or tangling, the retention band (14.3-114) may include a cable management mechanism (14.3-700).

A cable management mechanism (14.3-700) may route, position, tension, or otherwise manage slack (14.3-702) for a dongle (14.3-718). In some examples, the cable management mechanism (14.3-700) includes an outer ring, clip, button snap, Velcro® strip, tie, or the like that attaches to a retaining band (14.3-114). In other examples, the cable management mechanism (14.3-700) includes an opening, slot, or recess within the retaining band (14.3-114).

Similarly, FIG. 622 illustrates a dongle (14.3-818) connected to a removable strap (14.3-112). The dongle (14.3-818) may be identical or similar to the dongles (14.3-118, 14.3-618) discussed above. Like the dongle (14.3-718), the dongle (14.3-818) includes a slack (14.3-802) (e.g., for routing to an external DoD (14.3-122)). The cable management mechanism (14.3-800) is configured to efficiently handle the slack (14.3-802) by including one or more of the length or tension of the slack (14.3-802).

In some examples, the cable management mechanism (14.3-800) includes a retractable spool. Through the retractable spool, the slack (14.3-802) can be pulled or lengthened by manual interaction. In some examples, the slack (14.3-802) can be pulled to a desired length, and the retractable spool can be locked in place to maintain the amount or tension of the slack (14.3-802). In some examples, the cable management mechanism (14.3-800) can automatically retract the slack (14.3-802). In other examples, the cable management mechanism (14.3-800) retracts the slack (14.3-802) in response to user interaction with at least one of the slack (14.3-802) or the cable management mechanism (14.3-800). For example, the cable management mechanism (14.3-800) may include a button release to initiate winding of the slack (14.3-802). In other cases, the cable management mechanism (14.3-800) may wind the slack (14.3-802) in response to a pull (e.g., a directional tug) on the slack (14.3-802).

14.4: Devices with detachable headbands

Head-mounted devices include head-mounted support structures that allow the devices to be worn on a user's head. The head-mounted support structures may include device housings that encapsulate components, such as displays. The displays may be used to present visual content to a user. Head-mounted support structures for head-mounted devices may also include headbands and other structures that help maintain the device housing on the user's face. The headband of the head-mounted device may be removable. This allows users to use different headbands to accommodate different head sizes and/or update the style of the headband they are using.

Figure 623 is a side view of a head-mounted electronic device having a detachable headband. As shown in Figure 623, the head-mounted device (14.4-10) may include a head-mounted housing (14.4-12) (sometimes referred to as a main housing, a main housing unit, a head-mounted support structure, a main housing portion, etc.). The housing (14.4-12) may have walls or other structures that separate an inner housing region from an outer region surrounding the housing (14.4-12). For example, the housing (14.4-12) may have walls formed from polymers, glass, metal, and/or other materials. Electrical and optical components may be mounted in the housing (14.4-12). These components may include components such as integrated circuits, sensors, control circuitry, input/output devices, and the like.

To present images to a user for viewing from eye boxes (e.g., eye boxes where the user's eyes are positioned when the device (14.4-10) is worn on the user's head), the device (14.4-10) may include displays and lenses. These components may be mounted on optical modules (14.4-20) facing the rear (R) of the device (14.4-10), or may be mounted on other support structures in the housing (14.4-12) to form respective left and right optical systems. For example, there may be a left display for presenting images from the left eye box to the user's left eye through the left lens, and a right display for presenting images from the right eye box to the user's right eye.

If desired, the housing (14.4-12) may have forward-facing components such as cameras and other sensors on the front (F) for collecting sensor measurements and other input, and may have a soft cushion on the opposite rear (R). The rear (R) may have openings that allow the user to view images from the left and right optical modules (14.4-20) (e.g., when the rear (R) is placed in front of the user's head).

The device (14.4-10) may have a strap, such as a headband (14.4-26), and, if desired, other structures (e.g., an optional over-the-head strap) to help maintain the housing (14.4-12) on the user's head. The headband (14.4-26) may have a fixed length or may be adjustable. The headband (14.4-26) may have first and second ends coupled to the left and right sides of the housing (14.4-12), respectively. In the example of FIG. 623, coupling members (14.4-24) that serve as extensions of the housing (14.4-12) are provided on the left and right sides of the housing (14.4-12). The members (14.4-24) may be formed of rigid materials, such as rigid polymers, and/or other materials, and may include sensors, buttons, speakers, and other electrical components. Hinges and/or other mechanisms may be used to couple the members (14.4-24) to the housing (14.4-12), or the members (14.4-24) may be formed as integral parts of the main housing unit. The ends of the headband (14.4-26) may have coupling mechanisms, such as openings, configured to receive posts (14.4-30) (pins) or other protrusions on the members (14.4-24) or other housing structures. In some examples, these posts face inward toward the user's head and are not visible to persons near the device (14.4-10) when the device (14.4-10) is being worn by the user. Releasable latch mechanisms may be used to assist in securing the ends of the headband (14.4-26) to the member (14.4-24). For example, a first releasable latch may be used to removably couple the left end of the headband (14.4-26) to a left post on a left member (14.4-24) on a left side of the housing (14.4-12), and a second releasable latch may be used to removably couple the right end of the headband (14.4-26) to a right post on a right member (14.4-24) on a right side of the housing (14.4-12). If desired, the user can flip the headband (14.4-26) over so that the first removable latch removably engages the end of the headband (14.4-26) that was previously engaged to the left post to the right post, and the second removable latch removably engages the end of the headband (14.4-26) that was previously engaged to the right post to the left post (e.g., the user can flip the left and right sides of the band without turning the band inside out). The user can open or close the latches when the housing (14.4-12) is being worn or when the housing (14.4-12) is not being worn.

The use of latch-based engagement mechanisms in the device (14.4-10) may assist in allowing a user to removably attach the headband (14.4-26) to the members (14.4-24) and thereby removably attach the headband (14.4-26) to the housing (14.4-12). The members (14.4-24) may have elongated shapes of the type illustrated in FIG. 623 and/or other suitable shapes, and may sometimes be referred to as (for example) rigid straps, rigid engagement members, power straps, head-mounted device housing structures, elongated head-mounted device housing members, elongated housing structures, elongated housing members, or head-mounted device housing members.

The headband (14.4-26) may have soft flexible portions and/or rigid portions. For example, the central portion of the headband (14.4-26) may be formed of a stretchable fabric. Left and right end portions of the headband (14.4-26) may be joined to opposite ends of the central portion. The left and right end portions may, for example, have stiffening structures (e.g., the left and right end portions may be stiffer than the central stretchable portion). If desired, other types of configurations may be used for the headband (14.4-26) (e.g., arrangements having adjustable tensioning cables, etc.).

FIG. 624 is a drawing of an end portion of a headband (14.4-26) and a corresponding end portion of a member (14.4-24). Housing structures such as the headband (14.4-26) and members (14.4-24) may sometimes be collectively referred to as forming a head-mounted device headband system (headband system (14.4-22)). As shown in the example of FIG. 624, the member (14.4-24) may have a protruding post, such as a post (14.4-30), (e.g., a post that protrudes from the member (14.4-24) toward the user's head while the device (14.4-10) is being worn by the user). The headband (14.4-26) may have a corresponding opening (14.4-32) configured to receive the post (14.4-30).

The opening (14.4-32) may be a through hole opening having a shape matching the outline of the post (14.4-30). In the present example, the post (14.4-30) and the opening (14.4-32) have elongated shapes (e.g., rectangular shapes with rounded corners) when viewed end-on. These elongated shapes may help resist rotational movement between the longitudinal axis (14.4-34) of the headband (14.4-26) and the longitudinal axis (14.4-36) of the member (14.4-24). This helps prevent the headband (14.4-26) from sliding up or down along the posterior surface of the user's head during use. In general, the post (14.4-30) and/or the mating opening (14.4-32) may have any suitable shape (e.g., the shape of the post (14.4-30) and/or the opening (14.4-32) may be circular, oval, rectangular, triangular, may have curved edges and/or straight edges, may have drafted edges to aid alignment and/or insertion, etc.). The use of rectangular shapes with rounded corners and/or other elongated shapes (e.g., along the respective longitudinal axes (14.4-40, 14.4-38) of FIG. 624, respectively) is for illustrative purposes only.

Figure 625 is a side cross-sectional view of the system (14.4-22). As shown in Figure 625, the member (14.4-24) can have a main portion (14.4-24M). The main portion (14.4-24M) can serve as a support for the post (14.4-30) and can be formed of a rigid polymer, metal, fabric, carbon-fiber composites, and/or other materials. The post (14.4-30) can be attached to the main portion (14.4-24M) and can protrude inwardly (or in some examples, outwardly) from the portion (14.4-24M). The post (14.4-30) can be formed of a metal, a rigid polymer, other materials, and/or combinations of these materials. The post (14.4-30) may have a main portion (14.4-30C) that protrudes away from the surface of the portion (14.4-24M). The post (14.4-30) may also have a peripheral protrusion, such as a peripheral protrusion portion (14.4-30P). The portion (14.4-30P) may, for example, extend along the periphery of the post (14.4-30) and protrude radially outwardly from the main portion (14.4-30C). In the example of Fig. 625, the protruding portion (14.4-30P) has bevels to enable entry of the post (14.4-30) into the opening (14.4-32) of the headband (14.4-26) in the direction (14.4-54) and removal of the post (14.4-30) from the opening (14.4-32) in the opposite direction when separating the headband (14.4-26) from the member (14.4-24).

The headband (14.4-26) has a main strap portion (14.4-44). The strap portion (14.4-44), which may sometimes be referred to as a strap or headband member, may have internal reinforcing members, external fabric coverings and/or other covering layers, strips of reinforcing fabric, stretch fabric portions (e.g., stretch knit fabric), decorative coverings, and/or other headband structures. The through hole opening (14.4-32) may be formed by cutting or otherwise forming an opening in the portion (14.4-44). The perimeter of the opening (14.4-32) may be reinforced using a mating pair of ring members (14.4-40). The members (14.4-40), which may sometimes be referred to as a cap and socket, may have ring shapes and may capture portions of the strap (14.4-44). The members (14.4-40) may be attached to each other using laser welding and/or other attachment mechanisms. An adhesive may optionally be used to help secure the members (14.4-40) to the strap (14.4-44).

When the members (14.4-50) are attached to each other, a ring-shaped recess, such as a recess (14.4-52), is formed. A spring (14.4-42) (e.g., a spring formed of metal, foam, an extensible rubber gasket material or other elastomeric material, and/or other spring structures) may have a ring shape surrounding the opening (14.4-32) and may be received within the recess (14.4-52). A gap (14.4-46) may be formed on one side of the spring (14.4-42). As shown in the plan view of the spring (14.4-42) of Fig. 626, the presence of the gap (14.4-46) allows the spring (14.4-42) to expand outward in the direction (14.4-56) when the post (14.4-30) is inserted into the opening (14.4-32) and the inclined surfaces on the protruding portion (14.4-30P) radially outwardly urge the spring (14.4-42). Once the post (14.4-30) is inserted into the opening (14.4-32) sufficiently to allow the protrusion (14.4-30P) to pass through the spring (14.4-42), the spring (14.4-42) contracts inwardly with respect to the main portion (14.4-30C), thereby retaining the post (14.4-30) within the opening (14.4-32) and securing the headband (14.4-26) to the member (14.4-24). When removal of the headband (14.4-26) is desired, the headband (14.4-26) can be pulled away from the member (14.4-24). During headband removal, the inclined surfaces on the portion (14.4-30P) press against the spring (14.4-42) and expand the spring (14.4-42) radially, thereby allowing the post (14.4-30) to be removed from the opening (14.4-32).

The exemplary spring-based headband retention arrangement of FIGS. 625 and 626 allows the headband (14.4-26) to be attached and detached from the member (14.4-24). If desired, a latch-based mechanism may be used to secure and release the headband (14.4-26). An arrangement of this type is illustrated in FIG. 627. As illustrated in the example of FIG. 627, the system (14.4-22) may include a latching mechanism, such as a latch (14.4-62). The latch (14.4-62), which may sometimes be referred to as a latch mechanism or latch structure, may be opened and closed using magnets, springs, sliding members, toggling members, rotating members, such as knobs, buttons, and/or other latch structures that may be operated by a user (e.g., the user's finger). In the example of FIG. 627, the latch of the headband (14.4-26) has a movable latch member that engages the post (14.4-30) when the post (14.4-30) is within the opening (14.4-32) and has an associated release mechanism, such as a release tab (14.4-62T). The tab (14.4-62T), which may be formed of a flexible strip of material (e.g., fabric, polymer, and/or other material), can be pulled in a direction (14.4-64) by the user (e.g., when the user grasps the tab (14.4-62T) between the user's fingers), thereby moving the movable latch member out of engagement with the post (14.4-30). This releases the post (14.4-30) and allows the post (14.4-30) to be removed from the opening (14.4-32). Magnets, spring structures, and/or other biasing structures may be used to close the latch. In some examples, the member (14.4-24) and the headband (14.4-26) may have magnets that enable attachment of the headband (14.4-26) and the member (14.4-24). For example, as illustrated in FIG. 627, the post (14.4-30) may have one or more magnets, such as magnets (14.4-60). The magnet (14.4-60) may be used to attract and/or repel corresponding magnets within the strap (14.4-44), which may assist in attaching the headband (14.4-26) to the member (14.4-24) and/or assist in closing the latch (14.4-62).

Figure 628 is a side view of a system (14.4-22) having a latch (14.4-62) having a release tab. The tab (14.4-62T) can be attached to a slidable (movable) latch member (14.4-62M). The latch member (14.4-62M) can be moved laterally toward the post (14.4-30) in response to a magnetic force, spring force, or other biasing force from a latch member biasing mechanism such that a tip of the member (14.4-62M) protrudes beneath a lip portion (portion (14.4-30P)) of the post (14.4-30). In this manner, the post (14.4-30) is held within the opening (14.4-32) until the latch (14.4-62) is released (e.g., by pulling the tab (14.4-62T) in the direction (14.4-64).

FIG. 629 is a plan view of an example system (14.4-22) having magnets in a post (14.4-30) of a member (14.4-24) and a headband (14.4-26). The post (14.4-30) has a magnet (14.4-60). The strap (14.4-44) of the headband (14.4-26) has magnets (14.4-66, 14.4-68, 14.4-70). When the post (14.4-30) is inserted into the opening (14.4-32) of the headband (14.4-26), the magnet (14.4-60) is positioned between the magnets (14.4-66, 14.4-68). In this configuration, the south pole of the magnet (14.4-60) attracts the north pole of the magnet (14.4-68). The magnet (14.4-68) is attached to a slidable latch member (14.4-62M). The magnetic attraction between the magnet (14.4-60) and the magnet (14.4-68) pulls the latch member (14.4-62M) toward the post (14.4-30) until the tip of the latch member (14.4-62M) is accommodated under a protruding portion (lip) (14.4-30P) of the post (14.4-30) (as shown in FIG. 628). In this position, the latch (14.4-62) is closed and the post (14.4-30) is retained within the opening (14.4-32) (e.g., the headband (14.4-62) is attached to the member (14.4-24)).

When the post (14.4-30) is not inserted into the opening (14.4-32), the south poles of the magnets (14.4-70) attract the north poles of the magnets (14.4-68) and vice versa, causing the magnets (14.4-68) to align with the magnets (14.4-70) when the post (14.4-30) is not present. The magnets (14.4-70) are attached to the strap (14.4-44), while the magnets (14.4-68) are attached to the slidable latch member (14.4-62M). Due to the magnetic attraction between the magnets (14.4-70) and the magnets (14.4-68, 14.4-70), the member (14.4-62M) moves to the open latch position (14.4-62M'). This ensures that the tip of the member (14.4-62M) facing the opening (14.4-32) will not protrude into the opening (14.4-32) in the absence of the post (14.4-30) and thus will not be visible within the opening (14.4-32). Thereby, the magnetic retraction of the latch member (14.4-62M) helps to improve the visual appearance of the headband (14.4-26) when the headband (14.4-26) is not attached to the member (14.4-24) and the latch (14.4-62) is opened.

When a user wishes to attach the headband (14.4-26) to the member (14.4-24), the user positions the opening (14.4-32) of the headband (14.4-26) adjacent to the post (14.4-30). As the opening (14.4-32) moves toward the post (14.4-30), the south pole of the magnet (14.4-66) attracts the north pole of the magnet (14.4-60), while the north pole of the magnet (14.4-68) attracts the south pole of the magnet (14.4-60) in a nearly perfectly symmetrical manner, so that the forces acting on the post (14.4-30) feel balanced. This tends to align the post (14.4-30) with the opening (14.4-32) and pull the post (14.4-30) into the opening (14.4-32), thereby reducing the need for the user to precisely align the post (14.4-30) with the opening (14.4-32).

The illustrative example of Fig. 629 uses magnetic force for three different functions. First, while the headband (14.4-26) and the member (14.4-24) are separated, the magnetic force is used to automatically retract the latch member (14.4-62M) into position (14.4-62M'). This automatic magnetic latch opening mechanism helps keep the latch member (14.4-62M) out of the opening (14.4-32) when not in use. Second, when the user first attaches the headband (14.4-26) to the member (14.4-24), the magnetic force is used to guide the post (14.4-30) into the opening (14.4-32) without undue user attention. Thirdly, after the post (14.4-30) is accommodated within the opening (14.4-32), the magnetic force is used to pull the latch member (14.4-62M) towards the post (14.4-30) under the protruding (lip) portion (14.4-30P), thereby magnetically closing the latch (14.4-62).

Other bias mechanisms may be used in addition to or alternatively to magnetic bias arrays. For example, FIGS. 630, 631, 632, and 633 and their associated descriptions disclose spring-based bias mechanisms that may be used in addition to or alternatively to magnetic bias arrays.

As illustrated in FIG. 630, the latch member (14.4-26M) may be biased using a bias member (14.4-80). The bias member (14.4-80) may be a spring (e.g., a compression spring formed of metal or other spring material), a spring formed of an elastomeric material (e.g., a polymer foam), and/or may be formed of other spring structures that exert a spring force. The member (14.4-80) of FIG. 630 may be used, for example, to push away from the strap (14.4-44), thereby pushing the latch member (14.4-62M) into engagement with the post (14.4-30) when the post (14.4-30) is received within the opening (14.4-32). Compression springs or other expansion biasing members may be used to move any suitable movable structures associated with the latch (14.4-62) (e.g., member (14.4-62M) and/or other movable members).

As illustrated in FIG. 631, the bias members (14.4-80) may be used in a tensioned state (e.g., the members (14.4-80) may be tension springs). In the exemplary configuration of FIG. 631, the members (14.4-80) are pulling the member (14.4-62M) toward the opening (14.4-32). The tension springs or other tensioned bias members may generally pull any suitable latch structures within the latch (14.4-62).

Figures 632 and 633 illustrate the use of a spring formed from an elastomeric band. For example, as shown in the plan view of Figure 632, a spring member (14.4-80) (e.g., an elastomeric band having a ring shape) may extend between a portion of a headband (14.4-26) (e.g., a strap (14.4-44)) and a latch member (14.4-62M). When the member (14.4-62M) is moved away from the opening (14.4-32), the member (14.4-80) elongates. This creates an opposing restoring spring force that tends to pull the opening (14.4-32) toward the member (14.4-62M), thereby allowing the member (14.4-62M) to engage the post (14.4-30) within the opening (14.4-32). This type of elastomeric band spring biasing mechanism is further illustrated in the cross-sectional side view of the system (14.4-22) of FIG. 633. As shown in FIG. 633, the biasing member (14.4-80) (e.g., a spring formed from an elastomeric band) may have a ring shape extending (to the left) through a portion of the strap (14.4-44) and (to the right) through a recessed portion of the latch member (14.4-62M). The post (14.4-30) may have a protruding portion, such as a portion (14.4-30P), that creates a post recess (recess (14.4-82)) into which the latch member (14.4-62M) may be received when the latch (14.4-62) is closed. When the latch (14.4-62) is required to be opened, a release tab or other release mechanism coupled to the member (14.4-62M) can pull the tip of the latch member (14.4-62M) out of the recess (14.4-82). This releases the protruding portion (14.4-30P) from the tip of the latch member (14.4-62M), thereby unlocking the latch (14.4-62), allowing the post (14.4-30) to be removed from the opening (14.4-32). Simultaneously, moving the latch member (14.4-62M) away from the opening (14.4-32) tensions the member (14.4-80). When it is desired to attach the headband (14.4-26) to the member (14.4-24), this tension can be used to move the member (14.4-62M) into the recess (14.4-82) so that the member (14.4-62M) can engage the post (14.4-30).

In the latch arrangement of FIG. 633, the latch member (14.4-62M) has a cam surface, such as an inclined surface (14.4-84). This surface can interact with the protruding portion (14.4-30P). For example, as the post (14.4-30) is inserted into the opening (14.4-32), the portion (14.4-30P) can abut the surface (14.4-84), thereby forcing the latch member (14.4-62M) away from the post (14.4-30) to open the latch (14.4-62). Once the part (14.4-30P) has moved across all surfaces (14.4-84), the latch member (14.4-62M) can move into the recess (14.4-82) under the latch closing bias force of the bias member (14.4-80).

FIG. 634 illustrates how the latch member (14.4-62M) can have both outwardly and inwardly facing cam surfaces (14.4-88). The protruding portion (14.4-30P) can have corresponding outwardly and inwardly facing cam surfaces (14.4-86). With this type of arrangement, the outwardly facing cam surface of the protruding portion (14.4-30P) can abut the inwardly facing cam surface of the latch member (14.4-62M) when the post (14.4-30) is inserted into the opening (14.4-32), thereby moving the latch member (14.4-62M) away from the post (14.4-30) to place the latch (14.4-62) in its open position. After inserting the post (14.4-30) into the opening (14.4-32), a biasing mechanism (e.g., magnetic bias, spring bias, etc.) used to close the latch (14.4-62) pushes the latch member (14.4-62M) toward the post (14.4-30) and engages the projection (14.4-30P) to hold the post (14.4-30) in place within the opening (14.4-32). When the user wishes to remove the headband (14.4-26) from the member (14.4-24), the user can pull the headband (14.4-26) and the member (14.4-24) apart, causing the inwardly facing cam surface (14.4-86) of the protruding portion (14.4-30P) to engage the outwardly facing cam surface (14.4-88) of the latch member (14.4-62M), thereby pushing the latch member (14.4-62M) into its open position. Because a pulling force from the user is used to disengage the member (14.4-24) and the headband (14.4-26) in systems such as the system (14.4-22) of FIG. 634, such systems may sometimes be referred to as pull-to-release systems (e.g., the latch (14.4-62) of FIG. 634 may be referred to as a pull-to-release latch). Any suitable latch closing mechanism may be used with this type of latch (e.g., the member (14.4-62M) may be biased toward the post (14.4-30) using a magnetic bias, a metal spring bias, an elastomeric band spring bias, etc.).

In addition to or instead of using a pull-release mechanism to release the latch (14.4-62), the latch (14.4-62) may be provided with one or more of the latch release mechanisms of FIG. 635. As illustrated in FIG. 635, the latch (14.4-62) may have a movable latch member, such as a latch member (14.4-62M) having a cam surface, such as the cam surface (14.4-94). A biasing mechanism (magnetic, spring-based, etc.) may be used to bias the latch member (14.4-62M) into its closed position, in which the latch member (14.4-62M) engages the protruding portion (14.4-30P) of the post (14.4-30) and holds the member (14.4-24) and the headband (14.4-26) together.

In some examples, the latch (14.4-62) uses a push button release mechanism. With this arrangement, the latch (14.4-62) is provided with a button. The button may have a movable button member, such as a button member (14.4-90) that is coupled to a post (14.4-30). When a user desires to release the latch (14.4-62), the user may press inwardly on the button member (14.4-90), thereby moving the button (14.4-90) inwardly and causing the button member cam surface (14.4-92) to engage the cam surface (14.4-94) of the latch member (14.4-62M). This pushes the latch member (14.4-62M) away from the post (14.4-30), thereby opening the latch and allowing the post (14.4-30) to be removed from the opening (14.4-32).

In some examples, the latch (14.4-62) is provided with a toggle release mechanism. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 635, a toggle lever (14.4-96) may be coupled to the latch member (14.4-62M) by a pivot connection (14.4-100) and may be coupled to structures in the strap (14.4-44) of the headband (14.4-26) by a pivot connection (14.4-98). This allows a user to move the latch member (14.4-62M) into its open position (disengaged from the post (14.4-30)) by flipping the lever (14.4-96).

In some examples, a slider mechanism may be used for latch release operations. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 635, a slider member (14.4-102) may be attached to a latch member (14.4-62M). With this arrangement, a user may open the latch (14.4-62) by sliding the member (14.4-102) away from the post (14.4-30) (and thereby sliding the latch member (14.4-62M)).

If desired, additional latch release arrangements may be used (e.g., release mechanisms based on pull tabs, rotary knobs, push buttons, pull buttons, sliders, toggle switches, other release structures, and/or combinations of these structures). Such latch release arrangements may be used with any suitable latch biasing method (e.g., arrangements in which the latch member (14.4-62M) is biased toward its closed position magnetically, using a metal spring, using a tension spring, using a compression spring, using a coil spring, using a leaf spring, using a spring based on a flexible band such as an elastomeric ring, and/or using other springs, using a biasing device based on a compressible foam, etc.). The latch (14.4-62) may have a single latch member (14.4-62M) or multiple latch members (14.4-62M) may be used in the latch (14.4-62).

FIG. 636 is a perspective view of an exemplary headband (14.4-26) having a strap (14.4-44) having latch member recesses (14.4-104). The recesses (14.4-104) may be formed on opposite sides of an opening (14.4-32) and configured to receive respective latch members positioned on opposite sides of a post (14.4-30). With this type of arrangement, the latch members retract into the post (14.4-30) to open the latch (14.4-62) and extend from the post (14.4-30) into the openings (14.4-104) of the headband strap (14.4-44) to close the latch (14.4-62).

Figure 637 is a plan view of a post for a member (14.4-24) having movable latch members (14.4-62M) for forming a latch (14.4-62). In this example, the post (14.4-30) has a main portion (14.4-30MP) to which latch members (14.4-26M) are slidably engaged. When release of the headband (14.4-26) from the member (14.4-24) is desired, the movable post latch members (14.4-26M) are positioned in the retracted position shown in Figure 637. After inserting the post (14.4-30) into the opening (14.4-32) of the strap (14.4-44) of the headband (14.4-26), the latch members (14.4-26M) can be moved outward in the directions (14.4-106). This causes the latch members (14.4-62M) to move into the openings (14.4-104) of the strap (14.4-44) of FIG. 636, thereby closing the latch and securing the headband (14.4-26) to the member (14.4-24).

A side cross-sectional view of a post-based system having straps of the type illustrated in FIG. 636 and latch members of the type illustrated in FIG. 637 is illustrated in FIG. 638. As illustrated in FIG. 638, the latches (14.4-62) may have movable latch members (14.4-26M) slidably engaged with the posts (14.4-30) (e.g., in slots within the main post portion (14.4-30MP). Each latch member (14.4-26M) may have a biasing mechanism (magnetic, spring-based, etc.) that biases the member outwardly into a corresponding strap recess (14.4-104) in the strap (14.4-44) of the headband (14.4-26) when the post (14.4-30) is inserted into the opening (14.4-32). This closes the latch (14.4-62) and secures the headband (14.4-26) to the member (14.4-24).

The latch (14.4-62) may have a button release or other release mechanism. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 638, the button member (14.4-110) may be coupled to the post (14.4-30) and may move inwardly and outwardly relative to the main post portion (14.4-30MP). When the biasing mechanisms coupled to the latch member (14.4-26M) are pushing the members (14.4-26M) to their maximum outward extent (away from each other), the cam surfaces (14.4-116) of the members (14.4-62M) abut against the structures (14.4-108) (e.g., a hollow tube or other structure coupled to the member (14.4-24). This forces the latch members (14.4-62M) in an upward direction (14.4-120). When a release of the latch (14.4-62) is desired, the user may press the button member (14.4-130). This causes the button member (14.4-130) to move inward in the direction (14.4-122) such that the button member surface (14.4-112) abuts the surfaces (14.4-114) of the latch member (14.4-62M), thereby causing the cam surfaces (14.4-116) of the latch members (14.4-62M) to abut the structures (14.4-108). As the cam surfaces (14.4-116) interact with the structures (14.4-108) under pressure from the button member (14.4-110) in the direction (14.4-122), the latch members (14.4-62M) are forced inwardly toward each other (overcoming their outward biases). Once the latch members (14.4-62M) have fully retracted into the post (14.4-30), the latch members (14.4-62M) will disengage the recesses (14.4-104) of the strap (14.4-44), thereby allowing the strap (14.4-44) to be removed from the post (14.4-30).

In the example of FIG. 638, recesses (14.4-104) are positioned in the strap (14.4-44). If desired, recesses for accommodating latch members (14.4-62M) may be positioned in the post (14.4-30). As an example, consider the arrangement illustrated in the cross-sectional side view of the system (14.4-22) of FIG. 639. As illustrated in FIG. 639, the latch members (14.4-26M) may be slidably coupled to the strap (14.4-44) of the headband (14.4-26) (e.g., the latch members (14.4-26M) may slide laterally back and forth within the recesses within the strap (14.4-44). Bias mechanisms (e.g., self-biasing structures, spring-based biasing structures, etc.) may be used to bias the latch members (14.4-26M) toward the post (14.4-30). The post (14.4-30) may have one or more recesses (14.4-124) configured to receive the latch members (14.4-62M). When the latch members (14.4-26M) are biased into the recesses (14.4-124), the post (14.4-30) will be retained within the opening (14.4-32), thereby securing the headband (14.4-26) to the member (14.4-24). When a release of the latch (14.4-62) is desired, the members (14.4-26M) can be moved out of the post recesses (14.4-120) (e.g., using a release mechanism based on a push or pull button, a sliding button, a toggling button, a pull tab, etc.). The recess (14.4-124) may extend around the entire periphery of the post (14.4-30), or there may be one or more recesses (14.4-124) located at different locations around the periphery of the post (14.4-30), each of which is aligned with a respective member (14.4-26M).

Although the specification is sometimes described in the context of examples where the posts (14.4-30) are formed on the members (14.4-24) and the openings (14.4-32) are formed within the headband (14.4-26), the posts (14.4-30) may, if desired, be formed as part of the headband (14.4-26) and the openings (14.4-32) may be formed within the members (14.4-24).

14.5: Cable tensioning system and dial

Dial-based cable tensioning systems are used in a growing number of applications, including apparel, such as lacing systems for footwear and tensioning systems for headwear. Dial-based tensioning systems can feature various improvements over conventional tensioning systems, such as low friction across contact surfaces and balanced tensioning pressure (e.g., in the case of headwear, equal pressure is applied around the user's head). However, current dial-based tensioning systems often produce a lot of noise when the user operates the dial, which can be problematic or irritating. Additionally, current dial-based tensioning systems may fail to maintain the desired pressure across the contact surface over time. Improvements and developments in dial-based tensioning systems would be desirable to provide additional functionality in various situations and environments.

Portable electronic devices, such as smartphones, laptops, tablet computing devices, smartwatches, head-mounted displays (HMDs), and headphones, are becoming commonplace for people engaged in everyday activities, including travel, communication, education, entertainment, and employment. Indeed, portable electronic devices can assist in completing everyday tasks and errands, such as watching instructional videos or monitoring progress during and after exercise routines. Some electronic devices, such as HMDs, require mounting systems to secure the electronic devices to the user's body, such as the user's head. For example, an HMD can be mounted on the user's head using an adjustable headband, which may include a dial-based tensioning system. The tensioning systems described herein, such as tensioning systems for HMDs, can be quiet and non-reversible to maintain the HMD on the user's head without causing unwanted sounds near the user's ears. The tensioning systems described herein may be applicable to other applications, such as lacing systems for footwear, tensioning systems for other headwear, tensioning systems for other apparel, tensioning systems for binding, and the like.

Various examples disclosed herein relate to improved tensioning systems, such as improved dial-based tensioning systems, which may be used in adjustable headbands in head-mounted display devices, along with any other applications. The improved tensioning systems include a clutch that interacts with a spool on which a cable may be wound, and a wheel that may be used by a user to wind the spool. The clutch is a roller-and-wedge system that includes rollers in roller openings of a cam wheel. When the rollers are engaged between the housing of the tensioning system and the cam wheel, the cam wheel is locked. When the rollers are not engaged between the housing and the cam wheel, the cam wheel is unlocked. The roller-and-wedge system is non-reversible (the cable may be pushed into the tensioning system, but may not be pulled out of the tensioning system without rotating the wheel) and is silent. The tensioning system may also include various angle limiting systems, which prevent the tensioning system from overwinding (winding too much cable onto the spool, damaging the tensioning system) and from operating in a backward direction.

The HMDs described herein may include head-mountable support structures that allow the devices to be worn on a user's head. The head-mountable support structures may include device housings for housing components, such as displays, used to present visual content to the user. Head-mountable support structures for the HMD may also include headbands and other structures that help maintain the device housing on the user's face. The headband of the HMD device may be adjustable and may include a tensioning system, etc., for adjusting the headband.

These and other examples are discussed below with reference to FIGS. 640 through 648c. However, those skilled in the art will readily recognize that the detailed description provided herein with respect to these figures is for illustrative purposes only and should not be construed as limiting. Moreover, as used herein, a system, method, article, component, feature, or sub-feature that includes at least one of the first option, the second option, or the third option should be understood to refer to a system, method, article, component, feature, or sub-feature that can include one of each of the listed options (e.g., only one of the first option, only one of the second option, or only one of the third option), multiple of a single listed option (e.g., two or more of the first option), two options simultaneously (e.g., one of the first option and one of the second option), or a combination thereof (e.g., two of the first option and one of the second option).

FIG. 640 is a side view of a head-mountable display (HMD) (14.5-110) having an adjustable headband (14.5-126) (sometimes referred to herein as a “band”), according to some examples. As illustrated in FIG. 640, the HMD (14.5-110) may include a head-mountable housing (14.5-112). The head-mountable housing (14.5-112) may include a main housing, a main housing unit, a head-mountable support structure, and the like. The head-mountable housing (14.5-112) may have walls or other structures that separate an inner housing region from an outer housing region of the head-mountable housing (14.5-112). In some examples, the walls of the head-mountable housing (14.5-112) may be formed of a material such as a polymer, glass, metal, combinations thereof, or the like. Electrical and optical components may be mounted in a head-mountable housing (14.5-112). These components may include components such as integrated circuits, sensors, control circuitry, input/output devices, etc.

The HMD (14.5-110) may be used to present images to the user for viewing from eye boxes (e.g., eye boxes where the user's eyes are positioned when the HMD (14.5-110) is worn on the user's head, as exemplified by the user's head (14.5-122) in FIG. 640). Specifically, the HMD (14.5-110) may include displays, lenses, etc. within the eye boxes. These components may be mounted to optical modules or other support structures within the head-mountable housing (14.5-112) to form respective left and right optical systems. For example, a left display may be included to present images from the left eye box to the user's left eye through the left lens, and a right display may be included to present images from the right eye box to the user's right eye.

In some examples, the head-mountable housing (14.5-112) may include forward-facing components, such as cameras, other sensors, etc., on a front surface (F) of the head-mountable housing (14.5-112). The forward-facing components may be used to collect sensor measurements and other inputs. A soft cushion may be disposed on the opposite rear surface of the head-mountable housing (14.5-112). The rear surface of the head-mountable housing (14.5-112) may include openings that allow a user to view images from the left and right optical systems (e.g., when the rear of the head-mountable housing (14.5-112) is resting on the front surface (14.5-120F) of a user's head (14.5-122).

The HMD (14.5-110) may include an adjustable headband (14.5-126) or an adjustable band, such as a band. In some examples, the HMD (14.5-110) may include other structures (e.g., an optional over-the-head band, etc.) that help maintain the head-mountable housing (14.5-112) on the user's head (14.5-122). The adjustable headband (14.5-126) may have first and second ends that are physically coupled to the left and right sides, respectively, of the head-mountable housing (14.5-112). In the example illustrated in FIG. 640, coupling members (14.5-124) or straps that act as extensions of the head-mountable housing (14.5-112) are provided on the left and right sides of the head-mountable housing (14.5-112) to physically couple the adjustable headband (14.5-126) to the head-mountable housing (14.5-112). The coupling members (14.5-124) or straps may be formed of rigid materials, such as rigid polymers and/or other materials. The coupling members (14.5-124) may include sensors, buttons, speakers, and/or other electrical components. Hinges and/or other mechanisms may be used to couple the coupling members (14.5-124) to the head-mountable housing (14.5-112). In some examples, the joining members (14.5-124) or straps may be formed integrally as parts of the head-mountable housing (14.5-112).

The first and second ends of the adjustable headband (14.5-126) may have engagement mechanisms, such as openings configured to receive posts or other protrusions (14.5-124P) of the engagement members (14.5-124) or straps (or other engagement structures of the head-mountable housing (14.5-112)). The adjustable headband (14.5-126) may be coupled to the engagement members (14.5-124) or straps such that a user may removably attach the adjustable headband (14.5-126) to the engagement members (14.5-124) or straps. In this manner, a user may remove the adjustable headband (14.5-126) from the head-mountable housing (14.5-112). The coupling members (14.5-124) or straps may have elongated shapes as illustrated in FIG. 640 and/or other suitable shapes. Examples of the coupling members (14.5-124) or straps may include rigid straps, rigid coupling members, power straps, and the like.

The adjustable headband (14.5-126) may include a soft flexible portion, such as a center portion (14.5-130). The center portion (14.5-130) may be formed between two more rigid portions, such as end portions (14.5-128) on the left and right ends of the adjustable headband (14.5-126) (e.g., first and second ends of the adjustable headband (14.5-126)). The end portions (14.5-128) may be reinforced using embedded polymeric reinforcements (e.g., single-layer or multi-layer polymeric reinforcement strips) and/or other reinforcement members. The center portion (14.5-130) may be formed of a stretchable material, such as an extensible fabric. In some examples, the central portion (14.5-130) may be formed as a band of flat knit fabric comprising stretchable strands of material (e.g., elastomeric strands) and/or utilizing a stretchable fabric configuration (e.g., a stretchable knit configuration). The central portion (14.5-130) may include narrow end portions that may extend across reinforcing members within the end portions (14.5-128). This may ensure that the adjustable headband (14.5-126) has a uniform contour. Forming the central portion (14.5-130) of stretchable material and including the central portion in the adjustable headband (14.5-126) allows the adjustable headband (14.5-126) to elongate along its length. This allows the length of the adjustable headband (14.5-126) to be temporarily increased to assist the user in positioning the adjustable headband (14.5-126) over the user's head (14.5-122) when the user is wearing the HMD (14.5-110). When the adjustable headband (14.5-126) is released, the stretchable and elastic properties of the central portion (14.5-130) of the adjustable headband (14.5-126) help shorten the adjustable headband (14.5-126) and pull the adjustable headband (14.5-126) against the user's head. This allows the adjustable headband (14.5-126) to rest against the posterior surface (14.5-120R) of the user's head.

A tensioning mechanism (such as the tensioning mechanism (14.5-100), discussed below with respect to FIGS. 641-644) may be included to provide additional adjustment of the effective length and tension of the adjustable headband (14.5-126) for securing the adjustable headband (14.5-126) and HMD (14.5-110) to the user's head (14.5-122). The tensioning mechanism may be provided to adjust the effective length and tension in the headband tensioning cable (14.5-132). The tensioning mechanism may be a rotatable knob, lever, slider, or other mechanism for adjusting the tension within the headband tensioning cable (14.5-132). When the effective length of the cable (14.5-132) is greater or the tension is lower, the adjustable headband (14.5-126) will become looser. The increased effective length and lower cable tension of the headband tension cable (14.5-132) helps create slack in the adjustable headband (14.5-126), which can aid in donning and removing the HMD (14.5-110). As the cable tension increases, the adjustable headband (14.5-126) becomes more secure against the user's head.

As illustrated in FIG. 640, the headband tension cable (14.5-132) may have a loop shape and may include an upper cable segment (14.5-132T) extending along an upper edge of the adjustable headband (14.5-126) and an opposite lower cable segment (14.5-132B) extending along an opposite lower edge of the adjustable headband (14.5-126). At the center of the central portion (14.5-130) of the adjustable headband (14.5-126), the upper and lower cable segments (14.5-132T, 14.5-132B) may be separated by a distance (BW) (sometimes referred to as a cable branch distance). The separation between the upper and lower cable segments (14.5-132T, 14.5-132B) helps secure the adjustable headband (14.5-126) on the curved posterior surface (14.5-120R) of the user's head (14.5-122). When the adjustable headband (14.5-126) is worn on the posterior surface (14.5-120R), as illustrated in FIG. 640, the upper cable segment (14.5-132T) can apply an upward force (F1) to the adjustable headband (14.5-126) that prevents the headband (14.5-126) from sliding downwardly off the user's head (14.5-122). Similarly, the lower cable segment (14.5-132B) can apply a downward force (F2) that can prevent the adjustable headband (14.5-126) from sliding upwardly off the user's head (14.5-122).

FIG. 641 illustrates a plan view of an adjustable headband (14.5-126). The adjustable headband (14.5-126) may be substantially similar to the adjustable headband (14.5-126) discussed above with respect to FIG. 640 and may include some or all of its features. As illustrated in FIG. 641, the adjustable headband (14.5-126) may include a central portion (14.5-130) and end portions (14.5-128). As discussed above, the central portion (14.5-130) may be elastic and formed from an extensible knit fabric, and the end portions may be reinforced using reinforcements embedded in the fabric. One or more openings (14.5-140) may be formed in the end portions (14.5-128) of the adjustable headband (14.5-126). The openings (14.5-140) may accommodate posts or other protrusions, such as the protrusions (14.5-124P) discussed above with respect to FIG. 640. The openings (14.5-140) may be used in conjunction with the protrusions (14.5-124P) to secure the end portions (14.5-128) of the adjustable headband (14.5-126) to the joining members (14.5-124) or straps of the head-mountable housing (14.5-112). In some examples, a single opening (14.5-140) or other attachment mechanism may be positioned in each of the end portions (14.5-128) of the adjustable headband (14.5-126). In some examples, each of the end portions (14.5-128) of the adjustable headband (14.5-126) may include two or more openings (14.5-140). In some examples, other attachment mechanisms (e.g., magnets, snaps, hook-and-loop fasteners, screws or other fasteners, combinations thereof, etc.) may be used to attach the adjustable headband (14.5-126) to the coupling members (14.5-124) or straps within the HMD (14.5-110), or to other portions of the head-mountable housing (14.5-112).

A headband tension cable (14.5-132) may extend in a loop around the periphery of a central portion (14.5-130) of an adjustable headband (14.5-126). In the example illustrated in FIG. 641, the adjustable headband (14.5-126) includes a pulley (14.5-142) coupled to a left end portion (14.5-128) of the adjustable headband (14.5-126). The adjustable headband (14.5-126) includes a tensioning mechanism (14.5-100) coupled to a right end portion (14.5-128) of the adjustable headband (14.5-126). In some examples, the tensioning mechanism (14.5-100) may be an adjustment knob or dial. The tensioning mechanism (14.5-100) may be a bidirectional dial that can be rotated in a first direction (14.5-148) (e.g., clockwise) about a rotational axis (14.5-146) to shorten the length of the loop of the headband tensioning cable (14.5-132) and thereby increase the tension on the headband tensioning cable (14.5-132). The length of the loop of the headband tensioning cable (14.5-132) that is disposed outside the tensioning mechanism (14.5-100) and within the central portion (14.5-130) may be referred to as the "effective length" of the tensioning cable (14.5-132). The dial of the tensioning mechanism (14.5-100) can be rotated in a second, opposite direction (14.5-150) (e.g., counterclockwise) about the rotational axis (14.5-146) to increase the length of the loop of the headband tensioning cable (14.5-132) and thereby reduce the tension on the headband tensioning cable (14.5-132). By tightening the headband tensioning cable (14.5-132), the tension on the adjustable headband (14.5-126) can be increased, and the HMD (14.5-110) can be held more snugly on the user's head (14.5-122). A pulley (14.5-142) may be included to allow for tension to be balanced between the upper and lower portions of the headband tension cable (14.5-132) to ensure a consistent wrap of the adjustable headband (14.5-126) across a variety of head shapes. By loosening the headband tension cable (14.5-132), the effective length may be increased and the tension of the adjustable headband (14.5-126) may be decreased.

The tensioning mechanism (14.5-100) may include various enhancements. In some examples, the tensioning mechanism (14.5-100) may include a cam and wedge system that allows the tensioning mechanism (14.5-100) to quietly wind the headband tensioning cable (14.5-132) into the tensioning mechanism (14.5-100) and quietly release the headband tensioning cable (14.5-132) from the tensioning mechanism (14.5-100). The tensioning mechanism (14.5-100) may be non-reversible. In other words, the tensioning mechanism (14.5-100) may allow the headband tensioning cable (14.5-132) to be wound into the tensioning mechanism (14.5-100) without rotating the tensioning mechanism (14.5-100), but may not allow the headband tensioning cable (14.5-132) to be unwound from the tensioning mechanism (14.5-100) without rotating the tensioning mechanism (14.5-100). The tensioning mechanism (14.5-100) may include an angle stop mechanism (also referred to as a hard stop, an angle stop, etc.). The angle stop mechanism prevents too much of the headband tensioning cable (14.5-132) from being wound into the tensioning mechanism (14.5-100), thereby preventing damage to the tensioning mechanism (14.5-100). The angle stop mechanism also prevents the tensioning mechanism (14.5-100) from moving backward, which may impact the user experience. The tensioning mechanism (14.5-100) may additionally include a spring detent, etc. The spring detent may provide the tensioning mechanism (14.5-100) with desired sound, feel, and other user experience characteristics. These and other features of the tensioning mechanism (14.5-100) will be discussed below with respect to FIGS. 642 through 648c.

FIG. 642 illustrates a perspective view of a tensioning mechanism or system (14.5-300) that may be included in an HMD (14.5-110) for adjusting the tension of a headband tension cable (14.5-132) of an adjustable headband (14.5-126), according to some examples. The tensioning system (14.5-300) includes a dial cap (14.5-302) and a housing (14.5-304). The housing (14.5-304) may be directly affixed to the adjustable headband (14.5-126) of the head-mounted device (14.5-110), or may be affixed to the adjustable headband (14.5-126) via an interface. The housing (14.5-104) can be secured to the adjustable headband (14.5-126) such that the housing (14.5-304) cannot rotate relative to the adjustable headband (14.5-126).

In one example, the dial cap (14.5-302) includes a center cap (14.5-306) and a wheel (14.5-308) (also referred to as a tire, etc.). The wheel (14.5-308) may be configured to be rotated by the user to wind the headband tensioning cable (14.5-132) into the tensioning system (14.5-300) or to release the headband tensioning cable (14.5-132) from the tensioning system (14.5-300). The wheel (14.5-308) rotates about the center axis of the center cap (14.5-306). The center cap (14.5-306) and the housing (14.5-304) may be secured to each other such that the center cap (14.5-306) does not rotate relative to the housing (14.5-304). In this way, the wheel (14.5-308) may be rotatable relative to the center cap (14.5-306) and the housing (14.5-304).

As discussed in more detail below, the housing (14.5-304) may be configured to include a spool within the housing (14.5-304). The housing (14.5-304) includes a cable opening (14.5-310). A headband tensioning cable (14.5-132) extends into the housing (14.5-304) through the cable opening (14.5-310) and is secured to the spool. As the headband tensioning cable (14.5-132) is wound into or unwound from the tensioning system (14.5-300), for example, by rotating a wheel (14.5-308) of the dial cap (14.5-302), the headband tensioning cable (14.5-132) moves through the cable opening (14.5-310).

Any number or variety of components in any of the configurations described herein may be included in the tensioning system and electronic device. The components may include any combination of features described herein and may be arranged in any of the various configurations described herein. The structure and arrangement of the components of the tensioning system having the roller-wedge locking system described herein may be applied to any number of examples in any combination, not just the specific examples discussed herein. Examples of configurations of the various components of the tensioning system relative to one another are described below with reference to FIG. 643.

Figure 643 illustrates a partially exploded view of a tensioning system (14.5-300). The tensioning system (14.5-300) includes a headband tensioning cable (14.5-132), a dial cap (14.5-302), a housing (14.5-304), a cam wheel (14.5-312), rollers (14.5-314), a spool (14.5-316), and a cap post (14.5-318). The dial cap (14.5-302) and housing (14.5-304) may be substantially similar to the dial cap (14.5-302) and housing (14.5-304) discussed above with respect to Figure 642 and may include some or all of their features.

The housing (14.5-304) may include a housing post (14.5-322). The housing post (14.5-322) may be positioned in the center of the housing (14.5-304). The housing (14.5-304) may additionally include an outer wall (14.5-320) in which a cable opening (14.5-310) is positioned.

In at least one example, the spool (14.5-316) is configured to be seated within the housing (14.5-304) between an outer wall (14.5-320) and a housing post (14.5-322). The spool (14.5-316) may include a hollow central portion (14.5-330) surrounding the housing post (14.5-322). The spool (14.5-316) may be configured to rotate about the housing post (14.5-322) while the headband tensioning cable (14.5-132) is wound into or unwound from the tensioning system (14.5-300). The spool (14.5-316) includes a cable opening (14.5-334) through which the headband tensioning cable (14.5-132) extends. A headband tensioning cable (14.5-132) may be retained or secured within a cable opening (14.5-334) of a spool (14.5-316). The spool (14.5-316) includes a barrel (14.5-338) around which the headband tensioning cable (14.5-132) is wound, and a flange (14.5-336) that allows the headband tensioning cable (14.5-132) to be wound around or within other parts of the tensioning system (14.5-300) or otherwise prevents it from exiting the spool (14.5-316). The spool (14.5-316) further includes projections (14.5-332) that allow the spool (14.5-316) to interface with and be rotatably engaged with the cam wheel (14.5-312).

A cam wheel (14.5-312) and rollers (14.5-314) are used to transmit rotation between the dial cap (14.5-302) and the spool (14.5-316). The cam wheel (14.5-312) may be configured to rotate the spool (14.5-316) in response to a user rotating the wheel (14.5-308) in either direction. The cam wheel (14.5-312) and rollers (14.5-314) may be configured to allow the headband tensioning cable (14.5-132) to be wound into the tensioning system (14.5-300) by pushing the headband tensioning cable (14.5-132) into the housing (14.5-304) (e.g., without the user rotating the wheel (14.5-308)). The cam wheel (14.5-312) and rollers (14.5-314) can be configured to prevent the headband tensioning cable (14.5-132) from unwinding from the tensioning system (14.5-300) when the cable is pulled. The cam wheel (14.5-312) and rollers (14.5-314) are configured to resist torque in a first direction (e.g., in the direction in which the headband tensioning cable (14.5-132) unwinds from the tensioning system (14.5-300)) and to permit torque in a second direction (e.g., in the direction in which the headband tensioning cable (14.5-132) is retracted into the tensioning system (14.5-300). Details of the cam wheel (14.5-312) and rollers (14.5-314) are discussed below with respect to FIG. 644. The cam wheel (14.5-312) may include protrusions (14.5-340) that interact with protrusions (14.5-332) of the spool (14.5-316) to transmit rotation between the spool (14.5-316) and the cam wheel (14.5-312). The cam wheel (14.5-312) includes an opening (14.5-342) and is configured to rest on top of the spool (14.5-316) between the spool (14.5-316) and the dial cap (14.5-302).

A cap post (14.5-318) can be positioned within a post opening (14.5-324) of a housing (14.5-304). The cap post (14.5-318) can be secured to the housing (14.5-304) such that the cap post (14.5-318) remains in a fixed position. In some examples, the cap post (14.5-318) can be secured to the housing (14.5-304) via an adhesive, a fastener, or the like. In some examples, the cap post (14.5-318) can have a semicircular cross-sectional shape. The cap post (14.5-318) can be configured to interface with a center cap post (14.5-307) of the center cap (14.5-306) to maintain the center cap (14.5-306) in place within the housing (14.5-304). The cap post (14.5-318) can prevent the center cap (14.5-306) from rotating relative to the housing (14.5-304). The center cap post (14.5-307) can have a complementary cross-sectional shape to the cap post (14.5-318) (e.g., the center cap post (14.5-307) and the cap post (14.5-318) can each have semicircular cross-sectional shapes). In some examples, the center cap post (14.5-307) can have a key shape, and the cap post (14.5-318) can have a complementary keyhole shape.

Any number or variety of components in any of the configurations described herein may be included in the tensioning system and electronic device. The components may include any combination of features described herein and may be arranged in any of the various configurations described herein. The structure and arrangement of the components of the tensioning system having the roller-wedge locking system described herein may be applied to any number of examples in any combination, not just the specific examples discussed herein. Examples of the operation of the tensioning system are described below with reference to FIG. 644.

Figure 644 illustrates a partial cross-sectional view of a portion of a tensioning system (14.5-300). Figure 644 illustrates the operation of a cam wheel (14.5-312) and rollers (14.5-314) included in the tensioning system (14.5-300), according to some examples. The tensioning system (14.5-300) includes a housing (14.5-304), a spool (14.5-316) within the housing (14.5-304), and a wheel (14.5-308). The wheel (14.5-308) may include an outer portion (14.5-308A) and an inner portion (14.5-308B). The outer portion (14.5-308A) is configured to interact with a user. The outer portion (14.5-308A) may include ridges, bumps, grooves, or other features that may be used by a user to grip the outer portion. The outer portion (14.5-308A) may be formed of a relatively soft material, such as rubber, a polymer, or the like. The inner portion (14.5-308B) may include protrusions (14.5-308B.i) configured to interact with the rollers (14.5-314) and the cam wheel (14.5-312). The inner portion (14.5-308B) may also be used to connect the outer portion (14.5-308A) to other structures of the tensioning system (14.5-300). In some examples, the inner portion (14.5-308B) may include posts, and the outer portion (14.5-308A) may include corresponding holes into which the posts are inserted to secure the inner portion (14.5-308B) and the outer portion (14.5-308A) to each other. In some examples, an adhesive may be disposed between the inner portion (14.5-308B) and the outer portion (14.5-308A) to secure the inner portion (14.5-308B) and the outer portion (14.5-308A) to each other.

The wheel (14.5-312) may include a protrusion (14.5-342) configured to interface with the spool (14.5-316). For example, as illustrated in FIG. 644, the spool (14.5-316) may include an opening (14.5-343) having a complementary shape to the protrusion (14.5-342). This allows the spool (14.5-316) and the wheel (14.5-312) to be rotatably coupled to each other. A cap post (14.5-318) is disposed within the opening of the housing (14.5-304). The cap post (14.5-318) may be bonded to the housing (14.5-304). The housing (14.5-304) can be physically coupled to the center cap post (14.5-307) of the center cap by the protrusion (14.5-319) of the center cap post (14.5-307). The center cap post (14.5-307) and the cap post (14.5-318) including the protrusion (14.5-319) can have complementary shapes such that the center cap post (14.5-307) can be physically coupled (e.g., rotatably coupled) to the cap post (14.5-318) by the protrusion (14.5-319). For example, as illustrated in FIG. 644, the protrusion (14.5-319) and the center cap post (14.5-307) can have a key shape, and the cap post (14.5-318) can have a complementary keyhole shape.

The housing (14.5-304) may include a body portion (14.5-304A) and an inner ring (14.5-304B). The inner ring (14.5-304B) may be configured to interact with the rollers (14.5-314) and may be formed of a relatively hard material, such as metals (e.g., stainless steel, e.g., SAE 304 stainless steel, 420 stainless steel, etc.; aluminum, brass, or any other suitable metals), high-hardness polymers, other polymers, plastics, etc. The body portion (14.5-304A) may be formed of a relatively soft material, such as polymers, plastics, etc. The spool (14.5-316) may be formed of a relatively soft material, such as polymers, plastics, etc. The inner ring (14.5-304B) can be fixed to the main body portion (14.5-304A) via adhesive, fasteners, etc.

The cam wheel (14.5-312) may include roller openings (14.5-313) in which rollers (14.5-314) and projections (14.5-308B.i) are arranged. The roller openings (14.5-313) are configured to interact with the rollers (14.5-314) and projections (14.5-308B.i) to lock and unlock the cam wheel (14.5-312) and the housing (14.5-304) with each other. Specifically, when the rollers (14.5-314) are interposed between the cam wheel (14.5-312) and the housing (14.5-304), the cam wheel (14.5-312) and the housing (14.5-304) may be locked with each other. Such a system may be referred to as a roller-wedge system or roller-wedge clutch. The roller openings (14.5-313) include inclined surfaces (14.5-340) that are inclined at a cam angle (14.5-θ) with respect to the inner ring (14.5-304B) of the housing (14.5-304). Specifically, the cam angle (14.5-θ) for each inclined surface (14.5-340) defining each roller opening (14.5-313) may be measured between each inclined surface (14.5-340) and a line tangent to a point on the inner ring (14.5-304B) of the housing (14.5-304) that contacts the roller (14.5-314) within each roller opening (14.5-313). The cam angle (14.5-θ) may range from about 5° to about 30°.

In at least one example, tension from the cable may apply force to a cam wheel (14.5-312) via a spool (14.5-316), causing the cam wheel to rotate in a third direction (14.5-354) (e.g., counterclockwise). When the cam wheel (14.5-312) rotates in the third direction (14.5-354) as a result of the tension of the cable (14.5-132), the rollers (14.5-314) move in the fourth direction (14.5-356) (e.g. clockwise) over the inclined surfaces (14.5-340) and are sandwiched between the projections (14.5-308B.i) of the inner part (14.5-308B) of the wheel (14.5-308) and the inclined surfaces (14.5-344) of the cam wheel (14.5-312) defining the roller openings (14.5-313). The interlocked rollers (14.5-314) lock the cam wheel (14.5-312) and the housing (14.5-304) to each other due to the friction existing between the cam wheel (14.5-312) and the inner ring (14.5-304B) of the housing (14.5-304) and the interlocked rollers (14.5-314), thereby preventing the cable (14.5-132) from rotating the spool (14.5-316) in the third direction (14.5-354). When the cable is pushed into the tensioning system (14.5-300), the cam wheel (14.5-312) and the housing (14.5-304) unlock each other. Specifically, when the cable (14.5-132) is pushed into the tensioning system (14.5-300), the cam wheel (14.5-312) rotates in a direction opposite to the third direction (14.5-354), the rollers (14.5-314) are uncoupled and roll down the inclined surfaces (14.5-344) in a direction opposite to the fourth direction (14.5-356), and the spool (14.5-316) rotates freely, allowing the cable (14.5-132) to wrap around the spool (14.5-316).

In some examples, the inner ring (14.5-304B), the cam wheel (14.5-312), and the rollers (14.5-314) of the housing (14.5-304) may be formed of materials such as metals (e.g., stainless steel, e.g., SAE 304 stainless steel, 420 stainless steel, etc.; aluminum, brass, or any other suitable metals), high-hardness polymers, other polymers, plastics, etc. In some examples, one or more of the cam wheel (14.5-312), the rollers (14.5-314), and the inner ring (14.5-304B) may be coated or plated with a material to increase the hardness of the cam wheel (14.5-312), the rollers (14.5-314), and/or the inner ring (14.5-304B). In some examples, the rollers (14.5-314) may be formed of materials having a higher hardness than the materials of the cam wheel (14.5-312) and the inner ring (14.5-304B). For example, the cam wheel (14.5-312), the rollers (14.5-314), and the inner ring (14.5-304B) may be formed of 14.5-304 stainless steel, wherein a coating is applied to the rollers (14.5-314) to increase the hardness of the rollers (14.5-314) relative to the cam wheel (14.5-312) and the inner ring (14.5-304B).

The cam angle (14.5-θ) may be selected based on, among other factors, friction resulting from the materials selected for the cam wheel (14.5-312), the inner ring (14.5-304B) of the housing (14.5-304), and the rollers (14.5-314); the scale of the tensioning system (14.5-300); and the clearances and tolerances required for the tensioning system. Providing a smaller cam angle (14.5-θ) allows the cam wheel (14.5-312) and rollers (14.5-314) to lock with less friction existing between the cam wheel (14.5-312) and the inner ring (14.5-304B) of the housing (14.5-304) and the rollers (14.5-314). Providing too large a cam angle (14.5-θ) may allow slippage between the cam wheel (14.5-312) and the housing (14.5-304), which may prevent the cam wheel (14.5-312) and the housing (14.5-304) from locking sufficiently. Providing a smaller cam angle (14.5-θ) requires more room for the rollers (14.5-314) to move to lock the cam wheel (14.5-312) and the housing (14.5-304), which requires larger tolerances and clearances. This causes a larger dead zone between the travel of the cable (14.5-132) before the cam wheel (14.5-312) and housing (14.5-304) are locked and the travel of the wheel (14.5-308) before the spool (14.5-316) winds or unwinds the cable. The dead zone (also referred to as roller travel) can be the distance or angular distance (14.5-D1) between the centers of the rollers (14.5-314) in the locked and unlocked positions, and can range from about 0.5 mm to about 8 mm, or from about 5° and about 30°, respectively. A smaller cam angle (14.5-θ) results in higher normal forces, which require a greater force to dislodge the rollers (14.5-314) from between the cam wheel (14.5-312) and the inner ring (14.5-304B) when the cam wheel (14.5-312) and the housing (14.5-304) are locked. Providing a cam angle (14.5-θ) within the specified range allows the cam wheel (14.5-312) and the housing (14.5-304) to lock without slipping, while ensuring that there is a minimum dead zone and that the minimum force is required to rotate the wheel (14.5-308).

Although six protrusions (14.5-308B.i), six rollers (14.5-314), and six roller openings (14.5-313) are illustrated in FIG. 644, any number of protrusions (14.5-308B.i), rollers (14.5-314), and roller openings (14.5-313) may be provided. Providing a greater number of protrusions (14.5-308B.i), rollers (14.5-314), and roller openings (14.5-313) may increase strength, but may also increase complexity, size, and cost. Providing fewer protrusions (14.5-308B.i), rollers (14.5-314), and roller openings (14.5-313) can reduce strength, complexity, size, and cost.

FIG. 644 illustrates all protrusions (14.5-308B.i), rollers (14.5-314), and roller openings (14.5-313) facing in the same direction relative to the axis of rotation. In some examples, half or another percentage of the protrusions (14.5-308B.i), rollers (14.5-314), and roller openings (14.5-313) may face in opposite directions relative to the axis of rotation. This allows the tensioning system (14.5-300) to lock in both directions rather than unidirectionally. In examples where the protrusions (14.5-308B.i), rollers (14.5-314), and roller openings (14.5-313) face in opposite directions with respect to the axis of rotation, the wheel (14.5-308) can be used to wind the cable into and unwind the cable from the spool (14.5-316).

The wheel (14.5-308) can be rotated in a first direction (14.5-350) (e.g., clockwise) about the center cap post (14.5-307) and the housing (14.5-304) of the center cap (14.5-306) (illustrated in FIG. 643) and in a second direction (14.5-352) (e.g., counterclockwise) opposite to the first direction (14.5-350) about the center cap post (14.5-307) and the housing (14.5-304). Rotating the wheel (14.5-308) in the first direction (14.5-350) can apply tension to the cable by winding the cable onto the spool (14.5-316). In other words, rotating the wheel (14.5-308) in the first direction (14.5-350) wraps the cable around the spool (14.5-316) to tighten the cable. Rotating the wheel (14.5-308) in the second direction (14.5-352) releases the cable from the spool (14.5-316), thereby reducing the tension within the cable. In other words, rotating the wheel (14.5-308) in the second direction (14.5-352) releases the cable from the spool (14.5-316) to loosen the cable.

Rotating the wheel (14.5-308) in the first direction (14.5-350) or the second direction (14.5-352) unlocks the cam wheel (14.5-312) and the housing (14.5-304), causing the cable to be wound into or released from the tensioning system (14.5-300). For example, when the wheel (14.5-308) is rotated in the first direction (14.5-350), the rollers (14.5-314) roll down the inclined surfaces (14.5-344), and the tensioning system (14.5-300) is unlocked. When the wheel (14.5-308) is rotated in the second direction (14.5-352), the projections (14.5-308B.i) push the rollers (14.5-314) down the inclined surfaces, and the tensioning system (14.5-300) is unlocked. This allows the wheel (14.5-308) to rotate in either direction to increase or decrease the tension on the cable.

A tensioning system (14.5-300) comprising rollers (14.5-314) and a cam wheel (14.5-312) can be locked in either or both directions. Unlike conventional systems that may use spring-actuated pawls, ratchet systems, etc., the tensioning system (14.5-300) uses rollers (14.5-314) that roll within roller openings (14.5-313) to lock and unlock the tensioning system (14.5-300). This is a silent or relatively silent system. The tensioning system (14.5-300) can be locked in either or both directions and thus can be non-reversible. In other words, the cable can be pushed into the tensioning system (14.5-300), but cannot be pulled out of the tensioning system (14.5-300) without using the wheel (14.5-308). This allows the cable to be wound into the tensioning system (14.5-300) and for the tensioning system (14.5-300) to maintain tension within the cable.

Any number of components or a variety of components in any of the configurations described herein may be included in the tensioning system and electronic device. The components may include any combination of features described herein and may be arranged in any of the various configurations described herein. The structure and arrangement of the components of the tensioning system having the roller-wedge locking system described herein may be applied to any number of examples in any combination, as well as to the specific examples discussed herein. Examples of the configurations of the various components of the dial cap included in the tensioning system relative to each other and the configuration of the angle limiters are described below with reference to FIG. 645.

Figure 645 illustrates a partially exploded view of a dial cap (14.5-302) and a perspective view of a cam wheel (14.5-312). The dial cap (14.5-302) includes a center cap (14.5-306), a center cap post (14.5-307), a wheel (14.5-308) including an outer portion (14.5-308A) and an inner portion (14.5-308B), a wheel adhesive (14.5-360), and a clamp ring (14.5-364). The center cap (14.5-306), center cap post (14.5-307), wheel (14.5-308), and cam wheel (14.5-312) may be substantially similar to the center cap (14.5-306), center cap post (14.5-307), wheel (14.5-308), and cam wheel (14.5-312) discussed above with respect to FIGS. 642 through 644, respectively, and may include some or all of their features.

As previously discussed, a user can interact with the outer portion (14.5-308A) of the wheel (14.5-308) to rotate the wheel (14.5-308) and tighten or loosen the cable in the tensioning system by winding or unwinding the cable. The inner portion (14.5-308B) of the wheel (14.5-308) can include protrusions (14.5-308B.i). The protrusions (14.5-308B.i) can be used to interact with the rollers and the cam wheel (14.5-312) to lock and unlock the housing of the tensioning system and the cam wheel (14.5-312). Wheel adhesive (14.5-360) and clamp ring (14.5-364) can be used to fasten the inner part (14.5-308B) to the outer part (14.5-308A) of the wheel (14.5-308).

The example of FIG. 645 includes a disc-type angle stop mechanism. Specifically, the example of FIG. 645 includes a first disc (14.5-351) and a second disc (14.5-355) that provide angle stops for a dial cap (14.5-302). The first disc (14.5-351) and the second disc (14.5-355) can be mounted to a center cap post (14.5-307) by a clip (14.5-358). The first disc (14.5-351) and the second disc (14.5-355) can be fastened to the center cap post (14.5-307) by any method that allows the first disc (14.5-351) and the second disc (14.5-355) to rotate about the center cap post (14.5-307). For example, the first disc (14.5-351) and the second disc (14.5-355) may be fastened to the center cap post (14.5-307) by a pin, clip, other fastener, or the like. The center cap (14.5-306) may include a protrusion (14.5-309) that provides an angular stop for the first disc (14.5-351).

The first disc (14.5-351) may include a first protrusion (14.5-352A) that interacts with a first face of the protrusion (14.5-309) to stop angular rotation of the first disc (14.5-351) in a first direction or a second face of the protrusion (14.5-309) opposite the first face to stop angular rotation of the first disc (14.5-351) in a second direction opposite the first direction. The first disc (14.5-351) includes a second protrusion (e.g., the second protrusion (14.5-350B) discussed below with respect to FIGS. 646A and 646B) opposite the first protrusion that interacts with the second disc (14.5-355). The second disc (14.5-355) interacts with a protrusion (14.5-359) on the cam wheel (14.5-312). The cam wheel (14.5-312) is free to rotate until the protrusion (14.5-359) interacts with a first protrusion (14.5-356A) on the second disc (14.5-355). Subsequently, the cam wheel (14.5-312) and the second disc (14.5-355) are free to rotate until a second protrusion (e.g., the second protrusion (14.5-356B) discussed below with reference to FIG. 646b) of the second disc (14.5-355) interacts with a second protrusion of the first disc (14.5-351). Subsequently, the cam wheel (14.5-312), the second disc (14.5-355), and the first disc (14.5-351) can rotate freely until the first projection (14.5-352A) of the first disc (14.5-351) interacts with the projection (14.5-309) of the center cap (14.5-306). When the first protrusion (14.5-352A) of the first disc (14.5-351) interacts with the protrusion (14.5-309) of the center cap (14.5-306), the protrusion (14.5-309) provides an angular stop that prevents the first disc (14.5-351), the second disc (14.5-355), and the cam wheel (14.5-312) from rotating in one direction but allows the first disc (14.5-351), the second disc (14.5-355), and the cam wheel (14.5-312) to rotate in the opposite direction. This prevents a user from overwinding the tensioning system (e.g., winding more cable into the housing of the tensioning system than the housing is configured to hold) or from slackening the tensioning system so much that the tensioning system winds the cable into the housing in the wrong direction.

Each of the first disc (14.5-351) and the second disc (14.5-355) can allow approximately 360 degrees of rotation, and the cam wheel (14.5-312) can allow approximately an additional 360 degrees of rotation. Specifically, each of the first disc (14.5-351) and the second disc (14.5-355) can allow approximately 360 degrees of rotation less an angular width of the protrusions included in the first disc (14.5-351), the second disc (14.5-355), the center cap (14.5-306), and the cam wheel (14.5-312). Including a greater number of discs in an angle stop increases the angular rotation allowed by the angle stop, while decreasing the number of discs in an angle stop decreases the angular rotation allowed by the angle stop. The first disc (14.5-351) and the second disc (14.5-355) can be formed of relatively hard materials, such as metals (e.g., stainless steel, e.g., SAE 304 stainless steel, 420 stainless steel, etc.; aluminum, brass, or any other suitable metals), high-hardness polymers, other polymers, plastics, etc. Including the first disc (14.5-351) and the second disc (14.5-355) in the angle stop and forming the first disc (14.5-351) and the second disc (14.5-355) of relatively hard materials provides a strong and robust angle stop that is difficult for a user to damage.

Any number or variety of components in any of the configurations described herein may be included in the tensioning system and electronic device. The components may include any combination of features described herein and may be arranged in any of the various configurations described herein. The structure and arrangement of the components of the tensioning system having the roller-wedge locking system and angle limiter described herein may be applied to any number of examples in any combination, as well as to the specific examples discussed herein. Examples of the configuration and operation of the disc-shaped angle limiter included in the tensioning system are described with reference to FIGS. 646A and 646B.

Figures 646a and 646b illustrate plan views of the center cap (14.5-306), the first disc (14.5-351), the second disc (14.5-355), and the cam wheel (14.5-312). Figures 646a and 646b illustrate additional details of the disc-type angle stop mechanism of the example illustrated in Figure 645. The center cap (14.5-306), the first disc (14.5-351), the second disc (14.5-355), and the cam wheel (14.5-312) may be substantially similar to the center cap (14.5-306), the first disc (14.5-351), the second disc (14.5-355), and the cam wheel (14.5-312) discussed above with respect to FIG. 645, respectively, and may include some or all of their features.

As illustrated in FIG. 646a, the first disc (14.5-351) can be seated within the channel (14.5-311) of the center cap (14.5-306). The first disc (14.5-351) is free to rotate within the channel (14.5-311), but is stopped by contact between the first projection (14.5-352A) of the first disc (14.5-351) and one surface of the projection (14.5-309) of the center cap (14.5-306). The first disc (14.5-351) can rotate relative to the center cap (14.5-306) through an angle equal to the widths of the projections (14.5-309) and the first projection (14.5-352A) minus 360 degrees. The first disc (14.5-351) additionally includes a second protrusion (14.5-352B) opposite the first protrusion (14.5-352A) which interacts with the second disc (14.5-355) illustrated in FIG. 646b.

As illustrated in FIG. 646b, the second disc (14.5-355) is seated on the first disc (14.5-351). The second protrusion (14.5-352B) of the first disc (14.5-351) can be seated within the channel (14.5-353) of the second disc (14.5-355) which includes the second protrusion (14.5-356B) opposite the first protrusion (14.5-356A). The second disc (14.5-355) rotates freely and starts to rotate the first disc (14.5-351) when the second projection (14.5-356B) of the second disc (14.5-355) contacts one surface of the second projection (14.5-352B) of the first disc (14.5-351). The second disc (14.5-355) can rotate with respect to the first disc (14.5-351) by an angle equal to the widths of the second projections (14.5-352B) and the second projections (14.5-356B) minus 360 degrees.

In at least one example, the cam wheel (14.5-312) is seated on the second disc (14.5-355). The cam wheel (14.5-312) may include a channel in which the second disc (14.5-355) is disposed, and the protrusion (14.5-359) of the cam wheel (14.5-312) and the first protrusion (14.5-356A) of the second disc (14.5-355) may be disposed within the channel of the cam wheel (14.5-312). The cam wheel (14.5-312) rotates freely and starts to rotate the second disc (14.5-355) when the projection (14.5-359) of the cam wheel (14.5-312) contacts one side of the first projection (14.5-356A) of the second disc (14.5-355). The cam wheel (14.5-312) can rotate about the second disc (14.5-355) by an angle equal to the widths of the projections (14.5-359) and the first projection (14.5-356A) minus 360 degrees. Although the protrusion (14.5-359) has been discussed as being positioned on the cam wheel (14.5-312), the protrusion (14.5-359) may be positioned on any part that rotates relative to the housing and center cap (14.5-306), such as the spool, wheel, etc.

Any number or variety of components in any of the configurations described herein may be included in the tensioning system and electronic device. The components may include any combination of features described herein and may be arranged in any of the various configurations described herein. The structure and arrangement of the components of the tensioning system having a roller-wedge locking system and an angle limiter described herein may be applied to any number of examples in any combination, as well as to the specific examples discussed herein. Examples of the configuration and operation of a dial cap including a ball detent mechanism that may be included in the tensioning system are described below with reference to FIG. 647.

Figure 647 illustrates a partial cross-section of a dial cap (14.5-302). The dial cap (14.5-302) includes a center cap (14.5-306), a wheel (14.5-308), and a ball detent mechanism. The center cap (14.5-306) and the wheel (14.5-308) may be substantially similar to the center cap (14.5-306) and the wheel (14.5-308) discussed above with respect to Figures 642-645 and may include some or all of their features. The ball detent mechanism includes a ball (14.5-370), a detent spring (14.5-372), springs (14.5-374), and a grooved surface (14.5-376) within the wheel (14.5-308). The ball (14.5-370), the detent spring (14.5-372), and the springs (14.5-374) may be contained within the protrusions (14.5-315) of the center cap (14.5-306). As previously described, the wheel (14.5-308) may rotate relative to the center cap (14.5-306). As the wheel (14.5-308) rotates, the springs (14.5-374) push the detent spring (14.5-372), which pushes the ball (14.5-370) into the grooves of the grooved surface (14.5-376) within the wheel (14.5-308). The ball detent mechanism generates both a click sound and a click feel as the wheel (14.5-308) rotates and the ball (14.5-370) moves between adjacent grooves of the grooved surface (14.5-376). Because the locking mechanism provided by the rollers and cam wheel is quiet, the ball detent mechanism can be incorporated into the tensioning system to provide a desired user experience, including a click feel and sound, as the wheel (14.5-308) rotates.

Any number or variety of components in any of the configurations described herein may be included in the tensioning system and electronic device. The components may include any combination of features described herein and may be arranged in any of the various configurations described herein. The structure and arrangement of the components of the roller-wedge locking system and the tensioning system having angle limiters described herein may be applied to any number of examples in any combination, as well as to the specific examples discussed herein. Examples of configurations and operations of various angle limiters that may be included in the tensioning system are described below with reference to FIGS. 648A-648C.

FIGS. 648a through 648c illustrate various angle stop mechanisms that may be used in place of or in addition to the disc-type angle stop mechanism of FIGS. 645 through 646b. In the example of FIG. 648a, a cable-type angle stop mechanism is illustrated. A cable (14.5-380) may be provided and attached to the center cap (14.5-306) and the cam wheel (14.5-312). The cable (14.5-380) may be attached to the center cap (14.5-306) and the cam wheel (14.5-312) using an adhesive or the like. The cable (14.5-380) may be provided such that the cable (14.5-380) wraps around the center cap post (14.5-307) of the center cap (14.5-306) as the cam wheel (14.5-312) rotates about the center cap (14.5-306). Once the cable (14.5-380) is tightly wrapped around the center cap post (14.5-307), the cable (14.5-380) prevents the cam wheel (14.5-312) from rotating about the center cap (14.5-306) while allowing the cam wheel (14.5-312) to rotate in the opposite direction. The cable (14.5-380) may be a low-cost method for providing an angular stop mechanism for a tensioning system. This prevents the user from over-winding the tensioning system (e.g., winding more cable into the tensioning system housing than the housing is configured to hold) or from slackening the tensioning system so much that the tensioning system winds the cable into the housing in the wrong direction. While the cable (14.5-380) has been discussed as being attached to the center cap (14.5-306) and the cam wheel (14.5-312), the cable (14.5-380) may be attached to any component of the tensioning system that preferably includes an angle stop. For example, the cable (14.5-380) may be attached to the spool of the tensioning system and the center cap (14.5-306), the wheel of the tensioning system, etc. In some examples, the cable (14.5-380) may be attached to the housing and the cam wheel (14.5-312) of the tensioning system, the housing and the spool, the housing and the wheel, etc.

In the example of FIG. 648b, a screw-type angle stop mechanism is illustrated. A helical ridge (14.5-382) is formed on a center cap post (14.5-307) of a center cap (14.5-306), and a corresponding helical groove (14.5-384) is formed on a cam wheel (14.5-312). As the cam wheel (14.5-312) rotates relative to the center cap (14.5-306), the cam wheel (14.5-312) moves up or down the center post (14.5-307) of the center cap (14.5-306). Vertical stops may be included on the center cap post (14.5-307) to prevent the cam wheel (14.5-312) from rotating too far in either direction. This prevents the user from over-winding the tensioning system (e.g., winding more cable into the tensioning system housing than the housing is configured to hold) or from slackening the tensioning system so much that the tensioning system winds the cable into the housing in the wrong direction. While the helical ridge (14.5-382) has been discussed as being positioned on the center cap post (14.5-307) of the center cap (14.5-306), the helical ridge (14.5-382) may be positioned on a portion of the tensioning system housing, for example. The helical groove (14.5-384) may be positioned on a spool, for example, of the tensioning system.

In the example of FIG. 648c, a spiral-type angle stop mechanism is illustrated. A spiral (14.5-386) is formed in a center cap (14.5-306). A center cap post (14.5-307) of the center cap (14.5-306) may be formed adjacent to the spiral (14.5-386). The spiral (14.5-386) may be a spiral-shaped groove formed in the center cap (14.5-306). The spiral (14.5-386) may interact with a protrusion (14.5-388) of a cam wheel (14.5-312). The protrusion (14.5-388) may be attached to the cam wheel (14.5-312) such that the protrusion may slide relative to the cam wheel (14.5-312). For example, the protrusion (14.5-388) can slide along the radius of the cam wheel (14.5-312). As the cam wheel (14.5-312) rotates relative to the center cap (14.5-306), the protrusion (14.5-388) slides relative to the cam wheel (14.5-312) along the radius of the cam wheel (14.5-312) closer to or farther from the center of the cam wheel (14.5-312) depending on which direction the cam wheel (14.5-312) rotates. When the protrusion (14.5-388) reaches either end of the spiral (14.5-386), the protrusion (14.5-388) and the spiral (14.5-386) prevent the cam wheel (14.5-312) from rotating relative to the center cap (14.5-306), while allowing the cam wheel (14.5-312) to rotate in the opposite direction. This prevents the user from overwinding the tensioning system (e.g., winding more cable into the housing of the tensioning system than the housing is configured to hold) or from slackening the tensioning system so much that the tensioning system winds the cable into the housing in the wrong direction. Although the spiral (14.5-386) has been discussed as being disposed on the center cap (14.5-306), the spiral (14.5-386) may be disposed on any portion of the housing of the tensioning system, for example. The protrusion (14.5-388) can be placed on the spool of the tensioning system, the wheel of the tensioning system, etc.

14.6: Two-part speaker system

The following disclosure relates to speaker assemblies for electronic devices. More specifically, the following disclosure describes a two-part speaker assembly having a single exit port. Electronic devices typically include a housing that encloses internal system components such as audio speaker assemblies, circuitry, processing units, display elements, and other electronic components. However, as electronic devices become increasingly smaller, the available space for these components decreases. Additionally, it may be desirable to reduce the number of visible openings or ports on an electronic device. The speaker assembly described herein uniquely addresses the problems arising from the reduction in available space, as well as aesthetic and performance requirements.

In certain embodiments, an electronic device, such as a head-mounted device ("HMD"), may include a housing defining an interior volume. The housing may also define an opening that fluidly communicates the interior volume of the housing with the surrounding environment. A speaker assembly or unit may be positioned within the interior volume of the electronic device. In some examples, the speaker assembly is positioned within a support of the HMD, such as within a support arm or support band positioned along the user's head. The speaker assembly may be positioned proximate the user's ear and may be oriented to direct sound toward the user's ear.

In some examples, the speaker assembly may include a speaker pod or housing positioned within the electronic device. The speaker pod may house various components of the speaker assembly. The speaker pod may further define a port or outlet that is aligned with an opening of the electronic device. Thus, the port may be in fluid communication with the interior volume of the speaker pod and the external environment. The speaker assembly may include a plurality of audio transducers or speakers.

A speaker may include a diaphragm coupled to a magnetic component. The magnetic component may include gaps or grooves in which a wound coil, such as a copper coil or any conductive coil capable of being influenced by an electromagnetic field, is placed. In some examples, the coil can generate or be influenced by a desired electromagnetic field. A diaphragm may be attached to the coil. As electrical pulses pass through the coil, its magnetic field direction changes abruptly, causing alternating attractive and reactive forces on the magnetic component to cause back-and-forth vibrations. The coil may be attached to the diaphragm, which amplifies the vibrations and pumps sound waves into the surrounding air. Notably, despite having multiple audio transducers, the speaker assembly may include only a single outlet or port.

In one example, the speaker assembly includes a first speaker, such as a woofer, positioned within the pod and in fluid communication with a first channel. The woofer channel may include a meandering, serpentine path leading to an exit port. A second speaker, such as a tweeter, may also be positioned within the pod and in fluid communication with the second channel or the tweeter channel. As described in more detail below, the woofer channel and the tweeter channel may merge, converge, or combine into a shared channel leading to the port.

In some examples, the tweeter may at least partially overlap the woofer, thereby reducing the footprint of the assembly along at least one major dimension. This may allow the speaker pod to be better mounted within an electronic device having space constraints. In some examples, the speaker assembly may include a port barrier positioned at the port. The port barrier may cover the port. The port barrier may include a woven mesh, a metal screen defining the outer shape of the electronic device, and a support frame for reinforcing the woven mesh. Similarly, the speaker assembly may include a woofer mesh positioned within a channel leading to the woofer. The woofer mesh may have a higher density than the mesh of the port barrier. In some examples, the woofer mesh may have a lower density than the mesh of the port barrier. Thus, the speaker assembly may include a plurality of meshes.

A problem arising from a shared port system as described herein is the potential interference between acoustic waves or sound generated by the woofer and the tweeter. The woofer diaphragm is larger than the tweeter diaphragm, and thus, may negatively affect the tweeter's operation. Therefore, in some examples, the speaker assembly may include a wall positioned between the tweeter and the woofer channel. The wall may shield the tweeter from the acoustic waves generated by the woofer. In some examples, the shielding wall may at least partially confine one or more of the channels of the speaker assembly and may be shaped to direct the sound flow.

These and other embodiments are discussed below with reference to FIGS. 649 through 652. However, those skilled in the art will readily recognize that the detailed description provided herein with respect to these drawings is for illustrative purposes only and should not be construed as limiting. Moreover, as used herein, a system, method, article, component, feature, or sub-feature that includes at least one of the first option, the second option, or the third option should be understood to refer to a system, method, article, component, feature, or sub-feature that can include one of each of the listed options (e.g., only one of the first option, only one of the second option, or only one of the third option), multiple of a single listed option (e.g., two or more of the first option), two options simultaneously (e.g., one of the first option and one of the second option), or a combination thereof (e.g., two of the first option and one of the second option).

It will be further understood that the various directional indicators used herein (e.g., up, down, sideways, vertical, horizontal, top, bottom, above, below, etc.) are made with respect to the orientation of the drawing at issue. For example, a vertical axis should be understood as an axis extending from the top of the page to the bottom of the page.

Figures 649a through 649d illustrate various electronic devices that may be used with the speaker assembly described herein. The electronic devices may correspond to any type of wearable electronic device, portable media player, media storage device, portable digital assistant ("PDA"), tablet computer, computer, mobile communication device, GPS unit, remote control device, or any other electronic device. Specific examples of such devices are described below.

FIG. 649a illustrates an electronic device, such as a head-mounted device (14.6-100a), positioned on a user's head (14.6-120). The head-mounted device may include a display device used in virtual or augmented reality simulations. The head-mounted device (14.6-100a) may further be associated with any type of computer glasses or smart glasses. The head-mounted device (14.6-100a) may include a display (14.6-104) and a support (14.6-108), such as a headband or support arms. In some examples, the display (14.6-104) includes an opaque, partially transparent, transparent, or translucent screen including any number of lenses for presenting visual data.

A head-mounted device (14.6-100a) may be worn on a user's head (14.6-120) such that the display (14.6-104) is positioned over the user's face and over one or both of the user's eyes. The display (14.6-104) may be connected to a support (14.6-108). In some examples, the support (14.6-108) may be positioned against and in contact with a side of the user's head (14.6-120). In some examples, the support (14.6-108) may be positioned at least partially over the user's ear or ears (14.6-124). In some examples, the support (14.6-108) may be positioned adjacent to the user's ear or ears (14.6-124). The support (14.6-108) may extend around the user's head (14.6-120). In this manner, the display (14.6-104) and the support (14.6-108) may hold the head-mounted device (14.6-100a) on the user's head (14.6-120). However, it should be understood that this configuration is only one example of how the components of the modular head-mounted device (14.6-100a) may be arranged, and that in some examples, a different number of connector straps and/or retention bands may be included.

A head-mounted device (14.6-100a) may include a frame or housing housing various electrical components. Various components of the display unit (14.6-104) may be housed within the housing. For example, hardware and electronics that enable the functionality of the HMD may be housed within the housing. The housing may be bounded by any portion of the support (14.6-108) and/or the display (14.6-104).

In some examples, the head-mounted device (14.6-100a) may include a speaker assembly (14.6-112). The speaker assembly (14.6-112) may be positioned within a housing of the head-mounted device (14.6-100a). For example, the speaker assembly (14.6-112) may be positioned within or on a support (14.6-108). The support (14.6-108) may define an opening (14.6-116) positioned proximate the speaker assembly (14.6-112) that allows passage of acoustic waves generated by the speaker assembly (14.6-112) to radiate into the external environment. In some examples, when the head-mounted device (14.6-100a) is worn on the user's head (14.6-120), the speaker assembly (14.6-112) and the aperture (14.6-116) are positioned proximate the user's ear (14.6-124). The support (14.6-108) and/or the aperture (14.6-116) may be oriented such that sound is directed toward the user's ear (14.6-124) when the user (14.6-120) is wearing the head-mounted device (14.6-100a). Additional details regarding electronic devices that may implement a single port speaker system are described below with reference to FIG. 649b.

FIG. 649b illustrates an example in which the electronic device is a wearable device (14.6-100b). The wearable device (14.6-100b) may be a watch, such as a smartwatch. The wearable device (14.6-100b) of FIG. 649b is merely one representative example of a device that can be used with the components and methods disclosed herein. In other words, the wearable device (14.6-100b) is a non-limiting example of a device that may include a single port speaker assembly as described herein.

A wearable device (14.6-100b) may include an enclosure or housing (14.6-103). The housing (14.6-103) may be connected to a front display (14.6-105) and may have a strap (14.6-109) designed to attach the wearable device (14.6-100b) to a user or provide wearable functionality. The housing (14.6-103) may define a port (14.6-116) in fluid communication with a speaker assembly disposed within the housing (14.6-103). A number of input elements, such as a rotatable crown and/or buttons (14.6-107), may be attached to and protrude from the housing (14.6-103). The housing (14.6-103) may define a single speaker port (14.6-116) which may be integrally formed with and defined by the housing (14.6-103).

In some examples, the wearable device (14.6-100b) may include a speaker assembly (not shown in FIG. 649b). The speaker assembly may be positioned within a housing (14.6-103) of the wearable device (14.6-100b). The housing (14.6-103) may define a port (14.6-116) positioned relative to the speaker assembly (14.6-112) to allow passage of acoustic waves generated by the speaker assembly and radiate them into the external environment. In some examples, when the wearable device (14.6-100b) is worn by a user, the port (14.6-116) is positioned or oriented so as to be directed toward the user's ear (14.6-124). The port (14.6-116) may be positioned so that sound is directed toward the user's ear when the wearable device (14.6-100b) is worn by the user. Additional details regarding electronic devices capable of implementing a single port speaker system are described below with reference to FIG. 649c.

FIG. 649c illustrates an example in which the electronic device is a computer (14.6-100c), such as a laptop or desktop computer. The computer (14.6-100c) of FIG. 649c is merely one representative example of a device that can be used with the components and methods disclosed herein. Specifically, the computer (14.6-100c) is one representative example of a device that can include a single-port speaker assembly as described herein.

A computer (14.6-100c) may include an enclosure or housing (14.6-111). The housing (14.6-111) may be connected to a display (14.6-113). The housing (14.6-111) may define a port (14.6-116) in fluid communication with a speaker assembly housed within the housing (14.6-111). A plurality of input elements (14.6-115), such as a keyboard, may be attached to and protrude from the housing (14.6-111).

The housing (14.6-111) can substantially define at least a portion of the interior volume and exterior surface of the computer (14.6-100c). The display (14.6-113) can include a touch-sensitive surface, such as a touch screen. The display (14.6-113) can define the exterior surface of the computer (14.6-100c).

The housing (14.6-111) may also include features such as button openings or charging port openings. In some examples, the housing (14.6-111) defines only a single speaker port (14.6-116) by the process described herein. The speaker port (14.6-116) may be integrally formed with and defined by the housing (14.6-111).

In some examples, the computer (14.6-100c) may include a speaker assembly (not shown in FIG. 649c). The speaker assembly may be positioned within an interior volume of a housing (14.6-111) of the computer (14.6-100c). The housing (14.6-111) may define a port (14.6-116) positioned relative to the speaker assembly to allow passage of acoustic waves generated by the speaker assembly and radiate into the external environment. The port (14.6-116) may be positioned so that sound is directed toward the user's ear when the user is using the computer (14.6-100c). Additional details regarding electronic devices that may implement a single port speaker system are described below with reference to FIG. 649d.

FIG. 649d illustrates an example in which the electronic device is a mobile device (14.6-100d), such as a smartphone or tablet computer. The mobile device (14.6-100d) of FIG. 649d is merely one representative example of a device that can be used with the components and methods disclosed herein. Specifically, the mobile device (14.6-100d) is merely one representative example of a device that can include a single-port speaker assembly as described herein.

A mobile device (14.6-100d) may include an enclosure or housing (14.6-117). The housing (14.6-117) may be connected to a display (14.6-119). The housing (14.6-117) may define a port (14.6-116) in fluid communication with a speaker assembly disposed within the housing (14.6-117).

The housing (14.6-117) may substantially define at least a portion of an exterior surface of the mobile device (14.6-100d). The display (14.6-119) may include a touch-sensitive surface, such as a touch screen. The display (14.6-119) may define an exterior surface of the mobile device (14.6-100d).

The housing (14.6-117) may also include features such as button openings or charging port openings. In some examples, the housing (14.6-117) defines only a single speaker port (14.6-116) by the process described herein. The speaker port (14.6-116) may be integrally formed with the housing (14.6-117).

In some examples, the mobile device (14.6-100d) may include a speaker assembly (not shown in FIG. 649c). The speaker assembly may be positioned within a housing (14.6-117) of the mobile device (14.6-100d). The housing (14.6-117) may define a port (14.6-116) positioned relative to the speaker assembly (14.6-112) to allow passage of acoustic waves generated by the speaker assembly and radiate into the external environment. The port (14.6-116) may be positioned so that sound is directed toward the user's ear when the user is using the mobile device (14.6-100d). Additional details regarding the speaker assemblies are described below with reference to FIG. 650.

FIG. 650 illustrates a schematic diagram of an electronic device (14.6-200) including a speaker assembly (14.6-212). The electronic device (14.6-200) may be substantially similar to, and may include some or all of the features of, the electronic devices described herein, such as a head-mounted device (14.6-100a), a wearable device (14.6-100b), a computer (14.6-100c), and a mobile device (14.6-100d).

An electronic device (14.6-200) may define an interior volume (14.6-201) for housing electronic components. A speaker assembly (14.6-212) may be positioned within the interior volume (14.6-201). In some examples, the entirety of the speaker assembly (14.6-212) is positioned within the interior volume (14.6-201). The electronic device (14.6-200) may define an opening or openings (14.6-216a) that are in fluid communication with the surrounding environment and the speaker assembly (14.6-212).

The speaker assembly (14.6-212) may include a pod (14.6-213), which may alternatively be referred to as a speaker assembly housing or enclosure, that defines an interior volume (14.6-215) of the speaker assembly. The pod (14.6-213) may house various electrical and acoustic components. The speaker assembly (14.6-212) may include various acoustic components such as audio transducers, woofers, tweeters, midrange drivers, and any other types of drivers or speaker components.

In some examples, the speaker pod (14.6-213) includes a woofer (14.6-230) and a tweeter (14.6-234). The woofer (14.6-230) (also known as a bass speaker or loudspeaker driver) may be designed to produce low frequency sounds. The woofer (14.6-230) may be an electrodynamic driver. In some examples, the woofer (14.6-230) may be capable of producing sounds from about 50 Hz to about 2000 Hz.

The speaker assembly (14.6-212) may include a tweeter (14.6-234). The tweeter (14.6-234) may also be referred to as a treble speaker or loudspeaker. The tweeter (14.6-234) may be a speaker driver that produces sound output in a frequency range higher than that output by the high frequency range or woofer. In some examples, the tweeter (14.6-234) produces sound in the range of about 2 kHz to about 20 kHz. In some examples, the tweeter (14.6-234) may produce sound up to about 100 kHz. The tweeter (14.6-234) may be positioned proximate an opening, outlet, or port (14.6-216b) of the speaker pod (14.6-213) that leads into the surrounding environment. The port (14.6-216b) may be aligned with or in fluid communication with an opening (14.6-216a) defined by a housing of the electronic device (14.6-200).

In particular, in some examples, the speaker assembly (14.6-212) includes only one port (14.6-216b) that emits sounds into the surrounding environment. The tweeter (14.6-234) and the woofer (14.6-230) may be vertically stacked. For example, the tweeter (14.6-234) may be positioned above or on top of the woofer (14.6-230) (with respect to the drawing of FIG. 650). In some examples, the tweeter (14.6-234) overlaps the woofer (14.6-230) along a horizontal axis such that the woofer (14.6-230) and the tweeter are stacked along a vertical axis. The stacking of the woofer (14.6-230) and the tweeter (14.6-234) may allow the speaker pod (14.6-213) to have reduced dimensions (e.g., along a horizontal axis). As illustrated, the tweeter (14.6-234) may be positioned closer to the port (14.6-216b) than to the woofer (14.6-230). In other words, the distance between the port (14.6-216b) and the woofer (14.6-230) is greater than the distance between the port (14.6-216b) and the tweeter (14.6-234).

The speaker assembly (14.6-212) may include interior walls or barrier components that define one or more channels, passageways, or tunnels designed to guide sound within the speaker assembly (14.6-212). In some examples, a woofer channel (14.6-250) may be in fluid communication with an interior of the woofer (14.6-230) to receive sound produced by the woofer (14.6-230) and guide the sound at least partially to a port (14.6-216b). Similarly, a tweeter channel (14.6-251) may be in fluid communication with the tweeter (14.6-234) to receive sound produced by the tweeter (14.6-234) and guide the sound to a port (14.6-216b).

As described herein, the pod (14.6-213) may define a single exit port (14.6-216b). Thus, in some configurations, the woofer channel (14.6-250) and the tweeter channel (14.6-251) converge into a shared channel (14.6-252) leading to the port (14.6-216b). In at least one example, the woofer channel (14.6-250), the tweeter channel (14.6-251), and the shared channel (14.6-252) may be formed as a single channel leading to the single port (14.6-216b). In other words, the woofer channel (14.6-250) can direct primarily low-frequency sounds produced by the woofer (14.6-230), and the tweeter channel (14.6-251) can direct primarily high-frequency sounds produced by the tweeter (14.6-234). Thus, the shared channel (14.6-252) can include both high-frequency and low-frequency sound waves produced by both the woofer (14.6-230) and the tweeter (14.6-234). In some examples, the woofer channel (14.6-250) and the tweeter channel (14.6-251) terminate at the port (14.6-216b).

In at least one example, the shared channel (14.6-252) may be eliminated or reduced in size such that the woofer channel (14.6-250) and the tweeter channel (14.6-252) extend to port (14.6-216b). In such an example, the woofer channel (14.6-250) may terminate at the tweeter channel (14.6-251) and the tweeter channel may terminate at port (14.6-216). In this manner, in at least one example, the woofer channel (14.6-250) and the tweeter channel (14.6-251) may be joined to form a single channel that terminates at a single port (14.6-216b). As illustrated in FIG. 650, the port (14.6-216b) and the opening (14.6-216) may be aligned to form a single opening or port that is at least partially defined by the external housing of the device (14.6-200) and visible from the external environment.

In some examples, a mesh (14.6-258) may be positioned within or across the woofer channel (14.6-250). The mesh (14.6-258) may comprise a cloth or fabric (also referred to as grill cloth, acoustic cloth, or speaker mesh) designed to allow sound transmission through the material. The mesh (14.6-258) may aid in acoustic attenuation, distortion control, and airflow noise control.

The speaker mesh (14.6-258) may include a predetermined sound transmission characteristic suitable for the sound produced by the woofer (14.6-230). The woofer (14.6-230) may have a frequency range of about 20 Hz to about 2 kHz. The tweeter (14.6-234) may have a frequency range of about 200 Hz to about 20 kHz. In some examples, the woofer (14.6-230) may have a frequency range as low as about 20 Hz to about 50 Hz and as high as about 200 Hz to about 2 kHz. The tweeter (14.6-234) may have a frequency range as low as about 200 Hz to about 2 kHz and as high as about 20 kHz. In some examples, the mesh (14.6-258) may allow the passage of frequencies lower than those generated by the tweeter (14.6-234). For example, the mesh (14.6-258) may substantially allow sound generated by the woofer (14.6-230) below 2000 Hz to pass therethrough, but may substantially prevent or reduce transmission of frequencies generated by the tweeter (14.6-234) transmitted therethrough. For example, the mesh (14.6-258) may substantially block or prevent sound frequencies greater than about 2000 Hz from being transmitted backward from the tweeter channel (14.6-252) to the woofer channel (14.6-250). The mesh (14.6-258) may at least partially block or prevent sound from the tweeter (14.6-234) from traveling into the woofer channel (14.6-250). The mesh (14.6-258) may be made of synthetic materials or threads in a woven pattern, or may include foam. The mesh (14.6-258) may be an air-permeable component.

The mesh (14.6-258) may be positioned at or near the end or outlet (14.6-249) of the woofer channel (14.6-250). The mesh (14.6-258) may substantially occupy the entire volume defined by the woofer channel (14.6-250). However, in some other examples, the mesh (14.6-258) may occupy only a portion of the woofer channel (14.6-250). In use, the mesh (14.6-258) may serve to reduce the velocity of air flowing through the woofer channel (14.6-250), thereby reducing undesirable airflow noise and providing a clearer sound signal audible to the user. In some examples, the mesh (14.6-258) may block or prevent particle ingress through the woofer channel (14.6-250).

The speaker assembly (14.6-212) may include a port mesh (14.6-260) positioned within or across the aperture (14.6-216a), the port (14.6-216b), and/or the shared channel (14.6-252). In some examples, the port mesh (14.6-260) is positioned across the tweeter channel (14.6-251). The port mesh may be substantially similar to the mesh (14.6-258). However, in at least one example, the port mesh (14.6-260) may have a lower density than the mesh (14.6-258). The port mesh (14.6-260) may include a cloth or fabric designed to allow for easy sound transmission through the material. The port mesh (14.6-260) may include predetermined sound transmissivity suitable for sound produced by the tweeter (14.6-234). The port mesh (14.6-260) may complement the mesh (14.6-258) for additional sound attenuation. In some examples, the port mesh (14.6-260) may allow the passage of frequencies as high as 20 kHz. The port mesh (14.6-260) may be manufactured from synthetic materials or threads in a woven pattern. As described in more detail with respect to FIG. 652, a decorative steel screen may be combined with the port mesh (14.6-260) to define the exterior of the electronic device (14.6-200). Additionally, a frame defined by a series of support ribs may support the port mesh (14.6-260) to prevent damage to the port mesh (14.6-260).

The port mesh (14.6-260) may be an air-permeable component. In some examples, the port mesh (14.6-260) may substantially occupy the entire volume defined by at least one of the shared channel (14.6-252), the port (14.6-216b), and the opening (14.6-216a). However, in some other examples, the port mesh (14.6-260) may occupy only a portion of at least one of the shared channel (14.6-252), the port (14.6-216b), and the opening (14.6-216a). In use, the port mesh (14.6-260) may serve to reduce the velocity of air flowing through the shared channel (14.6-252), thereby reducing undesirable airflow noise and providing a clearer acoustic signal audible to the user. In some examples, the port mesh (14.6-260) may block or prevent particle entry through the shared channel (14.6-252).

As mentioned above and illustrated in FIG. 650, the mesh (14.6-258) can be positioned between the woofer channel (14.6-250) and the tweeter channel (14.6-252) so that the mesh (14.6-258) can aid in acoustic attenuation, distortion control, and noise control for specific frequencies output by the woofer (14.6-230) without attenuating or otherwise interfering with the passage of sound frequencies passing through the tweeter channel (14.6-252) and out of the port mesh (14.6-260). In this manner, the dense mesh (14.6-258) provides benefits that are tuned to the sound output by the woofer (14.6-230), and the port mesh is configured to optimally provide attenuation, distortion control, and drift noise control of the high frequencies output by the tweeter (14.6-234) without the same high frequencies having to first pass through the mesh (14.6-258). As mentioned above, the port mesh (14.6-260) is also configured to allow passage of lower frequencies from the woofer (14.6-230) through the port (14.6-216b) and the aperture (14.6-216a) without substantially or significantly attenuating or otherwise interfering with the woofer sound. In this manner, both the lower woofer frequencies and the higher tweeter frequencies produced by the speaker assembly (14.6-212) can be optimally controlled for quality when the sound passes through a single shared exit or opening, such as the aperture (14.6-216a), by both the mesh (14.6-258) and the port mesh (14.6-260) positioned as illustrated in FIG. 650. Additional details regarding the speaker assemblies are described below with reference to FIGS. 651a through 651e.

FIG. 651A illustrates a top perspective view of an example speaker assembly (14.6-312). The speaker assembly (14.6-312) may be substantially similar to the speaker assemblies described herein, such as speaker assemblies (14.6-112, 14.6-212), and may include some or all of their features. FIG. 651A is merely one exemplary example of how the speaker assembly (14.6-312) may be designed and is not limited to the design or components shown. As illustrated, the speaker assembly (14.6-312) may include a housing or pod (14.6-313) that houses various components of the speaker assembly (14.6-312), such as audio transducers. The pod (14.6-313) may comprise stainless steel. In some examples, the pod (14.6-313) may include a lower portion (illustrated in FIG. 651a) and an upper portion (not shown). The upper and lower portions of the pod (14.6-313) may substantially surround or encapsulate components of the speaker assembly (14.6-312). The lower portion of the pod (14.6-313) may include a curved or non-planar surface defining an interior volume, such as the interior volume (14.6-215) of FIG. 650. The speaker assembly (14.6-312) may include an elastomeric gasket (not shown in FIG. 651a) positioned around the periphery of the pod (14.6-313). The elastomeric gasket may provide a seal between the upper and lower portions of the pod (14.6-313). In some examples, the pod (14.6-313) does not include a top portion, but instead is sealed directly to the inner surface of the housing of the electronic device.

As illustrated in FIG. 651a, the pod (14.6-313) may house a woofer (14.6-330) and a tweeter (14.6-334). The tweeter (14.6-334) may be positioned at least partially adjacent to the woofer (14.6-330). As described herein, the tweeter (14.6-334) may be at least partially stacked or overlapped with the woofer (14.6-330) to accommodate the reduced dimensions of the pod (14.6-313).

The pod (14.6-313) may define a port (14.6-316), through which sound from both the woofer (14.6-330) and the tweeter (14.6-334) is radiated into the surrounding environment. As discussed herein, the pod (14.6-313) may include or define a single exit port (14.6-316). The single exit port (14.6-316) may improve the aesthetic appearance of the electronic device. Additionally, the single exit port (14.6-316) may provide the advantage of having fewer entry points for dust, particles, or debris, thereby reducing the likelihood of foreign matter entering the electronic device. The pod (14.6-313) may define grooves (14.6-338) that are shaped to allow electrical wires to pass within the interior volume of the pod (14.6-313) even when the upper portion is secured to the lower portion. The electrical wires may be in electrical communication with the woofer (14.6-330) and the tweeter (14.6-334). In some examples, a printed circuit board or PCB (not shown in FIG. 651a) may be secured to the upper portion of the woofer (14.6-330). The PCB may be at least partially secured by protrusions (14.6-342) that secure the PCB in place over the woofer (14.6-330). The protrusions (14.6-342) may be helical coils. A heat sink may be located on or above the PCB. In some examples, the speaker assembly (14.6-312) may include a vent (14.6-346). The vent (14.6-346) may be a barometric vent that allows for air equalization within the speaker assembly (14.6-312).

Figure 651b illustrates a cross-sectional side view of a speaker assembly (14.6-312) according to one embodiment. Similarly, Figure 651c illustrates a cross-sectional perspective view of a speaker assembly (14.6-312) according to one embodiment. The woofer (14.6-330) may include a diaphragm (14.6-332) that oscillates along a vertical axis when current is applied to the woofer (14.6-330). Sound produced by the woofer diaphragm (14.6-332) may travel downward in the woofer volume (14.6-349) and may then be guided laterally or horizontally through the woofer channel (14.6-350). In some examples, at least a portion of the woofer volume (14.6-349) and the woofer channel (14.6-350) may be defined by the inner surface of the bottom wall of the pod (14.6-313).

In some examples, the sound produced by the woofer (14.6-330) may take a tortuous or meandering path as it travels to the port (14.6-316). For example, sound from the woofer (14.6-330) may have to change direction several times to reach the port (14.6-316). A long meandering path may affect the acoustic modes of the path, and consequently, affect the output. As used herein, a meandering path may refer to a tortuous or curved path (e.g., non-linear). The meandering path described herein may originate at the horizontal interface (14.6-357) between the woofer (14.6-330) and the tweeter (14.6-334), as illustrated, with the tweeter stacked or overlapping the woofer (14.6-330).

As illustrated in FIG. 651b, the pod (14.6-313) may include an overhang or lip (14.6-315). The perimeter or footprint of the lip (14.6-315) may be smaller than the perimeter or footprint of the combined audio components housed within the pod (14.6-313), such as the woofer (14.6-330), the tweeter (14.6-334), etc. Accordingly, the system may need to be assembled in a certain order and manner due to the lip (14.6-315). For example, the dimensions of the pod (14.6-313) may prevent the woofer (14.6-330) and the tweeter (14.6-334) from being simply attached or assembled before being placed within the pod (14.6-313). Alternatively, it may be necessary to first position the tweeter (14.6-334) or woofer (14.6-330) within the pod (14.6-313), and then place the remaining components in place. Components of the speaker assembly (14.6-312) may need to be horizontally slid or angled to be set into the correct position within the pod (14.6-313). The lip (14.6-315) may overlap a portion of the tweeter (14.6-334) or protrude above it.

Additionally, as described herein, modern electronic devices often require reduced dimensions, necessitating novel solutions for mounting the electronics within housings or enclosures. For example, the electronic devices described herein may include integrated speaker assemblies that maintain a wide frequency range and desirable acoustic performance levels, despite being housed within smaller, more compact housings. In some examples, this is achieved by overlapping or stacking tweeters (14.6-334) and woofers (14.6-330).

The nested tweeter (14.6-334) and woofer (14.6-330) configuration increases the compactness of the speaker assembly (14.6-312) and allows for horizontal assembly tolerances when assembling the speaker assembly (14.6-312). Furthermore, in at least one example, the nested configuration of the tweeter (14.6-334) and woofer (14.6-330) may result in the woofer channel (14.6-350) and/or the tweeter channel (14.6-351) varying in orientation in a meandering manner, for example, from horizontal to vertical and/or at different channel angles. The stacked nature of the speaker assembly (14.6-312) in combination with the single port (14.6-316) may create a meandering, meandering path for sound waves. For example, the horizontal interface (14.6-357) allows for horizontal assembly tolerances while allowing the woofer channel (14.6-350) to be oriented upward to accommodate the horizontal interface (14.6-357). In some examples, the meandering path may be defined by smooth or curved walls to reduce or eliminate turbulence.

As illustrated in FIG. 651b, the horizontal interface (14.6-357) may, due to the laminated nature of the tweeter (14.6-334) and the woofer (14.6-330), contact or at least protrude over portions of the tweeter (14.6-334) and the woofer (14.6-330), or may contact or protrude over certain walls or other components of the tweeter (14.6-334) and the woofer (14.6-330). Additionally, as used herein and as shown in the orientation of FIG. 651b, the term "horizontal" may refer to a plane that is generally parallel to the planes on which the tweeter diaphragm (14.6-335) and the woofer diaphragm (14.6-332) are disposed. In one or more other examples, the stacked configuration/positioning of the tweeter (14.6-334) and the woofer (14.6-330) can form an interface at any angle from the "horizontal" orientation relative to the diaphragms (14.6-335, 14.6-332), e.g., any angle between horizontal and vertical ("vertical" relative to the angle, plane, or orientation perpendicular to the diaphragms (14.6-335, 14.6-332) illustrated in FIG. 651b). Thus, at least in one example, the interface (14.6-357) comprises surfaces or components of the tweeter (14.6-334) and the woofer (14.6-330) coming together at an angle other than vertical, e.g., a 45 degree angle from horizontal, or any other angle from the horizontal or vertical direction. As mentioned above, these angled or horizontal interfaces (14.6-357) may cause the sound path produced by the woofer (14.6-330) and/or tweeter (14.6-334) to be meandering or tortuous, as illustrated in FIG. 651b.

The angled or curved ramp (14.6-354) may be positioned and shaped to direct sound from the woofer volume (14.6-349) to the shared volume (14.6-352). For example, as sound travels laterally, the curved ramp (14.6-354) guides the sound upward. The curved ramp (14.6-354) may include a smooth transition surface to reduce turbulence. The curved ramp (14.6-354) may include a radius of curvature of about 0.2 cm to 0.3 cm. It will be appreciated that the ramp (14.6-354) is optional, and in some examples, sound produced by the woofer (14.6-330) travels primarily laterally or horizontally to the port (14.6-316).

In some examples, a mesh (14.6-358) (similar to mesh (14.6-258)) may be positioned at the end of the woofer channel (14.6-350). The mesh (14.6-358) may be positioned at the interface between the woofer (14.6-330) and the tweeter (14.6-334).

The speaker assembly (14.6-312) may include a wall (14.6-353). The wall (14.6-353) may be made of plastic and may be positioned below the tweeter (14.6-334) (e.g., between the tweeter (14.6-334) and the woofer channel (14.6-350)). The wall (14.6-353) may be positioned to shield the tweeter (14.6-334) from sound produced by the woofer (14.6-330). In some examples, the wall (14.6-353) may be curved to provide a smooth transition surface to direct upwardly directed sound laterally toward the port (14.6-316). In some examples, the wall (14.6-353) is positioned and/or shaped to direct sound from the tweeter (14.6-334) toward the port (14.6-316). The wall (14.6-353) may at least partially prevent sound from the tweeter (14.6-334) from passing into the woofer channel (14.6-350). The wall (14.6-353) may at least partially confine the tweeter channel (14.6-351) and/or the woofer channel (14.6-350). In some examples, the wall (14.6-353) may extend substantially across the tweeter (14.6-334). The wall (14.6-353) may extend into the port mesh (14.6-360). Therefore, the shared channel (14.6-352) can be omitted due to the wall (14.6-353) that maintains the separation of the woofer channel (14.6-350) and the tweeter channel (14.6-351).

The tweeter (14.6-334) may include a diaphragm (14.6-335). The diaphragm (14.6-335) may oscillate or vibrate along a vertical axis. The diaphragm (14.6-335) may oscillate in the same direction(s) as the diaphragm (14.6-332). The woofer diaphragm (14.6-332) may include a surface area approximately ten times greater than the surface area of the tweeter diaphragm (14.6-335).

In some examples, the tweeter (14.6-334) may be positioned closer to the port (14.6-316) than the woofer (14.6-330). The path taken by the sound produced by the tweeter (14.6-334) may be substantially more linear, or at least substantially less meandering, than the path taken by the sound from the woofer (14.6-330). In some examples, the sound produced by the tweeter (14.6-334) is initially directed downward but is guided substantially laterally toward the port (14.6-316).

The speaker assembly (14.6-312) may include several interfaces (e.g., horizontal interface (14.6-357)) between the woofer (14.6-330) and the tweeter (14.6-334) or between the speaker components and the pod (14.6-313). Foams may be positioned between the interfaces of the speaker housing (14.6-313) and the components. Specifically, FIG. 651b illustrates foam (14.6-363a) positioned between a sidewall (14.6-364) of the pod (14.6-313) and the tweeter (14.6-334). Additionally, foam (14.6-363b) may be positioned between an inner surface of the pod (14.6-313) and a channel wall (14.6-366).

The foams (14.6-363a, 14.6-363b) may include reworkable properties such as flexibility and malleability to allow free play within the speaker assembly (14.6-312). The foams (14.6-363a, 14.6-363b) may be used in addition to or as a replacement for a pressure-sensitive adhesive (PSA). The foams (14.6-363a, 14.6-363b) may advantageously not be permanently fixed, thereby allowing adjustment and repositioning of components of the assembly. In some examples, the foams (14.6-363a, 14.6-363b) may be used in conjunction with an adhesive. Advantageously, the foams between the pod (14.6-313) and various interfaces of the components may accommodate tolerances within the system. For example, the minimum sealing tolerance may be approximately 300 micrometers. The locations of the forms (14.6-363a, 14.6-363b) are merely exemplary locations where the forms may be present. It will be appreciated that the forms may be positioned at various locations or interfaces not shown in FIGS. 651b and 651c.

In some examples, the port (14.6-316) is about 30 mm ² across its cross-section. The size of the port (14.6-316) can vary depending on the capabilities of the woofer (14.6-330). The size of the port (14.6-316) can be determined by the desired particle velocity. For example, the particle velocity can be the volume velocity (e.g., the volume of sound waves or air passing through an area per unit time) divided by the cross-sectional area of the port, where the volume velocity is affected by the maximum output of the system at low frequencies. The particle velocity can be up to 50 meters per second. In some examples, the particle velocity is 10 meters per second. The port (14.6-316) can include a sleeve (14.6-319) positioned within the port (14.6-316) and extending around the periphery of the port (14.6-316). The sleeve (14.6-319) may be made of plastic. The sleeve (14.6-319) may extend through the port opening (14.6-316) of the pod (14.6-313) and may also extend through an opening in the housing of the electronic device (e.g., opening (14.6-216a) of FIG. 650).

Figure 651d illustrates a top perspective view of a speaker module (14.6-317). The speaker module (14.6-317) may represent certain electronic components removed from the aforementioned pod (14.6-313). The speaker module (14.6-317) may include a woofer (14.6-330) and a tweeter (14.6-334). In some examples, the speaker module (14.6-317) may include a frame (14.6-347). The frame (14.6-347) may be secured to an inner surface of the pod (14.6-313). Figure 651e illustrates a bottom perspective view of the speaker module (14.6-317). The underside of the frame (14.6-347) may be sealed to the bottom of the pod (14.6-313). In some examples, the speaker module (14.6-317) is sealed to the pod using a foam and/or adhesive, such as the foam (14.6-363) discussed above with respect to FIG. 651b. The woofer diaphragm (14.6-332), the woofer channel (14.6-350), and the mesh (14.6-358) are also visible on the underside of the speaker module (14.6-317) as illustrated in FIG. 651e. In some examples, a pneumatic vent (14.6-346) may be positioned between the mesh (14.6-358) and the woofer diaphragm (14.6-332), as illustrated.

FIG. 652 illustrates a perspective view of a port barrier (14.6-460). The port barrier (14.6-460) may be substantially similar to the meshes described herein, such as meshes (14.6-260, 14.6-360), and may include some or all of their features. The port barrier (14.6-460) may be positioned within or across an opening of an electronic device, a port of a speaker assembly, and/or a shared channel (e.g., shared channel (14.6-252)). The port barrier (14.6-460) may include an outer screen (14.6-460a), a woven mesh (14.6-460b), and a frame (14.6-460c).

The outer screen (14.6-460a) may be a metal structure that defines at least a portion of the outer surface of the electronic device. In other words, the outer screen (14.6-460a) may be a user-visible decorative feature. In some examples, the outer screen (14.6-460a) may provide structural support to the woven mesh (14.6-460b). The outer screen (14.6-460a) may act as a particle or debris barrier to prevent particles from entering the speaker assembly.

As discussed in more detail above with respect to FIG. 651b, the woven mesh (14.6-460b) may comprise a cloth or fabric designed to allow for easy sound transmission through the material. The speaker port barrier (14.6-460) may comprise a predetermined sound transmissivity suitable for the sound produced by the tweeter (14.6-234). The port barrier (14.6-460) may partially attenuate the sound. In some examples, the woven mesh (14.6-460b) may allow for the passage of frequencies between 20 Hz and 20 kHz. In some examples, the woven mesh (14.6-460b) may allow for the passage of frequencies between 2 kHz and 20 kHz. The woven mesh (14.6-460b) may be manufactured from synthetic materials or threads in a weaving pattern.

The port barrier (14.6-460) may be air permeable. The port barrier (14.6-460) may substantially occupy the entire volume defined by at least one of the shared channel, the port (e.g., the port (14.6-216b, 14.6-316)), and the opening (e.g., the opening (14.6-116, 14.6-216a)). However, in some other examples, the port barrier (14.6-460) may occupy only a portion of at least one of the shared channel (14.6-252), the port (14.6-216b), and the opening (14.6-216a). When in use, the port barrier (14.6-460) may serve to reduce the velocity of air flowing through the shared channel (14.6-252), thereby reducing undesirable airflow noise and providing a clearer acoustic signal audible to the user. In some examples, the port barrier (14.6-460) may block or prevent particle ingress through the shared channel (14.6-252). The port barrier (14.6-460) may have a lower density than the mesh (14.6-258).

The frame (14.6-460c) may be positioned within the outer screen (14.6-460a) and the woven mesh (14.6-460b). In some examples, the woven mesh (14.6-460b) is positioned between or sandwiched between the outer screen (14.6-460a) and the frame (14.6-460c). The frame (14.6-460c) may include a series of support ribs (14.6-461) to reinforce, shield, or support the woven mesh (14.6-460b). In some examples, the frame (14.6-460c) is positioned outside the woven mesh (14.6-460b) (e.g., between the outer screen (14.6-460a) and the woven mesh (14.6-460b)). The frame (14.6-460c) may be manufactured from any suitable material such as plastic or metal.

14.7: Bifurcated Bands

Head-mounted devices include head-mounted support structures that allow the devices to be worn on a user's head. The head-mounted support structures may include device housings for housing components, such as displays, used to present visual content to the user. Head-mounted support structures for head-mounted devices may also include headbands and other structures that help maintain the device housing on the user's face. The headband of the head-mounted device may be adjustable.

In some embodiments, it may be desirable to incorporate a bifurcated headband that contacts the user's head at multiple locations while the head-mounted device is worn. The headband may include different woven textures on opposing sides of the headband (e.g., on the side contacting the user's head versus the side facing away from the user's head) and may include hair-safe hook-and-loop fasteners. The headband may have ends with seamless, curved webbing. To prevent the headband from slipping against the user's head, stiffeners and/or cords may be incorporated on and/or within the headband. If the cords are incorporated into the headband, the headband may have an adaptive curvature based on the location of the cords within the headband. Consequently, the headband may conform to the user's head.

FIG. 653 is a side view of an exemplary head-mounted electronic device having an adjustable headband. As shown in FIG. 653, the head-mounted device (14.7-10) may include a head-mounted housing (14.7-12) (sometimes referred to as a main housing, a main housing unit, a head-mounted support structure, etc.). The housing (14.7-12) may have walls or other structures that separate an inner housing region from an outer region surrounding the housing (14.7-12). For example, the housing (14.7-12) may have walls formed from polymers, glass, metal, and/or other materials. Electrical and optical components may be mounted in the housing (14.7-12). These components may include components such as integrated circuits, sensors, control circuitry, input/output devices, etc.

To present images to a user for viewing from eye boxes (e.g., eye boxes where the user's eyes are positioned when the device (14.7-10) is worn on the user's head, such as the head (14.7-22) of FIG. 653), the device (14.7-10) may include displays and lenses. These components may be mounted to optical modules or other support structures within the housing (14.7-12) to form respective left and right optical systems. For example, there may be a left display for presenting images from the left eye box to the user's left eye through the left lens, and a right display for presenting images from the right eye box to the user's right eye.

If desired, the housing (14.7-12) may have forward-facing components such as cameras, other sensors, and/or a display on the front (F) for collecting sensor measurements/other input and/or display information on the front (F). The housing (14.7-12) may have a soft cushion on the opposite rear surface of the housing (14.7-12). The rear of the housing (14.7-12) may have openings that allow the user to view images from the left and right optical systems (e.g., when the rear of the housing (14.7-12) is resting on the front surface (14.7-20F) of the user's head (14.7-22).

The device (14.7-10) may have a strap, such as an adjustable headband (14.7-26), and, if desired, other structures (e.g., an optional over-the-head strap) to help maintain the housing (14.7-12) on the head (14.7-22). The headband (14.7-26) may have first and second ends coupled to the left and right sides of the housing (14.7-12), respectively. In the example of FIG. 653, coupling members (14.7-24) are provided on the left and right sides of the housing (14.7-12) to serve as extensions of the housing (14.7-12) (e.g., extending directly from the housing (14.7-12) or attached directly to the housing (14.7-12). The members (14.7-24) may be formed of rigid materials, such as rigid polymers, and/or other materials, and may include sensors, buttons, speakers, and other electrical components. Hinges and/or other mechanisms may be used to couple the members (14.7-24) to the housing (14.7-12), or the members (14.7-24) may be formed as integral parts of the main housing unit. The ends of the headband (14.7-26) may have coupling mechanisms, such as openings configured to receive posts or other protrusions (14.7-24P) on the members (14.7-24) or other housing structures. These coupling mechanisms allow a user to removably attach the headband (14.7-26) to the members (14.7-24) and thereby removably attach the headband (14.7-26) to the housing (14.7-12). The members (14.7-24) may have elongated shapes of the type illustrated in FIG. 653 and/or other suitable shapes, and may sometimes be referred to as rigid straps, rigid coupling members, or power straps.

The headband (14.7-26) may have a soft flexible portion, such as a central portion (14.7-30). The portion (14.7-30) may be formed between two more rigid portions, such as end portions (14.7-28) on the left and right ends of the headband (14.7-26). The portions (14.7-28) may be reinforced using embedded polymeric reinforcements (e.g., single-layer or multi-layer polymeric reinforcement strips) and/or other reinforcing members.

The portions (14.7-30) may be formed of a stretchable material, such as an extensible fabric. The portions (14.7-30) may, for example, be formed as a band of a plain knit fabric comprising stretchable strands of the material (e.g., elastomeric strands) and/or utilizing a stretchable fabric construction (e.g., a stretchable knit construction). Alternatively, the portions (14.7-30) may be formed as a band of a woven fabric, which may comprise stretchable strands of the material and/or utilize a stretchable fabric construction. The tapered end portions of the band of knitted fabric may, if desired, extend over reinforcing members within the end portions (14.7-28) (e.g., to ensure that the headband (14.7-26) has a uniform outer appearance).

The portion (14.7-30) may include two branched headband portions (14.7-32, 14.7-34). In particular, the branched headband portions (14.7-32, 14.7-34) may form two portions of the same headband (14.7-26) (e.g., the headband portions (14.7-32, 14.7-34) may be connected to the same points within the portions (14.7-28). In the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 653, the portion (14.7-32) may be attached to the protrusions (14.7-24P), and the portion (14.7-34) may extend from the portion (14.7-32) at a fixed angle. In other embodiments, both headband portions (14.7-32, 14.7-34) can be attached to the protrusions (14.7-24P) and thereby individually pivot about the protrusions (14.7-24P).

Both headband portions (14.7-32, 14.7-34) can contact the rear portions of the head (14.7-22). In particular, the headband portion (14.7-32) can contact the upper rear portion of the head (14.7-22) (e.g., at the upper half of the rear of the head (14.7-22)), while the headband portion (14.7-34) can contact the lower rear portion of the head (14.7-22) (e.g., at the lower half of the rear of the head (14.7-22)). By contacting the back of the head (14.7-22) at two different locations, the headband portions (14.7-32, 14.7-34) can secure the device (14.7-10) to the head (14.7-22) while relieving the amount of stress applied to any part of the head (14.7-22).

The elasticity of the headband portion (14.7-30) (and thus the headband portions (14.7-32, 14.7-34) of the headband (14.7-26)) allows the headband (14.7-26) to elongate along its length. This allows the length of the headband (14.7-26) to be temporarily increased to assist the user in positioning the headband (14.7-26) on the user's head when the user is wearing the device (14.7-10). When the headband (14.7-26) is released, the stretch and elastic properties of the portion (14.7-30) of the headband (14.7-26) will help to shorten the headband (14.7-26) and pull the headband (14.7-26) against the user's head so that the headband (14.7-26) lies against the posterior surface (14.7-20R) of the user's head.

Further adjustment of the tension of the headband (14.7-26) for securing the headband (14.7-26) and the device (14.7-10) on the user's head can be provided by tightening the doubled-backed portions (14.7-33, 14.7-35) of the headband (14.7-26). In particular, the doubled-backed portions (14.7-33, 14.7-35) can pass through adjustment loops (14.7-36, 14.7-38), respectively. The folded back portions (14.7-33, 14.7-35) may have hook-and-loop fasteners on their inner surfaces, allowing the folded back portions (14.7-33, 14.7-35) to be secured to the headband portions (14.7-32, 14.7-34). In this manner, the headband portions (14.7-32, 14.7-34) may be tightened or loosened as desired by a user of the device (14.7-10).

FIG. 654a is an exemplary side view of an outer surface (e.g., a surface facing away from the head (14.7-22) when worn) of a headband (14.7-26) in a configuration where the headband (14.7-26) is not attached to the housing (14.7-12). As illustrated in FIG. 654a, the headband (14.7-26) may have a stretchable central portion (14.7-30) comprising portions (14.7-32, 14.7-34) formed of an extensible woven or knitted fabric, and may have end portions (14.7-28) (e.g., end portions reinforced using reinforcements embedded in the fabric) - one of the end portions (14.7-28) is illustrated in the side view of FIG. 654a. One or more openings (14.7-40) may be formed at the ends of the headband (14.7-26) within the portion (14.7-31). The openings (14.7-40) may accommodate posts or other protrusions, such as the protrusions (14.7-24P) of FIG. 653, for securing the left and right ends of the headband (14.7-26) to the left and right members (14.7-24) of the device (14.7-10). There may be a single opening (14.7-40) or other attachment mechanism located on each end of the headband (14.7-26), or each end of the headband (14.7-26) may have two or more openings (14.7-40). If desired, other attachment mechanisms (e.g., magnets, snaps, latches, hook-and-loop fasteners, screws, or other fasteners) may be used to attach the headband (14.7-26) to other portions of the housing of the member (14.7-24) or the device (14.7-10).

As illustrated in FIG. 654a, both portions (14.7-32, 14.7-34) of the headband (14.7-26) can extend from portion (14.7-31) of the headband (14.7-26). In other words, portions (14.7-32, 14.7-34) can extend from portion (14.7-31) at fixed angles to each other. Portion (14.7-31) can be more rigid (e.g., less extensible) than portions (14.7-32, 14.7-34), if desired. For example, portion (14.7-31) can include one or more rigid or semi-rigid layers, such as polymeric layers or metallic layers.

By joining the parts (14.7-32, 14.7-34) with the part (14.7-31) (e.g., by weaving, knitting, or otherwise intertwining), the parts (14.7-32, 14.7-34) can be maintained at a fixed angle with respect to one another. In other words, the parts (14.7-32, 14.7-34) can be maintained separated by a fixed angle when worn on the head (14.7-22).

The headband portions (14.7-32, 14.7-34) may each include hook-and-loop fasteners (14.7-42, 14.7-44) that secure the ends of the portions (14.7-32, 14.7-34) when the end portions are folded back to tighten the headband (14.7-26) (as shown in FIG. 653). The hook-and-loop fasteners (14.7-42) may be, for example, hair safety hook-and-loop fasteners that prevent hair from catching on the fasteners (14.7-42).

The outer surface of the headband (14.7-26) may be woven. As illustrated in FIG. 654a, on the outer surface of the headband (14.7-26), the headband (14.7-26) may have a solid loop weave (14.7-46). The solid loop weave (14.7-46) may be tightly woven and have a uniform appearance across the headband (14.7-26). The loops within the solid loop weave (14.7-46) may provide loops for hook-and-loop fasteners (14.7-42).

FIG. 654b is an exemplary side view of an interior surface (e.g., the surface that contacts the head (14.7-22) when worn) of a headband (14.7-22) in a configuration where the headband (14.7-26) is not attached to the housing (14.7-12).

The headband (14.7-26) may have a tab, such as a tab (14.7-46). The tab (14.7-46) may be attached to a latch (or other suitable attachment mechanism) within an opening (14.7-40) that attaches the headband (14.7-26) to the post (14.7-24P). By pulling the tab (14.7-46), the user may release the latch from the post (14.7-24P), and the headband (14.7-26) may be removed from the member (14.7-24). However, this attachment mechanism of the headband (14.7-26) to the member (14.7-24) is merely exemplary. Alternatively, the headband (14.7-26) may be attached to the member (14.7-24) in any suitable manner.

The inner surface of the headband (14.7-26) may be woven. As illustrated in FIG. 654b, on the inner surface of the headband (14.7-26), the headband (14.7-26) may have a ribbed loop weave (14.7-47). The ribbed loop weave (14.7-47) may provide sufficient friction to maintain the headband (14.7-26) in place on the head (14.7-22) while remaining comfortable on the head (14.7-22) (e.g., on the user's hair). The ribbed loop weave (14.7-47) may include loops (14.7-49) and rib portions (14.7-48). By having a ribbed loop weave (14.7-47), the inner surface of the headband (14.7-26) can have loops that are less tightly packed than the solid loop weave (14.7-46) on the outer surface of the headband (14.7-26), thereby improving user comfort.

Although FIGS. 654a and 654b illustrate the headband (14.7-26) as being woven, this is merely exemplary. Alternatively, the headband (14.7-26) may be formed from a fabric including intertwined strands using knitting, weaving, braiding, and/or other strand intertwining techniques.

In some embodiments, it may be desirable to create a curved edge that appears seamless at the end of the headband (14.7-26). An exemplary headband strap having a curved edge with a seam that is not visible to the naked eye is illustrated in FIG. 655.

As illustrated in FIG. 655, the strap (14.7-50) may be formed of an inner woven portion (14.7-52) and a webbing (14.7-54). In particular, the webbing (14.7-54) may be stitched, woven, or otherwise joined to the woven portion (14.7-52). The woven portion (14.7-52) may have, for example, a solid loop woven fabric (e.g., the solid loop woven fabric (14.7-45) of FIG. 654a) or a ribbed loop woven fabric (e.g., the ribbed loop woven fabric (14.7-47) of FIG. 654b).

Although portion (14.7-52) is described as being woven, this is merely exemplary. Alternatively, portion (14.7-52) may be knitted, woven, braided, and/or formed using other strand entanglement techniques.

The webbing (14.7-54) may have a portion (14.7-56) that wraps from one side of the inner woven portion (14.7-52) (e.g., the left side of the inner woven portion (14.7-52)), across the edge (14.7-55) of the strap (14.7-50), to the opposite side of the inner woven portion (14.7-52) (e.g., the right side of the inner woven portion (14.7-52)).

If desired, reinforcements may be inserted into the webbing (14.7-54). In the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 655, reinforcements (14.7-58) may be inserted into the webbing (14.7-54), for example, into one side of the webbing (14.7-54). In particular, the webbing (14.7-54) may have multiple layers, and the reinforcements (14.7-58) may be inserted between the multiple layers. Alternatively, the webbing (14.7-54) may be formed as a single piece using a flat knitting technique and include built-in channels (sometimes referred to as pockets or cavities), into which the reinforcements (14.7-58) may be inserted. However, in general, the reinforcements (14.7-58) may be inserted into the webbing (14.7-54) in any desired manner.

The reinforcement (14.7-58) may be formed of a cord, such as a braided cord, or a flexible strip of polymer (e.g., an elastomeric polymer such as thermoplastic polyurethane). The reinforcement (14.7-58) may be sufficiently flexible to allow the headband to bend and twist, but may not substantially stretch along its length and may thus sometimes be referred to as a non-elastic reinforcement, a non-elastic member, a non-elastic reinforcing structure, etc. The reinforcement (14.7-58) may be considerably less extensible and ductile than the fabric of the strap (14.7-50) and may serve to increase stiffness and reduce (or eliminate) extensibility at desired locations along the strap (14.7-50). At the same time, the flexibility of the reinforcement (14.7-58) may allow the strap (14.7-50) to bend around the curvature of the user's head. Reinforcements (14.7-58) are inserted into selected portions of the strap (14.7-50) so that, if desired, the strap (14.7-50) can be selectively reinforced at desired portions along its length.

The headband (14.7-26) may have rounded corners (14.7-62) of the webbing (14.7-54) and may not have visible seams. An exemplary side view of the headband (14.7-26) is illustrated in FIG. 656.

As illustrated in FIG. 656, the headband (14.7-26) may include layers (14.7-64) and loops (14.7-66) (e.g., within the webbing (14.7-54) of FIG. 655). Webbing from one side of the headband (14.7-26) (e.g., portion (14.7-56) of FIG. 655) may be joined to the other side of the webbing at point (14.7-71) (e.g., the headband (14.7-26) may have a single seam at point (14.7-71) on only one side of the headband (14.7-26). As illustrated in FIG. 657, there may be no visible seam at point (14.7-71). In this way, a one-sided seam that is not visible to the naked eye can be formed on the headband (14.7-26).

Figures 654a and 654b illustrate portions (14.7-32, 14.7-34) of a headband (14.7-26) extending from a common portion (14.7-31), but this is merely exemplary. Alternatively, portions (14.7-32, 14.7-34) may be joined and attached to a head-mounted device in any suitable manner, such as by individually attaching portions (14.7-32, 14.7-34) to a common post or by wrapping a single band around a ring and folding it back over itself. An exemplary embodiment of a single band wrapped around a ring is illustrated in Figure 657.

As illustrated in FIG. 657, the headband (14.7-26) may be wrapped around a ring (14.7-70) to form sections (14.7-32, 14.7-34). The ring (14.7-70) may be a metal ring, a rigid polymer ring, or a ring of another suitable material. To ensure that the sections (14.7-32, 14.7-34) remain at a desired angle relative to each other when worn by a user, stiffeners (14.7-72) may be added to the headband (14.7-26). The stiffeners (14.7-72) may be formed of a rigid polymer, metal, or another suitable material.

The stiffeners (14.7-72) can locally increase the stiffness of the band (14.7-26) in the area surrounding the ring (14.7-70). Consequently, when the band (14.7-26) is worn on a user's head, the portions (14.7-32, 14.7-34) can maintain an angle between themselves centered around the ring (14.7-70). Furthermore, the stiffeners (14.7-72) can create detents to provide feedback to the user of the headband (14.7-26) regarding how tightly the headband (14.7-26) is fitted to the user's head. In other words, since the reinforcements (14.7-72) must pass through the rings (14.7-70) when the user tightens or loosens the headband (14.7-26), the reinforcements (14.7-72) can indicate to the user how tight the headband is (e.g., by the number of reinforcements the user feels passing through the rings (14.7-70)).

The reinforcements illustrated in FIG. 657 are merely exemplary. Alternatively, the reinforcements may be added to the headband (14.7-26) in any suitable manner. For example, as illustrated in FIGS. 658a and 658b, the reinforcements (14.7-72) may be added in different sizes, pitches, and/or geometries to adjust the rigidity of the headband (14.7-26) relative to the ring (14.7-70). The reinforcements (14.7-72) may protrude from the surface of the headband (14.7-26) or may be formed flush with or below the surface of the headband (14.7-26). As another exemplary example, as illustrated in FIG. 658c, cuts (14.7-74) may be formed in the headband (14.7-26). The cuts (14.7-74) can selectively modify the stiffness of the headband (14.7-26) in different regions, and the cuts (14.7-74) can be formed such that the headband (14.7-26) has greater stiffness in regions adjacent to the ring (14.7-70) than in other regions. In general, the reinforcements within the headband (14.7-26) can have any suitable geometric structures and can help maintain the angle between the portions (14.7-32, 14.7-34) centered around the ring (14.7-70).

Although reinforcements (14.7-72) are shown in FIG. 657 as being used when the headband (14.7-26) extends through the ring (14.7-70), this is merely exemplary. The reinforcements (14.7-72) may be included on the surface of the headband (14.7-26) when portions of the headband (14.7-26) are in fixed positions (e.g., as shown in FIG. 653).

In addition to or instead of the reinforcements (14.7-72), the headband (14.7-26) may have reinforcements extending along the length of the headband (14.7-26). An exemplary example of a headband having these types of reinforcements is illustrated in FIG. 659.

As illustrated in FIG. 659, portions (14.7-32, 14.7-34) of the headband (14.7-26) may include reinforcements (14.7-76). The reinforcements (14.7-76) may, for example, be identical to the reinforcements (14.7-58) of FIG. 655. The reinforcements (14.7-76) may be formed of a cord, such as a braided cord, or a flexible strip of polymer (e.g., an elastomeric polymer such as a thermoplastic polyurethane). The reinforcements (14.7-76) may be more rigid (e.g., less flexible/stretchy) than other portions of the headband (14.7-26).

The stiffeners (14.7-76) can be inserted along one side of the portions (14.7-32, 14.7-34), as illustrated in FIG. 659. In particular, because the stiffeners (14.7-76) elongate less than the remaining portions of the portions (14.7-32, 14.7-34), the portions (14.7-32, 14.7-34) can conform to the user's head (e.g., the head (14.7-22) of FIG. 653) and more effectively support the head-mounted device against the user's face.

The reinforcements (14.7-76) may extend entirely along the lengths of the segments (14.7-32, 14.7-34) or may extend over portions of the lengths of the segments (14.7-32, 14.7-34). Alternatively, the reinforcements (14.7-76) may be joined to suitable portions of the segments (14.7-32, 14.7-34) to adjust the rigidity of the segments (14.7-32, 14.7-34) over their lengths as needed.

The stiffeners (14.7-76) may be inserted into channels within the headband (14.7-26). As illustrated in exemplary FIG. 660, the headband (14.7-26) may include a strap (14.7-78) (which may correspond to the strap (14.7-50) of FIG. 655) having surfaces (14.7-80, 14.7-82). Between the surfaces (14.7-80, 14.7-82), the strap (14.7-78) may have a channel (14.7-85) having an opening (14.7-84) at an edge of the strap (14.7-78). The stiffener (14.7-76) may be mounted within the channel (14.7-85). In other words, the reinforcement (14.7-76) can be embedded within the strap (14.7-78) (e.g., within the headband (14.7-26)).

The stiffeners (14.7-76) can adjust the stiffness and curvature of the headband (14.7-26). In particular, by adding the stiffeners (14.7-76) to different regions of the headband (14.7-26), the headband (14.7-26) can be curved differently in different regions. Illustrative examples of a headband having stiffeners in different regions to create regions with different curvatures are illustrated in FIGS. 661a and 661b.

As illustrated in FIG. 661a, the headband (14.7-26) may be straight when not under tension. In other words, when the headband (14.7-26) is not on the user's head or is otherwise not under tension, the headband (14.7-26) may return to a straight configuration. However, when the headband (14.7-26) is pulled in opposite directions, the headband may bend differently based on the positions of the reinforcements (14.7-76).

As illustrated in FIG. 661b, portions (14.7-90) of the headband (14.7-26) may be more flexible than portions (14.7-92) in response to the headband (14.7-26) being pulled in the directions (14.7-88, 14.7-86). In particular, since the reinforcements (14.7-76) are formed in the portions (14.7-92), the portions (14.7-92) may be more rigid than the regions (14.7-90) that do not have the reinforcements (14.7-76) (i.e., the reinforcements (14.7-76) are more rigid than the fabric (14.7-78). As a result, in response to pulling the two ends of the headband (14.7-26) in the directions (14.7-88, 14.7-86), the headband (14.7-26) can be extended in a serpentine pattern.

In some embodiments, the headband (14.7-26) may be straight when not under tension (e.g., FIG. 661a) and may bend to conform to a complex curvature (e.g., a user's head) when under tension (e.g., FIG. 661b). However, this is merely exemplary. Alternatively, the stiffeners (14.7-76) may be incorporated into any suitable portion of the headband (14.7-26) to allow the headband (14.7-26) to bend as desired when under tension.

Returning to FIG. 659, by forming the stiffeners (14.7-76) on the lower edge of the portion (14.7-32) and the stiffeners (14.7-76) on the upper edge of the portion (14.7-34), the headband (14.7-26) can conform to the user's head when worn by the user. In other words, the headband (14.7-26) can lie flat against the user's head across different curvatures of the head (e.g., the headband (14.7-26) can distribute pressure evenly across an uneven surface). However, this is merely exemplary. If desired, the stiffeners (14.7-76) can be formed on the upper edge of the portion (14.7-32) or the lower edge of the portion (14.7-34), depending on the shape to which the headband (14.7-26) is required to conform.

The foregoing is merely exemplary, and various modifications may be made to the described embodiments. The above-described embodiments may be implemented individually or in any combination.

14.8: Over the head strap

Head-mounted devices include head-mounted support structures that allow the devices to be worn on a user's head. The head-mounted support structures may include device housings that encapsulate components, such as displays. The displays may be used to present visual content to a user. Head-mounted support structures for head-mounted devices may also include headbands and other structures that help maintain the device housing on the user's face. The headband of the head-mounted device may be removable. This allows users to use different headbands to accommodate different head sizes and/or update the style of the headband they are using.

In some embodiments, it may be desirable to attach multiple headbands to a head-mounted device. For example, one detachable headband may extend from the head-mounted support structure around the back of the user's head when worn, and another detachable headband may extend over the user's head. The user of the two (or more) headbands may hold the head-mounted device against the user's face, preventing undue pressure on the face when the device is worn. Both headbands may be attached to and detached from the same portion of the head-mounted support structure.

FIG. 662 is a side view of an exemplary head-mounted electronic device having multiple detachable headbands. As shown in FIG. 662, the head-mounted device (14.8-10) may include a head-mounted housing (14.8-12) (sometimes referred to as a main housing, a main housing unit, a head-mounted support structure, a main housing portion, etc.). The housing (14.8-12) may have walls or other structures that separate an inner housing region from an outer region surrounding the housing (14.8-12). For example, the housing (14.8-12) may have walls formed from polymers, glass, metal, and/or other materials. Electrical and optical components may be mounted in the housing (14.8-12). These components may include components such as integrated circuits, sensors, control circuitry, input/output devices, and the like.

To present images to a user for viewing from eye boxes (e.g., eye boxes where a user's eyes are positioned when the device (14.8-10) is worn on the user's head), the device (14.8-10) may include displays and lenses. These components may be mounted on optical modules (14.8-20) facing the rear (R) of the device (14.8-10), or may be mounted on other support structures in the housing (14.8-12) to form respective left and right optical systems. For example, there may be a left display for presenting images from the left eye box to the user's left eye through the left lens, and a right display for presenting images from the right eye box to the user's right eye.

If desired, the housing (14.8-12) may have forward-facing components such as cameras and other sensors on the front (F) for collecting sensor measurements and other input, and may have a soft cushion on the opposite rear (R). The rear (R) may have openings that allow the user to view images from the left and right optical modules (14.8-20) (e.g., when the rear (R) is placed in front of the user's head).

The device (14.8-10) may have straps, such as a headband (14.8-26) and an over-the-head headband (14.8-27), to help maintain the housing (14.8-12) on the user's head. The headbands (14.8-26, 14.8-27) may have a fixed length or may be adjustable. The headbands (14.8-26, 14.8-27) may have first and second ends respectively coupled to the left and right sides of the housing (14.8-12). In the example of FIG. 662, coupling members (14.8-24) that serve as extensions of the housing (14.8-12) are provided on the left and right sides of the housing (14.8-12). The members (14.8-24) may be formed of rigid materials, such as rigid polymers, and/or other materials, and may include sensors, buttons, speakers, and other electrical components. Hinges and/or other mechanisms may be used to couple the members (14.8-24) to the housing (14.8-12), or the members (14.8-24) may be formed as integral parts of the main housing unit.

The ends of the headbands (14.8-26, 14.8-27) may have engagement mechanisms, such as openings, magnets, second posts, or other structures, configured to attach to posts (14.8-30) (pins) or other protrusions on the members (14.8-24) or other housing structures. In an exemplary configuration, these posts face inward toward the user's head and are not visible to persons near the device (14.8-10) when the device (14.8-10) is being worn by the user. Releasable latch mechanisms may be used to assist in securing the ends of the headband (14.8-26) and/or the headband (14.8-27) to the member (14.8-24). For example, a first removable latch may be used to removably couple a left end of the headband (14.8-26) to a left post on a left member (14.8-24) on a left side of the housing (14.8-12), a second removable latch may be used to removably couple a right end of the headband (14.8-26) to a right post on a right member (14.8-24) on a right side of the housing (14.8-12), and a third and fourth removable latches may be used to removably couple the respective left and right ends of the headband (14.8-27) to the left and right posts. Alternatively or additionally, the headband (14.8-27) may be attached to posts between the head-mounted support structures (14.8-24) and the headband (14.8-26) to maintain the headband (14.8-27) attached to the structures (14.8-24) when the headband (14.8-26) is attached, and/or other structures such as magnetic structures or additional posts may be used to attach to the posts (14.8-30).

If desired, the user can flip the headband over so that the first removable latch removably engages the end of the headband (14.8-26) that was previously engaged with the left post to the right post, and the second removable latch removably engages the end of the headband (14.8-26) that was previously engaged with the right post to the left post (e.g., the user can reverse the left and right sides of the band without turning the band inside out). The headband (14.8-27) can also have reversible ends, if desired. The user can open and close the latches when the housing (14.8-12) is being worn, or, in an exemplary configuration sometimes described herein as an example, the user can open and close the latches when the housing (14.8-12) is not being worn.

The use of latch-based engagement mechanisms, magnetic structures, and/or other mechanisms in the device (14.8-10) may assist in allowing a user to removably attach the headbands (14.8-26, 14.8-27) to the members (14.8-24) and thereby removably attach the headbands (14.8-26, 14.8-27) to the housing (14.8-12). The members (14.8-24) may have elongated shapes of the type illustrated in FIG. 662 and/or other suitable shapes, and may sometimes be referred to as (by way of example) rigid straps, rigid engagement members, power straps, head-mounted device housing structures, elongated head-mounted device housing members, elongated housing structures, elongated housing members, or head-mounted device housing members.

The headbands (14.8-26, 14.8-27) may be straps having soft flexible portions and/or rigid portions. As an example, the central portion of the headband (14.8-26) and/or the headband (14.8-27) may be formed of a stretch fabric. The central portions of the headband (14.8-26) and/or the headband (14.8-27) may have internal reinforcing members, external fabric coverings and/or other covering layers, strips of reinforcing fabric, stretch fabric portions (e.g., stretch knit fabric), decorative coverings, and/or other headband structures.

The left and right end portions of the headband (14.8-26) and/or the headband (14.8-27) may be joined to opposite ends of the central portion. The left and right end portions may, for example, have reinforcing structures (e.g., the left and right end portions may be more rigid than the central flexible portion). If desired, other types of configurations may be used for the headband (14.8-26) (e.g., arrangements having adjustable tensioning cables, etc.).

FIG. 663 is an exemplary drawing of an end portion of an exemplary headband (14.8-26), an end portion of an exemplary headband (14.8-27), and a corresponding end portion of an exemplary member (14.8-24). The headband (14.8-26), the headband (14.8-27), and the housing structures, e.g., the members (14.8-24), may sometimes be collectively referred to as forming a head-mounted device headband system (headband system) (14.8-22). As illustrated in the example of FIG. 663, the member (14.8-24) may have a protruding post, such as a post (14.8-30), (e.g., a post that protrudes from the member (14.8-24) toward the user's head while the device (14.8-10) is being worn by the user). The headband (14.8-26) may have a corresponding opening (14.8-32) configured to accommodate the post (14.8-30).

The post (14.8-30) may protrude inwardly (or, in some embodiments, outwardly) from the member (14.8-24). The post (14.8-30) may be formed of metal, a rigid polymer, other materials, and/or combinations of these materials. The member (14.8-24) may have a rigid portion to which the post (14.8-30) is attached. This rigid portion may be formed of a rigid polymer, a metal, a fabric, carbon fiber composites, and/or other materials.

In an exemplary embodiment of FIG. 663, to attach the headband (14.8-27) to the post (14.8-30), the headband (14.8-27) may include a post (14.8-31). The post (14.8-31) may be formed of metal, a rigid polymer, other materials, and/or combinations of these materials. In the present example, the posts (14.8-31) and the posts (14.8-30) have elongated shapes (e.g., rectangular shapes with rounded corners) when viewed from the ends. These elongated shapes may help resist rotational movement between the longitudinal axis (14.8-34) of the headband (14.8-26) and the longitudinal axis (14.8-36) of the member (14.8-24). This helps prevent the headband (14.8-26) from sliding up or down along the back surface of the user's head during use. In general, the post (14.8-30) and/or the mating opening (14.8-32) may have any suitable shape (e.g., the shape of the post (14.8-30) and/or the opening (14.8-32) may be circular, oval, rectangular, triangular, may have curved edges and/or straight edges, may have drafted edges to aid alignment and/or insertion, etc.). The use of rectangular shapes with rounded corners and/or other shapes that are elongated are exemplary.

The post (14.8-31) may be slightly larger than the post (14.8-30) and may fit over the top of the post (14.8-30). If desired, the post (14.8-31) may fit snugly over the post (14.8-30) to attach the headband (14.8-27) to the member (14.8-24). Additionally or alternatively, the post (14.8-31) may include a structure biased by a latch, e.g., a spring or other suitable latch that engages an opening in the side of the post (14.8-30), a magnet, or other suitable attachment to attach the headband (14.8-27) to the member (14.8-24). When a latch is used to attach the headband (14.8-27) to the post (14.8-30), a tab (14.8-61T) may be attached to the latch and pulled to disengage the latch, thereby allowing the headband (14.8-27) to be released from the member (14.8-24).

The opening (14.8-32) within the headband (14.8-26) may be a through hole opening having a shape matching the outline of the post (14.8-31). The through hole opening (14.8-32) may be formed by cutting or otherwise forming an opening in the headband (14.8-26). The periphery of the opening (14.8-32) may be reinforced using a matching pair of ring members, sometimes referred to as a cap and socket, capable of capturing portions of the headband (14.8-26).

In this example, the post (14.8-31) and the opening (14.8-32) have elongated shapes (e.g., rectangular shapes with rounded corners) when viewed from the end. The headband (14.8-26) may have a latch, such as a spring-loaded structure or other suitable latch, within the opening (14.8-32) that engages the opening on the side of the post (14.8-31) to attach the headband (14.8-26) to the member headband (14.8-27). A tab (14.8-62T) may be attached to the latch and may be pulled to disengage the latch, thereby allowing the headband (14.8-27) to be released from the member (14.8-26).

By including the post (14.8-31) on the headband (14.8-27) and overlapping and attaching the post (14.8-30) thereto, both the headband (14.8-27) and the band (14.8-26) can be attached to the member (14.8-24). An exemplary cross-sectional view of the member (14.8-24), the headband (14.8-26), and the headband (14.8-27) attached to each other is illustrated in FIG. 664.

As illustrated in FIG. 664, the post (14.8-30) on the member (14.8-24) may extend into the post (14.8-31) of the headband (14.8-27). For example, the post (14.8-31) may be larger than the post (14.8-30) by a small amount (e.g., less than 1 mm larger, less than 2 mm larger, or another suitable size difference) to allow the post (14.8-31) to press against the post (14.8-30) and remain attached to the post (14.8-30). Next, the post (14.8-31) can be inserted into the opening (14.8-32) of the headband (14.8-26), thereby attaching the headband (14.8-26) to the headband (14.8-27) and the member (14.8-24).

In some embodiments, the post (14.8-31) may be attached to the post (14.8-30) using a latch, and/or the headband (14.8-26) may be attached to the post (14.8-31) using a latch. A cross-sectional side view of an exemplary latch that may be used to attach the posts (14.8-30, 14.8-31), and/or the headband (14.8-26) and the post (14.8-31) is illustrated in FIG. 665.

As illustrated in FIG. 665, the system (14.8-22) may include a latching mechanism, such as a latch (14.8-62). The latch (14.8-62), which may sometimes be referred to as a latch mechanism or latch structures, may be opened and closed using magnets, springs, sliding members, toggling members, rotating members, such as knobs, buttons, and/or other latch structures that may be operated by a user (e.g., a user's finger). In the example of FIG. 665, the latch of the headband (14.8-26) has a movable latch member that engages a post (14.8-31) when the post (14.8-31) is within an opening (14.8-32), and has an associated release mechanism, such as a release tab (14.8-62T). A tab (14.8-62T), which may be formed of a flexible strip of material (e.g., fabric, polymer, and/or other material), may be pulled in a direction (14.8-64) by a user (e.g., when the user grasps the tab (14.8-62T) between his or her fingers), thereby moving the movable latch member out of engagement with the post (14.8-31). This releases the post (14.8-31) and allows the post (14.8-31) to be removed from the opening (14.8-32). Magnets, spring structures, and/or other biasing structures may be used to close the latch. In some embodiments, the headband (14.8-27) and the headband (14.8-26) may have magnets that enable attachment of the headband (14.8-27) and the headband (14.8-26). For example, as illustrated in FIG. 665, the post (14.8-31) may have one or more magnets, such as magnet (14.8-60). The magnet (14.8-60) may be used to attract and/or repel corresponding magnets within the headband (14.8-26), which may assist in attaching the headband (14.8-26) to the headband (14.8-27) and/or assist in closing the latch (14.8-62).

Although FIG. 665 illustrates a latch (14.8-62) attaching a headband (14.8-26) to a headband (14.8-27), the latch (14.8-62) may additionally or alternatively be used to attach the headband (14.8-27) to the member (14.8-24). In particular, the latch (14.8-62) may be formed in a post (14.8-31) of the headband (14.8-27) and may be moved into and out of a recess within a post (14.8-30) of the member (14.8-24) using a tab (14.8-61T). In this manner, the headband (14.8-27) may be removably coupled to the member (14.8-24) with a latch, such as the latch (14.8-62).

In addition to or instead of using posts on the headband (14.8-27) to attach the headband (14.8-27) to the member (14.8-24), magnets may be used for such attachment. An exemplary embodiment in which the headband (14.8-27) is attached to the member (14.8-24) using magnets is illustrated in FIG. 666.

As illustrated in FIG. 666, the headband (14.8-26) can be attached to the post (14.8-30) at the opening (14.8-32). For example, the headband (14.8-26) can be attached to the post (14.8-30) in the same manner as the headband (14.8-26) is attached to the post (14.8-31) in FIG. 664. In particular, a latch within the opening (14.8-32) (e.g., latch (14.8-62) of FIG. 665) can be moved into the opening within the post (14.8-30) to removably attach the headband (14.8-26) to the member (14.8-24).

The headband (14.8-27) can be magnetically attached to the post (14.8-30). In particular, the magnet (14.8-33) can be inserted into the post (14.8-30), and the magnet (14.8-35) of the headband (14.8-27) can be magnetically attached to the magnet (14.8-33) of the post (14.8-30). Since the post (14.8-30) passes through the opening (14.8-32) of the headband (14.8-26), the headband (14.8-27) can contact the upper surface of the post (14.8-30) as the magnets (14.8-33, 14.8-35) attract the post (14.8-30) and the headband (14.8-27) together. An exemplary cross-sectional view of the magnetic attachment portion of the headband (14.8-27) and member (14.8-24) is shown in FIG. 667.

As illustrated in FIG. 667, the member (14.8-24) may have a recess (14.8-37) formed in the post (14.8-30). The magnet (14.8-33) may be coupled to the post (14.8-30) within the recess (14.8-37). Similarly, the headband (14.8-27) may include a recess (14.8-39), and the magnet (14.8-35) may be coupled to the headband (14.8-27) within the recess (14.8-39). The magnets (14.8-33, 14.8-35) may attach the headband (14.8-27) to the member (14.8-24).

When the headband (14.8-27) is magnetically attached to the member (14.8-24), the headband (14.8-26) can be between the member (14.8-24) and the headband (14.8-27). In particular, the opening (14.8-32) of the headband (14.8-26) can surround the post (14.8-30). The headband (14.8-26) can be removably attached to the member (14.8-24) by a latch within the opening (14.8-32) (as illustrated in FIG. 666), and/or the headband (14.8-26) can remain attached to the member (14.8-24) because the headband (14.8-27) is magnetically attached to the member (14.8-24).

The presence of recesses (14.8-37, 14.8-39) for accommodating magnets (14.8-33, 14.8-35) is merely exemplary. Alternatively, one or more magnets may be attached to each of the member (14.8-24) and the headband (14.8-27) in any suitable manner.

Instead of or in addition to having recesses within the member (14.8-24) and/or the headband (14.8-27) for accommodating magnets, recesses and protrusions may assist in attaching and aligning the headband (14.8-27) to the member (14.8-24). An exemplary embodiment in which recesses and protrusions are used to align and attach the member (14.8-24) and the headband (14.8-27) is illustrated in FIG. 668.

As illustrated in FIG. 668, in addition to having magnets (14.8-35, 14.8-37) that couple the headband (14.8-27) to the member (14.8-24), the member (14.8-24) may have a recess (14.8-40) within the post (14.8-30), and the headband (14.8-27) may have a protrusion (14.8-42). When the headband (14.8-27) and the member (14.8-24) are attached, the protrusion (14.8-42) may be inserted into the recess (14.8-40), which may improve alignment and/or attachment of the headband (14.8-27) and the member (14.8-24).

As in the embodiment of FIG. 667, when the headband (14.8-27) is magnetically attached to the member (14.8-24), the headband (14.8-26) may be between the member (14.8-24) and the headband (14.8-27). In particular, the opening (14.8-32) of the headband (14.8-26) may surround the post (14.8-30). The headband (14.8-26) may be removably attached to the member (14.8-24) by a latch within the opening (14.8-32) (as shown in FIG. 666), and/or the headband (14.8-26) may remain attached to the member (14.8-24) because the headband (14.8-27) is magnetically attached to the member (14.8-24).

Although the member (14.8-24) is shown as having a recess (14.8-40) and the headband (14.8-27) is shown as having a protrusion (14.8-42), this is merely exemplary. The headband (14.8-27) may, if desired, have a recess into which the protrusion of the member (14.8-24) is inserted.

In other embodiments, the headband (14.8-27) may be attached directly to the member (14.8-24), rather than to the post (14.8-30), for example, by wrapping around or clipping onto the member (14.8-24). An exemplary embodiment in which the headband (14.8-27) is attached directly to the member (14.8-24) is illustrated in FIG. 669.

As illustrated in FIG. 669, the headband (14.8-27) may be attached to the member (14.8-24) by portions (14.8-44, 14.8-46) that wrap around the member (14.8-24). In particular, portions (14.8-44, 14.8-46) may extend from the remainder of the headband (14.8-27) and may be on either side of the post (14.8-30) of the member (14.8-24). In some embodiments, the headband (14.8-27) may slide over the member (14.8-24) at the end (14.8-25), and portions (14.8-44, 14.8-46) may attach the headband (14.8-27) to the member (14.8-24).

The headband (14.8-26) may be directly attached to the post (14.8-30) since the opening (14.8-32) of the headband (14.8-26) may surround the post (14.8-30). The headband (14.8-26) may be removably attached to the member (14.8-24) by a latch or other mechanism within the opening (14.8-32) (as illustrated in FIG. 666).

Although FIG. 669 illustrates portions (14.8-44, 14.8-46) that wrap entirely around the member (14.8-24), this is merely exemplary. If desired, the headband (14.8-27) may have single or multiple portions that clip onto (e.g., extend partially around) the edges (14.8-21, 14.8-23) of the member (14.8-24). In this arrangement, the headband (14.8-27) can be detached from the member (14.8-24) (e.g., by unclipping the clip-on portions) without removing the headband (14.8-26) from the post (14.8-31). Alternatively or additionally, the portion (14.8-46) may extend around the end (14.8-25) of the member (14.8-24) to cover it.

Instead of having portions of the headband (14.8-27) that surround or clip onto the member (14.8-24), the headband (14.8-27) may include lugs that fit into openings in the member (14.8-24) (e.g., the headband (14.8-27) and the member (14.8-24) may have a lug and socket system for attaching the headband (14.8-27) to the member (14.8-24). An illustrative example of a headband (14.8-27) attached to the member (14.8-24) by a lug and socket system is illustrated in FIG. 670.

As illustrated in FIG. 670, the headband (14.8-27) may have lugs (14.8-48) received within sockets (14.8-50) of the member (14.8-24). The lugs (14.8-48) may be engaged by one or more springs or otherwise biased outwardly (e.g., into the sockets (14.8-50)). To release the headband (14.8-27) from the member (14.8-24), a sliding member (14.8-52) may slide within an opening (14.8-54) of the headband (14.8-27) to retract one of the lugs (14.8-50). The headband (14.8-27) may then be removed from the member (14.8-24). The headband (14.8-27) can be reattached to the member (14.8-24) by inserting the lugs (14.8-48) into the sockets (14.8-50), which may include retracting one of the lugs by sliding the member (14.8-52) within the opening (14.8-54). In this manner, the headband (14.8-27) can be attached to the member (14.8-24) using the lug and socket system.

The headband (14.8-26) may be directly attached to the post (14.8-30) since the opening (14.8-32) of the headband (14.8-26) may surround the post (14.8-30). The headband (14.8-26) may be removably attached to the member (14.8-24) by a latch or other mechanism within the opening (14.8-32) (as illustrated in FIG. 666).

In some embodiments, the post (14.8-30) of the member (14.8-24) may be modified to accommodate both the headband (14.8-26) and the headband (14.8-27). For example, the headband (14.8-27) may have an additional latch connecting the headband (14.8-27) to the member (14.8-24). An exemplary example of attaching the headband (14.8-27) to the member (14.8-24) by an additional latch is illustrated in FIG. 671.

As illustrated in FIG. 671, the headband (14.8-27) may include a latch (14.8-56), and the member (14.8-24) may have a post (14.8-30) having a recess (14.8-66). The latch (14.8-56) may be formed of metal, a rigid polymer, or other material. The latch (14.8-56) may include a protruding portion (14.8-68) that attaches to the post (14.8-31) within the recess (14.8-66). For example, the latch (14.8-56) may be biased toward the recess (14.8-66) by a spring, magnet, or other component. When it is desired to remove the headband (14.8-27) from the member (14.8-24), the user can push the portion (14.8-60) of the latch (14.8-56) so that the latch (14.8-56) rotates about the hinge (14.8-58). The protruding portion (14.8-68) can slide out of the recess (14.8-66), and the headband (14.8-27) can be removed from the member (14.8-24). To reattach the headband (14.8-27), the user can use the portion (14.8-60) to move the protruding portion, which can then be moved into place when released by the user. In some embodiments, the post (14.8-30) and/or the protruding portion (14.8-68) may be angled to allow a user to insert the headband (14.8-27) into the post (14.8-30) without engaging the portion (14.8-60) of the latch (14.8-56).

The headband (14.8-26) can be directly attached to the post (14.8-30) because the opening (14.8-32) of the headband (14.8-26) can surround the post (14.8-30). The headband (14.8-26) can be removably attached to the member (14.8-24) by a slidable latch member (14.8-62M) that can move with the tab (14.8-62T). As illustrated in FIG. 671, the headband (14.8-26) can be attached to the member (14.8-24) between the member (14.8-24) and the headband (14.8-27).

Instead of attaching the headband (14.8-27) to the member (14.8-24) using a latch (14.8-56), an internal structure may be used. An exemplary example of attaching the headband (14.8-27) to the member (14.8-24) using an internal structure is illustrated in FIG. 672.

As illustrated in FIG. 672, the headband (14.8-27) may have a protruding portion (14.8-70) that is inserted into an opening (14.8-72) of the post (14.8-30). The protruding portion (14.8-70) may be formed of metal, rigid plastic, or other material. In some embodiments, the protruding portion (14.8-70) may be slightly smaller than the opening (14.8-72) (e.g., less than 1 mm smaller, less than 2 mm smaller, or another suitable difference). By inserting the protruding portion (14.8-70) into the opening (14.8-72), the headband (14.8-27) may remain attached to the member (14.8-24).

To remove the headband (14.8-27) from the member (14.8-24) or to attach the headband (14.8-27) to the member (14.8-24), the user only needs to apply enough force to overcome the friction between the protrusion (14.8-70) and the opening (14.8-72).

If desired, additional material, such as material (14.8-74), may be added to the protruding portion (14.8-70) to further secure the headband (14.8-27) to the member (14.8-24). The material (14.8-74) may be, for example, a polymeric material, a gasket, or other suitable material. The post (14.8-30) may optionally have a recessed portion (14.8-76) that matches the shape of the material (14.8-74) to hold the protruding portion (14.8-70) in place within the opening (14.8-72).

To remove the headband (14.8-27) from the member (14.8-24) or to attach the headband (14.8-27) to the member (14.8-24), the user only needs to apply enough force to overcome the friction between the sides of the material (14.8-74) and the opening (14.8-72) (or recess (14.8-76) once inserted).

Another attachment mechanism for attaching the headband (14.8-27) to the member (14.8-24) is a twist-to-lock system. An exemplary example of a twist-to-lock system is illustrated in FIG. 673.

As illustrated in FIG. 673, the headband (14.8-27) may have a protrusion (14.8-78). The member (14.8-24) may have a post (14.8-30) having an opening (14.8-80). The protrusion (14.8-78) may fit vertically through the opening (14.8-80) and, once the protrusion (14.8-78) passes through the opening (14.8-80), may be twisted into a suitable position (14.8-82). The post (14.8-30) may have an interior that is at least partially hollow to allow the protrusion (14.8-78) to pivot into position (14.8-82) within the post (14.8-30). Once the protrusion (14.8-78) is positioned (14.8-82) within the post (14.8-30), it can be locked in place. The user can detach the headband (14.8-27) from the member (14.8-24) by twisting the headband (14.8-27) so that the protrusion (14.8-78) aligns with the opening (14.8-82). In this manner, the twist-to-lock system can attach the headband (14.8-27) to the member (14.8-24).

Although not shown in FIG. 673, the headband (14.8-27) and post (14.8-30) may include magnets for further attaching the headband (14.8-27) to the member (14.8-24). These magnets may be similar to those shown in FIGS. 666-668.

Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 673, prior to attaching the headband (14.8-27) to the member (14.8-24) with the twist-to-lock system, the headband (14.8-26) may be between the member (14.8-24) and the headband (14.8-27). In particular, the opening (14.8-32) of the headband (14.8-26) may surround the post (14.8-30). The headband (14.8-26) may be attached with a latch, such as the latch of FIG. 666, and/or may be held in place by the headband (14.8-27) once it is attached to the post (14.8-30) with the twist-to-lock system.

In some embodiments, the headband (14.8-27) may be attached to the member (14.8-24), and the headband (14.8-26) may be held in place by being attached to the member (14.8-24) by a latch. An illustrative example of such an embodiment is illustrated in FIG. 674.

As illustrated in FIG. 674, the member (14.8-24) may have a post (14.8-30) having a shoulder (14.8-84). The member (14.8-24) may also have pins (14.8-86), although the pins (14.8-86) may be omitted if desired. The headband (14.8-27) may have an opening (14.8-88) that is slightly larger than the shoulder (14.8-84) of the post (14.8-30) (e.g., less than 1 mm larger, less than 2 mm larger, or another suitable difference). The headband (14.8-27) can be attached to the member (14.8-24) by passing the post (14.8-30) through the opening (14.8-88), so that the headband (14.8-27) can surround the shoulder (14.8-84).

To prevent the headband (14.8-27) from detaching from the member (14.8-24), the headband (14.8-26) may be attached to the post (14.8-30). In particular, the opening (14.8-32) of the headband (14.8-26) may surround the post (14.8-30), and the headband (14.8-26) may be removably attached to the member (14.8-24) by a latch or other mechanism within the opening (14.8-32) (as illustrated in FIG. 666). When the latch is engaged and the headband (14.8-26) is attached to the member (14.8-24), the headband (14.8-26) will not be detachable from the member (14.8-24).

Optional pins (14.8-86) may pass through optional holes (14.8-90) within the headband (14.8-27). The pins (14.8-26) may prevent the headband (14.8-27) from moving/rotating relative to the member (14.8-24). In this manner, the pins (14.8-26) may maintain the headband (14.8-27) in a desired position on the user's head when worn.

An elastomer (14.8-92) may surround the opening (14.8-88). The elastomer (14.8-92) may be formed of any desired elastomeric material and may help prevent the headband (14.8-27) from moving relative to the shoulder (14.8-84) or from separating from the post (14.8-30). However, the elastomer (14.8-92) may be omitted if desired.

Regardless of whether the elastomer (14.8-92) or pins (14.8-86) are included in the embodiment of FIG. 674, a side cross-sectional view is illustrated in FIG. 675. As illustrated in FIG. 675, the headband (14.8-27) can surround the shoulder portions (14.8-84) of the post (14.8-30). The headband (14.8-26) can rest on top of the shoulder portions (14.8-84) of the post (14.8-30). In this manner, the headband (14.8-27) can be held in place against the member (14.8-24) by the headband (14.8-26).

Although not shown in FIGS. 674 and 675, since the headband (14.8-27) is directly on the member (14.8-24), a material may be included on the member (14.8-24) to prevent the headband (14.8-27) from moving (e.g., pivoting) when the head-mounted device is worn. For example, a gasket, such as a compressible gasket, an elastomeric material, or other material, may be formed on a surface of the member (14.8-24) that is contacted by the headband (14.8-27) when the headband (14.8-27) is attached to the member (14.8-24).

In some embodiments, the headband (14.8-27) may be attached to the member (14.8-24) by extendable magnets. An exemplary embodiment in which the headband (14.8-27) is attached to the member (14.8-24) by extendable magnets is illustrated in FIGS. 676A-678B.

As illustrated in FIG. 676a, the post (14.8-30) may have a magnet (14.8-94) in a retracted (e.g., non-extended) position. The post (14.8-30) may also include an opening (14.8-96) that may accommodate a latch mechanism (e.g., the latch mechanism of FIG. 666) for attaching the headband (14.8-26). As illustrated in FIG. 676b, the magnet (14.8-94) may extend into an extended position. The magnet (14.8-94) may include an optional recess (14.8-98) that may be used to attach the headband (14.8-27) to the member (14.8-24).

As illustrated in FIG. 677, the headband (14.8-27) may have an opening (14.8-100). The opening (14.8-100) may accommodate a magnet (14.8-94) when in an extended position. Illustrative examples of magnets (14.8-94) extending and attaching to the headband (14.8-27) are illustrated in FIGS. 678a and 678b.

As illustrated in FIG. 678a, the headband (14.8-27) may be brought into contact with a post (14.8-30) (e.g., with a member (14.8-24)). The headband (14.8-27) may have a fixed magnet (14.8-102) within an opening (14.8-100). As the headband (14.8-27) moves in the direction (14.8-101), the magnet (14.8-102) may attract the magnet (14.8-94) at the post (14.8-30). Consequently, as illustrated in FIG. 678b, the magnet (14.8-94) may be moved into the opening (14.8-100) of the headband (14.8-27) due to the attractive magnetic force of the magnet (14.8-102). The recess (14.8-98) of the magnet (14.8-94) can be engaged with a portion (14.8-104) of the opening (14.8-100), thereby attaching the headband (14.8-27) to the post (14.8-30) via the magnet (14.8-94). In this way, the extendable magnet can attach the headband (14.8-27) to the post (14.8-30) (and to the member (14.8-24)).

Although the embodiments of FIG. 14.8-2-17b illustrate attaching the headband (14.8-27) to the member (14.8-24) in various ways, this is merely exemplary. Alternatively, the headband (14.8-26) or any other headband may be attached to the member (14.8-24) using any of the attachments of FIG. 14.8-2-17b. Alternatively or additionally, while sometimes described herein in the context of examples in which the posts (14.8-30) are formed on the members (14.8-24) and the openings (14.8-32) are formed within the headband (14.8-26), the posts (14.8-30) may, if desired, be formed as part of the headband (14.8-26) and the openings (14.8-32) may be formed within the members (14.8-24).

The foregoing is merely exemplary, and various modifications may be made to the described embodiments. The above-described embodiments may be implemented individually or in any combination.

XV: User Interface

Figures 1A through 652 illustrate various examples of a computer system that may be used to provide audio, visual, and/or haptic feedback as part of the user interfaces described herein and to perform the methods. In some embodiments, the exemplary computer system optionally includes one or more display generation components (e.g., first and second display assemblies (1-120a, 1-120b) and/or first and second optical modules (11.1.1-104a, 11.1.1-104b)) for displaying to a user of the computer system a representation of a physical environment and/or virtual elements generated based on user inputs and/or detected events detected by the computer system. The user interfaces generated by the computer system are optionally corrected by one or more corrective lenses (11.3.2-216) removably attached to one or more of the optical modules to enable users who would otherwise correct their vision with glasses or contact lenses to more easily view the user interfaces. Many of the user interfaces exemplified herein show a single view of the user interface, and the user interfaces within the HMD are optionally displayed using two optical modules (e.g., first and second display assemblies (1-120a, 1-120b) and/or first and second optical modules (11.1.1-104a and 11.1.1-104b)), one for the user's right eye and one for the user's left eye, with slightly different images presented to the two different eyes to create the illusion of stereoscopic depth, but the single view of the user interface will typically be either a right-eye or a left-eye view, and the depth effect is described in text or using other schematic charts or views. In some embodiments, the computer system optionally includes one or more external displays (e.g., display assemblies (1-108)) for displaying status information about the computer system to a user of the computer system (when the computer system is not being worn) and/or to other people near the computer system, the status information being generated based on user inputs and/or events detected by the computer system. In some embodiments, the computer system optionally includes one or more audio output components (e.g., electronic components (1-112)) for generating audio feedback, the audio feedback being generated based on user inputs and/or events detected by the computer system. In some embodiments, the computer system includes one or more input devices for detecting input, such as one or more sensors (e.g., within the sensor assembly (1-356) and/or one or more sensors in FIG. 1i) for detecting information about the physical environment of the device, which may be used to generate a digital pass-through image, capture visual media (e.g., photographs and/or video) corresponding to the physical environment, or determine the pose (e.g., location and/or orientation) of physical objects and/or surfaces in the physical environment (optionally in conjunction with one or more illuminators, such as the illuminators described in FIG. 6i) so that virtual objects may be positioned based on the detected poses of the physical objects and/or surfaces. In at least one example, the virtual objects may represent structural objects, and may be referred to as virtual structural objects, and a user may interact with them via detected hand gestures and other body movements. In one example, the virtual structural objects may include virtual buttons, dials, crowns, keyboards, or other physical input mechanisms and devices that are virtually represented and operable by the user. In some embodiments, the computer system includes one or more input devices for detecting input, such as one or more sensors (e.g., within the sensor assembly (1-356) and/or one or more sensors in FIG. 6i) for detecting hand position and/or movement, which may be used (optionally in conjunction with one or more illuminators, such as the illuminators (6-124) described in FIG. 1i) to determine when one or more air gestures have been performed. In some embodiments, the computer system includes one or more input devices for detecting input, such as one or more sensors for detecting eye movement (e.g., the eye tracking and gaze tracking sensors of FIG. 1i), which may optionally be used to determine attention or gaze position and/or gaze movement (optionally in conjunction with one or more lights, such as lights 11.3.2-110 of FIG. 1o), which may optionally be used to detect gaze-only inputs based on gaze movement and/or dwell. A combination of the various sensors described above may be used to determine user facial expressions and/or hand movements for use in generating an avatar or representation of the user, such as an anthropomorphic avatar or representation for use in a real-time communication session, wherein the avatar is based on or has facial expressions, hand movements, and/or body movements similar to those detected by the user of the device. Gaze and/or attention information, optionally combined with hand tracking information, determines interactions between a user and one or more user interfaces based on direct and/or indirect inputs, such as air gestures or inputs using one or more hardware input devices, such as one or more buttons (e.g., a first button (1-128), a button (11.1.1-114), a second button (1-132), and/or a dial or button (1-328)), knobs (e.g., a first button (1-128), a button (11.1.1-114), and/or a dial or button (1-328)), digital crowns (e.g., a depressible and twistable or rotatable first button (1-128), a button (11.1.1-114), and/or a dial or button (1-328)), trackpads, touch screens, keyboards, mice, and/or other input devices. One or more buttons (e.g., first button (1-128), button (11.1.1-114), second button (1-132), and/or dial or button (1-328)) are optionally used to perform system actions such as re-centering content visible to a user of the device in a three-dimensional environment, displaying a home user interface for launching an application, initiating real-time communication sessions, or initiating display of virtual three-dimensional backgrounds. The knobs or digital crowns (e.g., the depressible, twistable or rotatable first button (1-128), button (11.1.1-114), and/or dial or button (1-328)) are optionally rotatable to adjust parameters of the visual content, such as the immersion level of the virtual three-dimensional environment (e.g., the extent to which the virtual content occupies the user's viewport into the three-dimensional environment), or other parameters associated with the virtual content and the three-dimensional environment displayed via the optical modules (e.g., the first and second display assemblies (1-120a, 1-120b) and/or the first and second optical modules (11.1.1-104a, 11.1.1-104b)).

Point of view

In an augmented reality, mixed reality, or virtual reality environment, a view of a three-dimensional environment is visible to the user. The view of the three-dimensional environment is typically visible to the user through one or more display generating components (e.g., a display or a pair of display modules presenting stereoscopic content to different eyes of the same user) through a virtual viewport having a viewport boundary that defines the extent of the three-dimensional environment visible to the user through the one or more display generating components. In some examples, the area bounded by the viewport boundary is smaller than the user's visible range in one or more dimensions (e.g., based on the user's visible range, the size, optical properties, or other physical characteristics of the one or more display generating components, and/or the position and/or orientation of the one or more display generating components relative to the user's eyes). In some embodiments, the area bounded by the viewport boundary is larger than the user's visible range in one or more dimensions (e.g., based on the user's visible range, the size, optical properties, or other physical characteristics of the one or more display generating components, and/or the position and/or orientation of the one or more display generating components relative to the user's eyes). The viewport and viewport bounds typically move as one or more display generating components move (e.g., with the user's head in the case of a head-mounted device, or with the user's hand in the case of a handheld device such as a tablet or smartphone). The user's viewpoint determines what content is visible in the viewport, and the viewpoint typically specifies a position and orientation relative to the 3D environment, and as the viewpoint shifts, the view of the 3D environment will also shift in the viewport. For head-mounted devices, the viewpoint is typically based on the orientation and position of the user's head, face, and/or eyes to provide a view of the 3D environment that provides a perceptually accurate and immersive experience when the user uses the head-mounted device. For handheld or deployed devices, the viewpoint shifts as the handheld or deployed device moves and/or as the user's position relative to the handheld or deployed device changes (e.g., as the user moves toward, away from, above, below, to the right, and/or to the left of the device). For devices that include display generating components with virtual pass-through, portions of the physical environment that are visible (e.g., displayed and/or projected) through one or more of the display generating components are typically based on the view of one or more cameras that communicate with the display generating components that move with the display generating components (e.g., move with the user's head in the case of a head-mounted device or move with the user's hand in the case of a handheld device such as a tablet or smartphone), because the user's viewpoint moves as the view of the one or more cameras moves (and the appearance of one or more virtual objects displayed through the one or more display generating components is updated based on the user's viewpoint (e.g., the displayed positions and poses of the virtual objects are updated based on the movement of the user's viewpoint)). For display generating components having optical pass-through, portions of the physical environment that are visible through one or more of the display generating components (e.g., optically visible through one or more partially or fully transparent portions of the display generating component) are based on the user's view through the partially or fully transparent portion(s) of the display generating component (e.g., moving with the user's head in the case of a head-mounted device or moving with the user's hand in the case of a handheld device such as a tablet or smartphone), because the user's viewpoint moves as the user's viewpoint through the partially or fully transparent portions of the display generating components moves (and the appearance of one or more virtual objects is updated based on the user's viewpoint).

Air Gestures

In some embodiments, the gesture includes an air gesture. An air gesture is a gesture detected without the user touching (or independently of) an input element that is part of a device (e.g., a computer system (101), one or more input devices (125), and/or a hand tracking device (140)) and is based on detected motion of a part of the user's body (e.g., the head, one or more arms, one or more hands, one or more fingers, and/or one or more legs) through the air, including motion of the user's body (e.g., motion of the user's hand relative to the user's other hand, and/or motion of the user's finger relative to another finger or part of the hand), and/or absolute motion of a part of the user's body (e.g., a tap gesture comprising motion of a hand in a predetermined pose by a predetermined amount and/or speed, or a shake gesture comprising a predetermined rotational speed or amount of a part of the user's body).

In some embodiments, the input gestures used in the various examples and embodiments described herein include air gestures performed by movement of the user's finger(s) relative to other finger(s) or part(s) of the user's hand to interact with an XR environment (e.g., a virtual or mixed reality environment), according to some embodiments. In some embodiments, an air gesture is a gesture that is based on detected motion of a portion of the user's body through air, including motion of the user's body relative to an absolute reference (e.g., the angle of the user's arm relative to the ground or the distance of the user's hand relative to the ground), motion of another portion of the user's body (e.g., movement of the user's hand relative to the user's shoulder, movement of one of the user's hands relative to the user's other hand, and/or movement of a user's finger relative to another finger or portion of the user's hand), and/or absolute motion of a portion of the user's body (e.g., a tap gesture comprising movement of a hand in a predetermined pose by a predetermined amount and/or speed, or a shake gesture comprising rotation of a portion of the user's body by a predetermined speed or amount).

In some embodiments where the input gesture is an air gesture (e.g., in the absence of physical contact with an input device that provides the computer system with information about which user interface element is the target of the user input, such as contact with a user interface element displayed on a touchscreen or contact with a mouse or trackpad moving a cursor over a user interface element), the gesture considers the user's attention (e.g., gaze) to determine the target of the user input (e.g., for direct inputs as described below). Thus, in implementations involving air gestures, the input gesture is detected attention (e.g., gaze) directed toward the user interface element in combination with (e.g., simultaneously with) movement of the user's finger(s) and/or hands to perform, for example, pinch and/or tap inputs, as described in more detail below.

Air Tap and Air Pinch

In some embodiments, input gestures directed toward a user interface object are performed either indirectly or directly with reference to the user interface object. For example, direct user input is performed on a user interface object by performing an input gesture with the user's hand at a position corresponding to the position of the user interface object in the three-dimensional environment (e.g., as determined based on the user's current viewpoint). In some embodiments, indirect input gestures are performed on a user interface object by detecting the user's attention (e.g., gaze) on the user interface object while the user's hand is not at a position corresponding to the position of the user interface object in the three-dimensional environment. For example, for a direct input gesture, the user may direct the user's input to the user interface object by initiating the gesture at or near a position corresponding to the displayed position of the user interface object (e.g., within a distance of 0.5 cm, 1 cm, 5 cm, or 0 to 5 cm, as measured from an outer edge of an option or a central portion of an option). For indirect input gestures, the user is able to direct the user's input to a user interface object by directing attention to the user interface object (e.g., by gazing at the user interface object), and while directing attention to an option, the user initiates an input gesture (e.g., at any position detectable by the computer system) (e.g., at a position that does not correspond to the displayed position of the user interface object).

In some embodiments, the input gestures (e.g., air gestures) used in the various examples and embodiments described herein include pinch inputs and tap inputs for interacting with a virtual or mixed reality environment, according to some embodiments. For example, the pinch inputs and tap inputs described below are performed as air gestures.

In some embodiments, the pinch input is part of an air gesture that includes one or more of a pinch gesture, a long pinch gesture, a pinch and drag gesture, or a double pinch gesture. For example, a pinch gesture, which is an air gesture, includes a movement of two or more fingers of a hand to contact each other, which is optionally followed by an immediate (e.g., within 0 to 1 second) release from the contact. A long pinch gesture, which is an air gesture, includes a movement of two or more fingers of a hand to contact each other for at least a threshold time (e.g., at least 1 second) before detecting a release from the contact. For example, a long pinch gesture includes a user holding a pinch gesture (e.g., bringing two or more fingers into contact), and the long pinch gesture continues until a release of contact between the two or more fingers is detected. In some embodiments, a double pinch gesture, which is an air gesture, comprises two (e.g., or more) pinch inputs (e.g., performed by the same hand) that are detected in succession immediately after each other (e.g., within a predefined time period). For example, a user performs a first pinch input (e.g., a pinch in or long pinch in), releases the first pinch input (e.g., by releasing contact between the two or more fingers), and performs a second pinch input within a predefined time period (e.g., within one second or within two seconds) after releasing the first pinch input.

In some embodiments, a pinch and drag gesture, which is an air gesture, comprises a pinch gesture (e.g., a pinch gesture or a long pinch gesture), which is performed in conjunction with (e.g., subsequent to) a drag input that changes the position of the user's hand from a first position (e.g., a starting position of the drag) to a second position (e.g., an ending position of the drag). In some embodiments, the user holds the pinch gesture while performing the drag input, and releases the pinch gesture (e.g., by opening up two or more of their fingers) to end the drag gesture (e.g., at the second position). In some embodiments, the pinch input and the drag input are performed by the same hand (e.g., the user pinches two or more fingers together to make contact, and then moves the same hand in the air to a second position using the drag gesture). In some embodiments, the pinch input is performed by the user's first hand and the drag input is performed by the user's second hand (e.g., the user continues the pinch input with the user's first hand while the user's second hand moves in the air from the first position to the second position). In some embodiments, an input gesture, which is an air gesture, includes inputs performed using both of the user's hands (e.g., pinch and/or tap inputs). For example, the input gesture includes two (e.g., more) pinch inputs that are performed together (e.g., simultaneously or within a predefined time period). For example, a first pinch gesture is performed using a first hand of the user (e.g., a pinch input, a long pinch input, or a pinch and drag input), and in connection with performing the pinch input using the first hand, a second pinch input is performed using the other hand (e.g., a second hand of the user's two hands).

In some embodiments, a tap input performed as an air gesture (e.g., directed toward a user interface element) includes a movement of the user's finger(s) toward the user interface element, a movement of the user's hand toward the user interface element, optionally with the user's finger(s) extended toward the user interface element, a downward motion of the user's finger (e.g., mimicking a mouse click motion or a tap on a touchscreen), or other predefined motion of the user's hand. In some embodiments, a tap input performed as an air gesture is detected based on movement characteristics of the finger or hand performing the tap gesture movement of the finger or hand away from the user's viewpoint and/or toward the object that is the target of the tap input, and a subsequent termination of the movement. In some embodiments, termination of the movement is detected based on a change in movement characteristics of the finger or hand performing the tap gesture (e.g., a termination of movement away from the user's viewpoint and/or toward the object that is the target of the tap input, a reversal of the direction of movement of the finger or hand, and/or a reversal of the direction of acceleration of the movement of the finger or hand).

caution

In some embodiments, the user's attention is determined to be directed to a portion of the 3D environment based on detection of gaze directed to a portion of the 3D environment (optionally without requiring other conditions). In some embodiments, the user's attention is determined to be directed to a portion of the 3D environment based on detection of gaze directed to a portion of the 3D environment together with one or more additional conditions, such as requiring gaze to be directed to a portion of the 3D environment for at least a threshold duration (e.g., a dwell duration) and/or requiring gaze to be directed to a portion of the 3D environment while the user's viewpoint is within a distance threshold from the portion of the 3D environment for the device to determine that the user's attention is directed to a portion of the 3D environment, wherein if one of the additional conditions is not met, the device determines that attention is not directed to the portion of the 3D environment to which gaze is directed (e.g., until the one or more additional conditions are met). Additional details of the user interface and user experience are provided below with reference to FIG. 679.

In FIG. 679, the electronic device (15.1-700) detects that an interpupillary distance (IPD) setting of the electronic device (15.1-700) does not match an interpupillary distance of a user of the electronic device (15.1-700) (e.g., as detected, estimated, and/or determined by the electronic device (15.1-700). For example, in some embodiments, the electronic device (15.1-700) is a head-mounted system that includes two or more optical components (e.g., two or more optical lenses and/or two or more display generating components, such as, for example, two or more transparent display generating components), wherein a first optical component is positioned in front of a first eye of the user and a second optical component is positioned in front of a second eye of the user. In some embodiments, the IPD setting of the electronic device (15.1-700) corresponds to a distance between two optical components, and the IPD setting is adjustable to move the two optical components further apart or closer together so that they are positioned correctly with respect to the two eyes of the user (e.g., the IPD setting is adjustable to move the two optical components further apart or closer together until the IPD setting of the electronic device (15.1-700) matches the interpupillary distance of the user). In FIG. 679, the electronic device (15.1-700) detects the interpupillary distance of the user (e.g., via the sensors (15.1-707)) and determines that the IPD setting of the electronic device (15.1-700) does not match the interpupillary distance of the user (e.g., the two optical components should be moved closer together or further apart). In FIG. 679, in response to detecting that the IPD setting of the electronic device (15.1-700) does not match the interpupillary distance of the user (and, optionally, in response to determining that the electronic device (15.1-700) does not satisfy one or more error conditions), the electronic device (15.1-700) displays the user interface (15.1-712). In some embodiments, when the electronic device (15.1-700) detects that the IPD setting of the electronic device (15.1-700) does match the interpupillary distance of the user (e.g., two optical components of the electronic device (15.1-700) are positioned at a predetermined location or within a predetermined range of locations relative to the two eyes of the user), the electronic device (15.1-700) skips displaying the user interface (15.1-712) (and, optionally, displays a different user interface).

In FIG. 679, the user interface (15.1-712) includes an object (15.1-714) representing an electronic device (15.1-700), and objects (15.1-716a, 15.1-716b) representing buttons (15.1-706a, 15.1-706b), respectively. The user interface (15.1-712) also includes objects (15.1-718a through 15.1-718c). In some embodiments, one or more of the objects (15.1-718a through 15.1-718c) represent physical components of the electronic device (15.1-700). For example, in some embodiments, object (15.1-718a) represents a first optical component (e.g., a first optical lens and/or a first display generating component) and object (15.1-718b) represents a second optical component (e.g., a second optical lens and/or a second display generating component). As will be described and illustrated in more detail below, in some embodiments, object (15.1-718a) and object (15.1-718b) move relative to each other on the display (15.1-702) to indicate movement of corresponding physical components of the electronic device (15.1-700). The user interface (15.1-712) also includes arrows (15.1-720) and prompts (15.1-722) that direct the user to press and hold a button (15.1-706b) (represented as an object (15.1-716b) in the user interface (15.1-712)) to align one or more physical components of the electronic device (15.1-700) (e.g., to adjust an IPD setting of the electronic device (15.1-700) and/or to move one or more optical components of the electronic device (15.1-700)). In FIG. 679, while the IPD setting of the electronic device (15.1-700) is not being adjusted (e.g., while the user is not providing user input to the button (15.1-706a) and/or the button (15.1-706b), the electronic device (15.1-700) outputs an audio output (15.1-711a). In some embodiments, the audio output (15.1-711a) is an ambient audio output indicating that the IPD setting of the electronic device (15.1-700) is not currently being modified and/or changed. In FIG. 679, the electronic device (15.1-700) detects a user input (15.1-724) that is a button press of the button (15.1-706b). In FIG. 679, the user input (15.1-724) is a button press of the button (15.1-706b). However, in some embodiments, the user input (15.1-724) is a different type of user input (e.g., a gesture, an air gesture, a touch input, a rotational input, a gaze-based input, and/or any combination of the foregoing). Additionally, the device (15.1-700) may include other buttons, including the button (15.1-704), which may also be pressed, rotated, or otherwise actuated to perform similar or different functions as those described above with reference to the buttons (15.1-706a, 15.1-706b). The buttons (15.1-706a, 15.1-706b, 15.1-704) may include mechanically depressible buttons, touch-sensitive buttons such as capacitively sensitive buttons, twistable/rotatable dials such as crowns or buttons described elsewhere herein, or any other type of button.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated in FIG. 679) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated and described elsewhere herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including their arrangements and configurations illustrated and described with reference to the drawings illustrated elsewhere) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIG. 679.

As illustrated in FIG. 680a, while displaying a mode control affordance (15.2-746) having a photo mode affordance (15.2-746A) and a video mode affordance (15.2-746B) (wherein the video mode affordance (15.2-746B) is highlighted) and a shutter affordance (15.2-718) in a filled-in color state, the computer system (15.2-700) detects a sixth potential media capture input, such as a button press input (15.2-748A), an air gesture input (15.2-748B), and/or a tap input (15.2-748C) of a hardware button (15.2-706), while the gaze (15.2-732) is directed to the shutter affordance (15.2-718), and initiates media capture accordingly. With the video media capture mode currently selected, the computer system (15.2-700) begins capturing video media. The computer system (15.2-700) may include an electronic device (15.2-702), which may, in one example, be part of a head-mounted device or other wearable electronic device that includes a display screen for displaying images. The device (15.2-700) may include a user interface (15.2-710) displayed on a display (15.2-708) within a boundary (15.2-714) of a housing or other structural frame. The device (15.2-702) may be configured to detect eye gaze and hand (15.2-726) gestures for controlling the user interface (15.2-710). A user interface (15.2-710) of a display (15.2-708) may include indicators (15.2-722A, 15.2-722B) as well as a shaded area (15.2-716). The display (15.2-708) may be a user-facing display of the HMDs described herein. A finger (15.2-724) may be used by a user to press any number of buttons of the HMD to input commands for modifying the user interface (15.2-710) as described herein.

As illustrated in FIG. 680b, while capturing video media, the computer system (15.2-700) stops displaying the mode control affordance (15.2-746) and instead displays a video status affordance (15.2-750) in a lower area of the camera viewfinder (15.2-712). The video status affordance (15.2-750) indicates that video media is currently being captured and includes the current elapsed time of the video capture. At the start of the video capture, the computer system (15.2-700) initially displays the video status affordance (15.2-750) as opaque. If no gaze (15.2-732) directed to the video state affordance (15.2-750) is detected after a threshold time (e.g., several seconds), the computer system (15.2-700) increases the translucency (e.g., decreases the opacity) of the video state affordance (15.2-750) (e.g., as described above with respect to changing the visual prominence of the captured media icon (15.2-738) and/or the mode control affordance (15.2-746). In response to detecting a gaze (15.2-732) directed to the video state affordance (15.2-750), the computer system (15.2-700) decreases the translucency (e.g., increases the opacity) of the video state affordance (15.2-750).

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 680a and 680b ) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated and described elsewhere herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated and described with reference to the drawings illustrated elsewhere) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 680a and 680b .

Figures 681a and 681b illustrate examples of a computer system (15.3-101) that may include a device such as an HMD. The HMD may include rear-facing displays or display screens, similar to the display showing the three-dimensional environment (15.3-702) illustrated in Figures 681a and 681b. The device may include one or more image sensors (314) similar to other sensors and cameras of HMDs shown and described elsewhere herein. The display can show indicators for various virtual objects (15.3-a to 15.3-h, 15.3-706, 15.3-708, 15.3-732a, 15.3-732c) as well as thresholds (15.3-734a to 15.3-734d, 15.3-738a, 15.3-738b). The display can be configured to project light toward the user's eyes when the HMD is worn, and forward-facing cameras and sensors can capture an environment outside the device, and the display can display these images as well as various virtual objects to the user through the display projecting the various virtual objects mentioned herein and illustrated in the drawings.

In some embodiments, when the attention input indicates that the user's attention has shifted away from a gaze virtual object (or a corresponding virtual object) and subsequently moved back to the gaze virtual object (or a corresponding virtual object), the computer system (15.3-101) updates a visual indication of the progression of the user's attention toward satisfying one or more criteria for performing an action associated with the corresponding virtual object based on whether the attention input has shifted back to the object within a threshold time (e.g., 0.03, 0.05, 0.07, 0.09, 0.1, 0.15, 0.2, 0.25, 0.3, 0.5, 1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 20, or 30 seconds). For example, in FIG. 681a, because the user's attention (e.g., attention input (15.3-716)) changed from being directed away from the virtual object (15.3-704a') of the virtual object (15.3-704a) to being directed toward the virtual object (15.3-704a') of the virtual object (15.3-704a) within a time threshold, the visual indication of the progress of the gaze target for the object (15.3-704a) is maintained (e.g., continues from the amount of fill prior to the user's attention being directed elsewhere). In some embodiments, the computer system (15.3-101) updates the visual indication of the progress differently than maintaining the indication of the progress, as described in the following figures.

In some embodiments, when the attention input comprises an activation input, the computer system (15.3-101) performs an action associated with the virtual object. For example, in FIG. 681a, the computer system (15.3-101) performs an action associated with the virtual object by receiving an activation input (e.g., a finger of a hand (15.3-710) touching a trackpad (15.3-746) and/or an air pinch gesture from the hand (15.3-710)) before the attention (15.3-716) satisfies one or more criteria associated with the gaze virtual object (15.3-704a') relative to the object (15.3-704a) to perform an action associated with the virtual object; For example, the duration of an attention input (15.3-716) directed toward a gaze virtual object (15.3-704a') associated with a virtual object (15.3-704a) is detected before reaching a threshold (15.3-734d) as illustrated by a timer (15.3-734) in FIG. 681a. In response to detecting an activation input before satisfying one or more criteria (e.g., reaching the threshold (15.3-734d)), the computer system (15.3-101) optionally performs an action associated with the virtual object (15.3-704a), such as updating the right side of the virtual object (15.3-704) to include content associated with the virtual object (15.3-704a), as illustrated in FIG. 681b.

In some embodiments, in response to detecting that recent interactions with the computer system include attention-only inputs or non-attentional inputs, the computer system (15.3-101) optionally changes (e.g., shortens or lengthens) the threshold requirement for displaying gaze virtual objects. For example, after detecting that the attentional input includes attention-only inputs (e.g., does not include non-attentional inputs, such as inputs from a hand (15.3-710)), the computer system (15.3-101) shortens the time threshold for displaying gaze virtual objects for the virtual object to 15.3-732b', as illustrated in FIG. 681a. In another example, after detecting that recent interactions with the computer system (15.3-101) included non-attentional inputs, the computer system (15.3-101) optionally extends the time threshold for displaying the gaze virtual object for the virtual object to 738b, as illustrated in FIG. 681b.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 681a and 681b ) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated and described elsewhere herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated and described with reference to the drawings illustrated elsewhere) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 681a and 681b .

Figures 682a and 682b illustrate first and second display generating components (15.4-7100, 15.4-7102), which may include cameras or sensors (15.4-7104, 15.4-7106), respectively. The display generating components (15.4-7100, 15.4-7102) are or include head-mountable display devices that operate at different locations (15.4-7000-a, 15.4-7000-b), as shown in Figures 682a and 682b. In at least one example, the HMDs may also include one or more buttons (15.4-7302) for controlling displayed content or other functions of the device, as described elsewhere herein. The buttons (15.4-7302) may include dials. In at least one example, the display generating components (15.4-7100, 15.4-7102) can display mixed/virtual reality (MR, VR, or XR) content (15.4-7002). Various virtual objects, including a progress bar (15.4-7004) and an overlay (15.4-7008), can be displayed as illustrated.

In some embodiments, the computer system detects whether criteria for changing the current immersion level are met while displaying XR content having respective immersion levels via the first display generation component (15.4-7100). In response to detecting that the criteria for changing the current immersion level are met, the computer system changes the immersion level at which the XR content is displayed via the first display generation component (15.4-7100) and changes the appearance of graphical elements representing a state associated with the user shown via the second display generation component (15.4-7102). For example, as illustrated in FIGS. 682a and 682b, in some embodiments, the computer system determines that the criteria for changing the immersion level are met upon detecting actions of a second user (15.4-7204) present in the physical environment (e.g., at location B (15.4-7000-b) of FIG. 682a). For example, in some embodiments, detecting actions of the second user (15.4-7204) that cause the computer system to change the current immersion level (e.g., when the current immersion level is a full immersion level or exceeds a threshold immersion level) includes detecting that the second user (15.4-7204) has moved into an area in front of the second display generating component (15.4-7102) (e.g., an area in front of the first user (15.4-7202) when the first user is wearing an HMD that includes the first display generating component (15.4-7100) and the second display generating component (15.4-7102). In some embodiments, detecting actions of the second user (15.4-7204) that cause the computer system to change the current immersion level (e.g., when the current immersion level is a full immersion level or exceeds a threshold immersion level) includes detecting that the second user (15.4-7204) is performing a gesture toward the first user (15.4-7202) (e.g., waving at the first user (15.4-7202), tapping the first user (15.4-7202) on the shoulder or arm, or other gestures that require the first user (15.4-7202)'s attention). As illustrated in FIG. 682a, the second user (15.4-7204) has moved into an area in front of the second display generating component (15.4-7102) and is waving to the first user (15.4-7202) and/or calling the first user (15.4-7202) by name; upon detecting one or more of the above, the computer system determines, in some embodiments, that criteria for changing the current immersion level are met. In FIG. M, in response to detecting that criteria for changing the current immersion level are met, the computer system, in some embodiments, changes the manner in which XR content is displayed through the first display generating component in response to the change in the current immersion level. In this exemplary scenario illustrated in FIGS. 682a and 682b, the computer system reduces the immersion level from a full immersion level to a medium immersion level, and displays a representation of a physical environment (e.g., a representation (15.4-7312) of a physical object (15.4-7314) in the physical environment (e.g., at location B (15.4-7000-b)) and a representation (15.4-7010) of a second user (15.4-7204) in front of the first user (e.g., at location B (15.4-7000-b)) among the displayed XR content via the first display generating component (15.4-7100). Additionally, when the computer system reduces the immersion level from a full immersion level to a medium immersion level, the computer system also displays, in some embodiments, a representation (15.4-7006) of a body part of the first user (15.4-7202) through the second display generating component (15.4-7102). The representation (15.4-7006) of the body part of the first user (15.4-7202) is updated according to changes in the appearance of the first user (15.4-7202), and graphical elements indicating the status of the XR content and the current immersion level are updated according to changes in the status of the XR content and the immersion level.

In at least one example, the computer system can vary the level of engagement between the user and the user interaction, including varying the level to which the user can engage with (e.g., manipulate, interact with, move, etc.) a virtual object displayed to the user. In at least one example, the computer system can vary the level of engagement between the user and the user interaction, including varying the level to which the user can engage with (e.g., manipulate, interact with, move, etc.) a 3-D space or 3-D environment, including virtual 3-D spaces displayed to the user. In one example, the levels of engagement between the user and the virtual objects and/or 3-D spaces can be automatically varied based on detected facial features, hand gestures, gaze direction, etc. In one example, the levels of engagement between the user and the virtual objects and/or 3-D spaces can be manually adjusted using buttons, dials, crowns, and other physical interactions between the user and the device having the computer system described herein.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 682a and 682b ) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated and described elsewhere herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated and described with reference to the drawings illustrated elsewhere) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 682a and 682b .

Figures 683a through 683c illustrate examples of setting immersion levels for operating system user interfaces compared to application user interfaces. Figure 683a illustrates an electronic device (15.5-101) that displays a three-dimensional environment (15.5-901) in a user interface via a display generating component (e.g., a display screen or generating component of a head-mounted device). The electronic device (15.5-101) may optionally include a display generating component (e.g., a touch screen) and a plurality of image sensors (e.g., image sensors including cameras of an HMD described herein). The image sensors optionally include one or more of a visible light camera, an infrared camera, a depth sensor, or any other sensor that the electronic device (15.5-101) may use to capture one or more images of a user or a portion of the user while the user interacts with the electronic device (15.5-101). In some embodiments, the user interfaces shown below may also be implemented on a head-mounted display that includes a display generating component that displays the user interface to the user, and sensors for detecting movements of the user's hands and/or the physical environment (e.g., external sensors facing outward from the user), and/or the user's gaze (e.g., internal sensors facing inward toward the user's face).

As illustrated in FIG. 683a, the device (15.5-101) captures one or more images of a physical environment (15.5-900) surrounding the device (15.5-101), including one or more objects within the physical environment (15.5-900) surrounding the device (15.5-101). In some embodiments, the device (15.5-101) displays representations of the physical environment in the three-dimensional environment (15.5-901). For example, the three-dimensional environment (15.5-901) includes a representation (15.5-902b) of a tree (e.g., corresponding to a tree (15.5-902a) within the physical environment (15.5-900)) and a representation (15.5-904b) of a person (e.g., corresponding to a person (15.5-904a) within the physical environment (15.5-900). In some embodiments, the device (15.5-101) also displays one or more virtual objects (e.g., objects not present in the physical environment (15.5-900)) in the three-dimensional environment (15.5-901). For example, in FIG. 683a, the device (15.5-101) displays a virtual object (15.5-910) (e.g., an ornament) on a representation of a tree (15.5-902b), a virtual object (15.5-906) (e.g., a hat) on a representation of a person (15.5-904b), and a representation of the sun (15.5-908). In some embodiments, a representation of the sun (15.5-908) is displayed and processed as a light source in the three-dimensional environment (15.5-901), and lighting effects generated from the representation of the sun (15.5-908) are applied by the device (15.5-101) to representations of virtual objects and/or physical objects displayed in the three-dimensional environment (15.5-901).

In FIG. 683a, the device (15.5-101) also displays a user interface (15.5-912) of an operating system of the device (15.5-101). The user interface (15.5-912) is optionally an application browsing user interface of the operating system of the device (15.5-101) through which one or more applications accessible on the device (15.5-101) may be displayed/launched. In some embodiments, the user interface (15.5-912) is any other user interface of the operating system of the device (15.5-101) (e.g., as compared to a user interface of an application on the device (15.5-101). In FIG. 683a, the user interface (15.5-912) includes icons corresponding to different applications accessible on the device (15.5-101) (e.g., an icon for App A, an icon for App B, an icon for App C, and an icon for App D) that are selectable to display individual selected applications via a display generating component (15.5-120) of the device (15.5-101). In at least one example, the display generating component (15.5-120) may be a display module or screen of a head-mounted device configured to project light toward the user's eyes when the user wears the head-mounted device. The button (15.5-920) may be similar to or identical to the crowns, dials, and other buttons illustrated and described on other head-mounted devices described herein and illustrated in other drawings.

In some embodiments, the user interface (15.5-912) is displayed at a location within the three-dimensional environment (15.5-901) such that one or more representations of virtual objects and/or physical objects are overlaid on the three-dimensional environment (15.5-901) (e.g., overlaying a portion of a representation (15.5-904b) of a person corresponding to a person (15.5-904a) within the physical environment (15.5-900) and in front of that person). In some embodiments, the user interface (15.5-912) is positioned within the three-dimensional environment (15.5-901) such that one or more virtual objects are in front of and overlay a portion of the user interface (15.5-912) and/or one or more representations of physical objects are in front of and overlay a portion of the user interface (15.5-912).

In some embodiments, the device (15.5-101) displays a three-dimensional environment (15.5-901) and/or user interfaces displayed via a display generating component (15.5-120) at a particular immersion level. In FIG. 683a, the device (15.5-101) is displaying a three-dimensional environment (15.5-901) at a particular immersion level (15.5-918) (e.g., on an immersion scale (15.5-916) - the leftmost side of which corresponds to no immersion and the rightmost side of which corresponds to maximum immersion) in which representations of physical objects (15.5-902b, 15.5-904b) are visible via the display generating component (15.5-120). In some embodiments, the immersion level includes an associated degree to which content displayed by the electronic device obscures background content (e.g., content other than the user interface (15.5-912)) surrounding/behind the user interface (15.5-912), optionally including the number of items of background content displayed and visual characteristics (e.g., color, contrast, opacity) with which the background content is displayed. In some embodiments, the background content is included in the background on which the user interface (15.5-912) is displayed. In some embodiments, the background content includes additional user interfaces (e.g., user interfaces generated by the device (15.5-101) corresponding to applications, system user interfaces, etc.), virtual objects (e.g., files generated by the device (15.5-101), representations of other users, etc.) that are associated with or not included in the user interface (15.5-912), and/or real objects (e.g., pass-through objects representing real objects within the physical environment of the electronic device (15.5-101) that are displayed by the device to be seen by the display generating component). In some embodiments, at a first (e.g., low) immersion level, the background, virtual, and/or real objects are displayed in a non-ambiguous manner. For example, a separate user interface having a low immersion level is optionally displayed concurrently with background content that is optionally displayed at full brightness, color, and/or translucency. In some embodiments, at a second (e.g., higher) immersion level, background, virtual, and/or real objects are displayed in an obscured manner (e.g., dimmed, blurred, removed from the display, etc.). For example, individual user interfaces with a high immersion level are displayed (e.g., in full screen or full immersion mode) without concurrently displaying background content. As another example, a user interface displayed at a medium immersion level is concurrently displayed with dimmed, blurred, or otherwise de-emphasized background content. In some embodiments, the visual characteristics of the background objects vary between background objects. For example, at a particular immersion level, one or more first background objects are visually de-emphasized (e.g., dimmed, blurred, or displayed with increased transparency) relative to one or more second background objects, and one or more third background objects are stopped from being displayed.

In FIG. 683a, an input is received on an input element (15.5-920) of a device (15.5-101). The input element (15.5-920) is optionally a mechanical input element, such as a slider element or a rotatable input element, that can be manipulated to change an immersion level of a currently-displayed user interface(s) by the device (15.5-101), wherein the amount and direction of the change in immersion (e.g., increasing or decreasing) is based on a magnitude and direction of manipulation of the input element (15.5-920) (e.g., a direction and/or magnitude of movement of the input element (15.5-920), or a direction and/or magnitude of rotation of the rotatable input element). In some embodiments, the device (15.5-101) and/or the input element (15.5-920) generates tactile feedback as the level of immersion changes (e.g., smaller tactile outputs for each increasing or decreasing step of immersion, and different larger tactile outputs when reaching minimum or maximum immersion).

In FIG. 683a, an input received on an input element (15.5-920) is an input to slide the input element (15.5-920) upward, thereby increasing the immersion level of the currently displayed user interface(s) by an amount based on the amount the element (15.5-920) has moved upward. In response to the input in FIG. 683a, the device (15.5-101) increases the immersion level at which the operating system user interface (15.5-912) is displayed to a medium immersion level, as illustrated in FIG. 683b and the immersion scale (15.5-916). In particular, in some embodiments, increasing the immersion level at which the user interface (15.5-912) is displayed causes the device (15.5-101) to display the user interface at a larger size via the display generating component (15.5-120), as illustrated in FIG. Additionally or alternatively, as previously described, content displayed around and/or behind the user interface (15.5-912) (e.g., representations of physical objects (15.5-902b, 15.5-904b) and virtual objects (15.5-910, 15.5-906)) is darkened and/or blurred in FIG. 683b, while the user interface (15.5-912) is not darkened or blurred. In some embodiments, increasing the immersion level with which the currently-displayed user interface(s) are displayed additionally or alternatively increases atmospheric visual and/or audio effects associated with the virtual or physical objects displayed via the display generating component (15.5-120). For example, in Fig. 683b, the light rays emitted from the sun representation (15.5-908) have become longer (e.g., corresponding to more virtual light being emitted from the representation (15.5-908), resulting in the ornament (15.5-910) on the tree representation (15.5-902b) beginning to glow. Additional or alternative changes in atmospheric lighting, visuals, audio, and other effects are similarly considered along with changes in immersion levels.

As previously mentioned, in some embodiments, the immersion levels at which different user interfaces are displayed are optionally set independently of one another. For example, a change in the immersion level at which operating system user interfaces are displayed optionally does not change the immersion level at which application user interfaces are displayed, and in some embodiments, a change in the immersion level at which a user interface of a first application is displayed does not change the immersion level at which a user interface of a second application is displayed. Accordingly, in some embodiments, in response to an input to switch from displaying one user interface to displaying another user interface, the device (15.5-101) optionally displays the switched user interface at the immersion level at which that user interface was last displayed, regardless of any change in immersion applied to the currently-displayed user interface.

For example, in FIG. 683b, the device (15.5-101) detects an input selecting an icon corresponding to App C in the user interface (15.5-912). In response, the device (15.5-101) displays a user interface (15.5-934) of App C, as illustrated in FIG. 683c. App C is optionally an application accessible via (e.g., installed on) the device (15.5-101), and optionally any type of application (e.g., a content viewing application, a word processing application, etc.). App C is optionally different from the operating system of the device (15.5-101), and thus the user interface (15.5-934) is optionally a user interface of App C rather than a user interface of the operating system of the device (15.5-101).

As illustrated in FIG. 683c, in response to an input to display app C, the device (15.5-101) displays the user interface (15.5-934) at an immersion level (15.5-932) that is higher (e.g., as indicated by the immersion scale (15.5-930) for app C) than the immersion level (15.5-918) at which the device (15.5-101) was displaying the user interface (15.5-912) in FIG. 683b. This is optionally because, as described above, the immersion levels set for applications are independent of the immersion levels set for the operating system of the device (15.5-101). Therefore, it is true that, optionally, the higher immersion level at which the device (15.5-101) is displaying the user interface (15.5-934) of app C in FIG. 683c is the immersion level at which the user interface (15.5-934) was last displayed by the device (15.5-101). If the user interface (15.5-934) was last displayed at a lower immersion level than the immersion level (15.5-918) for the user interface (15.5-912) illustrated in FIG. 683b, the device (15.5-101) would optionally display the user interface (15.5-934) of FIG. 683c at that lower immersion level, rather than at the higher immersion level illustrated in FIG. Also illustrated in FIG. 683c is an increased size of the user interface (15.5-934) on the display generating component (15.5-120) (compared to the size of the user interface (15.5-912) of FIG. 683b) and increased darkening and/or blurring of content outside/around the user interface (15.5-934) (compared to the darkening and/or blurring of content outside/around the user interface (15.5-912) of FIG. 683b) - these changes in display characteristics are optionally among the changes that occur in response to increased immersion, as previously described. Additional or alternative changes in display characteristics, such as those previously described, are also contemplated.

As described above, changes in the immersion level at which a user interface is displayed in one application optionally do not change the immersion level at which user interfaces of other applications and/or user interfaces of the operating system are displayed. For example, if the device (15.5-101) detects an input (e.g., via an input element (15.5-920)) to change the immersion level of the user interface (15.5-934) of app C in FIG. 683c, the device (15.5-101) will change the immersion level at which the user interface (15.5-934) is displayed in response to the input, as described above. After changing the immersion level at which the user interface (15.5-934) is displayed, in response to an input to redisplay the user interface (15.5-912) (e.g., an input to stop displaying the user interface (15.5-934)), the device will optionally revert to displaying the user interface (15.5-912) at immersion level (15.5-918) of FIG. 683b, where the immersion level (15.5-918) is the immersion level at which the user interface (15.5-912) was last displayed, and is independent of the changed immersion level at which the user interface (15.5-934) was displayed when the input to redisplay the user interface (15.5-912) was detected.

In some embodiments, applications (e.g., App C) include controls in their user interfaces for changing the level of immersion at which such applications are displayed. For example, in some embodiments, the user interface (15.5-934) of App C includes controls for increasing or decreasing the level of immersion at which the user interface (15.5-934) is displayed, and the level of immersion at which App C is displayed is changed by the device (15.5-101) in response to interaction with such controls, additionally or alternatively to interaction with the input element (15.5-920). Furthermore, in some embodiments, an immersion level above a threshold for the operating system user interface (e.g., a maximum level of immersion) is achievable in response to inputs detected at the input element (15.5-920). However, in some embodiments, the immersion level above that threshold for the application user interface is not achievable in response to inputs detected at the input element (15.5-920) - in some embodiments, the immersion level at which the application user interface is displayed can reach a threshold immersion level only using the input element, and once that threshold is reached, a different type of input is required to increase the immersion at which the application user interface is displayed beyond that threshold. For example, in FIG. 683c, the immersion level (15.5-932) at which the user interface (15.5-934) is displayed is optionally the highest immersion level that can be reached for the user interface (15.5-934) through inputs at the input element (15.5-920). To increase the immersion beyond the immersion level (15.5-932), the device (15.5-101) optionally requires an input that selects a user interface element depicted in the user interface (15.5-934). For example, in FIG. 683c, the user interface (15.5-934) includes a selectable user interface element (15.5-950) to increase the immersion at which the user interface (15.5-934) is displayed past the immersion level (15.5-932) (e.g., user input selecting the user interface element (15.5-950) optionally causes the device (15.5-101) to display the user interface (15.5-934) at maximum immersion, or full screen, where no content surrounding the user interface (15.5-934) is displayed by the device (15.5-101)). In some embodiments, the user interface (15.5-934) includes the element (15.5-950) only if the immersion level at which the user interface (15.5-934) is displayed has reached the threshold immersion level described previously. In some embodiments, the user interface (15.5-934) includes the element (15.5-950) regardless of whether the immersion level at which the user interface (15.5-934) is displayed has reached the threshold immersion level previously described.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 683a through 683c) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated and described elsewhere herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated and described with reference to the drawings illustrated elsewhere) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 683a through 683c.

FIG. 684a illustrates an application user interface (15.6-11002) displayed in a three-dimensional environment (15.6-11000, 15.6-7128) including a representation (15.6-7014') of a physical object (15.6-7014) (e.g., a physical table), representations (15.6-7004', 15.6-7006') of physical walls (15.6-7004, 15.6-7006), respectively, and a representation (15.6-7008') of a physical floor (15.6-7008). In some embodiments, both computer-generated virtual objects that do not correspond to any particular objects in the physical environment (e.g., a box (15.6-7016)) and representations of objects in the physical environment are displayed to the user.

In some embodiments, as illustrated in FIG. 684a, the application user interface (15.6-11002) presents media content to the user. For example, the application user interface (15.6-11002) is a video player that includes a display of playback controls. In some embodiments, the physical environment is a spatially constrained space (e.g., an indoor space) surrounded by walls, physical objects, or other obstacles. Features of the physical environment can be seen in a three-dimensional environment (15.6-11000) (e.g., an XR environment) displayed to the user by the presence of representations (15.6-7004', 15.6-7006') of physical walls (15.6-7004, 15.6-7006), representations (15.6-7008') of physical floors (15.6-7008), and representations (15.6-7014') of physical objects (15.6-7014) (e.g., tables), as illustrated in FIG. 684a. In some embodiments, computer-generated virtual content, such as a box (15.6-7016) that has no correspondence in the physical environment, is also displayed to the user by the computer system.

As illustrated in FIG. 684a, a first portion of the three-dimensional environment (15.6-11000) includes computer-generated virtual objects that do not exist in the physical environment, and a second portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment includes representations of objects within the physical environment displayed as part of the three-dimensional environment (15.6-11000). FIG. 684a illustrates a first immersive level generated by a display generation component of a computer system, wherein the display of the XR environment simultaneously includes a pass-through portion of the physical environment of the computer system, virtual content from an application user interface (15.6-11002), and computer-generated virtual content such as a box (15.6-7016) that is distinct from content provided by the application user interface (15.6-11002).

In some embodiments, as the level of immersion increases, the amount of input signals from the physical environment that the user receives is reduced. For example, reducing inputs from the physical environment by not displaying representations (15.6-7004', 15.6-7006', 15.6-7008') to the user, and/or displaying computer-generated virtual content that provides visual inputs to the user to simulate a wider environment (e.g., open fields, outdoor spaces, or external space) than that provided by the physical environment, increases the level of immersion provided to the user in the three-dimensional environment (15.6-11000). In some embodiments, increasing the level of immersion provided to the user reduces the impact of the physical environment on the user.

A user may desire to become more fully immersed in the content of media provided through the application user interface (15.6-11002). Without exiting the application user interface (15.6-11002), the user provides rotational inputs to the rotational input element (15.6-7108) (e.g., by rotating the rotational input element (15.6-7108 or 15.6-7508). The input elements (15.6-7108, 15.6-7508) may be similar to buttons, crowns, dials, and other input mechanisms of the head-mounted display devices described herein. In some embodiments, the user provides a first rotational input to the rotational input element (15.6-7108) by rotating it in a first rotational direction (e.g., clockwise rotation or counterclockwise rotation). The first rotation direction changes the level of immersion presented by the display-generating component (e.g., by increasing the level of immersion or decreasing the level of immersion). For example, by rotating in the first rotation direction that increases the level of immersion, pass-through portions of the physical environment are displayed with lower fidelity and/or fewer pass-through portions of the physical environment are displayed (e.g., some pass-through portions of the experience are stopped from being displayed) than before the first rotation input. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 684b, representation (15.6-7014) is stopped from being displayed. Instead, computer-generated content depicted by dashed lines is presented to the user as virtual content (15.6-11004).

In addition to increasing the level of immersion during a media consumption experience (e.g., watching a video or listening to music), the immersion level can also be increased to help a user focus and pay attention while working. For example, increasing the immersion level could reduce noise from the surrounding physical environment, and/or present content from a smaller number of applications (e.g., a single application, a word processing application) to the user (e.g., notifications from other applications are blocked while the user is using a particular application at a high level of immersion).

Increasing the proportion of virtual (e.g., computer-generated) content rather than representations of the physical environment increases the level of immersion presented to the user. Virtual content generally refers to content that is distinct from representations of the physical world (e.g., the physical environment). For example, presenting a greater number of computer-generated virtual content, such as a box (15.6-7016) that has no counterpart in the physical environment, increases the level of immersion presented to the user. In some embodiments, as the level of immersion increases, previously presented computer-generated content at a lower immersion level continues to be displayed (e.g., maintaining the display of computer-generated content as the level of immersion increases).

In some embodiments, the level of immersion presented to the user is related to the associated spatial extent (e.g., angular extent) of the field of view within which the computer-generated content is displayed. At lower immersion levels, the computer-generated virtual content is displayed within a smaller field of view. At higher immersion levels, the computer-generated virtual content is displayed within and covers a larger field of view.

For example, in FIG. 684a, box (15.6-7016) is computer-generated virtual content, but it appears in a peripheral portion of the user's field of view. In contrast, as illustrated in FIG. 684b, in response to detecting a rotational input to the rotatable input element (15.6-7108) along the first direction, the pass-through portion representing the representation (15.6-7014) is stopped from being displayed, and the first portion (e.g., the central portion) of the user's field of view is replaced with the computer-generated virtual content (15.6-11004). In some embodiments, the computer-generated virtual content begins in a central portion of the user's field of view and occupies an expanded portion of the user's field of view.

In some embodiments, the center of the user's field of view coincides with the middle area of the application user interface (15.6-110002). In some embodiments, the immersion level has an associated field of view, which is the angular size of the viewing cone of the field of view in which the computer-generated virtual content is displayed. A higher immersion level has a larger associated field of view, and a lower immersion level has a smaller associated field of view.

In some embodiments, for the immersive level illustrated in FIG. 684b, the field of view is approximately ±10°. For example, for a field of view of approximately ±10°, the computer-generated virtual content is displayed, from the user's perspective, starting at an angle of approximately 10° to the left and extending to approximately 10° to the right, and extending from approximately 10° upward to approximately 10° downward relative to an axis of the user (e.g., an axis that lies in the user's sagittal plane, e.g., an axis that projects vertically forward from the frontal plane of the user's body). In some embodiments, the computer-generated virtual content occupies (e.g., completely occupies) the user's field of view within the field of view. In some embodiments, the computer-generated virtual content partially occupies a portion of the user's field of view within the field of view, but no input from the physical environment of the computer system is provided to the user's field of view within the field of view.

In some embodiments, reducing the immersion level involves changing the immersion level from an initial virtual reality (VR) environment in which no pass-through portion of the physical environment of the computer system is displayed to a first immersion level that includes the display of an XR environment. In some embodiments, the highest immersion level for a three-dimensional environment is a virtual reality environment in which no pass-through portion of the physical environment is provided.

Immersion level affects the user's perceptual experience by altering properties of the mixed reality 3D environment. Altering the immersion level alters the relative prominence of virtual content relative to (visual and/or audio) content from the physical world. For example, for audio components, increasing the immersion level may include, for example, increasing noise cancellation, increasing the spatiality of spatial audio associated with the XR environment (e.g., by moving audio sources to more points around the user or increasing the number and/or volume of point sources of audio), and/or increasing the volume of audio associated with the virtual environment. In some embodiments, increasing the immersion level alters the extent to which the mixed reality environment reduces (or eliminates) cues from the physical world presented to the user (e.g., audio and/or visual pass-through of portions of the physical environment on a computer system). For example, increasing the level of immersion may include increasing the proportion of the visual field of view that displays virtual content, or reducing the salience of representations of the real world (e.g., the physical environment) by dimming, fading, or reducing the amount of real-world representation displayed to the user.

Changing the immersion level may also include changing the visual presentation of the mixed reality environment, including the extent of the field of view and the extent to which visibility of the external physical environment is reduced. Changing the immersion level may include changing the number or range of sensory modalities that the user can use to interact with the mixed reality 3D environment (e.g., interacting through the user's voice, gaze, and body motions). Changing the immersion level may also include changing the degree of fidelity and resolution with which the mixed reality environment simulates the desired environment. Changing the immersion level may also include changing the extent to which the viewpoint of the mixed reality environment is modified to match the user's viewpoint or perspective, for example, through capturing the user's motions and timely adjustment of portions of the 3D environment within the field of view.

At the immersive level illustrated in FIG. 684b, some visual input from the physical environment is still provided to the user. In some embodiments, the representations (15.6-7004', 15.6-7006', 15.6-7008') are provided with lower fidelity (e.g., less focused, lower contrast, or more monochromatic) at the immersive level illustrated in FIG. 684b compared to the immersive level illustrated in FIG. 684a. Thus, while input from the physical environment is still provided to the user, visibility of the external physical environment is reduced at higher immersive levels compared to lower immersive levels.

In addition to changing the immersion level presented to the user, the rotatable input mechanism (15.6-7108) may also receive one or more press inputs that cause the computer system (e.g., wearable device) to perform various actions, as described in Table 3 below.

The use of a single input device (e.g., a rotatable input mechanism (15.6-7108)) that accepts two (or more) different types of input (e.g., rotational inputs as a first type of input, and/or press inputs as a second type of input) reduces the number of separate input devices that must be provided to request or direct the performance of different functions. Reducing the number of input devices that must be provided reduces the manufacturing costs of the computer system and reduces the number of computer system components that can fail. Reducing the number of components reduces the cost and complexity of manufacturing the computer system and increases the reliability of the computer system. Reducing the number of input devices also reduces physical clutter on the computer system, allowing for more physical space in the computer system and helping to prevent accidental inputs from inadvertent contact.

Table 15-1 below describes the behavior of a computer system in response to different actions on a button (15.6-7108) (e.g., a hardware button, a solid-state button), according to some embodiments.

[Table 15-1]

For a computer system that is a wearable device (e.g., a head-mounted device, a strapped-on device, or a watch), in response to detecting a rotational input to a rotatable input element (15.6-7108) (e.g., a bidirectional rotatable input element) while the wearable device is turned on and worn on the user's body, an immersion level presented by the wearable device is changed in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 684a and 684b. For example, the immersion level increases when a rotational input in a first rotational direction is provided to the rotatable input element (15.6-7108). In another example, when the wearable device is turned on but not worn on the user's body (e.g., the user), no action is triggered in response to detecting a rotational input to the rotatable input element (15.6-7108) (e.g., the wearable device remains in a sleep state).

For a computer system that is a wearable device (e.g., a head-mounted device, a strap-on device, or a watch), in response to detecting a single-press input to a rotatable input element (15.6-7108) while the wearable device is turned on and worn on a user's body, a home menu user interface is presented to the user, or an application user interface that was in an immersive or full-screen display mode when the single-press input was detected exits the full-screen or immersive display mode. Accordingly, the wearable device is configured to perform different actions depending on the type of user input provided to the rotatable input element (15.6-7108) (e.g., a press input or a rotation input).

For a computer system that is a wearable device (e.g., a head-mounted device, a strap-on device, or a watch), in response to detecting a single press input to a rotatable input element (15.6-7108) while the wearable device is turned on but not worn on the user's body, the wearable device transitions from a sleep state to a standby state.

For a computer system that is a wearable device (e.g., a head-mounted device, a strap-on device, or a watch), in response to detecting two press inputs on a rotatable input element (15.6-7108) within a preset time interval (e.g., less than 3 seconds, less than 2 seconds, less than 1 second) while the wearable device is turned on and worn on the user's body, an operating system menu (e.g., a force quit menu) is presented to the user.

For a computer system that is a wearable device (e.g., a head-mounted device, a strap-on device, or a watch), in response to detecting three press inputs within a preset time interval (e.g., less than 5 seconds, less than 3 seconds, less than 2 seconds) on a rotatable input element (15.6-7108) while the wearable device is turned on and worn on the user's body, an option to enter an accessibility mode is presented to the user.

In some embodiments, the rotatable input mechanism (15.6-7108) is also used to re-center the user's field of view. For example, instead of aligning the center of the user's field of view with the center of the application user interface (15.6-11002), the user re-centers the center of their field of view to a different location within the three-dimensional environment (15.6-11000). For example, the new center of the user's field of view corresponds to a point along the intersection of the representations (15.6-7004', 15.6-7006'). In some embodiments, re-centering the field of view includes displaying computer-generated virtual content that was previously centered in the user's field of view to fade out of the user's field of view, followed by computer-generated virtual content fading in within the area of the user's field of view at the newly defined center. Optionally, the virtual content is presented with higher fidelity or displayed with higher contrast than before the re-centering of the user's field of view. While the wearable device is turned on and worn on the user's body, a press input on the rotatable input mechanism (15.6-7108) that is maintained (e.g., sustained) for a preset duration of time (e.g., about 2 seconds, or about 5 seconds) causes the wearable device to initiate the re-centering action described above. While the press input is maintained, the user can rotate or move her head so that the center of her field of view is re-positioned to a new location. Upon selecting the new location, releasing the press input re-centers the center of the user's field of view to the new location.

As illustrated in Table 3, different numbers of inputs (e.g., individual or sequential inputs) of a type distinct from rotational inputs (e.g., press inputs) cause the computer system to perform different actions. For example, in some embodiments, for a single press input: (1) the home menu user interface is displayed, (2) a pass-through portion of the physical environment is provided, or (3) the application exits full-screen mode. For two press inputs provided in close succession (e.g., within three seconds, within two seconds, within one second), a force quit menu is displayed. For three press inputs provided in close succession (e.g., within five seconds, within three seconds, within two seconds), an accessibility mode is activated, or an option to activate the accessibility mode is provided.

Using the number of press inputs to determine which action(s) to perform reduces the number of separate input devices that must be provided to accomplish different tasks. Reducing the number of input devices that must be provided reduces physical clutter on the device, freeing up more physical space on the device and helping to prevent accidental inputs from unintended contacts. Reducing the number of input devices also reduces the need for additional hardware wiring within the device; instead, the processor can be programmed to interpret more types of inputs (e.g., based on the number of press inputs) from a particular input device.

Without the need to display additional controls to the user, the use of a rotary input mechanism allows the user to easily provide a variety of inputs, which may be a continuous range or a range including a series of discrete steps or values, and the bidirectional nature of the rotary input mechanism allows input to be easily and intuitively changed in either direction. The same rotary input mechanism (15.6-7108) may also receive a second type of input (e.g., a press input) that requests or instructs the performance of separate functions (e.g., releasing or displaying a user interface object). Reducing the number of input devices that must be provided reduces physical clutter on the device, thereby freeing up more physical space on the device and helping to prevent accidental inputs from unintended contacts. The use of a rotary input mechanism provides direct access to performing different actions and changing immersion levels, thereby improving the operational efficiency of the computer system by reducing the time required to achieve specific results (e.g., the user does not need to navigate menus or visually displayed control elements to perform an action and/or make a selection to change the immersion level).

With regard to immersion levels, increasing the immersion level can help reduce the constraints imposed by the physical environment of a computer system. For example, a more realistically simulated virtual or XR environment can be created by blocking external sensory inputs from the physical environment (e.g., blocking visual input in a small/enclosed room, removing (audio) echoes from a small physical space), thereby providing a more conducive virtual environment for users to interact with applications in a three-dimensional environment (15.6-11000).

A user further increases the immersion level from the immersion level illustrated in FIG. 684b by applying an additional rotational input in the same direction (e.g., the first rotational direction) as applied to increase the immersion level from that illustrated in FIG. 684a to that illustrated in FIG. 684b. In response to the second rotational input, the immersion level associated with the display of the XR environment generated by the display generating component illustrated in FIG. 684b is increased to the second immersion level by displaying additional virtual content to the user.

Any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated in FIGS. 684a and 684b ) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into any of the other examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated and described elsewhere herein. Likewise, any of the features, components, and/or portions (including the arrangements and configurations thereof illustrated and described with reference to the drawings illustrated elsewhere) may be incorporated, alone or in any combination, into the examples of devices, features, components, and portions illustrated in FIGS. 684a and 684b .

While a number of user interface features and experiences that can be achieved with the systems described in FIGS. 1A through 652 are provided above, additional user input systems and methods can operate in conjunction with the exemplary systems and methods in various ways. In one exemplary embodiment, a user can dynamically change the level of immersion by operating an input. For example, a user can manipulate an input to gradually increase the level of immersion of an AR experience as the input progresses. Such gradual changes in immersion may include, but are not limited to, switching between multiple immersion levels, seamless animations between immersion levels, and displaying a window from the AR space to the VR space, wherein light from the VR space is projected onto objects within the AR space. Additionally, any number of motions can be detected and cause the initiation of a designated action, including but not limited to, detecting a user swipe to change views, a swipe to change lighting, a horizontal swipe to change the time of day or location (and vice versa) while a vertical swipe changes the immersion level, or a progression of swipes, such as a first swipe to expand windows, a second swipe to remove a wall, and a third swipe to remove multiple walls and roofs from the displayed environment. Other detected input variations can also be used to modify the user's experience with the HMD, including but not limited to, detecting repeated inputs to change immersion levels, detecting a single continuous input to change through multiple immersion levels, and detecting a relatively long press to obtain a navigation menu (geographic location, time of day, immersion level). Similarly, as the AR/VR environment is adjusted or presented, different combinations of removal and immersion may be performed, such as the floor remaining when a wall disappears, some furniture remaining in place when a wall disappears, and/or a detected user's left or right air swipe changing content, while a detected up or down air swipe changing the level of immersion. Additional input motions and generated system outputs may be integrated by the exemplary system.

Additionally, as mentioned above, some examples of HMDs may include a set of power straps that include a speaker system, or may communicate with earbuds or other separate audio devices. In some examples, the audio output style may be changed or otherwise modified to correspond to the level of immersion. In one example, the power straps may be designed to produce spatial audio. When a dial or button (1-328) is actuated (e.g., by pushing, pulling, rotating, etc.), the actuation may cause a specific audio change or setting. For example, if a user is watching a movie on the HMD, the system may provide stereo audio when the movie is displayed frame by frame, and surround sound audio when the movie is displayed in an immersive environment. Additionally, in some examples, the audio level corresponds to a change in the level of immersion (e.g., a window moves down, walls move away, etc.).

In other examples, the influence of the immersion level may be related only to the operating system. For example, the system may use a dedicated control to adjust the immersion level for the operating system, and according to this example, applications may have their own immersion controls (while the operating system is in a first immersion level, the user may enter an application, adjust the immersion in the application, and then return to the operating system at the first immersion level). In one example of this configuration, the digital crown may be the dedicated control, where the immersion level varies based on the rotation direction and/or size of the digital crown. In some examples, major haptics may be positioned at either end of the crown, and minor haptics may be positioned across the dial of the crown to provide desired haptic effects. In some examples, the system may incrementally change the immersion level of the first experience based on user input (e.g., based on the size and/or direction of the user input). Additionally, application controls may vary for different applications and may be displayed in the user interface. Additionally, in some examples, the immersion level may include indicating the amount of pass-through content being replaced. The immersion level may include the amount of de-emphasis of the pass-through content or the amount of display area occupied by the corresponding experience. In some examples, the immersion level may also control or correspond to atmospheric effects and/or audio effects. In some examples, the controls enable a 360-degree experience. The video content presented to the user may be in either a VR or AR environment.

In some examples, a user may exit a first application and enter a second application, each with a different immersion level. In one example, when the user toggles between applications, any adjustments to the immersion level in the first application will not affect the second application or the system as a whole. If the user returns to the first application (or the second application) after exiting the operating system, the system will revert to the immersion level previously set for the application (e.g., regardless of any changes to the immersion level in the operating system). Similarly, the system may remember the user's immersion level when toggling between AR/VR modes. For example, while displaying a first experience at a first immersion level, the system may detect an input to adjust the immersion level, increase it to a second immersion level selected based on the user input, and detect a request to decrease it to a lower immersion level. Upon resuming the experience, the user may resume at the second immersion level.

Additionally, the system includes various immersion levels and passthrough. In one example, a lower immersion level is essentially a passthrough. In one example, the immersion level can be adjusted by rotating the digital crown (e.g., based on the direction and/or size of rotation). In some examples, a request to decrease to a lower immersion level can be a press of the digital crown (e.g., in a direction perpendicular to the direction of rotation). Similarly, in some examples, rotating the crown can resume the experience from a second immersion level, or can resume the experience from a lower immersion level (e.g., not from the second immersion level) with an incrementally increasing immersion level. In addition to rotating the crown, any number of gestures can be used to trigger the system to resume the experience. Similarly, a press and hold exceeding a threshold time can cause the system to initiate a passthrough setting, and releasing the press and hold can cause the system to exit passthrough mode.

In some examples, when displaying a simulated environment, the system may use a first transition if the physical environment satisfies first criteria, and a second transition if the physical environment satisfies second criteria. In such examples, the first criteria may be that a portion of the physical environment in front of the user is further away from the user's viewpoint than a threshold distance. The second criteria may be that a portion of the physical environment in front of the user is less than a threshold distance from the user's viewpoint. In some embodiments, the environment may replace at least a portion of the view of the physical environment, and the transition may be gradual based on user input, such as a rotation of a crown. In some examples, the start and end states may be the same, but the intermediate states may be different. In some examples, the first transition may take into account depth information for each portion of the environment, and the second transition may not take into account depth information for each portion of the environment. The first transition may be a cross dissolve that starts with the part of the simulated environment that is furthest from the user's viewpoint, and the second transition may be a transition that progressively encloses parts of the physical environment based on their distance from the user's viewpoint. In these examples, parts of a room (e.g., architecture or furniture) that are "in front" of the part of the physical environment taken over by the simulated environment may be visible in front of the simulated environment (e.g., obscuring parts of the simulated environment), and parts of a room (e.g., architecture or furniture) that are "behind" the part of the physical environment taken over by the simulated environment may be hidden by the simulated environment (e.g., obscured by parts of the simulated environment). In some examples, the environment may include light sources that illuminate portions of the physical environment, the environment may consider the geometry of the room, the system may consider the architecture of the room (position of walls/windows/doors, etc.), the environment may include volumetric effects that fill space within the physical environment, lighting effects, and/or particle effects.

In some examples, the system includes immersion adjustment of spatial effects (environments/atmospheres). According to such examples, when initiating a spatial effect, the spatial effect may be in an intermediate immersive state, detect an input, and if the input is a first input, increase the immersion of the spatial effect, and if the input is a second input, decrease the immersion of the spatial effect. In some examples, the spatial effect may be an environment that replaces at least a portion of the view of the physical space. In some examples, the system may detect whether the user is looking sideways, and in response to the detected motion, fade the audio components of the environment. The user may also, in some examples, select a visual range for a maximum immersion level (e.g., 180 degrees of immersion to 360 degrees of immersion as a maximum immersion level). Alternatively, the application may specify a visual range for a maximum immersion level (e.g., 180 degrees of immersion to 360 degrees of immersion as a maximum immersion level).

In some examples, the spatial effect is an atmosphere that modifies at least a portion of the view of the physical space (e.g., with lighting or particle effects). In some examples, the system can detect when the user looks to the side to fade the atmosphere effect. In some examples, there are higher levels of immersion for environments than atmospheres. Additionally, displaying the atmosphere may include replacing something outside the room (e.g., an image outside a window, a ceiling), increasing the amount of light within the room, and/or decreasing the amount of light within the room.

Any number of visual indicators, including but not limited to graphic indicators, may be used to convey immersion levels. For example, primary indicators may indicate primary immersion levels, and secondary indicators may indicate secondary immersion levels. In some examples, a primary immersion level may be audio-only, a secondary immersion level may include audio and some visuals, and a secondary immersion level may include audio and extended visuals.

In some examples, a threshold distance is established by the system such that if the user moves more than the threshold distance while displaying the environment, the system can stop displaying the environment. In these examples, the environment gradually fades out as the user approaches the threshold distance. In some examples, if the user moves more than the threshold distance while displaying the environment, the system can stop displaying the environment and/or maintain the display of the atmosphere.

In one example, the system can detect the user's motion and adjust the user interface accordingly. For example, when the user looks to the side or behind, the system can add duck audio to the environment. In response to the detected movement, the system can reduce spatial audio, reduce noise cancellation, and/or reduce the complexity of the audio (e.g., the number of tracks). Similarly, when the user looks to the side or behind, the system can fade out some of the visuals in the environment. For example, the system can cut out feather cuts around the user's feet.

In some examples, the system may include environmental breakthroughs that reveal portions of the physical environment during use. In one example, the environment appears to approach the user as the user increases their immersion. Furthermore, in some examples, the environment rotates based on body movement rather than head movement. For example, the virtual environment may be viewed from a specific area, and when the user shifts their position toward the area's boundary, the system may reveal portions of the physical environment to the user. Alternatively, the system may decrease the level of immersion in the environment when revealing portions of the physical environment; may reveal portions of the physical environment regardless of the presence or absence of obstacles; and/or may stop displaying portions of the physical environment as the user moves away from the boundary. In some examples, the amount of physical environment revealed may be based on the distance from the boundary, the speed of movement toward the boundary, and/or the user's acceleration. In some examples, if the user continues to move toward the boundary, the system may stop displaying the virtual environment. In some instances, the physical environment is not displayed, such as when the user is simply looking around, or when the user moves toward the boundary but is not within a threshold distance of the boundary. In some instances, the system uses spatial transitions to reveal the physical space. In some instances, breakthroughs do not apply to atmospheres. Similarly, if the user leaves the virtual environment while the application is in the virtual environment, the system may stop displaying the application. However, if the user leaves the virtual environment while the application is outside the virtual environment, the system may continue to display the application on the system. Alternatively, if the user leaves the virtual environment while the application is in the virtual environment, the system may reduce the size of the application and move it into the physical space.

Additionally, the system may, in some instances, set the time and date for the system to be used with different applications. In one example, when a user requests to display an environment, the system may select a time of day for the environment based on the system settings (e.g., if the time of day has a first setting, the environment is displayed at the first time of day, and if the time of day has a second setting, the environment is displayed at the second time of day). In some instances, the user may manually or automatically select the time of day by the device. In some instances, the selection may be based on the current time of day, or alternatively, the selection may be based on the lighting level in the room. In some instances, the system may provide the user with access to a control center, including inputs for setting the time of day, using any number of system controls. In such instances, the control center may fade from the display after the time of day is set. Additionally, in one embodiment, when displaying the environment picker user interface, the system may update the displayed icons to represent the current time of day (e.g., daytime or nighttime); display different simulated times of day for different nighttime environments (e.g., dusk, midnight, or dawn); and display different simulated times of day for different daytime environments (e.g., morning, afternoon, or early evening). In one embodiment, the system may include a night mode that dims the passthrough for portions of the user's field of view that are displaying the passthrough content. In one embodiment, if ambient is currently selected, the system may disable the time of day picker. Similarly, the time of day setting may be ignored for some applications/experiences (e.g., mood and other contemplative experiences). In some instances, changing the time of day setting may affect UIs outside the app/experience. Additional variations may also include, but are not limited to, setting different degrees of pass-through dimming for different times of day (e.g., more dimming at night, less dimming during the day); changing the immersion of the environment with physical controls or control center settings; allowing access to settings for the environment even when the environment is hidden (e.g., at 0% immersion); and/or displaying environment volume controls.

In at least one example, when engaging in a communication session with users in different environments while in a simulated environment, the devices described herein can maintain the simulated environment. A first user can view a second user's representation in the first user's environment, and a second user can view the first user's representation in the second user's environment. In one example, environments can be shared between users when predetermined criteria are met. In such an example, environments can automatically switch when one user switches, the switch can occur when a user accepts a prompt to switch environments, the switch can occur after the environment has been downloaded after the user accepts the prompt to switch environments, and/or the switch can occur after a new environment has been fully downloaded.

In one example, the current environment can be shared from the information panel. The HMD's system/user interface can prompt the user to share the environment with other users when switching while the user is in a communication session. The environment selector can indicate which environments are currently shared with the user. The environment selector can indicate which environments have been downloaded. The user interface can present options to switch for all users or just for themselves. Switching environments can be based on a user request to switch the system environment even when the communication session ends, and switching environments based on a prompt to share another user's environment may not switch the system environment. In one example, if the user switches environments while not in a communication session, the user may not be prompted to share with others.

In one example, the user interface may prompt a user to join another user's environment, with the other user having the option to decline or accept. In one example, the event may be based on a user switching environments. In one example, the event may be based on a user starting to share content. In one example, if a user declines to switch environments, the user may leave the sharing session. In one example, when content sharing sessions end, the user interface may revert to the original environment. In one example, when users are in a shared environment, they may have shared spatial facts. In one example, users may be viewing different parts of the shared environment. In one example, even if all users have selected the same environment, there is no spatial facts if the users are only in the shared environment and if they are not in the shared environment.

In one example, when switching to a shared environment, the current immersion level may be maintained. In one example, when switching to a shared environment, if the immersion level is below a threshold, the current immersion level may not be maintained. In one example, different users may set different immersion levels. In one example, different users may set different volume levels. In one example, different users may set different immersion levels while not in full-screen viewing mode, but when content is switched to full-screen viewing mode, all users may have their immersion set to at least a threshold level (e.g., the same level or a "high" level). In one example, if users are sharing an environment, the time of day is synchronized, and if users are not sharing an environment, the time of day is not synchronized. In one example, any user may change the time of day. In one example, other users may receive notification of the change in the time of day.

In one example, while participating in a communication session and the environment changes, and if a first set of conditions are met, the user interface can change the environment for multiple users in the communication session. If the first set of conditions is not met, the environments for different users remain in different states. The first set of conditions can include a user confirmation that the environment should be shared. In one example, when a user displays the environment, the user is displayed in a predefined orientation. In one example, when a user participates in a communication session with a shared environment, the user can be positioned in a different orientation. In one example, the different orientations can be based on the positions of other participants within the environment. The different orientations can be based on the number of other participants in the environment. In one example, when the activity of the communication session changes, the participants can be shifted based on the selected activity. In one example, the participants can be shifted to face the same direction with respect to a shared visual experience (e.g., a video). In one example, participants may be shifted to face different directions (e.g., toward each other) for an engaging experience (e.g., a game).

In at least one example, the immersive state can be maintained for different participants, and a notification can be displayed when the shared environment changes. The notification can indicate who changed the environment. In one example, other users may need to download the environment before displaying it. In one example, multiple participants (e.g., all participants) can be positioned at the center of the environment and, in some examples, face different directions. In one example, one user can view such other users from different locations than where they view themselves. In one example, the time of day for the environment can be synchronized between different users. In one example, when one user changes the time of day, the time of day can change for multiple or all users.

In one example, a user may select a new environment for a communication session from the session UI (e.g., using audio/video start/stop options, call end options, and/or user status information). In one example, a user may select a new environment from the home UI (e.g., having multiple environment options, an option to display available apps, and/or an option to display people available for the communication session). The UI may highlight around the currently selected environment. Different color highlights may be used for shared environments versus non-shared environments. In one example, the home UI may be displayed over representations of one or more other participants. In one example, new participants may be added to the conversation.

In one example, while the user is in a first field of view looking at the environment from a first angle, the system can detect a predetermined event based on a determination that the user's perspective satisfies each of the criteria, change the field of view of the environment based on a determination that the user's perspective does not satisfy each of the criteria, and maintain the field of view of the environment. In one example, the angle of the environment can determine the location of a portal into the environment. In one example, the predetermined event can be dragging a window. In one example, the predetermined event can be detecting a change in the user's orientation. In one example, the change in orientation can be a change in the orientation of the user's body. In one example, the change in orientation can be a change in the orientation of the user's head or a change in the orientation of a part of the user relative to the horizon of the environment or relative to the horizon of the physical world. In one example, the field of view does not shift for different types of changes in the user's perspective (e.g., rotating left/right as opposed to tilting relative to the horizon). In one example, the predetermined event includes detecting a request to change the position of the content. In another example, the predetermined event includes detecting a request to re-center the content. These events may be triggered by pressing a hardware button or activating a software button. The software button may be displayed in response to a determination that the user's perspective has changed.

In one example, the horizon of the environment remains consistent as the viewing angle of the environment changes. In one example, the immersiveness of the environment remains consistent as the viewing angle of the environment changes. In one example, the environment can be viewed through a portal in the real world, and the location of the portal can shift. In one example, when the environment shifts, content that was at a first distance within the environment shifts in distance relative to the user, for example, shifts closer, or the content is docked at a predefined location and becomes a window that can be repositioned at a user-defined location. In one example, if a first type of content is displayed with the environment, the first type of content can be shifted to maintain the same or similar angle relative to the user's viewpoint, and if a second type of content is displayed with the environment (e.g., through user-positionable windows), the content can remain world-locked.

In one example, after the user's perspective shifts again, another predetermined event may be detected, and in response, the environment's field of view may shift. In one example, if the user's perspective shifts backward, the environment's field of view may shift backward. If the user's perspective shifts to a different perspective, the environment's field of view may shift to a different field of view. If a docked window was not docked when the field of view was first shifted, the window may be moved back to its docked position.

In one example, a mechanical or software button on the HMD can be pressed once to navigate to the Home UI and then hide the Home UI. In one example, while displaying an application, the button can be pressed to replace at least a portion of the application with the Home UI. When pressed again, the Home UI can be hidden. In one example, the Home UI can include representations of people, environments, and apps. Hiding the Home UI can include replacing the Home UI with a passthrough display. In one example, hiding the Home UI can include stopping displaying the virtual environment in which the Home UI is displayed. The Home UI can be used to switch which virtual environment is displayed. In one example, if the application is a media application with media playback, the UI can display a mini player including a video Picture-in-Picture (PiP), an audio player including a representation of video or audio content, and playback controls. In one example, the mini player can persist after the Home UI is hidden.

In one example, when the Home UI is displayed, the user can scroll through the Home UI and navigate through sections of the UI (e.g., Environments, People, and/or Apps). In one example, the current section can be retained when the user leaves and returns to the Home UI. In one example, the current section can be retained if the user returns to the Home UI within a time threshold, and the Home UI can be reset to a predetermined section (e.g., the first page of applications) if the user returns to the Home UI after a time threshold (e.g., the next day, the next session, or 1 hour). In one example, a quick look object (e.g., an object dragged from an application) can be retained when the application is dismissed. In one example, a quick look object is an object that was dragged from an application before it was replaced by the Home UI. In one example, the quick look objects are hidden when the Home UI is hidden (e.g., upon pressing a second button). In one example, a second application may be launched from the home UI while a quick look object is displayed. In one example, a quick look object may be dragged from the UI to the second application by the user, and actions may be performed in the second application based on the quick look object (e.g., added to a message or document).

In one example, the user can press the Home button again to redisplay the Home UI. In one example, the button is a hardware button. In one example, the button is a solid-state button. In one example, the system UI can be treated as the same as the application (e.g., pressing the button while it is displayed can cause the system UI to be replaced with the Home UI). In one example, quickly double-tapping the button can be a command to obtain an application management UI (e.g., a force quit menu or a multitasking UI).

In one example, the system may detect a press input on a button. If the device is displaying an immersive experience of an application, the UI may display the application in a non-immersive mode. If the device is displaying a non-immersive experience, the UI may replace the non-immersive experience with the home UI. In one example, the button may be pressed again during the non-immersive experience to stop displaying the home UI. In one example, the non-immersive experience may be displayed in a virtual environment that continues to be displayed after the home button is pressed. In one example, the virtual environment continues to be displayed while the home UI is displayed. In one example, the home UI may be used to switch which virtual environment is displayed.

In one example, a rotatable input mechanism of an HMD can be used to perform a UI immersion level change action when a first input type is detected and a different action when a second input type is detected. For example, the change in immersion can be based on a rotation of the mechanism, a direction of rotation, an amount of rotation, etc. In one example, the first input type is a rotation and the second input type is a press of the mechanism. In one example, the number of presses can change which action is performed. In one example, the duration of the press can change which action is performed. In one example, the second action can be a home display action. In one or more other examples, the second action can include an application dismiss action, a virtual object dismiss action, an application manager UI display action, an accessibility mode action, re-entering virtual UI elements in an AR/VR environment, and/or an action that can be used with another input device to perform a third action. In one or more other examples, the third action may depend on the duration and/or pattern of the inputs and may include taking a screenshot, powering off the device, restarting the device, and/or entering a hardware reset mode.

As described above, one aspect of the present technology involves the collection and use of information, such as information from input/output devices. The present disclosure contemplates that, in some instances, data may be collected that includes personal information that can be used to uniquely identify, contact, or locate a particular individual. Such personal information may include demographic data, location-based data, phone numbers, email addresses, Twitter IDs, home addresses, data or records regarding a user's health or fitness level (e.g., vital sign measurements, medication information, exercise information), date of birth, username, password, biometric information, or any other identifying or personal information.

This disclosure recognizes that the use of such personal information in the present technology can be used to benefit users. For example, personal information data can be used to deliver targeted content of greater interest to the user. Thus, the use of such personal information data allows users to have more control over the content delivered. Furthermore, other uses of personal information data that benefit users are also contemplated by this disclosure. For example, health and fitness data can be used to provide insight into a user's general well-being, or can be used as positive feedback to individuals using the technology to pursue wellness goals.

This disclosure contemplates that entities responsible for collecting, analyzing, disclosing, transmitting, storing, or otherwise using such personal data will adhere to well-established privacy policies and/or privacy practices. In particular, such entities should implement and consistently use privacy policies and practices that are generally recognized as meeting or exceeding industry or administrative requirements for keeping personal data private and secure. Such policies should be readily accessible to users and updated as the collection and/or use of data evolves. Personal information from users should be collected for legitimate and reasonable purposes of the entity and should not be shared or sold outside of these legitimate purposes. Additionally, such collection/sharing should occur only after receiving informed consent from users. Additionally, such entities should consider taking any necessary steps to protect and secure access to such personal data and to ensure that others with access to such personal data adhere to their privacy policies and procedures. Furthermore, these entities may be subject to third-party assessments to demonstrate their adherence to widely recognized privacy policies and practices. Additionally, policies and practices should be tailored to the specific types of personal data collected and/or accessed, and should be aligned with applicable laws and standards, including jurisdiction-specific considerations. For example, in the United States, the collection of or access to certain health data may be governed by federal and/or state law, such as the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA), while health data in other countries may be subject to and processed under different regulations and policies. Therefore, different privacy practices should be maintained for different types of personal data in each country.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, the present disclosure also contemplates embodiments in which users can selectively block the use of, or access to, personal information data. Specifically, the present disclosure contemplates that hardware and/or software components may be provided to prevent or block access to such personal information data. For example, the present technology may be configured to allow users to "agree" or "disagree" to participate in the collection of personal information data during registration for services or at any time thereafter. In another example, users may choose not to provide certain types of user data. In yet another example, users may choose to limit the length of time that user-specific data is retained. In addition to providing "agree" and "disagree" options, the present disclosure contemplates providing notifications regarding access or use of personal information. For example, users may be notified upon downloading an application (“app”) that will access their personal information, and then reminded again immediately before the app accesses their personal information.

Furthermore, it is the intent of this disclosure that personal data should be managed and processed in a manner that minimizes the risk of unintended or unauthorized access or use. This risk can be minimized by limiting data collection and deleting data when it is no longer needed. Additionally, and where applicable, data de-identification can be used to protect user privacy, including in certain health-related applications. Where appropriate, de-identification can be facilitated by removing specific identifiers (e.g., date of birth), controlling the amount or specificity of stored data (e.g., collecting location data at the city level rather than the address level), controlling how data is stored (e.g., aggregating data across users), and/or other methods.

Accordingly, while the present disclosure broadly covers the use of information that may include personal information data to implement one or more of the various disclosed embodiments, the present disclosure also contemplates that various embodiments may also be implemented without the need for access to personal information data. That is, various embodiments of the present technology are not rendered inoperable due to the lack of all or part of such personal information data.

Physical Environment: The physical environment refers to the physical world that people can perceive and/or interact with without the aid of electronic systems. Physical environments, such as a physical park, include physical objects, such as physical trees, physical buildings, and physical people. People can directly perceive and/or interact with the physical environment through, for example, sight, touch, hearing, taste, and smell.

Computer-Generated Reality: In contrast, a computer-generated reality (CGR) environment refers to a fully or partially simulated environment that people perceive and/or interact with through electronic systems. In a CGR, a person's physical movements, or a subset of their representations, are tracked, and in response, one or more characteristics of one or more virtual objects simulated in the CGR environment are adjusted in a manner consistent with at least one physical law. For example, a CGR system may detect a person's head rotation and, in response, adjust the graphical content and acoustic field presented to the person in a manner similar to how such views and sounds change in the physical environment. In some circumstances (e.g., for accessibility reasons), adjustments to the characteristics of virtual object(s) in a CGR environment may be made in response to representations of physical movements (e.g., voice commands). A person may perceive and/or interact with a CGR object using any of their senses, including sight, hearing, touch, taste, and smell. For example, a person may perceive and/or interact with audio objects that create a 3D or spatial audio environment that provides a perceptual point of view of audio sources in 3D space. In another example, audio objects may enable audio transparency, which optionally integrates ambient sounds from the physical environment with or without computer-generated audio. In some CGR environments, a person may perceive and/or interact with only audio objects. Examples of CGR include virtual reality and mixed reality.

Virtual Reality: A virtual reality (VR) environment refers to a simulated environment designed entirely based on computer-generated sensory inputs for one or more of the senses. The VR environment includes a plurality of virtual objects that a person can perceive and/or interact with. For example, computer-generated representations of trees, buildings, and avatars representing people are examples of virtual objects. A person can perceive and/or interact with virtual objects in a VR environment through the simulation of the person's presence in the computer-generated environment and/or through the simulation of a subset of the person's physical movements in the computer-generated environment.

Mixed Reality: In contrast to VR environments, which are designed to be based solely on computer-generated sensory inputs, a mixed reality (MR) environment refers to a simulated environment designed to incorporate sensory inputs, or representations thereof, from the physical environment in addition to computer-generated sensory inputs (e.g., virtual objects). Within the virtuality continuum, a mixed reality environment lies somewhere between, but does not encompass, a fully physical environment on one side and a fully virtual reality environment on the other. In some MR environments, computer-generated sensory inputs may respond to changes in sensory inputs from the physical environment. Additionally, some electronic systems for presenting an MR environment may track position and/or orientation relative to the physical environment, allowing virtual objects to interact with real objects (i.e., physical objects or representations of physical objects in the physical environment). For example, a system may account for movements so that a virtual tree appears stationary relative to the physical ground. Examples of mixed realities include augmented reality and augmented virtuality.

Augmented Reality: An augmented reality (AR) environment refers to a simulated environment in which one or more virtual objects are superimposed on a physical environment, or a representation thereof. For example, an electronic system for presenting an AR environment may have a transparent or translucent display through which a person can directly view the physical environment. The system may be configured to present virtual objects on the transparent or translucent display, such that a person can perceive the virtual objects superimposed on the physical environment using the system. Alternatively, the system may have an opaque display and one or more imaging sensors that capture images or video of the physical environment, which are representations of the physical environment. The system composites the images or video with virtual objects and presents the composite on the opaque display. The person uses the system to indirectly view the physical environment through the images or video of the physical environment and perceive the virtual objects superimposed on the physical environment. As used herein, the video of the physical environment shown on the opaque display is referred to as “pass-through video,” meaning that the system captures images of the physical environment using one or more imaging sensors and uses these images when presenting the AR environment on the opaque display. Additionally, the system may alternatively have a projection system that projects virtual objects onto the physical environment, for example, as holograms or on a physical surface, so that a person can perceive the virtual objects superimposed on the physical environment using the system. An augmented reality environment also refers to a simulated environment in which the representation of the physical environment is transformed by computer-generated sensory information. For example, when providing pass-through video, the system may transform one or more sensor images to impose a different perspective (e.g., a point of view) than the perspective captured by the imaging sensors. As another example, the representation of the physical environment may be transformed by graphically modifying portions of it (e.g., enlarging), such that the modified portion may be a representation of the originally captured images, but not a photorealistic version. As a further example, the representation of the physical environment may be transformed by graphically removing or blurring portions thereof.

Augmented Virtuality: An augmented virtual (AV) environment refers to a simulated environment that integrates one or more sensory inputs from the physical environment into a virtual or computer-generated environment. The sensory inputs may be representations of one or more features of the physical environment. For example, an AV park may have virtual trees and buildings, while people's faces may be realistically recreated from images of physical people. As another example, a virtual object may adopt the shape or color of a physical item imaged by one or more imaging sensors. As a further example, a virtual object may adopt shadows that correspond to the position of the sun in the physical environment.

Hardware: There are many different types of electronic systems that enable humans to sense and/or interact with various CGR environments. Examples include head-mounted systems, projection-based systems, head-up displays (HUDs), vehicle windshields with integrated display capabilities, windows with integrated display capabilities, displays formed as lenses designed to be placed on the human eye (e.g., similar to contact lenses), headphones/earphones, speaker arrays, input systems (e.g., wearable or handheld controllers with or without haptic feedback), smartphones, tablets, and desktop/laptop computers. A head-mounted system may have one or more speaker(s) and an integrated opaque display. Alternatively, a head-mounted system may be configured to accommodate an external opaque display (e.g., a smartphone). A head-mounted system may incorporate one or more imaging sensors for capturing images or video of the physical environment, and/or one or more microphones for capturing audio of the physical environment. Rather than an opaque display, a head-mounted system may have a transparent or translucent display. A transparent or translucent display may have a medium through which light representing images is directed toward the human eye. The display may utilize digital light projection, OLEDs, LEDs, μLEDs, silicon liquid crystal displays, laser scanning light sources, or any combination of these technologies. The medium may be an optical waveguide, a holographic medium, an optical combiner, an optical reflector, or any combination thereof. In one embodiment, the transparent or translucent display may be configured to be selectively opaque. Projection-based systems may employ retinal projection technology, which projects graphical images onto a human retina. Projection systems may also be configured to project virtual objects into the physical environment, for example, as holograms or on physical surfaces.

The foregoing is merely exemplary, and various modifications may be made to the described embodiments. The above-described embodiments may be implemented individually or in any combination. Each of the embodiments described in the detailed description above may include any of the features, options, and possibilities presented in this disclosure, including those under other independent embodiments, and may also include any combination of any of the features, options, and possibilities presented in this disclosure and the drawings. Additional examples consistent with the teachings described herein are presented in the numbered items below:

Item 1: A display assembly comprising: a curved display having pixels; a front cover; a curved lenticular lens array disposed between the display and the front cover; and a blinker film disposed between the curved lenticular lens array and the front cover, wherein the blinker film and the curved lenticular lens array define an air gap between the blinker film and the curved lenticular lens array.

Item 2: A display assembly according to Item 1, wherein the curved display is configured to project light from the pixels through the front cover.

Item 3: The display assembly of item 1, further comprising a shroud disposed between the curved lenticular lens array and the front cover; wherein the blinker film is adhered to an inner surface of the shroud, the inner surface facing the curved display.

Item 4: A display assembly according to Item 3, further comprising a haze film that adheres the blinker film to the shroud, wherein the haze film comprises an adhesive.

Item 5: A display assembly according to item 3, wherein the shroud includes an opaque portion and a transparent portion, and the curved display is configured to project light through the transparent portion.

Item 6: A display assembly according to Item 1, wherein the curved display and the curved lenticular lens array are curved in a first direction.

Item 7: A display assembly according to Item 6, wherein the front cover is curved in a first direction and in a second direction perpendicular to the first direction.

Item 8: A display assembly according to Item 1, further comprising a shroud disposed between the curved display and the front cover.

Item 9: A head-mountable device comprising: a display; a front cover; a shroud disposed between the front cover and the display, the shroud including an opaque portion and a transparent portion aligned with the display; a bracket coupling the display to the shroud; and a blinker film disposed between the display and the shroud, the blinker film being positioned against the shroud.

Item 10: A head-mountable device according to item 9, further comprising a lenticular lens array disposed between the display and the shroud.

Item 11: A head-mountable device according to item 10, wherein the lenticular lens array comprises a plurality of lenticular lenses; a first angle of a first lenticular lens of the plurality of lenticular lenses with respect to the display is different from a second angle of a second lenticular lens of the plurality of lenticular lenses with respect to the display, and the first lenticular lens is adjacent to the second lenticular lens.

Item 12: A head-mountable device according to item 10, wherein the bracket comprises a thermally conductive material.

Item 13: A head-mountable device according to Item 12, wherein the bracket comprises magnesium.

Item 14: A head-mountable device according to Item 12, further comprising a graphite layer disposed on the bracket.

Item 15: A head-mountable device according to item 14, wherein the bracket is disposed between the graphite layer and the display.

Item 16: A display assembly for a wearable electronic device, comprising: a transparent cover defining an outer surface of the device; a display screen; a shroud disposed between the display screen and the transparent cover; and a bracket coupling the display screen to the shroud; wherein the shroud defines an opaque portion that obscures a view of the bracket through the transparent cover; and a transparent portion aligned with the display screen, wherein the display screen is configured to project light through the transparent portion and the transparent cover.

Item 17: A display assembly according to Item 16, wherein the shroud includes an opaque film disposed on a surface of the shroud, the opaque film defining an opaque portion.

Item 18: A display assembly according to Item 16, further comprising a blinker film disposed on the shroud between the shroud and the display.

Item 19: A display assembly according to Item 18, wherein the blinker film is secured to the shroud via an adhesive.

Item 20: A display assembly according to Item 19, further comprising a haze film disposed between the blinker film and the shroud, wherein the haze film comprises an adhesive.

Item 21: A head-mountable display, comprising: a chassis assembly comprising an outer frame comprising a first material and defining an interior volume; an intermediate frame disposed within the interior volume and coupled to the outer frame, the intermediate frame comprising a second material different from the first material and defining a first opening and a second opening; and an inner frame coupled to the intermediate frame between the first opening and the second opening, the inner frame comprising a third material different from the first material and the second material; and a display assembly coupled to the intermediate frame.

Item 22: A head-mountable display according to item 21, wherein the first material comprises aluminum.

Item 23: A head-mountable display according to Item 22, wherein the second material comprises a magnesium alloy.

Item 24: A head-mountable display according to Item 23, wherein the third material comprises carbon fiber.

Item 25: A head-mountable display according to Item 24, wherein the inner frame is bonded to the middle frame.

Item 26: A head-mountable display according to Item 21, wherein the display assembly includes a display screen having a corresponding position with the first opening.

Item 27: A head-mountable display according to Item 26, wherein the display assembly is a first display assembly; the display screen is a first display screen; and the head-mountable display further comprises a second display assembly coupled to the middle frame, the second display assembly comprising a second display screen having a corresponding position with the second opening.

Item 28: A head-mountable display according to Item 27, further comprising a mounting bracket coupled to the intermediate frame, wherein the mounting bracket comprises a first cantilevered guide rod and a second cantilevered guide rod; wherein the first display assembly is slidably engaged with the first guide rod; and wherein the second display assembly is slidably engaged with the second guide rod.

Item 29: A head-mountable display, comprising: a chassis comprising an outer frame comprising a first material, a middle frame coupled to the outer frame and comprising a second material stronger than the first material, and an inner frame coupled to the middle frame and comprising a third material more rigid than the first material and the second material; and a display coupled to the chassis.

Item 30: A head-mountable display according to Item 29, wherein the first material comprises aluminum; the second material comprises a magnesium alloy; and the third material comprises carbon fiber.

Item 31: A head-mountable display according to item 29, wherein the intermediate frame is connected to the outer frame at a plurality of discrete connection points.

Item 32: A head-mountable display according to item 31, further comprising insulating interfaces, each insulating interface being positioned between the outer frame and the inner frame at a corresponding connection point of the discrete connection points.

Item 33: A head-mountable display according to Item 31, wherein the inner frame is bonded to the middle frame.

Item 34: A head-mountable display according to item 33, wherein the outer frame surrounds a periphery of the middle frame; the middle frame defines a first opening and a second opening; and the inner frame is bonded to the middle frame between the first opening and the second opening.

Item 35: A head-mountable device comprising: an outer frame defining an outer surface and an interior volume of the device; an intermediate frame disposed within the interior volume and coupled to the outer frame, the intermediate frame defining a first opening and a second opening; an inner frame coupled to the intermediate frame between the first opening and the second opening on a first side of the intermediate frame; an optical mounting frame coupled to the intermediate frame between the first opening and the second opening on a second side of the intermediate frame opposite the first side; and an optical assembly coupled to the optical mounting frame.

Item 36: A head-mountable device according to Item 35, wherein the optical assembly comprises a display screen having a corresponding position with the first opening.

Item 37: A head-mountable device according to Item 36, wherein the optical mounting frame comprises a first cantilevered arm extending in a first direction and a second cantilevered arm extending in a second direction opposite to the first direction; and the optical assembly is slidably engaged with the first cantilevered arm.

Item 38: A head-mountable device according to Item 37, wherein the optical assembly is a first optical assembly; and the head-mountable device further comprises a second optical assembly slidably engaged with the second cantilevered arm.

Item 39: A head-mountable device according to Item 35, wherein the middle frame comprises a magnesium alloy; and the inner frame comprises carbon fiber.

Item 40: A head-mountable device according to item 35, further comprising: a first fan disposed within the inner volume and having a first opening and a corresponding position; and a second fan disposed within the inner volume and having a second opening and a corresponding position.

Item 41: A head-mountable display device comprising: a structural frame; a first mounting bracket coupled to a first side of the structural frame and including a cantilever arm; a second mounting bracket coupled to a second side of the structural frame opposite the first side and including a mounting arm; a sensor coupled to the cantilever arm; and a display assembly slidably coupled to the mounting arm.

Item 42: A head-mountable display device further comprising a display assembly adjustment mechanism coupled to the mounting arm, according to Item 41.

Item 43: A head-mountable display device according to Item 42, wherein the display assembly adjustment mechanism includes a guide rod extending from the mounting arm.

Item 44: A head-mountable display device according to Item 43, wherein the display assembly is slidably engaged with the guide rod.

Item 45: A head-mountable display device according to Item 41, wherein the structural frame defines a first opening and a second opening.

Item 46: A head-mountable display device according to Item 45, wherein the first mounting bracket is coupled to the structural frame between the first opening and the second opening.

Item 47: A head-mountable display device according to Item 46, wherein the second mounting bracket is coupled to the structural frame between the first opening and the second opening.

Item 48: A head-mountable display device according to item 41, further comprising an outer frame defining an outer surface and an inner volume, wherein the structural frame is disposed within the inner volume and coupled to the outer frame.

Item 49: A head-mountable display device according to Item 48, wherein the outer frame comprises a first material; and the structural frame comprises a second material having a higher strength than the first material.

Item 50: A wearable electronic device comprising: an outer frame defining an outer surface; an inner frame coupled to the outer frame; a first mounting bracket coupled to a first side of the inner frame and including a first cantilever arm extending in a first direction and a second cantilever arm extending in a second direction opposite the first direction; a second mounting bracket coupled to a second side of the structural frame opposite the first side and including a first mounting arm extending in the first direction and a second mounting arm extending in the second direction; a first sensor coupled to the first cantilever arm; a second sensor coupled to the second cantilever arm; a first display assembly slidably coupled to the first mounting arm; and a second display assembly slidably coupled to the second mounting arm.

Item 51: A wearable electronic device according to item 50, wherein the first sensor comprises a camera.

Item 52: A wearable electronic device according to item 51, wherein the second sensor comprises an infrared sensor.

Item 53: A wearable electronic device according to item 50, wherein the first display assembly comprises a first display; and the second display assembly comprises a second display.

Item 54: A wearable electronic device according to Item 50, wherein the first mounting arm includes a first guide rod slidably coupling the first display assembly to the second mounting bracket; and the second mounting arm includes a second guide rod slidably coupling the second display assembly to the second mounting bracket.

Item 55: A wearable electronic device according to item 50, wherein the first cantilever arm and the second cantilever arm extend downward to accommodate a nose when the wearable electronic device is worn.

Item 56: A wearable electronic display device, comprising: a structural frame; a first mounting bracket coupled to a first side of the structural frame, the first mounting bracket including a middle portion coupled to the first side of the structural frame, the first mounting bracket further including a first cantilever arm extending from the middle portion in a first direction and a second cantilever arm extending from the middle portion in a second direction opposite the first direction; a second mounting bracket coupled to a second side of the structural frame opposite the first side; a first guide rod cantilevered from the second mounting bracket and extending in the first direction; a second guide rod cantilevered from the second mounting bracket and extending in the second direction; a first sensor coupled to the first cantilever arm; a second sensor coupled to the second cantilever arm; a first display assembly slidably engaged with the first guide rod; and a second display assembly slidably engaged with the second guide rod.

Item 57: A wearable electronic display device according to item 56, wherein the first sensor comprises a first camera oriented in a forward direction; the second sensor comprises a second camera oriented in a forward direction; the first display assembly comprises a first display screen oriented in a rearward direction opposite to the forward direction; and the second display assembly comprises a second display screen oriented in a rearward direction.

Item 58: A wearable electronic display device according to Item 57, further comprising a controller electrically coupled to the first camera, the second camera, the first display screen, and the second display screen, wherein the controller is configured to display a first image captured by the first camera on the first display screen; and to display a second image captured by the second camera on the second display screen.

Item 59: A wearable electronic display device according to item 56, wherein the first cantilever arm comprises a distal end opposite the middle portion, the distal end not being attached to the structural frame.

Item 60: A wearable electronic display device according to Item 59, wherein the first guide rod includes a proximal end coupled to the second mounting bracket and a distal end opposite the proximal end, wherein the distal end is not attached to the structural frame.

Item 61: A head-mountable display device, comprising: an outer frame defining a first opening, a second opening, an interior volume between the first opening and the second opening, an intake port between the first opening and the second opening, and an exhaust port between the first opening and the second opening; a front cover assembly disposed within the first opening; an interior frame coupled to the outer frame, the interior frame defining the first opening and the second opening; a curtain assembly covering the second opening and including an elastic layer defining an outer surface and an air impermeable layer defining the interior volume; and a fan assembly, the fan assembly including: a first fan disposed within the interior volume and aligned with the first opening; and a second fan disposed within the interior volume and aligned with the second opening; wherein the first fan and the second fan are configured to draw air into the interior volume through the intake port and to push air outward from the interior volume through the exhaust port.

Item 62: A head-mountable display device according to item 61, wherein the outer frame comprises an upper sidewall defining an exhaust port; and a lower sidewall opposite the upper sidewall and defining an intake port.

Item 63: A head-mountable display device according to item 61, further comprising a printed circuit board disposed within the interior volume.

Item 64: A head-mountable display device according to item 63, wherein the first fan comprises a first housing thermally coupled to the printed circuit board, and the second fan comprises a second housing thermally coupled to the printed circuit board.

Item 65: A head-mountable display device further comprising a display assembly disposed within the interior volume of item 64.

Item 66: A head-mountable display device according to item 65, wherein the fan assembly is disposed between the display assembly and the printed circuit board.

Item 67: A head-mountable display device according to item 65, wherein the display assembly comprises a first display screen and a second display screen.

Item 68: A head-mountable display device according to item 67, wherein the first display screen is aligned with the first opening; and the second display screen is aligned with the second opening.

Item 69: A head-mountable display device according to item 68, wherein the display assembly further comprises a first lens aligned with the first display screen; and a second lens aligned with the second display screen; and the curtain assembly covers a second opening between the outer frame and the first and second lenses.

Item 70: A head-mountable device comprising: a frame defining an interior volume, an intake port, and an exhaust port; a curtain assembly coupled to the frame, the curtain assembly including a first layer defining an outer surface; and a second layer defining the interior volume and being air impermeable; a heat sink disposed within the interior volume; and a fan assembly, the fan assembly comprising: a housing including the heat sink; and an air mover disposed within the housing and configured to draw air into the interior volume through the intake port and to push air out of the interior volume through the exhaust port.

Item 71: A head-mountable device according to item 70, further comprising a printed circuit board having a heat generating component, wherein the housing is thermally coupled to the heat generating component.

Item 72: A head mountable device according to item 71, wherein the heat sink is a first heat sink; the housing is a first housing; the heat generating component is a first heat generating component; the printed circuit board includes a second heat generating component; the head mountable device further includes a second heat sink; and the fan assembly includes a second housing including the second heat sink, the second housing being thermally coupled to the second heat generating component.

Item 73: A head-mountable device according to item 70, wherein the first layer is elastic; and the second layer is inelastic.

Item 74: A head-mountable device according to item 73, wherein the first layer comprises a woven fabric; and the second layer comprises a polymer.

Item 75: A wearable device, comprising: an outer surface of the wearable device, and an outer frame defining an interior volume; an inner frame coupled to the outer frame at discrete points, the inner frame defining a first opening and a second opening; a curtain assembly coupled to the outer frame, the curtain assembly including an air impermeable layer defining the interior volume; a metal heat sink disposed within the interior volume; a printed circuit board disposed within the interior volume; and a fan assembly disposed within the interior volume, the fan assembly comprising: a first metal housing aligned with the first opening and thermally coupled to the printed circuit board; and a second metal housing aligned with the second opening and thermally coupled to the printed circuit board; the first metal housing defining a first major plane; and the second metal housing defining a second major plane that is non-parallel to the first major plane.

Item 76: A wearable device according to item 75, wherein the outer frame comprises a first material; and the inner frame comprises a second material different from the first material, wherein the second material is stronger than the first material.

Item 77: A wearable device according to item 76, wherein the first material comprises a metal; and the second material comprises a magnesium alloy.

Item 78: A wearable device according to item 76, wherein the outer frame defines an intake port and an exhaust port.

Item 79: A wearable device according to item 78, wherein the outer frame defines an upper sidewall defining an exhaust port, and a lower sidewall opposite the upper sidewall and defining an intake port.

Item 80: A wearable device according to Item 79, wherein the fan assembly further comprises a first air mover disposed within the first metal housing and configured to draw air into the internal volume through the intake port and to push air outward from the internal volume through the exhaust port; and a second air mover disposed within the second metal housing and configured to draw air into the internal volume through the intake port and to push air outward from the internal volume through the exhaust port.

Item 81: An electronic cooling assembly comprising: a heat-generating electronic component; and a housing defining an interior volume and thermally coupled to the heat-generating electronic component; and a fan including a plurality of blades disposed within the interior volume.

Item 82: An electronic assembly according to Item 81, wherein the fan housing is directly thermally coupled to the heat generating component via thermal paste disposed between the heat generating component and the housing.

Item 83: An electronic assembly according to item 82, further comprising a printed circuit board (PCB), wherein the heating component is coupled to the PCB.

Item 84: An electronic assembly according to item 83, further comprising a barrier coupled to the PCB and at least partially surrounding the heat generating component, wherein the heat generating component, the PCB, the barrier, and the housing define a containment volume; and the barrier is configured to contain thermal paste within the containment volume.

Item 85: An electronic assembly according to item 83, wherein the housing defines a major plane of the fan that is arranged parallel to the PCB.

Item 86: An electronic assembly according to Item 1, wherein the housing comprises: a first housing shell thermally coupled to the heat generating component; and a second housing shell coupled to the first housing shell and defining a fan inlet.

Item 87: An electronic assembly according to Item 6, wherein the first housing shell and the second housing shell define a fan outlet.

Item 88: An electronic assembly according to item 81, wherein the heat generating component comprises a processor.

Item 89: An electronic device comprising: an outer frame defining an interior volume, an air inlet port, and an air exhaust port; a printed circuit board (PCB) disposed within the interior volume; a processor coupled to the PCB; and a fan configured to draw air into the interior volume through the inlet port and to force air from the interior volume to the exterior through the exhaust port, the fan including a metal housing thermally coupled to the processor.

Item 90: In item 89, the metal housing defines a fan inlet and a fan outlet; and the air inlet port, the fan inlet, the fan outlet, and the air exhaust port define an air flow path with the air inlet port upstream from the fan inlet, with the fan inlet upstream from the fan outlet, and with the fan outlet upstream from the air exhaust port.

Item 91: An electronic device according to item 90, wherein the processor is disposed outside the airflow path.

Item 92: An electronic device according to item 90, wherein the metal housing is disposed between the processor and the airflow path.

Item 93: An electronic device according to item 89, wherein the metal housing is thermally coupled to the processor via thermal paste disposed between the processor and the metal housing.

Item 94: An electronic device according to item 89, wherein the metal housing defines a planar portion arranged parallel to the PCB, and the processor is thermally coupled to the planar portion.

Item 95: An electronic display device comprising: an outer frame defining an interior volume; an inner frame coupled to the outer frame at discrete touch points and defining an opening; a display screen disposed within the interior volume and aligned with the opening; a processor electrically coupled to the display screen; and a fan disposed between the display screen and the processor, the fan including a housing aligned with the opening and thermally coupled to the processor.

Item 96: An electronic display device according to item 95, wherein the housing comprises: a first housing shell comprising metal and thermally coupled to the processor; and a second housing shell coupled to the first housing shell and defining a fan inlet and positioned between the display screen and the first housing shell.

Item 97: An electronic display device according to item 96, wherein the first housing shell and the second housing shell define a fan outlet; and the fan outlet is configured to direct air away from the processor.

Item 98: An electronic display device according to item 97, wherein the outer frame further defines an exhaust port, and the outlet is configured to direct air toward the exhaust port.

Item 99: An electronic display device according to item 95, wherein the housing is coupled to the inner frame at the interface.

Item 100: An electronic display device according to Item 99, wherein the interface comprises an insulator disposed between the housing and the inner frame.

Item 101: An electronic assembly comprising: a printed circuit board (PCB); an electronic component coupled to the PCB; an electrically conductive fence coupled to the PCB and surrounding a periphery of the electronic component; a housing coupled to the fence and positioned over the electronic component; and a fan assembly including a plurality of fan blades configured to rotate within the housing.

Item 102: An electronic assembly according to Item 101, further comprising an electromagnetic interference (EMI) foam disposed between the fence and the housing.

Item 103: An electronic assembly according to Item 102, wherein the housing is coupled to the fence via EMI foam.

Item 104: An electronic assembly according to Item 101, wherein the housing comprises a first housing shell coupled to the fence; and a second housing shell; and a plurality of fan blades are disposed between the first housing shell and the second housing shell.

Item 105: An electronic assembly according to Item 104, wherein the first housing shell defines a plane parallel to the PCB.

Item 106: An electronic assembly according to item 104, wherein the first housing shell includes an etched portion; and the fence is coupled to the etched portion.

Item 107: An electronic assembly according to item 101, further comprising a heating component coupled to the PCB.

Item 108: An electronic assembly according to item 107, wherein the housing is directly thermally coupled to the heat generating component.

Item 109: An electromagnetic interference (EMI) shielding assembly comprising: a printed circuit board (PCB); a fan housing arranged parallel to the PCB; and an electrically conductive fence extending between the PCB and the fan housing.

Item 110: An EMI shielding assembly according to Item 109, wherein the electrically conductive fence comprises metal sidewalls bonded to the PCB; and EMI foam bonded to the fan housing.

Item 111: An EMI shield assembly according to Item 109, wherein the fan housing defines an internal fan volume; and the EMI shield assembly further comprises a plurality of blades disposed within the internal volume and configured to rotate in a plane parallel to the PCB.

Item 112: An EMI shielding assembly according to item 111, wherein the fan housing comprises a first housing shell coupled to an electrically conductive fence; and a second housing shell coupled to the first housing shell; and a plurality of blades are disposed between the first housing shell and the second housing shell.

Item 113: An EMI shielding assembly according to item 112, wherein the second housing shell defines a fan inlet; and the first housing shell and the second housing shell define a fan outlet.

Item 114: An EMI shielding assembly further comprising an electronic component coupled to the PCB of item 109, wherein the fan housing is thermally coupled to the electronic component.

Item 115: An EMI shielding assembly according to Item 114, wherein the fan housing is thermally coupled to the electronic component via thermal paste disposed between the fan housing and the electronic component.

Item 116: A convection cooling electromagnetic interference (EMI) shielding can, comprising: a fan including a metal housing defining an internal fan volume and a plurality of fan blades disposed within the internal fan volume; and a sidewall extending from the metal housing; wherein the metal housing and the metal sidewall define a shielding volume.

Item 117: A convection-cooled EMI shielding can further comprising a printed circuit board (PCB) bonded to the sidewall of item 116, the sidewall being positioned between the metal housing and the PCB.

Item 118: A convection-cooled EMI shielding can according to Item 117, further comprising EMI foam disposed between the sidewall and the metal housing.

Item 119: A convection-cooled EMI shielding can according to Item 116, wherein the metal housing includes an etched surface portion.

Item 120: A convection-cooled EMI shielding can according to Item 119, wherein the sidewall is bonded to the etched surface portion.

Item 121: An electronic device, comprising: an outer frame defining an interior volume, an air inlet port, and an air exhaust port; a fan configured to draw air into the interior volume through the inlet port and to force air outward from the interior volume through the exhaust port, the fan including a housing; the housing defining a fan inlet and a fan outlet; the air inlet port, the fan inlet, the fan outlet, and the air exhaust port defining an air flow path with the air inlet port upstream from the fan inlet, with the fan inlet upstream from the fan outlet, and with the fan outlet upstream from the air exhaust port; a display assembly disposed within the interior volume, the air flow path defined between the display assembly and the fan inlet; and an inner frame coupled to the outer frame and disposed between the display assembly and the fan, the inner frame defining an opening aligned with the fan inlet.

Item 122: An electronic device according to item 121, wherein the fan is coupled to the inner frame.

Item 123: An electronic device according to item 122, wherein the housing comprises a first housing shell defining a fan inlet; a second housing shell; and a fan blade disposed between the first housing shell and the second housing shell.

Item 124: An electronic device according to item 123, wherein the first housing shell and the second housing shell define a fan outlet.

Item 125: An electronic device according to item 123, further comprising a processor disposed within the internal volume.

Item 126: An electronic device according to item 125, wherein the second housing shell is in direct thermal contact with the processor.

Item 127: An electronic device according to item 126, wherein the fan is disposed between the inner frame and the processor.

Item 128: An electronic device according to item 127, wherein the fan is configured to cool the display assembly by convection and to cool the processor by conduction.

Item 129: A head-mountable display device comprising: an outer frame defining an interior volume, an air inlet port, and an air exhaust port; a fan including a housing disposed within the interior volume between the air inlet port and the air exhaust port, the housing having a first side defining a fan inlet and a second side opposite the first side; an inner frame coupled to the outer frame and defining an opening; and a display assembly coupled to the inner frame and aligned with the opening; wherein the first side of the housing faces the display assembly; and the fan inlet is aligned with the opening.

Item 130: A head-mountable display device according to Item 129, wherein the inner frame is disposed between the display assembly and the housing.

Item 131: A head-mountable display device further comprising a printed circuit board including a heating component thermally coupled to the housing, according to Item 129.

Item 132: A head-mountable display device according to item 131, wherein the heating component is coupled to the second surface.

Item 133: A head-mountable display device according to item 130, wherein the inner frame is coupled to the outer frame at the first set of discrete touch points, and the inner frame is thermally isolated from the outer frame.

Item 134: A head-mountable display device according to item 133, wherein the housing is coupled to the inner frame at a second set of discrete touch points, and the inner frame is thermally isolated from the housing.

Item 135: A head-mountable display device according to item 134, wherein the inner frame is thermally isolated from the outer frame via a first set of insulating members disposed between the inner frame and the outer frame at a first set of discrete touch points, at least one insulating member of the first set of insulating members being disposed at each discrete touch point of the first set of discrete touch points; and the inner frame is thermally isolated from the housing via a second set of insulating members disposed between the inner frame and the outer frame at a second set of discrete touch points, at least one insulating member of the second set of insulating members being disposed at each discrete touch point of the second set of discrete touch points.

Item 136: A cooling assembly comprising: a structural frame defining a first opening and a second opening; a first display coupled to a first side of the structural frame and aligned with the first opening; a second display coupled to the first side and aligned with the second opening; a first fan coupled to a second side of the structural frame opposite the first side and aligned with the first opening; and a second fan coupled to the second side and aligned with the second opening; wherein the first fan includes a housing that is aligned with the first opening and defines a first fan inlet directed toward the first display; and the second fan includes a second housing that is aligned with the second opening and defines a second fan inlet directed toward the second display.

Item 137: A cooling assembly according to item 136, further comprising an outer housing coupled to the structural frame and defining an inlet port and an exhaust port.

Item 138: A cooling assembly according to Item 137, wherein the exhaust port is positioned centrally between the first opening and the second opening.

Item 139: A cooling assembly according to Item 137, wherein the first fan is configured to draw air through the inlet port, through a first opening downstream from the inlet port, through a first fan inlet downstream from the first opening, and through an exhaust port downstream from the first fan inlet; and the second fan is configured to draw air through the inlet port, through a second opening downstream from the inlet port, through a second fan inlet downstream from the second opening, and through an exhaust port downstream from the second fan inlet.

Item 140: A cooling assembly according to Item 137, wherein the outer housing defines a lower sidewall defining an inlet port; and an upper sidewall opposite the lower sidewall and defining an exhaust port.

Item 141: A head-mountable display device comprising: a frame defining an opening; an optical assembly disposed within the opening; and a curtain assembly extending between the frame and the optical assembly and covering the opening, wherein the curtain assembly comprises an elastic layer; and an air-impermeable layer.

Item 142: A head-mountable display device according to item 141, wherein the curtain assembly comprises a first edge coupled to the frame and a second edge coupled to the optical assembly; and wherein the elastic layer and the air impermeable layer are not attached to each other between the first edge and the second edge.

Item 143: A head-mountable display device according to Item 142, wherein the elastic layer and the air impermeable layer are joined to each other at the first edge and the second edge.

Item 144: A head-mountable display device according to item 141, wherein the elastic layer comprises a woven fabric material.

Item 145: A head-mountable display device according to item 144, wherein the air impermeable layer comprises a polymeric material.

Item 146: A head-mountable display device according to Item 141, wherein the opening is a first opening; the curtain assembly further includes a back plate defining a second opening, and the optical assembly is disposed within the second opening.

Item 147: A head-mountable display device according to Item 146, wherein the elastic layer is bonded to the back plate at the outer peripheral edge of the curtain assembly; the air impermeable layer is bonded to the back plate at the outer peripheral edge; and the back plate is bonded to the frame at the outer peripheral edge.

Item 148: A head-mountable display device according to Item 147, wherein the elastic layer and the air impermeable layer have no back plate between the inner edge and the outer peripheral edge of the curtain assembly, and the inner edge is coupled to the optical assembly.

Item 149: A head-mountable display device according to Item 141, wherein the optical assembly comprises a lens and a display screen.

Item 150: A display device comprising: a frame defining an opening; a lens disposed within the opening; and a curtain assembly coupled to the frame and the lens, wherein the curtain assembly comprises an elastic layer covering substantially all of the opening between the lens and the frame; and a plastic layer extending between the lens and the frame, the plastic layer defining a gap extending between the lens and the frame.

Item 151: In item 150, the lens is a first lens; the display device further includes a second lens; the curtain assembly includes a middle portion extending between the first lens and the second lens; and a side portion extending between the first lens and the frame, wherein the first lens is disposed between the middle portion and the side portion.

Item 152: A display device according to item 151, wherein the side portion includes a gap.

Item 153: A display device according to item 150, further comprising a motor coupled to the lens.

Item 154: A display device according to item 153, wherein the frame defines an interior volume; the display device further comprises an optical assembly disposed within the interior volume, the optical assembly comprising an optical lens and a display screen; and the motor is configured to adjust a position of the lens relative to the frame.

Item 155: A display device according to Item 154, wherein the elastic layer extends between the lens and the frame in a tensile state.

Item 156: A wearable electronic display device comprising: a frame; an optical lens adjustably coupled to the frame; a motor configured to adjust the optical lens; and a curtain assembly coupled to the frame and the optical lens, wherein the curtain assembly comprises an elastic layer extending between the frame and the lens in a tensioned state; and an air impermeable layer extending between the frame and the lens in a compressed state.

Item 157: A wearable electronic display device according to Item 156, wherein the frame defines an opening; and the wearable electronic display device further comprises an optical assembly disposed within the opening, the optical assembly comprising an optical lens and a display screen.

Item 158: A wearable electronic display device according to item 157, wherein the curtain assembly covers an opening between the lens and the frame.

Item 159: A wearable electronic display device according to Item 156, wherein the elastic layer comprises a woven material; and the air impermeable layer comprises a polymer.

Item 160: A wearable electronic display device according to item 156, wherein the curtain assembly comprises a peripheral edge coupled to the frame; the curtain assembly comprises an inner edge coupled to the lens; and the elastic layer and the air impermeable layer are not attached to each other between the peripheral edge and the inner edge.

Item 161: A head-mountable display, comprising: a structural frame defining a viewing aperture; an optical module coupled to the structural frame, the optical module configured to project light through the viewing aperture; the display screen defining an inner edge, an outer edge opposite the inner edge, a lower edge extending between the inner edge and the outer edge, and an upper edge opposite the lower edge; a first camera disposed adjacent the inner edge and closer to the lower edge than the upper edge; and a second camera disposed adjacent the lower edge and closer to the outer edge than the inner edge.

Item 162: A head-mountable display according to item 161, wherein the display screen defines a main plane having a normal axis; and the display screen is configured to project light parallel to the normal axis.

Item 163: A head-mountable display according to item 162, wherein the normal axis is a first normal axis; the first camera includes a first lens defining a second normal axis; and the second normal axis is positioned at a first angle with respect to the first normal axis.

Item 164: A head-mountable display according to item 163, wherein the second camera includes a second lens defining a third normal axis, the third normal axis being positioned at a second angle with respect to the first normal axis, the second angle being different from the first angle.

Item 165: A head-mountable display according to Item 161, wherein the optical module is a first optical module; the display screen is a first display screen; and the head-mountable display further comprises a second optical module including a second display screen.

Item 166: A head-mountable display according to item 165, wherein the inner edge is a first inner edge; the outer edge is a first outer edge; the second display screen defines a second inner edge and a second outer edge; and the first inner edge and the second inner edge are disposed between the first outer edge and the second outer edge.

Item 167: A head-mountable display according to item 161, further comprising a strip of light-emitting diodes arranged around the periphery of the display screen.

Item 168: A head-mountable display according to item 167, wherein the strip of light-emitting diodes is disposed between the first and second cameras and the display screen.

Item 169: A display device comprising: a housing defining a viewing opening, a first opening, and a second opening; a display assembly secured to the display housing and configured to project light through the viewing opening; a first camera disposed within the first opening and configured to capture an image through the viewing opening; a second camera disposed within the second opening and configured to capture an image through the viewing opening; and a lighting strip disposed on the housing between the first and second cameras and the display assembly, the lighting strip being disposed around a periphery of the display assembly.

Item 170: A display device according to item 169, wherein the first camera and the second camera are disposed between the display assembly and the observation opening.

Item 171: A display device according to item 169, wherein the display assembly comprises a display screen having an upper edge, a lower edge opposite the upper edge, and a side edge extending between the upper edge and the lower edge.

Item 172: A display device according to item 171, wherein the first camera is positioned adjacent to the side edge; and the second camera is positioned adjacent to the bottom edge.

Item 173: A display device according to item 169, wherein the first camera is positioned at a first angle relative to a main plane defined by the display screen; and the second camera is positioned at a second angle relative to the main plane, the second angle being different from the first angle.

Item 174: A display device according to item 169, wherein the light strip comprises a plurality of spaced light emitting diodes.

Item 175: A display device according to item 174, wherein the light emitting diodes are configured to emit light through the observation opening.

Item 176: An eye tracking system comprising: a housing; a display screen coupled to the housing; a first camera coupled to the housing adjacent a first edge of the display screen; a second camera coupled to the housing adjacent a second edge of the display screen; a plurality of lights disposed around a periphery of the display screen; and a controller electrically coupled to the first camera, the second camera, and the plurality of lights and configured to determine a gaze direction of an eye by analyzing a pattern of light reflected from an eye and projected by the plurality of lights, wherein determining the gaze direction comprises: assigning a first weight to a first pattern captured by the first camera; assigning a second weight to a second pattern captured by the second camera; and determining a weighted average pattern from the first pattern and the second pattern; wherein the first weight and the second weight are set based on a position of the display screen relative to the eye.

Item 177: An eye tracking system according to item 176, wherein the position of the display screen relative to the eye is determined by a first image captured by a first camera and a second image captured by a second camera.

Item 178: An eye tracking system according to item 176, wherein the controller is configured to change the first weight and the second weight as the position of the display screen relative to the eye changes.

Item 179: An eye tracking system according to item 176, wherein the plurality of lights comprise a plurality of light emitting diodes.

Item 180: An eye tracking system according to item 179, wherein a plurality of light emitting diodes are disposed between the display screen and the first and second cameras.

Item 181: A head-mountable device comprising: a front cover defining an exterior forward-facing surface; and a nose bridge configured to receive a nose when the head-mountable device is worn; a first rear-facing display configured to project light in a rearward direction opposite the forward-facing surface; a second rear-facing display configured to project light in a rearward direction; a first forward-facing camera configured to capture a first image through the front cover; a second forward-facing camera configured to capture a second image through the front cover; and a controller coupled to a memory comprising instructions, the controller being electrically coupled to the first forward-facing camera, the second forward-facing camera, the first rear-facing display, and the second rear-facing display; wherein the nose bridge is disposed between the first forward-facing camera and the second forward-facing camera; A head-mounted device, wherein the controller, when executing the commands, is configured to cause mixed reality video passthrough from a first forward-facing camera to a first rear-facing display, including a first image, and from a second forward-facing camera to a second rear-facing display, including a second image.

Item 182: A head-mountable device according to item 181, further comprising a shroud disposed between the first forward-facing camera and the front cover.

Item 183: A head-mountable device according to item 182, wherein the shroud defines a first transparent portion and a second transparent portion.

Item 184: A head-mountable device according to Item 183, wherein the first forward-facing camera is configured to capture a first image through the first transparent portion; and the second forward-facing camera is configured to capture a second image through the second transparent portion.

Item 185: A head-mountable device according to item 183, further comprising a front-facing display configured to project light through the first transparent portion and the front cover.

Item 186: A head-mountable device according to item 185, wherein the first forward-facing camera is configured to capture an image through the second transparent portion.

Item 187: A head-mountable device according to item 182, further comprising a sensor bracket; wherein the first forward-facing camera and the second forward-facing camera are coupled to the sensor bracket; and the shroud is configured to obscure a view of the sensor bracket through the front cover.

Item 188: A head-mountable device further comprising a depth projector coupled to the sensor bracket according to item 187; and a depth sensor coupled to the bracket.

Item 189: A wearable electronic device comprising: a structural frame; a sensor bracket coupled to the structural frame, wherein the bracket comprises: a central portion coupled to the structural frame; a first arm cantilevered from the central portion; and a second arm cantilevered from the central portion; a first camera mounted on the first arm; a second camera mounted on the second arm; a third camera mounted on the structural frame; and a fourth camera mounted on the structural frame; wherein the sensor bracket is disposed between the third camera and the fourth camera.

Item 190: A wearable electronic device according to item 189, further comprising a depth sensor coupled to the sensor bracket.

Item 191: A wearable electronic device according to item 190, further comprising a depth projector coupled to the sensor bracket.

Item 192: A wearable electronic device according to item 189, further comprising a first infrared illuminator mounted on the structural frame.

Item 193: A wearable electronic device according to item 192, further comprising a second infrared illuminator mounted on the structural frame.

Item 194: A wearable electronic device according to item 193, wherein the sensor bracket is positioned between the first infrared illuminator and the second infrared illuminator.

Item 195: A wearable electronic device according to item 189, further comprising a depth sensor mounted on a central portion of the sensor bracket.

Item 196: A head-mountable device comprising: a structural frame; a front cover coupled to the structural frame, the front cover defining an exterior forward-facing surface; a forward-facing display configured to project light in a forward direction through the front cover; a rearward-facing display configured to project light in a rearward direction opposite the forward direction; an outward-facing sensor assembly configured to capture images from an external environment in front of the head-mountable device, the outward-facing sensor assembly comprising: a first camera oriented in a first direction; and a second camera oriented in a second direction; an inward-facing sensor assembly configured to capture images of a user when the user wears the head-mountable device, the inward-facing sensor assembly comprising a rearward-facing eye-tracking camera; and a controller communicatively coupled to a memory device containing instructions, the controller electrically coupled to the outward-facing sensor assembly and the inward-facing sensor assembly, wherein the controller, when executing the instructions, causes the rearward-facing display to project first images captured by the outward-facing sensor assembly. And a head-mounted device configured to project second images captured by an eye-tracking camera onto the forward-facing display.

Item 197: A head-mountable device according to item 196, wherein the inward-facing sensor assembly comprises a jaw camera that is directed downward and configured to capture the user's chin.

Item 198: A head-mountable device according to Item 197, wherein the eye-tracking camera is a first eye-tracking camera; and the inward-facing sensor assembly further comprises a second eye-tracking camera.

Item 199: A head-mountable device according to item 198, wherein the first eye-tracking camera and the second eye-tracking camera are configured to capture images of a single eye of the user.

Item 200: A head-mountable device according to Item 198, wherein the first eye-tracking camera is configured to capture first images of an eye of a first user; and the second eye-tracking camera is configured to capture second images of an eye of a second user.

Item 201: A head-mountable display comprising: a structural frame; an optical bracket coupled to the structural frame; an optical assembly adjustably secured to the optical bracket and including a display screen; and a stop mechanism extending from the structural frame; wherein the optical assembly is configured to move back and forth between the optical bracket and the stop.

Item 202: A head-mountable display according to Item 201, wherein the bracket extends in a certain direction from the structural frame; and the stop extends in the certain direction from the structural frame.

Item 203: A head-mountable display according to item 202, wherein the optical assembly further comprises a housing; and the stop is configured to contact the housing.

Item 204: A head-mountable display according to Item 201, further comprising a guide rod extending between the optical bracket and the stop, wherein the optical assembly is slidably engaged with the guide rod.

Item 205: A head-mountable display according to item 204, wherein the stop is a first stop; and the head-mountable display further comprises a second stop coupled to the structural frame.

Item 206: A head-mountable display according to item 205, wherein the second stop defines the opening.

Item 207: A head-mountable display according to Item 206, wherein the guide rod comprises a first end and a second end opposite the first end; the first end is secured to the optical bracket; and the second end extends into the opening.

Item 208: A head-mountable display according to item 207, wherein the guide rod is cantilevered from the optical bracket.

Item 209: A head-mountable device comprising: a frame; a first stop extending from the frame; a second stop extending from the frame; an optical bracket coupled to the frame between the first stop and the second stop; a first optical assembly configured to move between the optical bracket and the first stop; and a second optical assembly configured to move between the optical bracket and the second stop.

Item 210: A head-mountable device further comprising: a first guide rod extending from the optical bracket, the first optical assembly slidably engaging the first guide rod; and a second guide rod extending from the optical bracket, the second optical assembly slidably engaging the second guide rod.

Item 211: A head-mountable device according to Item 210, wherein the first guide rod extends in a first direction between the optical bracket and the first stop; and the second guide rod extends in a second direction opposite to the first direction between the optical bracket and the second stop.

Item 212: A head-mountable device according to item 211, wherein the first guide rod is cantilevered from the optical bracket; and the second guide rod is cantilevered from the optical bracket.

Item 213: A head-mountable device according to Item 209, wherein the first optical assembly comprises a first display screen; and the second optical assembly comprises a second display screen.

Item 214: A head-mountable device according to item 209, wherein the frame defines a first opening and a second opening; and the optical bracket is secured to the frame between the first opening and the second opening.

Item 215: A head-mountable device according to Item 214, wherein the first opening is disposed between the optical bracket and the first stop; and the second opening is disposed between the optical bracket and the second stop.

Item 216: An electronic display device comprising: a structural frame; an optical bracket coupled to the structural frame; a guide rod extending from the optical bracket; an optical assembly slidably engaged with the guide rod and including a display screen and a housing; a first stop extending from the structural frame; and a second stop extending from the structural frame and defining an opening; the guide rod extending into the opening; and the optical assembly being configured to move between the optical bracket and the first stop via the guide rod.

Item 217: An electronic display device according to item 216, wherein the housing defines a follower slidably engaged with the guide rod; and the optical assembly further includes a bias member urging the follower toward the guide rod.

Item 218: An electronic display device according to item 217, wherein the follower defines an opening; and the bias member is connected to the follower and extends through the opening to contact the guide rod.

Item 219: An electronic display device according to item 216, wherein the guide rod is not attached to the second stop.

Item 220: An electronic display device according to Item 216, wherein the structural frame defines a ventilation opening; and the ventilation opening is disposed between the optical bracket and the first stop.

Item 221: A head-mountable electronic device comprising: a housing; an optical module secured to the housing; a facial interface connected to the housing; a strap connected to the housing, the strap being electrically connected to the optical module, the strap defining a volume, the strap including a processor disposed within the volume; and a fixation band connected to the strap.

Item 222: A head-mounted electronic device according to item 221, wherein the optical module further comprises a movable display; a motor connected to the display; and an inwardly facing sensor for detecting facial features of a user wearing the head-mounted electronic device.

Item 223: A head-mountable electronic device according to item 221, wherein the optical module further comprises a first display; a second display; and an inwardly facing sensor for detecting facial features of a user wearing the head-mountable electronic device.

Item 224: A head-mountable electronic device according to item 221, wherein the facial interface further comprises a structural frame connected to the housing; and a pad connected to the structural frame.

Item 225: A head-mountable electronic device according to item 224, wherein the structural frame is magnetically attached to the housing.

Item 226: A head-mountable electronic device according to item 221, wherein the strap is connected to the housing on the first end; the strap further includes a power connector disposed on the second end; and the power connector is electrically connected to the processor and the optical module.

Item 227: A head-mountable electronic device further comprising a speaker disposed within the volume of item 221.

Item 228: A head-mountable electronic device according to item 221, wherein the strap comprises a first strap connected to the housing; and a second strap connected to the housing and connected to the fixed band.

Item 229: A head-mountable electronic device according to item 221, wherein the fixed band is flexible; and the fixed band is rotatably connected to the strap.

Item 230: A wearable electronic device comprising: a housing; a first optical module secured to the housing and including a first display screen and a first sensor, the first display screen and the first sensor facing inward; a second optical module secured to the housing and including a second display screen and a second sensor, the second display screen and the second sensor facing inward; a facial interface connected to the housing; a first electronic strap connected to a first side of the housing, electrically connected to the first optical module, defining a first volume, and including a processor disposed within the first volume; a second electronic strap connected to a second side of the housing, electrically connected to the first electronic strap, defining a second volume; and a band connected to the first electronic strap and the second electronic strap.

Item 231: A wearable electronic device further comprising a first speaker disposed within the first volume; and a second speaker disposed within the second volume.

Item 232: A wearable electronic device according to item 230, wherein the first electronic strap further comprises a power connector electrically connected to the processor.

Item 233: A wearable electronic device according to item 230, wherein the first electronic strap is removably connected to the housing; and the second electronic strap is removably connected to the housing.

Item 234: A wearable electronic device further comprising: a first motor movably connecting the first optical module to the housing; and a second motor movably connecting the second optical module to the housing.

Item 235: A wearable electronic device according to item 230, wherein the facial interface comprises a structural frame connected to the housing; and a pad connected to the structural frame.

Item 236: A wearable electronic device according to item 235, wherein the facial interface is removably connected to the housing by a magnet.

Item 237: A head-mountable display device comprising: a housing; an optical module rotatably connected to the housing and including a display screen; a face-engaging structure disposed on an outer surface of the housing; a first strap connected to the housing, defining a first volume, the first strap including a processor disposed within the volume; a power connector; and a first conductor electrically connecting the power connector to the processor and the optical module; a second strap connected to the housing, defining a second volume, the second strap including a second conductor electrically connected to the power connector; and a band connected to the first strap and the second strap.

Item 238: A head-mountable display device further comprising a first speaker disposed within the first volume in Item 237; and a second speaker disposed within the second volume.

Item 239: A head-mountable display further comprising a motor translatably connecting the optical module to the housing in accordance with Item 237, wherein the processor is controllably connected to the motor.

Item 240: A head-mountable display according to Item 237, wherein the facial engagement structure is removably connected to the housing via a magnet.

Item 241: A head-mountable electronic device comprising: a housing; a facial engagement structure connected to the housing; a display attached to the housing disposed between the facial engagement structure and the display; a curved transparent cover disposed over the display; and a sensor disposed within the housing, the sensor being oriented away from the display, the sensor being electrically connected to the display.

Item 242: A head-mountable electronic device according to item 241, wherein the curved transparent cover comprises glass.

Item 243: A head-mounted electronic device according to item 242, wherein the sensor comprises a camera directed toward the user when the head-mounted electronic device is worn.

Item 244: A head-mountable electronic device according to item 241, further comprising a processor controllably connected to the display and the sensor, the processor configured to receive a signal from the sensor and to cause the display to generate an image viewable through the curved transparent cover based on the signal.

Item 245: A head-mountable electronic device according to item 241, further comprising an anti-reflective coating disposed on the transparent cover.

Item 246: A head-mountable electronic device according to item 241, further comprising a lenticular lens array disposed between the display and the transparent cover.

Item 247: A head-mountable electronic device according to item 241, wherein the display comprises a curved display having a curvature that approximates the curvature of the curved transparent cover.

Item 248: A head-mountable electronic device according to item 247, wherein the display comprises a lenticular film.

Item 249: A head-mountable electronic device according to item 241, wherein the display comprises a first display; and the head-mountable electronic device further comprises an optical module disposed within the housing, the optical module comprising a second display oriented away from the first display.

Item 250: A wearable electronic device comprising: a housing; a facial-engaging structure connected to the housing; a display attached to the housing opposite the facial-engaging structure; a curved transparent cover disposed over the display; a processor disposed within the wearable electronic device and electrically connected to the display; and a camera disposed within the housing oriented away from the display and electrically connected to the display via the processor, wherein the processor is configured to receive a signal from the camera and to cause the display to generate an image viewable through the curved transparent cover based on the signal.

Item 251: A wearable electronic device according to item 250, wherein the display comprises a first display; the wearable electronic device further comprises an optical module disposed within the housing, the optical module comprising a second display oriented away from the first display, and the camera is disposed adjacent to the second display.

Item 252: A wearable electronic device according to item 250, wherein the curved transparent cover comprises glass.

Item 253: A wearable electronic device according to item 250, wherein the processor is configured to enhance a signal before causing the display to generate an image.

Item 254: A wearable electronic device according to item 253, wherein the enhancement of the signal is based on detected user activity.

Item 255: A wearable electronic device according to item 250, wherein the display comprises a curved display having a curvature that approximates the curvature of the curved transparent cover.

Item 256: A wearable electronic device according to item 255, wherein the curved transparent cover comprises glass having an anti-reflective coating; and the display comprises a lenticular film.

Item 257: A display system for use with a head-mountable display, comprising: a display; a curved transparent cover disposed over the display; a processor electrically connected to the display; and a camera configured to be oriented opposite the display and toward a user wearing the head-mountable display and electrically connected to the display through the processor, wherein the processor is configured to receive a signal from the camera and cause the display to generate an image viewable through the curved transparent cover based on the signal.

Item 258: A display system according to item 257, wherein the display comprises a curved display having a curvature approximating the curvature of the curved transparent cover; and wherein the display comprises a lenticular film.

Item 259: A display system according to item 258, wherein the display comprises a first display; the display system further comprises an optical module comprising a second display configured to be oriented away from the first display, and the camera is positioned adjacent to the second display.

Item 260: A display system according to item 257, wherein the processor is configured to cause the display to generate an image viewable through the curved transparent cover based on the signal.

Item 261: A head-mountable electronic device comprising: a housing; an optical module disposed within the housing; a strap, the strap being connected to the housing on a first end of the strap, electrically connected to the optical module, defining a volume, and including a processor and a power connector disposed within the volume; and a band removably connected to a second end of the strap opposite the first end.

Item 262: A head-mountable electronic device according to item 261, wherein the power connector is disposed at the second end; and the power connector is electrically connected to the processor and the optical module.

Item 263: A head-mountable electronic device according to item 261, further comprising a battery removably connected to the power connector.

Item 264: A head-mountable electronic device according to item 263, wherein the power connector comprises a rotatable connection.

Item 265: A head-mountable electronic device according to item 263, wherein the battery is removably connected to the band.

Item 266: A head-mountable electronic device according to item 261, wherein the length of the band is adjustable; and the band is rotatably connected to the strap.

Item 267: A head-mountable electronic device further comprising a speaker disposed within the volume of item 261.

Item 268: A head-mountable electronic device according to Item 261, wherein the strap comprises a first strap connected to the housing on a first end of the housing; and a second strap connected to the housing on a second end of the housing, the second strap being connected to the band.

Item 269: A wearable electronic device comprising: a housing; a first optical module secured to the housing and including a first display screen; a second optical module secured to the housing and including a second display screen; a first strap connected to a first side of the housing, electrically connected to the first optical module, defining a first volume, and including a processor and a power connector disposed within the first volume; a second strap connected to a second side of the housing, electrically connected to the first strap, defining a second volume; and a band removably and rotatably connected to the first strap and the second strap.

Item 270: A wearable electronic device further comprising a first speaker disposed within the first volume; and a second speaker disposed within the second volume, according to Item 269.

Item 271: A wearable electronic device according to item 270, wherein the power connector is electrically connected to the second speaker through the housing.

Item 272: A wearable electronic device according to item 269, wherein the first strap is removably connected to the housing; and the second strap is removably connected to the housing.

Item 273: The wearable electronic device of item 270 further comprises a first motor movably connecting the first optical module to the housing; and a second motor movably connecting the second optical module to the housing, wherein the first motor and the second motor are configured to be electrically connected to a battery and a processor.

Item 274: A wearable electronic device according to item 269, wherein the power connector is configured to be connected to a battery, and further comprising a battery electrically connected to the power connector.

Item 275: A wearable electronic device according to item 269, wherein the band is configured to be removably connected to a battery.

Item 276: A wearable electronic device according to item 269, further comprising a cable configured to be removably connected to a power connector and a battery.

Item 277: A head-mountable display device comprising: a housing; an optical module rotatably connected to the housing and including a display screen; a first strap connected to the housing, defining a first volume, the first strap including a processor disposed within the first volume; a power connector disposed on the first strap; and a first conductor electrically connecting the power connector to the processor and the optical module; a second strap connected to the housing, defining a second volume, the second strap including a second conductor electrically connected to the power connector through the housing; a band removably connected to the first strap and the second strap; and a battery electrically connected to the power connector.

Item 278: A head-mountable display device further comprising: a first speaker disposed within the first volume; and a second speaker disposed within the second volume.

Item 279: A head-mountable display device according to item 277, wherein the battery is electrically connected to the processor and the optical module via the first conductor.

Item 280: A head-mountable display device according to item 277, wherein the battery is removably attached to the band.

Item 281: A head-mounted device (HMD), comprising: a housing; a fixation band coupled to the housing and configured to hold the HMD on a user's head; an external display coupled to the housing; an external sensor coupled to the housing; and an optical module coupled to the housing, wherein the optical module includes an internal display and an internal sensor configured to present external characteristics to a user based on a signal from the external sensor, and wherein the external display is configured to present user characteristics based on a signal from the internal sensor.

Item 282: The HMD of item 281, wherein the external sensor comprises a camera; and the internal sensor comprises cameras.

Item 283: The HMD of item 281, wherein the external sensor is configured to detect a user gesture.

Item 284: The HMD of item 281, wherein the internal sensor is configured to detect the user's gaze.

Item 285: The HMD of item 281, wherein the fixed band extends rearward from the housing, the internal display and the internal sensor are oriented rearward with respect to the housing, and the external display and the external sensor are oriented forward with respect to the housing.

Item 286: The HMD of item 281, wherein the external display includes a cover glass; and the cover glass is curved relative to the longitudinal axis of the housing.

Item 287: The HMD of item 281, wherein the external display is configured to display the user's expression based on signals from an internal sensor.

Item 288: A wearable electronic device comprising: a forward-facing display; a housing coupled to the forward-facing display; an optical module coupled to the housing, the optical module including a rearward-facing display and a rearward-facing camera, the forward-facing display configured to generate a user image based on a signal from the rearward-facing camera; and a band configured to retain the housing relative to the user.

Item 289: A wearable electronic device according to item 288, further comprising a forward-facing sensor coupled to the housing, wherein the rear-facing display is configured to generate an image of the environment based on signals from the forward-facing sensor.

Item 290: A wearable electronic device according to item 289, wherein the rear-facing display is configured to project mixed reality content including a first amount of video pass-through content captured by the front-facing sensor and a second amount of virtual reality content.

Item 291: A wearable electronic device according to Item 288, further comprising a forward-facing sensor coupled to the housing, the forward-facing sensor configured to detect a user gesture and generate a signal based on the detected gesture.

Item 292: A wearable electronic device according to item 288, wherein the rear-facing camera is configured to detect a user's gaze and generate a signal based on the detected gaze.

Item 293: A wearable electronic device according to Item 288, wherein the position of the optical module relative to the housing is adjustable.

Item 294: A display system, comprising: an optical module including an internal display and an internal sensor configured to generate a first signal; an external display configured to display a user characteristic based on the first signal; and a housing coupled to the optical module and the external display.

Item 295: A display system according to item 294, wherein the external display is configured to present a representation of a user including user characteristics.

Item 296: A display system according to item 295, wherein the internal sensor comprises a camera.

Item 297: The display system of item 294, wherein the first signal includes user gaze tracking data.

Item 298: A display system according to Item 294, further comprising an external sensor coupled to the housing, the external sensor configured to generate a second signal, and the internal display configured to display environmental characteristics based on the second signal.

Item 299: A display system according to item 298, wherein the external sensor comprises a camera.

Item 300: The display system of item 298, wherein the second signal includes user gesture tracking data.

Item 301: A head-mounted device (HMD), comprising: a housing; a fixing band coupled to the housing and configured to hold the HMD on a user's head; an external sensor coupled to the housing; and an optical module coupled to the housing and including an internal display and an internal sensor, wherein the external sensor is configured to perform gesture detection with respect to a user, and the internal sensor is configured to perform gaze detection with respect to the user.

Item 302: The HMD of item 301, wherein the external sensor includes a camera.

Item 303: In item 301, the HMD comprises an internal sensor including an LED and a camera.

Item 304: The HMD of item 301, wherein the internal display is configured to display an image based at least in part on gesture detection.

Item 305: An HMD according to item 301, further comprising an external display coupled to the housing, the external display configured to display an image based at least in part on gaze detection.

Item 306: The HMD of item 301, wherein the external sensor is further configured to perform face detection on the user.

Item 307: The HMD of item 301, wherein the external sensor is further configured to detect the user's environment.

Item 308: An HMD according to item 301, further comprising an optical seal at least partially surrounding the optical module, wherein the internal sensor and the external sensor are oriented inwardly with respect to the optical seal; and the external sensor is oriented outwardly with respect to the optical seal.

Item 309: A wearable electronic device comprising: a housing; a forward-facing sensor coupled to the housing; an optical module coupled to the housing, the optical module including a rear-facing display and a rear-facing sensor configured to perform gaze detection; and a band configured to retain the housing relative to a user.

Item 310: A wearable electronic device according to item 309, wherein the forward-facing sensor is configured to detect a user's hand.

Item 311: A wearable electronic device according to item 309, wherein the forward-facing sensor is configured to detect an environment surrounding the user and external to the wearable electronic device.

Item 312: A wearable electronic device according to item 309, wherein the rear-facing sensor comprises a camera.

Item 313: A wearable electronic device according to item 312, wherein the rear-facing sensor further comprises an LED.

Item 314: A wearable electronic device according to Item 309, wherein the position of the optical module relative to the housing is adjustable.

Item 315: A wearable electronic device according to item 309, further comprising an environmental seal at least partially surrounding the rear-facing display and the rear-facing sensor.

Item 316: A display system, comprising: a housing; a display configured to display an image in a first direction; a first sensor oriented in the first direction and configured to perform gaze detection for a user; and a second sensor oriented in a second direction and configured to perform gesture detection for the user.

Item 317: A display system according to item 316, wherein the second sensor is further configured to detect an environment surrounding the user.

Item 318: A display system according to item 316, wherein the first sensor comprises an LED and a camera.

Item 319: A display system according to item 316, wherein the second sensor comprises a camera.

Item 320: A display system according to item 316, wherein the display is a first display; the display system further includes a second display; and the optical module includes the first display and the second display, wherein the position of the optical module is adjustable relative to the housing.

Item 321: A head-mounted device (HMD), comprising: a housing; a fixation band coupled to the housing and configured to hold the HMD on a user's head; an optical module coupled to the housing and including an internal display configured to project light toward the user and an internal sensor oriented toward the user; and an input device coupled to the housing and configured to adjust a position of the optical module.

Item 322: An HMD according to item 321, wherein the input device is configured to adjust the position of the optical module relative to the housing.

Item 323: An HMD according to item 321, wherein the internal display is a first internal display; the optical module further includes a second internal display; the position is a first position; and the input device is configured to adjust the first position and the second position of the second internal display based on the user's pupillary distance.

Item 324: An HMD according to item 321, wherein the internal sensor is a first internal sensor; the optical module further comprises a second internal sensor; and the input device is configured to adjust the position of the first internal sensor relative to the second internal sensor based on the interpupillary distance of the user when operated.

Item 325: In item 321, the input device comprises a button, HMD.

Item 326: In item 321, the input device comprises a digital dial, HMD.

Item 327: The HMD of item 321, wherein the internal sensor is configured to detect a user.

Item 328: The HMD of item 321, wherein the internal sensor includes a camera.

Item 329: A wearable electronic device comprising: a housing; an optical module coupled to the housing, the optical module including a first display and a second display; and an input device on the exterior of the housing, wherein relative positions of the first display and the second display are adjustable based on a signal from the input device.

Item 330: A wearable electronic device according to item 329, wherein the input device is configured to adjust a position of the first display relative to the second display based on an interpupillary distance of a user wearing the wearable electronic device.

Item 331: A wearable electronic device according to item 329, wherein the input device comprises a first button and a second button.

Item 332: A wearable electronic device according to item 329, wherein the input device comprises a rotatable dial.

Item 333: A wearable electronic device according to Item 329, wherein the optical module further comprises a first sensor and a second sensor; and the input device is further configured to adjust a position of the first sensor relative to the second sensor based on an interpupillary distance of a user wearing the wearable electronic device.

Item 334: A wearable electronic device according to item 333, wherein the first sensor and the second sensor are configured to perform gaze detection on a user.

Item 335: A wearable electronic device according to item 333, wherein the first sensor and the second sensor are configured to detect a pupillary distance.

Item 336: A display system comprising: a housing; an input device positioned on the exterior of the housing; a display configured to display an image to a user; and a sensor configured to face the user, wherein a position of the sensor relative to the housing is adjustable based on input received by the input device.

Item 337: A display system according to item 336, wherein the input device comprises a button; and the input comprises pressing the button.

Item 338: A display system according to item 336, wherein the input device comprises a dial; and the input comprises rotation of the dial.

Item 339: In item 336, the sensor is a first sensor; the display system further includes a second sensor; and the distance between the first sensor and the second sensor is adjustable based on an input.

Item 340: A display system according to Item 336, wherein the position of the sensor relative to the housing is adjustable further based on the interpupillary distance of the user.

Item 341: A head-mountable electronic device comprising: a housing; a camera configured to capture content outside the housing; an optical module secured to the housing, the optical module including a display and an inward-facing sensor; and a processor electrically coupled to the camera, the inward-facing sensor, and the display; wherein the processor is configured to cause the display to project mixed reality content including a first amount of video pass-through content captured by the camera and a second amount of virtual reality content; wherein the second amount of virtual reality content is based on detection of the inward-facing sensor.

Item 342: A head-mounted electronic device according to item 341, wherein the camera is oriented downward toward the hand when the user is wearing the head-mounted electronic device.

Item 343: A head-mountable electronic device according to item 342, wherein the camera is a first camera; and the head-mountable electronic device further comprises a second camera configured to capture content outside the housing.

Item 344: A head-mounted electronic device according to item 341, wherein the camera is configured to capture hand gestures including hand positions.

Item 345: A head-mounted electronic device according to item 341, wherein the inward-facing sensor is configured to detect a facial feature; the inward-facing sensor comprises a visual camera; the second amount of virtual reality content is based on the facial feature; and the facial feature comprises a gaze direction.

Item 346: A wearable electronic device comprising: a housing; a first environmental camera configured to capture content outside the housing; a second environmental camera configured to detect a hand gesture; an optical module secured to the housing and including a display screen and an inward-facing sensor configured to detect facial features; and a processor electrically coupled to the first environmental camera, the second environmental camera, the inward-facing sensor, and the display screen; wherein the processor is configured to cause the display screen to project mixed reality content including a quantity of video pass-through content captured by the first environmental camera; wherein the quantity of video pass-through content is based on the hand gesture and the facial features.

Item 347: A wearable electronic device according to item 346, wherein the first environmental camera is oriented to face a first direction; the second environmental camera is oriented to face a second direction different from the first direction; and the inward-facing sensor is oriented to face a third direction different from the first and second directions.

Item 348: A wearable electronic device according to Item 347, wherein when the user wears the wearable electronic device, the first direction includes a forward direction; the second direction includes a downward direction; and the third direction includes a backward direction.

Item 349: A wearable electronic device according to item 347, wherein the display screen is oriented to face a third direction; and the inward-facing sensor is positioned adjacent to the display screen.

Item 350: A wearable electronic device according to item 346, wherein the processor is configured to cause the passthrough content to be superimposed on virtual reality content projected by the display screen.

Item 351: A head-mountable display device comprising: a housing defining an outer surface; a frame coupled to the housing; an outward-facing sensor secured to the frame; an optical module secured to the frame, the optical module including a display configured to project light toward an eye of a user wearing the head-mountable display device and an inward-facing sensor configured to detect facial features of the user; and a processor electrically coupled to the outward-facing sensor, the inward-facing sensor, and the display; wherein the processor is configured to cause the display to simultaneously project real-world content captured by the outward-facing sensor at a first level of immersion and virtual content at a second level of immersion; wherein the outward-facing sensor is configured to capture hand gestures; wherein the first and second immersion levels are based on the hand gestures and the facial features.

Item 352: A head-mounted display device according to item 351, wherein the outward-facing sensor is oriented to detect an environment outside the housing; and the inward-facing sensor is oriented to face the user's face.

Item 353: A head-mountable display device according to item 352, wherein the outward-facing sensor is oriented in a first direction; and the inward-facing sensor is oriented in a second direction opposite to the first direction.

Item 354: A head-mounted display device according to item 352, wherein the outward-facing sensor is oriented downward to detect the position of the user's hand.

Item 355: A head-mounted display device according to item 351, wherein the gesture comprises a position of a hand.

Item 356: A head-mountable display device according to item 351, wherein the facial features include a gaze direction.

Item 357: A head-mountable display device according to item 351, wherein the display comprises a pixelated screen.

Item 358: A head-mounted display device according to item 357, wherein the inward-facing sensor is positioned adjacent to the pixelated screen.

Item 359: A head-mountable display device according to Item 351, wherein the outward-facing sensor is a first outward-facing sensor; and the head-mountable display device further comprises a second outward-facing sensor.

Item 360: A head-mountable display device according to Item 359, wherein the first outward-facing sensor is oriented in a forward direction when the user wears the head-mountable display device; and the second outward-facing sensor is oriented in a downward direction when the user wears the head-mountable display device.

Item 361: A wearable display device comprising: a housing defining an outer surface; a dial rotatable relative to the housing; a first sensor oriented in a first direction to detect an environment outside the housing; an optical module within the housing, the optical module including a display configured to project light toward an eye of a user wearing the wearable display device, and a second sensor oriented in a second direction opposite the first direction and configured to detect a facial feature; and a processor electrically coupled to the dial, the first sensor, the second sensor, and the display, wherein the processor is configured to adjust a level of augmented reality immersion projected by the display based on a rotational position of the dial.

Item 362: A wearable display device according to item 361, wherein the level of augmented reality immersion includes a certain amount of virtual content superimposed over the video pass-through from the first sensor.

Item 363: A wearable display device according to item 362, wherein the processor is configured to cause the display to project virtual content and video pass-through simultaneously.

Item 364: A wearable display device according to item 361, wherein rotation of the dial in a first rotation direction increases the level of augmented reality immersion; and rotation of the dial in a second rotation direction decreases the level of augmented reality immersion.

Item 365: A wearable display device according to item 361, wherein the first direction is opposite to the second direction.

Item 366: A head-mounted display device comprising: a housing defining an outer surface; a frame fixed to the housing; a dial rotatably fixed relative to the housing; an environmental sensor fixed to the frame; an optical module fixed to the frame and configured to project light toward an eye of a user wearing the head-mounted display device and a facial feature sensor disposed adjacent the display; and a processor electrically coupled to the dial, the environmental sensor, the display, and the facial feature sensor; and the processor is configured to cause the display to project augmented reality content including virtual content of a predetermined level of immersion over real-world content captured by the environmental sensor; wherein rotation of the dial changes the immersion level of the virtual content.

Item 367: A head-mountable display device according to item 366, wherein the environmental sensor comprises a camera.

Item 368: A head-mounted display device according to item 367, wherein the real-world content comprises video pass-through, and the video pass-through comprises content captured by a camera.

Item 369: A head-mountable display device according to item 366, wherein the environmental sensor is a first environmental sensor; and the head-mountable display device further comprises a second environmental sensor fixed to the frame.

Item 370: A head-mountable display device according to Item 369, wherein when the user wears the head-mountable display device, the first environmental sensor comprises a forward-facing orientation; and the second environmental sensor comprises a downward-facing orientation.

Item 371: A head-mounted display device according to item 370, wherein the facial feature sensor comprises a rearward-facing orientation opposite to the forward-facing orientation.

Item 372: A head-mountable display device according to item 370, wherein the first environmental sensor comprises a visual camera; and the second environmental sensor comprises an infrared sensor.

Item 373: A head-mountable display device according to item 370, wherein the first environmental sensor comprises a first visual camera; and the second environmental sensor comprises a second visual camera.

Item 374: A head-mounted display device according to item 366, wherein the real-world content comprises video pass-through from an environmental sensor.

Item 375: A wearable display device comprising: a housing defining an outer surface; a dial rotatable relative to the housing; a sensor oriented to detect an environment outside the housing; an optical module within the housing, the optical module including a display configured to project light toward an eye of a user wearing the wearable display device; and a processor electrically coupled to the dial, the sensor, and the display; the processor configured to cause the display to project augmented reality content including pass-through content of a first immersive level captured by the sensor and virtual content of a second immersive level; wherein rotation of the dial changes the first immersive level and the second immersive level.

Item 376: A wearable display device according to item 375, wherein the dial is pressable relative to the housing; and pressing the dial causes the processor to change the augmented reality content.

Item 377: A wearable display device according to item 375, wherein the sensor is a first sensor; and the optical module further includes a second sensor.

Item 378: A wearable display device according to item 377, wherein the first sensor is oriented in a first direction; and the second sensor is oriented in a second direction opposite to the first direction.

Item 379: A wearable display device according to item 375, wherein the sensor comprises a visual camera.

Item 380: A wearable display device according to item 375, wherein the display comprises a pixelated display screen.

Item 381: A head-mountable display device comprising: a housing defining an outer surface; a button defining the outer surface; a frame secured to the housing; an outward-facing camera secured to the frame; an optical module including a display and an inward-facing camera secured to the frame and configured to project light toward an eye of a user wearing the head-mountable display device; and a processor electrically coupled to the display, the outward-facing camera, and the button; wherein the display is configured to display augmented reality content including pass-through content of a first immersive level and virtual content of a second immersive level captured by the outward-facing camera; and wherein operation of the button changes the first immersive level and the second immersive level.

Item 382: A head-mountable display device according to item 381, wherein the actuation comprises pressing a button on the housing.

Item 383: A head-mountable display device according to item 381, wherein the button is a first button; and the head-mountable display device further comprises a second button that is depressible relative to the housing.

Item 384: A head-mountable display device according to item 383, wherein the first immersion level is based on pressing at least one of the first button or the second button.

Item 385: A head-mountable display device according to item 381, wherein the button comprises a rotatable dial.

Item 386: A head-mountable display device according to item 385, wherein the first immersion level is based on a rotational position of the dial.

Item 387: A head-mounted display device according to item 381, wherein the first immersion level is based on facial features detected by an inward-facing camera.

Item 388: A head-mountable display device according to item 387, wherein the facial features include a direction of the user's gaze.

Item 389: A head-mounted display device comprising: a housing defining an outer surface; a frame secured to the housing; a button defining the outer surface and depressible relative to the housing; an environmental sensor secured to the frame; an optical module secured to the frame and configured to project light toward an eye of a user wearing the head-mounted display device, the optical module including a display and an inward-facing sensor; and a processor electrically coupled to the button, the environmental sensor, the display, and the inward-facing sensor; and the processor configured to cause the display to project augmented reality content including virtual content of a predetermined immersive level superimposed on real-world content captured by the environmental sensor; wherein depressing the button changes the immersive level of the virtual content.

Item 390: A head-mounted display device according to item 389, wherein when the user is wearing the head-mounted display device, the environmental sensor is oriented to face forward and away from the user; and the inward-facing sensor is oriented in a rearward direction opposite to the forward direction and toward the user.

Item 391: A head-mounted display device according to item 390, wherein the inward-facing sensor comprises a visual camera; and the camera is positioned adjacent to the display.

Item 392: A head-mountable display device according to item 391, wherein the display comprises a pixelated display screen oriented to face rearward.

Item 393: A head-mountable display device according to item 389, wherein the processor is configured to cause the display to project virtual content and real-world content simultaneously.

Item 394: A head-mounted display device according to item 393, wherein the real-world content comprises pass-through video from an environmental sensor.

Item 395: A wearable display device comprising: a housing defining an outer surface; a button operable with respect to the housing; a first sensor oriented in a first direction to detect an environment outside the housing; a display configured to project light toward an eye of a user wearing the wearable display device; and an optical module within the housing, the optical module including a second sensor oriented in a second direction opposite the first direction and configured to detect a facial feature; and a processor electrically coupled to the button, the first sensor, the second sensor, and the display, wherein the processor is configured to adjust a level of augmented reality immersion projected by the display based on an operation of the button.

Item 396: A wearable display device according to item 395, wherein the actuation comprises pressing a button on the housing.

Item 397: A wearable display device according to item 395, wherein the operation comprises rotating a button relative to the housing.

Item 398: A wearable display device according to item 395, wherein the display is oriented to project light in a second direction; and the second sensor is positioned adjacent to the display.

Item 399: A wearable display device according to item 395, wherein the first sensor comprises a first visual camera; and the second sensor comprises a second visual camera.

Item 400: In item 395, the optical module includes a chassis; the display and the second sensor are fixed to the chassis; the wearable display device further includes a frame fixed to the housing; and the chassis is fixed to the frame. A wearable display device.

Item 401: A wearable electronic device comprising: a housing; a button pressable relative to the housing; a dial rotatable relative to the housing; an optical module within the housing, the optical module comprising a first camera configured to capture an environment outside the housing and facing a first direction; a display oriented in a second direction different from the first direction and a second camera adjacent to the display and facing the second direction; and a processor electrically coupled to the display, the first camera, the dial, and the button; and the processor configured to cause the display to present augmented reality content including a predetermined amount of virtual content superimposed and blended over video pass-through content captured by the first camera, the predetermined amount being based on at least one of a press of the button or a rotation of the dial.

Item 402: A wearable electronic device according to item 401, further comprising a third camera oriented to face a third direction different from the first direction and the second direction, wherein the third camera is configured to detect a hand gesture of a user wearing the wearable electronic device.

Item 403: A wearable electronic device according to item 402, wherein the amount of virtual content is based on hand gestures.

Item 404: A wearable electronic device according to item 401, wherein the optical module further comprises a chassis; the display and the second camera are secured to the chassis; and the chassis is secured to the housing via a frame.

Item 405: A wearable electronic device according to item 401, wherein the second camera is configured to detect facial features of a user wearing the wearable electronic device.

Item 406: A wearable electronic device according to item 405, wherein the facial features include a direction of the user's gaze.

Item 407: A wearable display comprising: a housing defining an outer surface; a button defining the outer surface; a dial rotatably fixed to the housing; an outward-facing camera fixed within the housing; and an optical module including a display fixed within the housing and configured to project light toward an eye of a user wearing the wearable display; wherein the display is configured to display augmented reality content including pass-through content of a first immersive level captured by the outward-facing camera and virtual content of a second immersive level; wherein operation of at least one of the button or the dial changes the first immersive level and the second immersive level.

Item 408: A wearable display according to item 407, wherein the outward-facing camera is oriented to capture pass-through content in front of the user when the wearable display is worn; and wherein the wearable display further includes an inward-facing camera oriented to face the user's eyes when the wearable display is worn.

Item 409: A wearable display according to item 408, wherein the inward-facing camera is a first inward-facing camera; and the wearable display further comprises a second inward-facing camera.

Item 410: A wearable display according to item 409, wherein the second inward-facing camera is configured to detect facial features.

Item 411: A wearable display according to item 410, wherein the facial features include a gaze direction.

Item 412: A wearable display according to item 407, wherein the outward-facing camera is a first outward-facing camera; and the wearable display further comprises a second outward-facing camera.

Item 413: A wearable display according to item 412, wherein the second outward-facing camera is configured to capture pass-through content.

Item 414: A wearable display according to item 413, wherein the first immersion level and the second immersion level are based on facial features.

Item 415: A wearable display according to item 407, wherein the button comprises a capacitive touch sensor and the operation comprises touch contact of the button.

Item 416: A wearable display according to item 407, wherein the button is pressable relative to the housing; and the operation comprises pressing the button.

Item 417: A head-mountable display device comprising: a housing; a button pressable relative to the housing; a dial rotatable relative to the housing; an optical module within the housing, the optical module including a first camera configured to capture pass-through content and facing a first direction; a display oriented in a second direction different from the first direction; and a second camera oriented in the second direction, wherein the display is configured to project mixed reality content including a level of virtual content superimposed over the pass-through content, the level being based on at least one of a press of the button or a rotation of the dial.

Item 418: A head-mountable display device according to item 417, further comprising a frame fixed to the housing, wherein the optical module is fixed to the frame.

Item 419: A head-mountable display device according to item 418, wherein the dial is disposed on a first surface of the housing; the button is disposed on a second surface of the housing; and the optical module is disposed between the dial and the button.

Item 420: A head-mountable display device according to item 417, wherein the display comprises a pixelated screen; and the second camera is positioned adjacent to the pixelated screen.

Item 421: A wearable display device comprising: a housing defining an outer surface; a button operable relative to the housing and defining the outer surface; a display oriented to present content toward an eye of a user wearing the wearable display device, and an optical module including a sensor oriented toward the eye and configured to detect a facial feature of the user; and a processor electrically coupled to the button, the display, and the sensor, wherein the processor is configured to cause the content to change based on at least one of the facial feature or the operation of the button.

Item 422: A wearable display device according to item 421, wherein the content includes virtual content and video pass-through content.

Item 423: A wearable display device according to item 421, wherein the sensor comprises a first camera positioned adjacent to the display; and a second camera positioned adjacent to the display.

Item 424: A wearable display device according to item 423, wherein the facial feature comprises at least one of a direction of gaze of an eye or a shape of an eye.

Item 425: A wearable display device according to item 421, wherein the button is a first button; the operation is a first operation; the wearable display device further includes a second button operable with respect to the housing and defining an outer surface; and the processor is electrically coupled to the second button and configured to cause content to change based on a second operation of the second button.

Item 426: A wearable electronic device comprising: a display frame; a user input control unit positioned externally on the display frame; an internal display supported by the display frame and configured to simultaneously display real-world content and virtual content; and an optical component positioned adjacent to the internal display and configured to collect facial data; wherein the virtual content is configured to change based on the facial data and manipulation of the user input control unit.

Item 427: A wearable electronic device according to item 426, wherein the user input control comprises at least one of a lever, a button, a dial, a rocker, a slider, or a toggle.

Item 428: A wearable electronic device according to item 426, wherein the optical component comprises at least one of a camera; a light emitting diode; or an infrared sensor.

Item 429: A wearable electronic device according to item 426, wherein the facial data comprises at least one of an eye measurement or a gaze estimate.

Item 430: A wearable electronic device according to item 426, wherein the changing of the virtual content comprises changing the level of virtual immersion comprising a first amount of virtual content and a second amount of real-world content.

Item 431: A wearable electronic device according to item 426, wherein changing the virtual content comprises changing a detection setting for an optical component.

Item 432: A head-mountable electronic device comprising: a housing; a button positioned externally on the housing; a display integrated with the housing; an optical sensor disposed within the housing and oriented toward a user when the head-mountable electronic device is worn; a processor communicatively coupled to the button and the optical sensor; and a memory device storing instructions, which when executed by the processor cause the processor to: receive a button input in response to a press of the button; identify sensor data from the optical sensor; and control user interface content of the head-mountable electronic device based on the button input and the sensor data.

Item 433: A head-mountable electronic device according to item 432, wherein the optical sensor is a first optical sensor; the system further comprises a second optical sensor; and the first optical sensor and the second optical sensor are positioned adjacent to the display.

Item 434: A head-mountable electronic device according to item 433, wherein the first optical sensor is positioned adjacent to a first side of the display; and the second optical sensor is positioned adjacent to a second side of the display.

Item 435: A head-mounted electronic device according to item 432, wherein the sensor data includes eye tracking data.

Item 436: A head-mounted electronic device according to item 432, wherein controlling the user interface content comprises changing the manner in which the display presents virtual content relative to displayed real-world content.

Item 437: A head-mounted electronic device according to item 436, wherein controlling the user interface content comprises causing the display to adjust at least one of a size, orientation, or position of the virtual content relative to the real-world content; to remove at least a portion of the virtual content; or to increase the amount of the virtual content relative to the real-world content.

Item 438: A head-mounted electronic device according to item 436, wherein the displayed combination of virtual content and real-world content can vary between a first immersion limit of 0% virtual content and 100% real-world content and a second immersion limit of 100% virtual content and 0% real-world content.

Item 439: A head-mounted electronic device according to item 436, wherein the real-world content comprises a three-dimensional space; and the virtual content comprises at least one virtual wall defining a visual boundary of a portion of the three-dimensional space.

Item 440: A head-mounted electronic device according to item 436, wherein the real-world content comprises a three-dimensional space; and the three-dimensional space comprises at least one wall defining a visual boundary of a portion of the virtual content.

Item 441: A wearable electronic device comprising: a housing; an external dial rotatable relative to the housing; an optical module secured within the housing and configured to detect facial features of a user wearing the wearable electronic device, and a display configured to project light into an eye of the user when the wearable electronic device is worn; a processor electrically coupled to the optical module and the dial, the processor configured to cause the display to present content including a level of virtual immersion based on at least one of a rotation or position of the dial relative to the housing.

Item 442: A wearable electronic device according to item 441, wherein the level of virtual immersion comprises an amount of virtual content generated by the processor and superimposed over the video pass-through content.

Item 443: A wearable electronic device according to item 442, wherein rotation of the dial is configured to change the amount of virtual content.

Item 444: A wearable electronic device according to item 441, wherein the facial features include a direction of gaze of the eyes.

Item 445: A wearable electronic device according to item 441, wherein the optical sensor comprises a visual camera and a light emitting diode.

Item 446: A head-mountable electronic device comprising: a housing defining an outer surface; a dial operable relative to the housing and defining the outer surface; a display integrated with the housing; an optical sensor disposed within the housing and oriented inwardly toward a user when the head-mountable electronic device is worn; a processor communicatively coupled to the dial, the display, and the optical sensor; and a memory device storing instructions, which when executed by the processor cause the processor to: receive an input in response to an operation of the dial; identify sensor data from the optical sensor; and control user interface content presented by the display based on the input and the sensor data.

Item 447: A head-mountable electronic device according to item 446, wherein the optical sensor is a first optical sensor; the system further comprises a second optical sensor; and the first optical sensor and the second optical sensor are positioned adjacent to the display.

Item 448: A head-mountable electronic device according to item 447, wherein the first optical sensor is positioned adjacent to a first side of the display; and the second optical sensor is positioned adjacent to a second side of the display.

Item 449: A head-mounted electronic device according to item 446, wherein the sensor data includes eye tracking data.

Item 450: A head-mounted electronic device according to item 446, wherein controlling the user interface content comprises changing the manner in which the display presents virtual content relative to displayed real-world content.

Item 451: A head-mounted electronic device, wherein controlling the user interface content of item 450 comprises causing the display to adjust at least one of a size, orientation, or position of the virtual content relative to the real-world content; to remove at least a portion of the virtual content; or to increase the amount of the virtual content relative to the real-world content.

Item 452: A head-mounted electronic device according to item 450, wherein the displayed combination of virtual content and real-world content can vary between a first immersion limit of 0% virtual content and 100% real-world content and a second immersion limit of 100% virtual content and 0% real-world content.

Item 453: A head-mounted electronic device according to item 450, wherein the real-world content comprises a three-dimensional space; and the virtual content comprises at least one virtual wall defining a visual boundary of a portion of the three-dimensional space.

Item 454: A head-mounted electronic device according to item 450, wherein the real-world content comprises a three-dimensional space; and wherein the three-dimensional space comprises at least one wall defining a visual boundary of a portion of the virtual content.

Item 455: A wearable electronic device comprising: a display frame; a dial assembly supported by the display frame and including a dial accessible from an exterior of the display frame; a shaft extending from the dial into the display frame, the shaft and the dial configured to move together relative to the display frame; a dial sensor positioned inside the display frame, the dial sensor configured to generate dial sensor data in response to movement of the shaft; an internal display supported by the display frame and configured to simultaneously present real-world content and virtual content; and an optical component positioned adjacent the internal display and configured to generate facial data; wherein the virtual content is configured to change based on the facial data and the dial sensor data.

Item 456: A wearable electronic device according to item 455, wherein at least one of a rotation or a press of the dial is detectable by a dial sensor to manually control a change in virtual content; or to modify a user interface setting to automatically change virtual content.

Item 457: A wearable electronic device according to item 455, wherein the optical component comprises at least one of a camera, a light emitting diode, or an infrared sensor.

Item 458: A wearable electronic device according to item 15, wherein the facial data comprises at least one of an eye measurement or a gaze estimate.

Item 459: A wearable electronic device according to item 455, wherein the changing of the virtual content comprises changing the level of virtual immersion comprising a first amount of virtual content and a second amount of real-world content.

Item 460: A wearable electronic device according to item 455, wherein changing the virtual content comprises changing a detection setting for an optical component.

Item 461: A head-mountable electronic device comprising: a housing; a display secured within the housing; a first optical sensor disposed adjacent the display and oriented inwardly toward a user wearing the head-mountable electronic device, the first optical sensor including a camera and a light-emitting diode (LED); a second optical sensor oriented outwardly from and away from the face of the user; a processor communicatively coupled to the first optical sensor and the second optical sensor; and a memory device storing instructions, the instructions, when executed by the processor, causing the processor to: identify user gaze data from the first optical sensor; identify user hand gesture data from the second optical sensor; and modify a user interface presented by the display and including a virtual object based on at least one of the user gaze data or the hand gesture data.

Item 462: A head-mountable electronic device according to item 461, wherein the camera is a first camera; and the first optical sensor further comprises a second camera positioned adjacent to the display.

Item 463: A head-mountable electronic device according to item 462, wherein the first optical sensor further comprises an LED array comprising LEDs, the LED array being arranged around the periphery of the display.

Item 464: A head-mounted electronic device according to item 461, wherein the gaze data comprises eye tracking data from a first optical sensor.

Item 465: A head-mounted electronic device according to Item 464, wherein the first optical sensor is configured to collect eye tracking data by receiving light from an LED reflected from the user's eye through a camera.

Item 466: A head-mounted electronic device according to item 461, wherein modifying the user interface comprises changing the level of virtual reality immersion presented by the display.

Item 467: A head-mounted electronic device according to item 466, wherein the level of virtual reality immersion comprises a predetermined amount of virtual content superimposed over real-world content; and changing the level of virtual reality immersion comprises changing the predetermined amount of virtual content superimposed over real-world content.

Item 468: A head-mounted electronic device according to item 467, wherein the real-world content comprises a visual representation of an environment external to the user and the head-mounted electronic device, captured by the second optical sensor.

Item 469: A head-mounted electronic device according to item 461, wherein changing the user interface comprises moving a virtual object.

Item 470: A wearable electronic device comprising: a display frame; a display secured to the display frame and oriented rearwardly toward a user wearing the wearable electronic device; an LED positioned adjacent the display and oriented rearwardly to project light into the eye of the user; a first camera positioned adjacent the display and oriented rearwardly to detect a gaze of the user via light projected by the LED and reflected from the eye; and a second camera secured to the display frame and oriented outwardly away from the display frame and different from the rearward direction to detect a hand gesture of the user; wherein the display is configured to present virtual content superimposed on real-world content; and wherein an amount of the presented virtual content is based on at least one of the gaze or the hand gesture.

Item 471: A wearable electronic device further comprising a user input mechanism comprising at least one of a lever, a button, a dial, a rocker, a slider, and a toggle, according to item 470.

Item 472: A wearable electronic device according to item 471, wherein the amount of presented virtual content is based on manipulation of a user input mechanism.

Item 473: A wearable electronic device further comprising a plurality of LEDs including an LED, wherein the plurality of LEDs are arranged around the periphery of the display.

Item 474: A wearable electronic device according to item 470, wherein the outward direction is opposite to the rearward direction.

Item 475: A wearable electronic device according to item 470, wherein the outward direction includes a downward direction with respect to the user's face.

Item 476: A head-mountable electronic device comprising: a housing; a camera configured to capture content outside the housing; an optical module secured to the housing, the optical module including: a display; an LED disposed adjacent the display; and an inward-facing sensor configured to detect a gaze direction of a user wearing the head-mountable device based on light generated by the LED and reflected from an eye of the user; and a processor electrically coupled to the camera, the inward-facing sensor, the LED, and the display; wherein the processor is configured to cause the display to project mixed reality content including a first amount of video pass-through content captured by the camera and a second amount of virtual reality content including a virtual object; wherein the camera is configured to capture a hand gesture; and wherein the virtual object is configured to be manipulated based on the hand gesture.

Item 477: A head-mounted electronic device according to item 476, wherein the camera is oriented downward toward the hand when the user is wearing the head-mounted electronic device.

Item 478: A head-mountable electronic device according to item 477, wherein the camera is a first camera; and the head-mountable electronic device further comprises a second camera configured to capture video pass-through content outside the housing.

Item 479: A head-mounted electronic device according to item 476, wherein the hand gesture comprises a movement of the hand.

Item 480: A head-mounted electronic device according to item 476, wherein the inward-facing sensor comprises a visual camera.

Item 481: A head-mountable electronic device comprising: a housing; an outward-facing sensor assembly attached to the housing and configured to detect a hand gesture of a user wearing the head-mountable electronic device and an environment outside the housing; and a processor electrically coupled to the outward-facing sensor assembly and configured to cause the outward-facing sensor assembly to capture a still image of the environment based on the hand gesture.

Item 482: A head-mounted electronic device according to item 481, wherein the hand gesture comprises a movement of the user's hand; and wherein the processor causes the outward-facing sensor assembly to capture a still image when the outward-facing sensor assembly detects movement.

Item 483: A head-mounted electronic device according to item 481, wherein the outward-facing sensor assembly comprises a visual camera.

Item 484: A head-mounted electronic device according to item 481, wherein the processor is further configured to cause the outward-facing sensor assembly to capture video based on a hand gesture.

Item 485: A head-mounted electronic device according to item 481, further comprising an inward-facing sensor oriented to detect facial features of a user.

Item 486: A head-mountable electronic device according to item 485, wherein the processor is electrically coupled to the inward-facing sensor assembly and configured to cause the outward-facing sensor assembly to capture a still image based on facial features.

Item 487: A head-mountable electronic device according to item 486, wherein the facial features include a direction of gaze of the user.

Item 488: A head-mountable electronic device according to item 485, further comprising a display configured to project light toward the user's eye.

Item 489: A head-mountable electronic device according to item 488, wherein the display is positioned adjacent to the inward-facing sensor.

Item 490: A head-mounted electronic device according to item 485, wherein the inward-facing sensor comprises a visual camera.

Item 491: A head-mountable electronic device according to Item 481, wherein the outward-facing sensor assembly comprises a first outward-facing camera configured to detect a hand gesture; and a second outward-facing camera configured to detect an environment.

Item 492: A head-mountable display comprising: a housing; an outward-facing camera assembly configured to observe a feature of an environment outside the housing; a rearward-facing camera, the rearward-facing camera being attached to the housing, the housing being positioned between the outward-facing camera and the rearward-facing camera, the rearward-facing camera being configured to detect an eye feature of a user wearing the head-mountable display; and a processor electrically coupled to the outward-facing camera assembly and the rearward-facing camera, the processor being configured to cause the outward-facing camera assembly to capture an image of the environment based on the feature.

Item 493: A head-mountable display according to item 492, wherein the feature comprises a user's hand gesture.

Item 494: A head-mountable display according to item 493, wherein the outward-facing camera assembly comprises a first outward-facing camera configured to capture an image; and a second outward-facing camera configured to observe a hand gesture.

Item 495: A head-mounted display according to item 494, wherein the first outward-facing camera is oriented in a forward direction opposite to the rearward direction of the rearward-facing camera; and the second outward-facing camera is oriented downward with respect to the user's face.

Item 496: A head-mountable display according to item 492, further comprising an optical module within the housing, the optical module comprising a rear-facing camera and a display adjacent to the rear-facing camera.

Item 497: A head-mountable display according to item 496, wherein the rear-facing camera is a first rear-facing camera; and the optical module includes a second rear-facing camera disposed adjacent to the display.

Item 498: A head-mountable display device comprising: a frame; a front-facing sensor system attached to the frame and configured to detect a hand gesture of a user; an optical module attached to the frame and configured to detect a facial feature of the user; and a processor configured to cause the head-mountable display device to capture an image via the front-facing sensor based on input received by at least one of the front-facing sensor system or the optical module.

Item 499: A head-mountable display device according to item 498, wherein the front-facing sensor system is further configured to detect features of an environment external to the head-mountable display device.

Item 500: A head-mounted display device according to Item 498, wherein the facial features include predetermined movements of the user's eyelids.

Item 501: A head-mountable electronic device comprising: a housing; an input member positioned on the housing and configured to receive input from a user of the head-mountable electronic device; an outward-facing sensor attached to the housing and configured to capture an image of an environment of the user in response to receiving the input; and an inward-facing sensor attached to the housing and configured to detect a facial feature of the user in response to receiving the input.

Item 502: A head-mountable electronic device according to item 501, wherein the input element is configured to toggle between a first activation of the outward-facing sensor and a second activation of the inward-facing sensor.

Item 503: A head-mountable electronic device further comprising a processor configured to generate media including environmental and facial features according to item 501.

Item 504: A head-mounted electronic device according to item 501, wherein the input is a first input; the input member is configured to receive a second input different from the first input; the outward-facing sensor is configured to capture an image in response to the first input; and the inward-facing sensor is configured to capture a facial feature of the user in response to the second input.

Item 505: A head-mounted electronic device according to item 501, wherein in response to receiving input from the input member, the outward-facing camera is configured to capture a first video and the inward-facing camera is configured to capture a second video.

Item 506: A head-mountable electronic device according to item 501, wherein the input member comprises a dial.

Item 507: A head-mountable electronic device according to item 501, wherein the input member comprises a tactile button.

Item 508: A head-mountable electronic device according to item 501, wherein the input member comprises a capacitive touch sensor.

Item 509: A head-mountable electronic device according to item 501, wherein the facial features include a direction of gaze of the user.

Item 510: A head-mountable electronic device according to item 501, further comprising a display configured to project light toward a user's eye, the display configured to depict an image.

Item 511: A head-mountable electronic device according to item 501, further comprising a display configured to project light toward the user's eye, the display configured to depict facial features.

Item 512: A head-mounted electronic device according to item 501, wherein the outward-facing sensor comprises a front camera configured to capture an image; the image is a first image; and the inward-facing sensor comprises a rear camera configured to capture a second image of the user's face.

Item 513: A head-mountable display comprising a housing, the housing comprising a front end facing an environment of the head-mountable display; a rear end facing a user wearing the head-mountable display; a front-facing camera attached to the front end and configured to observe features of the environment; a rear-facing camera attached to the rear end and configured to detect eye features of the user; an input member accessible from the exterior of the housing; and a processor electrically coupled to the input member and configured to cause the head-mountable display to perform an action based on input received from the input member.

Item 514: A head-mountable display according to item 513, wherein the input member at least partially defines an exterior of the housing.

Item 515: A head-mounted display according to item 513, wherein the processor is electrically coupled to the front-facing camera and the rear-facing camera; and the action comprises capturing a first image using the front-facing camera; capturing a second image using the rear-facing camera; and generating a combined image based on the front-facing camera and the rear-facing camera.

Item 516: A head-mountable display according to item 513, wherein the feature comprises real-world content, and the processor is configured to overlay the real-world content with virtual content projected on the user-facing display.

Item 517: A head-mounted display according to item 513, wherein the front-facing camera is further configured to capture facial features of the user.

Item 518: A head-mounted display according to item 517, wherein the processor is configured to generate an image of the user based on facial features captured by the front-facing camera and eye features captured by the rear-facing camera.

Item 519: A head-mountable display device comprising: a frame; a front-facing sensor system attached to the frame and configured to detect an environment of a user; an optical module attached to the frame and configured to detect facial features of the user; an input member accessible from an exterior of the head-mountable display device; and a processor electrically coupled to the input member and configured to cause the head-mountable display device to perform an action based on input received from the input member.

Item 520: A head-mounted display device according to item 519, wherein the forward-facing sensor system is configured to capture video of the environment while the input member is actuated and to stop capturing video in response to the input member no longer being actuated.

Item 521: A head-mountable electronic device comprising: a housing; a facial-engaging structure connected to the housing; an inward-facing camera configured to detect eye features of a wearer of the head-mountable electronic device; an outward-facing camera disposed on the housing and configured to detect body features of the wearer outside the facial-engaging structure; and an outward-facing display disposed on the housing and configured to project a representation of the wearer, wherein the representation is based on at least one of a stored representation of the wearer and the eye features or the body features.

Item 522: A head-mountable electronic device according to item 521, wherein the body features include facial expressions of the wearer.

Item 523: A head-mountable electronic device according to item 521, wherein the body features include hand gestures.

Item 524: A head-mountable electronic device according to item 521, wherein the outward-facing display includes a cover glass defining an exterior of the head-mountable electronic device.

Item 525: A head-mountable electronic device according to item 521, wherein the outward-facing display comprises a curved cover glass that at least partially defines an exterior of the head-mountable electronic device.

Item 526: A head-mounted electronic device further comprising a processor electrically coupled to the inward-facing camera and the outward-facing camera, the processor configured to generate an avatar of the wearer's head based on eye features and body features.

Item 527: A head-mountable display comprising: a first display configured to project light toward an eye of a user wearing the head-mountable display; a second display configured to project an avatar of the user on an outer surface of the head-mountable display; an outward-facing sensor configured to detect a facial expression of the user; an inward-facing sensor configured to detect an eye feature of the user; and a processor electrically coupled to the outward-facing sensor and the inward-facing sensor, wherein the processor is configured to cause the second display to modify the avatar of the user based on at least one of the facial expression or the eye feature of the user.

Item 528: A head-mounted display according to item 527, wherein the outward-facing sensor is further configured to detect a user's hand gesture.

Item 529: A head-mounted display according to item 527, wherein the avatar includes a real-time representation of eye features.

Item 530: A head-mounted display according to item 527, wherein the avatar is displayed in response to detection by an outward-facing sensor.

Item 531: A head-mountable display according to item 527, wherein the second display is configured to display a real-time video of a user's eye features.

Item 532: In item 527, the avatar is an animated, head-mounted display.

Item 533: A head-mountable display according to item 527, wherein the second display is configured to make the head-mountable display appear transparent.

Item 534: A head-mountable device comprising: an external camera configured to detect facial features of a user wearing the head-mountable device; an inward-facing camera configured to detect eye features of the user; and a processor electrically coupled to the external camera and the inward-facing camera, wherein the processor is configured to generate an avatar of the user based on the facial features and the eye features.

Item 535: A head-mounted device according to item 534, wherein the processor is configured to generate a video call transmission of the avatar.

Item 536: A head-mounted device further comprising an outward-facing display configured to project an avatar, according to item 534.

Item 537: A head-mounted device according to item 534, wherein the avatar comprises user-selectable features.

Item 538: A head-mounted device according to item 534, wherein the avatar includes a real-time representation of the user's eye features and facial features.

Item 539: A head-mounted device according to item 534, wherein the external camera is further configured to detect the user's environment, and the processor is configured to virtually generate a visual representation of the avatar in the environment.

Item 540: A head-mountable device according to item 534, wherein the external camera is further configured to detect hand gestures.

Claims (20)

As a head-mountable display device,
A housing defining a front opening and a rear opening;
A display screen positioned within the front opening;
A display assembly disposed within the rear opening;
A first fixing strap coupled to the housing and including a first electronic component;
a second fixed strap coupled to the housing and including a second electronic component; and
A head-mountable display device comprising a fixing band extending between and coupled to the first fixing strap and the second fixing strap. In the first paragraph,
The above display assembly is a first display assembly;
A head-mountable display device, wherein the head-mountable display device further comprises a second display assembly disposed within the rear opening and including a second display screen and a third display screen. A head-mountable electronic device, wherein in the second aspect, the first display screen is oriented to project light in a first direction, and the second display screen and the third display screen are oriented to direct light in a second direction opposite to the first direction. A head-mountable display device according to claim 1, wherein the first electronic component comprises a speaker. A head-mountable display device, wherein the second electronic component comprises a computing component. A head-mountable display device, wherein the display screen has a curvature in the first aspect. A head-mountable display device, wherein the curvature follows the contours of the user's face. A head-mountable display device according to claim 1, wherein the fixed band comprises a flexible fabric material. As a display device,
Housing - The above housing is
1st opening;
A second opening opposite the first opening;
internal volume;
a first opening between the first opening and the second opening; and
- defining a second opening between the first opening and the second opening;
A front facing cover assembly disposed within the first opening;
A rear-facing display assembly disposed within the inner volume;
An elastic curtain covering the second opening between the housing and the rear-facing display assembly;
a dial placed within the first opening; and
A display device comprising a button disposed within the second opening. In paragraph 9,
The rear facing display assembly includes a display screen,
A display device, wherein the display device further comprises an adjustment mechanism configured to adjust the position of the display screen. In Article 10,
The above dial is electrically coupled to the above adjustment mechanism,
A display device in which operation of the above dial causes the above adjustment mechanism to adjust the position of the above display screen. In paragraph 9,
The front facing cover assembly includes a first display screen configured to project light in a first direction,
A display device, wherein the rear-facing display assembly includes a second display screen configured to project light in a second direction different from the first direction. In claim 12, the first display screen is curved, a display device. A display device in claim 12, wherein the second direction is opposite to the first direction. A display device in accordance with claim 12, further comprising an optical seal coupled to the housing around the second opening, the optical seal configured to press against the user's face around the user's eyes to block light outside the device, including light from the first display screen, from reaching the user's eyes. As a head-mounted electronic device,
A housing defining an internal volume and a front opening;
A display assembly disposed within the inner volume;
a curved front cover assembly disposed within the front opening; and
A fixing mechanism extending rearward from the housing, the fixing mechanism comprising:
A first electronic strap comprising a first proximal end coupled to the housing and a first distal end opposite the first proximal end;
A second electronic strap comprising a second proximal end coupled to the housing and a second distal end opposite the second proximal end;
Band 1 - The first band is,
a first end coupled to the first distal end; and
comprising a second end coupled to the second distal end; and
A head-mountable electronic device comprising a second band extending between the first electronic strap and the second electronic strap. In the 16th paragraph, the second band,
a first end coupled to the first electronic strap between the first proximal end and the first distal end; and
A head-mountable electronic device comprising a second end coupled to the second electronic strap between the second proximal end and the second distal end. In Article 16,
The first electronic strap and the second electronic strap comprise a plastic material;
A head-mountable electronic device, wherein the first band and the second band comprise a flexible material. A head-mountable electronic device according to claim 18, wherein the flexible material comprises a woven fabric material. A head-mountable electronic device, wherein the first electronic strap defines an internal strap volume and includes an electronic component disposed within the internal strap volume.